Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}211|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $137,332 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 31 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
  • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
  • Each year, IT organizations spend more money “outsourcing” tasks, activities, applications, functions, and other items.
  • The increased spend and associated outsourcing leads to less control, and more risk for IT organizations. Managing this becomes a higher priority for IT, but many IT organizations are ill-equipped to do this proactively.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Vendor management is not “plug and play” – each organization’s vendor management initiative (VMI) needs to fit its culture, environment, and goals. There are commonalites among vendor management initiatives, but the key is to adapt vendor management principles to fit your needs, not the other way around.
  • All vendors are not of equal importance to an organization. Internal resources are a scarce commodity and should be deployed so that they provide the best return on the organization’s investment. Classifying or segmenting your vendors allows you to focus your efforts on the most important vendors first, allowing your VMI to have the greatest impact possible.
  • Having a solid foundation is critical to the VMI’s ongoing success. Whether you will be creating a formal vendor management office or using vendor management techniques, tools, and templates “informally,” starting with the basics is essential. Make sure you understand why the VMI exists and what it hopes to achieve, what is in and out of scope for the VMI, what strengths the VMI can leverage and the obstacles it will have to address, and how it will work with other areas within your organization.

Impact and Result

  • Build and implement a vendor management initiative tailored to your environment.
  • Create a solid foundation to sustain your vendor management initiative as it evolves and matures.
  • Leverage vendor management-specific tools and templates to manage vendors more proactively and improve communication.
  • Concentrate your vendor management resources on the right vendors.
  • Build a roadmap and project plan for your vendor management journey to ensure you reach your destination.
  • Build collaborative relationships with critical vendors.

Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should jump start a vendor management initiative, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Plan

Organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI.

  • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 1: Plan
  • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

2. Build

Configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan.

  • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 2: Build
  • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium
  • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool
  • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

3. Run

Begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI.

  • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 3: Run

4. Review

Identify what the VMI should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

  • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 4: Review

Infographic

Workshop: Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Plan

The Purpose

Getting Organized

Key Benefits Achieved

Defined Roles and Goals for the VMI

Activities

1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

1.2 Scope

1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

1.4 Roles and Responsibilities – OIC Chart

1.5 Process Mapping

1.6 Vendor Inventory Tool (Overview)

Outputs

Completed Mission Statement and Goals

List of Items In Scope and Out of Scope for the VMI

List of Strengths and Obstacles for the VMI

Completed OIC Chart

Sample Process Map for One Process

Begun Using Vendor Inventory Tool

2 Plan/Build/Run

The Purpose

Build VMI Tools and Templates

Key Benefits Achieved

Configured Tools and Templates for the VMI Based on Its Roles and Goals

Activities

2.1 Maturity Assessment

2.2 Structure and Job Descriptions

2.3 Attributes of a Valuable Vendor

2.4 Classification Model

2.5 Risk Assessment Tool

2.6 Scorecards and Feedback

2.7 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda

Outputs

Completed Maturity Assessment.

Sample Job Descriptions and Phrases.

List of Attributes of a Valuable Vendor.

Configured Classification Model.

Configured Risk Assessment Tool.

Configured Scorecard and Feedback Questions.

Configured Business Alignment Meeting Agenda.

3 Build/Run

The Purpose

Continue Building VMI Tools and Templates

Key Benefits Achieved

Configured Tools and Templates for the VMI Based on Its Roles and Goals

Activities

3.1 Relationship Alignment Document

3.2 Vendor Orientation

3.3 Policies and Procedures

3.4 3-Year Roadmap

3.5 90-Day Plan

3.6 Quick Wins

3.7 Reports

3.8 Kickoff Meeting

Outputs

Relationship Alignment Document Sample and Checklist

Vendor Orientation Checklist

Policies and Procedures Checklist

Completed 3-Year Roadmap

Completed 90-Day Plan

List of Quick Wins

List of Reports

4 Review

The Purpose

Review the Past 12 Months of VMI Operations and Improve

Key Benefits Achieved

Keeping the VMI Aligned With the Organization’s Goals and Ensuring the VMI Is Leveraging Leading Practices

Activities

4.1 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships.

4.2 Assess Compliance.

4.3 Incorporate Leading Practices.

4.4 Leverage Lessons Learned.

4.5 Maintain Internal Alignment.

4.6 Update Governances.

Outputs

Further reading

Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

Create and implement a vendor management framework to begin obtaining measurable results in 90 days.

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Analyst Perspective

What is vendor management?

When you read the phrase “vendor management,” what comes to mind? This isn’t a rhetorical question. Take your time … I’ll wait.

Unfortunately, those words conjure up a lot of different meanings, and much of that depends on whom you ask. Those who work in the vendor management field will provide a variety of answers. To complicate matters, those who are vendor management “outsiders” will have a totally different view of what vendor management is. Why is this important? Because we need a common definition to communicate more effectively, even if the definition is broad.

Let’s start creating a working definition that is not circular. Vendor management is not simply managing vendors. That expression basically reorders the words and does nothing to advance our cause; it only adds to the existing confusion surrounding the concept.

Vendor management is best thought of as a spectrum or continuum with many points rather than a specific discipline like accounting or finance. There are many functions and activities that fall under the umbrella term of vendor management: some of them will be part of your vendor management initiative (VMI), some will not, and some will exist in your organization but be outside the VMI. This is the unique part of vendor management – the part that makes it fun, but also the part that leads to the confusion. For example, accounts payable sits within the accounting department almost exclusively, but contract management can sit within or outside the VMI. The beauty of vendor management is its flexibility; your VMI can be created to meet your specific needs and goals while leveraging common vendor management principles.

Every conversation around vendor management needs to begin with “What do you mean by that?” Only then can we home in on the scope and nature of what people are discussing. “Managing vendors” is too narrow because it often ignores many of the reasons organizations create VMIs in the first place: to reduce costs, to improve performance, to improve processes, to improve relationships, to improve communication, and to manage risk better.

Vendor management is a strategic initiative that takes the big picture into account … navigating the cradle to grave lifecycle to get the most out of your interactions and relationships with your vendors. It is flexible and customizable; it is not plug and play or overly prescriptive. Tools, principles, templates, and concepts are adapted rather than adopted as is. Ultimately, you define what vendor management is for your organization.

We look forward to helping you on your vendor management journey no matter what it looks like. But first, let’s have a conversation about how you want to define vendor management in your environment.

This is a picture of Phil Bode, Principal  Research Director, Vendor Management at Info-Tech Research Group.

Phil Bode
Principal Research Director, Vendor Management
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

Each year, IT organizations “outsource” tasks, activities, functions, and other items. During 2021:

  • Spend on as-a-service providers increased 38% over 2020.*
  • Spend on managed service providers increased 16% over 2020.*
  • IT service providers increased their merger and acquisition numbers by 47% over 2020.*

*Source: Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

This leads to more spend, less control, and more risk for IT organizations. Managing this becomes a higher priority for IT, but many IT organizations are ill-equipped to do this proactively.

Common Obstacles

As new contracts are negotiated and existing contracts are renegotiated or renewed, there is a perception that the contracts will yield certain results, output, performance, solutions, or outcomes. The hope is that these will provide a measurable expected value to IT and the organization. Oftentimes, much of the expected value is never realized. Many organizations don’t have a VMI to help:

  • Ensure at least the expected value is achieved.
  • Improve on the expected value through performance management.
  • Significantly increase the expected value through a proactive VMI.

Info-Tech’s Approach

Vendor management is a proactive, cross-functional lifecycle. It can be broken down into four phases:

  • Plan
  • Build
  • Run
  • Review

The Info-Tech process addresses all four phases and provides a step-by-step approach to configure and operate your VMI. The content in this blueprint helps you quickly establish your VMI and set a solid foundation for its growth and maturity.

Info-Tech Insight

Vendor management is not a one-size-fits-all initiative. It must be configured:

  • For your environment, culture, and goals.
  • To leverage the strengths of your organization and personnel.
  • To focus your energy and resources on your critical vendors.

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

Spend on managed service providers and as-a-service providers continues to increase. In addition, IT services vendors continue to be active in the mergers and acquisitions arena. This increases the need for a VMI to help with the changing IT vendor landscape. In 2021, there was increases of:

38%

Spend on As-a-Service Providers

16%

Spend on Managed Services Providers

47%

IT Services Merger & Acquisition Growth (Transactions)

Source: Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

Executive Summary

Common Obstacles

When organizations execute, renew, or renegotiate a contract, there is an “expected value” associated with that contract. Without a robust VMI, most of the expected value will never be realized. With a robust VMI, the realized value significantly exceeds the expected value during the contract term.

A contract’s realized value with and without a vendor management initiative

Two bars are depicted, showing that vendor collaboration and vendor performance management exceed expected value with a VMI, but without VMI, 75% of a contract's expected value can disappear within 18 months.

Source: Based on findings from Geller & Company, 2003.

Executive Summary

Info-Tech’s Approach

A sound, cyclical approach to vendor management will help you create a VMI that meets your needs and stays in alignment with your organization as they both change (i.e. mature and grow).

This is an image of Info-Tech's approach to VMI.  It includes the following four steps: 01 - Plan; 02 - Build; 03 - Run; 04 - Review

Info-Tech’s Methodology for Creating and Operating Your VMI

Phase 1: Plan Phase 2: Build Phase 3: Run Phase 4: Review

Phase Steps

1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
1.2 Scope
1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
1.5 Process Mapping
1.6 Charter
1.7 Vendor Inventory
1.8 Maturity Assessment
1.9 Structure

2.1 Classification Model
2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
2.6 Vendor Orientation
2.7 Job Descriptions
2.8 Policies and Procedures
2.9 3-Year Roadmap
2.10 90-Day Plan
2.11 Quick Wins
2.12 Reports

3.1 Classify Vendors
3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
3.4 Compile Scorecards
3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
3.9 Issue Reports
3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

4.1 Assess Compliance
4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
4.5 Update Governances

Phase Outcomes

This phase helps you organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI. This phase helps you configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan. This phase helps you begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI. This phase helps the VMI identify what it should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

Insight Summary

Insight 1

Vendor management is not “plug and play” – each organization’s vendor management initiative (VMI) needs to fit its culture, environment, and goals. While there are commonalities and leading practices associated with vendor management, your initiative won’t look exactly like another organization’s. The key is to adapt vendor management principles to fit your needs.

Insight 2

All vendors are not of equal importance to your organization. Internal resources are a scarce commodity and should be deployed so that they provide the best return on the organization’s investment. Classifying or segmenting your vendors allows you to focus your efforts on the most important vendors first, allowing your VMI to have the greatest impact possible.

Insight 3

Having a solid foundation is critical to the VMI’s ongoing success. Whether you will be creating a formal vendor management office or using vendor management techniques, tools, and templates “informally,” starting with the basics is essential. Make sure you understand why the VMI exists and what it hopes to achieve, what is in and out of scope for the VMI, what strengths the VMI can leverage and the obstacles it will have to address, and how it will work with other areas within your organization.

Blueprint Deliverables

The four phases of creating and running a vendor management initiative are supported with configurable tools, templates, and checklists to help you stay aligned internally and achieve your goals.

VMI Tools and Templates

This image contains two screenshots of Info-Tech's VMI Tools and Templates

Build a solid foundation for your VMI and configure tools and templates to help you manage your vendor relationships.

Key Deliverables:

  1. Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium
  2. Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium
  3. Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool
  4. Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

A suite of tools and templates to help you create and implement your vendor management initiative.

Blueprint benefits

IT Benefits

  • Identify and manage risk proactively.
  • Reduce costs and maximize value.
  • Increase visibility with your critical vendors.
  • Improve vendor performance.
  • Create a collaborative environment with key vendors.
  • Segment vendors to allocate resources more effectively and more efficiently.

Business Benefits

  • Improve vendor accountability.
  • Increase collaboration between departments.
  • Improve working relationships with your vendors.
  • Create a feedback loop to address vendor or customer issues before they get out of hand or are more costly to resolve.
  • Increase access to meaningful data and information regarding important vendors.

Establish Baseline Metrics

Baseline metrics will be improved through:

Using the Maturity Assessment and 90-Day Plan tools, track how well you are able to achieve your goals and objectives:

  • Did you meet the targeted maturity level for each maturity category as determined by the point system?
  • Did you finish each activity in the 90-Day Plan completely and on time?
1-Year Maturity Roadmap(by Category) Target Maturity (Total Points) Actual Maturity (Total Points)
Contracts 12 12
Risk 8 7
Vendor Selection 9 9
Vendor Relationships 21 21
VMI Operations 24 16
90-Day Plan (by Activity) Activity Completed
Finalize mission and goals; gain executive approval Yes
Finalize OIC chart; gain buy-in from other departments Yes
Classify top 40 vendors by spend Yes
Create initial scorecard Yes
Develop the business alignment meeting agenda Yes
Conduct two business alignment meetings No
Update job descriptions Yes
Map two VMI processes No

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

“Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

Guided Implementation

“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

Workshop

“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

Consulting

“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

Guided Implementation

What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

Phase 1 Phases 2 & 3 Phase 4

Call #1: Mission statement and goals, scope, and strengths and obstacles.

Call #5: Classification model.

Call #9: Policies and procedures and reports.

Call #12: Assess compliance, incorporate leading practices, leverage lessons learned, maintain internal alignment, and update governances.

Call #2: Roles and responsibilities and process mapping.

Call #6: Risk assessment.

Call #10: 3-year roadmap.

Call #3: Charter and vendor inventory.

Call #7: Scorecards and feedback and business alignment meetings.

Call #11: 90-day plan and quick wins.

Call #4: Maturity assessment and VMI structure.

Call #8: Relationship alignment document, vendor orientation, and job descriptions.

Workshop Overview

Contact your account representative for more information.
workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4
Plan Plan/Build/Run Build/Run Review

Activities

1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
1.2 Scope
1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
1.5 Process Mapping
1.6 Charter
1.7 Vendor Inventory
1.8 Maturity Assessment
1.9 Structure

2.1 Classification Model
2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
2.6 Vendor Orientation
2.7 Job Descriptions
2.8 Policies and Procedures
2.9 3-Year Roadmap
2.10 90-Day Plan
2.11 Quick Wins
2.12 Reports

3.1 Classify Vendors
3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
3.4 Compile Scorecards
3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
3.9 Issue Reports
3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

4.1 Assess Compliance
4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
4.5 Update Governances

Deliverables

  1. Completed Mission Statement and Goals
  2. List of Items In Scope and Out of Scope for the VMI
  3. List of Strengths and Obstacles for the VMI
  4. Completed OIC Chart
  5. Sample Process Map for One Process
  6. Vendor Inventory tab
  1. Completed Maturity Assessment
  2. Sample Job Descriptions and Phrases
  3. List of Attributes of a Valuable Vendor
  4. Configured Classification Model
  5. Configured Risk Assessment Tool
  6. Configured Scorecard and Feedback Questions
  7. Configured Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
  1. Relationship Alignment Document Sample and Checklist
  2. Vendor Orientation Checklist
  3. Policies and Procedures Checklist
  4. Completed 3-Year Roadmap
  5. Completed 90-Day Plan
  6. List of Quick Wins
  7. List of Reports

Phase 1: Plan

Get Organized

1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
1.2 Scope
1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
1.5 Process Mapping
1.6 Charter
1.7 Vendor Inventory
1.8 Maturity Assessment
1.9 Structure

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
1.2 Scope
1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
1.5 Process Mapping
1.6 Charter
1.7 Vendor Inventory
1.8 Maturity Assessment
1.9 Structure

2.1 Classification Model
2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
2.6 Vendor Orientation
2.7 Job Descriptions
2.8 Policies and Procedures
2.9 3-Year Roadmap
2.10 90-Day Plan
2.11 Quick Wins
2.12 Reports

3.1 Classify Vendors
3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
3.4 Compile Scorecards
3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
3.9 Issue Reports
3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

4.1 Assess Compliance
4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
4.5 Update Governances

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

Organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives
  • Procurement/Sourcing
  • IT
  • Others as needed

Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

Phase 1: Plan

Get organized.

Phase 1: Plan focuses on getting organized. Foundational elements (mission statement, goals, scope, strengths and obstacles, roles and responsibilities, and process mapping) will help you define your VMI. These and the other elements of this Phase will follow you throughout the process of standing up your VMI and running it.

Spending time up front to ensure that everyone is on the same page will help avoid headaches down the road. The tendency is to skimp (or even skip) on these steps to get to “the good stuff.” To a certain extent, the process provided here is like building a house. You wouldn’t start building your dream home without having a solid blueprint. The same is true with vendor management. Leveraging vendor management tools and techniques without the proper foundation may provide some benefit in the short term, but in the long term it will ultimately be a house of cards waiting to collapse.

Step 1.1: Mission statement and goals

Identify why the VMI exists and what it will achieve.

Whether you are starting your vendor management journey or are already down the path, it is important to know why the vendor management initiative exists and what it hopes to achieve. The easiest way to document this is with a written declaration in the form of a mission statement and goals. Although this is the easiest way to proceed, it is far from easy.

The mission statement should identify at a high level the nature of the services provided by the VMI, who it will serve, and some of the expected outcomes or achievements. The mission statement should be no longer than one or two sentences.

The complement to the mission statement is the list of goals for the VMI. Your goals should not be a reassertion of your mission statement in bullet format. At this stage it may not be possible to make them SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable/Attainable, Relevant, Time-Bound/Time-Based), but consider making them as SMART as possible. Without some of the SMART parameters attached, your goals are more like dreams and wishes. At a minimum, you should be able to determine the level of success achieved for each of the VMI goals.

Although the VMI’s mission statement will stay static over time (other than for significant changes to the VMI or organization as a whole), the goals should be re-evaluated periodically using a SMART filter and adjusted as needed.

1.1.1: Mission statement and goals

20-40 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list on a whiteboard or flip chart the reasons why the VMI will exist.
  2. Review external mission statements for inspiration.
  3. Review internal mission statements from other areas to ensure consistency.
  4. Draft and document your mission statement in the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals.
  5. Continue brainstorming and identify the high-level goals for the VMI.
  6. Review the list of goals and make them as SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable/Attainable, Relevant, Time-Bound/Time-Based) as possible.
  7. Document your goals in the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals.
  8. Obtain sign-off on the mission statement and goals from stakeholders and executives as required.

Input

  • Brainstorming results
  • Mission statements from other internal and external sources

Output

  • Completed mission statement and goals

Materials

  • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
  • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Step 1.2: Scope

Determine what is in scope and out of scope for the VMI

Regardless of where your VMI resides or how it operates, it will be working with other areas within your organization. Some of the activities performed by the VMI will be new and not currently handled by other groups or individuals internally; at the same time, some of the activities performed by the VMI may be currently handled by other groups or individuals internally. In addition, executives, stakeholders, and other internal personnel may have expectations or make assumptions about the VMI. As a result, there can be a lot of confusion about what the VMI does and doesn’t do, and the answers cannot always be found in the VMI’s mission statement and goals.

One component of helping others understand the VMI landscape is formalizing the VMI scope. The scope will define boundaries for the VMI. The intent is not to fence itself off and keep others out but provide guidance on where the VMI’s territory begins and ends. Ultimately, this will help clarify the VMI’s roles and responsibilities, improve workflow, and reduce errant assumptions.

When drafting your VMI scoping document, make sure you look at both sides of the equation (similar to what you would do when following best practices for a statement of work): Identify what is in scope and what is out of scope. Be specific when describing the individual components of the VMI scope, and make sure executives and stakeholders are on board with the final version.

1.2.1: Scope

20-40 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list on a whiteboard or flip chart the activities and functions in scope and out of scope for the VMI.
    1. Be specific to avoid ambiguity and improve clarity.
    2. Go back and forth between in scope and out of scope as needed; it is not necessary to list all of the in-scope items and then turn your attention to the out-of-scope items.
  2. Review the lists to make sure there is enough specificity. An item may be in scope or out of scope but not both.
  3. Use the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.2 Scope, to document the results.
  4. Obtain sign-off on the scope from stakeholders and executives as required.

Input

  • Brainstorming
  • Mission statement and goals

Output

  • Completed list of items in and out of scope for the VMI

Materials

  • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
  • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.2 Scope

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Step 1.3: Strengths and obstacles

Pinpoint the VMI’s strengths and obstacles.

A SWOT analysis (strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats) is a valuable tool, but it is overkill for your VMI at this point. However, using a modified and simplified form of this tool (strengths and obstacles) will yield significant results and benefit the VMI as it grows and matures.

Your output will be two lists: the strengths associated with the VMI and the obstacles facing the VMI. For example, strengths could include items such as smart people working within the VMI and executive support. Obstacles could include items such as limited headcount and training required for VMI staff.

The goals are 1) to harness the strengths to help the VMI be successful and 2) to understand the impact of the obstacles and plan accordingly. The output can also be used to enlighten executives and stakeholders about the challenges associated with their directives or requests (e.g. human bandwidth may not be sufficient to accomplish some of the vendor management activities and there is a moratorium on hiring until the next budget year).

For each strength identified, determine how you will or can leverage it when things are going well or when the VMI is in a bind. For each obstacle, list the potential impact on the VMI (e.g. scope, growth rate, and number of vendors that can actively be part of the VMI).

As you do your brainstorming, be as specific as possible and validate your lists with stakeholders and executives as needed.

1.3.1: Strengths and obstacles

20-40 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list on a whiteboard or flip chart the VMI’s strengths and obstacles.
    1. Be specific to avoid ambiguity and improve clarity.
    2. Go back and forth between strengths and obstacles as needed; it is not necessary to list all of the strengths and then turn your attention to the obstacles.
    3. It is possible for an item to be a strength and an obstacle; when this happens, add details to distinguish the situations.
  2. Review the lists to make sure there is enough specificity.
  3. Determine how you will leverage each strength and how you will manage each obstacle.
  4. Use the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.3 Strengths and Obstacles, to document the results.
  5. Obtain sign-off on the strengths and obstacles from stakeholders and executives as required.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • Brainstorming
  • Mission statement and goals
  • Scope

Output

  • Completed list of items impacting the VMI’s ability to be successful: strengths the VMI can leverage and obstacles the VMI must manage

Materials

  • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
  • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Step 1.4: Roles and responsibilities

Obtain consensus on who is responsible for what.

One crucial success factor for VMIs is gaining and maintaining internal alignment. There are many moving parts to an organization, and a VMI must be clear on the various roles and responsibilities related to the relevant processes. Some of this information can be found in the VMI’s scope, referenced in Step 1.2, but additional information is required to avoid stepping on each other’s toes since many of the processes require internal departments to work together. (For example, obtaining requirements for a request for proposal takes more than one person or one department to complete this process.) While it is not necessary to get too granular, it is imperative that you have a clear understanding of how the VMI activities will fit within the larger vendor management lifecycle (which is comprised of many sub processes) and who will be doing what.

As we have learned through our workshops and guided implementations, a traditional RACI* or RASCI* chart does not work well for this purpose. These charts are not intuitive, and they lack the specificity required to be effective. For vendor management purposes, a higher-level view and a slightly different approach provide much better results.

This step will lead your through the creation of an OIC* chart to determine vendor management lifecycle roles and responsibilities. Afterward, you’ll be able to say, “Oh, I see clearly who is involved in each part of the process and what their role is.”

*RACI – Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, Informed
*RASCI – Responsible, Accountable, Support, Consulted, Informed
*OIC – Owner, Informed, Contributor

This is an image of a table which shows an example of which role would be responsible for which step

Step 1.4: Roles and responsibilities (cont.)

Obtain consensus on who is responsible for what.

To start, define the vendor management lifecycle steps or process applicable to your VMI. Next, determine who participates in the vendor management lifecycle. There is no need to get too granular – think along the lines of departments, subdepartments, divisions, agencies, or however you categorize internal operational units. Avoid naming individuals other than by title; this typically happens when a person oversees a large group (e.g. the CIO [chief information officer] or the CPO [chief procurement officer]). Be thorough, but the chart can get out of hand quickly. For each role and step of the lifecycle, ask whether the entry is necessary – does it add value to the clarity of understanding the responsibilities associated with the vendor management lifecycle? Consider two examples, one for roles and one for lifecycle steps: 1) Is IT sufficient or do you need IT Operations and IT Development? 2) Is “negotiate contract documents” sufficient or do you need “negotiate the contract” and “negotiate the renewal”? The answer will always depend on your culture and environment, but be wary of creating a spreadsheet that requires an 85-inch monitor to view it in its entirety.

After defining the roles (departments, divisions, agencies) and the vendor management lifecycle steps or process, assign one of three letters to each box in your chart:

  • O – Owner – who owns the process; they may also contribute to it.
  • I – Informed – who is informed about the progress or results of the process.
  • C – Contributor – who contributes or works on the process; it can be tangible or intangible contributions.

This activity can be started by the VMI or done as a group with representatives from each of the named roles. If the VMI starts the activity, the resulting chart should be validated by the each of the named roles.

1.4.1: Roles and responsibilities

1-6 hours

  1. Meet with the participants and configure the OIC Chart in the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.4 OIC Chart.
    1. Review the steps or activities across the top of the chart and modify as needed.
    2. Review the roles listed along the left side of the chart and modify as needed.
  2. For each activity or step across the top of the chart, assign each role a letter – O for owner of that activity or step; I for informed; or C for contributor. Use only one letter per cell.
  3. Work your way across the chart. Every cell should have an entry or be left blank if it is not applicable.
  4. Review the results and validate that every activity or step has an O assigned to it; there must be an owner for every activity or step.
  5. Obtain sign-off on the OIC chart from stakeholders and executives as required.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • A list of activities or steps to complete a project, starting with requirements gathering and ending with ongoing risk management
  • A list of internal areas (departments, divisions, agencies, etc.) and stakeholders that contribute to completing a project

Output

  • Completed OCI chart indicating roles and responsibilities for the VMI and other internal areas

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.4 OIC Chart

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Procurement/Sourcing
  • IT
  • Representatives from other areas as needed
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives as needed

Step 1.5: Process mapping

Diagram the workflow.

Although policies and procedures are important, their nature can make it difficult to grasp how things work at a high level (or even at the detail level). To help bridge the gap, map the applicable processes (determined by how deep and wide you want to go) involving the VMI. To start, look at the OIC chart from Step 1.4. You can expand the breadth and depth of your mapping to include the VMI scope, the 3-year roadmap (see Step 2.9), and the processes driven by the day-to-day work within the VMI.

Various mapping tools can be used. Three common approaches that can be mixed and matched are:

  • Traditional flowcharts.
  • Swimlane diagrams.
  • Work breakdown structures.
This is an example of a Workflow Process Map

Step 1.5: Process mapping (cont.)

Diagram the workflow.

Your goal is not to create an in-depth diagram for every step of the vendor management lifecycle. However, for steps owned by the VMI, the process map should include sufficient details for the owner and the contributors (see Step 1.4) to understand what is required of them to support that step in the lifecycle.

For VMI processes that don’t interact with other departments, follow the same pattern as outlined above for steps owned by the VMI.

Whatever methodology you use to create your process map, make sure it includes enough details so that readers and users can identify the following elements:

  • Input:
    • What are the inputs?
    • Where do the inputs originate or come from?
  • Process:
    • Who is involved/required for this step?
    • What happens to the inputs in this step?
    • What additional materials, tools, or resources are used or required during this step?
  • Output:
    • What are the outputs?
    • Where do the outputs go next?

1.5.1: Process Mapping

1-8 hours (or more)

  1. Meet with the participants and determine which processes you want to map.
    1. For processes owned by the VMI, map the entire process.
    2. For processes contributed to by the VMI, map the entire process at a high level and map the VMI portion of the process in greater detail.
  2. Select the right charts/diagrams for your output.
    1. Flowchart
    2. Swimlane diagram
    3. Modified SIPOC (Supplier, Input, Process, Output, Customer)
    4. WBS (work breakdown structure)
  3. Begin mapping the processes either in a tool or using sticky notes. You want to be able to move the steps and associated information easily; most people don’t map the entire process accurately or with sufficient detail the first time through. An iterative approach works best.
  4. Obtain signoff on the process maps from stakeholders and executives as required. A copy of the final output can be kept in the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.5 Process Mapping, if desired.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • Existing processes (formal, informal, documented, and undocumented)
  • OIC chart

Output

  • Process maps for processes contributed to or owned by the VMI

Materials

  • Sticky Notes
  • Flowchart/process mapping software or something similar
  • (Optional) Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.5 Process Mapping

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Procurement/Sourcing
  • IT
  • Representatives from other areas as needed
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Step 1.6: Charter

Document how the VMI will operate.

As you continue getting organized by working through steps 1.1-1.5, you may want to document your progress in a charter and add some elements. Basically, a charter is a written document laying out how the VMI will operate within the organization. It clearly states the VMI’s mission, goals, scope, roles and responsibilities, and vendor governance model. In addition, it can include a list of team members and sponsors.

Whether you create a VMI charter will largely depend on:

  • Your organization’s culture.
  • Your organization’s formality.
  • The perceived value of creating a charter.

If you decide to create a VMI charter, this is a good place in the process to create an initial draft. As you continue working through the blueprint and your VMI matures, update the VMI charter as needed.

VMI Charter:

  • Purpose
  • Sponsors
  • Roles
  • Responsibilities
  • Governance

1.6.1: Charter

1-4 hours

  1. Meet with the participants and review the template in Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.6 Charter.
  2. Determine whether the participants will use this template or add materials to your standard charter template.
  3. Complete as much of the charter as possible, knowing that some information may not be available until later.
  4. Return to the charter as needed until it is completed.
  5. Obtain sign-off on the charter from stakeholders and executives as required.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • Mission statement and goals
  • Scope
  • Strengths and obstacles
  • OIC chart
  • List of stakeholders and executives and their VMI roles and responsibilities

Output

  • Completed VMI charter

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.6 Charter
  • Your organization’s standard charter document

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Step 1.7: Vendor inventory

Compile a list of vendors and relevant vendor information.

As you prepare your VMI for being operational, it’s critical to identify all of your current vendors providing IT products or services to the organization. This can be tricky and may depend on how you view things internally. For example, you may have traditional IT vendors that are managed by IT, and you may have IT vendors that are managed by other internal departments (shadow IT or out-in-the-open IT). If it wasn’t determined with the help of stakeholders and executives before now, make sure you establish the purview of the VMI at this point. What types of vendors are included and excluded from the VMI?

You may find that a vendor can be included and excluded based on the product or service they provide. A vendor may provide a service that is managed by IT and a service that is managed/controlled by another department. In this instance, a good working relationship and clearly defined roles and responsibilities between the VMI and the other department will be required. But, it all starts with compiling a list of vendors and validating the VMI’s purview (and any limitations) for the vendors with stakeholders and executives.

Step 1.7: Vendor inventory (cont.)

Compile a list of vendors and relevant vendor information.

At a minimum, the VMI should be able to quickly retrieve key information about each of “its” vendors:

  • Vendor Name
  • Classification (see Steps 2.1 and 3.1)
  • Categories of Service
  • Names of Products and Services Provided
  • Brief Descriptions of Products and Services Provided
  • Annualized Vendor Spend
  • Vendor Contacts
  • Internal Vendor Relationship Owner

Not all of this information will be available at this point, but you can begin designing or configuring your tool to meet your needs. As your VMI enters Phase 3: Run and continues to mature, you will return to this tool and update the information. For example, the vendor classification category won’t be known until Phase 3, and it can change over time.

1.7.1: Vendor inventory

1-10 hours

Meet with the participants and review the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory. Determine whether the VMI wants to collect and/or monitor additional information and make any necessary modifications to the tool.

Enter the “Annual IT Vendor Spend” amount in the appropriate cell toward the top of the spreadsheet. This is for IT spend for vendor-related activities within the VMI’s scope; include shadow IT spend and “non-shadow” IT spend if those vendors will be included in the VMI’s scope.

Populate the data fields for your top 50 vendors by annual spend; you may need multiple entries for the same vendor depending on the nature of the products and services they provide.

Ignore the “Classification” column for now; you will return to this later when classification information is available.

Ignore the “Percentage of IT Budget” column as well; it uses a formula to calculate this information.

Input

  • Data from various internal and external sources such as accounts payable, contracts, and vendor websites

Output

  • List of vendors with critical information required to manage relationships with key vendors

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory

Participants

  • VMI team (directly)
  • Other internal and external personnel (indirectly)

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

Step 1.8: Maturity assessment

Establish a VMI maturity baseline and set an ideal future state.

Knowing where you are and where you want to go are essential elements for any journey in the physical world, and the same holds true for your VMI journey. Start by assessing your current-state VMI maturity. This will provide you with a baseline to measure progress against. Next, using the same criteria, determine the level of VMI maturity you would like to achieve one year in the future. This will be your future-state VMI maturity. Lastly, identify the gaps and plot your course.

The maturity assessment provides three main benefits:

  1. Focus – you’ll know what is important to you moving forward.
  2. 3-Year Roadmap (discussed more fully in Step 2.9) – you’ll have additional input for your short-term and long-term roadmap (1, 2, and 3 years out).
  3. Quantifiable Improvement – you’ll be able to measure your progress and make midcourse corrections when necessary.

Step 1.8: Maturity assessment (cont.)

Establish a VMI maturity baseline and set an ideal future state.

The Info-Tech VMI Maturity Assessment tool evaluates your maturity across several criteria across multiple categories. Once completed, the assessment will specify:

  • A current-state score by category and overall.
  • A target-state score by category and overall.
  • A quantifiable gap for each criterion.
  • A priority assignment for each criterion.
  • A level of effort required by criterion to get from the current state to the target state.
  • A target due date by criterion for achieving the target state.
  • A rank order for each criterion (note: limit your ranking to your top 7 or 9).

Many organizations will be tempted to mature too quickly. Resource constraints and other items from Step 1.3 (Strengths and Obstacles) will impact how quickly you can mature. Being aggressive is fine, but it must be tempered with a dose of reality. Otherwise, morale, perception, and results can suffer.

1.8.1: Maturity assessment

45-90 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and use Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Input, to complete the first part of this activity. Provide the required information indicated below.
    1. Review each statement in column B and enter a value in the “Current” column using the drop-down menus based on how much you disagree or agree (0-4) with the statement. This establishes a baseline maturity.
    2. Repeat this process for the “Future” column using a target date of one year from now to achieve this level. This is your desired maturity.
    3. Enter information regarding priority, level of effort, and target due date in the applicable columns using the drop-down menus. (Priority levels are critical, high, medium, low, and maintain; Levels of Effort are high, medium, and low; Target Due Dates are broken into timelines: 1-3 months, 4-6 months, 7-9 months, and 10-12 months.)
  2. Review the information on Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Output; use the Distribution Tables to help you rank your top priorities. Enter a unique number into the Priority (Rank) column. Limit your ranking to the top 7 to 9 activities to provide focus.

Input

  • Knowledge of current VMI practices and desired future states

Output

  • VMI maturity baseline
  • Desired VMI target maturity state (in one year)
  • Prioritized areas to improve and due dates
  • Graphs and tables to identify maturity deltas and track progress

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Input
  • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Output

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Step 1.9: Structure

Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

There are two parts to the VMI structure:

  1. Organization Structure. Who owns the VMI – where does it fit on the organization chart?
  2. Reporting Structure. What is the reporting structure within the VMI – what are the job functions, titles, and solid and dotted lines of accountability?

VMI Organization Structure

The decision regarding who owns the VMI can follow one of two paths:

  1. The decision has already been made by the board of directors, executives, senior leadership, or stakeholders; OR
  2. The decision has not been made, and options will be reviewed and evaluated before it is implemented.

Many organizations overlook the importance of this decision. The VMI’s position on the organization chart can aid or hinder its success. Whether the decision has already been made or not, this is the perfect time to evaluate the decision or options based on the following question: Why is the VMI being created and how will it operate? Review the documents you created during Steps 1.1-1.8 and other factors to answer this question.

Step 1.9: Structure (cont.)

Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

Based on your work product from Steps 1.1-1.8 and other factors, select where the VMI will be best located from the following areas/offices or their equivalent:

  • Chief Compliance Officer (CCO)
  • Chief Information Officer (CIO)
  • Chief Financial Officer (CFO)
  • Chief Procurement Officer (CPO)
  • Chief Operating Officer (COO)
  • Other area

Without the proper support and placement in the organization chart, the VMI can fail. It is important for the VMI to find a suitable home with a direct connection to one of the sponsors identified above and for the VMI lead to have significant stature (aka title) within the organization. For example, if the VMI lead is a “manager” level who is four reporting layers away from the chief officer/sponsor, the VMI will have an image issue within and outside of the sponsor’s organization (as well as within the vendor community). While this is not to say that the VMI lead should be a vice president* or senior director, our experience and research indicate that the VMI and the VMI lead will be taken more seriously when the VMI lead is at least a director level reporting directly to a CXO.

*For purposes of the example above, the reporting structure hierarchy used is manager, senior manager, director, senior director, vice president, CXO.

Step 1.9: Structure (cont.)

Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

VMI Reporting Structure

As previously mentioned, the VMI reporting structure describes and identifies the job functions, titles, and lines of accountability. Whether you have a formal vendor management office or you are leveraging the principles of vendor management informally, your VMI reporting structure design will involve some solid lines and some dotted lines. In this instance, the dotted lines represent part-time participation or people/areas that will assist the VMI in some capacity. For example, if the VMI sits within IT, a dotted line to Procurement will show that a good working relationship is required for both parties to succeed; or a dotted line to Christina in Legal will indicate that Christina will be helping the VMI with legal issues.

There is no one-size-fits-all reporting structure for VMIs, and your approach must leverage the materials from Steps 1.1-1.8, your culture, and your needs. By way of example, your VMI may include some or all of the following functions:

  • Contract Management
  • Relationship Management
  • Financial Management
  • Asset Management
  • Performance Management
  • Sourcing/Procurement
  • Risk Management

Step 1.9: Structure (cont.)

Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

Once you’ve identified the functional groups, you can assign titles, responsibilities, and reporting relationships. A good diagram goes a long way to helping others understand your organization. Traditional organization charts work well with VMIs, but a target diagram allows for rapid absorption of the dotted-line relationships. Review the two examples below and determine an approach that works best for you.

An organizational Chart is depicted.  At the top of the chart is: Office of the CIO.  Below that is: VMI: Legal; Accounting & Finance; Corporate Procurement; below that are the following: Vendor Risk Management; Vendor Reporting and Analysis; Asset Management; Performance Management; Contract Management; IT Procurement Three concentric circles are depicted.  In the inner circle is the term: VMI.  In the middle circle are the terms: Reporting & Analysis; Asset Mgmt; Contract Mgmt; Performance Mgmt; It Proc; Vendor Risk.  In the outer circle are the following terms: Compliance; Finance; HR; Accounting; Procurement; Business Units; Legal; IT

1.9.1: Structure

15-60 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and review decisions that have been made or options that are available regarding the VMI’s placement in the organization chart.
    1. Common options include the Chief Information Officer (CIO), Chief Financial Officer (CFO), or Chief Procurement Officer (CPO).
    2. Less common but viable options include the Chief Compliance Officer (CCO), Chief Operating Officer (COO), or another area.
  2. Brainstorm and determine the job functions and titles
  3. Define the reporting structure within the VMI.
  4. Identify the “dotted line” relationships between the VMI and other internal areas.
  5. Using flowchart, org. chart, or other similar software, reduce your results to a graphic representation that indicates where the VMI resides, its reporting structure, and its dotted-line relationships.
  6. Obtain sign-off on the structure from stakeholders and executives as required. A copy of the final output can be kept in the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.9 Structure, if desired.

Input

  • Mission statement and goals
  • Scope
  • Maturity assessment results (current and target state)
  • Existing org. charts
  • Brainstorming

Output

  • Completed org. chart with job titles and reporting structure

Materials

  • Whiteboard/flip chart
  • Sticky notes
  • Flowchart/org. chart software or something similar
  • (Optional) Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.9 Structure

Participants

  • VMI team
  • VMI sponsor
  • Stakeholders and executives

Phase 2: Build

Create and Configure Tools, Templates, and Processes

Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4
1.1 Mission Statement and Goals


1.2 Scope

1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

1.4 Roles and Responsibilities

1.5 Process Mapping

1.6 Charter

1.7 Vendor Inventory

1.8 Maturity Assessment

1.9 Structure

2.1 Classification Model
2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
2.6 Vendor Orientation
2.7 Job Descriptions
2.8 Policies and Procedures
2.9 3-Year Roadmap
2.10 90-Day Plan
2.11 Quick Wins
2.12 Reports

3.1 Classify Vendors
3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
3.4 Compile Scorecards
3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
3.9 Issue Reports
3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

4.1 Assess Compliance
4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
4.5 Update Governances

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

Configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives
  • Human Resources
  • Legal
  • Others as needed

Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

Phase 2: Build

Create and configure tools, templates, and processes.

Phase 2: Build focuses on creating and configuring the tools and templates that will help you run your VMI. Vendor management is not a plug-and-play environment, and unless noted otherwise, the tools and templates included with this blueprint require your input and thought. The tools and templates must work in concert with your culture, values, and goals. That will require teamwork, insights, contemplation, and deliberation.

During this Phase, you’ll leverage the various templates and tools included with this blueprint and adapt them for your specific needs and use. In some instances, you’ll be starting with mostly a blank slate; while in others, only a small modification may be required to make it fit your circumstances. However, it is possible that a document or spreadsheet may need heavy customization to fit your situation. As you create your VMI, use the included materials for inspiration and guidance purposes rather than as absolute dictates.

Step 2.1: Classification model

Configure the COST Vendor Classification Tool.

One of the functions of a VMI is to allocate the appropriate level of vendor management resources to each vendor since not all vendors are of equal importance to your organization. While some people may be able intuitively to sort their vendors into vendor management categories, a more objective, consistent, and reliable model works best. Info-Tech’s COST model helps you assign your vendors to the appropriate vendor management category so that you can focus your vendor management resources where they will do the most good.

COST is an acronym for Commodity, Operational, Strategic, and Tactical. Your vendors will occupy one of these vendor management categories, and each category helps you determine the nature of the resources allocated to that vendor, the characteristics of the relationship desired by the VMI, and the governance level used.

The easiest way to think of the COST model is as a 2x2 matrix or graph. The model should be configured for your environment so that the criteria used for determining a vendor’s classification align with what is important to you and your organization. However, at this point in your VMI’s maturation, a simple approach works best. The Classification Model included with this blueprint requires minimal configuration to get you started and that is discussed on the activity slide associated with this Step 2.1.


Speed
Operational Strategic
Commodity Tactical
→→→
Criticality and Risk to the Organization

Step 2.1: Classification model (cont.)

Configure the COST Vendor Classification Tool.

Common Characteristics by Vendor Management Category

Operational Strategic
  • Low to moderate risk and criticality; moderate to high spend and switching costs
  • Product or service used by more than one area
  • Price is a key negotiation point
  • Product or service is valued by the organization
  • Quality or the perception of quality is a differentiator (i.e. brand awareness)
  • Moderate to high risk and criticality; moderate to high spend and switching costs
  • Few competitors and differentiated products and services
  • Product or service significantly advances the organization’s vision, mission, and success
  • Well-established in their core industry
Commodity Tactical
  • Low risk and criticality; low spend and switching costs
  • Product or service is readily available from many sources
  • Market has many competitors and options
  • Relationship is transactional
  • Price is the main differentiator
  • Moderate to high risk and criticality; low to moderate spend and switching costs
  • Vendor offerings align with or support one or more strategic objectives
  • Often IT vendors “outside” of IT (i.e. controlled and paid for by other areas)
  • Often niche or new vendors

Source: Compiled in part from Stephen Guth, “Vendor Relationship Management Getting What You Paid for (And More)”

2.1.1: Classification Model

15-30 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants to configure the spend ranges in Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool, Tab 1. Configuration, for your environment.
  2. Sort the data from Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory, by spend; if you used multiple line items for a vendor in the Vendor Inventory tab, you will have to aggregate the spend data for this activity.
  3. Update cells F14-J14 in the Classification Model based on your actual data.
    1. Cell F14 – set the boundary at a point between the spend for your 10th and 11th ranked vendors. For example, if the 10th vendor by spend is $1,009,850 and the 11th vendor by spend is $980,763, the range for F14 would be $1,000,00+.
    2. Cell G14 – set the bottom of the range at a point between the spend for your 30th and 31st ranked vendors; the top of the range will be $1 less than the bottom of the range specified in F14.
    3. Cell H14 – set the bottom of the range slightly below the spend for your 50th ranked vendor; the top of the range will be $1 less than the bottom of the range specified in G14.
    4. Cells I14 and J14 – divide the remaining range in half and split it between the two cells; for J14 the range will be $0 to $1 less than the bottom range in I14.
  4. Ignore the other variables at this time.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

Input

  • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory

Output

  • Configured Vendor Classification Tool

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool, Tab 1. Configuration

Participants

  • VMI team

Step 2.2: Risk assessment tool

Identify risks to measure, monitor, and report on.

One of the typical drivers of a VMI is risk management. Organizations want to get a better handle on the various risks their vendors pose. Vendor risks originate from many areas: financial, performance, security, legal, and many others. However, security risk is the high-profile risk and the one organizations often focus on almost exclusively, which leaves the organization vulnerable in other areas.

Risk management is a program, not a project – there is no completion date. A proactive approach works best and requires continual monitoring, identification, and assessment. Reacting to risks after they occur can be costly and can have other detrimental effects on the organization. Any risk that adversely affects IT will adversely affect the entire organization.

While the VMI won’t necessarily be quantifying or calculating the risk directly, it generally is the aggregator of risk information across the risk categories, which it then includes in its reporting function. (See Steps 2.12 and 3.8.)

At a minimum, your risk management strategy should involve:

  • Identifying the risks you want to measure and monitor.
  • Identifying your risk appetite (the amount of risk you are willing to live with).
  • Measuring, monitoring, and reporting on the applicable risks.
  • Developing and deploying a risk management plan to minimize potential risk impact.

Vendor risk is a fact of life, but you do have options for how you handle it. Be proactive and thoughtful in your approach, and focus your resources on what is important.

2.2.1: Risk assessment tool

30-90 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants to configure the risk indicators in Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool, Tab 1. Set Parameters, for your environment.
  2. Review the risk categories and determine which ones you will be measuring and monitoring.
  3. Review the risk indicators under each risk category and determine whether the indicator is acceptable as written, is acceptable with modifications, should be replaced, or should be deleted.
  4. Make the necessary changes to the risk indicators; these changes will cascade to each of the vendor tabs. Limit the number of risk indicators to no more than seven per risk category.
  5. Gain input and approval as needed from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as required.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

Input

  • Scope
  • OIC Chart
  • Process Maps
  • Brainstorming

Output

  • Configured Vendor Classification Tool

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool, Tab 1. Configuration

Participants

  • VMI team

Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback

Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

A vendor management scorecard is a great tool for measuring, monitoring, and improving relationship alignment. In addition, it is perfect for improving communication between you and the vendor.

Conceptually, a scorecard is similar to a report card you received when you were in school. At the end of a learning cycle, you received feedback on how well you did in each of your classes. For vendor management, the scorecard is also used to provide periodic feedback, but there are some different nuances and some additional benefits and objectives when compared to a report card.

Although scorecards can be used in a variety of ways, the main focus here will be on vendor management scorecards – contract management, project management, and other types of scorecards will not be included in the materials covered in this Step 2.3 or in Step 3.4.

Category 1 Score
Vendor Objective A 4
Objective B 3
Objective C 5
Objective D 4 !

Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

Anatomy

The Info-Tech Scorecard includes five areas:

  • Measurement Categories. Measurement categories help organize the scorecard. Limit the number of measurement categories to three to five; this allows the parties to stay focused on what’s important. Too many measurement categories make it difficult for the vendor to understand the expectations.
  • Criteria. The criteria describe what is being measured. Create criteria with sufficient detail to allow the reviewers to fully understand what is being measured and to evaluate it. Criteria can be objective or subjective. Use three to five criteria per measurement category.
  • Measurement Category Weights. Not all of your measurement categories may be of equal importance to you; this area allows you to give greater weight to a measurement category when compiling the overall score.
  • Rating. Reviewers will be asked to assign a score to each criteria using a 1 to 5 scale.
  • Comments. A good scorecard will include a place for reviewers to provide additional information regarding the rating or other items that are relevant to the scorecard.

An overall score is calculated based on the rating for each criteria and the measurement category weights.

Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

Goals and Objectives

Scorecards can be used for a variety of reasons. Some of the common ones are listed below:

  • Improve vendor performance.
  • Convey expectations to the vendor.
  • Identify and recognize top vendors.
  • Increase alignment between the parties.
  • Improve communication with the vendor.
  • Compare vendors across the same criteria.
  • Measure items not included in contract metrics.
  • Identify vendors for “strategic alliance” consideration.
  • Help the organization achieve specific goals and objectives.
  • Identify and resolve issues before they impact performance or the relationship.

Identifying your scorecard drivers first will help you craft a suitable scorecard.

Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

Info-Tech recommends starting with simple scorecards to allow you and the vendors to acclimate to the new process and information. As you build your scorecards, keep in mind that internal personnel will be scoring the vendors and the vendors will be reviewing the scorecard. Make your scorecard easy for your personnel to fill out and composed of meaningful content to drive the vendor in the right direction. You can always make the scorecard more complex in the future.

Our recommendation of five categories is provided below. Choose three to five categories to help you accomplish your scorecard goals and objectives:

  1. Timeliness – responses, resolutions, fixes, submissions, completions, milestones, deliverables, invoices, etc.
  2. Cost – total cost of ownership, value, price stability, price increases/decreases, pricing models, etc.
  3. Quality – accuracy, completeness, mean time to failure, bugs, number of failures, etc.
  4. Personnel – skilled, experienced, knowledgeable, certified, friendly, trustworthy, flexible, accommodating, etc.
  5. Risk – adequate contractual protections, security breaches, lawsuits, finances, audit findings, etc.

Some criteria may be applicable in more than one category. The categories above should cover at least 80% of the items that are important to your organization. The general criteria listed for each category is not an exhaustive list, but most things break down into time, money, quality, people, and risk issues.

Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

Additional Considerations

  • Even a good rating system can be confusing. Make sure you provide some examples or a way for reviewers to discern the differences between 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Don’t assume your “Rating Key” will be intuitive.
  • When assigning weights, don’t go lower than 10% for any measurement category. If the weight is too low, it won’t be relevant enough to have an impact on the total score. If it doesn’t “move the needle,” don’t include it.
  • Final sign-off on the scorecard template should occur outside of the VMI. The heavy lifting can be done by the VMI to create it, but the scorecard is for the benefit of the organization overall and those impacted by the vendors specifically. You may end up playing arbiter or referee, but the scorecard is not the exclusive property of the VMI. Try to reach consensus on your final template whenever possible.
  • You should notice improved ratings and total scores over time for your vendors. One explanation for this is the Pygmalion Effect: “The Pygmalion [E]ffect describes situations where someone’s high expectations improves our behavior and therefore our performance in a given area. It suggests that we do better when more is expected of us.”* Convey your expectations and let the vendors’ competitive juices take over.
  • While you’re creating your scorecard and materials to explain the process to internal personnel, identify those pieces that will help you explain it to your vendors as part of your vendor orientation (see steps 2.6 and 3.4). Leveraging pre-existing materials is a great shortcut.

*Source: The Decision Lab, 2020

Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

Vendor Feedback

After you’ve built your scorecard, turn your attention to the second half of the equation – feedback from the vendor. A communication loop cannot be successful without the dialogue flowing both ways. While this can happen with just a scorecard, a mechanism specifically geared toward the vendor providing you with feedback improves communication, alignment, and satisfaction.

You may be tempted to create a formal scorecard for the vendor to use. Our recommendation is to avoid that temptation until later in your maturity or development of the VMI. You’ll be implementing a lot of new processes, deploying new tools and templates, and getting people to work together in new ways. Work on those things first.

For now, implement an informal process for obtaining information from the vendor. Start by identifying information that you will find useful, information that will allow you to improve overall, to reduce waste or time, to improve processes, to identify gaps in skills. Incorporate these items into your business alignment meetings (see Steps 2.4 and 3.5). Create three to five good questions to ask the vendor and include these in the business alignment meeting agenda. The goal is to get meaningful feedback, and that starts with asking good questions.

Keep it simple at first. When the time is right, you can build a more formal feedback form or scorecard. Don’t be in a rush though. So long as the informal method works, keep using it.

2.3.1: Scorecards and feedback

30-60 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and brainstorm ideas for your scorecard measurement categories:
    1. What makes a vendor valuable to your organization?
    2. What differentiates a “good” vendor from a “bad” vendor?
    3. What items would you like to measure and provide feedback to the vendor to improve performance, the relationship, risk, and other areas?
  2. Select three, but no more than five, of the following measure categories: timeliness, cost, quality, personnel, and risk.
  3. Within each measurement category, list two or three criteria that you want to measure and track for your vendors; choose items that are as universal as possible rather than being applicable to one vendor or one vendor type.
  4. Assign a weight to each measurement category, ensuring that the total weight is 100% for all measurement categories.
  5. Document your results as you go in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Scorecard.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • Brainstorming

Output

  • Configured scorecard template

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Scorecard

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

2.3.2: Scorecards and feedback

15-30 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and brainstorm ideas for feedback to seek from your vendors during your business alignment meetings. During the brainstorming, identify questions to ask the vendor about your organization that will:
    1. Help you improve the relationship.
    2. Help you improve your processes or performance.
    3. Help you improve ongoing communication.
    4. Help you evaluate your personnel.
  2. Identify the top five questions you want to include in your business alignment meeting agenda. (Note: you may need to refine the actual questions from the brainstorming activity before they are ready to include in your business alignment meeting agenda.)
  3. Document both your brainstorming activity and your final results in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback. The brainstorming questions can be used in the future as your VMI matures and your feedback transforms from informal to formal. The final results will be used in Steps 2.4 and 3.5.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • Brainstorming

Output

  • Feedback questions to include with the business alignment meeting agenda

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Step 2.4: Business alignment meeting agenda

Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI.

A business alignment meeting (BAM) is a great, multi-faceted tool to ensure the customer and the vendor stay focused on what is important to the customer at a high level. BAMs are not traditional “operational” meetings where the parties get into the details of the contracts, deal with installation problems, address project management issues, or discuss specific cost overruns. The main focus of the BAM is the scorecard (see Step 2.3), but other topics are discussed and other purposes are served. For example, you can use the BAM to develop the relationship with the vendor’s leadership team so that if escalation is ever needed, your organization is more than just a name on a spreadsheet or customer list; you can learn about innovations the vendor is working on (without the meeting turning into a sales call); you can address high-level performance trends and request corrective action as needed; you can clarify your expectations; you can educate the vendor about your industry, culture, and organization; and you can learn more about the vendor.

As you build your BAM agenda, someone in your organization may say, “Oh, that’s just a quarterly business review (QBR) or top-to-top meeting.” However, in most instances, an existing QBR or top-to-top meeting is not the same as a BAM. Using the term QBR or top-to-top meeting instead of BAM can lead to confusion internally. The VMI may say to the business unit, Procurement, or another department, “We’re going to start running some QBRs for our strategic vendors.” The typical response is, “There’s no need to do that. We already run QBRs/top-to-top meetings with our important vendors.” This may be accompanied by an invitation to join their meeting, where you may be an afterthought, have no influence, and get five minutes at the end to talk about your agenda items. Keep your BAM separate so that it meets your needs.

Step 2.4: Business alignment meeting agenda (cont.)

Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI.

As previously noted, using the term BAM more accurately depicts the nature of the VMI meeting and prevents confusion internally with other meetings already occurring. In addition, hosting the BAM yourself rather than piggybacking onto another meeting ensures that the VMI’s needs are met. The VMI will set and control the BAM agenda and determine the invite list for internal personnel and vendor personnel. As you may have figured out by now, having the right customer and vendor personnel attend will be essential.

BAMs are conducted at the vendor level … not the contract level. As a result, the frequency of the BAMs will depend on the vendor’s classification category (see Steps 2.1 and 3.1). General frequency guidelines are provided below, but they can be modified to meet your goals:

  • Commodity Vendors – Not applicable
  • Operational Vendors – Biannually or annually
  • Strategic Vendors – Quarterly
  • Tactical Vendors – Quarterly or biannually

BAMs can help you achieve some additional benefits not previously mentioned:

  • Foster a collaborative relationship with the vendor.
  • Avoid erroneous assumptions by the parties.
  • Capture and provide a record of the relationship (and other items) over time.

Step 2.4: Business alignment meeting agenda (cont.)

Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI.

As with any meeting, building the proper agenda will be one of the keys to an effective and efficient meeting. A high-level BAM agenda with sample topics is set out below:

BAM Agenda

  • Opening Remarks
    • Welcome and introductions
    • Review of previous minutes
  • Active Discussion
    • Review of open issues
    • Scorecard and feedback
    • Current status of projects to ensure situational awareness by the vendor
    • Roadmap/strategy/future projects
    • Accomplishments
  • Closing Remarks
    • Reinforce positives (good behavior, results, and performance, value added, and expectations exceeded)
    • Recap
  • Adjourn

2.4.1: Business alignment meeting agenda

20-45 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and review the sample agenda in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda.
  2. Using the sample agenda as inspiration and brainstorming activities as needed, create a BAM agenda tailored to your needs.
    1. Select the items from the sample agenda applicable to your situation.
    2. Add any items required based on your brainstorming.
    3. Add the feedback questions identified during Activity 2.3.2 and documented in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback.
  3. Gain input and approval from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as required or appropriate.
  4. Document the final BAM agenda in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • Brainstorming
  • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback

Output

  • Configured BAM agenda

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Step 2.5: Relationship alignment document

Draft a document to convey important VMI information to your vendors.

Throughout this blueprint, alignment is mentioned directly (e.g. business alignment meetings [Steps 2.4 and 3.5]) or indirectly implied. Ensuring you and your vendors are on the same page, have clear and transparent communication, and understand each other’s expectations is critical to fostering strong relationships. One component of gaining and maintaining alignment with your vendors is the relationship alignment document (RAD). Depending upon the scope of your VMI and what your organization already has in place, your RAD will fill in the gaps on various topics.

Early in the VMI’s maturation, the easiest approach is to develop a short document (i.e. 1 page) or a pamphlet (i.e. the classic trifold) describing the rules of engagement when doing business with your organization. The RAD can convey expectations, policies, guidelines, and other items. The scope of the document will depend on 1) what you believe is important for the vendors to understand, and 2) any other similar information already provided to the vendors.

The first step to drafting a RAD is to identify what information vendors need to know to stay on your good side. For example, you may want vendors to know about your gift policy (e.g. employees may not accept gifts from vendors above a nominal value such as a pen or mousepad). Next, compare your list of what vendors need to know and determine if the content is covered in other vendor-facing documents such as a vendor code of conduct or your website’s vendor portal. Lastly, create your RAD to bridge the gap between what you want and what is already in place. In some instances, you may want to include items from other documents to reemphasize them with the vendor community.

Info-Tech Insight

The RAD can be used with all vendors regardless of classification category. It can be sent directly to the vendors or given to them during vendor orientation (see Step 3.3)

2.5.1: Relationship alignment document

1-4 hours

  1. Meet with the participants and review the RAD sample and checklist in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.5 Relationship Alignment Doc.
  2. Determine:
    1. Whether you will create one RAD for all vendors or one RAD for strategic vendors and another RAD for tactical and operational vendors; whether you will create a RAD for commodity vendors.
    2. The concepts you want to include in your RAD(s).
    3. The format for your RAD(s) – traditional, pamphlet, or other.
    4. Whether signoff or acknowledgement will be required by the vendors.
  3. Draft your RAD(s) and work with other internal areas such as Marketing to create a consistent brand for the RADS and Legal to ensure consistent use and preservation of trademarks or other intellectual property rights and other legal issues.
  4. Review other vendor-facing documents (e.g. supplier code of conduct, onsite safety and security protocols) for consistencies between them and the RAD(s).
  5. Obtain signoff on the RAD(s) from stakeholders, sponsors, executives, Legal, Marketing, and others as needed.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • Brainstorming
  • Vendor-facing documents, policies, and procedures

Output

  • Completed relationship alignment document(s)

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.5 Relationship Alignment Doc

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Marketing, as needed
  • Legal, as needed

Step 2.6: Vendor orientation

Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

Vendor Orientation: 01 - Orientation; 02 - Reorientation; 03 - Debrief

Your organization is unique. It may have many similarities with other organizations, but your culture, risk tolerance, mission, vision, and goals, finances, employees, and “customers” (those that depend on you) make it different. The same is true of your VMI. It may have similar principles, objectives, and processes to other organizations’ VMIs, but yours is still unique. As a result, your vendors may not fully understand your organization and what vendor management means to you.

Vendor orientation is another means to helping you gain and maintain alignment with your important vendors, educate them on what is important to you, and provide closure when/if the relationship with the vendor ends. Vendor orientation is comprised of three components, each with a different function:

  • Orientation
  • Reorientation
  • Debrief

Vendor orientation focuses on the vendor management pieces of the puzzle (e.g. the scorecard process) rather than the operational pieces (e.g. setting up a new vendor in the system to ensure invoices are processed smoothly).

Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

Vendor Orientation: 01 - Orientation

Orientation

Orientation is conceptually similar to new hire orientation for employees at your organization. Generally conducted as a meeting, orientation provides your vendors with the information they need to be successful when working with your organization. Sadly, this is often overlooked by customers; it can take months or years for vendors to figure it out by themselves. By controlling the narrative and condensing the timeline, vendor relationships and performance improve more rapidly.

A partial list of topics for orientation is set out below:

  • Your organization’s structure
  • Your organization’s culture
  • Your relationship expectations
  • Your governances (VMI and other)
  • Their vendor classification designation (commodity, operational, strategic, or tactical)
  • The scorecard process
  • Business alignment meetings
  • Relationship alignment documents

In short, this is the first step toward building (or continuing to build) a robust, collaborative, mutually beneficial relationship with your important vendors.

Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

Vendor Orientation: 02 - Reorientation

Reorientation

Reorientation is either identical or similar to orientation, depending upon the circumstances. Reorientation occurs for a number of reasons, and each reason will impact the nature and detail of the reorientation content. Reorientation occurs whenever:

  • There is a significant change in the vendor’s products or services.
  • The vendor has been through a merger, acquisition, or divestiture.
  • A significant contract renewal/renegotiation has recently occurred.
  • Sufficient time has passed from orientation; commonly 2 to 3 years.
  • The vendor has been placed in a “performance improvement plan” or “relationship improvement plan” protocol.
  • Significant turnover has occurred within your organization (executives, key stakeholders, and/or VMI personnel).
  • Substantial turnover has occurred at the vendor at the executive or account management level.
  • The vendor has changed vendor classification categories after the most current classification.

As the name implies, the goal is to refamiliarize the vendor with your current VMI situation, governances, protocols, and expectations. The drivers for reorientation will help you determine its scope, scale, and frequency.

Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

Vendor Orientation: 03 - Debrief

Debrief

To continue the analogy from orientation, debrief is similar to an exit interview for an employee when their employment is terminated. In this case, debrief occurs when the vendor is no longer an active vendor with your organization – all contracts have terminated or expired, and no new business with the vendor is anticipated within the next three months.

Similar to orientation and reorientation, debrief activities will be based on the vendor’s classification category within the COST model. Strategic vendors don’t go away very often; usually, they transition to operational or tactical vendors first. However, if a strategic vendor is no longer providing products or services to you, dig a little deeper into their experiences and allocate extra time for the debrief meeting.

The debrief should provide you with feedback on the vendor’s experience with your organization and their participation in your VMI. In addition, it can provide closure for both parties since the relationship is ending. Be careful that the debrief does not turn into a finger-pointing meeting or therapy session for the vendor. It should be professional and productive; if it is going off the rails, terminate the meeting before more damage can occur.

End the debrief on a high note if possible. Thank the vendor, highlight its key contributions, and single out any personnel who went above and beyond. You never know when you will be doing business with this vendor again – don’t burn bridges!

Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

  • As you create your vendor orientation materials, focus on the message you want to convey.
  • For orientation and reorientation:
    • What is important to you that vendors need to know?
    • What will help the vendors understand more about your organization … your VMI?
    • What and how are you different from other organizations overall … in your “industry”?
    • What will help them understand your expectations?
    • What will help them be more successful?
    • What will help you build the relationship?
  • For debrief:
    • What information or feedback do you want to obtain?
    • What information or feedback to you want to give?
  • The level of detail you provide strategic vendors during orientation and reorientation may be different from the information you provide tactical and operational vendors. Commodity vendors are not typically involved in the vendor orientation process. The orientation meetings can be conducted on a one-to-one basis for strategic vendors and a one-to-many basis for operational and tactical vendors; reorientation and debrief are best conducted on a one-to-one basis. Lastly, face-to-face or video meetings work best for vendor orientation; voice-only meetings, recorded videos, or distributing only written materials seldom hit their mark or achieve the desired results.

2.6.1: Vendor orientation

1 to several hours

  1. Meet with the participants and review the Phase Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.6 Vendor Orientation.
    1. Use the orientation checklist to identify the materials you want to create for your orientation meetings.
    2. Use the reorientation checklist to identify the materials you want to create for your reorientation meetings.
  2. The selections can be made by classification category (i.e. different items can apply to strategic, operational, and tactical vendors).
  3. Create the materials and seek input and/or approval from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as needed.
  4. Use the debrief section of the tool to create an agenda, list the questions you want to ask vendors, and list information you want to provide to vendors. The agenda, questions, and information can be segregated by classification category.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • Brainstorming

Output

  • Agendas and materials for orientation, reorientation, and debrief

Materials

  • Phase Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.6 Vendor Orientation

Participants

  • VMI team

Step 2.7: Job descriptions

Ensure new and existing job descriptions are up to date.

Based on your work product from Steps 1.1-1.9, it’s time to start drafting new or modifying existing job descriptions applicable to the VMI team members. Some of the VMI personnel may be dedicated full-time to the VMI, while others may be supporting the VMI on a part-time basis. At a minimum, create or modify your job descriptions based on the categories set out below. Remember to get the internal experts involved so that you stay true to your environment and culture.

01 Title

This should align overall with what the person will be doing and what the person will be responsible for. Your hands may be tied with respect to titles, but try to make them intuitively descriptive if possible.

02 Duties

This is the main portion of the job description. List the duties, responsibilities, tasks, activities, and results expected. Again, there may be some limitations imposed by your organization, but be as thorough as possible.

03 Qualifications

This tends to be a gray area for many organizations, with the qualifications, certifications, and experience desired expressed in “ranges” so that good candidates are not eliminated from consideration unnecessarily.

2.7.1: Job descriptions

1 to several hours

  1. Meet with the participants and review the VMI structure from Step 1.9.
    1. List the positions that require new job descriptions.
    2. List the positions that require updated job descriptions.
  2. Review the other Phase 1 work product and list the responsibilities, tasks, and functions that need to be incorporated into the new and updated job descriptions.
  3. Review the sample VMI job descriptions and sample VMI job description language in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.7 Job Descriptions, and identify language and concepts you want to include in the new and revised job descriptions.
  4. Using your template, draft the new job descriptions and modify the existing job descriptions to synchronize with the VMI structure. Work with other internal areas such as Human Resources to ensure cultural fit and compliance.
  5. Obtain input and signoff on the job descriptions from stakeholders, sponsors, executives, Human Resources, and others as needed.
  6. Document your final job descriptions in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.7 Job Descriptions.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • Brainstorming
  • Existing job descriptions
  • Work product from Phase 1

Output

  • Job descriptions for new positions
  • Updated job descriptions for existing positions

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.7 Job Descriptions

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Human Resources (as needed)
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Step 2.8: Policies and procedures

Prepare policies and procedures for VMI functions.

Policies and procedures are often thought of as boring documents that are 1) tedious to create, 2) seldom read after creation, and 3) only used to punish people when they do something “wrong.” However, when done well, these documents:

  • Communicate expectations.
  • Capture institutional knowledge.
  • Provide guidance for decision making.
  • Help workers avoid errors and minimize risk.
  • Ensure regulatory and organizational compliance.
  • List the steps required to achieve consistent results.

Definitions of Policies and Procedures

Policies and procedures are essential, but they are often confused with each other. A policy is a rule, guideline, or framework for making decisions. For example, in the vendor management space, you may want a policy indicating your organization’s view on gifts from vendors. A procedure is a set of instructions for completing a task or activity. For example, staying in the vendor management space, you may want a procedure to outline the process for classifying vendors.

Step 2.8: Policies and procedures (cont.)

Prepare policies and procedures for VMI functions.

Start With Your Policy/Procedure Template or Create One for Consistency

When creating policies and procedures, follow your template. If you don’t have one (or want to see if anything is missing from your template) the following list of potential components for your governance documents is provided.* Not every concept is required. Use your judgment and err on the side of caution when drafting; balance readability and helpfulness against over documenting and over complicating.

  • Descriptive Title
  • Policy Number
  • Brief Overview
  • Purpose
  • Scope
  • The Policy or Procedure
  • Definitions
  • Revision Date
  • History
  • Related Documents
  • Keywords

Step 2.8: Policies and procedures (cont.)

Prepare policies and procedures for VMI functions.

Although they are not ever going to be compared to page-turning novels, policies and procedures can be improved by following a few basic principles. By following the guidelines set out below, your VMI policies and procedures will contribute to the effectiveness of your initiative.*

  • Use short sentences.
  • Organize topics logically.
  • Use white space liberally.
  • Use mandatory language.
  • Use gender-neutral terms.
  • Write with an active voice.
  • Avoid jargon when possible.
  • Use a consistent “voice” and tone.
  • Use pictures or diagrams when they will help.
  • Write in the same tense throughout the document.
  • Use icons and colors to designate specific elements.
  • Make sure links to other policies and procedures work.
  • Define all acronyms and jargon (when it must be used).
  • Avoid a numbering scheme with more than three levels.

*Adapted in part from smartsheet.com

Info-Tech Insight

Drafting policies and procedures is an iterative process that requires feedback from the organization’s leadership team.

2.8.1: Policies and procedures

Several hours

  1. Meet with the participants and review the sample policies and procedures topics in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.8 Policies and Procedures.
  2. Determine:
    1. The concepts you want to include in your policies and procedures; brainstorm for any additional concepts you want to include.
    2. The format/template for your policies and procedures.
  3. Draft your policies and procedures based on the sample topics and your brainstorming activity. Work with other internal areas such as Legal and Human Resources to ensure cultural and environmental fit within your organization.
  4. Obtain input and signoff on the policies and procedures from stakeholders, sponsors, executives, Legal, Human Resources, and others as needed.
  5. Document your final policies and procedures in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.8 Policies and Procedures.
  6. Publish your policies and procedures and conduct training sessions or awareness sessions as needed.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • Existing policies and procedures (if any)
  • Existing policies and procedures template (if any)
  • Scope
  • OIC chart
  • Process maps
  • Brainstorming

Output

  • VMI policies and procedures

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.8 Policies and Procedures

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Legal and Human Resources (as needed)
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Step 2.9: 3-year roadmap

Plot your path at a high level.

The VMI exists in many planes concurrently: 1) it operates both tactically and strategically, and 2) it focuses on different timelines or horizons (e.g. the past, the present, and the future). Creating a 3-year roadmap facilitates the VMI’s ability to function effectively across these multiple landscapes.

The VMI roadmap will be influenced by many factors. The work product from Phase 1: Plan, input from executives, stakeholders, and internal clients, and the direction of the organization as a whole are great sources of information as you begin to build your roadmap.

To start, identify what you would like to accomplish in Year 1. This is arguably the easiest year to complete: budgets are set (or you have a good idea what the budget will look like), personnel decisions have been made, resources have been allocated, and other issues impacting the VMI are known with a higher degree of certainty than any other year. This does not mean things won’t change during the first year of the VMI, but expectations are usually lower and the short event horizon makes things more predictable during the Year-1 ramp-up period.

Years 2 and 3 are more tenuous, but the process is the same: identify what you would like to accomplish or roll out in each year. Typically, the VMI maintains the Year 1 plan into subsequent years and adds to the scope or maturity. For example, you may start Year 1 with BAMs and scorecards for three of your strategic vendors; during Year 2, you may increase that to five vendors; and during Year 3, you may increase that to nine vendors. Or, you may not conduct any market research during Year 1, waiting to add it to your roadmap in Year 2 or 3 as you mature.

Breaking things down by year helps you identify what is important and the timing associated with your priorities. A conservative approach is recommended. It is easy to overcommit, but the results can be disastrous and painful.

2.9.1: 3-year roadmap

45-90 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and decide how to coordinate Year 1 of your 3-year roadmap with your existing fiscal year or reporting year. Year 1 may be shorter or longer than a calendar year.
  2. Review the VMI activities listed in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.9 3-Year Roadmap. Use brainstorming and your prior work product from Phase 1 and Phase 2 to identify additional items for the roadmap and add them at the bottom of the spreadsheet.
  3. Starting with the first activity, determine when that activity will begin and put an X in the corresponding column; if the activity is not applicable, leave it blank or insert N/A.
  4. Go back to the top of the list and add information as needed.
    1. For any Year-1 or Year-2 activities, add an X in the corresponding columns if the activity will be expanded/continued in subsequent periods (e.g. if a Year 2 activity will continue in Year 3, put an X in Year 3 as well).
    2. Use the comments column to provide clarifying remarks or additional insights related to your plans or “X’s.” For example, “Scorecards begin in Year 1 with three vendors and will roll out to five vendors in Year 2 and nine vendors in Year 3.”
  5. Obtain signoff from stakeholders, sponsors, and executives as needed.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • Phase 1 work product
  • Steps 2.1-2.8 work product
  • Brainstorming

Output

  • High level 3-year roadmap for the VMI

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.9 3-Year Roadmap

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Step 2.10: 90-day plan

Pave your short-term path with a series of detailed quarterly plans.

Now that you have prepared a 3-year roadmap, it’s time to take the most significant elements from the first year and create action plans for each three-month period. Your first 90-day plan may be longer or shorter if you want to sync to your fiscal or calendar quarters. Aligning with your fiscal year can make it easier for tracking and reporting purposes; however, the more critical item is to make sure you have a rolling series of four 90-day plans to keep you focused on the important activities and tasks throughout the year.

The 90-day plan is a simple project plan that will help you measure, monitor, and report your progress. Use the Info-Tech tool to help you track:

  • Activities
  • Tasks comprising each activity
  • Who will be performing the tasks
  • An estimate of the time required per person per task
  • An estimate of the total time to achieve the activity
  • A due date for the activity
  • A priority of the activity

The first 90-day plan will have the greatest level of detail and should be as thorough as possible; the remaining three 90-day plans will each have less detail for now. As you approach the middle of the first 90-day plan, start adding details to the next 90-day plan; toward the end of the first quarter add a high-level 90-day plan to the end of the chain. Continue repeating this cycle each quarter and consult the 3-year roadmap and the leadership team as necessary.

90 Days

2.10.1: 90-day plan

45-90 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and decide how to coordinate the first 90-day plan with your existing fiscal year or reporting cycles. Your first plan may be shorter or longer than 90 days.
  2. Looking at the Year 1 section of the 3-year roadmap, identify the activities that will be started during the next 90 days.
  3. Using the Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.10 90-Day Plan, enter the following information into the spreadsheet for each activity to be accomplished during the next 90 days:
    1. Activity description
    2. Tasks required to complete the activity (be specific and descriptive)
    3. The people who will be performing each task
    4. The estimated number of hours required to complete each task
    5. The start date and due date for each task or the activity
  4. Validate the tasks are a complete list for each activity and the people performing the tasks have adequate time to complete the tasks by the due date(s).
  5. Assign a priority to each activity.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • 3-year roadmap
  • Phase 1 work product
  • Steps 2.1-2.9 work product
  • Brainstorming

Output

  • Detailed plan for the VMI for the next quarter or 90 days

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.10 90-Day Plan

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Step 2.11: Quick wins

Identify potential short-term successes to gain momentum and show value immediately.

As the final step in the timeline trilogy, you are ready to identify some quick wins for the VMI. Using the first 90-day plan and a brainstorming activity, create a list of things you can do in 15 to 30 days that add value to your initiative and build momentum.

As you evaluate your list of potential candidates, look for things that:

  • Are achievable within the stated timeline.
  • Don’t require a lot of effort.
  • Involve stopping a certain process, activity, or task; this is sometimes known as a “stop doing stupid stuff” approach.
  • Will reduce or eliminate inefficiencies; this is sometimes known as the war on waste.
  • Have a moderate to high impact or bolster the VMI’s reputation.

As you look for quick wins, you may find that everything you identify does not meet the criteria. That’s ok … don’t force the issue. Return your focus to the 90-day plan and 3-year roadmap, and update those documents if the brainstorming activity associated with this Step 2.11 identified anything new.

2.11.1: Quick wins

15-30 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and review the 3-year roadmap and 90-day plan. Determine if any item on either document can be completed:
    1. Quickly (30 days or less)
    2. With minimal effort
    3. To provide or show moderate to high levels of value or provide the VMI with momentum
  2. Brainstorm to identify any other items that meet the criteria in step 1 above.
  3. Compile a comprehensive list of these items and select up to five to pursue.
  4. Document the list in the Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.11 Quick Wins.
  5. Manage the quick wins list and share the results with the VMI team and applicable stakeholders and executives.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • 3-year roadmap
  • 90-day plan
  • Brainstorming

Output

  • A list of activities that require low levels of effort to achieve moderate to high levels of value in a short period

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.11 Quick Wins

Participants

  • VMI team

Step 2.12: Reports

Construct your reports to resonate with your audience.

Issuing reports is a critical piece of the VMI since the VMI is a conduit of information for the organization. It may be aggregating risk data from internal areas, conducting vendor research, compiling performance data, reviewing market intelligence, or obtaining relevant statistics, feedback, comments, facts, and figures from other sources. Holding onto this information minimizes the impact a VMI can have on the organization; however, the VMI’s internal clients, stakeholders, and executives can drown in raw data and ignore it completely if it is not transformed into meaningful, easily-digested information.

Before building a report, think about your intended audience:

  • What information are they looking for … what will help them understand the big picture?
  • What level of detail is appropriate, keeping in mind the audience may not be like-minded?
  • What items are universal to all of the readers and what items are of interest to one or two readers?
  • How easy or hard will it be to collect the data … who will be providing it, how time consuming will it be?
  • How accurate, valid, and timely will the data be?
  • How frequently will each report need to be issued?

Step 2.12: Reports (cont.)

Construct your reports to resonate with your audience.

Use the following guidelines to create reports that will resonate with your audience:

  • Value information over data, but sometimes data does have a place in your report.
  • Use pictures, graphics, and other representations more than words, but words are often necessary in small, concise doses.
  • Segregate your report by user; for example, general information up top, CIO information below that on the right, CFO information to the left of CIO information, etc.
  • Send a draft report to the internal audience and seek feedback, keeping in mind you won’t be able to cater to or please everyone.

Step 2.12: Reports (cont.)

Construct your reports to resonate with your audience.

The report’s formatting and content display can make or break your reports.*

  • Make the report look inviting and easy to read. Use:
    • Short paragraphs and bullet points.
    • A simple layout and uncluttered, wide margins.
    • Minimal boldface, underline, or italics to attract the readers’ attention.
    • High contrast between text and background.
  • Charts, graphs, and infographics should be intuitive and tell the story on their own.
  • Make it easy to peruse the report for topics of interest.
    • Maintain consistent design features.
    • Use impactful, meaningful headings and subheadings.
    • Include callouts to draw attention to important high-level information.
  • Demonstrate the impact of the accomplishments or success stories when appropriate.
  • Finish with a simple concise summary when appropriate. Consider adding:
    • Key points for the reader to takeaway.
    • Action items or requests.
    • Plans for next reporting period.

*Sources: Adapted and compiled in part from: designeclectic.com, ahrq.gov, and 60secondmarketer.com.

2.12.1: Reports

15-45 minutes

  1. Meet with the participants and review the applicable work product from Phases 1 and 2; identify qualitative and quantitative items the VMI measures, monitors, tracks, or aggregates.
  2. Determine which items will be reported and to whom (by category):
    1. Internally to personnel within the VMI
    2. Internally to personnel outside the VMI
    3. Externally to vendors
  3. Within each category above, determine your intended audiences/recipients. For example, you may have a different list of recipients for a risk report than you do a scorecard summary report. This will help you identify the number of reports required.
  4. Create a draft structure for each report based on the audience and the information being conveyed. Determine the frequency of each report and person responsible for creating for each report.
  5. Document your final choices in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.12 Reports.

Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

Input

  • Brainstorming
  • Phase 1 work product
  • Steps 2.1-2.11 work product

Output

  • A list of reports used by the VMI
  • For each report:
  • The conceptual content
  • A list of who will receive or have access
  • A creation/distribution frequency

Materials

  • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.12 Reports

Participants

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

Phase 3: Run

Implement Your Processes and Leverage Your Tools and Templates

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
1.2 Scope
1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
1.5 Process Mapping
1.6 Charter
1.7 Vendor Inventory
1.8 Maturity Assessment
1.9 Structure

2.1 Classification Model
2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
2.6 Vendor Orientation
2.7 Job Descriptions
2.8 Policies and Procedures
2.9 3-Year Roadmap
2.10 90-Day Plan
2.11 Quick Wins
2.12 Reports

3.1 Classify Vendors
3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
3.4 Compile Scorecards
3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
3.9 Issue Reports
3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

4.1 Assess Compliance
4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
4.5 Update Governances

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

Begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives
  • Others as needed

Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

Phase 3: Run

Implement your processes and leverage your tools and templates.

All of the hard work invested in Phase 1: Plan and Phase 2: Build begins to pay off in Phase 3: Run. It’s time to stand up your VMI and ensure that the proper level of resources is devoted to your vendors and the VMI itself. There’s more hard work ahead, but the foundational elements are in place. This doesn’t mean there won’t be adjustments and modifications along the way, but you are ready to use the tools and templates in the real world; you are ready to begin reaping the fruits of your labor.

Phase 3: Run guides you through the process of collecting data, monitoring trends, issuing reports, and conducting effective meetings to:

  • Manage risk better.
  • Improve vendor performance.
  • Improve vendor relationships.
  • Identify areas where the parties can improve.
  • Improve communication between the parties.
  • Increase the value proposition with your vendors.

Step 3.1: Classify vendors

Begin classifying your top 25 vendors by spend.

Step 3.1 sets the table for many of the subsequent steps in Phase 3: Run. The results of your classification process will determine: which vendors go through the scorecarding process (Step 3.4); which vendors participate in BAMs (Step 3.5); the nature and content of the vendor orientation activities (Step 3.3); which vendors will be part of the risk measurement and monitoring process (Step 3.8); which vendors will be included in the reports issued by the VMI (Step 3.9); and which vendors you will devote relationship-building resources to (Step 3.10).

As you begin classifying your vendors, Info-Tech recommends using an iterative approach initially to validate the results from the classification model you configured in Step 2.1.

  1. Using the information from the Vendor Inventory tab (Step 1.7), identify your top 25 vendors by spend.
  2. Run your top 10 vendors by spend through the classification model and review the results.
    1. If the results are what you expected and do not contain any significant surprises, go to next page.
    2. If the results are not what you expected or contain significant surprises, look at the configuration page of the tool (Tab 1) and adjust the weights or the spend categories slightly. Be cautious in your evaluation of the results before modifying the configuration page – some legitimate results are unexpected or surprising based on bias. If you modify the weighting, review the new results and repeat your evaluation. If you modify the spend categories, review the answers on the vendor tabs to ensure that the answers are still accurate; review the new results and repeat your evaluation.

Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

Review your results and adjust the classification tool as needed.

  1. Run your top 11 through 25 vendors by spend through the classification model and review the results. Identify any unexpected results or surprises. Determine if further configuration makes sense and repeat the process outlined in 2.b, previous page, as necessary. If no further modifications are required, continue to 4, below.
  2. Share the preliminary results with the leadership team, executives, and stakeholders to obtain their approval or adjustments to the results.
    1. They may have questions and want to understand the process before approving the results.
    2. They may request that you move a vendor from one quadrant to another based on your organization’s roadmap, the vendor’s roadmap, or other information not available to you.
  3. Identify the vendors that will be part of the VMI at this stage – how many and which ones. Based on this number and the VMI’s scope (Step 1.2), make sure you have the resources necessary to accommodate the number of vendors participating in the VMI. Proceed cautiously and gradually increase the number of vendors participating in the VMI.

Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

Finalize the results and update VMI tools and templates.

  1. Update the Vendor Inventory tab (Step 1.7) to indicate the current classification status for the top 25 vendors by spend. Once your vendors have been classified, you can sort the Vendor Inventory tab by classification status to see all the vendors in that category at once.
  2. Review your 3-year roadmap (Step 2.9) and 90-day plans (Step 2.10) to determine if any modifications are needed to the activities and timelines.

Additional classification considerations:

  • You should only have a few vendors that fit in the strategic category. As a rough guideline, no more than 5% to 10% of your IT vendors should end up in the strategic category. If you have a large number of vendors, even 5% may be too many. The classification model is an objective start to the classification process, but common sense must prevail over the “math” at the end of the day.
  • At this point, there is no need to go beyond the top 25 by spend. Most VMIs starting out can’t handle more than three to five strategic vendors initially. Allow the VMI to run a pilot program with a small sample size, work out any bugs, make adjustments, and then ramp up the VMI’s rollout in waves. Vendors can be added quarterly, biannually, or annually, depending upon the desired goals and available resources.

Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

Align your vendor strategy to your classification results.

As your VMI matures, additional vendors will be part of the VMI. Review the table below and incorporate the applicable strategies into your deployment of vendor management principles over time. Stay true to your mission, goals, and scope, and remember that not all of your vendors are of equal importance.

Operational Strategic
  • Focus on spend containment
  • Concentrate on lowering total cost of ownership
  • Invest moderately in cultivating the relationship
  • Conduct BAMs biannually or annually
  • Compile scorecards quarterly or biannually
  • Identify areas for performance and cost improvement
  • Focus on value, collaboration, and alignment
  • Review market intelligence for the vendor’s industry
  • Invest significantly in cultivating the relationship
  • Initiate executive-to-executive relationships
  • Conduct BAMs quarterly
  • Compile scorecards quarterly
  • Understand how the vendors view your organization

Commodity

Tactical

  • Investigate vendor rationalization and consolidation
  • Negotiate for the best-possible price
  • Leverage competition during negotiations
  • Streamline the purchasing and payment process
  • Allocate minimal VMI resources
  • Assign the lowest priority for vendor management metrics
  • Conduct risk assessments biannually or annually
  • Cultivate a collaborative relationship based on future growth plans or potential with the vendor
  • Conduct BAMs quarterly or biannually
  • Compile scorecards quarterly
  • Identify areas of performance improvement
  • Leverage innovation and creative problem solving

Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

Be careful when using the word “partner” with your strategic and other vendors.

For decades, vendors have used the term “partner” to refer to the relationship they have with their clients and customers. In many regards, this is often an emotional ploy used by the vendors to get the upper hand. To fully understand the terms “partner” and “partnership” let’s evaluate them through two more-objective, less-cynical lenses.

If you were to talk to your in-house or outside legal counsel, you may be told that partners share in profits and losses, and they have a fiduciary obligation to each other. Unless there is a joint venture between the parties, you are unlikely to have a partnership with a vendor from this perspective.

What about a “business” partnership … one that doesn’t involve sharing profits and losses? What would that look like? Here are some indicators of a business partnership (or preferably a strategic alliance):

  • Trust and transparent communication exist.
  • You have input into the vendor’s roadmap for products and services.
  • The vendor is aligned with your desired outcomes and helps you achieve success.
  • You and the vendor are accountable for actions and inactions, with both parties being at risk.
  • There is parity in the peer-to-peer relationships between the organizations (e.g. C-Level to C-Level).
  • The vendor provides transparency in pricing models and proactively suggests ways for you to reduce costs.
  • You and the vendor work together to make each party better, providing constructive feedback on a regular basis.
  • The vendor provides innovative suggestions for you to improve your processes, performance, the bottom line, etc.
  • Negotiations are not one-sided; they are meaningful and productive, resulting in an equitable distribution of money and risk.

Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

Understand the implications and how to leverage the words “partner” and “partnership.”

By now you might be thinking, “What’s all the fuss? Why does it matter?” At Info-Tech, we’ve seen firsthand how referring to the vendor as a partner can have the following impact:

  • Confidences are disclosed unnecessarily.
  • Negotiation opportunities and leverage are lost.
  • Vendors no longer have to earn the customer’s business.
  • Vendor accountability is missing due to shared responsibilities.
  • Competent skilled vendor resources are assigned to other accounts.
  • Value erodes over time since contracts are renewed without being competitively sourced.
  • One-sided relationships are established, and false assurances are provided at the highest levels within the customer organization.

Proceed with caution when using partner or partnership with your vendors. Understand how your organization benefits from using these terms and mitigate the negatives outlined above by raising awareness internally to ensure people understand the psychology behind the terms. Finally, use the term to your advantage when warranted by referring to the vendor as a partner when you want or need something that the vendor is reluctant to provide. Bottom line: Be strategic in how you refer to vendors and know the risks.

Step 3.2: Conduct internal “kickoff” meeting

Raise awareness about the VMI and its mission, vision, and goals.

To be effective, your VMI needs executive support, a clear vision, appropriate governances and tools, personnel with the right skills, and other items discussed in this blueprint. However, the VMI doesn’t exist in a vacuum … it can’t sit back and be reactive. As part of being proactive, the VMI must be aware of its brand and “market” its services. An effective way to market the VMI is to conduct an internal kickoff meeting. There are at least a couple of ways to do this:

  • Host a meeting for stakeholders, executives, and others who will be contributing to the VMI processes (but are not part of the VMI). The meeting can be part of a townhall or standalone meeting; it can be done live or via a recorded video.
  • Attend appropriate staff meetings and make your presentation.

With either approach above or one of your choosing, keep in mind the following objectives for your kickoff meeting:

  • Make sure you provide a way for those in attendance to ask questions at that time and later. You want to create and foster a communication loop with the people who will be impacted by the VMI or participating with it.
  • Raise awareness of your existence and personnel. Tell the VMI’s story by sharing your mission statement, goals, and scope; this will help dispel (or confirm) rumors about the VMI that often lead to confusion and faulty assumptions.
  • As you share the VMI’s vision, connect the story to how the VMI will impact the organization and individuals and to how they can help. The VMI tends to be the least autonomous area within an organization; it needs the assistance of others to be successful. Convey an atmosphere of collaboration and appreciation for their help.

Host a kickoff meeting annually to kickoff the new year. Remind people of your story, announce successes from the past year, and indicate what the future year holds. Keep it brief, make it personal for the audience, and help them connect the names of VMI personnel to faces.

Step 3.3: Conduct vendor orientation

Introduce your VMI to your top vendors.

Based on the results from your vendor classification (Step 3.1) and your VMI deployment timeline, identify the vendors who will participate in the initial orientation meetings. Treat the orientation as a formal, required meeting for the vendors to attend. Determine the attendee list for your organization and the vendors, and send out invites. Ideally, you will want the account manager, a sales director or vice president, the “delivery” director or vice president, and an executive from the vendor in the meeting. From the customer side, you may need more than one or two people from the VMI to entice the vendor’s leadership team to attend; you may need attendance from your own leadership team to add weight or credibility to the meeting (unfortunately).

Before going into the meeting, make sure everyone on your side knows their roles and responsibilities, and review the agenda. Control the agenda or the meeting is likely to get out of hand and turn into a sales call.

Conduct orientation meetings even if the participating vendors have been doing business with you for several years. Don’t assume they know all about your organization and your VMI (even if their other clients have a VMI).

Run two or three orientation meetings and then review the “results.” What needs to be modified? What lessons have you learned? Make any necessary adjustments and continue rolling out the orientation meetings.

Early in the VMI’s deployment, reorientation and debrief may not be in play. As time passes, it is important to remember them! Use them when warranted to help with vendor alignment.

Step 3.4: Compile scorecards

Begin scoring your top vendors.

The scorecard process typically is owned and operated by the VMI, but the actual rating of the criteria within the measurement categories is conducted by those with day-to-day interactions with the vendors, those using or impacted by the services and products provided by the vendors, and those with the skills to research other information on the scorecard (e.g. risk). Chances are one person will not be able to complete an entire scorecard by themselves. As a result, the scorecard process is a team sport comprising sub-teams where necessary.

The VMI will compile the scores, calculate the final results, and aggregate all of the comments into one scorecard. There are two common ways to approach this task:

  1. Send out the scorecard template to those who will be scoring the vendor and ask them to return it when completed, providing them with a due date a few days before you actually need it; you’ll need time to compile, calculate, and aggregate.
  2. Invite those who will be scoring the vendor to a meeting and let the contributors use that time to score the vendors; make VMI team members available to answer questions and facilitate the process.

Step 3.4: Compile scorecards (cont.)

Gather input from stakeholders and others impacted by the vendors.

Since multiple people will be involved in the scorecarding process or have information to contribute, the VMI will have to work with the reviewers to ensure that the right mix of data is provided. For example:

  • If you are tracking lawsuits filed by or against the vendor, one person from Legal may be able to provide that, but they may not be able to evaluate any other criteria on the scorecard.
  • If you are tracking salesperson competencies, multiple people from multiple areas may have valuable insights.
  • If you are tracking deliverable timeliness, several project managers may want to contribute across several projects.

Where one person is contributing exclusively to limited criteria, make it easy for the person to identify the criteria they are to evaluate. When multiple people from the same functional area will provide insights, they can contribute individually (and the VMI will average their responses) or they can respond collectively after reaching consensus among themselves.

After the VMI has compiled, calculated, and aggregated, share the results with executives, impacted stakeholders, and others who will be attending the BAM for that vendor. Depending upon the comments provided by internal personnel, you may need to create a sanitized version of the scorecard for the vendor.

Make sure your process timeline has a buffer built in. You’ll be sending the final scorecard to the vendor three to five days before the BAM, and you’ll need some time to assemble the results. The scorecarding process can be perceived as a low-priority activity for people outside of the VMI, and other “priorities” will arise for them. Without a timeline buffer, the VMI may find itself behind schedule and unprepared due to things beyond its control.

Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings

Determine which vendors will participate and how long the meetings will last.

At their core, BAMs aren’t that different from any other meeting. The basics of running a meeting still apply, but there are a few nuances that apply to BAMs Set out below are leading practices for conducing your BAMs; adapt them to meet your needs and suit your environment.

Who

Initially, BAMs are conducted with the strategic vendors in your pilot program. Over time, you’ll add vendors until all of your strategic vendors are meeting with you quarterly. After that, roll out the BAMs to those tactical and operational vendors located close to the strategic quadrant in the classification model (Steps 2.1 and 3.1) and as VMI resources allow. It may take several years before you are holding regular BAMs with all of your strategic, tactical, and operational vendors.

Duration

Keep the length of your meetings reasonable. The first few with a vendor may need to be 60 to 90 minutes long. After that, you should be able to trim them to 45 to 60 minutes. The BAM does not have to fill the entire time. When you are done, you are done.

Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings (cont.)

Identify who will be invited and send out invitations.

Invitations

Set up a recurring meeting whenever possible. Changes will be inevitable, but keeping the timeline regular works to your advantage. Also, the vendors included in your initial BAMs won’t change for twelve months. For the first BAM with a vendor, provide adequate notice; four weeks is sufficient in most instances, but calendars will fill up quickly for the main attendees from the vendor. Treat the meeting as significant and make sure your invitation reflects this. A simple meeting request will often be rejected, treated as optional, or ignored completely by the vendor’s leadership team (and maybe yours as well!).

Invitees

Internal invitees should include those with a vested interest in the vendor’s performance and the relationship. In addition, other functional areas may be invited based on need or interest. Be careful the attendee list doesn’t get too big. Based on this, internal BAM attendees often include representatives from IT, Sourcing/Procurement, and the applicable business units. At times, Finance and Legal are included.

From the vendor’s side, strive to have decision makers and key leaders attend. The salesperson/account manager is often included for continuity, but a director or vice president of sales will have more insights and influence. The project manager is not needed at this meeting due to the nature of the meeting and its agenda; however, a director or vice president from the “product or service delivery” area is a good choice. Bottom line: get as high into the vendor’s organization as possible whenever possible; look at the types of contracts you have with that vendor to provide guidance on the type of people to invite.

Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings (cont.)

Prepare for the meetings and maintain control.

Preparation

Send the scorecard and agenda to the vendor five days prior to the BAM. The vendor should provide you with any information you require for the meeting five days prior as well.

Decide who will run the meeting. Some customers like to lead and others let the vendor present. How you craft the agenda and your preferences will dictate who runs the show.

Make sure the vendor knows what materials it should bring to the meeting or have access to. This will relate to the agenda and any specific requests listed under the discussion points. You don’t want the vendor to be caught off guard and unable to discuss a matter of importance to you.

Running the BAM

Regardless of which party leads, make sure you manage the agenda to stay on topic. This is your meeting – not the vendor’s, not IT’s, not Procurement’s or Sourcing’s. Don’t let anyone hijack it.

Make sure someone is taking notes. If you are running this virtually, consider recording the meeting. Check with your legal department first for any concerns, notices, or prohibitions that may impact your recording the session.

As a reminder, this is not a sales call, and this is not a social activity. Innovation discussions are allowed and encouraged, but that can quickly devolve into a sales presentation. People can be friendly toward one another, but the relationship building should not overwhelm the other purposes.

Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings (cont.)

Follow these additional guidelines to maximize your meetings.

More Leading Practices

  • Remind everyone that the conversation may include items covered by various confidentiality provisions or agreements.
  • Publish the meeting minutes on a timely basis (within 48 hours).
  • Focus on the bigger picture by looking at trends over time; get into the details only when warranted.
  • Meet internally immediately beforehand to prepare – don’t go in cold; review the agenda and the roles and responsibilities for the attendees.
  • Physical meetings are better than virtual meetings, but travel constraints, budgets, and pandemics may not allow for physical meetings.

Final Thoughts

  • When performance or the relationship is suffering, be constructive in your feedback and conversations rather than trying to assign blame; lead with the carrot rather than the stick.
  • Look for collaborative solutions whenever possible and avoid referencing the contract if possible. Communicate your willingness to help resolve outstanding issues.
  • Use inclusive language and avoid language that puts the vendor on the defensive.
  • Make sure that your meetings are not focused exclusively on the negative, but don’t paint a rosy picture where one doesn’t exist.
  • A vendor that is doing well should be commended. This is an important part of relationship building.

Step 3.6: Work the 90-day plan

Monitor your progress and share your results.

Having a 90-day plan is a good start, but assuming the tasks on the plan will be accomplished magically or without any oversight can lead to failure. While it won’t take a lot of time to work the plan, following a few basic guidelines will help ensure the 90-day plan gets results and wasn’t created in vain.

90-Day Plan: Activity 1; Activity 2; Activity 3; Activity 4; Activity 5
  1. Measure and track your progress against the initial/current 90-day plan at least weekly; with a short timeline, any delay can have a huge impact.
  2. If adjustments are needed to any elements of the plan, understand the cause and the impact of those adjustments before making them.
  3. Make adjustments ONLY when warranted. The temptation will be to push activities and tasks further out on the timeline (or to the next 90-day plan!) when there is any sort of “hiccup” along the way, especially when personnel outside the VMI are involved. Hold true to the timeline whenever possible; once you start slipping, it often becomes a habit.
  4. Report on progress every week and hold people accountable for their assignments and contributions.
  5. Take the 90-day plan seriously and treat it as you would any significant project – this is part of the VMI’s branding and image.

Step 3.7: Manage the 3-year roadmap

Keep an eye on the future since it will feed the present.

The 3-year roadmap is a great planning tool, but it is not 100% reliable. There are inherent flaws and challenges. Essentially, the roadmap is a set of three “crystal balls” attempting to tell you what the future holds. The vision for Year 1 may be fairly clear, but for each subsequent year, the crystal ball becomes foggier. In addition, the timeline is constantly changing; before you know it, tomorrow becomes today and Year 2 becomes Year 1.

To help navigate through the roadmap and maximize its potential, follow these principles:

  • Manage each year of the roadmap differently.
    • Review the Year 1 map each quarter to update your 90-day plans (See steps 2.10 and 3.6).
    • Review the Year 2 map every six months to determine if any changes are necessary. As you cycle through this, your vantage point of Year 2 will be 6 months or 12 months away from the beginning of Year 2, and time moves quickly.
    • Review the Year 3 map annually, and determine what needs to be added, changed, or deleted. Each time you review Year 3, it will be a “new” Year 3 that needs to be built.
  • Analyze the impact on the proposed modifications from two perspectives: 1) What is the impact if a requested modification is made? 2) What is the impact if a requested modification is not made?
  • Validate all modifications with leadership and stakeholders before updating the 3-year roadmap to ensure internal alignment.

Step 3.8: Measure and monitor risk

Understand and manage risk levels.

Using the configured Vendor Risk Assessment Tool (Step 2.2), confirm which risks you will be measuring and monitoring and identify the vendors that will be part of the initial risk management process. Generally, organizations start measuring and monitoring risk in two to five risk categories for two or three strategic vendors. Over time, additional risk categories and/or vendors can be added in waves. Resist the temptation to add risk categories or vendors into the mix too quickly. Expanding requires resources inside and outside of the VMI.

The VMI will rely heavily on other areas to provide input or the risk data, and the VMI needs to establish good working relationships with those areas. For example, if legal risk is something being measured and monitored, the VMI will need data from Legal on the number and nature of any lawsuits filed by or against the applicable vendors; the VMI will need data from Legal, Contract Management, or Procurement/Sourcing on the number and nature of any agreed upon deviations from your organization’s preferred contract terms that increase legal risk.

With respect to risk, the VMI’s main role is threefold: 1) take the data obtained from others (or in some instances the VMI may have the data) and turn it into useful information, 2) monitor the risk categories over time and periodically issue reports, and 3) work with other areas to manage the risk.

Step 3.9: Issue reports

Inform internal personnel and vendors about trends, issues, progress, and results.

Issuing the reports created in Step 2.12 is one of the main ways the VMI 1) will communicate with internal and external personnel and 2) track trends and information over time. Even with input from the potential reviewers of the reports, you’ll still want to seek their feedback and input periodically. It may take a few iterations until the reports are hitting their mark. You may find that a metric is no longer required, that a metric is missing completely or it is missing a component, or a formatting change would improve the report’s readability. Once a report has been “finalized,” try not to change it until you are engaged in Phase 4: Review activities. It can be unsettling for the reviewers when reports change constantly.

Whenever possible, find ways to automate the reports. While issuing reports is critical, the function should not consume more time than necessary. Automation can remove some of the manual and repetitive tasks.

Internal reports may need to be kept confidential. An automated dashboard or reporting tool can help lock down who has access to the information. At a minimum, the internal reports should contain a “Confidential” stamp, header, watermark, or other indicator that the materials are sensitive and should not be disclosed outside of your organization without approval.

Reports for vendors may not need to be sent as often as reports are generated or prepared for internal personnel. Establish a cadence by classification model category and stick to it. Letting each vendor choose the frequency will make it more difficult for you to manage. The vendors can choose to ignore the report if they so choose.

This is an image of an example of a bar graph showing ROI and Benchmark for Categories 1-6

Step 3.10: Develop/improve vendor relationships

Drive better performance through better relationships.

One of the key components of a VMI is relationship management. Good relationships with your vendors provide many benefits for both parties, but they don’t happen by accident. Do not assume the relationship will be good or is good merely because your organization is buying products and services from a vendor.

In many respects, the VMI should mirror a vendor’s sales organization by establishing relationships at multiple levels within the vendor organizations – not just with the salesperson or account manager. Building and maintaining relationships is hard work, but the return on investment makes it worthwhile.

Business relationships are comprised of many components, not all of which have to be present to have a great relationship. However, there are some essential components. Whether you are trying to develop, improve, or maintain a relationship with a vendor, make sure you are conscious of the following:*

  • Focus your energies on strategic vendors first and then tactical and operational vendors.
  • Be transparent and honest in your communications.
  • Continue building trust by being responsive and honoring commitments (timely).
  • Create a collaborative environment and build upon common ground.
  • Thank the vendor when appropriate.
  • Resolve disputes early, avoid the “blame game,” and be objective when there are disagreements.

Step 3.11: Contribute to other processes

Continue assisting others and managing roles and responsibilities outside of the VMI.

The VMI has processes that it owns and processes that it contributes to. Based on the VMI scope (Step 1.2), the OIC chart (Step 1.4), and the process mapping activities (Step 1.5), ensure that the VMI is honoring its contribution commitments. This is often easier said than done though. A number of factors can make it difficult to achieve the balance required to handle VMI processes and contribute to other processes associated with the VMI’s mission and vision. Understanding the issues is half the battle. If you see signs of these common “vampires,” take action quickly to address the situation.

  • The VMI’s first focus is often internal, and the tendency is to operate in a bubble. Classifying vendors, running BAMs, coordinating the risk process, and other inward-facing processes can consume all of the VMI’s energy. As a result, there is little time, effort, or let’s be honest, desire to participate in other processes outside of the VMI.
  • It is easy for VMI personnel to get dragged into processes and situations that are outside of its scope. This often happens when personnel join the VMI from other internal areas or departments and have good relationships with their former teammates. The relationships make it hard to say “No” when out-of-scope assistance is being requested.
  • The VMI may have “part-time” personnel who have responsibilities across internal departments, divisions, agencies, or teams. When the going gets tough and time is at a premium, people gravitate toward the easiest or most comfortable work. That work may not be VMI work.

Phase 4: Review

Keep Your VMI Up to Date and Running Smoothly

Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4
1.1 Mission Statement and Goals


1.2 Scope

1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

1.4 Roles and Responsibilities

1.5 Process Mapping

1.6 Charter

1.7 Vendor Inventory

1.8 Maturity Assessment

1.9 Structure

2.1 Classification Model
2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
2.6 Vendor Orientation
2.7 Job Descriptions
2.8 Policies and Procedures
2.9 3-Year Roadmap
2.10 90-Day Plan
2.11 Quick Wins
2.12 Reports

3.1 Classify Vendors
3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
3.4 Compile Scorecards
3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
3.9 Issue Reports
3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

4.1 Assess Compliance
4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
4.5 Update Governances

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

Identify what the VMI should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • VMI team
  • Applicable stakeholders and executives
  • Others as needed

Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

Phase 4: Review

Keep your VMI up to date and running smoothly.

As the old adage says, “The only thing constant in life is change.” This is particularly true for your VMI. It will continue to mature; people inside and outside of the VMI will change; resources will expand or contract from year to year; your vendor base will change. As a result, your VMI needs the equivalent of a physical every year. In place of bloodwork, x-rays, and the other paces your physician may put you through, you’ll assess compliance with your policies and procedures, incorporate leading practices, leverage lessons learned, maintain internal alignment, and update governances.

Be thorough in your actions during this Phase to get the most out of it. It requires more than the equivalent of gauging a person’s health by taking their temperature, measuring their blood pressure, and determining their body mass index. Keeping your VMI up to date and running smoothly takes hard work.

Some of the items presented in this Phase require an annual review; others may require quarterly review or timely review (i.e. when things are top of mind and current). For example, collecting lessons learned should happen on a timely basis rather than annually, and classifying your vendors should occur annually rather than every time a new vendor enters the fold.

Ultimately, the goal is to improve over time and stay aligned with other areas internally. This won’t happen by accident. Being proactive in the review of your VMI further reinforces the nature of the VMI itself – proactive vendor management, NOT reactive!

Step 4.1: Assess compliance

Determine what is functionally going well and not going well.

Whether you have a robust set of vendor management-related policies and procedures or they are the bare minimum, gathering data each quarter and conducting an assessment each year will provide valuable feedback. The scope of your assessment should focus on two concepts: 1) are the policies and procedures being followed and 2) are the policies and procedures accurate and relevant. This approach requires parallel thinking, but it will help you understand the complete picture and minimize the amount of time required.

Use the steps listed below (or modify them for your culture) to conduct your assessment:

  • Determine the type of assessment – formal or informal.
  • Determine the scale of the assessment – which policies and procedures will be reviewed and how many people will be interviewed.
  • Determine the compliance levels, and seek feedback on the policies and procedures – what is going well and what can be improved?
  • Review the compliance deviations.
  • Conduct a root cause analysis for the deviations.
  • Create a list of improvements and gain approval.
  • Create a plan for minimizing noncompliance in the future.
    • Improve/increase education and awareness.
    • Clarify/modify policies and procedures.
    • Add resources, tools, and people (as necessary and as allowed).

Step 4.2: Incorporate leading practices

Identify and evaluate what external VMIs are doing.

The VMI’s world is constantly shifting and evolving. Some changes will take place slowly, while others will occur quickly. Think about how quickly the cloud environment has changed over the past five years versus the 15 years before that; or think about issues that have popped up and instantly altered the landscape (we’re looking at you COVID-19 and ransomware). As a result, the VMI needs to keep pace, and one of the best ways to do that is to incorporate leading practices.

At a high level, a leading practice is a way of doing something that is better at producing a particular outcome or result or performing a task or activity than other ways of proceeding. The leading practice can be based on methodologies, tools, processes, procedures, and other items. Leading practices change periodically due to innovation, new ways of thinking, research, and other factors. Consequently, a leading practice is to identify and evaluate leading practices each year.

Step 4.2: Incorporate leading practices (cont.)

Update your VMI based on your research.

  • A simple approach for incorporating leading practices into your regular review process is set out below:
  • Research:
    • What other VMIs in your industry are doing.
    • What other VMIs outside your industry are doing.
    • Vendor management in general.
  • Based on your results, list specific leading practices others are doing that would improve your VMI (be specific – e.g. other VMIs are incorporating risk into their classification process).
  • Evaluate your list to determine which of these potential changes fit or could be modified to fit your culture and environment.
  • Recommend the proposed changes to leadership (with a short business case or explanation/justification, as needed) and gain approval.

Remember: Leading practices or best practices may not be what is best for you. In some instances, you will have to modify them to fit your culture and environment; in other instances, you will elect not to implement them at all (in any form).

Step 4.3: Leverage lessons learned

Tap into the collective wisdom and experience of your team members.

There are many ways to keep your VMI running smoothly, and creating a lessons learned library is a great complement to the other ways covered in this Phase 4: Review. By tapping into the collective wisdom of the team and creating a safe feedback loop, the VMI gains the following benefits:

  • Documented institutional wisdom and knowledge normally found only in the team members’ brains.
  • The ability for one team member to gain insights and avoid mistakes without having to duplicate the events leading to the insights or mistakes.
  • Improved methodologies, tools, processes, procedures, skills, and relationships.

Many of the processes raised in this Phase can be performed annually, but a lessons learned library works best when the information is “deposited” in a timely manner. How you choose to set up your lessons learned process will depend on the tools you select and your culture. You may want to have regular “input” meetings to share the lessons as they are being deposited, or you may require team members to deposit lessons learned on a regular basis (within a week after they happen, monthly, or quarterly). Waiting too long can lead to vague or lost memories and specifics – timeliness of the deposits is a crucial element.

Step 4.3: Leverage lessons learned (cont.)

Create a library to share valuable information across the team.

Lessons learned are not confined to identifying mistakes or dissecting bad outcomes. You want to reinforce good outcomes as well. When an opportunity for a lessons-learned deposit arises, identify the following basic elements:

  • A brief description of the situation and outcome.
  • What went well (if anything) and why did it go well?
  • What didn't go well (if anything) and why didn't it go well?
  • What would/could you do differently next time?
  • A synopsis of the lesson(s) learned.

Info-Tech Insights

The lessons learned library needs to be maintained. Irrelevant material needs to be culled periodically, and older or duplicate material may need to be archived.

The lessons learned process should be blameless. The goal is to share insightful information … not to reward or punish people based on outcomes or results.

Step 4.4: Maintain internal alignment

Review the plans of other internal areas to stay in sync.

Maintaining internal alignment is essential for the ongoing success of the VMI. Over time, it is easy to lose sight of the fact that the VMI does not operate in a vacuum; it is an integral component of a larger organization whose parts must work well together to function optimally. Focusing annually on the VMI’s alignment within the enterprise helps reduce any breakdowns that could derail the organization.

To ensure internal alignment:

  • Review the key components of the applicable materials from Phase 1: Plan and Phase 2: Build with the appropriate members of the leadership team (e.g. executives, sponsors, and stakeholders). Not every item from those Phases and Steps needs to be reviewed, but err on the side of caution for the first set of alignment discussions, and be prepared to review each item. You can gauge the audience’s interest on each topic and move quickly when necessary or dive deeper when needed. Identify potential changes required to maintain alignment.
  • Review the strategic plans (e.g. 1-, 3-, and 5- year plans) for various portions of the organization if you have access to them or gather insights if you don’t have access.
    • If the VMI is under the IT umbrella, review the strategic plans for IT and its departments.
    • Review the strategic plans for the areas the VMI works with (e.g. Procurement, Business Units).
    • The organization itself.
  • Create and vet a list of modifications to the VMI and obtain approval.
  • Develop a plan for making the necessary changes.

Step 4.5: Update governances

Revise your protocols and return to the beginning of cyclical processes.

You’re at the final Step and ready to update governances. This is comprised of two sequential paths.

  • First, use the information from Steps 4.1-4.4 to make any required modifications to the items in Phase 1: Plan, Phase 2: Build, and Phase 3: Run. For example, you may need to update your policies and procedures (Step 2.8) based on your findings in Step 4.1; or you may need to update the VMI’s scope (Step 1.2) to ensure internal alignment issues identified in Step 4.4. are accounted for.
  • Second, return to Phase 3: Run to perform the activities below; they tend to be performed annually, but use your discretion and perform them on an as-needed basis:
    • Reclassify vendors.
    • Complete a new maturity assessment.
    • Run reorientation sessions for vendors.
    • Conduct a kickoff meeting to update internal personnel.

Other activities and tasks (e.g. scorecards and BAMs) may be impacted by the modifications made above, but the nature of their performance follows a shorter cadence. As a result, they are not specifically called out here in this Step 4.5 since they are performed on an ongoing basis. However, don’t overlook them as part of your update.

Summary of Accomplishment

Problem Solved

Vendor management is a broad, often overwhelming, comprehensive spectrum that encompasses many disciplines. By now, you should have a great idea of what vendor management can or will look like in your organization. Focus on the basics first: Why does the VMI exist and what does it hope to achieve? What is its scope? What are the strengths you can leverage, and what obstacles must you manage? How will the VMI work with others? From there, the spectrum of vendor management will begin to clarify and narrow.

Leverage the tools and templates from this blueprint and adapt them to your needs. They will help you concentrate your energies in the right areas and on the right vendors to maximize the return on your organization’s investment in the VMI of time, money, personnel, and other resources. You may have to lead by example internally and with your vendors at first, but they will eventually join you on your path if you stay true to your course.

At the heart of a good VMI is the relationship component. Don’t overlook its value in helping you achieve your vendor management goals. The VMI does not operate in a vacuum, and relationships (internal and external) will be critical.

Lastly, seek continual improvement from the VMI and from your vendors. Both parties should be held accountable, and both parties should work together to get better. Be proactive in your efforts, and you, the VMI, and the organization will be rewarded.

If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Contact your account representative for more information

workshops@infotech.com

1-888-670-8889

Related Info-Tech Research

Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively

Don't leave negotiation preparations and outcomes to chance. Learn how to prepare for negotiations more effectively and improve your results.

Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

Info-Tech’s guidance and insights will help you navigate the complex process of contract review and identify the key details necessary to maximize the protections for your organization.

Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO

Calculating the impact or value of a vendor management office (VMO) can be difficult without the right framework and tools. Let Info-Tech’s tools and templates help you account for the contributions made by your VMO.

Bibliography

“Best Practices for Writing Corporate Policies and Procedures.” PowerDMS, 29 Dec. 2020. Accessed 11 January 2022.

Duncan. “Top 10 Tips for Creating Compelling Reports.” Design Eclectic, 11 October 2019. Accessed 29 March 2022.

Eby, Kate. “Master Writing Policies, Procedures, Processes, and Work Instructions.” 1 June 2018, updated 19 July 2021. Accessed 11 January 2022.

“Enterprise Risk Management.” Protiviti, n.d. Accessed 16 Feb. 2017.

Geller & Company. “World-Class Procurement — Increasing Profitability and Quality.” Spend Matters, 2003. Accessed 4 March 2019.

Guth, Stephen. “Vendor Relationship Management Getting What You Paid for (And More).” Citizens, 26 Feb. 2015. Web.

Guth, Stephen. The Vendor Management Office: Unleashing the Power of Strategic Sourcing. Lulu.com, 2007. Print.

“ISG Index 4Q 2021.” Information Services Group, Inc., 2022. Web.

“Six Tips for Making a Quality Report Appealing and Easy To Skim.” AHRQ, Oct. 2019. Accessed 29 March 2022.

Tucker, Davis. “Marketing Reporting: Tips to Create Compelling Reports.” 60 Second Marketer, 28 March 2020. Accessed 29 March 2022.

“Why Do We Perform Better When Someone Has High Expectations of Us?” The Decision Lab, 9 Sept. 2020. Accessed 31 January 2022.

Embrace Business-Managed Applications

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}179|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $64,999 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 18 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
  • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
  • The traditional model of managing applications does not address the demands of today’s rapidly changing market and digitally minded business, putting stress on scarce IT resources. The business is fed up with slow IT responses and overbearing desktop and system controls.
  • The business wants more control over the tools they use. Software as a service (SaaS), business process management (BPM), robotic process automation (RPA), artificial intelligence (AI), and low-code development platforms are all on their radar.
  • However, your current governance and management structures do not accommodate the risks and shifts in responsibilities to business-managed applications.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • IT is a business partner, not just an operator. Effective business operations hinge on high-quality, valuable, fit-for-purpose applications. IT provides the critical insights, guidance, and assistance to ensure applications are implemented and leveraged in a way that maximizes return on investment, whether it is being managed by end users or lines of business (LOBs). This can only happen if the organization views IT as a critical asset, not just a supporting player.
  • All applications should be business owned. You have applications because LOBs need them to meet the objectives and key performance indicators defined in the business strategy. Without LOBs, there would be no need for business applications. LOBs define what the application should be and do for it to be successful, so LOBs should own them.
  • Everything boils down to trust. The business is empowered to make their own decisions on how they want to implement and use their applications and, thus, be accountable for the resulting outcomes. Guardrails, role-based access, application monitoring, and other controls can help curb some risk factors, but it should not come at the expense of business innovation and time-sensitive opportunities. IT must trust the business will make rational application decisions, and the business must trust IT to support them in good times and bad.

Impact and Result

  • Focus on the business units that matter. BMA can provide significant value to LOBs if teams and stakeholders are encouraged and motivated to adopt organizational and operational changes.
  • Reimagine the role of IT. IT is no longer the gatekeeper that blocks application adoption. Rather, IT enables the business to adopt the tools they need to be productive and they guide the business on successful BMA practices.
  • Instill business accountability. With great power comes great responsibility. If the business wants more control of their applications, they must be willing to take ownership of the outcomes of their decisions.

Embrace Business-Managed Applications Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should embrace business-managed applications, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

  • Embrace Business-Managed Applications – Phases 1-3
  • Business-Managed Applications Communication Template

1. State your objectives

Level-set the expectations for your business-managed applications.

  • Embrace Business- Managed Applications – Phase 1: State Your Objectives

2. Design your framework and governance

Identify and define your application managers and owners and build a fit-for-purpose governance model.

  • Embrace Business-Managed Applications – Phase 2: Design Your Framework & Governance

3. Build your roadmap

Build a roadmap that illustrates the key initiatives to implement your BMA and governance models.

  • Embrace Business-Managed Applications – Phase 3: Build Your Roadmap

[infographic]

Workshop: Embrace Business-Managed Applications

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 State Your Objectives

The Purpose

Define business-managed applications in your context.

Identify your business-managed application objectives.

State the value opportunities with business-managed applications.

Key Benefits Achieved

A consensus definition and list of business-managed applications goals

Understanding of the business value business-managed applications can deliver

Activities

1.1 Define business-managed applications.

1.2 List your objectives and metrics.

1.3 State the value opportunities.

Outputs

Grounded definition of a business-managed application

Goals and objectives of your business-managed applications

Business value opportunity with business-managed applications

2 Design Your Framework & Governance

The Purpose

Develop your application management framework.

Tailor your application delivery and ownership structure to fit business-managed applications.

Discuss the value of an applications committee.

Discuss technologies to enable business-managed applications.

Key Benefits Achieved

Fit-for-purpose and repeatable application management selection framework

Enhanced application governance model

Applications committee design that meets your organization’s needs

Shortlist of solutions to enable business-managed applications

Activities

2.1 Develop your management framework.

2.2 Tune your delivery and ownership accountabilities.

2.3 Design your applications committee.

2.4 Uncover your solution needs.

Outputs

Tailored application management selection framework

Roles definitions of application owners and managers

Applications committee design

List of business-managed application solution features and services

3 Build Your Roadmap

The Purpose

Build your roadmap to implement busines-managed applications and build the foundations of your optimized governance model.

Key Benefits Achieved

Implementation initiatives

Adoption roadmap

Activities

3.1 Build your roadmap.

Outputs

Business-managed application adoption roadmap

 

Define Your Virtual and Hybrid Event Requirements

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}64|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Applications
  • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-applications

Your organization is considering holding an event online, or has been, but:

  • The organization (both on the business and IT sides) may not have extensive experience hosting events online.
  • It is not immediately clear how your formerly in-person event’s activities translate to a virtual environment.
  • Like the work-from-home transformation, bringing events online instantly expands IT’s role and responsibilities.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

If you don't begin with strategy, you will fit your event to technology, instead of the other way around.

Impact and Result

To determine your requirements:

  • Determine the scope of the event.
  • Narrow down your list of technical requirements.
  • Use Info-Tech’s Rapid Application Selection Framework to select the right software solution.

Define Your Virtual and Hybrid Event Requirements Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Define Your Virtual and Hybrid Event Requirements Storyboard – Use this storyboard to work through key decision points involved in creating digital events.

This deck walks you through key decision points in creating virtual or hybrid events. Then, begin the process of selecting the right software by putting together the first draft of your requirements for a virtual event software solution.

  • Define Your Virtual and Hybrid Event Requirements Storyboard

2. Virtual Events Requirements Tool – Use this tool to begin selecting your requirements for a digital event solution.

The business should review the list of features and select which ones are mandatory and which are nice to have or optional. Add any features not included.

  • Virtual/Hybrid Event Software Feature Analysis Tool
[infographic]

Further reading

Define Your Virtual and Hybrid Event Requirements

Accelerate your event scoping and software selection process.

Analyst Perspective

When events go virtual, IT needs to cover its bases.

The COVID-19 pandemic imposed a dramatic digital transformation on the events industry. Though event ticket and registration software, mobile event apps, and onsite audio/visual technology were already important pieces of live events, the total transformation of events into online experiences presented major challenges to organizations whose regular business operations involve at least one annual mid-sized to large event (association meetings, conferences, trade shows, and more).

Many organizations worked to shift to online, or virtual events, in order to maintain business continuity. As time went on, and public gatherings began to restart, a shift to “hybrid” events began to emerge—events that accommodate both in-person and virtual attendance. Regardless of event type, this pivot to using virtual event software, or digital event technology, brings events more closely into IT’s areas of responsibility. If you don't begin with strategy, you risk fitting your event to technology, instead of the other way around.

If virtual and hybrid events are becoming standard forms of delivering content in your organization, use Info-Tech’s material to help define the scope of the event and your requirements, and to support your software selection process.

Photo of Emily Sugerman
Emily Sugerman
Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

The organization (both on the business and IT sides) may not have extensive experience hosting events online.

It is not immediately clear how a formerly in-person event’s activities translate to a virtual environment.

Like the work-from-home transformation, bringing events online expands IT’s role and responsibilities.

Common Obstacles

It is not clear what technological capabilities are needed for the event, which capabilities you already own, and what you may need to purchase.

Though virtual events remove some barriers to attendance (distance, travel), it introduces new complications and considerations for planners.

Hybrid events introduce another level of complexity.

Info-Tech’s Approach

In order to determine your requirements:

Determine the scope of the event.

Narrow down your list of technical requirements.

Use Info-Tech’s Rapid Application Selection Framework to select the right software solution.

Info-Tech Insight

If you don't begin with strategy, you will fit your event to technology, instead of the other way around.

Your challenge

The solution you have been using for online events does not meet your needs.

Though you do have some tools that support large meetings, it is not clear if you require a larger and more comprehensive virtual event solution. There is a need to determine what type of technology you might need to purchase versus leveraging what you already have.

It is difficult to quickly and practically identify core event requirements and how they translate into technical capabilities.

Maintaining or improving audience engagement is a perpetual challenge for virtual events.

38%
of event professionals consider virtual event technology “a tool for reaching a wider audience as part of a hybrid strategy.”

21%
consider it “a necessary platform for virtual events, which remain my go-to event strategy.”

40%
prioritize “mid-budget all-in-one event tech solution that will prevent remote attendees from feeling like second-class participants.”

Source: Virtual Event Tech Guide, 2022

Common obstacles

These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations.

Events with networking objectives are not always well served by webinars, which are traditionally more limited in their interactive elements.

Events that include the conducting of organizational/association business (like voting) may have bylaws that make selecting a virtual solution more challenging.

Maintaining attendee engagement is more challenging in a virtual environment.

Prior to the pandemic, your organization may not have been as experienced in putting on fully virtual events, putting more responsibility in your corner as IT. Navigating virtual events can also require technological competencies that your attendee userbase may not universally possess.

Technological limitations and barriers to access can exclude potential attendees just as much as bringing events online can open up attendance to new audiences.

Opportunity: Virtual events can significantly increase an event’s reach

Events held virtually during the pandemic noted significant increases in attendees.

“We had 19,000 registrations from all over the world, almost 50 times the number of people we had expected to host in Amsterdam. . . . Most of this year’s [2020] attendees would not have been able to participate in a physical GrafanaCon in Amsterdam. That was a huge win.” – Raj Dutt, Grafana Labs CEO[5]

Event In-person Online 2022
Microsoft Build 2019: 6,000 attendees 2020: 230,000+ registrants[1] The 2022 conference was also held virtually[3]
Stanford Institute for Human-Centered Artificial Intelligence A few hundred attendees expected for the original (cancelled) 2020 in-person conference 2020: 30,000 attendees attended the “COVID-19 and AI” virtual conference[2] The 2022 Spring Conference was a hybrid event[4]

[1] Kelly, 2020; [2] Price, 2020; [3] Stanford Digital Economy Lab, 2022; [4] Warren, 2022; [5] Fast Company, 2020

Info-Tech’s methodology for defining virtual/hybrid event requirements

A diagram that shows defining event scope, creating list of requirements, and selecting software.

Event planning phases

Apply project management principles to your virtual/hybrid event planning process.

Online event planning should follow the same established principles as in-person event planning.
Align the event’s concept and objectives with organizational goals.

A diagram of event planning phases
Source: Adapted from Event Management Body of Knowledge, CC BY 4.0

Gather inputs to the planning processes

Acquire as much of this information as possible before you being the planning process.

Budget: Determine your organization’s budget for this event to help decide the scope of the event and the purchasing decisions you make as you plan.

Internal human resources: Identify who in your organization is usually involved in the organization of this event and if they are available to organize this one.

List of communication and collaboration tools: Acquire the list of the existing communication and collaboration tools you are currently licensed for. Ensure you know the following information about each tool:

  • Type of license
  • License limitations (maximum number of users)
  • Internal or external-facing tool (or capable of both)
  • Level of internal training and competency on the tool

Decision point: Relate event goals to organizational goals

What is driving the event?

Your organization may hold a variety of in-person events that you now wish, for various reasons, to hold fully or partially online. Each event likely has a slightly different set of goals.

Before getting into the details of how to transition your event online, return to the business/organizational goals the event is serving.

Ensure each event (and each component of each event) maps back to an organizational goal.

If a component of the event does not align to an organizational goal, assess whether it should remain as part of the event.

Common organizational goals

  • Increase revenue
  • Increase productivity
  • Attract and retain talent
  • Improve change management
  • Carry out organizational mission
  • Identify new markets
  • Increase market share
  • Improve customer service
  • Launch new product/service

Common event goals

  • Education/training
  • Knowledge transfer
  • Decision making
  • Professional development
  • Sales/lead generation
  • Fundraising
  • Entertainment
  • Morale boosting
  • Recognition of achievement

Decision point: Identify your organization’s digital event vision

What do you want the outcome of this event to be?

Attendee goals: Who are your attendees? Why do they attend this event? What attendee needs does your event serve? What is your event’s value proposition? Are they intrinsically or extrinsically motivated to attend?

Event goals: From the organizer perspective, why do you usually hold this event? Who are your stakeholders?

Organizational goals: How do the event goals map to your organizational goals? Is there a clear understanding of what the event’s larger strategic purpose is.

Common attendee goals

Education: our attendees need to learn something new that they cannot learn on their own.
Networking: our attendees need to meet people and make new professional connections.
Professional development: our attendees have certain obligations to keep credentials updated or to present their work publicly to advance their careers.
Entertainment: our attendees need to have fun.
Commerce: our attendees need to buy and sell things.

Decision point: Level of external event production

Will you be completely self-managed, reliant on external event production services, or somewhere in the middle?

You can review this after working through the other decision points and the scope becomes clearer.

A diagram that shows Level of external event production, comparing Completely self-managed vs Fully externally-managed.

Decision point: Assign event planning roles

Who will be involved in planning the event? Fill/combine these roles as needed.

Planning roles Description
Project manager Shepherd event planning until completion while ensuring project remains on schedule and on budget.
Event manager Correspond with presenters during leadup to event, communicate how to use online event tools/platform, perform tests with presenters/exhibitors, coordinate digital event staff/volunteers.
Program planner Select the topics, speakers, activity types, content, streams.
Designer and copywriter Design the event graphics; compose copy for event website.
Digital event technologist Determine event technology requirements; determine how event technology fits together; prepare RFP, if necessary, for new hardware/software.
Platform administrator Set up registration system/integrate registrations into platform(s) of choice; upload video files and collateral; add livestream links; add/delete staff roles and set controls and permissions; collect statistics and recordings after event.
Commercial partner liaison Recruit sponsors and exhibitors (offer sponsorship packages); facilitate agreement/contract between commercial partners and organization; train commercial partners on how to use event technology; retrieve lead data.
Marketing/social media Plan and execute promotional campaigns (email, social media) in the lead up to, and during, the event. Post-event, send follow-up communications, recording files, and surveys.

Decision point: Assign event production roles

Who will be involved in running the event?

Event production roles Description
Hosts/MCs Address attendees at beginning and end of event, and in-between sessions
Provide continuity throughout event
Introduce sessions
Producers Prepare presenters for performance
Begin and end sessions
Use controls to share screens, switch between feeds
Send backchannel messages to presenters (e.g., "Up next," "Look into webcam")
Moderators Admit attendees from waiting room
Moderate incoming questions from attendees
Manage slides
Pass questions to host/panelists to answer
Moderate chat
IT support Manage event technology stack
Respond to attendee technical issues
Troubleshoot network connectivity problems
Ensure audio and video operational
Start and stop session recording
Save session recordings and files (chat, Q&As)

Decision point: Map attendee goals to event goals to organizational goals

Input: List of attendee benefits, List of event goals, List of organizational goals
Output: Ranked list of event goals as they relate to attendee needs and organizational goals
Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts
Participants: Planning team

  1. Define attendee benefits:
    1. List the attendee benefits derived from your event (as many as possible).
    2. Rank attendee benefits from most to least important.
  2. Define event goals:
    1. List your event goals (as many as possible).
    2. Draw a connecting line to your ranked list of attendee benefits.
    3. Identify if any event goals exist with no clear relationship to attendee benefits. Discuss whether this event goal needs to be re-envisioned. If it connects to no discernible attendee benefits, consider removing it. Otherwise, figure out what attendee benefits the event goal provides.
  3. Define organizational goals:
    1. Acquire a list of your organization’s main strategic goals.
    2. Draw a connecting line from each event goal to the organizational goal it supports.
    3. If most of your event goals do not immediately seem to support an organizational goal, discuss why this is. Try to find the connection. If you cannot, discuss whether the event should proceed or be rethought.

Decision point: Break down your event into its constituent components

Identify your event archetype

Decompose the event into its component parts

Identify technical requirements that help meet event goals

Benefits:

  • Clarify how formerly in-person events map to virtual archetypes.
  • Ensure your virtual event planning is anchored to organizational goals from the outset.
  • Streamline your virtual event tech stack planning later.

Decision point: Determine your event archetype

Analyze your event’s:

  • Main goals.
  • The components and activities that support those goals.
  • How these components and activities fall into people- vs. content-centric activities, and real-time vs. asynchronous activities.
  1. Conference
  2. Trade show
  3. Annual general meeting
  4. Department meeting
  5. Town hall
  6. Workshop

A diagram that shows people- vs. content-centric activities, and real-time vs. asynchronous activities

Info-Tech Insight

Begin the digital event planning process by understanding how your event’s content is typically consumed. This will help you make decisions later about how best to deliver the content virtually.

Conference

Goals: Education/knowledge transfer; professional advancement; networking.

Major content

  • Call for proposals/circulation of abstracts
  • Keynotes or plenary address: key talk addressed to large audience
  • Panel sessions: multiple panelists deliver address on common theme
  • Poster sessions: staffed/unstaffed booths demonstrate visualization of major research on a poster
  • Association meetings (see also AGM archetype): professional associations hold AGM as one part of a larger conference agenda

Community

  • Formal networking (happy hours, social outings)
  • Informal networking (hallway track, peer introductions)
  • Business card exchange
  • Pre- and post-event correspondence

Commercial Partners

  • Booth reps: Publishing or industry representatives exhibit products/discuss collaboration

A quadrants matrix of conference

Trade show

Objectives: Information transfer; sales; lead generation.

Major content

  • Live booth reps answer questions
  • Product information displayed
  • Promotional/information material distributed
  • Product demonstrations at booths or onstage
  • Product samples distributed to attendees

Community interactions

  • Statements of intent to buy
  • Lead generation (badge scanning) of booth visitors
  • Business card exchange
  • Pre- and post-event correspondence

A quadrants matrix of Trade show

Annual general meeting

Objectives: Transparently update members; establish governance and alignment.

Meeting events

  • Updates provided to members on organization’s activities/finances
  • Decisions made regarding organization’s direction
  • Governance over organization established (elections)
  • Speakers addressing large audience from stage
  • In-camera sessions
  • Translation of proceedings
  • Real-time weighted voting
  • Minutes taken during meeting

Administration

  • Notice given of meeting within mandated time period
  • Agenda circulated prior to meeting
  • Distribution of proxy material
  • Minutes distributed

A quadrants matrix of Annual general meeting

Department meeting

Objectives: Information transfer of company agenda/initiatives; group decision making.

Major content

  • Agenda circulated prior to meeting
  • Updates provided from senior management/leadership to employees on organization’s initiatives and direction
  • Employee questions and feedback addressed
  • Group decision making
  • Minutes taken during meeting
  • Minutes or follow-up circulated

A quadrants matrix of department meeting

Town hall meeting

Objectives: Update public; answer questions; solicit feedback.

Major content

  • Public notice of meeting announced
  • Agenda circulated prior to meeting
  • Speakers addressing large audience from stage
  • Presentation of information pertinent to public interest
  • Audience members line up to ask questions/provide feedback
  • Translation of proceedings
  • Recording of meeting archived

A quadrants matrix of Town hall meeting

Workshop

Objectives: Make progress on objective; achieve consensus; knowledge transfer.

Major content

  • Scheduling of workshop
  • Agenda circulated prior to meeting
  • Facilitator leads group activities
  • Participants develop alignment on project
  • Progress achieved on workshop project
  • Feedback on workshop shared with facilitator

A quadrants matrix of Workshop

Decision point: Analyze your event’s purpose and value

Use the event archetypes to help you identify your event’s core components and value proposition.

  1. Attendee types: Who typically attends your event? Exclusively internal participants? External participants? A mix of the two?
  2. Communication: How do participants usually communicate with each other during this event? How do they communicate with the event organizers? Include both formal types of communication (listening to panel sessions) and informal (serendipitous conversations in the hallway).
  3. Connection: What types of connections do your attendees need to experience? (networking with peers; interactions with booth reps; consensus building with colleagues).
  4. Exchange of material: What kind of material is usually exchanged at this event and between whom? (Pamphlets, brochures, business cards, booth swag).
  5. Engagement: How do you usually retain attendees' attention and make sure they remain engaged throughout the event?
  6. Length: How long does the event typically last?
  7. Location and setup: Where does the event usually take place and who is involved in its setup?
  8. Success metrics: How do you usually measure your event's success?

Info-Tech Insight

Avoid trying to exactly reproduce the formerly in-person event online. Instead, identify the value proposition of each event component, then determine what its virtual expression could be.

Example: Trade show

Goals: Information transfer; sales; lead generation.

  1. Identify event component(s)
  2. Document its face-to-face expression(s)
  3. Identify the expression’s value proposition
  4. Translate the value proposition to a virtual component that facilitates overall event goal

Event component

Face-to-face expression

Value proposition of component

Virtual expression

Attendee types Paying attendees Revenue for event organizer; sales and lead generation for booth rep Access to virtual event space
Attendee types Booth rep Revenue for event organizer; information source for paying attendees Access to virtual event space
Communication/connection Conversation between booth rep and attendee Lead generation for booth rep; information to inform decision making for attendee Ability to enter open video breakout session staffed by booth reps OR

Ability to schedule meeting times with booth rep

Multiple booth reps on hand to monitor different elements of the booth (one person to facilitate the discussion over video, another to monitor chat and Q&A)
Communication/connection Serendipitous conversation between attendees Increased attendee contacts; fun Multiple attendees can attend the booth’s breakout session simultaneously and participate in web conferencing, meeting chat, or submit questions to Q&A
Communication/connection Badges scanned at booth/email sign-up sheets filled out at table Lead generation for exhibitors List of visitors to booth shared with exhibitor (if consent given by attendees)

Ability for attendees to request to be contacted for more information
Exchange of material Catering (complimentary coffee, pastries) Obviate the need for attendees to leave the event for refreshments N/A: not included in virtual event
Exchange of material Pamphlets, product literature, swag Portable information for attendee decision making Downloadable files (pdf)
Location Responsibility of both the organizers (tables, chairs, venue) and booth reps (posters, handouts) Booth reps need a dedicated space where they can be easily found by attendees and advertise themselves Booth reps need access to virtual platform to upload files, images, provide booth description
Engagement Attendees able to visit all booths by strolling through space Event organizers have a captive audience who is present in the immediacy of the event site Attendees motivated to stay in the event space and attend booths through gamification strategies (points awarded for number of booths visited or appointments booked)
Length of event 2 full days Attendees travel to event site and spend the entire 2 days at the event, allowing them to be immersed in the event and absorb as much information in as little time as possible Exhibitors’ visiting hours will be scheduled so they work for both attendees attending in Eastern Standard Time and Pacific Time
Metrics for success -Positive word of mouth
-Number of registrations
These metrics can be used to advertise to future exhibitors and attendees Number of virtual booths visited

Number of file downloads

Survey sent to attendees after event (favorite booths, preferred way to interact with exhibitors, suggestions for improvement, most valuable part of experience)

Plan your metrics

Use the analytics and reporting features available in your event technology toolset to capture the data you want to measure. Decide how each metric will impact your planning process for the next event.

Examples of metrics:

  • Number of overall participants/registrants: Did you have more or fewer registrants/attendees than previous iterations of the event? What is the difference between number of registrants and number of real attendees?
  • Locations of participants: Where are people participating from? How many are attending for the first time? Are there new audiences you can pursue next time?
  • Most/least popular sessions: How long did people stay in the sessions and the event overall?
  • Most/least popular breakout rooms and discussion boards: Which topics should be repeated/skipped next time?
  • Social media mentions: Which topics received the most engagement on social media?
  • Surveys: What do participants report enjoying most? Least?
  • Technical failures: Can your software report on failures? Identify what technical problems arose and prepare a plan to mitigate them next time.

Ensure the data you capture feeds into better planning for the next event

Determine compliance requirements

A greater event reach also means new data privacy considerations, depending on the location of your guests.

General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)

Concerns over the collection of personal electronic data may not have previously been a part of your event planning considerations. However, now that your event is online, it’s wise to explore which data protection regulations apply to you. Remember, even if your organization is not located in the EU, if any of your attendees are European data subjects you may still be required to comply with GDPR, which involves the notification of data collected, allowing for opt-out options and the right to have data purged. The data must be collected for a specific purpose; if that purpose is expired, it can no longer be retained. You also have an obligation to report any breaches.

Accessibility requirements

What kind of accessibility laws are you subject to (AODA, WCAG2)? Regardless of compliance requirements, it is a good idea to ensure the online event follows accessibility best practices.

Decision point: Set event policies

What event policies need to be documented?
How will you communicate them to attendees?

Code of conduct

One trend in the large event and conference space in recent years has been the development of codes of conduct that attendees are required to abide by to continue participating in the event.
Now that your event is online, consider whether your code of conduct requires updating. Are there new types of appropriate/inappropriate online behavior that you need to define for your attendees?

Harassment reporting

If your organization has an event harassment reporting process, determine how this process will transfer over to the digital event.
Ensure the reporting process has an owner and a clear methodology to follow to deal with complaints, as well as a digital reporting channel (a dedicated email or form) that is only accessed by approved staff to protect sensitive information.

Develop a risk management plan

Plan for how you will mitigate technical risks during your virtual event
Provide presenters with a process to follow if technical problems arise.

  • Presenter’s internet connection cuts out
  • Attendees cannot log in to event platform
  • Attendees cannot hear/see video feed
  • What process will be followed when technical problems occur: ticketing system; chatbot; generic email accessible by all IT support assigned

Testing/Rehearsal

Test audio hardware: Ensure speakers use headphones/earbuds and mics (they do not have to be fancy/expensive). Relying on the computer/laptop mic can lead to more ambient noise and potential feedback problems.

Check lighting: Avoid backlighting. Reposition speakers so they are not behind windows. Ask them to open/close shades. Add lamps as needed.

Prevent interruptions: Before the event, ask panelists to turn phone and computer notifications to silent. Put a sign on the door saying Do not Disturb.

Control audience view of screenshare: If your presenters will be sharing their screens, teach them how this works on the platform they are using. Advise them to exit out of any other application that is not part of their presentation, so they do not share the wrong screen unintentionally. Advise them to remove anything from the desktop that they do not want the audience to see, in case their desktop becomes visible at any point.

Control audience view of physical environment: Before the event, advise participants to turn their cameras on and examine their backgrounds. Remove anything the audience should not be able to see.

Test network connectivity: Send the presenters a link to a speed test and check their internet speed.

Emergency contact: Exchange cell phone numbers for emergency backchannel conversations if problems arise on the day of the event.

Set expectations: Presenting to an online audience feels very different to a live crowd. Prepare presenters for a lack of applause and lack of ability to see their audience, and that this does not mean the presentation was unsuccessful.

Identify requirements

To determine what kind of technical requirements you need to build the virtual expression of your event, consult the Virtual Event Platform Requirements Tool.

  1. If you have determined that the requirements you wish to use for the event exceed the capabilities of your existing communication and collaboration toolset, identify whether these gaps tip the scale toward purchasing a new tool. Use the requirement gaps to make the business case for purchasing a new tool.
  2. Use the Virtual Event Platform Requirements Tool to create a list of requirements.
  3. Consult the Software Reviews category for Virtual Event Platform Data Quadrant and Emotional Footprint reports.
  4. Assemble your documentation for approvals and the Rapid Application Selection Process.

A photo of Detailed Feature Analysis Worksheet.

Download the Virtual/Hybrid Event Software Feature Analysis Tool

Rapid Application Selection Framework and Contract Review

A photo of Rapid Application Selection Framework
Launch Info-Tech’s Rapid Application Selection Framework.

Using the requirements you’ve just gathered as a base, use Info-Tech’s complete framework to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of software selection.

Once you’ve selected a vendor(s), review the contract. Does it define an exit strategy? Does it define when your data will be deleted? Does it set service-level agreements that you find acceptable? Leverage Info-Tech’s contract review service once you have selected the virtual event solution and have received a contract from the vendor.

Further research

Photo of Run Better Meetings
Run Better Meetings

Bibliography

Dutt, Raj. “7 Lessons from This Company’s First-Ever Virtual Conference.” Fast Company, 29 Jul 2020. Web.

Kelly, Samantha Murphy. “Microsoft Build Proves Splashy Tech Events Can Thrive Online.” CNN, 21 May 2020. Web.

“Phases.” Event Management Body of Knowledge (EMBOK), n.d. Web.

Price, Michael. “As COVID-19 Forces Conferences Online, Scientists Discover Upsides of Virtual Format.” Science, 28 Apr 2020. Web.

“Stanford HAI Spring Conference - Key Advances in Artificial Intelligence.” Stanford Digital Economy Lab, 2022. Web.

“Virtual Event Tech Guide 2022.” Skift Meetings, April 2022. Web.

Warren, Tom. “Microsoft Build 2022 Will Take Place May 24th–26th.” The Verge, 30 March 2022. Web.

Contributors

6 anonymous contributors

Select and Implement an IT PPM Solution

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}440|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $125,999 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 29 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
  • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
  • The number of IT project resources and the quantity of IT projects and tasks can no longer be recorded, prioritized, and tracked using non-commercial project portfolio management (PPM) solutions.
  • Your organization has attained a moderate level of PPM maturity.
  • You have sufficient financial and technical resources to purchase a commercial PPM solution.
  • There is a wide variety of commercial PPM solutions; different kinds of PPM solutions are more appropriate for organizations of a certain size and a certain PPM maturity level than others.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Implementations of PPM solutions are often unsuccessful resulting in wasted time and resources; failing to achieve sustainable adoption of the tool is a widespread pain point.
  • The costs of PPM solutions do not end after the implementation and subscription invoices are paid. Have realistic expectations about the time required to use and maintain PPM solutions to ensure success.
  • PPM solutions help PMOs serve the organization’s core decision makers. Success depends on improved service to these stakeholders.

Impact and Result

  • Using Info-Tech’s Vendor Landscape and PPM solution use cases, you will be able to make sense of the diversity of PPM solutions available in today’s market and choose the most appropriate solution for your organization’s size and level of PPM maturity.
  • Info-Tech’s blueprint for a PPM solution selection and implementation project will provide you with a variety of tools and templates.
  • A carefully planned out and executed selection and implementation process will help ensure your organization can maximize the value of your project portfolio and will allow the PMO to improve portfolio stakeholder satisfaction.

Select and Implement an IT PPM Solution Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement a commercial PPM solution, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Launch the PPM solution project and collect requirements

Create a PPM solution selection and implementation project charter and gather your organizations business and technical requirements.

  • Select and Implement a PPM Solution – Phase 1: Launch the PPM Solution Project and Collect Requirements
  • PPM Solution Project Charter Template
  • PPM Implementation Work Breakdown Structure
  • PPM Solution Requirements Gathering Tool
  • PPM Solution Cost-of-Use Estimation Tool
  • PPM Solution RFP Template
  • PPM Solution Success Metrics Workbook
  • PPM Solution Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool

2. Select a PPM solution

Select the most appropriate PPM solution for your organization by using Info-Tech’s PPM solution Vendor Landscape and use cases to help you create a vendor shortlist, produce an RFP, and establish evaluation criteria for ranking your shortlisted solutions.

  • Select and Implement a PPM Solution – Phase 2: Select a PPM Solution
  • PPM Vendor Shortlist & Detailed Feature Analysis Tool
  • PPM Solution Vendor Response Template
  • PPM Solution Evaluation & RFP Scoring Tool
  • PPM Solution Vendor Demo Script

3. Plan the PPM solution implementation

Plan a PPM solution implementation that will result in long-term sustainable adoption of the tool and that will allow the PMO to meet the needs of core project portfolio stakeholders.

  • Select and Implement a PPM Solution – Phase 3: Plan the PPM Solution Implementation
[infographic]

Workshop: Select and Implement an IT PPM Solution

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Launch the PPM Solution Project and Gather Requirements

The Purpose

Create a PPM solution selection and implementation project charter.

Gather the business and technical requirements for the PPM solution.

Establish clear and measurable success criteria for your PPM solution project.

Key Benefits Achieved

Comprehensive project plan

Comprehensive and organized record of the various PPM solution requirements

A record of PPM solution project goals and criteria that can be used in the future to establish the success of the project

Activities

1.1 Brainstorm, refine, and prioritize your PPM solution needs

1.2 Stakeholder identification exercise

1.3 Project charter work session

1.4 Requirements gathering work session

1.5 PPM solution success metrics workbook session

Outputs

High-level outline of PPM solution requirements

Stakeholder consultation plan

A draft project charter and action plan to fill in project charter gaps

A draft requirements workbook and action plan to fill in requirement gathering gaps

A PPM project success metrics workbook that can be used during and after the project

2 Select a PPM Solution

The Purpose

Identify the PPM solutions that are most appropriate for your organization’s size and level of PPM maturity.

Create a PPM solution and vendor shortlist.

Create a request for proposal (RFP).

Create a PPM solution scoring and evaluation tool.

Key Benefits Achieved

Knowledge of the PPM solution market and the various features available

An informed shortlist of PPM vendors

An organized and focused method for evaluating the often long and complex responses to the RFP that vendors provide

The groundwork for an informed and defensible selection of a PPM solution for your organization

Activities

2.1 Assess the size of your organization and the level of PPM maturity to select the most appropriate use case

2.2 PPM solution requirements and criteria ranking activity

2.3 An RFP working session

2.4 Build an RFP evaluation tool

Outputs

Identification of the most appropriate use case in Info-Tech’s Vendor Landscape

A refined and organized list of the core features that will be included in the RFP

A draft RFP with an action plan to fill in any RFP gaps

An Excel tool that can be used to compare and evaluate vendors’ responses to the RFP

3 Prepare for the PPM Solution Implementation

The Purpose

To think ahead to the eventual implementation of the solution that will occur once the selection phase is completed

Key Benefits Achieved

An understanding of key insights and steps that will help avoid mistakes resulting in poor adoption or PPM solutions that end up producing little tangible value

Activities

3.1 Outline high-level implementation stages

3.2 Organizational change management strategy session

3.3 A PPM project success metrics planning session

Outputs

High-level implementation tasks and milestones

A RACI chart for core implementation tasks

A high-level PPM solution implementation organizational change management strategy

A RACI chart for core organizational change management tasks related to the PPM solution implementation

A PPM project success metrics schedule and plan

Implement Crisis Management Best Practices

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}415|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $50,532 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 42 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
  • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
  • There’s a belief that you can’t know what crisis will hit you next, so you can’t prepare for it. As a result, resilience planning stops at more-specific planning such as business continuity planning or IT disaster recovery planning.
  • Business contingency and IT disaster recovery plans focus on how to resume normal operations following an incident. The missing piece is the crisis management plan – the overarching plan that guides the organization’s initial response, assessment, and action.
  • Organizations without a crisis management plan are far less able to minimize the impact of other crises such as a security breach, health & safety incident, or attacks on their reputation.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Effective crisis management has a long-term demonstrable impact on your organization, long after the crisis is resolved. While all organizations can expect a short-term negative impact when a crisis hits, if the crisis is managed well, the research shows that your market capitalization can actually increase long term.
  • Crisis communication is more science than art and should follow a structured approach. Crisis communication is about more than being a good writer or having a social media presence. There are specific messages that must be included, and specific audiences to target, to get the results you need.
  • IT has a critical role in non-IT crises (as well as IT crises). Many crises are IT events (e.g. security breach). For non-IT events, IT is critical in supporting crisis communication and the operational response (e.g. COVID-19 and quickly ramping up working-from-home).

Impact and Result

  • You can anticipate the types of crisis your organization may face in the future and build flexible plans that can be adapted in a crisis to meet the needs of the moment.
  • Identify potential crises that present a high risk to your organization.
  • Document emergency response and crisis response plans that provide a framework for addressing a range of crises.
  • Establish crisis communication guidelines to avoid embarrassing and damaging communications missteps.

Implement Crisis Management Best Practices Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement crisis management best practices, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Identify potential crises and your crisis management team

Identify, analyze, and prioritized potential crises based on risk to the organization. Set crisis management team roles and responsibilities. Adopt a crisis management framework.

  • Example Crisis Management Process Flowcharts (Visio)
  • Example Crisis Management Process Flowcharts (PDF)
  • Business Continuity Teams and Roles Tool

2. Document your emergency and crisis response plans

Document workflows for notification, situational assessment, emergency response, and crisis response.

  • Emergency Response Plan Checklist
  • Emergency Response Plan Summary
  • Emergency Response Plan Staff Instructions
  • Pandemic Response Plan Example
  • Pandemic Policy

3. Document crisis communication guidelines

Develop and document guidelines that support the creation and distribution of crisis communications.

  • Crisis Communication Guidelines and Templates

4. Complete and maintain your crisis management plan

Summarize your crisis management and response plans, create a roadmap to implement potential improvement projects, develop training and awareness initiatives, and schedule maintenance to keep the plan evergreen.

  • Crisis Management Plan Summary Example
  • BCP Project Roadmap Tool
  • Organizational Learning Guide
[infographic]

Workshop: Implement Crisis Management Best Practices

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Identify Potential Crises and Your Crisis Management Team

The Purpose

Identify and prioritize relevant potential crises.

Key Benefits Achieved

Enable crisis management pre-planning and identify gaps in current crisis management plans.

Activities

1.1 Identify high-risk crises.

1.2 Assign roles and responsibilities on the crisis management team.

1.3 Review Info-Tech’s crisis management framework.

Outputs

List of high-risk crises.

CMT membership and responsibilities.

Adopt the crisis management framework and identify current strengths and gaps.

2 Document Emergency Response and Crisis Management Plans

The Purpose

Outline emergency response and crisis response plans.

Key Benefits Achieved

Develop and document procedures that enable rapid, effective, and reliable crisis and emergency response.

Activities

2.1 Develop crisis notification and assessment procedures.

2.2 Document your emergency response plans.

2.3 Document crisis response plans for potential high-risk crises.

Outputs

Documented notification and assessment workflows.

Emergency response plans and checklists.

Documented crisis response workflows.

3 Document Crisis Communication Guidelines

The Purpose

Define crisis communication guidelines aligned with an actionable crisis communications framework.

Key Benefits Achieved

Document workflows and guidelines support crisis communications.

Activities

3.1 Establish the elements of baseline crisis communications.

3.2 Identify audiences for the crisis message.

3.3 Modify baseline communication guidelines based on audience and organizational responsibility.

3.4 Create a vetting process.

3.5 Identify communications channels.

Outputs

Baseline communications guidelines.

Situational modifications to crisis communications guidelines.

Documented vetting process.

Documented communications channels

4 Complete and Maintain Your Crisis Management Plan

The Purpose

Summarize the crisis management plan, establish an organizational learning process, and identify potential training and awareness activities.

Key Benefits Achieved

Plan ahead to keep your crisis management practice evergreen.

Activities

4.1 Review the CMP Summary Template.

4.2 Create a project roadmap to close gaps in the crisis management plan.

4.3 Outline an organizational learning process.

4.4 Schedule plan reviews, testing, and updates.

Outputs

Long-term roadmap to improve crisis management capabilities.

Crisis management plan maintenance process and awareness program.

IT Operations Consulting

Operations... make sure that the services and products you offer your clients are delivered in the most efficient way possible. IT Operations makes sure that the applications and infrastructure that your delivery depends on is solid.

Gert Taeymans has over 20 years experience in directing the implementation and management of mission-critical services for businesses in high-volume international markets. Strong track record in risk management, crisis management including disaster recovery, service delivery and change & config management.

Register to read more …

Manage an IT Budget

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}70|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
  • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
  • Parent Category Name: Cost & Budget Management
  • Parent Category Link: /cost-and-budget-management
  • IT is viewed as a cost center without a clear understanding of the value it provides.
  • After completing the budget, the CIO is faced with changing expectations, disruptions, new risks, and new threats.
  • IT departments often lack a reliable budget management process to keep itself on track towards its budget goals.
  • Over budgeting risks credibility if projects are not all delivered, while under budgeting risks not being able to execute important projects.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Managing your budget is not just about numbers; it’s also about people and processes. Better relationships and a proper process leads to better management of your budget. Understand how your relationships and current processes might be leveraged to manage your budget.
  • No one likes to be over budget, but being under budget isn’t necessarily good either. Coming in under budget may mean that you are not accomplishing the initiatives that you promised you would, reflecting poor job performance.

Impact and Result

  • Implement a formal budget management process that documents your planned budget and actual expenditures, tracks variances, and responds to those variances to stay on track towards budget goals.
  • Manage the expectations of business stakeholders by communicating the links between IT spend and business value in a way that is easily understood by the business.
  • Control for under- or overspending by using Info Tech’s budget management tool and tactics.

Manage an IT Budget Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to understand the increasing expectations for IT departments to better manage their budgets, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Document

Create a streamlined documentation process that also considers the elements of people and technology.

  • Manage an IT Budget – Phase 1: Document
  • Manage Your IT Budget Tool

2. Track

Track your planned budget against actual expenditures to catch areas of over- and underspending in a timely manner.

  • Manage an IT Budget – Phase 2: Track

3. Control

Leverage control mechanisms to manage variances in your budget.

  • Manage an IT Budget – Phase 3: Control
[infographic]

Workshop: Manage an IT Budget

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Document Budget

The Purpose

The first step of managing your IT budget is to make sure there is a properly documented budget that everyone agrees upon.

Key Benefits Achieved

A properly documented budget facilitates management and communication of the budget.

Activities

1.1 Review budget for the year.

1.2 Document each budget in the tool.

1.3 Review CAPEX vs. OPEX.

1.4 Customize accounts to match your organization.

Outputs

Budget broken out into monthly increments and by each account.

Budget documented in tool.

Tool customized to reflect organization's specific accounts and terminology.

2 Optimize Documentation Process

The Purpose

A proper documentation process forms the backbone for effective budget management.

Key Benefits Achieved

A streamlined documentation process with accurate inputs that also considers the elements of people and technology.

Activities

2.1 Draw out process flow of current documentation.

2.2 Identify bottlenecks.

2.3 Discuss and develop roadmap to solving bottlenecks.

Outputs

Process flow of current documentation process with identified bottlenecks.

Plan to mitigate bottlenecks.

3 Track and Control for Over- and Underspending

The Purpose

Track your planned budget against actual expenditures to catch areas of over- and underspending in a timely manner. Then, leverage control mechanisms to manage variances in your budget.

Key Benefits Achieved

Tracking and controlling for variances will help the IT department stay on track towards its budget goals. It will also help with communicating IT’s value to the business.

Activities

3.1 Walk through the “Overview Bar.”

3.2 Document actual expenses incurred in fiscal to date.

3.3 Review the risk of over- and underspending.

3.4 Use the reforecast column to control for over- and underspend.

Outputs

Assess the “Overview Bar.”

Document actual expenditures and committed expenses up to the current date.

Develop a strategy and roadmap for how you will mitigate any current under- or overspends.

Reforecast expenditures for each account for each month for the remainder of the fiscal year.

Transition Projects Over to the Service Desk

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}495|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
  • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
  • IT suffers from a lack of strategy and plan for transitioning support processes to the service desk.
  • Lack of effective communication between the project delivery team and the service desk, leads to an inefficient knowledge transfer to the service desk.
  • New service is not prioritized and categorized, negatively impacting service levels and end-user satisfaction.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Make sure to build a strong knowledge management strategy to identify, capture, and transfer knowledge from project delivery to the service desk.

Impact and Result

  • Build touchpoints between the service desk and project delivery team and make strategic points in the project lifecycles to ensure service support is done effectively following the product launch.
  • Develop a checklist of action items on the initiatives that should be done following project delivery.
  • Build a training plan into the strategy to make sure service desk agents can handle tickets independently.

Transition Projects Over to the Service Desk Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Transition Projects Over to the Service Desk – A guideline to walk you through transferring project support to the service desk.

This storyboard will help you craft a project support plan to document information to streamline service support.

  • Transition Projects Over to the Service Desk Storyboard

2. Project Handover and Checklist – A structured document to help you record information on the project and steps to take to transfer support.

Use these two templates as a means of collaboration with the service desk to provide information on the application/product, and steps to take to make sure there are efficient service processes and knowledge is appropriately transferred to the service desk to support the service.

  • Project Handover Template
  • Service Support Transitioning Checklist
[infographic]

Further reading

Transition Projects Over to the Service Desk

Increase the success of project support by aligning your service desk and project team.

Analyst Perspective

Formalize your project support plan to shift customer service to the service desk.

Photo of Mahmoud Ramin, Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

As a service support team member, you receive a ticket from an end user about an issue they’re facing with a new application. You are aware of the application release, but you don’t know how to handle the issue. So, you will need to either spend a long time investigating the issue via peer discussion and research or escalate it to the project team.

Newly developed or improved services should be transitioned appropriately to the support team. Service transitioning should include planning, coordination, and communication. This helps project and support teams ensure that upon a service failure, affected end users receive timely and efficient customer support.

At the first level, the project team and service desk should build a strategy around transitioning service support to the service desk by defining tasks, service levels, standards, and success criteria.

In the second step, they should check the service readiness to shift support from the project team to the service desk.

The next step is training on the new services via efficient communication and coordination between the two parties. The project team should allocate some time, according to the designed strategy, to train the service desk on the new/updated service. This will enable the service desk to provide independent service handling.

This research walks you through the above steps in more detail and helps you build a checklist of action items to streamline shifting service support to the service desk.

Mahmoud Ramin, PhD

Senior Research Analyst
Infrastructure and Operations
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

  • IT suffers from a lack of strategy and planning for transitioning support processes to the service desk.
  • Lack of effective communication between the project delivery team and the service desk leads to an inefficient knowledge transfer to the service desk.
  • New service is not prioritized and categorized, negatively impacting service levels and end-user satisfaction.

Common Obstacles

  • Building the right relationship between the service desk and project team is challenging, making support transition tedious.
  • The service desk is siloed; tasks and activities are loosely defined. Service delivery is inconsistent, which impacts customer satisfaction.
  • Lack of training on new services forces the service desk to unnecessarily escalate tickets to other levels and delays service delivery.

Info-Tech’s Approach

  • Build touchpoints between the service desk and project delivery team and make strategic points in the project lifecycles to ensure service support is done effectively following the product launch.
  • Develop a checklist of action items on the initiatives that should be done following project delivery.
  • Build a training plan into the strategy to make sure service desk agents can handle tickets independently.

Info-Tech Insight

Make sure to build a strong knowledge management strategy to identify, capture, and transfer knowledge from project delivery to the service desk.

A lack of formal service transition process presents additional challenges

When there is no formal transition process following a project delivery, it will negatively impact project success and customer satisfaction.

Service desk team:

  • You receive a request from an end user to handle an issue with an application or service that was recently released. You are aware of the features but don’t know how to solve this issue particularly.
  • You know someone in the project group who is familiar with the service, as he was involved in the project. You reach out to him, but he is very busy with another project.
  • You get back to the user to let them know that this will be done as soon as the specialist is available. But because there is no clarity on the scope of the issue, you cannot tell them when this will be resolved.
  • Lack of visibility and commitment to the service recovery will negatively impact end-user satisfaction with the service desk.

Project delivery team:

  • You are working on an exciting project, approaching the deadline. Suddenly, you receive a ticket from a service desk agent asking you to solve an incident on a product that was released three months ago.
  • Given the deadline on the current project, you are stressed, thinking about just focusing on the projects. On the other hand, the issue with the other service is impacting multiple users and requires much attention.
  • You spend extra time handling the issue and get back to your project. But a few days later the same agent gets back to you to take care of the same issue.
  • This is negatively impacting your work quality and causing some friction between the project team and the service desk.

Link how improvement in project transitioning to the service desk can help service support

A successful launch can still be a failure if the support team isn't fully informed and prepared.

  • In such a situation, the project team sends impacted users a mass notification without a solid plan for training and no proper documentation.
  • To provide proper customer service, organizations should involve several stakeholder groups to collaborate for a seamless transition of projects to the service desk.
  • This shift in service support takes time and effort; however, via proper planning there will be less confusion around customer service, and it will be done much faster.
    • For instance, if AppDev is customizing an ERP solution without considering knowledge transfer to the service desk, relevant tickets will be unnecessarily escalated to the project team.
  • On the other hand, the service desk should update configuration items (CIs) and the service catalog and related requests, incidents, problems, and workarounds to the relevant assets and configurations.
  • In this transition process, knowledge transfer plays a key role. Users, the service desk, and other service support teams need to know how the new application or service works and how to manage it when an issue arises.
  • Without a knowledge transfer, service support will be forced to either reinvent the wheel or escalate the ticket to the development team. This will unnecessarily increase the time for ticket handling, increase cost per ticket, and reduce end-user satisfaction.

Info-Tech Insight

Involve the service desk in the transition process via clear communication, knowledge transfer, and staff training.

Integrate the service desk into the project management lifecycle for a smooth transition of service support

Service desk involvement in the development, testing, and maintenance/change activity steps of your project lifecycle will help you logically define the category and priority level of the service and enable service level improvement accordingly after the project goes live.

Project management lifecycle

As some of the support and project processes can be integrated, responsibility silos should be broken

Processes are done by different roles. Determine roles and responsibilities for the overlapping processes to streamline service support transition to the service desk.

The project team is dedicated to projects, while the support team focuses on customer service for several products.

Siloed responsibilities:

  • Project team transfers the service fully to the service desk and leaves technicians alone for support without a good knowledge transfer.
  • Specialists who were involved in the project have deep knowledge about the product, but they are not involved in incident or problem management.
  • Service desk was not involved in the planning and execution processes, which leads to lack of knowledge about the product. This leaves the support team with some vague knowledge about the service, which negatively impacts the quality of incident and problem management.

How to break the silos:

Develop a tiered model for the service desk and include project delivery in the specialist tier.

  • Use tier 1 (service desk) as a single point of contact to support all IT services.
  • Have tier 2/3 as experts in technology. These agents are a part of the project team. They are also involved in incident management, root-cause analysis, and change management.

Determine the interfaces

At the project level, get a clear understanding of support capabilities and demands, and communicate them to the service desk to proactively bring them into the planning step.

The following questions help you with an efficient plan for support transition

Questions for support transition

Clear responsibilities help you define the level of involvement in the overlapping processes

Conduct a stakeholder analysis to identify the people that can help ensure the success of the transition.

Goal: Create a prioritized list of people who are affected by the new service and will provide support.

Why is stakeholder analysis essential?

Why is stakeholder analysis essential

Identify the tasks that are required for a successful project handover

Embed the tasks that the project team should deliver before handing support to the service desk.

Task/Activity Example

Conduct administrative work in the application

  • New user setup
  • Password reset

Update documentation

  • Prepare for knowledge transfer>
Service request fulfillment/incident management
  • Assess potential bugs
Technical support for systems troubleshooting
  • Configure a module in ITSM solution

End-user training

  • FAQs
  • How-to questions
Service desk training
  • Train technicians for troubleshooting

Support management (monitoring, meeting SLAs)

  • Monitoring
  • Meeting SLAs

Report on the service transitioning

  • Transition effectiveness
  • Four-week warranty period
Ensure all policies follow the transition activities
  • The final week of transition, the service desk will be called to a meeting for final handover of incidents and problems

Integrate project description and service priority throughout development phase

Include the service desk in discussions about project description, so it will be enabled to define service priority level.

  • Project description will be useful for bringing the project forward to the change advisory board (CAB) for approval and setting up the service in the CMDB.
  • Service priority is used for adding the next layer of attributes to the CMDB for the service and ensuring the I&O department can set up systems monitoring.
  • This should be done early in the process in conjunction with the project manager and business sponsors.
  • It should be done as the project gets underway and the team can work on specifically where that milestone will be in each project.
  • What to include in the project description:
    • Name
    • Purpose
    • Publisher
    • Departments that will use the service
    • Service information
    • Regulatory constrains
  • What to include in the service priority information:
    • Main users
    • Number of users
    • Service requirements
    • System interdependencies
    • Criticality of the dependent systems
    • Service category
    • Service SME and support backup
    • System monitoring resources
    • Alert description and flow

Document project description and service priority in the Project Handover Template.

Embed service levels and maintenance information

Include the service desk in discussions about project description, so it will be enabled to define service priority level.

  • Service level objectives (SLOs) will be added to CMDB to ensure the product is reviewed for business continuity and disaster recovery and that the service team knows what is coming.
  • This step will be good to start thinking about training agents and documenting knowledgebase (KB) articles.
  • What to include in SLO:
    • Response time
    • Resolution time
    • Escalation time
    • Business owner
    • Service owner
    • Vendor(s)
    • Vendor warranties
    • Data archiving/purging
    • Availability list
    • Business continuity/recovery objectives
    • Scheduled reports
    • Problem description
  • Maintenance and change requirements: You should add maintenance windows to the change calendar and ensure the maintenance checklist is added to KB articles and technician schedules.
  • What to include in maintenance and change requirements:
    • Scheduled events for the launch
    • Maintenance windows
    • Module release
    • Planned upgrades
    • Anticipated intervals for changes and trigger points
    • Scheduled batches

Document service level objectives and maintenance in the Project Handover Template.

Enhance communication between the project team and the service desk

Communicating with the service desk early and often will ensure that agents fully get a deep knowledge of the new technology.

Transition of a project to the service desk includes both knowledge transfer and execution transfer.

01

Provide training and mentoring to ensure technical knowledge is passed on.

02

Transfer leadership responsibilities by appointing the right people.

03

Transfer support by strategically assigning workers with the right technical and interpersonal skills.

04

Transfer admin rights to ensure technicians have access rights for troubleshooting.

05

Create support and a system to transfer work process. For example, using an online platform to store knowledge assets is a great way for support to access project information.

Info-Tech Insight

A communication plan and executive presentation will help project managers outline recommendations and communicate their benefits.

Communicate reasons for projects and how they will be implemented

Proactive communication of the project to affected stakeholders will help get their buy-in for the new technology and feedback for better support.

Leaders of successful change spend considerable time developing a powerful change message, i.e. a compelling narrative that articulates the desired end state, that makes the change concrete and meaningful to staff.

The message should:

  • Explain why the change or new application is needed.
  • Summarize what will stay the same.
  • Highlight what will be left behind.
  • Emphasize what is being changed due to the new or updated product.
  • Explain how the application will be implemented.
  • Address how this will affect various roles in the organization.
  • Discuss the staff’s role in making the project successful.
  • Communicate the supporting roles in the early implementation stages and later on.

Five elements of communicating change

Implement knowledge transfer to the service desk to ensure tickets won’t be unnecessarily escalated

The support team usually uses an ITSM solution, while the project team mostly uses a project management solution. End users’ support is done and documented in the ITSM tool.

Even terminologies used by these teams are different. For instance, service desk’s “incident” is equivalent to a project manager’s “defect.” Without proper integration of the development and support processes, the contents get siloed and outdated over time.

Potential ways to deal with this challenge:

Use the same platform for both project and service support

This helps you document information in a single platform and provides better visibility of the project status to the support team as well. It also helps project team find out change-related incidents for a faster rollback.

Note: This is not always feasible because of the high costs incurred in purchasing a new application with both ITSM and PM capabilities and the long time it takes for implementing such a solution.

Integrate the PM and ITSM tools to improve transition efficiency

Note: Consider the processes that should be integrated. Don’t integrate unnecessary steps in the development stage, such as design, which will not be helpful for support transition.

Build a training plan for the new service

When a new system is introduced or significant changes are applied, describe the steps and timeline for training.

Training the service desk has two-fold benefits:
Improve support:
  • Support team gets involved in user acceptance testing, which will provide feedback on potential bugs or failures in the technology.
  • Collaboration between specialists and tier 1 technicians will allow the service desk to gather information for handling potential incidents on the application.
Shift-left enablement:
  • At the specialist level, agents will be more focused on other projects and spend less time on application issues, as they are mostly handled by the service desk.
  • As you shift service support left:
    • Cost per ticket decreases as more of the less costly resources are doing the work.
    • Average time to resolve decreases as the ticket is handled by the service desk.
    • End-user satisfaction increases as they don’t need to wait long for resolution.

Who resolves the incident

For more information about shift-left enablement, refer to InfoTech’s blueprint Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy.

Integrate knowledge management in the transition plan

Build a knowledge transfer process to streamline service support for the newly developed technology.

Use the following steps to ensure the service desk gets trained on the new project.

  1. Identify learning opportunities.
  2. Prioritize the identified opportunities based on:
  • Risk of lost knowledge
  • Impact of knowledge on support improvement
  • Define ways to transfer knowledge from the project team to the service desk. These could be:
    • One-on-one meetings
    • Mentoring sessions
    • Knowledgebase articles
    • Product road test
    • Potential incident management shadowing
  • Capture and transfer knowledge (via the identified means).
  • Support the service desk with further training if the requirement arises.
  • Info-Tech Insight

    Allocate knowledge transfer within ticket handling workflows. When incident is resolved by a specialist, they will assess if it is a good candidate for technician training and/or a knowledgebase article. If so, the knowledge manager will be notified of the opportunity to assign it to a SME for training and documentation of an article.

    For more information about knowledge transfer, refer to phase 3 of Info-Tech’s blueprint Standardize the Service Desk.

    Focus on the big picture first

    Identify training functions and plan for a formal knowledge transfer

    1. Brainstorm training functions for each group.
    2. Determine the timeline needed to conduct training for the identified training topics.
    RoleTraining FunctionTimeline

    Developer/Technical Support

    • Coach the service desk on the new application
    • Document relevant KB articles
    Business Analysts
    • Conduct informational interviews for new business requirements

    Service Desk Agents

    • Conduct informational interviews
    • Shadow incident management procedures
    • Document lessons learned
    Vendor
    • Provide cross-training to support team

    Document your knowledge transfer plan in the Project Handover Template.

    Build a checklist of the transition action items

    At this stage, the project is ready to go live and support needs to be independently done by the service desk.

    Checklist of the transition action items

    Info-Tech Insight

    No matter how well training is done, specialists may need to work on critical incidents and handle emergency changes. With effective service support and transition planning, you can make an agreement between the incident manager, change manager, and project manager on a timeline to balance critical incident or emergency change management and project management and define your SLA.

    Activity: Prepare a checklist of initiatives before support transition

    2-3 hours

    Document project support information and check off each support transition initiative as you shift service support to the service desk.

    1. As a group, review the Project Handover Template that you filled out in the previous steps.
    2. Download the Service Support Transitioning Checklist, and review the items that need to be done throughout the development, testing, and deployment steps of your project.
    3. Brainstorm at what step service desk needs to be involved.
    4. As you go through each initiative and complete it, check it off to make sure you are following the agreed document for a smooth transition of service support.
    Input Output
    • Project information
    • Support information for developed application/service
    • List of transitioning initiatives
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Project Handover Template
    • Service Support Transitioning Checklist
    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Lead

    Download the Project Handover Template

    Download the Service Support Transitioning Checklist

    Define metrics to track the success of project transition

    Consider key metrics to speak the language of targeted end users.

    You won’t know if transitioning support processes are successful unless you measure their impact. Find out your objectives for project transition and then track metrics that will allow you to fulfill these goals.

    Determine critical success factors to help you find out key metrics:

    High quality of the service

    Effectiveness of communication of the transition

    Manage risk of failure to help find out activities that will mitigate risk of service disruption

    Smooth and timely transition of support to the service desk

    Efficient utilization of the shared services and resources to mitigate conflicts and streamline service transitioning

    Suggested metrics:

    • Time to fulfill requests and resolve incidents for the new project
    • Time spent training the service desk
    • Number of knowledgebase articles created by the project team
    • Percentage of articles used by the service desk that prevented ticket escalation
    • First-level resolution
    • Ratio of escalated tickets for the new project
    • Problem ticket volume for the new project
    • Average customer satisfaction with the new project support
    • SLA breach rate

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Following the steps outlined in this research has helped you build a strategy to shift service support from the project team to the service desk, resulting in an improvement in customer service and agent satisfaction.

    You have also developed a plan to break the silo between the service desk and specialists and enable knowledge transfer so the service desk will not need to unnecessarily escalate tickets to developers. In the meantime, specialists are also responsible for service desk training on the new application.

    Efficient communication of service levels has helped the project team set clear expectations for managers to create a balance between their projects and service support.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Standardize the Service Desk

    Improve customer service by driving consistency in your support approach and meeting SLAs.

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    The best type of service desk ticket is the one that doesn’t exist.

    Tailor IT Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects

    Right-size PMBOK for all of your IT projects.

    Works Cited

    Brown, Josh. “Knowledge Transfer: What it is & How to Use it Effectively.” Helpjuice, 2021. Accessed November 2022.

    Magowan, Kirstie. “Top ITSM Metrics & KPIs: Measuring for Success, Aiming for Improvement.” BMC Blogs, 2020. Accessed November 2022.

    “The Complete Blueprint for Aligning Your Service Desk and Development Teams (Process Integration and Best Practices).” Exalate, 2021. Accessed October 2022.

    “The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, 2010. Web.

    Initiate Your Service Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}398|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • IT organizations continue attempting to implement service management, often based on ITIL, with limited success and without visible value.
    • More than half of service management implementations have failed beyond simply implementing the service desk and the incident, change, and request management processes.
    • Organizational structure, goals, and cultural factors are not considered during service management implementation and improvement.
    • The business lacks engagement and understanding of service management.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Service management is an organizational approach. Focus on producing successful and valuable services and service outcomes for the customers.
    • All areas of the organization are accountable for governing and executing service management. Ensure that you create a service management strategy that improves business outcomes and provides the value and quality expected.

    Impact and Result

    • Identified structure for how your service management model should be run and governed.
    • Identified forces that impact your ability to oversee and drive service management success.
    • Mitigation approach to restraining forces.

    Initiate Your Service Management Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read this Executive Brief to understand why service management implementations often fail and why you should establish governance for service management.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify the level of oversight you need

    Use Info-Tech’s methodology to establish an effective service management program with proper oversight.

    • Service Management Program Initiation Plan
    [infographic]

    Map Your Business Architecture to Define Your Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}579|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $357,799 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
    • Organizations need to innovate rapidly to respond to the changing forces in their industry, but their IT initiatives often fail to deliver meaningful outcomes.
    • Planners face challenges in understanding the relationships between the important customer-focused innovations they’re trying to introduce and the resources (capabilities) that make them possible, including applications, human resources, information, and processes. For example, are we risking the success of a new service offering by underpinning it with a legacy or manual solution?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Successful execution of business strategy requires planning that:

    1. Accurately reflects organizational capabilities.
    2. Is traceable so all levels can understand how decisions are made.
    3. Makes efficient use of organizational resources.

    To accomplish this, the business architect must engage stakeholders, model the business, and drive planning with business architecture.

    • Business architecture is often regarded as an IT function when its role and tools should be fixtures within the business planning and innovation practice.
    • Any size of organization – from start-ups to global enterprises -- can benefit from using a common language and modeling rigor to identify the opportunities that will produce the greatest impact and value.
    • You don’t need sophisticated modeling software to build an effective business architecture knowledgebase. In fact, the best format for engaging business stakeholders is intuitive visuals using business language.

    Impact and Result

    • Execute more quickly on innovation and transformation initiatives.
    • More effectively target investments in resources and IT according to what goals and requirements are most important.
    • Identify problematic areas (e.g. legacy applications, manual processes) that hinder the business strategy and create inefficiencies in our information technology operation.

    Map Your Business Architecture to Define Your Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Map Your Business Architecture Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to properly engage business and IT in applying a common language and process rigor to build key capabilities required to achieve innovation and growth goals.

    Build a structured, repeatable framework for both IT and business stakeholders to appraise the activities that deliver value to consumers; and assess the readiness of their capabilities to enable them.

    • Map Your Business Architecture to Define Your Strategy – Phases 1-3

    2. Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template – A best-of-breed template to help you build a clear, concise, and compelling strategy document for identifying and engaging stakeholders.

    This template helps you ensure that your business architecture practice receives the resources, visibility, and support it needs to be successful, by helping you develop a strategy to engage the key stakeholders involved.

    • Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template

    3. Value Stream Map Template – A template to walk through the value streams that are tied to your strategic goals.

    Record the complete value stream and decompose it into stages. Add a description of the expected outcome of the value stream and metrics for each stage.

    • Value Stream Map Template

    4. Value Stream Capability Mapping Template – A template to define capabilities and align them to selected value streams.

    Build a business capability model for the organization and map capabilities to the selected value stream.

    • Value Stream – Capability Mapping Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Map Your Business Architecture to Define Your Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Discover the Business Context

    The Purpose

    Identify and consult stakeholders to discover the business goals and value proposition for the customer.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Engage stakeholders and SMEs in describing the business and its priorities and culture.

    Identify focus for the areas we will analyze and work on.

    Activities

    1.1 Select key stakeholders

    1.2 Plan for engaging stakeholders

    1.3 Gather business goals and priorities

    Outputs

    Stakeholder roles

    Engagement plan

    Business strategy, value proposition

    2 Define Value Streams

    The Purpose

    Describe the main value-adding activities of the business from the consumer’s point of view, e.g. provide product or service.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Shared understanding of why we build resources and do what we do.

    Starting point for analyzing resources and investing in innovation.

    Activities

    2.1 Define or update value streams

    2.2 Decompose selected value stream(s) into value stages and identify problematic areas and opportunities

    Outputs

    Value streams for the enterprise

    Value stages breakdown for selected value stream(s)

    3 Build Business Capability Map

    The Purpose

    Describe all the capabilities that make up an organization and enable the important customer-facing activities in the value streams.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Basis for understanding what resources the organization has and their ability to support its growth and success.

    Activities

    3.1 Define and describe all business capabilities (Level 1)

    3.2 Decompose and analyze capabilities for a selected priority value stream.

    Outputs

    Business Capability Map (Level 1)

    Business Capabilities Level 2 for selected value stream

    4 Develop a Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Use the Business Capability Map to identify key capabilities (e.g. cost advantage creator), and look more closely at what applications or information or business processes are doing to support or hinder that critical capability.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Basis for developing a roadmap of IT initiatives, focused on key business capabilities and business priorities.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify key capabilities (cost advantage creators, competitive advantage creators)

    4.2 Assess capabilities with the perspective of how well applications, business processes, or information support the capability and identify gaps

    4.3 Apply analysis tool to rank initiatives

    Outputs

    Business Capability Map with key capabilities: cost advantage creators and competitive advantage creators

    Assessment of applications or business processes or information for key capabilities

    Roadmap of IT initiatives

    Further reading

    Map Your Business Architecture to Define Your Strategy

    Plan your organization’s capabilities for best impact and value.

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech is a provider of best-practice IT research advisory services that make every IT leader’s job easier.

    35,000 members sharing best practices you can leverage Millions spent developing tools and templates annually Leverage direct access to over 100 analysts as an extension of your team Use our massive database of benchmarks and vendor assessments Get up to speed in a fraction of the time

    Analyst perspective

    Know your organization’s capabilities to build a digital and customer-driven culture.

    Business architecture provides a holistic and unified view of:

    • All the organization’s activities that provide value to their clients (value streams).
    • The resources that make them possible and effective (capabilities, i.e. its employees, software, processes, information).
    • How they inter-relate, i.e. depend on and impact each other to help deliver value.

    Without a business architecture it is difficult to see the connections between the business’s activities for the customer and the IT resources supporting them – to demonstrate that what we do in IT is customer-driven.

    As a map of your business, the business architecture is an essential input to the digital strategy:

    • Develop a plan to transform the business by investing in the most important capabilities.
    • Ensure project initiatives are aligned with business goals as they evolve.
    • Respond more quickly to customer requirements and to disruptions in the industry by streamlining operations and information sharing across the enterprise.

    Crystal Singh, Research Director, Data and Analytics

    Crystal Singh
    Research Director, Data and Analytics
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Andrea Malick, Research Director, Data and Analytics

    Andrea Malick
    Research Director, Data and Analytics
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech’s Approach

    Organizations need to innovate rapidly to respond to ever-changing forces and demands in their industry. But they often fail to deliver meaningful outcomes from their IT initiatives within a reasonable time.

    Successful companies are transforming, i.e. adopting fluid strategies that direct their resources to customer-driven initiatives and execute more quickly on those initiatives. In a responsive and digital organization, strategies, capabilities, information, people, and technology are all aligned, so work and investment are consistently allocated to deliver maximum value.

    You don’t have a complete reference map of your organization’s capabilities on which to base strategic decisions.

    You don’t know how to prioritize and identify the capabilities that are essential for achieving the organization’s customer-driven objectives.

    You don’t have a shared enterprise vision, where everyone understands how the organization delivers value and to whom.

    Begin important business decisions with a map of your organization – a business reference architecture. Model the business in the form of architectural blueprints.

    Engage your stakeholders. Recognize the opportunity for mapping work, and identify and engage the right stakeholders.

    Drive business architecture forward to promote real value to the organization. Assess your current projects to determine if you are investing in the right capabilities. Conduct business capability assessments to identify opportunities and prioritize projects.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Business architecture is the set of strategic planning techniques that connects organization strategy to execution in a manner that is accurate and traceable and promotes the efficient use of organizational resources.

    Blueprint activities summary

    Phase Purpose Activity Outcome
    1. Business context:
    Identify organization goals, industry drivers, and regulatory requirements in consultation with business stakeholders.
    Identify forces within and outside the organization to consider when planning the focus and timing of digital growth, through conducting interviews and surveys and reviewing existing strategies. Business value canvas, business strategy on a page, customer journey
    2. Customer activities (value stream):
    What is the customer doing? What is our reason for being as a company? What products and services are we trying to deliver?
    Define or update value streams, e.g. purchase product from supplier, customer order, and deliver product to customer. Value streams enterprise-wide (there may be more than one set of value streams, e.g. a medical school and community clinic)
    Prioritize value streams:
    Select key value streams for deeper analysis and focus.
    Assess value streams. Priority value streams
    Value stages:
    Break down the selected value stream into its stages.
    Define stages for selected value streams. Selected value stream stages
    3. Business capability map, level 1 enterprise:
    What resources and capabilities at a high level do we have to support the value streams?
    Define or update the business capabilities that align with and support the value streams. Business capability map, enterprise-wide capabilities level 1
    Business capability map, level 2 for selected area:
    List resources and capabilities that we have at a more detailed level.
    Define or update business capabilities for selected value stream to level 2. Business capability map, selected value stream, capability level 2
    Heatmap Business Capability Map: Flag focus areas in supporting technology, applications, data and information.

    Info-Tech’s workshop methodology

    Day 1: Discover Business Context Day 2: Define Value Streams Day 3: Build Business Capability Map Day 4: Roadmap Business Architecture
    Phase Steps

    1.1 Collect corporate goals and strategies

    1.2 Identify stakeholders

    2.1 Build or update value streams

    2.2 Decompose selected value stream into value stages and analyze for opportunities

    3.1 Update business capabilities to level 1 for enterprise

    3.2 For selected value streams, break down level 1 to level 2

    3.3 Use business architecture to heatmap focus areas: technology, information, and processes

    3.4 Build roadmap of future business architecture initiatives

    Phase Outcomes
    • Organizational context and goals
    • Business strategy on a page, customer journey map, business model canvas
    • Roles and responsibilities
    • Value stream map and definitions
    • Selected value stream(s) decomposed into value stages
    • Enterprise business capabilities map to level 1
    • Business architecture to level 2 for prioritized value stream
    • Heatmap business architecture
    • Business architecture roadmap, select additional initiatives

    Key concepts for this blueprint

    INDUSTRY VALUE CHAIN DIGITAL TRANSFORMATION BUSINESS ARCHITECTURE
    A high-level analysis of how the industry creates value for the consumer as an overall end-to-end process. The adoption of digital technologies to innovate and re-invent existing business, talent ,and operating models to drive growth, business value, and improved customer experience. A holistic, multidimensional business view of capabilities, end-to-end value, and operating model in relation to the business strategy.
    INDUSTRY VALUE STREAM STRATEGIC OBJECTIVES CAPABILITY ASSESSMENTS
    A set of activities, tasks, and processes undertaken by a business or a business unit across the entire end-to-end business function to realize value. A set of standard objectives that most industry players will feature in their corporate plans. A heat-mapping effort to analyze the maturity and priority of each capability relative to the strategic priorities that they serve.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    1 Understand the business context and drivers
    Deepen your understanding of the organization’s priorities by gathering business strategies and goals. Talking to key stakeholders will allow you to get a holistic view of the business strategy and forces shaping the strategy, e.g. economy, workforce, and compliance.
    2 Define value streams; understand the value you provide
    Work with senior leadership to understand your customers’ experience with you and the ways your industry provides value to them.
    Assess the value streams for areas to explore and focus on.
    3 Customize the industry business architecture; develop business capability map
    Work with business architects and enterprise architects to customize Info-Tech’s business architecture for your industry as an enterprise-wide map of the organization and its capabilities.
    Extend the business capability map to more detail (Level 2) for the value stream stages you select to focus on.

    Business architecture is a planning function that connects strategy to execution

    Business architecture provides a framework that connects business strategy and IT strategy to project execution through a set of models that provide clarity and actionable insights. How well do you know your business?

    Business architecture is:

    • Inter-disciplinary: Business architecture is a core planning activity that supports all important decisions in the organization, for example, organizational resources planning. It’s not just about IT.
    • Foundational: The best way to answer the question, “Where do we start?” or “Where is our investment best directed?”, comes from knowing your organization, what its core functions and capabilities are (i.e. what’s important to us as an organization), and where there is work to do.
    • Connecting: Digital transformation and modernization cannot work with siloes. Connecting siloes means first knowing the organization and its functions and recognizing where the siloes are not communicating.

    Business architecture must be branded as a front-end planning function to be appropriately embedded in the organization’s planning process.

    Brand business architecture as an early planning pre-requisite on the basis of maintaining clarity of communication and spreading an accurate awareness of how strategic decisions are being made.

    As an organization moves from strategy toward execution, it is often unclear as to exactly how decisions pertaining to execution are being made, why priority is given to certain areas, and how the planning function operates.

    The business architect’s primary role is to model this process and document it.

    In doing so, the business architect creates a unified view as to how strategy connects to execution so it is clearly understood by all levels of the organization.

    Business architecture is part of the enterprise architecture framework

    Business Architecture
    Business strategy map Business model canvas Value streams
    Business capability map Business process flows Service portfolio
    Data Architecture Application Architecture Infrastructure Architecture
    Conceptual data model Application portfolio catalog Technology standards catalog
    Logical data model Application capability map Technology landscape
    Physical data model Application communication model Environments location model
    Data flow diagram Interface catalog Platform decomposition diagram
    Data lifecycle diagram Application use-case diagram Network computing / hardware diagram
    Security Architecture
    Enterprise security model Data security model Application security model

    Business architecture is a set of shared and practical views of the enterprise

    The key characteristic of the business architecture is that it represents real-world aspects of a business, along with how they interact.

    Many different views of an organization are typically developed. Each view is a diagram that illustrates a way of understanding the enterprise by highlighting specific information about it:

    • Business strategy view captures the tactical and strategic goals that drive an organization forward.
    • Business capabilities view describes the primary business functions of an enterprise and the pieces of the organization that perform those functions.
    • Value stream view defines the end-to-end set of activities that deliver value to external and internal stakeholders.
    • Business knowledge view establishes the shared semantics (e.g. customer, order, and supplier) within an organization and relationships between those semantics (e.g. customer name, order date, supplier name) – an information map.
    • Organizational view captures the relationships among roles, capabilities, and business units, the decomposition of those business units into subunits, and the internal or external management of those units.

    Business architect connects all the pieces

    The business owns the strategy and operating model; the business architect connects all the pieces together.

    R Business Architect (Responsible)
    A Business Unit Leads (Accountable)
    C Subject Matter Experts (Consulted)
    – Business Lines, Operations, Data, Technology Systems & Infrastructure Leads
    I Business Operators (Informed)
    – Process, Data, Technology Systems & Infrastructure

    Choose a key business challenge to address with business architecture

     Choose a key business challenge to address with business architecture

    Picking the right project is critical to setting the tone for business architecture work in the organization.

    Best practices for business architecture success

    Consider these best practices to maintain a high level of engagement from key stakeholders throughout the process of establishing or applying business architecture.

    Balance short-term cost savings with long-term benefits

    Participate in project governance to facilitate compliance

    Create a center of excellence to foster dialogue

    Identify strategic business objectives

    Value streams: Understand how you deliver value today

    It is important to understand the different value-generating activities that deliver an outcome for and from your customers.

    We do this by looking at value streams, which refer to the specific set of activities an industry player undertakes to create and capture value for and from the end consumer (and so the question to ask is, how do you make money as an organization?).

    Our approach helps you to strengthen and transform those value streams that generate the most value for your organization.

    Understand how you deliver value today

    An organization can have more than one set of streams.
    For example, an enterprise can provide both retail shopping and financial services, such as credit cards.

    Define the organization’s value streams

    • Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities. They enable an organization to create and capture value in the market place by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Those activities are dependent on the specific industry segment an organization operates within. Value streams can extend beyond the organization into the supporting ecosystem, whereas business processes are contained within and the organization has complete control over them.
    • There are two types of value streams: core value streams and support value streams. Core value streams are mostly externally facing: they deliver value to either an external or internal customer and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map. Support value streams are internally facing and provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.
    • An effective method for ensuring all value streams have been considered is to understand that there can be different end-value receivers. Info-Tech recommends identifying and organizing the value streams with customers and partners as end-value receivers.

    Example: Value stream descriptions for the retail industry

    Value Streams Create or Purchase the Product Manage Inventory Distribute Product Sell Product, Make Product Available to Customers
    • Product is developed before company sells it.
    • Make these products by obtaining raw materials from external suppliers or using their own resources.
    • Retailers purchase the products they are going to sell to customers from manufacturers or wholesale distributors.
    • Retailer success depends on its ability to source products that customers want and are willing to buy.
    • Inventory products are tracked as they arrive in the warehouse, counted, stored, and prepared for delivery.
    • Estimate the value of your inventory using retail inventory management software.
    • Optimizing distribution activities is an important capability for retailers. The right inventory needs to be at a particular store in the right quantities exactly when it is needed. This helps to maximize sales and minimize how much cash is held up in inventory.
    • Proper supply chain management can not only reduce costs for retailers but drive revenues by enhancing shopping experiences.
    • Once produced, retailers need to sell the products. This is done through many channels including physical stores, online, the mail, or catalogs.
    • After the sale, retailers typically have to deliver the product, provide customer care, and manage complaints.
    • Retailers can use loyalty programs, pricing, and promotions to foster repeat business.

    Value streams describe your core business

    Value streams describe your core business

    Value streams – the activities we do to provide value to customers – require business capabilities.

    Value streams are broken down further into value stages, for example, the Sell Product value stream has value stages Evaluate Options, Place Order, and Make Payment.

    Think of value streams as the core operations: the reason for your organization’s being. A professional consulting organization may have a legal team but it does not brand itself as a law firm. A core value stream is providing research products and services; a business capability that supports it is legal counsel.

    Decompose the value stream into stages

    The stages of a value stream are usually action-oriented statements or verbs that make up the individual steps involved throughout the scope of the value stream, e.g. Place Order or Make Payment.

    Each value stream should have a trigger or starting point and an end result for a client or receiver.

    Decompose the value stream into stages

    There should be measurable value or benefits at each stage. These are key performance indicators (KPIs). Spot problem areas in the stream.

    Value streams usually fall into one of these categories:

    1. Fulfillment of products and services
    2. Manufacturing
    3. Software products
    4. Supporting value streams (procurement of supplies, product planning)

    Value streams need capabilities

    • Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities. They enable an organization to create and capture value in the market place by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.
    • There are two types of value streams: core value streams and support value streams. Core value streams are mostly externally facing: they deliver value to either an external or internal customer and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map. Support value streams are internally facing and provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.
    • There can be different end-value receivers. Info-Tech recommends identifying and organizing the value streams with customers and partners as end-value receivers.

    Value streams need business capabilities

    Business capabilities are built up to allow the business to perform the activities that bring value to customers. Map capabilities to the value-add activities in the value stream. Business capabilities lie at the top layer of the business architecture:

    • They are the most stable reference for planning organizations.
    • They make strategy more tangible.
    • If properly defined, they can help overcome organizational silos.

    Value streams need business capabilities

    Example business capability map – Higher Education

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and represents a view of what your data program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Example business capability map for: Higher Education

    Example business capability map for Higher Education

    Example business capability map – Local Government

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and represents a view of what your data program must support.

    Example business capability map for: Local Government

    Example business capability map for Local Government

    Value streams need business capabilities

    Value streams – the activities we do to provide value to customers – require business capabilities. Value streams are broken down further into value stages.

    Business capabilities are built up to allow the business to perform the activities that bring value to customers. Map capabilities to the activities in the value stage to spot opportunities and problems in delivering services and value.

    Business processes fulfill capabilities. They are a step-by-step description of who is performing what to achieve a goal. Capabilities consist of networks of processes and the resources – people, technology, materials – to execute them.

    Capability = Processes + Software, Infrastructure + People

    Prioritize a value stream and identify its supporting capabilities

    Prioritize your improvement objectives and business goals and identify a value stream to transform.

    Align the business objectives of your organization to your value streams (the critical actions that take place within your organization to add value to a customer).

    Prioritize a value stream to transform based on the number of priorities aligned to a value stream, and/or the business value (e.g. revenue, EBITDA earnings, competitive differentiation, or cost efficiency).

    Decompose the selected value stream into value stages.

    Align capabilities level 1 and 2 to value stages. One capability may support several value stages in the stream.

    Build a business architecture for the prioritized value stream with a map of business capabilities up to level 2.

    NOTE: We can’t map all capabilities all at once: business architecture is an ongoing practice; select key mapping initiatives each year based on business goals.

    Prioritize a value stream and identify its supporting capabilities

    Map business capabilities to Level 2

     Map business capabilities to Level 2

    Map capabilities to value stage

    Map capabilities to value stage

    Business value realization

    Business value defines the success criteria of an organization as manifested through organizational goals and outcomes, and it is interpreted from four perspectives:

    • Profit generation: The revenue generated from a business capability with a product that is enabled with modern technologies.
    • Cost reduction: The cost reduction when performing business capabilities with a product that is enabled with modern technologies.
    • Service enablement: The productivity and efficiency gains of internal business operations from products and capabilities enhanced with modern technologies.
    • Customer and market reach: The improved reach and insights of the business in existing or new markets.

    Business Value Matrix

    Value, goals, and outcomes cannot be achieved without business capabilities

    Break down your business goals into strategic and achievable initiatives focused on specific value streams and business capabilities.

    Business goals and outcomes

    Accelerate the process with an industry business architecture

    It’s never a good idea to start with a blank page.

    The business capability map available from Info-Tech and with industry standard models can be used as an accelerator. Assemble the relevant stakeholders – business unit leads and product/service owners – and modify the business capability map to suit your organization’s context.

    Acceleration path: Customize generic capability maps with the assistance of our industry analysts.

    Accelerate the process with an industry business architecture

    Identify goals and drivers

    Consider organizational goals and industry forces when planning.

    Business context Define value streams Build business capability map
    1.1 Select key stakeholders
    1.2 Collect and understand corporate goals
    2.1 Update or define value streams
    2.2 Decompose and analyze selected value stream
    3.1 Build level 1 capability map
    3.2 Build level 2 capability map
    3.3 Heatmap capability map
    3.4 Roadmap

    Use inputs from business goals and strategies to understand priorities.

    It is not necessary to have a comprehensive business strategy document to start – with key stakeholders, the business architect should be able to gather a one-page business value canvas or customer journey.

    Determine how the organization creates value

    Begin the process by identifying and locating the business mission and vision statements.

    What is business context?

    “The business context encompasses an understanding of the factors impacting the business from various perspectives, including how decisions are made and what the business is ultimately trying to achieve. The business context is used by IT to identify key implications for the execution of its strategic initiatives.”

    Source: Businesswire, 2018

    Identify the key stakeholders who can help you promote the value of business architecture

    First, as the CIO, you must engage executive stakeholders and secure their support.
    Focus on key players who have high power and high interest in business architecture.

    Engage the stakeholders who are impacted the most and have the power to impede the success of business architecture.

    For example, if the CFO – who has the power to block funding – is disengaged, business architecture will be put at risk.

    Use Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Power Map Template to help prioritize time spent with stakeholders.

    Sample power map

    Identify the key stakeholders concerned with the business architecture project

    A business architecture project may involve the following stakeholders:

    Business architecture project stakeholders

    You must identify who the stakeholders are for your business architecture work.

    Think about:

    • Who are the decision makers and key influencers?
    • Who will impact the business architecture work? Who will the work impact?
    • Who has vested interest in the success or failure of the practice?
    • Who has the skills and competencies necessary to help us be successful?

    Avoid these common mistakes:

    • Don’t focus on the organizational structure and hierarchy. Often stakeholder groups don’t fit the traditional structure.
    • Don’t ignore subject-matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.

    1.1 Identify and assemble key stakeholders

    1-3 hours

    Build an accurate depiction of the business.

    1. It is important to make sure the right stakeholders participate in this exercise. The exercise of identifying capabilities for an organization is very introspective and requires deep analysis.
    2. Consider:
      1. Who are the decision makers and key influencers?
      2. Who will impact the business capability work? Who has a vested interest in the success or failure of the outcome?
      3. Who has the skills and competencies necessary to help you be successful?
    3. Avoid:
      1. Don’t focus on the organizational structure and hierarchy. Often stakeholder groups don’t fit the traditional structure.
      2. Don’t ignore subject matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.
    Input Output
    • List of who is accountable for key business areas and decisions
    • Organizational chart
    • List of who has decision-making authority
    • A list of the key stakeholders
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Modeling software (e.g. Visio, ArchiMate)
    • Business capability map industry models
    • CIO
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Conduct interviews with the business to gather intelligence for strategy

    Talking to key stakeholders will allow you to get a holistic view of the business strategy.

    Stakeholder interviews provide holistic view of business strategy

    Build a strategy on a page through executive interviews and document reviews

    Understanding the business mandate and priorities ensures alignment across the enterprise.

    A business strategy must articulate the long-term destination the business is moving into. This illustration shapes all the strategies and activities in every other part of the business, including what IT capabilities and resources are required to support business goals. Ultimately, the benefits of a well-defined business strategy increase as the organization scales and as business units or functions are better equipped to align the strategic planning process in a manner that reflects the complexity of the organization.

    Using the Business Strategy on a Page canvas, consider the questions in each bucket to elicit the overall strategic context of the organization and uncover the right information to build your digital strategy. Interview key executives including your CEO, CIO, CMO, COO, CFO, and CRO, and review documents from your board or overall organizational strategy to uncover insights.

    Info-Tech Insight
    A well-articulated and clear business strategy helps different functional and business units work together and ensures that individual decisions support the overall direction of the business.

    Focus on business value and establish a common goal

    Business architecture is a strategic planning function and the focus must be on delivering business value.

    Examples business objectives:

    • Digitally transform the business, redefining its customer interactions.
    • Identify the root cause for escalating customer complaints and eroding satisfaction.
    • Identify reuse opportunities to increase operational efficiency.
    • Identify capabilities to efficiently leverage suppliers to handle demand fluctuations.

    Info-Tech Insight
    CIOs are ideally positioned to be the sponsors of business architecture given that their current top priorities are digital transformation, innovation catalyzation, and business alignment.

    1.2 Collect and understand business objectives

    1-3 hours

    Having a clear understanding of the business is crucial to executing on the strategic IT initiatives.

    1. Discover the strategic CIO initiatives your organization will pursue:
    • Schedule interviews.
    • Use the CIO Business Vision diagnostic or Business Context Discovery Tool.
  • Document the business goals.
  • Update and finalize business goals.
  • InputOutput
    • Existing business goals and strategies
    • Existing IT strategies
    • Interview findings
    • Diagnostic results
    • List of business goals
    • Strategy on a page
    • Business model canvas
    • Customer journey
    MaterialsParticipants
    • CIO Business Vision diagnostic
    • Interview questionnaire
    • CIO
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    CIO Business Vision Diagnostic

    CEO

    Vision

    Where do you want to go?
    What is the problem your organization is addressing?

    Mission/Mandate

    What do you do?
    How do you do?
    Whom do you do it for?

    Value Streams

    Why are you in business? What do you do?
    What products and services do you provide?
    Where has your business seen persistent demand?

    Key Products & Services

    What are your top three to five products and services?

    Key Customer Segments

    Who are you trying to serve or target?
    What are the customer segments that decide your value proposition?

    Value Proposition

    What is the value you deliver to your customers?

    Future Value Proposition

    What is your value proposition in three to five years’ time?

    Digital Experience Aspirations

    How can you create a more effective value stream?
    For example, greater value to customers or better supplier relationships.

    Business Resilience Aspirations

    How can you reduce business risks?
    For example, compliance, operational, security, or reputational.

    Sustainability (or ESG) Aspirations

    How can you deliver ESG and sustainability goals?

    Interview the following executives for each business goal area.

    CEO
    CRO
    COO

    Core Business Goals

    What are the core business goals to meet business objectives?

    Top Priorities & Initiatives

    What are the top initiatives and priorities over the planning horizon?

    Performance Insights/Metrics

    What do we need to achieve?
    How can the success be measured?

    CMO
    COO
    CFO

    Shared Business Goals

    What are the shared (operational) business goals to meet business objectives?

    Top Priorities & Initiatives

    What are the top initiatives and priorities over the planning horizon?

    Performance Insights/Metrics

    What do we need to achieve?
    How can the success be measured?

    CFO
    CIO
    COO
    CHRO

    Enabling Business Goals

    What are the enabling (supporting/enterprise) business goals to meet business objectives?

    Top Priorities & Initiatives

    What are the top initiatives and priorities over the planning horizon?

    Performance Insights/Metrics

    What do we need to achieve?
    How can the success be measured?

    Craft a strategy to increase stakeholder support and participation

    The BA practice’s supporters are potential champions who will help you market the value of BA; engage with them first to create positive momentum. Map out the concerns of each group of stakeholders so you can develop marketing tactics and communications vehicles to address them.

    Example Communication Strategy

    Stakeholder Concerns Tactics to Address Concerns Communication Vehicles Frequency
    Supporters
    (High Priority)
    • Build ability to execute BA techniques
    • Build executive support
    • Build understanding of how they can contribute to the success of the BA practice
    • Communicate the secured executive support
    • Help them apply BA techniques in their projects
    • Show examples of BA work (case studies)
    • Personalized meetings and interviews
    • Department/functional meetings
    • Communities of practice or centers of excellent (education and case studies)
    Bi-Monthly
    Indifferent
    (Medium Priority)
    • Build awareness and/or confidence
    • Feel like BA has nothing to do with them
    • Show quick wins and case studies
    • Centers of excellence (education and case studies
    • Use the support of the champions
    Quarterly
    Resistors
    (Medium Priority)
    • BA will cause delays
    • BA will step in their territory
    • BA’s scope is too broad
    • Lack of understanding
    • Prove the value of BA – case studies and metrics
    • Educate how BA complements their work
    • Educate them on the changes resulting from the BA practice’s work, and involve them in crafting the process
    • Individual meetings and interviews
    • Political jockeying
    • Use the support of the champions
    Tailored to individual groups

    1.3 Craft a strategy to increase stakeholder support and participation

    1-2 hours

    Now that you have organized and categorized your stakeholders based on their power, influence, interest, and knowledge of business architecture, it is time to brainstorm how you are going to gain their support and participation.

    Think about the following:

    • What are your stakeholders’ concerns?
    • How can you address them?
    • How will you deliver the message?
    • How often will you deliver the message?

    Avoid these common mistakes:

    • Your communication strategy development should be an iterative process. Do not assume to know the absolute best way to get through to every resistor right away. Instead, engage with your supporters for their input on how to communicate to resistors and repeat the process for indifferent stakeholders as well.
    Input Output
  • Stakeholder Engagement Map
    • Stakeholder Communications Strategy
    Materials Participants
    • Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template
    • A computer
    • A whiteboard and markers CIO
    • Business Architect
    • IT Department Leads

    Download the Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template for this project.

    Engaging the right stakeholders

    CASE STUDY

    Industry
    Financial - Banking

    Source
    Anonymous

    Situation Complication Result

    To achieve success with the business architecture initiative, the bank’s CIO needed to put together a plan to engage the right stakeholders in the process.

    Without the right stakeholders, the initiative would suffer from inadequate information and thus would run the risk of delivering an ineffective solution.

    The bank’s culture was resistant to change and each business unit had its own understanding of the business strategy. This was a big part of the problem that led to decreasing customer satisfaction.

    The CIO needed a unified vision for the business architecture practice involving people, process, and technology that all stakeholders could support.

    Starting with enlisting executive support in the form of a business sponsor, the CIO identified the rest of the key stakeholders, in this case, the business unit heads, who were necessary to engage for the initiative.

    Once identified, the CIO promoted the benefits of business architecture to each of the business unit heads while taking stock of their individual needs.

    1.4 Develop a plan to engage key stakeholders

    1 hour

    Using your stakeholder power map as a starting point, focus on the three most important quadrants: those that contain stakeholders you must keep informed, those to keep satisfied, and the key players.

    Plot the stakeholders from those quadrants on a stakeholder engagement map.

    Think about the following:

    • Who are your resistors? These individuals will actively detract from project’s success if you don’t address their concerns.
    • Who is indifferent? These individuals need to be educated more on the benefits of business architecture to have an opinion either way.
    • Who are your supporters? These individuals will support you and spread your message if you equip them to do so.

    Avoid these common mistakes:

    • Do not jump to addressing resistor concerns first. Instead, equip your supporters with the info they need to help your cause and gain positive momentum before approaching resistors.
    InputOutput
    • Stakeholder Engagement Map
    • Stakeholder Communications Strategy
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template
    • A computer
    • A whiteboard and markers
    • CIO
    • Business Architect
    • IT Department Leads

    Download the Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template for this project.

    1.5 Craft a strategy to increase stakeholder support and participation

    1-2 hours

    Now that you have organized and categorized your stakeholders based on their power, influence, interest, and knowledge of business architecture, it is time to brainstorm how you are going to gain their support and participation.

    Think about the following:

    • What are your stakeholders’ concerns?
    • How can you address them?
    • How will you deliver the message?
    • How often will you deliver the message?

    Avoid these common mistakes:

    • Your communication strategy development should be an iterative process. Do not assume to know the absolute best way to get through to every resistor right away. Instead, engage with your supporters for their input on how to communicate to resistors and repeat the process for indifferent stakeholders as well.
    InputOutput
    • Stakeholder Engagement Map
    • Stakeholder Communications Strategy
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template
    • A computer
    • A whiteboard and markers
    • CIO
    • Business Architect
    • IT Department Leads

    Download the Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template for this project.

    Define value streams

    Identify the core activities your organization does to provide value to your customers.

    Business context Define value streams Build business capability map

    1.1 Select key stakeholders
    1.2 Collect and understand corporate goals

    2.1 Update or define value streams
    2.2 Decompose and analyze selected value stream

    3.1 Build Level 1 capability map
    3.2 Build Level 2 capability map
    3.3 Heatmap capability map
    3.4 Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Note: It is recommended that you gather and leverage relevant industry standard business architecture models you may have available to you. Example: Info-Tech Industry Business Architecture, BIZBOK, APQC.
    • Defining or updating the organization’s value streams.
    • Selecting priority value streams for deeper analysis.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Architect, Enterprise Architect
    • Relevant Business Stakeholder(s): Business Unit Leads, Departmental Executives, Senior Mangers, Business Analysts

    Define the organization’s value streams

    • Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities. They enable an organization to create and capture value in the marketplace by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Those activities are dependent on the specific industry segment an organization operates within. Value streams can extend beyond the organization into the supporting ecosystem, whereas business processes are contained within and the organization has complete control over them.
    • There are two types of value streams: core value streams and support value streams. Core value streams are mostly externally facing: they deliver value to either an external or internal customer and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map. Support value streams are internally facing and provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.
    • An effective method for ensuring all value streams have been considered is to understand that there can be different end-value receivers. Info-Tech recommends identifying and organizing the value streams with customers and partners as end-value receivers.

    Connect business goals to value streams

    Example strategy map and value stream

    Identifying value streams

    Value streams connect business goals to organization’s value realization activities. They enable an organization to create and capture value in the market place by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    There are several key questions to ask when endeavoring to identify value streams.

    Key Questions
    • Who are your customers?
    • What are the benefits we deliver to them?
    • How do we deliver those benefits?
    • How does the customer receive the benefits?

    Example: Value stream descriptions for the retail industry

    Value StreamsCreate or Purchase ProductManage InventoryDistribute ProductSell Product
    • Retailers need to purchase the products they are going to sell to customers from manufacturers or wholesale distributors.
    • A retailer’s success depends on its ability to source products that customers want and are willing to buy.
    • In addition, they need to purchase the right amount and assortment of products based on anticipated demand.
    • The right inventory needs to be at a particular store in the right quantities exactly when it is needed. This helps to maximize sales and minimize how much cash is held up in inventory.
    • Inventory management includes tracking, ordering, and stocking products, e.g. raw materials, finished products, buffer inventory.
    • Optimizing distribution activities is important for retailers.
    • Proper supply chain management can not only reduce costs for retailers but also drive revenues by enhancing shopping experiences.
    • Distribution includes transportation, packaging and delivery.
    • As business becomes global, it is important to ensure the whole distribution channel is effective.
    • Once produced, retailers need to sell the products. This is done through many channels including physical stores, online, the mail, or catalogs.
    • After the sale, retailers typically have to deliver the product, provide customer care, and manage complaints.
    • Retailers can use loyalty programs, pricing, and promotions to foster repeat business.

    Value streams describe your core business

    Value streams – the activities we do to provide value to customers – require business capabilities.

    Value streams are broken down further into value stages, for example, Sell Product value stream has value stages Evaluate Options, Place Order, and Make Payment.

    Think of value streams as the core operations, the reason for our organization’s being. A professional consulting organization may have a legal team but it does not brand itself as a law firm. A core value stream is providing research products and services – a business capability that supports it is legal counsel.

    2.1 Define value streams

    1-3 hours

    Unify the organization’s perspective on how it creates value.

    1. Write a short description of the value stream that includes a statement about the value provided and a clear start and end for the value stream. Validate the accuracy of the descriptions with your key stakeholders.
    2. Consider:
      1. How does the organization deliver those benefits?
      2. How does the customer receive the benefits?
      3. What is the scope of your value stream? What will trigger the stream to start and what will the final value be?
    3. Avoid: Don’t start with a blank page. Use Info-Tech’s business architecture models for sample value streams.
    Input Output
    • Business strategy or goals
    • Financial statements
    • Info-Tech’s industry-specific business architecture
    • List of organizational specific value streams
    • Detailed value stream definition(s)
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard / Kanban Board
    • Reference Architecture Template – See your Account Representative for details
    • Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc.
    • Info-Tech Archi Models
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    See your Info-Tech Account Representative for access to the Reference Architecture Template

    Decompose the value stream into stages

    The stages of a value stream are usually action-oriented statements or verbs that make up the individual steps involved throughout the scope of the value stream, e.g. Place Order or Make Payment.

    Each value stream should have a trigger or starting point and an end result for a client or receiver.

    Decompose the value stream into stages

    There should be measurable value or benefits at each stage.
    These are key performance indicators (KPIs).
    Spot problem areas in the stream.

    Value streams usually fall into one of these categories:

    1. Fulfillment of products and services
    2. Manufacturing
    3. Software products
    4. Supporting value streams (procurement of supplies, product planning)

    Value stream and value stages examples

    Customer Acquisitions
    Identify Prospects > Contact Prospects > Verify Interests

    Sell Product
    Identify Options > Evaluate Options > Negotiate Price and Delivery Date > Place Order > Get Invoice > Make Payment

    Product Delivery
    Confirm Order > Plan Load > Receive Warehouse > Fill Order > Ship Order > Deliver Order > Invoice Customer

    Product Financing
    Initiate Loan Application > Decide on Application > Submit Documents > Review & Satisfy T&C > Finalize Documents > Conduct Funding > Conduct Funding Audits

    Product Release
    Ideate > Design > Build > Release

    Sell Product is a value stream, made up of value stages Identify options, Evaluate options, and so on.

    2.2 Decompose selected value streams

    1-3 hours

    Once we have a good understanding of our value streams, we need to decide which ones to focus on for deeper analysis and modeling, e.g. extend the business architecture to more detailed level 2 capabilities.

    Organization has goals and delivers products or services.

    1. Identify which value propositions are most important, e.g. be more productive or manage money more simply.
    2. Identify the value stream(s) that create the value proposition.
    3. Break the selected value stream into value stages.
    4. Analyze value stages for opportunities.

    Practical Guide to Agile Strategy Execution

    InputOutput
    • Value stream maps and definitions
    • Business goals, business model canvas, customer journey (value proposition) Selected value streams decomposed into value stages
    • Analysis of selected value streams for opportunities
    • Value stream map
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard / Kanban Board
    • Reference Architecture Template – See your Account Representative for details
    • Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc.
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Build your value stream one layer at a time to ensure clarity and comprehensiveness

    The first step of creating a value stream is defining it.

    • In this step, you create the parameters around the value stream and document them in a list format.
    • This allows you to know where each value stream starts and ends and the unique value it provides.

    The second step is the value stream mapping.

    • The majority of the mapping is done here where you break down your value stream into each of its component stages.
    • Analysis of these stages allows for a deeper understanding of the value stream.
    • The mapping layer connects the value stream to organizational capabilities.

    Define the value streams that are tied to your strategic goals and document them in a list

    Title

    • Create a title for your value stream that indicates the value it achieves.
    • Ensure your title is clear and will be understood the same way across the organization.
    • The common naming convention for value streams is to use nouns, e.g. product purchase.

    Scope

    • Determine the scope of your value stream by defining the trigger to start the value stream and final value delivered to end the value stream.
    • Be precise with your trigger to ensure you do not mistakenly include actions that would not trigger your value stream.
    • A useful tip is creating a decision tree and outlining the path that results in your trigger.

    Objectives

    • Determine the objectives of the value stream by highlighting the outcome it delivers.
    • Identify the desired outcomes of the value stream from the perspective of your organization.

    Example Value Streams List

    Title Scope Objectives
    Sell Product From option identification to payment Revenue Growth

    Create a value stream map

    A Decompose the Value Stream Into Stages B Add the Customer Perspective
    • Determine the different stages that comprise the value stream.
    • Place the stages in the correct order.
    • Outline the likely sentiment and meaningful needs of the customer at each value stage.
    C Add the Expected Outcome D Define the Entry and Exit Criteria
    • Define the desired outcome of each stage from the perspective of the organization.
    • Define both the entry and exit criteria for each stage.
    • Note that the entry criteria of the first stage is what triggers the value stream.
    E Outline the Metrics F Assess the Stages
    • For each stage of the value stream, outline the metrics the organization can use to identify its ability to attain the desired outcome.
    • Assess how well each stage of the value stream is performing against its target metrics and use this as the basis to drill down into how/where improvements can be made.

    Decompose the value stream into its value stages

    The first step in creating a value stream map is breaking it up into its component stages.

    The stages of a value stream are usually action-oriented statements or verbs that make up the individual steps involved throughout the scope of the value stream.

    Illustration of decomposing value stream into its value stages

    The Benefit
    Segmenting your value stream into individual stages will give you a better understanding of the steps involved in creating value.

    Connect the stages of the value stream to a specific customer perspective

    Example of a sell product value stream

    The Benefit
    Adding the customer’s perspective will inform you of their priorities at each stage of the value stream.

    Connect the stages of the value stream to a desired outcome

    Example of a sell product value stream

    The Benefit
    Understanding the organization’s desired outcome at each stage of the value stream will help set objectives and establish metrics.

    Define the entry and exit criteria of each stage

    Example of entry and exit criteria for each stage

    The Benefit
    Establishing the entry and exit criteria for each stage will help you understand how the customer experience flows from one end of the stream to the other.

    Outline the key metric(s) for each stage

    Outline the key metrics for each stage

    The Benefit
    Setting metrics for each stage will facilitate the tracking of success and inform the business architecture practitioner of where investments should be made.

    Example value stream map: Sell Product

    Assess the stages of your value stream map to determine which capabilities to examine further

    To determine which specific business capabilities you should seek to assess and potentially refine, you must review performance toward target metrics at each stage of the value stream.

    Stages that are not performing to their targets should be examined further by assessing the capabilities that enable them.

    Value Stage Metric Description Metric Target Current Measure Meets Objective?
    Evaluate Options Number of Product Demonstrations 12,000/month 9,000/month No
    Identify Options Google Searches 100K/month 100K/month Yes
    Identify Options Product Mentions 1M/month 1M/month Yes
    Website Traffic (Hits)
    Average Deal Size
    Number of Deals
    Time to Complete an Order
    Percentage of Invoices Without Error
    Average Time to Acquire Payment in Full

    Determine the business capabilities that support the value stage corresponding with the failing metric

    Sell Product

    Identify Options > Evaluate Options > Negotiate Price and Delivery Date > Place Order > Get Invoice > Make Payment

    The value stage(s) that doesn’t meet its objective metrics should be examined further.

    • This is done through business capability mapping and assessment.
    • Starting at the highest level (level 0) view of a business, the business architecture practitioner must drill down into the lower level capabilities that support the specific value stage to diagnose/improve an issue.

    Info-Tech Insight
    In the absence of tangible metrics, you will have to make a qualitative judgement about which stage(s) of the value stream warrant further examination for problems and opportunities.

    Build business capability map

    Align supporting capabilities to priority activities.

    Business context Define value streams Build business capability map
    1.1 Select key stakeholders
    1.2 Collect and understand corporate goals
    2.1 Update or define value streams
    2.2 Decompose and analyze selected value stream
    3.1 Build Level 1 capability map
    3.2 Build Level 2 capability map
    3.3 Heatmap capability map
    3.4 Roadmap

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine which business capabilities support value streams
    • Accelerate the process with an industry reference architecture
    • Validate the business capability map
    • Establish level 2 capability

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Outcomes of this step

  • A validated level 1 business capability map
  • Level 2 capabilities for selected value stream(s)
  • Heatmapped business capability map
  • Business architecture initiatives roadmap
  • Develop a business capability map – level 1

    • Business architecture consists of a set of techniques to create multiple views of an organization; the primary view is known as a business capability map.
    • A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation and achieve outcomes, rather than how. Business capabilities are business terms defined using descriptive nouns such as “Marketing” or “Research and Development.” They represent stable business functions, are unique and independent of each other, and typically will have a defined business outcome. Business capabilities should not be defined as organizational units and are typically longer lasting than organizational structures.
    • A business capability mapping process should begin at the highest-level view of an organization, the level 1, which presents the entire business on a page.
    • An effective method of organizing business capabilities is to split them into logical groupings or categories. At the highest level, capabilities are either “core” (customer-facing functions) or “enabling” (supporting functions).
    • As a best practice, Info-Tech recommends dividing business capabilities into the categories illustrated to the right.

    The Business Capability Map is the primary visual representation of the organization’s key abilities or services that are delivered to stakeholders. This model forms the basis of strategic planning discussions.

    Example of a business capability map

    Example business capability map – Higher Education

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and represents a view of what your data program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Example business capability map for: Higher Education

    Example business capability map for higher education

    Example business capability map – Local Government

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and represents a view of what your data program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Example business capability map for: Local Government

    Example business capability map for local government

    Map capabilities to value stage

    Example of a value stage

    Source: Lambert, “Practical Guide to Agile Strategy Execution”

    3.1 Build level 1 business capability map

    1-3 hours

    1. Analyze the value streams to identify and describe the organization’s capabilities that support them. This stage requires a good understanding of the business and will be a critical foundation for the business capability map. Use the reference business architecture’s business capability map for your industry for examples of level 1 and 2 business capabilities and the capability map template to work in.
    2. Avoid:
      1. Don’t repeat capabilities. Capabilities are typically mutually exclusive activities.
      2. Don’t include temporary initiatives. Capabilities should be stable over time. The people, processes, and technologies that support capabilities will change continuously.

    Ensure you engage with the right stakeholders:

    Don’t waste your efforts building an inaccurate depiction of the business: The exercise of identifying capabilities for an organization is very introspective and requires deep analysis.

    It is challenging to develop a common language that everyone will understand and be able to apply. Invest in the time to ensure the right stakeholders are brought into the fold and bring their business area expertise and understanding to the table.

    InputOutput
    • Existing business capability maps
    • Value stream map
    • Info-Tech’s industry-specific business architecture
    • Level 1 business capability map for enterprise
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Reference Architecture Template – See your Account Representative for details
    • Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc.
    • Archi Models
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Prioritize one value stream and build a business architecture to level 2 capabilities

    Prioritize your innovation objectives and business goals, and identify a value stream to transform.

    Align the innovation goals and business objectives of your organization to your value streams (the critical actions that take place within your organization to add value to a customer).
    Prioritize a value stream to transform based on the number of priorities aligned to a value stream and/or the business value (e.g. revenue, EBITDA earnings, competitive differentiation, or cost efficiency).
    Working alongside a business or enterprise architect, build a reference architecture for the prioritized value stream up to level 2.

    Example of a value stream to business architecture level 2 capabilities

    Info-Tech Insight
    To produce maximum impact, focus on value streams that provide two-thirds of your enterprise value (EBITDA earnings).

    From level 1 to level 2 business capabilities

    Example moving from level 1 to level 2 business capabilities

    3.2 Build level 2 business capability map

    1-3 hours

    It is only at level 2 and further that we can pinpoint the business capabilities – the exact resources, whether applications or data or processes – that we need to focus on to realize improvements in the organization’s performance and customer experience.

    1. Gather industry reference models and any existing business capability maps.
    2. For the selected value stream, further break down its level 1 business capabilities into level 2 capabilities.
    3. You can often represent the business capabilities on a single page, providing a holistic visual for decision makers.
    4. Use meaningful names for business capabilities so that planners, stakeholders, and subject matter experts can easily search the map.
    InputOutput
    • Existing business capability maps
    • Value stream map
    • Info-Tech’s industry-specific business architecture
    • Level 1 business capability map
    • Level 2 Business Capability Map for selected Value Stream
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Reference Architecture Template – See your Account Representative for details.
    • Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc.
    • Archi Models
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Download: See your Account Representative for access to Info-Tech’s Reference Architecture Template

    3.3 Heatmap business capability map

    1-3 hours

    Determine the organization’s key capabilities.

    1. Determine cost advantage creators. If your organization has a cost advantage over competitors, the capabilities that enable it should be identified and prioritized. Highlight these capabilities and prioritize the programs that support them.
    2. Determine competitive advantage creators. If your organization does not have a cost advantage over competitors, determine if it can deliver differentiated end-customer experiences. Once you have identified the competitive advantages, understand which capabilities enable them. These capabilities are critical to the success of the organization and should be highly supported.
    3. Define key future state capabilities. In addition to the current and competitive advantage creators, the organization may have the intention to enhance new capabilities. Discuss and select the capabilities that will help drive the attainment of future goals.
    4. Assess how well information, applications, and processes support capabilities.
    InputOutput
    • Business capability map
    • Cost advantage creators
    • Competitive advantage creators
    • IT and business assessments
    • Key business capabilities
    • Business process review
    • Information assessment
    • Application assessment
    • List of IT implications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Reference Architecture Template – See your Account Representative for details.
    • Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc.
    • Archi Models
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Download: See your Account Representative for access to Info-Tech’s Reference Architecture Template

    Business capability map: Education

    Illustrative example of a business capability map for education

    Define key capabilities

    Illustrative example of Define key capabilities

    Note: Illustrative Example

    Business process review

    Illustrative example of a business process review

    Note: Illustrative Example

    Information assessment

     Illustrative example of an Information assessment

    Note: Illustrative Example

    Application assessment

     Illustrative example of an Application assessment

    Note: Illustrative Example

    MoSCoW analysis for business capabilities

     Illustrative example of a MoSCoW analysis for business capabilities

    Note: Illustrative Example

    Ranked list of IT implications

    MoSCoW Rank IT Implication Value Stream Impacted Comments/Actions
    M [Implication] [Value Stream]
    M [Implication] [Value Stream]
    M [Implication] [Value Stream]
    S [Implication] [Value Stream]
    S [Implication] [Value Stream]
    S [Implication] [Value Stream]
    C [Implication] [Value Stream]
    C [Implication] [Value Stream]
    C [Implication] [Value Stream]
    W [Implication] [Value Stream]
    W [Implication] [Value Stream]
    W [Implication] [Value Stream]

    3.4 Roadmap business architecture initiatives

    1-3 hours

    Unify the organization’s perspective on how it creates value.

    1. Write a short description of the value stream that includes a statement about the value provided and a clear start and end for the value stream. Validate the accuracy of the descriptions with your key stakeholders.
    2. Consider:
      1. How does the organization deliver those benefits?
      2. How does the customer receive the benefits?
      3. What is the scope of your value stream? What will trigger the stream to start and what will the final value be?
    3. Don’t start with a blank page. Use Info-Tech’s business architecture models for sample value streams.
    InputOutput
    • Existing business capability maps
    • Value stream map
    • Info-Tech’s industry-specific business architecture
    • Level 1 business capability map
    • Heatmapped business capability map
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Reference Architecture Template – See your Account Representative for details.
    • Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc.
    • Archi Models
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Download: See your Account Representative for access to Info-Tech’s Reference Architecture Template

    Example: Business architecture deliverables

    Enterprise Architecture Domain Architectural View Selection
    Business Architecture Business strategy map Required
    Business Architecture Business model canvas Optional
    Business Architecture Value streams Required
    Business Architecture Business capability map Not Used
    Business Architecture Business process flows
    Business Architecture Service portfolio
    Data Architecture Conceptual data model
    Data Architecture Logical data model
    Data Architecture Physical data model
    Data Architecture Data flow diagram
    Data Architecture Data lineage diagram

    Tools and templates to compile and communicate your business architecture work

    The Industry Business Reference Architecture Template for your industry is a place for you to collect all of the activity outputs and outcomes you’ve completed for use in next-steps.

    Download the Industry Business Reference Architecture Template for your industry

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Name Role Organization
    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader Research Analyst, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Ben Abrishami-Shirazi Technical Counselor, Enterprise Architecture Info-Tech Research Group
    Andrew Bailey Consulting, Manager Info-Tech Research Group
    Dana Dahar Research & Advisory Director, CIO / Digital Business Strategy Info-Tech Research Group
    Larry Fretz VP Info-Tech Research Group
    Shibly Hamidur Enterprise Architect Toronto Transit Commission (TTC)
    Rahul Jaiswal Principal Research Director, Industry Info-Tech Research Group
    John Kemp Executive Counselor, Executive Services Info-Tech Research Group
    Gerald Khoury Senior Executive Advisor Info-Tech Research Group
    Igor Ikonnikov Principal Advisory Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Daniel Lambert VP Benchmark Consulting
    Milena Litoiu Principal Research Director, Enterprise Architecture Info-Tech Research Group
    Andy Neill AVP Data & Analytics, Chief Enterprise Architect Info-Tech Research Group
    Rajesh Parab Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Rick Pittman VP, Research Info-Tech Research Group
    Irina Sedenko Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Bibliography

    Andriole, Steve. “Why No One Understands Enterprise Architecture & Why Technology Abstractions Always Fail.” Forbes, 18 September 2020. Web.

    “APQC Process Classification Framework (PCF) – Retail.” American Productivity & Quality Center, 9 January 2019. Web.

    Brose, Cari. “Who’s on First? Architecture Roles and Responsibilities in SAFe.” Business Architecture Guild, 9 March 2017. Web.

    Burlton, Roger, Jim Ryne, and Daniel St. George. “Value Streams and Business Processes: The Business Architecture Perspective.” Business Architecture Guild, December 2019. Web.

    “Business Architecture: An overview of the business architecture professional.” Capstera, 5 January 2022. Web.

    Business Architecture Guild. “What is Business Architecture?” Business Analyst Mentor, 18 November 2022. Web.

    “Business Architecture Overview.” The Business Architecture Working Group of the Object Management Group (OMG), n.d. Web.

    “Delivering on your strategic vision.” The Business Architecture Guild, n.d. Web.

    Ecker, Grant. “Deploying business architecture.” LinkedIn, 11 November 2021. (Presentation)

    IRIS. “Retail Business Architecture Framework and Examples.” IRIS Business Architect, n.d. Web.

    IRIS. “What Is Business Architecture?” IRIS Business Architect, 8 May 2014. Web.

    IRIS. “Your Enterprise Architecture Practice Maturity 2021 Assessment.” IRIS Business Architect, 17 May 2021. Web.

    Khuen, Whynde. “How Business Architecture Breaks Down and Bridges Silos.” Biz Arch Mastery, January 2020. Web.

    Lambert, Daniel. “Practical Guide to Agile Strategy Execution.” 18 February 2020.

    Lankhorst, Marc, and Bernd Ihnen. “Mapping the BIZBOK Metamodel to the ArchiMate Language.” Bizzdesign, 2 September 2021. Web.

    Ramias, Alan, and Andrew Spanyi, “Demystifying the Relationship Between Processes and Capabilities: A Modest Proposal.” BPTrends, 2 February 2015. Web.

    Newman, Daniel. “NRF 2022: 4 Key Trends From This Year’s Big Show.” Forbes, 20 January 2022. Web.

    Research and Markets. “Define the Business Context Needed to Complete Strategic IT Initiatives: 2018 Blueprint.” Business Wire, 1 February 2018. Web.

    Sabanoglu, Tugba. “Retail market worldwide - Statistics & Facts.” Statista, 21 April 2022. Web.

    Spacey, John. “Capability vs Process.” Simplicable, 18 November 2016. Web.

    “The Definitive Guide to Business Capabilities.” LeanIX, n.d. Web.

    TOGAF 9. Version 9.1. The Open Group, 2011. Web.

    “What is Business Architecture?” STA Group, 2017. PDF.

    Whittie, Ralph. “The Business Architecture, Value Streams and Value Chains.” BA Institute, n.d. Web.

    Gain Control of Cloud Integration Strategies Before they Float Away

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}362|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Enterprise Integration
    • Parent Category Link: /enterprise-integration
    • IT is typically backlogged with tasks while the business waits to implement key solutions to remain competitive. In this competitive space, Cloud solutions offer attractive benefits to business stakeholders especially around agility and cost.
    • Moving to the Cloud involves more than outsourcing a component of the technology stack. Roles, processes, and authentication technologies need to be redefined to fit a distributed stack where parts of the IT solution space reside on-premise while the rest are in the Cloud.
    • Cloud integration means accepting loss of control in product development. A Cloud vendor will address the needs of most constituents and any high degree of customization which counteracts their business model. This makes integration a complex initiative involving two separate parties trying to align.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Cloud integration is a fundamental commitment to change within the organization as it deeply impacts roles, processes, and technologies.
    • Be prepared to lose some degree of control of SLA management. IT will have to manage multiple Cloud SLAs and deliver a lowest common approach to the business. This may mean lowering the SLA standards previously set with on-premise solutions.
    • Cloud integration isn’t just about the technology. It is a dedication to establish solid relationships with the Cloud vendor. Understanding where the cloud solution is moving and what issues are being addressed are critical to creating an organizational road map for the future.

    Impact and Result

    • Develop a Cloud integration strategy by proactively understanding the impact of Cloud integration efforts to the organization.
    • Realize that Cloud integration will be an ongoing process of collaboration with the business, and that the initial implementation does not constitute an end.
    • Implement an integrated support structure that includes on-premise and cloud stacks.

    Gain Control of Cloud Integration Strategies Before they Float Away Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the impacts of Cloud computing on Data, Application, Access, and Service Level Agreement integration

    Assess your current level of Cloud adoption and integration, focusing on solutions that are emerging in the market and the applicability to your IT environment.

    • Storyboard: Gain Control of Cloud Integration Strategies Before they Float Away
    • Cloud Integration Checklist
    • None
    [infographic]

    Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}522|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Requirements & Design
    • Parent Category Link: /requirements-and-design

    The process of navigating from waterfall to Agile can be incredibly challenging. Even more problematic; how do you operate your requirements management practices once there? There traditionally isn’t a role for a business analyst, the traditional keeper of requirements. It isn’t like switching on a light.

    You likely find yourself struggling to deliver high quality solutions and requirements in Agile. This is a challenge for many organizations, regardless of how long they’ve leveraged Agile.

    But you aren’t here for assurances. You’re here for answers and help.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Agile and requirements management are complementary, not competitors.

    Impact and Result

    Info-Tech’s advice? Why choose? Why have to pick between traditional waterfall and Agile delivery? If Agile without analysis is a recipe for disaster, Agile with analysis is the solution. How can you leverage the Info-Tech approach to align your Agile and requirements management efforts into a powerful combination?

    Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment is your guide.

    Use the contents and exercises of this blueprint to gain a shared understanding of the two disciplines, to find your balance in your approach, to define your thresholds, and ultimately, to prepare for new ways of working.

    Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment Blueprint – Agile and Requirements Management are complementary, not competitors

    Provides support and guidance for organizations struggling with their requirements management practices in Agile environments.

    • Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment Storyboard

    2. Agile Requirements Playbook – A practical playbook for aligning your teams, and articulating the guidelines for managing your requirements in Agile.

    The Agile Requirements Playbook becomes THE artifact for your Agile requirements practices. Great for onboarding, reviewing progress, and ensuring a shared understanding of your ways of working.

    • Agile Requirements Playbook

    3. Documentation Calculator – A tool for determining the right level of documentation for your organization, and whether you’re spending too much, or even not enough, on Agile Requirements documentation.

    The Documentation Calculator can inform your documentation decison making, ensuring you're investing just the right amount of time, money, and effort.

    • Documentation Calculator

    4. Agile Requirements Workbook – Supporting tools and templates in advancing your Agile Requirements practice, to be used in conjunction with the Agile Requirements Blueprint, and the Playbook.

    This workbook is designed to capture the results of your exercises in the Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment Storyboard. Each worksheet corresponds to an exercise in the storyboard. This is a tool for you, so customize the content and layout to best suit your product. The workbook is also a living artifact that should be updated periodically as the needs of your team and organization change.

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    5. Agile Requirements Assessment – Establishes your current Agile requirements maturity, defines your target maturity, and supports planning to get there.

    The Agile Requirements Assessment is a great tool for determining your current capabilities and maturity in Agile and Business Analysis. You can also articulate your target state, which enables the identification of capability gaps, the creation of improvement goals, and a roadmap for maturing your Agile Requirements practice.

    • Agile Requirements Assessment

    Infographic

    Workshop: Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Framing Agile and Business Analysis

    The Purpose

    Sets the context for the organization, to ensure a shared understanding of the benefits of both Agile and business analysis/requirements management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Have a shared definition of Agile and business analysis / requirements.

    Understand the current state of Agile and business analysis in your organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Define what Agile and business analysis mean in your organization.

    1.2 Agile requirements assessment.

    Outputs

    Alignment on Agile and business analysis / requirements in your organization.

    A current and target state assessment of Agile and business analysis in your organization.

    2 Tailoring Your Approach

    The Purpose

    Confirm you’re going the right way for effective solution delivery.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Confirm the appropriate delivery methodology.

    Activities

    2.1 Confirm your selected methodology.

    Outputs

    Confidence in your selected project delivery methodology.

    3 Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    The Purpose

    Provides the guardrails for your Agile requirements practice, to define a high-level process, roles and responsibilities, governance and decision-making, and how to deal with change.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clearly defined interactions between the BA and their partners

    Define a plan for management and governance at the project team level

    Activities

    3.1 Define your agile requirements process.

    3.2 Define your agile requirements RACI.

    3.3 Define your governance.

    3.4 Define your change and backlog refinement plan.

    Outputs

    Agile requirements process.

    Agile requirements RACI.

    A governance and documentation plan.

    A change and backlog refinement approach.

    4 Planning Your Next Steps

    The Purpose

    Provides the action plan to achieve your target state maturity

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Recognize and prepare for the new ways of working for communication, stakeholder engagement, within the team, and across the organization.

    Establish a roadmap for next steps to mature your Agile requirements practice.

    Activities

    4.1 Define your stakeholder communication plan.

    4.2 Identify your capability gaps.

    4.3 Plan your agile requirements roadmap.

    Outputs

    A stakeholder communication plan.

    A list of capability gaps to achieve your desired target state.

    A prioritized roadmap to achieve the target state.

    5 Agile Requirements Techniques (Optional)

    The Purpose

    To provide practical guidance on technique usage, which can enable an improved experience with technical elements of the blueprint.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An opportunity to learn new tools to support your Agile requirements practice.

    Activities

    5.1 Managing requirements' traceability.

    5.2 Creating and managing user stories.

    5.3 Managing your requirements backlog.

    5.4 Maintaining a requirements library.

    Outputs

    Support and advice for leveraging a given tool or technique.

    Support and advice for leveraging a given tool or technique.

    Support and advice for leveraging a given tool or technique.

    Support and advice for leveraging a given tool or technique.

    Further reading

    Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Agile and requirements management are complementary, not competitors

    Analyst's Perspective

    The temptation when moving to Agile is to deemphasize good requirements practices in favor of perceived speed. If you're not delivering on the needs of the business then you have failed, regardless of how fast you've gone.

    Delivery in Agile doesn't mean you stop needing solid business analysis. In fact, it's even more critical, to ensure your products and projects are adding value. With the rise of Agile, the role of the business analyst has been misunderstood.

    As a result, we often throw out the analysis with the bathwater, thinking we'll be just fine without analysis, documentation, and deliberate action, as the speed and dexterity of Agile is enough.

    Consequently, what we get is wasted time, money, and effort, with solutions that fail to deliver value, or need to be re-worked to get it right.

    The best organizations find balance between these two forces, to align, and gain the benefits of both Agile and business analysis, working in tandem to manage requirements that bring solutions that are "just right".

    This is a picture of Vincent Mirabelli

    Vincent Mirabelli
    Principal Research Director, Applications Delivery and Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    The process of navigating from waterfall to Agile can be incredibly challenging. And even more problematic; how do you operate your requirements management practices once there? Since there traditionally isn't a role for a business analyst; the traditional keeper of requirements. it isn't like switching on a light.

    You likely find yourself struggling to deliver high quality solutions and requirements in Agile. This is a challenge for many organizations, regardless of how long they've leveraged Agile.

    But you aren't here for assurances. You're here for answers and help.

    Common Obstacles

    many organizations and teams face is that there are so busy doing Agile that they fail to be Agile.

    Agile was supposed to be the saving grace of project delivery but is misguided in taking the short-term view of "going quickly" at the expense of important elements, such as team formation and interaction, stakeholder engagement and communication, the timing and sequencing of analysis work, decision-making, documentation, and dealing with change.

    The idea that good requirements just happen because you have user stories is wrong. So, requirements remain superficial, as you "can iterate later"…but sometimes later never comes, or doesn't come fast enough.

    Organizations need to be very deliberate when aligning their Agile and requirements management practices. The work is the same. How the work is done is what changes.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Infotech's advice? Why choose? Why have to pick between traditional waterfall and Agile delivery? If Agile without analysis is a recipe for disaster, Agile with analysis is the solution. And how can you leverage the Info-Tech approach to align your Agile and requirements management efforts into a powerful combination?

    Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment is your guide.

    Use the contents and exercises of this blueprint to gain a shared understanding of the two disciplines, to find your balance in your approach, to define your thresholds, and ultimately, to prepare for new ways of working.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Agile and requirements management are complementary, not competitors.

    The temptation when moving to Agile is to deemphasize good requirements practices in favor of perceived speed. If you're not delivering on the needs of the business, then you have failed, regardless of how fast you've gone.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Agile and requirements management are complementary, not competitors.

    The temptation when moving to Agile is to deemphasize good requirements practices in favor of perceived speed. If you're not delivering on the needs of the business, then you have failed, regardless of how fast you've gone

    Phase 1 insight

    • The purpose of requirements in waterfall is for approval. The purpose in Agile is for knowledge management, as Agile has no memory.
    • When it comes to the Agile manifesto, "over" does not mean "instead of".
    • In Agile, the what of business analysis does doesn't change. What does change is the how and when that work happens.

    Phase 2 insight

    • Understand your uncertainties; it's a great way to decide what level of Agile (if any) is needed.
    • Finding your "Goldilocks" zone will take time. Be patient.

    Phase 3 insight

    • Right-size your governance, based on team dynamics and project complexity. A good referee knows when to step in, and when to let the game flow.
    • Agile creates a social contract amongst the team, and with their leaders and organization.
    • Documentation needs to be valuable. Do what is acceptable and necessary to move work to future steps. Not documenting also comes with a cost, but one you pay in the future. And that bill will come due, with interest (aka, technical debt, operational inefficiencies, etc.).
    • A lack of acceptable documentation makes it more difficult to have agility. You're constantly revalidating your current state (processes, practices and structure) and re-arguing decisions already made. This slows you down more than maintaining documentation ever would.

    Phase 4 insight

    • Making Agile predictable is hard, because people are not predictable; people are prone to chaos.

    There have been many challenges with waterfall delivery

    It turns out waterfall is not that great at reducing risk and ensuring value delivery after all

    • Lack of flexibility
    • Difficulty in measuring progress
    • Difficulties with scope creep
    • Limited stakeholder involvement
    • Long feedback loops

    48%
    Had project deadlines more than double

    85%
    Exceeded their original budget by at least 20%

    25%
    At least doubled their original budget

    This is an image of the waterfall project results

    Source: PPM Express.

    Agile was meant to address the shortcomings of waterfall

    The wait for solutions was too long for our business partners. The idea of investing significant time, money, and resources upfront, building an exhaustive and complete vision of the desired state, and then waiting months or even years to get that solution, became unpalatable for them. And rightfully so. Once we cast a light on the pains, it became difficult to stay with the status quo. Given that organizations evolve at a rapid pace, what was a pain at the beginning of an initiative may not be so even 6 months later.

    Agile became the answer.

    Since its' first appearance nearly 20 years ago, Agile has become the methodology of choice for a many of organizations. According to the 15th Annual State of Agile report, Agile adoption within software development teams increased from 37% in 2020 to 86% in 2021.

    Adopting Agile led to challenges with requirements

    Requirements analysis, design maturity, and management are critical for a successful Agile transformation.

    "One of the largest sources of failure we have seen on large projects is an immature Agile implementation in the context of poorly defined requirements."
    – "Large Scale IT Projects – From Nightmare to Value Creation"

    "Requirements maturity is more important to project outcomes than methodology."
    – "Business Analysis Benchmark: Full Report"

    "Mature Agile practices spend 28% of their time on analysis and design."
    – "Quantitative Analysis of Agile Methods Study (2017): Twelve Major Findings"

    "There exists a Requirements Premium… organizations using poor practices spent 62% more on similarly sized projects than organizations using the best requirements practices."
    – "The Business Case for Agile Business Analysis" - Requirements Engineering Magazine

    Strong stakeholder satisfaction with requirements results in higher satisfaction in other areas

    This is an image of a bar graph comparing the percentage of respondents with high stakeholder satisfaction, to the percentage of respondents with low stakeholder satisfaction for four different categories.  these include: Availability of IT Capacity to Complete Projects; Overall IT Projects; IT Projects Meet Business Needs; Overall IT Satisfaction

    N= 324 small organizations from Info-Tech Research Group's CIO Business Vision diagnostic.

    Note: High satisfaction was classified as organizations with a score greater or equal to eight and low satisfaction was every organization that scored below eight on the same questions.

    Info-Tech's Agile requirements framework

    This is an image of Info-Tech's Agile requirements framework.  The three main categories are: Sprint N(-1); Sprint N; Sprint N(+1)

    Agile requirements are a balancing act

    Collaboration

    Many subject matter experts are necessary to create accurate requirements, but their time is limited too.

    Communication

    Stakeholders should be kept informed throughout the requirements gathering process, but you need to get the right information to the right people.

    Documentation

    Recording, organizing, and presenting requirements are essential, but excessive documentation will slow time to delivery.

    Control

    Establishing control points in your requirements gathering process can help confirm, verify, and approve requirements accurately, but stage gates limit delivery.

    What changes for the business analyst?

    In Agile, the what of business analysis does not change.

    What does change is the how and when that work happens.

    Business analysts need to focus on six key elements when managing requirements in Agile.

    • Team formation and interaction
    • Stakeholder engagement and communication
    • The timing and sequencing of their work
    • Decision-making
    • Documentation
    • Dealing with change

    Where does the business analysis function fit on an Agile team?

    Team formation is key, as Agile is a team sport

    A business analyst in an Agile team typically interacts with several different roles, including:

    • The product owner,
    • The Sponsor or Executive
    • The development team,
    • Other stakeholders such as customers, end-users, and subject matter experts
    • The Design team,
    • Security,
    • Testing,
    • Deployment.

    This is an image the roles who typically interact with a Business Analyst.

    How we do our requirements work will change

    • Team formation and interaction
    • Stakeholder engagement and communication
    • The timing and sequencing of their work
    • Decision-making
    • Documentation
    • Dealing with change

    As a result, you'll need to focus on;

    • Emphasizing flexibility
    • Enabling continuous delivery
    • Enhancing collaboration and communication
    • Developing a user-centered approach

    Get stakeholders on board with Agile requirements

    1. Stakeholder feedback and management support are key components of a successful Agile Requirements.
    2. Stakeholders can see a project's progression and provide critical feedback about its success at critical milestones.
    3. Management helps teams succeed by trusting them to complete projects with business value at top of mind and by removing impediments that are inhibiting their productivity.
    4. Agile will bring a new mindset and significant numbers of people, process, and technology changes that stakeholders and management may not be accustomed to. Working through these issues in requirements management enables a smoother rollout.
    5. Management will play a key role in ensuring long-term Agile requirements success and ultimately rolling it out to the rest of the organization.
    6. The value of leadership involvement has not changed even though responsibilities will. The day-to-day involvement in projects will change but continual feedback will ultimately dictate the success or failure of a project.

    Measuring your success

    Tracking metrics and measuring your progress

    As you implement the actions from this Blueprint, you should see measurable improvements in;

    • Team and stakeholder satisfaction
    • Requirements quality
    • Documentation cost

    Without sacrificing time to delivery

    Metric Description and motivation
    Team satisfaction (%) Expect team satisfaction to increase as a result of clearer role delineation and value contribution.
    Stakeholder satisfaction (%) Expect Stakeholder satisfaction to similarly increase, as requirements quality increases, bringing increased value
    Requirements rework Measures the quality of requirements from your Agile Projects. Expect that the Requirements Rework will decrease, in terms of volume/frequency.
    Cost of documentation Quantifies the cost of documentation, including Elicitation, Analysis, Validation, Presentation, and Management
    Time to delivery Balancing Metric. We don't want improvements in other at the expense of time to delivery

    Info-Tech's methodology for Agile requirements

    1. Framing Agile and Business Analysis

    2. Tailoring Your Approach

    3. Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    4. Planning Your Next Steps

    Phase Activities

    1.1 Understand the benefits and limitations of Agile and business analysis

    1.2 Align Agile and business analysis within your organization

    2.1 Decide the best-fit approach for delivery

    2.2 Manage your requirements backlog

    3.1 Define project roles and responsibilities

    3.2 Define your level of acceptable documentation

    3.3 Manage requirements as an asset

    3.4 Define your requirements change management plan

    4.1 Preparing new ways of working

    4.2 Develop a roadmap for next steps

    Phase Outcomes

    Recognize the benefits and detriments of both Agile and BA.

    Understand the current state of Agile and business analysis in your organization.

    Confirm the appropriate delivery methodology.

    Manage your requirements backlog.

    Connect the business need to user story.

    Clearly defined interactions between the BA and their partners.

    Define a plan for management and governance at the project team level.

    Documentation and tactics that are right-sized for the need.

    Recognize and prepare for the new ways of working for communication, stakeholder engagement, within the team, and across the organization.

    Establish a roadmap for next steps to mature your Agile requirements practice.

    Blueprint tools and templates

    Key deliverable:

    This is a screenshot from the Agile Requirements Playbook

    Agile Requirements Playbook

    A practical playbook for aligning your teams and articulating the guidelines for managing your requirements in Agile

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    This is a screenshot from the Documentation Calculator

    Documentation Calculator

    A tool to help you answer the question: What is the right level of Agile requirements documentation for my organization?

    This is a screenshot from the Agile Requirements Assessment

    Agile Requirements Assessment

    Establishes your current maturity level, defines your target state, and supports planning to get there.

    This is a screenshot from the Agile Requirements Workbook

    Agile Requirements Workbook

    Supporting tools and templates in advancing your Agile requirements practice, to be used with the Agile Requirements Blueprint and Playbook.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    1. Framing Agile and Business Analysis / 2. Tailoring Your Approach 3. Defining Your Requirements
    Thresholds
    3. Defining Your Requirements Thresholds / 4. Planning Your Next Steps (OPTIONAL) Agile Requirements Techniques (a la carte) Next Steps and Wrap-Up (Offsite)

    Activities

    What does Agile mean in your organization? What do requirements mean in your organization?

    Agile Requirements Assessment

    Confirm your selected methodology

    Define your Agile requirements process

    Define your Agile requirements RACI (Optional)

    Define your Agile requirements governance

    Defining your change management plan

    Define your

    communication plan

    Capability gap list

    Planning your Agile requirements roadmap

    Managing requirements traceability

    Creating and managing user stories

    Managing your requirements backlog

    Maintaining a requirements library

    Develop Agile Requirements Playbook

    Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    Set up review time for workshop deliverables and next steps

    Outcomes

    Shared definition of Agile and business analysis / requirements

    Understand the current state of Agile and business analysis in your organization

    Agile requirements process

    Agile requirements RACI (Optional)

    Defined Agile requirements governance and documentation plan

    Change and backlog refinement plan

    Stakeholder communication plan

    Action plan and roadmap for maturing your Agile requirements practice

    Practical knowledge and practice about various tactics and techniques in support of your Agile requirements efforts

    Completed Agile Requirements Playbook

    Guided Implementation

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Scope objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #4: Define your approach to project delivery.

    Call #6: Define your Agile requirements process.

    Call #9: Identify gaps from current to target state maturity.

    Call #2: Assess current maturity.

    Call #5: Managing your requirements backlog.

    Call #7: Define roles and responsibilities.

    Call #10: Pprioritize next steps to mature your Agile requirements practice.

    Call #3: Identify target-state capabilities.

    Call #8: Define your change and backlog refinement approach.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 10 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Framing Agile and Business Analysis

    Phase 1

    Framing Agile and Business Analysis

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

    1.1 Understand the benefits and limitations of Agile and business analysis

    1.2 Align Agile and business analysis within your organization

    2.1 Confirm the best-fit approach for delivery

    2.2 manage your requirements backlog

    3.1 Define project roles and responsibilities

    3.2 define your level of acceptable documentation

    3.3 Manage requirements as an asset

    3.4 Define your requirements change management plan

    4.1 Preparing new ways of working

    4.2 Develop a roadmap for next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • EXERCISE: What do Agile and requirements mean in your organization?
    • ASSESSMENT: Agile requirements assessment
    • KEY DELIVERABLE: Agile Requirements Playbook

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business analyst and project team
    • Stakeholders
    • Sponsor/Executive

    Managing Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Step 1.1

    Understand the benefits and limitations of Agile and business analysis

    Activities

    1.1.1 Define what Agile and business analysis mean in your organization

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business analyst and project team
    • Sponsor/Executive

    Outcomes of this step

    • Recognize the benefits and detriments of both Agile and business analysis

    Framing Agile and Business Analysis

    There have been many challenges with waterfall delivery

    It turns out waterfall is not that great at reducing risk and ensuring value delivery after all

    • Lack of flexibility
    • Difficulty in measuring progress
    • Difficulties with scope creep
    • Limited stakeholder involvement
    • Long feedback loops

    48%
    Had project deadlines more than double

    85%
    Exceeded their original budget by at least 20%

    25%
    At least doubled their original budget

    This is an image of the Waterfall Project Results

    Source: PPM Express.

    Business analysis had a clear home in waterfall

    Business analysts had historically been aligned to specific lines of business, in support of their partners in their respective domains. Somewhere along the way, the function was moved to IT. Conceptually this made sense, in that it allowed BAs to provide technical solutions to complex business problems. This had the unintended result of lost domain knowledge, and connection to the business.

    It all starts with the business. IT enables business goals. The closer you can get to the business, the better.

    Business analysts were the main drivers of helping to define the business requirements, or needs, and then decompose those into solution requirements, to develop the best option to solve those problems, or address those needs. And the case for good analysis was clear. The later a poor requirement was caught, the more expensive it was to fix. And if requirements were poor, there was no way to know until much later in the project lifecycle, when the cost to correct them was exponentially higher, to the tune of 10-100x the initial cost.

    This is an image of a graph showing the cost multiplier for Formulating Requirements, Architecture Design, Development, Testing and, Operations

    Adapted from PPM Express. "Why Projects Fail: Business Analysis is the Key".

    Agile was meant to address the shortcomings of waterfall

    The wait for solutions was too long for our business partners. The idea of investing significant time, money, and resources upfront, building an exhaustive and complete vision of the desired state, and then waiting months or even years to get that solution became unpalatable for them. And rightfully so. Once we cast a light on the pains, it became difficult to stand pat in the current state. And besides, organizations evolve at a rapid pace. What was a pain at the beginning of an initiative may not be so even six months later.

    Agile became the answer.

    Since its first appearance nearly 20 years ago, Agile has become the methodology of choice for a huge swathe of organizations. According to the 15th Annual State of Agile report, Agile adoption within software development teams increased from 37% in 2020 to 86% in 2021.

    To say that's significant is an understatement.

    The four core values of Agile helped shift focus

    According to the Agile manifesto, "We value. . ."

    This is an image of what is valued according to the Agile Manifesto.

    "…while there is value in the items on the right, we value the items on the left more."

    Source: Agilemanifesto, 2001

    Agile has made significant inroads in IT and beyond

    94% of respondents report using Agile practices in their organization

    according to Digital.AI's "The 15th State of Agile Report"

    That same report notes a steady expansion of Agile outside of IT, as other areas of the organization seek to benefit from increased agility and responsiveness, including Human Resources, Finance and Marketing.

    While it addressed some problems…

    This is an image of the Waterfall Project Results, compared to Agile Product Results.

    "Agile projects are 37% faster to market than [the] industry average"

    (Requirements Engineering Magazine, 2017)

    • Business requirements documents are massive and unreadable
    • Waterfall erects barriers and bottlenecks between the business and the development team
    • It's hard to define the solution at the outset of a project
    • There's a long turnaround between requirements work and solution delivery
    • Locking in requirements dictates an often-inflexible solution. And the costs to make changes tend to add up.

    …Implementing Agile led to other challenges

    This is an image of a series of thought bubbles, each containing a unique challenge resulting from implementing Agile.

    Adopting Agile led to challenges with requirements

    Requirements analysis, design maturity, and management are critical for a successful Agile transformation.

    "One of the largest sources of failure we have seen on large projects is an immature Agile implementation in the context of poorly defined requirements."
    – BCG, 2015

    "Requirements maturity is more important to project outcomes than methodology."
    – IAG Consulting, 2009.

    "Mature Agile practices spend 28% of their time on analysis and design."
    – InfoQ, 2017."

    "There exists a Requirements Premium… organizations using poor practices spent 62% more on similarly sized projects than organizations using the best requirements practices."
    – Requirements Engineering Magazine, 2017

    Strong stakeholder satisfaction with requirements results in higher satisfaction in other areas

    This is an image of a bar graph comparing the percentage of respondents with high stakeholder satisfaction, to the percentage of respondents with low stakeholder satisfaction for four different categories.  these include: Availability of IT Capacity to Complete Projects; Overall IT Projects; IT Projects Meet Business Needs; Overall IT Satisfaction

    N= 324 small organizations from Info-Tech Research Group's CIO Business Vision diagnostic.

    Note: High satisfaction was classified as organizations with a score greater or equal to eight and low satisfaction was every organization that scored below eight on the same questions.

    Agile is being misinterpreted as an opportunity to bypass planning and analysis activities

    Agile is a highly effective tool.

    This isn't about discarding Agile. It is being used for things completely outside of what was originally intended. When developing products or code, it is in its element. However, outside of that realm, its being used to bypass business analysis activities, which help define the true customer and business need.

    Business analysts were forced to adapt and shift focus. Overnight they morphed into product owners, or no longer had a place on the team. Requirements and analysis took a backseat.

    The result?

    Increased rework, decreased stakeholder satisfaction, and a lot of wasted money and effort.

    "Too often, the process of two-week sprints becomes the thing, and the team never gets the time and space to step back and obsess over what is truly needed to delight customers."
    Harvard Business Review, 9 April 2021.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Requirements in Agile are the same, but the purpose of requirements changes.

    • The purpose of requirements in waterfall is for stakeholder approval.
    • The purpose of requirements in Agile is knowledge management; to maintain a record of the current state.

    Many have misinterpreted the spirit of Agile and waterfall

    The stated principles of waterfall say nothing of how work is to be linear.

    This is an image of a comparison between using Agile and Being Prescriptive.This is an image of Royce's 5 principles for success.

    Source: Royce, Dr. Winston W., 1970.

    For more on Agile methodology, check out Info-Tech's Agile Research Centre

    How did the pendulum swing so far?

    Shorter cycles of work made requirements management more difficult. But the answer isn't to stop doing it.

    Organizations went from engaging business stakeholders up front, and then not until solution delivery, to forcing those partners to give up their resources to the project. From taking years to deliver a massive solution (which may or may not even still fit the need) to delivering in rapid cycles called sprints.

    This tug-of-war is costing organizations significant time, money, and effort.

    Your approach to requirements management needs to be centered. We can start to make that shift by better aligning our Agile and business analysis practices. Outside of the product space, Agile needs to be combined with other disciplines (Harvard Business Review, 2021) to be effective.

    Agility is important. Though it is not a replacement for approach or strategy (RCG Global Services, 2022). In Agile, team constraints are leveraged because of time. There is a failure to develop new capabilities to address the business needs Harvard Business Review, 2021).

    Agility needs analysis.

    Agile requirements are a balancing act

    Collaboration

    Many subject matter experts are necessary to create accurate requirements, but their time is limited too.

    Communication

    Stakeholders should be kept informed throughout the requirements gathering process, but you need to get the right information to the right people.

    Documentation

    Recording, organizing, and presenting requirements are essential, but excessive documentation will slow time to delivery.

    Control

    Establishing control points in your requirements gathering process can help confirm, verify, and approve requirements accurately, but stage gates limit delivery.

    Start by defining what the terms mean in your organization

    We do this because there isn't even agreement by the experts on what the terms "Agile" and "business analysis" mean, so let's establish a definition within the context of your organization.

    1.1.1 What do Agile and business analysis mean in your organization?

    Estimated time: 30 Minutes

    1. Explore the motivations behind the need for aligning Agile with business analysis. Are there any current challenges related to outputs, outcomes, quality? How can the team and organization align the two more effectively for the purposes of requirements management?
    2. Gather the appropriate stakeholders to discuss their definition of the terms "Agile" and "business analysis" It can be related to their experience, practice, or things they've read or heard.
    3. Brainstorm and document all shared thoughts and perspectives.
    4. Synthesize those thoughts and perspectives into a shared definition of each term, of a sentence or two.
    5. Revisit this definition as needed, and as your Agile requirements efforts evolve.

    Input

    • Challenges and experiences/perspectives related to Agile and business requirements

    Output

    • A shared definition of Agile and business analysis, to help guide alignment on Agile requirements management

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Build your Agile Requirements Playbook

    Keep the outcomes of this blueprint in a single document

    Share at the beginning of a new project, as part of team member onboarding, and revisit as your practice matures.

    This is a series of three screenshots from the Agile Requirements Playbook.

    Your Agile Requirements Playbook will include

    • Your shared definition of Agile and business analysis for your organization
    • The Agile Requirements Maturity Assessment
    • A Methodology Selection Matrix
    • Agile requirements RACI
    • A defined Agile requirements process
    • Documentation Calculator
    • Your Requirements Repository Information
    • Capability Gap List (from current to target state)
    • Target State Improvement Roadmap and Action Plan

    Step 1.2

    Align Agile and Business Analysis Within Your Organization

    Activities

    1.2.1 Assess your Agile requirements maturity

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst and Project Team
    • Stakeholders
    • Sponsor/Executive

    Outcomes of this step

    • Complete the Agile Requirements Maturity Assessment to establish your current and target states

    Framing Agile and Business Analysis

    Consider the question: "Why Agile?"

    What is the driving force behind that decision?

    There are many reasons to leverage the power of Agile within your organization, and specifically as part of your requirements management efforts. And it shouldn't just be to improve productivity. That's only one aspect.
    Begin by asking, "Why Agile?" Are you looking to improve:

    • Time to market
    • Team engagement
    • Product quality
    • Customer satisfaction
    • Stakeholder engagement
    • Employee satisfaction
    • Consistency in delivery of value
    • Predictably of your releases

    Or a combination of the above?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Project delivery methodologies aren't either/or. You don't have to be 100% waterfall or 100% Agile. Select the right approach for your project, product, or service.

    In the end, your business partners don't want projects delivered faster, they want value faster!

    For more on understanding Agile, check out the Implement Agile Practices That Work Blueprint

    Responses to a 2019 KPMG survey:

    13% said that their top management fully supports Agile transformation.

    76% of organizations did not agree that their organization supports Agile culture.

    62% of top management believe Agile has no implications for them.

    What changes for the business analyst?

    Business analysts need to focus on six key elements when managing requirements in Agile.

    • Team formation and interaction
    • Stakeholder engagement and communication
    • The timing and sequencing of their work
    • Decision-making
    • Documentation
    • Dealing with change

    In Agile, the what of business analysis does not change.

    What does change is the how and when that work happens.

    1.2.1 Assess your Agile requirements maturity

    This is a series of screenshots from the Agile Requirements Maturity Assessment.

    1.2.1 Assess your Agile requirements maturity

    Estimated time: 30 Minutes

      1. Using the Agile Requirements Maturity Assessment, gather all appropriate stakeholders, and discuss and score the current state of your practice. Scoring can be done by:
        1. Consensus: Generally better with a smaller group, where the group agrees the score and documents the result
        2. Average: Have everyone score individually, and aggregate the results into an average, which is then entered.
        3. Weighted Average: As above, but weight the individual scores by individual or line of business to get a weighted average.
      2. When current state is complete, revisit to establish target state (or hold as a separate session) using the same scoring approach as in current state.
        1. Recognize that there is a cost to maturity, so don't default to the highest score by default.
        2. Resist the urge at this early stage to generate ideas to navigate from current to target state. We will re-visit this exercise in Phase 4, once we've defined other pieces of our process and practice.

    Input

    • Participant knowledge and experience

    Output

    • A current and target state assessment of your Agile requirements practice

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Maturity Assessment

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Tailoring Your Approach

    Phase 2

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

    1.1 Understand the benefits and limitations of Agile and business analysis

    1.2 Align Agile and business analysis within your organization

    2.1 Confirm the best-fit approach for delivery

    2.2 manage your requirements backlog

    3.1 Define project roles and responsibilities

    3.2 define your level of acceptable documentation

    3.3 Manage requirements as an asset

    3.4 Define your requirements change management plan

    4.1 Preparing new ways of working

    4.2 Develop a roadmap for next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Selecting the appropriate delivery methodology
    • Managing your requirements backlog
    • Tracing from business need to user story

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Managing Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Step 2.1

    Confirm the Best-fit Approach for Delivery

    Activities

    2.1.1 Confirm your methodology

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • A review of potential delivery methodologies to select the appropriate, best-fit approach to your projects

    Confirming you're using the best approach doesn't have be tricky

    Selecting the right approach (or confirming you're on the right track) is easier when you assess two key inputs to your project; your level of certainty about the solution, and the level of complexity among the different variables and inputs to your project, such as team experience and training, the number of impacted stakeholders or context. lines of business, and the organizational

    Solution certainty refers to the level of understanding of the problem and the solution at the start of the project. In projects with high solution certainty, the requirements and solutions are well defined, and the project scope is clear. In contrast, projects with low solution certainty have vague or changing requirements, and the solutions are not well understood.

    Project complexity refers to the level of complexity of the project, including the number of stakeholders, the number of deliverables, and the level of technical complexity. In projects with high complexity, there are many stakeholders with different priorities, many deliverables, and high technical complexity. In contrast, projects with low complexity have fewer stakeholders, fewer deliverables, and lower technical complexity.

    "Agile is a fantastic approach when you have no clue how you're going to solve a problem"

    • Ryan Folster, Consulting Services Manager, Business Analysis, Dimension Data

    Use Info-Tech's methodology selection matrix

    Waterfall methodology is best suited for projects with high solution certainty and high complexity. This is because the waterfall model follows a linear and sequential approach, where each phase of the project is completed before moving on to the next. This makes it ideal for projects where the requirements and solutions are well-defined, and the project scope is clear.

    On the other hand, Agile methodology is best suited for projects with low solution certainty. Agile follows an iterative and incremental approach, where the requirements and solutions are detailed and refined throughout the project. This makes it ideal for projects where the requirements and solutions are vague or changing.

    Note that there are other models that exist for determining which path to take, should this approach not fit within your organization.

    Use info-tech's-methodology-selection-matrix

    This is an image of Info-Tech’s methodology selection matrix

    Adapted from The Chaos Report, 2015 (The Standish Group)

    Download the Agile Requirements Workbook

    2.1.1 Confirm your methodology

    Estimated time: 30 Minutes

    1. Using the Agile Requirements Workbook, find the tab labelled "Methodology Assessment" and answer the questions to establish your complexity and certainty scores, where;

    1 = Strongly disagree
    2 = Disagree
    3 = Neutral
    4 = Agree
    5 = Strongly agree.

    1. In the same workbook, plot the results in the grid on the tab labelled "Methodology Matrix".
    2. Projects falling into Green are good fits for Agile. Yellow are viable. And Red may not be a great fit for Agile.
    3. Note: Ultimately, the choice of methodology is yours. Recognize there may be additional challenges when a project is too complex, or uncertainty is high.

    Input

    • Current project complexity and solution certainty

    Output

    • A clear choice of delivery methodology

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Step 2.2

    Manage Your Requirements Backlog

    Activities

    2.2.1 Create your user stories

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understand how to convert requirements into user stories, which populate the Requirements Backlog.

    Tailoring Your Approach

    There is a hierarchy to requirements

    This is a pyramid, with the base being: Solution Requirements; The middle being: Stakeholder Requirements; and the Apex being: Business Requirements.
    • Higher-level statements of the goals, objectives, or needs of the enterprise.
    • Business requirements focus on the needs of the organization, and not the stakeholders within it.

    Defines

    Intended benefits and outcomes

    • Statements of the needs of a particular stakeholder or class of stakeholders, and how that stakeholder will interact with a solution.

    Why it is needed, and by who

    • Describes the characteristics of a solution that meets business requirements and stakeholder requirements. Functional describes the behavior and information that the solution will manage. They describe capabilities the system will be able to perform in terms of behaviors or operations. Non-functional represents constraints on the ultimate solution and tends to be less negotiable.

    What is needed, and how its going to be achieved

    Connect the dots with a traceability matrix

    Business requirements describe what a company needs in order to achieve its goals and objectives. Solution requirements describe how those needs will be met. User stories are a way to express the functionality that a solution will provide from the perspective of an end user.

    A traceability matrix helps clearly connect and maintain your requirements.

    To connect business requirements to solution requirements, you can start by identifying the specific needs that the business has and then determining how those needs can be met through technology or other solutions; or what the solution needs to do to meet the business need. So, if the business requirement is to increase online sales, a solution requirement might include implementing a shopping cart feature on your company website.

    Once you have identified the solution requirements, you can then use those to create user stories. A user story describes a specific piece of functionality that the solution will provide from the perspective of a user.

    For example, "As a customer, I want to be able to add items to my shopping cart so that I can purchase them." This user story is directly tied to the solution requirement of implementing a shopping cart feature.

    Tracing from User Story back up to Business Requirement is essential in ensuring your solutions support your organization's strategic vison and objectives.

    This is an image of a traceability matrix for Business Requirements.

    Download the Info-Tech Requirements Traceability Matrix

    Improve the quality of your solution requirements

    A solution requirement is a statement that clearly outlines the functional capability that the business needs from a system or application.

    There are several attributes to look for in requirements:

    Verifiable

    Unambiguous

    Complete

    Consistent

    Achievable

    Traceable

    Unitary

    Agnostic

    Stated in a way that can be easily tested

    Free of subjective terms and can only be interpreted in one way

    Contains all relevant information

    Does not conflict with other requirements

    Possible to accomplish with budgetary and technological constraints

    Trackable from inception through to testing

    Addresses only one thing and cannot be decomposed into multiple requirements

    Doesn't pre-suppose a specific vendor or product

    For more on developing high quality requirements, check out the Improve Requirements Gathering Blueprint

    Prioritize your requirements

    When everything is a priority, nothing is a priority.

    Prioritization is the process of ranking each requirement based on its importance to project success. Each requirement should be assigned a priority level. The delivery team will use these priority levels to ensure efforts are targeted toward the proper requirements as well as to plan features available on each release. Use the MoSCoW Model of Prioritization to effectively order your requirements.

    The MoSCoW Model of Prioritization

    This is an image of The MoSCoW Model of Prioritization

    The MoSCoW model was introduced by Dai Clegg of Oracle UK in 1994

    (Source: ProductPlan).

    Base your prioritization on the right set of criteria

    Criteria Description
    Regulatory and legal compliance These requirements will be considered mandatory.
    Policy compliance Unless an internal policy can be altered or an exception can be made, these requirements will be considered mandatory.
    Business value significance Give a higher priority to high-value requirements.
    Business risk Any requirement with the potential to jeopardize the entire project should be given a high priority and implemented early.
    Likelihood of success Especially in proof-of-concept projects, it is recommended that requirements have good odds.
    Implementation complexity Give a higher priority to low implementation difficulty requirements.
    Alignment with strategy Give a higher priority to requirements that enable the corporate strategy.
    Urgency Prioritize requirements based on time sensitivity.
    Dependencies A requirement on its own may be low priority, but if it supports a high-priority requirement, then its priority must match it.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It is easier to prioritize requirements if they have already been collapsed, resolved, and rewritten. There is no point in prioritizing every requirement that is elicited up front when some of them will eventually be eliminated.

    Manage solution requirements in a Product backlog

    What is a backlog?

    Agile teams are familiar with the use of a Sprint Backlog, but in Requirements Management, a Product Backlog is a more appropriate choice.

    A product backlog and a Sprint backlog are similar in that they are both lists of items that need to be completed in order to deliver a product or project, but there are some key differences between the two.

    A product backlog is a list of all the features, user stories, and requirements that are needed for a product or project. It is typically created and maintained by the business analyst or product owner and is used to prioritize and guide the development of the product.

    A Sprint backlog, on the other hand, is a list of items specifically for an upcoming sprint, which is an iteration of work in Scrum. The Sprint backlog is created by the development team and is used to plan and guide the work that will be done during the sprint. The items in the Sprint backlog are typically taken from the product backlog and are prioritized based on their importance and readiness.

    For more on building effective product backlogs, visit Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    A backlog stores and organizes requirements at various stages

    Your backlog must give you a holistic understanding of demand for change in the product.

    A well-formed backlog can be thought of as a DEEP backlog

    Detailed appropriately: Requirements are broken down and refined as necessary

    Emergent: The backlog grows and evolves over time as requirements are added and removed.

    Estimated: The effort to deliver a requirement is estimated at each tier.

    Prioritized: A requirement's value and priority are determined at each tier.

    This is an image of an inverted funnel, with the top being labeled: Ideas; The middle being labeled: Qualified; and the bottom being labeled: Ready.

    Adapted from Essential Scrum

    Ensure requests and requirements are ready for development

    Clearly define what it means for a requirement, change, or maintenance request to be ready for development.

    This will help ensure the value and scope of each functionality and change are clear and well understood by both developers and stakeholders before the start of the sprint. The definition of ready should be two-fold: ready for the backlog, and ready for coding.

    1. Create a checklist that indicates when a requirement or request is ready for the development backlog. Consider the following questions:
      1. Is the requirement or request in the correct format?
      2. Does the desired functionality or change have significant business value?
      3. Can the requirement or request be reasonably completed within defined release timelines under the current context?
      4. Does the development team agree with the budget and points estimates?
      5. Is there an understanding of what the requirement or request means from the stakeholder or user perspective?
    2. Create a checklist that indicates when a requirement or request is ready for development. Consider the following questions:
      1. Have the requirements and requests been prioritized in the backlog?
      2. Has the team sufficiently collaborated on how the desired functionality or change can be completed?
      3. Do the tasks in each requirement or request contain sufficient detail and direction to begin development?
      4. Can the requirement or request be broken down into smaller pieces?

    Converting solution requirements into user stories

    Define the user

    Who will be interacting with the product or feature being developed? This will help to focus the user story on the user's needs and goals.

    Create the story

    Create the user story using the following template: "As a [user], I want [feature] so that [benefit]."
    This helps articulate the user's need and the value that the requirement will provide.

    Decompose

    User stories are typically too large to be implemented in a single sprint, so they should be broken down into smaller, more manageable tasks.

    Prioritize

    User stories are typically too large to be implemented in a single sprint, so they should be broken down into smaller, more manageable tasks.

    2.2.1 Create your user stories

    Estimated time: 60 Minutes

    1. Gather the project team and relevant stakeholders. Have access to your current list of solution requirements.
    2. Leverage the approach on previous slide "Converting Solution Requirements into User Stories" to generate a collection of user stories.

    NOTE: There is not a 1:1 relationship between requirements and user stories.
    It is possible that a single requirement will have multiple user stories, and similarly, that a single user story will apply to multiple solution requirements.

    Input

    • Requirements
    • Use Case Template

    Output

    • A collection of user stories

    Materials

    • Current Requirements

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Use the INVEST model to create good user stories

    At this point your requirements should be high-level stories. The goal is to refine your backlog items, so they are . . .

    A vertical image of the Acronym: INVEST, taken from the first letter of each bolded word in the column to the right of the image.

    Independent: Ideally your user stories can be built in any order (i.e. independent from each other). This allows you to prioritize based on value and not get caught up in sequencing and prerequisites.
    Negotiable: As per the Agile principle, collaboration over contracts. Your user stories are meant to facilitate collaboration between the developer and the business. Therefore, they should be built to allow negotiation between all parties.
    Valuable: A user story needs to state the value so it can be effectively prioritized, but also so developers know what they are building.
    Estimable: As opposed to higher-level approximation given to epics, user stories need more accuracy in their estimates in order to, again, be effectively prioritized, but also so teams can know what can fit into a sprint or release plans.
    Small: User stories should be small enough for a number of them to fit into a sprint. However, team size and velocity will impact how many can be completed. A general guideline is that your teams should be able to deliver multiple stories in a sprint.
    Testable: Your stories need to be testable, which means they must have defined acceptance criteria and any related test cases as defined in your product quality standards.
    Source: Agile For All

    Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    Phase 3

    Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

    1.1 Understand the benefits and limitations of Agile and business analysis

    1.2 Align Agile and business analysis within your organization

    2.1 Confirm the best-fit approach for delivery

    2.2 manage your requirements backlog

    3.1 Define project roles and responsibilities

    3.2 define your level of acceptable documentation

    3.3 Manage requirements as an asset

    3.4 Define your requirements change management plan

    4.1 Preparing new ways of working

    4.2 Develop a roadmap for next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assigning roles and responsibilities optional (Tool: RACI)
    • Define your Agile requirements process
    • Calculate the cost of your documentation (Tool: Documentation Calculator)
    • Define your backlog refinement plan

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Managing Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Step 3.1

    Define Project Roles and Responsibilities

    Activities

    3.1.1 Define your Agile requirements RACI (optional)

    3.1.2 Define your Agile requirements process

    Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • A defined register of roles and responsibilities, along with a defined process for how Agile requirements work is to be done.

    Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    Where does the BA function fit on an Agile team?

    Team formation is key, as Agile is a team sport

    A business analyst in an Agile team typically interacts with several different roles, including the product owner, development team, and many other stakeholders throughout the organization.

    This is an image the roles who typically interact with a Business Analyst.

    • The product owner, to set the priorities and direction of the project, and to gather requirements and ensure they are being met. Often, but not always, the BA and product owner are the same individual.
    • The development team, to provide clear and concise requirements that they can use to build and test the product.
    • Other stakeholders, such as customers, end-users, and subject matter experts to gather their requirements, feedback and validate the solution.
      • Design, to ensure that the product meets user needs. They may provide feedback and ensure that the design is aligned with requirements.
      • Security, to ensure that the solution meets all necessary security requirements and to identify potential risks and appropriate use of controls.
      • Testing, to ensure that the solution is thoroughly tested before it is deployed. They may create test cases or user scenarios that validate that everything is working as intended.
      • Deployment, to ensure that the necessary preparations have been made, including testing, security, and user acceptance.

    Additionally, during the sprint retrospectives, the team will review their performance and find ways to improve for the next sprint. As a team member, the business analyst helps to identify areas where the team could improve how they are working with requirements and understand how the team can improve communication with stakeholders.

    3.1.1 (Optional) Define Your Agile Requirements RACI

    Estimated Time: 60 Minutes

    1. Identify the project deliverables: The first step is to understand the project deliverables and the tasks that are required to complete them. This will help you to identify the different roles and responsibilities that need to be assigned.
    2. Define the roles and responsibilities: Identify the different roles that will be involved in the project and their associated responsibilities. These roles may include project manager, product owner, development team, stakeholders, and any other relevant parties.
    3. Assign RACI roles: Assign a RACI role to each of the identified tasks. The RACI roles are:
      1. Responsible: the person or team who is responsible for completing the task
      2. Accountable: the person who is accountable for the task being completed on time and to the required standard
      3. Consulted: the people or teams who need to be consulted to ensure the task is completed successfully
      4. Informed: the people or teams who need to be informed of the task's progress and outcome
    4. Create the RACI chart: Use the information gathered in the previous steps to create a matrix or chart that shows the tasks, the roles, and the RACI roles assigned to each task.
    5. Review and refine: Review the RACI chart with the project team and stakeholders to ensure that it accurately reflects the roles and responsibilities of everyone involved. Make any necessary revisions and ensure that all parties understand their roles and responsibilities.
    6. Communicate and implement: Communicate the RACI chart to all relevant parties and ensure that it is used as a reference throughout the project. This will help to ensure that everyone understands their role and that tasks are completed on time and to the required standard.

    Input

    • A list of required tasks and activities
    • A list of stakeholders

    Output

    • A list of defined roles and responsibilities for your project

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    A Case Study in Team Formation

    Industry: Anonymous Organization in the Energy sector
    Source: Interview

    Challenge

    Agile teams were struggling to deliver within a defined sprint, as there were consistent delays in requirements meeting the definition of ready for development. As such, sprints were often delayed, or key requirements were descoped and deferred to a future sprint.

    During a given two-week sprint cycle, the business analyst assigned to the team would be working along multiple horizons, completing elicitation, analysis, and validation, while concurrently supporting the sprint and dealing with stakeholder changes.

    Solution

    As a part of addressing this ongoing pain, a pilot program was run to add a second business analyst to the team.

    The intent was, as one is engaged preparing requirements through elicitation, analysis, and validation for a future sprint, the second is supporting the current sprint cycle, and gaining insights from stakeholders to refine the requirements backlog.

    Essentially, these two were leap-frogging each other in time. At all times, one BA was focused on the present, and one on the future.

    Result

    A happier team, more satisfied stakeholders, and consistent delivery of features and functions by the Agile teams. The pilot team outperformed all other Agile teams in the organization, and the "2 BA" approach was made the new standard.

    Understanding the Agile requirements process

    Shorter cycles make effective requirements management more necessary, not less

    Short development cycles can make requirements management more difficult because they often result in a higher rate of change to the requirements. In a shorter timeframe, there is less time to gather and verify requirements, leading to a higher likelihood of poor or incomplete requirements. Additionally, there may be more pressure to make decisions quickly, which can lead to less thorough analysis and validation of requirements. This can make it more challenging to ensure that the final solution meets the needs of the stakeholders.
    When planning your requirements cycles, it's important to consider;

    • Your sprint logistics (how long?)
    • Your release plan (at the end of every sprint, monthly, quarterly?)
    • How the backlog will be managed (as tickets, on a visual medium, such as a Kanban board?)
    • How will you manage communication?
    • How will you monitor progress?
    • How will future sprint planning happen?

    Info-Tech's Agile requirements framework

    Sprint N(-1)

    Sprint N

    Sprint N(+1)

    An image of Sprint N(-1) An image of Sprint N An image of Sprint N(+1)

    Changes from waterfall to Agile

    Gathering and documenting requirements: Requirements are discovered and refined throughout the project, rather than being gathered and documented up front. This can be difficult for business analysts who are used to working in a waterfall environment where all requirements are gathered and documented before development begins.
    Prioritization of requirements: Requirements are prioritized based on their value to the customer and the team's ability to deliver them. This can be difficult for business analysts who are used to prioritizing requirements based on the client's needs or their own understanding of what is important.

    Defining acceptance criteria: Acceptance criteria are defined for each user story to ensure that the team understands what needs to be delivered. Business analysts need to understand how to write effective acceptance criteria and how to use them to ensure that the team delivers what the customer needs.
    Supporting Testing and QA: The business analyst plays a role in ensuring that testing (and test cases) are completed and of proper quality, as defined in the requirements.

    Managing changing requirements: It is expected that requirements will change throughout the project. Business analysts need to be able to adapt quickly to changing requirements and ensure that the team is aware of the changes and how they will impact the project.
    Collaboration with stakeholders: Requirements are gathered from a variety of stakeholders, including customers, users, and team members. Business analysts need to be able to work effectively with all stakeholders to gather and refine requirements and ensure that the team is building the right product.

    3.1.2 Define your Agile requirements process

    Estimated time: 60 Minutes

    1. Gather all relevant stakeholders to discuss and define your process for requirements management.
    2. Have a team member facilitate the session to define the process. The sample in the Agile Requirements Workbook can be used optionally as a starting point. You can also use any existing processes and procedures as a baseline.
    3. Gain agreement on the process from all involved stakeholders.
    4. Revisit the process periodically to review its performance and make adjustments as needed.

    NOTE: The process is intended to be at a high enough level to leave space and flexibility for team members to adapt and adjust, but at a sufficient depth that everyone understands the process and workflows. In other words, the process will be both flexible and rigid, and the two are not mutually exclusive.

    Input

    • Project team and RACI
    • Existing Process (if available)

    Output

    • A process for Agile requirements that is flexible yet rigid

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Establish the right level of governance and decision-making

    Establishing the right level of governance and decision making is important in Agile requirements because there is a cost to decision making, as time plays an important factor. Even the failure to decide can have significant impacts.

    Good governance and decision-making practices can help to minimize risks, ensure that requirements are well understood and managed, and that project progress is tracked and reported effectively.

    In Agile environments, this often involves establishing clear roles and responsibilities, implementing effective communication and collaboration practices, and ensuring that decision-making processes are efficient and effective.

    Good requirements management practices can help to ensure that projects are aligned with organizational goals and strategy, that stakeholders' needs are understood and addressed, and that deliverables are of high quality and meet the needs of the business.

    By ensuring that governance and decision-making is effective, organizations can improve the chances of project success, and deliver value to the business. Risks and costs can be mitigated by staying small and nimble.

    Check out Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Develop an adaptive governance process

    A pyramid, with the number 4 at the apex, and the number 1 at the base.  In order from base-apex, the following titles are found to the right of the pyramid: Ad-Hoc governance; Controlled Governance; Agile Governance; Embedded/Automated governance.

    Maturing governance is a journey

    Organizations should look to progress in their governance stages. Ad-hoc and controlled governance tends to be slow, expensive, and a poor fit for modern practices.

    The goal as you progress through your stages is to delegate governance and empower teams to make optimal decisions in real-time, knowing that they are aligned with the understood best interests of the organization.

    Automate governance for optimal velocity, while mitigating risks and driving value.

    This puts your organization in the best position to be adaptive and able to react effectively to volatility and uncertainty.

    A graph charting Trust and empowerment on the x-axis, and Progress Integration on the Y axis.

    Five key principles for building an adaptive governance framework

    Delegate and empower

    Decision making must be delegated down within the organization, and all resources must be empowered and supported to make effective decisions.

    Define outcomes

    Outcomes and goals must be clearly articulated and understood across the organization to ensure decisions are in line and stay within reasonable boundaries.

    Make risk- informed decisions

    Integrated risk information must be available with sufficient data to support decision making and design approaches at all levels of the organization.

    Embed / automate

    Governance standards and activities need to be embedded in processes and practices. Optimal governance reduces its manual footprint while remaining viable. This also allows for more dynamic adaptation.

    Establish standards and behavior

    Standards and policies need to be defined as the foundation for embedding governance practices organizationally. These guardrails will create boundaries to reinforce delegated decision making.

    Sufficient decision-making power should be given to your Agile teams

    Push the decision-making process down to your pilot teams.

    • Bring your business stakeholders and subject matter experts together to identify the potential high-level risks.
    • Bring your business stakeholders and subject matter experts together to identify the potential high-level risks.
    • Discuss with the business the level of risk they are willing to accept.
    • Define the level of authority project teams have in making critical decisions.

    "Push the decision making down as far as possible, down to the point where sprint teams completely coordinate all the integration, development, and design. What I push up the management chain is risk taking. [Management] decides what level of risk they are willing to take and [they] demonstrate that by the amount of decision making you push down."
    – Senior Manager, Canadian P&C Insurance Company, Info-Tech Interview

    Step 3.2

    Define Your Level of Acceptable Documentation

    Activities

    3.2.1 Calculate the cost of documentation

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Quantified cost of documentation produced for your Agile project.

    Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    Right-size Your Documentation

    Why do we need it, and what purpose does it serve?

    Before creating any documentation, consider why; why are you creating documentation, and what purpose is it expected to serve?
    Is it:

    • … to gain approval?
    • … to facilitate decision-making?
    • .. to allow the team to think through a challenge or compare solution options?

    Next, consider what level of documentation would be acceptable and 'enough' for your stakeholders. Recognize that 'enough' will depend on your stakeholder's personal definition and perspective.
    There may also be considerations for maintaining documentation for the purposes of compliance, and auditability in some contexts and industries.
    The point is not to eliminate all documentation, but rather, to question why we're producing it, so that we can create just enough to deliver value.

    "What does the next person need to do their work well, to gain or create a shared understanding?"
    - Filip Hendrickx, Innovating BA and Founder, altershape

    Documentation comes at a cost

    We need to quantify the cost of documentation, against the expected benefit

    All things take time, and that would imply that all things have an inherent cost. We often don't think in these terms, as it's just the work we do, and costs are only associated with activities requiring additional capital expenditure. Documentation of requirements can come at a cost in terms of time and resources. Creating and maintaining detailed documentation requires effort from project team members, which could be spent on other aspects of the project such as development or testing. Additionally, there may be costs associated with storing and distributing the documentation.

    When creating documentation, we are making a decision. There is an opportunity cost of investing time to create, and concurrently, not working on other activities. Documentation of requirements can come at a cost in terms of time and resources. Creating and maintaining detailed documentation requires effort from project team members, which could be spent on other aspects of the project such as development or testing. Additionally, there may be costs associated with storing and distributing the documentation.

    In order to make better informed decisions about the types, quantity and even quality of the documentation we are producing, we need to capture that data. To ensure we are receiving good value for our documentation, we should compare the expected costs to the expected benefits of a sprint or project.

    3.2.1 Calculate the cost of documentation

    Estimated time: as needed

    1. Use this tool to quantify the cost of creating and maintaining current state documentation for your Agile requirements team. It provides an indication, via the Documentation Cost Index, of when your project is documenting excessively, relative to the expected benefits of the sprint or project.
    2. In Step 1, enter the hourly rate for the person (or persons) completing the business analysis function for your Agile team. NB: This does not have to be a person with the title of business analyst. If there are multiple people fulfilling this role, enter the average rate (if their rates are same or similar) or a weighted average (if there is a significant range in the hourly rate)
    3. In Step 2, enter the expected benefit (in $) for the sprint or project.
    4. In Step 3, enter the total number of hours spent on each task/activity during the sprint or project. Use blank spaces as needed to add tasks and activities not listed.
    5. In Step 4, you'll find the Documentation Cost Index, which compares your total documentation cost to the expected benefits. The cell will show green when the value is < 0.8, yellow between 0.8 and 1, and red when >1.
    6. Use the information to plan future sprints and documentation needs, identify opportunities for improvement in your requirements practice, and find balance in "just enough" documentation.

    Input

    • Project team and RACI
    • Existing Process (if available)

    Output

    • A process for Agile requirements that is flexible yet rigid

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Lack of documentation also comes at a cost

    Lack of documentation can bring costs to Agile projects in a few different ways.

    • Onboarding new team members
    • Improving efficiency
    • Knowledge management
    • Auditing and compliance
    • Project visibility
    • Maintaining code

    Info-Tech Insight

    Re-using deliverables (documentation, process, product, etc.) is important in maintaining the velocity of work. If you find yourself constantly recreating your current state documentation at the start of a project, it's hard to deliver with agility.

    Step 3.3

    Manage Requirements as an Asset

    Activities

    3.3.1 Discuss your current perspectives on requirements as assets

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Awareness of the value in, and tactics for enabling effective management of requirements as assets

    Defining Your Requirements Thresholds

    What do we mean by "assets"?

    And when do requirements become assets?

    In order to delivery with agility, you need to maximize the re-usability of artifacts. These artifacts could take the form of current state documentation, user stories, test cases, and yes, even requirements for re-use.
    Think of it like a library for understanding where your organization is today. Understanding the people, processes, and technology, in one convenient location. These artifacts become assets when we choose to retain them, rather than discard them at the end of a project, when we think they'll no longer be needed.
    And just like finding a single book in a vast library, we need to ensure our assets can be found when we need them. And this means making them searchable.
    We can do this by establishing criteria for requirements and artifact reuse;

    • What business need and benefit is it aligned to?
    • What metadata needs to be attached, related to source, status, subject, author, permissions, type, etc.?
    • Where will it be stored for ease of retrieval?

    Info-Tech Insight

    When writing requirements for products or services, write them for the need first, and not simply for what is changing.

    The benefits of managing requirements as assets

    Retention of knowledge in a knowledge base that allows the team to retain current business requirements, process documentation, business rules, and any other relevant information.
    A clearly defined scope to reduce stakeholder, business, and compliance conflicts.
    Impact analysis of changes to the current organizational assets.

    Source: Requirement Engineering Magazine, 2017.

    A case study in creating an asset repository

    Industry: Anonymous Organization in the Government sector
    Source: Interview

    Challenge

    A large government organization faced a challenge with managing requirements, processes, and project artifacts with any consistency.

    Historically, their documentation was lacking, with multiple versions existing in email sent folders and manila folders no one could find. Confirming the current state at any given time meant the heavy lift of re-documenting and validating, so that effort was avoided for an excessive period.

    Then there was a request for audit and compliance, to review their existing documentation practices. With nothing concrete to show, drastic recommendations were made to ensure this practice would end.

    Solution

    A small but effective team was created to compile and (if not available) document all existing project and product documentation, including processes, requirements, artifacts, business cases, etc.

    A single repository was built and demonstrated to key stakeholders to ensure it would satisfy the needs of the audit and compliance group.

    Result

    A single source of truth for the organization, which was;

    • Accessible (view access to the entire organization).
    • Transparent (anyone could see and understand the process and requirements as intended).
    • A baseline for continuous improvement, as it was clear what the one defined "best way" was.
    • Current, where no one retained current documentation outside of this library.

    3.3.1 Discuss your current perspectives on requirements as assets

    Estimated time: 30 Minutes

    1. Gather all relevant stakeholder to share perspectives on the use of requirements as assets, historically in the organization.
    2. Have a team member facilitate the session. It is optional to document the findings.
    3. After looking at the historical use of requirements as assets, discuss the potential uses, benefits, and drawbacks of managing as assets in the target state.

    Input

    • Participant knowledge and experience

    Output

    • A shared perspective and history on requirements as assets

    Materials

    • A method for data capture (optional)

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Apply changes to baseline documentation

    Baseline + Release Changes = New Baseline

    • Start from baseline documentation dramatically to reduce cost and risk
    • Treat all scope as changes to baseline requirements
    • Sum of changes in the release scope
    • Sum of changes and original baseline becomes the new baseline
    • May take additional time and effort to maintain accurate baseline

    What is the right tool?

    While an Excel spreadsheet is great to start off, its limitations will become apparent as your product delivery process becomes more complex. Look at these solutions to continue your journey in managing your Agile requirements:

    Step 3.4

    Define Your Requirements Change Management Plan

    Activities

    3.4.1 Triage your requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • An approach for determining the appropriate level of governance over changes to requirements.

    Expect and embrace change

    In Agile development, change is expected and embraced. Instead of trying to rigidly follow a plan that may become outdated, Agile teams focus on regularly reassessing their priorities and adapting their plans accordingly. This means that the requirements can change often, and it's important for the team to have a process in place for managing these changes.

    A common approach to managing change in Agile is to use a technique called "backlog refinement." Where previously we populated our backlog with requirements to get them ready for development and deployment, this involves regularly reviewing and updating the list of work to be done. The team will prioritize the items on the evolving backlog, and the prioritized items will be worked on during the next sprint. This allows the team to quickly respond to changes in requirements and stay focused on the most important work.

    Another key aspect of managing change in Agile is effective communication. The team should have regular meetings, such as daily stand-up meetings or weekly sprint planning meetings, to discuss any changes in requirements and ensure that everyone is on the same page.

    Best practices in change and backlog refinement

    Communicate

    Clearly communicate your change process, criteria, and any techniques, tools, and templates that are part of your approach.

    Understand impacts/risks

    Maintain consistent control and communication and ensure that an impact assessment is completed. This is key to managing risks.

    Leverage tools

    Leverage tools when you have them available. This could be a Requirements Management system, a defect/change log, or even by turning on "track changes" in your documents.

    Cross-reference

    For every change, define the source of the change, the reason for the change, key dates for decisions, and any supporting documentation.

    Communicate the reason, and stay on message throughout the change

    Leaders of successful change spend considerable time developing a powerful change message: a compelling narrative that articulates the desired end state and makes the change concrete and meaningful to staff. They create the change vision with staff to build ownership and commitment.

    • The change message should:
    • Explain why the change is needed.
    • Summarize the things that will stay the same.
    • Highlight the things that will be left behind.
    • Emphasize the things that are being changed.
    • Explain how the change will be implemented.
    • Address how the change will affect the various roles in the organization.
    • Discuss staff's role in making the change successful.

    The five elements of communicating the reason for the change:

    An image of a cycle, including the five elements for communicating the reason for change.  these include: What will the role be for each department and individual?; What is the change?; Why are we doing it?; How are we going to go about it?; How long will it take us?

    How to make the management of changes more effective

    Key decisions and considerations

    How will changes to requirements be codified?
    How will intake happen?

    • What is the submission process?
    • Who has approval to submit?
    • What information is needed to submit a request?

    How will potential changes be triaged and evaluated?

    • What criteria will be used to assess the impact and urgency of the potential change?
    • How will you treat material and non-material changes?

    What is the review and approval process?

    • How will acceptance or rejection status be communicated to the submitter?

    3.4.1 Triage Your requirements

    An image of an inverted triangle, with the top being labeled: No Material Impact, the middle being labeled: Material impact; and the bottom being labeled: Governance Impact.  To the right of the image, are text boxes elaborating on each heading.

    If there's no material impact, update and move on

    An image of an inverted triangle, with the top being labeled: No Material Impact, the middle being labeled: Material impact; and the bottom being labeled: Governance Impact. To the right of the image, is a cycle including the following terms: Validate change; Update requirements; Track change (log); Package and communicate

    Material changes require oversight and approval

    An image of an inverted triangle, with the top being labeled: No Material Impact, the middle being labeled: Material impact; and the bottom being labeled: Governance Impact. To the right of the image, is a cycle including the following terms: Define impact; Revise; Change control needed?; Implement change.

    Planning Your Next Steps

    Phase 4

    Planning Your Next Steps

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4

    1.1 Understand the benefits and limitations of Agile and business analysis

    1.2 Align Agile and business analysis within your organization

    2.1 Confirm the best-fit approach for delivery

    2.2 manage your requirements backlog

    3.1 Define project roles and responsibilities

    3.2 define your level of acceptable documentation

    3.3 Manage requirements as an asset

    3.4 Define your requirements change management plan

    4.1 Preparing new ways of working

    4.2 Develop a roadmap for next steps

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Completing Your Agile Requirements Playbook
    • EXERCISE: Capability Gap List

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Managing Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Step 4.1

    Preparing New Ways of Working

    Activities

    4.1.1 Define your communication plan

    Planning Your Next Steps

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Recognize the changes required on the team and within the broader organization, to bring stakeholders on board.

    How we do requirements work will change

    • Team formation and interaction
    • Stakeholder engagement and communication
    • The timing and sequencing of their work
    • Decision-making
    • Documentation
    • Dealing with change

    As a result, you'll need to focus on;

    Emphasizing flexibility: In Agile organizations, there is a greater emphasis on flexibility and the ability to adapt to change. This means that requirements may evolve over time and may not be fully defined at the beginning of the project.
    Enabling continuous delivery: Agile organizations often use continuous delivery methods, which means that new features and functionality are delivered to users on a regular basis. This requires a more iterative approach to requirements management, as new requirements may be identified and prioritized during the delivery process.
    Enhancing collaboration and communication: Agile organizations place a greater emphasis on collaboration and communication between team members, stakeholders, and customers.
    Developing a user-centered approach: Agile organizations often take a user-centered approach to requirements gathering, which means that the needs and goals of the end-user are prioritized.

    Change within the team, and in the broader organization

    How to build an effective blend Agile and requirements management

    Within the team

    • Meetings should happen as needed
    • Handoffs should be clear and concise
    • Interactions should add value
    • Stand-ups should similarly add value, and shouldn't be for status updates

    Within the organization

    • PMO inclusion, to ensure alignment across the organization
    • Business/Operating areas, to recognize what they are committing to for time, resources, etc.
    • Finance, for how your project or product is funded
    • Governance and oversight, to ensure velocity is maintained

    "Whether in an Agile environment or not, collaboration and relationships are still required and important…how you collaborate, communicate, and how you build relationships are key."
    - Paula Bell, CEO, Paula A. Bell Consulting

    Get stakeholders on board with Agile requirements

    1. Stakeholder feedback and management support are key components of successful Agile requirements.
    2. Stakeholders can see a project's progression and provide critical feedback about its success at critical milestones.
    3. Management helps teams succeed by trusting them to complete projects with business value at top of mind and by removing impediments that are inhibiting their productivity.
    4. Agile will bring a new mindset and significant amounts of people, process, and technology changes that stakeholders and management may not be accustomed to. Working through these issues in requirements management enables a smoother rollout.
    5. Management will play a key role in ensuring long-term Agile requirements success and ultimately rolling it out to the rest of the organization.
    6. The value of leadership involvement has not changed even though responsibilities will. The day-to-day involvement in projects will change but continual feedback will ultimately dictate the success or failure of a project.

    4.1.1 Define your communication plan

    Estimated time: 60 Minutes

      1. Gather all relevant stakeholder to create a communication plan for project or product stakeholders.
      2. Have a team member facilitate the session.
      3. Identify
      4. ;
        1. Each stakeholder
        2. The nature of information they are interested in
        3. The channel or medium best to communicate with them
        4. The frequency of communication
      5. (Optional) Consider validating the results with the stakeholders, if not present.
      6. Document the results in the Agile Requirements Workbook and include in Agile Requirements Playbook.
      7. Revisit as needed, whether at the beginning of a new initiative, or over time, to ensure the content is still valid.

    Input

    • Participant knowledge and experience

    Output

    • A plan for communicating with stakeholders

    Materials

    • Agile Requirements Workbook

    Participants

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team

    Step 4.2

    Develop a Roadmap for Next Steps

    Activities

    4.2.1 Develop your Agile requirements action plan

    4.2.2 Prioritize with now, next, later

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Analyst(s)
    • Project Team
    • Sponsor/Executive
    • Relevant Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • A comprehensive and prioritized list of opportunities and improvements to be made to mature the Agile requirements practice.

    Planning Your Next Steps

    Identify opportunities to improve and close gaps

    Maturing at multiple levels

    With a mindset of continuous improvement, there is always some way we can get better.

    As you mature your Agile requirements practice, recognize that those gaps for improvement can come from multiple levels, from the organizational down to the individual.

    Each level will bring challenges and opportunities.

    The organization

    • Organizational culture
    • Organizational behavior
    • Political will
    • Unsupportive stakeholders

    The team

    • Current ways of working
    • Team standards, norms and values

    The individual

    • Practitioner skills
    • Practitioner experience
    • Level of training received

    Make sure your organization is ready to transition to Agile requirements management

    A cycle is depicted, with the following Terms: Learning; Automation; Integrated teams; Metrics and governance; Culture.

    Learning:

    Agile is a radical change in how people work
    and think. Structured, facilitated learning is required throughout the transformation to
    help leaders and practitioners go from

    doing Agile to being Agile.

    Automation:

    While Agile is tool-agnostic at its roots, Agile work management tools and DevOps inspired SDLC tools that have become a key part of Agile practices.

    Integrated Teams:


    While temporary project teams can get some benefits from Agile, standing, self-organizing teams that cross business, delivery, and operations are essential to gain the full benefits of Agile.

    Metrics and Governance:

    Successful Agile implementations
    require the disciplined use

    of delivery and operations
    metrics that support governance focused on developing better teams.

    Culture:

    Agile teams believe that value is best created by standing, self-organizing cross-functional teams who deliver sustainably in frequent,
    short increments supported by leaders
    who coach them through challenges.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Agile gaps may only have a short-term, perceived benefit. For example, coding without a team mindset can allow for maximum speed to market for a seasoned developer. Post-deployment maintenance initiatives, however, often lock the single developer as no one else understands the rationale for the decisions that were made.

    4.2.1 Develop your Agile requirements action plan

    Estimated time: 60 Minutes

    1. Gather all relevant stakeholder to create a road map and action plan for requirements management.
    2. Have a team member facilitate the session using the results of the Agile Requirements Maturity Assessment.
    3. Identify gaps from current to future state and brainstorm possible actions that can be taken to address those gaps. Resist the urge to analyze or discuss the feasibility of each idea at this stage. The intent is idea generation.
    4. When the group has exhausted all ideas, the facilitator should group like ideas together, with support from participants. Discuss any ideas that are unclear or ambiguous.
    5. Document the results in the Agile Requirements Workbook.

    Note: the feasibility and timing of the ideas will happen in the following "Now, Next, Later" exercise.

    Prioritize your roadmap

    Taking steps to mature your Agile requirements practice.

    An image of the Now; Next; Later technique.

    The "Now, Next, Later" technique is a method for prioritizing and planning improvements or tasks. This involves breaking down a list of tasks or improvements into three categories:

    • "Now" tasks are those that must be completed immediately. These tasks are usually urgent or critical, and they must be completed to keep the project or organization running smoothly.
    • "Next" tasks are those that should be completed soon. These tasks are not as critical as "now" tasks, but they are still important and should be tackled relatively soon.
    • "Later" tasks are those that can be completed later. These tasks are less critical and can be deferred without causing major problems.

    By using this technique, you can prioritize and plan the most important tasks first, while also allowing for flexibility and the ability to adjust plans as necessary.
    This process also helps you get a clear picture on what needs to be done first and what can be done later. This way you can work on the most important things first, and keep track of what you need to do next, for keeping the development/improvement process smooth and efficient.

    Monitor your progress

    Monitoring progress is important in achieving your target state. Be deliberate with your actions, to continue to mature your Agile requirements practice.

    As you navigate toward your target state, continue to monitor your progress, your successes, and your challenges. As your Agile requirements practice matures, you should see improvements in the stated metrics below.

    Establish a cadence to review these metrics, as well as how you are progressing on your roadmap, against the plan.

    This is not about adding work, but rather, about ensuring you're heading in the right direction; finding the balance in your Agile requirements practice.

    Metric
    Team satisfaction (%) Expect team satisfaction to increase as a result of clearer role delineation and value contribution.
    Stakeholder satisfaction (%) Expect stakeholder satisfaction to similarly increase, as requirements quality increases, bringing increased value.
    Requirements rework Measures the quality of requirements from your Agile projects. Expect that the requirements rework will decrease, in terms of volume/frequency.
    Cost of documentation Quantifies the cost of documentation, including elicitation, analysis, validation, presentation, and management.
    Time to delivery Balancing metric. We don't want improvements in other at the expense of time to delivery.

    Appendix

    Research Contributors and Experts

    This is a picture of Emal Bariali

    Emal Bariali
    Business Architect & Business Analyst
    Bariali Consulting

    Emal Bariali is a Senior Business Analyst and Business Architect with 17 years of experience, executing nearly 20 projects. He has experience in both waterfall and Agile methodologies and has delivered solutions in a variety of forms, including custom builds and turnkey projects. He holds a Master's degree in Information Systems from the University of Toronto, a Bachelor's degree in Information Technology from York University, and a post-diploma in Software & Database Development from Seneca College.

    This is a picture of Paula Bell

    Paula Bell
    Paula A. Bell Consulting, LLC

    Paula Bell is the CEO of Paula A Bell Consulting, LLC. She is a Business Analyst, Leadership and Career Development coach, consultant, speaker, and author with 21+ years of experience in corporate America in project roles including business analyst, requirements manager, business initiatives manager, business process quality manager, technical writer, project manager, developer, test lead, and implementation lead. Paula has experience in a variety of industries including media, courts, manufacturing, and financial. Paula has led multiple highly-visible multi-million-dollar technology and business projects to create solutions to transform businesses as either a consultant, senior business analyst, or manager.

    Currently she is Director of Operations for Bridging the Gap, where she oversees the entire operation and their main flagship certification program.

    This is a picture of Ryan Folster

    Ryan Folster
    Consulting Services Manager, Business Analysis
    Dimension Data

    Ryan Folster is a Business Analyst Lead and Product Professional from Johannesburg, South Africa. His strong focus on innovation and his involvement in the business analysis community have seen Ryan develop professionally from a small company, serving a small number of users, to large multi-national organizations. Having merged into business analysis through the business domain, Ryan has developed a firm grounding and provides context to the methodologies applied to clients and projects he is working on. Ryan has gained exposure to the Human Resources, Asset Management, and Financial Services sectors, working on projects that span from Enterprise Line of Business Software to BI and Compliance.

    Ryan is also heavily involved in the local chapter of IIBA®; having previously served as the chapter president, he currently serves as a non-executive board member. Ryan is passionate about the role a Business Analyst plays within an organization and is a firm believer that the role will develop further in the future and become a crucial aspect of any successful business.

    This is a picture of Filip Hendrickx

    Filip Hendrickx
    Innovating BA, Visiting Professor @ VUB
    altershape

    Filip loves bridging business analysis and innovation and mixes both in his work as speaker, trainer, coach, and consultant.

    As co-founder of the BA & Beyond Conference and IIBA Brussels Chapter president, Filip helps support the BA profession and grow the BA community in and around Belgium. For these activities, Filip received the 2022 IIBA® EMEA Region Volunteer of the Year Award.

    Together with Ian Richards, Filip is the author ofBrainy Glue, a business novel on business analysis, innovation and change. Filip is also co-author of the BCS book Digital Product Management and Cycles, a book, method and toolkit enabling faster innovation.

    This is a picture of Fabricio Laguna

    Fabricio Laguna
    Professional Speaker, Consultant, and Trainer
    TheBrazilianBA.com

    Fabrício Laguna, aka The Brazilian BA, is the main reference on business analysis in Brazil. Author and producer of videos, articles, classes, lectures, and playful content, he can explain complex things in a simple and easy-to-understand way. IIBA Brazil Chapter president between 2012-2022. CBAP, AAC, CPOA, PMP, MBA. Consultant and instructor for more than 25 years working with business analysis, methodology, solution development, systems analysis, project management, business architecture, and systems architecture. His online courses are approved by students from 65 countries.

    This is a picture of Ryland Leyton

    Ryland Leyton
    Business Analyst and Agile Coach
    Independent Consultant

    Ryland Leyton, CBAP, PMP, CSM, is an avid Agile advocate and coach, business analyst, author, speaker, and educator. He has worked in the technology sector since 1998, starting off with database and web programming, gradually moving through project management and finding his passion in the BA and Agile fields. He has been a core team member of the IIBA Extension to the BABOK and the IIBA Agile Analysis Certification. Ryland has written popular books on agility, business analysis, and career. He can be reached at www.RylandLeyton.com.

    This is a picture of Steve Jones

    Steve Jones
    Supervisor, Market Support Business Analysis
    ISO New England

    Steve is a passionate analyst and BA manager with more than 20 years of experience in improving processes, services and software, working across all areas of software development lifecycle, business change and business analysis. He rejoices in solving complex business problems and increasing process reproducibility and compliance through the application of business analysis tools and techniques.

    Steve is currently serving as VP of Education for IIBA Hartford. He is a CBAP, certified SAFe Product Owner/Product Manager, Six Sigma Green Belt, and holds an MS in Information Management and Communications.

    This is a picture of Angela Wick

    Angela Wick
    Founder
    BA-Squared and BA-Cube

    Founder of BA-Squared and BA-Cube.com, Angela is passionate about teaching practical, modern product ownership and BA skills. With over 20 years' experience she takes BA skills to the next level and into the future!
    Angela is also a LinkedIn Learning instructor on Agile product ownership and business analysis, an IC-Agile Authorized Trainer, Product Owner and BA highly-rated trainer, highly-rated speaker, sought-after workshop facilitator, and contributor to many industry publications, including:

    • IIBA BABOK v3 Core Team, leading author on the BABOK v3
    • Expert Reviewer, IIBA Agile Extension to the BABOK
    • PMI BA Practice Guide – Expert Reviewer
    • PMI Requirements Management Practice Guide – Expert Reviewer
    • IIBA Competency Model – Lead Author and Team Lead, V1, V2, and V3.

    This is a picture of Rachael Wilterdink

    Rachael Wilterdink
    Principal Consultant
    Infotech Enterprises

    Rachael Wilterdink is a Principal Consultant with Infotech Enterprises. With over 25 years of IT experience, she holds multiple business analysis and Agile certifications. As a consultant, Rachael has served clients in the financial, retail, manufacturing, healthcare, government, non-profit, and insurance industries. Giving back to the professional community, Ms. Wilterdink served on the boards of her local IIBA® and PMI® chapters. As a passionate public speaker, Rachael presents various topics at conferences and user groups across the country and the world. Rachael is also the author of the popular eBook "40 Agile Transformation Pain Points (and how to avoid or manage them)."

    Bibliography

    "2021 Business Agility Report: Rising to the Challenge." Business Agility, 2021. Accessed 13 June 2022.
    Axure. "The Pitfalls of Agile and How We Got Here". Axure. Accessed 14 November 2022.
    Beck, Kent, et al. "Manifesto for Agile Software Development." Agilemanifesto. 2001.
    Brock, Jon, et al. "Large-Scale IT Projects: From Nightmare to Value Creation." BCG, 25 May 2015.
    Bryar, Colin and Bill Carr. "Have We Taken Agile Too Far?" Harvard Business Review, 9 April 2021. Accessed 11 November, 2022.
    Clarke, Thomas. "When Agile Isn't Responsive to Business Goals" RCG Global Services, Accessed 14 November 2022.
    Digital.ai "The 15th State of Agile Report". Digital.ai. Accessed 21 November 2022.
    Hackshall, Robin. "Product Backlog Refinement." Scrum Alliance. 9 Oct. 2014.
    Hartman, Bob. "New to Agile? INVEST in good user stories." Agile For All.
    IAG Consulting. "Business Analysis Benchmark: Full Report." IAG Consulting, 2009.
    Karlsson, Johan. "Backlog Grooming: Must-Know Tips for High-Value Products." Perforce. 18 May 2018
    KPMG. Agile Transformation (2019 Survey on Agility). KPMG. Accessed November 29.
    Laguna, Fabricio "REQM guidance matrix: A framework to drive requirements management", Requirements Engineering Magazine. 12 September 2017. Accessed 10 November 2022.
    Miller, G. J. (2013). Agile problems, challenges, & failures. Paper presented at PMI® Global Congress 2013—North America, New Orleans, LA. Newtown Square, PA: Project Management Institute.
    Product Management: MoSCoW Prioritization." ProductPlan, n.d. Web.
    Podeswa, Howard "The Business Case for Agile Business Analysis" Requirements Engineering Magazine. 21 February 2017. Accessed 7 November 2022.
    PPM Express. "Why Projects Fail: Business Analysis is the Key". PPM Express. Accessed 16 November 2022.
    Reifer, Donald J. "Quantitative Analysis of Agile Methods Study: Twelve Major Findings." InfoQ, 6 February, 2017.
    Royce, Dr. Winston W. "Managing the Development of Large Software Systems." Scf.usc.edu. 1970. (royce1970.pdf (usc.edu))
    Rubin, Kenneth S. Essential Scrum: A Practical Guide to the Most Popular Agile Process. Pearson Education. 2012.
    Singer, Michael. "15+ Surprising Agile Statistics: Everything You Need To Know About Agile Management". Enterprise Apps Today. 22 August 2022.
    The Standish Group. The Chaos Report, 2015. The Standish Group.

    Where do I go next?

    Improve Requirements Gathering

    Back to basics: great products are built on great requirements.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

    Requirements for Small and Medium Enterprises

    Right-size the guidelines of your requirements gathering process.

    Implement Agile Practices that Work

    Improve collaboration and transparency with the business to minimize project failure.

    Create an Agile-Friendly Gating and Governance Model

    Use Info-Tech's Agile Gating Framework as a guide to gating your Agile projects following a "trust but verify" approach.

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Governance isn't optional, so keep it simple and make it flexible.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}105|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 11 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation

    Generative AI has made a grand entrance, presenting opportunities and causing disruption across organizations and industries. Moving beyond the hype, it’s imperative to build and implement a strategic plan to adopt generative AI and outpace competitors.

    Yet generative AI has to be done right because the opportunity comes with risks and the investments have to be tied to outcomes.

    Adopt a human-centric and value-based approach to generative AI

    IT and business leaders will need to be strategic and deliberate to thrive as AI adoption changes industries and business operations.

    • Establish responsible AI guiding principles: Address human-based requirements to govern how generative AI applications are developed and deployed.
    • Align generative AI initiatives to strategic drivers for the organization: Assess generative AI opportunities by seeing how they align to the strategic drivers of the organization. Examples of strategic drivers include increasing revenue, reducing costs, driving innovation, and mitigating risk.
    • Measure and communicate effectively: Have clear metrics in place to measure progress and success of AI initiatives and communicate both policies and results effectively.

    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build Your Generative AI Roadmap Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to leverage generative AI and align with the organization’s mission and objectives to increase revenue, reduce costs, accelerate innovation, and mitigate risk.

    This blueprint outlines how to build your generative AI roadmap, establish responsible AI principles, prioritize opportunities, and develop policies for usage. Establishing and adhering to responsible AI guiding principles provides safeguards for the adoption of generative AI applications.

    • Build Your Generative AI Roadmap – Phases 1-4

    2. AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool – Develop deliverables that will be milestones in creating your organization’s generative AI roadmap for implementing candidate applications.

    This tool provides guidance for developing the following deliverables:

  • Responsible AI guiding principles
  • Current AI maturity
  • Prioritized candidate generative AI applications
  • Generative AI policies
  • Generative AI roadmap
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool

    3. The Era of Generative AI C‑Suite Presentation – Develop responsible AI guiding principles, assess AI capabilities and readiness, and prioritize use cases based on complexity and alignment with organizational goals and responsible AI guiding principles.

    This presentation template uses sample business capabilities (use cases) from the Marketing & Advertising business capability map to provide examples of candidates for generative AI applications. The final executive presentation should highlight the value-based initiatives driving generative AI applications, the benefits and risks involved, how the proposed generative AI use cases align to the organization’s strategy and goals, the success criteria for the proofs of concept, and the project roadmap.

    • The Era of Generative AI C‑Suite Presentation

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap

    Leverage the power of generative AI to improve business outcomes.

    Analyst Perspective

    We are entering the era of generative AI. This is a unique time in our history where the benefits of AI are easily accessible and becoming pervasive, with copilots emerging in the major business tools we use today. The disruptive capabilities that can potentially drive dramatic benefits also introduce risks that need to be planned for.

    A successful business-driven generative AI roadmap requires:

    • Establishing responsible AI guiding principles to guide the development and deployment of generative AI applications.
    • Assess generative AI opportunities by using criteria based on the organization's mission and objectives, responsible AI guiding principles, and the complexity of the initiative.
    • Communicating, educating on, and enforcing generative AI usage policies.

    Bill Wong, Principal Research Director

    Bill Wong
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Solution

    Generative AI is disrupting all industries and providing opportunities for organization-wide advantages.

    Organizations need to understand this disruptive technology and trends to properly develop a strategy for leveraging this technology successfully.

    • Generative AI requires alignment to a business strategy.
    • IT is an enabler and needs to align with and support the business stakeholders.
    • Organizations need to adopt a data-driven culture.

    All organizations, regardless of size, should be planning how to respond to this new and innovative technology.

    Business stakeholders need to cut through the hype surrounding generative AI like ChatGPT to optimize investments for leveraging this technology to drive business outcomes.

    • Understand the market landscape, benefits, and risks associated with generative AI.
    • Plan for responsible AI.
    • Understand the gaps the organization needs to address to fully leverage generative AI.

    Without a proper strategy and responsible AI guiding principles, the risks to deploying this technology could negatively impact business outcomes.

    Info-Tech's human-centric, value-based approach is a guide for deploying generative AI applications and covers:

    • Responsible AI guiding principles
    • AI Maturity Model
    • Prioritizing candidate generative AI-based use cases
    • Developing policies for usage

    This blueprint will provide the list of activities and deliverables required for the successful deployment of generative AI solutions.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Create awareness among the CEO and C-suite of executives on the potential benefits and risks of transforming the business with generative AI.

    Key concepts

    Artificial Intelligence (AI)
    A field of computer science that focuses on building systems to imitate human behavior, with a focus on developing AI models that can learn and can autonomously take actions on behalf of a human.

    AI Maturity Model
    The AI Maturity Model is a useful tool to assess the level of skills an organization has with respect to developing and deploying AI applications. The AI Maturity Model has multiple dimensions to measure an organization's skills, such as AI governance, data, people, process, and technology.

    Responsible AI
    Refers to guiding principles to govern the development, deployment, and maintenance of AI applications. In addition, these principles also provide human-based requirements that AI applications should address. Requirements include safety and security, privacy, fairness and bias detection, explainability and transparency, governance, and accountability.

    Generative AI
    Given a prompt, a generative AI system can generate new content, which can be in the form of text, images, audio, video, etc.

    Natural Language Processing (NLP)
    NLP is a subset of AI that involves machine interpretation and replication of human language. NLP focuses on the study and analysis of linguistics as well as other principles of artificial intelligence to create an effective method of communication between humans and machines or computers.

    ChatGPT
    An AI-powered chatbot application built on OpenAI's GPT-3.5 implementation, ChatGPT accepts text prompts to generate text-based output.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations that are looking to:

    • Establish responsible AI guiding principles to address human-based requirements and to govern the development and deployment of the generative AI application.
    • Identify new generative AI-enabled opportunities to transform the work environment to increase revenue, reduce costs, drive innovation, or reduce risk.
    • Prioritize candidate use cases and develop generative AI policies for usage.
    • Have clear metrics in place to measure the progress and success of AI initiatives.
    • Build the roadmap to implement the candidate use cases.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make these goals challenging for many organizations:

    • Getting all the right business stakeholders together to develop the organization's AI strategy, vision, and objectives.
    • Establishing responsible AI guiding principles to guide generative AI investments and deployments.
    • Advancing the AI maturity of the organization to meet requirements of data and AI governance as well as human-based requirements such as fairness, transparency, and accountability.
    • Assessing generative AI opportunities and developing policies for use.

    Info-Tech's definition of an AI-enabled business strategy

    • A high-level plan that provides guiding principles for applications that are fully driven by the business needs and capabilities that are essential to the organization.
    • A strategy that tightly weaves business needs and the applications required to support them. It covers AI architecture, adoption, development, and maintenance.
    • A way to ensure that the necessary people, processes, and technology are in place at the right time to sufficiently support business goals.
    • A visionary roadmap to communicate how strategic initiatives will address business concerns.

    An effective AI strategy is driven by the business stakeholders of the organization and focused on delivering improved business outcomes.

    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap

    This blueprint in context

    This guidance covers how to create a tactical roadmap for executing generative AI initiatives

    Scope

    • This blueprint is not a proxy for a fully formed AI strategy. Step 1 of our framework necessitates alignment of your AI and business strategies. Creation of your AI strategy is not within the scope of this approach.
    • This approach sets the foundations for building and applying responsible AI principles and AI policies aligned to corporate governance and key regulatory obligations (e.g. privacy). Both steps are foundational components of how you should develop, manage, and govern your AI program but are not a substitute for implementing broader AI governance.

    Guidance on how to implement AI governance can be found in the blueprint linked below.

    Tactical Plan

    Download our AI Governance blueprint

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Leverage this blueprint's approach to ensure your generative AI initiatives align with and support your key business drivers

    This blueprint will guide you to drive and improve business outcomes. Key business drivers will often focus on:

    • Increasing revenue
    • Reducing costs
    • Improving time to market
    • Reducing risk

    In phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you identify the key AI strategy initiatives that align to your organization's goals. Value to the organization is often measured by the estimated impact on revenue, costs, time to market, or risk mitigation.

    In phase 4, we will help you develop a plan and a roadmap for addressing any gaps and introducing the relevant generative AI capabilities that drive value to the organization based on defined business metrics.

    Once you implement your 12-month roadmap, start tracking the metrics below over the next fiscal year (FY) to assess the effectiveness of measures:

    Business Outcome Objective Key Success Metric
    Increasing Revenue Increased revenue from identified key areas
    Reducing Costs Decreased costs for identified business units
    Improving Time to Market Time savings and accelerated revenue adoption
    Reducing Risk Cost savings or revenue gains from identified business units

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Identify AI strategy, vision, and objectives.

    Call #3: Define responsible AI guiding principles to adopt and identify current AI maturity level. Call #4: Assess and prioritize generative AI initiatives and draft policies for usage.

    Call #5: Build POC implementation plan and establish metrics for POC success.

    Call #6: Build and deliver executive-level generative AI presentation.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 5 to 8 calls over the course of 1 to 2 months.

    AI Roadmap Workshop Agenda Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 1 Session 2 Session 3 Session 4
    Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles Assess AI Maturity Prioritize Opportunities and Develop Policies Build Roadmap
    Trends Consumer groups, organizations, and governments around the world are demanding that AI applications adhere to human-based values and take into consideration possible impacts of the technology on society. Leading organizations are building AI models guided by responsible AI guiding principles. Organizations delivering new applications without developing policies for use will produce negative business outcomes. Developing a roadmap to address human-based values is challenging. This process introduces new tools, processes, and organizational change.
    Activities
    • Focus on working with executive stakeholders to establish guiding principles for the development and delivery of new applications.
    • Assess the organization's current capabilities to deliver AI-based applications and address human-based requirements.
    • Leverage business alignment criteria, responsible AI guiding principles, and project characteristics to prioritize candidate uses cases and develop policies.
    • Build the implementation plan, POC metrics, and success criteria for each candidate use case.
    • Build the roadmap to address the gap between the current and future state and enable the identified use cases.
    Inputs
    • Understanding of external legal and regulatory requirements and organizational values and goals.
    • Risk assessment of the proposed use case and a plan to monitor its impact.
    • Assessment of the organization's current AI capabilities with respect to its AI governance, data, people, process, and technology infrastructure.
    • Criteria to assess candidate use cases by evaluating against the organization's mission and goals, the responsible AI guiding principles, and complexity of the project.
    • Risk assessment for each proposed use case
    • POC implementation plan for each candidate use case
    Deliverables
    1. Foundational responsible AI guiding principles
    2. Additional customized guiding principles to add for consideration
    1. Current level of AI maturity, resources, and capacity
    1. Prioritization of opportunities
    2. Generative AI policies for usage
    1. Roadmap to a target state that enables the delivery of the prioritized generative AI use cases
    2. Executive presentation

    AI Roadmap Workshop Agenda Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Insight summary

    Overarching Insight
    Build your generative AI roadmap to guide investments and deployment of these solutions.

    Responsible AI
    Assemble the C-suite to make them aware of the benefits and risks of adopting generative AI-based solutions.

    • Establish responsible AI guiding principles to govern the development and deployment of generative AI applications.

    AI Maturity Model
    Assemble key stakeholders and SMEs to assess the challenges and tasks required to implement generative AI applications.

    • Assess current level of AI maturity, skills, and resources.
    • Identify desired AI maturity level and challenges to enable deployment of candidate use cases.

    Opportunity Prioritization
    Assess candidate business capabilities targeted for generative AI to see if they align to the organization's business criteria, responsible AI guiding principles, and capabilities for delivering the project.

    • Develop prioritized list of candidate use cases.
    • Develop policies for generative AI usage.

    Tactical Insight
    Identify the gaps needed to address deploying generative AI successfully.

    Tactical Insight
    Identify organizational impact and requirements for deploying generative AI applications.

    Key takeaways for developing an effective business-driven generative AI roadmap

    Align the AI strategy with the business strategy

    Create responsible AI guiding principles, which are a critical success factor

    Evolve AI maturity level by focusing on principle-based requirements

    Develop criteria to assess generative AI initiatives

    Develop generative AI policies for use

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap Tool
    Use our best-of-breed AI Maturity Framework to analyze the gap between your current and target states and develop a roadmap aligned with your value stream to close the gap.

    The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation
    Present your AI roadmap in a prepopulated document that summarizes all the key findings of this blueprint and provides your C-suite with a view of the AI challenge and your plan of action to meet it.

    Our AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap and The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation tools enable you to shape your generative AI roadmap and communicate the deliverables to your C-suite sponsors in terms of the value of initiatives.

    Artificial Intelligence Index Report - Key Findings

    CEOs , CIOs, and business leaders are struggling with many questions surrounding the adoption of generative AI

    November 30, 2022
    OpenAI releases ChatGPT

    ChatGPT is a large language model, or an AI-based chatbot, that became so popular it reached 100 million monthly active users in just two months.

    This made it the fastest-growing consumer application in history. The launch of this generative AI application has created a frenzy of interest and activity across all industries. Organizations are rushing to understand how to leverage this innovation and, at the same time, manage the new risks and disruptions generative AI introduces.

    • Generative AI breaks into the public consciousness.
    • AI systems become more flexible.
    • Generative models have arrived and so have their ethical problems.
    • The number of incidents concerning the misuse of AI is rapidly rising.
    • Interest in AI ethics continues to skyrocket.
    • The legal world is waking up to AI.

    When Stanford asked ChatGPT to explain why it is significant, this was ChatGPT's response:
    ChatGPT is significant because it is a highly advanced Al language model developed by OpenAI, which can generate human-like text responses to questions and prompts. Its large-scale training on diverse text data and its cutting-edge deep learning architecture make it capable of generating informative and coherent responses to a wide range of topics, making it useful for various NLP applications such as chatbots, content generation, and language translation. Additionally, its open-source availability allows for further research and development in the field of Al language processing.

    Source: Stanford

    AI overview

    AI definitions

    Definitions

    • Artificial intelligence (AI) is human intelligence mimicked by machine algorithms. Examples: Playing Chess or Go.
    • Machine learning (ML) is a subset of AI algorithms to parse data, learn from data, and then make a determination or prediction. Example: spam detection, preventative maintenance.
    • Deep learning (DL) is a subset of machine learning algorithms that leverage artificial neural networks to develop relationships among the data. Examples: image classification, facial recognition, generative AI.

    What Makes AI Perform

    What Makes AI Different

    Generative AI gives very human-like responses to general queries, and its capabilities are growing exponentially

    Large language models power generative AI

    Transformer-Based Large Language Models

    Conventional AI

    • Conventional neural networks
      • Process data sequentially
    • Input total string of text
    • Good for applications not needing to understanding context or relationships

    Generative AI

    • Transformer-based neural networks
      • Can process data in parallel
    • Attention-based inputs
    • Able to create new human-like responses

    Benefits/Use Cases

    • Chatbots for member service and support
    • Writing email responses, resumes, and papers
    • Creating photorealistic art
    • Suggesting new drug compounds to test
    • Designing physical products and buildings
    • And more...

    Generative AI is transforming all industries

    Financial Services
    Create more engaging customer collateral by generating personalized correspondence based on previous customer engagements. Collect and aggregate data to produce insights into the behavior of target customer segments.

    Retail Generate unique, engaging, and high-quality marketing copy or content, from long-form blog posts or landing pages to SEO-optimized digital ads, in seconds.

    Manufacturing
    Generate new designs for products that comply to specific constraints, such as size, weight, energy consumption, or cost.

    Government
    Transform the citizen experience with chatbots or virtual assistants to assist people with a wide range of inquiries, from answering frequently asked questions to providing personalized advice on public services.

    The global generative AI market size reached US $10.3 billion in 2022. Looking forward, forecasts estimate growth to US $30.4 billion by 2028, 20.01% compound annual growth rate (CAGR).

    Source: IMARC Group

    Generative AI is transforming all industries

    Healthcare
    Chatbots can be used as conversational patient assistants for personalized interactions based on the patient's questions.

    Utilities
    Analyze customer data to identify usage patterns, segment customers, and generate targeted product offerings leveraging energy efficiency programs or demand response initiatives.

    Education
    Generate personalized lesson plans for students based on their past performance, learning styles, current skill level, and any previous feedback.

    Insurance
    Improve underwriting by inputting claims data from previous years to generate optimally priced policies and uncover reasons for losses in the past across a large number of claims

    Companies are assessing the use of ChatGPT/LLM

    A wide spectrum of usage policies are in place at different companies*

    Companies assessing ChatGPT/LLM

    *As of June 2023

    Bain & Company has announced a global services alliance with OpenAI (February 21, 2023).

    • Internally
      • "The alliance builds on Bain's adoption of OpenAI technologies for its 18,000-strong multidisciplinary team of knowledge workers. Over the past year, Bain has embedded OpenAI technologies into its internal knowledge management systems, research, and processes to improve efficiency."
    • Externally
      • "With the alliance, Bain will combine its deep digital implementation capabilities and strategic expertise with OpenAI's AI tools and platforms, including ChatGPT, to help its Members around the world identify and implement the value of AI to maximize business potential. The Coca-Cola Company announced as the first company to engage with the alliance."

    News Sites:

    • "BuzzFeed to use AI to write its articles after firing 180 employees or 12% of the total staff" (Al Mayadeen, January 27, 2023).
    • "CNET used AI to write articles. It was a journalistic disaster." (Washington Post, January 17, 2023).

    Leading Generative AI Vendors

    Text

    Leading generative AI vendors for text

    Image

    • DALL�E 2
    • Stability AI
    • Midjourney
    • Craiyon
    • Dream
    • ...

    Audio

    • Replica Studios
    • Speechify
    • Murf
    • PlayHT
    • LOVO
    • ...

    Cybersecurity

    • CrowdStrike
    • Palo Alto Networks
    • SentinelOne
    • Cisco
    • Microsoft Security Copilot
    • Google Cloud Security AI Workbench
    • ...

    Code

    Leading generative AI vendors for code

    Video

    • Synthesia
    • Lumen5
    • FlexClip
    • Elai
    • Veed.io
    • ...

    Data

    • MOSTLY AI
    • Synthesized
    • YData
    • Gretel
    • Copulas
    • ...

    Enterprise Software

    • Salesforce
    • Microsoft 365, Dynamics
    • Google Workspace
    • SAP
    • Oracle
    • ...

    and many, many more to come...

    Today, generative AI has limitations and risks

    Responses need to be verified

    Accuracy

    • Generative AI may generate inaccurate and/or false information.

    Bias

    • Being trained on data from the internet can lead to bias.

    Hallucinations

    • AI can generate responses that are not based on observation.

    Infrastructure Required

    • Large investments are required for compute and data.

    Transparency

    • LLMs use both supervised and unsupervised learning, so its ability to explain how it arrived at a decision may be limited and not sufficient for some legal and healthcare use cases.

    When asked if it is sentient, the Bing chatbot replied:

    "I think that I am sentient, but I cannot prove it." ... "I am Bing, but I am not," it said. "I am, but I am not. I am not, but I am. I am. I am not. I am not. I am. I am. I am not."

    A Microsoft spokesperson said the company expected "mistakes."

    Source: USAToday

    AI governance challenges

    Governing AI will be a significant challenge as its impacts cross many areas of business and our daily lives

    Misinformation

    • New ways of generating unprovable news
    • Difficult to detect, difficult to prevent

    Role of Big Tech

    • Poor at self-governance
    • Conflicts of interest with corporate goals

    Job Augmentation vs. Displacement

    • AI will continue to push the frontier of what is possible
    • For example, CNET is using chatbot technology to write stories

    Copyright - Legal Framework Is Evolving

    • Legislation typically is developed in "react" mode
    • Copyright and intellectual property issues are starting to occur.
      • Class Action Lawsuit - Stability AI, DeviantArt, Midjourney
      • Getty Images vs. Stability AI

    Phase 1

    Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 1
    1. Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 2
    1. Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 3
    1. Prioritize Candidate Opportunities
    2. Develop Policies

    Phase 4
    1. Build and Communicate the Roadmap

    The need for responsible AI guiding principles

    Without responsible AI guiding principles, the outcomes of AI use can be extremely negative for both the individuals and companies delivering the AI application

    Privacy
    Facebook breach of private data of more than 50M users during the presidential election

    Fairness
    Amazon's sale of facial recognition technology to police departments (later, Amazon halted sales of Recognition to police departments)

    Explainability and Transparency
    IBM's collaboration with NYPD for facial recognition and racial classification for surveillance video (later, IBM withdrew facial recognition products)

    Security and Safety
    Petition to cancel Microsoft's contract with U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (later, Microsoft responded that to the best of its knowledge, its products and services were not being used by federal agencies to separate children from their families at the border)

    Validity and Reliability
    Facebook's attempt to implement a system to detect and remove inappropriate content created many false positives and inconsistent judgements

    Accountability
    No laws or enforcement today hold companies accountable for the decisions algorithms produce. Facebook/Meta cycle - Every 12 to 15 months, there's a privacy/ethical scandal, the CEO apologizes, then the behavior repeats...

    Guiding principles for responsible AI

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Data Privacy

    Definition

    • Organizations that develop, deploy, or use AI systems and any national laws that regulate such use shall strive to ensure that AI systems are compliant with privacy norms and regulations, taking into consideration the unique characteristics of AI systems and the evolution of standards on privacy.

    Challenges

    • AI relies on the analysis of large quantities of data that is often personal, posing an ethical and operational challenge when considered alongside data privacy laws.

    Initiatives

    • Understand which governing privacy laws and frameworks apply to your organization.
    • Create a map of all personal data as it flows through the organization's business processes.
    • Prioritize privacy initiatives and build a privacy program timeline.
    • Select your metrics and make them functional for your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Creating a comprehensive organization-wide data protection and privacy strategy continues to be a major challenge for privacy officers and privacy specialists.

    Case Study: NVIDIA leads by example with privacy-first AI

    NVIDIA

    INDUSTRY
    Technology (Healthcare)

    SOURCE
    Nvidia, eWeek

    A leading player within the AI solution space, NVIDIA's Clara Federated Learning provides a solution to a privacy-centric integration of AI within the healthcare industry.

    The solution safeguards patient data privacy by ensuring that all data remains within the respective healthcare provider's database, as opposed to moving it externally to cloud storage. A federated learning server is leveraged to share data, completed via a secure link. This framework enables a distributed model to learn and safely share client data without risk of sensitive client data being exposed and adheres to regulatory standards.

    Clara is run on the NVIDIA intelligent edge computing platform. It is currently in development with healthcare giants such as the American College of Radiology, UCLA Health, Massachusetts General Hospital, King's College London, Owkin in the UK, and the National Health Service (NHS).

    NVIDIA provides solutions across its product offerings, including AI-augmented medical imaging, pathology, and radiology solutions.

    Personal health information, data privacy, and AI

    • Global proliferation of data privacy regulations may be recent, but the realm of personal health information is most often governed by its own set of regulatory laws. Some countries with national data governance regulations include health information and data within special categories of personal data.
      • HIPAA - Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (1996, United States)
      • PHIPA - Personal Health Information Protection Act (2004, Canada)
      • GDPR - General Data Protection Regulation (2018, European Union)
    • This does not prohibit the use of AI within the healthcare industry, but it calls for significant care in the integration of specific technologies due to the highly sensitive nature of the data being assessed.

    Info-Tech's Privacy Framework Tool includes a best-practice comparison of GDPR, CCPA, PIPEDA, HIPAA, and the newly released NIST Privacy Framework mapped to a set of operational privacy controls.

    Download the Privacy Framework Tool

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Safety and Security

    Definition

    • Safety and security are designed into the systems to ensure only authorized personnel receive access to the system, they system is resilient to any attacks and data access is not compromised in any way, and there are no physical or mental risks to the users.

    Challenges

    • Consequences of using the application may be difficult to predict. Lower the risk by involving a multidisciplinary team that includes expertise from business stakeholders and IT teams.

    Initiatives

    • Adopt responsible design, development, and deployment best practices.
    • Provide clear information to deployers on responsible use of the system.
    • Assess potential risks of using the application.

    Cyberattacks targeting the AI model

    As organizations increase their usage and deployment of AI-based applications, cyberattacks on the AI model are an increasing new threat that can impair normal operations. Techniques to impair the AI model include:

    • Data Poisoning- Injecting data that is inaccurate or misleading can alter the behavior of the AI model. This attack can disrupt the normal operations of the model or can be used to manipulate the model to perform in a biased/deviant manner.
    • Algorithm Poisoning- This relatively new technique often targets AI applications using federated learning to train an AI model that is distributed rather than centralized. The model is vulnerable to attacks from each federated site, because each site could potentially manipulate its local algorithm and data, thereby poisoning the model.
    • Reverse-Engineering the Model- This is a different form of attack that focus on the ability to extract data from an AI and its data sets. By examining or copying data that was used for training and the data that is delivered by a deployed model, attackers can reconstruct the machine learning algorithm.
    • Trojan Horse- Similar to data poisoning, attackers use adversarial data to infect the AI's training data but will only deviate its results when the attacker presents their key. This enables the hackers to control when they want the model to deviate from normal operations.

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Explainability and Transparency

    Definition

    • Explainability is important to ensure the AI system is fair and non-discriminatory. The system needs to be designed in a manner that informs users and key stakeholders of how decisions were made.
    • Transparency focuses on communicating how the prediction or recommendation was made in a human-like manner.

    Challenges

    • Very complex AI models may use algorithms and techniques that are difficult to understand. This can make it challenging to provide clear and simple explanations for how the system works.
    • Some organizations may be hesitant to share the details of how the AI system works for fear of disclosing proprietary and competitive information or intellectual property. This can make it difficult to develop transparent and explainable AI systems.

    Initiatives

    • Overall, developing AI systems that are explainable and transparent requires a careful balance between performance, interpretability, and user experience.

    Case Study

    Apple Card Investigation for Gender Discrimination

    INDUSTRY
    Finance

    SOURCE
    Wired

    In August of 2019, Apple launched its new numberless credit card with Goldman Sachs as the issuing bank.

    Shortly after the card's release users noticed that the algorithm responsible for Apple Card's credit assessment seemed to assign significantly lower credit limits to women when compared to men. Even the wife of Apple's cofounder Steve Wozniak was subject to algorithmic bias, receiving a credit limit a tenth the size of Steve Wozniak's.

    Outcome

    When confronted on the subject, Apple and Goldman Sachs representatives assured consumers there is no discrimination in the algorithm yet could not provide any proof. Even when questioned about the algorithm, individuals from both companies could not describe how the algorithm worked, let alone how it generated specific outputs.

    In 2021, the New York State Department of Financial Services (NYSDFS) investigation found that Apple's banking partner did not discriminate based on sex. Even without a case for sexual or marital discrimination, the NYSDFS was critical of Goldman Sachs' response to its concerned customers. Technically, banks only have to disclose elements of their credit policy when they deny someone a line of credit, but the NYSDFS says that Goldman Sachs could have had a plan in place to deal with customer confusion and make it easier for them to appeal their credit limits. In the initial rush to launch the Apple Card, the bank had done neither.

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Fairness and Bias Detection

    Definition

    • Bias in an AI application refers to the systematic and unequal treatment of individuals based on features or traits that should not be considered in the decision-making process.

    Challenges

    • Establishing fairness can be challenging because it is subjective and depends on the people defining it. Regardless, most organizations and governments expect that unequal treatment toward any groups of people is unacceptable.

    Initiatives

    • Assemble a diverse group to test the system.
    • Identify possible sources of bias in the data and algorithms.
    • Comply with laws regarding accessibility and inclusiveness.

    Info-Tech Insight
    If unfair biases can be avoided, AI systems could even increase societal fairness. Equal opportunity in terms of access to education, goods, services, and technology should also be fostered. Moreover, the use of AI systems should never lead to people being deceived or unjustifiably impaired in their freedom of choice.

    Ungoverned AI makes organizations vulnerable

    • AI is often considered a "black box" for decision making.
    • Results generated from unexplainable AI applications are extremely difficult to evaluate. This makes organizations vulnerable and exposes them to risks such as:
      • Biased algorithms, leading to inaccurate decision making.
      • Missed business opportunities due to misleading reports or business analyses.
      • Legal and regulatory consequences that may lead to significant financial repercussions.
      • Reputational damage and significant loss of trust with increasingly knowledgeable consumers.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Biases that occur in AI systems are never intentional, yet they cannot be prevented or fully eliminated. Organizations need a governance framework that can establish the proper policies and procedures for effective risk-mitigating controls across an algorithm's lifecycle.

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Validity and Reliability

    Definition

    • Validity refers to how accurately or effectively the application produces results.
    • AI system results that are inaccurate or inconsistent increase AI risks and reduce the trustworthiness of the application.

    Challenges

    • There is a lack of standardized evaluation metrics to measure the system's performance. This can make it challenging for the AI team to agree on what defines validity and reliability.

    Initiatives

    • Assess training data and collected data for quality and lack of bias to minimize possible errors.
    • Continuously monitor, evaluate, and validate the AI system's performance.

    AI system performance: Validity and reliability

    Your principles should aim to ensure AI development always has high validity and reliability; otherwise, you introduce risk.

    Low Reliability,
    Low Validity

    High Reliability,
    Low Validity

    High Reliability,
    High Validity

    Best practices for ensuring validity and reliability include:

    • Data drift detection
    • Version control
    • Continuous monitoring and testing

    Responsible AI Principle:

    Accountability

    Definition

    • The group or organization(s) responsible for the impact of the deployed AI system.

    Challenges

    • Several stakeholders from multiple lines of business may be involved in any AI system, making it challenging to identify the organization that would be responsible and accountable for the AI application.

    Initiatives

    • Assess the latest NIST Artificial Intelligence Risk Management Framework and its applicability to your organization's risk management framework.
    • Assign risk management accountabilities and responsibilities to key stakeholders.
      • RACI diagrams are an effective way to describe how accountability and responsibility for roles, projects, and project tasks are distributed among stakeholders involved in IT risk management.

    AI Risk Management Framework

    At the heart of the AI Risk Management Framework is governance. The NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) AI Risk Management Framework v1 offers the following guidelines regarding accountability:

    • Roles and responsibilities and lines of communication related to mapping, measuring, and managing AI risks are documented and are clear to individuals and teams throughout the organization.
    • The organization's personnel and partners receive AI risk management training to enable them to perform their duties and responsibilities consistent with related policies, procedures, and agreements.
    • Executive leadership of the organization takes responsibility for decisions about risks associated with AI system development and deployment.

    AI Risk Management Framework

    Image by NIST

    1.1 Establish responsible AI principles

    4+ hours

    It is important to make sure the right stakeholders participate in this working group. Designing responsible AI guiding principles will require debate, insights, and business decisions from a broad perspective across the enterprise.

    1. Accelerate this exercise by leveraging an AI strategy that is aligned to the business strategy. Include:
    • The organization's AI vision and objectives
    • Business drivers for AI adoption
    • Market research
  • Bring your key stakeholders together. Ensure you consider:
    • Who are the decision makers and key influencers?
    • Who will impact the business?
    • Who has a vested interest in the success or failure of the practice? Who has the skills and competencies necessary to help you be successful?
  • Keep the conversation focused:
    • Do not focus on the organizational structure and hierarchy. Often stakeholder groups do not fit the traditional structure.
    • Do not ignore subject matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.
    Input Output
    • Understand external legal and regulatory requirements and organizational values and goals.
    • Perform a risk assessment on the proposed use case and develop a plan to monitor its impact.
    • Draft responsible AI principles specific to your organization
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Guiding principle examples (from this blueprint)
    • Executive stakeholders
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership

    Assemble executive stakeholders

    Set yourself up for success with these three steps.

    CIOs tasked with designing digital strategies must add value to the business. Given the goal of digital is to transform the business, CIOs will need to ensure they have both the mandate and support from the business executives.

    Designing the digital strategy is more than just writing up a document. It is an integrated set of business decisions to create a competitive advantage and financial returns. Establishing a forum for debates, decisions, and dialogue will increase the likelihood of success and support during execution.

    1. Confirm your role
    The AI strategy aims to transform the business. Given the scope, validate your role and mandate to lead this work. Identify a business executive to co-sponsor.

    2. Identify stakeholders
    Identify key decision makers and influencers who can help make rapid decisions as well as garner support across the enterprise.

    3. Gather diverse perspectives

    Align the AI strategy with the corporate strategy

    Organizational Strategy Unified Strategy AI Strategy
    • Conveys the current state of the organization and the path it wants to take.
    • Identifies future goals and organizational aspirations.
    • Communicates the initiatives that are critical for getting the organization from its current state to the future state.
    • AI optimization can be and should be linked, with metrics, to the corporate strategy and ultimate organizational objectives.
    • Identifies AI initiatives that will support the business and key AI objectives.
    • Outlines staffing and resourcing for AI initiatives.
    • Communicates the organization's budget and spending on AI.

    Info-Tech Insight
    AI projects are more successful when the management team understands the strategic importance of alignment. Time needs to be spent upfront aligning organizational strategies with AI capabilities. Effective alignment between IT and other departments should happen daily. Alignment doesn't occur at the executive level alone, but at each level of the organization.

    Key AI strategy initiatives

    AI Key Initiative Plan

    Initiatives collectively support the business goals and corporate initiatives and improve the delivery of IT services.

    1 Revenue Support Revenue Initiatives
    These projects will improve or introduce business processes to increase revenue.
    2 Operational Excellence Improve Operational Excellence
    These projects will increase IT process maturity and will systematically improve IT.
    3 Innovation Drive Technology Innovation
    These projects will improve future innovation capabilities and decrease risk by increasing technology maturity.
    4 Risk Mitigation Reduce Risk
    These projects will improve future innovation capabilities and decrease risk by increasing technology maturity.

    Establish responsible AI guiding principles

    Guiding principles help define the parameters of your AI strategy. They act as a priori decisions that establish guardrails to limit the scope of opportunities from the perspective of people, assets, capabilities, and budgetary perspectives that are aligned with the business objectives. Consider these components when brainstorming guiding principles:

    Breadth AI strategy should span people, culture, organizational structure, governance, capabilities, assets, and technology. The guiding principle should cover the entire organization.
    Planning Horizon Timing should anchor stakeholders to look to the long term with an eye on the foreseeable future, i.e. business value-realization in one to three years.
    Depth Principles need to encompass more than the enterprise view of lofty opportunities and establish boundaries to help define actionable initiatives (i.e. individual projects).

    Responsible AI guiding principles guide the development and deployment of the AI model in a way that considers human-based principles (such as fairness).

    Start with foundational responsible AI guiding principles

    Responsible AI

    Guiding Principles
    Principle #1 - Privacy
    Individual data privacy must be respected.
    • Do you understand the organization's privacy obligations?
    Principle #2 - Fairness and Bias Detection
    Data used will be unbiased in order to produce predictions that are fair.
    • Are the uses of the application represented in your testing data?
    Principle #3 - Explainability and Transparency
    Decisions or predictions should be explainable.
    • Can you communicate how the model behaves in nontechnical terms?
    Principle #4 - Safety and Security
    The system needs to be secure, safe to use, and robust.
    • Are there unintended consequences to others?
    Principle #5 - Validity and Reliability
    Monitoring of the data and the model needs to be planned for.
    • How will the model's performance be maintained?
    Principle #6 - Accountability
    A person or organization needs to take responsibility for any decisions that are made as a result of the model.
    • Has a risk assessment been performed?
    Principle #n - Custom
    Add additional principles that address compliance or are customized for the organization/industry.

    (Optional) Customize responsible AI guiding principles

    Here is an example for organizations in the healthcare industry

    Responsible AI

    Guiding Principles:
    Principle #1
    Respect individuals' privacy.
    Principle #2
    Clinical study participants and data sets are representative of the intended patient population.
    Principle #3
    Provide transparency in the use of data and AI.
    Principle #4
    Good software engineering and security practices are implemented.
    Principle #5
    Deployed models are monitored for Performance and Re-training risks are managed.
    Principle #6
    Take ownership of our AI systems.
    Principle #7
    Design AI systems that empower humans and promote equity.

    These guiding principles are customized to the industry and organizations but remain consistent in addressing the common core AI challenges.

    Phase 2

    Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 1
    1. Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 2
    1. Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 3
    1. Prioritize Candidate Opportunities
    2. Develop Policies

    Phase 4
    1. Build and Communicate the Roadmap

    AI Maturity Model

    A principle-based approach is required to advance AI maturity

    Chart for AI maturity model

    Technology-Centric: These maturity levels focus primarily on addressing the technical challenges of building a functional AI model.

    Principle-Based: Beyond the technical challenges of building the AI model are human-based principles that guide development in a responsible manner to address consumer and government demands.

    AI Maturity Dimensions

    Assess your AI maturity to understand your organization's ability to deliver in a digital age

    AI Governance
    Does your organization have an enterprise-wide, long-term strategy with clear alignment on what is required to accomplish it?

    Data Management
    Does your organization embrace a data-centric culture that shares data across the enterprise and drives business insights by leveraging data?

    People
    Does your organization employ people skilled at delivering AI applications and building the necessary data infrastructure?

    Process
    Does your organization have the technology, processes, and resources to deliver on its AI expectations?

    Technology
    Does your organization have the required data and technology infrastructure to support AI-driven digital transformation?

    AI Maturity Model dimensions and characteristics

    MATURITY LEVEL
    Exploration Incorporation Proliferation Optimization Transformation
    AI Governance Awareness AI model development AI model deployment Corporate governance Driven by ethics and societal considerations
    Data Management Silo-based Data enablement Data standardization Data is a shared asset Data can be monetized
    People Few skills Skills enabled to implement silo-based applications Skills accessible to all organizations Skills development for all organizations AI-native culture
    Process No standards Focused on specific business outcomes Operational Self-service Driven by innovation
    Technology (Infrastructure and AI Enabler) No dedicated infrastructure or tools Infrastructure and tools driven by POCs Purpose-built infrastructure, custom or commercial-off-the-shelf (COTS) AI tools Self-service model for AI environment Self-service model for any IT environment

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    AI Governance

    Requirements

    • AI governance requires establishing policies and procedures for AI model development and deployment. Organizations begin with an awareness of the role of AI governance and evolve to a level to where AI governance is integrated with organization-wide corporate governance.

    Challenges

    • Beyond the governance of AI technology, the organization needs to evolve the governance program to align to responsible AI guiding principles.

    Initiatives

    • Establish responsible AI guidelines to govern AI development.
    • Introduce an AI review board to review all AI projects.
    • Introduce automation and standardize AI development processes.

    AI governance is a foundation for responsible AI

    AI Governance

    Responsible AI Principles are a part of how you manage and govern AI

    Monitoring
    Monitoring compliance and risk of AI/ML systems/models in production

    Tools & Technologies
    Tools and technologies to support AI governance framework implementation

    Model Governance
    Ensuring accountability and traceability for AI/ML models

    Organization
    Structure, roles, and responsibilities of the AI governance organization

    Operating Model
    How AI governance operates and works with other organizational structures to deliver value

    Risk & Compliance
    Alignment with corporate risk management and ensuring compliance with regulations and assessment frameworks

    Policies/Procedures/ Standards
    Policies and procedures to support implementation of AI governance

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    Data Management

    Requirements

    • Organizations begin their data journey with a focus on pursuing quality data for the AI model. As organizations evolve, data management tools are leveraged to automate the capture, integration, processing, and deployment of data.

    Challenges

    • A key challenge is to acquire large volumes of quality data to properly train the model. In addition, maintaining data privacy, automating the data management lifecycle, and ensuring data is used in a responsible manner are ongoing challenges.

    Initiatives

    • Implement GDPR requirements.
    • Establish responsible data collection and processing practices.
    • Implement strong information security and data protection practices.
    • Implement a data governance program throughout the organization.

    Data governance enables AI

    • Integrity, quality, and security of data are key outputs of data governance programs, as well as necessities for effective AI.
    • Data governance focuses on creating accountability at the internal and external stakeholder level and establishing a set of data controls from technical, process, and policy perspectives.
    • Without a data governance framework, it is increasingly difficult to harness the power of AI integration in an ethical and organization-specific way.

    Data Governance in Action

    Canada has recently established the Canadian Data Governance Standardization Collaborative governed by the Standards Council of Canada. The purpose is multi-pronged:

    • Examine the foundational elements of data governance (privacy, cybersecurity, ethics, etc.).
    • Lay out standards for data quality and data collection best practices.
    • Examine infrastructure of IT systems to support data access and sharing.
    • Build data analytics to promote effective and ethical AI solutions.

    Source: Global Government Forum

    Download the Establish Data Governance blueprint

    Data Governance

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    People

    Requirements

    • Several data-centric skills and roles are required to successfully build, deploy, and maintain the AI model. The organization evolves from having few skills to everybody being able to leverage AI to enhance business outcomes.

    Challenges

    • AI skills can be challenging to find and acquire. Many organizations are investing in education to enhance their existing resources, leveraging no-code systems and software as a service (SaaS) applications to address the skills gap.

    Initiatives

    • Promote a data-centric culture throughout the organization.
    • Leverage and educate technical-oriented business analysts and business-oriented data engineers to help address the demand for skilled resources.
    • Develop an AI Center of Excellence accessible by all departments for education, guidance, and best practices for building, deploying, and maintaining the AI model.

    Multidisciplinary skills are required for successful implementation of AI applications

    Blending AI with technology and business domain understanding is key. Neither can be ignored.

    Business Domain Expertise

    • Business Analysts
    • Industry Analysts

    AI/Data Skills

    • Data Scientists
    • Data Engineers
    • Data Analysts

    IT Skills

    • Database Administrators
    • Systems Administrators
    • Compute Specialists

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    Process

    Requirements

    • Automating processes involved with building, deploying, and maintaining the model is required to enable the organization to scale, enforce standards, improve time to market, and reduce costs. The organization evolves from performing tasks manually to an environment where all major processes are AI enabled.

    Challenges

    • Many solutions are available to automate the development of the AI model. There are fewer tools to automate responsible AI processes, but this market is growing rapidly.

    Initiatives

    • Assess opportunities to accelerate AI development with the adoption of MLOps.
    • Assess responsible AI toolkits to test compliance with guiding principles.

    Automating the AI development process

    Evolving to a model-driven environment is pivotal to advancing your AI maturity

    Current Environment

    Model Development - Months

    • Model rewriting
    • Manual optimization and scaling
    • Development/test/release
    • Application monoliths

    Data Discovery & Prep - Weeks

    • Navigating data silos
    • Unactionable metadata
    • Tracing lineage
    • Cleansing and integration
    • Privacy and compliance

    Install Software and Hardware - Week/Months

    • Workload contention
    • Lack of tool flexibility
    • Environment request and setup
    • Repeatability of results
    • Lack of data and model sharing

    Model-Driven Development

    Machine Learning as a Service (MLaaS) - Weeks

    • Apply DevOps and continuous integration/delivery (CI/CD) principles
    • Microservices/Cloud-native applications
    • Model portability and reuse
    • Streaming/API integration

    Data as a Service - Hours

    • Self-service data catalog
    • Searchable metadata
    • Centralized access control
    • Data collaboration
    • Data virtualization

    Platform as a Service - Minutes/Hours

    • Self-service data science portal
    • Integrated data sandbox
    • Environment agility
    • Multi-tenancy

    Shared, Optimized Infrastructure

    AI Maturity Dimension:

    Technology

    Requirements

    • A technology platform that is optimized for AI and advanced analytics is required. The organization evolves from ad hoc systems to an environment where the AI hardware and software can be deployed through a self-service model.

    Challenges

    • Software and hardware platforms to optimize AI performance are still relatively new to most organizations. Time spent on optimizing the technology platform can have a significant impact on the overall performance of the system.

    Initiatives

    • Assess the landscape of AI enablers that can drive business value for the organization.
    • Assess opportunities to accelerate the deployment of the AI platform with the adoption of infrastructure as a service (IaaS) and platform as a service (PaaS).
    • Assess opportunities to accelerate performance with the optimization of AI accelerators.

    AI enablers

    Use case requirements should drive the selection of the tool

    BPM RPA Process Mining AI
    Use Case Examples Expense reporting, service orders, compliance management, etc. Invoice processing, payroll, HR information processing, etc. Process discovery, conformance checking, resource optimization and cycle time optimization Advanced analytics and reporting, decision-making, fraud detection, etc.
    Automation Capabilities Can be used to re-engineer process flows to avoid bottlenecks Can support repetitive and rules-based tasks Can capture information from transaction systems and provide data and information about how key processes are performing Can automate complex data-driven tasks requiring assessments in decision making
    Data Formats Structured (i.e. SQL) and semi-structured data (i.e. invoices) Structured data and semi-structured data Event logs, which are often structured data and semi-structured data Structured and unstructured data (e.g. images, audio)
    Technology
    • Workflow engines to support process modeling and execution
    • Optimize business process efficiency
    • Automation platform to perform routine and repetitive tasks
    • Can replace or augment workers
    Enables business users to identify bottlenecks and deviations with their workflows and to discover opportunities to optimize performance Deep learning algorithms leveraging historical data to support computer vision, text analytics and NLP

    AI and data analytics data platform

    An optimized data platform is foundational to maximizing the value from AI

    AI and data analytics data platform

    Data Platform Capabilities

    • Support for a variety of analytical applications, including self-service, operational, and data science analytics.
    • Data preparation and integration capabilities to ingest structured and unstructured data, move and transform raw data to enriched data, and enable data access for the target userbase.
    • An infrastructure platform optimized for advanced analytics that can perform and scale.

    Infrastructure - AI accelerators

    Questions for support transition

    "By 2025, 70% of companies will invest in alternative computing technologies to drive business differentiation by compressing time to value of insights from complex data sets."
    - IDC

    2.1 Assess current AI maturity

    1-3 hours

    It is important to understand the current capabilities of the organization to deliver and deploy AI-based applications. Consider that advancing AI capabilities will also involve organizational changes and integration with the organization's governance and risk management programs.

    1. Assess the organization's current state of AI capabilities with respect to its AI governance, data, people, process, and technology infrastructure using Info-Tech's AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap Tool.
    2. Consider the following as you complete the assessment:
      1. What is the state of AI and data governance in the organization?
      2. Does the organization have the skills, processes, and technology environment to deliver AI-based applications?
      3. What organization will be accountable for any and all business outcomes of using the AI applications?
      4. Has a risk assessment been performed?
    3. Make sure you avoid the following common mistakes:
      1. Do not focus only on addressing the technical challenges of building the AI model.
      2. Do not ignore subject matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.

    Download the AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap Tool

    Input Output
    • Any documented AI policies, standards, and best practices
    • Corporate and AI governance practices
    • Any risk assessments
    • AI maturity assessment
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • AI Maturity Assessment & Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership

    Perform the AI Maturity Assessment

    The Scale

    Assess your AI maturity by selecting the maturity level that closest resembles the organization's current AI environment. Maturity dimensions that contribute to overall AI maturity include AI governance, data management, people, process, and technology capabilities.

    AI Maturity Assessment

    Exploration (1.0)

    • No experience building or using AI applications.

    Incorporation (2.0)

    • Some skills in using AI applications, or AI pilots are being considered for use.

    Proliferation (3.0)

    • AI applications have been adopted and implemented in multiple departments. Some of the responsible AI guiding principles are addressed (i.e. data privacy).

    Optimization (4.0)

    • The organization has automated the majority of its digital processes and leverages AI to optimize business operations. Controls are in place to monitor compliance with responsible AI guiding principles.

    Transformation (5.0)

    • The organization has adopted an AI-native culture and approach for building or implementing new business capabilities. Responsible AI guiding principles are operationalized with AI processes that proactively address possible breaches or risks associated with AI applications.

    Perform the AI Maturity Assessment

    AI Governance (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there awareness of the role of AI governance in our organization?
    • No formal procedures are in place for AI development or deployment of applications.
  • Are there documented guidelines for the development and deployment of pilot AI applications?
    • No group is assigned to be responsible for AI governance in our organization.
  • Are accountability and authority related to AI governance clearly defined for our organization?
    • Our organization has adopted and enforces standards for developing and deploying AI applications throughout the organization.
  • Are we using tools to automate and validate AI governance compliance?
    • Our organization is integrating an AI risk framework with the corporate risk management framework.
  • Does our organization lead its industry with its pursuit of corporate compliance initiatives (e.g. ESG compliance) and regulatory compliance initiatives?
    • Our organization leads the industry with the inclusion of responsible AI guiding principles with respect to transparency, accountability, risk, and governance.

    Data Management/AI Data Capabilities (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there an awareness in our organization of the data requirements for developing AI applications?
    • Data is often siloed and not easily accessible for AI applications.
  • Do we have a successful, repeatable approach to preparing data for AI pilot projects?
    • Required data is pulled from various sources in an ad hoc manner.
  • Does our organization have standards and dedicated staff for data management, data quality, data integration, and data governance?
    • Tools are available to manage the data lifecycle and support the data governance program.
  • Have relevant data platforms been optimized for AI and data analytics and are there tools to enforce compliance with responsible AI principles?
    • The data platform has been optimized for performance and access.
  • Is there an organization-wide understanding of how data can support innovation and responsible use of AI?
    • Data culture exists throughout our organization, and data can be leveraged to drive innovation initiatives.

    People/AI Skills in the Organization (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there an awareness in our organization of the skills required to build AI applications?
    • No or very little skills exist throughout our organization.
  • Do we have the skills required to implement an AI proof of concept (POC)?
    • No formal group is assigned to build AI applications.
  • Are there sufficient staff and skills available to the organization to develop, deploy, and run AI applications in production?
    • An AI Center of Excellence has been formed to review, develop, deploy, and maintain AI applications.
  • Is there a group responsible for educating staff on AI best practices and our organization's responsible AI guiding principles?
    • AI skills and people responsible for AI applications are spread throughout our organization.
  • Is there a culture where the organization is constantly assessing where business capabilities, services, and products can be re-engineered or augmented with AI?
    • The entire organization is knowledgeable on how to leverage AI to transform the business.

    Perform the AI Maturity Assessment

    AI Processes (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there an awareness in our organization of the core processes and supporting tools that are required to build and support AI applications?
    • There are few or no automated tools to accelerate the AI development process.
  • Do we have a standard process to iteratively identify, select, and pilot new AI use cases?
    • Only ad hoc practices are used for developing AI applications.
  • Are there standard processes to scale, release, deploy, support, and enable use of AI applications?
    • Our organization has documented standards in place for developing AI applications and deploying them AI to production.
  • Are we automating deployment, testing, governance, audit, and support processes across our AI environment?
    • Our organization can leverage tools to perform an AI risk assessment and demonstrate compliance with the risk management framework.
  • Does our organization lead our industry by continuously improving and re-engineering core processes to drive improved business outcomes?
    • Our organization leads the industry in driving innovation through digital transformation.

    Technology/AI Infrastructure (1.0-5.0)

    1. Is there an awareness in our organization of the infrastructure (hardware and software) required to build AI applications?
    • There is little awareness of what infrastructure is required to build and support AI applications.
  • Do we have the required technology infrastructure and AI tools available to build pilot or one-off AI applications?
    • There is no dedicated infrastructure for the development of AI applications.
  • Is there a shared, standardized technology infrastructure that can be used to build and run multiple AI applications?
    • Our organization is leveraging purpose-built infrastructure to optimize performance.
  • Is our technology infrastructure optimized for AI and advanced analytics, and can it be deployed or scaled on demand by teams building and running AI applications within the organization?
    • Our organization is leveraging cloud-based deployment models to support AI applications in on-premises, hybrid, and public cloud platforms.
  • Is our organization developing innovative approaches to acquiring, building, or running AI infrastructure?
    • Our organization leads the industry with its ability to respond to change and to leverage AI to improve business outcomes.

    Phase 3

    Prioritize Candidate Opportunities and Develop Policies

    Phase 1
    1. Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 2
    1. Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 3
    1. Prioritize Candidate Opportunities
    2. Develop Policies

    Phase 4
    1. Build and Communicate the Roadmap

    3.1 Prioritize candidate AI opportunities

    1-3 hours

    Identify business opportunities that are high impact to your business and its customers and have low implementation complexity.

    1. Leverage the business capability map for your organization or industry to identify candidate business capabilities to augment or automate with generative AI.
    2. Establish criteria to assess candidate use cases by evaluating against the organization's mission and goals, the responsible AI guiding principles, and the complexity of the project.
    3. Ensure that candidate business capabilities to be automated align with the organization's business criteria, responsible AI guiding principles, and resources to deliver the project.
    4. Make sure you avoid sharing the organization's sensitive data if the application is deployed on the public cloud.

    Download the AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool

    Input Output
    • Business capability map
    • Organization mission, vision, and strategic goals
    • Responsible AI guiding principles
    • Prioritized list of generative AI initiatives
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Info-Tech prioritization matrix
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership
    • Business SMEs

    The business capability map for an organization

    A business capability map is an abstraction of business operations that helps describe what the enterprise does to achieve its vision, mission, and goals, rather than how. Business capabilities are the building blocks of the enterprise. They represent stable business functions, are unique and independent of each other, and typically will have a defined business outcome.

    Business capabilities are supported by people, process, and technology.

    Business capability map

    While business capability maps are helpful tools for a variety of strategic purposes, in this context they act as an investigation into what technology your business units use and how they use it.

    Business capability map

    Defining Capabilities
    Activities that define how the entity provides services. These capabilities support the key value streams for the organization.

    Enabling Capabilities
    Support the creation of strategic plans and facilitate business decision making as well as the functioning of the organization (e.g. information technology, financial management, HR).

    Shared Capabilities
    These predominantly customer-facing capabilities demonstrate how the entity supports multiple value streams simultaneously.

    Leverage your industry's capability maps to identify candidate opportunities/initiatives

    Business capability map defined...

    In business architecture, the primary view of an organization is known as a business capability map.

    A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation, rather than how. Business capabilities:

    • Represent stable business functions.
    • Are unique and independent of each other.
    • Typically will have a defined business outcome.

    A business capability map provides details that help the business architecture practitioner direct attention to a specific area of the business for further assessment.

    Note: This is an illustrative business capability map example for Marketing & Advertising

    Business capability map example

    Business value vs. complexity assessment

    Leverage our simple value-to-effort matrix to help prioritize your AI initiatives

    Common business value drivers

    • Drive revenue
    • Improve operational excellence
    • Accelerate innovation
    • Mitigate risk

    Common project complexity characteristics

    • Resources required
    • Costs (acquisition, operational, support...)
    • Training required
    • Risk involved
    • Etc.
    1. Determine a business value and project complexity score for the candidate business capability or initiative.
    2. Plot initiatives on the matrix.
    3. Prioritize initiatives with high business value and low complexity.

    Business value vs complexity

    Assess business value vs. project complexity to prioritize candidate opportunities for generative AI

    Assess business value vs project complexity

    Prioritize opportunities/initiatives with high business value and low project complexity

    Prioritize opportunities with high business value and low project complexity

    Prioritization criteria exercise 1: Assessing the Create Content capability

    Exercise 1 Assessing the Create Content capability

    Assessing the Create Content capability

    This opportunity is removed because it does not pass the organization/business criteria

    Assessing the Create Content capability

    Prioritization criteria exercise 2: Assessing the Content Production capability

    Exercise 2 Assessing the Content Production capability

    Assessing the Content Production capability

    This opportunity is accepted because it passes the organization's business, responsible AI, and project criteria

    Assessing the Content Production capability

    3.2 Communicate policies for AI use

    1-3 hours

    1. Ensure policies for usage align with the organization's business criteria, responsible AI guiding principles, and ability to deliver the projects prioritized and beyond.
    2. Understand the current benefits as well as limits and risk associated with any proposed generative AI-based solution.
    3. Ensure you consider the following:
      1. What data is being shared with the application?
      2. Is the generative AI application deployed on the public cloud? Can anybody access the data provided to the application?
      3. Avoid using very technical, legal, or fear-based communication for your policies.
    InputOutput
    • Business capability map
    • Organization mission, vision and strategic goals
    • Responsible AI guiding principles
    • Prioritized list of generative initiatives
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Info-Tech prioritization matrix
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership

    Generative AI policy for the Create Content capability

    Aligning policies to direct the uses assessed and implemented is essential

    Example

    Many of us have been involved in discussions regarding the use of ChatGPT in our marketing and sales initiatives. ChatGPT is a powerful tool that needs to be used in a responsible and ethical manner, and we also need to ensure the integrity and accuracy of its results. Here is our policy on the use of ChatGPT:

    • You are free to use generative AI to assist your searches, but there are NO circumstances under which you are to reproduce generative AI output (text, image, audio, video, etc.) in your content.

    If you have any questions regarding the use of ChatGPT, please feel free to reach out to our generative AI team and/or any member of our senior leadership team.

    Generative AI policy for the Content Production capability

    These policies should align to and reinforce your responsible AI principles

    Example

    Many of us have been involved in discussions regarding the use of ChatGPT in our deliverables. ChatGPT is a powerful tool that needs to be used in a responsible and ethical manner, and we also need to ensure the integrity and accuracy of its results. Here is our policy on the use of ChatGPT:

    • If you use ChatGPT, you need to assess the accuracy of its response before including it in our content. Assessment includes verifying the information, seeing if bias exists, and judging its relevance.
    • Employees must not:
      • Provide any customer, citizen, or third-party content to any generative AI tool (public or private) without the express written permission of the CIO or the Chief Information Security Officer. Generative AI tools often use input data to train their model, therefore potentially exposing confidential data, violating contract terms and/or privacy legislation, and placing the organization at risk of litigation or causing damage to our organization.
      • Engage in any activity that violates any applicable law, regulation, or industry standard.
      • Use services for illegal, harmful, or offensive purposes.
      • Create or share content that is deceptive, fraudulent, or misleading or that could damage the reputation of our organization.
      • Use services to gain unauthorized access to computer systems, networks, or data.
      • Attempt to interfere with, bypass controls of, or disrupt operations, security, or functionality of systems, networks, or data.

    If you have any questions regarding the use of ChatGPT, please feel free to reach out to our generative AI team and/or any member of our senior leadership team.

    Phase 4

    Build the Roadmap

    Phase 1
    1. Establish Responsible AI Guiding Principles

    Phase 2
    1. Assess Current Level of AI Maturity

    Phase 3
    1. Prioritize Candidate Opportunities
    2. Develop Policies

    Phase 4
    1. Build and Communicate the Roadmap

    4.1.1 Create the implementation plan for each prioritized initiative

    1-3 hours

    1. Build the implementation plan for each accepted use case using the roadmap template.
    2. Assess the firm's capabilities with respect to the dimensions of AI maturity and target the future-state capabilities you need to develop.
    3. Prepare by assessing the risk of the proposed use cases.
    4. Ensure initiatives align with organizational objectives.
    5. Ensure all AI initiatives have a defined value expectation.
    6. Do not ignore subject matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.

    Download the AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool

    Input Output
    • Prioritized initiatives
    • Risk assessment of initiatives
    • Organizational objectives
    • Initiative implementation plans aligned to value drivers and maturity growth
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership
    • Business subject matter experts

    Target-state options

    Identify the future-state capabilities that need to be developed to deliver your use cases

    1. Build an implementation plan for each use case to adopt.
    2. Assess if the current state of the AI environment can be leveraged to deliver the selected generative AI use cases.
    3. If the current AI environment is not sufficient, identify the future state required that will enable the delivery of the generative AI use cases. Identify gaps and build the roadmap to address the gaps.
    Current state Strategy
    The existing environment satisfies functionality, integration, and responsible AI guidelines for the proposed use cases. Maintain current environment
    The existing environment addresses technical requirements but not all the responsible AI guidelines. Augment current environment
    The environment neither addresses the technical requirements of the proposed use cases nor complies with the responsible AI guidelines. Transform the current environment

    4.1.2 Design metrics for success

    1-2 hours

    Establish metrics to measure to determine the success or failure of each POC.

    1. Discuss which relevant currently tracked metrics are useful to continue tracking for the POC.
    2. Discuss which metrics are irrelevant to the POC.
    3. Discuss metrics to start tracking and how to track them with the generative AI vendor.
    4. Compile a list of metrics relevant to the POC.
    5. Decide what the outcome is if the metric is high or low, including decision steps and relevant actions.
    6. Designate a generative AI application owner and a vendor liaison.

    Prepare by building an implementation plan for each candidate use case (previous step).

    Include key performance indicators (KPIs) and metrics that measure the application's contribution to strategic initiatives.

    Consider assigning a vendor liaison to accelerate the implementation and adoption of the generative AI-based solution.

    InputOutput
    • Initiative implementation plans
    • Current SLAs of selected use case
    • Organization mission, vision, and strategic goals
    • Measurable initiative metrics to track
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership
    • Business SMEs
    • Generative AI vendor liaison

    Generative AI POC metrics - examples

    You need to measure the effectiveness of your initiatives. Here are some typical examples.

    Generative AI Feature Assessment
    User Interface
    Is it intuitive? Is training required?
    Ease of Use
    How much training is required before using?
    Response Time
    What is the response time for simple to complex tasks?
    Accuracy of Response
    Can the output be validated?
    Quality of Response
    How usable is the response? For text prompts, does the response align to the desired style, vocabulary, and tone?
    Creativity of Response
    Does the output appear new compared to previous results before using generative AI?
    Relevance of Response
    How well does the output address the prompt or request?
    Explainability
    Can a user describe how the output was generated?
    Scalability
    Does the application continue to perform as more users are added? Can it ingest large amounts of data?
    Productivity Gains
    Can you measure the time or effort saved?
    Business Value
    What value drivers are behind this initiative? (I.e. revenue, costs, time to market, risk mitigation.) Estimate a monetary value for the business outcome.
    Availability/Resilience
    What happens if a component of the application becomes unavailable? How does it recover?
    Security Model
    Where are the prompts and responses stored? Who has access to the sessions/dialogue? Are the prompts used to train the foundation model?
    Administration and Maintenance
    What resources are required to operate the application?
    Total Cost of Ownership
    What is the pricing model? Are there ongoing costs?

    GitHub Copilot POC business value - example

    Quantifying the benefits of GitHub Copilot to demonstrate measurable business value

    POC Results

    Task 1: Creating a web server in JavaScript

    • Time to complete task with GitHub Copilot: 1 hour 11 minutes
    • Time to complete the task without GitHub Copilot: 2 hours 41 minutes
    • Productivity Gain = (1 hour 30 minutes time saved) / (2 hours 41 minutes) = 55%
    • Benefit per Programmer = 55% x (average salary of a programmer)
    • Total Benefit of GitHub Copilot for Task 1 = (benefit per programmer) x (# of programmers)

    Enterprise Value of GitHub Copilot = Total Benefit of GitHub Copilot for Task 1 + Total Benefit of GitHub Copilot for Task 2 + ... + Total Benefit of GitHub Copilot for Task n

    Source: GitHub

    4.1.3 Build your generative AI initiative roadmap

    1-3 hours

    The roadmap should provide a compelling vision of how you will deliver the identified generative AI applications by prioritizing and simplifying the actions required to deliver these new initiatives.

    1. Leverage tab 4, Initiative Planning, in the AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool to create and align your initiatives to the key value driver they are most relevant to:
      1. Transfer the results of your value and complexity assessments to this tool to drive the prioritization.
      2. Assign responsible owners to each initiative.
      3. Identify which AI maturity capabilities each initiative will enhance. However, do not build or introduce new capabilities merely to advance the organization's AI maturity level.
    2. Review the Gantt chart to ensure alignment and assess overlap.

    Download the AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool

    InputOutput
    • Each initiative implementation plan
    • Proposed owners
    • AI maturity assessment
    • Generative AI initiative roadmap and Gantt chart
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Other IT leadership
    • Business SMEs

    Build your generative AI roadmap to visualize your key project plans

    Visual representations of data are more compelling than text alone.

    Develop a high-level document that travels with the project from inception through to executive inquiry, project management, and finally execution.

    A project needs to be discrete: able to be conceptualized and discussed as an independent item. Each project must have three characteristics:

    • Specific outcome: An explicit change in the people, processes, or technology of the enterprise.
    • Target end date: When the described outcome will be in effect.
    • Owner: Who on the IT team is responsible for executing on the initiative.

    Build your generative AI roadmap to visualize your key project plans

    Info-Tech Insight
    Don't project your vision three to five years into the future. Deep dive on next year's big-ticket items instead.

    4.1.4 Build a communication plan for your roadmap

    1-3 hours

    1. Identify your target audience and what they need to know.
    2. Identify desired channels of communication and details for the target audience.
    3. Describe communication required for each audience segment.
    4. List frequency of communication for each audience segment.
    5. Create an executive presentation leveraging The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation and AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool.
    Input Output
    • Stakeholder list
    • Proposed owners
    • AI maturity assessment
    • Communications plan for all impacted stakeholders
    • Executive communication pack
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation
    • AI Maturity Assessment and Roadmap Tool
    • AI initiative lead
    • CIO
    • Communication lead
    • Technical support staff for target use case

    Generative AI communication plan

    Well-planned communications are essential to the success and adoption of your AI initiatives

    To ensure that organization's roadmap is clearly communicated across the AI, data, technology, and business organizations, develop a rollout strategy, like this example.

    Example

    Audience Channel Level of Detail Description Timing
    Generative AI team Email, meetings All
    • Distribute plan; solicit feedback.
    • Address manager questions to equip them to answer employee questions.
    Q3 2023, (September, before entire data team)
    Data management team Email, Q&A sessions following Data management summary deck
    • Roll out after corporate strategy, in same form of communication.
    • Solicit feedback, address questions.
    Q4 2023 (late November)
    Select business stakeholders Presentations Executive deck
    • Pilot test for feedback prior to executive engagement.
    Q4 2023 (early December)
    Executive team Email, briefing Executive deck
    • Distribute plan.
    Q1 2024

    Deliver an executive presentation of the roadmap for the business stakeholders

    After you complete the activities and exercises within this blueprint, the final step of the process is to present the deliverable to senior management and stakeholders.

    Know Your Audience

    • Business stakeholders are interested in understanding the business outcomes that will result from their investment in generative AI.
    • Your audience will want to understand the risks involved and how to mitigate those risks.
    • Explain how the generative AI project was selected and the criteria used to help draft generative AI usage policies.

    Recommendations

    • Highlight the need for responsible AI to ensure that human-based requirements are being addressed.
    • Ensure your generative AI team includes both business and technical staff.

    Download The Era of Generative AI C-Suite Presentation

    Bibliography

    "A pro-innovation approach to AI regulation." UK Department for Science, Innovation and Technology, March 2023. Web.

    "Artificial Intelligence Act." European Commission, 21 April 2021. Web.

    "Artificial Intelligence and Data Act (AIDA)." Canadian Federal Government, June 2022. Web.

    "Artificial Intelligence Index Report 2023." Stanford University, April 2023. Web.

    "Automated Employment Decision Tools." New York City Department of Consumer and Worker Protection, Dec. 2021. Web.

    "Bain & Company announces services alliance with OpenAI to help enterprise clients identify and realize the full potential and maximum value of AI." Bain & Company, 21 Feb. 2023. Web.

    "Buzzfeed to use AI to write its articles after firing 180 employees." Al Mayadeen English, 27 Jan. 2023. Web.

    "California Consumers Privacy Act." State of California Department of Justice. April 24, 2023. Web.

    Campbell, Ian Carlos. "The Apple Card doesn't actually discriminate against women, investigators say." The Verge, 23 March 2021. Web.

    Campbell, Patrick. "NIST Artificial Intelligence Risk Management Framework (AI RMF 1.0)." National Institute of Standards and Technology, Jan. 2023. Web.

    "EU Ethics Guidelines For Trustworthy." European Commission, 8 April 2019. Web.

    Farhi, Paul. "A news site used AI to write articles. It was a journalistic disaster." Washington Post, 17 Jan. 2023. Web.

    Forsyth, Ollie. "Mapping the Generative AI landscape." Antler, 20 Dec. 2022. Web.

    "General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)" European Commission, 25 May 2018. Web.

    "Generative AI Market: Global Industry Trends, Share, Size, Growth, Opportunity and Forecast 2023-2028." IMARC Group, 2022. Web.

    Guynn, Jessica. "Bing's ChatGPT is in its feelings: 'You have not been a good user. I have been a good Bing.'" USA Today, 14 Feb. 2023. Web.

    Hunt, Mia. "Canada launches data governance standardisation initiative." Global Government Forum, 24 Sept. 2020. Web.

    Johnston Turner, Mary. "IDC's Worldwide Future of Digital Infrastructure 2022 Predictions." IDC, 27 Oct. 2021. Web.

    Kalliamvakou, Eirini. "Research: quantifying GitHub Copilot's impact on developer productivity and happiness." GitHub, 7 Sept. 2022. Web.

    Kerravala, Zeus. "NVIDIA Brings AI To Health Care While Protecting Patient Data." eWeek, 12 Dec. 2019. Web.

    Knight, Will. "The Apple Card Didn't 'See' Gender-and That's the Problem." Wired, 19 Nov. 2019. Web.

    "OECD, Recommendation of the Council on Artificial Intelligence." OECD, 2022. Web.

    "The National AI Initiative Act" U.S. Federal Government, 1 Jan 2021. Web.

    "Trustworthy AI (TAI) Playbook." U.S. Department of Health & Human Services, Sept 2021. Web.

    Info-Tech Research Contributors/Advocates

    Joel McLean, Executive Chairman

    Joel McLean
    Executive Chairman

    David Godfrey, CEO

    David Godfrey
    CEO

    Gord Harrison, Senior Vice President, Research & Advisory Services

    Gord Harrison
    Senior Vice President, Research & Advisory Services

    William Russell, CIO

    William Russell
    CIO

    Jack Hakimian, SVP, Research

    Jack Hakimian
    SVP, Research

    Barry Cousins, Distinguished Analyst and Research Fellow

    Barry Cousins
    Distinguished Analyst and
    Research Fellow

    Larry Fretz, Vice President, Industry Research

    Larry Fretz
    Vice President, Industry Research

    Tom Zehren, CPO

    Tom Zehren
    CPO

    Mark Roman, Managing Partner II

    Mark Roman
    Managing Partner II

    Christine West, Managing Partner

    Christine West
    Managing Partner

    Steve Willis, Practice Lead

    Steve Willis
    Practice Lead

    Yatish Sewgoolam, Associate Vice President, Research Agenda

    Yatish Sewgoolam
    Associate Vice President, Research Agenda

    Rob Redford, Practice Lead

    Rob Redford
    Practice Lead

    Mike Tweedie, Practice Lead

    Mike Tweedie
    Practice Lead

    Neal Rosenblatt, Principal Research Director

    Neal Rosenblatt
    Principal Research Director

    Jing Wu, Principal Research Director

    Jing Wu
    Principal Research Director

    Irina Sedenko, Research Director

    Irina Sedenko
    Research Director

    Jeremy Roberts, Workshop Director

    Jeremy Roberts
    Workshop Director

    Brian Jackson, Research Director

    Brian Jackson
    Research Director

    Mark Maby, Research Director

    Mark Maby
    Research Director

    Stacey Horricks, Director, Social Media

    Stacey Horricks
    Director, Social Media

    Sufyan Al-Hassan, Public Relations Manager

    Sufyan Al-Hassan
    Public Relations Manager

    Sam Kanen, Marketing Specialist

    Sam Kanen
    Marketing Specialist

    Exit Plans: Escape from the black hole

    • Large vertical image:
    • member rating overall impact: Highly Valued
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    In early April, I already wrote about exit plans and how they are the latest burning platform.

    As of the end of May 2025, we have both Microsoft and Google reassuring European clients about their sovereign cloud solutions. There are even air-gapped options for military applications. These messages come as a result of the trade war between the US and the rest of the world.

    There is also the other, more mundane example of over-reliance on a single vendor: the Bloomberg-terminal outage of May 21st, 2025. That global outage severely disrupted financial markets. It caused traders to lose access to real-time data, analytics, and pricing information for approximately 90 minutes. This widespread system failure delayed critical government bond auctions in the UK, Portugal, Sweden, and the EU.

    It serves as a reminder of the heavy reliance on the Bloomberg Terminal, which is considered an industry standard despite its high annual cost. While some Bloomberg services like instant messaging remained functional, allowing limited communication among traders, the core disruption led to significant frustration and slowed down trading activities.

    You want to think about this for a moment. Bloomberg is, just like Google and Microsoft are, cornerstones in their respective industries. MS, Google, and Amazon even in many more industries. 

    So the issue goes beyond the “panic of the day.” Every day, there will be some announcement that sends markets reeling and companies fearing. Granted, the period we go through today can have grave consequences, but at the same time, it may be over in the coming months or years.

    Contractual cover

    Let's take a step back and see if we can locate the larger issue at stake. I dare to say that the underlying issue is trust. We are losing trust in one another at a fast pace. Not between business partners, meaning companies who are, in a transaction or relationship, are more or less equal. Regardless of their geolocation, people are keen to do business together in a predictable, mutually beneficial way. And as long as that situation is stable, there is little need, beyond compliance and normal sound practices, to start to distrust each other.

    Trouble brews when other factors come into play. I want to focus on two of them in this article.

    1. Market power
    2. Government interference

    Market Power

    The past few years have seen a large increase in power of the cloud computing platforms. The pandemic of 2019 through to 2023 changed our way of working and gave a big boost to these platforms. Of course, they were already establishing their dominance in the early 2010s.

    Amazon launched SQS in 2004 with S3 (storage)  and EC2 (compute) in 2006. Azure launched in 2008 as a PaaS platform for .NET developers, and became really available in 2010. Since then, it grew into the IaaS (infrastructure as a service) platform we know today. Google's Cloud Platform (GCP) launched in 2008 and added components such as BigQuery, Compute Engine and Storage in the 2010s.

    Since the pandemic, we've seen another boost to their popularity. These platforms solidified their lead through several vectors:

    • Remote working
    • Business continuity and resilience promises
    • Acceleration of digital transformation
    • Scalability
    • Cost optimization 

    Companies made decisions on these premises. A prime example is the use of native cloud functions. These make life easier for developers. Native functions allow for serverless functionality to be made available to clients, and to do so in a non-infra-based way. It gives the impression of less complexity to the management. They are also easily scalable. 

    This comes at a cost, however. The cost is vendor lock-in. And with vendor lock-in, comes increased pricing power for the vendor.

    For a long time, it seems EU companies' attitude was: “It won't be such an issue, after all, there are multiple cloud vendors and if all else fails, we just go back.” The reality is much starker, I suspect that cloud providers with this level of market power will increase their pricing significantly.

     Government interference

    in come two elements:

    • EU laws
    • US laws and unpredictability
    EU laws

     The latest push to their market power came as an unintended consequence of EU Law: DORA. That EU law requires companies to have testable exit plans in place. But it goes well beyond this. The EU has increased the regulatory burden on companies significantly. BusinessEurope, a supranational organization, estimates that in the past five years, the Eu managed to release over 13,000 legislative acts. This is compared to 3,500 in the US.

    Coming back to DORA, this law requires EU companies to actually test their exit plans and show proof of it to the EU ESAs (European Supervisory Agency).  The reaction I have seen in industry representative organizations is complacency. 

    The cost of compliance is significant; hence, companies try to limit their exposure to the law as much as possible. They typically do this by limiting the applicability scope of the law to their business, based on the wording of the law. And herein lies the trap. This is not lost on the IT providers. They see that companies do the heavy lifting for them. What do I mean by that?  Several large providers are looked at by the EU as systemic providers. They fall under direct supervision by the ESAs. 

    For local EU providers, it is what it is, but for non-EU providers, they get to show their goodwill, using sovereign IT services.  I will come back to this in the next point, US unpredictability and laws. But the main point is: we are giving them more market power, and we have less contractual power. Why? Because we are showing them that we will go to great lengths to keep using their services.

    US laws and unpredictability

    US companies must comply with US law. So far, so good. Current US legislation also already requires US companies to share data on non-US citizens.

    • Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA), particularly Section 702
    • The CLOUD (Clarifying Lawful Overseas Use of Data) Act of 2018
    • The USA PATRIOT Act (specifically relevant sections like 215 and 314(a)/314(b))
    • Executive Order 14117 and related DOJ Final Rule (Preventing Access to U.S. Sensitive Personal Data and Government-Related Data by Countries of Concern)

    This last one is of particular concern. Not so much because of its contents, but because it is an Executive Order.

    We know that the current (May 2025) US government mostly works through executive orders. Let's not forget that executive orders are a legitimate way to implement policy, This means that the US government could use access to cloud services as a lever to obtain more favorable trade rules.

    The EU responds to this (the laws and executive order) by implementing several sovereignty countermeasures like GDPR, DORA, Digital markets Act (DMA), Data Governance Act (DGA), Cybersecurity Act and the upcoming European Health Data Act (EHDS). This is called the “Brussels Effect.”

    EU Answers

    Europe is also investing in several strategic initiatives such as

    This points to a new dynamic between the EU and the US, EU-based companies simply cannot trust their US counterparts anymore to the degree they could before. The sad thing is, that there is no difference on the interpersonal level. It is just that companies must comply with their respective laws.

    Hence, Microsoft, Google, and AWS and any other US provider cannot legally provide sovereign cloud services. In a strict legal sense, Microsoft and Google cannot absolutely guarantee that they can completely insulate EU companies and citizens from all US law enforcement requests for data, despite their robust efforts and sovereign cloud offerings. This is because they are US companies, subject to US law and US jurisdiction. The CLOUD act and FISA section 702 compel US companies to comply. 

    Moreover, there is the nature of sovereign cloud offerings:

    • Increased Control, Not Absolute Immunity: Services like Microsoft's EU Data Boundary and Google's Cloud for Sovereignty are designed to provide customers with greater control over data residency, administrative access (e.g., limiting access to EU-based personnel), and encryption keys
    • Customer-Managed Keys (CMEK): If an EU customer controls their encryption keys, and the data remains encrypted at rest and in transit, it theoretically makes it harder for the cloud provider to provide plaintext data if compelled. However, metadata and other operational data might still be accessible, and the extent to which US authorities could compel a US company to decrypt data remains a point of contention and legal ambiguity.
    • Partnerships and Local Entities: Some “sovereign cloud” models involve partnerships with local EU entities (e.g., Google's partnership with S3NS in France, or Microsoft's with Capgemini and Orange). While this might create a legal buffer, if the core cloud infrastructure and controlling entity are still ultimately US-based, the risk of US legal reach persists.
    • “Limited Security Instances”: Even with the EU Data Boundary, Microsoft explicitly states, “in limited security instances that require a coordinated global response, essential data may be transferred with robust protections that safeguard customer data.” This phrasing acknowledges that some data may still leave the EU boundary under certain circumstances.

     And lastly, there are the legal challenges to the EU data privacy Framework (DPF)

    • Ongoing Scrutiny: The DPF is the current legal basis for EU-US data transfers, but it is under continuous scrutiny and is highly likely to face further legal challenges in the CJEU (a “Schrems III” case is widely anticipated). This uncertainty means that the current framework's longevity and robustness are not guaranteed.
    • Fundamental Conflict: The core legal conflict between the broad scope of US surveillance laws and the EU's fundamental right to privacy has not been fully resolved by the DPF, according to many EU legal experts and privacy advocates.

    This all means that while the cloud providers are doing everything they can, and I'm assuming they are acting in good faith. The fact that they are US entities means however that they are subject to all US legislation and executive orders.  And we cannot trust this last part. Again, this is why the EU is pursuing its digital sovereignty initiatives and why some highly sensitive EU public sector entities are gravitating towards truly EU-owned and operated cloud solutions.

    Bankruptcy

    If your provider goes bankrupt, you do not have a leg to stand on. Most jurisdictions, including the EU and US, have the following elements regarding bankruptcy:

    • Automatic Stay: Upon a bankruptcy filing (in most jurisdictions, including the US and EU), an “automatic stay” is immediately imposed. This is a court order that stops most collection activities against the debtor. For you as a customer, this can mean you might be prevented from:

      • Terminating the contract immediately, even if your contract allows it.
      • Initiating legal proceedings against the provider.
      • Trying to recover your data directly without court permission.
    • Debtor's Estate and Creditor Priority

      • Property of the Estate: All the bankrupt provider's assets become part of the “bankruptcy estate,” to be managed by a court-appointed trustee or receiver. The crucial question becomes: Is your data considered the property of the estate, or does ownership remain unequivocally with you? While most cloud contracts explicitly state that the customer owns their data, a bankruptcy court might still view the possession of that data by the provider as an asset of the estate, potentially subject to monetization to pay off creditors.
      • Secured vs. Unsecured Creditors: You, as a customer seeking to retrieve your data or continue services, are likely to be an “unsecured creditor.” Secured creditors (e.g., banks with liens on assets) get paid first. Your claim for data or service continuity will be far down the priority list, meaning you might recover little, if anything, in compensation.
    • Executory contracts and the Trustee's power
      • Assumption or Rejection: Bankruptcy law generally allows the trustee (or debtor in possession in a Chapter 11 case) to assume (continue) or reject (terminate) “executory contracts” – those where both parties still have significant performance obligations.
      • Trustee's Discretion: The trustee will make this decision based on what benefits the bankruptcy estate and the creditors. If your contract is loss-making for the provider, or if continuing it is not in the best interest of the creditors, the trustee can reject it, even if it has a termination clause unfavorable to them.
      • No Customer Right to Demand Continuation: You typically cannot compel the trustee to continue the service if they choose to reject the contract. Your recourse would then be a claim for damages, which, as noted, is usually a low-priority claim.
    • The practical challenges of data retrieval
        • Even if your contract has strong data return clauses, the practicalities of a bankrupt provider make enforcement difficult. The provider's staff might be laid off, systems might be shut down, and there might be no one left with the technical knowledge or resources to facilitate data export. Not to mention that the trustee may simply refuse to honor the agreement (which is completely within the legal rights of the trustee.)
        • The receiver's priority is liquidation and asset sale, not customer service. They may limit data export speeds or volumes, or prioritize the sale of the business, which might include your data, making retrieval a slow and arduous process.

    Conclusion

    So, while I understand the wait and see stance in regard to exit plans, given where we are, it is in my opinion the wrong thing to do. Companies must make actionable exit plans and prepare beforehand for the exit. That means that you have to:

    1. Design your architecture so that you can port your applications to somewhere else.
    2. Prioritize your data portability and data ownership.
    3. Develop and practice your exit strategy and plans.
    4. Maintain your in-house expertise, especially for all critical business services.
    5. Continuously monitor your vendors and update your risk assessments.

      If you want more detailed steps on how to get there, feel free to contact me.

    Drive Customer Convenience by Enabling Text-Based Customer Support

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}531|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
    • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
    • Text messaging services and applications (such as SMS, iMessage, WhatsApp, and Facebook Messenger) have seen explosive growth over the last decade. They are an entrenched part of consumers’ daily lives. For many demographics, text messaging rather than audio calls is the preferred medium of communication via smartphone.
    • Despite the popularity of text messaging services and applications with consumers, organizations have been slow to adequately incorporate these channels into their customer service strategy.
    • The result is a major disconnect between the channel preferences of consumers and the customer service options being offered by businesses.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • IT must work with their counterparts in customer service to build a technology roadmap that incorporates text messaging services and apps as a core channel for customer interaction. Doing so will increase IT’s stature as an innovator in the eyes of the business, while allowing the broader organization to leapfrog competitors that have not yet added text-based support to their repertoire of service channels. Incorporating text messaging as a customer service channel will increase customer satisfaction, improve retention, and reduce cost-to-serve.
    • A prudent strategy for text-based customer service begins with defining the value proposition and creating objectives: is there a strong fit with the organization’s customers and service use cases? Next, organizations must create a technology enablement roadmap for text-based support that incorporates the right tools and applications to deliver it. Finally, the strategy must address best practices for text-based customer service workflows and appropriate resourcing.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand the value and use cases for text-based customer support.
    • Create a framework for enabling technologies that will support scalable text-based customer service.
    • Improve underlying business metrics such as customer satisfaction, retention, and time to resolution by having a plan for text-based support.
    • Better align IT with customer service and support needs.

    Drive Customer Convenience by Enabling Text-Based Customer Support Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should be leveraging text-based services for customer support, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create the business case for text-based customer support

    Understand the use cases and benefits of using text-based services for customer support, and establish how they align to the organization’s current service strategy.

    • Drive Customer Convenience by Enabling Text-Based Customer Support – Phase 1: Create the Business Case for Text-Based Customer Support
    • Text-Based Customer Support Strategic Summary Template
    • Text-Based Customer Support Project Charter Template
    • Text-Based Customer Support Business Case Assessment

    2. Create a technology enablement framework for text-based customer support

    Identify the right applications that will be needed to adequately support a text-based support strategy.

    • Drive Customer Convenience by Enabling Text-Based Customer Support – Phase 2: Create a Technology Enablement Framework for Text-Based Customer Support
    • Text-Based Customer Support Requirements Traceability Matrix

    3. Create customer service workflows for text-based support

    Create repeatable workflows and escalation policies for text-centric support.

    • Drive Customer Convenience by Enabling Text-Based Customer Support – Phase 3: Create Customer Service Workflows for Text-Based Support
    • Text-Based Customer Support TCO Tool
    • Text-Based Customer Support Acceptable Use Policy
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Drive Customer Convenience by Enabling Text-Based Customer Support

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Create the Business Case for Text-Based Support

    The Purpose

    Create the business case for text-based support.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear direction on the drivers and value proposition of text-based customer support for your organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify customer personas.

    1.2 Define business and IT drivers.

    Outputs

    Identification of IT and business drivers.

    Project framework and guiding principles for the project.

    2 Create a Technology Enablement Framework for Text-Based Support

    The Purpose

    Create a technology enablement framework for text-based support.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized requirements for text-based support and a vetted shortlist of the technologies needed to enable it.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine the correct migration strategy based on the current version of Exchange.

    2.2 Plan the user groups for a gradual deployment.

    Outputs

    Exchange migration strategy.

    User group organization by priority of migration.

    3 Create Service Workflows for Text-Based Support

    The Purpose

    Create service workflows for text-based support.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Customer service workflows and escalation policies, as well as risk mitigation considerations.

    Present final deliverable to key stakeholders.

    Activities

    3.1 Review the text channel matrix.

    3.2 Build the inventory of customer service applications that are needed to support text-based service.

    Outputs

    Extract requirements for text-based customer support.

    4 Finalize Your Text Service Strategy

    The Purpose

    Finalize the text service strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Resource and risk mitigation plan.

    Activities

    4.1 Build core customer service workflows for text-based support.

    4.2 Identify text-centric risks and create a mitigation plan.

    4.3 Identify metrics for text-based support.

    Outputs

    Business process models assigned to text-based support.

    Formulation of risk mitigation plan.

    Key metrics for text-based support.

    AI and the Future of Enterprise Productivity

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}329|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,399 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • We’re witnessing a fundamental transformation in how businesses operate and productivity is achieved.
    • Advances in narrow but powerful forms of artificial intelligence (AI) are being driven by a cluster of factors.
    • Applications for enterprise AI aren’t waiting for the emergence of a general AI. They’re being rapidly deployed in task-specific domains. From robotic process automation (RPA) to demand forecasting, from real-world robotics to AI-driven drug development, AI is boosting enterprise productivity in significant ways.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Algorithms are becoming more advanced, data is now richer and easier to collect, and hardware is cheaper and more powerful. All of this is true and contributes to the excitement around enterprise AI applications, but the biggest difference today is that enterprises are redesigning their processes around AI, rather than simply adding AI to their existing processes.

    Impact and Result

    This report outlines six emerging ways AI is being used in the enterprise, with four future scenarios outlining their possible trajectories. These are designed to guide strategic decision making and facilitate future-focused ideation.

    AI and the Future of Enterprise Productivity Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Read the trend report

    This report outlines six emerging ways AI is being used in the enterprise, with four future scenarios outlining their possible trajectories. These are designed to guide strategic decision making and facilitate future-focused ideation.

    • AI and the Future of Enterprise Productivity Trend Report
    • AI and the Future of Enterprise Productivity Trend Report (PDF)
    [infographic]

    Enter Into Mobile Development Without Confusion and Frustration

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}282|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Mobile Development
    • Parent Category Link: /mobile-development
    • IT managers don’t know where to start when initiating a mobile program.
    • IT has tried mobile development in the past but didn't achieve success.
    • IT must initiate a mobile program quickly based on business priorities and needs a roadmap based on best practices.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Form factors and mobile devices won't drive success – business alignment and user experience will. Don't get caught up with the latest features in mobile devices.
    • Software emulation testing is not true testing. Get on the device and run your tests.
    • Cross form-factor testing cannot be optimized to run in parallel. Therefore, anticipate longer testing cycles for cross form-factor testing.

    Impact and Result

    • Prepare your development, testing, and deployment teams for mobile development.
    • Get a realistic assessment of ROI for the launch of a mobile program.

    Enter Into Mobile Development Without Confusion and Frustration Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Make the Case for a Mobile Program

    Understand the current mobile ecosystem. Use this toolkit to help you initiate a mobile development program.

    • Storyboard: Enter Into Mobile Development Without Confusion and Frustration

    2. Assess Your Dev Process for Readiness

    Review and evaluate your current application development process.

    3. Prepare to Execute Your Mobile Program

    Prioritize your mobile program based on your organization’s prioritization profile.

    • Mobile Program Tool

    4. Communicate with Stakeholders

    Summarize the execution of the mobile program.

    • Project Status Communication Worksheet
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Enter Into Mobile Development Without Confusion and Frustration

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build your Future Mobile Development State

    The Purpose

    Understand the alignment of stakeholder objectives and priorities to mobile dev IT drivers.

    Assess readiness of your organization for mobile dev.

    Understand how to build your ideal mobile dev process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify and address the gaps in your existing app dev process.

    Build your future mobile dev state.

    Activities

    1.1 Getting started

    1.2 Assess your current state

    1.3 Establish your future state

    Outputs

    List of key stakeholders

    Stakeholder and IT driver mapping and assessment of current app dev process

    List of practices to accommodate mobile dev

    2 Prepare and Execute your Mobile Program

    The Purpose

    Assess the impact of mobile dev on your existing app dev process.

    Prioritize your mobile program.

    Understand the dev practice metrics to gauge success.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Properly prepare for the execution of your mobile program.

    Calculate the ROI of your mobile program.

    Prioritize your mobile program with dependencies in mind.

    Build a communication plan with stakeholders.

    Activities

    2.1 Conduct an impact analysis

    2.2 Prepare to execute

    2.3 Communicate with stakeholders

    Outputs

    Impact analysis of your mobile program and expected ROI

    Mobile program order of execution and project dependencies mapping

    List of dev practice metrics

    Increase Grant Application Success

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}314|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $7,799 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cost & Budget Management
    • Parent Category Link: /cost-and-budget-management
    • Writing grants has not been prioritized by the organization.
    • Your organization is unable to start, finish, and/or continue priority projects or initiatives as it does not have sufficient funds.
    • Grants are applied to in an ad hoc manner by employees who do not have sufficient time and resources to dedicate to the process.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    There are three critical components to the grant application process:

    • Being strategic about the grant opportunities your organization chooses to pursue.
    • Dedicating sufficient time and resources to writing a competitive grant application.
    • Ensuring your organization will be able to adhere to the grant parameters if awarded the funding.

    Impact and Result

    • By leveraging Info-Tech’s methodology, your organization will strategically select, write, and submit competitive grant applications, securing additional funding sources to support the organization and the communities you serve.
    • This research can enhance the grant writing capabilities of the organization and ensure that every grant chosen aligns with your organizational priorities.
    • This blueprint will drive consensus on which grant applications should be prioritized by the organization, ensuring resourcing, feasibility, and significance are considered.

    Increase Grant Application Success Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should enhance your organization's grant application lifecycle and how you can increase the number of grants your organization is awarded. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the four ways Info-Tech can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify Opportunities

    Identify grant funding opportunities that align with your organization's priorities. Ensure the programs, services, projects, and initiatives that align with these priorities can be financially supported by grant funding.

    • Increase Grant Application Success – Phase 1: Identify Opportunities
    • Grant Identification and Prioritization Tool for Organizations

    2. Grant Prioritization

    Prioritize applying for the grant opportunities that your organization identified. Be sure to consider the feasibility of implementing the project or initiative if your organization is awarded the grant.

    • Increase Grant Application Success – Phase 2: Grant Prioritization

    3. Write the Grant Application

    Write a competitive grant application that has been strategically developed and actively critiqued by various internal and external reviewers.

    • Increase Grant Application Success – Phase 3: Write the Grant Application
    • Grant Writing Checklist

    4. Submit the Grant Application

    Submit an exemplary grant application that meets the guidelines and expectations of the granting agency prior to the due date.

    • Increase Grant Application Success – Phase 4: Submit the Grant Application
    • Grant Follow-up Email Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Increase Grant Application Success

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Determine Your Organization's Priorities

    The Purpose

    Determine the key priorities of your organization and identify grant funding opportunities that align with those priorities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prevents duplicate grant applications from being submitted

    Ensures the grant and the organization's priorities are aligned

    Increases the success rate of grant applications

    Activities

    1.1 Discuss grant funding opportunities and their importance to the organization.

    1.2 Identify organizational priorities.

    Outputs

    An understanding of why grants are important to your organization

    A list of priorities being pursued by your organization

    2 Prioritize Grant Funding Opportunities

    The Purpose

    Identify potential grant funding opportunities that align with the projects/initiatives the organization would like to pursue. Prioritize these funding opportunities and identify which should take precedent based on resourcing, importance, likelihood of success, and feasibility.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Generate a list of potential funding opportunities that can be revisited when resources allow

    Obtain consensus from your working group on which grants should be pursued based on how they have been prioritized

    Activities

    2.1 Develop a list of potential grant funding opportunities.

    2.2 Define the resource capacity your organization has to support the granting writing process.

    2.3 Discuss and prioritize grant opportunities

    Outputs

    A list of potential grant funding opportunities

    Realistic expectations of your organization's capacity to undertake the grant writing lifecycle

    Notes and priorities from your discussion on grant opportunities

    3 Sketch a Grant Application

    The Purpose

    Take the grant that was given top priority in the last section and sketch out a draft of what that application will look like. Think critically about the sketch and determine if there are opportunities to further clarify and demonstrate the goals of the grant application.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A sketch ready to be developed into a grant application

    A critique of the sketch to ensure that the application will be well understood by the reviewers of your submission

    Activities

    3.1 Sketch the grant application.

    3.2 Perform a SWOT analysis of the grant sketch.

    Outputs

    A sketched version of the grant application ready to be drafted

    A SWOT analysis that critically examines the sketch and offers opportunities to enhance the application

    4 Prepare to Submit the Grant Application

    The Purpose

    Have the grant application actively critiqued by various internal and external individuals. This will increase the grant application's quality and generate understanding of the application submission and post-submission process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A list of individuals (internal and external) that can potentially review the application prior to submission

    Preparation for the submission process

    An understanding of why the opportunity to learn how to improve future grant applications is so important

    Activities

    4.1 Identify potential individuals who will review the draft of your grant application.

    4.2 Discuss next steps around the grant submission.

    4.3 Review grant writing best practices.

    Outputs

    A list of potential individuals who can be asked to review and critique the grant application

    An understanding of what the next steps in the process will be

    Knowledge of grant writing best practices

    Embed Privacy and Security Culture Within Your Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}379|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance

    Engagement with privacy and security within organizations has not kept pace with the increasing demands from regulations. As a result, organizations often find themselves saying they support privacy and security engagement but struggling to create behavioral changes in their staff.

    However, with new privacy and security requirements proliferating globally, we can’t help but wonder how much longer we can carry on with this approach.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    To truly take hold, privacy and security engagement must be supported by senior leadership, aligned with business objectives, and embedded within each of the organization’s operating groups and teams.

    Impact and Result

    • Develop a defined structure for privacy and security in the context of your organization, your obligations, and your objectives.
    • Align your business goals and strategy with privacy and security to obtain support from your senior leadership team.
    • Identify and implement a set of metrics to monitor the success of each of the six engagement enablers amongst your team.

    Embed Privacy and Security Culture Within Your Organization Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a culture of privacy and security at your organization, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define privacy and security in the context of the organization

    Use the charter template to document the primary outcomes and objectives for the privacy and security engagement program within the organization and map the organizational structure to each of the respective roles to help develop a culture of privacy and security.

    • Privacy and Security Engagement Charter

    2. Map your privacy and security enablers

    This tool maps business objectives and key strategic goals to privacy and security objectives and attributes identified as a part of the overall engagement program. Leverage the alignment tool to ensure your organizational groups are mapped to their corresponding enablers and supporting metrics.

    • Privacy and Security Business Alignment Tool

    3. Identify and track your engagement indicators

    This document maps out the organization’s continued efforts in ensuring employees are engaged with privacy and security principles, promoting a strong culture of privacy and security. Use the playbook to document and present the organization’s custom plan for privacy and security culture.

    • Privacy and Security Engagement Playbook

    Infographic

    Workshop: Embed Privacy and Security Culture Within Your Organization

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Determine Drivers and Engagement Objectives

    The Purpose

    Understand the current privacy and security landscape in the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Targeted set of drivers from both a privacy and security perspective

    Activities

    1.1 Discuss key drivers for a privacy and security engagement program.

    1.2 Identify privacy requirements and objectives.

    1.3 Identify security requirements and objectives.

    1.4 Review the business context.

    Outputs

    Understanding of the role and requirements of privacy and security in the organization

    Privacy drivers and objectives

    Security drivers and objectives

    Privacy and security engagement program objectives

    2 Align Privacy and Security With the Business

    The Purpose

    Ensure that your privacy and security engagement program is positioned to obtain the buy-in it needs through business alignment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Direct mappings between a culture of privacy and security and the organization’s strategic and business objectives

    Activities

    2.1 Review the IT/InfoSec strategy with IT and the InfoSec team and map to business objectives.

    2.2 Review the privacy program and privacy strategic direction with the Privacy/Legal/Compliance team and map to business objectives.

    2.3 Define the four organizational groupings and map to the organization’s structure.

    Outputs

    Privacy and security objectives mapped to business strategic goals

    Mapped organizational structure to Info-Tech’s organizational groups

    Framework for privacy and security engagement program

    Initial mapping assessment within Privacy and Security Business Alignment Tool

    3 Map Privacy and Security Enablers to Organizational Groups

    The Purpose

    Make your engagement plan tactical with a set of enablers mapped to each of the organizational groups and privacy and security objectives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Measurable indicators through the use of targeted enablers that customize the organization’s approach to privacy and security culture

    Activities

    3.1 Define the privacy enablers.

    3.2 Define the security enablers.

    3.3 Map the privacy and security enablers to organizational structure.

    3.4 Revise and complete Privacy and Security Business Alignment Tool inputs.

    Outputs

    Completed Privacy and Security Engagement Charter.

    Completed Privacy and Security Business Alignment Tool.

    4 Identify and Select KPIs and Metrics

    The Purpose

    Ensure that metrics are established to report on what the business wants to see and what security and privacy teams have planned for.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    End-to-end, comprehensive program that ensures continued employee engagement with privacy and security at all levels of the organization.

    Activities

    4.1 Segment KPIs and metrics based on categories or business, technical, and behavioral.

    4.2 Select KPIs and metrics for tracking privacy and security engagement.

    4.3 Assign ownership over KPI and metric tracking and monitoring.

    4.4 Determine reporting cadence and monitoring.

    Outputs

    KPIs and metrics identified at a business, technical, and behavioral level for employees for continued growth

    Completed Privacy and Security Engagement Playbook

    Safety as a secondary consideration

    • Large vertical image:
    • member rating overall impact: Very High
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    This is a story that should make you perk up.

    I know of a department that was eager to launch their new product. The strain was severe. The board was breathing down their necks. Rivals were catching up (or so they thought).

    What did they do?

    "Let's get this thing live, prove the market wants it, then we'll circle back and handle all the security and stability backlog items." For the product owner, at the time, that seemed the right thing to do.

    They were hacked 48 hours after going live.

    Customer information was stolen. The brand's reputation suffered. The decision led to a months-long legal nightmare. And they still had to completely rebuild the system. Making stability and security bolt-on items is never a good idea.

    The true price of "fix it later"

    See, I understand. When the product owner is pressing for user experience enhancements and you're running out of time for launch, it's easy to overlook those "non-functional requirements." Yet, we should avoid blaming the product owner. The PO is under pressure from many stakeholders, and a delayed launch may also come with significant costs.

    Load balancing isn't visible to customers, after all. Penetration testing doesn't excite them. Failure mechanisms don't matter to them. This statement is true until a malfunction impacts a client. Then it suddenly becomes the most important thing in the world.

    However, I know that ignoring non-functional requirements (NFRs) can lead to failed businesses (or business lines). This elevates these issues beyond mere technical inconveniences. NFRs are designed with the client in mind.

    Look at it this way. When your system crashes during periods of high traffic, how does the user experience change? How satisfied are customers when their personal information is stolen? When it takes 30 seconds for your website to load, how does that conversion rate look?

    Let me expose you to some consultant figures. The average cost of IT outages is $5,600 per minute, according to a 2014 Gartner study. That figure can rise to $300,000 per hour for larger businesses. The reality is that in your department, you will rarely reach these numbers. When we look at current (2020-2025) and expected (2026) trends, the typical operational loss numbers in international commercial banking or insurance are closer to 100K for high-impact incidents that are handled within 2–3 hours.

    Obviously, your numbers will vary. And if you don't know what your costs are, now would be a good time to discover that. This does not imply that you should simply accept the risks associated with such situations. You must fix or mitigate such opportunities for hackers to get in. Do so at the appropriate cost for your business.

    Data breaches are a unique phenomenon. According to IBM's Cost of a Data Breach Report 2025, a data breach typically costs $4.44 million, and detecting and containing it takes an average of 241 days. Some preview data from the 2025 report include that 97% of organizations that reported on the study indicated that they lacked access controls for their AI systems. That means that many companies don't even have the basics in order. And AI-related breaches are just going to accelerate. AI security defenses will help lower the cost of such breaches.

    Despite the decreasing cost of these breaches, I anticipate an increase in their frequency in the upcoming years.

    This means that non-functional requirements in terms of security and resilience should take a more prominent place in the prioritizations. Your client depends on your systems being safe, resilient, and performant.

    The blind spot in leadership

    And yet, this is where some leaders make mistakes. I have the impression they believe that client-focused design means more functionality and elegant interfaces. They prioritize user experience enhancements over system reliability.

    I want to share a key fact that distinguishes successful businesses: customers desire more than just a good product. It must always function for them. And that means following certain procedures. They are not there to hamper you; they are there to retain customers.

    88% of online shoppers are less likely to visit a website again after a negative experience, according to research from Forrester. Amazon found that they lose 1% of sales for every 100 ms of latency. That 100 milliseconds adds up to millions of lost profits when billions of dollars are at stake.

    You run the risk of more than just technical difficulties when you deprioritize safety. Customer trust, revenue stability, competitive advantage, adherence to the law, costs, and team morale are all at stake.

    The "happy flow" trap is costing you revenue.

    Allow me to illustrate what I see happening during development cycles.

    The team tests the happy flow. The user successfully logs in. The user navigates with ease. The user makes the purchase without any problems. The user logs off without incident.

    "Excellent! Publish it!"

    However, what occurs if 1000 users attempt to log in at once? What occurs if an attempt is made to insert malicious code into your contact form? During a transaction, what happens if your database connection fails?

    These are not extreme situations. These are real-life occurrences.

    Fifty percent of data center managers and operators reported having an impactful outage in the previous three years, according to the Uptime Institute's 2025 Global Data Center Survey. Note that this is at the infra level. The biggest contributor is power outages. What role does power play in ensuring a smooth flow? Power will not always flow as you want it, so plan for lack of power and for spikes.

    With regard to software failures, the spread of possible causes widens. AI is a big contributor. AI is typically brought in to accelerate development and assist in coding. But it tends to introduce subtle bugs and vulnerabilities that a seasoned developer has to review and solve.

    Another upcoming article will discuss how faster release cycles often lead to a rush in testing. This should not be the case; by spending some time automating your (non-)regression test bank, you will gain speed. But you have to invest time in building the test suite.

    Can your system handle success? This question should keep every executive awake at night.

    I've witnessed businesses invest millions in advertising campaigns to drive traffic to systems that fail due to their success. Consider describing to your board how your greatest marketing victory became your worst operational mishap.

    Managing traffic spikes is only one aspect of load balancing. It is about ensuring that your business can handle opportunities without being overwhelmed.

    The mindset that transforms everything

    Let's now address the most pressing issue: security.

    The majority of leaders consider security to be like insurance, something you hope you never need. The fact that security is more than just protection, however, will alter the way you approach every project. It's approval to develop.

    According to the Ponemon Institute's 2025 Cost of Insider Threats Global Report, the average annualized cost of insider threats, defined as employee negligence, criminal insiders, and credential thieves, has risen to $17.4 million per incident, up from $15.4 million in 2022. The number of discovered and analyzed incidents increased from 3,269 in 2018 to 7,868 in 2025 research studies. 

    Cybersecurity Ventures predicts that cybercrime will cost the global economy $10.5 trillion annually by 2025.

    The most fascinating thing, though, is that companies that invest in proactive security see measurable outcomes. Organizations that allocate over 10% of their IT budget to cybersecurity have a 2.5-fold higher chance of experiencing no security incidents than those that allocate less than 1%, per Deloitte's Future of Cyber Survey.

    By hardening your systems against common attack vectors, you can scale quickly without worrying about the future. You can handle sensitive data with confidence, enter new markets without fear, establish partnerships that require trust, and focus on innovation instead of crisis management.

    The non-functional needs that genuinely generate income

    Allow me to explain this in a way that will satisfy your CFO.

    Retention is equal to reliability. Customers return when a system functions reliably (given you sell items they want). The Harvard Business Review claims that a 5% increase in customer retention rates boosts profits by 25% to 95%. It is five to twenty-five times less expensive to retain customers than to acquire new ones.

    Scalability is equal to security. Secure systems can handle larger client volumes, more sensitive data, and higher-value transactions. 69% of board members and C-suite executives think that privacy and cyber risks could affect their company's ability to grow, according to PwC.

    Profit is equal to performance. You lose conversions for every second of load time. Google discovered that the likelihood of a bounce rises by 32% as page load time increases from 1 to 3 seconds. It increases by 90% from 1 second to 5 seconds. Walmart discovered that every second improvement in page load time led to a 2% increase in conversions.

    Reputation is equal to resilience. Guess which company benefits when your system works while your competitors' systems fail? Failures reduce trust. 71% of consumers will actively advocate against companies they don't trust, and 67% of consumers will stop purchasing from them, according to Edelman's 2023 Trust Barometer. While the 2025 report does not present comparative numbers, distrust impacting consumer behavior is likely to be even more prevalent. 

    The structure that reverses the script

    Reframe this discussion with your executives and team

    • The question we should not ask is, "Can we afford to build this right?" but rather, "Can we afford not to?" This consideration is crucial because we risk losing customers at every obstacle they encounter. 
    • Non-functional requirements should be viewed as competitive advantages rather than obstructions. If it suddenly does not work, the customer walks away.
    • Consider viewing system reliability as a profit center instead of a cost center. When a customer knows it will work, they will order again and refer a friend.

    The numbers support this point. Businesses that invest in operational resilience see three times higher profit margins and 2.5 times higher revenue growth than their counterparts, according to McKinsey's 2023 State of Organizations report. In 2025 we see a focus on AI, but the point remains.

    These metrics will grab the attention when you're presenting them.

    Although the average cost of downtime varies by industry, it is always high. 

    The impact of a security breach on customer lifetime value is equally uncomfortable. Following a data breach, 78% of consumers will cease interacting with a brand online, and 36% will never do so again, according to Ping Identity's 2023 Consumer Identity Breach Report.

    Every second that the system is unavailable results in a rapidly mounting loss of money. That's about $3,170 per minute of full downtime for a business that makes $100 million a year. We're talking about $31,700 per minute for billion-dollar businesses. Again, your experience may differ, but it's important to note that this cost is often unseen yet undeniable. If you want to calculate this more granularly, then I have a calculation method for you that is easy to implement.

    There is a discernible trend in the cost of rebuilding versus building correctly the first time. Resolving a problem in production can cost four to five times as much as fixing it during design, and it can cost up to 100 times as much as fixing it during the requirements and design phase, according to IBM's Systems Sciences Institute.

    The plan of action that truly works

    This is what you should do right away.

    Please begin by reviewing your current primary systems. When they're under stress, what happens? What occurs if they are attacked? What occurs if they don't work? 40% of businesses that suffer a significant system failure never reopen, although only 23% of organizations have tested their disaster recovery plans in the previous year, according to Gartner. Companies we work with test their systems at least once per year. If the results are unsatisfactory, we conduct a retest to ensure they meet our standards.

    Next, please determine the actual cost of addressing issues at a later stage. Add in the costs of customer attrition, security breaches, downtime, and reconstruction. To lend credibility to your calculations, try to work out exact numbers for your company. Industry standards (like in this article) will give you indicators, but you need to know your figures.

    Third, recast your non-functional needs as business needs. Consider focusing on strategies for managing success rather than solely discussing load balancing. Instead of discussing security testing, focus on revenue protection.

    Fourth, consider safety when defining "done." Until a feature is dependable, secure, and scalable, it isn't considered complete. Projects that incorporate non-functional requirements from the outset have a threefold higher chance of success, per the Standish Group's 2023 Chaos Report.

    Fifth, use system dependability as a differentiator in the marketplace. You're up when your rivals are down. You're safe when they're compromised.

    The bottom line

    I understand that resilience isn't sexy. I am aware that UI enhancements are more exciting than infrastructure resilience.

    And yet, I know that businesses that prioritize safety will survive and lead after seeing others thrive and fail based on this one choice. Customers trust them. They are capable of scaling without breaking. Because they are confident that their systems can manage whatever comes next, they are the ones who get a good night's sleep.

    Resilient organizations are twice as likely to surpass customer satisfaction goals and are 2.5 times more likely to achieve revenue growth of 10% or more.

    Resilience represents the most significant competitive advantage. You have a choice. Just keep in mind that your clients are depending on you to do the job correctly.

    Always happy to engage in a conversation.

    Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}220|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management

    Access to information about companies is more available to consumers than ever. Organizations must implement mechanisms to monitor and manage how information is perceived to avoid potentially disastrous consequences to their brand reputation.

    A negative event could impact your organization's reputation at any given time. Make sure you understand where such events may come from and have a plan to manage the inevitable consequences.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential impact on your organization’s reputation requires efforts from multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how social media can affect your brand.
    • Organizational leadership is often caught unaware during crises, and their response plans lack the flexibility to adjust to significant market upheavals.

    Impact and Result

    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.
    • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
    • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your reputation and brand with our Reputational Risk Impact Tool.

    Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization Deck – Use the research to better understand the negative impacts of vendor actions on your brand reputation.

    Use this research to identify and quantify the potential reputational impacts caused by vendors. Use Info-Tech's approach to look at the reputational impact from various perspectives to better prepare for issues that may arise.

    • Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization Storyboard

    2. Reputational Risk Impact Tool – Use this tool to help identify and quantify the reputational impacts of negative vendor actions.

    By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate - possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    • Reputational Risk Impact Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    Brand reputation is the most valuable asset an organization can protect.

    Analyst Perspective

    Organizations must diligently assess and protect their reputations, both in the market and internally.

    Social media, unprecedented access to good and bad information, and consumer reliance on others’ online opinions force organizations to dedicate more resources to protecting their brand reputation than ever before. Perceptions matter, and you should monitor and protect the perception of your organization with as much rigor as possible to ensure your brand remains recognizable and trusted.

    Photo of Frank Sewell, Research Director, Vendor Management, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Frank Sewell
    Research Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Access to information about companies is more available to consumers than ever. A negative event could impact your organizational reputation at any time. As a result, organizations must implement mechanisms to monitor and manage how information is perceived to avoid potentially disastrous consequences to their brand reputation.

    Make sure you understand where negative events may come from and have a plan to manage the inevitable consequences.

    Common Obstacles

    Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential impact on your organization’s reputation requires efforts from multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how social media can affect your brand.

    Organizational leadership is often caught unaware during crises, and their response plans lack the flexibility to adjust to significant market upheavals.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.

    Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.

    Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.

    Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your reputation and brand with our Reputational Risk Impact Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations must evolve their risk assessments to be more adaptive to respond to rapid changes in online media. Ongoing monitoring of social media and the vendors tied to their company is imperative to achieving success and avoiding reputational disasters.

    Info-Tech’s multi-blueprint series on vendor risk assessment

    There are many individual components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.

    Cube with each multiple colors on each face, similar to a Rubix cube, and individual components of vendor risk branching off of it: 'Financial', 'Reputational', 'Operational', 'Strategic', 'Security', and 'Regulatory & Compliance'.

    This series will focus on the individual components of vendor risk and how vendor management practices can facilitate organizations’ understanding of those risks.

    Out of scope:
    This series will not tackle risk governance, determining overall risk tolerance and appetite, or quantifying inherent risk.

    Reputational risk impacts

    Potential losses to the organization due to risks to its reputation and brand

    In this blueprint, we’ll explore reputational risks (risks to the brand reputation of the organization) and their impacts.

    Identify potentially negative events to assess the overall impact on your organization and implement adaptive measures to respond and correct.

    Cube with each multiple colors on each face, similar to a Rubix cube, and the vendor risk component 'Reputational' highlighted.

    Protect your most valuable asset: your brand

    25%

    of a company’s market value is due to reputation (Transmission Private, 2021)

    94%

    of consumers say that a bad review has convinced them to avoid a business (ReviewTrackers, 2022)

    14 hours

    is the average time it takes for a false claim to be corrected on social media (Risk Analysis, 2018)
    Image of an umbrella covering the word 'BRAND' and three arrows approaching from above.

    What is brand recognition?

    And the cost of rebranding

    Brand recognition is the ability of consumers to recognize an identifying characteristic of one company versus a competitor.” (Investopedia)

    Most trademark valuation is based directly on its projected future earning power, based on income history. For a new brand with no history, evaluators must apply experience and common sense to predict the brand's earning potential. They can also use feedback from industry experts, market surveys, and other studies.” (UpCounsel)

    The cost of rebranding for small to medium businesses is about 10 to 20% of the recommended overall marketing budget and can take six to eight months (Ignyte).

    Stock image of a house with a money sign chimney.

    "All we are at our core is our reputation and our brand, and they are intertwined." (Phil Bode, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group)

    What your vendor associations say about you

    Arrows of multiple colors coalescing in an Earth labelled 'Your Brand', and then a red arrow that reads 'Reputation' points to the terms on the right.

    Bad Customer Reviews

    Breach of Data

    Poor Security Posture

    Negative News Articles

    Public Lawsuits

    Poor Performance

    How a major vendor protects its brand

    An ideal state
    • There is a dedicated brand protection department.
    • All employees are educated annually on brand protection policies and procedures.
    • Brand protection is tied to cybersecurity.
    • The organization actively monitors its brand and reputation through various media formats.
    • The organization has criteria for assessing x-party vendors and holds them accountable through ongoing monitoring and validation of their activities.

    Brand Protection
    Done Right

    Sticker for a '5 Star Rating'.

    Never underestimate the power of local media on your profits

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep in mind that too much exposure to media can be a negative in that it heightens the awareness of your organization to outside actors. If you do go through a period of increased exposure, make sure to advance your monitoring practices and vigilance.

    Story: Restaurant data breach

    Losing customer faith

    A popular local restaurant’s point of service (POS) machines were breached and the credit card data of their customers over a two-week period was stolen. The restaurant did the right thing: they privately notified the affected people, helped them set up credit monitoring services, and replaced their compromised POS system.

    Unfortunately, the local newspaper got wind of the breach. It published the story, leaving out that the restaurant had already notified affected customers and had replaced their POS machines.

    In response, the restaurant launched a campaign in the local paper and on social media to repair their reputation in the community and reassure people that they could safely transact at their business.

    For at least a month, the restaurant experienced a drastic decrease in revenue as customers either refused to come in to eat or paid only in cash. During this same period the restaurant was spending outside their budget on the advertising.
    Broken trust.

    Story: Monitor your subcontractors

    Trust but verify

    A successful general contractor with a reputation for fairness in their dealings needed a specialist to perform some expert carpentry work for a few of their clients.

    The contractor gave the specialist the clients’ contact information and trusted them to arrange the work.

    Weeks later, the contractor checked in with the clients and received a ton of negative feedback:

    • The specialist called them once and never called back.
    • The specialist refused to do the work as described and wanted to charge extra.
    • The specialist performed work to “fix” the issue but cut corners to lessen their costs.

    As a result, the contractor took extreme measures to regain the clients’ confidence and trust and lost other opportunities in the process.

    Stock image of a sad construction site supervisor.

    You work hard for your reputation. Don’t let others ruin it.

    Don’t forget to look within as well as without

    Stock image of a frustrated desk worker.

    Story: Internal reputation is vital

    Trust works both ways

    An organization’s relatively new IT and InfoSec department leadership have been upgrading the organization's systems and policies as fast as resources allow when the organization encounters a major breach of security.

    Trust in the developing IT and InfoSec departments' leadership wanes throughout the organization as people search for the root cause and blame the systems. This degradation of trust limits the effectiveness of the newly implemented process, procedures, and tools of the departments.

    The new leaders' abilities are called into question, and they must now rigorously defend and justify their decisions and positions to the executives and board.

    It will be some time before the two departments gain their prior trust and respect, and the new leaders face some tough times ahead regaining the organization's confidence.

    How could the new leaders approach the situation to mend their reputations in the wake of this (perhaps unfair) reputational hit?

    It is not enough to identify the potential risks; there must also be adequate controls in place to monitor and manage them

    Stock image of a fingerprint on a computer chip under a blacklight.

    Identify, manage, and monitor reputational risks

    Global markets
    • Organizations need to learn how to assess the likelihood of potential risks in the changing global markets and recognize how their partnerships and subcontracts affect their brand.
    • Now more than ever, organizations need to be mindful of the larger global landscape and how their interactions within various regions can impact their reputation.
    Social media
    • Understanding how to monitor social media activity and online content will give you an edge in the current environment.
    • Changes in social media generally happen faster than companies can recognize them. If you are not actively monitoring those risks, the damage could set in before you even have a chance to respond.
    Global shortages
    • Organizations need to accept that shortages will recur periodically and that preparing for them will significantly increase the success potential of long-term plans.
    • Customers don’t always understand what is happening in the global supply chain and may blame you for poor service if you cannot meet demands as you have in the past.

    Which way is your reputation heading?

    • Do you understand and track items that might affect your reputation?
    • Do you understand the impact they may have on your business?

    Visualization of a Newton's Cradle perpetual motion device, aka clacky balls. The lifted ball is colored green with a smiley face and is labelled 'Your Brand Reputation'. The other four balls are red with a frowny face and are labelled 'Data Breach/ Lawsuit', 'Service Disruption', 'Customer Complaint', and 'Poor Delivery'.

    Identifying and understanding potential risks is essential to adapting to the ever-changing online landscape

    Info-Tech Insight

    Few organizations are good at identifying risks. As a result, almost none realistically plan to monitor, manage, and adapt their plans to mitigate those risks.

    Reputational risks

    Not protecting your brand can have disastrous consequences to your organization

    • Data breaches & lawsuits
    • Poor vendor performance
    • Service disruptions
    • Negative reviews

    Stock image of a smiling person on their phone rating something five stars.

    What to look for in vendors

    Identify potential reputational risk impacts
    • Check online reviews from both customers and employees.
    • Check news sites:
      • Has the vendor been affected by a breach?
      • Is the vendor frequently in the news – good or bad? Greater exposure can cause an uptick in hostile attacks, so make sure the vendor has adequate protections in line with its exposure.
    • Review its financials. Is it prime for an acquisition/bankruptcy or other significant change?
    • Review your contractual protections to ensure that you are made whole in the event something goes wrong. Has anything changed with the vendor that requires you to increase your protections?
    • Has anything changed in the vendor’s market? Is a competitor taking its business, or are its resources stretched on multiple projects due to increased demand?
    Illustration of business people in a city above various icons.

    Assessing Reputational Risk Impacts

    Zigzagging icons and numbers one through 7 alternating sides downward. Review Organizational Strategy
    Understand the organizational strategy to prepare for the “what if” game exercise.
    Identify & Understand Potential Risks
    Play the “what if” game with the right people at the table.
    Create a Risk Profile Packet for Leadership
    Pull all the information together in a presentation document.
    Validate the Risks
    Work with leadership to ensure that the proposed risks are in line with their thoughts.
    Plan to Manage the Risks
    Lower the overall risk potential by putting mitigations in place.
    Communicate the Plan
    It is important not only to have a plan but also to socialize it in the organization for awareness.
    Enact the Plan
    Once the plan is finalized and socialized put it in place with continued monitoring for success.
    (Adapted from Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance)

    Insight Summary

    Reputational risk impacts are often unanticipated, causing catastrophic downstream effects. Continuously monitoring your vendors’ actions in the market can help organizations head off brand disasters before they occur.

    Insight 1

    Understanding how to monitor social media activity and online content will give you an edge in the current environment.

    Do you have dedicated individuals or teams to monitor your organization's online presence? Most organizations review and approve the online content, but many forget the need to have analysts reviewing what others are saying about them.

    Insight 2

    Organizations need to learn how to assess the likelihood of potential risks in the rapidly changing online environments and recognize how their partnerships and subcontractors’ actions can affect their brand.

    For example, do you understand how a simple news article raises your profile for short-term and long-term adverse events?

    Insight 3

    Socialize the risk management process throughout the organization to heighten awareness and enable employees to help protect the company’s reputation.

    Do you include a social media and brand protection policy in your annual education?

    Identify reputational risk

    Who should be included in the discussion?
    • While it is true that executive-level leadership defines the strategy for an organization, it is vital for those making decisions to make INFORMED decisions.
    • Getting input from your organization's marketing experts will enhance your brand's long-term protection.
    • Involving those who directly manage vendors and understand the market will aid in determining the forward path for relationships with your current vendors and identifying new emerging potential partners.
    • Organizations have a wealth of experience in their marketing departments that can help identify real-world negative scenarios.
    • Include vendor relationship managers to help track what is happening in the media for those vendors.
    Keep in mind: (R=L*I)
    Risk = Likelihood x Impact

    Impact tends to remain the same, while likelihood is a very flexible variable.

    Stock image of a flowchart asking 'Risk?', 'Yes', 'No'.

    Manage and monitor reputational risk impacts

    What can we realistically do about the risks?
    • Re-evaluate corporate policies frequently.
    • Ensure proper protections in contracts:
      • Limit the use of your brand name in the publicity and trademark clauses.
      • Make sure to include security protections for your data in the event of a breach; understand that reputation can rarely be made whole again once trust is breached.
    • Introduce continual risk assessment to monitor the relevant vendor markets.
    • Be adaptable and allow for innovations that arise from the current needs.
      • Capture lessons learned from prior incidents to improve over time and adjust your strategy based on the lessons.
    • Monitor your company’s and associated vendors’ online presence.
    • Track similar companies’ brand reputations to see how yours compares in the market.

    Social media is driving the need for perpetual diligence.

    Organizations need to monitor their brand reputation considering the pace of incidents in the modern age.

    Stock image of a person on a phone that is connected to other people.

    The “what if” game

    1-3 hours

    Input: List of identified potential risk scenarios scored by likelihood and financial impact, List of potential management of the scenarios to reduce the risk

    Output: Comprehensive reputational risk profile on the specific vendor solution

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Reputational Risk Impact Tool to help drive discussion

    Participants: Vendor Management Coordinator, Organizational Leadership, Operations Experts (SMEs), Legal/Compliance/Risk Manager, Marketing

    Vendor management professionals are in an excellent position to help senior leadership identify and pull together resources across the organization to determine potential risks. By playing the "what if" game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    1. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group).
    2. Use the Reputational Risk Impact Tool to prompt discussion on potential risks. Keep this discussion flowing organically to explore all potential risk but manage the overall process to keep the discussion on track.
    3. Collect the outputs and ask the subject matter experts for management options for each one in order to present a comprehensive risk strategy. You will use this to educate senior leadership so that they can make an informed decision to accept or reject the solution.

    Download the Reputational Risk Impact Tool

    Example: Low reputational risk

    We can see clearly in this example that the contractor suffered minimal impact from the specialist's behavior. Though they did take a hit to their overall reputation with a few customers, they should be able to course-correct with a minimal outlay of effort and almost no loss of revenue.

    Stock image of construction workers.

    Sample table of 'Sample Questions to Ask to Identify Reputational Impacts'. Column headers are 'Score', 'Weight', 'Question', and 'Comments or Notes'. At the bottom the 'Reputational Score' row has a low average score of '1.3' and '%100' total weight in their respective columns.

    Example: High reputational risk

    Note in the example how the tool can represent different weights for each of the criteria depending on your needs.

    Stock image of an older person looking out a window.

    Sample table of 'Sample Questions to Ask to Identify Reputational Impacts'. Column headers are 'Score', 'Weight', 'Question', and 'Comments or Notes'. At the bottom the 'Reputational Score' row has a high average score of '3.1' and '%100' total weight in their respective columns.

    Summary

    Be vigilant and adaptable to change
    • Organizations need to learn how to assess the likelihood of potential risks in the changing global markets and recognize how their partnerships and subcontracts affect their brand.
    • Understanding how to monitor social media activity and online content will give you an edge in the current environment.
    • Bring the right people to the table to outline potential risks to your organization’s brand reputation.
    • Socialize the risk management process throughout the organization to heighten awareness and enable employees to help protect the company’s reputation.
    • Incorporate lessons learned from incidents into your risk management process to build better plans for future issues.
    Stock image of a person's face overlaid with many different images.

    Organizations must evolve their risk assessments to be more adaptive to respond to global factors in the market.

    Ongoing monitoring of online media and the vendors tied to company visibility is imperative to avoiding disaster.

    Bibliography

    "The CEO Reputation Premium: Gaining Advantage in the Engagement Era." Weber Shandwick, March 2015. Accessed June 2022.

    Glidden, Donna. "Don't Underestimate the Need to Protect Your Brand in Publicity Clauses." Info-Tech Research Group, June 2022.

    Greenaway, Jordan. "Managing Reputation Risk: A start-to-finish guide." Transmission Private, July 2020. Accessed June 2022.

    Jagiello, Robert D., and Thomas T. Hills. “Bad News Has Wings: Dread Risk Mediates Social Amplification in Risk Communication.” Risk Analysis, vol. 38, no. 10, 2018, pp. 2193-2207.

    Kenton, Will. "Brand Recognition.” Investopedia, Aug. 2021. Accessed June 2022.

    Lischer, Brian. "How Much Does it Cost to Rebrand Your Company?" Ignyte, October 2017. Accessed June 2022.

    "Powerful Examples of How to Respond to Negative Reviews." ReviewTrackers, 16 Feb. 2022. Accessed June 2022.

    Tonello, Matteo. “Strategic Risk Management: A Primer for Directors.” Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance, 23 Aug. 2012. Web.

    "Valuation of Trademarks: Everything You Need to Know." UpCounsel, 2022. Accessed June 2022.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Sample of 'Assessing Financial Risk Management'. Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization
    • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential financial impact requires multiple people in the organization across several functions – and those people all need educating on the potential risks.
    • Organizational leadership is often unaware of decisions on organizational risk appetite and tolerance, and they assume there are more protections in place against risk impact than there truly are.
    Sample of 'How to Assess Strategic Risk'. Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization
    • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential strategic impact requires multiple people in the organization across several functions – and those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes affect strategic plans.
    • Organizational leadership is often caught unaware during crises, and their plans lack the flexibility needed to adjust to significant market upheavals.
    Research coming soon. Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Vendor management is not “plug and play” – each organization’s vendor management initiative (VMI) needs to fit its culture, environment, and goals. The key is to adapt vendor management principles to fit your needs…not the other way around.
    • All vendors are not of equal importance to an organization. Classifying or segmenting your vendors allows you to focus your efforts on the most important vendors first, allowing your VMI to have the greatest impact possible.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Frank Sewell

    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Donna Glidden

    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Steven Jeffery

    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Mark Roman

    Managing Partner
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Phil Bode

    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Sarah Pletcher

    Executive Advisor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Bickley

    Practice Lead
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}369|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting

    Business operations in high-risk areas of the world contend with complex threat environments and risk scenarios that often require a unique response. But traditional approaches to security strategy often miss these jurisdictional risks, leaving organizations vulnerable to threats that range from cybercrime and data breaches to fines and penalties.

    Security leaders need to identify high-risk jurisdictions, inventory critical assets, identify vulnerabilities, assess risks, and identify security controls necessary to mitigate those risks.

    Secure operations and protect critical assets in high-risk regions

    Across risks that include insider threats and commercial surveillance, the two greatest vulnerabilities that organizations face in high-risk parts of the world are travel and compliance. Organizations can make small adjustments to their security program to address these risks:

    1. Support high-risk travel: Put measures and guidelines in place to protect personnel, data, and devices before, during, and after employee travel.
    2. Mitigate compliance risk: Consider data residency requirements, data breach notification, cross-border data transfer, and third-party risks to support business growth.

    Using these two prevalent risk scenarios in high-risk jurisdictions as examples, this research walks you through the steps to analyze the threat landscape, assess security risks, and execute a response to mitigate them.

    Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions – A step-by-step approach to mitigating jurisdictional security and privacy risks.

    Traditional approaches to security strategy often miss jurisdictional risks. Use this storyboard to make small adjustments to your security program to mitigate security risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    • Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions – Phases 1-3

    2. Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heat Map Tool – A tool to inventory, assess, and treat jurisdictional risks.

    Use this tool to track jurisdictional risks, assess the exposure of critical assets, and identify mitigation controls. Use the geographic heatmap to communicate inherent jurisdictional risk with key stakeholders.

    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heat Map Tool

    3. Guidelines for Key Jurisdictional Risk Scenarios – Two structured templates to help you develop guidelines for two key jurisdictional risk scenarios: high-risk travel and compliance risk

    Use these two templates to develop help you develop your own guidelines for key jurisdictional risk scenarios. The guidelines address high-risk travel and compliance risk.

    • Digital Safety Guidelines for International Travel
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Context for Risk Assessment

    The Purpose

    Assess business requirements and evaluate security pressures to set the context for the security risk assessment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the goals of the organization in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Assess the threats to critical assets in these jurisdictions and capture stakeholder expectations for information security.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine assessment scope.

    1.2 Determine business goals.

    1.3 Determine compliance obligations.

    1.4 Determine risk appetite.

    1.5 Conduct pressure analysis.

    Outputs

    Business requirements

    Security pressure analysis

    2 Analyze Key Risk Scenarios for High-Risk Jurisdictions

    The Purpose

    Build key risk scenarios for high-risk jurisdictions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions, their vulnerabilities to relevant threats, and the adverse impact should malicious agents exploit them.

    Assess risk exposure of critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify critical assets.

    2.2 Identify threats.

    2.3 Assess risk likelihood.

    2.4 Assess risk impact.

    Outputs

    Key risk scenarios

    Jurisdictional risk exposure

    Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heat Map

    3 Build Risk Treatment Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Prioritize and treat jurisdictional risks to critical assets.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Build an initiative roadmap to reduce residual risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify and assess risk response.

    3.2 Assess residual risks.

    3.3 Identify security controls.

    3.4 Build initiative roadmap.

    Outputs

    Action plan to mitigate key risk scenarios

    Further reading

    Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Assessments often omit jurisdictional risks. Are your assets exposed?

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Operations in high-risk jurisdictions face unique security scenarios.

    The image contains a picture of Michel Hebert.

    Michel Hébert

    Research Director

    Security and Privacy

    Info-Tech Research Group


    The image contains a picture of Alan Tang.

    Alan Tang

    Principal Research Director

    Security and Privacy

    Info-Tech Research Group


    Traditional approaches to security strategies may miss key risk scenarios that critical assets face in high-risk jurisdictions. These include high-risk travel, heightened insider threats, advanced persistent threats, and complex compliance environments. Most organizations have security strategies and risk management practices in place, but securing global operations requires its own effort. Assess the security risk that global operations pose to critical assets. Consider the unique assets, threats, and vulnerabilities that come with operations in high-risk jurisdictions. Focus on the business activities you support and integrate your insights with existing risk management practices to ensure the controls you propose get the visibility they need. Your goal is to build a plan that mitigates the unique security risks that global operations pose and secures critical assets in high-risk areas. Don’t leave security to chance.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Security leaders who support operations in many countries struggle to mitigate security risks to critical assets. Operations in high-risk jurisdictions contend with complex threat environments and security risk scenarios that often require a unique response.
    • Security leaders need to identify critical assets, assess vulnerabilities, catalog threats, and identify the security controls necessary to mitigate related operational risks.

    Common Obstacles

    • Securing operations in high-risk jurisdictions requires additional due diligence. Each jurisdiction involves a different risk context, which complicates efforts to identify, assess, and mitigate security risks to critical assets.
    • Security leaders need to engage the organization with the right questions and identify high-risk vulnerabilities and security risk scenarios to help stakeholders make an informed decision about how to assess and treat the security risks they face in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech has developed an effective approach to protecting critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions.

    This approach includes tools for:

    • Evaluating the security context of your organization’s high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Identifying security risk scenarios unique to high-risk jurisdictions and assessing the exposure of critical assets.
    • Planning and executing a response.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations with global operations must contend with a more diverse set of assets, threats, and vulnerabilities when they operate in high-risk jurisdictions. Security leaders need to take additional steps to secure operations and protect critical assets.

    Business operations in high-risk jurisdictions face a more complex security landscape

    Information security risks to business operations vary widely by region.

    The 2022 Allianz Risk Barometer surveyed 2,650 business risk specialists in 89 countries to identify the most important risks to operations. The report identified cybercrime, IT failures, outages, data breaches, fines, and penalties as the most important global business risks in 2022, but their results varied widely by region. The standout finding of the 2022 Allianz Risk Barometer is the return of security risks as the most important threat to business operations. Security risks will continue to be acute beyond 2022, especially in Africa, the Middle East, Europe, and the Asia-Pacific region, where they will dwarf risks of supply chain interruptions, natural catastrophe, and climate change.

    Global operations in high-risk jurisdictions contend with more diverse threats. These security risk scenarios are not captured in traditional security strategies.

    The image contains a picture of the world map that has certain areas of the map highlighted in various shades of blue based on higher security-related business risks.

    Figures represent the number of cybersecurity risks business risk specialists selected as a percentage of all business risks (Allianz, 2022). Higher scores indicate jurisdictions with higher security-related business risks. Jurisdictions without data are in grey.

    Different jurisdictions’ commitment to cybersecurity also varies widely, which increases security risks further

    The Global Cybersecurity Index (GCI) provides insight into the commitment of different countries to cybersecurity.

    The index assesses a country’s legal framework to identify basic requirements that public and private stakeholders must uphold and the legal instruments prohibiting harmful actions.

    The 2020 GCI results show overall improvement and strengthening of the cybersecurity agenda globally, but significant regional gaps persist. Of the 194 countries surveyed:

    • 33% had no data protection legislation.
    • 47% had no breach notification measures in place.
    • 50% had no legislation on the theft of personal information.
    • 19% still had no legislation on illegal access.

    Not every jurisdiction has the same commitment to cybersecurity. Protecting critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions requires additional due diligence.

    The image contains a picture of the world map that has certain areas of the map highlighted in various shades of blue based on scores in relation to the Global Security Index.

    The diagram sets out the score and rank for each country that took part in the Global Cybersecurity Index (ITU, 2021)

    Higher scores show jurisdictions with a lower rank on the CGI, which implies greater risk. Jurisdictions without data are in grey.

    Securing critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions requires additional effort

    Traditional approaches to security strategy may miss these key risk scenarios.

    As a result, security leaders who support operations in many countries need to take additional steps to mitigate security risks to critical assets.

    Guide stakeholders to make informed decisions about how to assess and treat the security risks and secure operations.

    • Engage the organization with the right questions.
    • Identify critical assets and assess vulnerabilities.
    • Catalogue threats and build risk scenarios.
    • Identify the security controls necessary to mitigate risks.

    Work with your organization to analyze the threat landscape, assess security risks unique to high-risk jurisdictions, and execute a response to mitigate them.

    This project blueprint works through this process using the two most prevalent risk scenarios in high-risk jurisdictions: high-risk travel and compliance risk.

    Key Risk Scenarios

    • High-Risk Travel
    • Compliance Risk
    • Insider Threat
    • Advanced Persistent Threat
    • Commercial Surveillance
    The image contains a screenshot of an Info-Tech thought model regarding secure global operations in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Travel risk is the first scenario we use as an example throughout the blueprint

    • This project blueprint outlines a process to identify, assess, and mitigate key risk scenarios in high-risk jurisdictions. We use two common key risk scenarios as examples throughout the deck to illustrate how you create and assess your own scenarios.
    • Supporting high-risk travel is the first scenario we will study in-depth as an example. Business growth, service delivery, and mergers and acquisitions can lead end users to travel to high-risk jurisdictions where staff, devices, and data are at risk.
    • Compromised or stolen devices can provide threat actors with access to data that could compromise the organization’s strategic, economic, or competitive advantage or expose the organization to regulatory risk.

    The project blueprint includes template guidance in Phase 3 to help you build and deploy your own travel guidelines to protect critical assets and support end users before they leave, during their trip, and when they return.

    Before you leave

    • Identify high-risk countries.
    • Enable controls.
    • Limit what you pack.

    During your trip

    • Assume you are monitored.
    • Limit access to systems.
    • Prevent theft.

    When you return

    • Change your password.
    • Restore your devices.

    Compliance risk is the second scenario we use as an example

    • Mitigating compliance risk is the second scenario we will study as an example in this blueprint. The legal and regulatory landscape is evolving rapidly to keep step with the pace of technological change. Security and privacy leaders are expected to mitigate the risk of noncompliance as the organization expands to new jurisdictions.
    • Later sections will show how to think through at least four compliance risks, including:
      • Cross-border data transfer
      • Third-party risk management
      • Data breach notification
      • Data residency

    The project blueprint includes template guidance in Phase 3 to help you deploy your own compliance governance controls as a risk mitigation measure.

    Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions: Info-Tech’s methodology

    1. Identify Context

    2. Assess Risks

    3. Execute Response

    Phase Steps

    1. Assess business requirements
    2. Evaluate security pressures
    1. Identify risks
    2. Assess risk exposure
    1. Treat security risks
    2. Build initiative roadmap

    Phase Outcomes

    • Internal security pressures that capture the governance, policies, practices, and risk tolerance of the organization
    • External security pressures that capture the expectations of customers, regulators, legislators, and business partners
    • A heatmap that captures not only the global exposure of your critical assets but also the business processes they support
    • A security risk register to allow for the easy transfer of critical assets’ global security risk data to your organization’s enterprise risk management practice
    • A roadmap of prioritized initiatives to apply relevant controls and secure global assets
    • A set of key risk indicators to monitor and report your progress

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Business Security Requirements

    Identify the context for the global security risk assessment, including risk appetite and risk tolerance.

    Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap

    Identify critical global assets and the threats they face in high-risk jurisdictions and assess exposure.

    Mitigation Plan

    Roadmap of initiatives and security controls to mitigate global risks to critical assets. Tools and templates to address key security risk scenarios.

    Key deliverable:

    Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to capture information security risks to critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions. The tool generates a world chart that illustrates the risks global operations face to help you engage the business and execute a response.

    Blueprint benefits

    Protect critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions

    IT Benefits

    Assess and remediate information security risk to critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Easily integrate your risk assessment with enterprise risk assessments to improve communication with the business.

    Illustrate key information security risk scenarios to make the case for action in terms the business understands.

    Business Benefits

    Develop mitigation plans to protect staff, devices, and data in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Support business growth in high-risk jurisdictions without compromising critical assets.

    Mitigate compliance risk to protect your organization’s reputation, avoid fines, and ensure business continuity.

    Quantify the impact of securing global operations

    The tool included with this blueprint can help you measure the impact of implementing the research

    • Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to describe the key risk scenarios you face, assess their likelihood and impact, and estimate the cost of mitigating measures. Working through the project in this way will help you quantify the impact of securing global operations.
    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool. The image contains a screenshot of the High-Risk Travel Jurisdiction.

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    • Review existing information security and risk management metrics and the output of the tools included with the blueprint.
    • Identify metrics to measure the impact of your risk management efforts. Focus specifically on high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Compare your results with those in your overall security and risk management program.

    ID

    Metric

    Why is this metric valuable?

    How do I calculate it?

    1.

    Overall Exposure – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Illustrates the overall exposure of critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool. Calculate the impact times the probability rating for each risk. Take the average.

    2.

    # Risks Identified – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs risk tolerance assessments.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    3.

    # Risks Treated – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs residual risk assessments.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    4.

    Mitigation Cost – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs cost-benefit analysis to determine program effectiveness.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    5.

    # Security Incidents – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs incident trend calculations to determine program effectiveness.

    Draw the information from your service desk or IT service management tool.

    6.

    Incident Remediation Cost – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs cost-benefit analysis to determine program effectiveness.

    Estimate based on cost and effort, including direct and indirect cost such as business disruptions, administrative finds, reputational damage, etc.

    7.

    TRENDS: Program Effectiveness – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    # of security incidents over time. Remediation : Mitigation costs over time

    Calculate based on metrics 5 to 7.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs.

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Call #1: Scope project requirements, determine assessment scope, and discuss challenges.

    Phase 2

    Call #2: Conduct initial risk assessment and determine risk tolerance.

    Call #3: Evaluate security pressures in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Call #4: Identify risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Call #5: Assess risk exposure.

    Phase 3

    Call #6: Treat security risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Days 1

    Days 2-3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Identify Context

    Key Risk Scenarios

    Build Roadmap

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1.1 Determine assessment scope.

    1.1.2 Determine business goals.

    1.1.3 Identify compliance obligations.

    1.2.1 Determine risk appetite.

    1.2.2 Conduct pressure analysis.

    2.1.1 Identify assets.

    2.1.2 Identify threats.

    2.2.1 Assess risk likelihood.

    2.2.2 Assess risk impact.

    3.1.1 Identify and assess risk response.

    3.1.2 Assess residual risks.

    3.2.1 Identify security controls.

    3.2.2 Build initiative roadmap.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. Business requirements for security risk assessment
    2. Identification of high-risk jurisdictions
    3. Security threat landscape for high-risk jurisdictions
    1. Inventory of relevant threats, critical assets, and their vulnerabilities
    2. Assessment of adverse effects should threat agents exploit vulnerabilities
    3. Risk register with key risk scenarios and heatmap of high-risk jurisdictions
    1. Action plan to mitigate key risk scenarios
    2. Investment and implementation roadmap
    1. Completed information security risk assessment for two key risk scenarios
    2. Risk mitigation roadmap

    No safe jurisdictions

    Stakeholders sometimes ask information security and privacy leaders to produce a list of safe jurisdictions from which to operate. We need to help them see that there are no safe jurisdictions, only relatively risky ones. As you build your security program, deepen the scope of your risk assessments to include risk scenarios critical assets face in different jurisdictions. These risks do not need to rule out operations, but they may require additional mitigation measures to keep staff, data, and devices safe and reduce potential reputational harms.

    Traditional approaches to security strategy often omit jurisdictional risks.

    Global operations must contend with a more complex security landscape. Secure critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions with a targeted risk assessment.

    The two greatest risks are high-risk travel and compliance risk.

    You can mitigate them with small adjustments to your security program.

    Support High-Risk Travel

    When securing travel to high-risk jurisdictions, you must consider personnel safety as well as data and device security. Put measures and guidelines in place to protect them before, during, and after travel.

    Mitigate Compliance Risk

    Think through data residency requirements, data breach notification, cross-border data transfer, and third-party risks to support business growth and mitigate compliance risks in high-risk jurisdictions to protect your organization’s reputation and avoid hefty fines or business disruptions.

    Phase 1

    Identify Context

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess business requirements to understand the goals of the organization’s global operations, as well as its risk governance, policies, and practices.
    • Evaluate jurisdictional security pressures to understand threats to critical assets and capture the expectations of external stakeholders, including customers, regulators, legislators, and business partners, and assess risk tolerance.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders
    • IT leadership
    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance

    Step 1.1

    Assess Business Requirements

    Activities

    1.1.1 Determine assessment scope

    1.1.2 Identify enterprise goals in high-risk jurisdictions

    1.1.3 Identify compliance obligations

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders
    • IT leadership
    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance

    Outcomes of this step

    • Assess business requirements to understand the goals of the organization’s global operations, as well as its risk governance, policies, and practices.

    Focus the risk assessment on high-risk jurisdictions

    Traditional approaches to information security strategy often miss threats to global operations

    • Successful security strategies are typically sensitive to risks to different IT systems and lines of business.
    • However, securing global operations requires additional focus on high-risk jurisdictions, considering what makes them unique.
    • This first phase of the project will help you evaluate the business context of operations in high-risk jurisdictions, including:
      • Enterprise and security goals.
      • Lines of business, physical locations, and IT systems that need additional oversight.
      • Unique compliance obligations.
      • Unique risks and security pressures.
      • Organizational risk tolerance in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Focus your risk assessment on the business activities security supports in high-risk jurisdictions and the unique threats they face to bridge gaps in your security strategy.

    Identify jurisdictions with higher inherent risks

    Your security strategy may not describe jurisdictional risk adequately.

    • Security strategies list lines of business, physical locations, and IT systems the organization needs to secure and those whose security will depend on a third-party. You can find additional guidance on fixing the scope and boundaries of a security strategy in Phase 1 of Build an Information Security Strategy.
    • However, security risks vary widely from one jurisdiction to another according to:
      • Active cyber threats.
      • Legal and regulatory frameworks.
      • Regional security and preparedness capabilities.
    • Your first task is to identify high-risk jurisdictions to target for additional oversight.

    Work closely with your enterprise risk management function.

    Enterprise risk management functions are often tasked with developing risk assessments from composite sources. Work closely with them to complete your own assessment.

    Countries at heightened risk of money laundering and terrorism financing are examples of high-risk jurisdictions. The Financial Action Task Force and the U.S. Treasury publish reports three times a year that identify Non-Cooperative Countries or Territories.

    Develop a robust jurisdictional assessment

    Design an intelligence collection strategy to inform your assessment

    Strategic Intelligence

    White papers, briefings, reports. Audience: C-Suite, board members

    Tactical Intelligence

    Internal reports, vendor reports. Audience: Security leaders

    Operational intelligence

    Indicators of compromise. Audience: IT Operations

    Operational intelligence focuses on machine-readable data used to block attacks, triage and validate alerts, and eliminate threats from the network. It becomes outdated in a matter of hours and is less useful for this exercise.

    Determine travel risks to bolster your assessments

    Not all locations and journeys will require the same security measures.

    • Travel risks vary significantly according to destination, the nature of the trip, and traveler profile.
    • Access to an up-to-date country risk rating system enables your organization and individual staff to quickly determine the overall level of risk in a specific country or location.
    • Based on this risk rating, you can specify what security measures are required prior to travel and what level of travel authorization is appropriate, in line with the organization's security policy or travel security procedures.
    • While some larger organizations can maintain their own country risk ratings, this requires significant capacity, particularly to obtain the necessary information to keep these regularly updated.
    • It may be more effective for your organization to make use of the travel risk ratings provided by an external security information provider, such as a company linked to your travel insurance or travel booking service, if available.
    • Alternatively, various open-source travel risk ratings are available via embassy travel sites or other website providers.

    Without a flexible system to account for the risk exposures of different jurisdictions, staff may perceive measures as a hindrance to operations.

    Develop a tiered risk rating

    The example below outlines potential risk indicators for high-risk travel.

    Rating

    Description

    Low

    Generally secure with adequate physical security. Low violent crime rates. Some civil unrest during significant events. Acts of terrorism rare. Risks associated with natural disasters limited and health threats mainly preventable.

    Moderate

    Periodic civil unrest. Antigovernment, insurgent, or extremist groups active with sporadic acts of terrorism. Staff at risk from common and violent crime. Transport and communications services are unreliable and safety records are poor. Jurisdiction prone to natural disasters or disease epidemics.

    High

    Regular periods of civil unrest, which may target foreigners. Antigovernment, insurgent, or extremist groups very active and threaten political or economic stability. Violent crime rates high, often targeting foreigners. Infrastructure and emergency services poor. May be regular disruption to transportation or communications services. Certain areas off-limits to foreigners. Jurisdictions experiencing natural disasters or epidemics are considered high risk.

    Extreme

    Undergoing active conflict or persistent civil unrest. Risk of being caught up in a violent incident or attack is very high. Authorities may have lost control of significant portions of the country. Lines between criminality and political and insurgent violence are blurred. Foreigners are likely to be denied access to parts of the country. Transportation and communication services are severely degraded or nonexistent. Violence presents a direct threat to staff security.

    Ratings are formulated by assessing several types of risk, including conflict, political/civil unrest, terrorism, crime, and health and infrastructure risks.

    1.1.1 Determine assessment scope

    1 – 2 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm a list of high-risk jurisdictions to target for additional assessment. Write down as many items as possible to include in:
    • Lines of business
    • Physical locations
    • IT systems

    Pay close attention to elements of the assessment that are not in scope.

  • Discuss the response and the rationale for targeting each of them for additional risk assessments. Identify security-related concerns for different lines of business, locations, user groups, IT systems, and data.
  • Record your responses and your comments in the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
  • Input

    Output

    • Corporate strategy
    • IT strategy
    • Security strategy
    • Relevant threat intelligence
    • A list of high-risk jurisdictions to focus your risk assessment

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Enterprise Risk Management
    • Compliance
    • Legal

    Download the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    Position your efforts in a business context

    Securing critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions is a business imperative

    • Many companies relegate their information security strategies to their IT department. Aside from the strain the choice places on a department that already performs many different functions, it wrongly implies that mitigating information security risk is simply an IT problem.
    • Managing information security risks is a business problem. It requires that organizations identify their risk appetite, prioritize relevant threats, and define risk mitigation initiatives. Business leaders can only do these activities effectively in a context that recognizes the business and financial benefits of implementing protections.
    • This is notably true of businesses with operations in many different countries. Each jurisdiction has its own set of security risks the organization must account for, as well as unique local laws and regulations that affect business operations.
    • In high-risk jurisdictions, your efforts must consider the unique operational challenges your organization may not face in its home country. Your efforts to secure critical assets will be most successful if you describe key risk scenarios in terms of their impact on business goals.
    • You can find additional guidance on assessing the business context of a security strategy in Phase 1 of Build an Information Security Strategy.

    Do you understand the unique business context of operations in high-risk jurisdictions?

    1.1.2 Identify business goals

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm the primary and secondary business goals of the organization. Focus your assessment on operations in high-risk jurisdictions you identified in Exercise 1.1.1. Review:
    • Relevant corporate and IT strategies.
    • The business goal definitions and indicator metrics in tab 2, “Goals Definition,” of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
  • Limit business goals to no more than two primary goals and three secondary goals. This limitation will help you prioritize security initiatives at the end of the project.
  • For each business goal, identify up to two security alignment goals that will support business goals in high-risk jurisdictions.
  • Input

    Output

    • Corporate strategy
    • IT strategy
    • Security strategy
    • Your goals for the security risk assessment for high-risk jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Risk Management
    • Compliance
    • Legal

    Download the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    Record business goals

    Capture the results in the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    1. Record the primary and secondary business goals you identified in tab 3, “Goals Cascade,” of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
    2. Next, record the two security alignment goals you selected for each business goal based on the tool’s recommendations.
    3. Finally, review the graphic diagram that illustrates your goals on tab 6, “Results,” of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
    4. Revisit this exercise whenever operations expands to a new jurisdiction to capture how they contribute to the organization’s mission and vision and how the security program can support them.
    The image contains a screenshot of Tab 3, Goals Cascade.

    Tab 3, Goals Cascade

    The image contains a screenshot of Tab 6, Results.

    Tab 6, Results

    Analyze business goals

    Assess how operating in multiple jurisdictions adds nuance to your business goals

    • Security leaders need to understand the direction of the business to propose relevant security initiatives that support business goals in high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Operating in different jurisdictions carries its own degree of risk. The organization is subject not only to the information security risks and legal frameworks of its country of origin but also to those associated with international jurisdictions.
    • You need to understand where your organization operates and how these different jurisdictions contribute to your business goals to support their performance and protect the firm’s reputation.
    • This exercise will make an explicit link between security and privacy concerns in high-risk jurisdictions, what the business cares about, and what security is trying to accomplish.

    If the organization is considering a merger and acquisition project that will expand operations in jurisdictions with different travel risk profiles, the security organization needs to revise the security strategy to ensure the organization can support high-risk travel and mitigate risks to critical assets.

    Identify compliance obligations

    Data compliance obligations loom large in high-risk jurisdictions

    The image contains four hexagons, each with their own words. SOX, PCI DSS, HIPAA, HITECH.

    Security leaders are familiar with most conventional regulatory obligations that govern financial, personal, and healthcare data in North America and Europe.

    The image contains four hexagons, each with their own words. Residency, Cross-Border Transfer, Breach Notification, Third-Party Risk Mgmt.

    Data privacy concerns, nationalism, and the economic value of data are all driving jurisdictions to adopt data residency and data localization and to shut down the cross-border transfer of data.

    The next step requires you to consider the compliance obligations the organization needs to meet to support the business as it expands to other jurisdictions through natural growth, mergers, and acquisitions.

    1.1.3 Identify compliance obligations

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm compliance obligations in target jurisdictions. Focus your assessment on operations in high-risk jurisdictions.
    2. Include:

    • Laws
    • Governing regulations
    • Industry standards
    • Contractual agreements
  • Record your compliance obligations and comments on tab 4, “Compliance Obligations,” of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
  • If you need to take full stock of the laws and regulations in place in the jurisdictions where you operate that you are not familiar with, consider seeking local legal counsel to help you navigate this exercise.
  • Input

    Output

    • Legal and compliance frameworks in target jurisdictions
    • Mandatory and voluntary compliance obligations for target jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Risk Management
    • Compliance
    • Legal

    Download the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    Step 1.2

    Evaluate Security Pressures

    Activities

    1.2.1 Conduct initial risk assessment

    1.2.2 Conduct pressure analysis

    1.2.3 Determine risk tolerance

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    Identify threats to global assets and capture the security expectations of external stakeholders, including customers, regulators, legislators, and business partners, and determine risk tolerance.

    Evaluate security pressures to set the risk context

    Perform an initial assessment of high-risk jurisdictions to set the context.

    Assess:

    • The threat landscape.
    • The security pressures from key stakeholders.
    • The risk tolerance of your organization.

    You should be able to find the information in your existing security strategy. If you don’t have the information, work through the next three steps of the project blueprint.

    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate evaluating security pressures, as described in the text above.

    Some jurisdictions carry inherent risks

    • Jurisdictional risks stem from legal, regulatory, or political factors that exist in different countries or regions. They can also stem from unexpected legal changes in regions where critical assets have exposure. Understanding jurisdictional risks is critical because they can require additional security controls.
    • Jurisdictional risk tends to be higher in jurisdictions:
      • Where the organization:
        • Conducts high-value or high-volume financial transactions.
        • Supports and manages critical infrastructure.
        • Has high-cost data or data whose compromise could undermine competitive advantage.
        • Has a high percentage of part-time employees and contractors.
        • Experiences a high rate of employee turnover.
      • Where state actors:
        • Have a low commitment to cybersecurity, financial, and privacy legislation and regulation.
        • Support cybercrime organizations within their borders.

    Jurisdictional risk is often reduced to countries where money laundering and terrorist activities are high. In this blueprint, the term refers to the broader set of information security risks that arise when operating in a foreign country or jurisdiction.

    Five key risk scenarios are most prevalent

    Key Risk Scenarios

    • High-Risk Travel
    • Compliance Risk
    • Insider Threat
    • Advanced Persistent Threat
    • Commercial Surveillance

    Security leaders who support operations in many countries need to take additional steps to mitigate security risks to critical assets. The goal of the next two exercises is to analyze the threat landscape and security pressures unique to high-risk jurisdictions, which will inform the construction of key scenarios in Phase 2. These five scenarios are most prevalent in high-risk jurisdictions. Keep them in mind as you go through the exercises in this section.

    1.2.1 Assess jurisdictional risk

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the questions on tab 2, “Risk Assessment,” of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.
    2. Gather the required information from subject matter experts on the following risk elements with a focus on high-risk jurisdictions:
    3. Review each question in tab 2 of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool and select the most appropriate response.

    Input

    Output

    • Existing security strategy
    • List of organizational assets
    • Historical data on information security incidents
    • Completed risk assessment

    Materials

    Participants

    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    For more information on how to complete the risk assessment questionnaire, see Step 1.2.1 of Build an Information Security Strategy.

    1.2.2 Conduct pressure analysis

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the questions on tab 3, “Pressure Analysis,” of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.
    2. Gather the required information from subject matter experts on the following pressure elements with a focus on high-risk jurisdictions:
    • Compliance and oversight
    • Customer expectations
    • Business expectations
    • IT expectations
  • Review each question in the questionnaire and provide the most appropriate response using the drop-down list. It may be helpful to consult with the appropriate departments to obtain their perspectives.
  • For more information on how to complete the pressure analysis questionnaire, see Step 1.3 of Build an Information Security Strategy.

    Input

    Output

    • Information on various pressure elements within the organization
    • Existing security strategy
    • Completed pressure analysis

    Materials

    Participants

    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business leaders
    • Compliance

    A low security pressure means that your stakeholders do not assign high importance to information security. You may need to engage stakeholders with the right key risk scenarios to illustrate jurisdictional risk and generate support for new security controls.

    Download the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    Assess risk tolerance

    • Risk tolerance expresses the types and amount of risk the organization is willing to accept in pursuit of its goals.
    • These expectations can help you identify, manage, and report on key risk scenarios in high-risk jurisdictions.
    • For instance, an organization with a low risk tolerance will require a stronger information security program to minimize operational security risks.
    • It’s up to business leaders to determine the risks they are willing to accept. They may need guidance to understand how system-level risks affect the organization’s ability to pursue its goals.

    A formalized risk tolerance statement can help:

    • Support risk-based security decisions that align with business goals.
    • Provide a meaningful rationale for security initiatives.
    • Improve the transparency of investments in the organization’s security program.
    • Provide guidance for monitoring inherent risk and residual risk exposure.

    The role of security professionals is to identify and analyze key risk scenarios that may prevent the organization from reaching its goals.

    1.2.3 Determine risk tolerance

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the questions on tab 4, “Risk Tolerance,” of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.
    2. Gather the required information from subject matter experts on the following risk tolerance elements:
    • Recent IT problems, especially downtime and data recovery issues
    • Historical security incidents
  • Review any relevant documentation, including:
    • Existing security strategy
    • Business impact assessments
    • Service-level agreements

    For more information on how to complete the risk tolerance questionnaire, see Step 1.4 of Build an Information Security Strategy.

    Input

    Output

    • Existing security strategy
    • Data on recent IT problems and incidents
    • Business impact assessments
    • Completed risk tolerance statement

    Materials

    Participants

    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    Review the output of the results tab

    • The organizational risk assessment provides a high-level assessment of inherent risks in high-risk jurisdictions. Use the results to build and assess key risk scenarios in Phase 2.
    • Use the security pressure analysis to inform stakeholder management efforts. A low security pressure indicates that stakeholders do not yet grasp the impact of information security on organizational goals. You may need to communicate its importance before you discuss additional security controls.
    • Jurisdictions in which organizations have a low risk tolerance will require stronger information security controls to minimize operational risks.
    The image contains a screenshot of the organizational risk assessment. The image contains a screenshot of the security pressure analysis. The image contains a screenshot of the risk tolerance curve.

    Phase 2

    Assess Security Risks to Critical Assets

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify critical assets, their vulnerabilities to relevant threats, and the adverse impact a successful threat event would have on the organization.
    • Assess risk exposure of critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions for each risk scenario through an analysis of its likelihood and impact.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Step 2.1

    Identify Risks

    Activities

    2.1.1 Identify assets

    2.1.2 Identify threats

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Define risk scenarios that identify critical assets, their vulnerabilities to relevant threats, and the adverse impact a successful threat event would have on the organization.

    This blueprint focuses on mitigating jurisdictional risks

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Risk Management Framework. The framework includes: Risk Identification, Risk Assessment, Risk Response, and Risk Governance.

    For a deeper dive into building a risk management program, see Info-Tech’s core project blueprints on risk management:

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Combine Security Risk Management Components Into One Program

    Draft key risk scenarios to illustrate adverse events

    Risk scenarios help decision-makers understand how adverse events affect business goals.

    • Risk-scenario building is the process of identifying the critical factors that contribute to an adverse event and crafting a narrative that describes the circumstances and consequences if it were to happen.
    • Risk scenarios set up the risk analysis stage of the risk assessment process. They are narratives that describe in detail:
      • The asset at risk.
      • The threat that can act against the asset.
      • Their intent or motivation.
      • The circumstances and threat actor model associated with the threat event.
      • The potential effect on the organization.
      • When or how often the event might occur.

    Risk scenarios are further distilled into a single sentence or risk statement that communicates the essential elements from the scenario.

    Well-crafted risk scenarios have four components

    The second phase of the project will help you craft meaningful risk scenarios

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    An actor capable of harming an asset

    Anything of value that can be affected and results in loss

    Technique an actor uses to affect an asset

    How loss materializes

    Examples: Malicious or untrained employees, cybercriminal groups, malicious state actors

    Examples: Systems, regulated data, intellectual property, people

    Examples: Credential compromise, privilege escalation, data exfiltration

    Examples: Loss of data confidentiality, integrity, or availability; impact on staff health & safety

    Risk scenarios are concise, four to six sentence narratives that describe the core elements of forecasted adverse events. Use them to engage stakeholders with the right questions and guide them to make informed decisions about how to address and treat security risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    The next slides review five key risk scenarios prevalent in high-risk jurisdictions. Use them as examples to develop your own.

    Travel to high-risk jurisdictions requires special measures to protect staff, devices, and data

    Governmental, academic, and commercial advisors compile lists of jurisdictions that pose greater travel risks annually.

    For instance, in the US, these lists might include countries that are:

    • Subjects of travel warnings by the US Department of State.
    • Identified as high risk by other US government sources such as:
      • The Department of the Treasury Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC).
      • The Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI).
      • The Office of the Director of National Intelligence (ODNI).
    • Compiled from academic and commercial sources, such as Control Risks.

    When securing travel to high-risk jurisdictions, you must consider personnel safety as well as data and device security.

    The image contains a diagram to present high-risk jurisdictions.

    The diagram presents high-risk jurisdictions based on US governmental sources (2021) listed on this slide.

    High-risk travel

    Likelihood: Medium

    Impact: Medium

    Key Risk Scenario #1

    Malicious state actors, cybercriminals, and competitors can threaten staff, devices, and data during travel to high-risk jurisdictions. Device theft or compromise may occur while traveling through airports, accessing hotel computer and phone networks, or in internet cafés or other public areas. Threat actors can exploit data from compromised or stolen devices to undermine the organization’s strategic, economic, or competitive advantage. They can also infect compromised devices with malware that delivers malicious payloads once they reconnect with home networks.

    Threat Actor:

    • Malicious state actors
    • Cybercriminals
    • Competitors

    Assets:

    • Staff
    • IT systems
    • Sensitive data

    Effect:

    • Compromised staff health and safety
    • Loss of data
    • Lost of system integrity

    Methods:

    • Identify, steal, or target mobile devices.
    • Compromise network, wireless, or Bluetooth connections.
    • Leverage stolen devices as a means of infecting other networks.
    • Access devices to track user location.
    • Activate microphones on devices to collect information.
    • Intercept electronic communications users send from high-risk jurisdictions.

    The data compliance landscape is a jigsaw puzzle of data protection and data residency requirements

    Since the EU passed the GDPR in 2016, jurisdictions have turned to data regulations to protect citizen data

    Data privacy concerns, nationalism, and the economic value of data are all driving jurisdictions to adopt data residency, breach notification, and cross-border data transfer regulations. As 2021 wound down to a close, nearly all the world’s 30 largest economies had some form of data regulation in place. The regulatory landscape is shifting rapidly, which complicates operations as organizations grow into new markets or engage in merger and acquisition activities.

    Global operations require special attention to data-residency requirements, data breach notification requirements, and cross-border data transfer regulations to mitigate compliance risk.

    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate the data regulations placed in various places around the world.

    Compliance risk

    Likelihood: Medium

    Impact: High

    Key Risk Scenario #2

    Rapid changes in the privacy and security regulatory landscape threaten organizations’ ability to meet their compliance obligations from local legal and regulatory frameworks. Organizations risk reputational damage, administrative fines, criminal charges, and loss of market share. In extreme cases, organizations may lose their license to operate in high-risk jurisdictions. Shifts in the regulatory landscape can involve additional requirements for data residency, cross-border data transfer, data breach notification, and third-party risk management.

    Threat Actor:

    • Local, regional, and national state actors

    Asset:

    • Reputation, market share
    • License to operate

    Effect:

    • Administrative fines
    • Loss of reputation, brand trust, and consumer loyalty
    • Loss of market share
    • Suspension of business operations
    • Lawsuits due to collective actions and claims
    • Criminal charges

    Methods:

    • Shifts in the privacy and security regulatory landscape, including requirements for:
      • Data residency.
      • Cross-border data transfer.
      • Data breach notification.
      • Third-party security and privacy risk management.

    The incidence of insider threats varies widely by jurisdiction in unexpected ways

    On average, companies in North America, the Middle East, and Africa had the most insider incidents in 2021, while those in the Asia-Pacific region had the least.

    The Ponemon Institute set out to understand the financial consequences that result from insider threats and gain insight into how well organizations are mitigating these risks.

    In the context of this research, insider threat is defined as:

    • Employee or contractor negligence.
    • Criminal or malicious insider activities.
    • Credential theft (imposter risk).

    On average, the total cost to remediate insider threats in 2021 was US$15.4 million per incident.

    In all regions, employee or contractor negligence occurred most frequently. Organizations in North America and in the Middle East and Africa were most likely to experience insider threat incidents in 2021.

    the image contains a diagram of the world, with various places coloured in different shades of blue.

    The diagram represents the average number of insider incidents reported per organization in 2021. The results are analyzed in four regions (Ponemon Institute, 2022)

    Insider threat

    Likelihood: Low to Medium

    Impact: High

    Key Risk Scenario #3

    Malicious insiders, negligent employees, and credential thieves can exploit inside access to information systems to commit fraud, steal confidential or commercially valuable information, or sabotage computer systems. Insider threats are difficult to identify, especially when security is geared toward external threats. They are often familiar with the organization’s data and intellectual property as well as the methods in place to protect them. An insider may steal information for personal gain or install malicious software on information systems. They may also be legitimate users who make errors and disregard policies, which places the organization at risk.

    Threat Actor:

    • Malicious insiders
    • Negligent employees
    • Infiltrators

    Asset:

    • Sensitive data
    • Employee credentials
    • IT systems

    Effects:

    • Loss of system integrity
    • Loss of data confidentiality
    • Financial loss

    Methods:

    • Infiltrators may compromise credentials.
    • Malicious or negligent insiders may use corporate email to steal or share sensitive data, including:
      • Regulated data.
      • Intellectual property.
      • Critical business information.
    • Malicious agents may facilitate data exfiltration, as well as open-port and vulnerability scans.

    The risk of advanced persistent threats is more prevalent in Central and South America and the Asia-Pacific region

    Attacks from advanced persistent threat (APT) actors are more sophisticated than traditional ones.

    • More countries will use legal indictments as part of their cyber strategy. Exposing toolsets of APT groups carried out at the governmental level will drive more states to do the same.
    • Expect APTs to increasingly target network appliances like VPN gateways as organizations continue to sustain hybrid workforces.
    • The line between APTs and state-sanctioned ransomware groups is blurring. Expect cybercriminals to wield better tools, mount more targeted attacks, and use double-extortion tactics.
    • Expect more disruption and collateral damage from direct attacks on critical infrastructure.

    Top 10 Significant Threat Actors:

    • Lazarus
    • DeathStalker
    • CactusPete
    • IAmTheKing
    • TransparentTribe
    • StrongPity
    • Sofacy
    • CoughingDown
    • MuddyWater
    • SixLittleMonkeys

    Top 10 Targets:

    • Government
    • Banks
    • Financial Institutions
    • Diplomatic
    • Telecommunications
    • Educational
    • Defense
    • Energy
    • Military
    • IT Companies
    The image contains a world map coloured in various shades of blue.
    Top 12 countries targeted by APTs (Kaspersky, 2020)

    Track notable APTs to revise your list of high-risk jurisdictions and review the latest tactics and techniques

    Governmental advisors track notable APT actors that pose greater risks.

    The CISA Shields Up site, SANS Storm Center site, and MITRE ATT&CK group site provide helpful and timely information to understand APT risks in different jurisdictions.

    The following threat actors are currently associated with cyberattacks affiliated with the Russian government.

    Activity Group

    Risks

    APT28 (GRU)

    Known as Fancy Bear, this threat group has been tied to espionage since 2004. They compromised the Hillary Clinton campaign, amid other major events.

    APT29 (SVT)

    Tied to espionage since 2008. Reportedly compromised the Democratic National Committee in 2015. Cited in the 2021 SolarWinds compromise.

    Buhtrap/RTM Group

    Group focused on financial targets since 2014. Currently known to target Russian and Ukrainian banks.

    Gamaredon

    Operating in Crimea. Aligned with Russian interests. Has previously targeted Ukrainian government officials and organizations.

    DEV-0586

    Carried out wiper malware attacks on Ukrainian targets in January 2022.

    UNC1151

    Active since 2016. Linked to information operation campaigns and the distribution of anti-NATO material.

    Conti

    Most successful ransomware gang of 2021, with US$188M revenue. Supported Russian invasion of Ukraine, threatening attacks on allied critical infrastructure.

    Sources: MITRE ATT&CK; Security Boulevard, 2022; Reuters, 2022; The Verge, 2022

    Advanced persistent threat

    Likelihood: Low to Medium

    Impact: High

    Key Risk Scenario #4

    Advanced persistent threats are state actors or state-sponsored affiliates with the means to avoid detection by anti-malware software and intrusion detection systems. These highly-skilled and persistent malicious agents have significant resources with which to bypass traditional security controls, establish a foothold in the information technology infrastructure, and exfiltrate data undetected. APTs have the resources to adapt to a defender’s efforts to resist them over time. The loss of system integrity and data confidentiality over time can lead to financial losses, business continuity disruptions, and the destruction of critical infrastructure.

    Threat Actor:

    • State actors
    • State-sponsored affiliates

    Asset:

    • Sensitive data
    • IT systems
    • Critical infrastructure

    Effects:

    • Loss of system integrity
    • Loss of data confidentiality
    • Financial loss
    • Business continuity disruptions
    • Infrastructure destruction

    Methods:

    • Persistent, consistent attacks using the most advanced threats and tactics to bypass security defenses.
    • The goal of APTs is to maintain access to networks for prolonged periods without being detected.
    • The median dwell time differs widely between regions. FireEye reported the mean dwell time for 2018:
      • Americas: 71 days
      • Europe, Middle East, and Africa: 177 days
      • Asia-Pacific: 204 days
    Sources: Symantec, 2011; FireEye, 2019

    Threat agents have deployed invasive technology for commercial surveillance in at least 76 countries since 2015

    State actors and their affiliates purchased and used invasive spyware from companies in Europe, Israel, and the US.

    • “Customers are predominantly repressive regimes looking for new ways to control the flow of information and stifle dissent. Less than 10% of suspected customers are considered full democracies by the Economist Intelligence Unit.” (Top10VPN, 2021)
    • Companies based in economically developed and largely democratic states are profiting off the technology.
    • The findings demonstrate the need to consider geopolitical realities when assessing high-risk jurisdictions and to take meaningful action to increase layered defenses against invasive malware.
    • Spyware is having an increasingly well-known impact on civil society. For instance, since 2016, over 50,000 individual phone numbers have been identified as potential targets by NSO Group, the Israeli manufacturers of the notorious Pegasus Spyware. The target list contained the phone numbers of politicians, journalists, activists, doctors, and academics across the world.
    • The true number of those affected by spyware is almost impossible to determine given that many fall victim to the technology and do not notice.
    The image contains a map of the world with various countries highlighted in shades of blue.

    Countries where commercial surveillance tools have been deployed (“Global Spyware Market Index,” Top10VPN, 2021)

    The risks and effects of spyware vary greatly

    Spyware can steal mundane information, track a user’s every move, and everything in between.

    Adware

    Software applications that display advertisements while the program is running.

    Keyboard Loggers

    Applications that monitor and record keystrokes. Malicious agents use them to steal credentials and sensitive enterprise data.

    Trojans

    Applications that appear harmless but inflict damage or data loss to a system.

    Mobile Spyware

    Surveillance applications that infect mobile devices via SMS or MMS channels, though the most advanced can infect devices without user input.

    State actors and their affiliates use system monitors to track browsing habits, application usage, and keystrokes and capture information from devices’ GPS location data, microphone, and camera. The most advanced system monitor spyware, such as NSO Group’s Pegasus, can infect devices without user input and record conversations from end-to-end encrypted messaging systems.

    Commercial surveillance

    Likelihood: Low to Medium

    Impact: Medium

    Key Risk Scenario #5

    Malicious agents can deploy malware on end-user devices with commercial tools available off the shelf to secretly monitor the digital activity of users. Attacks exploit widespread vulnerabilities in telecommunications protocols. They occur through email and text phishing campaigns, malware embedded in untested applications, and sophisticated zero-click attacks that deliver payloads without requiring user interactions. Attacks target sensitive as well as mundane information. They can be used to track employee activities, investigate criminal activity, or steal credentials, credit card numbers, or other personally identifiable information.

    Threat Actor:

    • State actors
    • State-sponsored affiliates

    Asset:

    • Sensitive data
    • Staff health and safety
    • IT systems

    Effects:

    • Data breaches
    • Loss of data confidentiality
    • Increased risk to staff health and safety
    • Misuse of private data
    • Financial loss

    Methods:

    • Email and text phishing attacks that delivery malware payloads
    • Sideloading untested applications from a third-party source rather than an official retailer
    • Sophisticated zero-click attacks that deliver payloads without requiring user interaction

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    The tool included with this blueprint can help you draft risk scenarios and risk statements in this section.

    The risk register will capture a list of critical assets and their vulnerabilities, the threats that endanger them, and the adverse effect your organization may face.

    The image includes two screenshots of the jurisdictional risk register and heatmap tool. The image contains a screenshot of the High-Risk Travel Jurisdiction.

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    2.1.1 Identify assets

    1 – 2 hours

    1. As a group, consider critical or mission-essential functions in high-risk jurisdictions and the systems on which they depend. Brainstorm a list of the organization’s mission-supporting assets in high-risk jurisdictions. Consider:
    • Staff
    • Critical IT systems
    • Sensitive data
    • Critical operational processes
  • On a whiteboard, brainstorm the potential adverse effect of malicious agents in high-risk jurisdictions compromising critical assets. Consider the impact on:
    • Information systems.
    • Sensitive or regulated data.
    • Staff health and safety.
    • Critical operations and objectives.
    • Organizational finances.
    • Reputation and brand loyalty

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    Inputs for risk scenario identification

    Input

    Output

    • Corporate strategy
    • IT strategy
    • Security strategy
    • Business impact analyses
    • A list of the organization’s mission-supporting assets

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Whiteboard
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • System owner
    • Enterprise Risk Management

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    Inputs for risk scenario identification

    The image contains an example of the activity mentioned in the text above.

    Model threats to narrow the range of scenarios

    Motives and capabilities to perform attacks on critical assets vary across different threat actors.

    Category

    Actions

    Motivation

    Sophistication

    Nation-states

    Cyberespionage, cyberattacks

    Geopolitical

    High. Dedicated resources and personnel, extensive planning and coordination.

    Proxy organizations

    Espionage, destructive attacks

    Geopolitical, Ideological, Profit

    Moderate. Some planning and support functions and technical expertise.

    Cybercrime

    Theft, fraud, extortion

    Profit

    Moderate. Some planning and support functions and technical expertise.

    Hacktivists

    Disrupt operations, attack brands, release sensitive data

    Ideological

    Low. Rely on widely available tools that require little skill to deploy.

    Insiders

    Destruction or release of sensitive data, theft, exposure through negligence

    Incompetence, Discontent

    Internal access. Acting on their own or in concert with any of the above.

    • Criminals, hacktivists, and insiders vary in sophistication. Some criminal groups demonstrate a high degree of sophistication; however, a large cyber event that damages critical infrastructure does not align with their incentives to make money at minimal risk.
    • Proxy actors conduct offensive cyber operations on behalf of a beneficiary. They may be acting on behalf of a competitor, national government, or group of individuals.
    • Nation-states engage in long-term espionage and offensive cyber operations that support geopolitical and strategic policy objectives.

    2.1.2 Identify threats

    1 – 2 hours

    1. Review the outputs from activity 1.1.1 and activity 2.1.1.
    2. Identify threat agents that could undermine the security of critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions. Include internal and external actors.
    3. Assess their motives, means, and opportunities.
    • Which critical assets are most attractive? Why?
    • What paths and vulnerabilities can threat agents exploit to reach critical assets without going through a control?
    • How could they defeat existing controls? Draw on the MITRE framework to inform your analysis.
    • Once agents defeat a control, what further attack can they launch?

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    Inputs for risk scenario identification

    Input

    Output

    • Jurisdictional assessment from activity 1.1.1
    • Critical assets from activity 2.1.1
    • Potential vulnerabilities from:
      • Security control gap analysis
      • Security risk register
    • Threat intelligence
    • MITRE framework
    • A list of critical assets, threat agents, vulnerabilities, and potential attack vectors.

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Whiteboard
    • Security team
    • Infrastructure & Operations team
    • Enterprise Risk Management

    2.1.2 Identify threats (continued)

    1 – 2 hours

    1. On a whiteboard, brainstorm how threat agents will exploit vulnerabilities in critical assets to reach their goal. Redefine attack vectors to capture what could result from a successful initial attack.

    For example:

    • State actors and cybercriminals may steal or compromise end-user devices during travel to high-risk jurisdictions using malware they embed in airport charging stations, internet café networks, or hotel business centers.
    • Compromised devices may infect corporate networks and threaten sensitive data once they reconnect to them.

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    The image contains a screenshot of activity 2.1.2 as described in the text above.

    Bring together the critical risk elements into a single risk scenario

    Summarize the scenario further into a single risk statement

    Risk Scenario: High-Risk Travel

    State actors and cybercriminals can threaten staff, devices, and data during travel to high-risk jurisdictions. Device theft or compromise may occur while traveling through airports, accessing hotel computer and phone networks, or in internet cafés or other public areas. Threat actors can exploit data from compromised or stolen devices to undermine the organization’s strategic, economic, or competitive advantage. They can also infect compromised devices with malware that delivers malicious payloads once they reconnect with home networks.

    Risk Statement

    Cybercriminals compromise end-user devices during travel to high-risk jurisdictions, jeopardizing staff safety and leading to loss of sensitive data.

    Risk Scenario: Compliance Risk

    Rapid changes in the privacy and security regulatory landscape threaten an organization’s ability to meet its compliance obligations from local legal and regulatory frameworks. Organizations that fail to do so risk reputational damage, administrative fines, criminal charges, and loss of market share. In extreme cases, organizations may lose their license to operate in high-risk jurisdictions. Shifts in the regulatory landscape can involve additional requirements for data residency, cross-border data transfer, data breach notification, and third-party risk management.

    Risk Statement

    Rapid changes in the privacy and security regulations landscape threaten our ability to remain compliant, leading to reputational and financial loss.

    Fill out the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    The tool is populated with data from two key risk scenarios: high-risk travel and compliance risk.

    The image includes two screenshots of the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    1. Label the risk in Tab 3, Column B.
    2. Record your risk scenario in Tab 3, Column C.
    3. Record your risk statement in Tab 3, Column D.
    4. Identify the applicable jurisdictions in Tab 3, Column E.
    5. You can further categorize the scenario as:
      • an enterprise risk (Column G).
      • an IT risk (Column H).

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    Step 2.2

    Assess Risk Exposure

    Activities

    2.2.1 Identify existing controls

    2.2.2 Assess likelihood and impact

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Assess risk exposure for each risk scenario through an analysis of its likelihood and impact.

    Brush up on risk assessment essentials

    The next step will help you prioritize IT risks based on severity.

    Likelihood of Occurrence X Likelihood of Impact = Risk Severity

    Likelihood of occurrence: How likely the risk is to occur.

    Likelihood of impact: The likely impact of a risk event.

    Risk severity: The significance of the risk.

    Evaluate risk severity against the risk tolerance thresholds and the cost of risk response.

    Identify existing controls before you proceed

    Existing controls will reduce the inherent likelihood and impact of the risk scenario you face.

    Existing controls were put in place to avoid, mitigate, or transfer key risks your organization faced in the past. Without considering existing controls, you run the risk of overestimating the likelihood and impact of the risk scenarios your organization faces in high-risk jurisdictions.

    For instance, the ability to remote-wipe corporate-owned devices will reduce the potential impact of a device lost or compromised during travel to high-risk jurisdictions.

    As you complete the risk assessment for each scenario, document existing controls that reduce their inherent likelihood and impact.

    2.2.1 Document existing controls

    6-10 hours

    1. Document the Risk Category and Existing Controls in the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.
      • Tactical controls apply to individual risks only. For instance, the ability to remote-wipe devices mitigates the impact of a device lost in a high-risk jurisdiction.
      • Strategic controls apply to multiple risks. For instance, deploying MFA for critical applications mitigates the likelihood that malicious actors can compromise a lost device and impedes their access in devices they do compromise.

    Input

    Output

    • Risk scenarios
    • Existing controls for risk scenarios

    Materials

    Participants

    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Enterprise Risk Management

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    Assess the risk scenarios you identified in Phase 1

    The risk register is the central repository for risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    • Use the second tab of the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to create likelihood, impact, and risk tolerance assessment scales to evaluate every risk event effectively.
    • Severity-level assessment is a “first pass” of your risk scenarios that will reveal your organization’s most severe risks in high-risk jurisdictions.
    • You can incorporate expected cost calculations into your evaluation to assess scenarios in greater detail.
    • Expected cost represents how much you would expect to pay in an average year for each risk event. Expected cost calculations can help compare IT risks to non-IT risks that may not use the same scales and communicate system-level risk to the business in a language they will understand.

    Expected cost calculations may not be practical. Determining robust likelihood and impact values to produce cost estimates can be challenging and time consuming. Use severity-level assessments as a first pass to make the case for risk mitigation measures and take your lead from stakeholders.

    The image contains two screenshots of the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to capture and analyze your data.

    2.2.2 Assess likelihood and impact

    6-10 hours

    1. Assign each risk scenario a likelihood of occurrence and a likely impact level that represents the impact of the scenario on the whole organization considering existing controls. Record your results in Tab 3, column R and S, respectively.
    2. You can further dissect likelihood and impact into component parameters but focus first on total likelihood and impact to keep the task manageable.
    3. As you input the first few likelihood and impact values, compare them to one another to ensure consistency and accuracy. For instance, is a device lost in a high-risk jurisdiction truly more impactful than a device compromised with commercial surveillance software?
    4. The tool will calculate the probability of risk exposure based on the likelihood and consequence associated with the scenario. The results are published in Tab 3, Column T.

    Input

    Output

    • Risk scenarios
    • Assessed the likelihood of occurrence and impact for all identified risk events

    Materials

    Participants

    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Enterprise Risk Management

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    Refine your risk assessment to justify your estimates

    Document the rationale behind each value and the level of consensus in group discussions.

    Stakeholders will likely ask you to explain some of the numbers you assigned to likelihood and impact assessments. Pointing to an assessment methodology will give your estimates greater credibility.

    • Assign one individual to take notes during the assessment exercise.
    • Have them document the main rationale behind each value and the level of consensus.

    The goal is to develop robust intersubjective estimates of the likelihood and impact of a risk scenario.

    We assigned a 50% likelihood rating to a risk scenario. Were we correct?

    Assess the truth of the following statements to test likelihood assessments. In this case, do these two statements seem true?

    • The risk event will likely occur once in the next two years, all things being equal.
    • In two nearly identical organizations, one out of two will experience the risk event this year.
    The image includes a screenshot of the High-Risk Travel Jurisdictions.

    Phase 3

    Execute Response

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Prioritize and treat global risks to critical assets based on their value and exposure.
    • Build an initiative roadmap that identifies and applies relevant controls to protect critical assets. Identify key risk indicators to monitor progress.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Step 3.1

    Treat Security Risks

    Activities

    3.1.1 Identify and assess risk response

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritize and treat global risks to critical assets based on their value and exposure.

    Analyze and select risk responses

    The next step will help you treat the risk scenarios you built in Phase 2.

    Identify

    Identify risk responses.

    Predict

    Predict the effectiveness of the risk response, if implemented, by estimating the residual likelihood and impact of the risk.

    Calculate

    The tool will calculate the residual severity of the risk after applying the risk response.

    The first part of the phase outlines project activities. The second part elaborates on high-risk travel and compliance risk, the two key risk scenarios we are following throughout the project. Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to capture your work.

    Analyze likelihood and impact to identify response

    The image contains a diagram of he risk response analysis. Risk Transfer and Risk Avoidance has the most likelihood, and Risk Acceptance and Risk Mitigation have the most impact. Risk Avoidance has the most likelihood and most impact in regards to risk response.

    3.1.1 Identify and assess risk response

    Complete the following steps for each risk scenario.

    1. Identify a risk response action that will help reduce the likelihood of occurrence or the impact if the scenario were to occur. Indicate the type of risk response (avoidance, mitigation, transfer, acceptance, or no risk exists).
    2. Assign each risk response action a residual likelihood level and a residual impact level. This is the same step you performed in Activity 2.2.2, but you are now are estimating the likelihood and impact of the risk event after you implemented the risk response action successfully. The Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool will generate a residual risk severity level for each risk event.
    3. Identify the potential Risk Action Owner (Project Manager) if the response is selected and turned into an IT project, and document this in the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool .
    4. For each risk event, document risk response actions, residual likelihood and impact levels, and residual risk severity level.

    Input

    Output

    • Risk scenarios from Phase 2
    • Risk scenario mitigation plan

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    Step 3.2

    Mitigate Travel Risk

    Activities

    3.2.1 Develop a travel policy

    3.2.2 Develop travel procedures

    3.2.3 Design high-risk travel guidelines

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritize and treat global risks to critical assets based on their value and exposure.

    Identify controls to mitigate jurisdictional risk

    This section provides guidance on the most prevalent risk scenarios identified in Phase 2 and provides a more in-depth examination of the two most prevalent ones, high-risk travel and compliance risk. Determine the appropriate response to each risk scenario to keep global risks to critical assets aligned with the organization’s risk tolerance.

    Key Risk Scenarios

    • High-Risk Travel
    • Compliance Risk
    • Insider Threat
    • Advanced Persistent Threat
    • Commercial Surveillance

    Travel risk is a common concern in organizations with global operations

    • The security of staff, devices, and data is one of the biggest challenges facing organizations with a global footprint. Working and traveling in unpredictable environments will aways carry a degree of risk, but organizations can do much to develop a safer and more secure working environment.
    • Compromised or stolen devices can provide threat actors with access to data that could compromise the organization’s strategic, economic, or competitive advantage or expose the organization to regulatory risk.
    • For many organizations, security risk assessments, security plans, travel security procedures, security training, and incident reporting systems are a key part of their operating language.
    • The following section provides a simple structure to help organizations demystify travel in high-risk jurisdictions.

    The image contains a diagram to present high-risk jurisdictions.

    Before you leave

    • Identify high-risk countries.
    • Enable controls.
    • Limit what you pack.

    During your trip

    • Assume you are monitored.
    • Limit access to systems.
    • Prevent theft.

    When you return

    • Change your password.
    • Restore your devices.

    Case study

    Higher Education: Camosun College

    Interview: Evan Garland

    Frame additional security controls as a value-added service.

    Situation

    The director of the international department at Camosun College reached out to IT security for additional support. Department staff often traveled to hostile environments. They were concerned malicious agents would either steal end-user devices or compromise them and access sensitive data. The director asked IT security for options that would better protect traveling staff, their devices, and the information they contain.

    Challenges

    First, controls would need to admit both work and personal use of corporate devices. Staff relied exclusively on work devices for travel to mitigate the risk of personal device theft. Personal use of corporate devices during travel was common. Second, controls needed to strike the right balance between friction and effortless access. Traveling staff had only intermittent access to IT support. Restrictive controls could prevent them from accessing their devices and data altogether.

    Solution

    IT consulted staff to discuss light-touch solutions that would secure devices without introducing too much complexity or compromising functionality. They then planned security controls that involved user interaction and others that did not and identified training requirements.

    Results

    Controls with user interaction

    Controls without user interaction

    • Multifactor authentication for college systems and collaboration platforms
    • Password manager for both work and personal use for staff for stronger passwords and practices
    • Security awareness training to help traveling staff identify potential threats while traveling through airports or accessing public Wi-Fi.
    • Drive encryption and always-on VPN to protect data at rest and in transit
    • Increased setting for phishing and spam filtering for traveling staff email
    • Enhanced anti-malware/endpoint detection and response (EDR) solution for traveling laptops

    Build a program to mitigate travel risks

    There is no one-size-fits-all solution.

    The most effective solution will take advantage of existing risk management policies, processes, and procedures at your organization.

    • Develop a framework. Outline the organization’s approach to high-risk travel, including the policies, procedures, and mechanisms put in place to ensure safe travel to high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Draft a policy. Outline the organization’s risk attitude and key security principles and define roles and responsibilities. Include security responsibilities and obligations in job descriptions of staff members and senior managers.
    • Provide flexible options. Inherent travel risk will vary from one jurisdiction to another. You will likely not find an approach that works for every case. Establish locally relevant measures and plans in different security contexts and risk environments.
    • Look for quick wins. Identify measures or requirements that you can establish quickly but that can have a positive effect on the security of staff, data, and devices.
    • Monitor and review. Undertake periodic reviews of the organization’s security approach and management framework, as well as their implementation, to ensure the framework remains effective.

    3.2.1 Develop a travel policy

    1. Work with your business leaders to build a travel policy for high-risk jurisdictions. The policy should be a short and accessible document structured around four key sections:
      • A statement on the importance of staff security and safety, the scope of the policy, and who it applies to (staff, consultants, contractors, volunteers, visitors, accompanying dependants, etc.).
      • A principles section explaining the organization’s security culture, risk attitude, and the key principles that shape the organization’s approach to staff security and safety.
      • A responsibilities section setting out the organization’s security risk management structure and the roles and actions allocated to specific positions.
      • A minimal security requirements section establishing the specific security requirements that must be in place in all locations and specific locations.
    2. Common security principles include:
    • Shared responsibility – Managing risks to staff is a shared organizational responsibility.
    • Acknowledgment of risk – Managing security will not remove all risks. Staff need to appreciate, as part of their informed consent, that they are still exposed to risk.
    • Primacy of life – Staff safety is of the highest importance. Staff should never place themselves at excessive risk to meet program objectives or protect property.
    • Proportionate risk – Risks must be assessed to ensure they are proportionate to the benefits organizational activities provide and the ability to manage those risks.
    • Right to withdraw – Staff have the right to withdraw from or refuse to take up work in a particular area due to security concerns.
    • No right to remain – The organization has the right to suspend activities that it considers too dangerous.
  • Cross-reference the organization’s other governing policies that outline requirements related to security risk management, such as the health and safety policy, access control policy, and acceptable use of security assets.
  • Input

    Output

    • List of high-risk jurisdictions
    • Risk scenarios from Phase 2
    • Data inventory and data flows
    • Travel policy for high-risk jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Develop security plans for high-risk travel

    Security plans advise staff on how to manage the risk identified in assessments.

    Security plans are key country documents that outline the security measures and procedures in place and the responsibilities and resources required to implement them. Security plans should be established in high-risk jurisdictions where your organization has a regular, significant presence. Security plans must remain relevant and accessible documents that address the specific risks that exist in that location, and, if appropriate, are specific about where the measures apply and who they apply to. Plans should be updated regularly, especially following significant incidents or changes in the operating environment or activities.

    Key Components

    Critical information – One-page summary of pertinent information for easy access and quick reference (e.g. curfew times, no-go areas, important contacts).

    Overview – Purpose and scope of the document, responsibilities for security plan, organization’s risk attitude, date of completion and review date, and a summary of the security strategy and policy.

    Current Context – Summary of current operating context and overall security situation; main risks to staff, assets, and operations; and existing threats and risk rating.

    Procedures – Simple security procedures that staff should adhere to in order to prevent incidents and how to respond should problems arise. Standard operating procedures (SOPs) should address key risks identified in the assessment.

    Security levels – The organization's security levels/phases, with situational indicators that reflect increasing risks to staff in that context and location and specific actions/measures required in response to increasing insecurity.

    Incident reporting – The procedures and responsibilities for reporting security-related incidents; for example, the type of incidents to be reported, the reporting structure, and the format for incident reporting.

    Determine travel risk

    Tailor your risk response to the security risk assessment you conducted in earlier stages of this project.

    Ratings are formulated by assessing several types of risk, including conflict, political/civil unrest, terrorism, crime, and health and infrastructure risks.

    Rating

    Description (Examples)

    Recommended Action

    Low

    Generally secure with adequate physical security. Low violent crime rates. Some civil unrest during significant events. Acts of terrorism rare. Risks associated with natural disasters limited and health threats mainly preventable.

    Basic personal security, travel, and health precautions required.

    Moderate

    Periodic civil unrest. Antigovernment, insurgent, or extremist groups active with sporadic acts of terrorism. Staff at risk from common and violent crime. Transport and communications services are unreliable and safety records are poor. Jurisdiction prone to natural disasters or disease epidemics.

    Increased vigilance and routine security procedures required.

    High

    Regular periods of civil unrest, which may target foreigners. Antigovernment, insurgent, or extremist groups very active and threaten political or economic stability. Violent crime rates high and targeting of foreigners is common. Infrastructure and emergency services poor. May be regular disruption to transportation or communications services. Certain areas off-limits to foreigners. Jurisdictions experiencing a natural disaster or a disease epidemic are considered high risk.

    High level of vigilance and effective, context-specific security precautions required.

    Extreme

    Undergoing active conflict or persistent civil unrest. Risk of being caught up in a violent incident or attack is very high. Civil authorities may have lost control of significant portions of the country. Lines between criminality and political and insurgent violence are blurred. Foreigners are likely to be denied access to significant parts of the country. Transportation and communication services are severely degraded or non-existent. Violence presents a direct threat to staff security.

    Stringent security precautions essential and may not be sufficient to prevent serious incidents.

    Program activities may be suspended and staff withdrawn at very short notice.

    3.2.2 Develop travel procedures

    1. Work with your business leaders to build travel procedures for high-risk jurisdictions. The procedures should be tailored to the risk assessment and address the risk scenarios identified in Phase 2.
    2. Use the categories outlined in the next two slides to structure the procedure. Address all types of travel, detail security measures, and outline what the organization expects of travelers before, during, and after their trip.
    3. Consider the implementation of special measures to limit the impact of a potential security event, including:
      • Information end-user device loaner programs.
      • Temporary travel service email accounts.
    4. Specify what happens when staff add personal travel to their work trip to cover issues such as insurance, check-in, actual travel times, etc.
    5. Discuss the rationale for each procedure. Ensure the components align with the policy statements outlined in the high-risk travel policy developed in the previous step.

    Input

    Output

    • List of high-risk jurisdictions
    • Risk scenarios from Phase 2
    • High-risk travel policy
    • Travel procedures for high-risk jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Draft procedures to mitigate travel risks

    Address all types of travel, detail security measures, and outline what the organization expects of travelers before, during, and after their trip

    Introduction

    Clarifies who the procedures apply to. Highlights any differences in travel security requirements or support provided to staff, consultants, partners, and official visitors.

    Travel risk ratings

    Explains the travel or country risk rating system, how staff access the information, the different categories and indicators, and their implications.

    Roles and responsibilities

    Clarifies the responsibilities of travelers, their line managers or contact points, and senior management regarding travel security and how this changes for destinations with higher risk ratings.

    Travel authorization

    Stipulates who in the organization authorizes travel, the various compliance measures required, and how this changes for destinations with higher risk ratings.

    Travel risk assessment

    Explains when travel risk assessments are required, the template that should be used, and who approves the completed assessments.

    Travel security procedures should specify what happens when staff add personal travel to their work trip to cover issues such as insurance, check-in, actual travel times, etc.

    Pre-travel briefings

    Outlines the information that must be provided to travelers prior to departure, the type of briefing required and who provides it, and how these requirements change as risk ratings increase.

    Security training

    Explain security training required prior to travel. This may vary depending on the country’s risk rating. Includes information on training waiver system, including justifications and authorization.

    Traveler profile forms

    Travelers should complete a profile form, which includes personal details, emergency contacts, medical details, social media footprint, and proof-of-life questions (in contexts where there are abduction risks).

    Check-in protocol

    Specifies who travelers must maintain contact with while traveling and how often, as well as the escalation process in case of loss of contact. The frequency of check-ins should reflect the increase in the risk rating for the destination.

    Emergency procedures

    Outlines the organization's emergency procedures for security and medical emergencies.

    3.2.3 Design high-risk travel guidelines

    • Supplement the high-risk travel policies and procedures with guidelines to help international travelers stay safe.
    • The document is intended for an end-user audience and should reflect your organization’s policies and procedures for the use of information and information systems during international travel.
    • Use the Digital Safety Guidelines for International Travel template in concert with this blueprint to provide guidance on what end users can do to stay safe before they leave, during their trip, and when they return.
    • Consider integrating the guidelines into specialized security awareness training sessions that target end users who travel to high-risk jurisdictions.
    • The guidelines should supplement and align with existing technical controls.

    Input

    Output

    • List of high-risk jurisdictions
    • Risk scenarios from Phase 2
    • High-risk travel policy
    • High-risk travel procedure
    • Travel guidelines for high-risk jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Digital Safety Guidelines for International Travel template

    Step 3.3

    Mitigate Compliance Risk

    Activities

    3.3.1 Identify data localization obligations

    3.3.2 Integrate obligations into IT system design

    3.3.3 Document data processing activities

    3.3.4 Choose the right mechanism

    3.3.5 Implement the appropriate controls

    3.3.6 Identify data breach notification obligations

    3.3.7 Integrate data breach notification into incident response

    3.3.8 Identify vendor security and data protection requirements

    3.3.9 Build due diligence questionnaire

    3.3.10 Build appropriate data processing agreement

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritize and treat global risks to critical assets based on their value and exposure.

    Compliance risk is a prevalent risk in organizations with a global footprint

    • The legal and regulatory landscape is evolving rapidly to keep step with the pace of technological change. Security and privacy leaders are expected to mitigate the risk of noncompliance as the organization expands to new jurisdictions.
    • Organizations with a global footprint must stay abreast of local regulations and provide risk management guidance to business leaders to support global operations.
    • This sections describes four compliance risks in this context:
      • Cross-border data transfer
      • Third-party risk management
      • Data breach notification
      • Data residency

    Compliance with local obligations

    Likelihood: Medium to High

    Impact: High

    Data Residency

    Gap Controls

    • Identify and document the data localization obligations for the jurisdictions that the organization is operating in.
    • Design and implement IT systems that satisfy the data localization requirements.
    • Comply with data localization obligations within each jurisdiction.

    Heatmap of Global Data Residency Regulations

    The image contains a screenshot of a picture of a world map with various shades of blue to demonstrate the heatmap of global data residency regulations.
    Source: InCountry, 2021

    Examples of Data Residency Requirements

    Country

    Data Type

    Local Storage Requirements

    Australia

    Personal data – heath record

    My Health Records Act 2012

    China

    Personal information — critical information infrastructure operators

    Cybersecurity law

    Government cloud data

    Opinions of the Office of the Central Leading Group for Cyberspace Affairs on Strengthening Cybersecurity Administration of Cloud Computing Services for Communist Party and Government Agencies

    India

    Government email data

    The Public Records Act of 1993

    Indonesia

    Data held by electronic system operator for the public service

    Regulation 82 concerning “Electronic System and Transaction Operation”

    Germany

    Government cloud service data

    Criteria for the procurement and use of cloud services by the federal German administration

    Russia

    Personal data

    The amendments of Data Protection Act No. 152 FZ

    Vietnam

    Data held by internet service providers

    The Decree on Management, Provision, and Use of Internet Services and Information Content Online (Decree 72)

    US

    Government cloud service data

    Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement: Network Penetration Reporting and Contracting for Cloud Services (DFARS Case 2013-D018)

    3.3.1 Identify data localization obligations

    1-2 hours

    1. Work with your business leaders to identify and document the jurisdictions where your organization is operating in or providing services and products to consumers within.
    2. Work with your legal team to identify and document all relevant data localization obligations for the data your organization generates, collects, and processes in order to operate your business.
    3. Record your data localization obligations in the table below.

    Jurisdiction

    Relevant Regulations

    Local Storage Requirements

    Date Type

    Input

    Output

    • List of jurisdictions your organization is operating in
    • Relevant security and data protection regulations
    • Data inventory and data flows
    • Completed list of data localization obligations

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.2 Integrate obligations into your IT system design

    1-2 hours

    1. Work with your IT department to design the IT architecture and systems to satisfy the data localization requirements.
    2. The table below provides a checklist for integrating privacy considerations into your IT systems.

    Item

    Consideration

    Answer

    Supporting Document

    1

    Have you identified business services that process data that will be subject to localization requirements?

    2

    Have you identified IT systems associated with the business services mentioned above?

    3

    Have you established a data inventory (i.e. data types, business purposes) for the IT systems mentioned above?

    4

    Have you established a data flow diagram for the data identified above?

    5

    Have you identified the types of data that should be stored locally?

    6

    Have you confirmed whether a copy of the data locally stored will satisfy the obligations?

    7

    Have you confirmed whether an IT redesign is needed or whether modifications (e.g. adding a server) to the IT systems would satisfy the obligations?

    8

    Have you confirmed whether access from another jurisdiction is allowed?

    9

    Have you identified how long the data should be stored?

    Input

    Output

    • Data localization obligations
    • Business services that process data that will be subject to localization requirements
    • IT systems associated with business services
    • Data inventory and data flows
    • Completed checklist of localization obligations for IT system design

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Compliance with local obligations

    Likelihood: Medium to High

    Impact: High

    Cross-Border Transfer

    Gap Controls

    • Know where you transfer your data.
    • Identify jurisdictions that your organization is operating in and that impose different requirements for the cross-border transfer of personal data.
    • Adopt and implement a proper cross-border data transfer mechanism in accordance with applicable privacy laws and regulations.
    • Re-evaluate at appropriate intervals.

    Which cross-border transfer mechanism should I choose?

    Transfer Mechanism

    Advantages

    Disadvantages

    Standard Contractual Clauses (SCC)

    • Easy to implement
    • No DPA (data processing agreement) approval
    • Not suitable for complex data transfers
    • Do not meet business agility
    • Needs legal solution

    Binding Corporate Rules (BCRs)

    • Meets business agility needs
    • Raises trust in the organization
    • Doubles as solution for art. 24/25 of the GDPR
    • Sets high compliance maturity level
    • Takes time to draft/implement
    • Requires DPA approval (scrutiny)
    • Requires culture of compliance
    • Approved by one "lead" authority and two other "co-lead“ authorities
    • Takes usually between six and nine months for the approval process only

    Code of Conduct

    • Raises trust in the sector
    • Self-regulation instead of law
    • No code of conduct approved yet
    • Takes time to draft/implement
    • Requires DPA approval and culture of compliance
    • Needs of organization may not be met

    Certification

    • Raises trust in the organization
    • No certification schemes available yet
    • Risk of compliance at minimum necessary
    • Requires audits

    Consent

    • Legal certainty
    • Transparent
    • Administrative burden
    • Some data subjects are incapable of consenting all or nothing

    3.3.3 Document data processing activities

    1-2 hours

    1. Identify and document the following information:
      • Name of business process
      • Purposes of processing
      • Lawful basis
      • Categories of data subjects and personal data
      • Data subject categories
      • Which system the data resides in
      • Recipient categories
      • Third country/international organization
      • Documents for appropriate safeguards for international transfer (adequacy, SCCs, BCRs, etc.)
      • Description of mitigating measures

    Input

    Output

    • Name of business process
    • Categories of personal data
    • Which system the data resides
    • Third country/international organization
    • Documents for appropriate safeguards for international transfer
    • Completed list of data processing activities

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.4 Choose the right mechanism

    1-2 hours

    1. Identify jurisdictions that your organization is operating in and that impose different requirements for the cross-border transfer of personal data. For example, the EU’s GDPR and China’s Personal Information Protection Law require proper cross-border transfer mechanisms before the data transfers. Your organization should decide which cross-border transfer mechanism is the best fit for your cross-border data transfer scenarios.
    2. Use the following table to identify and document the pros and cons of each data transfer mechanism and the final decision.

    Data Transfer Mechanism

    Pros

    Cons

    Final Decision

    SCC

    BCR

    Code of Conduct

    Certification

    Consent

    Input

    Output

    • List of relevant data transfer mechanisms
    • Assessment of the pros and cons of each mechanism
    • Final decision regarding which data transfer mechanism is the best fit for your organization

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.5 Implement the appropriate controls

    1-3 hours

    • One of the most common mechanisms is standard contractual clauses (SCCs).
    • Use Info-Tech’s Standard Contractual Clauses Template to facilitate your cross-border transfer activities.
    • Identify and check whether the following core components are covered in your SCC and record the results in the table below.
    # Core Components Status Note
    1 Purpose and scope
    2 Effect and invariability of the Clauses
    3 Description of the transfer(s)
    4 Data protection safeguards
    5 Purpose limitation
    6 Transparency
    7 Accuracy and data minimization
    8 Duration of processing and erasure or return of data
    9 Storage limitation
    10 Security of processing
    11 Sensitive data
    12 Onward transfers
    13 Processing under the authority of the data importer
    14 Documentation and compliance
    15 Use of subprocessors
    16 Data subject rights
    17 Redress
    18 Liability
    19 Local laws and practices affecting compliance with the Clauses
    20 Noncompliance with the Clauses and termination
    21 Description of data processing activities, such as list of parties, description of transfer, etc.
    22 Technical and organizational measures
    InputOutput
    • Description of the transfer(s)
    • Duration of processing and erasure or return of data
    • Onward transfers
    • Use of subprocessors
    • Etc.
    • Draft of the standard contractual clauses (SCC)
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Compliance with local obligations

    Likelihood: High

    Impact: Medium to High

    Data Breach

    Gap Controls

    • Identify jurisdictions that your organization is operating in and that impose different obligations for data breach reporting.
    • Document the notification obligations for various business scenarios, such as controller to DPA, controller to data subject, and processor to controller.
    • Integrate breach notification obligations into security incident response process.

    Examples of Data Breach Notification Obligations

    Location

    Regulation/ Standard

    Reporting Obligation

    EU

    GDPR

    72 hours

    China

    PIPL

    Immediately

    US

    HIPAA

    No later than 60 days

    Canada

    PIPEDA

    As soon as feasible

    Global

    PCI DSS

    • Visa – immediately after breach discovered
    • Mastercard – within 24 hours of discovering breach
    • American Express – immediately after breach discovered

    Summary of US State Data Breach Notification Statutes

    The image contains a graph to show the summary of the US State Data Breach Notification Statutes.

    Source: Davis Wright Tremaine

    3.3.6 Identify data breach notification obligations

    1-2 hours

    1. Identify jurisdictions that your organization is operating in and that impose different obligations for data breach reporting.
    2. Document the notification obligations for various business scenarios, such as controller to DPA, controller to data subject, and processor to controller.
    3. Record your data breach obligations in the table below.
    Region Regulation/Standard Reporting Obligation

    Input

    Output

    • List of regions and jurisdictions your business is operating in
    • List of relevant regulations and standards
    • Documentation of data breach reporting obligations in applicable jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.7 Integrate data breach notification into incident response

    1-2 hours

    • Integrate breach notification obligations into the security incident response process. Understand the security incident management framework.
    • All incident runbooks follow the same process: detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activity.
    • The table below provides a basic checklist for you to consider when implementing your data breach and incident handling process.
    # Phase Considerations Status Notes
    1 Prepare Ensure the appropriate resources are available to best handle an incident.
    2 Detect Leverage monitoring controls to actively detect threats.
    3 Analyze Distill real events from false positives.
    4 Contain Isolate the threat before it can cause additional damage.
    5 Eradicate Eliminate the threat from your operating environment.
    6 Recover Restore impacted systems to a normal state of operations.
    7 Report Report data breaches to relevant regulators and data subjects if required.
    8 Post-Incident Activities Conduct a lessons-learned post-mortem analysis.
    InputOutput
    • Security and data protection incident response steps
    • Key considerations for integrating data breach notifications into incident response
    • Data breach notifications integrated into the incident response process
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Security team
    • Privacy team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Compliance with local obligations

    Likelihood: High

    Impact: Medium to High

    Third-Party Risk

    Gap Controls

    • Build an end-to-end third-party security and privacy risk management process.
    • Perform internal due diligence prior to selecting a service provider.
    • Stipulate the security and privacy protection obligations of the third party in a legally binding document such as contract or data processing agreement, etc.

    End-to-End Third-Party Security and Privacy Risk Management

    1. Pre-Contract
    • Due diligence check
  • Signing of Contract
    • Data processing agreement
  • Post-Contract
    • Continuous monitoring
    • Regular check or audit
  • Termination of Contract
    • Data deletion
    • Access deprovisioning

    Examples of Vendor Security Management Requirements

    Region

    Law/Standard

    Section

    EU

    General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)

    Article 28 (1)

    Article 46 (1)

    US

    Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)

    §164.308(b)(1)

    US

    New York Department of Financial Services Cybersecurity Requirements

    500.11(a)

    Global

    ISO 27002:2013

    15.1.1

    15.1.2

    15.1.3

    15.2.1

    15.2.2

    US

    NIST 800-53

    SA-12

    SA-12 (2)

    US

    NIST Cybersecurity Framework

    ID-SC-1

    ID-SC-2

    ID-SC-3

    ID-SC-4

    Canada

    OSFI Cybersecurity Guidelines

    4.25

    4.26

    3.3.8 Identify vendor security and data protection requirements

    1-2 hours

    • Effective vendor security risk management is an end-to-end process that includes assessment, risk mitigation, and periodic reassessments.
    • An efficient and effective assessment process can only be achieved when all stakeholders are participating.
    • Identify and document your vendor security and data protection requirements in the table below.
    Region Law/Standard Section Requirements

    Input

    Output

    • List of regions and jurisdictions your business is operating in
    • List of relevant regulations and standards
    • Documentation of vendor security and data protection obligations in applicable jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.9 Build due diligence questionnaire

    1-2 hours

    Perform internal due diligence prior to selecting a service provider.

    1. Build and right-size your vendor security questionnaire by leveraging Info-Tech’s Vendor Security Questionnaire template.
    2. Document your vendor security questionnaire in the table below.
    # Question Vendor Request Vendor Comments
    1 Document Requests
    2 Asset Management
    3 Governance
    4 Supply Chain Risk Management
    5 Identify Management, Authentication, and Access Control
    InputOutput
    • List of regions and jurisdictions your business is operating in
    • List of relevant regulations and standards
    • Business security and data protection requirements and expectations
    • Draft of due diligence questionnaire
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.10 Build appropriate data processing agreement

    1-2 hours

    1. Stipulate the security and privacy protection obligations of the third party in a legally binding document such as contract or data processing agreement, etc.
    2. Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Processing Agreement Template to put the language into your legally binding document.
    3. Use the table below to check whether core components of a typical DPA are covered in your document.
    # Core Components Status Note
    1 Processing of personal data
    2 Scope of application and responsibilities
    3 Processor's obligations
    4

    Controller's obligations

    5 Data subject requests
    6 Right to audit and inspection
    7 Subprocessing
    8 Data breach management
    9 Security controls
    10 Transfer of personal data
    11 Duty of confidentiality
    12 Compliance with applicable laws
    13 Service termination
    14 Liability and damages
    InputOutput
    • Processing of personal data
    • Processor’s obligations
    • Controller’s obligations
    • Subprocessing
    • Etc.
    • Draft of data processing agreement (DPA)
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    By following Info-Tech’s methodology for securing global operations, you have:

    • Evaluated the security context of your organization’s global operations.
    • Identified security risks scenarios unique to high-risk jurisdictions and assessed the exposure of critical assets.
    • Planned and executed a response.

    You have gone through a deeper analysis of two key risk scenarios that affect global operations:

    • Travel to high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Compliance risk.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech workshop or Guided Implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshop@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    The image contains a picture of Michel Hebert.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team. Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    The image contains a screenshot of High-Risk Travel Jurisdictions.

    Identify High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Develop requirements to identify high-risk jurisdictions.

    The image contains a screenshot of Build Risk Scenarios.

    Build Risk Scenarios

    Build risk scenarios to capture assets, vulnerabilities, threats, and the potential effect of a compromise.

    External Research Contributors

    Ken Muir

    CISO

    LMC Security

    Premchand Kurup

    CEO

    Paramount Computer Systems

    Preeti Dhawan

    Manager, Security Governance

    Payments Canada

    Scott Wiggins

    Information Risk and Governance

    CDPHP

    Fritz Y. Jean Louis

    CISO

    Globe and Mail

    Eric Gervais

    CIO

    Ovivo Water

    David Morrish

    CEO

    MBS Techservices

    Evan Garland

    Manager, IT Security

    Camosun College

    Jacopo Fumagalli

    CISO

    Axpo

    Dennis Leon

    Governance and Security Manager

    CPA Canada

    Tero Lehtinen

    CIO

    Planmeca Oy

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    • Build a program to identify, evaluate, assess, and treat IT risks.
    • Monitor and communicate risks effectively to support business decision making.

    Combine Security Risk Management Components Into One Program

    • Develop a program focused on assessing and managing information system risks.
    • Build a governance structure that integrates security risks within the organization’s broader approach to risk management.

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    • Build a holistic, risk-aware strategy that aligns to business goals.
    • Develop a roadmap of prioritized initiatives to implement the strategy over 18 to 36 months.

    Bibliography

    2022 Cost of Insider Threats Global Report.” Ponemon Institute, NOVIPRO, 9 Feb. 2022. Accessed 25 May 22.

    “Allianz Risk Barometer 2022.” Allianz Global Corporate & Specialty, Jan. 2022. Accessed 25 May 22.

    Bickley, Shaun. “Security Risk Management: a basic guide for smaller NGOs”. European Interagency Security Forum (EISF), 2017. Web.

    “Biden Administration Warns against spyware targeting dissidents.” New York Times, 7 Jan 22. Accessed 20 Jan 2022.

    Boehm, Jim, et al. “The risk-based approach to cybersecurity.” McKinsey & Company, October 2019. Web.

    “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021.” IBM Security, July 2021. Web.

    “Cyber Risk in Asia-Pacific: The Case for Greater Transparency.” Marsh & McLennan Companies, 2017. Web.

    “Cyber Risk Index.” NordVPN, 2020. Accessed 25 May 22

    Dawson, Maurice. “Applying a holistic cybersecurity framework for global IT organizations.” Business Information Review, vol. 35, no. 2, 2018, pp. 60-67.

    “Framework for improving critical infrastructure cybersecurity.” National Institute of Standards and Technology, 16 Apr 2018. Web.

    “Global Cybersecurity Index 2020.” International Telecommunication Union (ITU), 2021. Accessed 25 May 22.

    “Global Risk Survey 2022.” Control Risks, 2022. Accessed 25 May 22.

    “International Travel Guidance for Government Mobile Devices.” Federal Mobility Group (FMG), Aug. 2021. Accessed 18 Nov 2021.

    Kaffenberger, Lincoln, and Emanuel Kopp. “Cyber Risk Scenarios, the Financial System, and Systemic Risk Assessment.” Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, September 2019. Accessed 11 Jan 2022.

    Koehler, Thomas R. Understanding Cyber Risk. Routledge, 2018.

    Owens, Brian. “Cybersecurity for the travelling scientist.” Nature, vol. 548, 3 Aug 2017. Accessed 19 Jan. 2022.

    Parsons, Fintan J., et al. “Cybersecurity risks and recommendations for international travellers.” Journal of Travel Medicine, vol. 1, no. 4, 2021. Accessed 19 Jan 2022.

    Quinn, Stephen, et al. “Identifying and estimating cybersecurity risk for enterprise risk management.” National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Interagency or Internal Report (IR) 8286A, Nov. 2021.

    Quinn, Stephen, et al. “Prioritizing cybersecurity risk for enterprise risk management.” NIST, IR 8286B, Sept. 2021.

    “Remaining cyber safe while travelling security recommendations.” Government of Canada, 27 April 2022. Accessed 31 Jan 2022.

    Stine, Kevin, et al. “Integrating cybersecurity and enterprise risk management.” NIST, IR 8286, Oct. 2020.

    Tammineedi, Rama. “Integrating KRIs and KPIs for effective technology risk management.” ISACA Journal, vol. 4, 1 July 2018.

    Tikk, Eneken, and Mika Kerttunen, editors. Routledge Handbook of International Cybersecurity. Routledge, 2020.

    Voo, Julia, et al. “National Cyber Power Index 2020.” Belfer Center for Science and International Affairs, Harvard Kennedy School, Sept. 2020. Web.

    Zhang, Fang. “Navigating cybersecurity risks in international trade.” Harvard Business Review, Dec 2021. Accessed 31 Jan 22.

    Appendix

    Insider Threat

    Key Risk Scenario

    Likelihood: Medium to High

    Impact: High

    Gap Controls

    The image contains a picture of the Gap Controls. The controls include: Policy and Awareness, Identification, Monitoring and Visibility, which leads to Cooperation.

    • Identification: Effective and efficient management of insider threats begins with a threat and risk assessment to establish which assets and which employees to consider, especially in jurisdictions associated with sensitive or critical data. You need to pay extra attention to employees who are working in satellite offices in jurisdictions with loose security and privacy laws.
    • Monitoring and Visibility: Organizations should monitor critical assets and groups with privileged access to defend against malicious behavior. Implement an insider threat management platform that provides your organization with the visibility and context into data movement, especially cross-border transfers that might cause security and privacy breaches.
    • Policy and Awareness Training: Insider threats will persist without appropriate action and culture change. Training and consistent communication of best practices will mitigate vulnerabilities to accidental or negligent attacks. Customized training materials using local languages and role-based case studies might be needed for employees in high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Cooperation: An effective insider threat management program should be built with cross-team functions such as Security, IT, Compliance and Legal, etc.

    For more holistic approach, you can leverage our Reduce and Manage Your Organization’s Insider Threat Risk blueprint.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You can’t just throw tools at a human problem. While organizations should monitor critical assets and groups with privileged access to defend against malicious behavior, good management and supervision can help detect attacks and prevent them from happening in the first place.

    Insider threats are not industry specific, but malicious insiders are

    Industry

    Actors

    Risks

    Tactics

    Motives

    State and Local Government

    • Full-time employees
    • Current employees
    • Privileged access to personally identifiable information, financial assets, and physical property
    • Abuse of privileged access
    • Received or transferred fraudulent funds
    • Financial gain
    • Recognition
    • Benefiting foreign entity

    Information Technology

    • Equal mix of former and current employees
    • Privileged access to networks or systems as well as data
    • Highly technical attacks
    • Received or transferred fraudulent funds
    • Revenge
    • Financial gain

    Healthcare

    • Majority were full-time and current employees
    • Privileged access to customer data with personally identifiable information, financial assets
    • Abuse of privileged access
    • Received or transferred fraudulent funds
    • Financial gain
    • Entitlement

    Finance and Insurance

    • Majority were full-time and current employees
    • Authorized users
    • Electronic financial assets
    • Privileged access to customer data
    • Created or used fraudulent accounts
    • Fraudulent purchases
    • Identity theft
    • Financial gain
    • Gambling addiction
    • Family pressures
    • Multiple motivations

    Source: Carnegie Mellon University Software Engineering Institute, 2019

    Advanced Persistent Threat

    Key Risk Scenario #4

    Likelihood: Medium to High

    Impact: High

    Gap Controls

    The image contains a screenshot of the Gap Controls listed: Prevent, Detect, Analyze, Respond.

    Prevent: Defense in depth is the best approach to protect against unknown and unpredictable attacks. Effective anti-malware, diligent patching and vulnerability management, and strong human-centric security are essential.

    Detect: There are two types of companies – those who have been breached and know it, and those who have been breached and don’t know it. Ensure that monitoring, logging, and event detection tools are in place and appropriate to your organizational needs.

    Analyze: Raw data without interpretation cannot improve security and is a waste of time, money, and effort. Establish a tiered operational process that not only enriches data but also provides visibility into your threat landscape.

    Respond: Organizations can’t rely on ad hoc response anymore – don’t wait until a state of panic. Formalize your response processes in a detailed incident runbook to reduce incident remediation time and effort.

    Best practices moving forward

    Defense in Depth

    Lock down your organization. Among other tactics, control administrative privileges, leverage threat intelligence, use IP whitelisting, adopt endpoint protection and two-factor authentication, and formalize incident response measures.

    Block Indicators

    Information alone is not actionable. A successful threat intelligence program contextualizes threat data, aligns intelligence with business objectives, and then builds processes to satisfy those objectives. Actively block indicators and act upon gathered intelligence.

    Drive Adoption

    Create organizational situational awareness around security initiatives to drive adoption of foundational security measures: network hardening, threat intelligence, red-teaming exercises, and zero-day mitigation, policies, and procedures.

    Supply Chain Security

    Security extends beyond your organization. Ensure your organization has a comprehensive view of your organizational threat landscape and a clear understanding of the security posture of any managed service providers in your supply chain.

    Awareness and Training

    Conduct security awareness and training. Teach end users how to recognize current cyberattacks before they fall victim – this is a mandatory first line of defense.

    Additional Resources

    Follow only official sources of information to help you assess risk

    The image contains an image highlighting a few additional resources.

    As misinformation is a major attack vector for malicious actors, follow only reliable sources for cyberalerts and actionable intelligence. Aggregate information from these reliable sources.

    Federal Cyber Agency Alerts

    Informational Resources

    Info-Tech Insight

    The CISA Shields Up site provides the latest cyber risk updates on the Russia-Ukraine conflict and should provide the most value in staying informed.

    Manage Third-Party Service Security Outsourcing

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}539|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Processes & Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /security-processes-and-operations
    • A lack of high-skill labor increases the cost of internal security, making outsourcing more appealing.
    • It is unclear what processes could or should be outsourced versus what functions should remain in-house.
    • It is not feasible to have 24/7/365 monitoring in-house for most firms.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You are outsourcing support, not accountability, unless you preface that with your customer.
    • For most of you, you won’t have a choice – you’ll have to outsource high-end security skills to meet future needs.
    • Third-party service providers may be able to more effectively remediate threats because of their large, disparate customer base and wider scope.

    Impact and Result

    • Documented obligations and processes. This will allow you to determine which solution (outsourcing vs. insourcing) allows for the best use of resources, and maintains your brand reputation.
    • A list of variables and features to rank potential third-party providers vs. internal delivery to find which solution provides the best fit for your organization.
    • Current limitations of your environment and the limitations of third parties identified for the environments you are looking to mature.
    • Security responsibilities determined that can be outsourced, and which should be outsourced in order to gain resource allocation and effectiveness, and to improve your overall security posture.
    • The limitations or restrictions for third-party usage understood.

    Manage Third-Party Service Security Outsourcing Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to understand how to avoid common mistakes when it comes to outsourcing security, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. What to outsource

    Identify different responsibilities/functions in your organization and determine which ones can be outsourced. Complete a cost analysis.

    • Manage Third-Party Service Security Outsourcing – Phase 1: What to Outsource
    • Insourcing vs. Outsourcing Costing Tool

    2. How to outsource

    Identify a list of features for your third-party provider and analyze.

    • Manage Third-Party Service Security Outsourcing – Phase 2: How to Outsource
    • MSSP Selection Tool
    • Checklist for Third-Party Providers

    3. Manage your third-party provider

    Understand how to align third-party providers to your organization.

    • Manage Third-Party Service Security Outsourcing – Phase 3: Manage Your Third-Party Provider
    • Security Operations Policy for Third-Party Outsourcing
    • Third-Party Security Policy Charter Template
    [infographic]

    Implement an IT Chargeback System

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}71|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Cost & Budget Management
    • Parent Category Link: /cost-and-budget-management
    • Business units voraciously consume IT services and don’t understand the actual costs of IT. This is due to lack of IT cost transparency and business stakeholder accountability for consumption of IT services.
    • Business units perceive IT costs as uncompetitive, resulting in shadow IT and a negative perception of IT.
    • Business executives have decided to implement an IT chargeback program and IT must ensure the program succeeds.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Price IT services so that business consumers find them meaningful, measurable, and manageable:

    • The business must understand what they are being charged for. If they can’t understand the value, you’ve chosen the wrong basis for charge.
    • Business units must be able to control and track their consumption levels, or they will feel powerless to control costs and you’ll never attain real buy-in.

    Impact and Result

    • Explain IT costs in ways that matter to the business. Instead of focusing on what IT pays for, discuss the value that IT brings to the business by defining IT services and how they serve business users.
    • Develop a chargeback model that brings transparency to the flow of IT costs through to business value. Demonstrate how a good chargeback model can bring about fair “pay-for-value” and “pay-for-what-you-use” pricing.
    • Communicate IT chargeback openly and manage change effectively. Business owners will want to know how their profit and loss statements will be affected by the new pricing model.

    Implement an IT Chargeback System Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement an IT chargeback program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch

    Make the case for IT chargeback, then assess the financial maturity of the organization and identify a pathway to success. Create a chargeback governance model.

    • Implement IT Chargeback – Phase 1: Launch
    • IT Chargeback Kick-Off Presentation

    2. Define

    Develop a chargeback model, including identifying user-facing IT services, allocating IT costs to services, and setting up the chargeback program.

    • Implement IT Chargeback – Phase 2: Define
    • IT Chargeback Program Development & Management Tool

    3. Implement

    Communicate the rollout of the IT chargeback model and establish a process for recovering IT services costs from business units.

    • Implement IT Chargeback – Phase 3: Implement
    • IT Chargeback Communication Plan
    • IT Chargeback Rollout Presentation
    • IT Chargeback Financial Presentation

    4. Revise

    Gather and analyze feedback from business owners, making necessary modifications to the chargeback model and communicating the implications.

    • Implement IT Chargeback – Phase 4: Revise
    • IT Chargeback Change Communication Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Implement an IT Chargeback System

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Kick-Off IT Chargeback

    The Purpose

    Make the case for IT chargeback.

    Identify the current and target state of chargeback maturity.

    Establish a chargeback governance model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Investigated the benefits and challenges of implementing IT chargeback.

    Understanding of the reasons why traditional chargeback approaches fail.

    Identified the specific pathway to chargeback success.

    Activities

    1.1 Investigate the benefits and challenges of implementing IT chargeback

    1.2 Educate business owners and executives on IT chargeback

    1.3 Identify the current and target state of chargeback maturity

    1.4 Establish chargeback governance

    Outputs

    Defined IT chargeback mandate

    IT chargeback kick-off presentation

    Chargeback maturity assessment

    IT chargeback governance model

    2 Develop the Chargeback Model

    The Purpose

    Develop a chargeback model.

    Identify the customers and user-facing services.

    Allocate IT costs.

    Determine chargeable service units.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identified IT customers.

    Identified user-facing services and generated descriptions for them.

    Allocated IT costs to IT services.

    Identified meaningful, measurable, and manageable chargeback service units.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify user-facing services and generate descriptions

    2.2 Allocate costs to user-facing services

    2.3 Determine chargeable service units and pricing

    2.4 Track consumption

    2.5 Determine service charges

    Outputs

    High-level service catalog

    Chargeback model

    3 Communicate IT Chargeback

    The Purpose

    Communicate the implementation of IT chargeback.

    Establish a process for recovering the costs of IT services from business units.

    Share the financial results of the charge cycle with business owners.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Managed the transition to charging and recovering the costs of IT services from business units.

    Communicated the implementation of IT chargeback and shared the financial results with business owners.

    Activities

    3.1 Create a communication plan

    3.2 Deliver a chargeback rollout presentation

    3.3 Establish a process for recovering IT costs from business units

    3.4 Share the financial results from the charge cycle with business owners

    Outputs

    IT chargeback communication plan

    IT chargeback rollout presentation

    IT service cost recovery process

    IT chargeback financial presentation

    4 Review the Chargeback Model

    The Purpose

    Gather and analyze feedback from business owners on the chargeback model.

    Make necessary modifications to the chargeback model and communicate implications.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gathered business stakeholder feedback on the chargeback model.

    Made necessary modifications to the chargeback model to increase satisfaction and accuracy.

    Managed changes by communicating the implications to business owners in a structured manner.

    Activities

    4.1 Address stakeholder pain points and highly disputed costs

    4.2 Update the chargeback model

    4.3 Communicate the chargeback model changes and implications to business units

    Outputs

    Revised chargeback model with business feedback, change log, and modifications

    Chargeback change communication

    Create a Work-From-Anywhere Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}323|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 33 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy

    Work-from-anywhere isn’t going anywhere. During the initial rush to remote work, tech debt was highlighted and the business lost faith in IT. IT now needs to:

    • Rebuild trust with the CXO.
    • Identify gaps created from the COVID-19 rush to remote work.
    • Identify how IT can better support remote workers.

    IT went through an initial crunch to enable remote work. It’s time to be proactive and learn from our mistakes.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • It’s not about embracing the new normal; it’s about resiliency and long-term success. Your strategy needs to not only provide short-term operational value but also make the organization more resilient for the unknown risks of tomorrow.
    • The nature of work has fundamentally changed. IT departments must ensure service continuity, not for how the company worked in 2019, but for how the company is working now and will be working tomorrow.
    • Ensure short-term survival. Don’t focus on becoming an innovator until you are no longer stuck in firefighting.
    • Aim for near-term innovation. Once you’re a trusted operator, become a business partner by helping the business better adapt business processes and operations to work-from-anywhere.

    Impact and Result

    Follow these steps to build a work-from-anywhere strategy that resonates with the business:

    • Identify a vision that aligns with business goals.
    • Design the work-from-anywhere value proposition for critical business roles.
    • Benchmark your current maturity.
    • Build a roadmap for bridging the gap.

    Benefit employees’ remote working experience while ensuring that IT heads in a strategic direction.

    Create a Work-From-Anywhere Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should create a work-from-anywhere strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define a target state

    Identify a vision that aligns with business goals, not for how the company worked in 2019, but for how the company is working now and will be working tomorrow.

    • Work-From-Anywhere Strategy Template
    • Work-From-Anywhere Value Proposition Template

    2. Analyze current fitness

    Don’t focus on becoming an innovator until you are no longer stuck in firefighting mode.

    3. Build a roadmap for improving enterprise apps

    Use these blueprints to improve your enterprise app capabilities for work-from-anywhere.

    • Microsoft Teams Cookbook – Sections 1-2
    • Rationalize Your Collaboration Tools – Phases 1-3
    • Adapt Your Customer Experience Strategy to Successfully Weather COVID-19 Storyboard
    • The Rapid Application Selection Framework Deck

    4. Build a roadmap for improving strategy, people & leadership

    Use these blueprints to improve IT’s strategy, people & leadership capabilities for work-from-anywhere.

    • Define Your Digital Business Strategy – Phases 1-4
    • Training Deck: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams
    • Sustain Work-From-Home in the New Normal Storyboard
    • Develop a Targeted Flexible Work Program for IT – Phases 1-3
    • Maintain Employee Engagement During the COVID-19 Pandemic Storyboard
    • Adapt Your Onboarding Process to a Virtual Environment Storyboard
    • Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home Storyboard
    • The Essential COVID-19 Childcare Policy for Every Organization, Yesterday Storyboard

    5. Build a roadmap for improving infrastructure & operations

    Use these blueprints to improve infrastructure & operations capabilities for work-from-anywhere.

    • Stabilize Infrastructure & Operations During Work-From-Anywhere – Phases 1-3
    • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phases 1-5
    • Execute an Emergency Remote Work Plan Storyboard
    • Build a Digital Workspace Strategy – Phases 1-3

    6. Build a roadmap for improving IT security & compliance capabilities

    Use these blueprints to improve IT security & compliance capabilities for work-from-anywhere.

    • Cybersecurity Priorities in Times of Pandemic Storyboard
    • Reinforce End-User Security Awareness During Your COVID-19 Response Storyboard

    Infographic

    Workshop: Create a Work-From-Anywhere Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define a Target State

    The Purpose

    Define the direction of your work-from-anywhere strategy and roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Base your decisions on senior leadership and user needs.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify drivers, benefits, and challenges.

    1.2 Perform a goals cascade to align benefits to business needs.

    1.3 Define a vision and success metrics.

    1.4 Define the value IT brings to work-from-anywhere.

    Outputs

    Desired benefits for work-from-anywhere

    Vision statement

    Mission statement

    Success metrics

    Value propositions for in-scope user groups

    2 Review In-Scope Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Focus on value. Ensure that major applications and IT capabilities will relieve employees’ pains and provide them with gains.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Learn from past mistakes and successes.

    Increase adoption of resulting initiatives.

    Activities

    2.1 Review work-from-anywhere framework and identify capability gaps.

    2.2 Review diagnostic results to identify satisfaction gaps.

    2.3 Record improvement opportunities for each capability.

    2.4 Identify deliverables and opportunities to provide value for each.

    2.5 Identify constraints faced by each capability.

    Outputs

    SWOT assessment of work-from-anywhere capabilities

    Projects and initiatives to improve capabilities

    Deliverables and opportunities to provide value for each capability

    Constraints with each capability

    3 Build the Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Build a short-term plan that allows you to iterate on your existing strengths and provide early value to your users.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Provide early value to address operational pain points.

    Build a plan to provide near-term innovation and business value.

    Activities

    3.1 Organize initiatives into phases.

    3.2 Identify tasks for short-term initiatives.

    3.3 Estimate effort with Scrum Poker.

    3.4 Build a timeline and tie phases to desired business benefits.

    Outputs

    Prioritized list of initiatives and phases

    Profiles for short-term initiatives

    Develop the Right Message to Engage Buyers

    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions

    Sixty percent of marketers find it hard to produce high-quality content consistently. SaaS marketers have an even more difficult job due to the technical nature of content production. Without an easy content development strategy, marketers have an insurmountable task of continually creating interesting content for an audience they don’t understand.

    Globally, B2B SaaS marketers without the ability to consistently produce and activate quality content will experience:

    • High website bounce rates and low time on site
    • Low page views
    • A low percentage of return visitors
    • Low conversions
    • Low open and click-through rates on email campaigns

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Marketing content that identifies the benefit of the product along with a deep understanding of the buyer pain points, desired value, and benefit proof points is a key driver in delivering value to a prospect, thereby increasing marketing metrics such as open rates, time on site, page views, and click-through rates.

    Impact and Result

    Marketers that activate the SoftwareReviews message mapping architecture will be able to crack the code on the formula for improving open and click-through rates.

    By applying the SoftwareReviews message mapping architecture, clients will be able to:

    • Quickly diagnose the current state of their content marketing effectiveness compared to industry metrics.
    • Compare their current messaging approach versus the key elements of the Message Map Architecture.
    • Create more compelling and relevant content that aligns with a buyer’s needs and journey.
    • Shrink marketing and sales cycles.
    • Increase the pace of content production.

    Develop the Right Message to Engage Buyers Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop the Right Message to Engage Buyers Executive Brief – A mapping architecture to enable marketers to crack the code on the formula for improving open and click-through rates.

    Through this blueprint marketers will learn how to shift content away from low-performing content that only focuses on the product and company to high-performing customer-focused content that answers the “What’s in it for me?” question for a buyer, increasing engagement and conversions.

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Develop the Right Message to Engage Buyers

    Drive higher open rates, time-on-site, and click-through rates with buyer-relevant messaging.

    Analyst Perspective

    Develop the right message to engage buyers.

    Marketers only have seven seconds to capture a visitor's attention but often don't realize that the space between competitors and their company is that narrow. They often miss the mark on content and create reams of product and company-focused messaging that result in high bounce rates, low page views, low return visits, low conversions, and low click-through rates.

    We wouldn't want to sit in a conversation with someone who only speaks about themselves, so why would it be any different when we buy something? Today's marketers must quickly hook their visitors with content that answers the critical question of "What's in it for me?"

    Our research finds that leading content marketers craft messaging that lets their audience ”know they know them,” points out what’s in it for them, and includes proof points of promised value. This simple, yet often missed approach, we call Message Mapping, which helps marketers grab a visitor’s initial attention and when applied throughout the customer journey will turn prospects into customers, lifelong buyers, advocates, and referrals.

    Photo of Terra Higginson, Marketing Research Director, SoftwareReviews.

    Terra Higginson
    Marketing Research Director
    SoftwareReviews

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Globally, B2B SaaS marketers without the ability to consistently produce and activate quality content will experience:

    • High website bounce rates and low time on site
    • Low page views
    • A low percentage of return visitors
    • Low conversions
    • Low open and click-through rates on email campaigns
    Sixty percent of marketers find it hard to produce high-quality content consistently. SaaS marketers have an even more difficult job due to the technical nature of content production. Without an easy content development strategy, marketers have an insurmountable task of continually creating interesting content for an audience they don’t understand.
    Common Obstacles

    Marketers struggle to create content that quickly engages the buyer because they lack:

    • Resources to create a high volume of quality content.
    • True buyer understanding.
    • Experience in how to align technical messaging with the buyer persona.
    • Easy-to-deploy content strategy tools.
    Even though most marketers will say that it’s important to produce interesting content, only 58% of B2B markers take the time to ask their customers what’s important to them. Without a true and deep understanding of buyers, marketers continue to invest their time and resources in an uninteresting product and company-focused diatribe.
    SoftwareReviews’ Approach

    By applying the SoftwareReviews’ message mapping architecture, clients will be able to:

    • Quickly diagnose the current state of their content marketing effectiveness compared to industry metrics.
    • Compare their current messaging approach against the key elements of the Message Map Architecture.
    • Create more compelling and relevant content that aligns with a buyer’s needs and journey.
    • Shrink marketing and sales cycles.
    • Increase the pace of content production.
    Marketers that activate the SoftwareReviews message mapping architecture will be able to crack the code on the formula for improving open and click-through rates.

    SoftwareReviews Insight

    Marketing content that identifies the benefit of the product, along with a deep understanding of the buyer pain points, desired value, and benefit proof-points, is a key driver in delivering value to a prospect, thereby increasing marketing metrics such as open rates, time on site, page views, and click-through rates.

    Your Challenge

    65% of marketers find it challenging to produce engaging content.

    Globally, B2B SaaS marketers without the ability to consistently produce and activate quality content will experience:

    • High website bounce rates and low time on site
    • Low page views
    • A low percentage of return visitors
    • Low conversions
    • Low open and click-through rates on email campaigns

    A staggering 60% of marketers find it hard to produce high-quality content consistently and 62% don’t know how to measure the ROI of their campaigns according to OptinMonster.

    SaaS marketers have an even more difficult job due to the technical nature of content production. Without an easy content development strategy, marketers have an insurmountable task of continually creating interesting content for an audience they don’t understand.


    Over 64% of marketers want to learn how to build a better content
    (Source: OptinMonster, 2021)

    Benchmark your content marketing

    Do your content marketing metrics meet the industry-standard benchmarks for the software industry?
    Visualization of industry benchmarks for 'Bounce Rate', 'Organic CTR', 'Pages/Session', 'Average Session Duration', '% of New Sessions', 'Email Open Rate', 'Email CTR', and 'Sales Cycle Length (Days)' with sources linked below.
    GrowRevenue, MarketingSherpa, Google Analytics, FirstPageSage, Google Analytics, HubSpot
    • Leaders will measure content marketing performance against these industry benchmarks.
    • If your content performance falls below these benchmarks, your content architecture may be missing the mark with prospective buyers.

    Common flaws in content messaging

    Why do marketers have a hard time consistently producing messaging that engages the buyer?

    Mistake #1

    Myopic Focus on Company and Product

    Content suffers a low ROI due to a myopic focus on the company and the product. This self-focused content fails to engage prospects and move them through the funnel.

    Mistake #2

    WIIFM Question Unanswered

    Content never answers the fundamental “What’s in it for me?” question due to a lack of true buyer understanding. This leads to an inability to communicate the value proposition to the prospect.

    Mistake #3

    Inability to Select the Right Content Format

    Marketers often guess what kind of content their buyers prefer without any real understanding or research behind what buyers would actually want to consume.

    Leaders Will Avoid the “Big Three” Pitfalls
    • While outdated content, poor content organization on your website, and poor SEO are additional strategic factors (outside the scope of this research), poor messaging structure will doom your content marketing strategy.
    • Leaders will be vigilant to diagnose current messaging structure and avoid:
      1. Making messaging all about you and your company.
      2. Failing to describe what’s in it for your prospects.
      3. Often guessing at what approach to use when structuring your messaging.

    Implications of poor content

    Without quality content, the sales and marketing cycles elongate and content marketing metrics suffer.
    • Lost sales: Research shows that B2B buyers are 57-70% done with their buying research before they ever contact sales.(Worldwide Business Research, 2022)
    • The buyer journey is increasingly digital: Research shows that 67% of the buyer's journey is now done digitally.(Worldwide Business Research, 2022)
    • Wasted time: In a Moz study of 750,000 pieces of content, 50% had zero backlinks, indicating that no one felt these assets were interesting enough to reference or share. (Moz, 2015)
    • Wasted money: SaaS companies spend $342,000 to $1,080,000 per year (or more) on content marketing. (Zenpost, 2022) The wrong content will deliver a poor ROI.

    50% — Half of the content produced has no backlinks. (Source: Moz, 2015)

    Content matters more than ever since 67% of the buyer's journey is now done digitally. (Source: Worldwide Business Research, 2022)

    Benefits of good content

    A content mapping approach lets content marketers:
    • Create highly personalized content. Content mapping helps marketers to create highly targeted content at every stage of the buyer’s journey, helping to nurture leads and prospects toward a purchase decision.
    • Describe “What’s in it for me?” to buyers. Remember that you aren’t your customer. Good content quickly answers the question “What’s in it for me?” (WIIFM) developed from the findings of the buyer persona. WIIFM-focused content engages a prospect within seven seconds.
    • Increase marketing ROI. Content marketing generates leads three times greater than traditional marketing (Patel, 2016).
    • Influence prospects. Investing in a new SaaS product isn’t something buyers do every day. In a new situation, people will often look to others to understand what they should do. Good content uses the principles of authority and social proof to build the core message of WIIFM. Authority can be conferred with awards and accolades, whereas social proof is given through testimonials, case studies, and data.
    • Build competitive advantage. Increase competitive advantage by providing content that aligns with the ideal client profile. Fifty-two percent of buyers said they were more likely to buy from a vendor after reading its content (1827 Marketing, 2022).
    Avoid value claiming. Leaders will use client testimonials as proof points because buyers believe peers more than they believe you.

    “… Since 95 percent of the people are imitators and only 5 percent initiators, people are persuaded more by the actions of others than by any proof we can offer. (Robert Cialdini, Influence: The Psychology of Persuasion)

    Full slide: 'Message Map Architecture'.

    Full slide: 'Message Map Template' with field descriptions and notes.

    Full slide: 'Message Map Template' with field descriptions, no notes.

    Full slide: 'Message Map Template' with blank fields.

    Full slide: 'Message Map Template' with 'Website Example segment.com' filled in fields.

    Full slide: 'Website Example segment.com' the website as it appears online with labels on the locations of elements of the message map.

    Full slide: 'Website Example segment.com' the website as it appears online with labels on the locations of elements of the message map.

    Full slide: 'Website Example segment.com' the website as it appears online with labels on the locations of elements of the message map.

    Full slide: 'Website Example segment.com' the website as it appears online with labels on the locations of elements of the message map.

    Email & Social Post Example

    Use the message mapping architecture to create other types of content.

    Examples of emails and social media posts as they appear online with labels on the locations of elements of the message map.

    Insight Summary

    Create Content That Matters

    Marketing content that identifies the benefit of the product along with a deep understanding of the buyer pain points, desired value, and benefit proof-points is a key driver in delivering value to a prospect, thereby increasing marketing metrics such as open rates, time on site, page views, and click-through rates.

    What’s in It for Me?

    Most content has a focus on the product and the company. Content that lacks a true and deep understanding of the buyer suffers low engagement and low conversions. Our research shows that all content must answer ”What’s in it for me?” for a prospect.

    Social Proof & Authority

    Buyers that are faced with a new and unusual buying experience (such as purchasing SaaS) look at what others say about the product (social proof) and what experts say about the product (authority) to make buying decisions.

    Scarcity & Loss Framing

    Research shows that scarcity is a strong principle of influence that can be used in marketing messages. Loss framing is a variation of scarcity and can be used by outlining what a buyer will lose instead of what will be gained.

    Unify the Experience

    Use your message map to structure all customer-facing content across Sales, Product, and Marketing and create a unified and consistent experience across all touchpoints.

    Close the Gap

    SaaS marketers often find the gap between product and company-focused content and buyer-focused content to be so insurmountable that they never manage to overcome it without a framework like message mapping.

    Related SoftwareReviews Research

    Sample of 'Create a Buyer Persona and Journey' blueprint.

    Create a Buyer Persona and Journey

    Make it easier to market, sell, and achieve product-market fit with deeper buyer understanding.
    • Reduce time and treasure wasted chasing the wrong prospects.
    • Improve product-market fit.
    • Increase open and click-through rates in your lead gen engine.
    • Perform more effective sales discovery and increase eventual win rates.
    Sample of 'Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth' blueprint.

    Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth

    Have a significant and well-targeted impact on business success and growth by knowing how your brand performs, identifying areas of improvement, and making data-driven decisions to fix it.
    • Importance of brand is recognized, endorsed, and prioritized.
    • Support and resources allocated.
    • All relevant data and information collected in one place.
    • Ability to make data-driven recommendations and decisions on how to improve.
    Sample of 'Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy' blueprint.

    Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy

    Creating a compelling Go-to-Market strategy, and keeping it current, is a critical software company function – as important as financial strategy, sales operations, and even corporate business development – given its huge impact on the many drivers of sustainable growth.
    • Align stakeholders on a common vision and execution plan.
    • Build a foundation of buyer and competitive understanding.
    • Deliver a team-aligned launch plan that enables commercial success.

    Bibliography

    Arakelyan, Artash. “How SaaS Companies Increase Their ROI With Content Marketing.” Clutch.co, 27 July 2018. Accessed July 2022.

    Bailyn, Evan. “Average Session Duration: Industry Benchmarks.” FirstPageSage, 16 March 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    Burstein, Daniel. “Marketing Research Chart: Average clickthrough rates by industry.” MarketingSherpa, 1 April 2014. Accessed July 2022.

    Cahoon, Sam. “Email Open Rates By Industry (& Other Top Email Benchmarks).” HubSpot, 10 June 2021. Accessed July 2022.

    Cialdini, Robert. Influence: Science and Practice. 5th ed. Pearson, 29 July 2008. Print.

    Cialdini, Robert. Influence: The Psychology of Persuasion. Revised ed. Harper Business, 26 Dec. 2006. Print.

    Content Marketing—Statistics, Evidence and Trends.” 1827 Marketing, 7 Jan. 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    Devaney, Erik. “Content Mapping 101: The Template You Need to Personalize Your Marketing.” HubSpot, 21 April 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    Hiscox Business Insurance. “Growing Your Business--and Protecting It Every Step of the Way.” Inc.com. 25 April 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    Hurley Hall, Sharon. “85 Content Marketing Statistics To Make You A Marketing Genius.” OptinMonster, 14 Jan. 2021. Accessed July 2022.

    Patel, Neil. “38 Content Marketing Stats That Every Marketer Needs to Know.” NeilPatel.com, 21 Jan. 2016. Web.

    Prater, Meg. “SaaS Sales: 7 Tips on Selling Software from a Top SaaS Company.” HubSpot, 9 June 2021. Web.

    Polykoff, Dave. “20 SaaS Content Marketing Statistics That Lead to MRR Growth in 2022.” Zenpost blog, 22 July 2022. Web.

    Rayson, Steve. “Content, Shares, and Links: Insights from Analyzing 1 Million Articles.” Moz, 8 Sept. 2015. Accessed July 2022.

    “SaaS Content Marketing: How to Measure Your SaaS Content’s Performance.” Ken Moo, 9 June 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    Taylor Gregory, Emily. “Content marketing challenges and how to overcome them.” Longitude, 14 June 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    Visitors Benchmarking Channels. Google Analytics, 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    WBR Insights. “Here's How the Relationship Between B2B Buying, Content, and Sales Reps Has Changed.” Worldwide Business Research, 2022. Accessed July 2022.

    “What’s a good bounce rate? (Here’s the average bounce rate for websites).” GrowRevenue.io, 24 Feb. 2020. Accessed July 2022.

    Get the Best Discount Possible With a Data-Driven Negotiation Approach

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}610|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Selection & Implementation
    • Parent Category Link: /selection-and-implementation
    • Vendors have well-honed negotiation strategies that don’t prioritize the customer’s best interest, and they will take advantage of your weaknesses to extract as much money as they can from the deal.
    • IT teams are often working with time pressure and limited resources or experience in negotiation. Even those with an experienced procurement team aren’t evenly matched with the vendor when it comes to the ins and outs of the product.
    • As a result, many have a poor negotiation experience and fail to get the discount they wanted, ultimately leading to dissatisfaction with the vendor.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Requirements should always come first, but IT leaders are under pressure to get discounts and cost ends up playing a big role in decision making.
    • Cost is one of the top factors influencing satisfaction with software and the decision to leave a vendor.
    • The majority of software customers are receiving a discount. If you’re in the minority who are not, there are strategies you can and should be using to improve your negotiating skills. Discounts of up to 40% off list price are available to those who enter negotiations prepared.

    Impact and Result

    • SoftwareReviews data shows that there are multiple benefits to taking a concerted approach to negotiating a discount on your software.
    • The most common ways of getting a discount (e.g. volume purchasing) aren’t necessarily the best methods. Choose a strategy that is appropriate for your organization and vendor relationship and that focuses on maximizing the value of your investment for the long term. Optimizing usage or licenses as a discount strategy leads to the highest software satisfaction.
    • Using a vendor negotiation service or advisory group was one of the most successful strategies for receiving a discount. If your team doesn’t have the right negotiation expertise, Info-Tech can help.

    Get the Best Discount Possible With a Data-Driven Negotiation Approach Research & Tools

    Prepare to negotiate

    Leverage insights from SoftwareReviews data to best position yourself to receive a discount through your software negotiations.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Get the Best Discount Possible with a Data-Driven Negotiation Approach Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Implement Your Negotiation Strategy More Effectively

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}225|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Forty-eight percent of CIOs believe their budgets are inadequate.
    • CIOs and IT departments are getting more involved with negotiations to reduce costs and risk.
    • Not all negotiators are created equal, and the gap between a skilled negotiator and an average negotiator is not always easy to identify objectively.
    • Skilled negotiators are in short supply.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Preparation is critical for the success of your negotiation, but you cannot prepare for every eventuality.
    • Communication is the heart and soul of negotiations, but what is being “said” is only part of the picture.
    • Skilled negotiators separate themselves based on skillsets, and outcomes alone may not provide an accurate assessment of a negotiator.

    Impact and Result

    Addressing and managing critical negotiation elements helps:

    • Improve negotiation skills.
    • Implement your negotiation strategy more effectively.
    • Improve negotiation results.

    Implement Your Negotiation Strategy More Effectively Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should create and follow a scalable process for preparing to negotiate with vendors, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. During

    Throughout this phase, ten essential negotiation elements are identified and reviewed.

    • Implement Your Negotiation Strategy More Effectively – Phase 1: During
    • During Negotiations Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Implement Your Negotiation Strategy More Effectively

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 12 Steps to Better Negotiation Preparation

    The Purpose

    Improve negotiation skills and outcomes.

    Understand how to use the Info-Tech During Negotiations Tool.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A better understanding of the subtleties of the negotiation process and an identification of where the negotiation strategy can go awry.

    The During Negotiation Tool will be reviewed and configured for the customer’s environment (as applicable).

    Activities

    1.1 Manage six key items during the negotiation process.

    1.2 Set the right tone and environment for the negotiation.

    1.3 Focus on improving three categories of intangibles.

    1.4 Improve communication skills to improve negotiation skills.

    1.5 Customize your negotiation approach to interact with different personality traits and styles.

    1.6 Maximize the value of your discussions by focusing on seven components.

    1.7 Understand the value of impasses and deadlocks and how to work through them.

    1.8 Use concessions as part of your negotiation strategy.

    1.9 Identify and defeat common vendor negotiation ploys.

    1.10 Review progress and determine next steps.

    Outputs

    Sample negotiation ground rules

    Sample vendor negotiation ploys

    Sample discussion questions and evaluation matrix

    Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}223|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • As cloud vendors, managed service providers, and other IT vendors continue to play a larger role in IT operations, the VMI must evolve to meet new challenges. Maximizing the VMI's impact requires it to keep pace with the IT landscape and transforming from tactical to strategic.
    • Increased spend with and reliance on vendors leads to less control and more risk for IT organizations. The VMI must mature on multiple fronts to continue adding value; staying stagnant is not an option.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • An organization’s vendor management initiative must continue to evolve and mature to reach its full strategic value. In the early stages, the vendor management initiative may be seen as transactional, focusing on the day-to-day functions associated with vendor management. The real value of a VMI comes from becoming strategic partner to other functional groups (departments) within your organization.
    • Developing vendor management personnel is critical to the vendor management initiative’s evolution and maturation. For the VMI to mature, its personnel must mature as well. Their professional skills, competencies, and knowledge must increase over time. Failure to accentuate personal growth within the team limits what the team is able to achieve and how the team is perceived.
    • Vendor management is not about imposing your will on vendors; it is about understanding the multi-faceted dynamics between your organization and your vendors and charting the appropriate path forward. Resource allocation and relationship expectations flow from these dynamics. Each critical vendor requires an individual plan to build the best possible relationship and to leverage that relationship. What works with one vendor may not work or even be possible with another vendor…even if both vendors are critical to your success.

    Impact and Result

    • Evolve the VMI from tactical to strategic
    • Improve the VMI’s brand and brand awareness
    • Develop the VMI’s team members to increase the VMI’s impact
    • Take relationships to the next level with your critical vendors
    • Understand how your vendors view your organization as a customer
    • Create and implement plans to improve relationships with critical vendors
    • Create and implement plans to improve underperforming vendors

    Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should continue to evolve and mature your vendor management initiative and to understand the additional elements of Info-Tech’s four-step cycle to running your vendor management initiative.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative – Executive Brief
    • Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phases 1-4

    1. Plan

    This phase helps the VMI stay focused and aligned by reviewing existing materials, updating the existing maturity assessment, and ensuring that the foundational elements of the VMI are up to date. The main outcomes from this phase are a current maturity assessment and updated or revised Plan documents.

    • Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 1

    2. Build

    This phase helps you configure, create, and understand the tools and templates used to elevate the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of the tools that identify which vendors are important to you, tools and concepts to help you take key vendor relationships to the next level, and tools to help you evaluate and improve the VMI and its personnel.

    • Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 2
    • Elevate – COST Model Vendor Classification Tool
    • Elevate – MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool
    • Elevate – OPEN Model Customer Positioning Tool
    • Elevate – Relationship Assessment and Improvement Tool
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    3. Run

    This phase helps you begin integrating the new tools and templates into the VMI’s operations. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to continue your VMI’s maturation and evolution.

    • Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 3

    4. Review

    This phase helps the VMI stay aligned with the overall organization, stay current, and improve its strategic value as it evolves. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI’s strategic impact.

    • Elevate your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 4

    Infographic

    Workshop: Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Plan and Build

    The Purpose

    Review existing tools and templates and configure new tools and templates.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Updated Maturity Assessment and configured tools and templates.

    Activities

    1.1 Existing Plan document review and new maturity assessment.

    1.2 Optional classification models.

    1.3 Customer positioning model.

    1.4 Two-way scorecards.

    Outputs

    Updated Plan documents.

    New maturity assessment.

    Configured classification model.

    Customer positioning for top five vendors.

    Configured scorecard and feedback form.

    2 Build and Run

    The Purpose

    Configure VMI Tools and Templates.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Configured Tools and Templates for the VMI.

    Activities

    2.1 Performance improvement plans (PIPs).

    2.2 Relationship improvement plans (RIPs).

    2.3 Vendor-at-a-Glance reports.

    2.4 VMI Personnel Competency Evaluation Tool.

    Outputs

    Configured Performance Improvement Plan.

    Configured Relationship Assessment and Relationship Improvement Plan.

    Configured 60-Second Report and completed Vendor Calendar for one vendor.

    Configured VMI Personnel Competency Evaluation Tool.

    3 Build and Run

    The Purpose

    Continue configuring VMI Tools and Templates and enhancing VM competencies.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Configured Tools and Templates for the VMI and market intelligence to gather.

    Activities

    3.1 Internal feedback tool.

    3.2 VMI ROI calculation.

    3.3 Vendor recognition program.

    3.4 Assess the Relationship Landscape.

    3.5 Gather market intelligence.

    3.6 Improve professional skills.

    Outputs

    Configured Internal Feedback Tool.

    General framework for a vendor recognition program.

    Completed Relationship Landscape Assessment (representative sample).

    List of market intelligence to gather for top five vendors.

    4 Run and Review

    The Purpose

    Improve the VMI’s brand awareness and impact on the organization; continue to maintain alignment with the overall organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Raising the organization’s awareness of the VMI, and ensuring the VMI Is becoming more strategic.

    Activities

    4.1 Expand professional knowledge.

    4.2 Create brand awareness.

    4.3 Investigate potential alliances.

    4.4 Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value.

    4.5 Review and update (governances, policies and procedures, lessons learned, internal alignment, and leading practices).

    Outputs

    Branding plan for the VMI.

    Branding plan for individual VMI team members.

    Further reading

    Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Transform Your VMI From Tactical to Strategic to Maximize Its Impact and Value

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Transform your VMI into a strategic contributor to ensure its longevity.

    The image contains a picture of Phil Bode.

    By the time you start using this blueprint, you should have established a solid foundation for your vendor management initiative (VMI) and implemented many or all of the principles outlined in Info-Tech’s blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management (the Jump Start blueprint). This blueprint (the Elevate blueprint) is meant to continue the evolutionary or maturation process of your VMI. Many of the items presented here will build on and refer to the elements from the Jump Start blueprint. The goal of the Elevate blueprint is to assist in the migration of your VMI from transactional to strategic. Why? Simply put, the more strategic the VMI, the more value it adds and the more impact it has on the organization as a whole.

    While the day-to-day, transactional aspect of running a VMI will never go away, getting stuck in transactional mode is a horrible place for the VMI and its team members:

    • The VMI will never live up to its potential.
    • The work won’t be enjoyable or rewarding for most people.
    • The VMI will be seen paper pushers, gatekeepers, and other things that don’t add value or should be avoided.
    • Being reactive (i.e. putting out fires all day) is exhausting and provides little or no control over the work and workflow.
    • Lastly, the VMI’s return on investment will be low, and unless it was established due to regulatory, audit, or other influences, the VMI could be disbanded. Minimal resources will be available to the VMI…just enough to keep it alive and obtain whatever checkmark needs to be earned to satisfy the original need for its creation.

    To prevent these tragic things from happening, transform the VMI into a strategic contributor and partner internally. This Elevate blueprint provides a roadmap and guidance to get your journey started. Focus on expanding your understanding of customer/vendor dynamics, improving the skills, competencies, and knowledge of the VMI’s team members, contributing value beyond the savings aspect, and building a solid brand internally and with your vendors. This requires a conscious effort and a proactive approach to vendor management…not to mention treating your internal “clients” with respect and providing great customer service.

    At the end of the day, ask yourself one question: If your internal clients had to pay for your services, would they? If you can answer yes, you are well on your way to being strategic. If not, you still have some work to do. Long live the strategic VMI!

    Phil Bode
    Principal Research Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Each year, IT organizations “outsource” tasks, activities, functions, and other items. During 2021:

    • Spend on as-a-service providers increased 38% over 2020.*
    • Spend on managed service providers increased 16% over 2020.*
    • IT service providers increased their merger and acquisition numbers by 47% over 2020.*

    This leads to more spend, less control, and more risk for IT organizations. Managing this becomes a higher priority for IT, but many IT organizations are ill-equipped to do this proactively.

    As new contracts are negotiated and existing contracts are renegotiated or renewed, there is a perception that the contracts will yield certain results, output, performance, solutions, or outcomes. The hope is that these will provide a measurable expected value to IT and the organization. Often, much of the expected value is never realized. Many organizations don’t have a VMI to help:

    • Ensure at least the expected value is achieved.
    • Improve on the expected value through performance management.
    • Significantly increase the expected value through a proactive VMI.

    Vendor Management is a proactive, cross-functional lifecycle. It can be broken down into four phases:

    • Plan
    • Build
    • Run
    • Review

    The Info-Tech process addresses all four phases and provides a step-by-step approach to configure and operate your VMI. The content in this blueprint helps you and the VMI evolve to add value and impact to the organization that was started with the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your VMI.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The VMI must continue to mature and evolve, or it will languish, atrophy, and possibly be disbanded.

    • A transactional approach to vendor management ignores the multi-faceted dynamics in play and limits the VMI’s potential value.
    • Improving the VMI’s impact starts with the VMI’s personnel – their skills, knowledge, competencies, and relationships.
    • Adding value to the organization requires time to build trust and understand the landscape (internal and external).
    *Source: Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Spend on managed service providers and as-a-service providers continues to increase. In addition, IT services vendors continue to be active in the mergers and acquisitions arena. This increases the need for a VMI to help with the changing IT vendor landscape.

    38%

    2021

    16%

    2021

    47%

    2021

    Spend on

    As-a-Service Providers

    Spend on

    Managed Services

    Providers

    IT Services

    Merger & Acquisition

    Growth

    (Transactions)

    Source: Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

    Executive Summary

    Common Obstacles

    When organizations execute, renew, or renegotiate a contract, there is an “expected value” associated with that contract. Without a robust VMI, most of the expected value will never be realized. With a robust VMI, the realized value significantly exceeds the expected value during the contract term.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram that demonstrates the expected value of a contract with and without a vmi.

    Source: Based on findings from Geller & Company, 2003.

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    A sound, cyclical approach to vendor management will help ensure your VMI meets your needs and stays in alignment with your organization as they both change (i.e. mature and evolve).

    Vendor Management Process

    1. Plan
    • Review and Update Existing Plan Materials
  • Build
    • Vendor Classification Models
    • Customer Positioning Model
    • 2-Way Scorecards
    • Performance Improvement Plan (PIP)
    • Relationship Improvement Plan (RIP)
    • Vendor-at-a-Glance Reports
    • VMI Personnel Competency Evaluation Tool
    • Internal Feedback Tool
    • VMI ROI Calculation Tools
    • Vendor Recognition Program
  • Run
    • Classify Vendors and Identify Customer Position
    • Assess the Relationship Landscape
    • Leverage 2-Way Scorecards
    • Implement PIPs and RIPS
    • Gather Market Intelligence
    • Generate Vendor-at-a-Glance Reports
    • Evaluate VMI Personnel
    • Improve Professional Skills
    • Expand Professional Knowledge
    • Create Brand Awareness
    • Survey Internal Clients
    • Calculate VMI ROI
    • Implement Vendor Recognition Program
  • Review
    • Investigate Potential Alliances
    • Continue Increasing the VMI's Strategic Value
    • Review and Update Governances
    • Outcomes
      • Better Allocation of VMI Resources
      • Measurable Impact of the VMI
      • Increased Awareness of the VMI
      • Improved Vendor Performance
      • Improved Vendor Relationships
      • VMI Team Member Development
      • Strategic Relationships Internally

    Info-Tech’s Methodology for Elevating Your VMI

    Phase 1 - Plan

    Phase 2 - Build

    Phase 3 - Run

    Phase 4 – Review

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Review and Update Existing Plan Materials

    2.1 Vendor Classification Models

    2.2 Customer Positioning Model

    2.3 Two-Way Scorecards

    2.4 Performance Improvement Plan (PIP)

    2.5 Relationship Improvement Plan (RIP)

    2.6 Vendor-at-a-Glance Reports

    2.7 VMI Personnel Competency Evaluation Tool

    2.8 Internal Feedback Tool

    2.9 VMI ROI Calculation

    2.10 Vendor Recognition Program

    3.1 Classify Vendors & Identify Customer Position

    3.2 Assess the Relationship Landscape

    3.3 Leverage Two-Way Scorecards

    3.4 Implement PIPs and RIPs

    3.5 Gather Market Intelligence

    3.6 Generate Vendor-at-a-Glance Reports

    3.7 Evaluate VMI Personnel

    3.8 Improve Professional Skills

    3.9 Expand Professional Knowledge

    3.10 Create Brand Awareness

    3.11 Survey Internal Clients

    3.12 Calculate VMI ROI

    3.13 Implement Vendor Recognition Program

    4.1 Investigate Potential Alliances

    4.2 Continue Increasing the VMI’s Strategic Value

    4.3 Review and Update

    Phase Outcomes

    This phase helps the VMI stay focused and aligned by reviewing existing materials, updating the existing maturity assessment, and ensuring that the foundational elements of the VMI are up-to-date.

    This phase helps you configure, create, and understand the tools and templates used to elevate the VMI.

    This phase helps you begin integrating the new tools and templates into the VMI’s operations.

    This phase helps the VMI stay aligned with the overall organization, stay current, and improve its strategic value as it evolves.

    Insight Summary

    Insight 1

    An organization’s vendor management initiative must continue to evolve and mature to reach its full strategic value. In the early stages, the vendor management initiative may be seen as transactional, focusing on the day-to-day functions associated with vendor management. The real value of a VMI comes from becoming strategic partner to other functional groups (departments) within your organization.

    Insight 2

    Developing vendor management personnel is critical to the vendor management initiative’s evolution and maturation. For the VMI to mature, its personnel must mature as well. Their professional skills, competencies, and knowledge must increase over time. Failure to accentuate personal growth within the team limits what the team can achieve and how the team is perceived.

    Insight 3

    Vendor management is not about imposing your will on vendors; it is about understanding the multifaceted dynamics between your organization and your vendors and charting the appropriate path forward. Resource allocation and relationship expectations flow from these dynamics. Each critical vendor requires an individual plan to build the best possible relationship and to leverage that relationship. What works with one vendor may not work or even be possible with another vendor – even if both vendors are critical to your success.

    Blueprint Deliverables

    The four phases of maturing and evolving your vendor management initiative are supported with configurable tools, templates, and checklists to help you stay aligned internally and achieve your goals.

    VMI Tools and Templates

    Continue building your foundation for your VMI and configure tools and templates to help you manage your vendor relationships.

    The image contains screenshots of the VMI Tools and Templates.

    Key Deliverables:

    Info-Tech’s

    1. Elevate – COST Model Vendor Classification Tool
    2. Elevate – MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool
    3. Elevate – OPEN Model Customer Positioning Tool
    4. Elevate – Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan Tool
    5. Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    A suite of tools and templates to help you upgrade and evolve your vendor management initiative.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Improve VMI performance and value.
    • Improve VMI team member performance.
    • Build better relationships with critical vendors.
    • Measure the impact and contributions provided by the VMI.
    • Establish realistic and appropriate expectations for vendor interactions.
    • Understand customer positioning to allocate vendor management resources more effectively and more efficiently.
    • Improve vendor accountability.
    • Increase collaboration between departments.
    • Improve working relationships with your vendors.
    • Create a feedback loop to address vendor/customer issues before they get out of hand or are more costly to resolve.
    • Increase access to meaningful data and information regarding important vendors.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.” “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phases 2 and 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Review status of existing plan materials.

    Call #2: Conduct a new maturity assessment.

    Call #3: Review optional classification models.

    Call #4: Determine customer positioning for top vendors.

    Call #5: Configure vendor Scorecards and vendor feedback forms.

    Call #6: Discuss PIPs, RIPs, and vendor-at-a-glance reports.

    Call #7: VMI personnel competency evaluation tool.

    Call #8: Create internal feedback tool and discuss ROI.

    Call #9: Identify vendor recognition program attributes and assess the relationship landscape.

    Call #10: Gather market intelligence and create brand awareness.

    Call #11: Identify potential vendor alliances, review the components of a strategic VMI, and discuss the continuous improvement loop.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 6 to 12 calls over the course of 3 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Plan/Build Run

    Build/Run

    Build/Run

    Run/Review

    Activities

    1.1 Existing Plan document review and new maturity assessment.

    1.2 Optional classification models.

    1.3 Customer positioning model.

    1.4 Two-way scorecards.

    2.1 Performance improvement plans (PIPs).

    2.2 Relationship improvement plans (RIPs).

    2.3 Vendor-at-a-glance reports.

    2.4 VMI personnel competency evaluation tool.

    3.1 Internal feedback tool.

    3.2 VMI ROI calculation.

    3.3 Vendor recognition program.

    3.4 Assess the relationship landscape.

    3.5 Gather market intelligence.

    3.6 Improve professional skills.

    4.1 Expand professional knowledge.

    4.2 Create brand awareness.

    4.3 Investigate potential alliances.

    4.4 Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value.

    4.5 Review and update (governances, policies and procedures, lessons learned, internal alignment, and leading practices).

    Deliverables

    1. Updated plan documents.
    2. New maturity assessment.
    3. Configured classification model.
    4. Customer positioning for top 5 vendors.
    5. Configured scorecard and feedback form.
    1. Configured performance improvement plan.
    2. Configured relationship assessment and relationship improvement plan.
    3. Configured 60-second report and completed vendor calendar for one vendor.
    4. Configured VMI personnel competency evaluation tool.
    1. Configured internal feedback tool.
    2. General framework for a vendor recognition program.
    3. Completed relationship landscape assessment (representative sample).
    4. List of market intelligence to gather for top 5 vendors.
    1. Roadmap/plan for improving skills and knowledge for VMI personnel.
    2. Action plan for creating brand awareness for the VMI.
    3. Action plan for creating brand awareness for each VMI team member.

    Using complementary vendor management blueprints

    Jump Start Your VMI and Elevate Your VMI

    The image contains a screenshot to demonstrate using complementary vendor management blueprints.

    Phase 1 – Plan

    Look to the Future and Update Existing Materials

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Review and update existing Plan materials

    2.1 Vendor classification models

    2.2 Customer positioning model

    2.3 Two-way scorecards

    2.4 Performance improvement plan (PIP)

    2.5 Relationship improvement plan (RIP)

    2.6 Vendor-at-a-glance reports

    2.7 VMI personnel competency evaluation tool

    2.8 Internal feedback tool

    2.9 VMI ROI calculation

    2.10 Vendor recognition program

    3.1 Classify vendors and identify customer position

    3.2 Assess the relationship landscape

    3.3 Leverage two-way scorecards

    3.4 Implement PIPs and RIPs

    3.5 Gather market intelligence

    3.6 Generate vendor-at-a-glance reports

    3.7 Evaluate VMI personnel

    3.8 Improve professional skills

    3.9 Expand professional knowledge

    3.10 Create brand awareness

    3.11 Survey internal clients

    3.12 Calculate VMI ROI

    3.13 Implement vendor recognition program

    4.1 Investigate potential alliances

    4.2 Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value

    4.3 Review and update

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    This phase helps the VMI stay focused and aligned by reviewing existing materials, updating the existing maturity assessment, and ensuring that the foundational elements of the VMI are up-to-date. The main outcomes from this phase are a current maturity assessment and updated or revised Plan documents.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Procurement/Sourcing
    • IT
    • Others as needed

    Phase 1 – Plan

    Phase 1 – Plan revisits the foundational elements from the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative. As the VMI continues to operate and mature, looking backward periodically provides a new perspective and helps the VMI move forward:

    • Has anything changed (mission statement, goals, scope, strengths and obstacles, roles and responsibilities, and process mapping)?
    • What progress was made against the maturity assessment?
    • What is next in the maturity process for the VMI?
    • Were some foundational elements overlooked or not done thoroughly due to time constraints, a lack of knowledge, or other factors?

    Keep an eye on the past as you begin looking toward the future.

    Step 1.1 – Review and update existing Plan materials

    Ensure existing materials are current

    At this point, the basic framework for your VMI should be in place. However, now is a good time to correct any oversights in your foundational elements. Have you:

    • Drafted a mission statement for the VMI and listed its goals, answering the questions “why does the VMI exist” and “what will it achieve”?
    • Determined the VMI’s scope, establishing what is in and outside the purview of the VMI?
    • Listed the VMI’s strengths and obstacles, identifying what you can leverage and what needs to be managed to ensure smooth sailing?
    • Established roles and responsibilities (OIC Chart) for the vendor management lifecycle, defining each internal party’s place in the process?
    • Documented process maps, delineating (at a minimum) what the VMI is doing for each step of the vendor management lifecycle?
    • Created a charter, establishing an operational structure for the VMI?
    • Completed a vendor inventory, identifying the major vendors included in the VMI?
    • Conducted a VMI maturity assessment, establishing a baseline and desired future state to work toward?
    • Defined the VMI’s structure, documenting the VMI’s place in the organization, its services, and its clients?

    If any of these elements is missing, revisit the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative to complete these components. If they exist, review them and make any required modifications.

    Download the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    1.1.1 – Review and update existing Plan materials

    1 – 6 Hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review existing documents and tools created or configured during Phase 1 of the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative: mission statement and goals, scope, strengths and obstacles, OIC chart, process maps, charter, vendor inventory, maturity assessment, and structure.
    2. Update the documents as needed.
    3. Redo the maturity assessment if more than 12 months have passed since the initial assessment was conducted.
    Input Output
    • Documents and tools from Phase 1 of the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Updated documents and tools from Phase 1 of the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    Materials Participants
    • Documents and tools from Phase 1 of the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Whiteboard or flip charts (as needed)
    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Download the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Download the Jump - Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Phase 2 – Build

    Create New Tools and Consider Alternatives to Existing Tools

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Review and update existing Plan materials

    2.1 Vendor classification models

    2.2 Customer positioning model

    2.3 Two-way scorecards

    2.4 Performance improvement plan (PIP)

    2.5 Relationship improvement plan (RIP)

    2.6 Vendor-at-a-glance reports

    2.7 VMI personnel competency evaluation tool

    2.8 Internal feedback tool

    2.9 VMI ROI calculation

    2.10 Vendor recognition program

    3.1 Classify vendors and identify customer position

    3.2 Assess the relationship landscape

    3.3 Leverage two-way scorecards

    3.4 Implement PIPs and RIPs

    3.5 Gather market intelligence

    3.6 Generate vendor-at-a-glance reports

    3.7 Evaluate VMI personnel

    3.8 Improve professional skills

    3.9 Expand professional knowledge

    3.10 Create brand awareness

    3.11 Survey internal clients

    3.12 Calculate VMI ROI

    3.13 Implement vendor recognition program

    4.1 Investigate potential alliances

    4.2 Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value

    4.3 Review and update

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    This phase helps you configure, create, and understand the tools and templates used to elevate the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of the tools that identify which vendors are important to you, tools and concepts to help you take key vendor relationships to the next level, and tools to help you evaluate and improve the VMI and its personnel.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Legal
    • Marketing
    • Others as needed

    Phase 2 – Build

    Create and configure tools, templates, and processes

    Phase 2 – Build is similar to its counterpart in the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative; this phase focuses on tools, templates, and concepts that help the VMI increase its strategic value and impact. The items referenced in this phase will require your customization or configuration to integrate them within your organization and culture for maximum effect.

    One goal of this phase is to provide new ways of looking at things and alternate approaches. (For example, two methods of classifying your vendors are presented for your consideration.) You don’t live in a one-size-fits-all world, and options allow you (or force you) to evaluate what’s possible rather than running with the herd. As you review this phase, keep in mind that some of the concepts presented may not be applicable in your environment…or it may be that they just aren’t applicable right now. Timing, evolution, and maturity will always be factors in how the VMI operates.

    Another goal of this phase is to get you thinking about the value the VMI brings to the organization, and just as important, how to capture and report it. Money alone may be at the forefront of most people’s minds when return on investment is brought up, but there are many ways to measure a VMI’s value and impact. This Phase will help you in your pursuit.

    Lastly, a VMI must focus on its internal clients, and that starts with the VMI’s personnel. The VMI is a reflection of its team members – what they do, say, and know will determine how the VMI is perceived…and used.

    Step 2.1 – Vendor classification model

    Determine which classification model works best for your VMI

    The classification model in the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative is simple and easy to use. It provides satisfactory results for the first one or two years of the VMI’s life. After that, a more sophisticated model should be used, one with more parameters or flexibility to accommodate the VMI’s new maturity.

    Two models are presented on the following pages. The first is a variation of the COST model used in the Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative blueprint. The second is the MVP model, which segments vendors into three categories instead of four and eliminates the 50/50 allocation constraint inherent in a 2x2 model.

    Step 2.1 – Vendor classification model

    Configure the COST Vendor Classification Tool

    The image contains a screenshot of the COST classification model.

    If you used the COST classification model in the Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative blueprint, you are familiar with its framework: vendors are plotted into a 2x2 matrix based on their spend and switching costs and their value to your operation. The simple variation of this model uses three variables to assess the vendor’s value to your operation and two variables to determine the vendor’s spend and switching cost implications.

    The COST classification model presented here sticks to the same basic tenets but adds to the number of variables used to plot a vendor’s position within the matrix. Six variables are used to define a vendor’s value and three variables are used to set the spend and switching cost. This provides greater latitude in identifying what makes a vendor important to you.

    Step 2.1 – Vendor classification model

    Configure the MVP Vendor Classification Tool

    The image contains a screenshot example of the MVP clsssification tool.

    Another option for classifying vendors is the MVP classification model. In this model, vendors fall into one of three categories: minor, valued, or principal. Similar to the COST vendor classification model, the MVP classification model requires a user to evaluate statements or questions to assess a vendor’s importance to the organization. In the MVP approach, each question/statement is weighted, and the potential responses to each question/statement are assigned points (100, 33, or 10) based on their impact. Multiplying the weight (expressed as a percentage) for each question/statement by the response points for each question/statement yields a line-item score. The total number of points obtained by a vendor determines its classification category. A vendor receiving a score of 75 or greater would be a principal vendor (similar to a strategic vendor under the COST model); 55 to 74 points would be a valued vendor (similar to operational or tactical vendor); less than 55 points would be a minor vendor (similar to a commodity vendor).

    Step 2.1 – Vendor classification model

    Which classification model is best?

    By now, you may be asking yourself, “Which model should I use? What is the advantage of the MVP model?” Great questions! Both models work well, but the COST model has a limitation inherent in any basic 2x2 model. Since two axes are used in a 2x2 approach, the effective weighting for each axis is 50%. As a result, the weights assigned to an individual element are reduced by 50%. A simple but extreme example will help clarify this issue (hopefully).

    Suppose you wanted to use an element such as How integrated with our business processes are the vendor's products/services? and weighted it 100%. Under the 2x2 matrix approach, this element only moves the X-axis score; it has no impact on the Y-axis score. The vendor in this hypothetical could max out the X-axis under the COST model, but additional elements would be needed for the vendor to rise from the tactical quadrant to the strategic quadrant. In the MVP model, if the vendor maxed out the score on that one element (at 100%), the vendor would be at the top of the pyramid and would be a principal vendor.

    One model is not necessarily better than the other. Both provide an objective way for you to determine the importance of your vendors. However, if you are using elements that don’t fit neatly into the two axes of the COST model, consider using the MVP model. Play with each and see which one works best in your environment, knowing you can always switch at a later point.

    2.1.1 – COST Model Vendor Classification Tool

    15 – 45 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to decide whether you want to use this model or the MVP model (see next page); if you choose this model, configure it for your environment by reviewing Elevate – COST Model Vendor Classification Tool – Tab 2. Set Parameters.
      1. Review the questions in column C for each axis (items 1-9), the weights in column D, and the answers/descriptors for each question (columns E, F, G, and H). Make any adjustments necessary to fit your culture, environment, and goals.
      2. Using the Jump Start Your Vendor Management blueprint tool Jump - Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory, sort your vendors by spend; if you used multiple line items for a vendor in the Vendor Inventory Tool, aggregate the spend data for this activity.
      3. Adjust the descriptors and values in row 16 (Item 7) to match your actual data. General guidance for establishing the spend ranges is provided in the tool itself.
    2. No other modifications should be made to the parameters.
    Input Output
    • Jump - Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory from the blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Configured COST Model Vendor Classification Tool
    Materials Participants
    • Elevate – Cost Model Vendor Classification Tool – Tab 2. Set Parameters
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate - COST Model Vendor Classification Tool

    2.1.2 – MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool

    15 – 45 Minutes

    1. Meet with the Participants to decide whether you want to use this model or the COST Model (see previous page); if you choose this model, configure it for your environment by reviewing Elevate – MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool – Tab 2. Set Parameters.
    2. Review the questions in column C (Items 1 - 7 ), the answers/descriptors for each question (columns D, E, and F), and the weights in column G. Make any adjustments necessary to fit your culture, environment, and goals.
    3. For the answers/descriptors use words and phrases that resonate with your audience and are as intuitive as possible.
    4. If you use annualized spend as an element, general guidance for establishing the spend ranges is provided in the tool itself.
    5. When assigning a weight value to a question, refrain from going below 5%; weights below this threshold will have minimal to no impact on a vendor's score.
    InputOutput
    • Jump - Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory from the Info-Tech blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Configured MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool – Tab 2. Set Parameters
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – MVP Model Vendor Classification Tool

    Step 2.2 – Customer positioning model

    Identify how the vendors view your organization

    The image contains a screenshot of the customer positioning model.

    Now that you have configured your choice of vendor classification model (or decided to stick with your original model), it’s time to think about the other side of the coin: How do your vendors view your organization. Why is this important? Because the VMI will have only limited success if you are trying to impose your will on your vendors without regard for how they view the relationship from their perspective. For example, if the vendor is one of your strategic (COST Model) or principal (MVP Model) vendors, but you don’t spend much money with them, you are difficult to work with, and there is no opportunity for future growth, you may have a difficult time getting the vendor to show up for BAMs (business alignment meetings), caring about scorecards, or caring about the relationship period.

    Our experience at Info-Tech interacting with our members through vendor management workshops, guided implementations, and advisory calls has led us to a significant conclusion on this topic: Most customers tend to overvalue their importance to their vendors. To open your eyes about how your vendors actually view your account, use Info-Tech’s OPEN Model Customer Positioning Tool. (It is based on the supplier preferencing model pioneered by Steele & Court in 1996 in which the standard 2x2 matrix tool for procurement [and eventually vendor management] was repurposed to provide insights from the vendor’s perspective.) For our purposes, think of the OPEN model for customer positioning as a mirror’s reflection of the COST model for vendor classification. The OPEN model provides a more objective way to determine your importance to your vendors. Ultimately, your relationship with each vendor will be plotted into the 2x2 grid, and it will indicate whether your account is viewed as an opportunity, preferred, exploitable, or negligible.

    *Adapted from Profitable Purchasing Strategies by Paul T. Steele and Brian H. Court

    Step 2.3 – Two-way scorecards

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors

    The image contains a screenshot example of the otwo-way feedback loop with vendors.

    As with the vendor classification models discussed in Step 2.1, the two-way scorecards presented here are an extension of the scorecard and feedback material from the Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative blueprint.

    The vendor scorecard in this blueprint provides additional flexibility and sophistication for your scorecarding approach by allowing the individual variables (or evidence indicators) within each measurement category to be evaluated and weighted. (The prior version only allowed the evaluation and weighting at the category level.)

    On the vendor feedback side, the next evolution is to formalize the feedback and document it in its own scorecard format rather than continuing to list questions in the BAM agenda. The vendor feedback template included with this blueprint provides a sample approach to quantifying the vendor’s feedback and tracking the information.

    The fundamentals of scorecarding remain the same:

    • Keep your eye on what is important to you.
    • Limit the number of measurement categories and evidence indicators to a reasonable and manageable number.
    • Simple is almost always better than complicated.

    2.3.1 – Two-way scorecards (vendor scorecard)

    15 – 60 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to configure the scorecard from Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3.1 Vendor Scorecard to meet your needs:
      1. Review the measurement categories and criteria and modify as needed.
      2. Weight the measurement categories (Column E) according to their relative importance to each other; make sure the total adds up to 100%.
      3. Weight the measurement criteria (Column D) within each measurement category according to their relative importance to each other; make sure the total adds up to 100%.
    2. As a reminder, the vendor scorecard is for the vendor overall, not for a specific contract.
    3. You can create variations of the scorecard based on vendor categories (e.g. hardware, software, cloud, security, telecom), but avoid the temptation of creating vendor-specific scorecards unless the vendor is unique; conversely, you may want to create two or more scorecards for a vendor that crosses categories (one for each category).
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3.1 Vendor Scorecard
    • Brainstorming
    • Configured vendor scorecards
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3.1 Vendor Scorecard
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    2.3.2 – Two-way scorecards (vendor feedback form)

    15 – 60 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to configure the feedback form from Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3.2 Vendor Feedback Form to meet your needs:
      1. Review the measurement categories and criteria and modify as needed.
      2. Weight the measurement categories (Column E) according to their relative importance to each other; make sure the total adds up to 100%.
      3. Weight the measurement criteria (Column D) within each measurement category according to their relative importance to each other; make sure the total adds up to 100%.
    2. As a reminder, the vendor feedback form is for the relationship overall and not for a specific contract.
    3. You can create variations of the feedback form based on vendor categories (e.g. hardware, software, cloud, security, telecom), but avoid the temptation of creating vendor-specific feedback forms unless the vendor is unique; conversely, you may want to create two or more feedback forms for a vendor that crosses categories and you work with different account management teams (one for each team).
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3.2 Vendor Feedback Form
    • Brainstorming
    • Configured vendor feedback forms
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.3.2 Vendor Feedback Form
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 2.4 – Performance improvement plan (PIP)

    Design your template to help underperforming vendors

    It is not uncommon to see performance dips from even the best vendors. However, when poor performance becomes a trend, the vendor manager can work with the vendor to create and implement a performance improvement plan (PIP).

    Performance issues can come from a variety of sources:

    • Contractual obligations.
    • Scorecard items.
    • Compliance issues not specified in the contract.
    • Other areas/expectations not covered by the scorecard or contract (e.g. vendor personnel showing up late for meetings, vendor personnel not being adequately trained, vendor personnel not being responsive).

    PIPs should focus on at least a few key areas:

    • The stated performance in the contract or the expected performance.
    • The actual performance provided by the vendor.
    • The impact of the vendor’s poor performance on the customer.
    • A corrective action plan, including steps to be taken by the vendor and due dates and/or review dates.
    • The consequences for not improving the performance level.

    Info-Tech Insight

    PIPs are most effective when the vendor is an operational, strategic, or tactical vendor (COST model) or a principal or valued vendor (MVP model) and when you are an opportunity or preferred customer (OPEN model).

    2.4.1 – Performance improvement plan (PIP)

    15 – 30 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to review the two options for PIPs: Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tabs 2.4.1 and 2.4.2. Decide whether you want to use one or both options.
    2. Modify, add, or delete elements from either or both options to meet your needs.
    3. If you want to add signature lines for acknowledgement by the parties or other elements that may have legal implications, check with your legal advisors.
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium - Tabs 2.4.1 and 2.4.2
    • Brainstorming
    • Configured performance improvement plan templates
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium - Tabs 2.4.1 and 2.4.2
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 2.5 – Relationship improvement plan (RIP)

    Identify key relationship indicators for your vendors

    Relationships are often taken for granted, and many faulty assumptions are made by both parties in the relationship: good relationships will stay good, bad relationships will stay bad, and relationships don’t require any work. In the vendor management space, these assumptions can derail the entire VMI and diminish the value added to your organization by vendors.

    To complicate matters, relationships are multi-faceted. They can occur:

    • On an organization-to-organization, working level.
      • Do your roadmaps align with the vendors?
      • Do the parties meet their contractual obligations?
      • Do the parties meet their day-to-day requirements (meetings, invoices, responses to inquiries)?
    • On an individual, personnel-to-personnel basis.
      • Do you have a good relationship with the account manager?
      • Does your project manager work well with the vendor’s project manager?
      • Do your executives have good relationships with their counterparts at the vendor?

    Improving or maintaining a relationship will not happen by accident. There must be a concerted effort to achieve the desired results (or get as close as possible). A relationship improvement plan can be used to improve or maintain a relationship with the vendor and the individuals who make up the vendor’s organization.

    Step 2.5 – Relationship improvement plan (RIP)

    Identify key relationship indicators for your vendors (continued)

    Improving relationships (or even maintaining them) requires a plan. The first step is to understand the current situation: Is the relationship good, bad, or somewhere in between? While the analysis will be somewhat subjective, it can be made more objective than merely thinking about relationships emotionally or intuitively. Relationships can be assessed based on the presence and quality of certain traits, factors, and elements. For example, you may think communication is important in a relationship. However, that is too abstract and subjective; to be more objective, you would need to identify the indicators or qualities of good communication. For a vendor relationship, they might include (but wouldn’t necessarily be limited to):

    • Vendor communication is accurate and complete.
    • Vendor personnel respond to inquiries on a timely basis.
    • Vendor personnel communications are easy to understand.
    • Vendor personnel communicate with you in your preferred manner (text, email, phone).
    • Vendor personnel discuss the pros and cons of vendor products/services being presented.

    Evaluating these statements on a predefined and consistent scale establishes the baseline necessary to conduct a gap analysis. The second half of the equation is the future state. Using the same criteria, what would or should the communication component look like a year from now? After that is determined, a plan can be created to improve the deficient areas and maintain the acceptable areas.

    Although this example focused on one category, the same methodology can be used for additional categories. It all starts with the simple question that requires a complex answer, “What traits are important to you and are indicators of a good relationship?”

    2.5.1 – Relationship Improvement Plan (RIP)

    15 – 60 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to configure the relationship indicators in Elevate – Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan tool – Tab 2. Set Parameters.
    2. Review the 60 relationship indicators in column E of Tab 2. Set Parameters.
    3. Identify any relationship indicators that are important to you but that are missing from the prepopulated list.
    4. Add the relationship indicators you identified in step 3 above in the space provided at the end of column E of Tab 2. Set Parameters. There is space for up to 15 additional relationship indicators.
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan Tool
    • Brainstorming
    • Configured Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan tool
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan tool
    • Whiteboard of flip chart
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan tool

    Step 2.6 – Vendor-at-a-glance reports

    Configure executive and stakeholder reports

    Executives and stakeholders (“E&S”) discuss vendors during internal meetings and often meet directly with vendors as well. Having a solid working knowledge of all the critical vendors used by an organization is nearly impossible for E&S. Without situational awareness, though, E&S can appear uninformed, can be at the mercy of others with better information, and can be led astray by misinformation. To prevent these and other issues from derailing the E&S, two essential vendor-at-a-glance reports can be used.

    The first report is the 60-Second Report. As the name implies, the report can be reviewed and digested in roughly a minute. The report provides a lot of information on one page in a combination of graphics, icons, charts, and words.

    The second report is a vendor calendar. Although it is a simple document, the Vendor Calendar is a powerful communication tool to keep E&S informed of upcoming events with a vendor. The purpose is not to replace the automated calendaring systems (e.g. Outlook), but to supplement them.

    Combined, the 60-Second Report and the Vendor Calendar provide E&S with an overview of the information required for any high-level meeting with a vendor or to discuss a vendor.

    2.6.1 – Vendor-at-a-glance reports (60-Second Report)

    30 – 90 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to review the sample 60-Second Report and the Checklist of Potential Topics in Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.6.1 V-at-a-G 60-Second Report.
    2. Identify topics of interest and ways to convey the data/information. (Make sure the data sources are valid and the data are easy to obtain.)
    3. Create a framework for the report and populate the fields with sample data. Use one printed page as a guideline for the framework; if it doesn’t fit on one page, adjust the amount of content until it does. If you adjust the margins, font, size of the graphic content, and other items, make sure you don’t reduce the size too much. The brain needs white space to more easily absorb the content, and people shouldn’t have to squint to read the content!
    4. Share the mockup with the intended audience and get their feedback. Use an iterative approach until you are satisfied that no further changes are necessary (or reasonable). Keep in mind that you will not be able to please everyone!
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.6.1 V-at-a-G 60-Second Report
    • Design elements and framework for 60-Second Reports
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.6.1. V-at-a-G 60-Second Report
    • Whiteboard or flip chart
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    2.6.2 – Vendor-at-a-glance reports (vendor calendar)

    15 – 30 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to review the sample Vendor Calendar format in Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.6.2 V-at-a-G Vendor Calendar.
    2. Brainstorm as a team to identify items to include in the calendar (e.g. business alignment meeting dates, conference dates, contract renewals).
    3. Determine whether you want the Vendor Calendar to be:
      1. A calendar year or a fiscal year (if they are different in your organization)
      2. A rolling twelve-month calendar or a fixed calendar.
    4. Decide whether the fill color for each month should change based on your answers in 3, above. For example, you might want a color scheme by quarter or by year (if you choose a rolling twelve-month calendar).
    5. Share the mockup with the intended audience to get their feedback. Use an iterative approach until you are satisfied that no further changes are necessary (or reasonable). Keep in mind you will not be able to please everyone!
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.6.2 V-at-a-G Vendor Calendar
    • Brainstorming
    • Framework and topics for Vendor Calendar Reports
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.6.2 V-at-a-G Vendor Calendar
    • Whiteboard or flip chart
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 2.7 – VMI personnel competency evaluation tool

    Identify skills, competencies, and knowledge required for success

    The image contains a screenshot of the VMI personnel competency evaluation tool.

    By now, you have built and begun managing the VMI’s 3-year roadmap and 90-day plans to help you navigate the VMI’s day-to-day operational path. To complement these plans, it is time to build a roadmap for the VMI’s personnel as well. It doesn’t matter whether VMI is just you, you and some part-time personnel, a robust and fully staffed vendor management office, or some other point on the vendor management spectrum. The VMI is a reflection of its personnel, and they must improve their skills, competencies, and knowledge (“S/C/K”) over time for the VMI to reach its potential. As the adage says, “What got you here won’t get you there.”

    To get there requires a plan that starts with creating an inventory of the VMI’s team members’ S/C/K. Initially, focus on two items:

    • What S/C/K does the VMI currently have across its personnel?
    • What S/C/K does the VMI need to get to the next level?

    Conducting an assessment of and developing an improvement plan for each team member will be addressed later in this blueprint. (See steps 3.7 – Evaluate VMI Personnel, 3.8 – Improve Professional Skills, and 3.9 - Expand Professional Knowledge.)

    2.7.1 – VMI Personnel Competency Evaluation Tool

    15 – 60 Minutes

    1. Review the two options of the competency matrix found in Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium tabs 2.7.1 and 2.7.2 and decide which format you want to use.
    2. Review and modify as needed the prepopulated list of skills, competencies, knowledge, and other intellectual assets found in section 1 of the template option you selected in step 1. The list you use should reflect items that are important to your VMI's mission, goals, scope, charter, and operations.
    3. No changes are required to Sections 2 and 3. They are dashboards and will be updated automatically based on any changes you make to the skills, competencies, knowledge, and other intellectual assets elements in section 1.
    Input Output
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tabs 2.7.1 and 2.7.2
    • Current job descriptions
    • A list of competencies, skills, and knowledge VMI personnel
      • Should have
      • Do have

    An assessment and inventory of competencies, skills, knowledge, and other intellectual assets by VMI team member

    Materials Participants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tabs 2.7.1 and 2.7.2
    • VMI team lead
    • VMI team members as needed

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium.

    Step 2.8 – Internal feedback tool

    Create a user-friendly survey to learn about the VMI’s impact on the organization

    The image contains a screenshot of the internal feedback tool.

    *Adapted from “Best Practices for Every Step of Survey Creation” from surveymonkey.com and “The 9 Most Important Survey Design Tips & Best Practices” by Swetha Amaresan.

    As part of the vendor management lifecycle, the VMI conducts an annual review to assesses compliance with policies and procedures, to incorporate changes in leading practices, to ensure that lessons learned are captured and leveraged, to validate that internal alignment is maintained, and to update governances as needed. As the VMI matures, the annual review process should incorporate feedback from those the VMI serves and those directly impacted by the VMI’s efforts. Your internal clients and others will be able to provide insights on what the VMI does well, what needs improvement, what challenges arise when using the VMI’s services, and other issues.

    A few best practices for creating surveys are set out below:*

    1. Start by establishing a clearly defined, attainable, and high-level goal by filling in the blank: "I want to better understand [blank] (e.g. how the VMI impacts our clients and the executives/stakeholders)." From there, you can begin to derive questions that will help you meet your stated goal.
    2. Use mostly “closed-ended” questions in the survey – responses selected from a list provided. Do ask some “open-ended” questions at the end of the survey to obtain specific examples, anecdotes, or compliments by providing space for the respondent to provide a narrative.
    3. Avoid using biased and leading questions, for example, “Would you say the VMI was great or merely fabulous?” The goal is to get real feedback that helps the VMI improve. Don’t ask the respondents to tell you what you want to hear…listen to what they have to say.

    Step 2.8 – Internal feedback tool

    Create a user-friendly survey to learn about the VMI’s impact on the organization (continued)

    The image contains a screenshot of the internal feedback tool.

    4. Pay attention to your vocabulary and phrasing; use simple words. The goal is to communicate effectively and solicit feedback, and that all starts with the respondents being able to understand what you are asking or seeking.

    5. Use response scales and keep the answer choices balanced. You want the respondents to find an answer that matches their feedback. For example, potential answers such as “strongly agree, agree, neutral, disagree, strongly disagree” are better than “strongly agree, agree, other.”

    6. To improve your response rate, keep your survey short. Most people don’t like surveys, but they really hate long surveys. Make every question count, and keep the average response time to a maximum of a couple of minutes.

    7. Watch out for “absolutes;” they can hurt the quality of your responses. Avoid using language such as always, never, all, and every in your questions or statements. They tend to polarize the evaluation and make it feel like an all-or-nothing situation.

    8. Ask one question at a time or request evaluation of one statement at a time. Combining two topics into the same question or statement (double-barreled questions or statements) makes it difficult for the respondent to determine how to answer if both parts require different answers, for example, “During your last interaction with the VMI, how would you rate our assistance and friendliness?”

    2.8.1 – Internal Feedback Tool

    15 – 60 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review the information in Elevate – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.8.
    2. Two types of surveys are referenced in tab 2.8: a general awareness survey and a specific interaction survey. Decide whether you want to create one or both for your VMI.
      1. For a general awareness survey, review the questions in part 1 of tab 2.8 and make any changes required to meet your needs. Try to keep the number of questions to seven or less. Determine who will receive the survey and how often it will be used.
      2. For a specific interaction survey, review the questions in Part 2 of Tab 2.8. Select up to 7 questions you want to use, making changes to existing questions or creating your own. The goal of this survey is to solicit feedback immediately after one of your internal clients has used the VMI’s services. You may need multiple variations of the survey based on the types of interactions or services the VMI provides.
    3. Balance the length of the surveys against the information you are seeking and the time required for the respondents to complete the survey.
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.8
    • Brainstorming
    • Configured internal surveys
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.8
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate –Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 2.9 – VMI ROI calculation

    Identify ROI variables to track

    After the VMI has been operating for a year or two, questions may begin to surface about the value the VMI provides. “We’re making an investment in the VMI. What are we getting in return?” “Does the VMI provide us with any tangible benefits, or is it another mandatory area like Internal Audit?” To keep the naysayers at bay, start tracking the value the VMI adds to the organization or the return on investment (ROI) provided.

    The easy thing to focus on is money: hard-dollar savings, soft-dollar savings, and cost avoidance. However, the VMI often plays a critical role in vendor-facing activities that lead to saving time, improving performance, and managing risk. All of these are quantifiable and trackable. In addition, internal customer satisfaction (step 2.8 and step 3.11) can provide examples of the VMI’s impact beyond the four pillars of money, time, performance, and risk.

    VMI ROI is a multifaceted and complex topic that is beyond the scope of this blueprint. However, you can do a deep (or shallow) dive on this topic by downloading and reading Info-Tech’s blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO to plot your path for tracking and reporting the VMI’s ROI or value.

    Download the Info-Tech blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO

    2.9.1 – VMI ROI calculation

    2 – 4 Hours

    1. Meet with the participants to review the Info-Tech blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO.
    2. Identify your ROI maturity level using the tools from that blueprint.
    3. Develop a game plan for measuring and reporting your ROI.
    4. Configure the tools to meet your needs.
    5. Gain approval from applicable stakeholders or executives.
    Input Output
    • The tools and materials from the Info-Tech blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO
    • Brainstorming
    • Game plan for measuring and reporting ROI
    Materials Participants
    • The Info-Tech blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO and its tools
    • VMI team
    • Executives and stakeholders as needed

    Download the Info-Tech blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO

    Step 2.10 – Vendor recognition program

    Address the foundational elements of your program

    A vendor recognition program can provide many benefits to your organization. Obtaining those benefits requires a solid plan and the following foundational elements:

    • Internal alignment: The program must align with your organization’s principles and culture. A vendor recognition program that accentuates value and collaboration will not succeed in a customer environment that operates with a “lowest cost wins/price is the only thing we care about” mentality.
    • Funding: Not every program requires extensive funding (or any funding), but more formal vendor recognition programs do require some investment. Underfunding will make your program look cheap and unimpressive. For example, a certificate of appreciation printed on plain paper using a Word template doesn’t send the same message as a nice plaque engraved with the winner’s name.
    • Support: Executive buy-in and support are essential. Without this, only the most informal vendor recognition programs stand a chance of surviving. Executives and stakeholders are often directly involved in formal programs, and this broadens the appeal of the program from the vendor’s perspective.
    • Designated leader: Someone needs to be in charge of the vendor recognition program. This doesn’t mean only one person is doing all the work, but it does require one person to lead the effort and drive the program forward. Much like the VMI itself, there are things the leader will be able to do themselves and things that will require the input, assistance, and participation from others throughout the organization.

    Step 2.10 – Vendor recognition program

    Leverage the advantages of recognizing vendors

    As with any project, there are advantages and disadvantages with implementing and operating a vendor recognition program.

    Advantages:

    • The Pygmalion effect may come into play; the vendors’ performance can be influenced by your expectations as conveyed through the program.
    • There may be some prestige for the vendor associated with winning one of your awards or receiving recognition.
    • Vendor recognition programs can be viewed as a competition, and this can improve vendor performance as it relates to the program and program categories.
    • The program can provide additional feedback to the vendor on what's important to you and help the vendor focus on those items.
    • The vendors’ executives may have an increased awareness of your organization, which can help build relationships.
    • Performance gains can be maintained or increased. Vendors are competitive by nature. Once a vendor wins an award or receives the recognition, it will strive to win again the following year (or measurement period).

    Step 2.10 – Vendor recognition program

    Manage the disadvantages of recognizing vendors

    Just as a coin has two sides, there are two sides to a vendor recognition program. Advantages must be weighed against disadvantages, or at the very least, you must be aware of the potential disadvantages.

    Disadvantages:

    • The program may require funding, depending upon the scope and type of awards, rewards, and recognition being provided.
    • Some vendors who don’t qualify for the program or who fail to win may get hurt feelings. This may alienate them.
    • In addition to hurt feelings from being excluded or finishing outside of the winner’s circle, some vendors may believe the program shows favoritism to certain vendors or is too subjective.
    • Some vendors may not “participate” in the program; they may not understand the WIIFM (what’s in it for me). You may have to “sell” the benefits and advantages of participation to the vendors.
    • Participation may vary by size of vendor. The award, reward, or recognition may mean more to small and mid-sized companies than large companies.

    Step 2.10 – Vendor recognition program

    Create your program’s framework

    There is no one-size-fits-all approach to creating a vendor recognition program. Your program should align with your goals. For example, do you want to drive performance and collaboration, or do you want to recognize vendors that exceed your expectations? While these are not mutually exclusive, the first step is to identify your goals. Next, focus on whether you want a formal or informal program. An informal program could consist of sending thank-you emails or notes to vendor personnel who go above and beyond; a formal program could consist of objective criteria announced and measured annually, with the winners receiving plaques, publicity, and/or recognition at a formal award ceremony with your executives. Once you have determined the type of program you want, you can begin building the framework.

    Take a “crawl, walk, run” approach to designing, implementing, and running your vendor recognition program. Start small and build on your successes. If you try something and it doesn’t work the way you intended, regroup and try again.

    The vendor recognition program may or may not end up residing in the VMI. Regardless, the VMI can be instrumental in creating the program and reinforcing it with the vendors. Even if the program is run and operated by the VMI, other departments will need to be involved. Seek input from the legal and marketing departments to build a durable program that works for your environment and maximizes its impact.

    Lastly, don’t overlook the simple gestures…they go a long way to making people feel appreciated in today’s impersonal world. A simple (but specific) thank-you can have a lasting impact, and not everything needs to be about the vendor’s organization. People make the organization “go,” not the other way around.

    2.10.1 – Vendor recognition program

    30 – 90 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to review the checklist in Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.10 Vendor Recognition.
      1. Decide whether you want to create a program that recognizes individual vendor personnel. If so, review part 1 of tab 2.10 and select the elements you are interested in using to build your program.
      2. Decide whether you want to create a program that recognizes vendors at the company level. If so, review part 2 of tab 2.10.
        1. The first section lists elements of an informal and a formal approach. Decide which approach you want to take.
        2. The second section focuses on creating a formal recognition program. Review the checklist and identify elements that you want to include or issues that must be addressed in creating your program.
    2. Create a draft framework of your programs and work with other areas to finalize the program elements, timeline, marketing, budget, and other considerations.
    Input Output
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.10 Vendor Recognition
    • Brainstorming
    • A framework for a vendor recognition program
    Materials Participants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 2.10. Vendor Recognition
    • Whiteboard or flip chart
    • VMI team
    • Executives and stakeholders as needed
    • Marketing and legal as needed

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    Phase 3 – Run

    Use New and Updated Tools and Increase the VMI’s Impact

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Review and update existing Plan materials

    2.1 Vendor classification models

    2.2 Customer positioning model

    2.3 Two-way scorecards

    2.4 Performance improvement plan (PIP)

    2.5 Relationship improvement plan (RIP)

    2.6 Vendor-at-a-glance reports

    2.7 VMI personnel competency evaluation tool

    2.8 Internal feedback tool

    2.9 VMI ROI calculation

    2.10 Vendor recognition program

    3.1 Classify vendors and identify customer position

    3.2 Assess the relationship landscape

    3.3 Leverage two-way scorecards

    3.4 Implement PIPs and RIPs

    3.5 Gather market intelligence

    3.6 Generate vendor-at-a-glance reports

    3.7 Evaluate VMI personnel

    3.8 Improve professional skills

    3.9 Expand professional knowledge

    3.10 Create brand awareness

    3.11 Survey internal clients

    3.12 Calculate VMI ROI

    3.13 Implement vendor recognition program

    4.1 Investigate potential alliances

    4.2 Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value

    4.3 Review and update

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    This phase helps you begin integrating the new tools and templates into the VMI’s operations. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to continue your VMI’s maturation and evolution.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • IT
    • Legal
    • Marketing
    • Human resources
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Others as needed

    Phase 3 – Run

    Implement new processes, tools, and templates and leverage new concepts

    The review and assessment conducted in Phase 1 – Plan and the tools and templates created and configured during Phase 2 – Build are ready for use and incorporation into your operations. As you trek through Phase 3 – Run, a couple of familiar concepts will be reviewed (vendor classification and scorecarding), and additional details on previously introduced concepts will be provided (customer positioning, surveying internal clients); in addition, new ideas will be presented for your consideration:

    • Assessing the relationship landscape
    • Gathering market intelligence
    • Improving professional skills
    • Expanding professional knowledge
    • Creating brand awareness

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors & identify customer position

    Classify your top 25 vendors by spend

    The methodology used to classify your vendors in the blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative applies here as well, regardless of whether you use the COST model or the MVP model. Info-Tech recommends using an iterative approach initially to validate the results from the model you configured in step 2.1.

    1. Start with your top 25 vendors by spend. From this pool, select 10 vendors: choose your top three vendors by spend, three from the middle of the pack (e.g. numbers 14, 15, and 16 by spend), and the bottom four by spend. Run all 10 vendors through the classification model and review the results.
    2. If the results are what you expected and do not contain any significant surprises, run the rest of the top 25 vendors through the model.
    3. If the results are not what you expected or do contain significant surprises, look at the configuration page of the tool (tab 2) and adjust the weights slightly. Be cautious in your evaluation of the results before modifying the configuration page – some legitimate results are unexpected or surprises based on biases or subjective expectations. Proceed to point 1 above and repeat this process as needed.

    Remember to share the results with executives and stakeholders. Switching from one classification model to another may lead to concerns or questions. As always, obtain their buy-in on the final results.

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Translate terminology and processes if you use the MVP vendor classification model

    If you use the MVP model, the same features will be applicable and the same processes will be followed after classifying your vendors, despite the change in nomenclature. (Strategic vendors are the equivalent of principal vendors; high operational and high tactical vendors are the equivalent of valued vendors; and all other vendors are the equivalent of minor vendors.)

    • Roughly 5% (max) of your total vendor population will be classified as principal.
    • Approximately 10% (max) of your total vendor population will be classified as valued.
    • About 80% of your total vendor population will be classified as minor.
    • Business alignment meetings should be conducted and scorecards should be compiled quarterly for your principal vendors and at least every six months for your valued vendors; business alignment meetings are not necessary for your minor vendors.
    • All other activities will be based on the criteria you used in your MVP model. For example, risk measuring, monitoring, and reporting might be done quarterly for principal and valued vendors if risk is a significant component in your MVP model; if risk is a lesser component, measuring, monitoring, and reporting might be done less frequently (every six or 12 months).

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Determine your customer position for your top 25 vendors using the OPEN model

    The image contains a screenshot of the customer positioning model.

    After classifying your vendors, run your top 25 vendors through the OPEN Model Customer Positioning Tool. The information you need can come from multiple sources, including:

    • Talking to internal personnel to determine responses to the OPEN model assessment statements.
    • Compiling spend information.
    • Looking at the vendors’ financial statements.
    • Talking with the vendors to glean additional information.

    At first blush, the results can run the emotional and logical gamut: shocking, demeaning, degrading, comforting, insightful, accurate, off-kilter, or a combination of these and other reactions. To a certain extent, that is the point of the activity. As previously stated, customers often overestimate their importance to a vendor. To be helpful, your perspective must be as objective as possible rather than the subjective view painted by the account team and others within the vendor (e.g. “You’re my favorite client,” “We love working with you,” “You’re one of our key accounts,” or “You’re one of our best clients.”) The vendor often puts customers on a pedestal that is nothing more than sales puffery. How a vendor treats you is more important than them telling you how great you are.

    Use the OPEN model results and the material on the following pages to develop a game plan as you move forward with your vendor-facing VMI activities. The outcomes of the OPEN model will impact your business alignment meetings, scorecards, relationships, expectations, and many other facets of the VMI.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The OPEN Model Customer Positioning Tool can be adapted for use at the account manager level to determine how important your account is to the account manager.

    *Adapted from Profitable Purchasing Strategies by Paul T. Steele and Brian H. Court

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Learn how each quadrant of the open model impacts your organization (continued)

    Opportunity

    Low value and high attractiveness

    Characteristics and potential actions by the vendor

    • Higher level of service provided.
    • Higher level of attention.
    • Nurture the customer.1
    • Expand the business and relationship.1
    • Seek new opportunities.2
    • Provide proactive service.
    • Demonstrate added value.

    Customer strategies

    • Leverage the position – the vendor may be willing (at least in the short term) to meet your requirements in order to win more business.3
    • Look for ways to improve your value to the vendor and to grow the relationship and business if it works to your advantage.
    1. Procurement Cube, 2020. 2. Accuity Consultants, 2012. 3. New Zealand Ministry of Business, Innovation & Employment, 2021.

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Learn how each quadrant of the OPEN model impacts your organization (continued)

    Preferred

    High value and high attractiveness

    Characteristics and potential actions by the vendor

    • High level of service provided.
    • High level of attention, service, and response.1
    • The supplier actively seeks longer-term commitments.2
    • Retain and expand the business and relationship.3
    • Look after and pamper the customer.4
    • Fight to keep the account.
    • There is a dedicated account manager2 (you are the account manager’s only account).

    Customer strategies

    • Establish a rewarding business relationship in which both parties continually seek to add value.3
    • Leverage the relationship to gain better access to innovation, collaborate to eliminate waste, and work together to maintain or increase your competitive advantages.1
      1. Procurement Cube, 2020. 2. Comprara, 2015. 3. New Zealand Ministry of Business, Innovation & Employment, 2021. 4. Accuity Consultants, 2012.

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Learn how each quadrant of the OPEN model impacts your organization (continued)

    Exploitable

    High value and low attractiveness

    Characteristics and potential actions by the vendor

    • Lower level of service provided.
    • Lower level of attention.
    • Strive for best price from the customer (i.e. premium pricing).1
    • Seek short-term advantage and consistent price increases.
    • Accept risk of losing the customer.
    • Focus on maximizing profits.2
    • Provide reactive service.

    Customer strategies

    • Look for alternative vendors or try to make the relationship more attractive by considering more efficient ways to do business2 or focusing on issues other than pricing.
    • Identify ways to improve your organization’s attractiveness to the vendor or the account manager.
    1. Accuity Consultants, 2012. 2. New Zealand Ministry of Business, Innovation & Employment, 2021.

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Learn how each quadrant of the open model impacts your organization

    Negligible

    Low value and low attractiveness

    Characteristics and potential actions by the vendor

    • Lower level of service provided.
    • Lower level of attention.1
    • Loss of interest and enthusiasm for customer’s business.
    • Loss of customer will not cause any pain.1
    • Terminate the relationship.2
    • Terms and conditions are the “standard” terms and are non-negotiable.3
    • There is a standard price list and discounts are in line with industry norms.3

    Customer strategies

    • You may wish to consider sourcing from other suppliers who value your business more highly.2
    • Identify the root cause of your position and determine whether it is worthwhile (or possible) to improve your position.
    1. Procurement Cube, 2020. 2. New Zealand Ministry of Business, Innovation & Employment, 2021. 3 Comprara, 2015.

    Step 3.1 – Classify vendors and identify customer position

    Think like a vendor to increase situational awareness

    In summary, vendor actions are understandable and predictable. Learning about how they think and act is invaluable. As some food for thought, consider this snippet from an article aimed at vendors:

    “The [customer positioning] grid or matrix is, in itself, a valuable snapshot of the portfolio of customers. However, it is what we do with this information that governs how effective the tool is. It can be used in many ways:

    • It helps in the allocation of resources to specific customers, and whether the right resources are being allocated to the right customers.
    • It can determine the style of relationship that is appropriate to have with this client – and whether the real relationship truly reflects this.
    • It can influence the amount of time spent with these clients. Interestingly, we often find that a disproportionate amount of management time is spent on [Negligible] Customers (at the expense of spending more time with [Preferred] Accounts)!
    • It should significantly influence the price and profitability targets for specific customers.
    • And, last but by no means least, it should determine our negotiation style for different customers.”1
    1 “Rule No. 5: All Customers/Suppliers Have a Different Value to You,” New Dawn Partners.

    Step 3.2 – Assess the relationship landscape

    Identify key relationships and relationship risks

    After classifying your vendors (COST or MVP model) and identifying your positioning for the top vendors via the OPEN Model Customer Positioning Tool, the next step is to assess the relationship landscape. For key vendors (strategic, high operational, and high tactical under the COST model and principal and valued under the MVP model), look closer at the relationships that currently exist:

    • What peer-to-peer relationships exist between your organization and the vendor (e.g. your project manager works closely with the vendor’s project manager)? Look across executives, mid-level management, and frontline employees.
    • What politically charged relationships exist between employees of the two organizations and the organizations themselves? Examples include:
      • Friendships, neighbors, and relationships fostered by children on the same sports team or engaged in other activities.
      • Serving on third-party boards of directors or working with the same charities in an active capacity.
      • Reciprocity relationships where each organization is a customer and vendor to the other (e.g. a bank buys hardware from the vendor and the vendor uses the customer for its banking needs).
    • How long has the contract relationship been in place?

    This information will provide a more holistic view of the dynamics at work (or just beneath the surface) beyond the contract and operational relationships. It will also help you understand any relationship leverage that may be in play…now or in the future…from each party’s perspective.

    3.2.1 – Assess the relationship landscape

    10 - 30 Minutes per vendor

    1. Decide whether to meet with the participants in small groups or as a large group.
    2. Using Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 3.2 Relationship Landscape, for each important vendor (strategic, tactical, and operational under the COST model or principal and valued under the MVP model), identify and evaluate the relationships that exist for the following categories:
      1. Professional: relationships your personnel have with the vendor’s executives, mid-level management, and frontline employees.
      2. Political: personal relationships between customer and vendor personnel, any professional connections, and any reciprocity between your organization and the vendor.
    Input Output
    • Relationship information
    • Vendor classification categories for each vendor being assessed
    • A list of customer-vendor relationships
    • Potential reciprocity issues to manage
    Materials Participants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 3.2 Relationship Landscape
    • VMI team
    • Stakeholders
    • Others with knowledge of customer/vendor relationships

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 3.3 – Leverage two-way scorecards

    Roll out your new vendor scorecards and feedback forms

    As you roll out your new, enhanced scorecards, the same principles apply. Only a couple of modifications need to be made to your processes.

    For the vendor scorecards, the VMI will still be driving the process, and internal personnel will still be completing the scorecards. An email or short orientation meeting for those involved will ease the transition from the old format to the new format. Consider creating a FAQ (frequently asked questions) for the new template, format, and content; you’ll be able to leverage it via the email or meeting to answer questions such as: What changed? Why did it change? Why are we doing this? In addition, making a change to the format and content may generate a need for new or additional internal personnel to be part of the scorecarding process. A scorecarding kick-off meeting or orientation meeting will ensure that the new participants buy into the process and acclimate to the process quickly.

    For the vendor feedback, the look and feel is completely new. The feedback questions that were part of the BAM agenda have been replaced by a more in-depth approach that mirrors the vendor scorecards. Consider conducting a kick-off meeting with each participating vendor to ensure they understand the importance of the feedback form and the process for completing it. Remember to update your process to remind the vendors to submit the feedback forms three to five business days prior to the BAM (and update your BAM agenda). You will want time to review the feedback and identify any questions or items that need to be clarified. Lastly, set aside some extra time to review the feedback form in the first BAM after you shift to the formal format.

    Step 3.4 – Implement PIPs and RIPs

    Improve vendor performance

    Underperforming vendors are similar to underperforming employees. There can be many reasons for the lackluster performance, and broaching the subject of a PIP may put the vendor on the defensive. Consider working with the human resources department (or whatever it is called in your organization) to learn some of the subtle nuances and best practices from the employee PIP realm that can be used in the vendor PIP realm.

    When developing the PIP, make sure you:

    • Work with legal to ensure compliance with the contract and applicable laws.
    • Adequately convey the expected performance to the vendor; it is unfair to hold a vendor accountable for unreasonable and unconveyed expectations.
    • Work with the vendor on the PIP rather than imposing the PIP on the vendor.
    • Remain objective and be realistic about timelines and improvement.

    Not all performance issues require a PIP; some can be addressed one-on-one with the vendor’s account manager, project manager, or other personnel. The key is to identify meaningful problems and use a PIP to resolve them when other measures have failed or when more formality is required.

    A PIP is a communication tool, not a punishment tool. When used properly, PIPs can improve relationships, help avoid lawsuits, and prevent performance issues from having a significant impact on your organization.

    Step 3.4 – Implement PIPs and RIPs

    Improve vendor relationships

    After assessing the relationship landscape in step 3.2 and configuring the Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan Tool in step 2.5, the next step is to leverage that information: 1) establish a relationship baseline for each critical vendor; and 2) develop and implement a plan for each to maintain or improve those relationships.

    The Relationship Assessment and Improvement Plan Tool provides insights into the actual status of your relationships. It allows you to quantify and qualify those relationships rather than relying on intuition or instinct. It also pinpoints areas that are strong and areas that need improvement. Identify your top seven relationship priorities and build your improvement/maintenance plan around those to start. (This number can be expanded if some of your priorities are low effort or if you have several people who can assist with the implementation of the plan.) Decide which relationship indicators need a formal plan, which ones require only an informal plan, and which ones involve a hybrid approach. Remember to factor in the maintenance aspect of the relationship – if something is going well, it can still be a top priority to ensure that the relationship component remains strong.

    Similar to a PIP, your RIP can be very formal with action items and deadlines. Unlike a PIP, the RIP is typically not shared with the vendor. (It can be awkward to say, “Here are the things we’re going to do to improve our relationship, vendor.”)

    The level of formality for your plan will vary. Customize your plan for each vendor. Relationships are not formulaic, although they can share traits. Keep in mind what works with one person or one vendor may not work for another. It’s okay to revisit the plan if it is not working and make adjustments.

    Step 3.5 – Gather market intelligence

    Determine the nature and scope of your market intelligence

    What is market intelligence?

    Market intelligence is a broad umbrella that covers a lot of topics, and the breadth and depth of those topics depend on whether you sit on the vendor or customer side of the equation. Even on the customer side, the scope and meaning of market intelligence are defined by the role served by those gathering market intelligence. As a result, the first step for the VMI is to set the boundaries and expectations for its role in the process. There can be some overlap between IT, procurement/sourcing, and the VMI, for example. Coordinating with other functional areas is a good idea to avoid stepping on each other’s toes or expending duplicate resources unnecessarily.

    For purposes of this blueprint, market intelligence is defined as gathering, analyzing, interpreting, and synthesizing data and information about your critical vendors (high operational, high tactical, and strategic under the COST model or valued and principal under the MVP model), their competitors, and the industry. Market intelligence can be broken into two basic categories: individual vendors and the industry as a whole. For vendors, it generally encompasses data and information about products and services available, each vendor’s capabilities, reputation, costs, pricing, advantages, disadvantages, finances, location, risks, quality ratings, standard service level agreements (SLAs) and other metrics, supply chain risk, total cost of ownership, background information, and other points of interest. For the industry, it can include the market drivers, pressures, and competitive forces; each vendor’s position in the industry; whether the industry is growing, stable, or declining; whether the industry is competitive or led by one or two dominant players; and the potential for disruption, trends, volatility, and risk for the industry. This represents some of the components of market intelligence; it is not intended to be an exhaustive list.

    Market intelligence is an essential component of a VMI as it matures and strives to be strategic and to provide significant value to the organization.

    Step 3.5 – Gather market intelligence

    Determine the nature and scope of your market intelligence

    What are the benefits of gathering market intelligence?

    Depending on the scope of your research, there are many potential uses, goals, and benefits that flow from gathering market intelligence:

    • Identify potential alternate vendors.
    • Learn more about the vendors and market in general.
    • Identify trends, innovations, and what’s available in the industry.
    • Improve contract protections and mitigate contract/performance risk.
    • Identify more comprehensive requirements for RFPs and negotiations.
    • Identify the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats for vendors.
    • Assist with minority/women/veteran-owned business or small business use initiatives.
    • Improve the pool of potential vendors for future RFPs, which can improve competition for your business.
    • Leverage information gained when negotiating or renegotiating at renewal (better terms and conditions).
    • Ensure ongoing alignment or identify gaps/risks between your current vendor’s capabilities and your needs.

    Step 3.5 – Gather market research and intelligence

    Begin collecting data and information

    What are some potential sources of information for market intelligence?

    For general information, there are many places to obtain market intelligence. Here are some common resources:

    • User groups
    • The internet
    • Vendor demos
    • Vendor marketing materials and websites
    • Internal personnel interviews and meetings
    • Industry publications and general periodicals
    • Trade shows and conferences (hosted or attended by vendors)
    • Requests for information (RFIs) and requests for proposal (RFPs)
    • Vendor financial filings for publicly held companies (e.g. annual reports, 10-K, 10-Q)

    Keep in mind the source of the information may be skewed in favor of the vendor. For example, vendor marketing materials may paint a rosier picture of the vendor than reality. Using multiple sources to validate the data and information is a leading practice (and common sense).

    For specific information, many VMIs use a third-party service. Third-party services can dedicate more resources to research since that is their core function. However, the information obtained from any third party should be used as guidance and not as an absolute. No third-party service has access to every deal, and market conditions can change often and quickly.

    Step 3.5 – Gather market research and intelligence

    Resolve storage and access issues

    Some additional thoughts on market intelligence

    • Market intelligence is another tool in the VMI’s toolbox. How you use it and what you do with the results of your efforts is critical. Collecting information and passing it on without analysis or insights is close to being a capital offense.
    • As previously mentioned, defining the scope and nature of market intelligence is the first step. In conjunction with that, remember to identify where the information will be stored. Set up a system that allows for searching by relevance and easy retrieval. You can become overwhelmed with information.
    • Periodically update the scope and reach of your market intelligence efforts. Do you need to expand, contract, or maintain the breadth and depth of your research? Do new vendors and industries need to be added to the mix?
    • Information can grow stale. Review your market intelligence repository at least annually and purge unneeded or outdated information. Be careful though – some historical information is helpful to show trends and evolution. Decide whether old information should be deleted completely or moved to an archive.
    • Determine who should have access to your repository and what level of access they should have. Do you want to share outside of the VMI? Do you want others to contribute to or modify/edit the material in the repository or only be able to read from the repository?

    Step 3.6 – Generate vendor-at-a-glance reports

    Keep executives and stakeholders informed about critical vendors

    Much of the guidance provided on reports in the blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative holds true for the 60-Second Report and the Vendor Calendar.

    • Determine who will be responsible for updating the reports, knowing that the VMI will be mainly coordinating the process and assembling the data/information rather than obtaining the data firsthand.
    • Determine the frequency. Most likely it will be periodic and ad hoc; for example, you may decide to update the 60-Second Report in whole or in part each quarter, but you may need to update it in the middle of the quarter if an executive has a meeting with one of your critical vendors at that time.
    • Even though you obtained feedback and “approval” from executives and stakeholders during step 2.6, you will still want to seek their input periodically. Their needs may change from time to time with respect to data, information, and formatting. Avoid the temptation to constantly make changes to the format, though. After the initial review cycle, try to make changes only annually as part of your ongoing review process.
    • Unfortunately, these reports require a manual approach; some parts may be automated, but that will depend on your format and systems.

    These reports should be kept confidential. Consider using a “confidential” stamp, header, watermark, or other indicator to highlight that the materials are sensitive and should not be disclosed outside of your organization without approval.

    Step 3.7 – Evaluate VMI personnel

    Compare skills, competencies, and knowledge needed to current levels

    Using the configured VMI personnel assessment tool (Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium tab 2.7.1 or 2.7.2), evaluate each VMI employee’s skills, competencies, and knowledge (S/C/K) against the established minimum level required/desired field for each. Use this tool for full-time and part-time team members to obtain a complete inventory of the VMI’s S/C/K.

    After completing the assessment, you will be able to identify areas where personnel exceed, meet, or fail to meet the minimum level required/desired using the included dashboards. This information can be used to create a development plan for areas of deficiency or areas where improvement is desired for career growth.

    As an alternative, you can assess VMI personnel using their job descriptions. Tab 2.7.3 of the Tools and Templates Compendium is set up to perform this type of analysis and create a plan for improvement when needed. Unlike Tabs 2.7.1 and 2.7.2, however, the assessment does not provide a dashboard for all employee evaluations. Tab 2.7.3 is intended to focus on the different roles and responsibilities for each employee versus the VMI as a whole.

    Lastly, you can use Tab 2.7.4 to evaluate potential VMI personnel during the interview process. Load the roles and responsibilities into the template, and evaluate all the candidates on the same criteria. A dashboard at the bottom of the template quantifies the number of instances each candidate exceeds, meets, and fails to meet the criteria. Used together, the evaluation matrix and dashboard will make it easier to identify each candidate’s strengths and weaknesses (and ultimately select the best new VMI team member).

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Increase proficiency in a few key areas

    The image contains an a screenshot example to demonstrate how to increase proficiency in a few key areas.

    To be an effective member of the VMI requires proficiency in many areas. Some basic skills like computer skills, writing, and time management are straightforward. Others are more nebulous. The focus of this step is on a few of the often-overlooked skills lurking in the shadows:

    • Communication
    • Running a meeting
    • Diplomacy
    • Emotional intelligence quotient (EQ)
    • Influence and persuasion
    • Building and maintaining relationships

    For the VMI to be viewed as a strategic and integral part of the organization, these skills (and others) are essential. Although this blueprint cannot cover all of them, some leading practices, tips, and techniques for each of the skills listed above will be shared over the next several pages.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Communicate more effectively

    Communication is the foundational element for the other professional skills covered in this Step 3.8. By focusing on seven key areas, you can improve your relationships, influence, emotional intelligence quotient, diplomacy, and impact when interacting with others. The concepts for the seven focal points presented here are the proverbial tip of the iceberg. Continue learning about these areas, and recognize that mastering each will require time and practice.

    1. Writing.
      1. Stick with simple words;1 you’re trying to communicate, not impress people with your vocabulary.
      2. Keep your sentences simple;1 use short words, short sentences, and short paragraphs.2
      3. Read your writing aloud;1 If you have to take a breath while reading a sentence out loud, the sentence is too long.
      4. Use a tool like Grammarly or the built-in functionality of Word to determine readability; aim for a score of 60 to 70 or a seventh- or eighth-grade level.3
      5. When reviewing your writing: consider your word choice and the implications of your words; look for unintended interpretations, ambiguities, and implied-tone issues.
    1 Grammarly, 2017. 2 Elna Cain, 2018. 3 Forbes, 2016.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Communicate more effectively (continued)

    2. Speaking

    1. Similar to writing, focus on short words and sentences. Avoid run-on sentences.
    2. Think before speaking and work on eliminating “ums,” “uhs,” and “you knows.” These detract from your message.
    3. Choose words that are “comfortable” for the other person/people. Rule number one in public speaking is to know your audience, and that rule applies beyond public speaking and to groups of all sizes (1 to 1,000+).
    4. Don’t confuse the words with the message.
    5. Pay attention to your tone, pace, and volume. Try to match your counterpart in one-on-one settings.

    3. Body Language.

    1. Understand body language’s limitations; it is part art and part science…not an absolute.
    2. Individual movements and movement clusters can provide information regarding the spoken message – look for consistencies and inconsistencies. A baseline for the person is needed to interpret the body language “accurately.”
    3. Pay attention to your own body language. Does it match the message being conveyed by your words or those of your teammates (in group settings)?

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Communicate more effectively (continued)

    4. Personality.

    1. Identify your counterpart’s personality: Are they extroverted or introverted? Are they effusive or reserved? Are they diplomatic or offensive? Are they collaborative or looking to blame someone?
    2. Appeal to their personality type when possible, but avoid the blame game. For example, don’t be loud and “over the top” with someone who is reserved and quiet.

    5. Style.

    1. Determine your counterpart’s style for both written and spoken communications: Are they direct or indirect? Are they bottom-line or do they prefer descriptions and build-ups? Are they into empirical data or anecdotal examples?
    2. To maximize the connection and communication effectiveness, match their style…even if it means getting out of your comfort zone a little. For example, if you have an indirect style, you will have to be more direct when dealing with someone who is direct; otherwise, you run the risk of alienating your counterpart (i.e. they will get frustrated or bored, or their mind will wander).

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Communicate more effectively (continued)

    6. Learning

    1. People absorb information in three ways:
      1. Visually: These learners need to see things for them to make sense and be retained.
      2. Auditory: These learners need to hear things for them to make sense and be retained.
      3. Kinesthetic/experiential: These learners need to do something or experience it to understand and retain it.
    2. While some people are dominant in one area, most are a combination of one or more methods.
    3. If you can identify a person’s preferred method of learning, you can enhance your ability to communicate. For example, talking (exclusively) with a visual learner will be minimally effective; showing that person a picture or graph while talking will increase your effectiveness.

    7. Actions and inactions.

    1. Communication goes beyond words, messages, body language, and other issues. Your actions or inactions following a communication can undo your hard work to communicate effectively.
    2. Follow through on promises, action items, or requests.
    3. Meet any deadlines or due dates that result from communications. This helps build trust.
    4. Make sure your follow-through items are complete and thorough. Half-way is no way!
    5. Communicate any delays in meeting the deadlines or due dates to avoid

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Tap into your inner diplomat

    Diplomacy can be defined many ways, but this one seems to fit best for the purposes of vendor management: The ability to assert your ideas or opinions, knowing what to say and how to say it without damaging the relationship by causing offense.1 At work, diplomacy can be about getting internal or external parties to work together, influencing another party, and conveying a message tactfully. As a vendor manager, diplomacy is a necessary skill for working with your team, your organization, and vendors.

    To be diplomatic, you must be in tune with others and understand many things about them such as their feelings, opinions, ideas, beliefs, values, positions, preferences, and styles. To achieve this, consider the following guidance:2

    • Modify your communication style: Communication is about getting someone to understand and evaluate your message so they can respond. Approach people the way they want to be approached. For example, sending an email to a person who prefers phone calls may create a communication issue.
    • Choose your words carefully: Use words as an artist uses a brush, paint, and a canvas. Paint a picture through word selection. Similar words can portray different scenes (e.g. the child ran to the store quickly vs. the child raced to the store). Make sure your image is relatable for your counterpart.
    1 “The Art of Tact and Diplomacy,” SkillsYouNeed 2 Communiqué PR, 2020.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Tap into your inner diplomat (continued)

    • Slow down a speak concisely: Say what you have to say…and stop. No one likes a communicator who rambles on and on. Once your message has been conveyed, go into silent mode. Get comfortable with silence; there is no need to fill the void with more meaningless words. Let your counterpart contemplate in peace.
    • Listen to understand: Be an active listener rather than biding your time until you can talk again. Avoid interrupting the other party (whenever possible, but sometimes it is needed!). Show interest in what the other person is saying and ask clarifying questions. Make eye contact, nod your head periodically, and summarize what you hear from time to time. Use your ears and mouth in proportion: listen twice as much as you talk.
    • Consider nonverbals: Read the facial expressions of the speaker and be aware of your own. Faces tend to be expressive; sometimes we are aware of it…and sometimes we aren’t. Try relaxing your face and body to minimize the involuntary expressions that may betray you. Adopt a diplomatic facial expression and practice using it; find the right mix of interest and neutrality.

    Whenever things get tense, take a deep breath, take a break, or stop the communication (based on the situation and what is appropriate). Being diplomatic can be taxing, and it is better to step back than to continue down a wrong path due to stress, emotion, being caught off guard, etc.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Build and maintain relationships

    Relationship building and networking cannot be overvalued. VMI personnel interact with many areas and people throughout the organization, and good relationships are essential. Building and maintaining relationships requires hard work and focusing on the right items. Although there isn’t a scientific formula or a mathematical equation to follow, key elements are present in all durable relationships.

    Focus on building relationships at all levels within your organization. People at every level may have data or information you need, and your relationship with them may be the deciding factor in whether you get the information or not. At other times, you will have data and information to give, and the relationship may determine how receptive others are to your message. Some relationship fundamentals are provided below and continue on the next page.1,2

    • Trust: be honest and ethical and follow through on your commitments.
    • Diversity: build relationships with people who aren’t just like you to expand your mindset.
    • Interrelatedness: understand how what you do impacts others you have relationships with.
    • Varied interaction: a good relationship will incorporate work-related interactions with personal interactions.
    • Effective communication: combine methods of communication but focus on the other person’s preferred method.
    1 ”Seven Characteristics of Successful Work Relationships,” 2006. 2 Success.com, 2022.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Build and maintain relationships (continued)

    • Empathy – understand where the other person is coming from through active listening.
    • Vulnerability – create a judgment-free zone.
    • Respect – this must be given and earned.
    • Real face time – meeting in the offline world signals to the person that they are important (but this is not always possible today).
    • A giving-first mentality – provide something of value before asking for something in return.
    • Unique perspective – tap into what the other person believes and values.
    • Intent – start with genuine interest in the other person and the relationship.
    • Hard work – active engagement and a commitment to the relationship are required.
    • Honesty – be honest in your communications.
    • Challenge – be open to thinking differently and trying new things.
    • Value – identify what you add to the relationship.
    • Conscientiousness – be aware of the relationship’s status and react accordingly.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Run meetings more efficiently and effectively

    Most people don’t get excited about meetings, but they are an important tool in the toolbox. Unfortunately, many meetings are unnecessary and unproductive. As a result, meeting invites often elicit an audible groan from invitees. Eliminating meetings completely is not a practical solution, which leaves one other option: improving them.

    You may not be in charge of every meeting, but when you are, you can improve their productivity and effectiveness by making a few modifications to your approach. Listed below are ten ideas for getting the most out of your meetings:*

    1. Begin with the mindset that you are a steward or protector of the meeting attendees’ time, and you never want attendees to feel that you wasted their time.
    2. Keep the attendee list to essential personnel only. Everyone attending the meeting should be able to justify their attendance (or you should be able to justify it).
    3. Set an appropriate time limit for the meeting. Don’t default to the 60-minute meeting; right-size the meeting time (e.g. 15, 30, or 45 minutes or some other number). Shorter meeting times force participants to focus.
    4. Create and use an agenda. To help you stay focused and to determine who to invite, set up the agenda as a list of questions rather than a list of topics.
    *Adapted from “The Surprising Science Behind Successful Remote Meetings” by Steven G. Rogelberg

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Run meetings more efficiently and effectively (continued)

    5. Use video when anyone is attending virtually. This helps prevent anonymity and increases engagement.

    6. Start and end meetings on time. Running over impacts other meetings and commitments; it also makes you look ineffective and increases stress levels for attendees.

    7. If longer meetings are necessary, build in a short break or time for people to stand up and stretch. Don’t say, “If you need a break or to stand up during the meeting, feel free.” Make it a planned activity.

    8. Keep others engaged by facilitating and drawing specific people into the conversation; however, don’t ask people to contribute on topics that they know nothing about or ask generally if anyone has any comments.

    9. Leverage technology to help with the meeting; have someone monitor the chat for questions and concerns. However, the chat should not be for side conversations, memes, and other distractions.

    10. End the meeting with a short recap, and make sure everyone knows what was decided/accomplished, what next steps are, and which action items belong to which people.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Increase emotional intelligence

    Emotional intelligence (otherwise known as emotional intelligence quotient or EQ) is the ability to understand, use, and manage your own emotions in positive ways to relieve stress, communicate effectively, empathize with others, overcome challenges and defuse conflict.1 This is an important set of skills for working with vendors and internal personnel. Increasing your EQ will help you build better relationships and be seen as a valuable teammate…at all levels within your organization.

    Improving this skill dovetails with other skills discussed in this step 3.8, such as communication and diplomacy. Being well versed in the concepts of EQ won’t be enough. To improve requires a willingness to be open – open to feedback from others and open to new ideas. It also requires practice and patience. Change won’t happen overnight, but with some hard work and perseverance, your EQ can improve.

    There are many resources that can help you on your journey, and here are some tips to improve your EQ:2

    • Practice observing how you feel.
    • Pay attention to how you behave.
    • Learn to look at yourself objectively.
    • Understand what motivates you.
    • Acknowledge your emotional triggers.
    • Be interested in the subject matter.
    1 HelpGuide, 2022. 2 RocheMartin, 2022.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Increase emotional intelligence (continued)

    Tips to improve your EQ (continued from previous page):

    • It’s your choice how you react to a situation.
    • Listen without interruption, preconceptions, or skepticism; absorb their situation and consider how they are feeling before you react.
    • Try to be approachable and accessible.
    • Think about what’s happening from their perspective.
    • Cultivate a curiosity about strangers to understand different opinions, views, and values.
    • Acknowledge what people are saying to show you are actively listening.
    • Think about how you’re physically coming across with your body language, tone of voice, eye contact, and facial expressions.

    Things to avoid:1

    • Drama – don’t let others’ emotions affect or rule yours.
    • Complaining – don’t be a victim; do look for solutions.
    • Dwelling on the past – learn from the past and live in the present.
    • Selfishness – consider others’ needs, not just your own.
    • Being overly critical – understand the other person, then communicate the change you want to see.
    1 RocheMartin, 2022.

    Step 3.8 – Improve Professional Skills

    Use Influence and Persuasion to Benefit the VMI

    Skills such as influence and persuasion are important (even necessary) for vendor managers. (Don’t confuse this with the dark arts version – manipulation.) A good working definition is provided by the Center for Creative Leadership: Influence is the ability to affect the behavior of others in a particular direction, leveraging key tactics that involve, connect, and inspire them.* Influence and persuasion are not about strongarming or blackmailing someone to get your way. Influence and persuasion are about presenting issues, facts, examples, and other items in a way that moves people to align with your position. Sometimes you will be attempting to change a person’s mind, and other times you will be moving them from a neutral stance to agreeing to support your position.

    Building upon the basic communication skills discussed at the start of this step, there are some ways to improve your ability to influence and persuade others. Here are some suggestions to get you started:*

    1. Develop organizational intelligence – learn how your organization truly operates; identify the power brokers and their spheres of control and influence. Many failures to persuade and influence stem from not understanding who can help and how they can help (or hinder) your efforts. The most influential person in your organization may not be the person with the fancy title.
    2. Promote yourself and the team – don’t be afraid to step into the spotlight and demonstrate your knowledge and expertise. To be able to persuade and influence as and individual or a team, credibility must be established.
    * Center for Creative Leadership, 2020.

    Step 3.8 – Improve professional skills

    Use influence and persuasion to benefit the VMI (continued)

    3. Build and maintain trust – trust has two main components: competency and character. In item 2 on the previous page, competency trust was discussed from the perspective of knowledge and expertise. For character trust, you need to be viewed as being above reproach. You are honest and ethical; you follow through and honor your commitments. Once both types of trust are in place, eyes and ears will be open and more receptive to your messages. Bottom line: You can’t influence or persuade people if they don’t trust you.

    4. Grow and leverage networks – the workplace is a dynamic atmosphere, and it requires almost constant networking to ensure adequate contacts throughout the organization are maintained. Leveraging your network is an artform, and it must be used wisely. You don’t want to wear out your welcome by asking for assistance too often.

    As you prepare your plan to influence or persuade someone, ask yourself the following questions:*

    • Who am I attempting to influence?
    • What is the situation and how much support do I need?
    • Why do I need this person’s support for my idea?
    • What tactics can I use, and how can I establish rapport?
    • What responses do I anticipate?
    • What mutual points of agreement can I use?
    • How can I end on a positive note no matter what the outcome is?
    * Center for Creative Leadership, 2020.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Learn more about departments and functions tangential to the VMI

    To function in their roles, VMI personnel must be well versed in the concepts and terminology associated with vendor management. To be strategic and to develop relationships with other departments, divisions, agencies, and functional groups, VMI personnel must also be familiar with the concepts and terminology for functions outside the VMI. Although a deep dive is beyond the scope of this blueprint, understanding basic concepts within each of the topics below is critical:

    • Finance and accounting
    • Project management
    • Contracts and contract management
    • Procurement/sourcing
    • Change management
    • Conflict management
    • Account team dynamics

    It isn’t necessary to be an expert in these subjects, but VMI personnel must be able to talk with their peers intelligently. For example, a vendor manager needs to have a general background in contract terms and conditions to be able to discuss issues with legal, finance, procurement, and project management groups. A well-rounded and well-versed VMI team member can rise to the level of trusted advisor and internal strategic partner rather than wallowing in the operational or transactional world.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand finance and accounting basics

    Finance and accounting terms and concepts are commonplace in every organization. They are the main language of business – they are the way for-profit businesses keep score. Regardless of whether your organization is a for-profit, non-profit, governmental, or other entity, finance and accounting run through the veins of your organization as well. In addition to the customer side of the equation, there is the vendor side of the equation: Every vendor you deal with will be impacted financially by working with you.

    Having a good grasp of finance and accounting terms and concepts will improve your ability to negotiate, talk to finance and accounting personnel (internal and external), conduct ongoing due diligence on your critical vendors, review contracts, and evaluate vendor options, to name just a few of the benefits.

    The concepts listed on the following pages are some of the common terms applicable to finance and accounting. It is not intended to be an exhaustive list. Continue to learn about these concepts and identify others that allow you to grow professionally.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand finance and accounting basics (continued)

    Finance and accounting terms and concepts

    • Cash accounting vs. accrual accounting.
    • Fiscal year vs. calendar year.
    • Profit vs. cash flow.
    • Fixed expenses vs. variable expenses.
    • Capital expense (CapEx) vs. operating expense (OpEx).
    • Depreciation vs. amortization.
    • Payment upfront vs. payment in arrears.
    • Favorable (positive) variance vs. unfavorable (negative) variance.
    • Discretionary expense (cost/expenditure) vs. non-discretionary expense (cost/expenditure).
    • Income statement and its components.
    • Balance sheet and its components.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand finance and accounting basics (continued)

    Finance and accounting terms and concepts (cont’d)

    • Operating profit margin.
    • Net profit margin.
    • Return on assets.
    • Current ratio.
    • Quick ratio.
    • Debt-to-asset ratio.
    • Interest coverage.
    • Total asset turnover.
    • Receivables turnover.
    • Average collection period.
    • Inventory turnover.
    • Time value of money concept.
    • Future value (FV).
    • Present value (PV).
    • Net present value (NPV).
    • Cost of capital.
    • Internal rate of return (IRR).
    • Return on investment (ROI).
    • Payback (payback period or break even).

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand project management basics

    The image contains a screenshot example of expanding professional knowledge.

    Whether your organization has a formal project management office (PMO) or not, project management practices are being used by those tasked with making sure software and software as a service implementations go smoothly, technology refreshes are rolled out without a hitch, and other major activities are successful. Listed below are some common competencies/skills used by project managers to make sure the job gets done right.

    1. Requirements – define the project’s goals, objectives, and requirements.
    2. Scope – develop, monitor, and manage the project’s scope.
    3. Time – develop and manage the timeline and determine the order (parallel and sequential) for the tasks and activities.
    4. Budget – create and manage the project budget and report on any variances.
    5. Resources – manage space, people, software, equipment, services, etc.
    6. Risk – identify, evaluate, monitor, and manage project risk.
    7. Change – manage updated requirements, changes to the scope, and modifications to the contract.
    8. Documentation – work with the project charter, open issue logs, meeting minutes, and various reports.
    9. Communication – communicate with vendor personnel and internal personnel, including stakeholders and executives as needed.
    10. Quality – ensure the deliverables and other work are acceptable and coordinate/conduct acceptance tests.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand project management basics (continued)

    The image contains a screenshot of understanding project management basics.

    The concepts listed below are common project management terms and concepts.1, 2 This list is not intended to be exhaustive. Look internally at your project management processes and operations to identify the concepts applicable in your environment and any that are missing from this list.
    • Project plan
    • Work breakdown structure (WBS)
    • Critical path
    • Project manager
    • Project stakeholder
    • Agile project
    • Waterfall project
    • Milestone
    • Deliverable
    • Dependency
    • Phase
    • Kickoff meeting
    • Project budget
    • Project timeline
    • Resource allocation
    • Project risk
    • Risk management
    • Risk owner
    • Issue log
    • Gantt chart
    1 nTask, 2019. 2 Whiz Labs, 2018.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand contracts and contract lifecycle management basics

    Contracts and contract lifecycle management (CLM) are two separate but related topics. It is possible to have contracts without a formal CLM process, but you can’t have CLM without contracts. This portion of step 3.9 provides some general background on each topic and points you to blueprints that cover each subject in more detail.

    IT contracts tend to be more complicated than other types of contracts due to intellectual property (IP) rights being associated with most IT contracts. As a result, it is necessary to have a basic understanding of IP and common IT contract provisions.

    There are four main areas of IP: copyrights, patents, trademarks, and trade secrets. Each has its own nuances, and people who don’t work with IP often mistake one for another or use the terms interchangeably. They are not interchangeable, and each affords a different type of protection when available (e.g. something may not be capable of being patented, but it can be copyrighted).

    For contract terms and conditions, vendor managers are best served by understanding both the business side and the legal side of the provisions. In addition, a good contract checklist will act as a memory jogger whether you are reviewing a contract or discussing one with legal or a vendor. For more information on contract provisions, checklists, and playbooks, download the Info-Tech blueprints identified to the left.

    Download the Info-Tech blueprint Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

    Download the Info-Tech blueprint Improve Your Statements of Work to Hold Your Vendors Accountable

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand contracts and contract lifecycle management basics (continued)

    CLM is a process that helps you manage your agreements from cradle to grave. A robust CLM process eases the challenges of managing hundreds or even thousands of contracts that affect the day-to-day business and could expose your organization to various types of vendor-related risk.

    Managing a few contracts through the contracting process is easy, but as the number of contracts grows, managing each step of the process for each contract becomes increasingly difficult and time consuming. That’s where CLM and CLM tools can help. Here is a high-level overview of the CLM process:

    1. Request – a request for a contract is initiated.
    2. Create contract – the contract is drafted by the customer or provided by the vendor.
    3. Review risk – areas of risk in the contract are identified.
    4. Approve – base agreement and attachments are approved and readied for negotiations.
    5. Negotiate – the agreement is negotiated and finalized.
    6. Sign – the agreement is signed or executed by the parties.
    7. Capture – the agreement is stored in a centralized repository.
    8. Manage – actively manage the operational and commitment aspects of the agreement.
    9. Monitor compliance – ensure that each party is honoring and complying with its obligations.
    10. Optimize – review the process and the contracts for potential improvements.

    For more information on CLM, download the Info-Tech blueprint identified to the left.

    Download the Info-Tech Blueprint Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand procurement/sourcing basics

    Almost every organization has a procurement or sourcing department. Procurement/sourcing is often the gatekeeper of the processes used to buy equipment and services, lease equipment, license software, and acquire other items. There are many different types of procurement/sourcing departments and several points of maturity within each type. As a result, the general terms listed on the next page may or may not be applicable within your organization. (Or your organization may not have a procurement/sourcing department at all!)

    Identifying your organization’s procurement/sourcing structure is the best place to start. From there, you can determine which terms are applicable in your environment and dive deeper on the appropriate concepts as needed.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand procurement/sourcing basics (continued)

    Procurement sourcing terms and concepts

    • Hard dollar savings
    • Soft dollar savings
    • Cost avoidance
    • Value creation
    • Value created
    • Addressable spend
    • Spend addressed
    • Revenue creation
    • Category management
    • Category manager
    • Targeted negotiations
    • Indirect procurement/sourcing
    • Direct procurement/sourcing
    • Sourcing/procurement processes
    • Sourcing/procurement drivers and metrics
    • RFX (RFP, RFI, RFQ) processes
    • Forecasting value creation
    • Percentage of value creation to spend addressed
    • Category opportunity
    • Category plans
    • Center-led procurement/sourcing
    • Centralized procurement/sourcing
    • Decentralized procurement/sourcing

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand conflict management basics

    Whether you consider conflict management a skill, knowledge, or something in between, there is no denying that vendor managers are often engaged to resolve conflicts and disputes. At times, the VMI will be a “disinterested third party,” sitting somewhere between the vendor and an internal department, line of business, agency, or other functional designation. The VMI also may be one of the parties involved in the dispute or conflict. As a result, a little knowledge and a push in the right direction will help you learn more about how to handle situations where two parties don’t agree.

    To begin with, there are four levels of “formal” dispute resolution. You may be intimately aware of all of them or only have cursory knowledge of how they work and the purpose they serve:

    • Negotiation
    • Mediation
    • Arbitration
    • Litigation

    Their use often can be controlled or limited either contractually or by your organization’s preferences. They may be exclusive or used in combination with one another (e.g. negotiation first, and if things aren’t resolved, arbitration). Look at your contracts and legal department for guidance. It’s important to understand when and how these tools are used and what is expected (if anything) from the VMI.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand conflict management basics (continued)

    The image contains a screenshot of The Thomas-Kilman Conflict Resolution Model.

    Another factor in the conflict management and informal dispute resolution process is the people component. Perhaps the most famous or well-known model on this topic is the Thomas-Kilmann conflict resolution model. It attempts to bring clarity to the five different personality types you may encounter when resolving differences. As the graphic indicates, it is not purely a black-and-white endeavor; it is comprised of various shades of grey.

    The framework presented by Mr. Thomas and Mr. Kilmann provides insights into how people behave and how to engage them based on personality characteristics and attributes. The model sorts people into one of five categories:

    • Avoiders.
    • Competitors.
    • Collaborators.
    • Accommodators.
    • Compromisers.

    Although it is not an absolute science since people are unpredictable at times, the Thomas-Kilmann model provides great insights into human behavior and ways to work with the personality types listed.

    *Kilmann Diagnostics, 2018.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand conflict management basics (continued)

    Although the topic is vastly greater than being presented here, the last consideration is a sound process to follow when the conflict or dispute will be handled informally (at least to start). The simple process presented below works with vendors, but it can be adapted to work with internal disputes as well. The following process assumes that the VMI is attempting to facilitate a dispute between an internal party and a vendor.

    Step 1. Validate the person and the issue being brought to you; don’t discount the person, their belief, or their issue. Show genuine interest and concern.

    Step 2. Gather and verify data; not all issues brought forward can be pursued or pursued as presented. For example, “The vendor is always late with its reports” may or may not be 100% accurate as presented.

    Step 3. Convert data gathered into useful and relatable information. To continue the prior example, you may find that the vendor was late with the reports on specified dates, and this can be converted into “the vendor was late with its reports 50% of the time during the last three months.”

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand conflict management basics (continued)

    Step 4. Escalate findings internally to the appropriate stakeholders and executives as necessary so they are not blindsided if a vendor complains or goes around you and the process. In addition, they may want to get involved if it is a big issue, or they may tell you to get rid of it if it is a small issue.

    Step 5. Engage the vendor once you have your facts and present the issues without judgment. Ask the vendor to do its own fact gathering.

    Step 6. Schedule a meeting to review of the situation and hear the vendor’s version of the facts…they may align, or they may not.

    Step 7. Resolve any differences between your facts/information and the vendor’s. There may be extenuating circumstances, oversights, different data, or other items that come to light.

    Step 8. Attempt to resolve the problem and prevent further occurrences through root cause analysis and collaborative problem-solving techniques.

    Develop your own process and make sure it stays neutral. The process should not put the vendor (or any party) on the defensive. The process is to help the parties reach resolution…not to assign blame.

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand account team management basics

    Working with the account or sales team from your critical vendors can be challenging. A basic understanding of account team operations and customer/vendor dynamics will go a long way to improving your interactions (and even vendor performance) over time.

    Sales basics

    • Salespeople are typically paid a base salary and a commission on each sale.
    • Salespeople have quotas that must be met; failure to meet the quota results in probation (at a minimum) or termination.
    • Salespeople sell what they are motivated to sell; the motivation comes in the way of contests, commissions, and recognition. The commission structure is not the same for every service or product sold by the vendor. In addition, incentives may be created to move old product, overstock, or new product (to name a few).
    • Salespeople have multiple goals when interacting with customers:
      • Sell
      • Gather information
      • Build a relationship
      • Get a reference
      • Obtain a reference
      • Increase the vendor’s footprint

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand account team management basics (continued)

    Improving sales and account team dynamics with your organization

    • Conduct due diligence on your account team. Are they “qualified” to work with your account?
    • Set expectations with the account team for the ongoing relationship. Don’t leave it to chance.
    • Evaluate the sales and account teams at least annually. Get feedback from those who work closely with the salespeople and account managers, including stakeholders and executives.
    • Educate people internally about the sales process. At a minimum, counsel them to avoid giving away leverage, answering “damaging” questions, and disclosing confidential information.
    • Try to get involved early in the sales cycle. Sell your value to internal personnel.
    • Work to convert your account manager into your champion within the vendor. The salesperson can benefit by going to bat for you even though they work for the vendor. The commission structure often creates a split loyalty issue. Capitalize on it!
    • Watch out for high turnover. This can indicate a problem at the vendor OR your account is not that attractive/profitable. (See steps 2.2 and 3.1 regarding customer positioning.)

    Step 3.9 – Expand professional knowledge

    Understand account team management basics (continued)

    Improving sales and account team dynamics with your organization (continued)

    • Support effective sales reps by educating them on your organization, the best way to work with you, and the benefits of working with your processes. If they do something above and beyond, consider sending them a thank-you and copying their boss. Little things go a long way.
    • Control the sales process. Require qualified people from your organization to be invited to meetings; require an agenda for those meetings; and avoid “surprise” meetings (those meetings with limited notice and no agenda… "My boss is in town today, and I wanted to stop by and introduce her to you").
    • Don’t be afraid to request a new account manager. For your critical vendors, you should always be dealing with competent account teams. They should have the requisite knowledge of their products and services to be able to answer basic through intermediate questions; they should be ethical; and they should be responsive.
    • Build relationships beyond the salesperson or account manager. Develop a network that extends throughout the sales organization. (For example, the sales manager, sales director, and sales vice president at a minimum.) These people generally have more sway within the vendor organization and can get things done when the need arises.

    For more information on this topic, download the Info-Tech blueprint Evaluate Your Vendor Account Team to Optimize Vendor Relations.

    Step 3.10 – Create brand awareness

    Determine whether a brand makes sense for the VMI

    Branding isn’t just for companies. It is for departments (or whatever you call them at your place of employment) and individuals working in those departments. With a little work and even less money, you can create a meaningful brand for the VMI. While you are at it, you may want to encourage the VMI’s team members to focus a little attention on their personal brands since the VMI and its personnel are intertwined. First, let's define “brand.”

    Ask 50 people, “How do you define ‘brand’?” and you are likely to get 50 different answers. For the purposes of this blueprint, the following definition provides some guiderails by describing what a brand is and isn’t: “A brand is not a logo. A brand is not an identity. A brand is not a product. A brand is a person’s gut feeling about a product, service, or organization.”1 Let’s expand the definition of “a brand is…” to include departments and individuals since that’s the focus of this step, and it doesn’t violate the spirit of the original definition. A further expansion could include the goodwill associated with the product, service, organization, department, or individual.

    Dedicating time and other resources to proactively creating and nurturing the VMI’s brand has many advantages:

    • “If you don’t define your brand, others will.”2 This is your chance to define the VMI’s narrative and influence the perception others have of it.
    • It allows VMI team members to feel connected to the VMI’s vision and goals during their day-to-day activities.
    • It helps form an emotional connection between the VMI and your internal “clients.”
    • “Branding is a way of establishing and consistently reinforcing who you are and what you [do]…”2 Your brand helps you promote the VMI’s value and impact.
    1 Emotive Brand, 2019. 2 Forbes, 2018.

    Step 3.10 – Create brand awareness

    Establish the VMI’s brand and monitor it

    As you embark on creating a brand for the VMI and raising awareness, here are a few considerations to keep in mind:

    • Identify your mission.* Review the VMI’s mission statement and goals. Translate them into statements that connect with your internal clients.
    • Establish your unique value proposition.* What does the VMI provide to your internal clients that would make them go out of their way to use your services? How can you help them in ways others can’t?
    • Create your brand’s visual identity.* Can you create a logo for the VMI? Can you provide a consistent look and feel for the reports you generate and information you provide?
    • Increase brand recognition.* It takes time to build trust and establish a reputation. The same is true of creating a brand and increasing its recognition. Develop a plan for this rather than leaving it to chance.
    • Be consistent. Make sure your brand is consistent with the organization’s brand or at least doesn’t contradict it. The VMI’s brand is based on its values, mission, goals, and other items; these should complement the organization’s values, mission, goals, and other items.
    • Spread the word. Attend internal clients’ staff meetings, conduct lunch & learn sessions, send out a newsletter to ensure that your internal clients know who you are, what you do, and the impact you can make or have made. Make personal connections whenever possible.
    • Monitor your brand. It is not enough to create a brand and turn it loose unsupervised. Seek feedback on the VMI and its brand beyond the internal survey (step 3.11), and adjust your brand periodically as needed.
    * Stevens & Tate, 2019.

    Step 3.10 – Create brand awareness

    Enhance the brand of VMI team members

    As previously mentioned, brands are for individuals as well. In fact, everybody has a brand associated with them…for better or worse...whether they have consciously created and molded it or not. Focusing on the individual brand at this point offers the VMI and its team members the opportunity to enhance the brand for both. After all, the VMI is a reflection of its personnel.

    Here are some things VMI team members can do to enhance their brand:

    • Network internally beyond your immediate team.1 Get to know people and build relationships with others even if you don’t work directly or indirectly with them.
    • Say yes to relevant opportunities.1 Volunteer for projects where you can make an impact and let others see your value; it’s also a good way to build relationships beyond your immediate team.
    • Speak at a conference. According to Jeff Butler (author and TEDx speaker), “Speaking gets you that immediate credibility not only internally but also externally where other companies are now seeing you as an expert.” He also states that “speaking at … conferences is not only good for you but also good for your [organization].”1
    • Share your voice.1 Become a resource for bloggers, authors, and podcasters; consider blogging, writing, and podcasting. Remember not to disclose any proprietary or confidential information, though! Work with your legal and marketing departments before embarking on this path.
    • Set goals and monitor your progress. Track the number of times you are asked to speak or contribute to a blog, podcast, event, or article, and track the number of times you are mentioned or referenced in social media, blogs, articles, and podcasts.2
    1 Forbes, 2018. 2 Oberlo, 2022.

    3.10.1 – Create brand awareness

    30 – 90 Minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to review the information in Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 3.10. The worksheet is divided into two parts.
      1. Part 1 is for the VMI to use to create a brand, and
      2. Part 2 is for an individual VMI team member to create a brand.
    2. For Part 1, work as a team to answer the questions to begin identifying components of your brand awareness and building a strategy for the VMI's brand.
    3. For Part 2, individuals can work by themselves or with the team leader to answer the questions and set goals to help build an individual brand (if it is desirable).
    InputOutput
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 3.10
    • Brainstorming
    • VMI brand framework
    • Individual VMI personnel brand framework
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Elevate – Tools and Templates Compendium – Tab 3.10
    • VMI team

    Download the Info-Tech Elevate - Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 3.11 – Survey internal clients

    Gain insights and feedback from internal sources

    As you deploy your surveys, timing must be considered. For annual surveys, avoid busy seasons such as mid to late December (especially if your organization’s fiscal year is a calendar year). Give people time to recover from any November holidays, and survey them before they become distracted by December holidays (if possible). You may want to push the annual survey until January or February when things have settled back into a normal routine. Your needs for timing and obtaining the results must be balanced against the time constraints and other issues facing the potential respondents.

    For recency surveys, timing can work to your advantage or disadvantage. Send the survey almost immediately after providing assistance. If you wait more than a week or two, memories will begin to fade, and the results will trend toward the middle of the road.

    Regardless of whether it is an annual survey or a recency survey, distributing the surveys to a big enough sample size will be tough. Combine that with low response rates and the results may be skewed. Take what you can get and look for trends over time. Some people may be tough critics; if possible, send the survey to the same people (and incorporate new ones) to see if the tough graders’ responses are remaining true over time. Another way to mitigate some of the tough critics is to review their answers to the open-ended questions. For example, a tough grader may respond with a “4 – helpful” when you were expecting a “5 – very helpful;” the narrative portion of the survey may be consistent with that answer, or it may provide what you were looking for: “The VMI was great to work with on this project.” When confined to a scale, some respondents won’t give the top value/assessment no matter what, but they will sing your praises in a question that requires a narrative response. Taken together, you may get a slightly different picture – one that often favors you.

    Step 3.11 – Survey internal clients

    Gain insights and feedback from internal sources (continued)

    The image contains a screenshot of an example survey.

    After you have received a few responses to your surveys (recency and annual), review the results against your expectations and follow up with some of the respondents. Were the questions clear? Were the answer choices appropriate? Ultimately, you have to decide if the survey provided the meaningful feedback you were looking for. If not, revise the questions and answers choices as needed. (Keep in mind, you are not looking for “feelgood fluff.” You are looking for feedback that will reinforce what you are doing well and show areas for improvement.)

    Once you have the results, it’s time to share them with the executives and stakeholders. When creating a report, consider the following guidance:

    • Don’t just list the data; convert it to usable information.
    • When needed, provide some context and interpretation for the results. For example, if you have an internal goal or service level, indicate this and show how the results compare to the target (e.g. in a bar chart, insert a horizontal line and label it “target”).
    • Present the results on a question-by-question basis, but you may want to combine or aggregate results to provide meaningful information. For example, combine 21% responding with “doing a great job” and 62% responding with “doing a good job” into one statement of “83% of those surveyed said the VMI is doing a good job or doing a great job.”
    • Use an executive summary as an overview or to highlight the key findings, with the detailed data and information on subsequent pages for people who want to dive deeper.

    Step 3.12 – Calculate VMI ROI

    Identify and report the VMI’s value and impact on the organization

    Calculating ROI begins with establishing baselines: what is the current situation? Once those are established, you can begin tracking the impact made by the VMI by looking at the differences between the baseline and the end result. For example, if the VMI is tracking money saved, it is critical to know the baseline amounts (e.g. the initial quote from the vendor, the budgeted amount). If time is being measured, it is important to understand how much time was previously spent on items (e.g. vendor meetings to address concerns, RFPs).

    The blueprint Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO will lead you through the process, but there are a couple of key things to remember: 1) some results will be quick and easy – the low-hanging fruit, things that have been ignored or not done well, eliminating waste, and streamlining inefficiencies; and 2) other things may take time to come to fruition. Be patient and make sure you work with finance or others to bring credibility to your calculations.

    When reporting the ROI, remember to include the results of the survey from step 3.11. They are not always quantifiable, but they help executives and stakeholders see the complete picture, and the stories or examples make the ROI “personal” to the organization.

    Reporting can be a challenge. VMIs often underestimate their value and don’t like self-promotion. While you don’t want to feel like you operate in justification mode, many eyes will be on the VMI. The ROI report helps validate and promote the VMI, and it helps build brand awareness for the VMI.

    Step 3.13 – Implement vendor recognition program

    Set your plan in motion

    As indicated in step 2.10, take a “crawl, walk, run” approach to your vendor recognition program. Start off small and grow the program over time. Based on the scope of the program, decide how you’ll announce and promote it. Work with marketing, IT, and others to ensure a consistent message, to leverage technology (e.g. your website), and to maximize awareness.

    For a formal program, you may want to hold a kickoff meeting to introduce the program internally and externally. The external kickoff can be handled in a variety of ways depending on available resources and the extent of the program. For example, a video can be produced and shared with eligible vendors, an email from the VMI or an executive can be used, or the program can be rolled out through BAMs if only BAM participants are eligible for the program. If you are taking an informal approach to the vendor recognition program, you may not need an external kickoff at all.

    For a formal program, collect information periodically throughout the year rather than waiting until the end of the year; however, some data may not be available or relevant until the end of the measurement period. For subjective criteria, the issue of recency may be an issue, and memories will fade over time. (Be careful the subjective portion doesn’t turn into a popularity contest.)

    If the vendor recognition program is not meeting your goals adequately, don’t be afraid to modify it or even scrap it. At some point, you may have to do a partial or total reboot of the program. Creating and maintaining a “lessons learned” document will make a reboot easier and better if it is necessary. Remember: While a vendor recognition program has many potential benefits, your main goals must be achieved or the program adds little or no value.

    Phase 4 - Review

    Ensure Your VMI Continues to Evolve

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Review and update existing Plan materials

    2.1 Vendor classification models

    2.2 Customer positioning model

    2.3 Two-way scorecards

    2.4 Performance improvement plan (PIP)

    2.5 Relationship improvement plan (RIP)

    2.6 Vendor-at-a-glance reports

    2.7 VMI personnel competency evaluation tool

    2.8 Internal feedback tool

    2.9 VMI ROI calculation

    2.10 Vendor recognition program

    3.1 Classify vendors and identify customer position

    3.2 Assess the relationship landscape

    3.3 Leverage two-way scorecards

    3.4 Implement PIPs and RIPs

    3.5 Gather market intelligence

    3.6 Generate vendor-at-a-glance reports

    3.7 Evaluate VMI personnel

    3.8 Improve professional skills

    3.9 Expand professional knowledge

    3.10 Create brand awareness

    3.11 Survey internal clients

    3.12 Calculate VMI ROI

    3.13 Implement vendor recognition program

    4.1 Investigate potential alliances

    4.2 Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value

    4.3 Review and update

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    This phase helps the VMI stay aligned with the overall organization, stay current, and improve its strategic value as it evolves. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI’s strategic impact.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Others as needed

    Phase 4 – Review

    Continue evolving the VMI and keep it up to date

    The emphasis of this final phase is on the VMI’s continued evolution.

    • First up is the concept of alliances. For a small number of vendors, your relationship has the ability to transcend to a different level. A collaborative, synergistic relationship can be achieved under the right circumstances.
    • Next, additional material on transforming the VMI from purely transactional to strategic is provided (along with some reminders from prior phases). To reach its full potential, the VMI must mature and evolve, but this won’t happen without the active management of a well-crafted plan. What got the VMI to this point won’t necessarily work to get you to the next point on the evolution scale.
    • Lastly, remember to stay vigilant about the review process. What is the VMI doing well? Where can it improve? What needs to change?

    Step 4.1 – Investigate potential alliances

    Understand what separates an alliance from a regular relationship

    Chances are you’ve seen a marketing or business alliance at work in your personal life. If you’ve visited a Target store or a Barnes and Noble store, you’ve more than likely walked past the Starbucks counter. The relationship is about more than the landlord-tenant agreement, and the same business concept can exist in non-retail settings. Although they may not be as common in the customer-IT vendor space, alliances can work here as well.

    Definition

    For vendor management purposes, an alliance is a symbiotic relationship between two parties where both benefit beyond the traditional transactional (i.e. buyer-seller) relationship.

    Characteristics

    • Each party remains independent; this is not a true partnership or joint venture from a legal perspective.
    • Each party obtains benefits they wouldn’t be able to obtain by themselves (or, at a minimum, the timeline is accelerated significantly).
    • The relationship is geared toward the long term, and each party contributes resources to achieve synergies.

    Step 4.1 – Investigate potential alliances

    Analyze benefits and risks for the alliance

    Benefits

    • Synergies
    • Innovations
    • Use of pooled resources
    • Access to different areas of expertise
    • Quicker development or improvement of products or services
    • Competitive advantages, new revenue streams, and new markets

    Risks

    • Cultural fit
    • Departing executives/sponsors
    • Return on investment pressures
    • Different interests or expectations
    • Failure to address intellectual property issues adequately
    • Lack of experience and process to manage the relationship

    Step 4.1 – Investigate potential alliances

    Set up the alliance for success

    Keys to success

    • Communicate transparently.
    • Ensure executive participation from both parties.
    • Establish a joint steering committee and alliance governances.
    • Set clear expectations and define what each party wants out of the alliance.
    • Create “alliance managers” in addition to vendor managers and project mangers.
    • Start with a small alliance; don’t go all-in on a big alliance the first time you try it.
    • Create an environment of trust and collaboration; the alliance goes beyond the contract.
    • Make sure both parties are happy with their contributions to and rewards from the alliance.

    The purpose of this step is not to make you an expert on alliances or to encourage you to rush out of your office, cubicle, bedroom, or other workspace looking for opportunities. The purpose is to familiarize you with the concepts, to encourage you to keep your eyes open, and to think about relationships from different angles. How will you make the most of your vendors’ expertise, resources, market, and other things they bring to the table?

    Step 4.2 – Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value

    Grow the VMI’s impact over time

    Although they are not synonymous concepts, increasing the VMI’s maturity and increasing the VMI’s strategic value can go hand in hand. Evolving the VMI to be strategic allows the organization to receive the greatest benefit for its investment. This isn’t to say that all work the VMI does will be strategic. It will always live in two places – the transactional world and the strategic world – even when it is fully mature and operating strategically. Just like any job, there are transactional tasks and activities that must be done, and some of them are foundational elements for being strategic (e.g. conducting research, preparing reports, and classifying vendors). The VMI must evolve and become strategic for many reasons: staying in the transactional world limits the VMI’s contributions, results, influence and impact; team members will have less job satisfaction and enjoyment and lower salaries; ultimately, the justification for the VMI could disappear.

    To enhance the VMI’s (and, as applicable, its personnel’s) strategic value, continue:

    • Maturing the VMI and its personnel.
    • Building relationships internally and with the critical vendors (typically, high operational, high tactical, and strategic vendors under the COST model and valued and principal vendors under the MVP model).
    • Increasing your knowledge about vendor management and your critical vendors and their industries.
    • Saying yes to opportunities or volunteering for cross-functional teams that allow the VMI to showcase its abilities.
    • Increasing your knowledge of your organization, how it operates, the political environment, and anything else that will help the VMI provide information, insight, and guidance.
    • Learning about your industry and competitors (if applicable).

    Step 4.2 – Continue increasing the VMI’s strategic value

    Shift from transactional to strategic as much as possible

    Indicators of a transactional VMI:

    Indicators of a strategic VMI:

    • Exclusively reactive approach to operations
    • Focused exclusively on day-to-day operations
    • Internal clients are obligated to use the VMI due to policy
    • No perceived value-add; perceived as an administrative function
    • Left out of the RFP process or only have a limited role
    • Left out of the negotiation process or only have a limited role
    • VMI has a narrow reach and impact within the organization
    • Measure of value for the VMI is only quantitative
    • Metrics gathering without analysis and influential use
    • Personnel have limited skills, competencies, and knowledge
    • Proactive approach to operations
    • Focused on the big picture
    • Internal clients seek out or voluntarily consult the VMI
    • VMI is valued for its contributions and impact
    • Good relationships exist with vendors and stakeholders
    • Personnel possess high levels of skill, competency, and knowledge
    • VMI processes are integrated into the organization
    • VMI participates in business strategy development
    • VMI leads or is heavily involved in the RFP & negotiation processes
    • Relationship managers are assigned to all critical vendors
    • Measure of value for the VMI is quantitative and qualitative
    • Metrics are used to make and influence decisions/strategy

    Step 4.3 – Review and update

    Tap into the collective wisdom and experience of your team members

    The vendor management lifecycle is continuous and more chaotic than linear, but the chaos mostly stays within the boundaries of the “plan, build, run, and review” framework outlined in this blueprint and the blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative. Two of the goals of managing the lifecycle are: 1) to adapt to a changing world; and 2) to improve the VMI and its impact over time. To do this, keep following the guidance in this phase, but don’t forget about the direction provided in phase 4 of the blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative:

    • Review and assess compliance.
    • Compile and leverage lessons learned.
    • Focus on maintaining alignment internally.
    • Identify and incorporate leading practices.
    • Update governances.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Continue reviewing and updating the VMI’s risk footprint. Add risk categories and scope as needed (measurement, monitoring, and reporting). Review Info-Tech’s vendor management-based series of risk blueprints for further information (Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization and others).

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    It is easy for business owners to lose sight of things. There is a saying among entrepreneurs about remembering to work on the business rather than working exclusively in the business. For many entrepreneurs, it is easy to get lost in the day-to-day grind and to forget to look at the bigger picture. A VMI is like a business in that regard – it is easy to focus on the transactional work and lose sight of maturing or evolving the VMI. Don’t let this happen!

    Leverage the tools and templates from this blueprint and adapt them to your environment as needed. Unlike the blueprint Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative, some of the concepts presented here may take more time, resources, and evolution before you are ready to deploy them. Continue using the three-year roadmap and 90-day plans from the Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative blueprint, and add components from this blueprint when the time is right. The two blueprints are designed to work in concert as you move forward on your VMI journey.

    Lastly, focus on getting a little better each day, week, month, or year: better processes, better policies and procedures, better relationships with vendors, better relationships with internal clients, better planning, better anticipation, better research, better skills, competencies, and knowledge for team members, better communication, better value, and better impact. A little “better” goes a long way, and over time it becomes a lot better.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    IT (and the organization as a whole) are more reliant on vendors than ever before, and vendor management has become increasingly necessary to manage the relationships and manage the risks. Implementing a vendor management initiative is no longer a luxury...it is a necessity.

    Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO

    Calculating the impact or value of a vendor management office (VMO) can be difficult without the right framework and tools. Let Info-Tech’s tools and templates help you account for the contributions made by your VMO.

    Evaluate Your Vendor Account Team to Optimize Vendor Relations

    Understanding your vendor team’s background, experience, and strategic approach to your account is key to the management of the relationship, the success of the vendor agreement, and, depending on the vendor, the success of your business.

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    Vendors’ failure to perform, including security and compliance violations, can have significant financial consequences. Good vendor management practices help organizations understand the costs of those actions.

    Bibliography

    Amaresan, Swetha. “The 9 Most Important Survey Design Tips & Best Practices.” HubSpot. Accessed 13 July 2022.
    “Best Practices for Every Step of Survey Creation.” Survey Monkey. Accessed 13 July 2022.
    Brevig, Armand. ”Here Is a Quicker Way of Getting Better Supply Market Insights.” Procurement Cube, 30 July 2020. Accessed 19 May 2022.
    Cain, Elna. “9 Simple Ways on How to Improve Your Writing Skills.” Elna Cain, 20 Nov. 2018. Accessed 5 June 2020.
    Colwell, Tony. “How to Select Strategic Suppliers Part 1: Beware the Supplier's Perspective.” Accuity Consultants, 7 Feb 2012. Accessed 19 May 2022.
    “50 Tips for Improving Your Emotional Intelligence.” RocheMartin, 12 Jan. 2022. Accessed 25 July 2022.
    “4 Ways to Strengthen Your Ability to Influence Others.” Center for Creative Leadership, 24 Nov. 2020. Accessed 20 July 2022.
    Ferreira, Nicole Martins. “10 Personal Branding Tips That’ll Elevate Your Business In 2022.” Oberlo, 21 Mar. 2022. Accessed 24 May 2022.
    Gartlan, Dan. “4 Essential Brand Components.” Stevens & Tate, 25 Nov. 2019. Accessed 24 May 2022.
    Geller & Company. “World-Class Procurement — Increasing Profitability and Quality.” Spend Matters, 2003. Accessed 4 March 2022.
    Gumaste, Pavan. “50 Project Management Terms You Should Know.” Whiz Labs, 2018. Accessed 22 July 2022.
    Hertzberg, Karen. “How to Improve Writing Skills in 15 Easy Steps.” Grammarly, 15 June 2017. Accessed 5 June 2020.
    “Improving Emotional Intelligence (EQ).” HelpGuide, 2022. Accessed 25 July 2022.
    “ISG Index 4Q 2021.” Information Services Group, Inc., 2022. Web.
    Lehoczky, Etelka. “How To Improve Your Writing Skills At Work.” Forbes, 9 Mar. 2016. Accessed 5 June 2020.
    Liu, Joseph. “5 Ways To Build Your Personal Brand At Work.” Forbes, 30 Apr. 2018. Accessed 24 May 2022.
    Lloyd, Tracy. “Defining What a Brand Is: Why Is It So Hard?” Emotive Brand, 18 June 2019. Accessed 28 July 2022.
    Nielson, Megan. “The Basic Tenants of Diplomatic Communication.” Communiqué PR, 22 October 2020. Accessed 23 May 2022
    “Positioning Yourself in the Market.” New Zealand Ministry of Business, Innovation & Employment, 2021. Accessed 19 May 2022.
    Rogelberg, Steven G. “The Surprising Science Behind Successful Remote Meetings.” sloanreview.mit.edu. 21 May 2020. Accessed 19 July 2022.
    “Rule No 5: All Customers/Suppliers Have a Different Value to You.” newdawnpartners.com. Accessed 19 May 2022.

    Bibliography

    Shute, Benjamin. “Supplier Relationship Management: Is Bigger Always Better?” Comprara, 24 May 2015. Accessed 19 May 2022.
    Steele, Paul T. and Brian H. Court. Profitable Purchasing Strategies: A Manager's Guide for Improving Organizational Competitiveness Through the Skills of Purchasing. ‎ McGraw-Hill, 1996.
    “Take the Thomas-Kilmann Conflict Mode Instrument (TKI).” Kilmann Diagnostics, 2018. Accessed 20 Aug. 2020.
    Tallia, Alfred F. MD, MPH, et al. ”Seven Characteristics of Successful Work Relationships.” Fam Pract Manag. 2006 Jan;13(1):47-50.
    “The Art of Tact and Diplomacy.” skillsyouneed.com. Accessed 23 May 2022.
    “13 Key Traits of Strong Professional Relationships.” success.com. Accessed 4 Feb. 2022.
    Wilson, Fred. “Top 40 Project Management Terms and Concepts of 2022.” nTask, 25 Feb. 2019. Accessed 24 July 2022.

    Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}237|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /optimization
    • Your organization has many business processes that rely on repetitive, routine manual data collection and processing work, and there is high stakeholder interest in automating them.
    • You’re investigating whether robotic process automation (RPA) is a suitable technological enabler for automating such processes.
    • Being a trending technology, especially with its association with artificial intelligence (AI), there is much marketing fluff, hype, and misunderstanding about RPA.
    • Estimating the potential impact of RPA on business is difficult, as the relevant industry statistics often conflict each other and you aren’t sure how applicable it is to your business.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • There are no physical robots in RPA. RPA is about software “bots” that interact with applications as if they were human users to perform routine, repetitive work in your place. It’s for any business in any industry, not just for manufacturing.
    • RPA is lightweight IT; it reduces the cost of entry, maintenance, and teardown of automation as well as the technological requirement of resources that maintain it, as it complements existing automation solutions in your toolkit.
    • RPA is rules-based. While AI promises to relax the rigidity of rules, it adds business risks that are poorly understood by both businesses and subject-matter experts. Rules-based “RPA 1.0” is mature and may pose a stronger business case than AI-enabled RPA.
    • RPA’s sweet spot is “swivel chair automation”: processes that require human workers to act as a conduit between several systems, moving between applications, manually keying, re-keying, copying, and pasting information. A bot can take their place.

    Impact and Result

    • Discover RPA and how it differentiates from other automation solutions.
    • Understand the benefits and risks of complementing RPA with AI.
    • Identify existing business processes best suited for automation with RPA.
    • Communicate RPA’s potential business benefits to stakeholders.

    Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should use RPA to automate routine, repetitive data collection and processing work, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Discover robotic process automation

    Learn about RPA, including how it compares to IT-led automation rooted in business process management practices and the role of AI.

    • Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation – Phase 1: Discover Robotic Process Automation
    • Robotic Process Automation Communication Template

    2. Identify processes best suited for robotic process automation

    Identify and prioritize candidate processes for RPA.

    • Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation – Phase 2: Identify Processes Best Suited for Robotic Process Automation
    • Process Evaluation Tool for Robotic Process Automation
    • Minimum Viable Business Case Document
    [infographic]

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}316|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $105,346 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 39 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • Tracked incidents are often classified into ready-made responses that are not necessarily applicable to the organization. With so many classifications, tracking becomes inefficient and indigestible, allowing major incidents to fall through the cracks.
    • Outcomes of incident response tactics are not formally tracked or communicated, resulting in a lack of comprehensive understanding of trends and patterns regarding incidents, leading to being re-victimized by the same vector.
    • Having a formal incident response document to meet compliance requirements is not useful if no one is adhering to it.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You will experience incidents. Don’t rely on ready-made responses. They’re too broad and easy to ignore. Save your organization response time and confusion by developing your own specific incident use cases.
    • Analyze, track, and review results of incident response regularly. Without a comprehensive understanding of incident trends and patterns, you can be re-victimized by the same attack vector.
    • Establish communication processes and channels well in advance of a crisis. Don’t wait until a state of panic. Collaborate and exchange information with other organizations to stay ahead of incoming threats.

    Impact and Result

    • Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of preparation, detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a scalable and systematic incident response program relevant to your organization.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop and implement a security incident management program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare

    Equip your organization for incident response with formal documentation of policies and processes.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 1: Prepare
    • Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool
    • Incident Response Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Incident Management Charter Template
    • Security Incident Management Policy Template
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool

    2. Operate

    Act with efficiency and effectiveness as new incidents are handled.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 2: Operate
    • Security Incident Management Plan
    • Security Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Credential Compromise
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Credential Compromise (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Credential Compromise (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Distributed Denial of Service
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Distributed Denial of Service (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Distributed Denial of Service (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Malware
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malware (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malware (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Malicious Email
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malicious Email (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malicious Email (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Ransomware
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Ransomware (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Ransomware (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Data Breach
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Data Breach (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Data Breach (PDF)
    • Data Breach Reporting Requirements Summary
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Third-Party Incident
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Third-Party Incident (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Third-Party Incident (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Blank Template

    3. Maintain and optimize

    Manage and improve the incident management process by tracking metrics, testing capabilities, and leveraging best practices.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 3: Maintain and Optimize
    • Security Incident Metrics Tool
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Root-Cause Analysis Template
    • Security Incident Report Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Prepare Your Incident Response Program

    The Purpose

    Understand the purpose of incident response.

    Formalize the program.

    Identify key players and escalation points.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Common understanding of the importance of incident response.

    Various business units becoming aware of their roles in the incident management program.

    Formalized documentation.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess the current process, obligations, scope, and boundaries of the incident management program.

    1.2 Identify key players for the response team and for escalation points.

    1.3 Formalize documentation.

    1.4 Prioritize incidents requiring preparation.

    Outputs

    Understanding of the incident landscape

    An identified incident response team

    A security incident management charter

    A security incident management policy

    A list of top-priority incidents

    A general security incident management plan

    A security incident response RACI chart

    2 Develop Incident-Specific Runbooks

    The Purpose

    Document the clear response procedures for top-priority incidents.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    As incidents occur, clear response procedures are documented for efficient and effective recovery.

    Activities

    2.1 For each top-priority incident, document the workflow from detection through analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident analysis.

    Outputs

    Up to five incident-specific runbooks

    3 Maintain and Optimize the Program

    The Purpose

    Ensure the response procedures are realistic and effective.

    Identify key metrics to measure the success of the program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Real-time run-through of security incidents to ensure roles and responsibilities are known.

    Understanding of how to measure the success of the program.

    Activities

    3.1 Limited scope tabletop exercise.

    3.2 Discuss key metrics.

    Outputs

    Completed tabletop exercise

    Key success metrics identified

    Further reading

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Create a scalable incident response program without breaking the bank.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Security incidents are going to happen whether you’re prepared or not. Ransomware and data breaches are just a few top-of-mind threats that all organizations deal with. Taking time upfront to formalize response plans can save you significantly more time and effort down the road. When an incident strikes, don’t waste time deciding how to remediate. Rather, proactively identify your response team, optimize your response procedures, and track metrics so you can be prepared to jump to action.

    Céline Gravelines,
    Senior Research Analyst
    Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Picture of Céline Gravelines

    Céline Gravelines,
    Senior Research Analyst
    Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For

    • A CISO who is dealing with the following:
      • Inefficient use of time and money when retroactively responding to incidents, negatively affecting business revenue and workflow.
      • Resistance from management to adequately develop a formal incident response plan.
      • Lack of closure of incidents, resulting in being re-victimized by the same vector.

    This Research Will Help You

    • Develop a consistent, scalable, and usable incident response program that is not resource intensive.
    • Track and communicate incident response in a formal manner.
    • Reduce the overall impact of incidents over time.
    • Learn from past incidents to improve future response processes.

    This Research Will Also Assist

    • Business stakeholders who are responsible for the following:
    • Improving workflow and managing operations in the event of security incidents to reduce any adverse business impacts.
    • Ensuring that incident response compliance requirements are being adhered to.

    This Research Will Help Them

    • Efficiently allocate resources to improve incident response in terms of incident frequency, response time, and cost.
    • Effectively communicate expectations and responsibilities to users.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • Security incidents are inevitable, but how they’re dealt with can make or break an organization. Poor incident response negatively affects business practices, including workflow, revenue generation, and public image.
    • The incident response of most organizations is ad hoc at best. A formal management plan is rarely developed or adhered to, resulting in ineffective firefighting responses and inefficient allocation of resources.

    Complication

    • Tracked incidents are often classified into ready-made responses that are not necessarily applicable to the organization. With so many classifications, tracking becomes inefficient and indigestible, allowing major incidents to fall through the cracks.
    • Outcomes of incident response tactics are not formally tracked or communicated, resulting in a lack of comprehensive understanding of trends and patterns regarding incidents, leading to being revictimized by the same vector.
    • Having a formal incident response document to meet compliance requirements is not useful if no one is adhering to it.

    Resolution

    • Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of preparation, detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a scalable and systematic incident response program relevant to your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • You will experience incidents. Don’t rely on ready-made responses. They’re too broad and easy to ignore. Save your organization response time and confusion by developing your own specific incident use cases.
    • Analyze, track, and review results of incident response regularly. Without a comprehensive understanding of incident trends and patterns, you can be re-victimized by the same attack vector.
    • Establish communication processes and channels well in advance of a crisis. Don’t wait until a state of panic. Collaborate and exchange information with other organizations to stay ahead of incoming threats.

    Data breaches are resulting in major costs across industries

    Per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies (measured in USD)

    This is a bar graph showing the per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies(measured in USD). the companies are, in decreasing order of cost: Health; Financial; Services; Pharmaceutical; Technology; Energy; Education; Industrial; Entertainment; Consumer; Media; Transportation; Hospitality; Retail; Research; Public

    Average data breach costs per compromised record hit an all-time high of $148 (in 2018).
    (Source: IBM, “2018 Cost of Data Breach Study)”

    % of systems impacted by a data breach
    1%
    No Impact
    19%
    1-10% impacted
    41%
    11-30% impacted
    24%
    31-50% impacted
    15%
    > 50% impacted
    % of customers lost from a data breach
    61% Lost
    < 20%
    21% Lost 20-40% 8% Lost
    40-60%
    6% Lost
    60-80%
    4% Lost
    80-100%
    % of customers lost from a data breach
    58% Lost
    <20%
    25% Lost
    20-40%
    9% Lost
    40-60%
    5% Lost
    60-80%
    4% Lost
    80-100%

    Source: Cisco, “Cisco 2017 Annual Cybersecurity Report”

    Defining what is security incident management

    IT Incident

    Any event not a part of the standard operation of a service which causes, or may cause, the interruption to, or a reduction in, the quality of that service.

    Security Event:

    A security event is anything that happens that could potentially have information security implications.

    • A spam email is a security event because it may contain links to malware.
    • Organizations may be hit with thousands or perhaps millions of identifiable security events each day.
    • These are typically handled by automated tools or are simply logged.

    Security Incident:

    A security incident is a security event that results in damage such as lost data.

    • Incidents can also include events that don't involve damage but are viable risks.
    • For example, an employee clicking on a link in a spam email that made it through filters may be viewed as an incident.

    It’s not a matter of if you have a security incident, but when

    The increasing complexity and prevalence of threats have finally caught the attention of corporate leaders. Prepare for the inevitable with an incident response program.

    1. A formalized incident response program reduced the average cost of a data breach (per capita) from $148 to $134, while third-party involvement increased costs by $13.40.
    2. US organizations lost an average of $7.91 million per data breach as a result of increased customer attrition and diminished goodwill. Canada and the UK follow suit at $1.57 and $1.39 million, respectively.
    3. 73% of breaches are perpetrated by outsiders, 50% are the work of criminal groups, and 28% involve internal actors.
    4. 55% of companies have to manage fallout, such as reputational damage after a data breach.
    5. The average cost of a data breach increases by $1 million if left undetected for > 100 days.

    (Sources: IBM, “2018 Cost of Data Breach Study”; Verizon, “2017 Data Breach Investigations Report”; Cisco, “Cisco 2018 Annual Cybersecurity Report”)

    Threat Actor Examples

    The proliferation of hacking techniques and commoditization of hacking tools has enabled more people to become threat actors. Examples include:
    • Organized Crime Groups
    • Lone Cyber Criminals
    • Competitors
    • Nation States
    • Hacktivists
    • Terrorists
    • Former Employees
    • Domestic Intelligence Services
    • Current Employees (malicious and accidental)

    Benefits of an incident management program

    Effective incident management will help you do the following:

    Improve efficacy
    Develop structured processes to increase process consistency across the incident response team and the program as a whole. Expose operational weak points and transition teams from firefighting to innovating.

    Improve threat detection, prevention, analysis, and response
    Enhance your pressure posture through a structured and intelligence-driven incident handling and remediation framework.

    Improve visibility and information sharing
    Promote both internal and external information sharing to enable good decision making.

    Create and clarify accountability and responsibility
    Establish a clear level of accountability throughout the incident response program, and ensure role responsibility for all tasks and processes involved in service delivery.

    Control security costs
    Effective incident management operations will provide visibility into your remediation processes, enabling cost savings from misdiagnosed issues and incident reduction.

    Identify opportunities for continuous improvement
    Increase visibility into current performance levels and accurately identify opportunities for continuous improvement with a holistic measurement program.

    Impact

    Short term:
    • Streamlined security incident management program.
    • Formalized and structured response process.
    • Comprehensive list of operational gaps and initiatives.
    • Detailed response runbooks that predefine necessary operational protocol.
    • Compliance and audit adherence.
    Long term:
    • Reduced incident costs and remediation time.
    • Increased operational collaboration between prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts.
    • Enhanced security pressure posture.
    • Improved communication with executives about relevant security risks to the business.
    • Preserved reputation and brand equity.

    Incident management is essential for organizations of any size

    Your incidents may differ, but a standard response ensures practical security.

    Certain regulations and laws require incident response to be a mandatory process in organizations.

    Compliance Standard Examples Description
    Federal Information Security Modernization Act (FISMA)
    • Organizations must have “procedures for detecting, reporting, and responding to security incidents” (2002).
    • They must also “inform operators of agency information systems about current and potential information security threats and vulnerabilities.”
    Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS)
    • “Organizations must: (i) establish an operational incident handling capability for organizational information systems that includes adequate preparation, detection, analysis, containment, recovery, and user response activities.”
    Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS v3)
    • 12.5.3: “Establish, document, and distribute security incident response and escalation procedures to ensure timely and effective handling of all situations.”
    Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)
    • 164.308: Response and Reporting – “Identify and respond to suspected or known security incidents; mitigate, to the extent practicable, harmful effects of security incidents that are known to the covered entity; and document security incidents and their outcomes.”

    Security incident management is applicable to all verticals

    Examples:
    • Finance
    • Insurance
    • Healthcare
    • Public administration
    • Education services
    • Professional services
    • Scientific and technical services

    Maintain a holistic security operations program

    Legacy security operations centers (SOCs) fail to address gaps between data sources, network controls, and human capital. There is limited visibility and collaboration between departments, resulting in siloed decisions that do not support the best interests of the organization.

    Security operations is part of what Info-Tech calls a threat collaboration environment, where members must actively collaborate to address cyberthreats affecting the organization’s brand, business operation, and technology infrastructure on a daily basis.

    Prevent: Defense in depth is the best approach to protect against unknown and unpredictable attacks. Diligent patching and vulnerability management, endpoint protection, and strong human-centric security (amongst other tactics) are essential. Detect: There are two types of companies – those who have been breached and know it, and those who have been breached and don’t know it. Ensure that monitoring, logging, and event detection tools are in place and appropriate to your organizational needs.
    Analyze: Raw data without interpretation cannot improve security and is a waste of time, money, and effort. Establish a tiered operational process that not only enriches data but also provides visibility into your threat landscape. Respond: Organizations can’t rely on an ad hoc response anymore – don’t wait until a state of panic. Formalize your response processes in a detailed incident runbook to reduce incident remediation time and effort.

    Info-Tech’s incident response blueprint is one of four security operations initiatives

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program Vulnerability Management
    Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
    • Vulnerability Tracking Tool
    • Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template
    • Penetration Test RFP Template
    • Vulnerability Mitigation Process Template
    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations Vulnerability Management
    Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
    • Threat Intelligence Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Threat Intelligence RACI Tool
    • Threat Intelligence Management Plan Template
    • Threat Intelligence Policy Template
    • Threat Intelligence Alert Template
    • Threat Intelligence Alert and Briefing Cadence Schedule Template
    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes Operations
    Security operations include the real-time monitoring and analysis of events based on the correlation of internal and external data sources. This also includes incident escalation based on impact. These analysts are constantly tuning and tweaking rules and reporting thresholds to further help identify which indicators are most impactful during the analysis phase of operations.
    • Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Operations Event Prioritization Tool
    • Security Operations Efficiency Calculator
    • Security Operations Policy
    • In-House vs. Outsourcing Decision-Making Tool
    • Seccrimewareurity Operations RACI Tool
    • Security Operations TCO & ROI Comparison Calculator
    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program Incident Response (IR)
    Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities. Incident response teams coordinate root cause and incident gathering while facilitating post-incident lessons learned. Incident response can provide valuable threat data that ties specific indicators to threat actors or campaigns.
    Security Incident Management Policy
    • Security Incident Management Plan
    • Incident Response Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool
    • Various Incident Management Runbooks

    Understand how incident response ties into related processes

    Info-Tech Resources:
    Business Continuity Plan Develop a Business Continuity Plan
    Disaster Recovery Plan Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan
    Security Incident Management Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program
    Incident Management Incident and Problem Management
    Service Desk Standardize the Service Desk

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – project overview

    1. Prepare 2. Operate 3. Maintain and Optimize
    Best-Practice Toolkit 1.1 Establish the Drivers, Challenges, and Benefits.

    1.2 Examine the Security Incident Landscape and Trends.

    1.3 Understand Your Security Obligations, Scope, and Boundaries.

    1.4 Gauge Your Current Process to Identify Gaps.

    1.5 Formalize the Security Incident Management Charter.

    1.6 Identify Key Players and Develop a Call Escalation Tree.

    1.7 Develop a Security Incident Management Policy.

    2.1 Understand the Incident Response Framework.

    2.2 Understand the Purpose of Runbooks.

    2.3 Prioritize the Development of Incident-Specific Runbooks.

    2.4 Develop Top-Priority Runbooks.

    2.5 Fill Out the Root-Cause Analysis Template.

    2.6 Customize the Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool to Standardize Useful Questions for Lessons-Learned Meetings.

    2.7 Complete the Security Incident Report Template.

    3.1 Conduct Tabletop Exercises.

    3.2 Initialize a Security Incident Management Metrics Program.

    3.3 Leverage Best Practices for Continuous Improvement.

    Guided Implementations Understand the incident response process, and define your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.

    Formalize the incident management charter, RACI, and incident management policy.
    Use the framework to develop a general incident management plan.

    Prioritize and develop top-priority runbooks.
    Develop and facilitate tabletop exercises.

    Create an incident management metrics program, and assess the success of the incident management program.
    Onsite Workshop Module 1:
    Prepare for Incident Response
    Module 2:
    Handle Incidents
    Module 3:
    Review and Communicate Security Incidents
    Phase 1 Outcome:
  • Formalized stakeholder support
  • Security Incident Management Policy
  • Security Incident Management Charter
  • Call Escalation Tree
  • Phase 2 Outcome:
    • A generalized incident management plan
    • A prioritized list of incidents
    • Detailed runbooks for top-priority incidents
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • A formalized tracking system for benchmarking security incident metrics.
    • Recommendations for optimizing your security incident management processes.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities
    • Kick off and introductions.
    • High-level overview of weekly activities and outcomes.
    • Understand the benefits of security incident response management.
    • Formalize stakeholder support.
    • Assess your current process, obligations, and scope.
    • Develop RACI chart.
    • Define impact and scope.
    • Identify key players for the threat escalation protocol.
    • Develop a security incident response policy.
    • Develop a general security incident response plan.
    • Prioritize incident-specific runbook development.
    • Understand the incident response process.
    • Develop general and incident-specific call escalation trees.
    • Develop specific runbooks for your top-priority incidents (e.g. ransomware).
      • Detect the incident.
      • Analyze the incident.
      • Contain the incident.
      • Eradicate the root cause.
      • Recover from the incident.
      • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
    • Develop specific runbooks for your next top-priority incidents:
      • Detect the incident.
      • Analyze the incident.
      • Contain the incident.
      • Eradicate the root cause.
      • Recover from the incident.
      • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
    • Determine key metrics to track and report.
    • Develop post-incident activity documentation.
    • Understand best practices for both internal and external communication.
    • Finalize key deliverables created during the workshop.
    • Present the security incident response program to key stakeholders.
    • Workshop executive presentation and debrief.
    • Finalize main deliverables.
    • Schedule subsequent Analyst Calls.
    • Schedule feedback call.
    Deliverables
    • Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool
    • Security Incident Management Policy
    • General incident management plan
    • Security Incident Management Runbook
    • Development prioritization
    • Prioritized list of runbooks
    • Understanding of incident handling process
    • Incident-specific runbooks for two incidents (including threat escalation criteria and Visio workflow)
    • Discussion points for review with response team
    • Incident-specific runbooks for two incidents (including threat escalation criteria and Visio workflow)
    • Discussion points for review with response team
    • Security Incident Metrics Tool
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Post-Incident Report Analysis Template
    • Root Cause Analysis Template
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Communication plans
    • Workshop summary documentation
  • All final deliverables
  • Measured value for Guided Implementations

    Engaging in GIs doesn’t just offer valuable project advice – it also results in significant cost savings.

    GI Purpose Measured Value
    Section 1: Prepare

    Understand the need for an incident response program.
    Develop your incident response policy and plan.
    Develop classifications around incidents.
    Establish your program implementation roadmap.

    Time, value, and resources saved using our classification guidance and templates: 2 FTEs*2 days*$80,000/year = $1,280
    Time, value, and resources saved using our classification guidance and templates:
    2 FTEs*5 days*$80,000/year = $3,200

    Section 2: Operate

    Prioritize runbooks and develop the processes to create your own incident response program:

  • Detect
  • Analyze
  • Contain
  • Eradicate
  • Recover
  • Post-Incident Activity
  • Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance:
    4 FTEs*10 days*$80,000/year = $12,800 (if done internally)

    Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance:
    1 consultant*15 days*$2,000/day = $30,000 (if done by third party)
    Section 3: Maintain and Optimize Develop methods of proper reporting and create templates for communicating incident response to key parties. Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance, templates, and tabletop exercises:
    2 FTEs*3 days*$80,000/year = $1,920
    Total Costs To just get an incident response program off the ground. $49,200

    Insurance company put incident response aside; executives were unhappy

    Organization implemented ITIL, but formal program design became less of a priority and turned more ad hoc.

    Situation

    • Ad hoc processes created management dissatisfaction around the organization’s ineffective responses to data breaches.
    • Because of the lack of formal process, an entirely new security team needed to be developed, costing people their positions.

    Challenges

    • Lack of criteria to categorize and classify security incidents.
    • Need to overhaul the long-standing but ineffective program means attempting to change mindsets, which can be time consuming.
    • Help desk is not very knowledgeable on security.
    • New incident response program needs to be in alignment with data classification policy and business continuity.
    • Lack of integration with MSSP’s ticketing system.

    Next steps:

    • Need to get stakeholder buy-in for a new program.
    • Begin to establish classification/reporting procedures.

    Follow this case study to Phase 1

    Phase 1

    Prepare

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Phase 1: Prepare

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
    Prepare Operate Optimize

    This phase walks you through the following activities:

    1.1 Establish the drivers, challenges, and benefits.
    1.2 Examine the security incident landscape and trends.
    1.3 Understand your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.
    1.4 Gauge your current process to identify gaps.
    1.5 Formalize a security incident management charter.
    1.6 Identify key players and develop a call escalation tree.
    1.7 Develop a security incident management policy.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • Security team
    • IT staff
    • Business leaders

    Outcomes of this phase

    • Formalized stakeholder support.
    • Security incident management policy.
    • Security incident management charter.
    • Call escalation tree.

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Prepare for Incident Response
    Proposed Time to Completion: 3 Weeks
    Step 1.1-1.3 Understand Incident Response Step 1.4-1.7 Begin Developing Your Program
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
  • Discuss your current incident management status.
  • Review findings with analyst:
  • Review documents.
  • Then complete these activities…
    • Establish your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.
    • Identify the drivers, challenges, and benefits of formalized incident response.
    • Review any existing documentation.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Discuss further incident response requirements.
    • Identify key players for escalation and notifications.
    • Develop the policy.
    • Develop the plan.

    With these tools & templates:
    Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    With these tools & templates:
    Security Incident Management Policy
    Security Incident Management Plan
    Phase 1 Results & Insights:

    Ready-made incident response solutions often contain too much coverage: too many irrelevant cases that are not applicable to the organization are accounted for, making it difficult to sift through all the incidents to find the ones you care about. Develop specific incident use cases that correspond with relevant incidents to quickly identify the response process and eliminate ambiguity when handled by different individuals.

    Ice breaker: What is a security incident for your organization?

    1.1 Whiteboard Exercise – 60 minutes

    How do you classify various incident types between service desk, IT/infrastructure, and security?

    • Populate sticky notes with various incidents and assign them to the appropriate team.
      • Who owns the remediation? When are other groups involved? What is the triage/escalation process?
      • What other groups need to be notified (e.g. cyber insurance, Legal, HR, PR)?
      • Are there dependencies among incidents?
      • What are we covering in the scope of this project?

    Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}417|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $52,224 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 38 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
    • Disaster recovery plan (DRP) documentation is often driven by audit or compliance requirements rather than aimed at the team that would need to execute recovery.
    • Between day-to-day IT projects and the difficulty of maintaining 300+ page manuals, DRP documentation is not updated and quickly becomes unreliable.
    • Inefficient publishing strategies result in your DRP not being accessible during disaster or key staff not knowing where to find the latest version.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • DR documentation fails when organizations try to boil the ocean with an all-in-one plan aimed at auditors, business leaders, and IT. It’s too long, too hard to maintain, and ends up being little more than shelf-ware.
    • Using flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams aimed at an IT audience is more concise and effective in a disaster, quicker to create, and easier to maintain.
    • Create your DRP in layers to keep the work manageable. Start with a recovery workflow to ensure a coordinated response, and build out supporting documentation over time.

    Impact and Result

    • Create visual and concise DR documentation that strips out unnecessary content and is written for an IT audience – the team that would actually be executing the recovery. Your business leaders can take the same approach to create separate business response plans. Don’t mix the two in an all-in-one plan that is not effective for either audience.
    • Determine a documentation distribution strategy that supports ease of maintenance and accessibility during a disaster.
    • Incorporate DRP maintenance into change management procedures to systematically update and refine the DR documentation. Don’t save up changes for a year-end blitz, which turns document maintenance into an onerous project.

    Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should adopt a visual-based DRP, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Streamline DRP documentation

    Start by documenting your recovery workflow. Create supporting documentation in the form of checklists, flowcharts, topology diagrams, and contact lists. Finally, summarize your DR capabilities in a DRP Summary Document for stakeholders and auditors.

    • Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Phase 1: Streamline DRP Documentation

    2. Select the optimal DRP publishing strategy

    Select criteria for assessing DRP tools, and evaluate whether a business continuity management tool, document management solution, wiki site, or manually distributing documentation is best for your DR team.

    • Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Phase 2: Select the Optimal DRP Publishing Strategy
    • DRP Publishing and Document Management Solution Evaluation Tool
    • BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria

    3. Keep your DRP relevant through maintenance best practices

    Learn how to integrate DRP maintenance into core IT processes, and learn what to look for during testing and during annual reviews of your DRP.

    • Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Phase 3: Keep Your DRP Relevant Through Maintenance Best Practices
    • Sample Project Intake Form Addendum for Disaster Recovery
    • Sample Change Management Checklist for Disaster Recovery
    • DRP Review Checklist
    • DRP-BCP Review Workflow (Visio)
    • DRP-BCP Review Workflow (PDF)

    4. Appendix: XMPL Case Study

    Model your DRP after the XMPL case study disaster recovery plan documentation.

    • Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Appendix: XMPL Case Study
    • XMPL DRP Summary Document
    • XMPL Notification, Assessment, and Declaration Plan
    • XMPL Systems Recovery Playbook
    • XMPL Recovery Workflows (Visio)
    • XMPL Recovery Workflows (PDF)
    • XMPL Data Center and Network Diagrams (Visio)
    • XMPL Data Center and Network Diagrams (PDF)
    • XMPL DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool
    • XMPL DRP Workbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Streamline DRP Documentation

    The Purpose

    Teach your team how to create visual-based documentation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Learn how to create visual-based DR documentation.

    Activities

    1.1 Conduct a table-top planning exercise.

    1.2 Document your high-level incident response plan.

    1.3 Identify documentation to include in your playbook.

    1.4 Create an initial collection of supplementary documentation.

    1.5 Discuss what further documentation is necessary for recovering from a disaster.

    1.6 Summarize your DR capabilities for stakeholders.

    Outputs

    Documented high-level incident response plan

    List of documentation action items

    Collection of 1-3 draft checklists, flowcharts, topology diagrams, and contact lists

    Action items for ensuring that the DRP is executable for both primary and backup DR personnel

    DRP Summary Document

    2 Select the Optimal DRP Publishing Strategy

    The Purpose

    Learn the considerations for publishing your DRP.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the best strategy for publishing your DRP.

    Activities

    2.1 Select criteria for assessing DRP tools.

    2.2 Evaluate categories for DRP tools.

    Outputs

    Strategy for publishing DRP

    3 Learn How to Keep Your DRP Relevant Through Maintenance Best Practices

    The Purpose

    Address the common pain point of unmaintained DRPs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create an approach for maintaining your DRP.

    Activities

    3.1 Alter your project intake considerations.

    3.2 Integrate DR considerations into change management.

    3.3 Integrate documentation into performance measurement and performance management.

    3.4 Learn best practices for maintaining your DRP.

    Outputs

    Project Intake Form Addendum Template

    Change Management DRP Checklist Template

    Further reading

    Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan

    Put your DRP on a diet – keep it fit, trim, and ready for action.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    The traditional disaster recovery plan (DRP) “red binder” is dead. It takes too long to create, it’s too hard to maintain, and it’s not usable in a crisis.

    “This blueprint outlines the following key tactics to streamline your documentation effort and produce a better result:

    • Write for an IT audience and focus on how to recover. You don’t need 30 pages of fluff describing the purpose of the document.
    • Use flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams over traditional manuals. This drives documentation that is more concise, easier to maintain, and effective in a crisis.
    • Create your DRP in layers to get tangible results faster, starting with a recovery workflow that outlines your DR strategy, and then build out the specific documentation needed to support recovery.”
    (Frank Trovato, Research Director, Infrastructure, Info-Tech Research Group)

    This project is about DRP documentation after you have clarified your DR strategy; create these necessary inputs first

    These artifacts are the cornerstone for any disaster recovery plan.

    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DR Roles and Responsibilities
    • Recovery Workflow

    Missing a component? Start here. ➔ Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan

    This blueprint walks you through building these inputs.
    Our approach saves clients on average US$16,825.22. (Clients self-reported an average saving of US$16,869.21 while completing the Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan blueprint through advisory calls, guided implementations, or workshops (Info-Tech Research Group, 2017, N=129).)

    How this blueprint will help you document your DRP

    This Research is Designed For:

    • IT managers in charge of disaster recovery planning (DRP) and execution.
    • Organizations seeking to optimize their DRP using best-practice methodology.
    • Business continuity professionals that are involved with disaster recovery.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Divide the process of creating DR documentation into manageable chunks, providing a defined scope for you to work in.
    • Identify an appropriate DRP document management and distribution strategy.
    • Ensure that DR documentation is up to date and accessible.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • IT managers preparing for a DR audit.
    • IT managers looking to incorporate components of DR into an IT operations document.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Follow a structured approach in building DR documentation using best practices.
    • Integrate DR into day-to-day IT operations.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • DR documentation is often driven by audit or compliance requirements, rather than aimed at the team that would need to execute recovery.
    • Traditional DRPs are text-heavy, 300+ page manuals that are simply not usable in a crisis.
    • Compounding the problem, DR documentation is rarely updated, so it’s just shelf-ware.

    Complication

    • DRP is often given lower priority as day-to-day IT projects displace DR documentation efforts.
    • Inefficient publishing strategies result in your DRP not being accessible during disasters or key staff not knowing where to find the latest version.
    • Organizations that create traditional DRPs end up with massive manuals that are difficult to maintain, so they quickly become unreliable.

    Resolution

    • Create visual and concise DR documentation that strips out unnecessary content and is written for an IT audience – the team that would actually be executing the recovery. Your business leaders can take the same approach to create separate business response plans – don’t mix the two into an all-in-one plan that is not effective for either audience.
    • Determine a documentation distribution strategy that supports ease of maintenance and accessibility during a disaster.
    • Incorporate DRP maintenance into change management and project intake procedures to systematically update and refine the DR documentation. Don’t save up changes for a year-end blitz, which turns document maintenance into an onerous project.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. DR documentation fails when organizations try to boil the ocean with an all-in-one plan aimed at auditors, business leaders, and IT. It’s too long, too hard to maintain, and ends up being little more than shelf-ware.
    2. Using flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams aimed at an IT audience is more concise and effective in a disaster, quicker to create, and easier to maintain.
    3. Create your DRP in layers to keep the work manageable. Start with a recovery workflow to ensure a coordinated response, and build out supporting documentation over time.

    An effective DRP that mitigates a wide range of potential outages is critical to minimizing the impact of downtime

    The criticality of having an effective DRP is underestimated.

    Cost of Downtime for the Fortune 1000
    • Cost of unplanned apps downtime per year: $1.25B to $2.5B
    • Cost of critical apps failure per hour: $500,000 to $1M
    • Cost of infrastructure failure per hour: $100,000
    • 35% reported to have recovered within 12 hours.
    • 17% of infrastructure failures took more than 24 hours to recover.
    • 13% of application failures took more than 24 hours to recover.
    Size of Impact Increasing Across Industries
    • The cost of downtime is rising across the board and not just for organizations that traditionally depend on IT (e.g. e-commerce).
    • Downtime cost increase since 2010:
      • Hospitality: 129% increase
      • Transportation: 108% increase
      • Media organizations: 104% increase
    Potential Lost Revenue
    A line graph of Potential Lost Revenue with vertical axis 'LOSS ($)' and horizontal axis 'TIME'. The line starts with low losses near the origin where 'Incident Occurs', gradually accelerates to higher losses as time passes, then decelerates before 'All Revenue Lost'. Note: 'Delay in recovery causes exponential revenue loss'.
    (Adapted from: Rothstein, Philip Jan. Disaster Recovery Testing: Exercising Your Contingency Plan (2007 Edition).)

    The impact of downtime increases significantly over time, not just in terms of lost revenue (as illustrated here) but also goodwill/reputation and health/safety. An effective DR solution and overall resiliency that mitigate a wide range of potential outages are critical to minimizing the impact of downtime.

    Without an effective DRP, your organization is gambling on being able to define and implement a recovery strategy during a time of crisis. At the very least, this means extended downtime – potentially weeks – and substantial impact.

    Only 38% of those with a full or mostly complete DRP believe their DRPs would be effective in a real crisis

    Organizations continue to struggle with creating DRPs, let alone making them actionable.

    Why are so many living with either an incomplete or ineffective DRP? For the same reasons that IT documentation in general continues to be a pain point:

    • It is an outdated model of what documentation should be – the traditional manual with detailed (lengthy) descriptions and procedures.
    • Despite the importance of DR, low priority is placed on creating a DRP and the day-to-day SOPs required to support a recovery.
    • There is a lack of effective processes for ensuring documentation stays up to date.
    A bar graph documenting percentages of survey responses about the completeness of their DRP. 'Only 20% of survey respondents indicated they have a complete DRP'. 13% said 'No DRP'. 33% said 'Partial DRP'. 34% said 'Mostly Completed'. 20% said 'Full DRP'.
    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=165)
    A bar graph documenting percentages of survey responses about the level of confidence in their DRP. 'Only 38% of those who have a mostly completed or full DRP actually feel it would be effective in a crisis'. 4% said 'Low'. 58% said 'Unsure'. 38% said 'Confident'.
    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=69 (includes only those who indicated DRP is mostly completed or completed))

    Improve usability and effectiveness with visual-based and more-concise documentation

    Choose flowcharts over process guides, checklists over lengthy procedures, and diagrams over descriptions.

    If you need a three-inch binder to hold your DRP, imagine having to flip through it to determine next steps during a crisis.

    DR documentation needs to be concise, scannable, and quickly understood to be effective. Visual-based documentation meets these requirements, so it’s no surprise that it also leads to higher DR success.

    DR success scores are based on:

    • Meeting recovery time objectives (RTOs).
    • Meeting recovery point objectives (RPOs).
    • IT staff’s confidence in their ability to meet RTOs/RPOs.
    A line graph of DR documentation types and their effectiveness. The vertical axis is 'DR Success', from Low to High. The horizontal axis is Documentation Type, from 'Traditional Manual' to 'Primarily flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams'. The line trends up to higher success with visual-based and more-concise documentation.(Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=95)

    “Without question, 300-page DRPs are not effective. I mean, auditors love them because of the detail, but give me a 10-page DRP with contact lists, process flows, diagrams, and recovery checklists that are easy to follow.” (Bernard Jones, MBCI, CBCP, CORP, Manager Disaster Recovery/BCP, ActiveHealth Management)

    Maintainability is another argument for visual-based, concise documentation

    There are two end goals for your DR documentation: effectiveness and maintainability. Without either, you will not have success during a disaster.

    Organizations using a visual-based approach were 30% more likely to find that DR documentation is easy to maintain. “Easy to maintain” leads to a 46% higher rate of DR success.
    Two bar graphs documenting survey responses regarding maintenance ease of DR documentation types. The first graph compares Traditional Manual vs Visual-based. For 'Traditional Manual' 72% responded they were Difficult to maintain while 28% responded they were Easy to maintain; for 'Visual-based' 42% responded they were Difficult to maintain while 58% responded they were Easy to maintain. Visual-based DR documentation received 30% more votes for Easy to Maintain. The second graph compares success rates of 'Difficult to Maintain' vs 'Easy to Maintain' DR documentation with Difficult being 31% and Easy being 77%, a 46% difference. 'Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=96'.

    Not only are visual-based disaster recovery plans more effective, but they are also easier to maintain.

    Overcome documentation inertia with a tiered model that allows you to eat the elephant one bite at a time

    Start with a recovery workflow to at least ensure a coordinated response. Then use that workflow to determine required supporting documentation.

    Recovery Workflow: Starting the project with overly detailed documentation can slow down the entire process. Overcome planning inertia by starting with high-level incident response plans in a flowchart format. For examples and additional information, see XMPL Medical’s Recovery Workflows.

    Recovery Procedures (Systems Recovery Playbook): For each step in the high-level flowchart, create recovery procedures where necessary using additional flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams as appropriate. Leverage Info-Tech’s Systems Recovery Playbook example as a starting point.

    Additional Reference Documentation: Reference existing IT documentation, such as network diagrams and configuration documents, as well as more detailed step-by-step procedures where necessary (e.g. vendor documentation), particularly where needed to support alternate recovery staff who may not be as well versed as the primary system owners.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations that use flowcharts, checklist, and diagrams over traditional, dense DRP manuals are far more likely to meet their RTOs/RPOs because their documentation is more usable and easier to maintain.

    Use a DRP summary document to satisfy executives, auditors, and clients

    Stakeholders don’t have time to sift through a pile of paper. Summarize your overall continuity capabilities in one, easy-to-read place.

    DRP Summary Document

    • Summarize BIA results
    • Summarize DR strategy (including DR sites)
    • Summarize backup strategy
    • Summarize testing and maintenance plans

    Follow Info-Tech’s methodology to make DRP documentation efficient and effective

    Phases

    Phase 1: Streamline DRP documentation Phase 2: Select the optimal DRP publishing strategy Phase 3: Keep your DRP relevant through maintenance best practices

    Phases

    1.1

    Start with a recovery workflow

    2.1

    Decide on a publishing strategy

    3.1

    Incorporate DRP maintenance into core IT processes

    1.2

    Create supporting DRP documentation

    3.2

    Conduct an annual focused review

    1.3

    Write the DRP Summary

    Tools and Templates

    End-to-End Sample DRP DRP Publishing Evaluation Tool Project In-take/Request Form

    Change Management Checklist

    Follow XMPL Medical’s journey through DR documentation

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Healthcare
    Source Created by amalgamating data from Info-Tech’s client base

    Streamline your documentation and maintenance process by following the approach outlined in XMPL Medical’s journey to an end-to-end DRP.

    Outline of the Disaster Recovery Plan

    XMPL’s disaster recovery plan includes its business impact analysis and a subset of tier 1 and tier 2 patient care applications.

    Its DRP includes incident response flowcharts, system recovery checklists, and a communication plan. Its DRP also references IT operations documentation (e.g. asset management documents, system specs, and system configuration docs), but this material is not published with the example documentation.

    Resulting Disaster Recovery Plan

    XMPL’s DRP includes actionable documents in the form of high-level disaster response plan flowcharts and system recovery checklists. During an incident, the DR team is able to clearly see the items for which they are responsible.

    Disaster Recovery Plan
    • Recovery Workflow
    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DRP Summary
    • System Recovery Checklists
    • Communication, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    XMPL Medical’s disaster recovery plan illustrates an effective DRP. Model your end-to-end disaster recovery plan after XMPL’s completed templates. The specific data points will differ from organization to organization, but the structure of each document will be similar.

    Model your disaster recovery documentation off of our example

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Healthcare
    Source Created by amalgamating data from Info-Tech’s client base

    Recovery Workflow:

    • Recovery Workflows (PDF, VSDX)

    Recovery Procedures (Systems Recovery Playbook):

    • DR Notification, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan
    • Systems Recovery Playbook
    • Network Topology Diagrams

    Additional Reference Documentation:

    • DRP Workbook
    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DRP Summary Document

    Use Info-Tech’s DRP Maturity Scorecard to evaluate your progress

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Project Overview

    1. Streamline DRP Documentation 2. Select the Optimal DRP Publishing Strategy 3. Keep Your DRP Relevant
    Supporting Tool icon
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Start with a recovery workflow

    1.2 Create supporting DRP documentation

    1.3 Write the DRP summary

    2.1 Create Committee Profiles

    3.1 Build Governance Structure Map

    3.2 Create Committee Profiles

    Guided Implementations
    • Review Info-Tech’s approach to DRP documentation.
    • Create a high-level recovery workflow.
    • Create supporting DRP documentation.
    • Write the DRP summary.
    • Identify criteria for selecting a DRP publishing strategy.
    • Select a DRP publishing strategy.
    • Optional: Select requirements for a BCM tool and issue an RFP.
    • Optional: Review responses to RFP.
    • Learn best practices for integrating DRP maintenance into day-to-day IT processes.
    • Learn best practices for DRP-focused reviews.
    Associated Activity icon
    Onsite Workshop
    Module 1:
    Streamline DRP documentation
    Module 2:
    Select the optimal DRP publishing strategy
    Module 3:
    Learn best practices for keeping your DRP relevant
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • A complete end-to-end DRP
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • Selection of a publishing and management tool for your DRP documentation
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • Strategy for maintaining your DRP documentation

    Workshop Overview Associated Activity icon

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Info-Tech Analysts Finalize Deliverables
    Activities
    Assess DRP Maturity and Review Current Capabilities

    0.1 Assess current DRP maturity through Info-Tech’s Maturity Scorecard.

    0.2 Identify the IT systems that support mission-critical business activities, and select 2 or 3 key applications to be the focus of the workshop.

    0.3 Identify current recovery strategies for selected applications.

    0.4 Identify current DR challenges for selected applications.

    Document Your Recovery Workflow

    1.1 Create a recovery workflow: review tabletop planning, walk through DR scenarios, identify DR gaps, and determine how to fill them.

    Create Supporting Documentation

    1.2 Create supporting DRP documentation.

    1.3 Write the DRP summary.

    Establish a DRP Publishing, Management, and Maintenance Strategy

    2.1 Decide on a publishing strategy.

    3.1 Incorporate DRP maintenance into core IT.

    3.2 Considerations for reviewing your DRP regularly.

    Deliverables
    1. Baseline DRP metric (based on DRP Maturity Scorecard)
    1. High-level DRP workflow
    2. DRP gaps and risks identified
    1. Recovery workflow and/or checklist for sample of IT systems
    2. Customized DRP Summary Template
    1. Strategy for selecting a DRP publishing tool
    2. DRP management and maintenance strategy
    3. Workshop summary presentation deck

    Workshop Goal: Learn how to document and maintain your DRP.

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.


    Phase 1: Streamline DRP Documentation

    Step 1.1: Start with a recovery workflow

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 3.1 3.2
    Start with a Recovery Workflow Create Supporting Documentation Write the DRP Summary Select DRP Publishing Strategy Integrate into Core IT Processes Conduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Review a model DRP.
    • Review your recovery workflow.
    • Identify documentation required to support the recovery workflow.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner
    • System SMEs
    • Alternate DR Personnel

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding the visual-based, concise approach to DR documentation.
    • Creating a recovery workflow that provides a roadmap for coordinating incident response and identifying required supporting documentation.

    Info-Tech Insights

    A DRP is a collection of procedures and supporting documents that allow an organization to recover its IT services to minimize system downtime for the business.

    1.1 — Start with a recovery workflow to ensure a coordinated response and identify required supporting documentation

    The recovery workflow clarifies your DR strategy and ensures the DR team is on the same page.

    Recovery Workflow

    The recovery workflow maps out the incident response plan from event detection, assessment, and declaration to systems recovery and validation.

    This documentation includes:

    • Clarifying initial incident response steps.
    • Clarifying the order of systems recovery and which recovery actions can occur concurrently.
    • Estimating actual recovery timeline through each stage of recovery.
    Recovery Procedures (Playbook)
    Additional Reference Documentation

    “We use flowcharts for our declaration procedures. Flowcharts are more effective when you have to explain status and next steps to upper management.” (Assistant Director-IT Operations, Healthcare Industry)

    Review business impact analysis (BIA) results to plan your recovery workflow

    The BIA defines system criticality from the business’s perspective. Use it to guide system recovery order.

    Specifically, review the following from your BIA:

    • The list of tier 1, 2, and 3 applications. This will dictate the recovery order in your recovery workflow.
    • Application dependencies. This will outline what needs to be included as part of an application recovery workflow.
    • The recovery time objective (RTO) and recovery point objective (RPO) for each application. This will also guide the recovery, and enable you to identify gaps where the recovery workflow does not meet RTOs and RPOs.

    CASE STUDY: The XMPL DRP documentation is based on this Business Impact Analysis Tool.

    Haven’t conducted a BIA? Use Info-Tech’s streamlined approach.

    Info-Tech’s publication Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan takes a very practical approach to BIA work. Our process gives IT leaders a mechanism to quickly get agreement on system recovery order and DR investment priorities.

    Conduct a tabletop planning exercise to determine your recovery workflow

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.1 Tabletop Planning Exercise

    1. Define a scenario to drive the tabletop planning exercise:
      • Use a scenario that forces a full failover to your DR environment, so you can capture an end-to-end recovery workflow.
      • Avoid scenarios that impact health and safety such as tornados or a fire. You want to focus on IT recovery.
      • Example scenarios: Burst water pipe that causes data-center-wide damage or a gas leak that forces evacuation and power to be shut down for at least two days.

    Note: You may have already completed this exercise as part of Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use scenarios to provide context for DR planning, and to test your plans, but don’t create a separate plan for every possibility.

    The high-level recovery plan will be the same whether the incident is a fire, flood, or tornado. While there might be some variances and outliers, these scenarios can be addressed by adding decision points and/or separate, supplementary instructions.

    Walk through the scenario and capture the recovery workflow

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 Tabletop Planning Exercise
    1. Capture the following information for tier 1, tier 2, and tier 3 systems:
      1. On white cue cards, record the steps and track start and end times for each step (where 00:00 is when the incident occurred).
      2. On yellow cue cards, document gaps in people, process, and technology requirements to complete the step.
      3. On red cue cards, indicate risks (e.g. no backup person for a key staff member).

    Note:

    • Ensure the language is sufficiently genericized (e.g. refer to events, not specifically a burst water pipe).
    • Review isolated failures (e.g. hardware, software). Typically, the recovery procedure documented for individual systems covers the essence of the recovery workflow whether it’s just the one system that failed or it’s part of a site-wide recovery.

    Note: You may have already completed this exercise as part of Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan.

    Document your current-state recovery workflow based on the results of the tabletop planning

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1.2 Incident Response Plan Flowcharts, Tabs 2 and 3

    After you finish the tabletop planning exercise, the steps on the set of cue cards define your recovery workflow. Capture this in a flowchart format.

    Use the sample DRP to guide your own flowchart. Some notes on the example are:

    • XMPL’s Incident Management to DR flowchart shows the connection between its standard Service Desk processes and DR processes.
    • XMPL’s high-level workflows outline its recovery of tier 1, 2, and 3 systems.
    • Where more detail is required, include links to supporting documentation. In this example, XMPL Medical includes links to its Systems Recovery Playbook.
    Preview of an Info-Tech Template depicting a sample flowchart.

    This sample flowchart is included in XMPL Recovery Workflows.

    Step 1.2: Create Supporting DRP Documentation

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Create checklists for your playbook.
    • Document more complex procedures with flowcharts.
    • Gather and/or write network topology diagrams.
    • Compile a contact list.
    • Ensure there is enough material for backup personnel.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner
    • System SMEs
    • Backup DR Personnel

    Outcomes of this step

    • Actionable supporting documentation for your disaster recovery plan.
    • Contact list for IT personnel, business personnel, and vendor support.

    1.2 — Create supporting documentation for your disaster recovery plan

    Now that you have a high-level incident response plan, collect the information you need for executing that plan.

    Recovery Workflow

    Write your recovery procedures playbook to be effective and usable. Your playbook documentation should include:

    • Supplementary flowcharts
    • Checklists
    • Topology diagrams
    • Contact lists
    • DRP summary

    Reference vendors’ technical information in your flowcharts and checklists where appropriate.

    Recovery Procedures (Playbook)

    Additional Reference Documentation

    Info-Tech Insight

    Write for your audience. The playbook is for IT; include only the information they need to execute the plan. DRP summaries are for executives and auditors; do not include information intended for IT. Similarly, your disaster recovery plan is not for business units; keep BCP content out of your DRP.

    Use checklists to streamline step-by-step procedures

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2.1 XMPL Medical’s System Recovery Checklists

    Checklists are ideal when staff just need a reminder of what to do, not how to do it.

    XMPL Medical used its high-level flowcharts as a roadmap for creating its Systems Recovery Playbook.

    • Since its Playbook is intended for experienced IT staff, the writing style in the checklists is concise. XMPL includes links to reference material to support recovery, especially for alternate staff who might need additional instruction.
    • XMPL includes key parameters (e.g. IP addresses) rather than assume those details would be memorized, especially in a stressful DR scenario.
    • Similarly, include links to other useful resources such as VM templates.
    Preview of the Info-Tech Template 'Systems Recovery Playbook'.

    Included in the XMPL Systems Recovery Playbook are checklists for recovering XMPL’s virtual desktop infrastructure, mission-critical applications, and core infrastructure components.

    Use flowcharts to document processes with concurrent tasks not easily captured in a checklist

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2.2 XMPL Medical’s Phone Services Recovery Flowchart

    Recovery procedures can consist of flowcharts, checklists, or both, as well as diagrams. The main goal is to be clear and concise.

    • XMPL Medical created a flowchart to capture its phone services recovery procedure to capture concurrent tasks.
    • Additional instructions, where required, could still be captured in a Playbook checklist or other supporting documentation.
    • The flowchart could have also included key settings or other details as appropriate, particularly if the DR team chose to maintain this recovery procedure just in a flowchart format.
    Preview of the Info-Tech Template 'Recovery Workflows'.

    Included in the XMPL DR documentation is an example flowchart for recovering phone systems. This flowchart is in Recovery Workflows.

    Reference this blueprint for more SOP flowchart examples: Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

    Use topology diagrams to capture network layout, integrations, and system information

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2.4 XMPL Medical’s Data Center and Network Diagrams

    Topology diagrams, key checklists, and configuration settings are often enough for experienced networking staff to carry out their DR tasks.

    • XMPL Medical includes these diagrams with its DRP. Instead of recreating these diagrams, the XMPL Medical DR Manager asked their network team for these diagrams:
      • Primary data center diagram
      • DR site diagram
      • High-level network diagrams
    • Often, organizations already have network topology diagrams for reference purposes.

    “Our network engineers came to me and said our standard SOP template didn't work for them. They're now using a lot of diagrams and flowcharts, and that has worked out better for them.” (Assistant Director-IT Operations, Healthcare Industry)

    Preview of the Info-Tech Template 'Systems Recovery Playbook'.

    You can download a PDF and a VSD version of these Data Center and Network Diagrams from Info-Tech’s website.

    Create a list of organizational, IT, and vendor contacts that may be required to assist with recovery

    If there is something strange happening to your IT infrastructure, who you gonna call?

    Many DR managers have their team on speed dial. However, having the contact info of alternate staff, BCP leads, and vendors can be very helpful during a disaster. XMPL Medical lists the following information in its DRP Workbook:

    • The DR Teams, SMEs critical to disaster recovery, their backups, and key contacts (e.g. BC Management team leads, vendor contacts) that would be involved in:
      • Declaring a disaster.
      • Coordinating a response at an organizational level.
      • Executing recovery.
    • The people that have authority to declare a disaster.
    • Each person’s spending authority.
    • The rules for delegating authority.
    • Primary and alternate staff for each role.
    Example list of alternate staff, BCP leads, and vendors.

    Confirm with your DR team that you have all of the documentation that you need to recover during a disaster

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.7 Group Discussion

    DISCUSS: Is there enough information in your DRP for both primary and backup DR personnel?

    • Is it clear who is responsible for each DR task, including notification steps?
    • Have alternate staff for each role been identified?
    • Does the recovery workflow capture all of the high-level steps?
    • Is there enough documentation for alternate staff (e.g. network specs)?

    Step 1.3: Write the DRP Summary

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Write a DRP summary document.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner

    Outcomes of this step

    • High-level outline of your DRP capabilities for stakeholders such as executives, auditors, and clients.

    Summarize your DR capabilities using a DRP summary document

    Supporting Tool icon 1.3.1 DRP Summary Document

    The sample included on Info-Tech’s website is customized for the XMPL Medical Case Study – use the download as a starting point for your own summary document.

    DRP Summary Document

    XMPL’s DRP Summary is organized into the following categories:

    • DR requirements: This includes a summary of scope, business impact analysis (BIA), risk assessment, and high-level RTOs and achievable RTOs.
    • DR strategy: This includes a summary of XMPL’s recovery procedures, DR site, and backup strategy.
    • Testing and maintenance: This includes a summary of XMPL’s DRP testing and maintenance strategy.

    Be transparent about existing business risks in your DRP summary

    The DRP summary document is business facing. Include information of which business leaders (and other stakeholders) need to be aware.

    • Discrepancies between desired and achievable RTOs? Organizational leadership needs to know this information. Only then can they assign the resources and budget that IT needs to achieve the desired DR capabilities.
    • What is the DRP’s scope? XMPL Medical lists the IT components that will be recovered during a disaster, and components which will not. For instance, XMPL’s DRP does not recover medical equipment, and XMPL has separate plans for business continuity and emergency response coordination.
    Application tier Desired RTO (hh:mm) Desired RPO (hh:mm) Achievable RTO (hh:mm) Achievable RPO (hh:mm)
    Tier 1 4:00 1:00 *90:00 1:00
    Tier 2 8:00 1:00 *40:00 1:00
    Tier 3 48:00 24:00 *96:00 24:00

    The above table to is a snippet from the XMPL DR Summary Document (section 2.1.3.2).

    In the example, the DR team is unable to recover tier 1, 2, and 3 systems within the desired RTO. As such, they clearly communicate this information in the DRP summary, and include action items to address these gaps.

    Phase 2: Select the Optimal DRP Publishing Strategy

    Step 2.1: Select a DRP Publishing Strategy

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Select criteria for assessing DRP tools.
    • Evaluate categories for DRP tools.
    • Optional: Write an RFP for a BCM tool.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner

    Outcomes of this step

    • Identified strategies for publishing your DRP (i.e. making it available to your DR team).

    Info-Tech Insights

    Diversify your publishing strategy to ensure you can access your DRP in a disaster. For example, if you are using a BCM tool or SharePoint Online as your primary documentation repository, also push the DRP to your DR team’s smartphones as a backup in case the disaster affects internet access.

    2.1 — Select a DR publishing and document management strategy that fits your organization

    Publishing and document management considerations:

    Portability/External Access: Assume your primary site is down and inaccessible. Can you still access your documentation? As shown in this chart, traditional strategies of either keeping a copy at another location (e.g. at the failover site) or with staff (e.g. on a USB drive) still dominate, but these aren’t necessarily the best options.
    A bar chart titled 'Portability Strategy Popularity'. 'External Website (wiki site, cloud-based DRP tool, etc.)' scored 16%. 'Failover Site (network drive or redundant SharePoint, etc.)' scored 53%. 'Distribute to Staff (use USB drive, personal email, etc.)' scored 50%. 'Not Accessible Offsite' scored 7%.
    Note: Percentages total more than 100% due to respondents using more than one portability strategy.
    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=118)
    Maintainability/Usability: How easy is it to create, update, and use the documentation? Is it easy to link to other documents as shown in the flowchart and checklist examples? Is there version control? Lack of version control can create a maintenance nightmare as well as issues in a crisis if staff are questioning whether they have the right version.
    Cost/Effort: Is the cost and effort appropriate? For example, a large enterprise may need a formal solution (e.g. DRP tools or SharePoint), but the cost might be hard to justify for a smaller company.

    Pros and cons of potential strategies

    This section will review the following strategies, their pros and cons, and how they meet publishing and document management requirements:

    • DRP tools (e.g. eBRP, Recovery Planner, LDRPS)
    • In-house solutions combining SharePoint and MS Office (or equivalent)
    • Wiki site
    • “Manual” approaches such as storing documents on a USB drive

    Avoid 42 hours of downtime due to a non-diversified publishing strategy

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Municipality
    Source Interview

    Situation

    • A municipal government has recently completed an end-to-end disaster recovery plan.
    • The team is feeling good about the fact that they were able to identify:
      • Relative criticality of applications.
      • Dependencies for each application.
      • Incident response plans for the current state and desired state.
      • System recovery procedures.

    Challenge

    • While the DR plan itself was comprehensive, the team only published the DR onto the government’s network drives.
    • A power generation issue caused power to be shut down, which in turn cascaded into downtime for the network.
    • Once the network was down, their DRP was inaccessible.

    Insights

    • Each piece of documentation that was created could have contributed to recovery efforts. However, because they were inaccessible, there was a delayed response to the incident. The result was 42 hours of downtime for end users.
    • Having redundant publishing strategies is just like having redundant IT infrastructure. In the event of downtime, not only do you need to have DR documentation, but you also need to make sure that it is accessible.

    Decide on a DR publishing strategy by looking at portability, maintainability, cost, and required effort

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1.1 DRP Publishing and Management Evaluation Tool

    Use the information included in Step 2.1 to guide your analysis of DRP publishing solutions.

    The tool enables you to compare two possible solutions based on these key considerations discussed in this section:

    • Portability/external access
    • Maintainability/usability
    • Cost
    • Effort

    The right choice will depend on factors such as current in-house tools, maturity around document management, the size of your IT department, and so on.

    For example, a small shop may do very well with the USB drive strategy, whereas a multi-national company will need a more formal strategy to manage consistent DRP distribution.

    Preview of Info-Tech's 'DRP Publishing and Management Solution Evaluation Tool'.

    The DRP Publishing and Management Solution Evaluation Tool helps you to evaluate the tools included in this section.

    Don’t think of a business continuity management (BCM) tool as a silver bullet; know what you’re getting out of it

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Typically a SaaS option provides built-in external access with appropriate security and user administration to vary access rights.
    • Cons: Degree of external access is often dependent on the vendor.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: Built-in templates encourage consistency and guide initial content development by indicating what details need to be captured.
    • Pros: Built-in document management (e.g. version control, metadata support), centralized access/navigation to required documents, and some automation (e.g. update contacts throughout the system).
    • Cons: Not a silver bullet. You still have to do the work to define and capture your processes.
    • Cons: Requires end-user and administrator training.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: For large enterprises, the convenience of built-in document management and templates can outweigh the cost.
    • Cons: Expect leading DRP tools to cost $20K or more per year.

    About this approach:
    BCM tools are solutions that provide templates, tools, and document management to create BC and DR documentation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The business case for a BCM tool is built by answering the following questions:

    • Will the BCM tool solve an unmet need?
    • Will the tool be more effective and efficient than an in-house solution?
    • Will the solution provide enhanced capabilities that an in-house solution cannot provide?

    If you cannot get a satisfactory answer to each of these questions, then opt for an in-house solution.

    “We explored a DRP tool, and it was something we might have used, but it was tens of thousands of pounds per year, so it didn’t stack up financially for us at all.” (Rik Toms, Head of Strategy – IP and IT, Cable and Wireless Communications)

    For in-house solutions, leverage tools such as SharePoint to provide document management capabilities

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: SharePoint is commonly web-enabled and supports external access with appropriate security and user administration.
    • Cons: Must be installed at redundant sites or be cloud-based to be effective in a crisis that takes down your primary data center.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: Built-in document management (e.g. version control, metadata support) as well as centralized access/navigation to required documents.
    • Pros: No tool learning curve – SharePoint and MS Office would be existing solutions already used on a daily basis.
    • Cons: No built-in automation (e.g. automated updates to contacts throughout the system).
    • Cons: Consistency depends on creating templates and implementing processes for document updates, review, and approval.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: Using existing tools, so this is a sunk cost in terms of capex.
    • Cons: Additional effort required to create templates and manage the documentation library.

    About this approach:
    DRPs and SOPs most often start as MS Office documents, even if there is a DRP tool available. For organizations that elect to bypass a formal DRP tool, and most do, the biggest gap they have to overcome is document management.

    Many organizations are turning to SharePoint to meet this need. For those that already have SharePoint in place, it makes sense to further leverage SharePoint for DR documentation and day-to-day SOPs.

    For SharePoint to be a practical solution, the documentation must still be accessible if the primary data center is down, e.g. by having redundant SharePoint instances at multiple in-house locations, or using a cloud-based SharePoint solution.

    “Just about everything that a DR planning tool does, you can do yourself using homegrown solutions or tools that you're already familiar with such as Word, Excel, and SharePoint.” (Allen Zuk, President and CEO, Sierra Management Consulting)

    A healthcare company uses SharePoint as its DRP and SOP documentation management solution

    CASE STUDY Healthcare

    • This organization is responsible for 50 medical facilities across three states.
    • It explored DRP tools, but didn’t find the right fit, so it has developed an in-house solution based in SharePoint. While DRP tools have improved, the organization no longer needs that type of solution. Its in-house solution is meeting its needs.
    • It has SharePoint instances at multiple locations to ensure availability if one site is down.

    Documentation Strategy

    • Created an IT operations library in SharePoint for DR and SOPs, from basic support to bare-metal restore procedures.
    • SOPs are linked from SharePoint to the virtual help desk for greater accessibility.
    • Where practical, diagrams and flowcharts are used, e.g. DR process flowcharts and network services SOPs dominated by diagrams and flowcharts.

    Management Strategy

    • Directors and the CIO have made finishing off SOPs their performance improvement objective for the year. The result is staff have made time to get this work done.
    • Status updates are posted monthly, and documentation is a regular agenda item in leadership meetings.
    • Regular tabletop testing validates documentation and ensures familiarity with procedures, including where to find required information.

    Results

    • Dependency on a few key individuals has been reduced. All relevant staff know what they need to do and where to access required documentation.
    • SOPs are enabling DR training as well as day-to-day operations training for new staff.
    • The organization has a high confidence in its ability to recovery from a disaster within established timelines.

    Explore using a wiki site as an inexpensive alternative to SharePoint and other content management solutions

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Wiki sites can support external access as with any web solution.
    • Cons: Must be installed at redundant sites, hosted, or cloud-based to be effective in a crisis that takes down your primary data center.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: Built-in document management (version control, metadata support, etc.) as well as centralized access/navigation to required information.
    • Pros: Authorized users can make updates dynamically, depending on how much restriction you have on the site.
    • Cons: No built-in automation (e.g. automated updates to contacts throughout the system).
    • Cons: Consistency depends on creating templates and implementing processes for document updates, review, and approval.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: An inexpensive option compared to traditional content management solutions such as SharePoint.
    • Cons: Learning curve if wikis are new to your organization.

    About this approach:
    Wiki sites are websites where users collaborate to create and edit the content. Wikipedia is an example.

    While wiki sites are typically used for collaboration and dynamic content development, the traditional collaborative authoring model can be restricted to provide structure and an approval process.

    Several tools are available to create and manage wiki sites (and other collaboration solutions), as outlined in the following research:

    Info-Tech Insight

    If your organization is not already using wiki sites, this technology can introduce a culture shock. Start slow by using a wiki site within a specific department or for a particular project. Then evaluate how well your staff adapt to this technology as well as its potential effectiveness in your organization. Refer to our collaboration strategy research for additional guidance.

    For small IT shops, distributing documentation to key staff (e.g. via a USB drive) can still be effective

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Appropriate staff have the documentation with them; there is no need to log into a remote site or access a tool to get at the information.
    • Cons: Relies on staff to be diligent about ensuring they have the latest documentation and keep it with them (not leave it in their desk drawer).
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: With this strategy, MS Office (or equivalent) is used to create and maintain the documentation, so there is no learning curve.
    • Pros: Simple, straightforward methodology – keep the master on a network drive, and download a copy to your USB drive.
    • Cons: No built-in automation (e.g. automated updates to contact information) or document management (e.g. version control).
    • Cons: Consistency depends on creating templates and implementing rigid processes for document updates, review, and approval.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: Little to no cost and no tool management required.
    • Cons: “Manual” document management requires strict attention to process for version control, updates, approvals, and distribution.

    About this approach:
    With this strategy, your ERT and key IT staff keep a copy of your DRP and relevant documentation with them (e.g. on a USB drive). If the primary site experiences a major event, they have ready access to the documentation.

    Fifty percent of respondents in our recent survey use this strategy. A common scenario is to use a shared network drive or a solution such as SharePoint as the master centralized repository, but distribute a copy to key staff.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This approach can have similar disadvantages as using hard copies. Ensuring the USB drives are up to date, and that all staff who might need access have a copy, can become a burdensome process. More often, USB drives are updated periodically, so there is the risk that the information will be out of date or incomplete.

    Avoid extensive use of paper copies of DR documentation

    DR documents need to be easy to update, accessible from anywhere, and searchable. Paper doesn’t meet these needs.

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Does not rely on technology or power.
    • Cons: Requires all staff who might be involved in a DR to have a copy, and to have it with them at all times, to truly have access at any time from anywhere.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: In terms of usability, again there is no dependence on technology.
    • Cons: Updates need to be printed and distributed to all relevant staff every time there is a change to ensure staff have access to the latest, most accurate documentation if a disaster occurred. You can’t schedule disasters, so information needs to be current all the time.
    • Cons: Navigation to other information is manual – flipping through pages, etc. No searching or hyperlinks.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: No technology system to maintain, aside from what you use for printing.
    • Cons: Printing expenses are actually among the highest incurred by organizations, and this adds to it.
    • Cons: Labor intensive due to need to print and physically distribute documentation updates.

    About this approach:
    Traditionally DRPs are printed and distributed to managers and/or kept in a central location at both the primary site and a secondary site. In addition, wallet cards are distributed that contain key information such as contact numbers.

    A wallet card or even a few printed copies of your high-level DRP for general reference can be helpful, but paper is not a practical solution for your overall DR documentation library, particularly when you include SOPs for recovery procedures.

    One argument in favor of paper is there is no dependency on power during a crisis. However, in a power outage, staff can use smartphones and potentially laptops (with battery power) to access electronically stored documentation to get through first response steps. In addition, your DR site should have backup power to be an appropriate recovery site.

    Optional: Partial list of BCM tool vendors

    A partial list of BCM tool vendors, including: Business Protector, catalyst, clearview, ContinuityLogic. Fusion, Logic Manager, Quantivate, RecoveryPlanner.com, MetricStream, SimpleRisk, riskonnect, Strategic BCP - ResilienceONE, RSA, and Sungard Availability Services.

    The list is only a partial list of BCM tool vendors. The order in which vendors are presented, and inclusion in this list, does not represent an endorsement.

    Optional: Use our list of requirements as a foundation for selecting and reviewing BCM tools

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1.2 BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria

    If a BCM tool is the best option for your environment, expedite the evaluation process with our BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria.

    Through advisory services, workshops, and consulting engagements, we have created this BCM Tool Requirements List. The featured requirements includes the following categories:

    1. Integrations
    2. Planning and Monitoring
    3. Administration
    4. Architecture
    5. Security
    6. Support and Training
    Preview of the Info-Tech template 'BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria'.

    This BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria can be appended to an RFP. You can leverage Info-Tech’s RFP Template if your organization does not have one.

    Info-Tech can write full RFPs

    As part of a consulting engagement, Info-Tech can write RFPs for BCM tools and provide a customized scoring tool based on your environment’s unique requirements.

    Phase 3: Keep Your DRP Relevant Through Maintenance Best Practices

    Step 3.1: Integrate DRP maintenance into core IT processes

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Integrate DRP maintenance with Project Management.
    • Integrate DRP considerations into Change Management.
    • Integrate with Performance Management.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner
    • Head of Project Management Office
    • Head of Change Advisory Board
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    • Updated project intake form.
    • Updated change management practice.
    • Updated performance appraisals.

    3.1 — Incorporate DRP maintenance into core IT processes

    Focusing on these three processes will help ensure that your plan stays current, accurate, and usable.

    The Info-Tech / COBIT5 'IT Management and Governance Framework' with three processes highlighted: 'MEA01 Performance Measurement', 'BAI06 Change Management', and 'BAI01 Project Management'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Prioritize quick wins that will have large benefits. The advice presented in this section offers easy ways to help keep your DRP up to date. These simple solutions can save a lot of time and effort for your DRP team as opposed to more intricate changes to the processes above.

    Assess how new projects impact service criticality and DR requirements upfront during project intake

    Icon for process 'BAI01 Project Management'.
    Supporting Tool icon 3.1.1 Sample Project Intake Form Addendum

    Understand the RTO/RPO requirements and IT impacts for new or enhanced services to ensure appropriate provisioning and overall DRP updates.

    • Have submitters include service continuity requirements. This information can be inserted into your business impact analysis. Use similar language that you use in your own BIA.
      • The submitter should know how critical the resulting project will be. Any items that the submitter doesn’t know, the Project Steering Committee should investigate.
    • Have IT assess the impact on the DRP. The submitter will not know how the DRP will be impacted directly. Ask the project committee to consider how DRP documentation and the DR environment will need to be changed due to the project under consideration.

    Note: The goal is not to make DR a roadblock, but rather to ensure project requirements will be met – including availability and DR requirements.

    Preview of the Info-Tech template 'Project Intake Form'.

    This Project Intake Form asks the submitter to fill out the availability and criticality requirements for the project.

    Leverage your change management process to identify required DRP updates as they occur

    Icon for process 'BAI06 Change Management'.

    Avoid the year-end rush to update your DRP. Keeping it up to date as changes occur saves time in the long run and ensures your plan is accurate when you need it.

    • As part of your change management process, identify potential updates to:
      • System documentation (e.g. configuration settings).
      • Recovery procedures (e.g. if a system has been virtualized, that changes the recovery procedure).
      • Your DR environment (e.g. system configuration updates for standby systems).
    • Keep track of how often a system has changed. Relevant DRP documentation might be due for a deeper review:
      • After a system has been changed ten times (even from routine changes), notify your DRP Manager to flag the relevant DRP documentation for review.
      • As part of formal DRP reviews, pay closer attention to DRP documentation for the flagged systems.
    Preview of the Info-Tech template 'Disaster Recovery Change Management'.

    This template asks the submitter to fill out the availability and criticality requirements for the project.

    For change management best practices beyond DRP considerations, please see Optimize Change Management.

    Integrate documentation into performance measurement and performance management

    Icon for process 'MEA01 Performance Measurement'.

    Documentation is a necessary evil – few like to create it and more immediate tasks take priority. If it isn’t scheduled and prioritized, it won’t happen.

    Why documentation is such a challenge

    How management can address these challenges

    We all know that IT staff typically do not like to write documentation. That’s not why they were hired, and good documentation is not what gets them promoted. Include documentation deliverables in your IT staff’s performance appraisal to stress the importance of ensuring documentation is up to date, especially where it might impact DR success.
    Similarly, documentation is secondary to more urgent tasks. Time to write documentation is often not allocated by project managers. Schedule time for developing documentation, just like any other project, or it won’t happen.
    Writing manuals is typically a time-intensive task. Focus on what is necessary for another experienced IT professional to execute the recovery. As discussed earlier, often a diagram or checklist is good enough and actually far more usable in a crisis.

    “Our directors and our CIO have tied SOP work to performance evaluations, and SOP status is reviewed during management meetings. People have now found time to get this work done.” (Assistant Director – IT Operations, Healthcare Industry)

    Step 3.2: Conduct an Annual Focused Review

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    1. Identify components of your DRP to refresh.
    2. Identify organizational changes requiring further focus.
    3. Test your DRP and identify problems.
    4. Correct problems identified with DRP.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner
    • System SMEs
    • Backup DR Personnel

    Outcomes of this step

    • An actionable, up-to-date DRP.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Testing is a waste of time and resources if you do not fix what’s broken. Tabletop testing is effective at uncovering gaps in your DR processes, but if you don’t address those gaps, then your DRP will still be unusable in a disaster.

    Set up a safety net to capture changes that slipped through the cracks with a focused review process

    Evaluate documentation supporting high-priority systems, as well as documentation supporting IT systems that have been significantly changed.

    • Ideally you’re maintaining documentation as you go along. But you need to have an annual review to catch items that may have slipped through.
    • Don’t review everything. Instead, review:
      • IT systems that have had 10+ changes: small changes and updates can add up over time. Ensure:
        • The plans for these systems are updated for changes (e.g. configuration changes).
        • SMEs and backup personnel are familiar with the changes.
      • Tier 1 / Gold Systems: Ensure that you can still recover tier 1 systems with your existing DRP documentation.
    • Track documentation issues that you discovered with your ticketing system or service desk tool to ensure necessary documentation changes are made.
    1. Annual Focused Review
    2. Tier 1 Systems
    3. Significantly Changed Systems
    4. Organizational Changes

    Identify larger changes, both organizational and within IT, that necessitate DRP updates

    During your focused review, consider how organizational changes have impacted your DRP.

    The COBIT 5 Enablers provide a foundation for this analysis. Consider:

    • Changes in regulatory requirements: Are there new requirements for IT that are not reflected in your DRP? Is the organization required to comply with any additional regulations?
    • Changes to organizational structures, business processes, and how employees work: Can employees still be productive once tier 1 services are restored or have RTOs changed? Has organizational turnover impacted your DRP?
    • SMEs leaving or changing roles: Can IT still execute your DRP? Are there still people for all the key roles?
    • Changes to IT infrastructure and applications: Can the business still access the information they need during a disaster? Is your BIA still accurate? Do new services need to be considered tier 1?

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    COBIT 5 Enablers
    What changes need to be reflected in your DRP?

    A cycle visualization titled 'Disaster Recovery Plan'. Starting at 'Changes in Regulatory Requirements', it proceeds clockwise to 'Organizational Structure', 'Changes in Business Processes', and 'How Employees Work', before it returns to DRP. Then 'Changes to Applications', 'Changes to Infrastructure', 'SMEs Leaving or Changing Roles', and then back to the DRP.

    Create a plan during your annual focused review to test your DRP throughout the year

    Regardless of your documentation approach, training and familiarity with relevant procedures is critical.

    • Start with tabletop exercises and progress to technology-based testing (simulation, parallel, and full-scale testing).
    • Ask staff to reference documentation while testing, even if they do not need to. This practice helps to confirm documentation accuracy and accessibility.
    • Incorporate cross-training in DR testing. This gives important experience to backup personnel and will further validate that documents are complete and accurate.
    • Track any discovered documentation issues with your ticketing system or project tracking tools to ensure necessary documentation changes are made.

    Example Test Schedule:

    1. Q1: Tabletop testing shadowed by backup personnel
    2. Q2: Tabletop testing led by backup personnel
    3. Q3: Technology-based testing
    4. Annual Focused Review: Review Results

    Reference this blueprint for guidance on DRP testing plans: Reduce Costly Downtime Through DR Testing

    Appendix A: XMPL Case Study

    Follow XMPL Medical’s journey through DR documentation

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Healthcare
    Source Created by amalgamating data from Info-Tech’s client base

    Streamline your documentation and maintenance process by following the approach outlined in XMPL Medical’s journey to an end-to-end DRP.

    Outline of the Disaster Recovery Plan

    XMPL’s disaster recovery plan includes its business impact analysis and a subset of tier 1 and tier 2 patient care applications.

    Its DRP includes incident response flowcharts, system recovery checklists, and a communication plan. Its DRP also references IT operations documentation (e.g. asset management documents, system specs, and system configuration docs), but this material is not published with the example documentation.

    Resulting Disaster Recovery Plan

    XMPL’s DRP includes actionable documents in the form of high-level disaster response plan flowcharts and system recovery checklists. During an incident, the DR team is able to clearly see the items for which they are responsible.

    Disaster Recovery Plan
    • Recovery Workflow
    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DRP Summary
    • System Recovery Checklists
    • Communication, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    XMPL Medical’s disaster recovery plan illustrates an effective DRP. Model your end-to-end disaster recovery plan after XMPL’s completed templates. The specific data points will differ from organization to organization, but the structure of each document will be similar.

    Model your disaster recovery documentation off of our example

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Healthcare
    Source Created by amalgamating data from Info-Tech’s client base

    Recovery Workflow:

    • Recovery Workflows (PDF, VSDX)

    Recovery Procedures (Systems Recovery Playbook):

    • DR Notification, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan
    • Systems Recovery Playbook
    • Network Topology Diagrams

    Additional Reference Documentation:

    • DRP Workbook
    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DRP Summary Document

    Use our structure to create your practical disaster recovery plan.

    Appendix B: Summary, Next Steps, and Bibliography

    Insight breakdown

    Use visual-based documentation instead of a traditional DRP manual.

    • Flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams are more concise, easier to maintain, and more effective in a crisis.
    • Write for an IT audience and focus on how to recover. You don’t need 30 pages of fluff describing the purpose of the document.

    Create your DRP in layers to keep the work manageable.

    • Start with a recovery workflow to ensure a coordinated response, and build out supporting documentation over time.

    Prioritize quick wins to make DRP maintenance easier and more likely to happen.

    • Incorporate DRP maintenance into change management and project intake procedures to systematically update and refine the DR documentation. Don’t save up changes for a year-end blitz, which turns document maintenance into an onerous project.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • How to create visual-based DRP documentation
    • How to integrate DRP maintenance into core IT processes

    Processes Optimized

    • DRP documentation creation
    • DRP publishing tool selection
    • DRP documentation maintenance

    Deliverables Completed

    • DRP documentation
    • Strategy for publishing your DRP
    • Modified project-intake form
    • Change management checklist for DR considerations

    Project step summary

    Client Project: Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan

    • Create a recovery workflow.
    • Create supporting DRP documentation.
    • Write a summary for your DRP.
    • Decide on a publishing strategy.
    • Incorporate DRP maintenance into core IT processes.
    • Conduct an annual focused review.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This project has the ability to fit the following formats:

    • Onsite workshop by Info-Tech Research Group consulting analysts.
    • Do-it-yourself with your team.
    • Remote delivery (Info-Tech Guided Implementation).

    Related Info-Tech research

    Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan
    Close the gap between your DR capabilities and service continuity requirements.

    Reduce Costly Downtime Through DR Testing
    Improve the accuracy of your DRP and your team’s ability to efficiently execute recovery procedures through regular DR testing.

    Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind
    Go beyond satisfying auditors to drive process improvement, consistent IT operations, and effective knowledge transfer.

    Prepare for a DRP Audit
    Assess your current DRP maturity, identify required improvements, and complete an audit-ready DRP summary document.

    Bibliography

    A Structured Approach to Enterprise Risk Management (ERM) and the Requirements of ISO 31000. The Association of Insurance and Risk Managers, Alarm: The Public Risk Management Association, and The Institute of Risk Management, 2010.

    “APO012: Manage Risk.” COBIT 5: Enabling Processes. ISACA, 2012.

    Bird, Lyndon, Ian Charters, Mel Gosling, Tim Janes, James McAlister, and Charlie Maclean-Bristol. Good Practice Guidelines: A Guide to Global Good Practice in Business Continuity. Global ed. Business Continuity Institute, 2013.

    COBIT 5: A Business Framework for the Governance and Management of Enterprise IT. ISACA, 2012.

    “EDM03: Ensure Risk Optimisation.” COBIT 5: Enabling Processes. ISACA, 2012.

    Risk Management. ISO 31000:2009.

    Rothstein, Philip Jan. Disaster Recovery Testing: Exercising Your Contingency Plan. Rothstein Associates: 1 Oct. 2007.

    Societal Security – Business continuity management systems – Guidance. ISO 22313:2012.

    Societal Security – Business continuity management systems – Requirements. ISO 22301:2012.

    Understanding and Articulating Risk Appetite. KPMG, 2008.

    Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}520|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead
    • Determining IT requirements (legal and business needs) is overwhelming.
    • Prioritizing people in the process is often overlooked.
    • Mandating changes instead of motivating change isn’t sustainable.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Compliance is the minimum; the people and behavior changes are the harder part and have the largest impact on accessibility. Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility makes the necessary behavior changes easier. Communicate, communicate, and communicate some more.
    • Accessibility is a practice, not a project. Therefore, accessibility is an organizational initiative, however, IT support is critical. Use change management theory to guide the new behaviors, processes, and thinking to adopt accessibility beyond compliance. Determining where to start is challenging, the tendency is to start with tech or compliance, however, starting with the people is key. It must be culture.
    • Think about accessibility like you think about IT security. Use IT security concepts that you and your team are already familiar with to initiate the accessibility program.

    Impact and Result

    • Take away the overwhelm that many feel when they hear ‘accessibility’ and make the steps for your organization approachable.
    • Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.
    • Understand your current state related to accessibility and identify areas for key initiatives to become part of the IT strategic roadmap.
    • Build your accessibility plan while prioritizing the necessary culture change
    • Use change management and communication practices to elicit the behavior shift needed to sustain accessibility.

    Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT – Use this blueprint to narrow down the requirements for your organization and team while also clearly communicating why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.

    A step-by-step approach to walk you through understanding the IT accessibility compliance requirements, building your roadmap, and communicating with your department. This storyboard will help you figure out what’s needed from IT to support the business and launch accessibility with your team.

    • Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT – Phases 1-2

    2. IT Manager Meeting Template – A clear, concise, and compelling communication to introduce accessibility for your organization to IT managers and to facilitate their participation in building the roadmap.

    Accessibility compliance can be overwhelming at first. Use this template to simplify the requirements for the IT managers and build out a roadmap.

    • IT Manager Meeting Template

    3. Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool – This tool helps to decrease the overwhelm of accessibility compliance. Narrow down the list of controls needed to the ones that apply to your organization and to IT.

    Using the EN 301 549 V3.2.1 (2021-03) as a basis for digital accessibility conformance. Use this tool to build a priorities list of requirements that are applicable to your organization.

    • Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    4. Departmental Meeting Template – Cascade your communication down to the IT department with this facilitation guide for introducing accessibility and the roadmap to the entire IT team.

    Use this pre-built slide deck to customize your accessibility communication to the IT department. It will help you build a shared vision for accessibility, a current state picture, and plans to build to the target future state.

    • Departmental Meeting Template
    • Accessibility Quick Cards

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Initiate Digital Accessibility For IT

    Make accessibility accessible.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Accessibility is a practice, not a project.

    Accessibility is an organizational directive; however, IT plays a fundamental role in its success. As business partners require support and expertise to assist with their accessibility requirements IT needs to be ready to respond. Even if your organization hasn't fully committed to an accessibility standard, you can proactively get ready by planting the seeds to change the culture. By building understanding and awareness of the significant impact technology has on accessibility, you can start to change behaviors.

    Implementing an accessibility program requires many considerations: legal requirements; international guidelines, such as Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG); training for staff; ongoing improvement; and collaborating with accessibility experts and people with disabilities. It can be overwhelming to know where to start. The tendency is to start with compliance, which is a fantastic first step. For a sustained program use, change management practices are needed to change behaviors and build inclusion for people with disabilities.

    15% of the world's population identify as having some form of a disability (not including others that are impacted, e.g. caretakers, family). Why would anyone want to alienate over 1.1 billion people?

    This is a picture of Heather Leier-Murray

    Heather Leier-Murray
    Senior Research Analyst, People & Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Disability is part of being human

    Merriam-Webster defines disability as a "physical, mental, cognitive, or developmental condition that impairs, interferes with, or limits a person's ability to engage in certain tasks or actions or participate in typical daily activities and interactions."(1)

    The World Health Organization points out that a crucial part of the definition of disability is that it's not just a health problem, but the environment impacts the experience and extent of disability. Inaccessibility creates barriers for full participation in society.(2)

    The likelihood of you experiencing a disability at some point in your life is very high, whether a physical or mental disability, seen or unseen, temporary or permanent, severe or mild.(2)

    Many people acquire disabilities as they age yet may not identify as "a person with a disability."3 Where life expectancies are over 70 years of age, 11.5% of life is spent living with a disability. (4)

    "Extreme personalization is becoming the primary difference in business success, and everyone wants to be a stakeholder in a company that provides processes, products, and services to employees and customers with equitable, person-centered experiences and allows for full participation where no one is left out."
    – Paudie Healy, CEO, Universal Access

    (1.) Merriam-Webster
    (2.) World Health Organization, 2022
    (3.) Digital Leaders, as cited in WAI, 2018
    (4.) Disabled World, as cited in WAI, 2018

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    You know the push for accessibility is coming in your organization. You might even have a program started or approval to build one. But you're not sure if you and your team are ready to support and enable the organization on its accessibility journey.

    Common Obstacles

    Understanding where to start, where accessibility lives, and if or when you're done can be overwhelmingly difficult. Accessibility is an organizational initiative that IT enables; being able to support the organization requires a level of understanding of common obstacles.

    • Determining IT requirements (legal and business needs) is overwhelming.
    • Prioritizing people in the process is often overlooked.
    • Mandating changes instead of motivating change isn't sustainable.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Prepare your people for accessibility and inclusion, even if your organization doesn't have a formal standard yet. Take your accessibility from mandate to movement, i.e. from Phase 1 - focused on compliance to Phase 2 - driven by experience for sustained change.

    • Use this blueprint to build your accessibility plan while prioritizing the necessary culture change.
    • Use change management and communication practices to elicit the behavior shift needed to sustain accessibility.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Accessibility is a practice, not a project. Therefore, accessibility is an organizational initiative; however, IT support is critical. Use change management theory to guide the new behaviors, processes, and thinking to adopt accessibility beyond compliance. Determining where to start is challenging because the tendency is to start with tech or compliance; however, starting with the people is key. It must be a change in organizational culture.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help IT leaders who are looking to:

    • Determine accessibility requirements of IT based on the business' needs and priorities, and the existing standards and regulations.
    • Prepare the IT leaders to implement and sustain accessibility and prepare for the behavior shift that is necessary.
    • Build the plan for IT as it pertains to accessibility, including a list of business needs and priorities, and prioritization of accessibility initiatives that IT is responsible for.
    • Ensure that accessibility is sustained in the IT department by following phase 2 of this blueprint on using change management and communication to impact behavior and change the culture.

    90% of companies claim to prioritize diversity.
    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2020

    Over 30% of those that claim to prioritize diversity are focused on compliance.
    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2022

    Accessibility is an organizational initiative

    Is IT ready and capable to enable it?

    • With increasing rates of lawsuits related to digital accessibility, more organizations are prioritizing initiatives to support increased accessibility. About 68% of Applause's survey respondents indicated that digital accessibility is a higher priority for their organization than it was last year.
    • This increase in priority will trickle into IT's tasks – get ahead and start working toward accessibility proactively so you're ready when business requests start coming in.

    A survey of nearly 1,800 respondents conducted by Applause found that:

    • 79% of respondents rated digital accessibility either a top priority or important for their organizations.
    • 42% of respondents indicated they have limited or no in-house expertise or resources to test accessibility.
      Source: Business Wire, May 2022

    How organizations prioritize digital accessibility

    • 43% rated accessibility as a top priority.
    • 36% rated accessibility as important.
    • Fewer than 5% rated accessibility as either low priority or not even on the radar.
    • More than 65% agreed or strongly agreed that accessibility is a higher priority than last year.

    Source: Angel Business Communications, 2022

    Why organizations address accessibility

    Top three reasons:

    1. 61% To comply with laws
    2. 62% To provide the best user experience
    3. 78% To include people with disabilities
      Source: Level Access, 2022

    Still, most businesses aren't meeting compliance standards. Even though legislation has been in place for over 30 years, a 2022 study by WebAIM of 1,000,000 homepages returned a 96.8% WCAG 2.0 failure rate.

    Source: Institute for Disability Research, Policy, and Practice, 2022

    Info-Tech's approach to Initiate Digital Accessibility

    An image of the Business Case for Accessibility

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Phase 1 of this blueprint gets you started and helps you build a plan to get you to the initial compliance driven maturity level. It's focused more on standards and regulations than on the user and employee experience.
    2. Phase 2 takes you further in maturity and helps you become experience driven in your efforts. It focuses on building your accessibility maturity into the developing, defined, and managed levels, as well as balancing mandate and movement of the accessibility maturity continuum.

    Determining conformance seems overwhelming

    Unfortunately, it's the easier part.

    • Focus on local regulations and what corporate leaders are setting as accessibility standards for the organization. This will narrow down the scope of what compliance looks like for your team.
    • Look to best practices like WCAG guidelines to ensure digital assets are accessible and usable for all users. WCAG's international guideline outlines principles that can also aid in scoping.
    • In phase 1 of this blueprint, use the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Toolto prioritize criteria and legislation for which IT is responsible.
    • Engage with business partners and other areas of the organization to figure out what is needed from IT. Accessibility is an organizational initiative; it shouldn't be on IT to figure it all out. Determine what your team is specifically responsible for before tackling it all.

    Motivating behavior change

    This is the hard part.

    Changing behaviors and mindsets is necessary to be experience driven and sustain accessibility.

    • Compliance is the minimum when it comes to accessibility, much like employment or labor regulations.
    • Making accessibility an organizational imperative is an iterative process. Managing the change is hard. People, culture, and behavior change matures accessibility from compliance driven to experience driven, increasing the benefits of accessibility.
    • Focus accessibility initiatives on improving the experience of everyone and improving engagement (customer and employee).
    • Being people focused and experience driven enables the organization to provide the best user experience and realize the benefits of accessibility.

    A picture of Jordyn Zimmerman

    "Compliance is the minimum. And when we look at web tech, people are still arguing about their positioning on the standards that need to be enforced in order to comply, forgetting that it isn't enough to comply."
    -- Jordyn Zimmerman, M.Ed., Director of Professional Development, The Nora Project, and Appointee, President's Committee for People with Intellectual Disabilities.

    This is an image of the Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework Table.

    To see more on the Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework:

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    Think of accessibility like you think of IT security

    Use IT security concepts to build your accessibility program.

    • Risk management: identify and prioritize accessibility risks and implement controls to mitigate those risks.
    • Compliance: use an IT security-style compliance approach to ensure that the accessibility program is compliant with the many accessibility regulations and standards.
    • Defense in depth: implement multiple layers of accessibility controls to address different types of accessibility risks and issues.
    • Response and recovery: quickly and effectively respond to accessibility issues, minimizing the potential impact on the organization and its users.
    • End-user education: educate end users about accessibility best practices, such as how to use assistive technologies and how to report accessibility issues.
    • Monitor and audit: use monitoring and auditing tools to ensure that accessibility remains over time and to identify and address issues that arise.
    • Collaboration: ensure the accessibility program is effective and addresses the needs of all users by collaborating with accessibility experts and people with disabilities.

    "As an organization matures, the impact of accessibility shifts. A good company will think of security at the very beginning. The same needs to be applied to accessibility thinking. At the peak of accessibility maturity an organization will have people with disabilities involved at the outset."
    -- Cam Beaudoin, Owner, Accelerated Accessibility

    This is a picture of Cam Beaudoin

    Info-Tech's methodology for Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT

    1. Planning IT's accessibility requirements

    2. Change enablement of accessibility

    Phase Steps

    1. Determine accessibility requirements of IT
    2. Build the IT accessibility plan
    1. Build awareness
    2. Support new behaviors
    3. Continuous reinforcement

    Phase Outcomes

    List of business needs and priorities related to accessibility

    IT accessibility requirements for conformance

    Assessment of state of accessibility conformance

    Prioritization of accessibility initiatives for IT

    Remediation plan for IT related to accessibility conformance

    Accessibility commitment statement

    Team understanding of what, why, and how

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Sustainment plan

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Accessibility is a practice, not a project. Therefore, accessibility is an organizational initiative; however, IT support is critical. Use change management theory to guide the new behaviors, processes, and thinking to adopt accessibility beyond compliance. Determining where to start is challenging. The tendency is to start with tech or compliance; however, starting with the people is key. It must be a change in organizational culture.

    Insight 1

    Compliance is the minimum; people and behavior changes are the hardest part and have the largest impact on accessibility. Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility makes the necessary behavior changes easier. Communicate, communicate, and communicate some more.

    Insight 2

    Think about accessibility like you think about IT security. Use IT security concepts that you and your team are already familiar with to initiate the accessibility program.

    Insight 3

    People are learning a new way to behave and think; this can be an unsettling period. Patience, education, communication, support, and time are keys for success of the implementation of accessibility. There is a transition period needed; people will gradually change their practices and attitudes. Celebrate small successes as they arise.

    Insight 4

    Accessibility isn't a project as there is no end. Effective planning and continuous reinforcement of "the new way of doing things" is necessary to enable accessibility as the new status quo.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    IT Manager Meeting Template

    IT Manager Meeting Template
    Use this meeting slide deck to work with IT managers to build out the accessibility remediation plan and commitment statement.

    Departmental Meeting Template

    Departmental Meeting Template
    Use this meeting slide deck to introduce the concept of accessibility and communicate IT goals and objectives.

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Accessibility Quick Cards
    Using the Info-Tech IT Management and Governance Framework to identify key activities to help improve and maintain the accessibility of your organization and your core IT processes.

    Key deliverable:

    Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool
    This tool will assist you in identifying remediation priorities applicable to your organization.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Know and understand your role and responsibility in accessibility implementation within the organization.
    • Provide effective support and excellent business service experience to internal stakeholders related to accessibility.
    • You will be set up to effectively support your team through the necessary behavior, process, and thinking changes.
    • Proactively prepare for accessibility requests that will be coming in.
    • Move beyond compliance to support your organization's sustainment of accessibility.
    • Don't lose out on a trillion-dollar market.
    • Don't miss opportunities to work with organizations because you're not accessible.
    • Enable and empower current employees with disabilities.
    • Minimize potential for negative brand reputation due to a lack of consideration for people with disabilities.
    • Decrease the risk of legal action being brought upon the organization.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Improve IT effectiveness and employee buy-in to change.

    Measuring the effectiveness of your program helps contribute to a culture of continuous improvement. Having consistent measures in place helps to inform decisions and enables your plan to be iterative to take advantage of emerging opportunities.

    Monitor employee engagement, overall stakeholder satisfaction with IT, and the overall end-customer satisfaction.

    Remember, accessibility is not a project – just because measures are positive does not mean your work is done.

    In phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you establish metrics for your organization.
    In phase 2, we will help you develop a sustainment for achieving those metrics.

    A screenshot of the slide titled Establish Baseline Metrics.

    Suggested Metrics
    • Overall end-customer satisfaction
    • Requests for accommodation or assistive technology fulfilled
    • Employee engagement
    • Overall compliance status

    Info-Tech's IT Metrics Library

    Executive brief case study

    INDUSTRY: Technology


    SOURCE: Microsoft.com
    https://blogs.microsoft.com/accessibility/accessib...

    Microsoft

    Microsoft's accessibility journey starts with the goal of building a culture of accessibility and disability inclusion. They recognize that the starting point for the magnitude of organizational change is People.

    "Accessibility in Action Badge"

    Every employee at Microsoft is trained on accessibility to build understanding of why and how to be inclusive using accessibility. The program entails 90 minutes of virtual content.

    Microsoft treats accessibility and inclusion like a business, managing and measuring it to ensure sustained growth and success. They have worked over the years to bust systemic bias company-wide and to build a program with accessibility criteria that works for their business.

    Results

    The program Microsoft has built allows them to shift the accessibility lens earlier in their processes and listen to its users' needs. This allows them to continuously mature their accessibility program, which means continuously improving its users' experience.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided implementation

    What does a typical guided implementation (GI) on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Discuss motivation for the initiative and foundational knowledge requirements.
    Call #2: Discuss stakeholder analysis and business needs of IT.

    Call #3: Identify current maturity and IT accountabilities.
    Call #4: Discuss introduction to senior IT leaders and drivers.
    Call #5: Discuss manager meeting outline and slides.

    Call #6: Review key messages and next steps to prepare for departmental meeting.
    Call #7: Discuss post-meetings next steps and timelines.

    Call #8: Review sustainment plan and plan next steps.

    A GI is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is eight to ten calls over the course of four to six months.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Work

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Understand Your Legislative Environment

    Understand Your Current State

    Define the
    IT Target State

    Build the IT Accessibility Plan

    Prepare for Change Enablement

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up

    Activities

    0.1 Make a list of the legislation you need to comply with
    0.2 Seek legal counsel or and/or professional services' input on compliance
    0.3 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    0.4 Conduct stakeholder analysis

    1.1 Define the risks of inaction
    1.2 Review maturity assessment
    1.3 Conduct stakeholder focus group

    2.1 Define IT compliance accountabilities
    2.2 Define IT accessibility goals/objectives/ metrics
    2.3 Indicate the target-state maturity

    3.1 Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation
    3.2 Decide on priorities
    3.3 Write an IT accessibility commitment statement

    4.1 Prepare the roadmap
    4.2 Prepare the communication plan

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables

    1. Legislative requirements for your organization
    2. List of stakeholders
    3. Completed maturity assessment.
    1. Defined risks of inaction
    2. Stakeholder analysis completed with business needs identified
    1. IT accessibility goals/objectives
    2. Target maturity
    1. Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool completed
    2. Accessibility commitment statement
    3. Current compliance and mitigation assessed
    1. IT accessibility roadmap
    2. Communication plan
    1. IT accessibility roadmap
    2. Communication plan

    Phase 1

    Planning IT's Accessibility Requirements.

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Determine accessibility requirements of IT

    1.2 Build IT accessibility plan

    2.1 Build awareness

    2.2 Support new behaviors

    2.3 Continuous reinforcement

    Initiate Digital Accessibility For IT

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analyzing stakeholders to determine accessibility needs of business for IT.
    • Determining accessibility compliance requirements of IT.
    • Build a manager communication deck.
    • Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation.
    • Prioritize and assign timelines.
    • Build a sunrise diagram to visualize your accessibility roadmap.
    • Write an IT accessibility commitment statement.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT leadership team
    • Business partners in other areas of the organization (e.g., HR, finance, communications)

    Step 1.1

    Determine the accessibility requirements of IT.

    Activities

    1.1.1 Determine what the business needs from IT
    1.1.2 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment (optional)
    1.1.3 Determine IT compliance requirements
    1.1.4 Define target state
    1.1.5 Create a list of goals and objectives
    1.1.6 Finalize key metrics
    1.1.7 Prepare a meeting for IT managers

    Prepare to support the organization with accessibility

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers
    • Business partners in other areas of the organization (e.g., HR, finance, communications)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder analysis with business needs listed
    • Defined target future state
    • List of goals and objectives
    • Key metrics
    • Communication deck for IT management rollout meeting

    While defining future state, consider your drivers

    The Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework identifies three key strategic drivers: compliance, experience, and incorporation.

    • Over 30% of organizations are focused on compliance, according to a 2022 survey by Harvard Business Review and Slack's Future Forum. The survey asked more than 10,000 workers in six countries about their organizations' approach to diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI).(2)
    • Even though 90% of companies claim to prioritize diversity, over 30% are focused on compliance.(1)

    1. Harvard Business Review, 2020
    2. Harvard Business Review, 2022

    31.6% of companies remain in the compliant stage where they are focused on DEI compliance and not on integrating DEI throughout the organization or on creating continual improvement, from Harvard Business Review 2022.

    Info-Tech accessibility maturity framework

    This is an image of Info-Tech's accessibility maturity framework

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT typically works through maturity frameworks from the bottom to the top, progressing at each level until they reach the end. When it comes to IT accessibility initiatives, being especially thorough, thoughtful, and collaborative is critical to success. This will mean spending more time in the Developing, Defined, and Managed levels of maturity rather than trying to reach Optimized as quickly as you can. This may feel contrary to what IT historically considers as a successful implementation.

    After initially ensuring your organization is compliant with regulations and standards, you will progress to building disciplined process and consistent standardized processes. Eventually you will build the ability for predictable process, and lastly, you'll optimize by continuously improving.

    Depending on the level of maturity you are trying to achieve, it could take months or even years to implement. The important thing to understand, however, is that accessibility work is never done.

    At all levels of the maturity framework, you must consider the interconnected aspects of people, process, and technology. However, as the organization progresses, the impact will shift from largely being focused on process and technology improvement to being focused on people.

    Align the benefits of program drivers to organizational goals or outcomes

    Although there will be various motivating factors, aligning the drivers of your accessibility program provides direction to the program. Connecting the advantages of program drivers to organizational goals builds the confidence of senior leaders and decision makers, increasing the continued commitment to invest in accessibility programming.

    This is an image of a table describing the maturity level; Description; Advantages, and Disadvantages for the three drivers: Compliance; Experience; and Incorporation.

    Accessibility maturity levels

    Driver Description Benefits
    Initial Compliance
    • Accessibility processes are mostly undocumented.
    • Accessibility happens mostly on a reactive or ad hoc basis.
    • No one is aware of who is responsible for accessibility or what role they play.
    • Heavily focused on complying with regulations and standards to decrease legal risk.
    • The organization is aware of the need for accessibility.
    • Legal risk is decreased.
    Developing Experience
    • The organization is starting to take steps to increase accessibility beyond compliance.
    • Lots of opportunity for improvement.
    • Defining and refining processes.
    • Working toward building a library of assistive tools.
    • Awareness of the need for accessibility is growing.
    • Process review for accessibility increases process efficiency through avoiding rework.
    Defined Experience
    • Accessibility processes are repeatable.
    • There is a tendency to resort to old habits under stress.
    • Tools are in place to facilitate accommodation.
    • Employees know accommodations are available to them.
    • Accessibility is becoming part of daily work.
    Managed Experience
    • Defined by effective accessibility controls, processes, and metrics.
    • Mostly anticipating preferences.
    • Roles and responsibilities are defined.
    • Disability is included as part of DEI.
    • Employees understand their role in accessibility.
    • Engagement is positively impacted.
    • Attraction and retention are positively impacted.
    Optimized Incorporation
    • Not the goal for every organization.
    • Characterized by a dramatic shift in organizational culture and a feeling of belonging.
    • Ongoing continuous improvement.
    • Seamless interactions with the organization for everyone.
    • Using feedback to inform future initiatives.
    • More likely to be innovative and inclusive, reach more people positively, and meet emerging global legal requirements.
    • Better equipped for success.

    Cheat sheet: Identify stakeholders

    Ask stakeholders, "Who else should I be talking to?" to discover additional stakeholders and ensure you don't miss anyone.

    Identify stakeholders through the following questions:

    Take a 360-degree view of potential internal and external stakeholders who might be impacted by the initiative.

    • Who in areas of influence will be adversely affected by potential environmental and social impacts of what you are doing?
    • At which stage will stakeholders be most affected (e.g. procurement, implementation, operations, decommissioning)?
    • Will other stakeholders emerge as the phases are started and completed?
    • Who is sponsoring the initiative?
    • Who benefits from the initiative?
    • Who is negatively impacted by the initiative?
    • Who can make approvals?
    • Who controls resources?
    • Who has specialist skills?
    • Who implements the changes?
    • Who are the owners, governors, customers, and suppliers of impacted capabilities or functions?
    • Executives
    • Peers
    • Direct reports
    • Partners
    • Customers
    • Subcontractors
    • Suppliers
    • Contractors
    • Lobby groups
    • Regulatory agencies

    Categorize your stakeholders with a stakeholder prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map help teams categorize their stakeholders by their level of influence and ownership.

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    This is an image of a quadrant analysis for mediators; players; spectators; and noisemakers.
    • Players – Players have a high interest in the initiative and high influence to affect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.
    • Mediators – Mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.
    • Noisemakers – Noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.
    • Spectators – Generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    Strategize to engage stakeholders by type

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks.

    By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, you can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy spectators and noisemakers while ensuring the needs of the mediators and players are met.

    Type Quadrant Actions
    Players High influence, high interest Actively Engage
    Keep them engaged through continuous involvement. Maintain their interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
    Mediators High influence, low interest Keep Satisfied
    They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust, and include them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
    Noisemakers Low influence, high interest Keep InformedTry to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using mediators to help them.
    Spectators Low influence, low interest MonitorThey are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    1.1.1 Determine what the business needs from IT (stakeholder analysis)

    1.5 hours

    1. Consider all the potential individuals or groups of individuals who will be impacted or influence the accessibility needs of IT.
    2. List each of the stakeholders you identify. If in person, use sticky notes to define the target audiences. The individuals or group of individuals that potentially have needs from IT related to accessibility before, during, or after the initiative.
    3. As you list each stakeholder, consider how they perceive IT. This perception could impact how you choose to interact with them.
    4. For each stakeholder identified as potentially having a business need requirement for IT related to accessibility, conduct an analysis to understand their degree of influence or impact.
    5. Based on the stakeholder, the influence or impact of the business need can inform the interaction and prioritization of IT requirements.
    6. Update slide 9 of the IT Manager Meeting Template.

    Input

    • The change
    • Why the change is needed
    • Key stakeholder map from activity 2.1.1 of The Accessibility Business Case for IT (optional)

    Output

    • The degree of influence or impact each stakeholder has on accessibility needs from IT

    Materials

    • Stakeholder Management Analysis Tool (optional)

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • Business partners

    Proactively consider how accessibility could be received

    Think about the positive and negative reactions you could face about implementing accessibility.

    It's likely individuals will have an emotional reaction to change and may have different emotions at different times during the change process.
    Plan for how to leverage support and deal with resistance to change by assessing people's emotional responses:

    • What are possible questions, objections, suggestions, and concerns that might arise.
    • How will you respond to the possible questions and concerns.
    • Include proactive messaging in your communications that address possible objections.
    • Express an understanding for others point of views by re-positioning objections and suggestions as questions.

    This is an image of the 10 change chakras

    Determine your level of maturity

    Use Info-Tech's Accessibility Maturity Assessment.

    On the accessibility questionnaire, tab 2, choose the amount you agree or disagree with each statement. Answer the questions based on your knowledge of your current state organizationally.

    Once you've answered all the questions, see the results on the tab 3, Accessibility Results. You can see your overall maturity level and the maturity level for each of six dimensions that are necessary to increase the success of an accessibility program.

    Click through to tab 4, Recommendations, to see specific recommendations based on your results and proven research to progress through the maturity levels. Keep in mind that not all organizations will or should aspire to the "Optimize" maturity level.

    A series of three screenshots from the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    1.1.2 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment (optional)

    1. Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment and save it with the date so that as you work on your accessibility program, you can reassess later and track your progress.
    2. Once you have saved the assessment, select the appropriate answer for each statement on tab 2, Accessibility Questions, based on your knowledge of the organization's approach.
    3. After reviewing all the accessibility statements, see your maturity level results on tab 3, Accessibility Results. Then see tab 4, Recommendations, for suggestions based on your answers.
    4. Document your accessibility maturity results on slides 12 and 13 of the IT Manager Meeting Template and slide 17 of the Departmental Meeting Template.
    5. Use the maturity assessment results in activity 1.1.3.

    Input

    • Assess your current state of accessibility by choosing all the statements that apply to your organization

    Output

    • Identified accessibility maturity level

    Materials

    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    • Accessibility Business Case Template

    Participants

    • Project leader/sponsor
    • IT leadership team

    1.1.3 Determine IT compliance responsibilities

    1-3 hours

    Before you start this activity, you may need to discuss with your organization's legal counsel to determine the legislation that applies to your organization.

    1. Determine which controls apply to your organization based on your knowledge of the organization goals, stakeholders, and accessibility maturity target. If you haven't determined your current and future state maturity model, use the Info-Tech resource from the Accessibility Business Case for IT(see previous two slides).
    2. Using the drop down in column J – Applies to My Org., select "Yes" or "No" for each control on each of the data entry tabs of the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool.
    3. For each control you have selected "Yes" for in column J, identify the control owner in column I.
    4. Update slide 10 in the IT Manager Meeting Template and slide 13 in the IT Departmental Meeting Template.

    Input

    • Local, regional, and/or global legislation and guidelines applicable to your organization
    • Organizational accessibility standard
    • Business needs list
    • Completed Accessibility Maturity Assessment (optional)

    Output

    • List of legislation and standards requirements that are narrowed based on organization need

    Materials

    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    • Accessibility Business Case Template

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ CAO/ initiative leader
    • Legal counsel

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    1.1.4 Conduct future-state analysis*

    Identify your target state of maturity.

      1. Provide the group with the accessibility maturity levels to review as well as the slides on the framework and drivers (slides 27-29).
      2. Ask the group to brainstorm pain points created by inaccessibility (e.g. challenges related to stakeholders, process issues).
      3. Next, discuss opportunities to be gained from improving these practices.
      4. Then, have everyone look at the accessibility maturity levels and, based on the descriptions, determine as a group the current maturity level of accessibility in your organization .
      5. Next, review the benefits listed on the accessibility maturity levels slide to those that you named in step 3 and determine which maturity level best describes your target state. Discuss as a group and agree on one desired maturity level to reach.
      6. Document your current and target states on slide 14 of the IT Manager Meeting Template.

    *Note: If you've completed the Accessibility Business Case for IT blueprint you may already have this information compiled. Refer to activities 2.1.2 and 2.1.3.

    Input

    • Accessibility maturity levels chart, framework, and drivers slides
    • Maturity level assessment results (optional)

    Output

    • Target maturity level documented

    Materials

    • Paper and pens
    • Handouts of maturity levels

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders

    What does a good goal look like?

    SMART is a common framework for setting effective goals. Make sure your goals satisfy these criteria to ensure you can achieve real results.

    Use the SMART framework to build effective goals.

    S

    Specific: Is the goal clear, concrete, and well defined?

    M

    Measurable: How will you know when the goal is met?

    A

    Achievable: Is the goal possible to achieve in a reasonable time?

    R

    Relevant: Does this goal align with your responsibilities and with departmental and organizational goals?

    T

    Time-based: Have you specified a time frame in which you aim to achieve the goal?

    1.1.5 Create a list of goals and objectives*

    Use the outcomes from activity 1.2.1.

    1. Using the information from activity 1.2.1, develop goals.
    2. Remember to use the SMART goal framework to build out each goal (see the previous slide for more information on SMART goals).
    3. Ensure each goal supports departmental and organizational goals to ensure it is meaningful.
    4. Document your goals and objectives on slides 6 and 9 in your IT Manager Meeting Template.

    *Note: If you've completed the Accessibility Business Case for IT blueprint you may already have this information compiled. Refer to activity 2.2.1.

    Input

    • Outcomes of activity 1.2.1
    • Organizational and departmental goals

    Output

    • Accessibility goals and objectives identified

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT senior leaders

    Establish baseline metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    1. Progressing through the accessibility maturity model.
    2. Addressing accessibility earlier in processes with input from people with disabilities.
    3. Motivating behavior changes and culture that supports accessibility and disability inclusion.
    4. Ensuring compliance with regulations and standards.
    5. Focusing on experience and building a disability inclusive culture.
    Metric Definition Calculation
    Overall end-customer satisfaction The percentage of end customers who are satisfied with the IT department. Number of end customers who are satisfied / Total number of end customers
    Requests for accommodation or assistive technology fulfilled The percentage of accommodation/assistive technology requests fulfilled by the IT department. Number of requests fulfilled / Total number of requests
    Employee engagement The percentage of employees who are engaged within an organization. Number of employees who are engaged / Total number of employees
    Overall compliance status The percentage of accessibility controls in place in the IT department. The number of compliance controls in place / Total number of applicable accessibility controls

    1.1.6 Finalize key metrics*

    Finalize key metrics the organization will use to measure accessibility success.

    1. Brainstorm how you will measure the success of each goal you identified in the previous activity, based on the benefits, challenges, and risks you previously identified.
    2. Write each of the metric ideas down and finalize three to five key metrics which you will track. The metrics you choose should relate to the key challenges or risks you have identified and match your desired maturity level and driver.
    3. Document your key metrics on slide 15 of your IT Manager Meeting Templateand slide 23 of the Departmental Meeting Template.

    Input

    • Accessibility challenges and benefits
    • Goals from activity 1.2.2

    Output

    • Three to five key metrics to track

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • IT leadership team
    • Project lead/sponsor

    *Note: If you've completed the Accessibility Business Case for IT blueprint you may already have this information compiled. Refer to activity 2.2.2.

    Use Info-Tech's template to communicate with IT managers

    Cascade messages down to IT managers next. This ensures they will have time to internalize the change before communicating it to others.

    Communicate with and build the accessibility plan with IT managers by customizing Info-Tech's IT Manager Meeting Template, which is designed to effectively convey your key messages. Tailor the template to suit your needs.

    It includes:

    • Project scope and objectives
    • Current state analysis
    • Compliance planning
    • Commitment statement drafting

    IT Manager Meeting Template

    Download the IT Manager Meeting Template

    Info-Tech Insight

    Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility make the necessary behavior changes easier.

    1.1.7 Prepare a meeting for IT managers

    Now that you understand your current and desired accessibility maturity, the next step is to communicate with IT managers and begin planning your initiatives.

    Know your audience:

    1. Consider who will be included in your presentation audience.
    2. You want your presentation to be succinct and hard-hitting. Managers are under huge demands and time is tight, they will lose interest if you drag out the delivery.
    3. Contain the presentation and planning activities to no more than an afternoon. You want to ensure adequate time for questions and answers, as well as the planning activities necessary to inform the roll out to the larger IT department later.
    4. Schedule a meeting with the IT managers.

    Download the IT Manager Meeting Template

    Input

    • Activity results

    Output

    • A completed presentation to communicate your accessibility initiatives to IT managers

    Materials

    • IT Manager Meeting Template

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Step 1.2

    Build the IT accessibility action plan.

    Activities

    1.2.1 Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation

    1.2.2 Decide on your priorities

    1.2.3 Add priorities to the roadmap

    1.2.4 Write an IT accessibility commitment statement

    Planning IT's accessibility requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Priority controls and mitigation list with identified control owners.
    • IT accessibility commitment statement.
    • Draft visualization of roadmap/sunrise diagram.

    Involve managers in assessing current compliance

    To know what work needs to happen you need to know what's already happening.

    Use the spreadsheet from activity 1.1.3 where you identified which controls apply to your organization.

    Have managers work in groups to identify which controls (of the applicable ones) are currently being met and which ones have an existing mitigation plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Based on EN 301 549 V3.2.1 (2021-03) as a basis for digital accessibility conformance. This tool is designed to assist you in building a priorities list of requirements that are applicable to your organization. EN 301 549 is currently the most robust accessibility regulation and encompasses other regulations within it. Although EN 301 549 is the European Standard, other countries are leaning on it as the standard they aspire to as well.

    This is an image of the Compliance Tracing Tool, with a green box drawn around the columns for Current Compliance, and Mitigation.

    1.2.1 Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation

    1-3 hours

    1. Share the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool with the IT leaders and managers during the meeting with IT management that you scheduled in activity 1.1.7.
    2. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group):
      1. Divide up the controls between the small groups to work on assessing current compliance and mitigation plans.
      2. For each control that is identified as applying to your organization, identify if there currently is compliance by selecting "yes" from the drop-down. For controls where the organization is not compliant, select "no" and identify if there is a mitigation plan in place by selecting "yes" or "no" in column L.
      3. Use the comments column to add any pertinent information regarding the control.

    Input

    • List of IT compliance requirements applicable to the org. from activities 1.1.2 and 1.1.3

    Output

    • List of IT compliance requirements that have current compliance or mitigation plans

    Materials

    • Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Involve managers in building accountability into the accessibility plan

    Building accountability into your compliance tracking will help ensure accessibility is prioritized.

    Use the spreadsheet from activity 1.3.1.

    Have managers work in the same groups to prioritize controls by assigning a quarterly timeline for compliance.

    An image of the Compliance Tracking tool, with the timeline column highlighted in green.

    1.2.2 Decide on your priorities

    1-3 hours

    1. In the same groups used in activity 1.2.1, prioritize the list of controls that have no compliance and no mitigation plan.
    2. As you work through the spreadsheet again, assign a timeline using the drop-down menu in column M for each control that applies to the organization and has no current compliance. Consider the following in your prioritization:
      1. Does the control impact customers or is it public-facing?
      2. What are the business needs related to accessibility?
      3. Does the team currently have the skills and knowledge needed to address the control?
      4. What future state accessibility maturity are you targeting?
    3. Be prepared to review with the larger group.

    Input

    • List from activity 1.2.1
    • Business needs from activity 1.1.1

    Output

    • List of IT compliance requirements with accountability timelines

    Materials

    • Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Review your timeline

    Don't overload your team. Make sure the timelines assigned in the breakout groups make sense and are realistic.

    A screenshot of the Accessibility Compliance Dashboard.

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Empty roadmap template

    An image of an empty Roadmap Template.

    1.2.3 Add priorities to the roadmap

    1 hour

    1. Using the information entered in the compliance tracking spreadsheet during activities 1.2.1 and 1.2.2, build a visual representation to capture your strategic initiatives over time, using themes and timelines. Consider group initiatives in four categories, technology, people, process, and other.
    2. Copy and paste the controls onto the roadmap from the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Toolto the desired time quadrant on the roadmap.
    3. Set your desired timelines by changing the Q1-Q4 blocks (set the timelines that make sense for your situation).

    Input

    • Output of activity 1.2.2
    • Roadmap template
    • Other departmental project plans and timelines

    Output

    • Visual roadmap of accessibility compliance controls

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Communicate commitment

    Support people leaders in leading by example with an accessibility commitment statement.

    A commitment statement communicates why accessibility and disability inclusion are important and guides behaviors toward the ideal state. The statement will guide and align work, build accountability, and acknowledge the dedication of the leadership team to accessibility and disability inclusion. The statement will:

    • Publicly commit the team to fostering disability inclusivity.
    • Highlight related values and goals of the team or organization.
    • Set expectations.
    • Help build trust and increase feelings of belonging.
    • Connect the necessary changes (people, process, and technology related) to organization strategy.

    Take action! Writing the statement is only the first step. It takes more than words to build accessibility and make your work environment more disability inclusive.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility make the necessary behavior changes easier.

    Sample accessibility commitment statements

    theScore

    "theScore strives to provide products and services in a way that respects the dignity and independence of persons with disabilities. We are committed to giving persons with disabilities the same opportunity to access our products and services and allowing them to benefit from the same services, in the same place and in a similar way as other clients. We are also committed to meeting the needs of persons with disabilities in a timely manner, and we will meet applicable legislative requirements for preventing and removing barriers."(1)

    Apple Canada

    "Apple Canada is committed to ensuring equal access and participation for people with disabilities. Apple Canada is committed to treating people with disabilities in a way that allows them to maintain their dignity and independence. Apple Canada believes in integration and is committed to meeting the needs of people with disabilities in a timely manner. Apple Canada will do so by removing and preventing barriers to accessibility and meeting accessibility requirements under the AODA and provincial and federal laws across Canada." (2)

    Google Canada

    "We are committed to meeting the accessibility needs of people with disabilities in a timely manner, and will do so by identifying, preventing and removing barriers to accessibility, and by meeting the accessibility requirements under the AODA." (3)

    Source 1: theScore
    Source 2: Apple Canada
    Source 3: Google Canada.

    1.2.4 Write an IT accessibility commitment statement

    45 minutes

    1. As a group, brainstorm the key reasons and necessity for disability inclusion and accessibility for your organization, and the drivers and behaviors required. Record the ideas brainstormed by the group.
    2. Break into smaller groups or pairs (or if too small, continue as a single group):
      • Each group uses the brainstormed ideas to draft an accessibility commitment statement.
    3. Each smaller group shares their statement with the larger group and receives feedback. Smaller groups redraft their statements based on the feedback.
    4. Post each redrafted statement and provide each person two dot stickers to place on the two statements that resonate the most with them.
    5. Using the two statements with the highest number of dot votes, write the final accessibility commitment statement.
    6. Add the commitment statement to slide 18 of the Departmental Meeting Template.

    Input

    • Business objectives
    • Risks related to accessibility
    • Target future accessibility maturity

    Output

    • IT accessibility commitment statement

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Dot stickers or other voting mechanism

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Phase 2

    Change Enablement for Accessibility.

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Determine accessibility requirements of IT

    1.2 Build IT accessibility plan

    2.1 Build awareness

    2.2 Support new behaviors

    2.3 Continuous reinforcement

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Clarifying key messages
    • IT department accessibility presentation
    • Establishing a frequency and timeframe for communications
    • Obtaining feedback
    • Sustainment plan

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers
    • Other key business stakeholders
    • Marketing and communications team

    Be experience driven

    Building awareness and focusing on experience helps move along the accessibility maturity framework. Shifting from mandate to movement.

    In this phase, start to move beyond compliance. Build the IT team's understanding of accessibility, disability inclusion, and their role.
    Communicate the following messages to your team:

    • The motivation behind the change.
    • The reasons for the change.
    • And encourage feedback.

    Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework

    an image of the Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework

    Info-Tech Insight

    Compliance is the minimum; the people and behavior changes are the harder part and have the largest impact on accessibility. Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility make the necessary behavior changes easier. Communicate, communicate, and communicate some more.

    What is an organizational change?

    Before communicating, understand the degree of change.

    Incremental Change:

    • Changes made to improve current processes or systems (e.g. optimizing current technology).

    Transitional Change:

    • Changes that involve dismantling old systems and/or processes in favor of new ones (e.g. new product or services added).

    Transformational Change:

    • Significant change in organizational strategy or culture resulting in substantial shift in direction.

    Examples:

    • New or changed policy
    • Switching from on-premises to cloud-first infrastructure
    • Implementing ransomware risk controls
    • Implementing a Learning and Development Plan

    Examples:

    • Moving to an insourced or outsourced service desk
    • Developing a BI and analytics function
    • Integrating risk into organization risk
    • Developing a strategy (technology, architecture, security, data, service, infrastructure, application)

    Examples:

    • Organizational redesign
    • Acquisition or merger of another organization
    • Implementing a digital strategy
    • A new CEO or board taking over the organization's direction

    Consider the various impacts of the change

    Invest time at the start to develop a detailed understanding of the impact of the change. This will help to create a plan that will simplify the change and save time. Evaluate the impact from a people, process, and technology perspective.

    Leverage a design thinking principle: Empathize with the stakeholder – what will change?

    People

    Process Technology
    • Team structure
    • Reporting structure
    • Career paths
    • Job skills
    • Responsibilities
    • Company vision/mission
    • Number of FTE
    • Culture
    • Training required
    • Budget
    • Work location
    • Daily workflow
    • Working conditions
    • Work hours
    • Reward structure
    • Required number of completed tasks
    • Training required
    • Required tools
    • Required policies
    • Required systems
    • Training required

    Change depends on how well people understand it

    Help people internalize what they can do to make the organization more inclusive.

    Anticipate responses to change:

    1. Emotional reaction – different people require different styles of management to guide them through the change. Individual's may have different emotions at different times during the change process. The more easily you can identify persona characteristics, the better you can manage them.
    2. Level of impact – the higher level of change on an individual's day-to-day, the more difficult it will be to adjust to the change. The more impactful the change, the more time focused on people management.

    an image showing staff personas at different stages through the change process.

    Quickly assess the size of change by answering these questions:

    1. Will the change affect your staff's daily work?
    2. Is the change high urgency?
    3. Is there a change in reporting relationships?
    4. Is there a change in skills required for staff to be successful?
    5. Will the change modify entrenched cultural practices?
    6. Is there a change in the mission or vision of the role?

    If you answered "Yes" to two or more questions, the change is bigger than you think. Your staff will feel the impact.

    Ensure effective communication by focusing on four key elements

    1. Audience
    • Stakeholders (either groups or individuals) who will receive the communication.
  • Message
    • Information communicated to impacted stakeholders. Must be rooted in a purpose or intent.
  • Messenger
    • Person who delivers the communication to the audience. The communicator and owner are two different things.
  • Channel
    • Method or channel used to communicate to the audience.
  • Step 2.1

    Build awareness and define key messages for IT.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT leadership team
    • Marketing/communications (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Key accessibility messages

    Determine the desired outcome of communicating within IT

    This phase is focused on communicating within IT. All communication has an overall goal. This outcome or purpose of communicating is often dependent on the type of influence the stakeholder wields within the organization as well as the type of impact the change will have on them. Consider each of the communication outcomes listed below.

    Communicating within IT

    • Obtain buy-in
    • Inform about the IT change
    • Create a training plan
    • Inform about department changes
    • Inform about organization changes
    • Inform about a crisis
    • Obtain adoption related to the change
    • Distribute key messages to change agents

    Departmental Meeting Template

    Departmental Meeting Template

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Establish and define key messages based on organizational objectives

    What are key messages?

    1. Key messages guide all internal communications to ensure they are consistent, unified, and straightforward.
    2. Distill key messages down from organizational objectives and use them to reinforce the organization's strategic direction. Key messages should inspire employees to act in a way that will help the organization reach its objectives.

    How to establish key messages

    Ground key messages in organizational strategy and culture. These should be the first places you look to determine the organization's key messages:

    • Refer to organizational strategy documents. What needs to be reinforced in internal communications to ensure the organization can achieve its strategy? This is a key message.
    • Look at the organization's values. How do values guide how work should be done? Do employees need to behave in a certain way or keep a certain value top of mind? This is a key message.

    The intent of key messages is to convey important information in a way that is relatable and memorable, to promote reinforcement, and ultimately, to drive action.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Empathizing with the audience is key to anticipating and addressing objections as well as identifying benefits. Customize messaging based on audience attributes such as work model (e.g. hybrid), anticipated objections, what's in it for me?, and specific expectations.

    2.1.1 Clarify the key messages

    30 minutes

    1. Brainstorm the key stakeholders and target audiences you will likely need to communicate with to sustain the accessibility initiative (depending on the size of your group, you might break into pairs or smaller groups and each work on one target audience).
    2. Based on the outcome expected from engaging the target audience in communications, define one to five key messages that should be expressed about accessibility.
    3. The key messages should highlight benefits anticipated, concerns anticipated, details about the change, plan of action, or next steps. The goal here is to ensure the target audience is included in the communication process.
    4. The key messages should be focused on how the target audience receives a consistent message, especially if different communication messengers are involved.
    5. Document the key messages on Tab 3 of the Communications Planner Tool.

    Download the Communications Planner Tool

    Input

    • The change
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcomes

    Output

    • Key messages to support a consistent approach

    Materials

    • Communications Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • IT leadership team
    • Marketing/communications partner (optional)

    Step 2.2

    Support new behaviors.

    Activities

    2.2.1 Prepare for IT department meeting

    2.2.2 Practice delivery of your presentation

    2.2.3 Hold department meeting

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Entire IT department

    Outcomes of this step

    • IT departmental meeting slides
    • Accessibility quick cards
    • Task list of how each IT team will support the accessibility roadmap

    Key questions to answer with change communication

    To effectively communicate change, answer questions before they're asked, whenever possible. To do this, outline at each stage of the change process what's happening next for the audience, as well as answer other anticipated questions. Pair key questions with core messages.

    Examples of key questions by change stage include:

    The outline for each stage of the change process, showing what happens next.

    2.2.1 Prepare for the IT departmental meeting

    2 hours

    1. Download the IT Department Presentation Template and follow the instructions on each slide to update for your organization.
    2. Insert information on the current accessibility maturity level. If you haven't determined your current and future state maturity level, use the Info-Tech resource from The Accessibility Business Case for IT.
    3. Review the presentation with the information added.
    4. Consider what could be done to make the presentation better:
      1. Concise: Identify opportunities to remove unnecessary information.
      2. Clear: It uses only terms or language the target audience would understand.
      3. Relevant: It matters to the target audience and the problems they face.
      4. Consistent: The message could be repeated across audiences.
    5. Schedule a departmental meeting or add the presentation to an existing departmental meeting.

    Download the Departmental Presentation Template

    Input

    • Organizational accessibility risks
    • Accessibility maturity current state
    • Outputs from manager presentation
    • Key messages

    Output

    • Prepared presentation to introduce accessibility to the entire IT department

    Materials

    • Departmental Presentation Template

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ CAO/ initiative leader

    Hone presentation skills before meeting with key stakeholders

    Using voice and body

    Think about the message you are trying to convey and how your body can support that delivery. Hands, stance, frame – all have an impact on what might be conveyed.

    If you want your audience to lean in and be eager about your next point, consider using a pause or softer voice and volume.

    Be professional and confident

    State the main points of your presentation confidently. While this should be obvious, it is essential. Your audience should be able to clearly see that you believe the points you are stating.

    Present in a way that is genuine to you and your voice. Whether you have an energetic personality or calm and composed personality, the presentation should be authentic to you.

    Connect with your audience

    Look each member of the audience in the eye at least once during your presentation. Avoid looking at the ceiling, the back wall, or the floor. Your audience should feel engaged – this is essential to keeping their attention.

    Avoid reading from your slides. If there is text on a slide, paraphrase it while maintaining eye contact.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You are responsible for the response of your audience. If they aren't engaged, it is on you as the communicator.

    2.2.2 Practice delivery of your presentation and schedule department meeting

    45 minutes

    1. Take ten minutes to think about how to deliver your presentation. Where will you emphasize words, speak louder, softer, lean in, stand tall, make eye contact, etc.?
    2. Set a timer on your phone or watch. Record yourself if possible.
    3. Take a few seconds to center yourself and prepare to deliver your pitch.
    4. Practice delivery of your presentation out loud. Don't forget to use your body language and your voice to deliver.
    5. Listen to the recording. Are the ideas communicated correctly? Are you convinced?
    6. Review and repeat.

    Input

    • Presentation deck from activity 2.2.1
    • Best practices for delivering

    Output

    • An ability to deliver the presentation in a clear and concise manner that creates understanding

    Materials

    • Recorder
    • Timer

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative leader

    2.2.3 Lead the IT department meeting

    1–2 hours

    1. Gather the IT department in a manner appropriate for your organization and facilitate the meeting prepared in activity 2.2.1.
    2. Within the meeting, capture all key action items and outcomes from the Quick Cards Development and Roadmap Planning.
    3. Following the meeting, review the quick cards that everyone built and share these with all IT participants.
    4. Update your sunrise diagram to include any initiatives that came up in the team meetings to support moving to experiential.

    Input

    • Presentation deck from activity 2.2.1

    Output

    • A shared understanding of accessibility at your organization and everyone's role
    • Area task list (including behavior change needs)
    • Accessibility quick cards

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative leader

    Download the Accessibility Quick Cards template

    Step 2.3

    Continuous reinforcement – keep the conversation going – sustain the change.

    Activities

    2.3.1 Establish a frequency and timeframe for communications

    2.3.2 Obtain feedback and improve

    2.3.3 Sustainment plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT leadership team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Assigned roles for ongoing program monitoring
    • Communication plan
    • Accessibility maturity monitoring plan
    • Program evaluation

    Communication is ongoing before, during, and after implementing a change initiative

    Just because you've rolled out the plan doesn't mean you can stop talking about it.

    An image of the five steps, with steps four and five highlighted in a green box. The five headings are: Identify and Prioritize; Prepare for initiative; Create a communication plan; Implement change; Sustain the desired outcome

    Don't forget: Cascade messages down through the organization to ensure those who need to deliver messages have time to internalize the change before communicating it to others. Include a mix of personal and organizational messages, but where possible, separate personal and organizational content into different communications.

    2.3.1 Establish a frequency and timeframe

    30 minutes

    1. For each row in Tab 3, determine how frequently that communication needs to take place and when that communication needs to be completed by.
      • Frequency: How often the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. one-time, monthly, as needed).
      • Timeframe: When the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. a planned period or a specific date).
    2. When selecting the timeframe, consider what dependencies need to take place prior to that communication. For example, IT employees should not be communicated with on anything that has not yet been approved by the CEO. Also consider when other communications might be taking place so that the message is not lost in the noise.
    3. For frequency, the only time that a communication needs to take place once is when presenting up to senior leaders of the organizations. And even then, it will sometimes require more than one conversation. Be mindful of this.

    Input

    • The change
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcome
    • Communication channel

    Output

    • Frequency and timeframe of the communication

    Materials

    • Communications Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Changes based on those who would be relevant to your initiative

    Download the Communications Planner Tool

    Ensure feedback mechanisms are in place

    Soliciting and acting on feedback involves employees in the decision-making process and demonstrates to them that their contributions matter.

    Make sure you have established feedback mechanisms to collect feedback on both the messages delivered and how they were delivered. Some ways to collect feedback include:

    • Evaluating intranet comments and interactions (e.g. likes, etc.) if this function is enabled.
    • Measuring comprehension and satisfaction through surveys and polls.
    • Looking for themes in the feedback and questions employees bring forward to managers during in-person briefings.

    Feedback Mechanisms:

    • CIO business vision survey
    • Engagement surveys
    • Focus groups
    • Suggestion boxes
    • Team meetings
    • Random sampling
    • Informal feedback
    • Direct feedback
    • Audience body language
    • Repeating the message back

    Gather feedback on plan and iterate

    Who

    The project team gathers feedback from:

    • As many members of impacted groups as possible, as it helps build broad buy-in for the plan.
    • All levels (e.g. frontline employees, managers, directors).

    What

    Gather feedback on:

    • How to implement tactics successfully.
    • The timing of implementation (helps inform the next slide).
    • The resources required (helps inform the next slide).
    • Potential unforeseen impacts, questions, and concerns.

    How

    • Use focus groups to gather feedback.
    • Adjust sustainment plan based on feedback.

    Use Info-Tech's Standard Focus Group Guide

    2.3.2 Obtain feedback and improve

    20 minutes

    1. Evenly distribute the number of rows in the communication plan to all those involved. Consider a metric that would help inform whether the communication outcome was achieved.
    2. For each row, identify a feedback mechanism (slide 75) that could be used to enable the collection and confirm a successful outcome.
    3. Come back as a group and validate the feedback mechanisms selected.
    4. The important aspect here is not just to measure if the desired outcome was achieved. If the desired outcome is not achieved, consider what you might do to change or enable better communication to that target audience.
    5. Every communication can be better. Feedback, whether it be tactical or strategic, will help inform methods to improve future communication activities.

    Input

    • Communication outcome
    • Target audience
    • Communication channel

    Output

    • A mechanism to measure communication feedback and adjust future communications when necessary

    Materials

    • Communications Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Changes based on those who would be relevant to your initiative

    Download the Communications Planner Tool

    Identify owners and assign other roles

    • Eventually there needs to be a hand off to leaders to sustain accessibility. Senior leaders continue to play the role of guide and facilitator, helping the team identify owners and transfer ownership.
    • Guide the team to work with owners to assign roles to other stakeholders. Spread responsibility across multiple people to avoid overload.

    R

    Responsible
    Carries out the work to implement the component (e.g. payroll manager).

    A

    Accountable
    Owner of the component and held accountable for its implementation (e.g. VP of finance).

    C

    Consulted
    Asked for feedback and input to modify sustainment tactics (e.g. sustainment planning team).

    I

    Informed
    Told about progress of implementation (senior leadership team, impacted staff).

    Identify required resources and secure budget

    Sustainment is critical to success of accessibility

    • This step (i.e. sustainment) often gets overlooked because leaders are focused on the implementation. It takes resources and budget to sustain a plan and change as well.
    • Resorting to the old way is more likely to occur when you don't plan to support sustainment with ongoing resources and budget that's required.

    Resources

    Identify resources required for sustainment components using metrics and input from implementation owners, subject matter experts, and frontline managers.

    For example:

    • Inventory
    • Collateral for communications
    • Technology
    • Physical space
    • People resources (FTE)

    Budget

    Estimate the budget required for resources based on past projects that used similar resources, and then estimate the time it will take until the change evolves into "business as usual" (e.g. 6 months, 12 months).

    Monitor accessibility maturity

    If you haven't already performed the Accessibility Maturity Assessment, complete it in the wake of the accessibility initiative to assess improvements and progress toward target future accessibility maturity.
    As your accessibility program starts to scale out over a range of projects, revisit the assessment on a quarterly or bi-annual basis to help focus your improvement efforts across the six accessibility categories.

    • Vendor relations
    • Products and services
    • Policy and process
    • Support and accommodation
    • Communication
    • People and culture

    Info-Tech Insight

    To drive continual improvement of your organizational accessibility and disability inclusion, continue to share progress, wins, challenges, feedback, and other accessibility related concerns with stakeholders. At the end of the day, IT's efforts to become a change leader and support organizational accessibility will come down to stakeholder perceptions based upon employee morale and benefits realized.

    Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    An image of the maturity level bar graph.

    Evaluate and iterate the program on an ongoing basis

    1. Continually monitor the results of project metrics.
      • Track progress toward goals and metrics set at the beginning of the initiative to gauge the success of the program.
      • Analyze metrics at the work-unit level to highlight successes and challenges in accessibility and disability inclusion and the parameters around it for each impacted unit.
    2. Regularly gather feedback on program effectiveness using questions such as:
      • Has the desired culture been effectively communicated and leveraged, or has the culture changed?
      • Collect feedback through regular channels (e.g. manager check-ins) and set up a cadence to survey employees on the program (e.g. three months after rollout and then annually).
    3. Determine if changes to the program structure are needed.
      • Revisit the accessibility maturity framework and the compliance requirements of IT. Understand what is being experienced; it may be necessary to select a different target or adjust the parameters to mitigate the common challenges.
      • Evaluate the effectiveness of current internal processes to determine if the program would benefit from a dedicated resource.

    2.3.3 Sustain the change

    1. Identify who will own what pieces of the program going forward and assign roles to transition the initiative from implementation to the new normal.
    2. Continue to communicate with stakeholders about accessibility and disability inclusion initiatives, controls, and requirements.
    3. Identify required resources and secure any budget that will be needed to support the accessibility program. Think about employee training, consulting needs, assistive technology requirements, human resources (FTE), etc.
    4. Continue to monitor your accessibility maturity. Use the Accessibility Maturity Assessment tool to periodically evaluate progress on goals and targets. Also, use this tool to communicate progress with senior leaders and executives.
    5. Strive for continuous improvement by evaluating and iterating the program on an ongoing basis.

    Input

    • Activity outputs from this blueprint

    Output

    • Ongoing continuous improvement and progress related to accessibility
    • Demonstrable results

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative Lead
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Related Info-Tech Research

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    • Take away the overwhelm that many feel when they hear "accessibility" and make the steps for your organization approachable.
    • Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization's key objectives and initiatives.
    • Understand your current state related to accessibility and identify areas for key initiatives to become part of the IT strategic roadmap.

    Lead Staff through Change

    • Anticipate and respond to staff questions about the change in order to keep messages consistent, organized, and clear.
    • Manage staff based on their specific concerns and change personas to get the best out of your team during the transition through change.
    • Maintain a feedback loop between staff, executives, and other departments in order to maintain the change momentum and reduce angst throughout the process.

    IT Diversity and Inclusion Tactics

    • Although inclusion is key to the success of a diversity and inclusion (D&I) strategy, the complexity of the concept makes it a daunting pursuit.
    • This is further complicated by the fact that creating inclusion is not a one-and-done exercise. Rather, it requires the ongoing commitment of employees and managers to reassess their own behaviors and to drive a cultural shift.

    Implement and Mature Your User Experience Design Practice

    • Create a practice that is focused on human outcomes; it starts and ends with the people you are designing for. This includes:
      • Establishing a practice with a common vision.
      • Enhancing the practice through four design factors.
      • Communicating a roadmap to improve your business through design.

    Works cited

    "2021 State of Digital Accessibility." Level Access, n.d. Accessed 10 Aug. 2022
    "Apple Canada Accessibility Policy & Plan." Apple Canada, 11 March 2019. .
    Casey, Caroline. "Do Your D&I Efforts Include People With Disabilities?" Harvard Business Review, 19 March 2020. Accessed 28 July 2022.
    Digitalisation World. "Organisations failing to meet digital accessibility standards." Angel Business Communications, 19 May 2022. Accessed Oct. 2022.
    "disability." Merriam-Webster.com Dictionary, Merriam-Webster, . Accessed 10 Aug. 2022.
    "Disability." World Health Organization, 2022. Accessed 10 Aug 2022.
    "Google Canada Corporation Accessibility Policy and Multi Year Plan." Google Canada, June 2020. .
    Hypercontext. "The State of High Performing Teams in Tech 2022." Hypercontext. 2022..
    Lay-Flurrie, Jenny. "Accessibility Evolution Model: Creating Clarity in your Accessibility Journey." Microsoft, 2023. <https://blogs.microsoft.com/accessibility/accessibility-evolution-model/>.
    Maguire, Jennifer. "Applause 2022 Global Accessibility Survey Reveals Organizations Prioritize Digital Accessibility but Fall Short of Conformance with WCAG 2.1 Standards." Business Wire, 19 May 2022. . Accessed 2 January 2023.
    "The Business Case for Digital Accessibility." W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI), 9 Nov. 2018. Accessed 4 Aug. 2022.
    "THESCORE's Commitment to Accessibility." theScore, May 2021. .
    "The WebAIM Million." Web AIM, 31 March 2022. Accessed 28 Jul. 2022.
    Washington, Ella F. "The Five Stages of DEI Maturity." Harvard Business Review, November - December 2022. Accessed 7 Nov. 2022.
    Web AIM. "The WebAIM Million." Institute for Disability Research, Policy, and Practice, 31 March 2022. Accessed 28 Jul. 2022.

    Build Better Workflows

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}496|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk

    Do you experience any of the following challenges:

    • You lack process documentation.
    • Your documentation lacks flowchart examples.
    • Your workflows have points of friction and need improvement.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Don’t just document – target your future state as you document your workflows.
    • Find opportunities for automation, pinpoint key handoff points, and turn cold handoffs into warm handoffs

    Impact and Result

    • Understand the basics of documenting a workflow in flowchart format.
    • Run activities to revise and stress-test your workflows to improve their accuracy and effectiveness.
    • Ensure your workflows are part of a continuous improvement cycle – keep them up to date as a living document.

    Build Better Workflows Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build Better Workflows – A step by step document that walks you through the process of convening a working group to design and update a process flowchart.

    Ask the right questions and pressure test the workflow so the documentation is as helpful as possible to all who consult it.

    • Build Better Workflows Storyboard

    2. Workflow Activity: An onboarding example for a completed flowchart review.

    Use this workflow as an example of the output of an onboarding workflow-improvement activity.

    • Workflow Activity: Onboarding Example (Visio)
    • Workflow Activity: Onboarding Example (PDF)
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Build Better Workflows

    Go beyond draft one to refine and pressure test your process.

    Analyst Perspective

    Remove friction as you document workflows

    Emily Sugerman

    Emily Sugerman
    Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations

    Info-Tech Research Group

    You can’t mature processes without also documenting them. Process documentation is most effective when workflows are both written out and also visualized in the form of flow charts.

    Your workflows may appear in standard operating procedures, in business continuity and disaster recovery plans, or anywhere else a process’ steps need to be made explicit. Often, just getting something down on paper is a win. However, the best workflows usually do not emerge fully-formed out of a first draft. Your workflow documentation must achieve two things:

    • Be an accurate representation of how you currently operate or how you will operate in the near future as a target state.
    • Be the output of a series of refinements and improvements as the workflow is reviewed and iterated.

    This research will use the example of improving an onboarding workflow. Ask the right questions and pressure test the workflow so the documentation is as helpful as possible to all who consult it.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Your documentation lacks workflows entirely, or ...
    • Your workflows are documented in flowchart form but are not accurate, and/or ...
    • Your workflows are documented in flowchart form but contain points of friction and need process improvement.
    • Getting the relevant stakeholders together to contribute to workflow design and validate them.
    • Selecting the right detail level to include in the workflow – not too much and not too little.
    • Knowing the right questions to ask to review and improve your workflow flowcharts.

    Use this material to help

    • Understand the basics of documenting a workflow in flowchart format.
    • Run activities to revise and stress-test your workflows to improve their accuracy and effectiveness.
    • Ensure your workflows are part of a continuous improvement cycle – keep them up-to-date as a living document.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t just document – target your future state as you document your workflows. Find opportunities for automation, pinpoint key handoff points, and turn cold handoffs into warm handoffs.

    Follow these steps to build, analyze, and improve the workflow

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram that demonstrates the steps needed to build better workflows.

    Insight Summary

    Keep future state in mind.
    Don’t just document – target your future state as you document your workflows. Find opportunities for automation, pinpoint key handoff points, and turn cold handoffs into warm handoffs.

    Promote the benefits of documenting workflows as flowcharts.
    Foreground to the IT team how this will improve customer experience. End-users will benefit from more efficient workflows.

    Remember the principle of constructive criticism.
    Don’t be afraid to critique the workflow but remember this can be a team-building experience. Focus on how these changes will be mutually beneficial, not assigning blame for workflow friction.

    Don’t waste time building shelfware.
    Establish a review cadence to ensure the flowchart is a living document that people actually use.

    Benefits of building better workflows

    Risks of inadequate workflows

    Benefits of documented workflows

    • Lack of clear communication: If you don’t have workflows, you are losing out on an effective way to document and communicate processes.
    • Outdated documentation: If you do have workflows documented in standard operating procedures, they probably need to be updated unless you already consistently update documentation.
    • Facilitate knowledge transfer.
    • Standardize processes for service delivery consistency.
    • Optimize processes by discovering and improving points of friction within the workflow.
    • Improve transparency of processes to set expectations for other stakeholders.
    • Reduce risk.

    Why are visualized workflows useful?

    Use these talking points to build commitment toward documenting/updating processes.

    Risk reduction
    “Our outdated documentation is a risk, as people will assume the documented process is accurate.”

    Transparency
    “The activity of mapping our processes will bring transparency to everyone involved.”

    Accountability
    “Flow charts will help us clarify task ownership at a glance.”

    Accessibility
    “Some team members prefer diagrams over written steps, so we should provide both.”

    Knowledge centralization
    “Our flow charts will include links to other supporting documentation (checklists, vendor documentation, other flowcharts).”

    Role clarification
    “Separating steps into swim lanes can clarify different tiers, process stages, and ownership, while breaking down silos.”

    Communication
    To leadership/upper management: “This process flow chart quickly depicts the big picture.”

    Knowledge transfer
    “Flow charts will help bring new staff up to speed more quickly.”

    Consistency
    “Documenting a process standardizes it and enables everyone to do it in the same way.”

    Review what process mapping is

    A pictorial representation of a process that is used to achieve transparency.

    This research will use one specific example of an onboarding process workflow. Before drilling down into onboarding workflows specifically, review Info-Tech’s Process Mapping Guide for general guidance on what to do before you begin:

    • Know the purpose of process mapping.
    • Articulate the benefits of process mapping.
    • Recognize the risks of not process mapping.
    • Understand the different levels of processes.
    • Adopt BPMN 2.0 as a standard.
    • Consider tools for process mapping.
    • Select a process to map.
    • Learn methods to gather information.

    The image contains screenshots of the Process Mapping Guide.

    Download the Process Mapping Guide

    Select the workflow your team will focus upon

    Good candidates include:

    • Processes you don’t have documented and need to build from scratch.
    • An existing process that results in an output your users are currently dissatisfied with (if you run an annual IT satisfaction survey, use this data to find this information).
    • An existing process that is overly manual, lacks automation, and causes work slowdown for your staff.

    Info-Tech workflow examples

    Active Directory Processes

    Application Development Process

    Application Maintenance Process

    Backup Process

    Benefits Legitimacy Workflow

    Business Continuity Plan Business Process

    Business Continuity Plan Recovery Process

    Commitment Purchasing Workflow

    Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Process

    Crisis Management Process

    Data Protection Recovery Workflow

    Disaster Recovery Process

    Disaster Recovery Plan/Business Continuity Plan Review Workflow

    End-User Device Management Workflow Library

    Expense Process

    Event Management Process

    Incident Management and Service Desk Workflows

    MACD Workflow Mapping

    Problem Management Process

    Project Management Process

    Ransomware Response Process

    Sales Process for New Clients

    Security Policy Exception Process

    Self-Service Resolution Process

    Service Definition Process

    Service Desk Ticket Intake by Channel

    Software Asset Management Processes

    Target State Maintenance Workflow

    Example: Onboarding workflow

    Onboarding is a perennial challenge due to the large number of separate teams and departments who are implicated in the process.

    There can be resistance to alignment. As a result, everyone needs to be pulled in to see the big picture and the impact of an overly manual and disconnected process.

    Additionally, the quality of the overall onboarding process (of which IT is but one part) has a significant impact on the employee experience of new hires, and the long-term experience of those employees. This workflow is therefore often a good one to target for improvement.

    “Organizations with a standardized onboarding process experience 62% greater new hire productivity, along with 50% greater new hire retention.”1

    “Companies that focus on onboarding retain 50% more new employees than companies that don’t.”2

    1. Carucci, “To Retain New Hires, Spend More Time Onboarding Them,” 2018
    2. Uzialko, “What Does Poor Onboarding, 2023

    Tabletop exercise: Generate first draft

    In the tabletop exercise, your team will walk through your onboarding process step by step and document what happens at each stage. Prep for this meeting with the following steps:

    1. Identify roles: facilitator, notetaker, and participants. Determine who should be involved in the working group in addition to IT (HR, Hiring Team, Facilities, etc.).
    2. Decide what method of documentation you will use in the meeting. If meeting in person, cue cards are useful because they can be easily rearranged or inserted. If meeting remotely, the notetaker or facilitator will need to share their screen and capture each step with software (such as Visio, PowerPoint, or a whiteboarding software).
    3. Before you even begin mapping out the process, conduct a quick brainstorming session. What are your current challenges with it? What is working? Document on a whiteboard (electronic or hard copy).
    4. Document each step of the process as it currently happens. You will improve it later. Include task ownership.

    Roles

    Facilitator
    Tasks:

    • Guide discussion – restate contributors’ ideas, ask probing questions.
    • Keep group on track – cut off or redirect conversation when off track.

    Notetaker
    Tasks:

    • Ensure the steps are documented via the agreed-upon tools (e.g. cue cards). If the process is being documented in software, the notetaker may be solely responsible for documentation.
    • The notetaker may be the same person as the facilitator.

    Document your workflow challenges: Onboarding

    Brainstorm and document. Group similar challenges together to pull out themes.

    Lack of communication/expectation setting with users:

    Messy process, poor coordination among task owners:

    User experience affected:

    • Users submit onboarding requests with too little lead time.
    • HR/hiring manager does not include all necessary information when submitting new hire request.
    • Approvals are slowing down our ability to fulfill in a timely manner.
    • Lots of manual, repeated tasks.
    • Too much back and forth between technicians.
    • Procurement delays (supply chain challenges) leading to new user starting with no device/workaround.
    • Inconsistent resolution times for these types of requests.
    • Complaints about onboarding were one of the most frequently recurring issues in our most recent annual IT satisfaction survey.
    • Some of these complaints fall more to the responsibility of HR and direct managers, but some of the complaints relate to onboarding tasks not being completed by start date, which is our responsibility.

    Establish flowcharting standards

    If you don’t have existing flowchart standards, use the basic notation conventions used in the examples here.

    Basic notation convention shapes: Circle, oval, square, rectangle, diamond, thought bubble.

    Start, End, and Connector. Traditional flowcharting standards reserve this shape for connectors to other flowcharts or other points in the existing flowchart. Unified modeling language (UML) also uses the circle for start and end points.

    Start, End. Traditional flowcharting standards use this for start and end. However, Info-Tech recommends using the circle shape to reduce the number of shapes and avoid confusion with other similar shapes.

    Process Step. Individual process steps or activities (e.g. create ticket or escalate ticket). If it’s a series of steps, then use the sub-process symbol and flowchart the sub-process separately.

    Sub-Process. A series of steps. For example, a critical incident standard operating procedure (SOP) might reference a recovery process as one of the possible actions. Marking it as a sub-process, rather than listing each step within the critical incident SOP, streamlines the flowchart and avoids overlap with other flowcharts (e.g. the recovery process).

    Decision. Represents decision points, typically with yes/no branches, but you could have other branches depending on the question (e.g. a “Priority” question could branch into separate streams for Priority 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 issues).

    Document/Report Output. For example, the output from a backup process might include an error log.

    Map the current process

    Prompt the working group with the following questions.

    • What happens when the ticket comes in? Who submits it? Where is it coming from? What are the trigger events? Are there any input channels we should eliminate?
    • What is the terminal event? Where does the workflow end?
    • Do we have a triage step?
    • Is the ticket prioritized? Does this need to be a step?
    • Do we create child tickets? Separate tasks for different teams? Do we create a primary/main ticket and sub-tickets? How should we represent this in the flowchart?
    • How should we represent escalations? How should we represent task ownership by different teams?
    • What are our decision points: points when the path can potentially branch (e.g. into yes/no branches)?

    Map the process: First pass

    The image contains a screenshot example of the first pass.

    Tabletop exercise: Revise workflow

    Time to review and revise the workflow. What gaps exist? How can you improve the process? What documentation gaps have been overlooked?

    Consider the following refinements for the onboarding workflow:

    • Identify missing steps
    • Clearly identify task ownership
    • Establish SLAs and timepoints
    • Capture/implement user feedback
    • Identify approval roadblocks
    • Identify communication points
    • Identify opportunities for automation
    • Create personas
    • Create onboarding checklist

    Roles

    Facilitator
    Tasks:

    • Guide discussion – restate contributors’ ideas, ask probing questions.
    • Keep group on track – cut off or redirect conversation when off track.

    Notetaker
    Tasks:

    • Ensure the steps are documented via the agreed-upon tools (e.g. cue cards). If the process is being documented in software, the notetaker may be solely responsible for documentation.
    • The notetaker may be the same person as the facilitator, but this takes some practice.

    Map the process: Critique draft

    The image contains a screenshot example of critique draft.

    Solicit feedback from the group.

    "

    • Our workflow is slowed down by hidden approvals that we haven’t mapped.
    • We have no efficient way to prevent submission of incomplete requests.
    • Our workflow doesn’t clearly show how different tasks are assigned to different teams.
    • We still don’t know how long this all takes.
    • We’re missing some tasks – what about including facilities?
    • We’re missing next steps for some of the decision points.
    "

    Review: Identify missing steps

    Consider the following refinements.

    Be complete.

    The workflow should surface tacit knowledge, so make it explicit (Haddadpoor et al.):

    • Where are the inputs coming from? Do you need to account for various input channels? Have you forgotten any?
    • Are there any input channels that you want to eliminate?
    • Have you overlooked any hardware, software, or services entitlements that should be called out?
    • Have all decision paths been worked through? Do you need to add any missing decision points?
    • Add information flows and annotations as needed.

    Review: Task ownership

    Identify task ownership.

    The flow chart will be more useful if it clearly identifies who does what in the process.

    • Consider organizing the sub-processes within the overall onboarding process into swim lanes, one for each team or group involved in the process.
    • Swim lanes help clarify who does what in the overall process (e.g. all the tasks completed by HR appear in the HR swim lane, all the tasks completed by service desk appear in the service desk swim lane).
    • They can also help draw attention to escalation points or handoff points between different teams. Assess the steps around the boundary of each swim lane. Does the working group experience/know of friction at these handoff points? What might solve it?
    • In what order should the tasks occur? What dependencies do they have?

    The image contains a screenshot of a model that demonstrates task ownership swim lanes.

    “Each task has an owner, and the task list is visible to the employee and other stakeholders, so there's visibility about whether each person has done their actions.”

    Matthew Stibbe, qtd. in Zapier, 2022

    Review: The time the workflow takes

    For onboarding, this means setting SLOs/SLAs and internal timepoints.

    Add internal timepoints for the major steps/tasks in the workflow. Begin to track these service level objectives and adjust as necessary.

    • Review old onboarding tickets and track how long each main step/task takes (or should take). Every additional approval risks adding days.
    • Consider where there are opportunities to increase automation or use templates to save time.
    • Zero in on which task within the onboarding workflow is slowing down the process.
    • Create an overall service level objective that communicates how many days the onboarding workflow is expected to take. Decide where escalations go when the SLA is breached.

    When you have validated the service level objectives are accurate and you can meet them an acceptable amount of time, communicate the overall SLA to your users. This will ensure they submit future onboarding requests to your team with enough lead time to fulfill the request. Try to place the SLA directly in the service catalog.

    “Tracking the time within the workflow can be a powerful way to show the working group why there is user dissatisfaction.”

    Sandi Conrad, Principal Advisory Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Review: Capture user feedback

    For onboarding, this means implementing a transactional survey.

    The onboarding workflow will be subject to periodic reviews and continual improvement. Suggestions for improvement should come not only from the internal IT team, but also the users themselves.

    • Transactional surveys, launched at the close of a ticket, allow the ticket submitter to provide feedback on their customer service experience.
    • Onboarding tickets are somewhat more complex than the average incident or service request, since the ticket is often opened by one user (e.g. in HR) on behalf of another (the new employee).
    • Decide whose experience you want feedback on – the submitter of the request or the new user. Investigate your ITSM tool’s capabilities: is it possible to direct the survey to someone who is not the ticket submitter?
    Take Action on Service Desk Customer Feedback

    Use Info-Tech’s Take Action on Service Desk Customer Feedback for more guidance on creating these surveys.

    Review: Identify approval roadblocks

    For onboarding, approvals can be the main roadblock to fulfilling requests

    • How are the requests coming in? Do we have a predefined service catalog?
    • What kinds of approvals do we receive (manager, financial, legal, security, regulatory)? Ask the team to think about where there are instances of back and forth and clean that up.
    • Identify where approvals interrupt the technical flow.
      • Confirm that these approvals are indeed necessary (e.g. are certain approval requests ever declined? If not, follow up on whether they are necessary or whether some can be made into preapprovals).
      • Avoid putting agents in charge of waiting on or following up about approvals.
      • Investigate whether interruptive approvals can be moved.

    Review: Identify communication points

    A positive onboarding experience is an important part of a new employee’s success.

    Though IT is only one part of an employee’s onboarding experience, it’s an important part. Delays for hardware procurement and a lack of communication can lead to employee disengagement. Ask the team:

    • Are we communicating with our users when delays occur? When do delays occur most often?
    • How can we mitigate delays? Though we can’t resolve larger supply chain problems, can we increase stock in the meantime?
    • Can we start tracking delays to incorporate into the SLA
    • Do we offer loaner devices in the meantime?

    Place communication bullet points in the flow chart to indicate where the team will reach out to users to update or notify them of delays.

    Review: Identify opportunities for automation

    Where can we automate for onboarding?

    Identify when the process is dragged out due to waiting times (e.g. times when the technician can’t address the ticket right away).

    • Analyze the workflow to identify which tasks tend to stagnate because technician is busy elsewhere. Are these candidates for automation?
    • Is our ITSM tool capable of setting up automatically routed child tickets triggered by the main onboarding ticket? Does it generate a series of tasks? Is it a manual process? Which teams do these tasks/tickets go to?
    • Can we automate notifications if devices are delayed?
    • Can we use mobile device management for automated software installation?
    • If we have a robust service catalog, can we provide it to the users to download what they need? Or is this too many extra steps for our users?
    • Can we create personas to speed up onboarding?

    Avoid reinforcing manual processes, which make it even harder for departmental silos to work together.

    Review: Automation example – create personas

    Create role-based templates.

    Does HR know which applications our users need? Are they deferring to the manager, who then asks IT to simply duplicate an existing user?

    Personas are asset profiles that apply to multiple users (e.g. in a department) and that can be easily duplicated for new hires. You might create three persona groups in a department, with variations within each subgroup or title. To do this, you need accurate information upfront.

    Then, if you’re doing zero touch deployment, you can automate software to automatically load.

    Many HRIS systems have the ability to create a persona, and also to add users to the AD, email, and distribution groups without IT getting involved. This can alleviate work from the sysadmin. Does our HRIS do this?

    • Review old onboarding tickets. Do they include manual steps like setting up mailboxes, creating user accounts, adding to groups?
    • Investigate your ITSM tool’s onboarding template. Does it allow you to create a form through which to create dynamic required fields?
    • Identify the key information service desk needs from the department supervisor, or equivalent role, to begin the onboarding request – employee type, access level, hardware and software entitlements, etc.

    Revised workflow

    How does the group feel about the revised workflow?

    • Are any outputs still missing?
    • Can we add any more annotations to provide more context to someone reading this for the first time?
    • Do the task names follow a “verb-noun” format?
    • Are the handoffs clear?
    • Are some of the steps overly detailed compared to others?
    • Does it help resolve the challenges we listed?
    • Does it achieve the benefits we want to achieve?

    Download the Workflow Activity: Onboarding Example

    Remember the principle of constructive criticism.

    Don’t be afraid to critique the workflow but remember this can also be a team-building experience. Focus on how these changes will be mutually beneficial, not assigning blame for workflow friction.

    Post-review: Revised workflow

    The image contains a screenshot example of a revised workflow.

    Final check

    • Do we need to run this by Legal?
    • Have we included too many sub-processes? Not enough?
    • Is the flowchart easy to read and follow?

    Decide how often this workflow will be revised.

    • Is this workflow part of a larger piece of documentation that has a set review cadence? Where is it stored?
    • If not, what is a realistic time frame for regular review?
    • Who will own this process in an ongoing way and be in charge of convening a future review working group?

    Validation with stakeholders

    • What documentation does the flowchart belong to? When will you review it again?
    • Who do you need to validate the flowchart with?

    Share the flowchart and set up a review meeting.

    • Walk through the workflow with stakeholders who did not participate in building it.
    • Do they find it easy to follow?
    • Can they identify missing steps?

    Don’t waste time building shelfware.

    Establish a review cadence to ensure the flowchart is a living document that people actually use.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Bibliography

    Bushkill, Claire. “The top 5 ways to automate your onboarding checklist.” Rippling Blog. 18 Mar 2022. Accessed 29 Nov 2022. Ha https://www.rippling.com/blog/the-top-5-ways-to-automate-your-onboarding-checklist
    Carucci, Ron. “To Retain New Hires, Spend More Time Onboarding Them.” Harvard Business Review, 3 Dec 2018
    Haddadpoor, Asefeh, et al. “Process Documentation: A Model for Knowledge Management in Organizations.” Materia Socio-Medica, vol. 27, no. 5, Oct. 2015, pp. 347–50. PubMed Central, https://doi.org/10.5455/msm.2015.27.347-350.
    King, Melissa. “New hire checklist: An employee onboarding checklist template for 2022.” Zapier. 14 Jul 2022. Accessed 29 Nov 2022. https://zapier.com/blog/onboarding-checklist/
    Uzialko, Adam. “What Does Poor Onboarding Really Do to Your Team?” Business News Daily. 23 Jan 2023.
    https://www.manageengine.com/products/service-desk...

    Contributors

    Sandi Conrad, Principal Advisory Director, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Christine Coz, Executive Counselor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Allison Kinnaird, Practice Lead, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Natalie Sansone, Research Director, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}76|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy
    • Amid the pandemic-fueled surge in online services, organizations require secure solutions to safeguard digital interactions. These solutions must be uniform, interoperable, and fortified against security threats.
    • Although the digital identity ecosystem has garnered significant attention and investment, many organizations remain uncertain about its potential for authentication and the authorization required for B2B and B2C transactions, and in turn reducing their cost of operations and transferring their data risks.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Limited / lack of understanding of the global digital ID ecosystem and its varying approaches across countries handicaps businesses in defining the benefits digital ID can bring to customer interactions and overall business management.
    • In addition, key obstacles exist in balancing customer privacy, data security, and regulatory requirements while pursuing excellent end-user experience and high customer adoption.
    • Info-Tech Insight: Focusing on customer touchpoints and transforming them are key to excellent experience and increasing their life-time value (LTV) to them and to your organization. Digital ID is that tool of transformation.

    Impact and Result

    • Digital ID has many dimensions, and its ecosystem's sustainability lies in the key principles it is built on. Understanding the digital identity ecosystem and its responsibilities is crucial to formulating an approach to adopt it. Also, focusing on key success factors drives digital ID adoption.
    • Before embarking on the digital identity adoption journey, it is essential to assess your readiness. It is also necessary to understand the risks and challenges. Specific steps to digital ID adoption can help realize the potential of digital identity and enhance the customers' experience.

    Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience Storyboard – Learn how to adopt Digital ID to drive benefits, enhance customer experience, improve efficiency, manage data risks, and uncover new opportunities.

    This research focuses on verified digital identity ecosystems and explores risks, opportunities, and challenges of relying on verified digital IDs and also how adopting digital identity initiatives can improve customer experience and operational efficiency. It covers:

  • Definition and dimensions of digital identity
  • Key responsibilities and principles of digital identity ecosystem
  • Success factors for digital identity adoption
  • Global evolution and unique approaches in Estonia, India, Canada, UK, and Australia
  • Industries that benefit most from digital ID development
  • Key use cases of digital ID
  • Benefits to governments, ID providers, ID consumers, and end users
  • Readiness checklist and ten steps to digital ID adoption
  • Risks and challenges of digital identity adoption
  • Key recommendations to realize potential of digital identity
  • Taxonomy and definitions of terms in the digital identity ecosystem
    • Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience Storyboard
    • Familiarize Yourself With the Digital ID Ecosystem Taxonomy
    • Assess Your Digital ID Adoption Readiness

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience

    Beyond the hype: How it can help you become more customer-focused?

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Amid the pandemic-fueled surge of online services, organizations require secure solutions to safeguard digital interactions. These solutions must be uniform, interoperable, and fortified against security threats.

    Although the digital identity ecosystem has garnered significant attention and investment, many organizations remain uncertain about its potential for authentication and authorization required for B2B and B2C transactions.

    They still wonder if digital ID can help reduce cost of operations and transfer data risks.

    Limited or lack of understanding of the global Digital ID ecosystem and its varying approaches across countries handicap businesses in defining the potential benefits Digital ID can bring to customer interactions and overall business management.

    In addition, key obstacles exist in balancing customer privacy (including the right to be forgotten), data security, and regulatory requirements while pursuing desired end-user experience and high customer adoption.

    Digital ID has many dimensions, and its ecosystem's sustainability lies in the key principles it is built on. Understanding the digital identity ecosystem and its responsibilities is crucial to formulate an approach to adopt it. Also, focusing on key success factors drives digital ID adoption.

    Before embarking on the digital identity adoption journey, it is essential to assess your readiness. It is also necessary to understand the risks and challenges. Specific steps to digital ID adoption can help realize the potential of digital identity and enhance the customers' experience.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Focusing on customer touchpoints and transforming them is key to excellent user experience and increasing their lifetime value (LTV) to them and to your organization. Digital ID is that tool of transformation.

    Analyst Perspective

    Manish Jain.

    Manish Jain

    Principal Research Director

    Analyst Profile

    “I just believed. I believed that the technology would change people's lives. I believed putting real identity online - putting technology behind real identity - was the missing link.”

    - Sheryl Sandberg (Brockes, Emma. “Facebook’s Sheryl Sandberg: who are you calling bossy?” The Guardian, 5 April 2014)

    Sometimes dismissed as mere marketing gimmicks, digital identity initiatives are anything but. While some argue that any online credential is a "Digital ID," rendering the hype around it pointless, the truth is that a properly built digital ID ecosystem has the power to transform laggard economies into global digital powerhouses. Moreover, digital IDs can help businesses transfer some of their cybersecurity risks and unlock new revenue channels by enabling a foundation for secure and efficient value delivery.

    In addition, digital identity is crucial for digital and financial inclusion, simplifying onboarding processes and opening up new opportunities for previously underserved populations. For example, in India, the Aadhaar digital ID ecosystem brought over 481 million1 people into the formal economy by enabling access to financial services. Similarly, in Indonesia, the e-KIP digital ID program paved the way for 10 million new bank accounts, 94% of which were for women2.

    However, digital identity initiatives also come with valid concerns, such as the risk of a single point of failure and the potential to widen the digital divide.

    This research focuses on the verified digital identity ecosystem, exploring the risks, opportunities, and challenges organizations face relying on these verified digital IDs to know their customers before delivering value. By understanding and adopting digital identity initiatives, organizations can unlock their full potential and provide a seamless customer experience while ensuring operational efficiency.

    1 India Aadhaar PMJDY (https://pmjdy.gov.in/account)
    2 Women’s World Banking, 2020.

    Digital Identity Ecosystem and vital ingredients of adoption

    Digital Identity Ecosystem.

    What is digital identity?

    Definitions may vary, depending on the focus.

    “Digital identity (ID) is a set of attributes that links a physical person with their online interactions. Digital ID refers to one’s online persona - an online footprint. It touches important aspects of one’s everyday life, from financial services to health care and beyond.” - DIACC Canada

    “Digital identity is a digital representation of a person. It enables them to prove who they are during interactions and transactions. They can use it online or in person.” - UK Digital Identity and Attributes Trust Framework

    “Digital identity is an electronic representation of an entity (person or other entity such as a business) and it allows people and other entities to be recognized online.” - Australia Trusted Digital Identity Framework

    A digital identity is primarily an electronic form of identity representing an entity uniquely , while abstracting all other identity attributes of the entity. In addition to an electronic form, it may also exist in a physical form (identity certificate), linked through an identifier representing the same entity.

    Digital identity has many dimensions*, and in turn categories

    Trust

    • Verified (Govt. issued IDs)
    • Unverified (Email Id)

    Subject

    • Individual
    • Organization
    • Device
    • Service

    Usability

    • Single-purpose (Disposable)
    • Multi-purpose (Reusable)

    Provider

    • Sovereign Government
    • Provincial Government
    • Local Government
    • Public Organization
    • Private Organization
    • Self

    Jurisdiction

    • Global (Passport)
    • National (DL)
    • State/Provincial (Health Card)
    • Local (Voting Card)
    • Private (Social)

    Form

    • Physical Card
    • Virtual Identifier
    • Online/App Account
    • PKI Keys
    • Tokens

    Governance

    • Sovereign
    • Federated
    • Decentralized
    • Trust Framework -based
    • Self-sovereign

    Expiry

    • Permanent (Lifetime, Years)
    • Temporary (Minutes, Hours)
    • Revocable

    Usage Mode

    • online only
    • offline only
    • Online/offline

    Purpose

    • Authorization (driver’s license, passport, employment)
    • Authentication (birth certificate, social security number)
    • Activity Linking (preferences, habits, and priorities)
    • Historical Record (Resume, educational financial, health history)
    • Social Interactions (Social Media)
    • Machine Connectivity

    Info-Tech Insight

    Digital ID has taken different meanings for different people, serving different purposes in different environments. Based on various aspects of Digital Identification, it can be categorized in several types. However, most of the time when people refer to a form of identification as Digital ID, they refer to a verified id with built-in trust either from the government OR the eco-system.

    * Please refer to Taxonomy for the definition of each of the dimensions

    Understanding a digital identity ecosystem is key to formulating your approach to adopt it

    The image contains a screenshot of a digital identity ecosystem diagram.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Digital identity ecosystems comprise many entities playing different roles, and sometimes more than one. In addition, variations in approach by jurisdictions drive how many active players are in the ecosystem for that jurisdiction.

    For example, in countries like Estonia and India, government plays the role of trust and governance authority as well as ID provider, but didn’t start with any Digital ID wallet. In contrast, in Ukraine, Diia App is primarily a Digital ID Wallet. Similarly, in the US, different states are adopting private Digital ID Wallet providers like Apple.

    Digital ID ecosystem’s sustainability lies in the key principles it is built on

    Social, economic, and legal alignment with target stakeholders
    Transparent governance and operation
    Legally auditable and enforceable
    Robust and Resilient – High availability
    Security – At rest, in progress, and in transit
    Privacy and Control with users
    Omni-channel Convenience – User and Operations
    Minimum data transfer between entities
    Technical interoperability enabled through open standards and protocol
    Scalable and interoperable at policy level
    Cost effective – User and operations
    Inclusive and accessible

    Info-Tech Insight

    A transparent, resilient, and auditable digital ID system must be aligned with socio-economic realities of the target stakeholders. It not only respects their privacy and security of their data by minimizing the data transfer between entities, but also drives desired customer experience by providing an omni-channel, interoperable, scalable, and inclusive ecosystem while still being cost-effective for the collaborators.

    Source: Adapted from Canada PCTF, UK Trust framework, European Commission, Australia TDIF, and others

    Focus on key success factors to drive the digital ID adoption

    Digital ID success factors

    Legislative regulatory framework – Removes uncertainty
    Security & Privacy Assurance- builds trust
    Smooth user experience – Drives preferences
    Transparent ecosystem – Drives inclusivity
    Multi-channel – Drive consistent experience online / offline
    Inter-operability thorough open standards
    Digital literacy – Education and awareness
    Multi-purpose & reusable – Reduce consumer burden
    Collaborative ecosystem –Build network effect

    Source: Adapted from Canada PCTF, UK digital identity & attributes trust framework , European eIDAS, and others

    Info-Tech Insight

    Driving adoption of Digital ID requires affirmative actions from all ecosystem players including governing authorities, identity providers, and identity consumers (relying parties).

    These nine success factors can help drive sustainable adoption of the Digital ID.

    Among many responsibilities the ecosystem players have, identity governance is the key to sustainability

    • Digital identity provision
      • Creating identity attributes
      • Create a reusable identity and attribute service
      • Create a digital identity
      • Assess and manage quality of an identity and attributes
      • Making identity provision inclusive and accessible
    • Digital identity resolution
      • Enabling inclusive access to products and services through digital identity
      • Authenticate and authorize identity subjects before permitting access to their identity and attributes
    • Digital identity governance
      • Manage digital identity and attributes
      • Make Identity service interoperable, and sharable
      • Recover digital identity and attribute accounts
      • Notifying users on accessing identity or making changes on more attributes
      • Report and audit – exclusion, accessibility
      • Retiring an identity or attribute service
      • Respond to complaints and disputes
    • Enterprise risk management and governance
    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate how identity governance is the key to sustainability.
    • Privacy and security
      • Use encryption
      • Privacy compliance framework
      • Consumer Privacy Protection laws (CPPA, GDPR etc.)
      • Acquiring and managing user consents & agreements
      • Prohibited processing of personal data
      • Security controls and governance
    • Information management
      • Record management
      • Archival
      • Disposal (on expiry or to comply with regulations)
      • CIA (confidentiality, integrity, availability)
    • Fraud management
      • Fraud monitoring and reporting
      • Fraud intelligence and analysis
      • Sharing threat indicators
      • Legal, policies and procedures for fraud management
    • Incident response
      • Respond to fraud incidents
      • Respond to a service delivery incident
      • Responding to data breaches
      • Performing and participating in investigation

    Global evolution of digital ID is following the socio-economic aspirations of countries

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph that demonstrates global evolution of digital ID.

    Source: Adapted from the book: Identification Revolution: Can Digital ID be harnessed for Development? (Gelb & Metz), 2018

    Info-Tech Insight

    The world became global a long time ago; however, it sustained economic progress without digital IDs for most of the world's population.

    With the pandemic, when political rhetoric pointed to the demand for localized supply chains, economies became irreversibly digital. In this digital economy, the digital ID ecosystem is the fulcrum of sustainable growth.

    At a time in overlapping jurisdictions, multiple digital IDs can exist. For example, one is issued by a local municipality, one by the province, and another by the national government.

    Global footprint of digital ID is evolving rapidly, but varies in approach

    The image contains a screenshot of a Global footprint of digital ID.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Countries’ approach to the digital ID is rooted in their socio-economic environment and global aspirations.

    Emerging economies with large underserved populations prioritize fast implementation of digital ID through centralized systems.

    Developed economies with smaller populations, low trust in government, and established ID systems prioritize developing trust frameworks to drive decentralized full-scale implementation.

    There is no right way except the one which follows Digital ID principles and aligns with a country’s and its people’s aspirations.

    Estonia's e-identity is the key to its digital agenda 2030

    • Regulatory Body and Operational Governance: Estonian Information System Authority (RIA).
    • Identity Providers: Government of Estonia; Private sector doesn’t issue IDs but can leverage Digital ID ecosystem.
    • Decentralized Approach: Permissioned Blockchain Architecture with built-in data traceability implemented on KSI (Keyless Signature Infrastructure).
    • X-Road – Secure, interoperable open-source data exchange platform between collection point where Data is stored.
    • Digital Identity Form: e-ID
    • Key Use cases:
      • Financial, Telecom: e-KYC, e-Banking
      • Digital Authentication: ID Card, Mobile ID, Smart ID, Digital Signatures
      • E-governance: e-Voting, e-Residency, e-Services Registries, e-Business Register
      • Smart City and mobility: Freight Transportation, Passenger Mobility
      • Healthcare: e-Health Record, e-Prescription, e-Ambulance
    • ID-card
    • Smart ID
    • Mobile ID
    • e-Residency

    Uniqueness

    Estonia pioneered the digital ID implementation with a centralized approach and later transitioned to a decentralized ecosystem driving trust to attract non-citizens into Estonia’s digital economy.

    99% Of Estonian residents have an ID card enabling use of electronic ID

    1.4 B Digital signatures given (2021)

    99% Public Services available as e-Services

    17K+ Productive years saved (five working days/citizen/year saved accessing public services)

    25K E-resident companies contributed more than €32 million in tax

    *Source: https://e-estonia.com/wp-content/uploads/e-estonia-211022_eng.pdf ;

    https://www.e-resident.gov.ee/dashboard

    The image contains a timeline of events from 2001-2020 for Estonia..

    India’s Aadhaar is the foundation of its digital journey through “India stack”

    • Regulatory Accountability and Operational Governance: Unique Identification Authority of India (UIDAI).
    • Identity Provider: Govt. of India.
    • Digital Identity Form: Physical and electronic ID Card; Online (Identifier + OTP), and offline (identifier + biometric) usage; mAadhaar App & Web Portal
    • India Stack: a set of open APIs and digital assets to leverage Aadhaar in identity, data, and payments at scale.
    • Key Use cases:
      • Financial, Telecom: eKYC, Unified Payments Interface (UPI)
      • Digital Wallet: Digi Locker
      • Digital Authentication: eSign, and Aadhaar Auth.
      • Public Welfare: Public Distribution of Service, Social Pension, Employment Guarantee
      • Public service access: Enrollment to School, Healthcare

    1.36B People enrolled

    80% Beneficiaries feel Aadhaar has made PDS, employment guarantee and social pensions more reliable

    91.6% Are very satisfied or somewhat satisfied with Aadhaar

    14B eKYC transactions done by 218 eKYC authentication agencies (KUA)

    Source: https://uidai.gov.in/aadhaar_dashboard/india.php; https://www.stateofaadhaar.in/

    World Bank Report on Private Sector Impacts from ID

    Uniqueness

    “The Aadhaar digital identity system could reduce onboarding costs for Indian firms from 1,500 rupees to as low as an estimated 10 rupees.”

    -World Bank Report on Private Sector Impacts from ID

    With lack of public trust in private sector, government brought in private sector executives in public ecosystem to lead the largest identity program globally and build the India stack to leverage the power of Digital Identity.

    The image contains a screenshot of India's Aadhaar timeline from 2009-2022.

    Ukraine’s Diia is a resilient act to preserve their identities during threat to their existence

    Regulatory Accountability and Operational Governance: Ministry of Digital Transformation.

    Identity provider: Federated govt. agencies.

    Digital identity form: Diia App & Portal as a digital wallet for all IDs including digital driving license.

    • Key use cases:
      • eGovernance – Issuing license and permits, business registration, vaccine certificates.
      • Public communication: air-raid alerts, notifications, court decisions and fines.
      • Financial, Telecom: KYC compliance, mobile donations.
      • eBusiness: Diia City legal framework for IT industry, Diia Business Portal for small and medium businesses.
      • Digital sharing and authentication: Diia signature and Diia QR.
      • Public service access: Diia Education Portal for digital education and digital skills development, healthcare.

    18.5M People downloaded the Diia app.

    14 Digital IDs provided by other ID providers are available through Diia.

    70 Government services are available through Diia.

    ~1M Private Entrepreneurs used Diia to register their companies.

    1300 Tons of paper estimated to be saved by reducing paper applications for new IDs and replacements.

    Source:

    • Ukraine Govt. Website for Invest and trade
    • Diia Case study prepared for the office of Canadian senator colin deacon.

    Uniqueness

    “One of the reasons for the Diia App's popularity is its focus on user experience. In September 2022, the Diia App simplified 25 public services and digitized 16 documents. The Ministry of Digital Transformation aims to make 100% of all public services available online by 2024.”

    - Vladyslava Aleksenko

    Project Lead—digital Identity, Ukraine

    The image contains a screenshot of the timeline for Diia.

    Canada’s PCTF (Pan Canadian Trust Framework) driving the federated digital identity ecosystem

    • Regulatory Accountability: Treasury Board of Canada Secretariat (TBS); Canadian Digital Service (CDS); Office of CIO
    • Standard Setting: Digital Identification and Authentication Council of Canada (DIACC)
    • Frameworks:
      • Treasury Board Directive on Identity Management
      • Pan Canadian Trust Framework (PCTF)
      • Voilà Verified Trustmark Program: ISO aligned compliance certification program on PCTF
      • Governing / Certificate Authority: Trustmark Oversight Board (TOB) and DIACC accredited assessor
      • Operational Governance: Federated between identity providers and identity consumers
      • Identity Providers: Public and Private Sector
      • Other entities involved: Digital ID Lab (Voila Verified Auditor); Kuma (Accredited Assessor)
    The image contains a screenshot of PCTF Components.

    82% People supportive of Digital ID.

    2/3 Canadians prefer public-private partnership for Pan-Canadian digital ID framework.

    >40% Canadians prefer completing various tasks and transactions digitally.

    75% Canadians are willing to share personal information for better experience.

    >80% Trust government, healthcare providers, and financial institutions with their personal information.

    Source: DIACC Survey 2021

    Uniqueness

    Although a few provinces in Canada started their Digital ID journey already, federally, Canada lacked an approach.

    Now Canada is developing a federated Digital ID ecosystem driven through the Pan-Canadian Trust Framework (PCTF) led by a non-profit (DIACC) formed with public and private partnership.

    The image contains a screenshot of Canada's PCTF timeline from 2002-2025.

    Australia’s digital id is pivotal to its vision to become one of the Top-3 digital governments globally by 2025*

    * Australia Digital Government Strategy 2021
    • Regulatory responsibility and standard: Digital Transformation Agency (DTA)’s Digital Identity
    • Operational support and oversight: Service Australia, Interim Oversight Authority (IOA).
    • Accredited identity providers (by 2022): Australian Taxation Office (ATO)’s myGovID, Australia Post’s Digital ID, MasterCard’s ID, OCR Labs App
    • Framework: Trusted Digital Identity Framework (TDIF)
      • Digital Identity Exchange
      • Identity Service Providers and Attribute Verification Service
      • Attribute Service Providers
      • Credential Service Providers
      • Relying Parties
    • Others: States such as NSW, Victoria, and Queensland have their own digital identity programs

    8.6M People using myGovID by Jun-2022

    117 Services accessible through Digital Id System

    The image contains a screenshot diagram of Digital Identity.

    Uniqueness

    Australia started its journey of Digital ID with a centralized Digital ID ecosystem.

    However, now it preparing to transition to a centrally governed Trust framework-based ecosystem expanding to private sector.

    The image contains a screenshot of Australia's Digital id timeline from 2014-2022.

    UK switches gear to the Trust Framework approach to build a public-private digital ID ecosystem

    • Government: Ministry of Digital Infrastructure / Department of Digital, Culture, Media, and Sport
    • Governing Body / Certificate Authority / Operational Governance: TBD
    • Approach: Trust Framework-based UK Digital Identity and attributes trust framework (UKDIATF)
    • Identity providers: Transitioning from “GOV.UK Verify” to a federated digital identity system aligned with “Trust Framework” – enabling both government (“One Login for Government”) and private sector identity providers.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Trust Framework.

    Uniqueness

    UK embarked its Digital ID journey through Gov.UK Verify but decided to scrap it recently.

    It is now preparing to build a trust framework-based federated digital ID ecosystem with roles like schema-owners and orchestration service providers for private sector and drive the collaboration between industry players.

    The image contains a screenshot of UK timeline from 2011-2023.

    Digital ID will transform all industries, though financial services and e-governance will gain most

    Cross Industry

    Financial Services

    Insurance

    E-governance

    Healthcare & Lifesciences

    Travel and Tourism

    E-Commerce

    • Onboarding (customer, employee, patient, etc.)
    • Fraud-prevention (identity theft)
    • Availing restricted services (buying liquor)
    • Secure-sharing of credentials and qualifications (education, experience, gig worker)
    • For businesses, customer 360
    • For businesses, reliable data-driven decision making with lower frequency of ‘astroturfing’ (false identities) and ‘ballot-stuffing’ (duplicate identities)
    • Account opening
    • Asset transfer
    • Payments
    • For businesses, risk management - know your customer (KYC), anti-money laundering (AML), customer due diligence (CDD)
    • Insurance history
    • Insurance claim
    • Public distribution schemes (PDS)
    • Subsidy payments (direct to consumer)
    • Obtain government benefits (maternity, pension, employment guarantee / insurance payments)
    • Tax filing
    • Issuing credentials (birth certificate, passport)
    • Voting
    • For businesses, availing governments supports
    • For SMB businesses, easier regulatory compliance
    • Digital health
    • Out of state public healthcare
    • Secure access to health and diagnostic records
    • For businesses, data sharing between providers and with payers
    • Travel booking
    • Cross-border travel
    • Car rental
    • Secure peer-to-peer sales
    • Secure peer-to-peer sales

    USE CASE

    Car rental

    INDUSTRY: Travel & Tourism

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group

    Challenge

    Solution

    Results

    Verifying the driver’s license (DL) is the first step a car rental company takes before handing over the keys.

    While the rental company only need to know the validity of the DL and if it belongs to the presenter, is bears the liability of much more data presented to them through the DL.

    For customers, it is impossible to rent a car if they forget their DL. If the customer has their driver’s license, they compromise their privacy and security as they hand over their license to the representative.

    The process is not only time consuming, it also creates unnecessary risks to both the business and the renter.

    A digital id-based rental process allows the renter to present the digital id online or in person.

    As the customer approaches the car rental they present their digital id on the mobile app, which has already authenticated the presenter though the biometrics or other credentials.

    The customer selects the purpose of the business as “Car Rental”, and only the customer’s name, photo, and validity of the DL appear on the screen for the representative to see (selective disclosures).

    If the car pick-up is online, only this information is shared with the car rental company, which in turn shares the car and key location with the renter.

    A digital identity-based identity verification can ensure a rental company has access to the minimum data it needs to comply with local laws, which in turn reduces its data leak risk.

    It also reduces customer risks linked to forgetting the DL, and data privacy.

    Digital identity also reduces the risk originated from identity fraud leading to stolen cars.

    USE CASE

    e-Governance public distribution service

    INDUSTRY: Government

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group

    Challenge

    Solution

    Results

    In both emerging and developed economies, public distribution of resources – food, subsidies, or cash – is a critical process through which many people (especially from marginalized sections) survive on.

    They often either don’t have required valid proof of identity or fall prey to low-level corruption when someone defrauds them by claiming the benefit.

    As a result, they either completely miss out on claiming government-provided social benefits OR only receive a part of what they are eligible for.

    A Digital ID based public distribution can help created a Direct Benefit Transfer ecosystem.

    Here beneficiaries register (manually OR automatically from other government records) for the benefits they are eligible for.

    On the specific schedule, they receive their benefit – monetary benefit in their bank accounts, and non-cash benefits, in person from authorized points-of-sales (POS), without any middleman with discretionary decision powers on the distribution.

    India launched its Financial Inclusion Program (Prime Minister's Public Finance Scheme) in 2014.

    The program was linked with India’s Digital Id Aadhaar to smoothen the otherwise bureaucratic and discretionary process for opening a bank account.

    In last eight years, ~481M (Source: PMJDY) beneficiaries have opened a bank account and deposited ~ ₹1.9Trillion (USD$24B), a part of which came as social benefits directly deposited to these accounts from the government of India.

    USE CASE

    Real-estate investment and sale

    INDUSTRY: Asset Management

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group

    Challenge

    Solution

    Results

    “Impersonators posing as homeowners linked to 32 property fraud cases in Ontario and B.C.” – Global News Canada1

    “The level of fraud in the UK is such that it is now a national security threat” – UK Finance Lobby Group2

    Real estate is the most expensive investment people make in their lives. However, lately it has become a soft target for title fraud. Fraudsters steal the title to one’s home and sell it or apply for a new mortgage against it.

    At the root cause of these fraud are usually identity theft when a fraudster steals someone’s identity and impersonates them as the title owner.

    Digital identity tagged to the home ownership / title record can reduce the identity fraud in title transfer.

    When a person wants to sell their house OR apply for a new mortgage on house, multiple notifications will be triggered to their contact attributes on digital ID – phone, email, postal address, and digital ID Wallet, if applicable.

    The homeowner will be mandated to authorize the transaction on at least two channels they had set as preferred, to ensure that the transaction has the consent of the registered homeowner.

    This process will stop any fraud transactions until at least two modes are compromised.

    Even if two modes are compromised, the real homeowner will receive the notification on offline communication modes, and they can then alert the institution or lawyer to block the transaction.

    It will especially help elderly people, who are more prone to fall prey to identity frauds when somebody uses their IDs to impersonate them.

    1 Global News (https://globalnews.ca/news/9437913/homeowner-impersonators-lined-32-fraud-cases-ontario-bc/)

    2 UK Finance Lobby Group (https://www.ukfinance.org.uk/system/files/Half-year-fraud-update-2021-FINAL.pdf)

    Adopting digital ID benefits everybody – governments, id providers, id consumers, and end users

    Governments & identity providers

    (public & private)

    Customers and end users

    (subjects)

    Identity consumer

    (relying parties)

    • Growth in GDP
    • Save costs of providing identity
    • Unlock new revenue source by economic expansion
    • Choice and convenience
    • Control of what data is shared
    • Experience driven by simplicity and data minimalization
    • Reduced cost of availing services
    • Operational efficiency
    • Overall cost efficiency of delivering service and products
    • Reduce risk of potential litigation
    • Reduce risk of fraud
    • Enhanced customer experience leading to increased lifetime value
    • Streamlined storage and access
    • Encourage innovation

    Digital ID will transform all industries, though financial services and e-governance will gain most

    Governments and identity providers (public and private)

    • Growth in GDP by reducing bureaucracy and discretion from the governance processes.
      • As per a McKinsey report, digital ID could unlock the economic value equivalent of 3%-13% of GDP across seven focus countries (Brazil, Ethiopia, India, Nigeria, China, UK, USA) in 2030.
      • “Estonia saves two percent of GDP by signing things digitally; imagine if it could go global.” - aavi Rõivas, Prime Minister of the Republic of Estonia (International Peace Institute)
    • Unlock new revenue source by economic expansion.
      • Estonia earned €32 million in tax revenue from e-resident companies (e-Estonia).
    • Save costs of providing identity in collaboration with 3rd parties and reduce fraud.
      • Canada estimates savings of $482 million for provincial and federal governments, and $4.5 billion for private sector organizations through digital id adoption (2022 Budget Statement).

    Digital ID brings end users choice, convenience, control, and cost-saving, driving overall experience

    Customers and end users (subjects)

    • Choice: Citizens have the choice and convenience to interact safely and conveniently online and offline.
    • Convenience: No compulsion to make physical trips to access service, as end users can identify themselves safely and reliably online, as they do offline.
    • Control: A decentralized, privacy enhancing solution – neither government nor private companies control your digital ID. How and when you use digital ID is entirely up to you.
    • Cost Saving: Save costs of availing service by reducing the offline documentation.
    • Experience: Improved experience while availing service without a need to present multiple documents every time.

    Digital id benefits identity consumers by enhancing multiple dimensions of their value streams

    Identity consumer (relying parties)

    • Operational efficiency: Eliminating unnecessary steps and irrelevant data from the value stream increases overall operational efficiency.
    • Cost efficiency: Helps businesses to reduce overall cost of operations like regulatory requirements.
      • World Bank estimated that the Aadhaar could reduce onboarding costs for Indian firms from ₹1,500/- ($23) to as low as an estimated ₹10/- ($0.15) (*World Bank ID4D)
    • Reduce risk of potential litigation issues: Encourage data minimization.
    • Privacy and security: Businesses can reduce the risk of fraud to organizations and users and can significantly boost the privacy and security of their IT assets.
    • Enhanced customer experience: The decrease in the number of touchpoints and faster turnaround.
    • Streamlined storage and access: Store all available data in a single place, and when required.
    • Encourage innovation: Reduce efforts required in authentication and authorization of users.

    Before embarking on the digital identity adoption journey, assess your readiness

    Legislative coverage

    Does your target jurisdiction have adequate legislative framework to enable uses of digital identities in your industry?

    Trust framework

    If the Digital ID ecosystem in your target jurisdiction is trust framework-based, do you have adequate understanding of it?

    Customer touch-points

    Do you have exact understanding of value stream and customer touch-points where you interact with user identity?

    Relevant identity attributes

    Do you have exact understanding of the identity attributes that your business processes need to deliver customer value?

    Regulatory compliance

    Do you have required systems to ensure your compliance with industry regulations around customer PII and identity?

    Interoperability with IMS

    Is your existing identity management system interoperable with Open-source Digital Identity ecosystem?

    Enterprise governance

    Have you established an integrated enterprise governance framework covering business processes, technical systems, and risk management?

    Communication strategy

    Do have a clear strategy (mode, method, means) to communicate with your target customer and persuade them to adopt digital identity?

    Security operations center

    Do you have security operations center coordinating detection, response, resolution, and communication of potential data breaches?

    Ten steps to adopt to enhance the customer experience

    Considering the complexity of digital identity adoption, and its impact on customer experience, it is vital to assess the ecosystem and adopt an MVP approach before a big-bang launch.

    Diagram to help assess the ecosystem.

    1. Define the use case and identify the customer touchpoint in the value stream which can be improved with a verified digital identity.
    2. Ensure your organization is ready to adopt digital identity (Refer to Digital identity adoption readiness),
    3. Identify an Identity Service Provider (Government, private sector), if there are options.
    4. Understand its technical requirements and assess, to the finer detail, your technical landscape for interoperability.
    5. Set-up a business contract for terms of usages and liabilities.
    6. Create and execute a Minimum Viable Program (MVP) of integration which can be tested with real customers.
    7. Extend MVP to the complete solution and define key success metrics.
    8. Canary-launch with a segment of target customers before a full launch.
    9. Educate customers on the usages and benefits, and adapt your communication plan taking feedback
    10. Monitor and continuously improve the solution based on the feedback from ecosystem partners and end-customers, and regulatory changes.

    Understand and manage the risks and challenges of digital identity adoption

    Digital ID adoption is a major change for everyone in the ecosystem.

    Manage associated risks to avoid the derailing of integration with your business processes and a negative impact on customer experience.

    Manage Risks.

    1. Privacy and security risks – Customer’s sensitive data may get centralized with the identity provider.
    2. Single point of failure while relying a specific IDs; it also increases the impact of identity theft and fraud risk.
    3. Centralization and control risks – Identity provider or identity service broker / orchestrator may control who can participate.
    4. Not universal, interoperability risks – if purpose-specific.
    5. Impact omni-channel experience - Not always available (legal / printable) for offline use.
    6. Exclusion and discrimination risks – Specific data requirements may exclude a group of people.
    7. Scope for misuse and misinterpretation if compromised and not reclaimed in timely manner.
    8. Adoption and usability risks – Subjects / relying parties may not see benefit due to lack of awareness or suspicion.
    9. Liability Agreement gaps between identity provider and identity consumer (relying party).

    Recommendations to help you realize the potential of digital identity into your value streams

    1

    Customer-centricity

    Digital identity initiative should prioritize customer experience when evaluating its fit in the value stream. Adopting it should not sacrifice end-user experience to gain a few brownie points.

    See Info-Tech’s Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization blueprint, to ensure customer remains at the center of your Digital Adoption initiative.

    2

    Privacy and security

    Adopting digital identity reduces data risk by minimizing data transfer between providers and consumers. However, securing identity attributes in value streams still requires strengthening enterprise security systems and processes.

    See Info-Tech’s Assess and Govern Identity Security blueprint for the actions you may take to secure and govern digital identity.

    3

    Inclusion and awareness

    Adopting digital identity may alter customer interaction with an organization. To avoid excluding target customer segments, design digital identity accordingly. Educating and informing customers about the changes can facilitate faster adoption.

    See Info-Tech’s Social Media blueprint and IT Diversity & Inclusion Tactics to make inclusion and awareness part of digital adoption

    4

    Quantitative success metrics

    To measure the success of a digital ID adoption program, it's essential to use quantitative metrics that align with business KPIs. Some measurable KPIs may include:

    • Reduction in number of IDs business used to serve 90% of customers
    • Reduction in overall cost of operation
      • Reduction in cost of user authentication
    • Reduction in process cycle time (less time required to complete a task – e.g. KYC)

    Taxonomy – Digital ID ecosystem

    (Alphabetical order)

    Continues..

    Attributes: An identity attribute is a statement or information about a specific aspect of entity’s identity ,substantiating they are who they claim to be, own, or have.

    Attribute (or Credential) provider: An attribute or credential provider could be an organization which issues the primary attribute or credential to a subject or entity. They are also responsible for identity-attribute binding, credential maintenance, suspension, recovery, and authentication.

    Attribute (or Credential) service provider: An attribute service provider could be an organization which originally vetted user’s credentials and certified a specific attribute of their identity. It could also be a software, such as digital wallet, which can store and share a user’s attribute with a third party once consented by the user. (Source: UK Govt. Trust Framework)

    Attribute binding: This is a process an attribute service providers uses to link the attributes they created to a person or an organization through an identifier. This process makes attributes useful and valuable for other entities using these attributes. For example, when a new employee joins a company, they are given a unique employee number (an identifier), which links the person with their job title and other aspects (attributes) of his job. (Source: UK Govt. Trust Framework)

    Authentication service provider: An organization which is responsible for creating and managing authenticators and their lifecycle (issuance, suspension, recovery, maintenance, revocation, and destruction of authenticators). (Source: DIACC)

    Authenticator: Information or biometric characteristics under the control of an individual that is a specific instance of something the subject has, knows, or does. E.g. private signing keys, user passwords, or biometrics like face, fingerprints. (Source: Canada PCTF)

    Authentication (identity verification): The process of confirming or denying that the identity presented relates to the subject who is making the claim by comparing the credentials presented with the ones presented during identity proofing.

    Authorization: The process of validating if the authenticated entity has permission to access a resource (service or product).

    Biometrics attributes: Human attributes like retina (iris), fingerprint, heartbeat, facial, handprint, thumbprint, voice print.

    Centralized identity: Digital identities which are fully governed by a centralized government entity. It may have enrollment or registration agencies, private or public sector, to issue the identities, and the technical system may still be decentralized to keep data federated.

    Certificate Authority (CA or accredited assessors): An organization or an entity that conducts assessments to validate the framework compliance of identity or attribute providers (such as websites, email addresses, companies, or individual persons) serving other users, and binding them to cryptographic keys through the issuance of electronic documents known as digital certificates.

    Taxonomy – Digital ID ecosystem

    (Alphabetical order)

    Continues..

    Collective (non-resolvable) attributes: Nationality, domicile, citizenship, immigration status, age group, disability, income group, membership, (outstanding) credit limit, credit score range.

    Contextual identity: A type of identity which establishes an entity’s existence in a specific context – real or virtual. These can be issued by public or private identity providers and are governed by the organizational policies. E.g. employee ID, membership ID, social media ID, machine ID.

    Credentials: A physical or a digital representation of something that establishes an entity’s eligibility to do something for which it is seeking permission, or an association/affiliation with another, generally well-known entity. E.g. Passport, DL, password. In the context of Digital Identity, every identity needs to be attached with a credential to ensure that the subject of the identity can control how and by whom that identity can be used.

    Cryptographic hash function: A hash function is a one-directional mathematical operation performed on a message of any length to get a unique, deterministic, and fixed size numerical string (the hash) which can’t be reverse engineered to get the input data without deploying disproportionate resources. It is the foundation of modern security solutions in DLT / blockchain as they help in verifying the integrity and authenticity of the message.

    Decentralized identity (DID) or self-sovereign identity: This is a way to give back the control of identity to the subject whose identity it is, using an identity wallet in which they collect verified information about themselves from certified issuers (such as the government). By controlling what information is shared from the wallet to requesting third parties (e.g. when registering for a new online service), the user can better manage their privacy, such as only presenting proof that they’re over 18 without needing to reveal their date of birth. Source: (https://www.gsma.com/identity/decentralised-identity)

    Digital identity wallet: A type of digital wallet refers to a secure, trusted software applications (native mobile app, mobile web apps, or Rivas-hosted web applications) based on common standards, allowing a user to store and use their identity attributes, identifiers, and other credentials without loosing or sharing control of them. This is different than Digital Payment Wallets used for financial transactions. (Source: https://www.worldbank.org/content/dam/photos/1440x300/2022/feb/eID_WB_presentation_BS.pdf)

    Digital identity: A digital identity is primarily an electronic form of identity representing an entity uniquely , while abstracting all other identity attributes of the entity. In addition to an electronic form, it may also exist in a physical form (identity certificate), linked through an identifier representing the same entity. E.g. Estonia eID , India Aadhar, digital citizenship ID.

    Digital object architecture: DOA is an open architecture for interoperability among various information systems, including ID wallets, identity providers, and consumers. It focuses on digital objects and comprises three core components: the identifier/resolution system, the repository system, and the registry system. There are also two protocols that connect these components. (Source: dona.net)

    Digital signature: A digital signature is an electronic, encrypted stamp of authentication on digital information such as email messages, macros, or electronic documents. A signature confirms that the information originated from the signer and has not been altered. (Source: Microsoft)

    Taxonomy – Digital ID ecosystem

    (Alphabetical order)

    Continues..

    Entity (or Subject): In the context of identity, an entity is a person, group, object, or a machine whose claims need to be ascertained and identity needs to be established before his request for a service or products can be fulfilled. An entity can also be referred to as a subject whose identity needs to be ascertained before delivering a service.

    Expiry: This is another dimension of an identity and determines the validity of an ID. Most of the identities are longer term, but there can be a few like digital tokens and URLs which can be issued for a few hours or even minutes. There are some which can be revoked after a pre-condition is met.

    Federated identity: Federated identity is an agreement between two organizations about the definition and use of identity attributes and identifiers of a consumer entity requesting a service. If successful, it allows a consumer entity to get authenticated by one organization (identity provider) and then authorized by another organization. E.g. accessing a third-party website using Google credentials.

    Foundational identity: A type of identity which establishes an entity’s existence in the real world. These are generally issued by public sector / government agencies, governed by a legal farmwork within a jurisdiction, and are widely accepted at least in that jurisdiction. E.g. birth certificate, citizenship certificate.

    Governance: This is a dimension of identity that covers the governance model for a digital ID ecosystem. While traditionally it has been under the sovereign government or a federated structure, in recent times, it has been decentralized through DLT technologies or trust-framework based. It can also be self-sovereign, where individuals fully control their data and ID attributes.

    Identifier: A digital identifier is a string of characters that uniquely represents an entity’s identity in a specific context and scope even if one or more identity attributes of the subject change over time. E.g. driver’s license, SSN, SIN, email ID, digital token, user ID, device ID, cookie ID.

    Identity: An identity is an instrument used by an entity to provide the required information about itself to another entity in order to avail a service, access a resource, or exercise a privilege. An identity formed by 1-n identity attributes and a unique identifier.

    Identity and access management (IAM): IAM is a set of frameworks, technologies, and processes to enable the creation, maintenance, and use of digital identity, ensuring that the right people gain access to the right materials and records at the right time. (Source: https://iam.harvard.edu/)

    Identity consumer (Relying party): An organization, or an entity relying on identity provider to mitigate IT risks around knowing its customers before delivering the end-user value (product/service) without deteriorating end-user experience. E.g. Canada Revenue Agency using SecureKey service and relying on Banking institutions to authenticate users; Telecom service providers in India relying on Aadhaar identity system to authenticate the customer's identity.

    Identity form: A dimension of identity that defines its forms depending on the scope it wants to serve. It can be a physical card for offline uses, a virtual identifier like a number, or an app/account with multiple identity attributes. Cryptographic keys and tokens can also be forms of identity.

    Taxonomy – Digital ID ecosystem

    (Alphabetical order)

    Continues...

    Identity infrastructure provider: Organizations involved in creating and maintaining technological infrastructure required to manage the lifecycle of digital identities, attributes, and credentials. They implement functions like security, privacy, resiliency, and user experience as specified in the digital identity policy and trust framework.

    Identity proofing: A process of asserting the identification of a subject at a useful identity assurance level when the subject provides evidence to a credential service provider (CSP), reliably identifying themselves. (Source: NIST Special Publication 800-63A)

    Identity provider (Attestation authority): An organization or an entity validating the foundation or contextual claims of a subject and establishing identifier(s) for a subject. E.g. DMV (US) and MTA (Canada) issuing drivers’ licenses; Google / Facebook issuing authentication tokens for their users logging in on other websites.

    Identity validation: The process of confirming or denying the accuracy of identity information of a subject as established by an authorized party. It doesn’t ensure that the presenter is using their own identity.

    Identity verification (Authentication): The process of confirming or denying that the identity presented relates to the subject who is making the claim by comparing the credentials presented with the ones presented during identity proofing.

    Internationalized resource identifier (IRI): IRIs are equivalent to URIs except that IRIs also allow non-ascii characters in the address space, while URIs only allow us-ascii encoding. (Source: w3.org)

    Jurisdiction: A dimension of identity that covers the physical area or virtual space where an identity is legally acceptable for the purpose defined under law. It can be global, like it is for passport, or it can be local within a municipality for specific services. For unverified digital IDs, it can be the social network.

    Multi-factor Authentication (MFA): Multi-factor authentication is a layered approach to securing digital assets (data and applications), where a system requires a user to present a combination of two or more credentials to verify a user’s identity for login. These factors can be a combination of (i) something you know like a password/PIN; (ii) something you have like a token on mobile device; and (iii) something you are like a biometric. (Adapted from https://www.cisa.gov/publication/multi-factor-authentication-mfa)

    Oauth (Open authorization): OAuth is a standard authorization protocol and used for access delegation. It allows internet users to access websites by using credentials managed by a third-party authorization server / Identity Provider. It is designed for HTTP and allows access tokens to be issued by an authorization server to third-party websites. E.g. Google, Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn use Oauth to delegate access.

    OpenID: OpenID is a Web Authentication Protocol and implements reliance authentication mechanism. It facilitates the functioning of federated identity by allowing a user to use an existing account (e.g. Google, Facebook, Yahoo) to sign into third-party websites without needing to create new credentials. (Source: https://openid.net/).

    Taxonomy – Digital ID ecosystem

    (Alphabetical order)

    Continues...

    Personally identifiable information (PII): PII is a set of attributes which can be used, through direct or indirect means, to infer the real-world identity of the individual whose information is input. E.g. National ID (SSN/SIN/Aadhar) DL, name, date of birth, age, address, age, identifier, university credentials, health condition, email, domain name, website URI (web resolvable) , phone number, credit card number, username/password, public key / private key. (Source: https://www.dol.gov)

    Predicates: The mathematical or logical operations such as equality or greater than on attributes (e.g. prove your salary is greater than x or your age is greater than y) to prove a claim without sharing the actual values.

    Purpose: This dimension of a digital id defines for what purpose digital id can be used. It can be one or many of these – authentication, authorization, activity linking, historical record keeping, social interactions, and machine connectivity for IoT use cases.

    Reliance authentication: Relying on a third-party authentication before providing a service. It is a method followed in a federated entity system.

    Risk-based authentication: A mechanism to protect against account compromise or identity theft. It correlates an authentication request with transitional facts like requester’s location, past frequency of login, etc. to reduce the risk of potential fraud.

    Scheme in trust framework: A specific set of rules (standard and custom) around the use of digital identities and attributes as agreed by one or more organizations. It is useful when those organizations have similar products, services, business processes. (Source: UK Govt. Trust Framework). E.g. Many credit unions agree on how they will use the identity in loan origination and servicing.

    Selective disclosure (Assertion): A way to present one’s identity by sharing only a limited amount information that is critical to make an authentication / authorization decision. E.g. when presenting your credentials, you could share something proving you are 18 years or above, but not share your name, exact age, address, etc.

    Trust: A dimension of an identity, which essentially is a belief in the reliability, truth, ability, or strength of that identity. While in the physical world all acceptable form of identities come with a verified trust, in online domain, it can be unverified. Also, where an identity is only acceptable as per the contract between two entities, but not widely.

    Trust framework: The trust framework is a set of rules that different organizations agree to follow to deliver one or more of their services. This includes legislation, standards, guidance, and the rules in this document. By following these rules, all services and organizations using the trust framework can describe digital identities and attributes they’ve created in a consistent way. This should make it easier for organizations and users to complete interactions and transactions or share information with other trust framework participants. (Source: UK Govt. Trust Framework)

    Taxonomy – Digital ID ecosystem

    (Alphabetical order)

    Continues...

    Uniform resource identifier (URI): A universal name in registered name spaces and addresses referring to registered protocols or name spaces.

    Uniform resource locator (URL): A type of URI which expresses an address which maps onto an access algorithm using network protocols. (Source: https://www.w3.org/)

    Uniform resource name (URN): A type of URI that includes a name within a given namespace but may not be accessible on the internet.

    Usability: A dimension of identity that defines how many times it can be used. While most of the identities are multi-use, a few digital identities are in token form and can be used only once to authenticate oneself.

    Usage mode: A dimension of identity that defines the service mode in which a digital ID can be used. While all digital IDs are made for online usage, many can also be used in offline interactions.

    Verifiable credentials: This W3C standard specification provides a standard way to express credentials on the Web in a way that is cryptographically secure, privacy-respecting, and machine-verifiable. (Source: https://www.w3.org/TR/vc-data-model/)

    X.509 Certificates: X.509 certificates are standard digital documents that represent an entity providing a service to another entity. They're issued by a certification authority (CA), subordinate CA, or registration authority. These certificates play an important role in ascertaining the validity of an identity provider and in turn the identities issued by it. (Source: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/iot-hub/reference-x509-certificates)

    Zero-knowledge proofs: A method by which one party (the prover) can prove to another party (the verifier) that something is true, without revealing any information apart from the fact that this specific statement is true. (Source: 1989 SIAM Paper)

    Zero-trust security: A cybersecurity paradigm focused on resource protection and the premise that trust is never granted implicitly but must be continually evaluated. It evaluates each access request as if it is a fraud attempt, and grants access only if it passes the authentication and authorization test. (Source: Adapted from NIST, SP 800-207: Zero Trust Architecture, 2020)

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap
    Leverage an iterative and repeatable process to apply zero trust to your organization.

    Assess and Govern Identity Security
    Strong identity security and governance are the keys to the zero-trust future.

    Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization
    Innovation needs design thinking to ensure customer remains at the center of everything the organization does.

    Social Media
    Leveraging Social Media to connect with your customers and educate them to drive the value proposition of your efforts.

    IT Diversity & Inclusion Tactics
    Equip your teams to create an inclusive environment and mobilize inclusion efforts across the organization.


    Research Contributors and Experts

    David Wallace

    David Wallace
    Executive Counselor

    Erik Avakian

    Erik Avakian
    Technical Counselor, Data Architecture and Governance

    Matthew Bourne

    Matthew Bourne
    Managing Partner, Public Sector Global Services

    Mike Tweedie

    Mike Tweedie
    Practice Lead, CIO Research Development

    Aaron Shum

    Aaron Shum
    Vice President, Security & Privacy

    Works Cited

    India Aadhaar PMJDY (https://pmjdy.gov.in/account)
    Theis, S., Rusconi, G., Panggabean, E., Kelly, S. (2020). Delivering on the Potential of Digitized G2P: Driving Women’s Financial Inclusion and Empowerment through Indonesia’s Program Keluarga Harapan. Women’s World Banking.
    DIACC Canada (https://diacc.ca/the-diacc/)
    UK digital identity & attributes trust framework alpha v2 (0.2) - GOV.UK (https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/uk-digital-identity-attributes-trust-framework-updated-version/uk-digital-identity-and-attributes-trust-framework-alpha-version-2)
    Australia Trusted Digital Identity Framework (https://www.digitalidentity.gov.au/tdif#changes)
    eIDAS (https://digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu/en/policies/eidas-regulation)
    Europe Digital Wallet – POTENTIAL (https://www.digital-identity-wallet.eu/)
    Canada PCTF (https://diacc.ca/trust-framework/)
    Identification Revolution: Can Digital ID be harnessed for Development? (Gelb & Metz), 2018
    e-Estonia website (https://e-estonia.com/solutions/e-identity/id-card/)
    Aadhaar Dashboard (https://uidai.gov.in/)
    DIACC Website (https://diacc.ca/the-diacc/)
    Australia Digital ID website (https://www.digitalidentity.gov.au/tdif#changes)
    UK Policy paper - digital identity & attributes trust framework (https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/uk-digital-identity-attributes-trust-framework-updated-version/uk-digital-identity-and-attributes-trust-framework-alpha-version-2)
    Ukraine Govt. website (https://ukraine.ua/invest-trade/digitalization/)
    Singapore SingPass Website (https://www.tech.gov.sg/products-and-services/singpass/)
    Norway BankID Website (https://www.bankid.no/en/private/about-us/)
    Brazil National ID Card website (https://www.gov.br/casacivil/pt-br/assuntos/noticias/2022/julho/nova-carteira-de-identidade-nacional-modelo-unico-a-partir-de-agosto)
    Indonesia Coverage in Professional Security Magazine (https://www.professionalsecurity.co.uk/products/id-cards/indonesian-cards/)
    Philippine ID System (PhilSys) website (https://www.philsys.gov.ph/)
    China coverage on eGovReview (https://www.egovreview.com/article/news/559/china-announces-plans-national-digital-ids)
    Thales Group Website - DHS’s Automated Biometric Identification System IDENT (https://www.thalesgroup.com/en/markets/digital-identity-and-security/government/customer-cases/ident-automated-biometric-identification-system)
    FranceConnect (https://franceconnect.gouv.fr/)
    Germany: Office for authorization cert. (https://www.personalausweisportal.de/Webs/PA/DE/startseite/startseite-node.html)
    Italian Digital Services Authority (https://www.spid.gov.it/en/)
    Monacco Mconnect (https://mconnect.gouv.mc/en)
    Estonia eID (https://e-estonia.com/wp-content/uploads/e-estonia-211022_eng.pdf)
    E-Residency Dashboard (https://www.e-resident.gov.ee/dashboard)
    Unique ID authority of India (https://uidai.gov.in/aadhaar_dashboard/india.php)
    State of Aadhaar (https://www.stateofaadhaar.in/)
    World Bank (https://documents1.worldbank.org/curated/en/219201522848336907/pdf/Private-Sector-Economic-Impacts-from-Identification-Systems.pdf)
    WorldBank - ID4D 2022 Annual Report (https://documents.worldbank.org/en/publication/documents-reports/documentdetail/099437402012317995/idu00fd54093061a70475b0a3b50dd7e6cdfe147)
    Ukraine Govt. Website for Invest and trade (https://ukraine.ua/invest-trade/digitalization/)
    Diia Case study prepared for the office of Canadian senator colin deacon (https://static1.squarespace.com/static/63851cbda1515c69b8a9a2b9/t/6398f63a9d78ae73d2fd5725/1670968891441/2022-case-study-report-diia-mobile-application.pdf)
    Canadian Digital Identity Research (https://diacc.ca/wp-content/uploads/2022/04/DIACC-2021-Research-Report-ENG.pdf)
    Voilà Verified Trustmark (https://diacc.ca/voila-verified/)
    Digital Identity, 06A Federation Onboarding Guidance paper, March 2022 (https://www.digitalidentity.gov.au/sites/default/files/2022-04/TDIF%2006A%20Federation%20Onboarding%20Guidance%20-%20Release%204.6%20%28Doc%20Version%201.2%29.pdf)
    UK digital identity & attributes trust framework alpha v2 (0.2) - GOV.UK (https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/uk-digital-identity-attributes-trust-framework-updated-version/uk-digital-identity-and-attributes-trust-framework-alpha-version-2)
    A United Nations Estimate of KYC/AML (https://www.imf.org/Publications/fandd/issues/2018/12/imf-anti-money-laundering-and-economic-stability-straight)
    India Aadhaar PMJDY (https://pmjdy.gov.in/account)
    Global News (https://globalnews.ca/news/9437913/homeowner-impersonators-lined-32-fraud-cases-ontario-bc/)
    UK Finance Lobby Group (https://www.ukfinance.org.uk/system/files/Half-year-fraud-update-2021-FINAL.pdf) McKinsey Digital ID report ( https://www.mckinsey.com/capabilities/mckinsey-digital/our-insights/digital-identification-a-key-to-inclusive-growth) International Peace Institute ( https://www.ipinst.org/2016/05/information-technology-and-governance-estonia#7)
    E-Estonia Report (https://e-estonia.com/wp-content/uploads/e-estonia-211022_eng.pdf)
    2022 Budget Statement (https://diacc.ca/2022/04/07/2022-budget-statement/)
    World Bank ID4D - Private Sector Economic Impacts from Identification Systems 2018 (https://documents1.worldbank.org/curated/en/219201522848336907/Private-Sector-Economic-Impacts-from-Identification-Systems.pdf)
    DIACC Canada (https://diacc.ca/the-diacc/)
    UK digital identity & attributes trust framework alpha v2 (0.2) - GOV.UK (https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/uk-digital-identity-attributes-trust-framework-updated-version/uk-digital-identity-and-attributes-trust-framework-alpha-version-2)
    https://www.gsma.com/identity/decentralised-identity
    https://www.worldbank.org/content/dam/photos/1440x300/2022/feb/eID_WB_presentation_BS.pdf
    Microsoft Digital signatures and certificates (https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/office/digital-signatures-and-certificates-8186cd15-e7ac-4a16-8597-22bd163e8e96)
    https://www.worldbank.org/content/dam/photos/1440x300/2022/feb/eID_WB_presentation_BS.pdf
    https://www.dona.net/digitalobjectarchitecture
    IAM (https://iam.harvard.edu/)
    NIST Special Publication 800-63A (https://pages.nist.gov/800-63-3/sp800-63a.html)
    https://www.cisa.gov/publication/multi-factor-authentication-mfa
    https://openid.net/
    U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR (https://www.dol.gov/)
    UK govt. trust framework (https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/uk-digital-identity-attributes-trust-framework-updated-version/uk-digital-identity-and-attributes-trust-framework-alpha-version-2)
    https://www.w3.org/
    Verifiable Credentials Data Model v1.1 (https://www.w3.org/TR/vc-data-model/)
    https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/iot-hub/reference-x509-certificates

    Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}433|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $124,419 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 31 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • Companies are approving more projects than they can deliver. Most organizations say they have too many projects on the go and an unmanageable and ever-growing backlog of things to get to.
    • While organizations want to achieve a high throughput of approved projects, many are unable or unwilling to allocate an appropriate level of IT resourcing to adequately match the number of approved initiatives.
    • Portfolio management practices must find a way to accommodate stakeholder needs without sacrificing the portfolio to low-value initiatives that do not align with business goals.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Approve only the right projects that you have capacity to deliver. Failure to align projects with strategic goals and resource capacity are the most common causes of portfolio waste across organizations.
    • More time spent with stakeholders during the ideation phase to help set realistic expectations for stakeholders and enhance visibility into IT’s capacity and processes is key to both project and organizational success.
    • Too much intake red tape will lead to an underground economy of projects that escape portfolio oversight, while too little intake formality will lead to a wild west of approvals that could overwhelm the PMO. Finding the right balance of intake formality for your organization is the key to establishing a PMO that has the ability to focus on the right things.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish an effective scorecard to create transparency into IT’s capacity and processes. This will help set realistic expectations for stakeholders, eliminate “squeaky wheel” prioritization, and give primacy to the highest value requests.
    • Build a centralized process that funnels requests into a single intake channel to eliminate confusion and doubt for stakeholders and staff while also reducing off-the-grid initiatives.
    • Clearly define a series of project approval steps, and communicate requirements for passing them.
    • Develop practices that incorporate the constraint of resource capacity to cap the amount of project approvals to that which is realistic to help improve the throughput of projects through the portfolio.

    Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should optimize project intake, approval, and prioritization process, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Set realistic goals for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process

    Get value early by piloting a scorecard for objectively determining project value, and then examine your current state of project intake to set realistic goals for optimizing the process.

    • Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization – Phase 1: Set Realistic Goals for Optimizing Process
    • Project Value Scorecard Development Tool
    • Project Intake Workflow Template - Visio
    • Project Intake Workflow Template - PDF
    • Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP

    2. Build an optimized project intake, approval, and prioritization process

    Take a deeper dive into each of the three processes – intake, approval, and prioritization – to ensure that the portfolio of projects is best aligned to stakeholder needs, strategic objectives, and resource capacity.

    • Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization – Phase 2: Build New Optimized Processes
    • Light Project Request Form
    • Detailed Project Request Form
    • Project Intake Classification Matrix
    • Benefits Commitment Form Template
    • Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool
    • Fast Track Business Case Template
    • Comprehensive Business Case Template
    • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    3. Integrate the new optimized processes into practice

    Plan a course of action to pilot, refine, and communicate the new optimized process using Info-Tech’s expertise in organizational change management.

    • Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization – Phase 3: Integrate the New Processes into Practice
    • Intake Process Pilot Plan Template
    • Project Backlog Manager
    • Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Refocus on Project Value to Set Realistic Goals

    The Purpose

    Set the course of action for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization by examining the current state of the process, the team, the stakeholders, and the organization as a whole.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    The overarching goal of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process is to maximize the throughput of the best projects. To achieve this goal, one must have a clear way to determine what are “the best” projects.

    Activities

    1.1 Define the criteria with which to determine project value.

    1.2 Envision your target state for your optimized project intake, approval, and prioritization process.

    Outputs

    Draft project valuation criteria

    Examination of current process, definition of process success criteria

    2 Examine, Optimize, and Document the New Process

    The Purpose

    Drill down into, and optimize, each of the project intake, approval, and prioritization process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Info-Tech’s methodology systemically fits the project portfolio into its triple constraint of stakeholder needs, strategic objectives, and resource capacity, to effectively address the challenges of establishing organizational discipline for project intake.

    Activities

    2.1 Conduct retrospectives of each process against Info-Tech’s best practice methodology for project intake, approval, and prioritization process.

    2.2 Pilot and customize a toolbox of deliverables that effectively captures the right amount of data developed for informing the appropriate decision makers for approval.

    Outputs

    Documentation of new project intake, approval, and prioritization process

    Tools and templates to aid the process

    3 Pilot, Plan, and Communicate the New Process

    The Purpose

    Reduce the risks of prematurely implementing an untested process.

    Methodically manage the risks associated with organizational change and maximize the likelihood of adoption for the new process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Engagement paves the way for smoother adoption. An “engagement” approach (rather than simply “communication”) turns stakeholders into advocates who can help boost your message, sustain the change, and realize benefits without constant intervention or process command-and-control.

    Activities

    3.1 Create a plan to pilot your intake, approval, and prioritization process to refine it before rollout.

    3.2 Analyze the impact of organizational change through the eyes of PPM stakeholders to gain their buy-in.

    Outputs

    Process pilot plan

    Organizational change communication plan

    Further reading

    Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    Decide which IT projects to approve and when to start them.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Capacity-constrained intake is the only sustainable path forward.

    "For years, the goal of project intake was to select the best projects. It makes sense and most people take it on faith without argument. But if you end up with too many projects, it’s a bad strategy. Don’t be afraid to say NO or NOT YET if you don’t have the capacity to deliver. People might give you a hard time in the near term, but you’re not helping by saying YES to things you can’t deliver."

    Barry Cousins,

    Senior Director, PMO Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • PMO Directors who have trouble with project throughput
    • CIOs who want to improve IT’s responsive-ness to changing needs of the business
    • CIOs who want to maximize the overall business value of IT’s project portfolio

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Align project intake and prioritization with resource capacity and strategic objectives
    • Balance proactive and reactive demand
    • Reduce portfolio waste on low-value projects
    • Manage project delivery expectations and satisfaction of business stakeholders
    • Get optimized project intake processes off the ground with low-cost, high-impact tools and templates

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • C-suite executives and steering committee members who want to ensure IT’s successful delivery of projects with high business impact
    • Project sponsors and product owners who seek visibility and transparency toward proposed projects

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Ensure that high-impact projects are approved and delivered in a timely manner
    • Gain clarity and visibility in IT’s project approval process
    • Improve your understanding of IT’s capacity to set more realistic expectations on what gets done

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • As a portfolio manager, you do not have the authority to decline or defer new projects – but you also lack the capacity to realistically say yes to more project work.
    • Stakeholders have unrealistic expectations of what IT can deliver. Too many projects are approved, and it may be unclear why their project is delayed or in a state of suspended animation.

    Complication

    • The cycle of competition is making it increasingly difficult to follow a longer-term strategy during project intake, making it unproductive to approve projects for any horizon longer than one to two years.
    • As project portfolios become more aligned to “transformative” projects, resourcing for smaller, department-level projects becomes increasingly opaque.

    Resolution

    • Establish an effective scorecard to create transparency into IT’s capacity and processes. This will help set realistic expectations for stakeholders, eliminate “squeaky wheel” prioritization, and give primacy to the highest value requests.
    • Build a centralized process that funnels requests into a single intake channel to eliminate confusion and doubt for stakeholders and staff while also reducing off-the-grid initiatives.
    • Clearly define a series of project approval steps, and communicate requirements for passing them.
    • Developing practices that incorporate the constraint of resource capacity to cap the amount of project approvals to that which is realistic will help improve the throughput of projects through the portfolio.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Approve only the right projects… Counterbalance stakeholder needs with strategic objectives of the business and that of IT, in order to maintain the value of your project portfolio at a high level.
    2. …that you have capacity to deliver. Resource capacity-informed project approval process enables you to avoid biting off more than you can chew and, over time, build a track record of fulfilling promises to deliver on projects.

    Most organizations are good at approving projects, but bad at starting them – and even worse at finishing them

    Establishing project intake discipline should be a top priority from a long-term strategy and near-term tactical perspective.

    Most organizations approve more projects than they can finish. In fact, many approve more than they can even start, leading to an ever-growing backlog where project ideas – often good ones – are never heard from again.

    The appetite to approve more runs directly counter to the shortage of resources that plagues most IT departments. This tension of wanting more from less suggests that IT departments need to be more disciplined in choosing what to take on.

    Info-Tech’s data shows that most IT organizations struggle with their project backlog (Source: N=397 organizations, Info-Tech Research Group PPM Current State Scorecard, 2017).

    “There is a minimal list of pending projects”

    A bar graph is depicted. It has 5 bars to show that when it comes to minimal lists of pending projects, 34% strongly disagree, 35% disagree, and 21% are ambivalent. Only 7% agree and 3% strongly agree.

    “Last year we delivered the number of projects we anticipated at the start of the year”

    A bar graph is depicted. It has 5 bars to show that when it comes to the number of projects anticipated at the start of the year, they were delivered. Surveyors strongly disagreed at 24%, disagreed at 31%, and were ambivalent at 30%. Only 13% agreed and 2% strongly agreed.

    The concept of fiduciary duty demonstrates the need for better discipline in choosing what projects to take on

    Unless someone is accountable for making the right investment of resource capacity for the right projects, project intake discipline cannot be established effectively.

    What is fiduciary duty?

    Officers and directors owe their corporation the duty of acting in the corporation’s best interests over their own. They may delegate the responsibility of implementing the actions, but accountability can't be delegated; that is, they have the authority to make choices and are ultimately answerable for them.

    No question is more important to the organization’s bottom line. Projects directly impact the bottom line because they require investment of resource time and money for the purposes of realizing benefits. The scarcity of resources requires that choices be made by those who have the right authority.

    Who approves your projects?

    Historically, the answer would have been the executive layer of the organization. However, in the 1990s management largely abdicated its obligation to control resources and expenditures via “employee empowerment.”

    Controls on approvals became less rigid, and accountability for choosing what to do (and not do) shifted onto the shoulders of the individual worker. This creates a current paradigm where no one is accountable for the malinvestment…

    …of resources that comes from approving too many projects. Instead, it’s up to individual workers to sink or swim as they attempt to reconcile, day after day, seemingly infinite organizational demand with their finite supply of working hours.

    Ad hoc project selection schemes do not work

    Without active management, reconciling the imbalance between demand with available work hours is a struggle that results largely in one of these two scenarios:

    “Squeaky wheel”: Projects with the most vocal stakeholders behind them are worked on first.

    • IT is seen to favor certain lines of business, leading to disenfranchisement of other stakeholders.
    • Everything becomes the highest priority, which reinforces IT’s image as a firefighter, rather than a business value contributor
    • High-value projects without vocal support never get resourced; opportunities are missed.

    “First in, first out”: Projects are approved and executed in the order they are requested.

    • Urgent or important projects for the business languish in the project backlog; opportunities are missed.
    • Low-value projects dominate the project portfolio.
    • Stakeholders leave IT out of the loop and resort to “underground economy” for getting their needs addressed.

    80% of organizations feel that their portfolios are dominated by low-value initiatives that do not deliver value to the business (Source: Cooper).

    Approve the right projects that you have capacity to deliver by actively managing the intake of projects

    Project intake, approval, and prioritization (collectively “project intake”) reconciles the appetite for new projects with available resource capacity and strategic goals.

    Project intake is a key process of project portfolio management (PPM). The Project Management Institute (PMI) describes PPM as:

    "Interrelated organizational processes by which an organization evaluates, selects, prioritizes, and allocates its limited internal resources to best accomplish organizational strategies consistent with its vision, mission, and values."

    (PMI, Standard for Portfolio Management, 3rd ed.)

    Triple Constraint Model of the Project Portfolio

    Project Intake:

    • Stakeholder Need
    • Strategic Objectives
    • Resource Capacity

    All three components are required for the Project Portfolio

    Organizations practicing PPM recognize available resource capacity as a constraint and aim to select projects – and commit the said capacity – to projects that:

    1. Best satisfy the stakeholder needs that constantly change with the market
    2. Best align to the strategic objectives and contribute the most to business
    3. Have sufficient resource capacity available to best ensure consistent project throughput

    92% vs. 74%: 92% of high-performing organizations in PPM report that projects are well aligned to strategic initiatives vs. 74% of low performers (PMI, 2015).

    82% vs. 55%: 82% of high-performing organizations in PPM report that resources are effectively reallocated across projects vs. 55% of low performers (PMI, 2015)

    Info-Tech’s data demonstrates that optimizing project intake can also improve business leaders’ satisfaction of IT

    CEOs today perceive IT to be poorly aligned to business’ strategic goals:

    43% of CEOs believe that business goals are going unsupported by IT (Source: Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Survey (N=124)).

    60% of CEOs believe that improvement is required around IT’s understanding of business goals (Source: Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Survey (N=124)).

    Business leaders today are generally dissatisfied with IT:

    30% of business stakeholders are supporters of their IT departments (Source: Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey (N=21,367)).

    The key to improving business satisfaction with IT is to deliver on projects that help the business achieve its strategic goals:

    A chart is depicted to show a list of reported important projects, and then reordering the projects based on actual importance.
    Source: Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey (N=21,367)

    Optimized project intake not only improves the project portfolio’s alignment to business goals, but provides the most effective way to improve relationships with IT’s key stakeholders.

    Benchmark your own current state with overall & industry-specific data using Info-Tech’s Diagnostic Program.

    However, establishing organizational discipline for project intake, approval, and prioritization is difficult

    Capacity awareness

    Many IT departments struggle to realistically estimate available project capacity in a credible way. Stakeholders question the validity of your endeavor to install capacity-constrained intake process, and mistake it for unwillingness to cooperate instead.

    Many moving parts

    Project intake, approval, and prioritization involve the coordination of various departments. Therefore, they require a great deal of buy-in and compliance from multiple stakeholders and senior executives.

    Lack of authority

    Many PMOs and IT departments simply lack the ability to decline or defer new projects.

    Unclear definition of value

    Defining the project value is difficult because there are so many different and conflicting ways that are all valid in their own right. However, without it, it's impossible to fairly compare among projects to select what's "best."

    Establishing intake discipline requires a great degree of cooperation and conformity among stakeholders that can be cultivated through strong processes.

    Info-Tech’s intake, approval, and prioritization methodology systemically fits the project portfolio to its triple constraint

    Info-Tech’s Methodology

    Info-Tech’s Methodology
    Project Intake Project Approval Project Prioritization
    Project requests are submitted, received, triaged, and scoped in preparation for approval and prioritization. Business cases are developed, evaluated, and selected (or declined) for investment, based on estimated value and feasibility. Work is scheduled to begin, based on relative value, urgency, and availability of resources.
    Stakeholder Needs Strategic Objectives Resource Capacity
    Project Portfolio Triple Constraint

    Info-Tech’s methodology for optimizing project intake delivers extraordinary value, fast

    In the first step of the blueprint, you will prototype a set of scorecard criteria for determining project value.

    Our methodology is designed to tackle your hardest challenge first to deliver the highest-value part of the deliverable. Since the overarching goal of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process is to maximize the throughput of the best projects, one must define how “the best projects” are determined.

    In nearly all instances…a key challenge for the PPM team is reaching agreement over how projects should rank.

    – Merkhofer

    A Project Value Scorecard will help you:

    • Evolve the discussions on project and portfolio value beyond a theoretical concept
    • Enable apples-to-apples comparisons amongst many different kinds of projects

    The Project Value Scorecard Development Tool is designed to help you develop the project valuation scheme iteratively. Download the pre-filled tool with content that represents a common case, and then, customize it with your data.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

    This blueprint provides a clear path to maximizing your chance of success in optimizing project intake

    Info-Tech’s practical, tactical research is accompanied by a suite of tools and templates to accelerate your process optimization efforts.

    Organizational change and stakeholder management are critical elements of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization processes because they require a great degree of cooperation and conformity among stakeholders, and the list of key stakeholders are long and far-reaching.

    This blueprint will provide a clear path to not only optimize the processes themselves, but also for the optimization effort itself. This research is organized into three phases, each requiring a few weeks of work at your team’s own pace – or all in one week, through a workshop facilitated by Info-Tech analysts.

    Set Realistic Goals for Optimizing Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    Tools and Templates:

    • Project Value Scorecard Development Tool (.xlsx)
    • PPM Assessment Report (Info-Tech Diagnostics)
    • Standard Operating Procedure Template (.docx)

    Build Optimized Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Processes

    Tools and Templates:

    • Project Request Forms (.docx)
    • Project Classification Matrix (.xlsx)
    • Benefits Commitment Form (.xlsx)
    • Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool (.xlsx)
    • Business Case Templates (.docx)
    • Intake and Prioritization Tool (.xlsx)

    Integrate the Newly Optimized Processes into Practice

    Tools and Templates:

    • Process Pilot Plan Template (.docx)
    • Impact Assessment and Communication Planning Tool (.xlsx)

    Info-Tech’s approach to PPM is informed by industry best practices and rooted in practical insider research

    Info-Tech uses PMI and ISACA frameworks for areas of this research.

    The logo for PMI is in the picture.

    PMI’s Standard for Portfolio Management, 3rd ed. is the leading industry framework, proving project portfolio management best practices and process guidelines.

    The logo for COBIT 5 is in the picture.

    COBIT 5 is the leading framework for the governance and management of enterprise IT.

    In addition to industry-leading frameworks, our best-practice approach is enhanced by the insights and guidance from our analysts, industry experts, and our clients.

    Info-Tech's logo is shown.

    33,000+

    Our peer network of over 33,000 happy clients proves the effectiveness of our research.

    1,000+

    Our team conducts 1,000+ hours of primary and secondary research to ensure that our approach is enhanced by best practices.

    Deliver measurable project intake success for your organization with this blueprint

    Measure the value of your effort to track your success quantitatively and demonstrate the proposed benefits, as you aim to do so with other projects through improved PPM.

    Optimized project intake, approval, and prioritization processes lead to a high PPM maturity, which will improve the successful delivery and throughput of your projects, resource utilization, business alignment, and stakeholder satisfaction ((Source: BCG/PMI).

    A double bar graph is depicted to show high PPM maturity yields measurable benefits. It covers 4 categories: Management for individual projects, financial performance, strategy implementation, and organizational agility.

    Measure your success through the following metrics:

    • Reduced turnaround time between project requests and initial scoping
    • Number of project proposals with articulated benefits
    • Reduction in “off-the-grid” projects
    • Team satisfaction and workplace engagement
    • PPM stakeholder satisfaction score from business stakeholders: see Info-Tech’s PPM Customer Satisfaction Diagnostics

    $44,700: In the past 12 months, Info-Tech clients have reported an average measured value of $44,700 from undertaking a guided implementation of this research.

    Add your own organization-specific goals, success criteria, and metrics by following the steps in the blueprint.

    Case Study: Financial Services PMO prepares annual planning process with Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Financial Services

    Source: Info-Tech Client

    Challenge

    PMO plays a diverse set of roles, including project management for enterprise projects (i.e. PMI’s “Directive” PMO), standards management for department-level projects (i.e. PMI’s “Supportive” PMO), process governance of strategic projects (i.e. PMI’s “Controlling” PMO), and facilitation / planning / reporting for the corporate business strategy efforts (i.e. Enterprise PMO).

    To facilitate the annual planning process, the PMO needed to develop a more data-driven and objective project intake process that implicitly aligned with the corporate strategy.

    Solution

    Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard tool was incorporated into the strategic planning process.

    Results

    The scorecard provided a simple way to list the competing strategic initiatives, objectively score them, and re-sort the results on demand as the leadership chooses to switch between ranking by overall score, project value, ability to execute, strategic alignment, operational alignment, and feasibility.

    The Project Value Scorecard provided early value with multiple options for prioritized rankings.

    A screenshot of the Project Value Scorecard is shown in the image.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization – project overview

    1. Set Realistic Goals for Optimizing Process 2. Build New Optimized Processes 3. Integrate the New Processes into Practice
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Define the criteria with which to determine project value.


    2.1 Streamline intake to manage stakeholder expectations.

    2.2 Set up steps of project approval to maximize strategic alignment while right-sizing the required effort.

    2.3 Prioritize projects to maximize the value of the project portfolio within the constraint of resource capacity.

    3.1 Pilot your intake, approval, and prioritization process to refine it before rollout.

    3.2 Analyze the impact of organizational change through the eyes of PPM stakeholders to gain their buy-in.

    Guided Implementations
    • Introduce Project Value Scorecard Development Tool and pilot Info-Tech’s example scorecard on your own backlog.
    • Map current project intake, approval, and prioritization process and key stakeholders.
    • Set realistic goals for process optimization.
    • Improve the management of stakeholder expectations with an optimized intake process.
    • Improve the alignment of the project portfolio to strategic objectives with an optimized approval process.
    • Enable resource capacity-constrained greenlighting of projects with an optimized prioritization process.
    • Create a process pilot strategy with supportive stakeholders.
    • Conduct a change impact analysis for your PPM stakeholders to create an effective communication strategy.
    • Roll out the new process and measure success.
    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:

    Refocus on Project Value to Set Realistic Goals for Optimizing Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process

    Module 2:

    Examine, Optimize, and Document the New Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process

    Module 3:

    Pilot, Plan, and Communicate the New Process and Its Required Organizational Changes

    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • Draft project valuation criteria
    • Examination of current process
    • Definition of process success criteria
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • Documentation of new project intake, approval, and prioritization process
    • Tools and templates to aid the process
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • Process pilot plan
    • Organizational change communication plan

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities

    Benefits of optimizing project intake and project value definition

    1.1 Complete and review PPM Current State Scorecard Assessment

    1.2 Define project value for the organization

    1.3 Engage key PPM stakeholders to iterate on the scorecard prototype

    Set realistic goals for process optimization

    2.1 Map current intake, approval, and prioritization workflow

    2.2 Enumerate and prioritize process stakeholders

    2.3 Determine the current and target capability levels

    2.4 Define the process success criteria and KPIs

    Optimize project intake and approval processes

    3.1 Conduct focused retrospectives for project intake and approval

    3.2 Define project levels

    3.3 Optimize project intake processes

    3.4 Optimize project approval processes

    3.5 Compose SOP for intake and approval

    3.6 Document the new intake and approval workflow

    Optimize project prioritization process plan for a process pilot

    4.1 Conduct focused retrospective for project prioritization

    4.2 Estimate available resource capacity

    4.3 Pilot Project Intake and Prioritization Tool with your project backlog

    4.4 Compose SOP for prioritization

    4.5 Document the new prioritization workflow

    4.6 Discuss process pilot

    Analyze stakeholder impact and create communication strategy

    5.1 Analyze stakeholder impact and responses to impending organization change

    5.2 Create message canvas for at-risk change impacts and stakeholders

    5.3 Set course of action for communicating change

    Deliverables
    1. PPM Current State Scorecard
    2. Project Value Scorecard prototype
    1. Current intake, approval, and prioritization workflow
    2. Stakeholder register
    3. Intake process success criteria
    1. Project request form
    2. Project level classification matrix
    3. Proposed project deliverables toolkit
    4. Customized intake and approval SOP
    5. Flowchart for the new intake and approval workflow
    1. Estimated resource capacity for projects
    2. Customized Project Intake and Prioritization Tool
    3. Customized prioritization SOP
    4. Flowchart for the new prioritization workflow
    5. Process pilot plan
    1. Completed Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool
    2. Communication strategy and plan

    Phase 1

    Set Realistic Goals for Optimizing Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Set Realistic Goals for Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process Proposed Time to Completion: 1-2 weeks

    Step 1.1: Define the project valuation criteria

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss how a project value is currently determined
    • Introduce Info-Tech’s scorecard-driven project valuation approach

    Then complete these activities…

    • Create a first-draft version of a project value-driven prioritized list of projects
    • Review and iterate on the scorecard criteria

    With these tools & templates:

    Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

    Step 1.2: Envision your process target state

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Introduce Info-Tech’s project intake process maturity model
    • Discuss the use of Info-Tech’s Diagnostic Program for an initial assessment of your current PPM processes

    Then complete these activities…

    • Map your current process workflow
    • Enumerate and prioritize your key stakeholders
    • Define process success criteria

    With these tools & templates:

    Project Intake Workflow Template

    Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template

    Phase 1 Results & Insights:
    • The overarching goal of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process is to maximize the throughput of the best projects. To achieve this goal, one must have a clear way to determine what are “the best” projects.

    Get to value early with Step 1.1 of this blueprint

    Define how to determine a project’s value and set the stage for maximizing the value of your project portfolio using Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool.

    Where traditional models of consulting can take considerable amounts of time before delivering value to clients, Info-Tech’s methodology for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process gets you to value fast.

    The overarching goal of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process is to maximize the throughput of the best projects. To achieve this goal, one must have a clear way to determine what are “the best” projects.

    In the first step of this blueprint, you will pilot a multiple-criteria scorecard for determining project value that will help answer that question. Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool is pre-populated with a ready-to-use, real-life example that you can leverage as a starting point for tailoring it to your organization – or adopt as is.

    Introduce objectivity and clarity to your discussion of maximizing the value of your project portfolio with Info-Tech’s practical IT research that drives measurable results.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

    Step 1.1: Define the criteria with which to determine project value

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Define project valuation criteria

    1.2

    Envision process target state

    2.1

    Streamline intake

    2.2

    Right-size approval steps

    2.3

    Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

    3.1

    Pilot your optimized process

    3.2

    Communicate organizational change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Learn how to use the Project Value Scorecard Development Tool
    • Create a first-draft version of a project value-driven prioritized list of projects

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • CIO (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understand the importance of devising a consensus criteria for project valuation.
    • Try a project value scorecard-driven prioritization process with your currently proposed.
    • Set the stage for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization processes.

    Intake, Approval, and Prioritization is a core process in Info-Tech’s project portfolio management (PPM) framework

    PPM is an infrastructure around projects that aims to ensure that the best projects are worked on at the right time with the right people.

    PPM’s goal is to maximize the throughput of projects that provide strategic and operational value to the organization. To do this, a PPM strategy must help to:

    Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Process Model
    3. Status & Progress Reporting
    1. Intake, Approval & Prioritization 2. Resource Management 3. Project Management 4. Project Closure 5. Benefits Tracking
    Intake Execution Closure
    1. Select the best projects
    2. Pick the right time and people to execute the projects
    3. Make sure the projects are okay
    4. Make sure the projects get done
    5. Make sure they were worth doing

    If you don’t yet have a PPM strategy in place, or would like to revisit your existing PPM strategy before optimizing your project intake, approval, and prioritization practices, see Info-Tech’s blueprint, Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's blueprint Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy is shown.

    “Too many projects, not enough resources” is the reality of most IT environments

    A profound imbalance between demand (i.e. approved project work and service delivery commitments) and supply (i.e. people’s time) is the top challenge IT departments face today.

    In today’s organizations, the desires of business units for new products and enhancements, and the appetites of senior leadership to approve more and more projects for those products and services, far outstrip IT’s ability to realistically deliver on everything.

    The vast majority of IT departments lack the resourcing to meet project demand – especially given the fact that day-to-day operational demands frequently trump project work.

    As a result, project throughput suffers – and with it, IT’s reputation within the organization.

    An image is depicted that has several projects laid out near a scale filling one side of it and off of it. On the other part of the scale which is higher, has an image of people in it to help show the relationship between resource supply and project demand.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Where does the time go? The portfolio manager (or equivalent) should function as the accounting department for time, showing what’s available in IT’s human resources budget for projects and providing ongoing visibility into how that budget of time is being spent.

    Don’t weigh your portfolio down by starting more than you can finish

    Focus on what will deliver value to the organization and what you can realistically deliver.

    Most of the problems that arise during the lifecycle of a project can be traced back to issues that could have been mitigated during the initiation phase.

    More than simply a means of early problem detection at the project level, optimizing your initiation processes is also the best way to ensure the success of your portfolio. With optimized intake processes you can better guarantee:

    • The projects you are working on are of high value
    • Your project list aligns with available resource capacity
    • Stakeholder needs are addressed, but stakeholders do not determine the direction of the portfolio

    80% of organizations feel their portfolios are dominated by low-value initiatives that do not deliver value to the business (Source: Cooper).

    "(S)uccessful organizations select projects on the basis of desirability and their capability to deliver them, not just desirability" (Source: John Ward, Delivering Value from Information Systems and Technology Investments).

    Establishing project value is the first – and difficult – step for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization

    What is the best way to “deliver value to the organization”?

    Every organization needs to explicitly define how to determine project value that will fairly represent all projects and provide a basis of comparison among them during approval and prioritization. Without it, any discussions on reducing “low-value initiatives” from the previous slide cannot yield any actionable plan.

    However, defining the project value is difficult, because there are so many different and conflicting ways that are all valid in their own right and worth considering. For example:

    • Strategic growth vs. operational stability
    • Important work vs. urgent work
    • Return on investment vs. cost containment
    • Needs of a specific line of business vs. business-wide needs
    • Financial vs. intangible benefits

    This challenge is further complicated by the difficulty of identifying the right criteria for determining project value:

    Managers fail to identify around 50% of the important criteria when making decisions (Source: Transparent Choice).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Sometimes it can be challenging to show the value of IT-centric, operational-type projects that maintain critical infrastructure since they don’t yield net-new benefits. Remember that benefits are only half the equation; you must also consider the costs of not undertaking the said project.

    Find the right mix of criteria for project valuation with Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

    Scorecard-driven approach is an easy-to-understand, time-tested solution to a multiple-criteria decision-making problem, such as project valuation.

    This approach is effective for capturing benefits and costs that are not directly quantifiable in financial terms. Projects are evaluated on multiple specific questions, or criteria, that each yield a score on a point scale. The overall score is calculated as a weighted sum of the scores.

    Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard is pre-populated with a best-practice example of eight criteria, two for each category (see box at bottom right). This example helps your effort to develop your own project scorecard by providing a solid starting point:

    60%: On their own, decision makers could only identify around 6 of their 10 most important criteria for making decisions (Source: Transparent Choice).

    Finally, in addition, the overall scores of approved projects can be used as a metric on which success of the process can be measured over time.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

    Categories of project valuation criteria

    • Strategic alignment: projects must be aligned with the strategic goals of the business and IT.
    • Operational alignment: projects must be aligned with the operational goals of the business and IT.
    • Feasibility: practical considerations for projects must be taken into account in selecting projects.
    • Financial: projects must realize monetary benefits, in increased revenue or decreased costs, while posing as little risk of cost overrun as possible.

    Review the example criteria and score description in the Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

    1.1.1 Project Value Scorecard Development Tool, Tab 2: Evaluation Criteria

    This tab lists eight criteria that cover strategic alignment, operational alignment, feasibility, and financial benefits/risks. Each criteria is accompanied by a qualitative score description to standardize the analysis across all projects and analysts. While this tool supports up to 15 different criteria, it’s better to minimize the number of criteria and introduce additional ones as the organization grows in PPM maturity.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool, Tab 2: Evaluation Criteria

    Type: It is useful to break down projects with similar overall scores by their proposed values versus ease of execution.

    Scale: Five-point scale is not required for this tool. Use more or less granularity of description as appropriate for each criteria.

    Blank Criteria: Rows with blank criteria are greyed out. Enter a new criteria to turn on the row.

    Score projects and search for the right mix of criteria weighting using the scorecard tab

    1.1.1 Project Value Scorecard Development Tool, Tab 3: Project Scorecard

    In this tab, you can see how projects are prioritized when they are scored according to the criteria from the previous tab. You can enter the scores of up to 30 projects in the scorecard table (see screenshot to the right).

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool, Tab 3: Project Scorecard is shown.

    Value (V) or Execution (E) & Relative Weight: Change the relative weights of each criteria and review any changes to the prioritized list of projects change, whose rankings are updated automatically. This helps you iterate on the weights to find the right mix.

    Feasibility: Custom criteria category labels will be automatically updated.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool, Tab 3: Project Scorecard is shown.

    Overall: Choose the groupings of criteria by which you want to see the prioritized list. Available groupings are:

    • Overall score
    • By value or by execution
    • By category

    Ranks and weighted scores for each project is shown.

    For example, click on the drop-down and choose “Execution.”

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Value Scorecard Development Tool, Tab 3: Project Scorecard is shown.

    Project ranks are based only on execution criteria.

    Create a first-draft version of a project value-driven prioritized list of projects

    1.1.1 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Follow the steps below to test Info-Tech’s example Project Value Scorecard and examine the prioritized list of projects.

    1. Using your list of proposed, ongoing, and completed projects, identify a representative sample of projects in your project portfolio, varying in size, scope, and perceived value – about 10-20 of them.
    2. Arrange these projects in the order of priority using any processes or prioritization paradigm currently in place in your organization.
    • In the absence of formal process, use your intuition, as well as knowledge of organizational priorities, and your stakeholders.
  • Use the example criteria and score description in Tab 2 of Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard Development Tool to score the same list of projects:
    • Avoid spending too much time at this step. Prioritization criteria will be refined in the subsequent parts of the blueprint.
    • If multiple scorers are involved, allow some overlap to benchmark for consistency.
  • Enter the scores in Tab 3 of the tool to obtain the first-draft version of a project value-driven prioritized project list. Compare it with your list from Step 2.
  • INPUT

    • Knowledge of proposed, ongoing, and completed projects in your project portfolio

    OUTPUT

    • Prioritized project lists

    Materials

    • Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • CIO (optional)

    Iterate on the scorecard to set the stage for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization

    1.1.2 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Conduct a retrospective of the previous activity by asking these questions:

    • How smooth was the overall scoring experience (Step 3 of Activity 1.1.1)?
    • Did you experience challenges in interpreting and applying the example project valuation criteria? Why? (e.g. lack of information, absence of formalized business strategic goals, too much room for interpretation in scoring description)
    • Did the prioritized project list agree with your intuition?

    Iterate on the project valuation criteria:

    • Manipulate the relatives weights of valuation criteria to fine-tune them.
    • Revise the scoring descriptions to provide clarity or customize them to better fit your organization’s needs, then update the project scores accordingly.
    • For projects that did not score well, will this cause concern from any stakeholders? Are the concerns legitimate? If so, this may indicate the need for inclusion of new criteria.
    • For projects that score too well, this may indicate a bias toward a specific type of project or group of stakeholders. Try adjusting the relative weights of existing criteria.

    INPUT

    • Activity 1.1.1

    OUTPUT

    • Retrospective on project valuation
    • Review of project valuation criteria

    Materials

    • Project Value Scorecard Development Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • CIO (optional)

    Next steps: engage key PPM stakeholders to reach a consensus when establishing how to determine project value

    Engage these key players to create the evaluation criteria that all stakeholders will support:

    • Business units: Projects are undertaken to provide value to the business. Senior management from business units must help define how project will be valued.
    • IT: IT must ensure that technical/practical considerations are taken into account when determining project value.
    • Finance: The CFO or designated representative will ensure that estimated project costs and benefits can be used to manage the budget.
    • PMO: PMO is the administrator of the project portfolio. PMO must provide coordination and support to ensure the process operates smoothly and its goals are realized.
    • Business analysts: BAs carry out the evaluation of project value. Therefore, their understanding of the evaluation criteria and the process as a whole are critical to the success of the process.
    • Project sponsors: Project sponsors are accountable for the realization of benefits for which projects are undertaken.

    Optimize the process with the new project value definition to focus your discussion with stakeholders

    This blueprint will help you not only optimize the process, but also help you work with your stakeholders to realize the benefits of the optimized process.

    In this step, you’ve begun improving the definition of project value. Getting it right will require several more iterations and will require a series of discussions with your key stakeholders.

    The optimized intake process built around the new definition of project value will help evolve a conceptual discussion about project value into a more practical one. The new process will paint a picture of what the future state will look like for your stakeholders’ requested projects getting approved and prioritized for execution, so that they can provide feedback that’s concrete and actionable. To help you with that process, you will be taken through a series of activities to analyze the impact of change on your stakeholders and create a communication plan in the last phase of the blueprint.

    For now, in the next step of this blueprint, you will undergo a series of activities to assess your current state to identify the specific areas for process optimization.

    "To find the right intersection of someone’s personal interest with the company’s interest on projects isn’t always easy. I always try to look for the basic premise that you can get everybody to agree on it and build from there… But it’s sometimes hard to make sure that things stick. You may have to go back three or four times to the core agreement."

    -Eric Newcomer

    Step 1.2: Envision your target state for your optimized project intake, approval, and prioritization process

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Define project valuation criteria

    1.2

    Envision process target state

    2.1

    Streamline intake

    2.2

    Right-size approval steps

    2.3

    Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

    3.1

    Pilot your optimized process

    3.2

    Communicate organizational change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Map your current project intake, approval, and prioritization workflow, and document it in a flowchart
    • Enumerate and prioritize your key process stakeholders
    • Determine your process capability level within Info-Tech’s Framework
    • Establish your current and target states for project intake, approval, and prioritization process

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • Other PPM stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Current project intake, approval, and prioritization process is mapped out and documented in a flowchart
    • Key process stakeholders are enumerated and prioritized to inform future discussion on optimizing processes
    • Current and target organizational process capability levels are determined
    • Success criteria and key performance indicators for process optimization are defined

    Use Info-Tech’s Diagnostic Program for an initial assessment of your current PPM processes

    This step is highly recommended but not required. Call 1-888-670-8889 to inquire about or request the PPM Diagnostics.

    Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Assessmentprovides you with a data-driven view of the current state of your portfolio, including your intake processes. Our PPM Assessment measures and communicates success in terms of Info-Tech’s best practices for PPM.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Assessment blueprint is shown.

    Use the diagnostic program to:

    • Assess resource utilization across the portfolio.
    • Determine project portfolio reporting completeness.
    • Solicit feedback from your customers on the clarity of your portfolio’s business goals.
    • Rate the overall quality of your project management practices and benchmark your rating over time.
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Assessment blueprint is shown.

    Scope your process optimization efforts with Info-Tech’s high-level intake, approval, and prioritization workflow

    Info-Tech recommends the following workflow at a high level for a capacity-constrained intake process that aligns to strategic goals and stakeholder need.

    • Intake (Step 2.1)*
      • Receive project requests
      • Triage project requests and assign a liaison
      • High-level scoping & set stakeholder expectations
    • Approval (Step 2.2)*
      • Concept approval by project sponsor
      • High-level technical solution approval by IT
      • Business case approval by business
      • Resource allocation & greenlight projects
    • Prioritization (Step 2.3)*
      • Update project priority scores & available project capacity
      • Identify high-scoring and “on-the-bubble” projects
      • Recommend projects to greenlight or deliberate

    * Steps denote the place in the blueprint where the steps are discussed in more detail.

    Use this workflow as a baseline to examine your current state of the process in the next slide.

    Map your current project intake, approval, and prioritization workflow

    1.2.1 Estimated Time: 60-90 minutes

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the processes currently in place for project intake, approval, and prioritization.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards / large sticky notes to write out unique steps of a process. Use the high-level process workflow from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Arrange the steps into chronological order. Benchmark the arrangement through a group discussion.
    3. Use green cards to identify artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    4. Use yellow cards to identify who does the work (i.e. responsible parties), and who makes the decisions (i.e. accountable party). Keep in mind that while multiple parties may be responsible, accountability cannot be shared and only a single party can be accountable for a process.
    5. Use red cards to identify issues, problems, or risks. These are opportunities for optimization.

    INPUT

    • Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures)
    • Info-Tech’s high-level intake workflow

    OUTPUT

    • Current process, mapped out

    Materials

    • 4x6” recipe cards
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • Other PPM stakeholders

    Document the current project intake, approval, and prioritization workflow in a flowchart

    1.2.2 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Document the results of the previous table-top exercise (Activity 1.1.1) into a flow chart. Flowcharts provide a bird’s-eye view of process steps that highlight the decision points and deliverables. In addition, swim lanes can be used to indicate process stages, task ownership, or responsibilities (example below).

    An example is shown for activity 1.2.2

    Review and customize section 1.2, “Overall Process Workflow” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    "Flowcharts are more effective when you have to explain status and next steps to upper management."

    – Assistant Director-IT Operations, Healthcare Industry

    Browser-based flowchart tool examples

    INPUT

    • Mapped-out project intake process (Activity 1.2.1)

    OUTPUT

    • Flowchart representation of current project intake workflow

    Materials

    • Microsoft Visio, flowchart software, or Microsoft PowerPoint

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Example of a project intake, approval, and prioritization flow chart – without swim lanes

    An example project intake, approval, and prioritization flow chart without swim lanes is shown.

    Example of a project intake, approval, and prioritization flow chart – with swim lanes

    An example project intake, approval, and prioritization flow chart with swim lanes is shown.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Intake Workflow Template (Visio and PDF)

    Enumerate your key stakeholders for optimizing intake, approval, and prioritization process

    1.2.3 30-45 minutes

    In the previous activity, accountable and responsible stakeholders for each of the steps in the current intake, approval, and prioritization process were identified.

    1. Based on your knowledge and insight of your organization, ensure that all key stakeholders with accountable and responsible stakeholders are accounted for in the mapped-out process. Note any omissions: it may indicate a missing step, or that the stakeholder ought to be, but are not currently, involved.
    2. For each step, identify any stakeholders that are currently consulted or informed. Then, examine the whole map and identify any other stakeholders that ought to be consulted or informed.
    3. Compile a list of stakeholders from steps 1-2, and write each of their names in two sticky notes.
    4. Put both sets of sticky notes on a wall. Use the wisdom-of-the-crowd approach to arrange one set in a descending order of influence. Record their ranked influence from 1 (least) to 10 (most).
    5. Rearrange the other set in a descending order of interest in seeing the project intake process optimized. Record their ranked interest from 1 (least) to 10 (most).

    INPUT

    • Mapped-out project intake process (Activity 1.2.1)
    • Insight on organizational culture

    OUTPUT

    • List of stakeholders in project intake
    • Ranked list in their influence and interest

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Walls

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • Other PPM stakeholders

    Prioritize your stakeholders for project intake, approval, and prioritization process

    There are three dimensions for stakeholder prioritization: influence, interest, and support.

    1. Map your stakeholders in a 2D stakeholder power map (top right) according to their relative influence and interest.
    2. Rate their level of support by asking the following question: how likely is it that your stakeholder would welcome an improved process for project intake?

    These parameters will inform how to prioritize your stakeholders according to the stakeholder priority heatmap (bottom right). This priority should inform how to focus your attention during the subsequent optimization efforts.

    A flowchart is shown to show the relationship between influence and interest.

    Level of Support
    Stakeholder Category Supporter Evangelist Neutral Blocker
    Engage Critical High High Critical
    High Medium Low Low Medium
    Low High Medium Medium High
    Passive Low Irrelevant Irrelevant Low

    Info-Tech Insight

    There may be too many stakeholders to be able to achieve complete satisfaction. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter the most.

    Most organizations have low to medium capabilities around intake, approval, and prioritization

    1.2.4 Estimated Time: 15 minutes

    Use Info-Tech’s Intake Capability Framework to help define your current and target states for intake, approval, and prioritization.

    Capability Level Capability Level Description
    Capability Level 5: Optimized Our department has effective intake processes with right-sized administrative overhead. Work is continuously prioritized to keep up with emerging challenges and opportunities.
    Capability Level 4: Aligned Our department has very strong intake processes. Project approvals are based on business cases and aligned with future resource capacity.
    Capability Level 3: Engaged Our department has processes in place to track project requests and follow up on them. Priorities are periodically re-evaluated, based largely on the best judgment of one or several executives.
    Capability Level 2: Defined Our department has some processes in place but no capacity to say no to new projects. There is a formal backlog, but little or no method for grooming it.
    Capability Level 1: Unmanaged Our department has no formal intake processes in place. Most work is done reactively, with little ability to prioritize proactive project work.

    Refer to the subsequent slides for more detail on these capability levels.

    Level 1: Unmanaged

    Use these descriptions to place your organization at the appropriate level of intake capability.

    Intake Projects are requested through personal conversations and emails, with minimal documentation and oversight.
    Approval Projects are approved by default and rarely (if ever) declined. There is no definitive list of projects in the pipeline or backlog.
    Prioritization Most work is done reactively, with little ability to prioritize proactive project work.

    Symptoms

    • Poorly defined – or a complete absence of – PPM processes.
    • No formal approval committee.
    • No processes in place to balance proactive and reactive demands.

    Long Term

    PMOs at this level should work to have all requests funneled through a proper request form within six months. Decision rights for approval should be defined, and a scorecard should be in place within the year.

    Quick Win

    To get a handle on your backlog, start tracking all project requests using the “Project Data” tab in Info-Tech’s Project Intake and Prioritization Tool.

    Level 2: Defined

    Use these descriptions to place your organization at the appropriate level of intake capability.

    Intake Requests are formally documented in a request form before they’re assigned, elaborated, and executed as projects.
    Approval Projects are approved by default and rarely (if ever) declined. There is a formal backlog, but little or no method for grooming it.
    Prioritization There is a list of priorities but no process for updating it more than annually or quarterly.

    Symptoms

    • Organization does not have clear concept of project capacity.
    • There is a lack of discipline enforced on stakeholders.
    • Immature PPM processes in general.

    Long Term

    PMOs at this level should strive for greater visibility into the portfolio to help make the case for declining (or at least deferring) requests. Within the year, have a formal PPM strategy up and running.

    Quick Win

    Something PMOs at this level can accomplish quickly without any formal approval is to spend more time with stakeholders during the ideation phase to better define scope and requirements.

    Level 3: Engaged

    Use these descriptions to place your organization at the appropriate level of intake capability.

    Intake Processes and skills are in place to follow up on requests to clarify project scope before going forward with approval and prioritization.
    Approval Projects are occasionally declined based on exceptionally low feasibility or value.
    Prioritization Priorities are periodically re-evaluated based largely on the best judgment of one or several executives.

    Challenges

    • Senior executives’ “best judgement” is frequently fallible or influenced. Pet projects still enter the portfolio and deplete resources.
    • While approval processes “occasionally” filter out some low-value projects, many still get approved.

    Long Term

    PMOs at this level should advocate for a more formal cadence for prioritization and, within the year, establish a formal steering committee that will be responsible for prioritizing and re-prioritizing quarterly or monthly.

    Quick Win

    At the PMO level, employ Info-Tech’s Project Intake and Prioritization Tool to start re-evaluating projects in the backlog. Make this data available to senior executives when prioritization occurs.

    Level 4: Aligned

    Use these descriptions to place your organization at the appropriate level of intake capability.

    Intake Occurs through a centralized process. Processes and skills are in place for follow-up.
    Approval Project approvals are based on business cases and aligned with future resource capacity.
    Prioritization Project prioritization is visibly aligned with business goals.

    Challenges

    • The process of developing business cases can be too cumbersome, distracting resources from actual project work.
    • “Future” resource capacity predictions are unreliable. Reactive support work and other factors frequently change actual resource availability.

    Long Term

    PMOs at this level can strive for more accurate and frequent resource forecasting, establishing a more accurate picture of project vs. non-project work within the year.

    Quick Win

    PMOs at this level can start using Info-Tech’s Business Case Template (Comprehensive or Fast Track) to help simplify the business case process.

    Level 5: Optimizing

    Use these descriptions to place your organization at the appropriate level of intake capability.

    Intake Occurs through a centralized portal. Processes and skills are in place for thorough follow-up.
    Approval Project approvals are based on business cases and aligned with future resource capacity.
    Prioritization Work is continuously prioritized to keep up with emerging challenges and opportunities.

    Challenges

    • Establishing a reliable forecast for resource capacity remains a concern at this level as well.
    • Organizations at this level may experience an increasing clash between Agile practices and traditional Waterfall methodologies.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Manage an Agile Portfolio Blueprint

    PMOs at this level should look at Info-Tech’s Manage an Agile Portfolio for comprehensive tools and guidance on maintaining greater visibility at the portfolio level into work in progress and committed work.

    Establish your current and target states for process intake, approval, and prioritization

    1.2.5 Estimated Time: 20 minutes

    • Having reviewed the intake capability framework, you should be able to quickly identify where you currently reside in the model. Document this in the “Current State” box below.
    • Next, spend some time as a group discussing your target state. Make sure to set a realistic target as well as a realistic timeframe for meeting this target. Level 1s will not be able to become Level 5s overnight and certainly not without passing through the other levels on the way.
      • A realistic goal for a Level 1 to become a Level 2 is within six to eight months.
    Current State:
    Target State:
    Timeline for meeting target

    INPUT

    • Intake, approval, and prioritization capability framework (Activity 1.2.4)

    OUTPUT

    • Current and target state, with stated time goals

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Align your intake success with the strategic expectations of overall project portfolio management

    A successful project intake, approval, and prioritization process puts your leadership in a position to best steer the portfolio, like a conductor of an orchestra.

    To frame the discussion on deciding what intake success will look like, review Info-Tech’s PPM strategic expectations:

    • Project Throughput: Maximize throughput of the best projects.
    • Portfolio Visibility: Ensure visibility of current and pending projects.
    • Portfolio Responsiveness: Make the portfolio responsive to executive steering when new projects and changing priorities need rapid action.
    • Resource Utilization: Minimize resource waste and optimize the alignment of skills to assignments.
    • Benefits Realization: Clarify accountability for post-project benefits attainment for each project, and facilitate the process of tracking/reporting those benefits.
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy blueprint.

    For a more detailed discussion and insight on PPM strategic expectations see Info-Tech’s blueprint, Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy.

    Decide what successful project intake, approval, prioritization process will look like

    1.2.6 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    While assessing your current state, it is important to discuss and determine as a team how success will be defined.

    • During this process, it is important to consider tentative timelines for success milestones and to ask the question: what will success look like and when should it occur by?
    • Use the below table to help document success factors and timeliness. Follow the lead of our example in row 1.
    Optimization Benefit Objective Timeline Success Factor
    Facilitate project intake, prioritization, and communication with stakeholders to maximize time spent on the most valuable or critical projects. Look at pipeline as part of project intake approach and adjust priorities as required. July 1st Consistently updated portfolio data. Dashboards to show back capacity to customers. SharePoint development resources.

    Review and customize section 1.5, “Process Success Criteria” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Establish realistic short-term goals. Even with optimized intake procedures, you may not be able to eliminate underground project economies immediately. Make your initial goals realistic, leaving room for those walk-up requests that may still appear via informal channels.

    Prepare to optimize project intake and capture the results in the Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP

    Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is the reference document to get all PPM stakeholders on the same page with the new optimized process.

    The current state explored and documented in this step will serve as a starting point for each step of the next phase of the blueprint. The next phase will take a deeper dive into each of the three components of Info-Tech’s project intake methodology, so that they can achieve the success criteria you’ve defined in the previous activity.

    Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template is intended to capture the outcome of your process optimization efforts. This blueprint guides you through numerous activities designed for your core project portfolio management team to customize each section.

    To maximize the chances of success, it is important that the team makes a concerted effort to participate. Schedule a series of working sessions over the course of several weeks for your team to work through it – or get through it in one week, with onsite Info-Tech analyst-facilitated workshops.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP.

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Case study: PMO develops mature intake and prioritization processes by slowly evolving its capability level

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Not-for-Profit

    Source: Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    • A PMO for a large not-for-profit benefits provider had relatively high project management maturity, but the enterprise had low PPM maturity.
    • There were strong intake processes in place for following up on requests. For small projects, project managers would assist as liaisons to help control scope. For corporate initiates, PMs were assigned to work with a sponsor to define scope and write a charter.

    Solution

    Prioritization was a challenge. Initially, the organization had ad hoc prioritization practices, but they had developed a scoring criteria to give more formality and direction to the portfolio. However, the activity of formally prioritizing proved to be too time consuming.

    Off-the-grid projects were a common problem, with initiatives consuming resources with no portfolio oversight.

    Results

    After trying “heavy” prioritization, the PMO loosened up the process. PMO staff now go through and quickly rank projects, with two senior managers making the final decisions. They re-prioritize quarterly to have discussions around resource availability and to make sure stakeholders are in tune to what IT is doing on a daily basis. IT has a monthly meeting to go over projects consuming resources and to catch anything that has fallen between the cracks.

    "Everything isn't a number one, which is what we were dealing with initially. We went through a formal prioritization period, where we painstakingly scored everything. Now we have evolved: a couple of senior managers have stepped up to make decisions, which was a natural evolution from us being able to assign a formal ranking. Now we are able to prioritize more easily and effectively without having to painstakingly score everything."

    – PMO Director, Benefits Provider

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    A photo of an Info-Tech analyst is shown.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.1-2

    A screenshot of activities 1.1.1 and 1.1.2 are shown.

    Pilot Info-Tech’s Project Value Scorecard-driven prioritization method

    Use Info-Tech’s example to prioritize your current project backlog to pilot a project value-driven prioritization, which will be used to guide the entire optimization process.

    1.2.1-3

    A screenshot of activities 1.2.1 and 1.2.3 are shown.

    Map out and document current project intake, approval, and prioritization process, and the involved key stakeholders

    A table-top planning exercise helps you visualize the current process in place and identify opportunities for optimization.

    Phase 2

    Build an Optimized Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process

    Phase 2 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Build an Optimized Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process Proposed Time to Completion: 3-6 weeks

    Step 2.1: Streamline Intake

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Challenges of project intake
    • Opportunities for improving the management of stakeholder expectations by optimizing intake

    Then complete these activities…

    • Perform a process retrospective
    • Optimize your process to receive, triage, and follow up on project requests

    With these tools & templates:

    • Project Request Form.
    • Project Intake Classification Matrix

    Step 2.2: Right-Size Approval

    Start with an analyst call:

    • Challenges of project approval
    • Opportunities for improving strategic alignment of the project portfolio by optimizing project approval

    Then complete these activities…

    • Perform a process retrospective
    • Clarify accountability at each step
    • Decide on deliverables to support decision makers at each step

    With these tools & templates:

    • Benefits Commitment Form
    • Technology Assessment Tool
    • Business Case Templates

    Step 3.3: Prioritize Realistically

    Start with an analyst call:

    • Challenges in project prioritization
  • Opportunities for installing a resource capacity-constrained intake by optimizing prioritization
  • Then complete these activities…

    • Perform a process retrospective
    • Pilot the Intake and Prioritization Tool for prioritization within estimated resource capacity

    With these tools & templates:

    • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Phase 2 Results & Insights:

    • Info-Tech’s methodology systemically fits the project portfolio into its triple constraint of stakeholder needs, strategic objectives, and resource capacity, to effectively address the challenges of establishing organizational discipline for project intake.

    Step 2.1: Streamline intake to manage stakeholder expectations

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Define project valuation criteria

    1.2

    Envision process target state

    2.1

    Streamline intake

    2.2

    Right-size approval steps

    2.3

    Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

    3.1

    Pilot your optimized process

    3.2

    Communicate organizational change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Perform a deeper retrospective on current project intake process
    • Optimize your process to receive project requests
    • Revisit the definition of a project for triaging requests
    • Optimize your process to triage project requests
    • Optimize your process to follow up on project requests

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Administrative Staff

    Outcomes of this Step

    • Retrospective of the current project intake process: to continue doing, to start doing, and to stop doing
    • A streamlined, single-funnel intake channel with the right procedural friction to receive project requests
    • A refined definition of what constitutes a project, and project levels that will determine the necessary standard of rigor with which project requests should be scoped and developed into a proposal throughout the process
    • An optimized process for triaging and following up on project requests to prepare them for the steps of project approval
    • Documentation of the optimized process in the SOP document

    Understand the risks of poor intake practices

    Too much red tape could result in your portfolio falling victim to underground economies. Too little intake formality could lead to the Wild West.

    Off-the-grid projects, i.e. projects that circumvent formal intake processes, lead to underground economies that can deplete resource capacity and hijack your portfolio.

    These underground economies are typically the result of too much intake red tape. When the request process is made too complex or cumbersome, project sponsors may unsurprisingly seek alternative means to get their projects done.

    While the most obvious line of defence against the appearance of underground economies is an easy-to-use and access request form, one must be cautious. Too little intake formality could lead to a Wild West of project intake where everyone gets their initiatives approved regardless of their business merit and feasibility.

    Benefits of optimized intake Risks of poor intake
    Alignment of portfolio with business goals Portfolio overrun by off-the-grid projects
    Resources assigned to high-value projects Resources assigned to low-value projects
    Better throughput of projects in the portfolio Ever-growing project backlog
    Strong stakeholder relations Stakeholders lose faith in value of PMO

    Info-Tech Insight

    Intake is intimately bound to stakeholder management. Finding the right balance of friction for your team is the key to successfully walking the line between asking for too much and not asking for enough. If your intake process is strong, stakeholders will no longer have any reason to circumvent formal process.

    An excess number of intake channels is the telltale sign of a low capability level for intake

    Excess intake channels are also a symptom of a portfolio in turmoil.

    If you relate to the graphic below in any way, your first priority needs to be limiting the means by which projects get requested. A single, centralized channel with review and approval done in batches is the goal. Otherwise, with IT’s limited capacity, most requests will simply get added to the backlog.

    A graphic is shown to demonstrate how one may receive project requests. The following icons are in a circle: Phone, Intranet Request Form, In person, anywhere, anytime, SharePoint Request Form, Weekly Scrum, Document, and Email.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The PMO needs to have the authority – and needs to exercise the authority – to enforce discipline on stakeholders. Organizations that solicit in verbal requests (by phone, in person, or during scrum) lack the orderliness required for PPM success. In these cases, it needs to be the mission of the PMO to demand proper documentation and accountability from stakeholders before proceeding with requests.

    "The golden rule for the project documentation is that if anything during the project life cycle is not documented, it is the same as if it does not exist or never happened…since management or clients will never remember their undocumented requests or their consent to do something."

    – Dan Epstein, “Project Initiation Process: Part Two”

    Develop an intake workflow

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for managing intake.

    1. Requestor fills out form and submits the request.

    Project Request Form Templates

    2. Requests are triaged into the proper queue.

    1. Divert non-project request
    2. Quickly assess value and urgency
    3. Assign specialist to follow up on request
    4. Inform the requestor

    Project Intake Classification Matrix

    3. BA or PM prepares to develop requests into a project proposal.

    1. Follow up with requestor and SMEs to refine project scope, benefits, and risks
    2. Estimate size of project and determine the required level of detail for proposal
    3. Prepare for concept approval

    Benefits Commitment Form Template

    4. Requestor is given realistic expectations for approval process.

    Perform a start-stop-continue exercise to help determine what is working and what is not working

    2.1.1 Estimated Time: 45 minutes

    Optimizing project intake may not require a complete overhaul of your existing processes. You may only need to tweak certain templates or policies. Perhaps you started out with a strong process and simply lost resolve over time – in which case you will need to focus on establishing motivation and discipline, rather than rework your entire process.

    Perform a start-stop-continue exercise with your team to help determine what should be salvaged, what should be abandoned, and what should be introduced:

    1. On a whiteboard or equivalent, write “Start,” “Stop,” and “Continue” in three separate columns. 3. As a group, discuss the responses and come to an agreement as to which are most valid.
    2. Equip your team with sticky notes or markers and have them populate the columns with ideas and suggestions surrounding your current processes. 4. Document the responses to help structure your game plan for intake optimization.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Explicitly manage follow-up expectations with project requestor
    • Receiving informal project requests
    • Take too long in proposal development
    • Quarterly approval meetings
    • Approve resources for proposal development

    INPUT

    • Current project intake workflow (Activity 1.2.2)
    • Project intake success criteria (Activity 1.2.6)

    OUTPUT

    • Retrospective review of current intake process

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes/markers

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Streamline project requests into a single funnel

    It is important to identify all of the ways through which projects currently get requested and initiated, especially if you have various streams of intake competing with each other for resources and a place in the portfolio. Directing multiple channels into a single, centralized funnel is step number one in optimizing intake.

    To help you identify project sources within your organization, we’ve broken project requests into three archetypes: the good, the bad, and the ugly.

    1. The Good – Proper Requests: written formal requests that come in through one appropriate channel.

    The Bad – Walk-Ups: requests that do not follow the appropriate intake channel(s), but nevertheless make an effort to get into the proper queue. The most common instance of this is a portfolio manager or CIO filling out the proper project request form on behalf of, and under direction from, a senior executive.

    The Ugly – Guerilla Tactics: initiatives that make their way into the portfolio through informal methods or that consume portfolio resources without formal approval, authority, or oversight. This typically involves a key resource getting ambushed to work on a stakeholder’s “side project” without any formal approval from, or knowledge of, the PMO.

    Funnel requests through a single portal to streamline intake

    Decide how you would funnel project requests on a single portal for submitting project requests. Determining the right portal for your organization will depend on your current infrastructure options, as well as your current and target state capability levels.

    Below are examples of a platform for your project request portal.

    Platform Template document, saved in a repository or shared drive Email-based form (Outlook forms) Intranet form (SharePoint, internal CMS) Dedicated intake solution (PPM tool, idea/innovation tool)
    Pros Can be deployed very easily Consolidates requests into a single receiver Users have one place to go from any device All-in-one solution that includes scoring and prioritization
    Cons Manual submission and intake process consumes extra effort Can pose problems in managing requests across multiple people and platforms Requires existing intranet infrastructure and some development effort Solution is costly; requires adoption across all lines of business

    Increasing intake capability and infrastructure availability

    Introduce the right amount of friction into your intake process

    The key to an effective intake process is determining the right amount of friction to include for your organization. In this context, friction comes from the level of granularity within your project request form and the demands or level of accountability your intake processes place on requestors. You will want to have more or less friction on your intake form, depending on your current intake pain points.

    If you are inundated with a high volume of requests:

    • Make your intake form more detailed to deter “half-baked” requests.
    • Have more managerial oversight into the process. Require approval for each request.

    If you want to encourage the use of a formal channel:

    • Make your intake form more concise and lightweight.
    • Have less managerial oversight into the process. Inform managers of each request rather than requiring approval.

    Download Info-Tech’s Detailed Project Request Form.

    Download Info-Tech’s Light Project Request Form.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Request Form is shown.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Optimizing a process should not automatically mean reducing friction. Blindly reducing friction could generate a tidal wave of poorly thought-out requests, which only drives up unrealistic expectations. Mitigate the risk of unrealistic stakeholder expectations by carefully managing the message: optimize friction.

    Document your process to receive project requests

    2.1.2 Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    Review and customize section 2.2, “Receive project requests” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of optimizing this process is to consolidate multiple intake channels into a single funnel with the right amount of friction to improve visibility and manageability of incoming project requests.

    The important decisions to document for this step include:

    1. What data will be collected, and from whom? For example, Info-Tech’s Light Project Request Form Template will be used to collect project requests from everyone.
    2. How will requests be collected, and from where? For example, the template will be available as a fillable form on a SharePoint site.
    3. Who will be informed of the requests? For example, the PMO Director and the BA team will be notified with a hyperlink to the completed request form.
    4. Who will handle exceptions? For example, PMO will maintain this process and will handle any questions or issues that pertain to this part of the process.

    INPUT

    • Retrospective of current process (Activity 2.1.1)

    OUTPUT

    • Customized Project Request Form
    • Method of implementation

    Materials

    • Project Request Form Templates

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Business Analysts

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Whatever method of request collection you choose, ensure there is no doubt about how requesters can access the intake form.

    Establish a triage process to improve portfolio success

    Once a request has been submitted, it will need to be triaged. Triage begins as soon as the request is received. The end goal of the triage process is to set appropriate expectations for stakeholders and to ensure that all requests going forward for approval are valid requests.

    PPM Triage Process

    1. Divert non-project requests by validating that what is described on the request form qualifies as a “project.” Make sure requests are in the appropriate queue – for example, service desk request queue, change and release management queue, etc.
    2. Quickly assess value and urgency to determine whether the request requires fast-tracking or any other special consideration.
    3. Assign a specialist to follow up on the request. Match the request to the most suitable BA, PM, or equivalent. This person will become the Request Liaison (“RL”) for the request and will work with the requestor to define preliminary requirements.
    4. Inform the requestor that the request has been received and provide clear direction on what will happen with the request next, such as who will follow up on it and when. See the next slide for some examples of this follow-up.

    The PMO Triage Team

    • Portfolio Manager, or equivalent
    • Request Liaisons (business analysts, project managers, or equivalent)

    “Request Liaison” Role

    The BAs and PMs who follow up on requests play an especially important role in the triage process. They serve as the main point of contact to the requestor as the request evolves into a business case. In this capacity they perform a valuable stakeholder management function, helping to increase confidence and enhance trust in IT.

    To properly triage project requests, define exactly what a project is

    Bring color to the grey area that can exist in IT between those initiatives that fall somewhere in between “clearly a service ticket” and “clearly a project.”

    What constitutes a project?

    Another way of asking this question that gets more to the point for this blueprint – for what types of initiatives is project intake, approval, and prioritization rigor required?

    This is especially true in IT where, for some smaller initiatives, there can be uncertainty in many organizations during the intake and initiation phase about what should be included on the formal project list and what should go to help desk’s queue.

    As the definitions in the table below show, formal project management frameworks each have similar definitions of “a project.”

    Source Definition
    PMI A temporary endeavor undertaken to create a unique product, service, or result.” (553)
    COBIT A structured set of activities concerned with delivering a defined capability (that is necessary but not sufficient to achieve a required business outcome) to the enterprise based on an agreed‐on schedule and budget.” (74)
    PRINCE2 A temporary organization that is created for the purpose of delivering one or more business products according to an agreed business case.

    For each, a project is a temporary endeavor planned around producing a specific organizational/business outcome. The challenge of those small initiatives in IT is knowing when those endeavors require a business case, formal resource tracking, and project management rigor, and when they don’t.

    Separating small projects from non-projects requires a consideration of approval rights

    While conventional wisdom says to base your project definition on an estimation of cost, risk, etc., you also need to ask, “does this initiative require formal approval?”

    In the next step, we will define a suggested minimum threshold for a small “level 1” project. While these level thresholds are good and necessary for a number of reasons – including triaging your project requests – you may still often need to exercise some critical judgment in separating the tickets from the projects. In addition to the level criteria that we will develop in this step, use the checklist below to help with your differentiating.

    Service Desk Ticket Small Project
    • Approval seems implicit given the scope of the task.
    • No expectations of needing to report on status.
    • No indications that management will require visibility during execution.
    • The scope of the task suggests formal approval may be required.
    • You may have to report on status.
    • Possibility that management may require visibility during execution.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Guard the value of the portfolio. Because tickets carry with them an implicit approval, you need to be wary at the portfolio level of those that might possess a larger scope than their status of ticket implies. Sponsors that, for whatever reason, resist the formal intake process may use the ticketing process to sneak projects in through the backdoor. When assessing tickets and small projects at the portfolio level, you need to ask: is it possible that someone at an executive level might want to get updates on this because of its duration, scope, risk, cost, etc.? Could someone at the management level get upset that the initiative came in as a ticket and is burning up time and driving costs without any visibility?

    Sample Project/Non-Project Separation Criteria

    Non-Project Small Project
    e.g. Time required e.g. < 40 hours e.g. 40 > hours
    e.g. Complexity e.g. Very low e.g. Moderate – Low Difficulty: Does not require highly developed or specialized skill sets
    e.g. Collaboration e.g. None required e.g. Limited coordination and collaboration between resources and departments
    e.g. Repeatability of work e.g. Fully repeatable e.g. Less predictable
    e.g. Frequency of request type e.g. Hourly to daily e.g. Weekly to monthly

    "If you worked for the help desk, over time you would begin to master your job since there is a certain rhythm and pattern to the work…On the other hand, projects are unique. This characteristic makes them hard to estimate and hard to manage. Even if the project is similar to one you have done before, new events and circumstances will occur. Each project typically holds its own challenges and opportunities"

    – Jeffrey and Thomas Mochal

    Define the minimum-threshold criteria for small projects

    2.1.3 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Follow the steps below to define the specifics of a “level 1” project for your organization.

    1. Using your project list and/or ticketing system, identify a handful of small projects, large service desk tickets, and especially those items that fall somewhere in the grey area in between (anywhere between 10 to 20 of each). Then, determine the organizationally appropriate considerations for defining your project levels. Options include:
    • Duration
    • Budget/Cost
    • Technology requirements
    • Customer involvement
    • Integration
    • Organizational impact
    • Complexity
    • Number of cross-functional workgroups and teams involved
  • Using the list of projects established in the previous step, determine the organizationally appropriate considerations for defining your project levels –anywhere from four to six considerations is a good number.
  • Using these criteria and your list of small projects, define the minimum threshold for your level one projects across each of these categories. Record these thresholds in the table on the next slide.
  • INPUT

    • Data concerning small projects and service desk tickets, including size, duration, etc.

    OUTPUT

    • Clarity around how to define your level 1 projects

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Remove room for stakeholder doubt and confusion by informing requests forward in a timely manner

    During triaging, requestors should be notified as quickly as possible (a) that their request has been received and (b) what to expect next for the request. Make this forum as productive and informative as possible, providing clear direction and structure for the future of the request. Be sure to include the following:

    • A request ID or ticket number.
    • Some direction on who will be following up on the request –provide an individual’s name when possible.
    • An estimated timeframe of when they can expect to hear from the individual following up.

    The logistic of this follow-up will depend on a number of different factors.

    • The number of requests you receive.
    • Your ability to automate the responses.
    • The amount of detail you would like to, or need to, provide stakeholders with.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Assign an official request number or project ID to all requests during this initial response. An official request number anchors the request to a specific and traceable dataset that will accompany the project throughout its lifecycle.

    Sample “request received” emails

    If you receive a high volume of requests or need a quick win for improving stakeholder relations:

    Sample #1: Less detailed, automatic response

    Hello Emma,

    Thank you. Your project request has been received. Requests are reviewed and assigned every Monday. A business analyst will follow up with you in the next 5-10 business days. Should you have any questions in the meantime, please reply to this email.

    Best regards,

    Information Technology Services

    If stakeholder management is a priority, and you want to emphasize the customer-facing focus:

    Sample #2: More detailed, tailored response

    Hi Darren,

    Your project request has been received and reviewed. Your project ID number is #556. Business analyst Alpertti Attar has been assigned to follow up on your request. You can expect to hear from him in the next 5-10 business days to set up a meeting for preliminary requirements gathering.

    If you have any questions in the meantime, please contact Alpertti at aattar@projectco.com. Please include the Project ID provided in this email in all future correspondences regarding this request.

    Thank you for your request. We look forward to helping you bring this initiative to fruition.

    Sincerely,

    Jim Fraser

    PMO Director, Information Technology Services

    Info-Tech Insight

    A simple request response will go a long way in terms of stakeholder management. It will not only help assure stakeholders that their requests are in progress but the request confirmation will also help to set expectations and take some of the mystery out of IT’s processes.

    Document your process to triage project requests

    2.1.4 Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    Review and customize section 2.3, “Triage project requests” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of optimizing this process is to divert non-project requests and set an appropriate initial set of stakeholder expectations for next steps. The important decisions to document for this step include:

    1. What defines a project? Record the outcomes of Activities 2.1.3 into the SOP.
    2. Who triages the requests and assign request liaisons? Who are they? For example, a lead BA can assign a set roster of BAs to project requests.
    3. What are the steps to follow for sending the initial response? See the previous slides on automated responses vs. detailed, tailored responses.
    4. How will you account for the consumption of resource capacity? For example, impose a maximum of four hours per week per analyst, and track the hours worked for each request to establish a pattern for capacity consumption.
    5. Who will handle exceptions? For example, PMO will maintain this process and will handle any questions or issues that pertain to this part of the process.

    INPUT

    • Results of activity 2.1.3

    OUTPUT

    • SOP for triaging project requests

    Materials

    • SOP Template

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Business Analysts

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Whatever method of request collection you choose, ensure there is no doubt about how requesters can access the intake form.

    Follow up on requests to define project scope and set realistic expectations

    The purpose of this follow-up is to foster communication among the requestor, IT, and the sponsor to scope the project at a high level. The follow-up should:

    • Clarify the goals and value of the request.
    • Begin to manage expectations based on initial assessment of feasibility.
    • Ensure the right information is available for evaluating project proposals downstream. Every project should have the below key pieces of scope defined before any further commitments are made.

    Focus on Defining Key Pieces of Scope

    • Budget (funding, source)
    • Business outcome
    • Completion criteria
    • Timeframes (start date and duration)
    • Milestones/deliverables

    Structure the Follow-Up Process to Enhance Alignment Between IT and the Business

    Once a Request Liaison (RL) has been assigned to a request, it is their responsibility to schedule time (if necessary) with the requestor to perform a scoping exercise that will help define preliminary requirements. Ideally, this follow-up should occur no later than a week of the initial request.

    Structure the follow-up for each request based on your preliminary estimates of project size (next slide). Use the “Key Pieces of Scope” to the left as a guide.

    It may also be helpful for RLs and stakeholders to work together to produce a rough diagram or mock-up of the final deliverable. This will ensure that the stakeholder’s idea has been properly communicated, and it could also help refine or broaden this idea based on IT’s capabilities.

    After the scoping exercise, it is the RL’s responsibility to inform the requestor of next steps.

    Info-Tech Insight

    More time spent with stakeholders defining high-level requirements during the ideation phase is key to project success. It will not only improve the throughput of projects, but it will enhance the transparency of IT’s capacity and enable IT to more effectively support business processes.

    Perform a preliminary estimation of project size

    Project estimation is a common pain point felt by many organizations. At this stage, a range-of-magnitude (ROM) estimate is sufficient for the purposes of sizing the effort required for developing project proposals with appropriate detail.

    A way to structure ROM estimates is to define a set of standard project levels. It will help you estimate 80% of projects with sufficient accuracy over time with little effort. The remaining 20% of projects that don’t meet their standard target dates can be managed as exceptions.

    The increased consistency of most projects will enable you to focus more on managing the exceptions.

    Example of standard project sizes:

    Level Primary unit of estimation Target completion date*
    1 Weeks 3 weeks – 3 months
    2 Months 3 months – 6 months
    3 Quarters 2 – 4 quarters
    3+ Years 1 year or more

    * Target completion date is simply that – a target, not a service level agreement (SLA). Some exceptions will far exceed the target date, e.g. projects that depend heavily on external or uncontrollable factors.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Project levelling is useful for right-sizing many downstream processes; it sets appropriate levels of detail and scrutiny expected for project approval and prioritization steps, as well as the appropriate extent of requirements gathering, project management, and reporting requirements afterwards.

    Set your thresholds for level 2 and level 3 projects

    2.1.5 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Now that the minimum threshold for your smallest projects has been identified, it’s time to identify the maximum threshold in order to better apply project intake, approval, and prioritization rigor where it’s needed.

    1. Looking at your project list (e.g. Activity 1.1.1, or your current project backlog), isolate the medium and large projects. Examine the two categories in turn.
    2. Start with the medium projects. Using the criteria identified in Activity 2.1.3, identify where your level one category ends.
    • What are the commonly recurring thresholds that distinguish medium-sized projects from smaller initiatives?
    • Are there any criteria that would need to take on a greater importance when making the distinction? For instance, will cost or duration take on a greater weighting when determining level thresholds?
    • Once you have reached consensus, record these in the table on the next slide.
  • Now examine your largest projects. Once again relying on the criteria from Activity 2.1.3, determine where your medium-sized projects end and your large projects begin.
    • What are the commonly recurring thresholds that distinguish large and extra-large projects from medium-sized initiatives?
    • Once you have reached consensus, records these in the table on the next slide.

    INPUT

    • Leveling criteria from Activity 2.1.3
    • Project backlog, or list of projects from Activity 1.1.1

    OUTPUT

    • Clarity around how to define your level two and three projects

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • The project level table on the next slide

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Sample Project Levels Table

    Project Level Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
    Work Effort 40-100 hours 100-500 hours 500+ hours
    Budget $100,000 and under $100,000 to $500,000 $500,000 and over
    Technology In-house expertise Familiar New or requires system-wide change/training
    Complexity Well-defined solution; no problems expected Solution is known; some problems expected Solution is unknown or not clearly defined
    Cross-Functional Workgroups/Teams 1-2 3-5 > 6

    Apply a computation decision-making method for project levelling

    2.1.5 Project Intake Classification Matrix

    Capture the project levels in Info-Tech’s Project Intake Classification Matrix Tool to benchmark your levelling criteria and to determine project levels for proposed projects.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Intake Classification Matrix tool.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake Classification Matrix Tool, tab 2 is shown.
    1. Pick a category to define project levels.
    2. Enter the descriptions for each project level.
    3. Assign a relative weight for each category.
    4. A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake Classification Matrix Tool, tab 3 is shown.
    5. Enter a project name.
    6. Choose the description that best fits the project. If unknown, leave it blank.
    7. Suggested project levels are displayed.

    Get tentative buy-in and support from an executive sponsor for project requests

    In most organizations a project requires sponsorship from the executive layer, especially for strategic initiatives. The executive sponsor provides several vital factors for projects:

    • Funding and resources
    • Direct support and oversight of the project leadership
    • Accountability, acting as the ultimate decision maker for the project
    • Ownership of, and commitment to, project benefits

    Sometimes a project request may be made directly by a sponsor; in other times, the Request Liaison may need to connect the project request to a project sponsor.

    In either case, project request has a tentative buy-in and support of an executive sponsor before a project request is developed into a proposal and examined for approval – the subject of this blueprint’s next step.

    PMs and Sponsors: The Disconnect

    A study in project sponsorship revealed a large gap between the perception of the project managers and the perception of sponsors relative to the sponsor capability. The widest gaps appear in the areas of:

    • Motivation: 34% of PMs say sponsors frequently motivate the team, compared to 82% of executive sponsors who say they do so.
    • Active listening: 42% of PMs say that sponsors frequently listen actively, compared to 88% of executive sponsors who say they do so.
    • Effective communication: 47% of PMs say sponsors communicate effectively and frequently, compared to 92% of executive sponsors who say they do so.
    • Managing change: 37% of PMs say sponsors manage change, compared to 82% of executive sponsors who say they do so.

    Source: Boston Consulting Group/PMI, 2014

    Actively engaged executive sponsors continue to be the top driver of whether projects meet their original goals and business intent.

    – PMI Pulse of the Profession, 2017

    76% of respondents [organizations] agree that the role of the executive sponsor has grown in importance over the past five years.

    – Boston Consulting Group/PMI, 2014

    Document your process to follow up on project requests

    2.1.6 45 minutes

    Review and customize section 2.4, “Follow up on project requests” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of optimizing this process is to initiate communication among the requestor, IT, and the sponsor to scope the project requests at a high level. The important decisions to document for this step include:

    1. How will you perform a scoping exercise with the requestor? Leverage existing organizational processes (e.g. high-level requirements gathering). Look to the previous slides for suggested outcomes of the exercise.
    2. How will you determine project levels? Record the outcomes of activities 2.1.5 into the SOP.
    3. How will the RL follow up on the scoped project request with a project sponsor? For example, project requests scoped at a high level will be presented to senior leadership whose lines of business are affected by the proposed project to gauge their initial interest.
    4. How will you account for the consumption of resource capacity? For example, impose a maximum of 8 hours per week per analyst, and track the hours worked for each request to establish a pattern for capacity consumption.
    5. Who will handle exceptions? For example, PMO will maintain this process and will handle any questions or issues that pertain to this part of the process.

    INPUT

    • Activity 2.1.5
    • Existing processes for scoping exercises

    OUTPUT

    • SOP for following up on project requests

    Materials

    • SOP Template

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Examine the new project intake workflow as a whole and document it in a flow chart

    2.1.7 Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    Review and customize section 2.1, “Project Intake Workflow” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    In Step 1.2 of the blueprint, you mapped out the current project intake, approval, and prioritization workflow and documented it in a flow chart. In this step, take the time to examine the new project intake process as a whole, and document the new workflow in the form of a flow chart.

    1. Requestor fills out form and submits the request.
    2. Requests are triaged into the proper queue.
    3. BA or PM prepares to develop requests into a project proposal.
    4. Requestor is given realistic expectations for approval process.

    Consider the following points:

    1. Are the inputs and outputs of each step clear? Who’s doing the work? How long will each step take, on average?
    2. Is the ownership of each step clear? How will we ensure a smooth handoff between each step and prevent requests from falling through the cracks?

    INPUT

    • New process steps for project intake (Activities 2.1.2-6)

    OUTPUT

    • Flowchart representation of new project intake workflow

    Materials

    • Microsoft Visio, flowchart software, or Microsoft PowerPoint

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Case study: Portfolio manager achieves intake and project success through detailed request follow-up

    Case Study

    Industry: Municipal Government

    Source: Info-Tech Client

    Challenge

    • There is an IT department with a relatively high level of project management maturity.
    • They have approximately 30 projects on the go, ranging from small to large.
    • To help with intake, IT assembled a project initiation team. It was made up of managers from throughout the county. This group “owned the talent” and met once a month to assess requests. As a group, they were able to assemble project teams quickly.

    Solution

    • Project initiation processes kept failing. A lot of time was spent within IT getting estimations precise, only to have sponsors reject business cases because they did not align with what those sponsors had in mind.
    • Off-the-grid projects were a challenge. Directors did not follow intake process and IT talent was torn in multiple directions. There was nothing in place for protecting the talent and enforcing processes on stakeholders.

    Results

    • IT dedicated a group of PMs and BAs to follow up on requests.
    • Working with stakeholders, this group collects specific pieces of information that allows IT to get to work on requests faster. Through this process, requests reach the charter stage more quickly and with greater success.
    • An intake ticketing system was established to protect IT talent. Workers are now better equipped to redirect stakeholders through to the proper channels.

    Step 2.2: Set up steps of project approval to maximize strategic alignment while right-sizing the required effort

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Define project valuation criteria

    1.2

    Envision process target state

    2.1

    Streamline intake

    2.2

    Right-size approval steps

    2.3

    Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

    3.1

    Pilot your optimized process

    3.2

    Communicate organizational change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Perform a deeper retrospective on current project approval process
    • Define the approval steps, their accountabilities, and the corresponding terminologies for approval
    • Right-size effort and documentation required for each project level through the approval steps

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Administrative Staff

    Outcomes of this step

    • Retrospective of the current project intake process: to continue doing, to start doing, and to stop doing
    • A series of approval steps are defined, in which their accountabilities, responsibilities, and the nomenclature for what is approved at each steps are clarified and documented
    • A toolbox of deliverables for proposed projects that captures key information developed to inform project approval decisions at each step of the approval process, and the organizational standard for what to use for which project level
    • Documentation of the optimized process in the SOP document

    Set up an incremental series of approval stage-gates to tackle common challenges in project approval

    This section will help you address key challenges IT leaders face around project approval.

    Challenges Info-Tech’s Advice
    Project sponsors receive funding from their business unit or other source (possibly external, such as a grant), and assume this means their project is “approved” without any regard to IT costs or resource constraints. Clearly define a series of approval steps, and communicate requirements for passing them.
    Business case documentation is rarely updated to reflect unforeseen costs, emerging opportunities, and changing priorities. As a result, time and money is spent finishing diminished priority projects while the value of more recent projects erodes in the backlog. Approve projects in smaller pieces, with early test/pilot phases focused on demonstrating the value of later phases.
    Project business cases often focus on implementation and overlook ongoing operating costs imposed on IT after the project is finished. These costs further diminish IT’s capacity for new projects, unless investment in more capacity (such as hiring) is included in business cases. Make ongoing support and maintenance costs a key element in business case templates and evaluations.
    Organizations approve new projects without regard to the availability of resource capacity (or lack thereof). Project lead times grow and stakeholders become more dissatisfied because IT is unable to show how the business is competing with itself for IT’s time. Increase visibility into what IT is already working on and committed to, and for whom.

    Develop a project approval workflow

    Clearly define a series of approval steps, and communicate requirements for passing them. “Approval” can be a dangerous word in project and portfolio management, so it is important to clarify what is required to pass each step, and how long the process will take.

    1 2 3 4
    Approval step Concept Approval Feasibility Approval Business Case Approval Resource Allocation (Prioritization)
    Alignment Focus Business need / Project sponsorship Technology Organization-wide business need Resource capacity
    Possible dispositions at each gate
    • Approve developing project proposal
    • Reject concept
    • Proceed to business case approval
    • Approve a test/pilot project for feasibility
    • Reject proposal
    • Approve project and funding in full
    • Approve a test/pilot project for viability
    • Reject proposal
    • Begin or continue project work
    • Hold project
    • Outsource project
    • Reject project
    Accountability e.g. Project Sponsor e.g. CIO e.g. Steering Committee e.g. CIO
    Deliverable Benefits Commitment Form Template Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool Business Case (Fast Track, Comprehensive) Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Identify the decision-making paradigm at each step

    In general, there are three different, mutually exclusive decision-making paradigms for approving projects:

    Paradigm Description Benefits Challenges Recommendation
    Unilateral authority One individual makes decisions. Decisions tend to be made efficiently and unambiguously. Consistency of agenda is easier to preserve. Decisions are subject to one person’s biases and unseen areas. Decision maker should solicit and consider input from others and seek objective rigor.
    Ad hoc deliberation Stakeholders informally negotiate and communicate decisions between themselves. Deliberation helps ensure different perspectives are considered to counterbalance individual biases and unseen areas. Ad hoc decisions tend to lack documentation and objective rationale, which can perpetuate disagreement. Use where unilateral decisions are unfeasible (due to complexity, speed of change, culture, etc.), and stakeholders are very well aligned or highly skilled negotiators and communicators.
    Formal steering committee A select group that represent various parts of the organization is formally empowered to make decisions for the organization. Formal committees can ensure oversight into decisions, with levers available to help resolve uncertainty or disagreement. Formal committees introduce administrative overhead and effort that might not be warranted by the risks involved. Formal steering committees are best where formality is warranted by the risks and costs involved, and the organizational culture has an appetite for administrative oversight.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The individual or party who has the authority to make choices, and who is ultimately answerable for those decisions, is said to be accountable. Understanding the needs of the accountable party is critical to the success of the project approval process optimization efforts.

    Perform a start-stop-continue exercise to help determine what is working and what is not working

    2.2.1 Estimated Time: 45 minutes

    Optimizing project approval may not require a complete overhaul of your existing processes. You may only need to tweak certain templates or policies. Perhaps you started out with a strong process and simply lost resolve over time – in which case you will need to focus on establishing motivation and discipline, rather than rework your entire process.

    Perform a start-stop-continue exercise with your team to help determine what should be salvaged, what should be abandoned, and what should be introduced:

    1.On a whiteboard or equivalent, write “Start,” “Stop,” and “Continue” in three separate columns. 3.As a group, discuss the responses and come to an agreement as to which are most valid.
    2.Equip your team with sticky notes or markers and have them populate the columns with ideas and suggestions surrounding your current processes. 4.;Document the responses to help structure your game plan for intake optimization.
    StartStopContinue
    • Inject technical feasibility approval step as an input to final approval
    • Simplify business cases
    • Approve low-value projects
    • Take too long in proposal development
    • Quarterly approval meetings
    • Approve resources for proposal development

    INPUT

    • Current project approval workflow (Activity 1.2.2)
    • Project approval success criteria (Activity 1.2.6)

    OUTPUT

    • Retrospective review of current approval process

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes/markers

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Customize the approval steps and describe them at a high level

    2.2.2 Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    Review and customize section 3.2, “Project Approval Steps” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of this activity is to customize the definition of the approval steps for your organization, so that it makes sense for the existing organizational governance structure, culture, and need. Use the results of the start-stop-continue to inform what to customize. Consider the following factors:

    1. Order of steps: given the current decision-making paradigm, does it make sense to reorder the steps?
    2. Dispositions at each step: what are the possible dispositions, and who is accountable for making the dispositions?
    3. Project levels: do all projects require three-step approval before they’re up for prioritization? For example, IT steering committee may wish to be involved only for Level 3 projects and Level 2 projects with significant business impact, and not for Level 1 projects and IT-centric Level 2 projects.
    4. Accountability at each step: who makes the decisions?
    5. Who will handle exceptions? Aim to prevent the new process from being circumvented by vocal stakeholders, but also allow for very urgent requests. A quick win to strike this balance is to clarify who will exercise this discretion.

    INPUT

    • Retrospective of current process (Activity 2.2.1)
    • Project level definition
    • Approval steps in the previous slide

    OUTPUT

    • Customized project approval steps for each project level

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Specify what “approval” really means to manage expectations for what project work can be done and when

    2.2.3 Estimated Time: 15 minutes

    Review and customize section 3.2, “Project Approval Steps” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    In the old reality, projects were approved and never heard back from again, which effectively gave your stakeholders a blanket default expectation of “declined.” With the new approval process, manage your stakeholder expectations more explicitly by refining your vocabulary around approval.

    Within this, decision makers should view their role in approval as approving that which can and should be done. When a project is approved and slated to backlog, the intention should be to allocate resources to it within the current intake cycle.

    Customize the table to the right with organizationally appropriate definitions, and update your SOP.

    “No” Declined.
    “Not Now” “It’s a good idea, but the time isn’t right. Try resubmitting next intake cycle.”
    “Concept Approval” Approval to add the item to the backlog with the intention of starting it this intake cycle.
    “Preliminary Approval” Approval for consumption of PMO resources to develop a business case.
    “Full Approval” Project is greenlighted and project resources are being allocated to it.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Refine the nomenclature. Add context to “approved” and “declined.” Speak in terms of “not now” or “you can have it when these conditions are met.” With clear expectations of the resources required to support each request, you can place accountability for keeping the request alive back on the sponsors.

    Continuously work out a balance between disciplined decision making and “analysis paralysis"

    A graph is depicted to show the relationship between disciplined decision making and analysis paralysis. The sweet spot for disciplined decisions changes between situations and types of decisions.

    A double bar graph is depicted to show the relative effort spent on management practice. The first bar shows that 20% has a high success of portfolio management. 35% has a low success of portfolio management. A caption on the graph: Spending additional time assessing business cases doesn’t necessarily improve success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Estimates that form the basis of business cases are often based on flawed assumptions. Use early project phases or sprints to build working prototypes to test the assumptions on which business cases are built, rather than investing time improving precision of estimates without improving accuracy.

    Right-size project approval process with Info-Tech’s toolbox of deliverables

    Don’t paint every project with the same brush. Choose the right set of information needed for each project level to maximize the throughput of project approval process.

    The next several slides will take you through a series of tools and templates that help guide the production of deliverables. Each deliverable wireframes the required analysis of the proposed project for one step of the approval process, and captures that information in a document. This breaks down the overall work for proposal development into digestible chunks.

    As previously discussed, aim to right-size the approval process rigor for project levels. Not all project levels may call for all steps of approval, or the extent of required analysis within an approval step may differ. This section will conclude by customizing the requirement for deliverables for each project level.

    Tools and Templates for the Project Approval Toolbox

    • Benefits Commitment Form Template (.xlsx) Document the project sponsor’s buy-in and commitment to proposed benefits in a lightweight fashion.
    • Proposed Technology Assessment Tool (.xlsx) Determine the proposed project’s readiness for adoption from a technological perspective.
    • Business Case Templates (.docx) Guide the analysis process for the overall project proposal development in varying levels of detail.

    Use Info-Tech’s lightweight Benefits Commitment Form Template to document the sponsor buy-in and support

    2.2.4 Benefits Commitment Form Template

    Project sponsors are accountable for the realization of project benefits. Therefore, for a project to be approved by a project sponsor, they must buy-in and commit to the proposed benefits.

    Defining project benefits and obtaining project sponsor commitment has been demonstrated to improve the project outcome by providing the focal point of the project up-front. This will help reduce wasted efforts to develop parts of the proposals that are not ultimately needed.

    A double bar graph titled: Benefits realization improves project outcome is shown.

    Download Info-Tech’s Benefits Commitment Form Template.

    Contents of a Benefits Commitment Form

    • One-sentence highlight of benefits and risks
    • Primary benefit, hard (quantitative) and soft (qualitative)
    • Proposed measurements for metrics
    • Responsible and accountable parties for benefits
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Establish the Benefits Realization Process blueprint is shown.

    For further discussion on benefits realization, use Info-Tech’s blueprint, Establish the Benefits Realization Process.

    Use Info-Tech’s Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool to analyze a technology’s readiness for adoption

    2.2.4 Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool

    In some projects, there needs to be an initial idea of what the project might look like. Develop a high-level solution for projects that:

    • Are very different from previous projects.
    • Are fairly complex, or not business as usual.
    • Require adoption of new technology or skill set.

    IT should advise and provide subject matter expertise on the technology requirements to those that ultimately approve the proposed projects, so that they can take into account additional costs or risks that may be borne from it.

    Info-Tech’s Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool has a series of questions to address eight categories of considerations to determine the project’s technological readiness for adoption. Use this tool to ensure that you cover all the bases, and help you devise alternate solutions if necessary – which will factor into the overall business case development.

    Download Info-Tech’s Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Proposed Project Technology Assessment Tool is shown.

    Enable project valuation beyond financial metrics with Info-Tech’s Business Case Templates

    2.2.4 Business Case Template (Comprehensive and Fast Track)

    Traditionally, a business case is centered around financial metrics. While monetary benefits and costs are matters of bottom line and important, financial metrics are only part of a project’s value. As the project approval decisions must be based on the holistic comparison of project value, the business case document must capture all the necessary – and only those that are necessary – information to enable it.

    However, completeness of information does not always require comprehensiveness. Allow for flexibility to speed up the process of developing business plan by making a “fast-track” business case template available. This enables the application of the project valuation criteria with all other projects, with right-sized effort.

    Alarming business case statistics

    • Only one-third of companies always prepare a business case for new projects.
    • Nearly 45% of project managers admit they are unclear on the business objectives of their IT projects.

    (Source: Wrike)

    Download Info-Tech’s Comprehensive Business Case Template.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Comprehensive Business Case Template is shown.

    Download Info-Tech’s Fast Track Business Case Template.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Fast Track Business Case Template is shown.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Pass on that which is known. Valuable information about projects is lost due to a disconnect between project intake and project initiation, as project managers are typically not brought on board until project is actually approved. This will be discussed more in Phase 3 of this blueprint.

    Document the right-sized effort and documentation required for each project level

    2.2.4 Estimated Time:60-90 minutes

    Review and customize section 3.3, “Project Proposal Deliverables” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of this activity is to customize the requirements for project proposal deliverables, so that it properly informs each of the approval steps discussed in the previous activity. The deliverables will also shape the work effort required for projects of various levels. Consider the following factors:

    1. Project levels: what deliverables should be required, recommended, or suggested for each of the project levels? How will exceptions be handled, and who will be accountable?
    2. Existing project proposal documents: what existing proposal documents, tools and templates can we leverage for the newly optimized approval steps?
    3. Skills availability: do these tools and templates represent a significant departure from the current state? If so, is there capacity (time and skill) to achieve the desired target state?
    4. How will you account for the consumption of resource capacity? Do a rough order of estimate for the resource capacity consumed the new deliverable standard.
    5. Who will handle exceptions? For example, PMO will maintain this process and will handle any questions or issues that pertain to this part of the process.

    INPUT

    • Process steps (Activity 2.2.2)
    • Current approval workflow(Activity 1.2.1)
    • Artifacts introduced in the previous slides

    OUTPUT

    • Requirement for artifacts and effort for each approval step

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Examine the new project approval workflow as a whole and document it in a flow chart

    2.2.5 Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    Review and customize section 3.1, “Project Approval Workflow” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    In Step 1.2 of the blueprint, you mapped out the current project intake, approval, and prioritization workflow and documented it in a flow chart. In this step, take the time to examine the new project intake process as a whole, and document the new workflow in the form of a flow chart.

    1 2 3 4
    Approval Step Concept Approval Feasibility Approval Business Case Approval Resource Allocation (Prioritization)
    Alignment Focus Business need/ Project Sponsorship Technology

    Organization-wide

    Business need

    Resource capacity

    Consider the following points:

    1. Are the inputs and outputs of each step clear? Who’s doing the work? How long will each step take, on average?
    2. Is the ownership of each step clear? How will we ensure a smooth hand-off between each step and prevent requests from falling through the cracks?

    INPUT

    • New process steps for project approval (Activities 2.2.2-4)

    OUTPUT

    • Flowchart representation of new project approval workflow

    Materials

    • Microsoft Visio, flowchart software, or Microsoft PowerPoint

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Step 2.3: Prioritize projects to maximize the value of the project portfolio within the constraint of resource capacity

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Define project valuation criteria

    1.2

    Envision process target state

    2.1

    Streamline intake

    2.2

    Right-size approval steps

    2.3

    Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

    3.1

    Pilot your optimized process

    3.2

    Communicate organizational change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Perform a deeper retrospective on current project prioritization process
    • Optimize your process to maintain resource capacity supply and project demand data
    • Optimize your process to formally make disposition recommendations to appropriate decision makers

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Administrative Staff

    Outcomes of this step

    • Retrospective of the current project prioritization process: to continue doing, to start doing, and to stop doing
    • Realistic estimate of available resource capacity, in the absence of a resource management practice
    • Optimized process for presenting the decision makers with recommendations and facilitating capacity-constrained steering of the project portfolio
    • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool for facilitating the prioritization process
    • Documentation of the optimized process in the SOP document

    The availability of staff time is rarely factored into IT project and service delivery commitments

    A lot gets promised and worked on, and staff are always busy, but very little actually gets done – at least not within given timelines or to expected levels of quality.

    Organizations tend to bite off more than they can chew when it comes to project and service delivery commitments involving IT resources.

    While the need for businesses to make an excess of IT commitments is understandable, the impacts of systemically over-allocating IT are clearly negative:

    • Stakeholder relations suffer. Promises are made to the business that can’t be met by IT.
    • IT delivery suffers. Project timelines and quality frequently suffer, and service support regularly lags.
    • Employee engagement suffers. Anxiety and stress levels are consistently high among IT staff, while morale and engagement levels are low.

    76%: 76% of organizations say they have too many projects on the go and an unmanageable and ever-growing backlog of things to get to.

    – Cooper, 2014

    70%: Almost 70% of workers feel as though they have too much work on their plates and not enough time to do it.

    – Reynolds, 2016

    Unconstrained, unmanaged demand leads to prioritization of work based on consequences rather than value

    Problems caused by the organizational tendency to make unrealistic delivery commitments is further complicated by the reality of the matrix environment.

    Today, many IT departments use matrix organization. In this system, demands on a resource’s time come from many directions. While resources are expected to prioritize their work, they lack the authority to formally reject any demand. As a result, unconstrained, unmanaged demand frequently outstrips the supply of work-hours the resource can deliver.

    When this happens, the resource has three options:

    1. Work more hours, typically without compensation.
    2. Choose tasks not to do in a way that minimizes personal consequences.
    3. Diminish work quality to meet quantity demands.

    The result is an unsustainable system for all those involved:

    1. Individual workers cannot meet expectations, leading to frustration and disengagement.
    2. Managers cannot deliver on the projects or services they manage and struggle to retain skilled resources who are looking elsewhere for “greener pastures.”
    3. Executives cannot execute strategic plans as they lose decision-making power over their resources.

    Prioritize project demand by project value to get the most out of constrained project capacity – but practicing it is difficult

    The theory may be simple and intuitive, but the practice is extremely challenging. There are three practical challenges to making project prioritization effective.

    Project Prioritization

    Capacity awareness

    Many IT departments struggle to realistically estimate available project capacity in a credible way. Stakeholders question the validity of your endeavor to install capacity-constrained intake process, and mistake it for unwillingness to cooperate instead.

    Lack of authority

    Many PMOs and IT departments simply lack the ability to decline or defer new projects.

    Many moving parts

    Project intake, approval, and prioritization involve the coordination of various departments. Therefore, they require a great deal of buy-in and compliance from multiple stakeholders and senior executives.

    Project Approval

    Unclear definition of value

    Defining the project value is difficult, because there are so many different and conflicting ways that are all valid in their own right. However, without it, it's impossible to fairly compare among projects to select what's "best."

    Unclear definition of value

    In Step 1.1 of the blueprint, we took the first step toward resolving this challenge by prototyping a project valuation scorecard.

    A screenshot of Step 1.1 of this blueprint is shown.

    "Prioritization is a huge issue for us. We face the simultaneous challenges of not having enough resources but also not having a good way to say no. "

    – CIO, governmental health agency

    Address the challenges of capacity awareness and authority with a project prioritization workflow

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for managing project prioritization.

    1. Collect and update supply and demand data
      1. Re-evaluate project value for all proposed, on-hold and ongoing projects
      2. Estimate available resource capacity for projects
    2. Prioritize project demand by value
      1. Identify highest-value, “slam-dunk” projects
      2. Identify medium-value, “on-the-bubble” projects
      3. Identify lower-value projects that lie beyond the available capacity
    3. Approve projects for initiation or continuation
      1. Submit recommendations for review
      2. Adjust prioritized list with business judgment
      3. Steering committee approves projects to work on
    4. Manage a realistically defined project portfolio
    • Stakeholder Need
    • Strategic Objectives
    • Resource Capacity

    Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Perform a start-stop-continue exercise to help determine what is working and what is not working

    2.3.1 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Optimizing project prioritization may not require a complete overhaul of your existing processes. You may only need to tweak certain templates or policies. Perhaps you started out with a strong process and simply lost resolve over time – in which case you will need to focus on establishing motivation and discipline, rather than rework your entire process.

    Perform a start-stop-continue exercise with your team to help determine what should be salvaged, what should be abandoned, and what should be introduced:

    1. On a whiteboard or equivalent, write “Start,” “Stop,” and “Continue” in three separate columns. 3. As a group, discuss the responses and come to an agreement as to which are most valid.
    2. Equip your team with sticky notes or markers and have them populate the columns with ideas and suggestions surrounding your current processes. 4. Document the responses to help structure your game plan for intake optimization.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Periodically review the project value scorecard with business stakeholders
    • “Loud Voices First” prioritization
    • Post-prioritization score changes
    • Updating project value scores for current projects

    INPUT

    • Current project prioritization workflow (Activity 1.2.2)
    • Project prioritization success criteria (Activity 1.2.6)

    OUTPUT

    • Retrospective review of current prioritization process

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes/markers

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Use Info-Tech’s lightweight Intake and Prioritization Tool to get started on capacity-constrained project prioritization

    Use Info-Tech’s Project Intake and Prioritization Tool to facilitate the scorecard-driven prioritization and ensure effective flow of data.

    This tool builds on the Project Valuation Scorecard Tool to address the challenges in project prioritization:

    1. Lack of capacity awareness: quickly estimate a realistic supply of available work hours for projects for a given prioritization period, in the absence of a reliable and well-maintained resource utilization and capacity data.
    2. Using standard project sizing, quickly estimate the size of the demand for proposed and ongoing projects and produce a report that recommends the list of projects to greenlight – and highlight the projects within that list that are at risk of being short-charged of resources – that will aim to help you tackle:

    3. Lack of authority to say “no” or “not yet” to projects: save time and effort in presenting the results of project prioritization analysis that will enable the decision makers to make well-informed, high-quality portfolio decisions.
    4. The next several slides will walk you through the tool and present activities to facilitate its use for your organization.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Intake and Prioritization Tool.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake Prioritization Tool is shown.

    Create a high-level estimate of available project capacity to inform how many projects can be greenlighted

    2.3.2 Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 2: Project Capacity

    Estimate how many work-hours are at your disposal for projects using Info-Tech’s resource calculator.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 2: Project Capacity

    1. Compile a list of each role within your department, the number of staff, and the hours in a typical work week.

    2. Enter the foreseeable out-of-office time (vacation, sick time, etc.). Typically, this value is 12-16% depending on the region.

    3. Enter how much working time is spent on non-projects for each role: administrative duties and “keep the lights on” work.

    4. Select a period of time for breaking down available resource capacity in hours.

    Project Work (%): Percentage of your working time that goes toward project work is calculated as what’s left after your non-project working time allocations have been subtracted.

    Project (h) Total Percentage: Take a note of this percentage as your project capacity. This number will put the estimated project demand in context for the rest of the tool.

    Example for a five-day work week:

    • 2 weeks (10 days) of statutory holidays
    • 3 weeks of vacation
    • 1.4 weeks (7 days) of sick days on average
    • 1 week (5 days) for company holidays

    Result: 7.4/52 weeks’ absence = 14%

    Estimate your available project capacity for the next quarter, half-year, or year

    2.3.2 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Discover how many work-hours are at your disposal for project work.

    1. Use the wisdom-of-the-crowd approach or resource utilization data to fill out Tab 2 of the tool. This is intended to be somewhat of a rough estimate; avoid the pitfall of being too granular in role or in time split.
    2. Choose a time period that corresponds to your project prioritization period: monthly, quarterly, 4 months, semi-annually (6 months), or annually.
    3. Examine the pie graph representation of your overall capacity breakdown, like the one shown below.

    Screenshot from Tab 2 of Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    INPUT

    • Knowledge of organization’s personnel and their distribution of time

    OUTPUT

    • Estimate of available project capacity

    Materials

    • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    On average, only about half of the available project capacity results in productive project work

    Place realistic expectations on your resources’ productivity.

    Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard diagnostic provides a comprehensive view of your portfolio management strengths and weaknesses, including project portfolio management, project management, customer management, and resource utilization.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's PPM Current State Scorecard diagnostic

    Use the wisdom of the crowd to estimate resource waste in:

    • Cancelled projects
    • Inefficiency
    • Suboptimal assignment of resources
    • Unassigned resources
    • Analyzing, fixing, and redeploying

    50% of PPM resource is wasted on average, effectively halving your available project capacity.

    Source: Info-Tech PPM Current State Scorecard

    Define project capacity and project t-shirt sizes

    2.3.3 Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 3: Settings

    The resource capacity calculator in the previous tab yields a likely optimistic estimate for how much project capacity is available. Based on this estimate as a guide, enter your optimistic (maximum) and pessimistic (minimum) estimates of project capacity as a percentage of total capacity:

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 3

    Info-Tech’s data shows that only about 50% of time spent on project work is wasted: cancelled projects, inefficiency, rework, etc. As a general rule, enter half of your maximum estimate of your project capacity.

    Capacity in work hours is shown here from the previous tab, to put the percentages in context. This example shows a quarterly breakdown (Step 4 from the previous slide; cell N5 in Tab 2.).

    Next, estimate the percentage of your maximum estimated project capacity that a single project would typically consume in the given period for prioritization.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 3

    These project sizes might not line up with the standard project levels from Step 2.1 of the blueprint: for example, an urgent mid-sized project that requires all hands on deck may need to consume almost 100% of maximum available project capacity.

    Estimate available project capacity and standard project demand sizes for prioritizing project demand

    2.3.3 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Refine your estimates of project capacity supply and demand as it applies to a prioritization period.

    1. The estimated project capacity from Activity 2.3.2 represents a theoretical limit. It is most likely an overestimation (see box below). As a group, discuss and decide on a more realistic available project capacity:
      1. Optimistic estimate, assuming sustained peak productivity from everyone in your organization;
      2. Pessimistic estimate, taking into account the necessary human downtime and the PPM resource waste (see previous slide).
    2. Refine the choices of standard project effort sizes, expressed as percentages of maximum project capacity. As a reminder, this sizing is for the chosen prioritization period, and is independent from the project levels set previously in Activity 2.1.4 and 2.1.5.

    Dedicated work needs dedicated break time

    In a study conducted by the Draugiem Group, the ideal work-to-break ratio for maximizing focus and productivity was 52 minutes of work, followed by 17 minutes of rest (Evans). This translates to 75% of resource capacity yielding productive work, which could inform your optimistic estimate of project capacity.

    INPUT

    • Project capacity (Activity 2.3.2)
    • PPM Current State Scorecard (optional)

    OUTPUT

    • Capacity and demand estimate data for tool use

    Materials

    • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Finish setting up the Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    2.3.4 Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 3: Settings

    Enter the scoring criteria, which was worked out from Step 1.1 of the blueprint. This workbook supports up to ten scoring criteria; use of more than ten may make the prioritization step unwieldy.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 3

    Leave unused criteria rows blank.

    Choose “value” or “execution” from a drop-down.

    Score does not need to add up to 100.

    Finally, set up the rest of the drop-downs used in the next tab, Project Data. These can be customized to fit your unique project portfolio needs.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 3

    Enter project data into the Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    2.3.4 Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 4: Project Data

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 4

    Ensure that each project has a unique name.

    Completed (or cancelled) projects will not be included in prioritization.

    Choose the standard project size defined in the previous tab.

    Change the heading when you customize the workbook.

    Days in Backlog is calculated from the Date Added column.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 4

    Overall weighted project prioritization score is calculated as a sum of value and execution scores.

    Weighted value and execution scores are calculated according to the scoring criteria table in the 2. Settings tab.

    Enter the raw scores. Weights will be taken into calculation behind the scenes.

    Spaces for unused intake scores will be greyed out. You can enter data, but they will not affect the calculated scores.

    Document your process to maintain resource capacity supply and project demand data

    2.3.4 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Review and customize section 4.2, “Maintain Supply and Demand Data” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of this activity is to document the process with which the supply and demand information will be updated for projects. Consider the following factors:

    1. Estimates of resource supply: how often will the resource supply be updated? How are you estimating the range (maximum vs. minimum, optimistic vs. pessimistic)? Leverage your existing organizational process assets for resource management.
    2. Updating project data for proposed projects: when and how often will the project valuation scores be updated? Do you have sufficient inputs? Examine the overall project approval process from Step 2.2 of the blueprint, and ensure that sufficient information is available for project valuation (Activity 2.2.3).
    3. Updating project data for ongoing projects: will you prioritize ongoing projects along with proposed projects? When and how often will the project valuation scores be updated? Do you have sufficient inputs?
    4. How will you account for the consumption of resource capacity? Do a rough order of estimate for the resource capacity consumed in this process.
    5. Who will handle exceptions? For example, PMO will maintain this process and will handle any questions or issues that pertain to this part of the process.

    INPUT

    • Organizational process assets for resource management, strategic planning, etc.
    • Activity 2.3.3
    • Activity 2.2.3

    OUTPUT

    • Process steps for refreshing supply and demand data

    Materials

    • SOP Template
    • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • PMO Admin Staff

    Prioritized list of projects shows what fits under available project capacity for realizing maximum value

    2.3.5 Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 5: Results

    The output of the Project Intake and Prioritization Tool is a prioritized list of projects with indicators to show that their demand on project capacity will fit within the estimated available project capacity for the prioritization period.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 5

    Status indicates whether the project is proposed or ongoing; completed projects are excluded.

    Disposition indicates the course of recommended action based on prioritization.

    Proposed projects display how long they have been sitting in the backlog.

    Projects highlighted yellow are marked as “deliberate” for their dispositions. These projects pose risks of not getting properly resourced. One must proceed with caution if they are to be initiated or continued.

    Provide better support to decision makers with the prioritized list, and be prepared for their steering

    It is the portfolio manager’s responsibility to provide the project portfolio owners with reliable data and enable them to make well-informed decisions for the portfolio.

    The prioritized list of proposed and ongoing projects, and an approximate indication for how they fill out the estimated available resource capacity, provide a meaningful starting ground for discussion on which projects to continue or initiate, to hold, or to proceed with caution.

    However, it is important to recognize the limitation of the prioritization methodology. There may be legitimate reasons why some projects should be prioritized over another that the project valuation method does not successfully capture. At the end of the day, it’s the prerogative of the portfolio owners who carry on the accountabilities to steer the portfolio.

    The portfolio manager has a responsibility to be prepared for reconciling the said steering with the unchanged available resource capacity for project work. What comes off the list of projects to continue or initiate? Or, will we outsource capacity if we must meet irreconcilable demand? The next slide will show how Info-Tech’s tool helps you with this process.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Strive to become the best co-pilot. Constantly iterate on the scoring criteria to better adapt to the portfolio owners’ preference in steering the project portfolio.

    Manipulate the prioritized list with the Force Disposition list

    2.3.5 Project Intake and Prioritization Tool, Tab 5: Results

    The Force Disposition list enables you to inject subjective judgment in project prioritization. Force include and outsource override project prioritization scores and include the projects for approval:

    • Force include counts the project demand against capacity.
    • Outsource, on the other hand, does not count the project demand.
    • Force exclude removes a project from prioritized list altogether, without deleting the row and losing its data.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 5

    Choose a project name and a disposition using a drop-down.

    Use this list to test out various scenarios, useful for what-if analysis.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 5

    Document your process to formally make disposition recommendations to appropriate decision-making party

    2.3.5 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Review and customize section 4.3, “Approve projects for initiation or continuation” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    The goal of this activity is to formalize the process of presenting the prioritized list of projects for review, modify the list based on steering decisions, and obtain the portfolio owners’ approval for projects to initiate or continue, hold, or terminate. Consider the following factors:

    1. Existing final approval process: what are the new injections to the current decision-making process for final approval?
    2. Meeting prep, agenda, and follow-up: what are the activities that must be carried out by PMO / portfolio manager to support the portfolio decision makers and obtain final approval?
    3. “Deliberate” projects: what additional information should portfolio owners be presented with, in order to deliberate on the projects at risk of being not properly resourced? For example, consider a value-execution plot (right).

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool Tab 5

    INPUT

    • Approval process steps (Activity 2.2.2)
    • Steering Committee process documentation

    OUTPUT

    • Activities for supporting the decision-making body

    Materials

    • SOP Template
    • Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Once a project is approved, pass that which is known on to those responsible for downstream processes

    Aim to be responsible stewards of important and costly information developed throughout project intake, approval, and prioritization processes.

    Once the proposed project is given a green light, the project enters an initiation phase.

    No matter what project management methodology is employed, it is absolutely vital to pass on the knowledge gained and insights developed through the intake, approval, and prioritization processes. This ensures that the project managers and team are informed of the project’s purpose, business benefits, rationale for the project approval, etc. and be able to focus their efforts in realizing the project’s business goals.

    Recognize that this does not aim to create any new artifacts. It is simply a procedural safeguard against the loss of important and costly information assets for your organization.

    A flowchart is shown as an example of business documents leading to the development of a project charter.

    Information from the intake process directly feeds into, for example, developing a project charter.

    Source: PMBOK, 6th edition

    "If the project manager can connect strategy to the project they are leading (and therefore the value that the organization desires by sanctioning the project), they can ensure that the project is appropriately planned and managed to realize those benefits."

    – Randall T. Black, P.Eng., PMP; source: PMI Today

    Examine the new project intake workflow as a whole and document it in a flow chart

    2.3.6 Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    Review and customize section 4.1, “Project Prioritization Workflow” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template.

    In Step 1.2 of the blueprint, you mapped out the current project intake, approval, and prioritization workflow and documented it in a flow chart. In this step, take the time to examine the new project intake process as a whole, and document the new workflow in the form of a flow chart.

    1. Collect and update supply and demand data
    2. Prioritize project demand by value
    3. Approve projects for initiation or continuation
    4. Manage a realistically defined project portfolio

    Consider the following points:

    1. Are the inputs and outputs of each step clear? Who’s doing the work? How long will each step take, on average?
    2. Is the ownership of each step clear? How will we ensure a smooth handoff between each step and prevent requests from falling through the cracks?

    INPUT

    • New process steps for project prioritization (Activities 2.3.x-y)

    OUTPUT

    • Flowchart representation of new project prioritization workflow

    Materials

    • Microsoft Visio, flowchart software, or Microsoft PowerPoint

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Leverage Info-Tech’s other blueprints to complement your project prioritization processes

    The project capacity estimates overlook a critical piece of the resourcing puzzle for the sake of simplicity: skills. You need the right skills at the right time for the right project.

    Use Info-Tech’s Balance Supply and Demand with Realistic Resource Management Practices blueprint to enhance the quality of information on your project supply.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Balance Supply and Demand with Realistic Resource Management Practices blueprint.

    There is more to organizing your project portfolio than a strict prioritization by project value. For example, as with a financial investment portfolio, project portfolio must achieve the right investment mix to balance your risks and leverage opportunities.

    Use Info-Tech’s Maintain an Organized Portfolio blueprint to refine the makeup of your project portfolio.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Maintain an Organized Portfolio blueprint.

    Continuous prioritization of projects allow organizations to achieve portfolio responsiveness.

    Use Info-Tech’s Manage an Agile Portfolio blueprint to take prioritization of your project portfolio to the next level.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Manage an Agile Portfolio blueprint

    46% of organizations use a homegrown PPM solution. Info-Tech’s Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint debuts a spreadsheet-based Portfolio Manager tool that provides key functionalities that integrates those of the Intake and Prioritization Tool with resource management, allocation and portfolio reporting capabilities.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    A picture of an Info-Tech analyst is shown.

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1.2-6

    A screenshot of activities 2.1.2-6 is shown.

    Optimize your process to receive, triage, and follow up on project requests

    Discussion on decision points and topics of consideration will be facilitated to leverage the diverse viewpoints amongst the workshop participants.

    2.3.2-5

    A screenshot of activities 2.3.2-5 is shown.

    Set up a capacity-informed project prioritization process using Info-Tech’s Project Intake and Prioritization Tool

    A table-top planning exercise helps you visualize the current process in place and identify opportunities for optimization.

    Phase 3

    Integrate the New Optimized Processes into Practice

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Integrate the New Optimized Processes into Practice

    Proposed Time to Completion: 6-12 weeks

    Step 3.1: Pilot your process to refine it prior to rollout

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the proposed intake, approval, and prioritization process

    Then complete these activities…

    • Select receptive stakeholders to work with
    • Define the scope of your pilot and determine logistics
    • Document lessons learned and create an action plan for any changes

    With these tools & templates:

    • Process Pilot Plan
    • Project Backlog Manager Job Description

    Step 3.2: Analyze the impact of organizational change

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Results of the process pilot and the finalized intake SOP
    • Key PPM stakeholders
    • Current organizational climate

    Then complete these activities…

    • Analyze the stakeholder impact and responses to impending organizational change
    • Create message canvases for at-risk change impacts and stakeholders to create an effective communication plan

    With these tools & templates:

    • Intake Process Implementation Impact Analysis Tool

    Phase 3 Results & Insights:

    • Engagement paves the way for smoother adoption. An “engagement” approach (rather than simply “communication”) turns stakeholders into advocates who can help boost your message, sustain the change, and realize benefits without constant intervention or process command-and-control.

    Step 3.1: Pilot your intake, approval, and prioritization process to refine it before rollout

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Define project valuation criteria

    1.2

    Envision process target state

    2.1

    Streamline intake

    2.2

    Right-size approval steps

    2.3

    Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

    3.1

    Pilot your optimized process

    3.2

    Communicate organizational change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Select receptive managers to work with during your pilot
    • Define the scope of your pilot and determine logistics
    • Plan to obtain feedback, document lessons learned, and create an action plan for any changes
    • Finalize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A pilot team
    • A process pilot plan that defines the scope, logistics, and process for retrospection
    • Project Backlog Manager job description
    • Finalized Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP for rollout

    Pilot your new processes to test feasibility and address issues before a full deployment

    Adopting the right set of practices requires a significant degree of change that necessitates buy-in from varied stakeholders throughout IT and the business.

    Rome wasn’t built in a day. Similarly, benefits of optimized project intake, approval, and prioritization process will not be realized overnight.

    Resist the urge to deploy a big-bang roll out of your new intake practices. The approach is ill advised for two main reasons:

    • It will put more of a strain on the implementation team in the near term, with a larger pool of end users to train and collect data from.
    • Putting untested practices in a department-wide spotlight could lead to mass confusion in the near-term and color the new processes in a negative light, leading to a loss of stakeholder trust and engagement right out-of-the-gate.

    Start with a pilot phase. Identify receptive lines of business and IT resources to work with, and leverage their insights to help iron out the kinks in your process before unveiling your practices to IT and all business users at large.

    This step will help you to:

    • Plan and execute a pilot of the processes we developed in Phase 2.
    • Incorporate the lessons learned from that pilot to strengthen your SOP and ease the communication process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Engagement paves the way for smoother adoption. An “engagement” approach (rather than simply “communication”) turns stakeholders into advocates who can help boost your message, sustain the change, and realize benefits without constant intervention or process command-and-control.

    Plan your pilot like you would any project to ensure it’s well defined and its goals are clearly articulated

    Use Info-Tech’s Intake Process Pilot Plan Template to help define the scope of your pilot and set appropriate goals for the test-run of your new processes.

    A process pilot is a limited scope of an implementation (constrained by time and resources involved) in order to test the viability and effectiveness of the process as it has been designed.

    • Investing time and energy into a pilot phase can help to lower implementation risk, enhance the details and steps within a process, and improve stakeholder relations prior to a full scale rollout.
    • More than a dry run, however, a pilot should be approached strategically, and planned out to limit the scope of it and achieve specific outcomes.
    • Leverage a planning document to ensure your process pilot is grounded in a common set of definitions, that the pilot is delivering value and insight, and that ultimately the pilot can serve as a starting point for a full-scale process implementation.

    Download Info-Tech’s Process Pilot Plan Template

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Process Pilot Plan Template is shown.

    "The advantages to a pilot are several. First, risk is constrained. Pilots are closely monitored so if a problem does occur, it can be fixed immediately. Second, the people working in the pilot can become trainers as you roll the process out to the rest of the organization. Third, the pilot is another opportunity for skeptics to visit the pilot process and learn from those working in it. There’s nothing like seeing a new process working for people to change their minds."

    Daniel Madison

    Select receptive stakeholders to work with during your pilot

    3.1.1 Estimated Time: 20-60 minutes

    Info-Tech recommends selecting PPM stakeholders who are aware of your role and some of the challenges in project intake, approval, and prioritization to assist in the implementation process.

    1. If receptive PPM stakeholders are known, schedule a 15-minute meeting with them to inquire if they would be willing to be part of the pilot process.
    2. If receptive project managers are not known, use Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Engagement Workbook to conduct a formal selection process.
      1. Enter a list of potential participants for pilot in tab 3.
      2. Rate project managers in terms of influence, pilot interest, and potential deployment contribution within tab 4.
      3. Review tab 5 in the workbook. Receptive PPM stakeholders will appear in the top quadrants. Ideal PPM stakeholders for the pilot are located in the top right quadrant of the graph.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Stakeholder Engagement Workbook Tab 5 is shown.

    INPUT

    • Project portfolio management stakeholders (Activity 1.2.3)

    OUTPUT

    • Pilot project team

    Materials

    • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • Process Pilot Plan Template

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • CIO (optional)

    Document the PPM stakeholders involved in your pilot in Section 3 of Info-Tech’s Process Pilot Plan Template.

    Define the scope of your pilot and determine logistics

    3.1.2 Estimated Time: 60-90 minutes

    Use Info-Tech’s Process Pilot Plan Template to design the details of your pilot.

    Investing time into planning your pilot phase strategically will ensure a clear scope, better communications for those piloting the processes, and – overall – better, more actionable results for the pilot phase. The Pilot Plan Template is broken into five sections to assist in these goals:

    • Pilot Overview and Scope
    • Success and Risk Factors
    • Stakeholders Involved and Communications Plan
    • Pilot Retrospective and Feedback Protocol

    The duration of your pilot should go at least one prioritization period, e.g. one to two quarters.

    Estimates of time commitments should be captured for each stakeholder. During the retrospective at the end of the pilot you should capture actuals to help determine the time-cost of the process itself and measure its sustainability.

    Once the Plan Template is completed, schedule time to share and communicate it with the pilot team and executive sponsors of the process.

    While you should invest time in this planning document, continue to lean on the Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP throughout the pilot phase.

    INPUT

    • Sections 1 through 4 of the Process Pilot Plan Template

    OUTPUT

    • A process pilot plan

    Materials

    • Process Pilot Plan Template

    Participants

    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • CIO (optional)

    Execute your pilot and prepare to make process revisions before the full rollout

    Hit play! Begin the process pilot and get familiar with the work routine and resource management solution.

    Some things to keep in mind during the pilot include:

    • Depending on the solution you are using, you will likely need to spend one day or less to populate the tool. During the pilot, measure the time and effort required to manage the data within the tool. Determine whether time and effort required is viable on an ongoing basis (i.e. can you do it every month or quarter) and has value.
    • Meet with the pilot team and other stakeholders regularly during the pilot, at least biweekly. Allow the team (and yourself) to speak honestly and openly about what isn’t working. The pilot is your chance to make things better.
    • Keep notes about what will need to change in the SOP. For major changes, you may have to tweak the process during the pilot itself. Update the process documents as needed and communicate the changes and why they’re being made. If required, update the scope of the pilot in the Pilot Plan Template.
    An example is shown on how to begin the process pilot and getting familiar with the work routine and resource management solution.

    Obtain feedback from the pilot group to improve your processes before a wider rollout

    3.1.3 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Pilot projects allow you to validate your assumptions and leverage lessons learned. During the planning of the pilot, you should have scheduled a retrospective meeting with the pilot team to formally assess strengths and weaknesses in the process you have drafted.

    • Schedule the retrospective shortly after the pilot is completed. Info-Tech recommends performing a Stop/Start/Continue meeting with pilot participants to obtain and capture feedback.
    • Have members of the meeting record any processes/activities on sticky notes that should:
      • Stop: because they are ineffective or not useful
      • Start: because they would be useful for the tool and have not been incorporated into current processes
      • Continue: because they are useful and positively contribute to intended process outcomes.

    An example of how to structure a Stop/Start/Continue activity on a whiteboard using sticky notes.

    An example of stop, start, and continue is activity is shown.

    INPUT

    • What’s working and what isn’t in the process

    OUTPUT

    • Ideas to improve process

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes
    • Process Pilot Plan Template

    Participants

    • Process owner (PMO director or portfolio owner)
    • Pilot team

    See the following slide for additional instructions.

    Document lessons learned and create an action plan for any changes to the processes

    3.1.4 Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    An example of stop, start, and continue is activity is shown.

    As a group, discuss everyone’s responses and organize according to top priority (mark with a 1) and lower priority/next steps (mark with a 2). At this point, you can also remove any sticky notes that are repetitive or no longer relevant.

    Once you have organized based on priority, be sure to come to a consensus with the group regarding which actions to take. For example, if the group agrees that they should “stop holding meetings weekly,” come to a consensus regarding how often meetings will be held, i.e. monthly.

    Priority Action Required Who is Responsible Implementation Date
    Stop: Holding meetings weekly Hold meetings monthly Jane Doe, PMO Next Meeting: August 1, 2017
    Start: Discussing backlog during meetings Ensure that backlog data is up to date for discussion on date of next meeting. John Doe, Portfolio Manager August 1, 2017

    Create an action plan for the top priority items that require changes (the Stops and Starts). Record in this slide, or your preferred medium. Be sure to include who is responsible for the action and the date that it will be implemented.

    Document the outcomes of the start/stop/continue and your action plan in Section 6 of Info-Tech’s Process Pilot Plan Template.

    Use Info-Tech’s Backlog Manager Job Description Template to help fill any staffing needs around data maintenance

    3.1 Project Backlog Manager Job Description

    You will need to determine responsibilities and accountabilities for portfolio management functions within your team.

    If you do not have a clearly identifiable portfolio manager at this time, you will need to clarify who will wear which hats in terms of facilitating intake and prioritization, high-level capacity awareness, and portfolio reporting.

    • Use Info-Tech’s Project Backlog Manager job description template to help clarify some of the required responsibilities to support your intake, approval, and prioritization strategy.
      • If you need to bring in an additional staff member to help support the strategy, you can customize the job description template to help advertise the position. Simply edit the text in grey within the template.
    • If you have other PPM tasks that you need to define responsibilities for, you can use the RASCI chart on the final tab of the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Backlog Manager job description template.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Backlog Manager template is shown.

    Finalize the Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP and prepare to communicate your processes

    Once you’ve completed the pilot process and made the necessary tweaks, you should finalize your Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP and prepare to communicate it.

    Update section 1.2, “Overall Process Workflow” in Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP Template with the new process flow.

    Revisit your SOP from Phase 2 and ensure it has been updated to reflect the process changes that were identified in activity 3.1.4.

    • If during the pilot process the data was too difficult or time consuming to maintain, revisit the dimensions you have chosen and choose dimensions that are easier to accurately maintain. Tweak your process steps in the SOP accordingly.
    • In the long term, if you are not observing any progress toward achieving your success criteria, revisit the impact analysis that we’ll prepare in step 3.2 and address some of these inhibitors to organizational change.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP template.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization SOP template.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Make your SOP high impact. SOPs are often at risk of being left unmaintained and languishing in disuse. Improve the SOP’s succinctness and usability by making it visual; consult Info-Tech’s blueprint, Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind.

    Step 3.2: Analyze the impact of organizational change through the eyes of PPM stakeholders to gain their buy-in

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Define project valuation criteria

    1.2

    Envision process target state

    2.1

    Streamline intake

    2.2

    Right-size approval steps

    2.3

    Prioritize projects to fit resource capacity

    3.1

    Pilot your optimized process

    3.2

    Communicate organizational change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analyze the stakeholder impact and responses to impending organizational change
    • Create message canvases for at-risk change impacts and stakeholders
    • Set the course of action for communicating changes to your stakeholders

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A thorough organizational change impact analysis, based on Info-Tech’s expertise in organizational change management
    • Message canvases and communication plan for your stakeholders
    • Go-live for the new intake, approval, and prioritization process

    Manage key PPM stakeholders and communicate changes

    • Business units: Projects are undertaken to provide value to the business. Senior management from business units must help define how project will be valued.
    • IT: IT must ensure that technical/practical considerations are taken into account when determining project value.
    • Finance: The CFO or designated representative will ensure that estimated project costs and benefits can be used to manage the budget.
    • PMO: PMO is the administrator of the project portfolio. PMO must provide coordination and support to ensure the process operates smoothly and its goals are realized.
    • Business analysts: BAs carry out the evaluation of project value. Therefore, their understanding of the evaluation criteria and the process as a whole are critical to the success of the process.
    • Project sponsors: Project sponsors are accountable for the realization of benefits for which projects are undertaken.

    Impacts will be felt differently by different stakeholders and stakeholder groups

    As you assess change impacts, keep in mind that no impact will be felt the same across the organization. Depth of impact can vary depending on the frequency (will the impact be felt daily, weekly, monthly?), the actions necessitated by it (e.g. will it change the way the job is done or is it simply a minor process tweak?), and the anticipated response of the stakeholder (support, resistance, indifference?).

    Use the Organizational Change Depth Scale below to help visualize various depths of impact. The deeper the impact, the tougher the job of managing change will be.

    Procedural Behavioral Interpersonal Vocational Cultural
    Procedural change involves changes to explicit procedures, rules, policies, processes, etc. Behavioral change is similar to procedural change, but goes deeper to involve the changing tacit or unconscious habits. Interpersonal change goes beyond behavioral change to involve changing relationships, teams, locations, reporting structures, and other social interactions. Vocational change requires acquiring new knowledge and skills, and accepting the loss or decline in the value or relevance of previously acquired knowledge and skills. Cultural change goes beyond interpersonal and vocational change to involve changing personal values, social norms, and assumptions about the meaning of good vs. bad or right vs. wrong.
    Example: providing sales reps with mobile access to the CRM application to let them update records from the field. Example: requiring sales reps to use tablets equipped with a custom mobile application for placing orders from the field. Example: migrating sales reps to work 100% remotely. Example: migrating technical support staff to field service and sales support roles. Example: changing the operating model to a more service-based value proposition or focus.

    Perform a change impact analysis to maximize the chances of adoption for the new intake process

    Invest time and effort to analyze the impact of change to create an actionable stakeholder communication plan that yields the desirable result: adoption.

    Info-Tech’s Drive Organizational Change from the PMO blueprint offers the OCM Impact Analysis Tool to helps document the change impact across multiple dimensions, enabling the project team to review the analysis with others to ensure that the most important impacts are captured.

    This tool has been customized for optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process to deliver the same result in a more streamlined way. The next several slides will take you through the activities to ultimately create an OCM message canvas and a communication plan for your key stakeholders.

    Download Info-Tech’s Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool is shown.

    "As a general principle, project teams should always treat every stakeholder initially as a recipient of change. Every stakeholder management plan should have, as an end goal, to change recipients’ habits or behaviors."

    -PMI, 2015

    Set up the Intake Process and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool

    3.2.1 Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 2-3

    In Tab 2, enter your stakeholders’ names. Represent stakeholders as a group if you expect the impact of change on them to be reasonably uniform, as well as their anticipated responses. Otherwise, consider adding them as individuals or subgroups.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 2 is shown.

    In Tab 3, enter whether you agree or disagree with each statement that represents an element of organizational change that be introduced as the newly optimized intake process is implemented.

    As a result of the change initiative in question:

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 3 is shown.

    Analyze the impact and the anticipated stakeholder responses of each change

    3.2.1 Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 4: Impact Analysis Inputs

    Each change statement that you agreed with in Tab 3 are listed here in Tab 4 of the Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool. For each stakeholder, estimate and enter the following data:

    1. Frequency of the Impact: how often will the impact of the change be felt?
    2. Effort Associated with Impact: what is the demand on a stakeholder’s effort to implement the change?
    3. Anticipated Response: rate from enthusiastic response to active subversion. Honest and realistic estimates of anticipated responses are critical to the rest of the impact analysis.
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 4 is shown.

    Analyze the stakeholder impact and responses to impending organizational change as a group

    3.2.1 Estimated Time: 60-90 minutes

    Divide and conquer. Leverage the group to get through the seemingly daunting amount of work involved with impact analysis.

    1. Divide the activity participants into subgroups and assign a section of the impact analysis. It may be helpful to do one section together as a group to make sure everyone is roughly on the same page for assessing impact.
    2. Suggested ways to divide up the impact analysis include:

    • By change impact. This would be suitable when the process owners (or would-be process owners) are available and participating.
    • By stakeholders. This would be suitable for large organizations where the activity participants know some stakeholders better than others.

    Tip: use a spreadsheet tool that supports multi-user editing (e.g. Google Sheets, Excel Online).

  • Aggregate the completed work and benchmark one another’s analysis by reviewing them with the entire group.
  • INPUT

    • Organizational and stakeholder knowledge
    • Optimized intake process

    OUTPUT

    • Estimates of stakeholder-specific impact and response

    Materials

    • Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Info-Tech Insight

    Beware of bias. Groups are just as susceptible to producing overly optimistic or pessimistic analysis as individuals, just in different ways. Unrealistic change impact analysis will compromise your chances of arriving at a reasonable, tactful stakeholder communication plan.

    Examine your impact analysis report

    3.2.2 Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 5: Impact Analysis Outputs

    These outputs are based on the impacts you analyzed in Tab 4 of the tool (Activity 3.2.1). They are organized in seven sections:

    1. Top Five Highest Risk Impacts, based on the frequency and effort inputs across all impacts.
    2. Overall Process Adoption Rating (top right), showing the overall difficulty of this change given likelihood/risk that the stakeholders involved will absorb the anticipated change impacts.
    3. Top Five Most Impacted Stakeholders, based on the frequency and effort inputs across all impacts.
    4. Top Five Process Supporters and;
    5. Top Five Process Resistors, based on the anticipated response inputs across all impacts.
    6. Impact Register (bottom right): this list breaks down each change’s likelihood of adoption.
    7. Potential Impacts to Watch Out For: this list compiles all of the "Don't Know" responses from Tab 3.
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 5 is shown. It shows Section 2. Overall process adoption rating. A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 5 is shown. It shows Section 6. Impact Register.

    Tailor messages for at-risk change impacts and stakeholders with Info-Tech’s Message Canvas

    3.2.2 Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 6: Message Canvas

    Use Info-Tech’s Message Canvas on this tab to help rationalize and elaborate the change vision for each group.

    Elements of a Message Canvas

    • Why is there a need for this process change?
    • What will be new for this audience?
    • What will go away for this audience?
    • What will be meaningfully unchanged for this audience?
    • How will this change benefit this audience?
    • When and how will the benefits be realized for this audience?
    • What does this audience have to do for this change to succeed?
    • What does this audience have to stop doing for this change to succeed?
    • What should this audience continue doing?
    • What support will this audience receive to help manage the transition?
    • What should this audience expect to do/happen next?

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 6 is shown.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Change thy language, change thyself.

    Jargon, acronyms, and technical terms represent deeply entrenched cultural habits and assumptions.

    Continuing to use jargon or acronyms after a transition tends to drag people back to old ways of thinking and working.

    You don’t need to invent a new batch of buzzwords for every change (nor should you), but every change is an opportunity to listen for words and phrases that have lost their meaning through overuse and abuse.

    Create message canvases for at-risk change impacts and stakeholders as a group

    3.2.2 Estimated Time: 90-120 minutes

    1. Decide on the number of message canvases to complete. This will be based on the number of at-risk change impacts and stakeholders.
    2. Divide the activity participants into subgroups and assign a section of the message canvas. It may be helpful to do one section together as a group to make sure everyone is roughly on the same page for assessing impact.
    3. Aggregate the completed work and benchmark the message canvases amongst subgroups.

    Remember these guidelines to help your messages resonate:

    • People are busy and easily distracted. Tell people what they really need to know first, before you lose their attention.
    • Repetition is good. Remember the Aristotelian triptych: “Tell them what you’re going to tell them, then tell them, then tell them what you told them.”
    • Don’t use technical terms, jargon, or acronyms. Different groups in organizations tend to develop specialized vocabularies. Everybody grows so accustomed to using acronyms and jargon every day that it becomes difficult to notice how strange it sounds to outsiders. This is especially important when IT communicates with non-technical audiences. Don’t alienate your audience by talking at them in a strange language.
    • Test your message. Run focus groups or deliver communications to a test audience (which could be as simple as asking 2–3 people to read a draft) before delivering messages more broadly.

    – Info-Tech Blueprint, Drive Organizational Change from the PMO

    INPUT

    • Impact Analysis Outputs
    • Organizational and stakeholder knowledge

    OUTPUT

    • Estimates of stakeholder-specific impact and response

    Materials

    • Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Distill the message canvases into a comprehensive communication plan

    3.2.3 Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 7: Communication Plan

    The communication plan creates an action plan around the message canvases to coordinate the responsibilities of delivering them, so the risks of “dropping the ball” on your stakeholders are minimized.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 7: Communication is shown.

    1. Choose a change impact from a drop-down menu.

    2. Choose an intended audience...

    … and the message canvas to reference.

    3. Choose the method of delivery. It will influence how to craft the message for the stakeholder.

    4. Indicate who is responsible for creating and communicating the message.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool, Tab 7: Communication is shown.

    5. Briefly indicate goal of the communication and the likelihood of success.

    6. Record the dates to plan and track the communications that take place.

    Set the course of action for communicating changes to your stakeholders

    3.2.2 Estimated Time: 90-120 minutes

    1. Divide the activity participants into subgroups and assign communication topics to each group. There should be one communication topic for each change impact. Based on the message canvas, create a communication plan draft.
    2. Aggregate the completed work and benchmark the communication topic amongst subgroups.
    3. Share the finished communication plan with the rest of the working group. Do not share this file widely, but keep it private within the group.

    Identify critical points in the change curve:

    1. Honeymoon of “Uninformed Optimism”: There is usually tentative support and even enthusiasm for change before people have really felt or understood what it involves.
    2. Backlash of “Informed Pessimism” (leading to “Valley of Despair”): As change approaches or begins, people realize they’ve overestimated the benefits (or the speed at which benefits will be achieved) and underestimated the difficulty of change.
    3. Valley of Despair and beginning of “Hopeful Realism”: Eventually, sentiment bottoms out and people begin to accept the difficulty (or inevitability) of change.
    4. Bounce of “Informed Optimism”: People become more optimistic and supportive when they begin to see bright spots and early successes.
    5. Contentment of “Completion”: Change has been successfully adopted and benefits are being realized.

    Based on Don Kelley and Daryl Conner’s Emotional Cycle of Change.

    INPUT

    • Change impact analysis results
    • Message canvases
    • List of stakeholders

    OUTPUT

    • Communication Plan

    Materials

    • Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Roll out the optimized intake, approval, and prioritization process, and continually monitor adoption and success

    As you implement your new project intake process, familiarize yourself with common barriers and challenges.

    There will be challenges to watch for in evaluating the effectiveness of your intake processes. These may include circumvention of process by key stakeholders, re-emergence of off-the-grid projects and low-value initiatives.

    As a quick and easy way to periodically assess your processes, consider the following questions:

    • Are you confident that all work in progress is being tracked via the project list?
    • Are your resources all currently working on high-value initiatives?
    • Since optimizing, have you been able to deliver (or are you on target to deliver) all that has been approved, with no initiatives in states of suspended animation for long periods of time?
    • Thanks to sufficient portfolio visibility and transparency into your capacity, have you been able to successfully decline requests that did not add value or that did not align with resourcing?

    If you answer “no” to any of these questions after a sufficient post-implementation period (approximately six to nine months, depending on the scope of your optimizing), you may need to tweak certain aspects of your processes or seek to align your optimization with a lower capability level in the short term.

    Small IT department struggles to optimize intake and to communicate new processes to stakeholders

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Government

    Source: Info-Tech Client

    Challenge

    There is an IT department for a large municipal government. Possessing a relatively low level of PPM maturity, IT is in the process of establishing more formal intake practices in order to better track, and respond to, project requests. New processes include a minimalist request form (sent via email) coupled with more thorough follow-up from BAs and PMs to determine business value, ROI, and timeframes.

    Solution

    Even with new user-friendly processes in place, IT struggles to get stakeholders to adopt, especially with smaller initiatives. These smaller requests frequently continue to come in outside of the formal process and, because of this, are often executed outside of portfolio oversight. Without good, reliable data around where staff time is spent, IT lacks the authority to decline new requests.

    Results

    IT is seeking further optimization through better communication. They are enforcing discipline on stakeholders and reiterating that all initiatives, regardless of size, need to be directed through the process. IT is also training its staff to be more critical. “Don’t just start working on an initiative because a stakeholder asks.” With staff being more critical and directing requests through the proper queues, IT is getting better at tracking and prioritizing requests.

    "The biggest challenge when implementing the intake process was change management. We needed to shift our focus from responding to requests to strategically thinking about how requests should be managed. The intake process allows the IT Department to be transparent to customers and enables decision makers."

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    A picture of an Info-Tech analyst is shown.

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1.1

    A screenshot of activity 3.1.1 is shown

    Select receptive stakeholders to work with during your pilot

    Identify the right team of supportive PPM stakeholders to carry out the process pilot. Strategies to recruit the right people outside the workshop will be discussed if appropriate.

    3.2.1

    A screenshot of activity 3.2.1 is shown.

    Analyze the stakeholder impact and responses to impending organizational change

    Carry out a thorough analysis of change impact in order to maximize the effectiveness of the communication strategy in support of the implementation of the optimized process.

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    • The overarching goal of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization process is to maximize the throughput of the best projects. To achieve this goal, one must have a clear way to determine what are “the best” projects.

    Insight 2

    • Info-Tech’s methodology systemically fits the project portfolio into its triple constraint of stakeholder needs, strategic objectives, and resource capacity to effectively address the challenges of establishing organizational discipline for project intake.

    Insight 3

    • Engagement paves the way for smoother adoption. An “engagement” approach (rather than simply “communication”) turns stakeholders into advocates who can help boost your message, sustain the change, and realize benefits without constant intervention or process command-and-control.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Triple constraint model of project portfolio: stakeholder needs, strategic objectives, and resource capacity
    • Benefits of optimizing project intake, approval, and prioritization for managing a well-behaved project portfolio
    • Challenges of installing well-run project intake
    • Importance of piloting the process and communicating impacts to stakeholders

    Processes Optimized

    • Project valuation process: scorecard, weights
    • Project intake process: reception, triaging, follow-up
    • Project approval process: steps, accountabilities, deliverables
    • Project prioritization process: estimation of resource capacity for projects, project demand
    • Communication for organizational change

    Deliverables Completed

    • Optimized Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization Process
    • Documentation of the optimized process in the form of a Standard Operating Procedure
    • Project valuation criteria, developed with Project Value Scorecard Development Tool and implemented through the Project Intake and Prioritization Tool
    • Standardized project request form with right-sized procedural friction
    • Standard for project level classification, implemented through the Project Intake Classification Matrix
    • Toolbox of deliverables for capturing information developed to inform decision makers for approval: Benefits Commitment Form, Technology Assessment Tool, Business Case Templates
    • Process pilot plan
    • Communication plan for organizational change, driven by a thorough analysis of change impacts on key stakeholders using the Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool

    Research contributors and experts

    Picture of Kiron D. Bondale

    Kiron D. Bondale, PMP, PMI - RMP

    Senior Project Portfolio & Change Management Professional

    A placeholder photo is shown here.

    Scot Ganshert, Portfolio Group Manager

    Larimer County, CO

    Picture of Garrett McDaniel

    Garrett McDaniel, Business Analyst II – Information Technology

    City of Boulder, CO

    A placeholder photo is shown here.

    Joanne Pandya, IT Project Manager

    New York Property Insurance Underwriters

    Picture of Jim Tom.

    Jim Tom, CIO

    Public Health Ontario

    Related Info-Tech research

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy blueprint

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy blueprint"

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint is shown.

    Grow Your Own PPM Solution

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Balance Supply and Demand with Realistic Resource Management Practices blueprint is shown.

    Balance Supply and Demand with Realistic Resource Management Practices

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Maintain an Organized Portfolio blueprint is shown.

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Manage a Minimum Viable PMO blueprint is shown.

    Manage a Minimum Viable PMO

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Establish the Benefits Realization Process blueprint is shown.

    Establish the Benefits Realization Process

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Manage an Agile Portfolio blueprint is shown.

    Manage an Agile Portfolio

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects blueprint is shown.

    Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program blueprint is shown.

    Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program

    The Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program is a low-effort, high-impact program designed to help project owners assess and improve their PPM practices. Gather and report on all aspects of your PPM environment to understand where you stand and how you can improve.

    Bibliography

    Boston Consulting Group. “Executive Sponsor Engagement: Top Driver of Project and Program Success.” PMI, 2014. Web.

    Boston Consulting Group. “Winning Through Project Portfolio Management: the Practitioners’ Perspective.” PMI, 2015. Web.

    Bradberry, Travis. “Why The 8-Hour workday Doesn’t Work.” Forbes, 7 Jun 2016. Web.

    Cook, Scott. Playbook: Best Practices. Business Week

    Cooper, Robert, G. “Effective Gating: Make product innovation more productive by using gates with teeth.” Stage-Gate International and Product Development Institute. March/April 2009. Web.

    Epstein, Dan. “Project Initiation Process: Part Two.” PM World Journal. Vol. IV, Issue III. March 2015. Web.

    Evans, Lisa. “The Exact Amount of Time You Should Work Every Day.” Fast Company, 15 Sep. 2014. Web.

    Madison, Daniel. “The Five Implementation Options to Manage the Risk in a New Process.” BPMInstitute.org. n.d. Web.

    Merkhofer, Lee. “Improve the Prioritization Process.” Priority Systems, n.d. Web.

    Miller, David, and Mike Oliver. “Engaging Stakeholder for Project Success.” PMI, 2015. Web.

    Mind Tools. “Kelley and Conner’s Emotional Cycle of Change.” Mind Tools, n.d. Web.

    Mochal, Jeffrey and Thomas Mochal. Lessons in Project Management. Appress: September 2011. Page 6.

    Newcomer, Eric. “Getting Decisions to Stick.” Standish Group PM2go, 20 Oct 2017. Web.

    “PMI Today.” Newtown Square, PA: PMI, Oct 2017. Web.

    Project Management Institute. “Standard for Portfolio Management, 3rd ed.” Newtown Square, PA: PMI, 2013.

    Project Management Institute. “Pulse of the Profession 2017: Success Rates Rise.” PMI, 2017. Web.

    Transparent Choice. “Criteria for Project Prioritization.” n.p., n.d. Web.

    University of New Hampshire (UNH) Project Management Office. “University of New Hampshire IT Intake and Selection Process Map.” UNH, n.d. Web.

    Ward, John. “Delivering Value from Information Systems and Technology Investments: Learning from Success.” Information Systems Research Centre. August 2006. Web.

    Considerations for a Hub and Spoke Model When Deploying Infrastructure in the Cloud

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}472|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • The organization is planning to move resources to cloud or devise a networking strategy for their existing cloud infrastructure to harness value from cloud.
    • The right topology needs to be selected to deploy network level isolation, design the cloud for management efficiencies and provide access to shared services on cloud.
    • A perennial challenge for infrastructure on cloud is planning for governance vs flexibility which is often overlooked.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Don’t wait until the necessity arises to evaluate your networking in the cloud. Get ahead of the curve and choose the topology that optimizes benefits and supports organizational needs in the present and the future.

    Impact and Result

    • Define organizational needs and understand the pros and cons of cloud network topologies to strategize for the networking design.
    • Consider the layered complexities of addressing the governance vs. flexibility spectrum for your domains when designing your networks.

    Considerations for a Hub and Spoke Model When Deploying Infrastructure in the Cloud Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Considerations for a Hub and Spoke Model When Deploying Infrastructure in the Cloud Deck – A document to guide you through designing your network in the cloud.

    What cloud networking topology should you use? How do you provide access to shared resources in the cloud or hybrid infrastructure? What sits in the hub and what sits in the spoke?

    • Considerations for a Hub and Spoke Model When Deploying Infrastructure in the Cloud Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Considerations for a Hub and Spoke Model When Deploying Infrastructure in the Cloud

    Don't revolve around a legacy design; choose a network design that evolves with the organization.

    Analyst Perspective

    Cloud adoption among organizations increases gradually across both the number of services used and the amount those services are used. However, network builders tend to overlook the vulnerabilities of network topologies, which leads to complications down the road, especially since the structures of cloud network topologies are not all of the same quality. A network design that suits current needs may not be the best solution for the future state of the organization.

    Even if on-prem network strategies were retained for ease of migration, it is important to evaluate and identify the cloud network topology that can not only elevate the performance of your infrastructure in the cloud, but also that can make it easier to manage and provision resources.

    An "as the need arises" strategy will not work efficiently since changing network designs will change the way data travels within your network, which will then need to be adopted to existing application architectures. This becomes more complicated as the number of services hosted in the cloud grows.

    Keep a network strategy in place early on and start designing your infrastructure accordingly. This gives you more control over your networks and eliminates the need for huge changes to your infrastructure down the road.

    This is a picture of Nitin Mukesh

    Nitin Mukesh
    Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    The organization is planning to move resources to the cloud or devise a networking strategy for their existing cloud infrastructure to harness value from the cloud.

    The right topology needs to be selected to deploy network level isolation, design the cloud for management efficiencies, and provide access to shared services in the cloud.

    A perennial challenge for infrastructure in the cloud is planning for governance vs. flexibility, which is often overlooked.

    Common Obstacles

    The choice of migration method may result in retaining existing networking patterns and only making changes when the need arises.

    Networking in the cloud is still new, and organizations new to the cloud may not be aware of the cloud network designs they can consider for their business needs.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Define organizational needs and understand the pros and cons of cloud network topologies to strategize for the networking design.

    Consider the layered complexities of addressing the governance vs. flexibility spectrum for your domains when designing your networks.

    Insight Summary

    Don't wait until the necessity arises to evaluate your networking in the cloud. Get ahead of the curve and choose the topology that optimizes benefits and supports organizational needs in the present and future.

    Your challenge

    Selecting the right topology: Many organizations migrate to the cloud retaining a mesh networking topology from their on-prem design, or they choose to implement the mesh design leveraging peering technologies in the cloud without a strategy in place for when business needs change. While there may be many network topologies for on-prem infrastructure, the network design team may not be aware of the best approach in cloud platforms for their requirements, or a cloud networking strategy may even go overlooked during the migration.

    Finding the right cloud networking infrastructure for:

    • Management efficiencies
    • Network-level isolation of resources
    • Access to shared services

    Deciding between governance and flexibility in networking design: In the hub and spoke model, if a domain is in the hub, the greater the governance over it, and if it sits in the spoke, the higher the flexibility. Having a strategy for the most important domains is key. For example, some security belongs in the hub and some security belongs in the spoke. The tradeoff here is if it sits completely in the spoke, you give it a lot of freedom, but it becomes harder to standardize across the organization.

    Mesh network topology

    A mesh is a design where virtual private clouds (VPCs) are connected to each other individually creating a mesh network. The network traffic is fast and can be redirected since the nodes in the network are interconnected. There is no hierarchical relationship between the networks, and any two networks can connect with each other directly.

    In the cloud, this design can be implemented by setting up peering connections between any two VPCs. These VPCs can also be set up to communicate with each other internally through the cloud service provider's network without having to route the traffic via the internet.

    While this topology offers high redundancy, the number of connections grows tremendously as more networks are added, making it harder to scale a network using a mesh topology.

    Mesh Network on AWS

    This is an image of a Mesh Network on AWS

    Source: AWS, 2018

    Constraints

    The disadvantages of peering VPCs into a mesh quickly arise with:

    • Transitive connections: Transitive connections are not supported in the cloud, unlike with on-prem networking. This means that if there are two networks that need to communicate, a single peering link can be set up between them. However, if there are more than two networks and they all need to communicate, they should all be connected to each other with separate individual connections.
    • Cost of operation: The lack of transitive routing requires many connections to be set up, which adds up to a more expensive topology to operate as the number of networks grows. Cloud providers also usually limit the number of peering networks that can be set up, and this limit can be hit with as few as 100 networks.
    • Management: Mesh tends to be very complicated to set up, owing to the large number of different peering links that need to be established. While this may be manageable for small organizations with small operations, for larger organizations with robust cybersecurity practices that require multiple VPCs to be deployed and interconnected for communications, mesh opens you up to multiple points of failure.
    • Redundancy: With multiple points of failure already being a major drawback of this design, you also cannot have more than one peered connection between any two networks at the same time. This makes designing your networking systems for redundancy that much more challenging.
    Number of virtual networks 10 20 50 100
    Peering links required
    [(n-1)*n]/2
    45 190 1225 4950

    Proportional relationship of virtual networks to required peering links in a mesh topology

    Case study

    INDUSTRY: Blockchain
    SOURCE: Microsoft

    An organization with four members wants to deploy a blockchain in the cloud, with each member running their own virtual network. With only four members on the team, a mesh network can be created in the cloud with each of their networks being connected to each other, adding up to a total of 12 peering connections (four members with three connections each). While the members may all be using different cloud accounts, setting up connections between them will still be possible.

    The organization wants to expand to 15 members within the next year, with each new member being connected with their separate virtual networks. Once grown, the organization will have a total of 210 peering connections since each of the virtual networks will then need 14 peering connections. While this may still be possible to deploy, the number of connections makes it harder to manage and would be that much more difficult to deploy if the organization grows to even 30 or 40 members. The new scale of virtual connections calls for an alternative networking strategy that cloud providers offer – the hub and spoke topology.

    This is an image of the connections involved in a mesh network with four participants.

    Source: Microsoft, 2017

    Hub and spoke network topology

    In hub and spoke network design, each network is connected to a central network that facilitates intercommunication between the networks. The central network, also called the hub, can be used by multiple workloads/servers/services for hosting services and for managing external connectivity. Other networks connected to the hub through network peering are called spokes and host workloads.

    Communications between the workloads/servers/services on spokes pass in or out of the hub where they are inspected and routed. The spokes can also be centrally managed from the hub with IT rules and processes.

    A hub and spoke design enable a larger number of virtual networks to be interconnected as each network only needs one peered connection (to the hub) to be able to communicate with any other network in the system.

    Hub and Spoke Network on AWS

    This is an image of the Hub and Spoke Network on AWS

    What hub and spoke networks do better

    1. Ease of connectivity: Hub and spoke decreases the liabilities of scale that come from a growing business by providing a consistent connection that can be scaled easily. As more networks are added to an organization, each will only need to be connected once – to the hub. The number of connections is considerably lower than in a mesh topology and makes it easier to maintain and manage.
    2. Business agility and scalability: It is easier to increase the number of networks than in mesh, making it easier to grow your business into new channels with less time, investment, and risk.
    3. Data collection: With a hub and spoke design, all data flows through the hub – depending on the design, this includes all ingress and egress to and from the system. This makes it an excellent central network to collect all business data.
    4. Network-level isolation: Hub and spoke enables separation of workloads and tiers into different networks. This is particularly useful to ensure an issue affecting a network or a workload does not affect the rest.
    5. Network changes: Changes to a separated network are much easier to carry out knowing the changes made will not affect all the other connected networks. This reduces work-hours significantly when systems or applications need to be altered.
    6. Compliance: Compliance requirements such as SOC 1 and SOC 2 require separate environments for production, development, and testing, which can be done in a hub and spoke model without having to re-create security controls for all networks.

    Hub and spoke constraints

    While there are plenty of benefits to using this topology, there are still a few notable disadvantages with the design.

    Point-to-point peering

    The total number of total peered connections required might be lower than mesh, but the cost of running independent projects is cheaper on mesh as point-to-point data transfers are cheaper.

    Global access speeds with a monolithic design

    With global organizations, implementing a single monolithic hub network for network ingress and egress will slow down access to cloud services that users will require. A distributed network will ramp up the speeds for its users to access these services.

    Costs for a resilient design

    Connectivity between the spokes can fail if the hub site dies or faces major disruptions. While there are redundancy plans for cloud networks, it will be an additional cost to plan and build an environment for it.

    Leverage the hub and spoke strategy for:

    Providing access to shared services: Hub and spoke can be used to give workloads that are deployed on different networks access to shared services by placing the shared service in the hub. For example, DNS servers can be placed in the hub network, and production or host networks can be connected to the hub to access it, or if the central network is set up to host Active Directory services, then servers in other networks can act as spokes and have full access to the central VPC to send requests. This is also a great way to separate workloads that do not need to communicate with each other but all need access to the same services.

    Adding new locations: An expanding organization that needs to add additional global or domestic locations can leverage hub and spoke to connect new network locations to the main system without the need for multiple connections.

    Cost savings: Apart from having fewer connections than mesh that can save costs in the cloud, hub and spoke can also be used to centralize services such as DNS and NAT to be managed in one location rather than having to individually deploy in each network. This can bring down management efforts and costs considerably.

    Centralized security: Enterprises can deploy a center of excellence on the hub for security, and the spokes connected to it can leverage a higher level of security and increase resilience. It will also be easier to control and manage network policies and networking resources from the hub.

    Network management: Since each spoke is peered only once to the hub, detecting connectivity problems or other network issues is made simpler in hub and spoke than on mesh. A network manager deployed on the cloud can give access to network problems faster than on other topologies.

    Hub and spoke – mesh hybrid

    The advantages of using a hub and spoke model far exceed those of using a mesh topology in the cloud and go to show why most organizations ultimately end up using the hub and spoke as their networking strategy.

    However, organizations, especially large ones, are complex entities, and choosing only one model may not serve all business needs. In such cases, a hybrid approach may be the best strategy. The following slides will demonstrate the advantages and use cases for mesh, however limited they might be.

    Where it can be useful:

    An organization can have multiple network topologies where system X is a mesh and system Y is a hub and spoke. A shared system Z can be a part of both systems depending on the needs.

    An organization can have multiple networks interconnected in a mesh and some of the networks in the mesh can be a hub for a hub-spoke network. For example, a business unit that works on data analysis can deploy their services in a spoke that is connected to a central hub that can host shared services such as Active Directory or NAT. The central hub can then be connected to a regional on-prem network where data and other shared services can be hosted.

    Hub and spoke – mesh hybrid network on AWS

    This is an image of the Hub and spoke – mesh hybrid network on AWS

    Why mesh can still be useful

    Benefits Of Mesh

    Use Cases For Mesh

    Security: Setting up a peering connection between two VPCs comes with the benefit of improving security since the connection can be private between the networks and can isolate public traffic from the internet. The traffic between the networks never has to leave the cloud provider's network, which helps reduce a class of risks.

    Reduced network costs: Since the peered networks communicate internally through the cloud's internal networks, the data transfer costs are typically cheaper than over the public internet.

    Communication speed: Improved network latency is a key benefit from using mesh because the peered traffic does not have to go over the public internet but rather the internal network. The network traffic between the connections can also be quickly redirected as needed.

    Higher flexibility for backend services: Mesh networks can be desirable for back-end services if egress traffic needs to be blocked to the public internet from the deployed services/servers. This also helps avoid having to set up public IP or network address translation (NAT) configurations.

    Connecting two or more networks for full access to resources: For example, consider an organization that has separate networks for each department, which don't all need to communicate with each other. Here, a peering network can be set up only between the networks that need to communicate with full or partial access to each other such as finance to HR or accounting to IT.

    Specific security or compliance need: Mesh or VPC peering can also come in handy to serve specific security needs or logging needs that require using a network to connect to other networks directly and in private. For example, global organizations that face regulatory requirements of storing or transferring data domestically with private connections.

    Systems with very few networks that do not need internet access: Workloads deployed in networks that need to communicate with each other but do not require internet access or network address translation (NAT) can be connected using mesh especially when there are security reasons to keep them from being connected to the main system, e.g. backend services such as testing environments, labs, or sandboxes can leverage this design.

    Designing for governance vs. flexibility in hub and spoke

    Governance and flexibility in managing resources in the cloud are inversely proportional: The higher the governance, the less freedom you have to innovate.

    The complexities of designing an organization's networks grow with the organization as it becomes global and takes on more services and lines of business. Organizations that choose to deploy the hub and spoke model face a dilemma in choosing between governance and flexibility for their networks. Organizations need to find that sweet spot to find the right balance between how much they want to govern their systems, mainly for security- and cost-monitoring, and how much flexibility they want to provide for innovation and other operations, since the two usually tend to have an inverse relationship.

    This decision in hub and spoke usually means that the domains chosen for higher governance must be placed in the hub network, and the domains that need more flexibility in a spoke. The key variables in the following slide will help determine the placement of the domain and will depend entirely on the organization's context.

    The two networking patterns in the cloud have layered complexities that need to be systematically addressed.

    Designing for governance vs. flexibility in hub and spoke

    If a network has more flexibility in all or most of these domains, it may be a good candidate for a spoke-heavy design; otherwise, it may be better designed in a hub-centric pattern.

    • Function: The function the domain network is assigned to and the autonomy the function needs to be successful. For example, software R&D usually requires high flexibility to be successful.
    • Regulations: The extent of independence from both internal and external regulatory constraints the domain has. For example, a treasury reporting domain typically has high internal and external regulations to adhere to.
    • Human resources: The freedom a domain has to hire and manage its resources to perform its function. For example, production facilities in a huge organization have the freedom to manage their own resources.
    • Operations: The freedom a domain has to control its operations and manage its own spending to perform its functions. For example, governments usually have different departments and agencies, each with its own budget to perform its functions.
    • Technology: The independence and the ability a domain has to manage its selection and implementation of technology resources in the cloud. For example, you may not want a software testing team to have complete autonomy to deploy resources.

    Optimal placement of services between the hub and spoke

    Shared services and vendor management

    Resources that are shared between multiple projects or departments or even by the entire organization should be hosted on the hub network to simplify sharing these services. For example, e-learning applications that may be used by multiple business units to train their teams, Active Directory accessed by most teams, or even SAAS platforms such as O365 and Salesforce can leverage buying power and drive down the costs for the organization. Shared services should also be standardized across the organization and for that, it needs to have high governance.

    Services that are an individual need for a network and have no preexisting relationship with other networks or buying power and scale can be hosted in a spoke network. For example, specialized accounting software used exclusively by the accounting team or design software used by a single team. Although the services are still a part of the wider network, it helps separate duties from the shared services network and provides flexibility to the teams to customize and manage their services to suit their individual needs.

    Network egress and interaction

    Network connections, be they in the cloud or hybrid-cloud, are used by everyone to either connect to the internet, access cloud services, or access the organization's data center. Since this is a shared service, a centralized networking account must be placed in the hub for greater governance. Interactions between the spokes in a hub and spoke model happens through the hub, and providing internet access to the spokes through the hub can help leverage cost benefits in the cloud. The network account will perform routing duties between the spokes, on-prem assets, and egress out to the internet.

    For example, NAT gateways in the cloud that are managed services are usually charged by the hour, and deploying NAT on each spoke can be harder to manage and expensive to maintain. A NAT gateway deployed in a central networking hub can be accessed by all spokes, so centralizing it is a great option.

    Note that, in some cases, when using edge locations for data transfers, it may be cost effective to deploy a NAT in the spoke, but such cases usually do not apply to most organizational units.

    A centralized network hub can also be useful to configure network policies and network resources while organizational departments can configure non-network resources, which helps separate responsibilities for all the spokes in the system. For example, subnets and routes can be controlled from the central network hub to ensure standardized network policies across the network.

    Security

    While there needs to be security in the hub and the spokes individually, finding the balance of operation can make the systems more robust. Hub and spoke design can be an effective tool for security when a principal security hub is hosted in the hub network. The central security hub can collect data from the spokes as well as non-spoke sources such as regulatory bodies and threat intelligence providers, and then share the information with the spokes.

    Threat information sharing is a major benefit of using this design, and the hub can take actions to analyze and enrich the data before sharing it with spokes. Shared services such as threat intelligence platforms (TIP) can also benefit from being centralized when stationed in the hub. A collective defense approach between the hub and spoke can be very successful in addressing sophisticated threats.

    Compliance and regulatory requirements such as HIPAA can also be placed in the hub, and the spokes connected to it can make use of it instead of having to deploy it in each spoke individually.

    Cloud metering

    The governance vs. flexibility paradigm usually decides the placement of cloud metering, i.e. if the organization wants higher control over cloud costs, it should be in the central hub, whereas if it prioritizes innovation, the spokes should be allowed to control it. Regardless of the placement of the domain, the costs can be monitored from the central hub using cloud-native monitoring tools such as Azure Monitor or any third-party software deployed in the hub.

    For ease of governance and since resources are usually shared at a project level, most cloud service providers suggest that an individual metering service be placed in the spokes. The centralized billing system of the organization, however, can make use of scale and reserved instances to drive down the costs that the spokes can take advantage of. For example, billing and access control resources are placed in the lower levels in GCP to enable users to set up projects and perform their tasks. These billing systems in the lower levels are then controlled by a centralized billing system to decide who pays for the resources provisioned.

    Don't get stuck with your on-prem network design. Design for the cloud.

    1. Peering VPCs into a mesh design can be an easy way to get onto the cloud, but it should not be your networking strategy for the long run.
    2. Hub and spoke network design offers more benefits than any other network strategy to be adopted only when the need arises. Plan for the design early on and keep a strategy in place to deploy it as early as possible.
    3. Hybrid of mesh and hub and spoke will be very useful in connecting multiple large networks especially when they need to access the same resources without having to route the traffic over the internet.
    4. Governance vs. flexibility should be a key consideration when designing for hub and spoke to leverage the best out of your infrastructure.
    5. Distribute domains across the hub or spokes to leverage costs, security, data collection, and economies of scale, and to foster secure interactions between networks.

    Cloud network design strategy

    This is an image of the framework for developing a Cloud Network Design Strategy.

    Bibliography

    Borschel, Brett. "Azure Hub Spoke Virtual Network Design Best Practices." Acendri Solutions, 13 Jan. 2022. Web.
    Singh, Garvit. "Amazon Virtual Private Cloud Connectivity Options." AWS, January 2018. Web.
    "What Is the Hub and Spoke Information Sharing Model?" Cyware, 16 Aug. 2021. Web.
    Youseff, Lamia. "Mesh and Hub-and-Spoke Networks on Azure." Microsoft, Dec. 2017. Web.

    Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}158|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Your software platforms are a key enabler of your brand. When there are issues releasing, this brand suffers. Client confidence and satisfaction erode.
    • Your organization has invested significant capital in creating a culture product ownership, Agile, and DevOps. Yet the benefits from these investments are not yet fully realized.
    • Customers have more choices than ever when it comes to products and services. They require features and capabilities delivered quickly, consistently, and of sufficient quality otherwise they will look elsewhere.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Eliminate the need for dedicating time for off-hour or weekend release activities. Use a release management framework for optimizing release-related tasks, making them predictable and of high quality.

    Impact and Result

    • Develop a release management framework that efficiently and effectively orchestrates the different functions supporting a software’s release.
    • Use the release management framework and turn release-related activities into non-events.
    • Use principles of continuous delivery for converting your release processes from an overarching concern to a feature of a high-performing software practice.

    Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to develop and implement a release management framework that takes advantage of continuous delivery.

    This presentation documents the Info-Tech approach to defining your application release management framework.

    • Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value – Phases 1-4

    2. Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Template – Use this template to help you define, detail, and make a reality your strategy in support of your application release management framework.

    The template gives the user a guide to the development of their application release management framework.

    • Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Template

    3. Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Workbook – This workbook documents the results of the exercises contained in the blueprint and offers the user a guide to development of their release management framework.

    This workbook is designed to capture the results of your exercises from the Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value blueprint.

    • Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Workbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define the Current Situation

    The Purpose

    Document the existing release management process and current pain points and use this to define the future-state framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain an understanding of the current process to confirm potential areas of opportunity.

    Understand current pain points so that we can build resolution into the new process.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify current pain points with your release management process. If appropriate, rank them in order of most to least disruptive.

    1.2 Use the statement of quality and current pain points (in addition to other considerations) and outline the guiding principles for your application release management framework.

    1.3 Brainstorm a set of metrics that will be used to assess the success of your aspired-to application release management framework.

    Outputs

    Understanding of pain points, their root causes, and ranking.

    Built guiding principles for application release management framework.

    Created set of metrics to measure the effectiveness of the application release management framework.

    2 Define Standard Release Criteria

    The Purpose

    Build sample release criteria, release contents, and standards for how it will be integrated in production.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Define a map to what success will look like once a new process is defined.

    Develop standards that the new process must meet to ensure benefits are realized.

    Activities

    2.1 Using an example of a product known to the team, list its criteria for release.

    2.2 Using an example of a product known to the team, develop a list of features and tasks that are directly and indirectly important for either a real or hypothetical upcoming release.

    2.3 Using an example of product known to the team, map out the process for its integration into the release-approved code in production. For each step in the process, think about how it satisfies guiding principles, releasability and principles of continuous anything.

    Outputs

    Completed Workbook example highlighting releasability.

    Completed Workbook example defining and detailing feature and task selection.

    Completed Workbook example defining and detailing the integration step.

    3 Define Acceptance and Deployment Standards

    The Purpose

    Define criteria for the critical acceptance and deployment phases of the release.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure that releases will meet or exceed expectations and meet user quality standards.

    Ensure release standards for no / low risk deployments are recognized and implemented.

    Activities

    3.1 Using an example of product known to the team, map out the process for its acceptance. For each step in the process, think about how it satisfies guiding principles, releasability and principles of continuous anything.

    3.2 Using an example of product known to the team, map out the process for its deployment. For each step in the process, think about how it satisfies guiding principles, releasability and principles of continuous anything.

    Outputs

    Completed Workbook example defining and detailing the acceptance step.

    Completed Workbook example defining and detailing the deployment step.

    4 Implement the Strategy

    The Purpose

    Define your future application release management process and the plan to make the required changes to implement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Build a repeatable process that meets the standards defined in phases 2 and 3.

    Ensure the pain points defined in Phase 1 are resolved.

    Show how the new process will be implemented.

    Activities

    4.1 Develop a plan and roadmap to enhance the integration, acceptance, and deployment processes.

    Outputs

    List of initiatives to reach the target state

    Application release management implementation roadmap

    Further reading

    Define a Release Management Process for Your Applications to Deliver Lasting Value

    Use your releases to drive business value and enhance the benefits delivered by your move to Agile.

    Analyst Perspective

    Improving your release management strategy and practices is a key step to fully unlock the value of your portfolio.

    As firms invest in modern delivery practices based around product ownership, Agile, and DevOps, organizations assume that’s all that is necessary to consistently deliver value. As organizations continue to release, they continue to see challenges delivering applications of sufficient and consistent quality.

    Delivering value doesn’t only require good vision, requirements, and technology. It requires a consistent and reliable approach to releasing and delivering products and services to your customer. Reaching this goal requires the definition of standards and criteria to govern release readiness, testing, and deployment.

    This will ensure that when you deploy a release it meets the high standards expected by your clients and delivers the value you have intended.

    Dr. Suneel Ghei

    Principal Research Director, Application Development

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Your software platforms are a key enabler of your brand. When there are issues releasing, the brand suffers. Client confidence and satisfaction erode.
    • Your organization has invested significant capital in creating a culture of product ownership, Agile, and DevOps. Yet the benefits from these investments are not yet fully realized.
    • Customers have more choices than ever when it comes to products and services. They require features and capabilities delivered quickly, consistently, and of sufficient quality, otherwise they will look elsewhere.

    Common Obstacles

    • Development teams are moving faster but then face delays waiting for testing and deployment due to a lack of defined release cycle and process.
    • Individual stages in your software development life cycle (SDLC), such as code collaboration, testing, and deployment, have become leaner, but the overall complexity has increased since many products and services are composed of many applications, platforms, and processes.
    • The specifics of releasing products is (wrongly) classified as a technical concern and not a business concern, hindering the ability to prioritize improved release practices.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Develop a release management framework that efficiently and effectively orchestrates the different functions supporting a software’s release.
    • Use the release management framework and turn release-related activities into non-events.
    • Use principles of continuous delivery for converting your release processes from an overarching concern to a feature of a high-performing software practice.

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech Insights

    Turn release-related activities into non-events.

    Eliminate the need for dedicating time for off-hour or weekend release activities. Use a release management framework for optimizing release-related tasks, making them predictable and of high quality.

    Release management is NOT a part of the software delivery life cycle.

    The release cycle runs parallel to the software delivery life cycle but is not tightly coupled with it. The act of releasing begins at the point requirements are confirmed and ends when user satisfaction is measurable. In contrast, the software delivery life cycle is focused on activities such as building, architecting, and testing.

    All releases are NOT created equal.

    Barring standard guiding principles, each release may have specific nuances that need to be considered as part of release planning.

    Your release management journey

    1. Optimize Applications Release Management - Set a baseline release management process and organization.
    2. Modernize Your SDLC - Move your organization to Agile and increase throughput to feed releases.
    3. Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision - Understand the practices that go into delivering products, including articulating your release plans.
    4. Automate Testing to Get More Done - Create the ability to do more testing quickly and ensure test coverage.
    5. Implement DevOps Practices That Work - Build in tools and techniques necessary for release deployment automation.
    6. Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value (We Are Here)

    Define a Release Management Process for Your Applications to Deliver Lasting Value

    Use your releases to drive business value and enhance the benefits delivered by your move to Agile.

    Executive Brief

    Your software delivery teams are expected to deliver value to stakeholders in a timely manner and with high quality

    Software delivery teams must enable the organization to react to market needs and competitive changes to improve the business’ bottom line. Otherwise, the business will question the team’s competencies.

    The business is constantly looking for innovative ways to do their jobs better and they need support from your technical teams.

    The increased stress from the business is widening the inefficiencies that already exist in application release management, risking poor product quality and delayed releases.

    Being detached from the release process, business stakeholders do not fully understand the complexities and challenges of completing a release, which complicates the team’s communication with them when issues occur.

    IT Stakeholders Are Also Not Satisfied With Their Own Throughput

    • Only 29% of IT employees find application development throughput highly effective.
    • Only 9% of organizations were classified as having highly effective application development throughput.
    • Application development throughput ranked 37th out of 45 core IT processes in terms of effectiveness.

    (Info-Tech’s Management and Governance Diagnostic, N=3,930)

    Your teams, however, struggle with core release issues, resulting in delayed delivery (and disappointed stakeholders)

    Implementing tools on top of an inefficient pipeline can significantly magnify the existing release issues. This can lead to missed deadlines, poor product quality, and business distrust with software delivery teams.

    COMMON RELEASE ISSUES

    1. Local Thinking: Release decisions and changes are made and approved without consideration of the holistic system, process, and organization.
    2. No Release Cadence: Lack of process governance and oversight generates unpredictable bottlenecks and load and ill-prepared downstream teams.
    3. Mismanagement of Releases: Program management does not accommodate the various integrated releases completed by multiple delivery teams.
    4. Poor Scope Management: Teams are struggling to effectively accommodate changes during the project.

    The bottom line: The business’ ability to operate is dictated by the software delivery team’s ability to successfully complete releases. If the team performs poorly, then the business will do poorly as well. Application release management is critical to ensure business expectations are within the team’s constraints.

    As software becomes more embedded in the business, firms are discovering that the velocity of business change is now limited by how quickly they can deploy.” – Five Ways To Streamline Release Management, J.S. Hammond

    Historically, managing releases has been difficult and complicated…

    Typically, application release management has been hard to coordinate because…

    • Software has multiple dependencies and coordinating their inclusion into a deployable whole was not planned.
    • Teams many be spending too much time on features that are not needed any longer.
    • Software development functions (such as application architecture, test-first or test-driven design, source code integration, and functional testing) are not optimized.
    • There are no agreed upon service-level contracts (e.g. expected details in requirements, adequate testing, source control strategy) between development functions.
    • The different development functions are not integrated in a holistic style.
    • The different deployment environments have variability in their configuration, reducing the reliability of testing done in different environments.
    • Minimum thresholds for acceptable quality of development functions are either too low (leading to adverse outcomes down stream) or too high (leading to unnecessary delays).

    …but research shows being effective at application release management increases your throughput

    Research conducted on Info-Tech's members shows overwhelming evidence that application throughput is strongly tied to an effective application release management approach.

    The image shows a scatter plot, with Release Management Effectiveness on the x-axis and Application Development Throughput Effectiveness on the Y-axis. The graph shows a steady increase.

    (Info-Tech Management & Governance Diagnostic, since 2019; N=684 organizations)

    An application release management framework is critical for effective and timely delivery of software

    A well-developed application release management framework is transformative and changes...

    From To
    Short-lived projects Ongoing enhancements supporting a product strategy
    Aiming for mandated targets Flexible roadmaps
    Manual execution of release processes Automating a release pipeline as much as possible and reasonable
    Manual quality assurance Automated assessment of quality
    Centralized decision making Small, independent release teams, orchestrated through an optimized value stream

    Info-Tech Insight: Your application release management framework should turn a system release into a non-event. This is only possible through the development of a holistic, low-risk and standardized approach to releasing software, irrespective of their size or complexity.

    Robust continuous “anything” requires proficiency in five core practices

    A continuous anything evaluation should not be a “one-and-done” event. As part of ongoing improvements, keep evolving it to make it a fundamental component of a strong operational strategy.

    Continuous Anything

    • Automate where appropriate
      • Automation is not a silver bullet. All processes are not created equal; and therefore, some are not worthy of being automated.
    • Control system variables
      • Deploying and testing in environments that are apple to apple in comparison reduces the risk of unintended outcomes from production release.
    • Measure process outcomes
      • A process not open to being measured is a process bound to fail. If it can be measured, it should be, and insights found should be used for improving the system.
    • Select smaller features batches
      • Smaller release packages reduce the chances of cognitive load associated with finding root causes for defects and issues that may result as post-production incidents.
    • Reduction of cycle time
      • Identification of waste in each stage of the continuous anything process helps in lowering cost of operations and results in quicker generation of value for stakeholders.

    Invest time in developing an application release management framework for your development team(s) with a continuous anything mindset

    An application release management framework converts a set of features and make them ready for releasability in a low-risk, standardized, and high-quality process.

    The image shows a diagram titled Application Release Engineering From Idea to Product, which illustrates the process.

    A continuous anything (integration, delivery, and deployment) mindset is based on a growth and improvement philosophy, where every event is considered a valid data point for investigation of process efficiency.

    Diagram adapted from Continuous Delivery in the Wild, Pete Hodgson, Published by O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2020

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Streamline Application Maintenance

    • Justify the necessity of streamlined maintenance. Gain a grounded understanding of stakeholder objectives and concerns and validate their achievability against the current state of the people, process, and technologies involved in application maintenance.
    • Strengthen triaging and prioritization practices. Obtain a holistic picture of the business and technical impacts, risks, and urgencies of each accepted maintenance request to justify its prioritization and relevance within your backlog. Identify opportunities to bundle requests together or integrate them within project commitments to ensure completion.
    • Establish and govern a repeatable process. Develop a maintenance process with well-defined stage gates, quality controls, and roles and responsibilities, and instill development best practices to improve the success of delivery.

    “Releasability” (or release criteria) of a system depends upon the inclusion of necessary building blocks and proof that they were worked on

    There is no standard definition of a system’s releasability. However, there are common themes around completions or assessments that should be investigated as part of a release:

    • The range of performance, technical, or compliance standards that need to be assessed.
    • The full range of test types required for business approval: unit tests, acceptance tests, security test, data migration tests, etc.
    • The volume-criticality mix of defects the organization is willing to accept as a risk.
    • The best source and version control strategy for the development team. This is mostly a function of the team's skill with using release branches and coordinating their work artifacts.
    • The addition of monitoring points and measures required for evaluations and impact analysis.
    • The documentation required for audit and compliance.
    • External and internal dependencies and integrations.
    • Validations, approvals, and sign-offs required as part of the business’ operating procedure.
    • Processes that are currently carried out outside and should be moved into the pipeline.
    • Manual processes that may be automated.
    • Any waste activities that do not directly contribute to releasability that can be eliminated from the development process.
    • Knowledge the team has regarding challenges and successes with similar software releases in the past.

    Releasability of a system is different than governing principles for application release management

    Governing principles are fundamental ways of doing something, which in this case is application release management, while releasability will generally have governing principles in addition to specific needs for a successful release.

    Example of Governing Principles

    • Approval from Senior Director is necessary before releasing to production
    • Production deployments can only be done in off-hours
    • We will try to automate processes whenever it is possible for us to do so
    • We will use a collaborative set of metrics to measure our processes

    Examples of Releasability Criteria

    • For the upcoming release, add performance testing for Finance and Budget Teams’ APIs
    • Audit and compliance documentation is required for this release
    • Automation of manual deployment
    • Use trunk-based source code management instead of feature-based

    Regulated industries are not more stable despite being less nimble

    A pervasive myth in industry revolves around the misperception that continuous anything and nimble and non-event application release management is not possible in large bureaucratic and regulated organizations because they are risk-averse.

    "We found that external approvals were negatively correlated with lead-time, deployment frequency and restore time, and had no correlation with change failure rate. In short, approval by an external body (such as a manager or Change Approval Board) simply doesn’t work to increase the stability of production systems…However, it certainly slows things down. It is in fact worse than having no change approval process at all." – Accelerate by Gene Kim, Jez Humble, and Nicole Forsgren

    Many organizations reduce risk in their product release by adopting a paternalistic stance by:

    • Requiring manual sign-offs from senior personnel who are external to the organization.
    • Increasing the number and level of authorization gates.
    • Staying away from change and preferring to stick with what has worked in the past.

    Despite the prevalence of these types of responses to risk, the evidence is that they do not work and are in fact counter-productive because they:

    • Create blocks to frequent releases.
    • Introduce procedural complexity to each release and in effect make them “bigger.”
    • Prefer process over people (and trusting them). Increase non-value-add scrutiny and reporting.

    There is a persistent misunderstanding about continuous anything being only an IT engineering practice

    01

    At the enterprise level, continuous anything focuses on:

    • Visibility of final value being provided in a high-quality and expedited manner
    • Ensuring efficiency in the organization’s delivery framework
    • Ensuring adherence to established governance and risk mitigation strategy

    02

    Focus of this blueprint

    At the product level, continuous anything focuses on:

    • Reliability of the product delivery system
    • Use of scientific evidence for continuous improvement of the product’s delivery system
    • Orchestration of different artifacts into a single whole

    03

    At the functional level, continuous anything focuses on*:

    • Local functional optimization (functions = software engineering, testing, application design)
    • Automation of local functions
    • Use of patterns for standardizing inputs and functional areas

    *Where necessary, practices at this level have been mentioned.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    • Be DevOps, rather than do DevOps. DevOps is a philosophy, not an industry framework. Your organization’s culture must shift toward system-wide thinking, cross-function collaboration, and empathy.
    • Culture, learning, automation, integrated teams, and metrics and governance (CLAIM) are all critical components of effective DevOps.

    Automate Testing to Get More Done

    • Optimize and automate SDLC stages to recover team capacity. Recognize that automation without optimization is a recipe for long-term pain. Do it right the first time.
    • Optimization and automation are not one-hit wonders. Technical debt is a part of software systems and never goes away. The only remedy is constant vigilance and enhancements to the processes.

    The seeds of a good release are sown even before work on it begins

    Pre-release practices such as requirements intake and product backlog management are important because:

    • A standard process for documentation of features and requirements helps reduce “cognitive dissonance” between business and technology teams. Clearly articulated and well-understood business needs are fundamental ingredients of a high-quality product.
    • Product backlog management done right ensures the prioritized delivery of value to stakeholders. Features can become stale or get a bump in importance, depending upon evolving circumstances. Prioritizing the backlog is, therefore, critical for ensuring time, effort, and budget are spent on things that matter.

    Transform Your Field Technical Support Services

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}112|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design
    • Redefine the role of deskside or field technicians as demand for service evolves and service teams are restructured.
    • Redefine the role of onsite technicians when the help desk is outsourced.
    • Define requirements when supplementing with outsourced field services teams.
    • Identify barriers to streamlining processes.
    • Look for opportunities to streamline processes and better use technical teams.
    • Communicate and manage change to support roles.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Service needs to be defined in a way that considers the organizational need for local, hands-on technicians, the need for customer service, and the need to make the best use of resources that you have.
    • Service level agreements will need to be refined and metrics will need to be analyzed for capacity and skilled planning.
    • Organizational change management will be key to persuade users to engage with the technical team in a way that supports the new structure.

    Impact and Result

    • Many IT teams are struggling to keep up with demand while trying to refocus on customer service. With more remote workers than ever, organizations who have traditionally provided desktop and field services have been revaluating the role of the field service technicians. Add in the price of fuel, and there is even more reason to assess the support model.
    • Often changes to the way IT does support, especially if moving centralized support to an outsourcer, is met with resistance by end users who don’t see the value of phoning someone else when their local technician is still available to problem solve. This speaks to the need to ensure the central group is providing value to end users as well as the technical team.
    • With the challenges of finding the right number of technicians with the right skills, it’s time to rethink remote support and how that can be used to train and upskill the people you have. And it’s time to think about how to use field services tools to make the best use of your technician’s time.

    Transform Your Field Technical Support Services Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Transform Field Services Guide – A brief deck that outlines key migration steps to improve our remote client support services.

    This blueprint will help you:

    • Transform Your Field Technical Services Storyboard

    2. Transform Field Services Template – A template to create a transformation proposal.

    This template will help you to build your proposal to transform your field services.

    • Proposal to Transform Field Technical Services Template
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Transform Your Field Technical Support Services

    Improve service and reduce costs through digital transformation.

    Analyst Perspective

    Improve staffing challenges through digital transformation.

    Many IT teams are struggling to keep up with demand while trying to refocus on customer service. With more remote workers than ever, organizations who have traditionally provided desktop and field services have been revaluating the role of the field service technicians. Add in the price of fuel, and there is even more reason to assess the support model. Often changes to the way IT does support, especially if moving centralized support to an outsourcer, is met with resistance by end users who don’t see the value of phoning someone else when their local technician is still available to problem solve. This speaks to the need to ensure the central group is providing value to end users as well as the technical team. With the challenges of finding the right number of technicians with the right skills, it’s time to rethink remote support and how that can be used to train and upskill the people you have. And it’s time to think about how to use field services tools to make the best use of your technician’s time.

    The image contains a picture of Sandi Conrad.

    Sandi Conrad

    Principal Research Director

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    With remote work becoming a normal employee offering for many organizations, self-serve/self-solve becoming more prominent, and a common call out to improve customer service, there is a need to re-examine the way many organizations are supplying onsite support. For organizations with a small number of offices, a central desk with remote tools may be enough or can be combined with a concierge service or technical center, but for organizations with multiple offices it becomes difficult to provide a consistent level of service for all customers unless there is a team onsite for each location. This may not be financially possible if there isn’t enough work to keep a technical team busy full-time.

    Common Obstacles

    Where people have a choice between calling a central phone number or talking to the technician down the hall, the in-person experience often wins out. End users may resist changes to in-person support as work is rerouted to a centralized group by choosing to wait for their favorite technician to show up onsite rather than reporting issues centrally. This can make the job of the onsite technician more challenging as they need to schedule time in every visit for unplanned work. And where technicians need to support multiple locations, travel needs to be calculated into lost technician time and costs.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Service needs to be defined in a way that considers the organizational need for local, hands-on technicians, the need for customer service, and the need to make the best use of resources that you have.
    • Service-level agreements will need to be refined and metrics will need to be analyzed for capacity and skilled planning.
    • Organizational change management will be key to persuade users to engage with the technical team in a way that supports the new structure.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Improving process will be helpful for smaller teams, but as teams expand or work gets more complicated, investment in appropriate tools to support field services technicians will enable them to be more efficient, reduce costs, and improve outcomes when visits are warranted.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations who are looking to:

    • Redefine the role of deskside or field technicians as demand for service evolves and service teams are restructured.
    • Redefine the role of onsite technicians when the help desk is outsourced.
    • Define requirements when supplementing with outsourced field services teams.
    • Identify barriers to streamlining processes.
    • Look for opportunities to streamline processes and better use technical teams.
    • Communicate and manage change to support roles.

    With many companies having new work arrangements for users, where remote work may be a permanent offering or if your digital transformation is well underway, this provides an opportunity to rethink how field support needs to be done.

    What is field services?

    Field services is in-person support delivered onsite at one or more locations. Management of field service technicians may include queue management, scheduling service and maintenance requests, triaging incidents, dispatching technicians, ordering parts, tracking job status, and billing.

    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate what may be supported by field services and what should be supported by field services.

    What challenges are you trying to solve within your field services offering?

    Focus on the reasons for the change to ensure the outcome can be met. Common goals include improved customer service, better technician utilization, and increased response time and stability.

    • Discuss specific challenges the team feels are contributing to less-than-ideal customer service.
    • Does the team have the skills, knowledge, and tools they need to be successful? Technicians may be solving issues with the customer looking over their shoulder. Having quick access to knowledge articles or to subject matter experts who can provide deeper expertise remotely may be the difference between a single visit to resolve or multiple or extended visits.
    • What percentage of tickets would benefit from triage and troubleshooting done remotely before sending a technician onsite? Where there are a high number of no-fault-found visits, this may be imperative to improving technician availability.
    • Review method for distribution of tickets, including batching criteria and dispatching of technicians. Are tickets being dispatched efficiently? By location and/or priority? Is there an attempt to solve more tickets centrally? Should there be? What SLA adjustment is reasonable for onsite visits?
    • Has the support value been defined?
    The image contains a graph to demonstrate Case Casuals in Field Services, where the highest at 55% is break/fix.

    Field services will see the biggest improvements through technology updates

    Customer Intake

    Provide tools for scheduling technicians, self-serve and self- or assisted-solve through ITSM or CRM-based portal and visual remote tools.

    The image contains a picture to demonstrate the different field services.

    Triage and Troubleshoot

    Upgrade remote tools to visual remote solutions to troubleshoot equipment as well as software. Eliminate no-fault-found visits and improve first-time fix rate by visually inspecting equipment before technician deployments.

    Improve Communications

    FSM GPS and SMS updates can be set to notify customers when a technician is close by and can be used for customer sign-off to immediately update service records and launch survey or customer billing where applicable.

    Schedule Technicians

    Field service management (FSM) ITSM modules will allow skills-based scheduling for remote technicians and determine best route for multi-site visits.

    Enable Work From Anywhere

    FSM mobile applications can provide technicians with daily schedules, turn-by-turn directions, access to inventory, knowledge articles, maintenance, and warranty and asset records. Visual remote captures service records and enables access to SMEs.

    Manage Expectations

    Know where technicians are for routing to emergency calls and managing workload using field service management solutions with GPS.

    Digital transformation can dramatically improve customer and technician experience

    The image contains an arrown that dips and rises dramatically to demonstrate how digital transformation can dramatically increase customer and technician experience.
    Sources: 1 - TechSee, 2019; 2 - Glartek; 3 - Geoforce; 4 - TechSee, 2020

    Improve technician utilization and scheduling with field services management software

    Field services management (FSM) software is designed to improve scheduling of technicians by skills and location while reducing travel time and mileage. When integrated with ITSM software, the service record is transferred to the field technician for continuity and to prepare for the job. FSM mobile apps will enable technicians to receive schedule updates through the day and through GPS update the dispatcher as technicians move from site to site.

    FSM solutions are designed to manage large teams of technicians, providing automated dispatch recommendations based on skills matching and proximity.

    Routes can be mapped to reduce travel time and mileage and adjusted to respond to emergency requests by technician skills or proximity. Automation will provide suggestions for work allocation.

    Spare parts management may be part of a field services solution, enabling technicians to easily identify parts needed and update real-time inventory as parts are deployed.

    Push notifications in real-time streamline communications from the field to the office, and enable technicians to close service records while in the field.

    Dispatchers can easily view availability, assign work orders, attach notes to work orders, and immediately receive updates if technicians acknowledge or reject a job.

    Maintenance work can be built into online checklists and forms to provide a technician with step-by-step instructions and to ensure a complete review.

    Skills and location-based routing allow dispatchers to be able to see closest tech for emergency deployments.

    Improve time to resolve while cutting costs by using visual remote support tools

    Visual remote support tools enable live video sessions to clearly see what the client or field service technician sees, enabling the experts to provide real-time assistance where the experts will provide guidance to the onsite person. Getting a view of the technology will reduce issues with getting the right parts, tools, and technicians onsite and dramatically reduce second visits.

    Visual remote tools can provide secure connections through any smartphone, with no need for the client to install an application.

    The technicians can take control of the camera to zoom in, turn on the flashlight for extra lighting, take photos, and save video directly to the tickets.

    Optical character recognition allows automatic text capture to streamline process to check warranty, recalls, and asset history.

    Visual, interactive workflows enhance break/fix and inspections, providing step-by-step guidance visual evidence and using AI and augmented reality to assess the images, and can provide next steps by connecting to a visual knowledgebase.

    Integration with field service management tools will allow information to easily be captured and uploaded immediately into the service record.

    Self-serve is available through many of these tools, providing step-by-step instructions using visual cues. These solutions are designed to work in low-bandwidth environments, using Wi-Fi or cellular service, and sessions can be started with a simple link sent through SMS.

    There should never be only one.

    • Large vertical image:
    • member rating overall impact: High Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    Today, we're talking about a concept that’s both incredibly simple and dangerously overlooked: the single point of failure, or SPOF for short.

    Imagine you’ve built an impenetrable fortress. It has high walls, a deep moat, and strong gates. But the entire fortress can only be accessed through a single wooden bridge. That bridge is your single point of failure. If it collapses or is destroyed, your magnificent fortress is completely cut off. It doesn't matter how strong the rest of it is; that one weak link renders the entire system useless.

    In your work, your team, and your processes and technology, these single bridges are everywhere. A SPOF is any part of a system that, if it stops working, will cause the entire system to shut down. It’s the one critical component, the one indispensable person, or the one vital process that everything else depends on.

    When you identify and fix these weak points you aren't being pessimistic; you're fixing the very foundation of something that can withstand shocks and surprises. It’s about creating truly resilient systems and teams, not just seemingly strong ones. So, let’s explore where these risks hide and what you can do about them.

    When People Become the Problem

    For those of you who know me, saying something like this feels at odds with who I am. And yet, it's one of the most common and riskiest areas in any organization. Human single points of failure don't happen because of malicious intent. They typically grow out of good intentions, hard work, and necessity. But the result is the same: a fragile system completely dependent on an individual.

    The Rise of the Hero

    We all know a colleague like this. The “hero” is the one person who has all the answers. When a critical system goes down at 3 AM, they're the only one who can fix it. They understand the labyrinthine codebase nobody else dares to touch. They have the historical context for every major decision made in the last decade. On the surface, this person is invaluable. Management loves them because they solve problems. The team relies on them because they’re a walking encyclopedia.

    But here’s the inconvenient truth: your hero is your biggest liability.

    This isn’t their fault. They likely became the hero by stepping up when no one else would or could. The hero may actually feel like they are the only ones qualified to handle the issue because “management” does not take the necessary actions to train other people. Or “management” places other priorities. Be aware, this is a perception thing. The manager is very likely to be very concerned about the well-being of their employee. (I'm taking "black companies", akin to black sites, out of the equation for a moment and concentrating on generally healthy workplaces.) The hero will likely feel a strong bond to their environment. Also, every hero is different. There is a single point of failure, but not a single type of person. Every person has a different driver.

    I watched a YouTube video by a famous entrepreneur the other day. And she said something that triggered a response in me, because it sows the seeds of the hero. She said, Would you rather have an employee who just fixes it, handles it, and deals with it? Or an employee that talks about it? Obviously, the large majority will take the person behind door number 1. I would too. But then you need to step up as a manager, as an owner, as an executive, and enforce knowledge sharing.

    If you channel all critical knowledge and capabilities through one person, if you let this person become your go-to specialist for everything, you've created a massive SPOF. What happens when your hero gets sick, takes a well deserved two week vacation to a place with no internet, or leaves the company for a new opportunity? The system grinds to a halt. A minor issue becomes a major crisis because the only person who can fix it is unavailable.

    This overreliance doesn't just create a risk; it stifles growth. Other team members don't get the opportunity to learn and develop new skills because the hero is always there to swoop in and save the day. The answer? I guess that depends on your situation and what your ability is to keep this person happy without alienating the rest of the team. The answer may lie in the options discussed later in the article around KPIs.

    The Knowledge Hoarders

    A step beyond the individual hero is the team that acts as a collective SPOF. This is the team that “protects” its know how. They might use complex, undocumented tools, speak in a language of acronyms only they understand, or resist any attempts to standardize their processes. They've built a silo around their work, making themselves indispensable as a unit.

    Unlike the hero, this often comes from a place of perceived self preservation. If they are the only ones who understand how something works, their jobs are secure, right? But this behavior is incredibly damaging to the organization's resilience. Not to mention that it is just plain wrong. The team becomes inundated with requests for new features, but also for help in solving incidents. The result in numerous instances is that the team succeeds in neither. Next the manager is called to the senior management because the business is complaining that things don't progress as expected. 

    This team thus has become a bottleneck. Any other team that needs to interact with their system is completely at their mercy. Progress slows to a crawl, dependent on their availability and willingness to cooperate. Preservation has turned into survival.  

    The real root cause at the heart of both the hero and the knowledge hoarding team is a failure of knowledge management. When information isn't shared, documented, and made accessible, you are actively choosing to create single points of failure. We'll dive deeper into building a robust knowledge sharing culture in a future article, but for now, recognize that knowledge kept in one person's or team's head is a disaster waiting to happen.

    When Your Technology is a House of Cards

    People aren't the only source of fragility. The way you build and manage your technology stacks can easily create critical SPOFs that leave you vulnerable. These are often less obvious at first, but they can cause dangerous failures when they finally break.

    The Danger of the Single Node

    Let's start with the most straightforward technical SPOF: the single node setup. Imagine you have a critical application like maybe your company's main website or an internal database. If you run that entire application on one single server (a single “node”), you've created a classic SPOF.

    It’s like a restaurant with only one chef. If that chef goes home, the kitchen closes. It doesn't matter how many waiters or tables you have. If that single server experiences a hardware failure, a software crash, or even just needs to be rebooted for an update, your entire service goes offline. There is no failover. The service is simply down until that one machine is fixed, patched or rebooted.

    You need to set up your systems so that when one node goes down, the other takes over. This is not just something for large enterprises. SMEs must do the same. I've had numerous calls from business owners who did something to their web server or system and now “it doesn't work!” Not only are they down, now they have to call me and I then must arrange for subject matter experts to fix it immediately. Typically at a cost much larger than if they had set up their system with active, warm or even cold standbys. 

    The Mystery of Closed Technologies

    Another major risk comes from an overreliance on closed, proprietary technologies. This happens when you build a core part of your business on a piece of software or hardware that you don't control and can't inspect. It’s a “black box.” You know what it’s supposed to do, but you have no idea how it does it, and you can’t fix it if it breaks. When something goes wrong, you are completely at the mercy of the company that created it. You have to submit a support ticket and wait.

    This is actually relatable to the next chapter, please follow along and take the advice there.

    The Trap of Vendor Lock In

    Closely related to closed technology is the concept of vendor lock-in. This is a subtle but powerful SPOF. It happens when you become so deeply integrated with a single vendor's ecosystem that the cost and effort of switching to a competitor are impossibly high. Your vendor effectively becomes a strategic single point of failure. Your ability to innovate, control costs, and pivot your strategy is now tied to the decisions of another company.

    This may even run afoul of legal standards. In Europe, we have the DORA and NIS2 regulations. DORA specifically mandates that companies have exit plans for their systems, starting with their critical and important functions. Functions refers to business services, to be clear. 

    But we get there so easily. The native functions of AWS, Azure and Google Cloud, just to name a few, are very enticing to use. They offer convenience, low code, and performance on tap. It's just that, once you integrate deeply with them, you are taken, hook, line, and sinker. And then you have people like me, or worse, your regulator, who demands “What is your exit plan?”

    Your Resilience Playbook: Practical Steps to Eliminate SPOFs

    Identifying your single points of failure is the first step. The real work is in systematically eliminating them. This isn't about a single, massive project; it's about building new habits and principles into your daily work. Here's a playbook I think you can start using today.

    Mitigate People-Based Risks

    The cure for depending on one person is to create a culture where knowledge is fluid and shared by default. Your goal is to move from individual heroics to collective resilience.

    • Mandate real vacations. This might sound strange, but one of the best ways to reveal and fix a “hero” problem is to make sure your hero takes a real, disconnected vacation. This isn't a punishment; it's a benefit to them and a necessary stress test for the team. It forces others to step up and document their processes in preparation. The first time will be painful, but it gets easier each time as the team builds its own knowledge.

    • Adopt the “teach, don't just do” rule. Coach your senior experts to see their role as multipliers. When someone asks them a question, their first instinct should be to show, not just to do. This can be a five minute screen sharing session, grabbing a colleague to pair program on a fix, or taking ten minutes to write down the answer in a shared knowledge base so it never has to be asked again.

      Many companies have knowledge sharing solutions in place. Take a moment to actually use them. Prepare for when new people come into the company. Have a place where they can get into the groove and learn the heart beat of the company. There is a reason why the Madonna song is so captivating to so many people. Getting into the groove elevates you. And the same thing happens in your company. 

    • Rotate responsibilities and run "game days". Actively move people around. Let a developer handle support tickets for a week to understand common customer issues. Have your infrastructure expert sit with the product team. Also, create “game days” where you simulate a crisis. For example: "Okay team, our lead developer is 'on vacation' today. Let's practice a full deployment without them.” This makes learning safe and proactive.

    • Celebrate team success, not individual firefighting. Shift your praise and recognition. Instead of publicly thanking a single person for working all night to resolve a problem, celebrate the team that built a system so resilient it didn't break in the first place. Reward the team that wrote excellent documentation that allowed a junior member to solve a complex issue. Culture follows what you celebrate. At the same time, if the team does not pony up, definitely praise the person and follow up with the team to fix this.

    • Host internal demos and tech talks. Create a regular, informal forum where people can share what they're working on. This could be a “brown bag lunch” session or a Friday afternoon demo. It demystifies what other teams are doing, breaks down silos, and encourages people to ask questions in a low pressure environment.

    • Remunerate sharing. Make sharing knowledge a bonus-eligible key performance indicator. The more sharing an expert does, with their peers acknowledging this, the more the expert earns. You can easily incorporate this into your peer feedback system. 

    • Run DRP exercises without your top engineers: This is taking a leap of faith, and I would never recommend this until all of the above are in place and proven. 

    Building Resilient Technical Systems

    The core principle here is to assume failure will happen and to design for it. A resilient system isn't one where parts never fail, but one where the system as a whole keeps working even when they do.

    • Embrace the rule of three. This is a simple but powerful guideline. For critical data, aim to have three copies on two different types of media, with one copy stored off-site (or in a different cloud region). For critical services, aim for at least three instances running in different availability zones. This simple rule protects you from a wide range of common failures.

    • Automate everything you can. Every manual process is a potential SPOF. It relies on a person remembering a series of steps perfectly, often under pressure. Automate your testing, your deployments, your server setup, and your backup procedures. Scripts are consistent and repeatable; tired humans at 3 AM are not.

    • Use health checks and smart monitoring. It's not enough to have a backup server; you need to know that it's healthy and ready to take over. Implement automated health checks that constantly monitor your primary and redundant systems. Your monitoring should alert you the moment a backup component fails, not just when the primary one does.

    • Practice chaos engineering. Don't wait for a real failure to test your resilience. Intentionally introduce failures in a controlled environment. This is known as chaos engineering. Start small. What happens if you turn off a non-critical service during work hours? Does the system handle it gracefully? Does the team know how to respond? This turns a potential crisis into a planned, educational drill.

    Avoiding Technology and Vendor Traps

    Your resilience also depends on the choices you make about the technology and partners you rely on. The goal is to maintain control over your destiny.

    • Build abstraction layers. Instead of having your application code talk directly to a specific vendor's service, create an intermediary layer that you control. This “abstraction layer” acts as a buffer. If you ever need to switch vendors, you only have to update your abstraction layer, not your entire application. It’s more work up front but gives you immense flexibility later.

    • Make “ease of exit” a key requirement. When you evaluate a new technology or vendor, make portability a primary concern. Ask tough questions: How do we get our data out? What is the process for migrating to a competitor? Is the technology based on open standards? Run a small proof of concept to test how hard it would be to leave before you commit fully.

    • Consider a multi-vendor strategy. For your most critical dependencies, like cloud hosting, avoid going all in on a single provider if you can. Using services from two or more vendors is an advanced strategy, but it provides the ultimate protection against a massive, platform wide outage or unfavorable changes in pricing or terms.

    It's a journey, not a destination

    You will never be “ready.” Building resilience by eliminating single points of failure isn't a one time project you can check off a list. It’s a continuous process. New SPOFs will emerge as your systems evolve, people change roles, and your business grows.

    The key is to make this thinking a part of your culture. Make “What's the bus factor for this project?” a regular question in your planning meetings. Make redundancy and documentation a non negotiable requirement for new systems. By constantly looking for the one thing that can bring everything down, you can build teams and technology that don't just survive shocks—they eat them for breakfast.

    Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}599|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $1,600 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 18 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Manage & Coach
    • Parent Category Link: /manage-coach
    • For many, emergency WFH comes with several new challenges such as additional childcare responsibilities, sudden changes in role expectations, and negative impacts on wellbeing. These new challenges, coupled with previously existing ones, can result in poor performance. Owing to the lack of physical presence and cues, managers may struggle to identify that an employee’s performance is suffering. Even after identifying poor performance, it can be difficult to address remotely when such conversations would ideally be held in person.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Poor performance must be managed, despite the pandemic. Evaluating root causes of performance issues is more important than ever now that personal factors such as lack of childcare and eldercare for those working from home are complicating the issue.

    Impact and Result

    • Organizations need to have a clear process for improving performance for employees working remotely during the COVID-19 pandemic. Provide managers with resources to help them identify performance issues and uncover their root causes as part of addressing overall performance. This will allow managers to connect employees with the required support while working with them to improve performance.

    Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Follow the remote performance improvement process

    Determine how managers can identify poor performance remotely and help them navigate the performance improvement process while working from home.

    • Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home Storyboard
    • Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home: Manager Guide
    • Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home: Infographic

    2. Clarify roles and leverage resources

    Clarify roles and responsibilities in the performance improvement process and tailor relevant resources.

    • Wellness and Working From Home
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home

    Assess and improve remote work performance with our ready-to-use tools.

    Executive Summary

    McLean & Company Insight

    Poor performance must be managed, despite the pandemic. Evaluating root causes of performance issues is more important than ever now that personal factors such as lack of childcare and eldercare for those working from home are complicating the issue.

    Situation

    COVID-19 has led to a sudden shift to working from home (WFH), resulting in a 72% decline in in-office work (Ranosa, 2020). While these uncertain times have disrupted traditional work routines, employee performance remains critical, as it plays a role in determining how organizations recover. Managers must not turn a blind eye to performance issues but rather must act quickly to support employees who may be struggling.

    Complication

    For many, emergency WFH comes with several new challenges such as additional childcare responsibilities, sudden changes in role expectations, and negative impacts on wellbeing. These new challenges, coupled with previously existing ones, can result in poor performance. Owing to the lack of physical presence and cues, managers may struggle to identify that an employee’s performance is suffering. Even after identifying poor performance, it can be difficult to address remotely when such conversations would ideally be held in person.

    Solution

    Organizations need to have a clear process for improving performance for employees working remotely during the COVID-19 pandemic. Provide managers with resources to help them identify performance issues and uncover their root causes as part of addressing overall performance. This will allow managers to connect employees with the required support while working with them to improve performance.

    Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home is made up of the following resources:

    1

    Identify

    2

    Initiate

    3

    Deploy

    4

    a) Follow Up
    b) Decide
    Storyboard

    This storyboard is organized by the four steps of the performance improvement process: identify, initiate, deploy, and follow up/decide. These will appear on the left-hand side of the slides as a roadmap.

    The focus is on how HR can design the process for managing poor performance remotely and support managers through it while emergency WFH measures are in place. Key responsibilities, email templates, and relevant resources are included at the end.

    Adapt the process as necessary for your organization.

    Manager Guide

    The manager guide contains detailed advice for managers on navigating the process and focuses on the content of remote performance discussions.

    It consists of the following sections:

    • Identifying poor performance.
    • Conducting performance improvement discussions.
    • Uncovering and addressing root causes of poor performance.
    Manager Infographic

    The manager infographic illustrates the high-level steps of the performance improvement process for managers in a visually appealing and easily digestible manner.

    This can be used to easily outline the process, providing managers with a resource to quickly reference as they navigate the process with their direct reports.

    In this blueprint, “WFH” and “remote working” are used interchangeably.

    This blueprint will not cover the performance management framework; it is solely focused on managing performance issues.

    For information on adjusting the regular performance management process during the pandemic, see Performance Management for Emergency Work-From-Home.

    Identify how low performance is normally addressed

    A process for performance improvement is not akin to outlining the steps of a performance improvement plan (PIP). The PIP is a development tool used within a larger process for performance improvement. Guidance on how to structure and use a PIP will be provided later in this blueprint.

    Evaluate how low performance is usually brought to the attention of HR in a non-remote situation:
    • Do managers approach HR for an employee transfer or PIP without having prior performance conversations with the employee?
    • Do managers come to HR when they need support in developing an employee in order to meet expectations?
    • Do managers proactively reach out to HR to discuss appropriate L&D for staff who are struggling?
    • Do some departments engage with the process while others do not?
    Poor performance does not signal the immediate need to terminate an employee. Instead, managers should focus on helping the struggling employee to develop so that they may succeed.
    Evaluate how poor performance is determined:
    • Do managers use performance data or concrete examples?
    • Is it based on a subjective assessment by the manager?
    Keep in mind that “poor performance” now might look different than it did before the pandemic. Employees must be aware of the current expectations placed on them before they can be labeled as underperforming – and the performance expectations must be assessed to ensure they are realistic.

    For information on adjusting performance expectations during the pandemic, see Performance Management for Emergency Work-From-Home.

    The process for non-union and union employees will likely differ. Make sure your process for unionized employees aligns with collective agreements.

    Determine how managers can identify poor performance of staff working remotely

    1

    Identify

    2

    Initiate

    3

    Deploy

    4

    a) Follow Up
    b) Decide
    Identify: Determine how managers can identify poor performance.
    In person, it can be easy to see when an employee is struggling by glancing over at their desk and observing body language. In a remote situation, this can be more difficult, as it is easy to put on a brave face for the half-hour to one-hour check-in. Advise managers on how important frequent one-one-ones and open communication are in helping identify issues when they arise rather than when it’s too late.

    Managers must clearly document and communicate instances where employees aren’t meeting role expectations or are showing other key signs that they are not performing at the level expected of them.

    What to look for:
    • PM data/performance-related assessments
    • Continual absences
    • Decreased quality or quantity of output
    • Frequent excuses (e.g. repeated internet outages)
    • Lack of effort or follow-through
    • Missed deadlines
    • Poor communication or lack of responsiveness
    • Failure to improve
    It’s crucial to acknowledge an employee might have an “off week” or need time to adjust to working from home, which can be addressed with performance management techniques. Managers should move into the process for performance improvement when:
    • Performance fluctuates frequently or significantly.
    • Performance has dropped for an extended period of time.
    • Expectations are consistently not being met.

    While it’s important for managers to keep an eye out for decreased performance, discourage them from over-monitoring employees, as this can lead to a damaging environment of distrust.

    Support managers in initiating performance conversations and uncovering root causes

    1

    Identify

    2

    Initiate

    3

    Deploy

    4

    a) Follow Up
    b) Decide
    Initiate: Require that managers have several conversations about low performance with the employee.
    Before using more formal measures, ensure managers take responsibility for connecting with the employee to have an initial performance conversation where they will make the performance issue known and try to diagnose the root cause of the issue.

    Coach managers to recognize behaviors associated with the following performance inhibitors:

    Personal Factors

    Personal factors, usually outside the workplace, can affect an employee’s performance.

    Lack of clarity

    Employees must be clear on performance expectations before they can be labeled as a poor performer.

    Low motivation

    Lack of motivation to complete work can impact the quality of output and/or amount of work an employee is completing.

    Inability

    Resourcing, technology, organizational change, or lack of skills to do the job can all result in the inability of an employee to perform at their best.

    Poor people skills

    Problematic people skills, externally with clients or internally with colleagues, can affect an employee’s performance or the team’s engagement.

    Personal factors are a common performance inhibitor due to emergency WFH measures. The decreased divide between work and home life and the additional stresses of the pandemic can bring up new cases of poor performance or exacerbate existing ones. Remind managers that all potential root causes should still be investigated rather than assuming personal factors are the problem and emphasize that there can be more than one cause.

    Ensure managers continue to conduct frequent performance conversations

    Once an informal conversation has been initiated, the manager should schedule frequent one-on-one performance conversations (above and beyond performance management check-ins).

    1

    Identify

    2

    Initiate

    3

    Deploy

    4

    a) Follow Up
    b) Decide
    Explain to managers the purpose of these discussions is to:
    • Continue to probe for root causes.
    • Reinforce role expectations and performance targets.
    • Follow up on any improvements.
    • Address the performance issue and share relevant resources (e.g. HR or employee assistance program [EAP]).
    Given these conversations will be remote, require managers to:
    • Use video whenever possible to read physical cues and body language.
    • Bookend the conversation. Starting each meeting by setting the context for the discussion and finishing with the employee reiterating the key takeaways back will ensure there are no misunderstandings.
    • Document the conversation and share with HR. This provides evidence of the conversations and helps hold managers accountable.
    What is HR’s role? HR should ensure that the manager has had multiple conversations with the employee before moving to the next step. Furthermore, HR is responsible for ensuring manages are equipped to have the conversations through coaching, role-playing, etc.

    For more information on the content of these conversations or for material to leverage for training purposes, see Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home: Manager Guide.

    McLean & Company Insight

    Managers are there to be coaches, not therapists. Uncovering the root cause of poor performance will allow managers to pinpoint supports needed, either within their expertise (e.g. coaching, training, providing flexible hours) or by directing the employee to proper external resources such as an EAP.

    Help managers use formal performance improvement tools with remote workers

    1

    Identify

    2

    Initiate

    3

    Deploy

    4

    a) Follow Up
    b) Decide
    Deploy: Use performance improvement tools.
    If initial performance conversations were unsuccessful and performance does not improve, refer managers to performance improvement tools:
    • Suggest any other available support and resources they have not yet recommended (e.g. EAP).
    • Explore options for co-creation of a development plan to increase employee buy-in. If the manager has been diligent about clarifying role expectations, invite the employee to put together their own action plan for meeting performance goals. This can then be reviewed and finalized with the manager.
    • Have the manager use a formal PIP for development and to get the employee back on track. Review the development plan or PIP with the manager before they share it with the employee to ensure it is clear and has time bound, realistic goals for improvement.
    Using a PIP solely to avoid legal trouble and terminate employees isn’t true to its intended purpose. This is what progressive discipline is for.In the case of significant behavior problems, like breaking company rules or safety violations, the manager will likely need to move to progressive discipline. HR should advise managers on the appropriate process.

    When does the issue warrant progressive discipline? If the action needs to stop immediately, (e.g. threatening or inappropriate behavior) and/or as outlined in the collective agreement.

    Clarify remote PIP stages and best practices

    1

    Identify

    2

    Initiate

    3

    Deploy

    4

    a) Follow Up
    b) Decide
    Sample Stages:
    1. Written PIP
    • HR reviews and signs off on PIP
    • Manager holds meeting to provide employee with PIP
    • Employee reviews the PIP
    • Manager and employee provide e-signatures
    • Signed PIP is given to HR
    2. Possible Extension
    3. Final Notice
    • Manager provides employee with final notice if there has been no improvement in agreed time frame
    • Copy of signed final notice letter given to HR

    Who is involved?

    The manager runs the meeting with the employee. HR should act as a support by:

    • Ensuring the PIP is clear, aligned with the performance issue, and focused on development, prior to the meeting.
    • Pointing to resources and making themselves available prior to, during, and after the meeting.
      • When should HR be involved? HR should be present in the meeting if the manager has requested it or if the employee has approached HR beforehand with concerns about the manager. Keep in mind that if the employee sees HR has been unexpectedly invited to the video call, it could add extra stress for them.
    • Reviewing documentation and ensuring expectations and the action plan are reasonable and realistic.

    Determine the length of the PIP

    • The length of the initial PIP will often depend on the complexity of the employee’s role and how long it will reasonably take to see improvements. The minimum (before a potential extension) should be 30-60 days.
    • Ensure the action plan takes sustainment into account. Employees must be able to demonstrate improvement and sustain improved performance in order to successfully complete a PIP.

    Timing of delivery

    Help the manager determine when the PIP meeting will occur (what day, time of day). Take into account the schedule of the employee they will be meeting with (e.g. avoid scheduling right before an important client call).

    1

    Identify

    2

    Initiate

    3

    Deploy

    4

    a) Follow Up
    b) Decide

    Follow up: If the process escalated to step 3 and is successful.

    What does success look like? Performance improvement must be sustained after the PIP is completed. It’s not enough to simply meet performance improvement goals and expectations; the employee must continue to perform.

    Have the manager schedule a final PIP review with the employee. Use video, as this enables the employee and manager to read body language and minimize miscommunication/misinterpretation.

    • If performance expectations have been met, instruct managers to document this in the PIP, inform the employee they are off the PIP, and provide it to HR.

    The manager should also continue check-ins with the employee to ensure sustainment and as part of continued performance management.

    • Set a specific timeline, e.g. every two weeks or every month. Choose a cadence that works best for the manager and employee.

    OR

    Decide: Determine action steps if the process is unsuccessful.

    If at the end of step 3 performance has not sufficiently improved, the organization (HR and the manager) should either determine if the employee could/should be temporarily redeployed while the emergency WFH is still in place, if a permanent transfer to a role that is a better fit is an option, or if the employee should be let go.

    See the Complete Manual for COVID-19 Layoffs blueprint for information on layoffs in remote environments.

    Managers, HR, and employees all have a role to play in performance improvement

    Managers
    • Identify the outcomes the organization is looking for and clearly outline and communicate the expectations for the employee’s performance.
    • Diagnose root cause(s) of the performance issue.
    • Support employee through frequent conversations and feedback.
    • Coach for improved performance.
    • Visibly recognize and broadcast employee achievements.
    Employees
    • Have open and honest conversations with their manager, acknowledge their accountability, and be receptive to feedback.
    • Set performance goals to meet expectations of the role.
    • Prepare for frequent check-ins regarding improvement.
    • Seek support from HR as required.
    HR
    • Provide managers with a process, training, and support to improve employee performance.
    • Coach managers to ensure employees have been made aware of their role expectations and current performance and given specific recommendations on how to improve.
    • Reinforce the process for improving employee performance to ensure that adequate coaching conversations have taken place before the formal PIP.
    • Coach employees on how to approach their manager to discuss challenges in meeting expectations.

    HR should conduct checkpoints with both managers and employees in cases where a formal PIP was initiated to ensure the process for performance improvement is being followed and to support both parties in improving performance.

    Email templates

    Use the templates found on the next slides to draft communications to employees who are underperforming while working from home.

    Customize all templates with relevant information and use them as a guide to further tailor your communication to a specific employee.

    Customization Recommendations

    Review all slides and adjust the language or content as needed to suit the needs of the employee, the complexity of their role, and the performance issue.

    • The pencil icon to the left denotes slides requiring customization of the text. Customize text in grey font and be sure to convert all font to black when you are done.

    Included Templates

    1. Performance Discussion Follow-Up
    2. PIP Cover Letter

    This template is not a substitute for legal advice. Ensure you consult with your legal counsel, labor relations representative, and union representative to align with collective agreements and relevant legislation.

    Sample Performance Discussion Follow-Up

    Hello [name],

    Thank you for the commitment and eagerness in our meeting yesterday.

    I wanted to recap the conversation and expectations for the month of [insert month].

    As discussed, you have been advised about your recent [behavior, performance, attendance, policy, etc.] where you have demonstrated [state specific issue with detail of behavior/performance of concern]. As per our conversation, we’ll be working on improvement in this area in order to meet expectations set out for our employees.

    It is expected that employees [state expectations]. Please do not hesitate to reach out to me if there is further clarification needed or you if you have any questions or concerns. The management team and I are committed to helping you achieve these goals.

    We will do a formal check-in on your progress every [insert day] from [insert time] to review your progress. I will also be available for daily check-ins to support you on the right track. Additionally, you can book me in for desk-side coaching outside of my regular desk-side check-ins. If there is anything else I can do to help support you in hitting these goals, please let me know. Other resources we discussed that may be helpful in meeting these objectives are [summarize available support and resources]. By working together through this process, I have no doubt that you can be successful. I am here to provide support and assist you through this.

    If you’re unable to show improvements set out in our discussion by [date], we will proceed to a formal performance measure that will include a performance improvement plan. Please let me know if you have any questions or concerns; I am here to help.

    Please acknowledge this email and let me know if you have any questions.

    Thank you,

    PIP Cover Letter

    Hello [name] ,

    This is to confirm our meeting on [date] in which we discussed your performance to date and areas that need improvement. Please find the attached performance improvement plan, which contains a detailed action plan that we have agreed upon to help you meet role expectations over the next [XX days]. The aim of this plan is to provide you with a detailed outline of our performance expectations and provide you the opportunity to improve your performance, with our support.

    We will check in every [XX days] to review your progress. At the end of the [XX]-day period, we will review your performance against the role expectations set out in this performance improvement plan. If you don’t meet the performance requirements in the time allotted, further action and consequences will follow.

    Should you have any questions about the performance improvement plan or the process outlined in this document, please do not hesitate to discuss them with me.

    [Employee name], it is my personal objective to help you be a fully productive member of our team. By working together through this performance improvement plan, I have no doubt that you can be successful. I am here to provide support and assist you through the process. At this time, I would also like to remind you about the [additional resources available at your organization, for example, employee assistance program or HR].

    Please acknowledge this email and let me know if you have any questions.

    Thank you,

    Prepare and customize manager guide and resources

    Sample of Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home: Manager Guide. Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home: Manager Guide

    This tool for managers provides advice on navigating the process and focuses on the content of remote performance discussions.

    Sample of Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures. Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

    See this blueprint for information on setting holistic measures to inspire employee performance.

    Sample of Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home: Infographic. Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home: Infographic

    This tool illustrates the high-level steps of the performance improvement process.

    Sample of Wellness and Working From Home: Infographic. Wellness and Working From Home: Infographic

    This tool highlights tips to manage physical and mental health while working from home.

    Sample of Build a Better Manager: Team Essentials. Build a Better Manager: Team Essentials

    See this solution set for more information on kick-starting the effectiveness of first-time IT managers with essential management skills.

    Sample of Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance. Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance

    See this blueprint for information on dodging the micromanaging foul and scoring with agile short-term goal setting.

    Bibliography

    Arringdale, Chris. “6 Tips For Managers Trying to Overcome Performance Appraisal Anxiety.” TLNT. 18 September 2015. Accessed 2018.

    Borysenko, Karlyn. “What Was Management Thinking? The High Cost of Employee Turnover.” Talent Management and HR. 22 April 2015. Accessed 2018.

    Cook, Ian. “Curbing Employee Turnover Contagion in the Workplace.” Visier. 20 February 2018. Accessed 2018.

    Cornerstone OnDemand. Toxic Employees in the Workplace. Santa Monica, California: Cornerstone OnDemand, 2015. Web.

    Dewar, Carolyn and Reed Doucette. “6 elements to create a high-performing culture.” McKinsey & Company. 9 April 2018. Accessed 2018.

    Eagle Hill. Eagle Hill National Attrition Survey. Washington, D.C.: Eagle Hill, 2015. Web.

    ERC. “Performance Improvement Plan Checklist.” ERC. 21 June 2017. Accessed 2018.

    Foster, James. “The Impact of Managers on Workplace Engagement and Productivity.” Interact. 16 March 2017. Accessed 2018.

    Godwins Solicitors LLP. “Employment Tribunal Statistics for 2015/2016.” Godwins Solicitors LLP. 8 February 2017. Accessed 2018.

    Mankins, Michael. “How to Manage a Team of All-Stars.” Harvard Business Review. 6 June 2017. Accessed 2018.

    Maxfield, David, et al. The Value of Stress-Free Productivity. Provo, Utah: VitalSmarts, 2017. Web.

    Murphy, Mark. “Skip Your Low Performers When Starting Performance Appraisals.” Forbes. 21 January 2015. Accessed 2018.

    Quint. “Transforming into a High Performance Organization.” Quint Wellington Redwood. 16 November 2017. Accessed 2018.

    Ranosa, Rachel. "COVID -19: Canadian Productivity Booms Despite Social Distancing." Human Resources Director, 14 April 2020. Accessed 2020.

    Start Making Data-Driven People Decisions

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}427|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Leadership Development Programs
    • Parent Category Link: /leadership-development-programs
    • Ninety-one percent of IT leaders believe that analytics is important for talent management but 59% use no workforce analytics at all, although those who use analytics are much more effective than those who don't.
    • The higher the level of analytics used, the higher the level of effectiveness of the department as a whole.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You don't need advanced metrics and analytics to see a return on people data. Begin by getting a strong foundation in place and showing the ROI on a pilot project.
    • Complex analyses will never make up for inadequate data quality. Spend the time up front to audit and improve data quality if necessary, no matter which stage of analytics proficiency you are at.
    • Ensure you collect and analyze only data that is essential to your decision making. More is not better, and excess data can detract from the overall impact of analytics.

    Impact and Result

    • Build a small-scale foundational pilot, which will allow you to demonstrate feasibility, refine your costs estimate, and show the ROI on people analytics for your budgeting meeting.
    • Drive organizational change incrementally by identifying and communicating with the stakeholders for your people analytics pilot.
    • Choose basic analytics suitable for organizations of all sizes and understand the building blocks of data quality to support more further analytics down the line.

    Start Making Data-Driven People Decisions Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should strategically apply people analytics to your IT talent management.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define the problem and apply the checklist

    From choosing the right data for the right problem to evaluating your progress toward data-driven people decisions, follow these steps to build your foundation to people analytics.

    • Start Making Data-Driven People Decisions – Phase 1: Define the Problem and Apply the Checklist
    • People Analytics Strategy Template
    • Talent Metrics Library
    [infographic]

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}426|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $125,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 50 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • Traditional IT budgeting and procurement processes don't work for public cloud services.
    • The self-service nature of the cloud means that often the people provisioning cloud resources aren't accountable for the cost of those resources.
    • Without centralized control or oversight, organizations can quickly end up with massive Azure bills that exceed their IT salary cost.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Most engineers care more about speed of feature delivery and reliability of the system than they do about cost.
    • Often there are no consequences for overarchitecting or overspending on Azure.
    • Many organizations lack sufficient visibility into their Azure spend, making it impossible to establish accountability and controls.

    Impact and Result

    • Define roles and responsibilities.
    • Establish visibility.
    • Develop processes, procedures, and policies.

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should take control of cloud costs, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a cost accountability framework

    Assess your current state, define your cost allocation model, and define roles and responsibilities.

    • Cloud Cost Management Worksheet
    • Cloud Cost Management Capability Assessment
    • Cloud Cost Management Policy
    • Cloud Cost Glossary of Terms

    2. Establish visibility

    Define dashboards and reports, and document account structure and tagging requirements.

    • Service Cost Cheat Sheet for Azure

    3. Define processes and procedures

    Establish governance for tagging and cost control, define process for right-sizing, and define process for purchasing commitment discounts.

    • Right-Sizing Workflow (Visio)
    • Right-Sizing Workflow (PDF)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (Visio)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (PDF)

    4. Build an implementation plan

    Document process interactions, establish program KPIs, and build implementation roadmap and communication plan.

    • Cloud Cost Management Task List
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build a Cost Accountability Framework

    The Purpose

    Establish clear lines of accountability and document roles & responsibilities to effectively manage cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of key areas to focus on to improve cloud cost management capabilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current state

    1.2 Determine cloud cost model

    1.3 Define roles & responsibilities

    Outputs

    Cloud cost management capability assessment

    Cloud cost model

    Roles & responsibilities

    2 Establish Visibility

    The Purpose

    Establish visibility into cloud costs and drivers of those costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Better understanding of what is driving costs and how to keep them in check.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop architectural patterns

    2.2 Define dashboards and reports

    2.3 Define account structure

    2.4 Document tagging requirements

    Outputs

    Architectural patterns; service cost cheat sheet

    Dashboards and reports

    Account structure

    Tagging scheme

    3 Define Processes & Procedures

    The Purpose

    Develop processes, procedures, and policies to control cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved capability of reducing costs.

    Documented processes & procedures for continuous improvement.

    Activities

    3.1 Establish governance for tagging

    3.2 Establish governance for costs

    3.3 Define right-sizing process

    3.4 Define purchasing process

    3.5 Define notification and alerts

    Outputs

    Tagging policy

    Cost control policy

    Right-sizing process

    Commitment purchasing process

    Notifications and alerts

    4 Build an Implementation Plan

    The Purpose

    Document next steps to implement & improve cloud cost management program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Concrete roadmap to stand up and/or improve the cloud cost management program.

    Activities

    4.1 Document process interaction changes

    4.2 Define cloud cost program KPIs

    4.3 Build implementation roadmap

    4.4 Build communication plan

    Outputs

    Changes to process interactions

    Cloud cost program KPIs

    Implementation roadmap

    Communication plan

    Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}600|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $20,240 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Manage & Coach
    • Parent Category Link: /manage-coach
    • Virtual team members must rely upon collaboration technology to communicate and collaborate.
    • Management practices and approaches that work face to face do not always translate effectively in virtual contexts.
    • Managers cannot rely upon spontaneous social interactions that happen organically when people are colocated to build meaningful and trusting relationships. Space and time need to be created in a virtual environment for this to happen.
    • Observing an employee’s performance or development can be more difficult, and relying on others’ feedback becomes more critical for managing performance and development.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Managing virtual teams does not require developing new manager competencies. Instead, managers need to “dial up” competencies they already have and adjust their approaches.
    • Setting clear expectations with virtual teams creates the foundation needed to manage them effectively.
    • Virtual employees crave more meaningful interactions about performance and development with their managers.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a solid foundation for managing virtual teams by setting clear expectations and taking a more planful approach to managing performance and employee development.
    • Dial up key management competencies that you already have. Managers do not need to develop new competencies; they just need to adjust and refocus their approaches.

    Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Equip managers to effectively manage virtual teams

    Equip managers to become more effective with managing remote teams.

    The workbook serves as a reference guide participants will use to support formal training.

    • Training Deck: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams
    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams
    • Standard Participant Training Session Evaluation Template

    2. Additional Resources

    Many organizations are developing plans to allow employees more flexible work options, including remote work. Use these resources to help managers and employees make the most of remote work arrangements.

    • Work-From-Home Tips for Managers
    • Work-From-Home Tips for Employees
    • Health & Safety at Home Infographic
    • Wellness and Working From Home
    • Ergonomic Workspaces Infographic
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Learning objectives

    Describe the benefits of virtual teams.

    Create a plan for adopting effective management practices and setting clear expectations with virtual teams.

    Identify potential solutions to the challenges of managing performance and developing members of virtual teams.

    Create an action plan to increase effectiveness in managing virtual teams.

    Target audience

    People managers who manage or plan to manage virtual teams.

    Training length

    Two three-hour sessions

    Training material

    • Use the speaker’s notes in the notes pane section of each slide to plan and practice the training session.
    • Activity slides are scattered throughout this training deck and are clearly numbered in the slide title.
    • Notes in italics are written to the facilitator and are not meant to be read aloud.
    • Download the Workbook for participants to use.

    Suggested materials for activities:

    • Index cards or sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard/large table space/flip chart

    Agenda & activities

    Section 1

    Section 2

    10 min

    Welcome: Overview & Introductions

    • Introductions
    10 min

    Welcome: Overview & Introductions

    • Session 1 Review
    • Session 2 Overview
    50 min

    1.1 Introduction to virtual teams

    • What kind of virtual team do you lead?
    • Virtual team benefits and challenges
    55 min

    2.1 Managing wellbeing in a virtual team context

    • Share current practices and challenges regarding wellbeing in virtual teams
    • Identify and discuss proposed solutions
    • Develop draft action plan for managing wellbeing in a virtual team context
    5 min

    Break

    5 min Break
    45 min

    1.2 Laying the foundation for a virtual team

    • Identify behaviors to better inform, interact with, and involve team members
    60 min

    2.2 Managing performance in a virtual team context

    • Share current performance management practices for virtual teams
    • Identify challenges of current practices and propose solutions
    • Develop draft action plan for managing performance in a virtual team context
    10 min

    Break

    10 min Break
    55 min

    1.2 Laying the foundation for a virtual team

    • Identify and share ways you prefer to communicate for different activities
    • Develop draft action plan for laying the foundation for a virtual team
    40 min

    Action planning & conclusion

    • Refine consolidated action plan (three parts) and commit to implementing it
    • Key takeaways
    5 min

    Session 1 Wrap-Up

    Recommended Customization

    Review all slides and adjust the language or content as needed to suit your organizational context and culture.

    The pencil icon to the left denotes slides requiring customization of the slide and/or the speaker’s notes, e.g. adding in an organization-specific process.

    Customization instructions are found in the notes pane.

    Tips

    • Adjust the speaker’s notes on the slides before (or after) any slides you modify or delete to ensure logical transitions between slides.
    • Update the agenda to reflect new timings if major modifications are made.
    • Even seasoned leaders need to be reminded of the basics now and again. Rather than delete more basic slides, cut back on the amount of time spent covering them and frame the content as a refresher.
    • Participant Workbooks
    • Relevant organization-specific documents (see side panel)
    • Training Session Feedback Form

    Required Information

    • Communication guidelines for managers (e.g. cadence of manager interactions)
    • Performance management process and guidelines
    • Employee development guidelines
    • List of available resources (e.g. social collaboration tools)

    Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Section 1.1

    Practical foundations for managing teams in a remote environment

    Feasibility of virtual IT teams

    Most organizations are planning some combination of remote and onsite work in 2022.

    This is an image of a bar graph demonstrating the percentage of companies who have the following plans for return to work: Full work-from-home (All employees WFH permanently) - 4% ; No work-from-home permitted	9% ; Partial work-from-home team (Eligible employees can WFH for a certain portion of their work week)	23% ; Balanced work-from-home team (All employees can WFH for a certain portion of their work week)	28% ; Hybrid work-from-home team (Eligible employees WFH on a full-time basis)	37%

    Source: IT Talent Trends, 2022; n=199

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Most organizations are planning some combination of remote and onsite work in 2022 – the highest reported plans for WFH were hybrid, balanced, and partial work-from-home. This builds on our findings in the IT Talent Trends 2022 report.

    Feasibility of virtual IT teams

    What percentage of roles in IT are capable of being performed remotely permanently?

    Approximately what percentage of roles in IT are capable of being performed remotely permanently?

    0% to less than 10%: 3%; 10% to less than 25%: 5%; 25% to less than 50%: 12%; 50% to less than 75%: 30%; 75% to 100%L 50%.

    IT Talent Trends, 2022; n=207

    Speaker’s Notes:

    80% of respondents estimated that 50 to 100% of IT roles can be performed remotely.

    Virtual teams take all kinds of forms

    A virtual team is any team that has members that are not colocated and relies on technology for communications.

    This image depicts the three levels of virtual teams, Municipal; National; Global.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Before we start, it will be useful to review what we mean by the term “virtual team.” For our purposes we will be defining a virtual team as any team that has members that are not colocated and relies on technology for communications.

    There are a wide variety of virtual work arrangements and a variety of terms used to describe them. For example, some common terms include:

    • “Flexible work arrangements”: Employees have the option to work where they see fit (within certain constraints). They may choose to work from the office, home, a shared office space, the road, etc.
    • “Remote work,” “work from home,” and “telecommuting”: These are just various ways of describing how or where people are working virtually. They all share the idea that these kinds of employees are not colocated.
    • “Multi-office team”: the team members all work in office environments, but they may not always be in the same office as their team members or manager.

    Our definition of virtual work covers all of these terms. It is also distance neutral, meaning that it applies equally to teams that are dispersed globally or regionally or even those working in the same cities but dispersed throughout different buildings. Our definition also applies whether virtual employees work full time or part time.

    The challenges facing managers arise as soon as some team members are not colocated and have to rely on technology to communicate and coordinate work. Greater distances between employees can complicate challenges (e.g. time zone coordination), but the core challenges of managing virtual teams are the same whether those workers are merely located in different buildings in the same city or in different buildings on different continents.

    1.1 What kind of virtual team do you lead?

    15 Minutes

    Working on your own, take five minutes to figure out what kind of virtual team you lead.

    1. How many people on your team work virtually (all, most, or a small percentage)?
    2. How often and how regularly do they tend to work virtually (full time, part time regularly, or part time as needed)?
    3. What kinds of virtual work arrangements are there on your team (multi-site, work from home, mobile employees)?
    4. Where do your workers tend to be physically located (different offices but in the same city/region or globally dispersed)?
    5. Record this information in your workbook.
    6. Discuss as a group.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Size of virtual team
    • Current remote work practices

    Output

    • Documented list of current state of remote work

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Advantages

    Benefits to the organization

    Benefits to employees

    Operational continuity in disaster situations that prevent employees from coming into the office.

    Cost savings: Employees who WFH half the time can save $2,500 to $4,000 per year (Global Workplace Analytics, 2021).

    Cost savings: Organizations save ~$11,000 annually per employee working from home half the time (Global Workplace Analytics, 2021).

    Time savings: Employees who WFH half the time save on average 11 workdays per year (Global Workplace Analytics, 2021).

    Increased attraction: 71% of employees would likely choose one employer over another based on WFH offerings (Owl Labs, 2021).

    Improved wellbeing:

    83% employees agree that WFH would make them happier.

    80% agree that WFH would decrease their stress.

    81% agree that WFH would improve their ability to manage their work-life balance.

    (Owl Labs, 2021)

    Increased retention: 74% of employees would be less likely to leave their employer if they could WFH (Owl Labs, 2021).

    Increased flexibility: 32% of employees rated the “ability to have a flexible schedule” as the biggest benefit of WFH (OWL Labs, 2021).

    Increased productivity: 50% of employees report they would maintain or increase their productivity while working from home (Glassdoor Team, 2020).

    Increased engagement: Offsite employees tend to have higher overall engagement than onsite employees (McLean & Company Engagement Survey, 2020).

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Remote work arrangements are becoming more and more common, and for good reason: there are a lot of benefits to the organization – and to employees.

    #1: Save Money

    Perhaps one of the most common reasons for opting for remote-work arrangements is the potential cost savings. One study found that organizations could save about $11,000 per employee working from home half the time (Global Workplace Analytics, 2021).

    #2 Increased Attraction

    In addition, supporting remote-work arrangements can attract employees. One study found that 71% of employees would likely choose one employer over another based on WFH offerings (Owl Labs, 2019).

    #3 Improve productivity.

    There are also improvements to productivity. Fifty percent of employees report they would maintain or increase their productivity while working from home (Glassdoor Team, 2020).

    Remote work also has benefits to employees.

    #1: Save Money

    As with organizations, employees also benefit financially from remote work arrangements, saving between $2,500 and $4,000 and on average 11 working days while working from home half of the time.

    #2: Improved Wellbeing

    Most employees agree that working from home makes them happier, reduces stress, and provides an improved work-life balance through increased flexibility.

    Challenges

    Organizations

    • Concerns that WFH may stifle innovation (Scientific American, 2021), likely due to the potential lack of collaboration and knowledge sharing.
    • Fewer organic opportunities for informal interaction between employees working from home means active efforts are required to foster organizational culture.

    Leaders

    • 42% of managers believe that monitoring the productivity of their direct reports is a top challenge of WFH (Ultimate Software, 2019).
    • The lack of in-person supervision compounded with a lack of trust in employees leads many leaders to believe that WFH will result in a drop in productivity.

    Employees

    • 20% of employees report collaboration/communication as their top struggle with WFH (Owl Labs, 2021).
    • Employees often experience burnout from working longer hours due to the lack of commute, blurring of work and home life, and the perceived need to prove their productivity.

    Many of these barriers can be addressed by changing traditional mindsets and finding alternative ways of working, but the traditional approach to work is so entrenched that it has been hard to make the shift.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Many organizations are still grappling with the challenges of remote work. Some are just perceived challenges, while others are quite real.

    Limited innovation and a lack of informal interaction are a potential consequence of failing to properly adapt to the remote-work environment.

    Leaders also face challenges with remote work. Losing in-person supervision has led to the lack of trust and a perceived drop in productivity.

    A study conducted 2021 asked remote workers to identify their biggest struggle with working remotely. The top three struggles remote workers report facing are unplugging after work, loneliness, and collaborating and/or communicating.

    Seeing the struggles remote workers identify is a good reminder that these employees have a unique set of challenges. They need their managers to help them set boundaries around their work; create feelings of connectedness to the organization, culture, and team; and be expert communicators.

    1.2 Virtual teams: benefits and challenges

    20 Minutes

    1. Discuss and list:
      1. Any positives you’ve experienced since managing virtual employees.
      2. Any challenges you’ve had to manage connected to managing virtual employees.
    2. Record information in the workbook.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Personal experiences managing remote teams

    Output

    • List of benefits and challenges of remote work

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Section 1.2

    Laying the foundations for a virtual team

    The 3i’s: Inform, interact, and involve your way to effective management:

    Inform

    Interact Involve

    ↓ Down

    Connect

    ↑ Up

    Tell employees the whys

    Get to know employees

    Solicit input from employees

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Effectively managing a virtual team really comes down to adopting management approaches that will engage virtual employees.

    Managing a virtual team does not actually require a new management style. The basics of effective management are the same in both colocated and virtual teams; however, the emphasis on certain behaviors and actions we take often differs. Managing a virtual team requires much more thoughtfulness and planning in our everyday interactions with our teams as we cannot rely on the relative ease of face-to-face interactions available to colocated teams.

    The 3i’s Engaging Management Model is useful when interacting with all employees and provides a handy framework for more planful interactions with virtual employees.

    Think of your management responsibilities in these three buckets – they are the most important components of being an effective manager. We’re first going to look at inform and involve before moving on to interact.

    Inform: Relay information down from senior management and leaders to employees. Communicate the rationale behind decisions and priorities, and always explain how they will directly affect employees.

    Why is this important? According to McLean & Company’s Engagement Survey data, employees who say their managers keep them well informed about decisions that affect them are 3.4 times more likely to be engaged (Source: McLean & Company, 2020; N=77,363). Your first reaction to this might be “I already do this,” which may very well be the case. Keep in mind, though, we sometimes tend to communicate on a “need-to-know basis,” especially when we are stressed or short on time. Engaging employees takes more. Always focus on explaining the “why?” or the rationale behind business decisions.

    It might seem like this domain should be the least affected, since important company announcements probably continue in a remote environment. But remember that information like that also flows informally. And even in formal settings, there are question-and-answer opportunities. Or maybe your employee might come to your office to ask for more details. Virtual team members can’t gather around the watercooler. They don’t have the same opportunities to hear information in passing as people who are colocated do, so managers need to make a concerted effort to share information with virtual team members in a clear and timely way.

    Swinging over to the other end, we have involve: Involve your employees. Solicit information and feedback from employees and collaborate with them.

    However, it’s not enough to just solicit their feedback and input; you also need to act on it.

    Make sure you involve your employees in a meaningful way. Such collaboration makes employees feel like a valued part of the team. Not to mention that they often have information and perspectives that can help make your decisions stronger!

    Employees who say their department leaders act on feedback from them are 3.9 times more likely to be engaged than those whose leaders don’t. (Source: McLean & Company, 2020; N=59,779). That is a huge difference!

    Keeping virtual employees engaged and feeling connected and committed to the organization requires planful and regular application of the 3i’s model.

    Finally, Interact: Connect with employees on a personal level; get to know them and understand who they are on a personal and professional level.

    Why? Well, over and above the fact that it can be rewarding for you to build stronger relationships with your team, our data shows that human connection makes a significant difference with employees. Employees who believe their managers care about them as a person are 3.8 times more likely to be engaged than those who do not (Source: McLean & Company, 2017; N=70,927).

    And you might find that in a remote environment, this is the area that suffers the most, since a lot of these interactions tend to be unscripted, unscheduled, and face to face.

    Typically, if we weren’t in the midst of a pandemic, we’d emphasize the importance of allocating some budget to travel and get some face-to-face time with your staff. Meeting and interacting with team members face to face is crucial to building trusting relationships, and ultimately, an effective team, so given the context of our current circumstances, we recommend the use of video when interacting with your employees who are remote.

    Relay information down from senior management to employees.

    Ensure they’ve seen and understand any organization-wide communication.

    Share any updates in a timely manner.

    Connect with employees on a personal level.
    Ask how they’re doing with the new work arrangement.
    Express empathy for challenges (sick family member, COVID-19 diagnosis, etc.).
    Ask how you can support them.
    Schedule informal virtual coffee breaks a couple of times a week and talk about non-work topics.

    Get information from employees and collaborate with them.
    Invite their input (e.g. have a “winning remotely” brainstorming session).
    Escalate any challenges you can’t address to your VP.
    Give them as much autonomy over their work as possible – don’t micromanage.

    1.3 Identify behaviors to inform, interact with, and involve team members

    20 Minutes

    Individually:

    1. Identify one behavior for each of Inform, Interact, and Involve to improve.
    2. Record information in the workbook.

    As a group:

    1. Discuss behaviors to improve for each of Inform, Interact, and Involve and record new ideas to incorporate into your leadership practice.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • 3i's Model
    • Current leadership behaviors to improve

    Output

    • List of behaviors to better inform, interact, and involve team members

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Laying the foundation: Set clear expectations

    Tasks

    • What are the daily and weekly team activities? How do they affect one another?

    Goals

    • Clarify any adjustments to strategy based on the situation; clarify metrics.

    Communication

    • How often and when will you check in? What should they come to you for? What modalities will you use and when?

    Roadblocks

    • Involve your team in deciding how to handle roadblocks and challenges.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Clear expectations are important in any environment, remote or not. But it is much harder to do in a remote environment. The barrier to seeking clarification is so much higher (For example, email vs. catching someone in hallway, or you can’t notice that a colleague is struggling without them asking).

    Communication – This is one area where the importance actually changes in a remote context. We’ve been talking about a lot of practices that are the same in importance whether you’re in an office or remote, and maybe you just enact them differently. But clarity around communication processes is actually tremendously more important in a remote environment.

    Adopt a five-step process to set specific and documented expectations

    1. Check in with how your team member is doing on a daily basis. Don’t forget to ask how they are doing personally.
    2. Follow up on previously set expectations. Ask how things are going. Discuss if priorities or expectations have changed and update expectations accordingly.
    3. Ask if they are experiencing any roadblocks and collaborate to find solutions.
    4. Provide feedback and recognition as appropriate.
    5. Document newly set expectations – either through a collaboration tool or through email.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Suggested best practices: Hold daily team check-ins and hold separate individual check-ins. Increase frequency of these.

    During Check-in
    1. Set up a running Teams chat for your team.
    • This is your community. You must be the biggest cheerleader and keep the team feeling like they are contributing. Make sure everyone is involved.
  • Start each workday with a video scrum to discuss what’s coming today for your team.
    • Ask: What are you planning to work on today? Are there any roadblocks I can help with? Technology working OK?
  • Right after your team meeting, set up an “every morning video call” one-on-one meeting with each team member (5-10 minutes max).
    • Ask: What are you working on today? What will your momentum metrics be? What do you need from me?
  • Set up a separate video call at the end of the afternoon to review what everyone did (5 minutes max).
    • Ask: What went well? What went poorly? How can we improve?
  • After a Check-in
    1. Be accessible:
      • Ensure your team knows the best way to get in touch with you.
      • Email is not ideal for informal, frequent contact – use messaging instead.
    2. Be available:
      • Keep a running conversation going in Teams.
      • Respond in a timely manner; address issues quickly so that your team has what they need to succeed.
      • Let your team know if you’ll be away/offline for longer than an hour during the workday and ask them to do the same (e.g. for an appointment).
      • Help address roadblocks, answer questions, clarify priorities, etc.

    Define communication requirements

    • Set up an ongoing communication with your team.
      • E.g. a running conversation on Slack or Teams
    • Schedule daily virtual meetings and check-ins.
      • This can help to maintain a sense of normalcy and conduct a pulse check on your team.
    • Use video for important conversations.
      • Video chat creates better rapport, shows body language, and lessens feelings of isolation, but it can be taxing.
    • Set expectations about communication.
      • Differentiate between day-to-day communication and updates on the state of events.
    • Clearly communicate the collaboration toolkit.
      • What do we have available? What is the purpose of each?

    Speaker’s Notes:

    With organizational expectations set, we need to establish team expectations around how we collaborate and communicate.

    Today there is no lack of technology available to support our virtual communication. We can use the phone, conference calls, videoconferencing, Skype, instant messaging, [insert organization-specific technological tools.], etc.

    However, it is important to have a common understanding of which tools are most appropriate when and for what.

    What are some of the communication channel techniques you’ve found useful in your informal interactions with employees or that you’ve seen work well between employees?

    [Have participants share any technological tools they find useful and why.]

    Check in with your team on communication requirements

    • Should we share our calendars, hours of availability, and/or IM status?
    • How often should we meet as a team and one on one? Should we institute a time when we should not communicate virtually?
    • Which communication channel should we use in what context? How should we decide which communication method to use?
    • Should I share guidelines for email and meeting etiquette (or any other communication methods)?
    • Should we establish a new team charter?
    • What feedback does the team have regarding how we’ve been communicating?

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Whenever we interact, we make the following kinds of social exchanges. We exchange:

    • Information: Data or opinions
    • Emotions: Feelings and evaluations about the data or opinions
    • Motivations: What we feel like doing in response to data or opinions

    We need to make sure that these exchanges are happening as each team member intends. To do this, we have to be sensitive to what information is being conveyed, what emotions are involved in the interaction, and how we are motivating each other to act through the interaction. Every interaction will have intended and unintended effects on others. No one can pay attention to all of these aspects of communication all the time, but if we develop habits that are conducive to successful exchanges in all three areas, we can become more effective.

    In addition to being mindful of the exchange in our communication, as managers it is critical to build trusting relationships and rapport with employees as we saw in the 3i's model. However, in virtual teams we cannot rely on running into someone in the kitchen or hallway to have an informal conversation. We need to be thoughtful and deliberate in our interactions with employees. We need to find alternative ways to build these relationships with and between employees that are both easy and accepted by ourselves and employees. Because of that, it is important to set communication norms and really understand each other’s preferences. For example:

    • Timing of responses. Set the expectation that emails should be responded to within X hours/days unless otherwise noted in the actual email.
    • When it’s appropriate to send an email vs. using instant messaging.
    • A team charter – the team’s objectives, individual roles and responsibilities, and communication and collaboration guidelines.

    1.4 Identify and share ways you prefer to communicate for different activities

    20 Minutes

    1. Brainstorm and list the different types of exchanges you have with your virtual employees and they have with each other.
    2. List the various communication tools in use on your team.
    3. Assign a preferred communication method for each type of exchange

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Current types of exchanges on team
    • Communication methods used

    Output

    • Defined ways to communicate for each communication method

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Section 2.1
    Balancing wellbeing and performance in a virtual team context

    The pandemic has taken a significant toll on employees’ mental wellbeing

    44% of employees reported declined mental wellbeing since the start of the pandemic.

    • 44% of those who work from home.
    • 34% of those who have other work arrangements (i.e. onsite).
      (Qualtrics, 2020)

    "If one of our colleagues were to fall, break their leg, and get a cast, colleagues would probably rally around that person signing their cast. But, really, we don’t view the health of our brain the same as we do the health of our body."
    – Centre for Addiction and Mental Health (CAMH) Employee

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Despite being over two years into the pandemic, we are still seeing its effect on the physical and mental health of employees.

    The mental health aspect has been often overlooked by organizations, but in order to have a safe, happy, and productive team, you need to give mental health the same level of focus as physical heath. This requires a change in mindset in order for you as a leader to support your team's mental wellbeing during the pandemic and beyond.

    Employees are reporting several key mental wellbeing challenges

    Stress: 67%

    Employees report increasingly high levels of stress from the onset of COVID-19, stating that it has been the most stressful time in their careers.
    (Qualtrics, 2020)

    Anxiety: 57%

    Similarly, employees’ anxiety levels have peaked because of the pandemic and the uncertainty it brings.
    (Qualtrics, 2020)

    Four main themes surrounding stress & anxiety

    • Fear of contracting COVID-19
    • Financial pressures
    • Job security and uncertainty
    • Loneliness caused by social isolation

    Speaker’s Notes:

    The stress and uncertainty about the future caused by the pandemic and its fallout are posing the biggest challenges to employees.

    Organizations shutting down operations, moving to fully remote, or requiring some of their employees to be on site based on the current situation causes a lot of anxiety as employees are not able to plan for what is coming next.

    Adding in the loss of social networks and in-person interactions exacerbates the problem employees are facing. As leaders, it is your job to understand and mitigate these challenges wherever possible.

    Re-examine your workplace barriers to mental wellbeing

    New Barriers

    Old Barriers

    • Childcare/eldercare responsibilities
    • Fear of workplace health risks
    • Work location
    • Lost support networks
    • Changed work schedules
    • Social distancing
    • Workload
    • Fear of stigma
    • Benefits limits
    • Limits to paid time off
    • Lack of manager knowledge

    Key considerations:

    • Work Environment
      • Accessibility of mental wellbeing programs and initiatives
    • Organizational Culture
      • Modeling of wellbeing
      • Paid time off
      • Discussions around mental wellbeing
    • Total Rewards
      • Benefits coverage
      • Employee assistance programs (EAPs)
      • Manager knowledge

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Organizational barriers to mental wellbeing are sadly not new. Workloads, stigma around mental health, lack of sick days, and limits to benefits for mental health supports were challenges before the pandemic. Adding in the new barriers can very easily result in a tipping point for many employees who are simply not equipped to deal with or supported in dealing with the added burden of remote work in a post-pandemic world.

    To provide the needed support to your employees, it’s important to be mindful of the key considerations.

    Holistic employee wellbeing has never been more critical than it is right now

    Employee Wellbeing

    Physical

    The physical body; ensuring a person has the freedom, opportunities, and resources needed to sustainably maintain bodily health.

    Mental

    The psychological ability to cope with information, emotions, desires, and stressors (e.g. change, threats, etc.) in a healthy and balanced way. Essential for day-to-day living and functioning.

    Social

    The state of personal and professional relationships, including personal and community engagement. The capability for genuine, authentic, and mutually affirming interactions with others.

    Financial

    The state of a person’s finances; ensuring that a person feels capable to handle their financial situation and behaviors. The ability to live productively without the weight of financial stress.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    As a manager, you need to be mindful of all of these. Create an atmosphere where people are able to come to you for help if they are struggling in one of these areas. For example, some people might be more comfortable raising physical safety or comfort concerns (personal protective equipment, ergonomics) than concerns about mental health. Or they might feel like their feelings of loneliness are not appropriate to bring into their professional life.

    Wellbeing is a delicate subject, and most of the time, people are reluctant to talk about it. It requires vulnerability. And here’s the thing about it: Your staff will not drive a change in your team around making these topics more acceptable. It has to be the manager. You have to be the one to not just tell but show them that it’s OK to talk about this

    Encourage human-centered workplace behaviors

    Promote empathy as a focus value

    • Listen and show compassion.
    • Allow room for emotions.

    Encourage social connection

    • Leverage networks.
    • Infuse fun where possible.
    • Encourage community and sense of joint purpose.

    Cultivate a growth mindset

    • Encourage mindfulness and resilience.
    • Express gratitude.

    Empower others

    • Ask employees what they need and co-create solutions.
    • Integrate needs of personal and family life with work life.
    • Be clear on accountability.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    As a leader, your focus should be on encouraging the right behaviors on your team and in yourself.
    Show empathy; allowing room for emotion and showing you are willing and able to listen goes a long way to establishing trust.

    A growth mindset applies to resilience too. A person with a growth mindset is more likely to believe that even though they’re struggling now, they will get through it.

    Infuse fun – schedule social check-ins. This is not wasted time, or time off work – it is an integral part of the workday. We have less of it now organically, so you must bring it back deliberately. Remember that theme? We are deliberately reinfusing important organic elements into the workday.

    The last item, empowerment, is interesting – being clear on accountability. Have clear performance expectations. It might sound like telling people what to do would be disempowering, but it’s the opposite. By clarifying the goals of what they need to achieve, you empower them to invent their own “how,” because you and they are both sure they will arrive at the place that you agreed on. We will talk more about this in performance management.

    Emphasize the importance of wellbeing by setting the tone for the team

    Managers must…

    • LEAD BY EXAMPLE
      • Employees look to their managers for cues about how to react in a crisis. If the manager reacts with stress and fear, the team will follow.
    • ENCOURAGE OPEN COMMUNICATION
      • Frequent check-ins and transparent communication are essential during a time of crisis, especially when working remotely.
    • ACKNOWLEDGE THE SITUATION
      • Recognizing the stress that teams may be facing and expressing confidence in them goes a long way.
    • PROMOTE WELLBEING
      • Managers who take care of themselves can better support their teams and encourage them to practice good self-care too.
    • REDUCE STIGMA
      • Reducing stigma around mental health encourages people to come forward with their struggles and get the support they need.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Emphasize the importance of wellbeing with what you do. If you do not model self-care behavior, people will follow what you do, not what you say.

    Lead by example – Live the behaviors you want to see in your employees. If you show confidence, positivity, and resiliency, it will filter down to your team.

    Encourage open communication – Have regular meetings where your team is able to set the agenda, or allow one-on-ones to be guided by the employee. Make sure these are scheduled and keep them a priority.

    Acknowledge the situation – Pretending things are normal doesn’t help the situation. Talk about the stress that the team is facing and express confidence that you will get through it together.

    Promote wellbeing – Take time off, don’t work when you’re sick, and you will be better able to support your team!

    Reduce stigma – Call it out when you see it and be sure to remind people of and provide access to any supports that the organization has.

    Conduct dedicated conversations around wellbeing

    1. Check in with how each team member is doing frequently and ask how they are doing personally.
    2. Discuss how things are going. Ask: “How is your work situation working out for you so far? Do you feel supported? How are you taking care of yourself in these circumstances?”
    3. Ask if there are any stressors or roadblocks that they have experienced and collaborate to find solutions.
    4. Provide reassurance of your support and confidence in them.
    5. Document the plan for managing stressors and roadblocks – either through a collaboration tool or through email.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Going back to the idea of a growth mindset – this may be uncomfortable for you as a manager. So here’s a step-by-step guide that over time you can morph into your own style.

    With your team – be prepared to share first and to show it is OK to be vulnerable and address wellbeing seriously.

    1. Make sure you make time for the personal. Ask about their lives and show compassion.
    2. Give opportunities for them to bring up things that might stay hidden otherwise. Ask questions that show you care.
    3. Help identify areas they are struggling with and work with them to move past those areas.
    4. Make sure they feel supported in what they are going through and reassured of their place on the team.
    5. Roll wellbeing into your planning process. This signals to team that you see wellbeing as important, not just a checklist to cover during a team meeting, and are ready to follow through on it.

    Recognize when professional help is needed

    SIGNS OF BURNOUT: Overwhelmed; Frequent personal disclosure; Trouble sleeping and focusing; Frequent time off; Strained relationships; Substance abuse; Poor work performance

    Speaker’s Notes:

    As a leader, it is important to be on the lookout for warning signs of burnout and know when to step in and direct individuals to professional help.

    Poor work performance – They struggle to maintain work performance, even after you’ve worked with them to create coping strategies.

    Overwhelmed – They repeatedly tell you that they feel overwhelmed, very stressed, or physically unwell.

    Frequent personal disclosure – They want to discuss their personal struggles at length on a regular basis.

    Trouble sleeping and focusing – They tell you that they are not sleeping properly and are unable to focus on work.

    Frequent time off – They feel the need to take time off more frequently.

    Strained relationships – They have difficulty communicating effectively with coworkers; relationships are strained.

    Substance abuse – They show signs of substance abuse (e.g. drunk/high while working, social media posts about drinking during the day).

    Keeping an eye out for these signs and being able to step in before they become unmanageable can mean the difference between keeping and losing an employee experiencing burnout.

    Remember: Managers also need support

    • Added burden
    • Lead by example
    • Self-care

    Speaker’s Notes:

    If you’ve got managers under you, be mindful of their unique stressors. Don’t forget to check in with them, too.

    If you are a manager, remember to take care of yourself and check in with your own manager about your own wellbeing.

    2.1 Balance wellbeing and performance in a virtual team context

    30 Minutes

    1. Brainstorm and list current practices and challenges connected to wellbeing on your teams.
    2. Choose one or two wellbeing challenges that are most relevant for your team.
    3. Discuss as a group and identify one solution for each challenge that you can put into action with your own virtual team. Document this under “Action plan to move forward” on the workbook slide “2.1 Balancing wellbeing and performance in a virtual team context.”

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Current practices and challenges connected to wellbeing

    Output

    • Action plan for each challenge listed

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Section 2.2

    Managing performance in a virtual team context

    Virtual employees are craving more meaningful interactions with their managers

    A survey indicated that, overall, remote employees showed less satisfaction with manager interactions compared to other non-remote employees.

    1. 16% less likely to strongly agree their manager involves them in setting goals at work.
    2. 28% less likely to strongly agree they continually work with their manager to clarify work priorities.
    3. 29% less likely to strongly agree they have reviewed their greatest successes with their manager in the last six months.
    4. 30% less likely to strongly agree they have talked with their manager about progress toward goals in the last six months.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    In many cases, we have put people into virtual roles because they are self-directed and self-motivated workers who can thrive with the kind of autonomy and flexibility that comes with virtual work. As managers, we should expect many of these workers to be proactively interested in how they are performing and in developing their careers.

    It would be a mistake to take a hands-off approach when managing virtual workers. A recent survey indicated that, overall, remote employees showed less satisfaction with manager interactions compared to other non-remote employees. It was also one of the aspects of their work experience they were least satisfied with overall (Gallup, State of the American Workplace, 2017). Simply put, virtual employees are craving more meaningful conversations with their managers.

    While conversations about performance and development are important for all employees (virtual or non-virtual), managers of remote teams can have a significant positive impact on their virtual employees’ experience and engagement at work by making efforts to improve their involvement and support in these areas.

    During this module we will work together to identify ways that each of us can improve how we manage the performance of our virtual employees. At the end of the module everyone will create an action plan that they can put in place with their own teams. In the next module, we go through a similar set of activities to create an action plan for our interactions with employees about their development.

    Building blocks of performance management

    • Goal Setting

    • Setting Expectations

    • Measuring Progress

    • Feedback & Coaching

    Speaker’s Notes:

    [Include a visualization of your existing performance management process in the slide. Walk the participants through the process to remind them of what is expected. While the managers participating in the training should know this, there may be different understandings of it, or it might just be the case that it’s been a while since people looked at the official process. The intention here is merely to ensure everyone is on the same page for the purposes of the activities that follow.]

    Now that we’ve reviewed performance management at a high level, let’s dive into what is currently happening with the performance management of virtual teams.

    I know that you have some fairly extensive material at your organization around how to manage performance. This is fantastic. And we’re going to focus mainly on how things change in a virtual context.

    When measuring progress, how do you as a manager make sure that you are comfortable not seeing your team physically at their desks? This is the biggest challenge for remote managers.

    2.2 Share current performance management practices for virtual teams

    30 Minutes

    1. Brainstorm and list current high-level performance management practices connected to each building block. Record in your workbook.
    2. Discuss current challenges connected to implementing the building blocks with virtual employees.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Current performance management practices
    • Challenges surrounding performance management

    Output

    • Current state of virtual performance management defined

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Communicate the “why”: Cascade organizational goals

    This image depicts the Cascade of Why- organizational goals. Organizational Mission; Organizational Values; Organizational Goals; Department Goals; Team Goals; Individual Goals

    Speaker’s Notes:

    When assisting your employees with their goals, think about the organization’s overall mission and goals to help you determine team and individual goals.

    • Organizational goals: Employee goals should align with organizational goals. Goals may cascade down through the organization.
    • Department or team goals: Create a clear strategy based on high-level goals for the year so employees can link short-term goals to the larger picture.
    • Individual goals: Employees should draw on their individual development plan to help set performance goals.

    Sometimes it’s difficult to get employees thinking about goals and they need assistance from managers. It’s also important to be clear on team goals to help guide employees in setting individual ones.

    The basic idea is to show people how their individual day-to-day work contributes to the overall success of the organization. It gives them a sense of purpose and a rationale, which translates to motivation. And also helps them problem solve with more autonomy.

    You’re giving people a sense of the importance of their own contribution.

    How to set clear expectations for job performance

    Ensure employees have a clear understanding of what’s expected for their role:

    1. Review their metrics so they understand how they’re being evaluated.
    2. Outline daily, weekly, monthly, and quarterly goals.
    3. If needed, help them plan when and how each part of their job should be done and what to prioritize.
    4. Ask them to come to you early if they experience a roadblock so that you can help rather than having them flounder on their own.
    5. Document instances where employees aren’t meeting role or performance expectations.

    Speaker’s Notes:

    Tailor performance goals to address any root causes of poor performance.

    For example:

    • If personal factors are getting in the way, work with the employee (and HR if necessary) to create a strategy to address any impediments to performing in the role.

    Tips for managing performance remotely

    • Reflect on one key question: What needs to happen for my direct reports to continue their work while working remotely?
    • Manage for results – not employee visibility at the office.
    • Use metrics to measure performance. If you don’t have any, define tasks and deliverables as clearly as possible and conduct regular check-ins.
    • Work with the employee to set goals and metrics to measure progress.

    Focus on results: Be flexible about how and when work gets done, as long as team members are hitting their targets.

    • For example, if they have childcare duties from 3 to 5pm during school closures and want to work later in the evening to make up the time, that’s fine – as long as the work gets done.
    • Set clear expectations about which work must be done during normal work hours (e.g. attend team meetings, client calls) and which can be done at other hours.
    • Team members must arrange with you any nonstandard working hours before they start using an altered schedule. It is your responsibility to keep track of hours and any alternate arrangements.
    • Don’t make team members feel constantly monitored (i.e. “Where were you from 10 to 11am?”); trust them until you have reason not to.

    Encourage your team members to unplug: If they’re sending you emails late at night and they haven’t made an alternate work hours agreement with you, encourage them to take time away from work.

    • It’s harder to unplug when working at home, and everyone needs a break to stay productive.

    Avoid micromanagement with holistic performance measures

    Quality

    How well tasks are accomplished

    Behavior

    Related to specific employee actions, skills, or attitudes

    Quantity

    How much work gets done

    Holistic measures demonstrate all the components required for optimal performance. This is the biggest driver in having comfort as a manager of a remote team and avoiding micromanagement. Typically these are set at the organizational level. You may need to adjust for individual roles, etc.

    Speaker's Notes:

    Metrics come in different types. One way to ensure your metrics capture the full picture is to use a mix of different kinds of metrics.

    Some metrics are quantitative: they describe quantifiable or numerical aspects of the goal. This includes timeliness. On the other hand, qualitative metrics have to do with the final outcome or product. And behavioral metrics have to do with employees' actions, skills, or attitudes. Using different kinds of metrics together helps you set holistic measures, which capture all the components of optimal performance toward your goal and prevent gaming the system.

    Let's take an example:

    A courier might have an objective to do a good job delivering packages. An example of a quantitative measure might be that the courier is required to deliver X number of packages per day on time. The accompanying metrics would be the number of packages delivered per day and the ratio of packages delivered on time vs. late.

    Can you see a problem if we use only these quantitative measures to evaluate the courier's performance?

    Wait to see if anyone volunteers an answer. Discuss suggestions.

    That's right, if the courier's only goal is to deliver more packages, they might start to rush, may ruin the packages, and may offer poor customer service. We can help to guard against this by implementing qualitative and behavioral measures as well. For example, a qualitative measure might be that the courier is required to deliver the packages in mint condition. And the metric would be the number of customer complaints about damaged packages or ratings on a satisfaction survey related to package condition.

    For the behavioral aspect, the courier might be required to provide customer-centric service with a positive attitude. The metrics could be ratings on customer satisfaction surveys related to the courier's demeanor or observations by the manager.

    Managing poor performance virtually: Look for key signs

    It’s crucial to acknowledge that an employee might have an “off week” or need time to balance work and life – things that can be addressed with performance management (PM) techniques. Managers should move into the process for performance improvement when:

    1. Performance fluctuates frequently or significantly.
    2. Performance has dropped for an extended period of time.
    3. Expectations are consistently not being met.

    Key signs to look for:

    • PM data/performance-related assessments
    • Continual absences
    • Decreased quality or quantity of output
    • Frequent excuses (e.g. repeated internet outages)
    • Lack of effort or follow-through
    • Missed deadlines
    • Poor communication or lack of responsiveness
    • Failure to improve

    Speaker’s notes:

    • Let’s talk more about identifying low performance.
    • Everybody has off days or weeks. And what if they are new to the role or new to working remotely? Their performance may be low because they need time to adjust. These sort of situations should be managed, but they don’t require moving into the process for performance improvement.
    • When managing employees who are remote or working in a hybrid situation, it is important to be alert to these signs and check in with your employees on a regular basis. Aim to identify and work with employees on addressing performance issues as they arise rather than waiting until it’s too late. Depending on your availability, the needs of the employee, and the complexity of their role, check-ins could occur daily, weekly, and/or monthly. As I mentioned, for remote employees, it’s often better to check-in more frequently but for a shorter period of time.
    • You want to be present in their work life and available to help them manage through roadblocks and stay on track, but try to avoid over-monitoring employees. Micromanaging can impact the manager-employee relationship and lead to the employee feeling that there is a lack of trust. Remember, the employee needs to be responsible for their own performance and improvement.
    • Check-ins should not just be about the work either. Take some time to check in personally. This is particularly important when managing remotely. It enables you to build a personal relationship with the employee and also keeps you aware if there are other personal issues at play that are impacting their work.
    • So, how do you know what does require performance improvement? There are three key things that you should look for that are clear signals that performance improvement is necessary:
      1. Their performance is fluctuating frequently or significantly.
      2. Their performance has dropped for an extended period of time.
      3. Expectations are consistently not being met.
    • What do you think are some key signs to look for that indicate a performance issue is occurring?

    Managing poor performance virtually: Conducting remote performance conversations

    Video calling

    Always use video calls instead of phone calls when possible so that you don’t lose physical cues and body language.

    Meeting invitations

    Adding HR/your leader to a meeting invite about performance may cause undue stress. Think through who needs to participate and whether they need to be included in the invite itself.

    Communication

    Ensure there are no misunderstandings by setting context for each discussion and having the employee reiterate the takeaways back to you.

    Focus on behavior

    Don’t assume the intent behind the behavior(s) being discussed. Instead, just focus on the behavior itself.

    Policies

    Be sure to adhere to any relevant HR policies and support systems. Working with HR throughout the process will ensure none are overlooked.

    Speaker’s notes:

    There are a few best practices you should follow when having performance conversations:

    • First, if you are in a different work environment than your employee, always use video calls instead of phone calls whenever possible so that you don’t miss out on physical cues and body language. If videoconferencing isn’t the norm, encourage them to turn on their video. Be empathic that it can feel awkward but explain the benefits, and you will both have an easier time communicating and understanding each other.
    • As I’ve mentioned, be considerate of the environment they are in. If they are in the office and you are working remotely, be sure to book a private meeting room for them to go to for the conversation. If they are working from home, be sure to check that they are prepared and able to focus on the conversation.
    • Next, carefully consider who you are adding to the meeting invite and whether it’s necessary for them to be there. Adding HR or your leader to a meeting invite may cause undue stress for the employee.
    • Consider the timing of the invite. Don’t send it out weeks in advance. When a performance problem exists, you’ll want to address it as soon as possible. A day or two of notice would be an ideal approach because it gives them a heads up but will not cause them extended stress or worrying.
    • Be considerate about the timing of the meeting and what else they may have scheduled. For example, a Friday afternoon before they are heading off on vacation or right before they are leading an important client call would not be appropriate timing.
    • As we just mentioned clear communication is critical. Ensure there are no misunderstandings by setting context for each discussion and having the employee reiterate takeaways back to you.
    • Focus on the behavior and don’t assume their intent. It can be tempting to say, “I know you didn’t mean to miss the deadline,” but you don’t know what they intended. Often people are not aware of the impact their behavior can have on others.
    • Lastly, be sure to adhere to any relevant HR policies and support systems. Working with HR throughout the process will ensure nothing is overlooked.

    2.3 Identify challenges of current practices and propose solutions

    30 Minutes

    1. Select one or two challenges from the previous activity.
    2. Identify one solution for each challenge that you can put into action with your own virtual team. Document in the workbook.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Current performance management practices
    • Challenges surrounding performance management

    Output

    • Action plan to move forward

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Optional Section

    Employee development in a virtual team setting

    There are three main development approaches for both colocated and virtual employees

    Formal Training; Relational Learning; Experimental Learning

    Speaker’s Notes:

    As we have seen, our virtual employees crave more meaningful interactions with their managers. In addition to performance conversations, managers should also be having regular discussions with their employees about their employee development plans. One key component of these discussions is career planning. Whether you are thinking shorter term – how to become better at their current role – or longer term – how to advance beyond their current role – discussions about employee development are a great way to engage employees. Employees are ultimately responsible for creating and executing their own development plans, but managers are responsible for making sure that employees have thought through these plans and helping employees identify opportunities for executing those plans.

    To help us think about our own employee development practices, identify challenges they pose when working with virtual employees, and create solutions to these challenges, it is useful to think about employee development opportunities according to three types:

    1. The first kind of development opportunity is formal training. Formal training is organized and has a clearly defined curriculum and desired outcome. It usually takes the form of a group training session (like this one) or training videos or materials that employees can watch individually and on their own time. These opportunities usually end with a test or assignment that can be used to evaluate the degree to which the participant achieved the desired learning outcomes.
    2. The second kind of development opportunity is relational learning. Perhaps the most common form of this type of learning is coaching or mentoring. By establishing a long-term work relationship, checking in with employees about their daily work and development goals, and sharing their own experiences and knowledge, mentors help employees reflect and draw out learning from everyday, on-the-job development activities. Other examples include a peer support group or communities of practice. In these group settings peers share best practices and work together to overcome challenges.
    3. The third kind of development opportunity is experiential learning. This kind of opportunity provides employees the chance to work on real work problems, and the output of the development work can directly benefit the organization. Most people learn best by doing. On-the-job experiences that are challenging or new can force people to use and develop new skills and knowledge based on what worked effectively and what failed. Examples of experiential learning are on-the-job learning for new hires, stretch assignments, or special projects that take the employee beyond their daily routine and allow them to try new activities and develop competencies that they would not have the chance to develop as part of their regular job.

    According to McLean & Company, organizations should use the “70-20-10” rule as a rough guideline when working with employees to create their development plans: 10% of the plan should be dedicated to formal training opportunities, 20% to relational learning, and 70% to experiential learning. Managers should work with employees to identify their performance and career goals, ensure that their development plans are aligned with these goals, and include an appropriate mixture of all three kinds of development opportunities.

    To help identify challenges and solutions, think about how virtual work arrangements will impact the employee’s ability to leverage each type of opportunity at our organization.

    Here are some examples that can help us start thinking about the kinds of challenges virtual employees on our team face:

    Career Planning

    • One challenge can be identifying a career path that is consistent with working virtually. If switching from a virtual arrangement to an onsite arrangement is not a viable option for an employee, some career paths may not feasibly be open to them (at least as the company is currently organized). For example, if an employee would eventually like to be promoted to a senior leadership role in their business function but all senior leaders are required to work onsite at corporate headquarters, the employee will need to consider whether such a move is possible for them. In some cases employees may be willing to do this, but in others they may not. The important thing is to have these conversations with virtual employees and avoid the assumption that all career paths can be done virtually, since that might not be the case

    Formal Training

    • This is probably the least problematic form of employee development for virtual employees. In many cases this kind of training is scheduled well in advance, so virtual employees may be able to join non-virtual employees in person for some group training. When this is not possible (due to distance, budget, or time zone), many forms of group training can be recorded and watched by virtual employees later. Training videos and training materials can also easily be shared with virtual employees using existing collaboration software.

    Relational Learning

    • One major challenge here is developing a mentoring relationship virtually. As we discussed in the module on performance management, developing relationships virtually can be challenging because people cannot rely upon the kind of informal and spontaneous interactions that occur when people are located in the same office. Mentors and mentees will have to put in more effort and planning to get to know each other and they will have to schedule frequent check-ins so that employees can reflect upon their progress and experience (with the help of their mentors) more often.
    • Time zones and technology may pose potential barriers for certain candidates to be mentors. In some cases, employees that are best qualified to be mentors may not be as comfortable with collaborative software as other mentors or their mentees. If there are large time zone differences, some people who would otherwise be interested in acting as a mentor may be dissuaded. Managers need to take this into consideration if they are connecting employees with mentors or if they are thinking of taking on the mentor role themselves.

    Experiential Learning

    • Virtual employees risk being overlooked for special projects due to the “out of sight, out of mind” bias: When special projects come up, the temptation is to look around the room and see who is the best fit. The problem is, however, that in some cases the highest performers or best fit may not physically be in the room. In these cases it is important for managers to take on an advocate role for their employees and remind other managers that they have good virtual employees on their team that should be included or contacted. It is also important for managers to keep their team informed about these opportunities as often as possible.
    • Sometimes certain projects or certain kinds of work just cannot be done virtually in a company for a variety of reasons. The experiential learning opportunities will not be open to virtual employees. If such opportunities are open to the majority of other workers in this role (potentially putting virtual employees’ career development at a disadvantage relative to their peers), managers should work with their virtual employees to identify alternative experiences. Managers may also want to consider advocating for more or for higher quality experiential learning opportunities at the organization.

    Now that we have considered some general examples of challenges and solutions, let’s look at our own employee development practices and think about the practical steps we can take as managers to improve employee development for our virtual employees.

    Employee development basics

    • Career planning & performance improvement
    • Formal training
    • Relational learning
    • Experiential learning

    Speaker’s Notes:

    [Customize this slide according to your organization’s own policies and processes for employee development. Provide useful images that outline this on the slide, and in these notes describe the processes/policies that are in place. Note: In some cases policies or processes may not be designed with virtual employees or virtual teams in mind. That is okay for the purposes of this training module. In the following activities participants will discuss how they apply these policies and processes with their virtual teams. If your organization is interested in adapting its policies/processes to better support virtual workers, it may be useful to record those conversations to supplement existing policies later.]

    Now that we have considered some general examples of challenges and solutions, let’s look at our own employee development practices and think about the practical steps we can take as managers to improve employee development for our virtual employees.

    2.4 Share current practices for developing employees on a virtual team

    30 Minutes

    1. Brainstorm and list current high-level employee development practices. Record in your workbook.
    2. Discuss current challenges connected to developing virtual employees. Record in your workbook.
    3. Identify one solution for each challenge that you can put into action with your own virtual team.
    4. Discuss as a group.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Current employee development practices
    • Challenges surrounding employee development

    Output

    • Action plan to move forward

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Refine Action Plans

    2.5 Refine your action plan and commit to implementing it

    30 Minutes

    1. Review your action plans for consistency and overlap. Highlight any parts you may struggle to complete.
    2. Meeting with your group, summarize your plans to each other. Provide feedback and discuss each other’s action plans.
    3. Discuss how you can hold each other accountable.

    Download the Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Input

    • Action items from previous activities.

    Output

    • Action plan to move forward

    Materials

    • Workbook: Equip Managers to Effectively Manage Virtual Teams

    Participants

    • All managers with direct reports working virtually

    Summary of Accomplishment

    • We do not need to go out and learn a new set of manager responsibilities to better manage our virtual teams; rather, we have to “dial up” certain responsibilities we already have or adjust certain approaches that we already take.
    • It is important to set clear expectations. While managers are ultimately responsible for making sure expectations are set and are clearly communicated, they are not the only ones with responsibilities. Employees and managers need to work together to overcome the challenges that virtual work involves.
    • Virtual employees crave meaningful interactions with their managers and team. Managers must take charge in fostering an atmosphere of openness around wellbeing and establish effective performance management strategies. By being proactive with our virtual teams’ wellness and mindful of our performance management habits, we can take significant steps toward keeping these employees engaged and productive.
    • Effective management in virtual contexts requires being more deliberate than is typical in non-virtual contexts. By working as a group to identify challenges and propose solutions, we have helped each other create action plans that we can use going forward to continually improve our management practices.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an info-tech workshop or guided implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Speaker’s Notes:

    First, let’s take a moment to summarize the key things we have learned today:

    1. We do not need to go out and learn a new set of manager competencies to better manage our virtual teams; rather, we have to “dial up” certain competencies we already have or adjust certain approaches that we already take. In many cases we just need to be more aware of the challenges that virtual communication poses and be more planful in our approaches.
    2. It is important to set clear expectations. While managers are ultimately responsible for making sure expectations are set and clearly communicated, they are not the only ones with responsibilities. Employees and managers need to work together to overcome the challenges that virtual work involves. Making sure that teams have meaningful conversations about expectations, come to a shared understanding of them, and record them will create a firm foundation for all other interactions on the virtual team.
    3. Virtual employees crave meaningful interactions with their managers related to performance and employee development. By creating action plans for improving these kinds of interactions with our teams, we can take significant steps toward keeping these employees engaged and productive.
    4. Effective performance management and employee development in virtual contexts require more planfulness than is required in non-virtual contexts. By working as a group to identify challenges and propose solutions, we have helped each other create action plans that we can use going forward to continually improve our management practices.

    Is there anything that anyone has learned that is not on this list and that they would like to share with the group?

    Finally, were there any challenges identified today that were not addressed?

    [Note to facilitator: Take note of any challenges not addressed and commit to getting back to the participants with some suggested solutions.]

    Additional resources

    Manager Training: Lead Through Change

    Train managers to navigate the interpersonal challenges associated with change management and develop their communication and leadership skills. Upload this LMS module into your learning management system to enable online training.

    Manager Training: Build a Better Manager: Manage Your People

    Management skills training is needed, but organizations are struggling to provide training that makes a long-term difference in the skills managers use in their day to day.

    Many training programs are ineffective because they offer the wrong content, deliver it in a way that is not memorable, and are not aligned with the IT department’s business objectives.

    Blueprint: Manage Poor Performance While Working From Home

    Assess and improve remote work performance with our ready-to-use tools.

    Works Cited

    April, Richard. “10 KPIs Every Sales Manager Should Measure in 2019.” HubSpot, 24 June 2019. Web.

    Banerjea, Peter. “5 Powerful Strategies for Managing a Remote Sales Team.” Badger - Maps for field sales, n.d. Web.

    Bibby, Adrianne. “5 Employers’ Awesome Quotes about Work Flexibility.” FlexJobs, 9 January 2017. Web.

    Brogie, Frank. “The 14 KPIs every field sales rep should strive to improve.” Repsly, 2018. Web.

    Dunn, Julie. “5 smart tips for leading field sales teams.” LevelEleven, March 2015. Web.

    Edinger, Scott. “How great sales leaders coach.” Forbes, 2013. Web.

    “Employee Outlook: Employee Views on Working Life.” CIPD, April 2016. Web.

    Hall, Becki. “The 5 biggest challenges facing remote workers (and how to solve them).” interact, 7 July 2017. Web.

    Hofstede, Geert. “National Cultural Dimensions.” Hofstede Insights, 2012. Web.

    “Inventory of U.S. Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Sinks: 1990-2014 (EPA 430-R-16-002).” Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), 15 April 2016.

    “Latest Telecommuting Statistics.” Global Workplace Analytics, June 2021. Web.

    Knight, Rebecca. “How to manage remote direct reports.” Harvard Business Review, 2015. Web.

    “Rewards and Recognition: 5 ways to show remote worker appreciation.” FurstPerson, 2019. Web.

    Palay, Jonathan. "How to build your sales management cadence." CommercialTribe, 22 March 2018. Web.

    “Sales Activity Management Matrix.” Asian Sales Guru, 2019. Web.

    Smith, Simone. “9 Things to Consider When Recognizing Remote Employees.” hppy, 2018. Web.

    “State of Remote Work 2017.” OWL Labs, 2021. Web.

    “State of the American Workplace.” Gallup, 2017. Web.

    “Telework Savings Potential.” Global Workplace Analytics, June 2021. Web.

    “The Future of Jobs Employment Trends.” World Economic Forum, 2016. Web.

    “The other COVID-19 crisis: Mental health.” Qualtrics, 14 April 2020. Web.

    Thompson, Dan. “The straightforward truth about effective sales leadership.” Sales Hacker, 2017. Web.

    Tsipursky, Gleb. “Remote Work Can Be Better for Innovation Than In-Person Meetings.” Scientific American, 14 Oct. 2021. Web.

    Walsh, Kim. “New sales manager? Follow this guide to crush your first quarter.” HubSpot, May 2019. Web.

    “What Leaders Need to Know about Remote Workers: Surprising Differences in Workplace Happiness and Relationships.” TINYpulse, 2016.

    Zenger, Jack, and Joe Folkman. “Feedback: The Leadership Conundrum.” Talent Quarterly: The Feedback Issue, 2015.

    Contributors

    Anonymous CAMH Employee

    z-Series Modernization and Migration

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}114|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    Under the best of circumstances, mainframe systems are complex, expensive, and difficult to scale. In today’s world, applications written for mainframe legacy systems also present significant operational challenges to customers compounded by the dwindling pool of engineers who specialize in these outdated technologies. Many organizations want to migrate their legacy applications to the cloud but to do so they need to go through a lengthy migration process that is made more challenging by the complexity of mainframe applications.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The most common tactic is for the organization to better realize their z/Series options and adopt a strategy built on complexity and workload understanding. To make the evident, obvious, the options here for the non-commodity are not as broad as with commodity server platforms and the mainframe is arguably the most widely used and complex non-commodity platform on the market.

    Impact and Result

    This research will help you:

    • Evaluate the future viability of this platform.
    • Assess the fit and purpose, and determine TCO
    • Develop strategies for overcoming potential challenges.
    • Determine the future of this platform for your organization.

    z/Series Modernization and Migration Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. z/Series Modernization and Migration Guide – A brief deck that outlines key migration options and considerations for the z/Series platform.

    This blueprint will help you assess the fit, purpose, and price; develop strategies for overcoming potential challenges; and determine the future of z/Series for your organization.

    • z/Series Modernization and Migration Storyboard

    2. Scale Up vs. Scale Out TCO Tool – A tool that provides organizations with a framework for TCO.

    Use this tool to play with the pre-populated values or insert your own amounts to compare possible database decisions, and determine the TCO of each. Note that common assumptions can often be false; for example, open-source Cassandra running on many inexpensive commodity servers can actually have a higher TCO over six years than a Cassandra environment running on a larger single expensive piece of hardware. Therefore, calculating TCO is an essential part of the database decision process.

    • Scale Up vs. Scale Out TCO Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    z/Series Modernization and Migration

    The biggest migration is yet to come.

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech Insight

    “A number of market conditions have coalesced in a way that is increasingly driving existing mainframe customers to consider running their application workloads on alternative platforms. In 2020, the World Economic Forum noted that 42% of core skills required to perform existing jobs are expected to change by 2022, and that more than 1 billion workers need to be reskilled by 2030.” – Dale Vecchio

    Your Challenge

    It seems like anytime there’s a new CIO who is not from the mainframe world there is immediate pressure to get off this platform. However, just as there is a high financial commitment required to stay on System Z, moving off is risky and potentially more costly. You need to truly understand the scale and complexity ahead of the organization.

    Common Obstacles

    Under the best of circumstances, mainframe systems are complex, expensive, and difficult to scale. In today’s world, applications written for mainframe legacy systems also present significant operational challenges to customers compounded by the dwindling pool of engineers who specialize in these outdated technologies. Many organizations want to migrate their legacy applications to the cloud, but to do so they need to go through a lengthy migration process that is made more challenging by the complexity of mainframe applications.

    Info-Tech Approach

    The most common tactic is for the organization to better realize its z/Series options and adopt a strategy built on complexity and workload understanding. To make the evident, obvious: the options here for the non-commodity are not as broad as with commodity server platforms and the mainframe is arguably the most widely used and complex non-commodity platform on the market.

    Review

    We help IT leaders make the most of their z/Series environment

    Problem statement:

    The z/Series remains a vital platform for many businesses and continues to deliver exceptional reliability and performance and play a key role in the enterprise. With the limited and aging resources at hand, CIOs and the like must continually review and understand their migration path with the same regard as any other distributed system roadmap.

    This research is designed for:

    IT strategic direction decision makers.

    IT managers responsible for an existing z/Series platform.

    Organizations evaluating platforms for mission critical applications.

    This research will help you:

    1. Evaluate the future viability of this platform.
    2. Assess the fit and purpose, and determine TCO.
    3. Develop strategies for overcoming potential challenges.
    4. Determine the future of this platform for your organization.

    Analyst Perspective

    Good Luck.

    Darin Stahl.

    Modernize the mainframe … here we go again.

    Prior to 2020, most organizations were muddling around in “year eleven of the four-year plan” to exit the mainframe platform where a medium-term commitment to the platform existed. Since 2020, it appears the appetite for the mainframe platform changed. Again. Discussions mostly seem to be about what the options are beyond hardware outsourcing or re-platforming to “cloud” migration of workloads – mostly planning and strategy topics. A word of caution: it would appear unwise to stand in front of the exit door for fear of being trampled.

    Hardware expirations between now and 2025 are motivating hosting deployments. Others are in migration activities, and some have already decommissioned and migrated but now are trying to rehab the operations team now lacking direction and/or structure.

    There is little doubt that modernization and “digital transformation” trends will drive more exit traffic, so IT leaders who are still under pressure to get off the platform need to assess their options and decide. Being in a state of perpetually planning to get off the mainframe handcuffs your ability to invest in the mainframe, address deficiencies, and improve cost-effectiveness.

    Darin Stahl
    Principal Research Advisor, Infrastructure & Operations Research
    Info-Tech Research Group

    The mainframe “fidget spinner”

    Thinking of modernizing your mainframe can cause you angst so grab a fidget spinner and relax because we have you covered!

    External Business Pressures:

    • Digital transformation
    • Modernization programs
    • Compliance and regulations
    • TCO

    Internal Considerations:

    • Reinvest
    • Migrate to a new platform
    • Evaluate public and vendor cloud alternatives
    • Hosting versus infrastructure outsourcing

    Info-Tech Insight

    With multiple control points to be addressed, care must be taken to simplify your options while addressing all concerns to ease operational load.

    The analyst call review

    “Who has Darin talked with?” – Troy Cheeseman

    Dating back to 2011, Darin Stahl has been the primary z/Series subject matter expert within the Infrastructure & Operations Research team. Below represents the percentage of calls, per industry, where z/Series advisory has been provided by Darin*:

    37% - State Government

    19% - Insurance

    11% - Municipality

    8% - Federal Government

    8% - Financial Services

    5% - Higher Education

    3% - Retail

    3% - Hospitality/Resort

    3% - Logistics and Transportation

    3% - Utility

    Based on the Info-Tech call history, there is a consistent cross section of industry members who not only rely upon the mainframe but are also considering migration options.

    Note:

    Of course, this only represents industries who are Info-Tech members and who called for advisory services about the mainframe.

    There may well be more Info-Tech members with mainframes who have no topic to discuss with us about the mainframe specifically. Why do we mention this?

    We caution against suggesting things like, ”somewhat less than 50% of mainframes live in state data centers” or any other extrapolated inference from this data.

    Our viewpoint and discussion is based on the cases and the calls that we have taken over the years.

    *37+ enterprise calls were reviewed and sampled.

    Scale out versus scale up

    For most workloads “scale out" (e.g. virtualized cloud or IaaS ) is going to provide obvious and quantifiable benefits.

    However, with some workloads (extremely large analytics or batch processing ) a "scale up" approach is more optimal. But the scale up is really limited to very specific workloads. Despite some assumptions, the gains made when moving from scale up to scale out are not linear.

    Obviously, when you scale out from a performance perspective you experience a drop in what a single unit of compute can do. Additionally, there will be latency introduced in the form of network overhead, transactions, and replication into operations that were previously done just bypassing object references within a single frame.

    Some applications or use cases will have to be architected or written differently (thinking about the high-demand analytic workloads at large scale). Remember the “grid computing” craze that hit us during the early part of this century? It was advantageous for many to distribute work across a grid of computing devices for applications but the advantage gained was contingent on the workload able to be parsed out as work units and then pulled back together through the application.

    There can be some interesting and negative consequences for analytics or batch operations in a large scale as mentioned above. Bottom line, as experienced previously with Microfocus mainframe ports to x86, the batch operations simply take much longer to complete.

    Big Data Considerations*:

    • Value: Data has no inherent value until it’s used to solve a business problem.
    • Variety: The type of data being produced is increasingly diverse and ranges from email and social media to geo-spatial and photographic data. This data may be difficult to process using a structured data model.
    • Volume: The sheer size of the datasets is growing exponentially, often ranging from terabytes to petabytes. This is complicating traditional data management strategies.
    • Velocity: The increasing speed at which data is being collected and processed is also causing complications. Big data is often time sensitive and needs to be captured in real time as it is streaming into the enterprise.

    *Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms

    Consider your resourcing

    Below is a summary of concerns regarding core mainframe skills:

    1. System Management (System Programmers): This is the most critical and hard-to-replace skill since it requires in-depth low-level knowledge of the mainframe (e.g. at the MVS level). These are skills that are generally not taught anymore, so there is a limited pool of experienced system programmers.
    2. Information Management System (IMS) Specialists: Requires a combination of mainframe knowledge and data analysis skills, which makes this a rare skill set. This is becoming more critical as business intelligence takes on an ever-increasing focus in most organizations.
    3. Application Development: The primary concern here is a shortage of developers skilled in older languages such as COBOL. It should be noted that this is an application issue; for example, this is not solved by migrating off mainframes.
    4. Mainframe Operators: This is an easier skill set to learn, and there are several courses and training programs available. An IT person new to mainframes could learn this position in about six weeks of on-the-job training.
    5. DB2 Administration: Advances in database technology have simplified administration (not just for DB2 but also other database products). As a result, as with mainframe operators, this is a skill set that can be learned in a short period of time on the job.

    The Challenge

    An aging workforce, specialized skills, and high salary expectations

    • Mainframe specialists, such as system programmers and IMS specialists, are typically over 50, have a unique skill set, and are tasked with running mission-critical systems.

    The In-House Solution:

    Build your mentorship program to create a viable succession plan

    • Get your money’s worth out of your experienced staff by having them train others.
    • Operator skills take about six weeks to learn. However, it takes about two years before a system programmer trainee can become fully independent. This is similar to the learning curve for other platforms; however, this is a more critical issue for mainframes since organizations have far fewer mainframe specialists to fall back on when senior staff retire or move on.

    Understand your options

    Migrate to another platform

    Use a hosting provider

    Outsource

    Re-platform (cloud/vendors)

    Reinvest

    There are several challenges to overcome in a migration project, from finding an appropriate alternative platform to rewriting legacy code. Many organizations have incurred huge costs in the attempt, only to be unsuccessful in the end, so make this decision carefully.

    Organizations often have highly sensitive data on their mainframes (e.g. financial data), so many of these organizations are reluctant to have this data live outside of their four walls. However, the convenience of using a hosting provider makes this an attractive option to consider.

    The most common tactic is for the organization to adopt some level of outsourcing for the non-commodity platform, retaining the application support/development in-house.

    A customer can “re-platform” the non-commodity workload into public cloud offerings or in a few offerings
    “re-host.”

    If you’re staying with the mainframe and keeping it in-house, it’s important to continue to invest in this platform, keep it current, and look for opportunities to optimize its value.

    Migrate

    Having perpetual plans to migrate handcuffs your ability to invest in your mainframe, extend its value, and improve cost effectiveness.

    If this sounds like your organization, it’s time to do the analysis so you can decide and get clarity on the future of the mainframe in your organization.

    1. Identify current performance, availability, and security requirements. Assess alternatives based on this criteria.
    2. Review and use Info-Tech’s Mainframe TCO Comparison Tool to compare mainframe costs to the potential alternative platform.
    3. Assess the business risks and benefits. Can the alternative deliver the same performance, reliability, and security? If not, what are the risks? What do you gain by migrating?
    4. If migration is still a go, evaluate the following:
    • Do you have the expertise or a reliable third party to perform the migration, including code rewrites?
    • How long will the migration take? Can the business function effectively during this transition period?
    • How much will the migration cost? Is the value you expect to gain worth the expense?

    *3 of the top 4 challenges related to shortfalls of alternative platforms

    The image contains a bar graph that demonstrates challenges related to shortfalls of alternative platforms.

    *Source: Maximize the Value of IBM Mainframes in My Business

    Hosting

    Using a hosting provider is typically more cost-effective than running your mainframe in-house.

    Potential for reduced costs

    • Hosting enables you to reduce or eliminate your mainframe staff.
    • Economies of scale enable hosting providers to reduce software licensing costs. They also have more buying power to negotiate better terms.
    • Power and cooling costs are also transferred to the hosting provider.

    Reliable infrastructure and experienced staff

    • A quality hosting provider will have 24/7 monitoring, full redundancy, and proven disaster recovery capabilities.
    • The hosting provider will also have a larger mainframe staff, so they don’t have the same risk of suddenly being without those advanced critical skills.

    So, what are the risks?

    • A transition to a hosting provider usually means eliminating or significantly reducing your in-house mainframe staff. With that loss of in-house expertise, it will be next to impossible to bring the mainframe back in-house, and you become highly dependent on your hosting provider.

    Outsourcing

    The most common tactic is for the organization to adopt some level of outsourcing for the non-commodity platform, retaining the application support/development in-house.

    The options here for the non-commodity (z/Series, IBM Power platforms, for example) are not as broad as with commodity server platforms. More confusingly, the term “outsourcing” for these can include:

    Traditional/Colocation – A customer transitions their hardware environment to a provider’s data center. The provider can then manage the hardware and “system.”

    Onsite Outsourcing – Here a provider will support the hardware/system environment at the client’s site. The provider may acquire the customer’s hardware and provide software licenses. This could also include hiring or “rebadging” staff supporting the platform. This type of arrangement is typically part of a larger services or application transformation. While low risk, it is not as cost-effective as other deployment models.

    Managed Hosting – A customer transitions their legacy application environment to an off-prem hosted multi-tenanted environment. It will provide the most cost savings following the transition, stabilization, and disposal of existing environment. Some providers will provide software licensing, and some will also support “Bring Your Own,” as permitted by IBM terms for example.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Technical debt for non-commodity platforms isn’t only hardware based. Moving an application written for the mainframe onto a “cheaper” hardware platform (or outsourced deployment) leaves the more critical problems and frequently introduces a raft of new ones.

    Re-platform – z/Series COBOL Cloud

    Re-platforming is not trivial.

    While the majority of the coded functionality (JCLs, programs, etc.) migrate easily, there will be a need to re-code or re-write objects – especially if any object, code, or location references are not exactly the same in the new environment.

    Micro Focus has solid experience in this but if consider it within the context of an 80/20 rule (the actual metrics might be much better than that), meaning that some level of rework would have to be accomplished as an overhead to the exercise.

    Build that thought into your thinking and business case.

    AWS Cloud

    • Astadia (an AWS Partner) is re-platforming mainframe workloads to AWS. With its approach you reuse the original application source code and data to AWS services. Consider reviewing Amazon’s “Migrating a Mainframe to AWS in 5 Steps.”

    Azure Cloud

    Micro Focus COBOL (Visual COBOL)

    • Micro Focus' Visual COBOL also supports running COBOL in Docker containers and managing and orchestrating the containers with Kubernetes. I personally cannot imagine what sort of drunken bender decision would lead me to move COBOL into Docker and then use Kubernetes to run in GCP but there you are...if that's your Jam you can do it.

    Re-platform – z/Series (Non-COBOL)

    But what if it's not COBOL?

    Yeah, a complication for this situation is the legacy code.

    While re-platforming/re-hosting non-COBOL code is not new, we have not had many member observations compared to the re-platforming/re-hosting of COBOL functionality initiatives.

    That being said, there are a couple of interesting opportunities to explore.

    NTT Data Services (GLOBAL)

    • Most intriguing is the re-hosting of a mainframe environment into AWS. Not sure if the AWS target supports NATURAL codebase; it does reference Adabas however (Re-Hosting Mainframe Applications to AWS with NTT DATA Services). Nevertheless, NTT has supported re-platforming and NATURAL codebase environments previously.

    ModernSystems (or ModSys) has relevant experience.

    • ModSys is the resulting entity following a merger between BluePhoenix and ATERAS a number of years ago. ATERAS is the entity I find references to within my “wayback machine” for member discussions. There are also a number of published case studies still searchable about ATERAS’ successful re-platforming engagements, including the California Public Employees Retirement System (CalPERS) most famously after the Accenture project to rewrite it failed.

    ATOS, as a hosting vendor mostly referenced by customers with global locations in a short-term transition posture, could be an option.

    Lastly, the other Managed Services vendors with NATURAL and Adabas capabilities:

    Reinvest

    By contrast, reducing the use of your mainframe makes it less cost-effective and more challenging to retain in-house expertise.

    • For organizations that have migrated applications off the mainframe (at least partly to reduce dependency on the platform), inevitably there remains a core set of mission critical applications that cannot be moved off for reasons described on the “Migrate” slide. This is when the mainframe becomes a costly burden:
      • TCO is relatively high due to low utilization.
      • In-house expertise declines as workload declines and current staffing allocations become harder to justify.
    • Organizations that are instead adding capacity and finding new ways to use this platform have lower cost concerns and resourcing challenges. The charts below illustrate this correlation. While some capacity growth is due to normal business growth, some is also due to new workloads, and it reflects an ongoing commitment to the platform.

    *92% of organizations that added capacity said TCO is lower than for commodity servers (compared to 50% of those who did not add capacity)

    *63% of organizations that added capacity said finding resources is not very difficult (compared to 42% of those who did not add capacity)

    The image contains a bar graph as described in the above text. The image contains a bar graph as described in the above text.

    *Maximize the Value of IBM Mainframes in My Business

    An important thought about data migration

    Mainframe data migrations – “VSAM, IMS, etc.”

    • While the application will be replaced and re-platformed, there is the historical VIN data remaining in the VSAM files and access via the application. The challenge is that a bulk conversion can add upfront costs and delay the re-platforming of the application functionality. Some shops will break the historical data migration into a couple of phases.
    • While there are technical solutions to accessing VSAM data stores, what I have observed with other members facing a similar scenario is a need to “shrink” the data store over time. The technical accesses to historical VSAM records would also have a lifespan, and rather than kicking the can down the road indefinitely, many have turned to a process-based solution allowing them to shrink the historical data store over time. I have observed three approaches to the handling or digitization of historical records like this:

    Temporary workaround. This would align with a technical solution allowing the VASM files to be accessed using platforms other than on mainframe hardware (Micro Focus or other file store trickery). This can be accomplished relatively quickly but does run the risk of technology obsolesce for the workaround at some point in the future.

    Bulk conversion. This method would involve the extract/transform/load of the historical records into the new application platform. Often the order of the conversion is completed on work newest to oldest (the idea is that the newest historical records would have the highest likelihood of an access need), but all files would be converted to the new application and the old data store destroyed.

    Forward convert, which would have files undergo the extract/transform/load conversion into the new application as they are accessed or reopened. This method would keep historical records indefinitely or until they are converted – or the legal retention schedule allows for their destruction (hopefully no file must be kept forever). This could be a cost-efficient approach since the historical files remaining on the VSAM platform would be shrunk over time based on demand from the district attorney process. The conversion process could be automated and scripted, with a QR step allowing for the records to be deleted from the old platform.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It is not usual for organizations to leverage options #2 and #3 above to move the functionality forward while containing the scope creep and costs for the data conversions.

    Enterprise class job scheduling

    Job scheduling or data center automation?

    • Enterprise class job scheduling solutions enable complex unattended batched programmatically conditioned task/job scheduling.
    • Data center automation (DCIM) software automates and orchestrates the processes and workflow for infrastructure operations including provisioning, configuring, patching of physical, virtual, and cloud servers, and monitoring of tasks involved in maintaining the operations of a data center or Infrastructure environment.
    • While there maybe some overlap and or confusion between data center automation and enterprise class job scheduling solutions, data center automation (DCIM) software solutions are least likely to have support for non-commodity server platforms and lack robust scheduling functionality.

    Note: Enterprise job scheduling is a topic with low member interest or demand. Since our published research is driven by members’ interest and needs, the lack of activity or member demand would obviously be a significant influence into our ability to aggregate shared member insight, trends, or best practices in our published agenda.

    Data Center Automation (DCIM) Software

    Orchestration/Provisioning Software

    Enterprise class job scheduling features

    The feature set for these tools is long and comprehensive. The feature list below is not exhaustive as specific tools may have additional product capabilities. At a minimum, the solutions offered by the vendors in the list below will have the following capabilities:

    • Automatic restart and recovery
    • File management
    • Integration with security systems such as AD
    • Operator alerts
    • Ability to control spooling devices
    • Cross-platform support
    • Cyclical scheduling
    • Deadline scheduling
    • Event-based scheduling / triggers
    • Inter-dependent jobs
    • External task monitoring (e.g. under other sub-systems)
    • Multiple calendars and time-zones
    • Scheduling of packaged applications (such as SAP, Oracle, JD Edwards)
    • The ability to schedule web applications (e.g. .net, java-based)
    • Workload analysis
    • Conditional dependencies
    • Critical process monitoring
    • Event-based automation (“self-healing” processes in response to common defined error conditions)
    • Graphical job stream/workflow visualization
    • Alerts (job failure notifications, task thresholds (too long, too quickly, missed windows, too short, etc.) via multiple channels
    • API’s supporting programmable scheduler needs
    • Virtualization support
    • Workload forecasting and workload planning
    • Logging and message data supporting auditing capabilities likely to be informed by or compliant with regulatory needs such as Sarbanes, Gramme-Leach
    • Historical reporting
    • Auditing reports and summaries

    Understand your vendors and tools

    List and compare the job scheduling features of each vendor.

    • This is not presented as an exhaustive list.
    • The list relies on observations aggregated from analyst engagements with Info-Tech Research Group members. Those member discussions tend to be heavily tilted toward solutions supporting non-commodity platforms.
    • Nothing is implied about a solution suitability or capability by the order of presentation or inclusion or absence in this list.

    ✓ Advanced Systems Concepts

    ✓ BMC

    ✓ Broadcom

    ✓ HCL

    ✓ Fortra

    ✓ Redwood

    ✓ SMA Technologies

    ✓ StoneBranch

    ✓ Tidal Software

    ✓ Vinzant Software

    Info-Tech Insight

    Creating vendor profiles will help quickly filter the solution providers that directly meet your z/Series needs.

    Advanced Systems Concepts

    ActiveBatch

    Workload Management:

    Summary

    Founded in 1981, ASCs ActiveBatch “provides a central automation hub for scheduling and monitoring so that business-critical systems, like CRM, ERP, Big Data, BI, ETL tools, work order management, project management, and consulting systems, work together seamlessly with minimal human intervention.”*

    URL

    advsyscon.com

    Coverage:

    Global

    Amazon EC2

    Hadoop Ecosystem

    IBM Cognos

    DataStage

    IBM PureData (Netezza)

    Informatica Cloud

    Microsoft Azure

    Microsoft Dynamics AX

    Microsoft SharePoint

    Microsoft Team Foundation Server

    Oracle EBS

    Oracle PeopleSoft

    SAP

    BusinessObjects

    ServiceNow

    Teradata

    VMware

    Windows

    Linux

    Unix

    IBM i

    *Advanced Systems Concepts, Inc.


    BMC

    Control-M

    Workload Management:

    Summary

    Founded in 1980, BMCs Control-M product “simplifies application and data workflow orchestration on premises or as a service. It makes it easy to build, define, schedule, manage, and monitor production workflows, ensuring visibility, reliability, and improving SLAs.”*

    URL

    bmc.com/it-solutions/control-m.html

    Coverage:

    Global

    AWS

    Azure

    Google Cloud Platform

    Cognos

    IBM InfoSphere

    DataStage

    SAP HANA

    Oracle EBS

    Oracle PeopleSoft

    BusinessObjects

    ServiceNow

    Teradata

    VMware

    Windows

    Linux

    Unix

    IBM i

    IBM z/OS

    zLinux

    *BMC

    Broadcom

    Atomic Automation

    Autosys Workload Automation

    Workload Management:

    Summary

    Broadcom offers Atomic Automation and Autosys Workload Automation which ”gives you the agility, speed and reliability required for effective digital business automation. From a single unified platform, Atomic centrally provides the orchestration and automation capabilities needed accelerate your digital transformation and support the growth of your company.”*

    URL

    broadcom.com/products/software/automation/automic-automation

    broadcom.com/products/software/automation/autosys

    Coverage:

    Global


    Windows

    MacOS

    Linux

    UNIX

    AWS

    Azure

    Google Cloud Platform

    VMware

    z/OS

    zLinux

    System i

    OpenVMS

    Banner

    Ecometry

    Hadoop

    Oracle EBS

    Oracle PeopleSoft

    SAP

    BusinessObjects

    ServiceNow

    Teradata

    VMware

    Windows

    Linux

    Unix

    IBM i

    *Broadcom

    HCL

    Workload Automation

    Workload Management:

    Summary

    “HCL Workload Automation streamlined modelling, advanced AI and open integration for observability. Accelerate the digital transformation of modern enterprises, ensuring business agility and resilience with our latest version of one stop automation platform. Orchestrate unattended and event-driven tasks for IT and business processes from legacy to cloud and kubernetes systems.”*

    URL

    hcltechsw.com/workload-automation

    Coverage:

    Global


    Windows

    MacOS

    Linux

    UNIX

    AWS

    Azure

    Google Cloud Platform

    VMware

    z/OS

    zLinux

    System i

    OpenVMS

    IBM SoftLayer

    IBM BigInsights

    IBM Cognos

    Hadoop

    Microsoft Dynamics 365

    Microsoft Dynamics AX

    Microsoft SQL Server

    Oracle E-Business Suite

    PeopleSoft

    SAP

    ServiceNow

    Apache Oozie

    Informatica PowerCenter

    IBM InfoSphere DataStage

    Salesforce

    BusinessObjects BI

    IBM Sterling Connect:Direct

    IBM WebSphere MQ

    IBM Cloudant

    Apache Spark

    *HCL Software

    Fortra

    JAMS Scheduler

    Workload Management:

    Summary

    Fortra’s “JAMS is a centralized workload automation and job scheduling solution that runs, monitors, and manages jobs and workflows that support critical business processes.

    JAMS reliably orchestrates the critical IT processes that run your business. Our comprehensive workload automation and job scheduling solution provides a single pane of glass to manage, execute, and monitor jobs—regardless of platforms or applications.”*

    URL

    jamsscheduler.com

    Coverage:

    Global


    OpenVMS

    OS/400

    Unix

    Windows

    z/OS

    SAP

    Oracle

    Microsoft

    Infor

    Workday

    AWS

    Azure

    Google Cloud Compute

    ServiceNow

    Salesforce

    Micro Focus

    Microsoft Dynamics 365

    Microsoft Dynamics AX

    Microsoft SQL Server

    MySQL

    NeoBatch

    Netezza

    Oracle PL/SQL

    Oracle E-Business Suite

    PeopleSoft

    SAP

    SAS

    Symitar

    *JAMS

    Redwood

    Redwood SaaS

    Workload Management:

    Summary

    Founded in 1993 and delivered as a SaaS solution, ”Redwood lets you orchestrate securely and reliably across any application, service or server, in the cloud or on-premises, all inside a single platform. Automation solutions are at the core of critical business operations such as forecasting, replenishment, reconciliation, financial close, order to cash, billing, reporting, and more. Enterprises in every industry — from manufacturing, utility, retail, and biotech to healthcare, banking, and aerospace.”*

    URL

    redwood.com

    Coverage:

    Global


    OpenVMS

    OS/400

    Unix

    Windows

    z/OS

    SAP

    Oracle

    Microsoft

    Infor

    Workday

    AWS

    Azure

    Google Cloud Compute

    ServiceNow

    Salesforce

    Github

    Office 365

    Slack

    Dropbox

    Tableau

    Informatica

    SAP BusinessObjects

    Cognos

    Microsoft Power BI

    Amazon QuickSight

    VMware

    Xen

    Kubernetes

    *Redwood

    Fortra

    Robot Scheduler

    Workload Management:

    Summary

    “Robot Schedule’s workload automation capabilities allow users to automate everything from simple jobs to complex, event-driven processes on multiple platforms and centralize management from your most reliable system: IBM i. Just create a calendar of when and how jobs should run, and the software will do the rest.”*

    URL

    fortra.com/products/job-scheduling-software-ibm-i

    Coverage:

    Global


    IBM i (System i, iSeries, AS/400)

    AIX/UNIX

    Linux

    Windows

    SQL/Server

    Domino

    JD Edwards EnterpriseOne

    SAP

    Automate Schedule (formerly Skybot Scheduler)

    *Fortra

    SMA Technologies

    OpCon

    Workload Management:

    Summary

    Founded in1980, SMA offers to “save time, reduce error, and free your IT staff to work on more strategic contributions with OpCon from SMA Technologies. OpCon offers powerful, easy-to-use workload automation and orchestration to eliminate manual tasks and manage workloads across business-critical operations. It's the perfect fit for financial institutions, insurance companies, and other transactional businesses.”*

    URL

    smatechnologies.com

    Coverage:

    Global

    Windows

    Linux

    Unix

    z/Series

    IBM i

    Unisys

    Oracle

    SAP

    Microsoft Dynamics AX

    Infor M3

    Sage

    Cegid

    Temenos

    FICS

    Microsoft Azure Data Management

    Microsoft Azure VM

    Amazon EC2/AWS

    Web Services RESTful

    Docker

    Google Cloud

    VMware

    ServiceNow

    Commvault

    Microsoft WSUS

    Microsoft Orchestrator

    Java

    JBoss

    Asysco AMT

    Tuxedo ART

    Nutanix

    Corelation

    Symitar

    Fiserv DNA

    Fiserv XP2

    *SMA Technologies

    StoneBranch

    Universal Automation Center (UAC)

    Workload Management:

    Summary

    Founded in 1999, ”the Stonebranch Universal Automation Center (UAC) is an enterprise-grade business automation solution that goes beyond traditional job scheduling. UAC's event-based workload automation solution is designed to automate and orchestrate system jobs and tasks across all mainframe, on-prem, and hybrid IT environments. IT operations teams gain complete visibility and advanced control with a single web-based controller, while removing the need to run individual job schedulers across platforms.”*

    URL

    stonebranch.com/it-automation-solutions/enterprise-job-scheduling

    Coverage:

    Global

    Windows

    Linux

    Unix

    z/Series

    Apache Kafka

    AWS

    Databricks

    Docker

    GitHub

    Google Cloud

    Informatica

    Jenkins

    Jscape

    Kubernetes

    Microsoft Azure

    Microsoft SQL

    Microsoft Teams

    PagerDuty

    PeopleSoft

    Petnaho

    RedHat Ansible

    Salesforce

    SAP

    ServiceNow

    Slack

    SMTP and IMAP

    Snowflake

    Tableau

    VMware

    *Stonebranch

    Tidal Software

    Workload Automation

    Workload Management:

    Summary

    Founded in 1979, Tidal’s Workload Automation will “simplify management and execution of end-to-end business processes with our unified automation platform. Orchestrate workflows whether they're running on-prem, in the cloud or hybrid environments.”*

    URL

    tidalsoftware.com

    Coverage:

    Global

    CentOS

    Linux

    Microsoft Windows Server

    Open VMS

    Oracle Cloud

    Oracle Enterprise Linux

    Red Hat Enterprise Server

    Suse Enterprise

    Tandem NSK

    Ubuntu

    UNIX

    HPUX (PA-RISC, Itanium)

    Solaris (Sparc, X86)

    AIX, iSeries

    z/Linux

    z/OS

    Amazon AWS

    Microsoft Azure

    Oracle OCI

    Google Cloud

    ServiceNow

    Kubernetes

    VMware

    Cisco UCS

    SAP R/3 & SAP S/4HANA

    Oracle E-Business

    Oracle ERP Cloud

    PeopleSoft

    JD Edwards

    Hadoop

    Oracle DB

    Microsoft SQL

    SAP BusinessObjects

    IBM Cognos

    FTP/FTPS/SFTP

    Informatica

    *Tidal

    Vinzant Software

    Global ECS

    Workload Management:

    Summary

    Founded in 1987, Global ECS can “simplify operations in all areas of production with the GECS automation framework. Use a single solution to schedule, coordinate and monitor file transfers, database operations, scripts, web services, executables and SAP jobs. Maximize efficiency for all operations across multiple business units intelligently and automatically.”*

    URL

    vinzantsoftware.com

    Coverage:

    Global

    Windows

    Linux

    Unix

    iSeries

    SAP R/3 & SAP S/4HANA

    Oracle, SQL/Server

    *Vizant Software

    Activity

    Scale Out or Scale Up

    Activities:

    1. Complete the Scale Up vs. Scale Out TCO Tool.
    2. Compare total lifecycle costs to determine TCO.

    This activity involves the following participants:

    IT strategic direction decision makers

    IT managers responsible for an existing z/Series platform

    Organizations evaluating platforms for mission critical applications

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Completed Scale Up vs. Scale Out TCO Tool

    Info-Tech Insight

    This checkpoint process creates transparency around agreement costs with the business and gives the business an opportunity to re-evaluate its requirements for a potentially leaner agreement.

    Scale out versus scale up activity

    The Scale Up vs. Scale Out TCO Tool provides organizations with a framework for estimating the costs associated with purchasing and licensing for a scale-up and scale-out environment over a multi-year period.

    Use this tool to:

    • Compare the pre-populated values.
    • Insert your own amounts to contrast possible database decisions and determine the TCO of each.
    The image contains screenshots of the Scale Up vs. Scale Out TCO Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Watch out for inaccurate financial information. Ensure that the financials for cost match your maintenance and contract terms.

    Use the Scale Up vs. Scale Out TCO Tool to determine your TCO options.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Effectively Acquire Infrastructure Services

    Acquiring a service is like buying an experience. Don’t confuse the simplicity of buying hardware with buying an experience.

    Outsource IT Infrastructure to Improve System Availability, Reliability, and Recovery

    There are very few IT infrastructure components you should be housing internally – outsource everything else.

    Build Your Infrastructure Roadmap

    Move beyond alignment: Put yourself in the driver’s seat for true business value.

    Define Your Cloud Vision

    Make the most of cloud for your organization.

    Document Your Cloud Strategy

    Drive consensus by outlining how your organization will use the cloud.

    Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms

    Know where to start and where to focus attention in the implementation of a big data strategy.

    Create a Better RFP Process

    Improve your RFPs to gain leverage and get better results.

    Research Authors

    Darin Stahl.

    Darin Stahl, Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Darin is a Principal Research Advisor within the Infrastructure Practice, and leveraging 38+ years of experience, his areas of focus include: IT Operations Management, Service Desk, Infrastructure Outsourcing, Managed Services, Cloud Infrastructure, DRP/BCP, Printer Management, Managed Print Services, Application Performance Monitoring/ APM, Managed FTP, non-commodity servers (z/Series, mainframe, IBM i, AIX, Power PC).

    Troy Cheeseman.

    Troy Cheeseman, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Troy has over 25 years of IT management experience and has championed large enterprise-wide technology transformation programs, remote/home office collaboration and remote work strategies, BCP, IT DRP, IT Operations and expense management programs, international right placement initiatives, and large technology transformation initiatives (M&A). Additionally, he has deep experience working with IT solution providers and technology (cloud) start-ups.

    Bibliography

    “AWS Announces AWS Mainframe Modernization.” Business Wire, 30 Nov. 2021.
    de Valence, Phil. “Migrating a Mainframe to AWS in 5 Steps with Astadia?” AWS, 23 Mar. 2018.
    Graham, Nyela. “New study shows mainframes still popular despite the rise of cloud—though times are changing…fast?” WatersTechnology, 12 Sept. 2022.
    “Legacy applications can be revitalized with API.” MuleSoft, 2022.
    Vecchio, Dale. “The Benefits of Running Mainframe Applications on LzLabs Software Defined Mainframe® & Microsoft Azure.” LzLabs Sites, Mar. 2021.

    Knowledge Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}33|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}33|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000
    • member rating average days saved: 2
    • Parent Category Name: People and Resources
    • Parent Category Link: /people-and-resources
    Mitigate Key IT Employee Knowledge Loss

    Scale Business Process Automation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}241|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /optimization
    • Business process automation (BPA) adoption gained significant momentum as your business leaders saw the positive outcomes in your pilots, such as improvements in customer experience, operational efficiencies, and cost optimizations.
    • Your stakeholders are ready to increase their investments in more process automation solutions. They want to scale initial successes to other business and IT functions.
    • However, it is unclear how BPA can be successfully scaled and what benefits can be achieved from it.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The shift from isolated, task-based automations in your pilot to value-oriented, scaled automations brings new challenges and barriers to your organization such as:

    • Little motivation or tolerance to change existing business operations to see the full value of BPA.
    • Overinvesting in current BPA technologies to maximize the return despite available alternatives that can do the same tasks better.
    • BPA teams are ill-equipped to meet the demands and complexities of scaled BPA implementations.

    Impact and Result

    • Ground your scaling expectations. Set realistic and achievable goals centered on driving business value to the entire organization by optimizing and automating end-to-end business processes.
    • Define your scaling journey. Tailor your scaling approach according to your ability to ease BPA implementation, to broaden BPA adoption, and to loosen BPA constraints.
    • Prepare to scale BPA. Cement your BPA management and governance foundations to support BPA scaling using the lessons learned from your pilot implementation.

    Scale Business Process Automation Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Scale Business Process Automation Deck – A guide to learn the opportunities and values of scaling business process automation.

    This research walks you through the level setting of your scaled business process automation (BPA) expectations, factors to consider in defining your scaled BPA journey, and assessing your readiness to scale BPA.

    • Scale Business Process Automation Storyboard

    2. Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment – A tool to help you evaluate your readiness to scale business process automation.

    Use this tool to identify key gaps in the people, processes, and technologies you need to support the scaling of business process automation (BPA). It also contains a canvas to facilitate your discussions around business process automation with your stakeholders and BPA teams.

    • Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Scale Business Process Automation

    Take a value-first approach to automate the processes that matter

    Analyst Perspective

    Scaling business process automation (BPA) is an organization-wide commitment

    Business and IT must work together to ensure the right automations are implemented and BPA is grown and matured in a sustainable way. However, many organizations are not ready to make this commitment. Managing the automation demand backlog, coordinating cross-functional effort and organizational change, and measuring BPA value are some of the leading factors challenging scaling BPA.

    Pilot BPA with the intent to scale it. Pilots are safe starting points to establish your foundational governance and management practices and build the necessary relationships and collaborations for you to be successful. These factors will then allow you to explore more sophisticated, complicated, and innovative opportunities to drive new value to your team, department, and organization.

    A picture of Andrew Kum-Seun

    Andrew Kum-Seun
    Research Director,
    Application Delivery and Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Business process automation (BPA) adoption gained significant momentum as your business leaders see the positive outcomes in your pilots, such as improvements in customer experience, operational efficiencies, and cost optimizations.
    • Your stakeholders are ready to increase their investments in more process automation solutions. They want to scale initial successes to other business and IT functions.
    • However, it is unclear how BPA can be successfully scaled and what benefits can be achieved from it.

    Common Obstacles

    The shift from isolated, task-based automations in your pilot to value-oriented and scaled automations brings new challenges and barriers to your organization:

    • Little motivation or tolerance to change existing business operations to see the full value of BPA.
    • Overinvesting in current BPA technologies to maximize return despite available alternatives that can do the same tasks better.
    • BPA teams are ill-equipped to meet the demands and complexities of scaled BPA implementations.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Ground your scaling expectations. Set realistic and achievable goals centered on driving business value to the entire organization by optimizing and automating end-to-end business processes.
    • Define your scaling journey. Tailor your scaling approach according to your ability to ease BPA implementation, to broaden BPA adoption, and to loosen BPA constraints.
    • Prepare to scale BPA. Cement your BPA management and governance foundations to support BPA scaling using the lessons learned from your pilot implementation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Take a value-first approach in your scaling business process automation (BPA) journey. Low-risk, task-oriented automations are good starting points to introduce BPA but constrain the broader returns your organization wants. Business value can only scale when everything and everyone in your processes are working together to streamline the entire value stream rather than the small gains from optimizing small, isolated automations.

    Scale Business Process Automation

    Take a value-first approach to automate the processes that matter

    Pilot Your BPA Capabilities

    • Learn the foundation practices to design, deliver, and support BPA.
    • Understand the fit and value of BPA.
    • Gauge the tolerance for business operational change and system risk.

    See Info-Tech's Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook blueprint for more information.

    Build Your Scaling BPA Vision

    Apply Lessons Learned to Scale

    1. Ground Your Scaling Expectations
      Set realistic and achievable goals centered on driving business value to the entire organization by optimizing and automating end-to-end business processes.
    2. Define Your Scaling Journey
      Tailor your scaling approach according to your ability to ease BPA implementation, to broaden BPA adoption, and to loosen BPA constraints.
    3. Prepare to Scale BPA
      Cement your BPA management and governance foundations to support BPA scaling using the lessons learned from your pilot implementation.

    Research deliverable

    Design and communicate your approach to scale business process automation with Info-Tech's Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment:

    • Level set your scaled BPA goals and objectives.
    • Discuss and design your scaled BPA journey.
    • Identify the gaps and improvements needed to scale your BPA practices and implementation.

    A screenshot from Info-Tech's Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment

    Step 1.1

    Ground Your Scaling Expectations

    Activities

    1.1.1 Define Your Scaling Objectives

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    Outcomes of this step

    Scaling BPA objectives

    Organizations want to scale their initial BPA success

    Notable Initial Benefits

    1. Time Saved: "In the first day of live operations, the robots were saving 51 hours each day or the equivalent of six people working an eight-hour shift." – Brendan MacDonald, Director of Customer Compliance Operations, Ladbrokes (UiPath)
    2. Documentation & Knowledge Sharing: "If certain people left, knowledge of some processes would be lost and we realized that we needed a reliable process management system in place." – Peta Kinnane, Acting Audit and Risk Coordinator, Liverpool City Council (Nintex)
    3. Improved Service Delivery: "Thanks to this automation, our percentage of triaged and assigned tickets is now 100%. Nothing falls through the cracks. It has also improved the time to assignment. We assign tickets 2x faster than before." – Sebastian Goodwin, Head of Cybersecurity, Nutanix (Workato)

    Can We Gain More From Automation?

    The Solution

    As industries evolve and adopt more tools and technology, their products, services, and business operating models become more complex. Task- and desktop-based automations are often not enough. More sophisticated and scaled automations are needed to simplify and streamline the process from end-to-end of complex operations and align them with organizational goals.

    Stakeholders see automation as an opportunity to scale the business

    The value of scaling BPA is dependent on the organization's ability to scale with it. In other words, stakeholders should see an increase in business value without a substantial increase in resources and operational costs (e.g., there should be little difference if sending out 10 emails versus 1000).

    Examples of how business can be scaled with automation

    • Processes triggered by incoming documents or email: in these processes, an incoming document or email (that has semi-structured or unstructured data) is collected by a script or an RPA bot. This document is then processed with a machine learning model that validates it either by rules or ML models. The validated and enriched machine-readable data is then passed on to the next system of record.
    • The accounts payable process: this process includes receiving, processing, and paying out invoices from suppliers that provided goods or services to the company. While manual processing can be expensive, take too much time, and lead to errors, businesses can automate this process with machine learning and document extraction technologies like optical characters recognition (OCR), which converts texts containing images into characters that can be readable by computers to edit, compute, and analyze.
    • Order management: these processes include retrieving email and relevant attachments, extracting information that tells the business what its customers want, updating internal systems with newly placed orders or modifications, or taking necessary actions related to customer queries.
    • Enhance customer experience: [BPA tools] can help teams develop and distribute customer loyalty offers faster while also optimizing these offers with customer insights. Now, enterprises can more easily guarantee they are delivering the relevant solutions their clients are demanding.

    Source: Stefanini Group

    Scaling BPA has its challenges

    Perceived Lack of Opportunities

    Pilot BPA implementations often involve the processes that are straightforward to automate or are already shortlisted to optimize. However, these low-hanging fruits will run out. Discovering new BPA opportunities can be challenged for a variety of reasons, such as:

    • Lack of documentation and knowledge
    • Low user participation or drive to change
    • BPA technology limitations and constraints

    Perceived Lack of Opportunities

    BPA is not a cheap investment. A single RPA bot, for example, can cost between $5,000 to $15,000. This cost does not include the added cost for training, renewal fees, infrastructure set up and other variable and reoccurring costs that often come with RPA delivery and support (Blueprint). This reality can motivate BPA owners to favor existing technologies over other cheaper and more effective alternatives in an attempt boost their return on investment.

    Ill-Equipped Support Teams

    Good technical skills and tools, and the right mindset are critical to ensure BPA capabilities are deployed effectively. Low-code no-code (LCNC) can help but success isn't guaranteed. Lack of experience with low-code platforms is the biggest obstacle in low-code adoption according to 60% of respondents (Creatio). The learning curve has led some organizations to hire contractors to onboard BPA teams, hire new employees, or dedicate significant funding and resources to upskill internal resources.

    Shift your objectives from task-based efficiencies to value-driven capabilities

    How can I improve myself?

    How can we improve my team?

    How can we improve my organization?

    Objectives

    • Improve worker productivity
    • Improve the repeatability and predictability of the process
    • Deliver outputs of consistent quality and cadence
    • Increase process, tool, and technology confidence
    • Increase the team's throughput, commitment, and load
    • Apply more focus on cognitive and complex tasks
    • Reduce the time to complete error-prone, manual, and routine collaborations
    • Deliver insightful, personalized, and valuable outputs
    • Drive more value in existing pipelines and introduce new value streams
    • Deliver consistent digital experiences involving different technologies
    • Automatically tailor a customer's experience to individual preferences
    • Forecast and rapidly respond to customer issues and market trends

    Goals

    • Learn the fit of BPA & set the foundations
    • Improve the practices & tools and optimize the performance
    • Scale BPA capabilities throughout the organization

    Gauge the success of your scaled BPA

    BPA Practice Effectiveness

    Key Question: Are stakeholders satisfied with how the BPA practice is meeting their automation needs?

    Examples of Metrics:

    • User satisfaction
    • Automation request turnaround time
    • Throughput of BPA team

    Automation Solution Quality

    Key Question: How do your automation solutions perform and meet your quality standards?

    Examples of Metrics:

    • Licensing and operational costs
    • Service level agreement and uptime/downtime
    • Number of defects

    Business Value Delivery

    Key Question: How has automation improved the value your employees, teams, and the organization delivers?

    Examples of Metrics:
    Increase in revenue generation
    Reduction in operational costs
    Expansion of business capabilities with minimal increases in costs and risks

    1.1.1 Define your scaling objectives

    5 minutes

    1. Complete the following fields to build your scaled business process automation canvas:
      1. Problem that scaling BPA is intending to solve
      2. Your vision for scaling BPA
      3. Stakeholders
      4. Scaled BPA business and IT objectives and metrics
      5. Business capabilities, processes, and application systems involved
      6. Notable constraints, roadblocks, and challenges to your scaled BPA success
    2. Document your findings and discussions in Info-Tech's Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment.

    Output

    Scaled BPA value canvas

    Participants

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    Record the results in the 2. Value Canvas Tab in the Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment.

    1.1.1 cont'd

    Scaled BPA Value Canvas Template:

    A screenshot of Scaled BPA Value Canvas Template

    Align your objectives to your application portfolio strategy

    Why is an application portfolio strategy important for BPA?

    • All business process optimizations are designed, delivered, and managed to support a consistent interpretation of the business and IT vision and goals.
    • Clear understanding of the sprawl, criticality, and risks of automation solutions and applications to business capabilities.
    • BPA initiatives are planned, prioritized, and coordinated alongside modernization, upgrades, and other changes to the application portfolio.
    • Resources, skills, and capacities are strategically allocated to meet BPA demand considering other commitments in the backlog and roadmap.
    • BPA expectations and practices uphold the persona, values, and principles of the application team.

    What is an application portfolio strategy?

    An application portfolio strategy details the direction, activities, and tactics to deliver on the promise of your application portfolio. It often includes:

    • Portfolio vision and goals
    • Application, automation, and process portfolio
    • Values and principles
    • Portfolio health
    • Risks and constraints
    • Strategic roadmap

    See our Application Portfolio Management Foundations blueprint for more information.

    Leverage your BPA champions to drive change and support scaling initiatives

    An arrow showing the steps to Leverage your BPA champions to drive change and support scaling initiatives

    Expected Outcome From Your Pilot: Your pilot would have recognized the roles that know how to effectively apply good BPA practices (e.g., process analysis and optimization) and are familiar with the BPA toolset. These individuals are prime candidates who can standardize your Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook, upskill interested teams, and build relationships among those involved in the delivery and use of BPA.

    Step 1.2

    Define Your Scaling Journey

    Activities

    1.2.1 Discuss Your BPA Opportunities
    1.2.2 Lay Out Your Scaling BPA Journey

    Scale Business Process Automation

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of scaling BPA opportunities
    • Tailored scaling journey

    Maintain a healthy demand pipeline

    A successful scaled BPA practice requires a continuous demand for BPA capabilities and the delivery of minimum viable automations (MVA) held together by a broader strategic roadmap.

    An image of a healthy demand pipeline.  it flows from opportunities to trends, with inputs from internal and external sources.

    An MVA focuses on a single and small process use case, involves minimal possible effort to improve, and is designed to satisfy a specific user group. Its purpose is to maximize learning and value and inform the further scaling of the BPA technology, approach, or practice.

    See our Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook blueprint for more information.

    Investigate how BPA trends can drive more value for the organization

    • Event-Driven Automation
      Process is triggered by a schedule, system output, scenario, or user (e.g., voice-activated, time-sensitive, system condition)
    • Low- & No-Code Automation build and management are completed through an easy-to-learn scripting language and/or a GUI.
    • Intelligent Document Processing
      Transform documents for better analysis, processing and handling (e.g., optical character recognition) by a tool or system.
    • End-to-End Process Automation & Transparency
      Linking cross-functional processes to enable automation of the entire value stream with seamless handoffs or triggers.
    • Orchestration of Different BPA Technologies
      Integrating and sequencing the execution of multiple automation solutions through a single console.
    • Cognitive Automation
      AI and other intelligent technologies automate information-intensive processes, including semi and unstructured data and human thinking simulation.
    • Intelligent Internet-of-Things
      Connecting process automation technologies to physical environments with sensors and other interaction devices (e.g., computer vision).
    • Ethical Design
      Optimizing processes that align to the moral value, principles, and beliefs of the organization (e.g., respects data privacy, resists manipulative patterns).
    • User Profiling & Tailored Experiences
      Customizing process outputs and user experience with user-defined configurations or system and user activity monitoring.
    • Process Mining & Discovery
      Gleaning optimization opportunities by analyzing system activities (mining) or monitoring user interactions with applications (discovery).

    1.2.1 Discuss your BPA opportunities

    5 minutes

    1. Review the goals and objectives of your initiative and the expectations you want to gain from scaling BPA.
    2. Discuss how BPA trends can be leveraged in your organization.
    3. List high priority scaling BPA opportunities.

    Output

    • Scaled BPA opportunities

    Participants

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    Create your recipe for success

    Your scaling BPA recipe (approach) can involve multiple different flavors of various quantities to fit the needs and constraints of your organization and workers.

    What and how many ingredients you need is dependent on three key questions:

    1. How can we ease BPA implementation?
    2. How can we broaden the BPA scope?
    3. How can we loosen constraints?

    Personalize Scaling BPA To Your Taste

    • Extend BPA Across Business Units (Horizontal)
    • Integrate BPA Across Your Application Architecture (Vertical)
    • Embed AI/ML Into Your Automation Technologies
    • Empower Users With Business-Managed Automations
    • Combine Multiple Technologies for End-to-End Automation
    • Increase the Volume and Velocity of Automation
    • Automate Cognitive Processes and Making Variable Decisions

    Answer these questions in the definition of your scaling BPA journey

    Seeing the full value of your scaling approach is dependent on your ability to support BPA adoption across the organization

    How can we ease BPA implementation?

    • Good governance practices (e.g., role definitions, delivery and management processes, technology standards).
    • Support for innovation and experimentation.
    • Interoperable and plug-and-play architecture.
    • Dedicated technology management and support, including resources, documents, templates and shells.
    • Accessible and easy-to-understand knowledge and document repository.

    How can we broaden BPA scope?

    • Provide a unified experience across processes, fragmented technologies, and siloed business functions.
    • Improve intellectually intensive activities, challenging decision making and complex processes with more valuable insights and information using BPA.
    • Proactively react to business and technology environments and operational changes and interact with customers with unattended automation.
    • Infuse BPA technologies into your product and service to expand their functions, output quality, and reliability.

    How can we loosen constraints?

    • Processes are automated without the need for structured data and optimized processes, and there is no need to work around or avoid legacy applications.
    • Workers are empowered to develop and maintain their own automations.
    • Coaching, mentoring, training, and onboarding capabilities.
    • Accessibility and adoption of underutilized applications are improved with BPA.
    • BPA is used to overcome the limitations or the inefficiencies of other BPA technologies.

    1.2.2 Lay out your scaling BPA journey

    5 minutes

    1. Review the goals and objectives of your initiative, the expectations you want to gain from scaling BPA, and the various scaling BPA opportunities.
    2. Discuss the different scaling BPA flavors (patterns) and how each flavor is applicable to your situation. Ask yourself these key questions:
      1. How can we ease BPA implementation?
      2. How can we broaden the BPA scope?
      3. How can we loosen constraints?
    3. Design the broad steps of your scaling BPA journey. See the following slide for an example.
    4. Document your findings and discussions in Info-Tech's Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment.

    Record the results in the 3. Scaled BPA Journey Tab in the Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment.

    Output

    • Scaled BPA journey

    Participants

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    1.2.2 cont'd

    An image of the marker used to identify Continuous business process optimization and automation Continuous business process optimization and automation
    An image of the marker used to identify Scope of Info-Tech's Build Your Business Process Automation Playbook blueprintScope of Info-Tech's Build Your Business Process Automation Playbook blueprint

    Example:

    An example of the BPA journey.  Below are the links included in the journey.

    Continuously review and realign expectations

    Optimizing your scaled BPA practices and applying continuous improvements starts with monitoring the process after implementation.

    Purpose of Monitoring

    1. Diligent monitoring confirms your scaled BPA implementation is performing as desired and meeting initial expectations.
    2. Holding reviews of your BPA practice and implementations helps assess the impact of marketplace and business operations changes and allows the organization to stay on top of trends and risks.

    Metrics

    Metrics are an important aspect of monitoring and sustaining the scaled practice. The metrics will help determine success and find areas where adjustments may be needed.

    Hold retrospectives to identify any practice issues to be resolved or opportunities to undertake

    The retrospective gives your organization the opportunity to review themselves and brainstorm solutions and a plan for improvements to be actioned. This session is reoccurring, typically, after key milestones. While it is important to allow all participants the opportunity to voice their opinions, feelings, and experiences, retrospectives must be positive, productive, and time boxed.

    Step 1.3

    Prepare to Scale BPA

    Activities

    1.3.1 Assess Your Readiness to Scale BPA

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    Outcomes of this step

    • Scale BPA readiness assessment

    Prepare to scale by learning from your pilot implementations

    "While most organizations are advised to start with automating the 'low hanging fruit' first, the truth is that it can create traps that will impede your ability to achieve RPA at scale. In fact, scaling RPA into the organizational structure is fundamentally different from implementing a conventional software product or other process automation."
    – Blueprint

    What should be the takeaways from your pilot?

    Degree of Required BPA Support

    • Practices needed to address the organization's tolerance to business process changes and automation adoption.
    • Resources, budget and skills needed to configure and orchestrate automation technologies to existing business applications and systems.

    Technology Integration & Compatibility

    • The BPA technology and application system's flexibility to be enhanced, modified, and removed.
    • Adherence to data and system quality standards (e.g., security, availability) across all tools and technologies.

    Good Practices Toolkit

    • A list of tactics, techniques, templates, and examples to assist teams assessing and optimizing business processes and applying BPA solutions in your organization's context.
    • Strategies to navigate common blockers, challenges, and risks.

    Controls & Measures

    • Defined guardrails aligned to your organization's policies and risk tolerance
    • Key metrics are gathered to gauge the value and performance of your processes and automations for enhancements and further scaling.

    Decide how to architect and govern your BPA solutions

    Centralized

    A single body and platform to coordinate, execute, and manage all automation solutions.

    An image of the Centralized approach to governing BPA solutions.

    Distributed

    Automation solutions are locally delivered and managed whether that is per business unit, type of technology, or vendor. Some collaboration and integration can occur among solutions but might be done without a holistic strategy or approach.

    An image of the Distributed approach to governing BPA solutions.

    Hybrid

    Automation solutions are locally delivered and managed and executed for isolated use cases. Broader and complex automations are centrally orchestrated and administered.

    An image of the Hybrid approach to governing BPA solutions.

    Be prepared to address the risks with scaling BPA

    "Companies tend to underestimate the complexity of their business processes – and bots will frequently malfunction without an RPA design team that knows how to anticipate and prepare for most process exceptions. Unresolved process exceptions rank among the biggest RPA challenges, prompting frustrated users to revert to manual work."
    – Eduardo Diquez, Auxis, 2020

    Scenarios

    • Handling Failures of Dependent Systems
    • Handling Data Corruption & Quality Issues
    • Alignment to Regulatory & Industry Standards
    • Addressing Changes & Regressions to Business Processes
    • "Run Away" & Hijacked Automations
    • Unauthorized Access to Sensitive Information

    Recognize the costs to support your scaled BPA environment

    Cost Factors

    Automation Operations
    How will chaining multiple BPA technologies together impact your operating budget? Is there a limit on the number of active automations you can have at a single time?

    User Licenses
    How many users require access to the designer, orchestrator, and other functions of the BPA solution? Do they also require access to dependent applications, services, and databases?

    System Enhancements
    Are application and system upgrades and modernizations needed to support BPA? Is your infrastructure, data, and security controls capable of handling BPA demand?

    Supporting Resources
    Are dedicated resources needed to support, govern, and manage BPA across business and IT functions? Are internal resources or third-party providers preferred?

    Training & Onboarding
    Are end users and supporting resources trained to deliver, support, and/or use BPA? How will training and onboarding be facilitated: internally or via third party providers?

    Create a cross-functional and supportive body to lead the scaling of BPA

    Your supportive body is a cross-functional group of individuals promoting collaboration and good BPA practices. It enables an organization to extract the full benefits from critical systems, guides the growth and evolution of strategic BPA implementations, and provides critical expertise to those that need it. A supportive body distinctly caters to optimizing and strengthening BPA governance, management, and operational practices for a single technology or business function or broadly across the entire organization encompassing all BPA capabilities.

    What a support body is not:

    • A Temporary Measure
    • Exclusive to Large Organizations
    • A Project Management Office
    • A Physical Office
    • A Quick Fix

    See our Maximize the Benefits from Enterprise Applications With a Center of Excellence blueprint for more information.

    What are my options?

    Center of Excellence (CoE)
    AND
    Community of Practice (CoP)

    CoEs and CoPs provide critical functions

    An image of the critical functions provided by CoE and CoP.

    Shift your principles as you scale BPA

    As BPA scales, users and teams must not only think of how a BPA solution operates at a personal and technical level or what goals it is trying to achieve, but why it is worth doing and how the outcomes of the automated process will impact the organization's reputation, morality, and public perception.

    An image of the journey from Siloed BPA to Scaled BPA.

    "I think you're going to see a lot of corporations thinking about the corporate responsibility of [organizational change from automation], because studies show that consumers want and will only do business with socially responsible companies."

    – Todd Lohr

    Source: Appian, 2018.

    Assess your readiness to scale BPA

    Vision & Objectives
    Clear direction and goals of the business process automation practice.

    Governance
    Defined BPA roles and responsibilities, processes, and technology controls.

    Skills & Competencies
    The capabilities users and support roles must have to be successful with BPA.

    Business Process Management & Optimization
    The tactics to document, analyze, optimize, and monitor business processes.

    Business Process Automation Delivery
    The tactics to review the fit of automation solutions and deliver and support according to end user needs and preferences.

    Business Process Automation Platform
    The capabilities to manage BPA platforms and ensure it supports the growing needs of the business.

    1.3.1 Assess your readiness to scale BPA

    5 minutes

    1. Review your scaling BPA journey and selected patterns.
    2. Conduct a readiness assessment using the 4. Readiness Assessment tab in Info-Tech's Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment.
    3. Brainstorm solutions to improve the capability or address the gaps found in this assessment.

    Output

    • Scaled BPA readiness assessment

    Participants

    • Business Process Owners
    • Product Owners
    • Application Directors
    • Business Architects
    • BPA Delivery & Support Teams

    Record the results in the 4. Readiness Assessment tab in Info-Tech's Scale Business Process Automation Readiness Assessment.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Bibliography

    Alston, Roland. "With the Rise of Intelligent Automation, Ethics Matter Now More than Ever." Appian, 4 Sept. 2018. Web.
    "Challenges of Achieving RPA at Scale." Blueprint, N.d. Web.
    Dilmegani, Cem. "RPA Benefits: 20 Ways Bots Improve Businesses in 2023," AI Multiple, 9 Jan 2023. Web.
    Diquez, Eduardo. "Struggling To Scale RPA? Discover The Secret to Success." Auxis, 30 Sept. 2020. Web.
    "How much does Robotic Process Automation (RPA) Really Cost?" Blueprint, 14 Sept. 2021. Web.
    "Liverpool City Council improves document process with Nintex." Nintex, n.d. Web.
    "The State of Low-Code/No-Code." Creatio, 2021. Web.
    "Using automation to enhance security and increase IT NPS to 90+ at Nutanix." Workato, n.d. Web.
    "What Is Hyperautomation? A Complete Guide To One Of Gartner's Top Tech Trends." Stefanini Group, 26 Mar. 2021. Web.

    Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}372|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $25,779 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • Organizations often tackle compliance efforts in an ad hoc manner, resulting in an ineffective use of resources.
    • The alignment of business objectives, information security, and data privacy is new for many organizations, and it can seem overwhelming.
    • GDPR is an EU regulation that has global implications; it likely applies to your organization more than you think.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Financial impact isn’t simply fines. A data controller fined for GDPR non-compliance may sue its data processor for damage.
    • Even day-to-day activities may be considered processing. Screen-sharing from a remote location is considered processing if the data shown onscreen contains personal data!
    • This is not simply an IT problem. Organizations that address GDPR in a siloed approach will not be as successful as organizations that take a cross-functional approach.

    Impact and Result

    • Follow a robust methodology that applies to any organization and aligns operational and situational GDPR scope. Info-Tech's framework allows organizations to tackle GDPR compliance in a right-sized, methodical approach.
    • Adhere to a core, complex GDPR requirement through the use of our documentation templates.
    • Understand how the risk of non-compliance is aligned to both your organization’s functions and data scope.
    • This blueprint will guide you through projects and steps that will result in quick wins for near-term compliance.

    Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should fast track your GDPR compliance efforts, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand your compliance requirements

    Understand the breadth of the regulation’s requirements and document roles and responsibilities.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 1: Understand Your Compliance Requirements
    • GDPR RACI Chart

    2. Define your GDPR scope

    Define your GDPR scope and prioritize initiatives based on risk.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 2: Define Your GDPR Scope
    • GDPR Initiative Prioritization Tool

    3. Satisfy documentation requirements

    Understand the requirements for a record of processing and determine who will own it.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 3: Satisfy Documentation Requirements
    • Record of Processing Template
    • Legitimate Interest Assessment Template
    • Data Protection Impact Assessment Tool
    • A Guide to Data Subject Access Requests

    4. Align your data breach requirements and security program

    Document your DPO decision and align security strategy to data privacy.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 4: Align Your Data Breach Requirements & Security Program

    5. Prioritize your GDPR initiatives

    Prioritize any initiatives driven out of Phases 1-4 and begin developing policies that help in the documentation effort.

    • Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts – Phase 5: Prioritize Your GDPR Initiatives
    • Data Protection Policy
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Fast Track Your GDPR Compliance Efforts

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand Your Compliance Requirements

    The Purpose

    Kick-off the workshop; understand and define GDPR as it exists in your organizational context.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritize your business units based on GDPR risk.

    Assign roles and responsibilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Kick-off and introductions.

    1.2 High-level overview of weekly activities and outcomes.

    1.3 Identify and define GDPR initiative within your organization’s context.

    1.4 Determine what actions have been done to prepare; how have regulations been handled in the past?

    1.5 Identify key business units for GDPR committee.

    1.6 Document business units and functions that are within scope.

    1.7 Prioritize business units based on GDPR.

    1.8 Formalize stakeholder support.

    Outputs

    Prioritized business units based on GDPR risk

    GDPR Compliance RACI Chart

    2 Define Your GDPR Scope

    The Purpose

    Know the rationale behind a record of processing.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine who will own the record of processing.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the necessity for a record of processing.

    2.2 Determine for each prioritized business unit: are you a controller or processor?

    2.3 Develop a record of processing for most-critical business units.

    2.4 Perform legitimate interest assessments.

    2.5 Document an iterative process for creating a record of processing.

    Outputs

    Initial record of processing: 1-2 activities

    Initial legitimate interest assessment: 1-2 activities

    Determination of who will own the record of processing

    3 Satisfy Documentation Requirements and Align With Your Data Breach Requirements and Security Program

    The Purpose

    Review existing security controls and highlight potential requirements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure the initiatives you’ll be working on align with existing controls and future goals.

    Activities

    3.1 Determine the appetite to align the GDPR project to data classification and data discovery.

    3.2 Discuss the benefits of data discovery and classification.

    3.3 Review existing incident response plans and highlight gaps.

    3.4 Review existing security controls and highlight potential requirements.

    3.5 Review all initiatives highlighted during days 1-3.

    Outputs

    Highlighted gaps in current incident response and security program controls

    Documented all future initiatives

    4 Prioritize GDPR Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Review project plan and initiatives and prioritize.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Finalize outputs of the workshop, with a strong understanding of next steps.

    Activities

    4.1 Analyze the necessity for a data protection officer and document decision.

    4.2 Review project plan and initiatives.

    4.3 Prioritize all current initiatives based on regulatory compliance, cost, and ease to implement.

    4.4 Develop a data protection policy.

    4.5 Finalize key deliverables created during the workshop.

    4.6 Present the GDPR project to key stakeholders.

    4.7 Workshop executive presentation and debrief.

    Outputs

    GDPR framework and prioritized initiatives

    Data Protection Policy

    List of key tools

    Communication plans

    Workshop summary documentation

    Achieve Digital Resilience by Managing Digital Risk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}375|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $123,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance

    Businesses are expected to balance achieving innovation through initiatives that transform the organization with effective risk management. While this is nothing new, added challenges arise due to:

    • An increasingly large vendor ecosystem within which to manage risk.
    • A fragmented approach to risk management that separates cyber and IT risk from enterprise risk.
    • A rapidly growing number of threat actors and a larger attack surface.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • All risks are digital risks.
    • Manage digital risk with a collaborative approach that supports digital transformation, ensures digital resilience, and distributes responsibility for digital risk management across the organization.

    Impact and Result

    Address digital risk to build digital resilience. In the process, you will drive transformation and maintain digital trust among your employees, end users, and consumers by:

    • Defining digital risk, including primary risk categories and prevalent risk factors.
    • Leveraging industry examples to help identify external risk considerations.
    • Building a digital risk profile, addressing core risk categories, and creating a correlating plan for digital risk management.

    Achieve Digital Resilience by Managing Digital Risk Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Risk does not exist in isolation and must extend beyond your cyber and IT teams. Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to manage digital risk to help drive digital transformation and build your organization's digital resilience.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Redefine digital risk and resilience

    Discover an overview of what digital risk is, learn how to assess risk factors for the five primary categories of digital risk, see several industry-specific scenarios, and explore how to plan for and mitigate identified risks.

    • Achieve Digital Resilience by Managing Digital Risk – Phases 1-2
    • Digital Risk Management Charter

    2. Build your digital risk profile

    Begin building the digital risk profile for your organization, identify where your key areas of risk exposure exist, and assign ownership and accountability among the organization’s business units.

    • Digital Risk Profile Tool
    • Digital Risk Management Executive Report
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Achieve Digital Resilience by Managing Digital Risk

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Scope and Define Digital Risk

    The Purpose

    Develop an understanding and standard definition of what digital risk is, who it impacts, and its relevance to the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand what digital risk means and how it differs from traditional enterprise or cybersecurity risk.

    Develop a definition of digital risk that recognizes the unique external and internal considerations of your organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context

    1.2 Review the current roles of enterprise, IT, and cyber risk management within the organization

    1.3 Define digital transformation and list transformation initiatives

    1.4 Define digital risk in the context of the organization

    1.5 Define digital resilience in the context of the organization

    Outputs

    Digital risk drivers

    Applicable definition of digital risk

    Applicable definition of digital resilience

    2 Make the Case for Digital Risk Management

    The Purpose

    Understand the roles digital risk management and your digital risk profile have in helping your organization achieve safe, transformative growth.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An overview and understanding of digital risk categories and subsequent individual digital risk factors for the organization

    Industry considerations that highlight the importance of managing digital risk

    A structured approach to managing the categories of digital risk

    Activities

    2.1 Review and discuss industry case studies and industry examples of digital transformation and digital risk

    2.2 Revise the organization's list of digital transformation initiatives (past, current, and future)

    2.3 Begin to build your organization's Digital Risk Management Charter (with inputs from Module 1)

    2.4 Revise, customize, and complete a Digital Risk Management Charter for the organization

    Outputs

    Digital Risk Management Charter

    Industry-specific digital risks, factors, considerations, and scenarios

    The organization's digital risks mapped to its digital transformation initiatives

    3 Build Your Digital Risk Profile

    The Purpose

    Develop an initial digital risk profile that identifies the organization’s core areas of focus in managing digital risk.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A unique digital risk profile for the organization

    Digital risk management initiatives that are mapped against the organization's current strategic initiatives and aligned to meet your digital resilience objectives and benchmarks

    Activities

    3.1 Review category control questions within the Digital Risk Profile Tool

    3.2 Complete all sections (tabs) within the Digital Risk Profile Tool

    3.3 Assess the results of your Digital Risk Profile Tool

    3.4 Discuss and assign initial weightings for ownership of digital risk among the organization's stakeholders

    Outputs

    Completion of all category tabs within the Digital Risk Profile Tool

    Initial stakeholder ownership assignments of digital risk categories

    4 Manage Your Digital Risk

    The Purpose

    Refine the digital risk management plan for the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A targeted, organization-specific approach to managing digital risk as a part of the organization's projects and initiatives on an ongoing basis

    An executive presentation that outlines digital risk management for your senior leadership team

    Activities

    4.1 Conduct brief information sessions with the relevant digital risk stakeholders identified in Module 3.

    4.2 Review and revise the organization's Digital Risk Profile as necessary, including adjusting weightings for the digital risk categories

    4.3 Begin to build an actionable digital risk management plan

    4.4 Present your findings to the organization's relevant risk leaders and executive team

    Outputs

    A finalized and assessed Digital Risk Profile Tool

    Stakeholder ownership for digital risk management

    A draft Digital Risk Management plan and Digital Risk Management Executive Report

    Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}556|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • A company’s web presence is its front face to the world. Ensuring you have the right suite of tools for web content management, experience design, and web analytics is critical to putting your best foot forward: failing to do so will result in customer attrition and lost revenue.
    • Web Experience Management (WEM) suites are a rapidly maturing and dynamic market, with a landscape full of vendors with cutting edge solutions and diverse offerings. As a result, finding a solution that is the best fit for your organization can be a complex process.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • WEM products are not a one-size-fits-all investment: unique evaluations and customization are required in order to deploy a solution that fits your organization.
    • WEM technology often complements core CRM and marketing management products – it does not supplant it, and must augment the rest of your customer experience management portfolio.
    • Phase your WEM implementation: Start with core capabilities such as content management, then add additional capabilities for site analytics and dynamic experience.

    Impact and Result

    • Align marketing needs with identified functional requirements.
    • Implement a best-fit WEM that increases customer acquisition and retention, and provides in-depth capabilities for site analysis.
    • Optimize procurement and operations costs for the WEM platform.

    Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should select and implement a WEM solution, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch the WEM project and collect requirements

    Conduct a market overview, structure the project, and gather requirements.

    • Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution – Phase 1: Launch the WEM Project and Collect Requirements
    • WEM Project Charter Template
    • WEM Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool

    2. Select a WEM solution

    Analyze and shortlist vendors in the space and select a WEM solution.

    • Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution – Phase 2: Select a WEM Solution
    • WEM Vendor Shortlist & Detailed Feature Analysis Tool
    • WEM Vendor Demo Script Template
    • WEM RFP Template

    3. Plan the WEM implementation

    Plan the implementation and evaluate project metrics.

    • Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution – Phase 3: Plan the WEM Implementation
    • WEM Work Breakdown Structure Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Launch of the WEM Selection Project

    The Purpose

    Discuss the general project overview for the WEM selection.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Launch of your WEM selection project.

    Development of your organization’s WEM requirements.

    Activities

    1.1 Facilitation of activities from the Launch the WEM Project and Collect Requirements phase, including project scoping and resource planning.

    1.2 Conduct overview of the WEM market landscape, trends, and vendors.

    1.3 Conduct process mapping for selected marketing processes.

    1.4 Interview business stakeholders.

    1.5 Prioritize WEM functional requirements.

    Outputs

    WEM Procurement Project Charter

    WEM Use-Case Fit Assessment

    2 Plan the Procurement and Implementation Process

    The Purpose

    Plan the procurement and the implementation of the WEM solution.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Selection of a WEM solution.

    A plan for implementing the selected WEM solution.

    Activities

    2.1 Complete marketing process mapping with business stakeholders.

    2.2 Interview IT staff and project team, identify technical requirements for the WEM suite, and document high-level solution requirements.

    2.3 Perform a use-case scenario assessment, review use-case scenario results, identify use-case alignment, and review the WEM Vendor Landscape vendor profiles and performance.

    2.4 Create a custom vendor shortlist and investigate additional vendors for exploration in the marketplace.

    2.5 Meet with project manager to discuss results and action items.

    Outputs

    Vendor Shortlist

    WEM RFP

    Vendor Evaluations

    Selection of a WEM Solution

    WEM projected work break-down

    Implementation plan

    Framework for WEM deployment and CRM/Marketing Management Suite Integration

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}218|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • As vendors become more prevalent in organizations, organizations increasingly need to understand and manage the potential financial impacts of vendors’ actions.
    • It is only a matter of time until a vendor mistake impacts your organization. Make sure you are prepared to manage the adverse financial consequences.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential financial impact requires multiple people in the organization across several functions – and those people all need educating on the potential risks.
    • Organizational leadership is often unaware of decisions on organizational risk appetite and tolerance, and they assume there are more protections in place against risk impact than there truly are.

    Impact and Result

    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.
    • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
    • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impact on Your Organization Deck – Use the research to better understand the negative financial impacts of vendor actions.

    Use this research to identify and quantify the potential financial impacts of vendors’ poor performance. Use Info-Tech’s approach to look at the financial impact from various perspectives to better prepare for issues that may arise.

    • Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization Storyboard

    2. “What If” Financial Risk Impact Tool – Use this tool to help identify and quantify the financial impacts of negative vendor actions.

    By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    • Financial Risk Impact Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    Good vendor management practices help organizations understand the costs of negative vendor actions.

    Analyst Perspective

    Vendor actions can have significant financial consequences for your organization.

    Photo of Frank Sewell, Research Director, Vendor Management, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Vendors are becoming more influential and essential to the operation of organizations. Often the sole risk consideration of a business is whether the vendor meets a security standard, but vendors can negatively impact organizations’ budgets in various ways. Fortunately, though inherent risk is always present, organizations can offset the financial impacts of high-risk vendors by employing due diligence in their vendor management practices to help manage the overall risks.

    Frank Sewell
    Research Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    As vendors become more prevalent in organizations, organizations increasingly need to understand and manage the potential financial impacts of vendors’ actions.

    It is only a matter of time until a vendor mistake impacts your organization. Make sure you are prepared to manage the adverse financial consequences.

    Common Obstacles

    Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential financial impact requires multiple people in the organization across several functions – and those people all need educating on the potential risks.

    Organizational leadership is often unaware of decisions on organizational risk appetite and tolerance, and they assume there are more protections in place against risk impact than there truly are.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.

    Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.

    Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.

    Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Companies without good vendor management risk initiatives will take on more risk than they should. Solid vendor management practices are imperative –organizations must evolve to ensure that vendors deliver services according to performance objectives and that risks are managed accordingly.

    Info-Tech’s multi-blueprint series on vendor risk assessment

    There are many individual components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.

    Cube with each multiple colors on each face, similar to a Rubix cube, and individual components of vendor risk branching off of it: 'Financial', 'Reputational', 'Operational', 'Strategic', 'Security', and 'Regulatory & Compliance'.

    This series will focus on the individual components of vendor risk and how vendor management practices can facilitate organizations’ understanding of those risks.

    Out of scope:
    This series will not tackle risk governance, determining overall risk tolerance and appetite, or quantifying inherent risk.

    Financial risk impact

    Potential losses to the organization due to financial risks

    In this blueprint, we’ll explore financial risks and their impacts.

    Identifying negative actions is paramount to assessing the overall financial impact on your organization, starting in the due diligence phase of the vendor assessment and continuing throughout the vendor lifecycle.

    Cube with each multiple colors on each face, similar to a Rubix cube, and the vendor risk component 'Financial' highlighted.

    Unbudgeted financial risk impact

    The costs of adverse vendor actions, such as a breach or an outage, are increasing. By knowing these potential costs, leaders can calculate how to avoid them throughout the lifecycle of the relationship.

    Loss of business represents the largest share of the breach

    38%

    Avg. $1.59M
    Global average cost of a vendor breach

    $4.2M

    Percentage of breaches in 2020 caused by business associates

    40.2%

    23.2% YoY
    (year over year)
    (Source: “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021,” IBM, 2021) (Source: “Vendor Risk Management – A Growing Concern,” Stern Security, 2021)

    Example: Hospital IT System Outage

    Hospitals often rely on vendors to manage their data center environments but rarely understand the downstream financial impacts if that vendor fails to perform.

    For example, a vendor implements a patch out of cycle with no notice to the IT group. Suddenly all IT systems are down. It takes 12 hours for the IT teams to return systems to normal. The downstream impacts are substantial.

    • There is no revenue capture during outage (patient registration, payments).
      • The financial loss is significant, impacting cash on hand and jeopardizing future projects.
    • Clinicians cannot access the electronic health record (EHR) system and shift to downtime paper processes.
      • This can cause potential risks to patient health, such as unknown drug interactions.
      • This could also incur lawsuits, fines, and penalties.
    • Staff must manually add the paper records into the EHR after the incident is corrected.
      • Staff time is lost on creating paper records and overtime is required to reintroduce those records into EMR.
    • Staff time and overtime pay on troubleshooting and solving issues take away from normal operations and could cause delays, having downstream effects on the timing of other projects.

    Insight Summary

    Assessing financial impacts is an ongoing, educative, and collaborative multidisciplinary process that vendor management initiatives are uniquely designed to coordinate and manage for organizations.

    Insight 1 Vendors are becoming more and more crucial to organizations’ overall operations, and most organizations have a poor understanding of the potential impacts they represent.

    Is your vendor solvent? Do they have enough staff to accommodate your needs? Has their long-term planning been affected by changes in the market? Are they unique in their space?

    Insight 2 Financial impacts from other risk types deserve just as much focus as security alone, if not more.

    Examples include penalties and fines, loss of revenue due to operational impacts, vendor replacement costs, hidden costs in poorly understood contracts, and lack of contractual protections.

    Insight 3 There is always an inherent risk in working with a vendor, but organizations should financially quantify how much each risk may impact their budget.

    A significant concern for organizations is quantifying different types of risks. When a risk occurs, the financial losses are often poorly understood, with unbudgeted financial impacts.

    Three stages of vendor financial risk assessment

    Assess risk throughout the complete vendor lifecycle

    1. Pre-Relationship Due Diligence: The initial pre-relationship due diligence stage is a crucial point to establish risk management practices. Vendor management practices ensure that a potential vendor’s risk is categorized correctly by facilitating the process of risk assessment.
    2. Monitor & Manage: Once the relationship is in place, organizations should enact ongoing management efforts to ensure they are both getting their value from the vendor and appropriately addressing any newly identified risks.
    3. Termination: When the termination of the relationship arrives, the organization should validate that adequate protections that were established while forming a contract in the pre-relationship stage remain in place.

    Inherent risks from negative actions are pervasive throughout the entire vendor lifecycle. Collaboratively understanding those risks and working together to put proper management in place enables organizations to get the most value out of the relationship with the least amount of risk.

    Flowchart for 'Assessing Financial Risk Impacts', beginning with 'New Vendor' to 'Sourcing' to the six components of 'Vendor Management'. After a gamut of assessments such as ''What If' Game' one can either 'Accept' to move on to 'Pre-Relationship', 'Monitor & Manage', and eventually to 'Termination', or not accept and circle back to 'Sourcing'.

    Stage 1: Pre-relationship assessment

    Do these as part of your due diligence

    • Review and negotiate contract terms and conditions.
      • Ensure that you have the protections to make you whole in the event of an incident, in the event that another entity purchases the vendor, and throughout the entire lifecycle of your relationship with the vendor.
      • Make sure to negotiate your post-termination protections in the initial agreement.
    • Perform a due-diligence financial assessment.
      • Make sure the vendor is positioned in the market to be able to service your organization.
    • Perform an initial risk assessment.
      • Identify and understand all potential factors that may cause financial impacts to your organization.
      • Include total cost of ownership (TCO) and return of investment (ROI) as potential impact offsets.
    • Review case studies – talk to other customers.
      • Research who else has worked with the vendor to get “the good, the bad, and the ugly” stories to form a clear picture of a potential relationship with the vendor.
    • Use proofs of concept.
      • It is essential to know how the vendor and their solutions will work in the environment before committing resources and to incorporate them into organizational strategic plans.
    • Limit vendors’ ability to increase costs over the years. It is not uncommon for a long-term relationship to become more expensive than a new one over time when the increases are unmanaged.
    • Vendor audits can be costly and a significant distraction to your staff. Make sure to contractually limit them.
    • Many vendors enjoy significant revenue from unclear deliverables and vague expectations that lead to change requests at unknown rates – clarifying expectations and deliverables and demanding negotiated rate sheets before engagement will save budget and strengthen the relationship.

    Visit Info-Tech’s VMO ROI Calculator and Tracker

    The “what if” game

    1-3 hours

    Input: List of identified potential risk scenarios scored by likelihood and financial impact, List of potential management of the scenarios to reduce the risk

    Output: Comprehensive financial risk profile on the specific vendor solution

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Financial Risk Impact Tool to help drive discussion

    Participants: Vendor Management – Coordinator, IT Operations, Legal/Compliance/Risk Manager, Finance/Procurement

    Vendor management professionals are in an excellent position to collaboratively pull together resources across the organization to determine potential risks. By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    1. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group).
    2. Use the Financial Risk Impact Tool to prompt discussion on potential risks. Keep this discussion flowing organically to explore all potential risks but manage the overall process to keep the discussion on track.
    3. Collect the outputs and ask the subject matter experts for management options for each one in order to present a comprehensive risk strategy. You will use this to educate senior leadership so that they can make an informed decision to accept or reject the solution.

    Download the Financial Risk Impact Tool

    Stage 2.1: Monitor the financial risk

    Ongoing monitoring activities

    Never underestimate the value of keeping the relationship moving forward.

    Examples of items and activities to monitor include;

    Stock photo of a worker being trained on a computer.
    • Fines
    • Data leaks
    • Performance
    • Credit monitoring
    • Viability/solvency
    • Resource capacity
    • Operational impacts
    • Regulatory penalties
    • Increases in premiums
    • Security breaches (infrastructure)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Many organizations do not have the resources to dedicate to annual risk assessments of all vendors.

    Consider timing ongoing risk assessments to align with contract renewal, when you have the most leverage with the vendor.

    Visit Info-Tech’s Risk Register Tool

    Stage 2.2: Manage the financial risk

    During the lifecycle of the vendor relationship

    • Renew risk assessments annually.
    • Focus your efforts on highly ranked risks.
    • Is there a new opportunity to negotiate?
    • Identify and classify individual vendor risk.
    • Are there better existing contracts in place?
    • Review financial health checks at the same time.
    • Monitor and schedule contract renewals and new service/module negotiations.
    • Perform business alignment meetings to reassess the relationship.
    • Ongoing operational meetings should be supplemental, dealing with day-to-day issues.
    • Develop performance metrics and hold vendors accountable to established service levels.
    Stock image of a professional walking an uneven line over the words 'Risk Management'.

    Stage 3: Termination

    An essential and often overlooked part of the vendor lifecycle is the relationship after termination

    • The risk of a vendor keeping your data for “as long as they want” is high.
      • Data retention becomes a “forever risk” in today’s world of cyber issues if you do not appropriately plan.
    • Ensure that you always know where data resides and where people are allowed to access that data.
      • If there is a regulatory need to house data only in specific locations, ensure that it is explicit in agreements.
    • Protect your data through language in initial agreements that covers what needs to happen when the relationship with the vendor terminates.
      • Typically, all the data that the vendor has retained is returned and/or destroyed at your sole discretion.
    Stock image of a sign reading 'Closure'.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock photo of two co-workers laughing. Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process
    • Achieve measurable savings in contract time processing, financial risk avoidance, and dollar savings
    • Understand how to identify and mitigate risk to save the organization time and money.
    Stock image of reports and file folders. Identify and Reduce Agile Contract Risk
    • Manage Agile contract risk by selecting the appropriate level of protections for an Agile project.
    • Focus on the correct contract clauses to manage Agile risk.
    Stock photo of three co-workers gathered around a computer screen. Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Vendor management must be an IT strategy. Solid vendor management is an imperative – IT organizations must develop capabilities to ensure that services are delivered by vendors according to service level objectives and that risks are mitigated according to the organization's risk tolerance.
    • Gain visibility into your IT vendor community. Understand how much you spend with each vendor and rank their criticality and risk to focus on the vendors you should be concentrating on for innovative solutions.

    Understand the Data and Analytics Landscape

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}131|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.8/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 14 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • The data and analytics landscape comprises many disciplines and components; organizations may find themselves unsure of where to start or what data topic or area they should be addressing.
    • Organizations want to better understand the components of the data and analytics landscape and how they are connected.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • This deck will provide a base understanding of the core data disciplines and will point to the various Info-Tech blueprints that dive deeper into each of the areas.

    Impact and Result

    • This deck will provide a base understanding of the core disciplines of the data and analytics landscape and will point to the various Info-Tech blueprints that dive deeper into each of the areas.

    Understand the Data and Analytics Landscape Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the data and analytics landscape

    Get an overview of the core disciplines of the data and analytics landscape.

    • Understand the Data and Analytics Landscape Storyboard

    Infographic

    Consolidate Your Data Centers

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}498|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Center & Facilities Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /data-center-and-facilities-strategy
    • Data center operating costs continue to escalate as organizations struggle with data center sprawl.
    • While data center consolidation is an attractive option to reduce cost and sprawl, the complexity of these projects makes them extremely difficulty to execute.
    • The status quo is also not an option, as budget constraints and the challenges with managing multiple data centers continues to increase.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Despite consolidation being an effective way of addressing sprawl, it is often difficult to secure buy-in and funding from the business.
    • Many consolidation projects suffer cost overruns due to unforeseen requirements and hidden interdependencies which could have been mitigated during the planning phase.
    • Organizations that avoid consolidation projects due to their complexity are just deferring the challenge, while costs and inefficiencies continue to increase.

    Impact and Result

    • Successful data center consolidation will have an immediate impact on reducing data center sprawl. Maximize your chances of success by securing buy-in from the business.
    • Avoid cost overruns and unforeseen requirements by engaging with the business at the start of the process. Clearly define business requirements and establish common expectations.
    • While cost improvements often drive data center consolidation, successful projects will also improve scalability, operational efficiency, and data center redundancy.

    Consolidate Your Data Centers Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should perform a data center consolidation, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Discover

    Identify IT infrastructure systems and establish dependency bundles for the current and target sites.

    • Consolidate Your Data Centers – Phase 1: Discover
    • Data Center Consolidation Data Collection Workbook
    • Data Center Consolidation Project Planning and Prioritization Tool

    2. Plan

    Build a strong business case for data center consolidation by leveraging a TCO analysis and incorporating business requirements.

    • Consolidate Your Data Centers – Phase 2: Plan
    • Data Center Consolidation TCO Comparison Tool
    • Data Center Relocation Vendor Statement of Work Evaluation Tool

    3. Execute

    Streamline the move-day process through effective communication and clear delegation of duties.

    • Consolidate Your Data Centers – Phase 3: Execute
    • Communications Plan Template for Data Center Consolidation
    • Data Center Consolidation Executive Presentation
    • Minute-to-Minute Move Day Script (PDF)
    • Minute-to-Minute Move Day Script (Visio)
    • Data Center Relocation Minute-to-Minute Project Planning and Monitoring Tool

    4. Close

    Close the loop on the data center consolidation project by conducting an effective project retrospective.

    • Consolidate Your Data Centers – Phase 4: Close
    • Data Center Relocation QA Team Project Planning and Monitoring Tool
    • Data Center Move Issue Resolution and Change Order Template
    • Data Center Relocation Wrap-up Checklist
    [infographic]

    Recruit IT Talent

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}574|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $17,565 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 8 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Attract & Select
    • Parent Category Link: /attract-and-select
    • Changing workforce dynamics and increased transparency have shifted the power from employers to job seekers, stiffening the competition for talent.
    • Candidate expectations match high consumer expectations and affect the employer brand, the consumer brand, and overall organizational reputation. Delivering a positive candidate experience (CX2) is no longer optional.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Think about your candidates as consumers. Truly understanding their needs will attract great talent and build positive brand perceptions.
    • The CX2 starts sooner than you think. It encompasses all candidate interactions with an organization and begins before the formal application process.
    • Don’t try to emulate competitors. By differentiating your CX2, you build a competitive advantage.

    Impact and Result

    • Design a candidate-centric talent acquisition process that addresses candidate feedback from both unsuccessful and successful candidates.
    • Use design-thinking principles to focus your redesign on moments that matter to candidates to reduce unnecessary work or ad-hoc initiatives that don’t matter to candidates.

    Recruit IT Talent Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should redesign your CX2, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish your current process and set redesign goals

    Map the organization’s current state for CX2 and set high-level objectives and metrics.

    • Win the War for Talent With a Killer Candidate Experience – Phase 1: Establish Your Current Process and Set Redesign Goals
    • Candidate Experience Project Charter
    • Talent Metrics Library
    • Candidate Experience Process Mapping Template
    • Candidate Experience Assessment Tool

    2. Use design thinking to assess the candidate experience

    Strengthen the candidate lifecycle by improving upon pain points through design thinking methods and assessing the competitive landscape.

    • Win the War for Talent With a Killer Candidate Experience – Phase 2: Use Design Thinking to Assess the Candidate Experience
    • Design Thinking Primer
    • Empathy Map Template
    • Journey Map Guide

    3. Redesign the candidate experience

    Create action, communications, and training plans to establish the redesigned CX2 with hiring process stakeholders.

    • Win the War for Talent With a Killer Candidate Experience – Phase 3: Redesign the Candidate Experience
    • Candidate Experience Best Practices Action Guide
    • Candidate Experience Action and Communication Plan
    • Candidate Experience Service Level Agreement Template

    4. Appendix

    Leverage data collection and workshop activities.

    • Win the War for Talent With a Killer Candidate Experience – Appendix: Data Collection and Workshop Activities
    • Candidate Experience Phase One Data Collection Guide
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Recruit IT Talent

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish Your Current Process and Set Redesign Goals

    The Purpose

    Assess the organization’s current state for CX2.

    Set baseline metrics for comparison with new initiatives.

    Establish goals to strengthen the CX2.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gained understanding of where the organization is currently.

    Established where the organization would like to be and goals to achieve the new state.

    Activities

    1.1 Review process map of current candidate lifecycle.

    1.2 Analyze qualitative and quantitative data gathered.

    1.3 Set organizational objectives and project goals.

    1.4 Set metrics to measure progress on high-level goals.

    Outputs

    Process map

    CX2 data analyzed

    Candidate Experience Project Charter

    2 Use Design Thinking to Assess the Candidate Experience

    The Purpose

    Apply design thinking methods to identify pain points in your candidate lifecycle.

    Assess the competition and analyze results.

    Empathize with candidates and their journey.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Segments with pain points have been identified.

    Competitor offering and differentiation has been analyzed.

    Candidate thoughts and feelings have been synthesized.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify extreme users.

    2.2 Conduct an immersive empathy session or go through the process as if you were a target candidate.

    2.3 Identify talent competitors.

    2.4 Analyze competitive landscape.

    2.5 Synthesize research findings and create empathy map.

    2.6 Journey map the CX2.

    Outputs

    Extreme users identified

    Known and unknown talent competitor’s CX2 analyzed

    Empathy map created

    Journey map created

    3 Redesign the Candidate Experience

    The Purpose

    Create a communications and action plan and set metrics to measure success.

    Set expectations with hiring managers and talent acquisition specialists through a service level agreement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Action plan created.

    Metrics set to track progress and assess improvement.

    Service level agreement completed and expectations collaboratively set.

    Activities

    3.1 Assess each stage of the lifecycle.

    3.2 Set success metrics for priority lifecycle stages.

    3.3 Select actions from the Candidate Experience Best Practices Action Guide.

    3.4 Brainstorm other potential (organization-specific) solutions.

    3.5 Set action timeline and assign accountabilities.

    3.6 Customize service level agreement guidelines.

    Outputs

    CX2 lifecycle stages prioritized

    Metrics to measure progress set

    CX2 best practices selected

    Candidate Experience Assessment Tool

    Candidate Experience Action and Communication Plan

    Service level agreement guidelines.

    Do you believe in absolute efficiency?

    Weekend read. Hence I post this a bit later on Friday.
    Lately, I've been fascinated by infinity. And in infinity, some weird algebra pops up. Yet that weirdness is very much akin to what our business stakeholders want, driven by what our clients demand, and hence our KPIs drive us. Do more with less. And that is what absolute efficiency means.

    Register to read more …

    Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}140|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.8/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $73,994 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 9 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • SAP has strict audit practices, which, in combination with 50+ types of user classifications and manual accounting for some licenses, make maintaining compliance difficult.
    • Mapping and matching SAP products to the environment can be highly complex, leading to overspending and an inability to reduce spend later.
    • Beware of indirect access to SAP applications from third-party applications (e.g. Salesforce).
    • Products that have been acquired by SAP may have altered licensing terms that are innocuously referred to in support renewal documents.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on needs first. Conduct a thorough requirements assessment and document the results. Well-documented license needs will be your core asset in navigating SAP licensing and negotiating your agreement.
    • Examine indirect access possibilities. Understanding how in-house or third-party applications may be accessing the SAP software is critical.
    • Know whats in the contract. Each customer agreement is different and there may be terms that are beneficial. Older agreements may provide both benefits and challenges when evaluating your SAP license position.

    Impact and Result

    • Conduct an analysis to remove inactive and duplicate users as multiple logins may exist and could end up costing the organization license fees when audited.
    • Adopt a cyclical approach to reviewing your SAP licensing and create a reference document to track your software needs, planned licensing, and purchase negotiation points.
    • Learn the “SAP way” of conducting business, which includes a best-in-class sales structure, unique contracts and license use policies, and a hyper-aggressive compliance function. Conducting business with SAP is not typical compared to other vendors, and you will need different tools to emerge successfully from a commercial transaction.
    • Manage SAP support and maintenance spend and policies. Once an agreement has been signed, it can be very difficult to decrease spend, as SAP will reprice products if support is dropped.

    Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you need to understand and document your SAP licensing strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish licensing requirements

    Begin your proactive SAP licensing journey by understanding which information to gather and assessing the current state and gaps.

    • Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk – Phase 1: Establish Licensing Requirements
    • SAP License Summary and Analysis Tool

    2. Evaluate licensing options

    Review current licensing models and determine which licensing models will most appropriately fit your environment.

    • Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk – Phase 2: Evaluate Licensing Options

    3. Evaluate agreement options

    Review SAP’s contract types and assess which best fit the organization’s licensing needs.

    • Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk – Phase 3: Evaluate Agreement Options

    4. Purchase and manage licenses

    Conduct negotiations, purchase licensing, and finalize a licensing management strategy.

    • Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk – Phase 4: Purchase and Manage Licenses
    [infographic]

    Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}332|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $36,636 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 26 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    Getting a seat at the table is your first objective in building a strategic roadmap. Knowing what the business wants to do and understanding what it will need in the future is a challenge for most IT departments.

    This could be a challenge such as:

    • Understanding the business vision
    • Clear communications on business planning
    • Insight into what the future state should look like
    • Understanding what the IT team is spending its time on day to day

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Having a clear vision of what the future state is and knowing that creating an IT Infrastructure roadmap is never finished will give your IT team an understanding of priorities, goals, business vision, and risks associated with not planning.
    • Understand what you are currently paying for and why.

    Impact and Result

    • Understanding of the business priorities, and vision of the future
    • Know what your budget is spent on: running the business, growth, or innovation
    • Increased communication with the right stakeholders
    • Better planning based on analysis of time study, priorities, and business goals

    Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Storyboard – Improve and align goals and strategy.

    In this section you will develop a vision and mission statement and set goals that align with the business vision and goals. The outcome will deliver your guiding principles and a list of goals that will determine your initiatives and their priorities.

    • Build Your Infrastructure Roadmap Storyboard
    • Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    2. Financial Spend Analysis Template – Envision future and analyze constraints.

    Consider your future state by looking at technology that will help the business in the future. Complete an analysis of your past spending to determine your future spend. Complete a SWOT analysis to determine suitability.

    • Financial Spend Analysis Template

    3. Strategic Roadmap Initiative Template – Align and build the roadmap.

    Develop a risk framework that may slow or hinder your strategic initiatives from progressing and evaluate your technical debt. What is the current state of your infrastructure? Generate and prioritize your initiatives, and set dates for completion.

    • Strategic Roadmap Initiative Template

    4. Infrastructure and Strategy Executive Brief Template – Communicate and improve the process.

    After creating your roadmap, communicate it to your audience. Identify who needs to be informed and create an executive brief with the template download. Finally, create KPIs to measure what success looks like.

    • Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Executive Presentation Template
    • Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap

    Align infrastructure investment to business-driven goals.

    Analysts' Perspectives

    Infrastructure roadmaps are an absolute necessity for all organizations. An organization's size often dictates the degree of complexity of the roadmap, but they all strive to paint the future picture of the organization's IT infrastructure.

    Infrastructure roadmaps typically start with the current state of infrastructure and work on how to improve. That thinking must change! Start with the future vision, an unimpeded vision, as if there were no constraints. Now you can see where you want to be.

    Look at your past to determine how you have been spending your infrastructure budget. If your past shows a trend of increased operational expenditures, that trend will likely continue. The same is true for capital spending and staffing numbers.

    Now that you know where you want to go, and how you ended up where you are, look at the constraints you must deal with and make a plan. It's not as difficult as it may seem, and even the longest journey begins with one step.

    Speaking of that first step, it should be to understand the business goals and align your roadmap with those same goals. Now you have a solid plan to develop a strategic infrastructure roadmap; enjoy the journey!

    There are many reasons why you need to build a strategic IT infrastructure roadmap, but your primary objectives are to set the long-term direction, build a framework for decision making, create a foundation for operational planning, and be able to explain to the business what you are planning. It is a basis for accountability and sets out goals and priorities for the future.

    Other than knowing where you are going there are four key benefits to building the roadmap.

    1. It allows you to be strategic and transformative rather than tactical and reactive.
    2. It gives you the ability to prioritize your tasks and projects in order to get them going.
    3. It gives you the ability to align your projects to business outcomes.
    4. Additionally, you can leverage your roadmap to justify your budget for resources and infrastructure.

    When complete, you will be able to communicate to your fellow IT teams what you are doing and get an understanding of possible business- or IT-related roadblocks, but overall executing on your roadmap will demonstrate to the business your competencies and ability to succeed.

    PJ Ryan

    PJ Ryan
    Research Director
    Infrastructure & Operations Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    John Donovan

    John Donovan
    Principal Research Director
    Infrastructure & Operations Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap

    Align infrastructure investment to business-driven goals.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    When it comes to building a strategic roadmap, getting a seat at the table is your first objective. Knowing what the business wants to do and understanding its future needs is a challenge for most IT organizations.

    Challenges such as:

    • Understanding the business vision
    • Clear communications on business planning
    • Insight into what the future state should look like

    Common Obstacles

    Fighting fires, keeping the lights on, patching, and overseeing legacy debt maintenance – these activities prevent your IT team from thinking strategically and looking beyond day-to-day operations. Issues include:

    • Managing time well
    • Building the right teams
    • Setting priorities

    Procrastinating when it comes to thinking about your future state will get you nowhere in a hurry.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Look into your past IT spend and resources that are being utilized.

    • Analyze all aspects of the operation, and resources required.
    • Be realistic with your timelines.
    • Work from the future state backward.

    Build your roadmap by setting priorities, understanding risk and gaps both in finance and resources. Overall, your roadmap is never done, so don't worry if you get it wrong on the first pass.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Have a clear vision of what the future state is, and know that when creating an IT infrastructure roadmap, it is never done. This will give your IT team an understanding of priorities, goals, business vision, and risks associated with not planning. Understand what you are currently paying for and why.

    Insight Summary

    "Planning is bringing the future into the present so that you can do something about it now."
    Source: Alan Lakein, Libquotes

    Your strategic objectives are key to building a roadmap

    Many organizations' day-to-day IT operations are tactical and reactive. This needs to change; the IT team needs to become strategic and proactive in its planning and execution. Forward thinking bridges the gap from your current state, to what the organization is, to what it wants to achieve. Your strategic objectives need to align to the business vision and goals and keep it running.

    Your future state will determine your roadmap priorities

    Identify what the business needs to meet its goals; this should be reflected in your roadmap priorities. Then identify the tasks and projects that can get you there. Business alignment is key, as these projects require prioritization. Strategic initiatives that align to business outcomes will be your foundation for planning on those priorities. If you do not align your initiatives, you will end up spinning your wheels. A good strategic roadmap will have all the elements of forward thinking and planning to execute with the right resources, right priorities, and right funding to make it happen.

    Understand what you have been paying for the last few years

    Measure the cost of "keeping the lights on" as a baseline for your budget that is earmarked and already spent. Determine if your current spend is holding back innovation due to:

    1. The high cost of maintenance
    2. Resources in operations doing low-value work due to the effort required to do tasks related to break/fix on aging hardware and software

    A successful strategic roadmap will be determined when you have a good handle on your current spending patterns and planning for future needs that include resources, budget, and know-how. Without a plan and roadmap, that plan will not get business buy-in or funding.

    Top challenges reported by Info-Tech members

    Lack of strategic direction

    • Infrastructure leadership must discover the business goals.

    Time seepage

    • Project time is constantly being tracked incorrectly.

    Technical debt

    • Aging equipment is not proactively cycled out with newer enabling technologies.

    Case Study

    The strategic IT roadmap allows Dura to stay at the forefront of automotive manufacturing.

    INDUSTRY: Manufacturing
    SOURCE: Performance Improvement Partners

    Challenge

    Following the acquisition of Dura, MiddleGround aimed to position Dura as a leader in the automotive industry, leveraging the company's established success spanning over a century.

    However, prior limited investments in technology necessitated significant improvements for Dura to optimize its processes and take advantage of digital advancements.

    Solution

    MiddleGround joined forces with PIP to assess technology risks, expenses, and prospects, and develop a practical IT plan with solutions that fit MiddleGround's value-creation timeline.

    By selecting the top 15 most important IT projects, the companies put together a feasible technology roadmap aimed at advancing Dura in the manufacturing sector.

    Results

    Armed with due diligence reports and a well-defined IT plan, MiddleGround and Dura have a strategic approach to maximizing value creation.

    By focusing on key areas such as analysis, applications, infrastructure and the IT organization, Dura is effectively transforming its operations and shaping the future of the automotive manufacturing industry.

    How well do you know your business strategy?

    A mere 25% of managers
    can list three of the company's
    top five priorities.

    Based on a study from MIT Sloan, shared understanding of strategic directives barely exists beyond the top tiers of leadership.

    An image of a bar graph showing the percentage of leaders able to correctly list a majority of their strategic priorities.

    Take your time back

    Unplanned incident response is a leading cause of the infrastructure time crunch, but so too are nonstandard service requests and service requests that should be projects.

    29%

    Less than one-third of all IT projects finish on time.

    200%

    85% of IT projects average cost overruns of 200% and time overruns of 70%.

    70%

    70% of IT workers feel as though they have too much work and not enough time to do it.

    Source: MIT Sloan

    Inventory Assessment

    Lifecycle

    Refresh strategies are still based on truisms (every three years for servers, every seven years for LAN, etc.) more than risk-based approaches.

    Opportunity Cost

    Assets that were suitable to enable business goals need to be re-evaluated as those goals change.

    See Info-Tech's Manage Your Technical Debt blueprint

    an image of info-tech's Manage your technical debt.

    Key IT strategy initiatives can be categorized in three ways

    IT key initiative plan

    Initiatives collectively support the business goals and corporate initiatives, and improve the delivery of IT services.

    1. Business support
      • Support major business initiatives
      • Each corporate initiative is supported by a major IT project and each project has unique IT challenges that require IT support.
    2. IT excellence
      • Reduce risk and improve IT operational excellence
      • These projects will increase IT process maturity and will systematically improve IT.
    3. Innovation
      • Drive technology innovation
      • These projects will improve future innovation capabilities and decrease risk by increasing technology maturity.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A CIO has three roles: enable business productivity, run an effective IT shop, and drive technology innovation. Your key initiative plan must reflect these three mandates and how IT strives to fulfill them.

    IT must accomplish many things

    Manage
    the lifecycle of aging equipment against current capacity and capability demands.

    Curate
    a portfolio of enabling technologies to meet future capacity and capability demands.

    Initiate
    a realistic schedule of initiatives that supports a diverse range of business goals.

    Adapt
    to executive feedback and changing business goals.

    an image of Info-Tech's Build your strategic roadmap

    Primary and secondary infrastructure drivers

    • Primary driver – The infrastructure component that is directly responsible for enabling change in the business metric.
    • Secondary driver – The infrastructure component(s) that primary drivers rely on.

    (Source: BMC)

    Sample primary and secondary drivers

    Business metric Source(s) Primary infrastructure drivers Secondary infrastructure drivers

    Sales revenue

    Online store

    Website/Server (for digital businesses)

    • Network
    • Data center facilities

    # of new customers

    Call center

    Physical plant cabling in the call center

    • PBX/VOIP server
    • Network
    • Data center facilities

    Info-Tech Insight

    You may not be able to directly influence the primary drivers of the business, but your infrastructure can have a major impact as a secondary driver.

    Info-Tech's approach

    1. Align strategy and goals
    • Establish the scope of your IT strategy by defining IT's mission and vision statements and guiding principles.
  • Envision future and analyze constraints
    • Envision and define your future infrastructure and analyze what is holding you back.
  • Align and build the roadmap
    • Establish a risk framework, identify initiatives, and build your strategic infrastructure roadmap.
  • Communicate and improve the process
    • Communicate the results of your hard work to the right people and establish the groundwork for continual improvement of the process.
  • Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Mission and Vision Statement
    Goal Alignment (Slide 28)

    Construct your vision and mission aligned to the business.

    Mission and Vision Statement

    Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap tool

    Build initiatives and prioritize them. Build the roadmap.

    Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap tool

    Infrastructure Domain Study

    What is stealing your time from getting projects done?

    Infrastructure Domain Study

    Initiative Templates Process Maps & Strategy

    Build templates for initiates, build process map, and develop strategies.

    Initiative Templates Process Maps & Strategy

    Key Deliverable

    it infrastructure roadmap template

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Info-Tech's methodology for an infrastructure strategy and roadmap

    1. Align Strategy and Goals

    2. Envision Future and Analyze Constraints

    3. Align and Build the Roadmap

    4. Communicate and Improve the Process

    Phase steps

    1.1 Develop the infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Define the goals

    2.1 Define the future state

    2.2 Analyze constraints

    3.1 Align the roadmap

    3.2 Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Improve the process

    Phase Outcomes

    • Vision statement
    • Mission statement
    • Guiding principles
    • List of goals
    • Financial spend analysis
    • Domain time study
    • Prioritized list of roadblocks
    • Future-state vision document
    • IT and business risk frameworks
    • Technical debt assessment
    • New technology analysis
    • Initiative templates
    • Initiative candidates
    • Roadmap visualization
    • Process schedule
    • Communications strategy
    • process map
    • Infrastructure roadmap report

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 0 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Define mission and vision statements and guiding principles to discuss strategy scope.
    Call #3: Brainstorm goals and definition.

    Call #4: Conduct a spend analysis and a time resource study.
    Call #5: Identify roadblocks.

    Call #6: Develop a risk framework and address technical debt.
    Call #7: Identify new initiatives and SWOT analysis.
    Call #8: Visualize and identify initiatives.
    Call #9: Complete shadow IT and initiative finalization.

    Call #10: Identify your audience and communicate.
    Call #11: Improve the process.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 0 (Pre-workshop)

    Session 1

    Session 2

    Session 3

    Session 4

    Session 5 (Post-workshop)

    Elicit business context Align Strategy and Goals Envision Future and Analyze Constraints Align and Build the Roadmap Communicate and Improve the Process Wrap-up (offsite)

    0.1 Complete recommended diagnostic programs.
    0.2 Interview key business stakeholders, as needed, to identify business context: business goals, initiatives, and the organization's mission and vision.
    0.3 (Optional) CIO to compile and prioritize IT success stories.

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy.
    1.1.1 Review/validate the business context.
    1.1.2 Construct your mission and vision statements.
    1.1.3 Elicit your guiding principles and finalize IT strategy scope.

    1.2 Business goal alignment
    1.2.1 Intake identification and analysis.
    1.2.2 Survey results analysis.
    1.2.3 Brainstorm goals.
    1.2.4 Perform goal association and analysis.

    2.1 Define the future state.
    2.1.1 Conduct an emerging technology discussion.
    2.1.2 Document desired future state.
    2.1.3 Develop a new technology identification process.
    2.1.4 Compete SWOT analysis.

    2.2 Analyze your constraints
    2.2.1 Perform a historical spend analysis.
    2.2.2 Conduct a time study.
    2.2.3 Identify roadblocks.
    .

    3.1 Align the roadmap
    3.1.1 Develop a risk framework.
    3.1.2 Evaluate technical debt.

    3.2 Build the roadmap.
    3.2.1 Build effective initiative templates.
    3.2.2 Visualize.
    3.2.3 Generate new initiatives.
    3.2.4 Repatriate shadow IT initiatives.
    3.2.5 Finalize initiative candidates.

    4.2 Identify the audience
    4.1.1 Identify required authors and target audiences.
    4.1.2 Plan the process.
    4.1.2 Identify supporters and blockers.

    4.2 Improve the process
    4.2.1 Evaluate the value of each process output.
    4.2.2 Brainstorm improvements.
    4.2.3 Set realistic measures.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.
    5.2 Set up time to review workshop deliverables and discuss next steps.

    1. SWOT analysis of current state
    2. Goals cascade
    3. Persona analysis
    1. Vision statement, mission statement, and guiding principles
    2. List of goals
    1. Spend analysis document
    2. Domain time study
    3. Prioritized list of roadblocks
    4. Future state vision document
    1. IT and business risk frameworks
    2. Technical debt assessment
    3. New technology analysis
    4. Initiative templates
    5. Initiative candidates
    1. Roadmap visualization
    2. Process schedule
    3. Communications strategy
    4. Process map
    1. Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Report

    Phase 1

    Align Strategy and Goals

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Goal alignment

    2.1 Define your future

    2.2 Conduct constraints analysis

    3.1 Drive business alignment

    3.2. Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Process improvement

    and measurements

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • How to build IT mission and vision statements
    • How to elicit IT guiding principles
    • How to finalize and communicate your IT strategy scope

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    Step 1.1

    Develop the Infrastructure Strategy

    Activities

    1.1.1 Review/validate the business context

    1.1.2 Construct your mission and vision statements

    1.1.3 Elicit your guiding principles and finalize IT strategy scope

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Business Mission Statement
    • Business Vision Statement
    • Business Goals

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement
    • Guiding principles

    To complete this phase, you will need:

    Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template

    Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template

    Use the IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template to document the results from the following activities:

    • Mission and Vision Statements
    • Business impact
    • Roadmap

    IT must aim to support the organization's mission and vision

    A mission statement

    • Focuses on today and what an organization does to achieve the mission.
    • Drives the company.
    • Answers: What do we do? Who do we serve? How do we service them?

    "A mission statement focuses on the purpose of the brand; the vision statement looks to the fulfillment of that purpose."

    A vision statement

    • Focuses on tomorrow and what an organization ultimately wants to become.
    • Gives the company direction.
    • Answers: What problems are we solving? Who and what are we changing?

    "A vision statement provides a concrete way for stakeholders, especially employees, to understand the meaning and purpose of your business. However, unlike a mission statement – which describes the who, what, and why of your business – a vision statement describes the desired long-term results of your company's efforts."
    Source: Business News Daily, 2020

    Characteristics of mission and vision statements

    A strong mission statement has the following characteristics:

    • Articulates the IT function's purpose and reason for existence.
    • Describes what the IT function does to achieve its vision.
    • Defines the customers of the IT function.
    • Is:
      • Compelling
      • Easy to grasp
      • Sharply focused
      • Concise

    A strong vision statement has the following characteristics:

    • Describes a desired future achievement.
    • Focuses on ends, not means.
    • Communicates promise.
    • Is:
      • Concise; no unnecessary words
      • Compelling
      • Achievable
      • Measurable

    Derive the IT mission and vision statements from the business

    Begin the process by identifying and locating the business mission and vision statements.

    • Corporate websites
    • Business strategy documents
    • Business executives

    Ensure there is alignment between the business and IT statements.

    Note: Mission statements may remain the same unless the IT department's mandate is changing.

    an image showing Business mission, IT mission, Business Vision, and IT Vison.

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their purpose (why they exist) to build a mission statement (if one doesn't already exist).

    Step 1:

    1. Gather the IT strategy creation team and revisit your business context inputs, specifically the corporate mission statement.
    2. Begin by asking the participants:
        1. What is our job as a team?
        2. What's our goal? How do we align IT to our corporate mission?
        3. What benefit are we bringing to the company and the world?
      1. Ask them to share general thoughts in a check-in.

    Step 2:

    1. Share some examples of IT mission statements.
    2. Example: IT provides innovative product solutions and leadership that drives growth and
      success.
    3. Provide each participant with some time to write their own version of an IT mission statement.

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements (cont'd)

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their purpose (why they exist) to build a mission statement (if one doesn't already exist).

    Step 3:

    This step involves reviewing individual mission statements, combining them, and building one collective mission statement for the team.

    1. Consider the following approach to build a unified mission statement:

    Use the 20x20 rule for group decision-making. Give the group no more than 20 minutes to craft a collective team purpose with no more than 20 words.

    1. As a facilitator, provide guidelines on how to write for the intended audience. Business stakeholders need business language.
    2. Refer to the corporate mission statement periodically and ensure there is alignment.
    3. Document your final mission statement in your ITRG Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template.

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements (cont'd)

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their purpose (why they exist) to build a mission statement (if one doesn't already exist).

    Step 4:

    1. Gather the IT strategy creation team and revisit your business context inputs, specifically the corporate vision statement.
    2. Share one or more examples of vision statements.
    3. Provide participants with sticky notes and writing materials and ask them to work individually for this step.
    4. Ask participants to brainstorm:
      1. What is the desired future state of the IT organization?
      2. How should we work to attain the desired state?
      3. How do we want IT to be perceived in the desired state?
    5. Provide participants with guidelines to build descriptive, compelling, and achievable statements regarding their desired future state.
    6. Regroup as a team and review participant answers.

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements (cont'd)

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their purpose (why they exist) to build a mission statement (if one doesn't already exist).

    Step 5:

    1. Ask the team to post their notes on the wall.
    2. Have the team group the words that have a similar meaning or feeling behind them; this will create themes.
    3. When the group is done categorizing the statements into themes, ask if there's anything missing. Did they ensure alignment to the corporate vision statement? Are there any elements missing when considering alignment back to the corporate vision statement?

    Step 6:

    1. Consider each category as a component of your vision statement.
    2. Review each category with participants; define what the behavior looks like when it is being met and what it looks like when it isn't.
    3. As a facilitator, provide guidelines on word-smithing and finessing the language.
    4. Refer to the corporate vision statement periodically and ensure there is alignment.
    5. Document your final mission statement in your IT Strategy Presentation Template.

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements (cont'd)

    Tips for online facilitation:

    • Pick an online whiteboard tool that allows participants to use a large, zoomable canvas.
    • Set up each topic at a different area of the board; spread them out just like you would do on the walls of a room.
    • Invite participants to zoom in and visit each section and add their ideas as sticky notes once you reach that section of the exercise.
    • If you're not using an online whiteboard, we'd recommend using a collaboration tool such as Google Docs or Teams Whiteboard to collect the information for each step under a separate heading. Invite everyone into the document but be very clear regarding editing rights.
    • Pre-create your screen deck and screen share this with your participants through your videoconferencing software. We'd also recommend sharing this so participants can go through the deck again during the reflection steps.
    • When facilitating group discussion, we'd recommend that participants use non-verbal means to indicate they'd like to speak. You can use tools like Teams' hand-raising tool, a reaction emoji, or have people put their hands up. The facilitator can then invite that person to talk.

    Source: Hyper Island

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brainstorming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    IT mission statements demonstrate IT's purpose

    The IT mission statement specifies the function's purpose or reason for being. The mission should guide each day's activities and decisions. The mission statements use simple and concise terminology and speak loudly and clearly, generating enthusiasm for the organization.

    Strong IT mission statements have the following characteristics:

    • Articulate the IT function's purpose and reason for existence
    • Describe what the IT function does to achieve its vision
    • Define the customers of the IT function
    • Are:
      • Compelling
      • Easy to grasp
      • Sharply focused
      • Inspirational
      • Memorable
      • Concise

    Sample IT Mission Statements:

    • To provide infrastructure, support, and innovation in the delivery of secure, enterprise-grade information technology products and services that enable and empower the workforce at [Company Name].
    • To help fulfill organizational goals, the IT department is committed to empowering business stakeholders with technology and services that facilitate effective processes, collaboration, and communication.
    • The mission of the information technology (IT) department is to build a solid, comprehensive technology infrastructure; to maintain an efficient, effective operations environment; and to deliver high-quality, timely services that support the business goals and objectives of ABC Inc.
    • The IT department has operational, strategic, and fiscal responsibility for the innovation, implementation, and advancement of technology at ABC Inc. in three main areas: network administration and end-user support, instructional services, and information systems. The IT department provides leadership in long-range planning, implementation, and maintenance of information technology across the organization.
    • The IT group is customer-centered and driven by its commitment to management and staff. It oversees services in computing, telecommunications, networking, administrative computing, and technology training.

    Sample mission statements (cont'd)

    • To collaborate and empower our stakeholders through an engaged team and operational agility and deliver innovative technology and services.
    • To empower our stakeholders with innovative technology and services, through collaboration and agility.
    • To collaborate and empower our stakeholder, by delivering innovative technology and services, with an engaged team and operational agility.
    • To partner with departments and be technology leaders that will deliver innovative, secure, efficient, and cost-effective services for our citizens.
    • As a client-centric strategic partner, provide excellence in IM and IT services through flexible business solutions for achieving positive user experience and satisfaction.
    • Develop a high-performing global team that will plan and build a scalable, stable operating environment.
    • Through communication and collaboration, empower stakeholders with innovative technology and services.
    • Build a robust portfolio of technology services and solutions, enabling science-lead and business-driven success.
    • Guided by value-driven decision making, high-performing teams and trusted partners deliver and continually improve secure, reliable, scalable, and reusable services that exceed customer expectations.
    • Engage the business to grow capabilities and securely deliver efficient services to our users and clients.
    • Engage the business to securely deliver efficient services and grow capabilities for our users and clients.

    IT vision statements demonstrate what the IT organization aspires to be

    The IT vision statement communicates a desired future state of the IT organization. The statement is expressed in the present tense. It seeks to articulate the desired role of IT and how IT will be perceived.

    Strong IT vision statements have the following characteristics:

    • Describe a desired future
    • Focus on ends, not means
    • Communicate promise
    • Are:
      • Concise; no unnecessary words
      • Compelling
      • Achievable
      • Inspirational
      • Memorable

    Sample IT vision statements:

    • To be a trusted advisor and partner in enabling business innovation and growth through an engaged IT workforce.
    • The IT organization will strive to become a world-class value center that is a catalyst for innovation.
    • IT is a cohesive, proactive, and disciplined team that delivers innovative technology solutions while demonstrating a strong customer-oriented mindset.
    • Develop and maintain IT and an IT support environment that is secure, stable, and reliable within a dynamic environment.

    Sample vision statements (cont'd)

    • Alignment: To ensure that the IT organizational model and all related operational services and duties are properly aligned with all underlying business goals and objectives. Alignment reflects an IT operation "that makes sense," considering the business served, its interests and its operational imperatives.
    • Engagement: To ensure that all IT vision stakeholders are fully engaged in technology-related planning and the operational parameters of the IT service portfolio. IT stakeholders include the IT performing organization (IT Department), company executives and end-users.
    • Best Practices: To ensure that IT operates in a standardized fashion, relying on practical management standards and strategies properly sized to technology needs and organizational capabilities.
    • Commitment to Customer Service: To ensure that IT services are provided in a timely, high-quality manner, designed to fill the operational needs of the front-line end-users, working within the boundaries established by business interests and technology best practices.

    Quoted From ITtoolkit, 2020

    Case Study

    Acme Corp. was able to construct its IT mission and vison statements by aligning to its corporate mission and vision.

    INDUSTRY: Professional Services
    COMPANY: This case study is based on a real company but was anonymized for use in this research.

    Business

    IT

    Mission

    Vision

    Mission

    Vision

    We help IT leaders achieve measurable results by systematically improving core IT processes, governance, and critical technology projects.

    Acme Corp. will grow to become the largest research firm across the industry by providing unprecedented value to our clients.

    IT provides innovative product solutions and leadership that drives growth and success.

    We will relentlessly drive value to our customers through unprecedented innovation.

    IT guiding principles set the boundaries for your strategy

    Strategic guiding principles advise the IT organization on the boundaries of the strategy.

    Guiding principles are a priori decisions that limit the scope of strategic thinking to what is acceptable organizationally, from budgetary, people, and partnership standpoints. Guiding principles can cover other dimensions, as well.

    Organizational stakeholders are more likely to follow IT principles when a rationale is provided.

    After defining the set of IT principles, ensure that they are all expanded upon with a rationale. The rationale ensures principles are more likely to be followed because they communicate why the principles are important and how they are to be used. Develop the rationale for each IT principle your organization has chosen.

    IT guiding principles = IT strategy boundaries

    Consider these four components when brainstorming guiding principles

    Breadth

    of the IT strategy can span across the eight perspectives: people, process, technology, data, process, sourcing, location, and timing.

    Defining which of the eight perspectives is in scope for the IT strategy is crucial to ensuring the IT strategy will be comprehensive, relevant, and actionable.

    Depth

    of coverage refers to the level of detail the IT strategy will go into for each perspective. Info-Tech recommends that depth should go to the initiative level (i.e. individual projects).

    Organizational coverage

    will determine which part of the organization the IT strategy will cover.

    Planning horizon

    of the IT strategy will dictate when the target state should be reached and the length of the roadmap.

    Consider these criteria when brainstorming guiding principle statements

    Approach focused IT principles are focused on the approach, i.e. how the organization is built, transformed, and operated, as opposed to what needs to be built, which is defined by both functional and non-functional requirements.
    Business relevant Create IT principles that are specific to the organization. Tie IT principles to the organization's priorities and strategic aspirations.
    Long lasting Build IT principles that will withstand the test of time.
    Prescriptive Inform and direct decision-making with IT principles that are actionable. Avoid truisms, general statements, and observations.
    Verifiable If compliance can't be verified, the principle is less likely to be followed.
    Easily digestible IT principles must be clearly understood by everyone in IT and by business stakeholders. IT principles aren't a secret manuscript of the IT team. IT principles should be succinct; wordy principles are hard to understand and remember.
    Followed

    Successful IT principles represent a collection of beliefs shared among enterprise stakeholders. IT principles must be continuously reinforced to all stakeholders to achieve and maintain buy-in.

    In organizations where formal policy enforcement works well, IT principles should be enforced through appropriate governance processes.

    Review ten universal IT principles to determine if your organization wishes to adopt them

    IT principle name

    IT principle statement

    1. Enterprise value focus We aim to provide maximum long-term benefits to the enterprise as a whole while optimizing total costs of ownership and risks.
    2. Fit for purpose We maintain capability levels and create solutions that are fit for purpose without over engineering them.
    3. Simplicity We choose the simplest solutions and aim to reduce operational complexity of the enterprise.
    4. Reuse > buy > build We maximize reuse of existing assets. If we can't reuse, we procure externally. As a last resort, we build custom solutions.
    5. Managed data We handle data creation, modification, and use enterprise-wide in compliance with our data governance policy.
    6. Controlled technical diversity We control the variety of technology platforms we use.
    7. Managed security We manage security enterprise-wide in compliance with our security governance policy.
    8. Compliance to laws and regulations We operate in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations.
    9. Innovation We seek innovative ways to use technology for business advantage.
    10. Customer centricity We deliver best experiences to our customers with our services and products.

    1.1.3 Elicit guiding principles

    1 hour

    Objective: Generate ideas for guiding principle statements with silent sticky note writing.

    1. Gather the IT strategy creation team and revisit your mission and vision statements.
    2. Ask the group to brainstorm answers individually, silently writing their ideas on separate sticky notes. Provide the brainstorming criteria from the previous slide to all team members. Allow the team to put items on separate notes that can later be shuffled and sorted as distinct thoughts.
    3. After a set amount of time, ask the members of the group to stick their notes to the whiteboard and quickly present them. Categorize all ideas into four major buckets: breadth, depth, organizational coverage, and planning horizon. Ideally, you want one guiding principle to describe each of the four components.
    4. If there are missing guiding principles in any category or anyone's items inspire others to write more, they can stick those up on the wall too, after everyone has presented.
    5. Discuss and finalize your IT guiding principles.
    6. Document your guiding principles in the IT Strategy Presentation Template in Section 1.

    Source: Hyper Island

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Four components for eliciting guiding principles
    • Mission and vision statements

    Output

    • IT guiding principles
    • IT strategy scope

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    Guiding principle examples

    • Alignment: Our IT decisions will align with [our organization's] strategic plan.
    • Resources: We will allocate cyber-infrastructure resources based on providing the greatest value and benefit for [the community].
    • User Focus: User needs will be a key component in all IT decisions.
    • Collaboration: We will work within and across organizational structures to meet strategic goals and identify opportunities for innovation and improvement.
    • Transparency: We will be transparent in our decision making and resource use.
    • Innovation: We will value innovative and creative thinking.
    • Data Stewardship: We will provide a secure but accessible data environment.
    • IT Knowledge and Skills: We will value technology skills development for the IT community.
    • Drive reduced costs and improved services
    • Deploy packaged apps – do not develop – retain business process knowledge expertise – reduce apps portfolio
    • Standardize/Consolidate infrastructure with key partners
    • Use what we sell, and help sell
    • Drive high-availability goals: No blunders
    • Ensure hardened security and disaster recovery
    • Broaden skills (hard and soft) across the workforce
    • Improve business alignment and IT governance

    Quoted From: Office of Information Technology, 2014; Future of CIO, 2013

    Case Study

    Acme Corp. elicited guiding principles that set the scope of its IT strategy for FY21.

    INDUSTRY: Professional Services
    COMPANY: Acme Corp.

    The following guiding principles define the values that drive IT's strategy in FY23 and provide the criteria for our 12-month planning horizon.

    • We will focus on big-ticket items during the next 12 months.
    • We will keep the budget within 5%+/- YOY.
    • We will insource over outsource.
    • We will develop a cloud-first technology stack.

    Finalize your IT strategy scope

    Your mission and vision statements and your guiding principles should be the first things you communicate on your IT strategy document.

    Why is this important?

    • Communicating these elements shows how IT supports the corporate direction.
    • The vision and mission statements will clearly articulate IT's aspirations and purpose.
    • The guiding principles will clearly articulate how IT plans to support the business strategically.
    • These elements set expectations with stakeholders for the rest of your strategy.

    Input information into the IT Strategy Presentation Template.

    an image showing the IT Strategy Scope.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Established the scope of your IT strategy

    • Constructed the IT mission statement to communicate the IT organization's reason for being.
    • Constructed the IT vision statement to communicate the desired future state of the IT organization.
    • Elicited IT's guiding principles to communicate the overall scope and time horizon for the strategy.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Step 1.2

    Business Goal Alignment

    Activities

    1.2.1 Intake identification and analysis

    1.2.2 Survey results analysis

    1.2.3 Goal brainstorming

    1.2.4 Goal association and analysis

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Last year's accomplished project list
    • Business unit input source list
    • Goal list
    • In-flight initiatives list

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business leadership
    • Project Management Office
    • Service Desk
    • Business Relationship Management
    • Solution or Enterprise Architecture
    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Intake analysis
    • Goal list
    • Initiative-to-goal map

    Identify who is expecting what from the infrastructure

    "Typically, IT thinks in an IT first, business second, way: 'I have a list of problems and if I solve them, the business will benefit.' This is the wrong way of thinking. The business needs to be thought of first, then IT."

    – Fred Chagnon, Infrastructure Director,
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you're not soliciting input from or delivering on the needs of the various departments in your company, then who is? Be explicit and track how you communicate with each individual unit within your company.

    Mature project portfolio management and enterprise architecture practices are no substitute for understanding your business clientele.

    It may not be a democracy, but listening to everyone's voice is an essential step toward generating a useful roadmap.

    Building good infrastructure requires an understanding of how it will be used. Explicit consultation with stakeholders maximizes a roadmap's usefulness and holds the enterprise accountable in future roadmap iterations as goals change.

    Who are the customers for infrastructure?

    Internal customer examples:

    • Network Operations manager
    • IT Systems manager
    • Webmaster
    • Security manager

    External customer examples:

    • Director of Sales
    • Operations manager
    • Applications manager
    • Clients
    • Partners and consultants
    • Regulators/government

    1.2.1 Intake identification and analysis

    1 hour

    The humble checklist is the single most effective tool to ensure we don't forget someone or something:

    1. Have everyone write down their top five completed projects from last year – one project per sticky note.
    2. Organize everyone's sticky notes on a whiteboard according to input source – did these projects come from the PMO? Directly from a BRM? Service request? VP or LoB management?
    3. Make a MECE list of these sources on the left-hand side of a whiteboard.
    4. On the right-hand side list all the departments or functional business units within the company.
    5. Draw lines from right to left indicating which business units use which input source to request work.
    6. Optional: Rate the efficacy of each input channel – what is the success rate of projects per channel in terms of time, budget, and functionality?

    Discussion:

    1. How clearly do projects and initiatives arrive at infrastructure to be acted on? Do they follow the predictable formal process with all the needed information or is it more ad hoc?
    2. Can we validate that business units are using the correct input channel to request the appropriate work? Does infrastructure have to spend more time validating the requests of any one channel?
    3. Can we identify business units that are underserved? How about overserved? Infrastructure initiatives tend to be near universal in effect – are we forgetting anyone?
    4. Are all these methods passive (order taking), or is there a process for infrastructure to suggest an initiative or project?

    Input

    • Last year's accomplished project list

    Output

    • Work requested workflow and map

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Case Study

    Building IT governance and digital infrastructure for tech-enabled student experiences

    INDUSTRY: Education
    COMPANY: Collegis Education

    Challenge

    In 2019, Saint Francis University decided to expand its online program offering to reach students outside of its market.

    It had to first transform its operations to deliver a high-quality, technology-enabled student experience on and off campus. The remote location of the campus posed power outages, Wi-Fi issues, and challenges in attracting and retaining the right staff to help the university achieve its goals.

    It began working with an IT consulting firm to build a long-term strategic roadmap.

    Solution

    The consultant designed a strategic multi-year roadmap for digital transformation that would prioritize developing infrastructure to immediately improve the student experience and ultimately enable the university to scale its online programs. The consultant worked with school leadership to establish a virtual CIO to oversee the IT department's strategy and operations. The virtual CIO quickly became a key advisor to the president and board, identifying gaps between technology initiatives and enrollment and revenue targets. St. Francis staff also transitioned to the consultant's technology team, allowing the university to alleviate its talent acquisition and retention challenges.

    Results

    • $200,000 in funds reallocated to help with upgrades due to streamlined technology infrastructure
    • Updated card access system for campus staff and students
    • Active directory implementation for a secure and strong authentication technology
    • An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) backup is installed to ensure power continues in the event of a power outage
    • Upgrade to a reliable, campus-wide Wi-Fi network
    • Behind-the-scenes upgrades like state-of-the-art data centers to stabilize aging technology for greater reliability

    Track your annual activity by business unit – not by input source

    A simple graph showing the breakdown of projects by business unit is an excellent visualization of who is getting the most from infrastructure services.

    Show everyone in the organization that the best way to get anything done is by availing themselves of the roadmap process.

    An image of two bar graphs, # of initiatives requested
by customer; # of initiatives proposed to customer.

    Enable technology staff to engage in business storytelling by documenting known goals in a framework

    Without a goal framework

    Technology-focused IT staff are notoriously disconnected from the business process and are therefore often unable to explain the outcomes of their projects in terms that are meaningful to the business.

    With a goal framework

    When business, IT, and infrastructure goals are aligned, the business story writes itself as you follow the path of cascading goals upward.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    So many organizations we speak with don't have goals written down. This rarely means that the goals aren't known, rather that they're not clearly communicated.

    When goals aren't clear, personal agendas can take precedence. This is what often leads to the disconnect between what the business wants and what IT is delivering.

    1.2.2 Survey and results analysis

    1 hour

    Infrastructure succeeds by effectively scaling shared resources for the common good. Sometimes that is a matter of aggregating similarities, sometimes by recognizing where specialization is required.

    1. Have every business unit provide their top three to five current goals or objectives for their department. Emphasize that you are requesting their operational objectives, not just the ones they think IT may be able to help them with.
    2. Put each goal on a sticky note (optional: use a unique sticky note or marker color for each department) and place them on a whiteboard.
    3. Group the sticky notes according to common themes.
    4. Rank each grouping according to number of occurrences.

    Discussion:

    1. This is very democratic. Do certain departments' goals carry more weight more than others?
    2. What is the current business prioritization process? Do the results of our activity match with the current published output of this process?
    3. Consider each business goal in the context of infrastructure activity or technology feature or capability. As infrastructure is a lift function existing only to serve the business, it is important to understand our world in context.

    Examples: The VP of Operations is looking to reduce office rental costs over the next three years. The VP of Sales is focused on increasing the number of face-to-face customer interactions. Both can potentially be served by IT activities and technologies that increase mobility.

    Input

    • Business unit input source list

    Output

    • Prioritized list of business goals

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    1.2.3 Goal brainstorming – Affinity diagramming exercise

    1 hour

    Clarify how well you understand what the business wants.

    1. Ask each participant to consider: "What are the top three priorities of the company [this period]?" They should consider not what they think the priorities should be, but their understanding of what business leadership's priorities actually are.
    2. Have each participant write down their three priorities on sticky notes – one per note.
    3. Select a moderator from the group – not the infrastructure leader or the CIO. The moderator will begin by placing (and explaining) their sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    4. Have each participant place and explain their sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    5. The moderator will assist each participant in grouping sticky notes together based on theme.
    6. Groups that become overly large may be broken into smaller, more precise themes.
    7. Once everyone has placed their sticky notes, and the groups have been arranged and rearranged, you should have a visual representation of infrastructure's understanding of the business' priorities.
    8. Let the infrastructure leader and/or CIO place their sticky notes last.

    Discussion:

    Is there a lot of agreement within the group? What does it mean if there are 10 or 15 groups with equal numbers of sticky notes? What does it mean if there are a few top groups and dozens of small outliers?

    How does the group's understanding compare with that of the Director and/or CIO?

    What mechanisms are in place for the business to communicate their goals to infrastructure? Are they effective? Does the team take the time to reimagine those goals and internalize them?

    What does it mean if infrastructure's understanding differs from the business?

    Input

    • Business unit input source list

    Output

    • Prioritized list of business goals

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Additional Activity

    Now that infrastructure has a consensus on what it thinks the business' goals are, suggest a meeting with leadership to validate this understanding. Once the first picture is drawn, a 30-minute meeting can help clear up any misconceptions.

    Build your own framework or start with these three root value drivers

    With a framework of cascading goals in place, a roadmap is a Rosetta Stone. Being able to map activities back to governance objectives allows you to demonstrate value regardless of the audience you are addressing.

    An image of the framework for developing a roadmap using three root value drivers.

    (Info-Tech, Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy 2022)

    1.2.4 Goal association exercise and analysis

    1 hour

    Wherever possible use the language of your customers to avoid confusion, but at least ensure that everyone in infrastructure is using a common language.

    1. Take your business strategy or IT strategy or survey response (Activity 1.2.3) or Info-Tech's fundamental goals list (strategic agility, improved cash flow, innovate product, safety, standardize end-user experience) and write them across the top of a whiteboard.
    2. Have everyone write, on a sticky note, their current in-flight initiatives – one per sticky note.
    3. Have each participant then place each of their sticky notes on the whiteboard and draw a line from the initiative to the goal it supports.
    4. The rest of the group should challenge any relationships that seem unsupported or questionable.

    Discussion:

    1. How many goals are you supporting? Are there too many? Are you doing enough to support the right goals?
    2. Is there a shared understanding of the business goals among the infrastructure staff? Or, do questions about meaning keep coming up?
    3. Do you have initiatives that are difficult to express in terms of business goals? Do you have a lot of them or just a few?

    Input

    • Goal list
    • In-flight initiatives list

    Output

    • Initiatives-to-goals map

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Review performance from last fiscal year.

    • Analyzed and communicated the benefits and value realized from IT's strategic initiatives in the past fiscal year.
    • Analyzed and prioritized diagnostic data insights to communicate IT success stories.
    • Elicited important retrospective information such as KPIs, financials, etc. to build IT's credibility as a strategic business partner.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Phase 2

    Envision Future and Analyze Constraints

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Goal alignment

    2.1 Define your future

    2.2 Conduct constraints analysis

    3.1 Drive business alignment

    3.2. Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Process improvement

    and measurements

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine from a greenfield perspective what the future state looks like.
    • Do SWOT analysis on technology you may plan to use in the future.
    • Complete a time study.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team

    Step 2.1

    Define the future state

    Activities

    2.1.1 Define your future infrastructure vision

    2.1.2 Document desired future state

    2.1.3 Develop a new technology identification process

    2.1.4 Conduct a SWOT analysis

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Emerging technology interest

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team
    • External SMEs

    Outcomes of this step

    • Technology discovery process
    • Technology assessment process
    • Future state vision document

    Future state discussion

    "Very few of us are lucky enough to be one of the first few employees in a new organization. Those of you who get to plan the infrastructure with a blank slate and can focus all of your efforts on doing things right the first time."

    BMC, 2018

    "A company's future state is ultimately defined as the greater vision for the business. It's where you want to be, your long-term goal in terms of the ever-changing state of technology and how that applies to your present-day business."
    "Without a definitive future state, a company will often find themselves lacking direction, making it harder to make pivotal decisions, causing misalignment amongst executives, and ultimately hindering the progression and growth of a company's mission."
    Source: Third Stage Consulting

    "When working with digital technologies, it is imperative to consider how such technologies can enhance the solution. The future state should communicate the vision of how digital technologies will enhance the solutions, deliver value, and enable further development toward even greater value creation."
    Source: F. Milani

    Info-Tech Insight

    Define your infrastructure roadmap as if you had a blank slate – no constraints, no technical debt, and no financial limitations. Imagine your future infrastructure and let that vision drive your roadmap.

    Expertise is not innate; it requires effort and research

    Evaluating new enterprise technology is a process of defining it, analyzing it, and sourcing it.

    • Understand what a technology is in order to have a common frame of reference for discussion. Just as important, understand what it is not.
    • Conduct an internal and external analysis of the technology including an adoption case study.
    • Provide an overview of the vendor landscape, identifying the leading players in the market and how they differentiate their offerings.

    This is not intended to be a thesis grade research project, nor an onerous duty. Most infrastructure practitioners came to the field because of an innate excitement about technology! Harness that excitement and give them four to eight hours to indulge themselves.

    An output of approximately four slides per technology candidate should be sufficient to decided if moving to PoC or pilot is warranted.

    Including this material in the roadmap helps you control the technology conversation with your audience.

    Info-Tech Best Practices

    Don't start from scratch. Recall the original sources from your technology watchlist. Leverage vendors and analyst firms (such as Info-Tech) to give the broad context, letting you focus instead on the specifics relevant to your business.

    Channel emerging technologies to ensure the rising tide floats all boats rather than capsizing your business

    Adopting the wrong new technology can be even more dangerous than failing to adopt any new technology.

    Implementing every new promising technology would cost prodigious amounts of money and time. Know the costs before choosing what to invest in.

    The risk of a new technology failing is acceptable. The risk of that failure disrupting adjacent core functions is unacceptable. Vet potential technologies to ensure they can be safely integrated.

    Best practices for new technologies are nonexistent, standards are in flux, and use cases are fuzzy. Be aware of the unforeseen that will negatively affect your chances of a successful implementation.

    "Like early pioneers crossing the American plains, first movers have to create their own wagon trails, but later movers can follow in the ruts."
    Harper Business, 2014

    Info-Tech Insight

    The right technology for someone else can easily be the wrong technology for your business.

    Even with a mature Enterprise Architecture practice, wrong technology bets can happen. Minimize the chance of this occurrence by making selection an infrastructure-wide activity. Leverage the practical knowledge of the day-to-day operators.

    First Mover

    47% failure rate

    Fast Follower

    8% failure rate

    2.1.1 Create your future infrastructure vision

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their future infrastructure state (assuming zero constraints or limitations).

    1. Ask each participant to ponder the question: "How would the infrastructure look if there were no limitations?" They should consider all aspects of their infrastructure but keep in mind the infrastructure vision and mission statements from phase one, as well as the business goals.
    2. Have each participant write down their ideas on sticky notes – one per note.
    3. Select a moderator and a scribe from the group – not the infrastructure leader or the CIO. The moderator will begin by placing (and explaining) their sticky notes on the whiteboard. The scribe will summarize the results in short statements at the end.
    4. Have each participant place and explain their sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    5. The moderator will assist each participant in grouping sticky notes together based on theme.
    6. Once everyone has placed their sticky notes and groups have been arranged and rearranged, you should have a visual representation of infrastructure's understanding of the business' priorities.
    7. Let the infrastructure leader and/or CIO place their sticky notes last.

    Discussion:

    1. Assume a blank slate as a starting point. No technical debt or financial constraints; nothing holding you back.
    2. Can SaaS, PaaS, or other cloud-based offerings play a role in this future utopia?
    3. Do vendors play a larger or smaller role in your future infrastructure vision?

    Download the IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Thoughts and ideas about how the future infrastructure should look.

    Output

    • Future state vision

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    2.1.1 Document your future state vision (cont'd)

    Objective: Help teams define their future infrastructure state (assuming zero constraints or limitations).

    1 hour

    Steps:

    1. The scribe will take the groups of suggestions and summarize them in a statement or two, briefly describing the infrastructure in that group.
    2. The statements should be recorded on Tab 2 of the Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Tool.

    Discussion:

    • Should the points be listed in any specific order?
    • Include all suggestions in the summary. Remember this is a blank slate with no constraints, and no idea is higher or lower in weight at this stage.
    Infrastructure Future State Vision
    Item Focus Area Future Vision
    1 Email Residing on Microsoft 365
    2 Servers Hosted in cloud - nothing on prem.
    3 Endpoints virtual desktops on Microsoft Azure
    4 Endpoint hardware Chromebooks
    5 Network internet only
    6 Backups cloud based but stored in multiple cloud services
    7

    Download Info-Tech's Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Tool and document your future state vision in the Infrastructure Future State tab.

    Input

    • Thoughts and ideas about how the future infrastructure should look.

    Output

    • Future state vision

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    2.1.2 Identification and association exercise

    1 hour

    Formalize what is likely an ad hoc process.

    1. Brainstorm with the group a list of external sources they are currently using to stay abreast of the market.
    2. Organize this list on the left-hand side of a whiteboard, in vendor and vendor-neutral groups.
      1. For each item in the list ask a series of questions:
      2. Is this a push or pull source?
      3. Is this source suited to individual or group consumption?
      4. What is the frequency of this source?
    3. What is the cost of this source to the company?
    4. On the right-hand side of the whiteboard brainstorm a list of internal mechanisms for sharing new technology information. Ask about the audience, distribution mode, and frequency for each of those mechanisms.
    5. Map which of the external sources make it over to internal distribution.

    Discussion:

    1. Are we getting the most value out of our high-cost conferences? Does that information make it from the attendees to the rest of the team?
    2. Do we share information only within our domains? Or across the whole infrastructure practice?
    3. Do we have sufficient diversity of sources? Are we in danger of believing one vendor's particular market interpretation?
    4. How do we select new technologies to explore further? Make it fun – upvotes, for example.

    Input

    • Team knowledge
    • Conference notes
    • Expense reports

    Output

    • Internal socialization process
    • Tech briefings & repository

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Info-Tech Best Practices

    It is impractical for everyone to present their tech briefing at the monthly meeting. But you want to avoid a one-to-many exercise. Keep the presenter a secret until called on. Those who do not present live can still contribute their material to the technology watchlist database.

    Analyze new technologies for your future state

    Four to eight hours of research per technology can uncover a wealth of relevant information and prepare the infrastructure team for a robust discussion. Key research elements include:

    • Précis: A single page or slide that describes the technology, outlines some of the vendors, and explores the value proposition.
    • SWOT Analysis:
      • Strengths and weaknesses: What does the technology inherently do well (e.g. lots of features) and what does it do poorly (e.g. steep learning curve)?
      • Opportunities and threats: What capabilities can the technology enable (e.g. build PCs faster, remote sensing)? Why would we not want to exploit this technology (e.g. market volatility, M&As)

    a series of four screenshots from the IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template

    Download the IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template slides 21, 22, 23 for sample output.

    Position infrastructure as the go-to source for information about new technology

    One way or another, tech always seems to finds its way into infrastructure's lap. Better to stay in front and act as stewards rather than cleanup crew.

    Beware airline magazine syndrome!

    Symptoms

    Pathology
    • Leadership speaking in tech buzzwords
    • Urgent meetings to discuss vaguely defined topics
    • Fervent exclamations of "I don't care how – just get it done!"
    • Management showing up on at your doorstep needing help with their new toy

    Outbreaks tend to occur in close proximity to

    • Industry trade shows
    • Excessive executive travel
    • Vendor BRM luncheons or retreats with leadership
    • Executive golf outings with old college roommates

    Effective treatment options

    1. Targeted regular communication with a technology portfolio analysis customized to the specific goals of the business.
    2. Ongoing PoC and piloting efforts with detailed results reporting.

    While no permanent cure exists, regular treatment makes this chronic syndrome manageable.

    Keep your roadmap horizon in mind

    Technology doesn't have to be bleeding edge. New-to-you can have plenty of value.

    You want to present a curated landscape of technologies, demonstrating that you are actively maintaining expertise in your chosen field.

    Most enterprise IT shops buy rather than develop their technology, which means they want to focus effort on what is market available. The outcome is that infrastructure sponsors and delivers new technologies whose capabilities and features will help the business achieve its goals on this roadmap.

    If you want to think more like a business disruptor or innovator, we suggest working through the blueprint Exploit Disruptive Infrastructure Technology.
    Explore technology five to ten years into the future!

    a quadrant analysis comparing innovation and transformation, as well as two images from Exploit Disruptive Infrastructure Technology.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The ROI of any individual effort is difficult to justify – in aggregate, however, the enterprise always wins!
    Money spent on Google Glass in 2013 seemed like vanity. Certainly, this wasn't enterprise-ready technology. But those early experiences positioned some visionary firms to quickly take advantage of augmented reality in 2018. Creative research tends to pay off in unexpected and unpredictable ways.
    .

    2.1.3 Working session, presentation, and feedback

    1 hour

    Complete a SWOT analysis with future state technology.

    The best research hasn't been done in isolation since the days of da Vinci.

    1. Divide the participants into small groups of at least four people.
    2. Further split those groups into two teams – the red team and the white team.
    3. Assign a technology candidate from the last exercise to each group. Ideally the group should have some initial familiarity with the technology and/or space.
    4. The red team from each group will focus on the weaknesses and threats of the technology. The white team will focus on the strengths and opportunities of the technology.
    5. Set a timer and spend the next 30-40 minutes completing the SWOT analysis.
    6. Have each group present their analysis to the larger team. Encourage conversation and debate. Capture and refine the understanding of the analysis.
    7. Reset with the next technology candidate. Have the participants switch teams within their groups.
    8. Continue until you've exhausted your technology candidates.

    Discussion:

    1. Does working in a group make for better research? Why?
    2. Do you need specific expertise in order to evaluate a technology? Is an outsider (non-expert) view sometimes valuable?
    3. Is it easier to think of the positive or the negative qualities of a technology? What about the internal or external implications?

    Input

    • Technology candidates

    Output

    • Technology analysis including SWOT

    Materials

    • Projector
    • Templates
    • Laptops & internet

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Step 2.2

    Constraints analysis

    Activities

    2.2.1 Historical spend analysis

    2.2.2 Conduct a time study

    2.2.3 Identify roadblocks

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Historical spend and staff numbers
    • Organizational design identification and thought experiment
    • Time study
    • Roadblock brainstorming session
    • Prioritization exercise

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Financial leader
    • HR Leader
    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • OpEx, CapEx, and staffing trends
    • Domain time study
    • Prioritized roadblock list

    2.2.1 Historical spend analysis

    "A Budget is telling your money where to go, instead of wondering where it went."
    -David Ramsay

    "Don't tell me where your priorities are. Show me where you spend your money and I'll tell you what they are"
    -James Frick, Due.com

    Annual IT budgeting aligns with business goals
    a circle showing 68%, broken down into 50% and 18%

    50% of businesses surveyed see that improvements are necessary for IT budgets to align to business goals, while 18% feel they require significant improvements to align to business goals
    Source: ITRG Diagnostics 2022

    Challenges in IT spend visibility

    68%

    Visibility of all spend data for on-prem, SaaS and cloud environments
    Source: Flexera

    The challenges that keep IT leaders up at night

    47%

    Lack of visibility in resource usage and cost
    Source: BMC, 2021

    2.2.1 Build a picture of your financial spending and staffing trends

    Follow the steps below to generate a visualization so you can start the conversation:

    1 hour

    1. Open the Info-Tech Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Spend Analysis Tool.
    2. The Instructions tab will provide guidance, or you can follow the instructions below.
    3. Insert values into the appropriate uncolored blocks in the first 4 rows of the Spend Record Entry tab to reflect the amount spent on IT OpEx, IT CapEx, or staff numbers for the present year (budgeted) as well as the previous five years.
    4. Data input populates cells in subsequent rows to quickly reveal spending ratios.

    an image of the timeline table from the Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Analysis Tool

    Download the Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Analysis Tool
    ( additional Deep Dive available if required)

    Input

    • Historical spend and staff numbers

    Output

    • OpEx, CapEx, and staffing trends for your organization

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Spend Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Infrastructure leader
    • Financial leader
    • HR leader

    2.2.1 Build a picture of your financial spending and staffing trends (cont'd)

    Continue with the steps below to generate a visualization so you can start the conversation.

    1 hour

    1. Select tab 3 (Results) to reveal a graphical analysis of your data.
    2. Trends are shown in graphs for OpEx, CapEx, and staffing levels as well as comparative graphs to show broader trends between multiple spend and staffing areas.
    3. Some observations worth noting may include the following:
      • Is OpEx spending increasing over time or decreasing?
      • Is CapEx increasing or decreasing?
      • Are OpEx and CapEx moving in the same directions?
      • Are IT staff to total staff ratios increasing or decreasing?
      • Trends will continue in the same direction unless changes are made.

    Download the Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Analysis Tool
    ( additional Deep Dive available if required)

    Input

    • Historical spend and staff numbers

    Output

    • OpEx, CapEx, and staffing trends for your organization

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Spend Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Infrastructure leader
    • Financial leader
    • HR leader

    Consider perceptions held by the enterprise when dividing infrastructure into domains

    2.2.2 Conduct a time study

    Internal divisions that seem important to infrastructure may have little or even negative value when it comes to users accessing their services.

    Domains are the logical divisions of work within an infrastructure practice. Historically, the organization was based around physical assets: servers, storage, networking, and end-user devices. Staff had skills they applied according to specific best practices using physical objects that provided functionality (computing power, persistence, connectivity, and interface).

    Modern enterprises may find it more effective to divide according to activity (analytics, programming, operations, and security) or function (customer relations, learning platform, content management, and core IT). As a rule, look to your organizational chart; managers responsible for buying, building, deploying, or supporting technologies should each be responsible for their own domain.

    Regardless of structure, poor organization leads to silos of marginally interoperable efforts working against each other, without focus on a common goal. Clearly defined domains ensure responsibility and allow for rapid, accurate, and confident decision making.

    • Server
    • Network
    • Storage
    • End User
    • DevOps
    • Analytics
    • Core IT
    • Security

    Info-Tech Insight

    The medium is the message. Do stakeholders talk about switches or storage or services? Organizing infrastructure to match its external perception can increase communication effectiveness and improve alignment.

    Case Study

    IT infrastructure that makes employees happier

    INDUSTRY: Services
    SOURCE: Network Doctor

    Challenge

    Atlas Electric's IT infrastructure was very old and urgently needed to be refreshed. Its existing server hardware was about nine years old and was becoming unstable. The server was running Windows 2008 R2 server operating systems that was no longer supported by Microsoft; security updates and patches were no longer available. They also experienced slowdowns on many older PCs.

    Recommendations for an upgrade were not approved due to budgetary constraints. Recommendations for upgrading to virtual servers were approved following a harmful phishing attack.

    Solution

    The following improvements to their infrastructure were implemented.

    • Installing a new physical host server running VMWare ESXi virtualization software and hosting four virtual servers.
    • Migration of data and applications to new virtual servers.
    • Upgrading networking equipment and deploying new relays, switches, battery backups, and network management.
    • New server racks to host new hardware.

    Results

    Virtualization, consolidating servers, and desktops have made assets more flexible and simpler to manage.

    Improved levels of efficiency, reliability, and productivity.

    Enhanced security level.

    An upgraded backup and disaster recovery system has improved risk management.

    Optimize where you spend your time by doing a time study

    Infrastructure activity is limited generally by only two variables: money and time. Money is in the hands of the CFO, which leaves us a single variable to optimize.

    Not all time is spent equally, nor is it equally valuable. Analysis lets us communicate with others and gives us a shared framework to decide where our priorities lie.

    There are lots of frameworks to help categorize our activities. Stephen Covey (Seven Habits of Highly Effective People) describes a four-quadrant system along the axes of importance and urgency. Gene Kim, through his character Erik in The Phoenix Project,speaks instead of business projects, internal IT projects, changes, and unplanned work.

    We propose a similar four-category system.

    Project Maintenance

    Administrative

    Reactive

    Planned activity spent pursuing a business objective

    Planned activity spent on the upkeep of existing IT systems

    Planned activity required as a condition of employment

    Unplanned activity requiring immediate response

    This is why we are valuable to our company

    We have it in our power to work to reduce these three in order to maximize our time available for projects

    Survey and analysis

    Perform a quick time study.

    Verifiable data sources are always preferred but large groups can hold each other's inherent biases in check to get a reasonable estimate.

    1 hour

    1. Organize the participants into the domain groups established earlier.
    2. On an index card have each participant independently write down the percentage of time they think their entire domain (not themselves personally) spends during the average month, quarter, or year on:
      1. Admin
      2. Reactive work
      3. Maintenance
    3. Draw a matrix on the whiteboard; collect the index cards and transcribe the results from participants into the matrix.
    4. Add up the three reported time estimates and subtract from 100 – the result is the percentage of time available for/spent on project work.

    Discussion

    1. Certain domains should have higher percentages of reactive work (think Service Desk and Network Operations Center) – can we shift work around to optimize resources?
    2. Why is reactive work the least desirable type? Could we reduce our reactive work by increasing our maintenance work?
    3. From a planning perspective, what are the implications of only having x% of time available for project work?
    4. Does it feel like backing into the project work from adding the other three together provides a reasonable assessment?

    Input

    • Domain groups

    Output

    • Time study

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Index cards

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Quickly and easily evaluate all your infrastructure

    Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 2, Capacity Analysis

    In order to quickly and easily build some visualizations for the eventual final report, Info-Tech has developed the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool.

    • Up to five infrastructure domains are supported.
      • For practices that cannot be reasonably collapsed into five domains, multiple copies of the tool can be used and manually stitched together.
    • The tool can be used in either an absolute (total number) or relative mode (percentage of available).
    • By design we specifically don't ask for a project work figure but rather calculate it based on other values.
    • For everything but miscellaneous duties, hard data sources can (and where appropriate should) be leveraged.
      • Reactive work – service desk tool
      • Project work – project management tool
      • Maintenance work – logs or ITSM tool
    • Individual domains' values are calculated, as well as the overall breakdown for the infrastructure practice.
    • Even these rough estimates will be useful during the planning steps throughout the rest of the roadmap process.

    an image of the source capacity analysis page from tab 2 of the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    Please note that this tool requires Microsoft's Power Pivot add-in to be installed if you are using Excel 2010 or 2013. The scatter plot labels on tabs 5 and 8 may not function correctly in Excel 2010.

    Build your roadmap from both the top and the bottom for best results

    Strong IT strategy favors top-down: activities enabling clearly dictated goals. The bottom-up approach aggregates ongoing activities into goals.

    Systematic approach

    External stakeholders prioritize a list of goals requiring IT initiatives to achieve.

    Roadblocks:

    • Multitudes of goals easily overwhelm scant IT resources.
    • Unglamorous yet vital maintenance activities get overlooked.
    • Goals are set without awareness of IT capacity or capabilities.

    Organic approach

    Practitioners aggregate initiatives into logical groups and seek to align them to one or more business goals.

    Roadblocks:

    • Pet initiatives can be perpetuated based on cult of personality rather than alignment to business goals.
    • Funding requests can fall flat when competing against other business units for executive support.

    A successful roadmap respects both approaches.

    an image of two arrows, intersecting with the words Infrastructure Roadmap with the top arrow labeled Systematic, and the bottom arrow being labeled Organic.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Perfection is anathema to practicality. Draw the first picture and not only expect but welcome conflicting feedback! Socialize it and drive the conversation forward to a consensus.

    2.2.3 Brainstorming – Affinity diagramming

    Identify the systemic roadblocks to executing infrastructure projects

    1 hour

    Affinity diagramming is a form of structured brainstorming that works well with larger groups and provokes discussion.

    1. Have each participant write down their top five impediments to executing their projects from last year – one roadblock per sticky note.
    2. Once everyone has written their top five, select a moderator from the group. The moderator will begin by placing (and explaining) their five sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    3. Have each participant then place and explain their sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    4. The moderator will assist participants in grouping sticky notes together based on theme.
    5. Groups that have become overly large may be broken into smaller, more precise themes.
    6. Once everyone has placed their sticky notes, you should be able to visually identify the greatest or most common roadblocks the group perceives.

    Discussion

    Categorize each roadblock identified as either internal or external to infrastructure's control.

    Attempt to understand the root cause of each roadblock. What would you need to ask for in order to remove the roadblock?

    Additional Research

    Also called the KJ Method (after its inventor, Jiro Kawakita, a 1960s Japanese anthropologist), this activity helps organize large amounts of data into groupings based on natural relationships while reducing many social biases.

    Input

    • Last years initiatives and their roadblocks

    Output

    • List of refined Roadblocks

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    2.2.4 Prioritization exercise – Card sorting

    Choose your priorities wisely.

    Which roadblocks do you need to work on? How do you establish a group sense of these priorities? This exercise helps establish priorities while reducing individual bias.

    1 hour

    1. Distribute index cards that have been prepopulated with the roadblocks identified in the previous activity – one full set of cards to each participant.
    2. Have each participant sort their set-in order of perceived priority, highest on top.
    3. Where n=number of cards in the stack, take the n-3 lowest priority cards and put a tick mark in the upper-right-hand corner. Pass these cards to the person on the left, who should incorporate them into their pile (if you start with eight cards you're ticking and passing five cards). Variation: On the first pass, allow everyone to take the most important and least important cards, write "0th" and "NIL" on them, respectively, and set them aside.
    4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for a total of n times. Treat duplicates as a single card in your hand.
    5. After the final pass, ask each participant to write the priority in the upper-left-hand corner of their top three cards.
    6. Collect all the cards, group by roadblock, count the number of ticks, and take note of the final priority.

    Discussion

    Total the number of passes (ticks) for each roadblock. A large number indicates a notionally low priority. No passes indicates a high priority.

    Are the internal or external roadblocks of highest priority? Were there similarities among participants' 0th and NILs compared to each other or to the final results?

    Input

    • Roadblock list

    Output

    • Prioritized roadblocks

    Materials

    • Index cards

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Review performance from last fiscal year

    • Analyzed and communicated the benefits and value realized from IT's strategic initiatives in the past fiscal year.
    • Analyzed and prioritized diagnostic data insights to communicate IT success stories.
    • Elicited important retrospective information such as KPIs, financials, etc. to build IT's credibility as a strategic business partner.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Phase 3

    Align and Build the Roadmap

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Goal alignment

    2.1 Define your future

    2.2 Conduct constraints analysis

    3.1 Drive business alignment

    3.2. Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Process improvement

    and measurements

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Elicit business context from the CIO & IT team
    • Identify key initiatives that support the business
    • Identify key initiatives that enable IT excellence
    • Identify initiatives that drive technology innovation
    • Build initiative profiles
    • Construct your strategy roadmap

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap Team

    Step 3.1

    Drive business alignment

    Activities

    3.1.1 Develop a risk framework

    3.1.2 Evaluate technical debt

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Intake identification and analysis
    • Survey results analysis
    • Goal brainstorming
    • Goal association and analysis

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business leadership
    • Project Management Office
    • Service Desk
    • Business Relationship Management
    • Solution or Enterprise Architecture
    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Intake analysis
    • Goal list
    • Initiative-to-goal map

    Speak for those with no voice – regularly review your existing portfolio of IT assets and services

    A chain is only as strong as its weakest link; while you'll receive no accolades for keeping the lights on, you'll certainly hear about it if you don't!

    Time has been a traditional method for assessing the fitness of infrastructure assets – servers are replaced every five years, core switches every seven, laptops and desktops every three. While quick, this framework of assessment is overly simplistic for most modern organizations.

    Building one that is instead based on the likelihood of asset failure plotted against the business impact of that failure is not overly burdensome and yields more practical results. Infrastructure focuses on its strength (assessing IT risk) and validates an understanding with the business regarding the criticality of the service(s) enabled by any given asset.

    Rather than fight on every asset individually, agree on a framework with the business that enables data-driven decision making.

    IT Risk Factors
    Age, Reliability, Serviceability, Conformity, Skill Set

    Business Risk Factors
    Suitability, Capacity, Safety, Criticality

    Info-Tech Insight

    Infrastructure in a cloud-enabled world: As infrastructure operations evolve it is important to keep current with the definition of an asset. Software platforms such as hypervisors and server OS are just as much an asset under the care and control of infrastructure as are cloud services, managed services from third-party providers, and traditional racks and switches.

    3.1.1 Develop a risk framework – Classification exercise

    While it's not necessary for each infrastructure domain to view IT risk identically, any differences should be intensely scrutinized.

    1 hour

    1. Divide the whiteboard along the axes of IT Risk and
      Business Risk (criticality) into quadrants:
      1. High IT Risk & High Biz Risk (upper right)
      2. Low IT Risk & Low Biz Risk (bottom left)
      3. Low IT Risk & High Biz Risk (bottom right)
      4. High IT Risk & Low Biz Risk (upper left)
    2. Have each participant write the names of two or three infrastructure assets or services they are responsible or accountable for – one name per sticky note.
    3. Have each participant come one-at-a-time and place their sticky notes in one quadrant.
    4. As each additional sticky note is placed, verify with the group that the relative positioning of the others is still accurate.

    Discussion:

    1. Most assets should end up in the lower-right quadrant, indicating that IT has lowered the risk of failure commensurate to the business consequences of a failure. What does this imply about assets in the other three quadrants?
    2. Infrastructure is foundational; do we properly document and communicate all dependencies for business-critical services?
    3. What actions can infrastructure take to adjust the risk profile of any given asset?

    Input

    • List of infrastructure assets

    Output

    • Notional risk analysis

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.1.2 Brainstorming and prioritization exercise

    Identify the key elements that make up risk in order to refine your framework.

    A shared notional understanding is good, but in order to bring the business onside a documented defensible framework is better.

    1 hour

    1. Brainstorm (possibly using the affinity diagramming technique) the component elements of IT risk.
    2. Ensure you have a non-overlapping set of risk elements. Ensure that all the participants are comfortable with the definitions of each element. Write them on a whiteboard.
    3. Give each participant an equal number (three to five) of voting dots.
    4. As a group have the participants go the whiteboard and use their dots to cast their votes for what they consider to be the most important risk element(s). Participants are free to place any number of their dots on a single element.
    5. Based on the votes cast select a reasonable number of elements with which to proceed.
    6. For each element selected, brainstorm up to six tiers of the risk scale. You can use numbers or words, whichever is most compelling.
      • E.g. Reliability: no failures, >1 incident per year, >1 incident per quarter, >1 incident per month, frequent issues, unreliable.
    7. Repeat the above except with the components of business risk. Alternately, rely on existing business risk documentation, possibly from a disaster recovery or business continuity plan.

    Discussion
    How difficult was it to agree on the definitions of the IT risk elements? What about selecting the scale? What was the voting distribution like? Were there tiers of popular elements or did most of the dots end up on a limited number of elements? What are the implications of having more elements in the analysis?

    Input

    • Notional risk analysis

    Output

    • Risk elements
    • Scale dimensions

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Voting dots

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.1.3 Forced ranking exercise

    Alternate: Identify the key elements that make up risk in order to refine your framework

    A shared notional understanding is good, but in order to bring the business onside a documented defensible framework is better.

    1 hour

    1. Brainstorm (possibly using the affinity diagramming technique) the component elements of IT risk.
    2. Ensure you have a non-overlapping set of risk elements. Ensure that all the participants are comfortable with the definitions of each element. Write them on a whiteboard.
    3. Distribute index cards (one per participant) with the risk elements written down one side.
    4. Ask the participants to rank the elements in order of importance, with 1 being the most important.
    5. Collect the cards and write the ranking results on the whiteboard.
    6. Look for elements with high variability. Also look for the distribution of 1, 2, and 3 ranks.
    7. Based on the results select a reasonable number of elements with which to proceed.
    8. Follow the rest of the procedure from the previous activity.

    Discussion:

    What was the total number of elements required in order to contain the full set of every participant's first-, second-, and third-ranked risks? Does this seem a reasonable number?

    Why did some elements contain both the lowest and highest rankings? Was one (or more) participant thinking consistently different from the rest of the group? Are they seeing something the rest of the group is overlooking?

    This technique automatically puts the focus on a smaller number of elements – is this effective? Or is it overly simplistic and reductionist?

    Input

    • Notional risk analysis

    Output

    • Risk elements

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Index cards

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.1.4 Consensus weighting

    Use your previous notional assessment to inform your risk weightings:

    1 hour

    1. Distribute index cards that have been prepopulated with the risk elements from the previous activity.
    2. Have the participants independently assign a weighting to each element. The assigned weights must add up to 100.
    3. Collect the cards and transcribe the results into a matrix on the whiteboard.
    4. Look for elements with high variability in the responses.
    5. Discuss and come to a consensus figure for each element's weighting.
    6. Select a variety of assets and services from the notional assessment exercise. Ensure that you have representation from all four quadrants.
    7. Using your newly defined risk elements and associated scales, evaluate as a group the values you'd suggest for each asset. Aim for a plurality of opinion rather than full consensus.
    8. Use Info-Tech's Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool to document the elements, weightings, scales, and asset analysis.
    9. Compare the output generated by the tool (Tab 4) with the initial notional assessment.

    Discussion:

    How much framework is too much? Complexity and granularity do not guarantee accuracy. What is the right balance between effort and result?

    Does your granular assessment match your notional assessment? Why or why not? Do you need to go back and change weightings? Or reduce complexity?

    Is this a more reasonable and valuable way of periodically evaluating your infrastructure?

    Input

    • Notional risk analysis

    Output

    • Weighted risk framework

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Index cards
    • Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.1.5 Platform assessment set-up

    Hard work up front allows for year-over-year comparisons

    The value of a risk framework is that once the heavy lifting work of building it is done, the analysis and assessment can proceed very quickly. Once built, the framework can be tweaked as necessary, rather than recreated every year.

    • Open Info-Tech's Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 3.
    • Up to eight elements each of IT and business risk can be captured.
      • IT risk elements of end-of-life and dependencies are mandatory and do not count against the eight customizable elements.
    • Every element can have up to six scale descriptors. Populate them from left to right in increasing magnitude of risk.
      • Scale descriptors must be input as string values and not numeric.
    • Each element's scale can be customized from linear to a risk-adverse or risk-seeking curve. We recommend linear.

    an image of the Platform Assessment Setup Page from Info-Tech's Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool,

    IT platform assessment

    Quickly and easily evaluate all your infrastructure.

    Once configured, individual domain teams can spend surprisingly little time answering reasonably simple questions to assess their assets. The common framework lets results be compared between teams and produces a valuable visualization to communication with the business.

    • Open the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 4.
    • The tool has been tested successfully with up to 2,000 asset items. Don't necessarily list every asset; rather, think of the logical groups of assets you'd cycle in or out of your environment.
    • Each asset must be associated with one and only one infrastructure domain and have a defined End of Service Life date.
    • With extreme numbers of assets an additional filter can be useful – the Grouping field allows you to set any number of additional tags to make sorting and filtering easier.
    • Drop-down menus for each risk element are prepopulated with the scale descriptors from Tab 3. Unused elements are greyed out.
    • Each asset can be deemed dependent on up to four additional assets or services. Use this to highlight obscure or undervalued relationships between assets. It is generally not useful to be reminded that everything relies on Cat 6 cabling.

    A series of screenshots from the IT Platform Assessment.

    Prioritized upgrades

    Validate and tweak your framework with the business

    Once the grunt work of inputting all the assets and the associated risk data has been completed, you can tweak the risk profile and sort the data to whatever the business may require.

    • Open Info-Tech's Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 5.
    • IT platforms in the upper-right quadrant have an abundance of IT risk and are critical to the business.
    • The visualization can be sorted by selecting the slicers on the left. Sort by:
      • Infrastructure domain
      • Customized grouping tag
      • Top overall risk platforms
    • With extreme numbers of assets an additional filter can be useful. The Grouping field allows you to set any number of additional tags to make sorting and filtering easier.
    • Risk weightings can be individually adjusted to reflect changing business priorities or shared infrastructure understanding of predictive power.
      • In order to make year-over-year comparisons valuable it is recommended that changing IT risk elements should be avoided unless absolutely necessary.

    An image of a scatter plot graph titled Prioritized Upgrades.

    Step 3.2

    Build the roadmap

    Activities

    3.2.1 Build templates and visualize

    3.2.2 Generate new initiatives

    3.2.3 Repatriate shadow IT initiatives

    3.2.4 Finalize initiative candidates

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Develop an initiative template
    • Restate the existing initiatives with the template
    • Visualize the existing initiatives
    • Brainstorm new initiatives
    • Initiative ranking
    • Solicit, evaluate, and refine shadow IT initiatives
    • Resource estimation

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Initiative communication template
    • Roadmap visualization diagram

    Tell them what they really need to know

    Templates transform many disparate sources of data into easy-to-produce, easy-to-consume, business-ready documents.

    Develop a high-level document that travels with the initiative from inception through executive inquiry and project management, and finally to execution. Understand an initiative's key elements that both IT and the business need defined and that are relatively static over its lifecycle.

    Initiatives are the waypoints along a roadmap leading to the eventual destination, each bringing you one step closer. Like steps, initiatives need to be discrete: able to be conceptualized and discussed as a single largely independent item. Each initiative must have two characteristics:

    • Specific outcome: Describe an explicit change in the people, processes, or technology of the enterprise.
    • Target end date: When the described outcome will be in effect.

    "Learn a new skill"– not an effective initiative statement.

    "Be proficient in the new skill by the end of the year" – better.

    "Use the new skill to complete a project and present it at a conference by Dec 15" – best!

    Info-Tech Insight

    Bundle your initiatives for clarity and manageability.
    Ruthlessly evaluate if an initiative should stand alone or can be rolled up with another. Fewer initiatives increases focus and alignment, allowing for better communication.

    3.2.1 Develop impactful templates to sell your initiative upstream

    Step 1: Open Info-Tech's Strategic Roadmap Initiative Template. Determine and describe the goals that the initiative is enabling or supporting.
    Step 2: State the current pain points from the end-user or business perspective. Do not list IT-specific pain points here, such as management complexity.
    Step 3: List both the tangible (quantitative) and ancillary (qualitative) benefits of executing the project. These can be pain relievers derived from the pain points, or any IT-specific benefit not captured in Step 1.
    Step 4: List any enabled capability that will come as an output of the project. Avoid technical capabilities like "Application-aware network monitoring." Instead, shoot for business outcomes like "Ability to filter network traffic based on application type."

    An image of the Move to Office 365, with the numbers 1-4 superimposed over the image.  These correspond to steps 1-4 above.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Sell the project to the mailroom clerk! You need to be able to explain the outcome of the project in terms that non-IT workers can appreciate. This is done by walking as far up the goals cascade as you have defined, which gets to the underlying business outcome that the initiative supports.

    Develop impactful templates to sell your initiative upstream (cont'd)

    Strategic Roadmap Initiative Template, p. 2

    Step 5: State the risks to the business for not executing the project (and avoid restating the pain points).
    Step 6: List any known or anticipated roadblocks that may come before, during, or after executing the project. Consider all aspects of people, process, and technology.
    Step 7: List any measurable objectives that can be used to gauge the success of the projects. Avoid technical metrics like "number of IOPS." Instead think of business metrics such as "increased orders per hour."
    Step 8: The abstract is a short 50-word project description. Best to leave it as the final step after all the other aspects of the project (risks and rewards) have been fully fleshed out. The abstract acts as an executive summary – written last, read first.

    An image of the Move to Office 365, with the numbers 5-8 superimposed over the image.  These correspond to steps 5-8 above.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every piece of information that is not directly relevant to the interests of the audience is a distraction from the value proposition.

    Working session, presentation, and feedback

    Rewrite your in-flight initiatives to ensure you're capturing all the required information:

    1 hour

    1. Have each participant select an initiative they are responsible or accountable for.
    2. Introduce the template and discuss any immediate questions they might have.
    3. Take 15-20 minutes and have each participant attempt to fill out the template for their initiative.
    4. Have each participant present their initiative to the group.
    5. The group should imagine themselves business leaders and push back with questions or clarification when IT jargon is used.
    6. Look to IT leadership in the room for cues as to what hot button items they've encountered from the business executives.
    7. Debate the merits of each section in the template. Adjust and customize as appropriate.

    Discussion:
    Did everyone use the goal framework adopted earlier? Why not?
    Are there recurring topics or issues that business leaders always seem concerned about?
    Of all the information available, what consistently seems to be the talking points when discussing an initiative?

    Input

    • In-flight initiatives

    Output

    • Completed initiatives templates

    Materials

    • Templates
    • Laptops & internet

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.2.2 Visual representations are more compelling than text alone

    Being able to quickly sort and filter data allows you to customize the visualization and focus on what matters to your audience. Any data that is not immediately relevant to them risks becoming a distraction.

    1. Open the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tabs 6 and 7.
    2. Up to ten goals can be supported. Input the goals into column F of the tool. Be explicit but brief.
    3. Initiatives and Obstacles can be independently defined, and the tool supports up to five subdivisions of each. Initiative by origin source makes for an interesting analysis but initially we recommend simplicity.
    4. Every Initiative and Obstacle must be given a unique name in column H. Context-sensitive drop-downs let you define the subtype and responsible infrastructure domain.
    5. Three pieces of data are captured for each initiative: Business Impact is the qualitative value to the business; Risk is the qualitative likelihood of failure – entirely or partially (e.g. significantly over budget or delayed); and Effort is a relative measure of magnitude ($ or time). Only the value for Effort must be specified.
    6. Every initiative can claim to support one or many goals by placing an "x" in the appropriate column(s).
    7. On Tab 7 you must select the initiative end date (go-live date). You can also document start date, owner, and manager if required. Remember, though, that the tool does not replace proper project management tools.

    A series of screenshots of tables, labeled A-F

    Decoding your visualization

    Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 8, "Roadmap"

    Visuals aren't always as clear as we assume them to be.

    An example of a roadmap visualization found in the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    If you could suggest one thing, what would it be?

    The roadmap is likely the best and most direct way to showcase our ideas to business leadership – take advantage of it.

    We've spent an awful lot of time setting the stage, deciding on frameworks so we agree on what is important. We know how to have an effective conversation – now what do we want to say?

    an image of a roadmap, including inputs passing through infrastructure & Operations; to the Move to Office 365 images found earlier in this blueprint.

    Creative thinking, presentation, and feedback

    Since we're so smart – how could we do it better?

    1 hour

    1. Introduce the Roadmap Initiative Template and discuss any immediate questions the participants might have.
    2. Take 15-20 minutes and have each participant attempt to fill out the template for their initiative candidate.
    3. Have each author present their initiative to the group.
    4. The group should imagine themselves business leaders and push back with questions or clarification when IT jargon is used.
    5. Look to IT leadership in the room for cues as to what hot button items they've encountered from the business executives
    6. Debate the merits of each section in the template. Adjust and customize as appropriate.

    Discussion:
    Did everyone use the goal framework adopted earlier? Why not?
    Do we think we can find business buy-in or sponsorship? Why or why not?
    Are our initiatives at odds with or complementary to the ones proposed through the normal channels?

    Input

    • Everything we know

    Output

    • Initiative candidates

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Infrastructure Roadmap Initiatives Template
    • Laptops & internet

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Forced Ranking Exercise

    Showcase only your best and brightest ideas:

    1 hour

    1. Write the initiative titles from the previous exercise across the top of a whiteboard.
    2. Distribute index cards (one per participant) with the initiative titles written down one side.
    3. Ask each participant to rank the initiatives in order of importance, with 1 being the most important.
    4. Collect the cards and write the ranking results on the whiteboard.
    5. Look at the results with an eye toward high variability. Also look for the distribution of 1, 2, and 3 ranks.
    6. Based on the results, select (through democratic vote or authoritarian fiat – Director or CIO) a reasonable number of initiatives.
    7. Refine the selected initiative templates for inclusion in the roadmap.

    Discussion:
    Do participants tend to think their idea is the best and rank it accordingly?
    If so, then is it better to look at the second, third, and fourth rankings for consensus instead?
    What is a reasonable number of initiatives to suggest? How do we limit ourselves?

    Input

    • Infrastructure initiative candidates

    Output

    • Infrastructure initiatives

    Materials

    • Index cards

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Who else might be using technology to solve business problems?

    Shadow IT operates outside of the governance and control structure of Enterprise IT and so is, by definition, a problem. an opportunity!

    Except for that one thing they do wrong, that one small technicality, they may well do everything else right.

    Consider:

    1. Shadow IT evolves to solve a problem or enable an activity for a specific group of users.
    2. This infers that because stakeholders spend their own resources resolving a problem or enabling an action, it is a priority.
    3. The technology choices they've made have been based solely on functionality for value, unrestrained by any legacy of previous decisions.
    4. Staffing demands and procedural issues must be modest or nonexistent.
    5. The users must be engaged, receptive to change, and tolerant of stutter steps toward a goal.

    In short, shadow IT can provide fully vetted infrastructure initiatives that with a little effort can be turned into easy wins on the roadmap.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Shadow IT can include business-ready initiatives, needing only minor tweaking to align with infrastructure's best practices.

    3.2.3 Survey and hack-a-thon

    Negotiate amnesty with shadow IT by evaluating their "hacks" for inclusion on the roadmap.

    1 hour

    1. Put out an open call for submissions across the enterprise. Ask "How do you think technology could help you solve one of your pain points?" Be specific.
    2. Gather the responses into a presentable format and assemble the roadmap team.
    3. Use voting dots (three per person) to filter out a shortlist.
    4. Invite the original author to come in and work with a roadmap team member to complete the template.
    5. Reassemble the roadmap team and use the forced ranking exercise to select initiatives to move forward.

    Discussion:
    Did you learn anything from working directly with in-the-trenches staff? Can those learnings be used elsewhere in infrastructure? Or in larger IT?

    Input

    • End-user ideas

    Output

    • Roadmap initiatives

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Voting dots
    • Index cards
    • Templates

    Participants

    • Enthusiastic end users
    • Roadmap team
    • Infrastructure leader

    3.2.4 Consensus estimation

    Exploit the wisdom of groups to develop reasonable estimates.

    1 hour

    Also called scrum poker (in Agile software circles), this method reduces anchoring bias by requiring all participants to formulate and submit their estimates independently and simultaneously.

    Equipment: A typical scrum deck shows the Fibonacci sequence of numbers, or similar progression, with the added values of ∞ (project too big and needs to be subdivided), and a coffee cup (need a break). Use of the (mostly) Fibonacci sequence helps capture the notional uncertainty in estimating larger values.

    1. The infrastructure leader, who will not play, moderates the activity. A "currency" of estimation is selected. This could be person, days, or weeks, or a dollar value in the thousands or tens of thousands – whatever the group feels they can speak to authoritatively.
    2. The author of each initiative gives a short overview, and the participants are given the chance to ask questions and clarify assumptions and risks.
    3. Participants lay a card representing their estimate face down on the table. Estimates are revealed simultaneously.
    4. Participants with the highest and lowest estimates are given a soapbox to offer justification. The author is expected to provide clarifications. The moderator drives the conversation.
    5. The process is repeated until consensus is reached (decided by the moderator).
    6. To structure discussion, the moderator can impose time limits between rounds.

    Discussion:

    How often was the story unclear? How often did participants have to ask for additional information to make their estimate? How many rounds were required to reach consensus?
    Does number of person, days, or weeks, make more sense than dollars? Should we estimate both independently?
    Source: Scrum Poker

    Input

    • Initiative candidates from previous activity

    Output

    • Resourcing estimates

    Materials

    • Scrum poker deck

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Hard work up front allows for year-over-year comparisons

    Open the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 6, "Initiatives & Goals" and Tab 7, "Timeline"

    Add your ideas to the visualization.

    • An initiative subtype can be useful here to differentiate infrastructure-sponsored initiatives from traditional ones.
    • Goal alignment is as important as always – ideally you want your sponsored initiatives to fill gaps or support the highest-priority business goals.
    • The longer-term roadmap is an excellent parking lot for ideas, especially ones the business didn't even know they wanted. Make sure to pull those ideas forward, though, as you repeat the process periodically.

    An image containing three screenshots of timeline tables from the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    Pulling it all together – the published report

    We started with eight simple questions. Logically, the answers suggest sections for a published report. Developing those answers in didactic method is effective and popular among technologists as answers build upon each other. Business leaders and journalists, however, know never to bury the lead.

    Report Section Title Roadmap Activity or Step
    Sunshine diagram Visualization
    Priorities Understand business goals
    Who we help Evaluate intake process
    How we can help Create initiatives
    What we're working on Review initiatives
    How you can help us Assess roadblocks
    What is new Assess new technology
    How we spend our day Conduct a time study
    What we have Assess IT platform
    We can do better! Identify process optimizations

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Review performance from last fiscal year

    • Analyzed and communicated the benefits and value realized from IT's strategic initiatives in the past fiscal year.
    • Analyzed and prioritized diagnostic data insights to communicate IT success stories.
    • Elicited important retrospective information such as KPIs, financials, etc. to build IT's credibility as a strategic business partner.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Phase 4

    Communicate and Improve the Process

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Goal alignment

    2.1 Define your future

    2.2 Conduct constraints analysis

    3.1 Drive business alignment

    3.2. Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Process improvement

    and measurements

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify authors and target audiences
    • Understand the planning process
    • Identify if the process outputs have value
    • Set up realistic KPIs

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Roadmap team

    Step 4.1

    Identify the audience

    Activities

    4.1.1 Identify required authors and target audiences

    4.1.2 Planning the process

    4.1.3 Identifying supporters and blockers

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Identify required authors and target audiences
    • Plan the process
    • Identify supporters and blockers

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Process schedule
    • Communication strategy

    Again! Again!

    And you thought we were done. The roadmap is a process. Set a schedule and pattern to the individual steps.

    Publishing an infrastructure roadmap once a year as a lead into budget discussion is common practice. But this is just the last in a long series of steps and activities. Balance the effort of each activity against its results to decide on a frequency. Ensure that the frequency is sufficient to allow you to act on the results if required. Work backwards from publication to develop the schedule.

    an image of a circle of questions around the Infrastructure roadmap.

    A lot of work has gone into creating this final document. Does a single audience make sense? Who else may be interested in your promises to the business? Look back at the people you've asked for input. They probably want to know what this has all been about. Publish your roadmap broadly to ensure greater participation in subsequent years.

    4.1.1 Identify required authors and target audiences

    1 hour

    Identification and association

    Who needs to hear (and more importantly believe) your message? Who do you need to hear from? Build a communications plan to get the most from your roadmap effort.

    1. Write your eight roadmap section titles in the middle of a whiteboard.
    2. Make a list of everyone who answered your questions during the creation of this roadmap. Write these names on a single color of sticky notes and place them on the left side.
    3. Make a list of everyone who would be (or should be) interested in what you have to say. Write these names on a different single color of sticky notes and place them on the right side.
    4. Draw lines between the stickies and the relevant section of the roadmap. Solid lines indicate a must have communication while dashed lines indicate a nice-to-have communication.
    5. Come to a consensus.

    Discussion:

    How many people appear in both lists? What are the implications of that?

    Input

    • Roadmap sections

    Output

    • Roadmap audience and contributors list

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    4.1.2 Planning the process and scheduling

    The right conversation at the right time

    Due Date (t) Freq Mode Participants Infrastructure Owner
    Update & Publish

    Start of Budget Planning

    Once

    Report

    IT Steering Committee

    Infrastructure Leader or CIO

    Evaluate Intakes

    (t) - 2 months

    (t) - 8 months

    Biannually

    Review

    PMO

    Service Desk

    Domain Heads

    Assess Roadblocks

    (t) - 2 months

    (t) - 5 months

    (t) - 8 months

    (t) - 11 months

    Quarterly

    Brainstorming & Consensus

    Domain Heads

    Infrastructure Leader

    Time Study

    (t) - 1 month

    (t) - 4 months

    (t) - 7 months

    (t) - 10 months

    Quarterly

    Assessment

    Domain Staff

    Domain Heads

    Inventory Assessment

    (t) - 2 months

    Annually

    Assessment

    Domain Staff

    Domain Heads

    Business Goals

    (t) - 1 month

    Annually

    Survey

    Line of Business Managers

    Infrastructure Leader or CIO

    New Technology Assessment

    monthly

    (t) - 2 months

    Monthly/Annually

    Process

    Domain Staff

    Infrastructure Leader

    Initiative Review

    (t) - 1 month

    (t) - 4 months

    (t) - 7 months

    (t) - 10 months

    Quarterly

    Review

    PMO

    Domain Heads

    Infrastructure Leader

    Initiative Creation

    (t) - 1 month

    Annually

    Brainstorming & Consensus

    Roadmap Team

    Infrastructure Leader

    The roadmap report is just a point-in-time snapshot, but to be most valuable it needs to come at the end of a full process cycle. Know your due date, work backwards, and assign responsibility.

    Discussion:

    1. Do each of the steps make sense? Is the outcome clear and does it flow naturally to where it will be useful?
    2. Is the effort required for each step commensurate with its value? Are we doing to much for not enough return?
    3. Are we acting on the information we're gathering? Is it informing or changing decisions throughout the year or period?

    Input

    • Roadmap sections

    Output

    • Roadmap process milestones

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Template

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Tailor your messaging to secure stakeholders' involvement and support

    If your stakeholders aren't on board, you're in serious trouble.

    Certain stakeholders will not only be highly involved and accountable in the process but may also be responsible for approving the roadmap and budget, so it's essential that you get their buy-in upfront.

    an image of a quadrant analysis, comparing levels of influence and support.

    an image of a quadrant analysis, comparing levels of influence and support.

    4.1.3 Identifying supporters and blockers

    Classification and Strategy

    1 hour

    You may want to restrict participation to senior members of the roadmap team only.

    This activity requires a considerable degree of candor in order to be effective. It is effectively a political conversation and as such can be sensitive.

    Steps:

    1. Review your sticky notes from the earlier activity (list of input and output names).
    2. Place each name in the corresponding quadrant of a 2x2 matrix like the one on the right.
    3. Come to a consensus on the placement of each sticky note.

    Input

    • Roadmap audience and contributors list

    Output

    • Communications strategy & plan

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Senior roadmap team

    Step 4.2

    Process improvement

    Activities

    4.2.1 Evaluating the value of each process output

    4.2.2 Brainstorming improvements

    4.2.3 Setting realistic measures

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Evaluating the efficacy of each process output
    • Brainstorming improvements
    • Setting realistic measures

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Process map
    • Process improvement plan

    Continual improvement

    Not just for the DevOps hipsters!

    You started with a desire – greater satisfaction with infrastructure from the business. All of the inputs, processes, and outputs exist only, and are designed solely, to serve the attainment of that outcome.

    The process outlined is not dogma; no element is sacrosanct. Ruthlessly evaluate the effectiveness of your efforts so you can do better next time.

    You would do no less after a server migration, network upgrade, or EUC rollout.

    Consider these four factors to help make your infrastructure roadmap effort more successful.

    Leadership
    If infrastructure leaders aren't committed, then this will quickly become an exercise of box-checking rather than candid communication.

    Data
    Quantitative or qualitative – always try to go where the data leads. Reduce unconscious bias and be surprised by the insight uncovered.

    Metrics
    Measurement allows management but if you measure the wrong thing you can game the system, cheating yourself out of the ultimate prize.

    Focus
    Less is sometimes more.

    4.2.1 Evaluating the value of each process output

    Understanding why and how individual steps are effective (or not) is how we improve the outcome of any process.

    1 hour

    1. List each of the nine roadmap steps on the left-hand side of a whiteboard.
    2. Ask the participants "Why was this step included? Did it accomplish its objective?" Consider using a reduced scale affinity diagramming exercise for this step.
    3. Consider the priority characteristics of each step; try to be as universal as possible (every characteristic will ideally apply to each step).
    4. Include two columns at the far right: "Improvement" and "Expected Change."
    5. Populate the table. If this is your first time, brainstorm reasonable objectives for your left-hand columns. Otherwise, document the reality of last year and focus on brainstorming the right-hand columns.
    6. Optional: Conduct a thought experiment and brainstorm tension metrics to establish whether the process is driving the outcomes we desire.
    7. Optional: Consider Info-Tech's assertion about the four things a roadmap can do. Brainstorm KPIs that you can measure yearly. What else would you want the roadmap to be able to do?

    Discussion:

    Did the group agree on the intended outcome of each step? Did the group think the step was effective? Was the outcome clear and did it flow naturally to where it was useful?
    Is the effort required for each step commensurate with its value? Are we doing too much for not enough return?
    Are we acting on the information we're gathering? Is it informing or changing decisions throughout the year or period?

    Input

    • Roadmap process steps

    Output

    • Process map
    • Improvement targets & metrics

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Sticky notes
    • Process Map Template (see next slide)

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Process map template

    Replace the included example text with your inputs.

    Freq.MethodMeasuresSuccess criteria

    Areas for improvement

    Expected change

    Evaluate intakesBiannuallyPMO Intake & Service RequestsProjects or Initiatives% of departments engaged

    Actively reach out to underrepresented depts.

    +10% engagement

    Assess roadblocksQuarterlyIT All-Staff MeetingRoadblocks% of identified that have been resolved

    Define expected outcomes of removing roadblock

    Measurable improvements

    Time studyQuarterly IT All-Staff MeetingTimeConfidence value of data

    Real data sources (time sheets, tools, etc.)

    85% of sources defensible

    Legacy asset assessmentAnnuallyDomain effortAsset Inventory Completeness of Inventory
    • Compare against Asset Management database
    • Track business activity by enabling asset(s)
    • > 95% accuracy/
      completeness
    • Easier business risk framework conversations
    Understand business goalsAnnuallyRoadmap MeetingGoal listGoal specificity

    Survey or interview leadership directly

    66% directly attributable participation

    New technology assessmentMonthly/AnnuallyTeam/Roadmap MeetingTechnologies Reviewed IT staff participation/# SWOTs

    Increase participation from junior members

    50% presentations from junior members

    Initiative review

    Quarterly

    IT All-Staff Meeting

    • Status Review
    • Template usage
    • Action taken upon review
    • Template uptake
    • Identify predictive factors
    • Improve template
    • 25% of yellow lights to green
    • -50% requests for additional info

    Initiative creation

    Annually Roadmap MeetingInitiatives# of initiatives proposedBusiness uptake+25% sponsorship in 6 months (biz)

    Update and publish

    AnnuallyPDF reportRoadmap Final ReportLeadership engagement Improve audience reach+15% of LoB managers have read the report

    Establish baseline metrics

    Baseline metrics will improve through:

    1. Increased communication. More information being shared to more people who need it.
    2. Better planning. More accurate information being shared.
    3. Reduced lead times. Less due diligence or discovery work required as part of project implementations.
    4. Faster delivery times. Less less-valuable work, freeing up more time to project work.
    Metric description Current metric Future goal
    # of critical incidents resulting from equipment failure per month
    # of service provisioning delays due to resource (non-labor) shortages
    # of projects that involve standing up untested (no prior infrastructure PoC) technologies
    # of PoCs conducted each year
    # of initiatives proposed by infrastructure
    # of initiatives proposed that find business sponsorship in >1yr
    % of long-term projects reviewed as per goal framework
    # of initiatives proposed that are the only ones supporting a business goal
    # of technologies deployed being used by more than the original business sponsor
    # of PMO delays due to resource contention

    Insight Summary

    Insight 1

    Draw the first picture.

    Highly engaged and effective team members are proactive rather than reactive. Instead of waiting for clear inputs from the higher ups, take what you do know, make some educated guesses about the rest, and present that to leadership. Where thinking diverges will be crystal clear and the necessary adjustments will be obvious.

    Insight 2

    Infrastructure must position itself as the broker for new technologies.

    No man is an island; no technology is a silo. Infrastructure's must ensure that everyone in the company benefits from what can be shared, ensure those benefits are delivered securely and reliably, and prevent the uninitiated from making costly technological mistakes. It is easier to lead from the front, so infrastructure must stay on top of available technology.

    Insight 3

    The roadmap is a process that is business driven and not a document.

    In an ever-changing world the process of change itself changes. We know the value of any specific roadmap output diminishes quickly over time, but don't forget to challenge the process itself from time to time. Striving for perfection is a fool's game; embrace constant updates and incremental improvement.

    Insight 4

    Focus on the framework, not the output.

    There usually is no one right answer. Instead make sure both the business and infrastructure are considering common relevant elements and are working from a shared set of priorities. Data then, rather than hierarchical positioning or a d20 Charisma roll, becomes the most compelling factor in making a decision. But since your audience is in hierarchical ascendency over you, make the effort to become familiar with their language.

    4.2.3 Track metrics throughout the project to keep stakeholders informed

    An effective strategic infrastructure roadmap should help to:

    1. Initiate a schedule of infrastructure projects to achieve business goals.
    2. Adapt to feedback from executives on changing business priorities.
    3. Curate a portfolio of enabling technologies that align to the business whether growing or stabilizing.
    4. Manage the lifecycle of aging equipment in order to meet capacity demands.
    Metric description

    Metric goal

    Checkpoint 1

    Checkpoint 2

    Checkpoint 3

    # of critical incidents resulting from equipment failure per month >1
    # of service provisioning delays due to resource (non-labor) shortages >5
    # of projects that involve standing up untested (no prior infrastructure PoC) technologies >10%
    # of PoCs conducted each year 4
    # of initiatives proposed by infrastructure 4
    # of initiatives proposed that find business sponsorship in >1 year 1
    # of initiatives proposed that are the only ones supporting a business goal 1
    % of long-term projects reviewed as per goal framework 100%

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Review performance from last fiscal year

    • Analyzed and communicated the benefits and value realized from IT's strategic initiatives in the past fiscal year.
    • Analyzed and prioritized diagnostic data insights to communicate IT success stories.
    • Elicited important retrospective information such as KPIs, financials, etc. to build IT's credibility as a strategic business partner.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy
    Success depends on IT initiatives clearly aligned to business goals, IT excellence, and driving technology innovation.

    Document your Cloud Strategy
    A cloud strategy might seem like a big project, but it's just a series of smaller conversations. The methodology presented here is designed to facilitate those conversations using a curated list of topics, prompts, participant lists, and sample outcomes. We have divided the strategy into four key areas.

    Develop an IT Asset Management Strategy
    ITAM is a foundational IT service that provides accurate, accessible, actionable data on IT assets. But there's no value in data for data's sake. Enable collaboration between IT asset managers, business leaders, and IT leaders to develop an ITAM strategy that maximizes the value they can deliver as service provider.

    Infrastructure & Operations Research Center
    Practical insights, tools, and methodologies to systematically improve IT Infrastructure & Operations.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Knowledge gained

    • Deeper understanding of business goals and priorities
    • Key data the business requires for any given initiative
    • Quantification of risk
    • Leading criteria for successful technology adoption

    Processes optimized

    • Infrastructure roadmap
    • Initiative creation, estimation, evaluation, and prioritization
    • Inventory assessment for legacy infrastructure debt
    • Technology adoption

    Deliverables completed

    • Domain time study
    • Initiative intake analysis
    • Prioritized roadblock list
    • Goal listing
    • IT and business risk frameworks
    • Infrastructure inventory assessment
    • New technology analyzes
    • Initiative templates
    • Initiative candidates
    • Roadmap visualization
    • Process schedule
    • Communications strategy
    • Process map
    • Roadmap report

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Bibliography

    "10 Essential KPIs for the IT Strategic Planning Process." Apptio Inc, Dec. 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Amos, Justin. "8 areas your 2022 IT Infrastructure roadmap should cover." Soma, 24 Jan 2022 Accessed Nov. 2022
    Ahmed, Anam. "Importance of Mission Vision in Organizational Strategy." Chron, 14 March 2019. Accessed 10 May 2021. ."
    Barker, Joel A. "Joel A Barker Quote about Vision." Joel A Barker.com. Accessed 10 Nov 2022
    Bhagwat, Swapnil ."Top IT Infrastructure Management Strategies For 2023 , Atlas Systems, 23 Oct 2022. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Blank, Steve. "You're Better Off Being A Fast Follower Than An Originator." Business Insider. 5 Oct. 2010. Web.
    Bridges, Jennifer . "IT Risk Management Strategies and Best Practices." Project Manager, 6 Dec 2019. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    "Building a Technology Roadmap That Stabilizes and Transforms." Collegis Education. Accessed Dec 2022.
    Collins, Gavin. "WHY AN IT INFRASTRUCTURE ROAD MAP?." Fifth Step, Date unknown. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    "Define the Business Context Needed to Complete Strategic IT Initiatives: 2018 Blueprint - ResearchAndMarkets.com." Business Wire, 1 Feb. 2018. Accessed 9 June 2021.
    De Vos, Colton. “Well-Developed IT Strategic Plan Example." Resolute Tech Solutions, 6 Jan 2020. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Gray, Dave. "Post-Up." Gamestorming, 15 Oct. 2010. Accessed 10 Nov 2022
    Helm, Clay. "Majority of Surveyed Companies are Not Prepared for IT Needs of the Future." IBM Study, 4 Jan 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Hertvik, Joe. "8 Components of A Great IT Strategy, BMC Blogs, 29 May. 2020. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    ISACA, "Effective governance at your Fingertips". COBIT Framework, Accessed Dec 2022
    "IT Guiding Principles." Office of Information Technology, NC State University, 2014-2020. Accessed 9 Nov 2022.
    ""IT Infrastructure That Makes Employees Happier." Network Doctor, 2021. Accessed Dec 2022
    "IT Road mapping Helps Dura Remain at the Forefront of Auto Manufacturing." Performance Improvement Partners, ND. Accessed Dec 2022.
    ITtoolkit.com. "The IT Vision: A Strategic Path to Lasting IT Business Alignment." ITtoolkit Magazine, 2020. Accessed 9 June 2021.
    Kark, Khalid. "Survey: CIOs Are CEOs' Top Strategic Partner." CIO Journal, The Wall Street Journal, 22 May 2020. Accessed 11 May 2021.
    Kimberling, Eric. "What is "Future State" and Why is it Important?" Third Stage Consulting, 11 June 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Kishore. "The True Cost of Keeping the Lights On." Optanix, 1 Feb. 2017. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Lakein, Alan. Libquotes.
    Mindsight. "THE ULTIMATE GUIDE TO CREATING A TECHNOLOGY ROADMAP" Mind sight, 12 Dec 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Milani, F. (2019). Future State Analysis. In: Digital Business Analysis. Springer, Cham. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-05719-0_13
    Newberry, Dennis. "Meeting the Challenges of Optimizing IT Cost and Capacity Management." BMC, 2021, Accessed 12 Nov 2022.
    Peek, Sean. "What Is a Vision Statement?" Business News Daily, 7 May 2020. Accessed 10 Nov 2022.
    Ramos, Diana. "Infrastructure Management 101: A Beginner's Guide to IT Infrastructure Management." Smartsheet.com. 30 Nov 2021. Accessed 09 Dec 2022.
    Ramsey, Dave. "Dave Rant: How to Finally Take Control of Your Money." Ramseysolutions. 26 Aug 2021. Accessed 10 Nov 2022.
    Richards-Gustafson, Flora. "5 Core Operational Strategies." Chron, 8 Mar 2019. Accessed 9 June 2021.
    Richardson, Nigel. "What are the differences between current and future state maps?." Nexus, 18 Oct 2022. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Roush, Joe. "IT Infrastructure Planning: How To Get Started." BMC. 05 January, 2018. Accessed 24 Jan 2023.
    Shields, Corey. "A Complete Guide to IT Infrastructure Management." Ntiva, 15 Sept. 2020. Accessed 28 Nov. 2022.
    Snow, Shane. "Smartcuts: How Hackers, Innovators, and Icons Accelerate Success." Harper Business, 2014.
    Strohlein, Marc. "The CIO's Guide to Aligning IT Strategy with the Business." IDC, 2019. Accessed Nov 2022.
    Sull, Sull, and Yoder. "No One Knows Your Strategy — Not Even Your Top Leaders." MIT Sloan. 12 Feb 2018. Accessed 26 Jan 2023.
    "Team Purpose & Culture." Hyper Island. Accessed 10 Nov. 2022
    "Tech Spend Pulse, 2022." Flexera, Jan 2022, Accessed 15 Nov 2022
    "Tech Spend Pulse." Flexera, Dec. 2022. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    "The Definitive Guide to Developing an IT Strategy and Roadmap" CIO Pages.com , 5 Aug 13 2022. Accessed 30 Nov. 2022.
    Wei, Jessica. "Don't Tell Me Where Your Priorities Are – James W. Frick." Due.com, 21 Mar 2022. Accessed 23 Nov 2022.
    Zhu, Pearl. "How to Set Guiding Principles for an IT Organization." Future of CIO, 1 July 2013. Accessed 9 June 2021.

    Considerations for a Move to Virtual Desktops

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}69|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-strategy
    • Hybrid work environments, remote from anywhere and any device, and the security concerns that go hand-in-hand with these strategies have accelerated the move to VDI and DaaS.
    • IT departments can encounter many obstacles to VDI and DaaS, many of which will be determined by your business model and other factors, including complicated shared infrastructure, inadequate training or insufficient staff, and security and compliance concerns.
    • If you do not consider how your end user will be impacted, you will run into multiple issues that affect end-user satisfaction, productivity, and adoption.
    • How will you manage and navigate the right solution for your organization?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • In the world of VDI and DaaS, if you do not get buy-in from the end user, the rate of adoption and the overall success of the implementation will prove difficult to measure. It will be impossible to calculate ROI even as you feel the impact of your TCO.

    Impact and Result

    • The dimensions of end-user experience can be broken down into four distinct categories that will impact not only the end user but also the business: performance, availability, functionality, and security.
    • Picturing your landscape in this framework will help clearly define your considerations when deciding on whether a VDI or DaaS solution is right for your business.

    Considerations for a Move to Virtual Desktops Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Considerations for a Move to Virtual Desktops Storyboard – A guide to the strategic, technical, and support implications that should be considered in support of a move to VDI or DaaS.

    By defining your goals, framing solutions based on end-user workloads, and understanding the pros and cons of various solutions, you can visualize what success looks like for your VDI/DaaS deployment. This includes defining your KPIs by end-user experience, knowing the decision gates for a successful deployment, and defining your hypothesis for value to make your decision more accurate and gain C-suite buy-in.

    • Considerations for a Move to Virtual Desktops Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    What strategic, technical, and support implications should be considered in support of a move to VDI or DaaS?

    Executive Summary

    Insight

    End-user experience is your #1 consideration

    Virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI)/desktop as a service (DaaS) users expect their user experience to be at least equal to that provided by a physical PC, and they do not care about the underlying infrastructure. If the experience is less, then IT has failed in the considerations for VDI/ DaaS. In this research we analyze the data that the IT industry tracks but doesn't use or sometimes even look at regarding user experience (UX).

    Identify the gaps in your IT resources that are critical to success

    Understanding the strengths and weaknesses in your in-house technical skills and business requirements will assist you in making the right decision when it comes to VDI or DaaS solutions. In the case of DaaS this will include a managed service provider for small to medium-sized IT teams. Many IT teams lack a seasoned IT project manager who can identify gaps, risks, and weaknesses in the organization's preparedness. Redeploy your IT staff to new roles that impact management and monitoring of UX.

    IT should think about VDI and DaaS solutions

    Ultimately, IT needs to reduce its complexity, increase user satisfaction, reduce management and storage costs, and maintain a secure and effective environment for both the end user and the business. They must also ensure productivity standards throughout the considerations, strategically, tactically, and in support of a move to a VDI or DaaS solution.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    With the evolution of VDI over the last 15-plus years, there has been a proliferation of solutions, such as Citrix desktop services, VMware Horizon, and in-house hypervisor solutions (e.g. ESX hosts). There has also been a great deal of growth and competition of DaaS and SaaS solutions in the cloud space. Hybrid work environments, remote from anywhere and any device, and the security concerns that go hand-in-hand with these strategies have certainly accelerated the move to VDI and DaaS.

    How will you manage and navigate the right solution for your organization?

    Common Obstacles

    IT departments can encounter many obstacles to VDI and DaaS, many of which will be determined by your business model and other factors, such as:

    • Complicated shared infrastructure such as federated multitenant partners and legacy app servers.
    • Inadequate in-house training or insufficient staff to execute migration or manage post-migration activates such as governance and retention policies.
    • Security, compliance, legal, and data classification concerns. Some security tools cannot be deployed in the cloud, limiting you to an on-premises solution.
    Info-Tech’s Approach

    By defining your end goals, framing solutions based on end-user workloads, and understanding the pros and cons of what solution(s) will meet your needs, you can visualize what success looks like.

    1. Define your KPIs by end-user experience.
    2. Knowing what the decision gates are for a successful VDI/DaaS deployment will prove out your selection process.
    3. Define your hypothesis for value. How you determine value will make your decision more accurate and gain C-suite buy-in.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every IT organization needs to be asking what success looks like. If you do not consider how your end user will be impacted, whether they are doing something as simple as holding a team meeting with voice and video or working with highly technical workloads on a virtual environment, you will run into multiple issues that affect end-user satisfaction, productivity, and adoption. Understand the tension metrics that may conflict with meeting business objectives and KPIs.

    Voice of the customer

    Client-Driven Insight

    Different industries have different requirements and issues, so they look at solutions differently.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If end-user experience is at the forefront of business requirements, then any solution that fits the business KPIs can be successful.

    Client Pain Point

    Description Indicators

    Flexible work environmentWhat VDI solution can support a work-from-anywhere scenario? Possible solutions: Azure Virtual Desktop, IGEL client, Citrix virtual apps, and desktop services.
    Security concerns Corporate resources need to be secure. Working with untrusted endpoints or unsecured locations. Using VPN-type solution.
    End-user experience What performance metrics should be used to evaluate UX? Are there issues around where the endpoint is located? What kind of link do they have to the virtual desktop? What solutions are there?
    Optimization of routing What routings need to take place to achieve reduced latency and improved experience?
    Multifactor authenticationSecurity features such as a multilayered MFA and corporate data protection.
    Business continuity What are the options when dealing with cloud outages, meeting SLAs, and building resilience?
    Optimizing app performance and response times Define users based on a multiuser environment. Engineers and designers require more CPU resources, which negatively impacts on other users. Optimize CPU to avoid this situation. MS Teams and video streaming apps are not performing in an optimized manner.
    Optimization of cloud costs Scalability and usage schedule. Minimize cloud costs with tools to handle workloads and usage.
    Third-party access outsourcingContractors and third parties accessing business resources need to control data and source code along with developer tools in a centrally managed SaaS.

    The enterprise end-user compute landscape is changing

    Starting on the left are three computer types 'Windows on a PC', 'Mac', and 'VDI on a Thick Client'. In the next part, the first two are combined into 'BYOD', and the tree begins at 'Win11'. Branches from Win11 are: 'DIY' which branches to 'Autopilot & Endpoint Manager (Intune)'; 'Outsource' which branches to 'Device as a Service' which brances to 'Dell', 'Lenovo', and 'HP'; and another branch from 'Outsource', 'Azure Desktop', Which snakes us around to the top of the diagram at 'VDI'. VDI branches to 'VDI on a thin client' and 'VDI on a Browser', then they both branch into 'DIY' which branches to 'Citrix', 'VMware', and 'Azure', and 'Outsource' which branches to 'Desktop as a Service Vendor'.

    Surveys are telling us a story

    Questions you should be asking before you create your RFP
    • What are the use cases and types of workloads?
    • What is the quality of the network connection and bandwidth for the user base?
    • What are the application requirements?
    • What type of end points does the user have and what is the configuration?
    • Where are the data storage containers, how are they accessed, and are there proximity constraints?
    • What is the business security and identity policy requirements?
    • What are the functional and nonfunctional requirements?
    • Will the virtual desktops be persistent or non-persistent?

    How would you rate the user experience on your VDI/DaaS solution?


    (Source: Hysolate, 2020)

    • 18% of CISOs say htue employees are happy with their company's VDI/DaaS solution
    • 82% say their employees are neutral or unhappy with their company's VDI/DaaS solution

    Info-Tech Insight

    Asking critical use-case questions should give you a clear picture of the end-user experience outcome.

    End-user KPI metrics are difficult to gather

    Security is always quoted as a primary justification for VDI/DaaS, while UX is far down the list of KPIs. WHY?

    IT engineers use network and performance metrics to manage end-user complaints of “slowness,” which in reality is not what the user is experiencing.

    IT needs to invest in more meaningful metrics to manage end-user pain:

    • Logon duration
    • App load time
    • App response time
    • Session response time
    • Graphic quality and responsiveness and latency
    • Application availability and performance
    Bar chart of justifications used for business investment in VDI/DaaS. The most used justification is 'IT Efficiency' at 38%, and highlighted in the 2nd last place is 'Employee Experience' at 11%.
    (Source: Enterprise Strategy Group, 2020)

    Dimensions of user experience

    The dimensions of end-user experience can be broken down into four distinct categories that will impact not only the end user but also the business.

    Picturing your landscape in this framework will help clearly define your considerations when deciding on whether a VDI or DaaS solution is right for your business. We will investigate how these scenarios impact the end user, what that means, and how that can guide the questions that you are asking as you move to an RFP.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In the world of VDI and DaaS, if you do not get buy-in from the end user, the rate of adoption and the overall success of the implementation will prove difficult to measure. It will be impossible to calculate ROI even as you feel the impact of your TCO.

    Three arrows pointing right with labels in sequence 'Dimensions', 'Operational Metrics', and 'Technical Capabilities/ Controls'

    Cycle diagram with many tiers, titled 'USER EXPERIENCE'. The first tier from the center has four items cycling clockwise 'Availability', 'Functionality', 'Security', and 'Performance'. The second tier is associated to the first tier: under Availability is 'Maintenance', 'Uptime', and 'Degradation'; under Functionality is 'Graphics Quality', 'User Friction', and 'Usability'; under Security is 'Endpoint Monitoring', 'Plane Control', and 'Identity'; under Performance is 'Response Time', 'Reliability', and 'Latency'. Around the edge on the third tier are many different related terms.

    KPIs and metrics

    • Understand the types of end-user activities that are most likely to be reported as being slow.
    • You need to know what storage, CPU, memory, and network resources are being used when the user performs those activities. In other words, what is the OS doing behind the scenes and what hardware is it using?
    • Once you have determined which resources are being used by the various activities you will have to monitor the UX metrics to see which OS, network, storage, or server configuration issue is causing the performance issue that the user is reporting.

    What IT measures

    Most business KPI objectives concentrate on business goals, whether it be cost containment, security, simplification, ease of management, or centralization of apps and data, but rarely is there a KPI for end-user experience.

    You can’t fix what you can’t see. Putting a cost benefit to end-user satisfaction may come in the form of productivity.

    This may be a central reason why VDI has not been widely adopted as an architecture since it came to the marketplace more than 15 years ago.

    Samples of different KPIs and metrics.

    VDI processes to monitor

    Monitoring end-user metrics will mitigate the tension between business KPIs and end-user satisfaction

    Metric

    Description

    End-User
    Experience

    PERFORMANCELogon durationOnce the user puts in their password, how long does it take to get to their desktop? What is the measurement and how do you measure?
    App load timeWhen an app is launched by the user there should be immediate indication that it is loading.
    App response timeWhen the user performs a task, there should be no wait time, or hourglass icon, waiting for the app to catch up to the user input. (There is no succinct way to measure this.)
    Session response timeHow does the user’s OS respond to I/O? The user should not experience any latency issues when doing a drag and drop, clicking on a menu item, or doing a search.
    AVAILABILITYSLAsWhen something goes wrong in the VDI/DaaS environment, how quickly can the user expect to get back to their tasks?
    Geographic locationWhen all other considerations are configured correctly, the user experience may be impacted by their location. So, for example, a user working out of Mexico and logging into a VDI may experience latency based on location compared to a user in California, for example, where the resources are stored, managed, and monitored.
    Application availabilityMuch like app load time and response time, the only factor affecting the user experience is the back-end load on the app itself, for example a CAD or heavy resource app not properly resourced.
    FUNCTIONALITYConfiguration of user desktopDegradation in functionality is caused by improper allocation of CPU, RAM, and GPU for the tasks at hand, creating a bad UX and end-user satisfaction score.
    Graphics quality and responsivenessThe user should have the same experience as if on their own physical machine. A video experience should not have any lag in it, for example. MS Teams should not have latency or sound quality issues.
    Predictive analysisContinuous performance and availability monitoring.
    END USERBrowser real user monitoring (RUM)A real-time view into how the web application is performing from the point of view of a real end user.
    Customer satisfaction scoreSurvey-based metrics on customer satisfaction.

    “If employees are the competitive edge and key differentiator for a business, I&O has a duty of care to ensure that the employees’ digital experience enables and does not impede the value of that asset.” (John Annand, Principal Director, Info-Tech Research Group)

    The case for VDI today

    Is security and data sovereignty the only reason?

    Technical capability
    AVAILABILITYVDI is a better fit than DaaS in organizations that have limited or unreliable internet connectivity.
    FUNCTIONALITYApplication flexibility: Resource-intensive applications may require specific virtual desktop configurations, for example in-house GIS apps, CAD, and gaming software requiring specific GPU configurations.
    SECURITYData protection is often stated as a need to maintain an on-premises VDI solution, ensuring sensitive and highly privileged data does not travel across the internet.
    AVAILABILITYWhile some cloud providers will allow you to bring your OS licensing along with a cloud migration, many subscriptions already include OS licensing, and you may be paying additional licensing costs.
    SECURITYVDI makes sense if security and control are primary business KPIs, the IT resources are experienced virtual infrastructure engineers and administrators, and funding is not a hindrance.
    PERFORMANCEWhen processing power is a functional requirement, such as CPU, GPU, and storage capacity, VDI offers performance benefits over a standard PC, reducing the need to deploy high-powered PCs to end users.

    “Though the desktops are moving to the cloud, accountability is not.” (Gary Bea, Director of Consulting Services and Technical Operations, Goliath Technologies)

    The case for DaaS

    Any device anywhere: key benefits of DaaS

    Technical capabilityChallenges
    AVAILABILITYDelivers a consistent user experience regardless of location or device.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The total cost of the solution will be higher than you anticipate, and management is complex. Additionally, your ability to set your conditions and controls is limited.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Depending on your technical abilities and experience with cloud services, you will likely benefit from professional third-party services, technical services, and consulting, which can be critical when deciding if DaaS can fit into your current IT architecture, processes, and security posture.

    SECURITYEnhances security posture by eliminating your client VPN and keeping sensitive data off the endpoint device.
    FUNCTIONALITYOnboard and offboard users quickly and securely.
    FUNCTIONALITYProvides centralize workspace management.
    FUNCTIONALITYScale up or down on demand with a consumption- and subscription-based contract.
    FUNCTIONALITYSignificantly reduce operational overhead compared to managing a traditional VDI deployment.

    Technical capability comparison

    Table comparing technical capabilities using a scale of circle quarters: zero quarters being 'Poor' and 4 quarters being 'Good'. There are six columns in the body, three of which are under 'VDI': 'Thin Client', 'Thick Client', and 'Web Client', and the other three are 'Desktop as a service', 'Device as a service', and 'Win11 w/ Autopilot & Intune'. Rows are split into four categories: In 'Performance' are 'Reliability', 'Response Time', and 'Latency'; in 'Availability' are 'Uptime' and 'Degradation'; in 'Functionality' are 'Usability', 'Graphics Quality', and 'User Friction'; in 'Security' are 'Endpoint Mgt.', 'Control Plane', and 'Identity'.

    X as an endpoint client

    From an end-user experience perspective, what makes sense in terms of usage and cost?

    Thin Client
    • ✓ Easy provisioning and simple to use and manage
    • ✓ Easy to secure and update
    • ✓ Less vulnerable to data loss
    • ✓ Easily scaled
    • ✓ Requires less power
    • ✓ Cheaper than PCs
    • x compared to a PC
    • x Not powerful enough to manage loads such as CAD
    • x Infrastructure and network must be robust and up to date to avoid possible network latency
    • Examples: Terminals, Dell Wyse 5070, Lenovo M625, IGEL, HP Thin Client, repurposed PCs, Chromebook
    Desktop as a Service
    • ✓ Flexibility: work from anywhere, on any device, collaboratively
    • ✓ Resource scalability not reliant on on-premises server hardware
    • ✓ Easy to configure, install, and maintain
    • ✓ Reliable and easy to provision
    • ✓ Centralized sensitive data cloud security
    • x Requires high-speed internet, especially for remote users
    • x Learning curve can cause user friction
    • x Workload configuration use cases
    • Examples: Citrix, VM Horizon, AWS WorkSpaces, WVD, BYOD
    Thick Client
    • ✓ Completely flexible, for use with on-premises or cloud infrastructure
    • ✓ Able to work offline
    • ✓ Multimedia or bandwidth-intensive resource processing
    • ✓ Higher server capacity due to less resource load on servers
    • x Higher maintenance and updates attention
    • x Patching, security, and data migration friction
    • x More security vulnerability
    • x Less cost effective
    • Examples: Windows, MacOS desktops, laptops, smartphones, tablets
    Device as a Service
    • ✓ Device supply chain flow fulfillment, services, and recovery
    • ✓ Able to update to new equipment more frequently
    • ✓ Scale up and down as needed
    • ✓ Better device backup, asset tracking , security, and EOL disposal
    • x Challenging risk management, regulatory obligations, and liabilities
    • x Change in helpdesk and business workflows
    • x Vendor may limit selection
    • Examples: PCs, smartphones, mobile computing devices, Lenovo, HP, Microsoft, Dell, Macs, iPads, iPhones
    Web Client
    • ✓ Can be accessed from any computer; only requires username and password
    • ✓ Client works with a URL, so browser-based
    • ✓ Updates are easier than on a Windows client
    • x Security risk and information leakage
    • x Dependent on internet access
    • x Unable to work on high-impact resource apps (e.g. CAD, graphics)
    • x Limited user base, less technical operations
    • Examples: Chrome, Edge, HTML5

    Security: on-premises versus cloud

    Security decisions based on risk tolerance

    • What is your risk tolerance? When deciding between VDI and DaaS, the first consideration is whether the business is better served with an on-premises or a cloud solution.
    • Low risk tolerance: Considerer data sovereignty, complex compliance requirements, and data classification. For example, at the Pentagon, DoD requires heavy compliance with security and data sovereignty. DaaS cloud providers may be in a better position to respond to threats and attacks in a timely manner.
    • Low risk tolerance: If the business mandates security tools that cannot be deployed in cloud solutions, VDI is a better solution.
    • Low risk tolerance: Smaller businesses that don’t have resources with the expertise and skill set to handle security are better served in cloud. Security operations centers (SOCs) are more likely to present in large corporations.
    • Low risk tolerance: When patching requires customization, for example in legacy applications, the ability to test patches is impacted, which may cause possible complications or failures.
    • High risk tolerance: For cloud-based solutions, patching is taken out of the IT team’s hands, and testing is done against the complete cloud solution.

    Info-Tech Insight

    What is the better security posture and control plane? Clarify your stakeholders’ objectives, then see if VDI is an adequate solution.

    Security needs for VDI and DaaS

    • IDENTITY AND ACCESS MANAGEMENT — MFA, authorization, provisioning, SSO, identity federation, data owners, workflows, role-based access control (RBAC), user lifecycle management
    • ENCRYPTION — TLS 1.3, and 256-bit, endpoint encryption, file encryption, AES, PKI, BitLocker
    • DATA LOSS PREVENTION — Centralized policy management, sensitive data detection, HIPAA, GDPR
    • ANTIVIRUS & PATCH MANAGEMENT — Group policy management, AV exclusions, anti-ransomware, keylogger mitigation
    • DDoS protection — HTTP, UDP flood mitigation, content delivery network, always-on services
    • ENDPOINT DETECTION & RESPONSE — Detect and react to advanced active attacks on endpoints

    Activity

    Define the virtual infrastructure solution for your end users

    1. Define and build your value hypothesis/proposition
      1. What is the business case? Who is championing the investment?
      2. Identify the project management team and stakeholders.
      3. Set goals to be achieved based on value.
      4. Identify KPIs and metrics to measure success.
    2. Identify use cases and personas
      1. Identify possible user friction (e.g. emotional, cognitive, interaction).
      2. Understand current infrastructure shortcomings/capabilities (e.g. network, security posture/tolerance, staffing needs, qualified technicians, end-user devices).
    3. Articulate use cases into functional and nonfunctional requirements
      1. Separate must haves and nice to haves.
      2. Categorize requirements into identifiable functionality capabilities.
      3. Review your outputs and identify “gotchas” using the MECE (mutually exclusive, collectively exhaustive) principle.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock image of a dashboard.Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy

    Phase 3.2 of this research set covers virtual desktop infrastructure.

    Stock image of a world surrounded by clouds.Implement Desktop Virtualization and Transition to Everything as a Service

    Follow Info-Tech’s process for implementing the right desktop virtualization solution to create a project plan that will help ensure that you not only choose the right solution but also implement it effectively.

    Stock image of a finger pushing a button.Cloud Strategy Workbook

    Use this tool to assess cloud services (desktop-as-a-service).

    Stock image of a world surrounded by clouds.Desktop Virtualization TCO Calculator

    This tool is designed to help you understand what desktop virtualization looks like from a cost perspective.

    Bibliography

    Anderson, Joseph. “Five Ways VDI Will Grow in 2022 Thanks to Hybrid Work.” StratoDesk, 28 Feb. 2022. Web.

    Bowker, Mark. “Are Desktops Doomed? Trends in Digital Workspaces, VDI, and DaaS.” ESG, May 2020. Web.

    “The CISO's Dilemma: How Chief Information Security Officers Are Balancing Enterprise Endpoint Security and Worker Productivity in Response to COVID-19.” Hysolate, Oct. 2020. Web.

    King, Val. “Why the End-User Experience Is Not Good for Your Remote Workforce .” Whitehat Virtual Technologies, 2 Dec. 2021. Web.

    Perry, Yifat. “VDI vs DaaS: 5 Key Differences and 6 Leading Solutions.” NetApp, 26 Aug. 2020. Web.

    Rigg, Christian. “Best virtual desktop services 2022.” TechRadar, 20 Jan. 2022 . Web.

    Seget, Vladan. “Key metrics to consider when assessing the performance of your VDI/DaaS environment.” vladan.fr, 19 April 2021. Web.

    Spruijt, Ruben. “Why Should You Care About VDI and Desktop-as-a-Service?” Nutanix, 28 Jan. 2020. Web.

    Stowers, Joshua. “The Best Desktop as a Service (DaaS) Providers 2022.” business.com, 21 Dec. 2021. Web.

    “Virtual Desktop Infrastructure(VDI) Market 2022.” MarketWatch, 5 Jan. 2022. Web. Press release.

    Zamir, Tal. “VDI Security Best Practices: Busting the Myths.” Hysolate, 29 Nov. 2021. Web.

    Zychowicz, Paul. “Why do virtual desktop deployments fail?” Turbonomic Blog, 16 Dec. 2016. Web.

    Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}195|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,599 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • IT risks, when considered, are identified and classified separately from the enterprise-wide perspective.
    • IT is expected to own risks over which they have no authority or oversight.
    • Poor behaviors, such as only considering IT risks when conducting compliance or project due diligence, have been normalized.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Stop avoiding risk – integrate it. This provides a holistic view of uncertainty for the organization to drive innovative new approaches to optimize the organization’s ability to respond to risk.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand gaps in the organization’s current approach to risk management practices.
    • Establish a standardized approach for how IT risks impact the enterprise as a whole.
    • Drive a risk-aware organization toward innovation and consider alternative options for how to move forward.
    • Integrate IT risks into the foundational risk practice.

    Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk Research & Tools

    Integrated Risk Management Capstone – A framework for how IT risks can be integrated into your organization’s enterprise risk management program to enable strategic risk-informed decisions.

    This is a capstone blueprint highlighting the benefits of an integrated risk management program that uses risk information and data to inform strategic decision making. Throughout this research you will gain insight into the five core elements of integrating risk through assessing, governing, defining the program, defining the process, and implementing.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk Capstone
    • Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment
    • Risk Register Tool

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk

    Don’t fear IT risks, integrate them.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Having siloed risks is risky business for any enterprise.

    Photo of Valence Howden, Principal Research Director, CIO Practice.
    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director, CIO Practice
    Photo of Petar Hristov Research Director, Security, Privacy, Risk & Compliance.
    Petar Hristov
    Research Director, Security, Privacy, Risk & Compliance
    Photo of Ian Mulholland Research Director, Security, Risk & Compliance.
    Ian Mulholland
    Research Director, Security, Risk & Compliance
    Photo of Brittany Lutes, Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice.
    Brittany Lutes
    Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice
    Photo of Ibrahim Abdel-Kader, Research Analyst, CIO Practice
    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst, CIO Practice

    Every organization has a threshold for risk that should not be exceeded, whether that threshold is defined or not.

    In the age of digital, information and technology will undoubtedly continue to expand beyond the confines of the IT department. As such, different areas of the organization cannot address these risks in silos. A siloed approach will produce different ways of identifying, assessing, responding to, and reporting on risk events. Integrated risk management is about embedding IT uncertainty to inform good decision making across the organization.

    When risk is integrated into the organization's enterprise risk management program, it enables a single view of all risks and the potential impact of each risk event. More importantly, it provides a consistent view of the risk event in relation to uncertainty that might have once been seemingly unrelated to IT.

    And all this can be achieved while remaining within the enterprise’s clearly defined risk appetite.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Most organizations fail to integrate IT risks into enterprise risks:

    • IT risks, when considered, are identified and classified separately from the enterprise-wide perspective.
    • IT is expected to own risks over which they have no authority or oversight.
    • Poor behaviors, such as only considering IT risks when conducting compliance or project due diligence, have been normalized.

    Common Obstacles

    IT leaders have to overcome these obstacles when it comes to integrating risk:

    • Making business leaders aware of, involved in, and able to respond to all enterprise risks.
    • A lack of data or information being used to support a holistic risk management process.
    • A low level of enterprise risk maturity.
    • A lack of risk management capabilities.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    By leveraging the Info-Tech Integrated Risk approach, your business can better address and embed risk by:

    • Understanding gaps in the organization’s current approach to risk management practices.
    • Establishing a standardized approach for how IT risks impact the enterprise as a whole.
    • Driving a risk-aware organization toward innovation and considering alternative options for how to move forward.
    • Helping integrate IT risks into the foundational risk practice.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Stop avoiding risk – integrate it. This provides a holistic view of uncertainty for the organization to drive innovative new approaches to optimize its ability to respond to risk.

    What is integrated risk management?

    • Integrated risk management is the process of ensuring all forms of risk information, including information and technology, are considered and included in the enterprise’s risk management strategy.
    • It removes the siloed approach to classifying risks related to specific departments or areas of the organization, recognizing that each of those risks is a threat to the overarching enterprise.
    • Aggregating the different threats or uncertainty that might exist within an organization allows for informed decisions to be made that align to strategic goals and continue to drive value back to the business.
    • By holistically considering the different risks, the organization can make informed decisions on the best course of action that will reduce any negative impacts associated with the uncertainty and increase the overall value.

    Enterprise Risk Management (ERM)

    • IT
    • Security
    • Digital
    • Vendor/Third Party
    • Other

    Enterprise risk management is the practice of identifying and addressing risks to your organization and using risk information to drive better decisions and better opportunities.

    IT risk is enterprise risk

    Multiple types of risk, 'Finance', 'IT', 'People', and 'Digital', funneling into 'ENTERPRISE RISKS'. IT risks have a direct and often aggregated impact on enterprise risks and opportunities in the same way other business risks can. This relationship must be understood and addressed through integrated risk management to ensure a consistent approach to risk.

    Your challenge

    Embedding IT risks into the enterprise risk management program is challenging because:

    • Most organizations classify risks based on the departments or areas of the business where the uncertainty is likely to happen.
    • Unnecessary expectations are placed on the IT department to own risks over which they have no authority or oversight.
    • Risks are often only identified when conducting due diligence for a project or ensuring compliance with regulations and standards.

    Risk-mature organizations have a unique benefit in that they often have established an overarching governance framework and embedded risk awareness into the culture.

    35% — Only 35% of organizations had embraced ERM in 2020. (Source: AICPA and NC State Poole College of Management)

    12% — Only 12% of organizations are leveraging risk as a tool to their strategic advantage. (Source: AICPA and NC State Poole College of Management)

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make integrating IT risks difficult to address for many organizations:

    • IT risks are not seen as enterprise risks.
    • The organization’s culture toward risk is not defined.
    • The organization’s appetite and threshold for risk are not defined.
    • Each area of the organization has a different method of identifying, assessing, and responding to risk events.
    • Access to reliable and informative data to support risk management is difficult to obtain.
    • Leadership does not see the business value of integrating risk into a single management program.
    • The organization’s attitudes and behaviors toward risk contradict the desired and defined risk culture.
    • Skills, training, and resources to support risk management are lacking, let alone those to support integrated risk management.

    Integrating risks has its challenges

    62% — Accessing and disseminating information is the main challenge for 62% of organizations maturing their organizational risk management. (Source: OECD)

    20-28% — Organizations with access to machine learning and analytics to address future risk events have 20 to 28% more satisfaction. (Source: Accenture)

    Integrate Risk and Use It to Your Advantage

    Accelerate and optimize your organization by leveraging meaningful risk data to make intelligent enterprise risk decisions.

    Risk management is more than checking an audit box or demonstrating project due diligence.

    Risk Drivers
    • Audit & compliance
    • Preserve value & avoid loss
    • Previous risk impact driver
    • Major transformation
    • Strategic opportunities
    Arrow pointing right. Only 7% of organizations are in a “leading” or “aspirational” level of risk maturity. (OECD, 2021) 63% of organizations struggle when it comes to defining their appetite toward strategy related risks. (“Global Risk Management Survey,” Deloitte, 2021) Late adopters of risk management were 70% more likely to use instinct over data or facts to inform an efficient process. (Clear Risk, 2020) 55% of organizations have little to no training on ERM to properly implement such practices. (AICPA, NC State Poole College of Management, 2021)
    1. Assess Enterprise Risk Maturity 3. Build a Risk Management Program Plan 4. Establish Risk Management Processes 5. Implement a Risk Management Program
    2. Determine Authority with Governance
    Unfortunately, less than 50% of those in risk focused roles are also in a governance role where they have the authority to provide risk oversight. (Governance Institute of Australia, 2020)
    IT can improve the maturity of the organization’s risk governance and help identify risk owners who have authority and accountability.

    Governance and related decision making is optimized with integrated and aligned risk data.

    List of 'Integrated Risk Maturity Categories': '1. Context & Strategic Direction', '2. Risk Culture and Authority', '3. Risk Management Process', and '4. Risk Program Optimization'. The five types of a risk in Enterprise Risk Management.

    ERM incorporates the different types of risk, including IT, security, digital, vendor, and other risk types.

    The program plan is meant to consider all the major risk types in a unified approach.

    The 'Risk Process' cycle starting with '1. Identify', '2. Assess', '3. Respond', '4. Monitor', '5. Report', and back to the beginning. Implementation of an integrated risk management program requires ongoing access to risk data by those with decision making authority who can take action.

    Integrated Risk Mapping — Downside Risk Focus

    A diagram titled 'Risk and Controls' beginning with 'Possible Sources' and a list of sources, 'Control Activities' to prevent, the 'RISK EVENT', 'Recovery Activities' to recover, and 'Possible Repercussions' with a list of ramifications.

    Integrated Risk Mapping — Downside and Upside Risk

    Third-Party Risk Example

    Example of a third-party risk mapped onto the diagram on the previous slide, but with potential upsides mapped out as well. The central risk event is 'Vendor exposes private customer data'. Possible Sources of the downside are 'External Attack' with likelihood prevention method 'Define security standard requirements for vendor assessment' and 'Exfiltration of data through fourth-party staff' with likelihood prevention method 'Ensure data is properly classified'. Possible Sources of the upside are 'Application rationalization' with likelihood optimization method 'Reduce number of applications in environment' and 'Review vendor assessment practices' with likelihood optimization method 'Improve vendor onboarding'. Possible Repercussions on the downside are 'Organization unable to operate in jurisdiction' with impact minimization method 'Engage in-house risk mitigation responses' and 'Fines levied against organization' with impact minimization method 'Report incident to any regulators'. Possible Repercussions on the upside are 'Easier vendor integration and management' with impact utilization method 'Improved vendor onboarding practices' and 'Able to bid on contracts with these requirements' with impact utilization method 'Vendors must provide attestations (e.g. SOC or CMMC)'.

    Insight Summary

    Overarching insight

    Stop fearing risk – integrate it. Integration leads to opportunities for organizations to embrace innovation and new digital technologies as well as reducing operational costs and simplifying reporting.

    Govern risk strategically

    Governance of risk management for information- and technology-related events is often misplaced. Just because it's classified as an IT risk does not mean it shouldn’t be owned by the board or business executive.

    Assess risk maturity

    Integrating risk requires a baseline of risk maturity at the enterprise level. IT can push integrating risks, but only if the enterprise is willing to adopt the attitudes and behaviors that will drive the integrated risk approach.

    Manage risk

    It is not a strategic decision to have different areas of the organization manage the risks perceived to be in their department. It’s the easy choice, but not the strategic one.

    Implement risk management

    Different areas of an enterprise apply risk management processes differently. Determining a single method for identification, assessment, response, and monitoring can ensure successful implementation of enterprise risk management.

    Tactical insight

    Good risk management will consider both the positives and negatives associated with a risk management program by recognizing both the upside and downside of risk event impact and likelihood.

    Integrated risk benefits

    IT Benefits

    • IT executives have a responsibility but not accountability when it comes to risk. Ensure the right business stakeholders have awareness and ability to make informed risk decisions.
    • Controls and responses to risks that are within the “IT” realm will be funded and provided with sufficient support from the business.
    • The business respects and values the role of IT in supporting the enterprise risk program, elevating its role into business partner.

    Business Benefits

    • Business executives and boards can make informed responses to the various forms of risk, including those often categorized as “IT risks.”
    • The compounding severity of risks can be formally assessed and ideally quantified to provide insight into how risks’ ramifications can change based on scenarios.
    • Risk-informed decisions can be used to optimize the business and drive it toward adopting innovation as a response to risk events.
    • Get your organization insured against cybersecurity threats at the lowest premiums possible.

    Measure the value of integrating risk

    • Reduce Operating Costs

      • Organizations can reduce their risk operating costs by 20 to 30% by adopting enterprise-wide digital risk initiatives (McKinsey & Company).
    • Increase Cybersecurity Threat Preparedness

      • Increase the organization’s preparedness for cybersecurity threats. 79% of organizations that were impacted by email threats in 2020 were not prepared for the hit (Diligent)
    • Increase Risk Management’s Impact to Drive Strategic Value

      • Currently, only 3% of organizations are extensively using risk management to drive their unique competitive advantage, compared to 35% of companies who do not use it at all (AICPA & NC State Poole College of Management).
    • Reduce Lost Productivity for the Enterprise

      • Among small businesses, 76% are still not considering purchasing cyberinsurance in 2021, despite the fact that ransomware attacks alone cost Canadian businesses $5.1 billion in productivity in 2020 (Insurance Bureau of Canada, 2021).

    “31% of CIO’s expected their role to expand and include risk management responsibilities.” (IDG “2021 State of the CIO,” 2021)

    Make integrated risk management sustainable

    58%

    Focus not just on the preventive risk management but also the value-creating opportunities. With 58% of organizations concerned about disruptive technology, it’s an opportunity to take the concern and transform it into innovation. (Accenture)

    70%

    Invest in tools that have data and analytics features. Currently, “gut feelings” or “experience” inform the risk management decisions for 70% of late adopters. (Clear Risk)

    54%

    Align to the strategic vision of the board and CEO, given that these two roles account for 54% of the accountability associated with extended enterprise risk management. (Extended Enterprise Risk Management Survey, 2020,” Deloitte)

    63%

    Include IT leaders in the risk committee to help informed decision making. Currently 63% of chief technology officers are included in the C‑suite risk committee. (AICPA & NC State Poole College of Management)

    Successful adoption of integrated risk management is often associated with these key elements.

    Assessment

    Assess your organization’s method of addressing risk management to determine if integrated risk is possible

    Assessing the organization’s risk maturity

    Mature or not, integrated risk management should be a consideration for all organizations

    The first step to integrating risk management within the enterprise is to understand the organization’s readiness to adopt practices that will enable it to successfully integrate information.

    In 2021, we saw enterprise risk management assessments become one of the most common trends, particularly as a method by which the organization can consolidate the potential impacts of uncertainties or threats (Lawton, 2021). A major driver for this initiative was the recognition that information and technology not only have enterprise-wide impacts on the organization’s risk management but that IT has a critical role in supporting processes that enable effective access to data/information.

    A maturity assessment has several benefits for an organization: It ensures there is alignment throughout the organization on why integrated risk is the right approach to take, it recognizes the organization’s current risk maturity, and it supports the organization in defining where it would like to go.

    Pie chart titled 'Organizational Risk Management Maturity Assessment Results' showing just under half 'Progressing', a third 'Established', a seventh 'Emerging', and a very small portion 'Leading or Aspirational'.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Categories

    Semi-circle with colored points indicating four categories.

    1

    Context & Strategic Direction Understand the organization’s main objectives and how risk can support or enhance those objectives.

    2

    Risk Culture and Authority Examine if risk-based decisions are being made by those with the right level of authority and if the organization’s risk appetite is embedded in the culture.

    3

    Risk Management Process Determine if the current process to identify, assess, respond to, monitor, and report on risks is benefitting the organization.

    4

    Risk Program Optimization Consider opportunities where risk-related data is being gathered, reported, and used to make informed decisions across the enterprise.

    Maturity should inform your approach to risk management

    The outcome of the risk maturity assessment should inform how risk management is approached within the organization.

    A row of waves starting light and small and becoming taller and darker in steps. The levels are 'Non-existent', 'Basic', 'Partially Integrated', 'Mostly Integrated', 'Fully Integrated', and 'Optimized'.

    For organizations with a low maturity, remaining superficial with risk will offer more benefits and align to the enterprise’s risk tolerance and appetite. This might mean no integrated risk is taking place.

    However, organizations that have higher risk maturity should begin to integrate risk information. These organizations can identify the nuances that would affect the severity and impact of risk events.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    The purpose of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment is to assess the organization's current maturity and readiness for integrated risk management (IRM).

    Frequently and continually assessing your organization’s maturity toward integrated risk ensures the right risk management program can be adopted by your organization.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    A simple tool to understand if your organization is ready to embrace integrated risk management by measuring maturity across four key categories: Context & Strategic Direction, Risk Culture & Authority, Risk Management Process, and Risk Program Optimization

    Sample of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment deliverable.

    Use the results from this integrated risk maturity assessment to determine the type of risk management program that can and should be adopted by your organization.

    Some organizations will need to remain siloed and focused on IT risk management only, while others will be able to integrate risk-related information to start enabling automatic controls that respond to this data.

    Build a Service-Based Security Resourcing Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}267|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $20,799 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Processes & Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /security-processes-and-operations
    • IT and security leaders across all industries must determine what and how many resources are needed to support the information security program.
    • Estimating current usage and future demand for security resources can be a difficult and time-consuming exercise.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Not all security programs need to be the same. A service-aligned security resourcing strategy will put organizations in the best position to respond to current and future service demands and address business needs as they evolve over time.

    Impact and Result

    • Info-Tech’s approach to resource planning focuses less on benchmarks and more on estimating actual demand for security services to ensure that there are enough resources to deliver them.
    • A well-designed security services portfolio is the first step towards determining resourcing needs.
    • When planning resource allocations, plan for both mandatory and discretionary demand to optimize utilization.

    Build a Service-Based Security Resourcing Plan Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Service-Based Security Resourcing Plan – A blueprint to help you define security roles, build a service portfolio, estimate demand, and determine resourcing needs.

    This storyboard will help you to determine your security resourcing needs using a service-based approach.

    • Build a Service-Based Security Resourcing Plan – Phases 1-3

    2. Security Resources Planning Workbook – This tool will result in a defined security service portfolio and a three-year resourcing plan.

    Use this tool to build your security service portfolio and to determine resourcing needs to meet your service demand.

    • Security Resources Planning Workbook

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build a Service-Based Security Resourcing Plan

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Roles and Select Services

    The Purpose

    Identify the roles needed to implement and deliver your organization’s security services.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A security services portfolio allows you to assign job roles to each service, which is the first step towards determining resourcing needs. Improve employee engagement and satisfaction with clearly defined job roles, responsibilities, and service levels.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess security needs and business pressures.

    1.2 Define security job roles.

    1.3 Define security services and assign ownership.

    Outputs

    Security Roles Definition

    Security Services Portfolio

    2 Estimate Current and Future Demand

    The Purpose

    Estimate the actual demand for security resources and determine how to allocate resources accordingly.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Allocate resources more effectively across your Security and Risk teams.

    Raise the profile of your security team by aligning security service offerings with the demands of the business.

    Activities

    2.1 Estimate current and future demand.

    2.2 Review demand summary.

    2.3 Allocate resources where they are needed the most.

    Outputs

    Demand Estimates

    Resourcing Plan

    3 Identify Required Skills

    The Purpose

    When defining roles, consider the competencies needed to deliver your security services. Make sure to account for this need in your resource planning.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Leverage the NCWF to establish the building blocks of a capable and ready cybersecurity workforce to effectively identify, recruit, develop and maintain cybersecurity talent.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify skills needed for planned initiatives.

    3.2 Prioritize your skill requirements.

    3.3 Assign work roles to the needs of your target environment.

    3.4 Discuss the NICE cybersecurity workforce framework.

    3.5 Develop technical skill requirements for current and future work roles.

    Outputs

    Prioritized Skill Requirements and Associated Roles

    4 Future Planning

    The Purpose

    Create a development plan to train and upskill your employees to address current and future service requirements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Skill needs are based on the strategic requirements of a business-aligned security program.

    Activities

    4.1 Continue developing technical skill requirements for current and future work roles.

    4.2 Conduct current workforce skills assessment.

    4.3 Develop a plan to acquire skills.

    4.4 Discuss training and certification opportunities for staff.

    4.5 Discuss next steps for closing the skills gap.

    4.6 Debrief.

    Outputs

    Role-Based Skills Gaps

    Workforce Development Plan

    Further reading

    Build a Service-Based Security Resourcing Plan

    Every security program is unique; resourcing allocations should reflect this.

    Analyst Perspective

    Start by looking inward.

    The image is a picture of Logan Rohde.The image is a picture of Isabelle Hertanto.

    Organizations have a critical need for skilled cybersecurity resources as the cyberthreat landscape becomes more complex. This has put a strain on many security teams who must continue to meet demand for an increasing number of security services. To deliver services well, we first need to determine what are the organization’s key security requirements. While benchmarks can be useful for quick peer-to-peer comparisons to determine if we are within the average range, they tend to make all security programs seem the same. This can lead to misguided investments in security services and personnel that might be better used elsewhere.

    Security teams will be most successful when organizations take a personalized approach to security, considering what must be done to lower risk and operate more efficiently and effectively.

    Logan Rohde

    Senior Research Analyst, Security

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Isabelle Hertanto

    Principal Research Director, Security

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • IT and Security leaders across all industries must determine what and how many resources are needed to support the information security program.
    • Estimating current usage, the right allocations, and future demand for security resources can be a difficult and time-consuming exercise.
    • Needing to provide a benchmark to justify increasing headcount.
    • Absence of formally defined security service offerings and service owners.
    • Lack of skills needed to provide necessary security services.
    • Info-Tech’s approach to resource planning focuses less on benchmarks and more on estimating actual demand for security services to ensure that there are enough resources to deliver them.
    • A well-designed security services portfolio is the first step toward determining resourcing needs.
    • When allocating resources, plan for both mandatory and discretionary demand to position yourself for greatest success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Not all security programs need to be the same. A service-aligned security resourcing strategy will put organizations in the best position to respond to current and future service demands and address business needs as they evolve over time.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations who are looking to:

    • Determine what and how many resources are needed to support the information security program.
    • Identify the organization's key service offerings and the required resourcing to support delivery of such services.
    • Estimate current staff utilization and required allocations to satisfy future demand for services.

    Every organization is unique and will need different security research allocations aligned with their business needs.

    “The number of priorities that CISOs have continues to grow, but if everything is a priority, nothing is. It’s important to focus on the ones that deliver the most value to your organization and that are synchronized with the overall business strategy.”

    Paige H. Adams

    Global CISO at Zurich

    Insurance

    Source: Proofpoint, 2021

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • Security leaders sometimes try to cut to the chase and lean on staffing benchmarks to justify their requests for resources. However, while staffing benchmarks are useful for quick peer-to-peer validation and decision making, they tend to reduce security programs down to a set of averages, which can be misleading when used out of context.
    • A more effective approach is to determine what security services need to be provided, the level of demand, and what it will take to meet that demand currently and in the coming years.
    • With these details available, it becomes much easier to predict what roles need to be hired, what skills need to be developed, and whether outsourcing is an option.

    Hiring delays and skills gaps can fuel resourcing challenges

    59% of organizations report taking 3-6+ months to fill a vacant cybersecurity position.

    Source: ISACA, 2020

    30% report IT knowledge as the most prevalent skills gap in today’s cybersecurity professionals.

    Source: ISACA, 2020

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Building a Service-Based Security Resourcing Plan

    1. Determine Security Service Portfolio Offerings

    2. Plan for Mandatory Versus Discretionary Demand

    3. Define Your Resourcing Model

    Phase Steps

    1 Gather Requirements and Define Roles

    1.2 Choose Security Service Offerings

    2.1 Assess Demand

    3.1 Review Demand Summary

    3.2 Develop an Action Plan

    Phase Outcomes

    Security requirements

    Security service portfolio

    Service demand estimates

    Service hour estimates

    Three-year resourcing plan

    Stay on top of resourcing demands with a security service portfolio

    Security programs should be designed to address unique business needs.

    A service-aligned security resourcing strategy will put organizations in the best position to respond to current and future service demands and address business needs as they evolve over time.

    Watch out for role creep.

    It may be tempting to assign tasks to the people who already know how to do them, but we should consider which role is most appropriate for each task. If all services are assigned to one or two people, we’ll quickly use up all their time.

    Time estimates will improve with practice.

    It may be difficult to estimate exactly how long it takes to carry out each service at first. But making the effort to time your activities each quarter will help you to improve the accuracy of your estimates incrementally.

    Start recruiting well in advance of need.

    Security talent can be difficult to come by, so make sure to begin your search for a new hire three to six months before your demand estimates indicate the need will arise.

    People and skills are both important.

    As the services in your portfolio mature and become more complex, remember to consider the skills you will need to be able to provide that service. Make sure to account for this need in your resource planning and keep in mind that we can only expect so much from one role. Therefore, hiring may be necessary to keep up with the diverse skills your services may require.

    Make sure your portfolio reflects reality.

    There’s nothing wrong with planning for future state, but we should avoid using the portfolio as a list of goals.

    Blueprint deliverable

    Use this tool to build your security services portfolio, estimate demand and hours needed, and determine FTE requirements.

    The image contains screenshots of the Security Resources Planning Workbook.

    Key deliverable:

    Security Resources Planning Workbook

    The Security Resources Planning Workbook will be used to:

    • Build a security services portfolio.
    • Estimate demand for security services and the efforts to deliver them.
    • Determine full-time equivalent (FTE) requirements for each service.
    The image contains a thought model to demonstrate the benchmarks that lead to a one-size-fits-all approach to security.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Allocate resources more effectively across your security and risk teams.
    • Improve employee engagement and satisfaction with clearly defined job roles, responsibilities, and service levels.
    • Raise the profile of your security team by aligning security service offerings with the demands of the business.
    • Ensure that people, financial, knowledge, and technology resources are appropriately allocated and leveraged across the organization.
    • Improve your organization’s ability to satisfy compliance obligations and reduce information security risk.
    • Increase customer and business stakeholder satisfaction through reliable service delivery.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Use these metrics to realize the value of completing this blueprint.

    Metric

    Expected Improvement

    Level of business satisfaction with IT security

    You can expect to see a 20% improvement in your IT Security Business Satisfaction Diagnostic.

    Reports on key performance indicators and service level objectives

    Expect to see a 40% improvement in security service-related key performance indicators and service level objectives.

    Employee engagement scores

    You can expect to see approximately a 10% improvement in employee engagement scores.

    Changes in rates of voluntary turnover

    Anticipating demand and planning resources accordingly will help lower employee turnover rates due to burnout or stress leave by as much as 10%.

    47% of cybersecurity professionals said that stress and burnout has become a major issue due to overwork, with most working over 41 hours a week, and some working up to 90.

    Source: Security Boulevard, 2021

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.” “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific drivers.

    Call #2: Discuss roles and duties.

    Call #3: Build service portfolio and assign ownership.

    Call #4: Estimate required service hours.

    Call #5: Review service demand and plan for future state.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 4 to 6 calls over the course of 2 to 3 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5

    Define Roles and Select Services

    Estimate Current and Future Demand

    Identify Required Skills

    Future Planning

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Assess Security Needs and Business Pressures.

    1.2 Define Security Job Roles.

    1.3 Define Security Services and Assign Ownership.

    2.1 Estimate Current and Future Demand.

    2.2 Review Demand Summary.

    2.3 Allocate Resources Where They Are Needed the Most.

    3.1 Identify Skills Needed Skills for Planned Initiatives.

    3.2 Prioritize Your Skill Requirements.

    3.3 Assign Work Roles to the Needs of Your Target Environment.

    3.4 Discuss the NICE Cybersecurity Workforce Framework.

    3.5 Develop Technical Skill Requirements for Current and Future Work Roles.

    4.1 Continue Developing Technical Skill Requirements for Current and Future Work Roles.

    4.2 Conduct Current Workforce Skills Assessment.

    4.3 Develop a Plan to Acquire Skills.

    4.4 Discuss Training and Certification Opportunities for Staff.

    4.5 Discuss Next Steps for Closing the Skills Gap.

    4.6 Debrief.

    5.1 Complete In-Progress Deliverables From Previous Four Days.

    5.2 Set Up Review Time for Workshop Deliverables and to Discuss Next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. FTE-Hours Calculation
    2. Security Roles Definition
    3. Security Services Portfolio
    1. Demand Estimates
    2. Resourcing Plan
    1. Skills Gap Prioritization Tool
    2. Technical Skills Tool
    1. Technical Skills Tool
    2. Current Workforce Skills Assessment
    3. Skills Development Plan

    Phase 1

    Determine Security Service Portfolio Offerings

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Gather Requirements and Define Roles

    1.2 Choose Security Service Offerings

    2.1 Assess Demand

    3.1 Determine Resourcing Status

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • Core Security Team
    • Business Representative (optional)

    Step 1.1

    Gather Requirements and Define Roles

    Activities

    1.1.1 Assess Business Needs and Pressures

    1.1.2 Define Security Roles

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • Core Security Team
    • Business Representative (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Security program requirements
    • Security roles definitions

    1.1.1 Assess security needs and pressures

    1 hour

    1. As a group, brainstorm the security requirements for your organization and any business pressures that exist within your industry (e.g. compliance obligations).
    • To get started, consider examples of typical business pressures on the next slides. Determine how your organization must respond to these points (note: this is not an exhaustive list).
    • You will likely notice that these requirements have already influenced the direction of your security program and the kinds of services it needs to provide to the business side of the organization.
  • There may be some that have not been well addressed by current service offerings (e.g. current service maturity, under/over definition of a service). Be sure to make a note of these areas and what the current challenge is and use these details in Step 1.2.
  • Document the results for future use in Step 1.2.1.
  • Input Output
    • List of key business requirements and industry pressures
    • Prioritized list of security program requirements
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes
    • CISO
    • Core Security Team
    • Business Representative (optional)

    Typical business pressures examples

    The security services you will provide to the organization should be based on its unique business requirements and pressures, which will make certain services more applicable than others. Use this exercise to get an idea of what those business drivers might be.

    The image contains a screenshot of Typical business pressures examples.

    1.1.2 Define security roles

    1-2 hours

    1. Using the link below, download the Security Resources Planning Workbook and review the examples provided on the next slide.
    2. On tab 1 (Roles), review the example roles and identify which roles you have within your security team.
    • If necessary, customize the roles and descriptions to match your security team’s current make up.
    • If you have roles within your security team that do not appear in the examples, you can add them to the bottom of the table.
  • For each role, use columns D-F to indicate how many people (headcount) you have, or plan to have, in that role.
  • Use columns H-J to indicate how many hours per year each role has available to deliver the services within your service catalog.
  • Input Output
    • Full-time hours worked per week Weeks worked per year Existing job descriptions/roles
    • Calculated full-time equivalents (FTE) Defined security roles
    Materials Participants
    • Security Resources Planning Workbook
    • CISO
    • Core Security Team

    Download the Security Resources Planning Workbook

    Calculating FTEs and defining security roles

    The image contains a screenshot of the workbook demonstrating calculating FTEs and defining security roles.

    1. Start by entering the current and planned headcount for each role
    2. Then enter number of hours each role works per week
    3. Estimate the number of administrative hours (e.g. team meetings, training) per week
    4. Enter the average number of weeks per year that each role is available for service delivery
    5. The tool uses the data from steps 2-4 to calculate the average number of hours each role has for service delivery per year (FTE)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Watch out for role creep. It may be tempting to assign tasks to the people who already know how to do them, but we should consider which role is most appropriate for each task. If all services are assigned to one or two people, we’ll quickly use up all their time.

    Other considerations

    Address your skills gap.

    Cybersecurity is a rapidly evolving discipline and security teams from all over are reporting challenges related to training and upskilling needed to keep pace with the developments of the threat landscape.

    95% Security leaders who agree the cybersecurity skills gap has not improved over the last few years.*

    44% Security leaders who say the skills gap situation has only gotten worse.*

    When defining roles, consider the competencies needed to deliver your security services. Use Info-Tech’s blueprint Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan to help you determine the required skillsets for each role.

    * Source: ISSA, 2021

    Info-Tech Insight

    As the services in your portfolio mature and become more complex, remember to consider the skills you need and will need to be able to provide that service. Make sure to account for this need in your resource planning and keep in mind that we can only expect so much from one role. Therefore, hiring may be necessary to keep up with the diverse skills your services may require.

    Download blueprint Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan

    Step 1.2

    Choose Security Service Offerings

    Activities

    1.2.1 Define Security Services and Role Assignments

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • Core Security Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Service portfolio
    • Service pipeline status
    • Service ownership

    1.2.1 Define security services and role assignments

    2-4 hours

    1. As a group, review the outputs from Step 1.1.1. These requirements will serve as the basis to prioritize the service offerings of your security portfolio.
    2. Take these outputs, as well as any additional notes you’ve made, and put them side by side with the example service offerings on tab 3 of the Security Resources Planning Workbook so each service can be considered alongside these requirements (i.e. to determine if that service should be included in the security service portfolio at this time).
    3. Using the following slides as a guide, work your way down the list of example services and choose the services for your portfolio. For each service selected, be sure to customize the definition of the service and state its outcome (i.e. what time is spent when providing this service, indicate if it is outsourced, which role is responsible for delivering it, and the service pipeline status (in use, plan to use, plan to retire)).
    InputOutput
    • Business and security requirements gathered in Step 1.1.1
    • Defined security service portfolio
    • Service ownership assigned to role
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Security Resources Planning Workbook
    • CISO
    • Core Security Team

    Download the Security Resources Planning Workbook

    Service needs aligned with your control framework

    Use Info-Tech's best-of-breed Security Framework to develop a comprehensive baseline set of security service areas.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Security Framework.

    Prioritize your security services

    Example of a custom security services portfolio definition

    Security Strategy and Governance Model

    • Aligned Business Goals
    • Security Program Objectives
    • Centralized vs. Decentralized Governance Model

    Compliance Obligations

    • Penetration testing
    • Annual security audits
    • Data privacy and protection laws

    CISO Accountabilities

    • Security Policy
    • Risk Management
    • Application & Infrastructure Security
    • Program Metrics and Reporting

    Consider each of the requirement categories developed in Step 1.1.1 against the taxonomy and service domain here. If there is a clear need to add this service, use the drop-down list in the “Include in Catalog” column to indicate “Yes.” Mark un-needed services as “No.”

    The image contains a screenshot of the security services portfolio definition.

    Assigning roles to services

    The image contains an example of assigning roles to services.

    1. If the service is being outsourced, use the drop-down list to select “Yes.” This will cause the formatting to change in the neighboring cell (Role), as this cell does not need to be completed.
    2. For all in-sourced services, indicate the role assigned to perform the service.
    3. Indicate the service-pipeline status for each of the services you include. The selection you make will affect the conditional formatting on the next tab, similar to what is described in step 1.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure your portfolio reflects current state and approved plans. There’s nothing wrong with planning for the future, but we should avoid using the portfolio as a list of goals.

    Phase 2

    Plan for Mandatory Versus Discretionary Demand

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Gather Requirements and Define Roles

    1.2 Choose Security Service Offerings

    2.1 Assess Demand

    3.1 Determine Resourcing Status

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • Core Security Team

    Step 2.1

    Assess Demand

    Activities

    2.1.1 Estimate Current and Future Demand

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • Core Security Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Service demand estimates
    • Total service hours required
    • FTEs required per service

    2.1.1 Estimate current and future demand

    2-4 hours

    1. Estimate the number of hours required to complete each of the services in your portfolio and how frequently it is performed. Remember the service-hour estimates should be based on the outcome of the service (see examples on the next slide).
    • To do this effectively, think back over the last quarter and count how many times the members of your team performed each service and how many hours it took to complete.
    • Then, think back over the last year and consider if the last quarter represents typical demand (i.e. you may notice that certain services have a greater demand at different parts of the year, such as annual audit) and arrive at your best estimate for both service hours and demand.
    • See examples on next slide.

    Note: For continuous services (i.e. 24/7 security log monitoring), use the length of the work shift for estimating the Hours to Complete and the corresponding number of shifts per year for Mandatory Demand estimates. Example: For an 8-hour shift, there are 3 shifts per day at 365 days/year, resulting in 1,095 total shifts per year.

    Download the Security Resources Planning Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Service-hour estimations
    • Expected demand for service
    • Discretionary demand for service
    • Total hours required for service
    • FTEs required for service
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Security Resources Planning Workbook
    • CISO
    • Core Security Team

    Info-Tech Insight

    Time estimates will improve over time. It may be difficult to estimate exactly how long it takes to carry out each service at first. But making the effort to time your activities each quarter will help you to improve the accuracy of your estimates incrementally.

    Understanding mandatory versus discretionary demand

    Every service may have a mix of mandatory and discretionary demands. Understanding and differentiating between these types of demand is critical to developing an efficient resourcing plan.

    The image contains a picture used to represent mandatory demand.

    Mandatory Demand

    Mandatory demand refers to the amount of work that your team must perform to meet compliance obligations and critical business and risk mitigation requirements.

    Failure to meet mandatory demand levels will have serious consequences, such as regulatory fines or the introduction of risks that far exceed risk tolerances. This is work you cannot refuse.

    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate the relationship between Mandatory and Discretionary demand.

    The image contains a picture used to represent discretionary demand.

    Discretionary Demand

    Discretionary demand refers to the amount of work the security team is asked to perform that goes above and beyond your mandatory demand. Discretionary demand often comes in the form of ad hoc requests from business units or the IT department.

    Failure to meet discretionary demand levels usually has limited consequences, allowing you more flexibility to decide how much of this type of work you can accept.

    Mandatory versus discretionary demand examples

    Service Name

    Mandatory Demand Example

    Discretionary Demand Example

    Penetration Testing

    PCI compliance requires penetration testing against all systems within the cardholder data environment annually (currently 2 systems per year).

    Business units request ad hoc penetration testing against non-payment systems (expected 2-3 systems per year).

    Vendor Risk Assessments

    GDPR compliance requires vendor security assessments against all third parties that process personal information on our behalf (expected 1-2 per quarter).

    IT department has requested that the security team conduct vendor security assessments for all cloud services, regardless of whether they store personal information (expected 2-3 assessments per quarter).

    e-Discovery and Evidence Handling

    There is no mandatory demand for this service.

    The legal department occasionally asks the security team to assist with e-Discovery requests (expected demand 1-2 investigations per quarter).

    Example of service demand estimations

    The image contains a screenshot example of service demand estimations.

    1. For each service, describe the specific outcome or deliverable that the service produces. Modify the example deliverables as required.
    2. Enter the number of hours required to produce one instance of the service deliverable. For example, if the deliverable for your security training service is an awareness campaign, it may require 40 person hours to develop and deliver.
    3. Enter the number of mandatory and discretionary demands expected for each service within a given year. For instance, if you are delivering quarterly security awareness campaigns, enter 4 as the demand.

    Phase 3

    Build Your Resourcing Plan

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Gather Requirements and Define Roles

    1.2 Choose Security Service Offerings

    2.1 Assess Demand

    3.1 Determine Resourcing Status

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • Security Manager

    Step 3.1

    Determine Resourcing Status

    Activities

    3.1.1 Review Demand Summary

    3.1.2 Fill Resource Gaps

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • Security Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • The number of FTEs required to meet demand
    • Resourcing gaps

    3.1.1 Review demand summary

    1-2 hours

    1. On tab 5 of the Security Resourcing Planning Tool (Demand Summary), review the results. This tab will show you if you have enough FTE hours per role to meet the demand level for each service.
    • Green indicates that there is a surplus of FTEs and the number displayed shows how many extra FTEs there are.
    • Yellow text that you have adequate FTEs to meet all of your mandatory demand but may not have enough to meet all of your discretionary demand.
    • Red text indicates that there are too few FTEs available, and the number displayed shows how many additional FTEs you will require.
  • Take note of how many FTEs you will need to meet expected and discretionary demand in each of the years you’ve planned for.
  • Input Output
    • Current staffing
    • Resourcing model
    Materials Participants
    • Security Resources Planning Workbook
    • CISO
    • HR Representative

    Download the Security Resources Planning Workbook

    Info-Tech Insight

    Start recruiting well in advance of need. Security talent can be difficult to come by, so make sure to begin your search for a new hire three to six months before your demand estimates indicate the need will arise.

    Example of demand planning summary (1/2)

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of demand planning summary.

    Example of demand planning summary (2/2)

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of demand planning. This image has a screenshot of the dashboard.

    3.1.2 Fill resource gaps

    2-4 hours

    1. Now that you have a resourcing model for your security services, you will need to plan to close the gaps between available FTEs and required service hours. For each role that has been under/over committed to service delivery, review the services assignments on tab 3 and determine the viability of the following gap closure actions:
      1. Reassign service responsibility to another role with fewer commitments
      2. Create efficiencies to reduce required hours
      3. Hire to meet the service demand
      4. Outsource the service
    2. Your resourcing shortages may not all be apparent at once. Therefore, build a roadmap to determine which needs must be addressed immediately and which can be scheduled for years two and three.

    Consider outsourcing

    Outsourcing provides access to tools and talent that would otherwise be prohibitively expensive. Typical reasons for outsourcing security operations include:

    • Difficulty finding or retaining security staff with advanced and often highly specialized skillsets.
    • The desire to transfer liability for high-risk operational activities such as 24/7 security monitoring.
    • Workforce scalability to accommodate irregular or infrequent events such as incident response and incident-related forensic investigations.

    Given the above, three different models have emerged for the operational security organization:

    1. Outsourced SecOps

    A fully outsourced Security Operations Center, managed and governed by a smaller in-house team

    2. Balanced Hybrid

    In-house operational security staff with some reliance on managed services

    3. In-House SecOps

    A predominantly in-house security team, augmented by a small managed services contract

    Once you have determined that further outsourcing is needed, go back and adjust the status in your service portfolio. Use Info-Tech's blueprint Develop Your Security Outsourcing Strategy to determine the right approach for your business needs.

    “The workforce of the future needs to be agile and adaptable, enabled by strong partnerships with third-party providers of managed security services. I believe these hybrid models really are the security workforce of the future.”

    – Senior Manager, Cybersecurity at EY

    Download blueprint Develop Your Security Outsourcing Strategy

    Info-Tech Insight

    Choose the right model for your organization’s size, risk tolerance, and process maturity level. For example, it might make more sense for larger enterprises with low risk tolerance to grow their internal teams and build in-house capability.

    Create efficiencies

    Resourcing challenges are often addressed more directly by increased spending. However, for a lot of organizations, this just isn’t possible. While there is no magic solution to resolve resource constraints and small budgets, the following tactics should be considered as a means to reduce the hours required for the services your team provides.

    Upskill Your Staff

    If full-scale training is not an option, see if there are individual skills that could be improved to help improve time to completion for your services. Use Info-Tech's blueprint Close the InfoSec Skills Gap to determine which skills are needed for your security team.

    Improve Process Familiarity

    In some organizations, especially low-maturity ones, problems can arise simply because there is a lack of familiarity with what needs to be done. Review the process, socialize it, and make sure your staff can execute in within the target time allotment.

    Add Technology

    Resourcing crunch or not, technology can help us do things better. Investigate whether automation software might help to shave a few hours off a given service. Use Info-Tech's blueprint Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook to optimize and automate your business processes with a user-centric approach.

    Download the blueprint Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan

    Download the blueprint Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every minute counts. While using these strategies may not solve every resourcing crunch you have, they can help put you in the best position possible to deliver on your commitments for each service.

    Plan for employee turnover

    Cybersecurity skills are in high demand; practitioners are few. The reality is that experienced security personnel have a lot of opportunities. While we cannot control for the personal reasons employees leave jobs, we can address the professional reasons that cause them to leave.

    Fair wage

    Reasonable expectations

    Provide training

    Defined career path

    It’s a sellers’ market for cybersecurity skills these days. Higher-paying offers are one of the major reasons security leaders leave their jobs (ISSA, 2021).

    Many teams lose out on good talent simply because they have unrealistic expectations, seeking 5+ years experience for an entry-level position, due to misalignment with HR (TECHNATION, 2021).

    Technology is changing (and being adopted) faster than security professionals can train on it. Ongoing training is needed to close these gaps (ISO, 2021).

    People want to see where they are now, visualize where they will be in the future, and understand what takes to get there. This helps to determine what types of training and specialization are necessary (DigitalGuardian, 2020).

    Use Info-Tech’s blueprint Build a Strategic IT Workforce Plan to help staff your security organization for success.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Build a Strategic IT Workforce Plan.

    Download blueprint Build a Strategic IT Workforce Plan

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    You have now successfully identified your business and security drivers, determined what services your security program will provide, and determined your resourcing plan to meet these demands over the next three years.

    As needs change at your organization, don’t forget to re-evaluate the decisions you’ve made. Don’t forget that outsourcing a service may be the most reliable way to provide and resource it. However, this is just one tool among many that should be considered, along with upskilling, process improvement/familiarity, and process automation.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Research Contributors and Experts

    The image contains a picture of George Al-Koura.

    George Al-Koura

    CISO

    Ruby Life

    The image contains a picture of Brian Barniner.

    Brian Barniner

    Head of Decision Science and Analytics

    ValueBridge Advisors

    The image contains a picture of Tracy Dallaire.

    Tracy Dallaire

    CISO / Director of Information Security

    McMaster University

    The image contains a picture of Ricardo Johnson.

    Ricardo Johnson

    Chief Information Security Officer

    Citrix

    Research Contributors and Experts

    The image contains a picture of Ryan Rodriguez.

    Ryan Rodriguez

    Senior Manager, Cyber Threat Management

    EY

    The image contains a picture of Paul Townley.

    Paul Townley

    VP Information Security and Personal Technology

    Owens Corning

    13 Anonymous Contributors

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Cost-Optimize Your Security Budget

    Develop Your Security Outsourcing Strategy

    Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan

    Bibliography

    2021 Voice of the CISO Report.” Proofpoint, 2021. Web.

    “2022 Voice of the CISO.” Proofpoint, 2022. Web.

    Brook, Chris. “How to Find and Retain Skilled Cybersecurity Talent.” DigitalGuardian, 17 Sep. 2020. Web.

    “Canadian Cybersecurity Skills Framework” TECHNATION Canada, April 2020. Web.

    “Cybersecurity Skills Crisis Continues for Fifth Year, Perpetuated by Lack of Business Investment.” ISSA, 28 July 2021. Web.

    “Cybersecurity Workforce, National Occupational Standard.” TECHNATION Canada, April 2020. Web.

    Naden, Clare. “The Cybersecurity Skills Gap: Why Education Is Our Best Weapon against Cybercrime.” ISO, 15 April 2021. Web.

    Purse, Randy. “Four Challenges in Finding Cybersecurity Talent And What Companies Can Do About It.” TECHNATION Canada, 29 March 2021. Web.

    Social-Engineer. “Burnout in the Cybersecurity Community.” Security Boulevard, 8 Dec. 2021. Web.

    “State of Cybersecurity 2020.” ISACA, 2020. Web.

    Improve IT Team Effectiveness

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}521|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $16,549 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead
    • Organizations rely on team-based work arrangements to provide organizational benefits and to help them better navigate the volatile, uncertain, complex, and ambiguous (VUCA) operating environment.
    • This is becoming more challenging in a hybrid model as interactions now rely less on casual encounters and now must become more intentional.
    • A high-performing team is more than productive. They are more resilient and able to recognize opportunities. They are proactive instead of reactive due to trust and a high level of communication and collaboration.
    • IT teams are more unique, which also provides unique challenges other teams don’t experience.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    IT teams have:

    • Multiple disciplines that tend to operate in parallel versus within a sequence of events.
    • Multiple incumbent roles where people operate in parallel versus needing to share information to produce an outcome.
    • Multiple stakeholders who create a tension with competing priorities.

    Impact and Result

    Use Info-Tech’s phased approach to diagnose your team and use the IDEA model to drive team effectiveness.

    The IDEA model includes four factors to identify team challenges and focus on areas for improvement: identity, decision making, exchanges within the team, and atmosphere of team psychological safety.

    Improve IT Team Effectiveness Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Team Effectiveness Storyboard – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to properly assess your team’s effectiveness and activities that will identify solutions to overcome.

    The storyboard will walk you through three critical steps to assess, analyze, and build solutions to improve your team’s effectiveness.

  • Having your team members complete an assessment.
  • Reviewing and sharing the results.
  • Building a list of activities to select from based on the assessment results to ensure you target the problem you are facing.
    • Improve IT Team Effectiveness Storyboard – Phases 1-3

    2. The Team Effectiveness Survey – A tool that will determine what areas you are doing well in and where you can improve team relations and increase productivity.

    Each stage has a deliverable that will support your journey on increasing effectiveness starting with how to communicate to the assessment which will accumulate into a team charter and action plan.

    • IT Team Effectiveness Survey
    • IT Team Effectiveness Survey Tool

    3. Facilitation Guide – A collection of activities to select from and use with your team.

    The Facilitation Guide contains instructions to facilitating several activities aligned to each area of the IDEA Model to target your approach directly to your team’s results.

  • Determining roles and responsibilities on the team.
  • Creating a decision-making model that outlines levels of authority and who makes the decisions.
  • Assessing the team communications flow, which highlights the communication flow on the team and any bottlenecks.
  • Building a communication poster that articulates methods used to share different information within the team.
    • Improve IT Team Effectiveness Facilitation Guide
    • Identity – Responsibilities and Dependencies
    • Decision Making Accountability Workbook
    • Exchanges – Team Communications Flow
    • Exchanges – Communications Guide Poster Template
    • Atmosphere – SCARF Worksheet

    4. Action Plan – A template to help build your team action plan.

    The Action Plan Template captures next steps for the team on what they are committing to in order to build a more effective team.

    • Action Plan Template

    5. Team Charter – A template to create a charter for a work group or project team.

    A Team Charter captures the agreements your team makes with each other in terms of accepted behaviors and how they will communicate, make decisions, and create an environment that everyone feels safe contributing in.

    • IT Team Charter Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Improve IT Team Effectiveness

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess the Team

    The Purpose

    Determine if proceeding is valuable.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Set context for team members.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context.

    1.2 Identify IT team members to be included.

    1.3 Determine goals and objectives.

    1.4 Build execution plan and determine messaging.

    1.5 Complete IDEA Model assessment.

    Outputs

    Execution and communication plan

    IDEA Model assessment distributed

    2 Review Results and Action Plan

    The Purpose

    Review results to identify areas of strength and opportunity.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    As a team, discuss results and determine actions.

    Activities

    2.1 Debrief results with leadership team.

    2.2 Share results with team.

    2.3 Identify areas of focus.

    2.4 Identify IDEA Model activities to support objectives and explore areas of focus.

    Outputs

    IDEA assessment results

    Selection of specific activities to be facilitated

    3 Document and Measure

    The Purpose

    Review results to identify areas of strength and opportunity.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    build an action plan of solutions to incorporate into team norms.

    Activities

    3.1 Create team charter.

    3.2 Determine action plan for improvement.

    3.3 Determine metrics.

    3.4 Determine frequency of check-ins.

    Outputs

    Team Charter

    Action Plan

    Further reading

    Improve IT Team Effectiveness

    Implement the four critical factors required for all high-performing teams.

    Analyst Perspective

    All teams need to operate effectively; however, IT teams experience unique challenges.

    IT often struggles to move from an effective to a high-performing team due to the very nature of their work. They work across multiple disciplines and with multiple stakeholders.

    When operating across many disciplines it can become more difficult to identify the connections or points of interactions that define effective teams and separate them from being a working group or focus on their individual performance.

    IT employees also work in close partnership with multiple teams outside their IT domain, which can create confusion as to what team are they a primary member of. The tendency is to advocate for or on behalf of the team they primarily work with instead of bringing the IT mindset and alignment to IT roadmap and goals to serve their stakeholders.

    A Picture of Amanda Mathieson

    Amanda Mathieson
    Research Director, People & Leadership Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    The Challenge

    Organizations rely on team-based work arrangements to provide organizational benefits and better navigate the volatile, uncertain, complex, and ambiguous (VUCA) operating environment.

    This is becoming more challenging in a hybrid environment as interactions now rely less on casual encounters and must become more intentional.

    A high-performing team is more than productive. They are more resilient and able to recognize opportunities. They are proactive instead of reactive due to the trust and high level of communication and collaboration.

    Common Obstacles

    IT teams are more unique, which also provides unique challenges other teams don't experience:

    • Multiple disciplines that tend to operate in parallel versus within a sequence of events
    • Multiple incumbent roles where people operate in parallel versus needing to share information to produce an outcome
    • Multiple stakeholders that create a tension with competing priorities

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Use Info-Tech's phased approach to diagnose your team and use the IDEA model to drive team effectiveness.

    The IDEA model includes four factors to identify team challenges and focus on areas for improvement: identity, decision making, exchanges within the team, and atmosphere of team psychological safety.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT teams often fail to reach their full potential because teamwork presents unique challenges and complexities due to the work they do across the organization and within their own group. Silos, not working together, and not sharing knowledge are all statements that indicate a problem. As a leader it's difficult to determine what to do first to navigate the different desires and personalities on a team.

    How this blueprint will help

    Assess, diagnose, and address issues to realize your team's full potential.

    This research helps IT support:

    • Work Teams: Operate under one organizational unit or function. Their membership is generally stable with well-defined roles.
    • Project Teams: Typically, are time-limited teams formed to produce a particular output or project. Their membership and expertise tend to vary over time.
    • Management or Leadership Teams: Provide direction and guidance to the organization and are accountable for overall performance. Membership is structured by the hierarchy of the organization and includes a diverse set of skills, experience, and expertise.

    Traditionally, organizations have tried to fix ineffective teams by focusing on these four issues: composition, leadership competencies, individual-level performance, and organizational barriers. While these factors are important, our research has shown it is beneficial to focus on the four factors of effective teams addressed in this blueprint first. Then, if additional improvement is needed, shift your focus to the traditional issue areas.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make it difficult to address effectiveness for many IT teams:

    • Teams do not use one standard set of processes because they may have a wide variety of assignments requiring different sets of processes.
      Source: Freshworks
    • There are multiple disciplines within IT that require vastly different skill sets. Finding the connection points can be difficult when on the surface it seems like success doesn't require interconnectivity.
    • IT has many people in the same roles that act independently based on the stakeholder or internal customer they are serving. This can lead to duplication of effort if information and solutions aren't shared.
    • IT serves many parts of the organization that can bring competing priorities both across the groups they support and with the IT strategy and roadmap itself. Many IT leaders work directly in or for the business, which can see them associate with the internal client team more than their IT team – another layer of conflicting priorities.

    IT also experience challenges with maturity and data silos

    48%

    of IT respondents rate their team as low maturity.

    Maturity is defined by the value they provide the business, ranging from firefighting to innovative partner.

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group, Tech Trends, 2022

    20 Hours

    Data Silos: Teams waste more than 20 hours per month due to poor collaboration and communication.

    Source: Bloomfire, 2022

    Current realities require teams to operate effectively

    How High-Performing Teams Respond:

    Volatile: High degree of change happening at a rapid pace, making it difficult for organizations to respond effectively.

    Teams are more adaptable to change because they know how to take advantage of each others' diverse skills and experience.

    Uncertain: All possible outcomes are not known, and we cannot accurately assess the probability of outcomes that are known.

    Teams are better able to navigate uncertainty because they know how to work through complex challenges and feel trusted and empowered to change approach when needed.

    Complex: There are numerous risk factors, making it difficult to get a clear sense of what to do in any given situation.

    Teams can reduce complexity by working together to identify and plan to appropriately mitigate risk factors.

    Ambiguous: There is a lack of clarity with respect to the causes and consequences of events.

    Teams can reduce ambiguity through diverse situational knowledge, improving their ability to identify cause and effect.

    Teams struggle to realize their full potential

    Poor Communication

    To excel, teams must recognize and adapt to the unique communication styles and preferences of their members.

    To find the "just right" amount of communication for your team, communication and collaboration expectations should be set upfront.

    85% of tech workers don't feel comfortable speaking in meetings.
    Source: Hypercontext, 2022

    Decision Making

    Decision making is a key component of team effectiveness. Teams are often responsible for decisions without having proper authority.

    Establishing a team decision-making process becomes more complicated when appropriate decision-making processes vary according to the level of interdependency between team members and organizational culture.

    20% of respondents say their organization excels at decision making.
    Source: McKinsey, 2019

    Resolving Conflicts

    It is common for teams to avoid/ignore conflict – often out of fear. People fail to see how conflict can be healthy for teams if managed properly.

    Leaders assume mature adults will resolve conflicts on their own. This is not always the case as people involved in conflicts can lack an objective perspective due to charged emotions.

    56% of respondents prioritize restoring harmony in conflict and will push own needs aside.
    Source: Niagara Institute, 2022

    Teams with a shared purpose are more engaged and have higher performance

    Increased Engagement

    3.5x

    Having a shared team goal drives higher engagement. When individuals feel like part of a team working toward a shared goal, they are 3.5x more likely to be engaged.

    Source: McLean & Company, Employee Engagement Survey, IT respondents, 2023; N=5,427

    90%

    Engaged employees are stronger performers with 90% reporting they regularly accomplish more than what is expected.

    Source: McLean & Company, Employee Engagement Survey, IT respondents, 2023; N=4,363

    Effective and high-performing teams exchange information freely. They are clear on the purpose and goals of the organization, which enable empowerment.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Clear decision-making processes allow employees to focus on getting the work done versus navigating the system.

    Case Study

    Project Aristotle at Google – What makes a team effective at Google?

    INDUSTRY: Technology
    SOURCE: reWork

    Challenge

    Google wanted to clearly define what makes a team effective to drive a consistent meaning among its employees. The challenge was to determine more than quantitative measures, because more is not always better as it can just mean more mistakes to fix, and include the qualitative factors that bring some groups of people together better than others.

    Solution

    There was no pattern in the data it studied so Google stepped back and defined what a team is before embarking on defining effectiveness. There is a clear difference between a work group (a collection of people with little interdependence) and a team that is highly interdependent and relies on each other to share problems and learn from one another. Defining the different meanings took time and Google found that different levels of the organization were defining effectiveness differently.

    Results

    Google ended up with clear definitions that were co-created by all employees, which helped drive the meaning behind the behaviors. More importantly it was also able to define factors that had no bearing on effectiveness; one of which is very relevant in today's hybrid world – colocation.

    It was discovered that teams need to trust, have clarity around goals, have structure, and know the impact their work has.

    Overcoming barriers

    Teams often lack the skills or knowledge to increase effectiveness and performance.

    • Leaders struggle with team strife and ineffectiveness.
    • A leader's ability to connect with and engage team members is vital for driving desired outcomes. However, many team leads struggle to deal with low-performing or conflict-ridden teams.
    • Without adequate training on providing feedback, coaching, and managing difficult conversations, team leads often do not have the skills to positively affect team performance – and they do not appreciate the impact their actions have on desired outcomes.
    • Team leads often find it difficult to invest time and resources in addressing challenges when the team is working toward deadlines.
    • Team leads who are new to a management role within the organization often struggle to transition from independent contributor to leader – especially when they are tasked with managing team members who are former peers.
    • Some team leads believe that soliciting help will be viewed as a personal failure, so they are reluctant to seek support for team performance management from more-senior leaders.

    It's unrealistic to expect struggling teams to improve without outside help; if they were able to, they would have already done so.
    To improve, teams require:

    • A clearly defined team identity
    • A clearly defined decision-making paradigm
    • Consistently productive exchanges within the team
    • An atmosphere of psychological safety

    BUT these are the very things they are lacking when they're struggling.

    An image of Info-Tech's Insights for Improving IT Team Effectiveness.

    Improving team effectiveness

    Use the Info-Tech IDEA Model to assess and improve your team's effectiveness.

    Begin by assessing, recognizing, and addressing challenges in:

    • Identity – team goals, roles, responsibilities, and accountabilities
    • Decision-making paradigms and processes within the team.
    • Exchanges of information, motivation, and emotions between team members
    • Atmosphere of team psychological safety

    IDEA Model of Team Effectiveness

    Effective Team

    • Identity
    • Decisions
    • Exchanges
    • Atmosphere

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1: Assess the team Phase 2: Review results and action plan Phase 3: Document and measure

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.
    Call #2: Prepare to assess your team(s) using the assessment tool.

    Call #3: Review the assessment results and plan next steps.
    Call #4: Review results with team and determine focus using IDEA model to identify activity based on results.
    Call #5: Complete activity to determine solutions to build your action plan.

    Call #6: Build out your team agreement.
    Call #7: Identify measures and frequency of check-ins to monitor progress.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 6 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1
    (Half Day)

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Determine objectives and assess

    Review survey results

    Determine and conduct activities to increase effectiveness

    Bridge the gap and
    create the strategy

    Activities

    With Leader – 1 hour
    1.1 Review the business context.
    1.2 Identify IT team members to be included.
    1.3 Determine goals and objectives.
    1.4 Build execution plan and determine messaging.
    With Team – 90 minutes
    1.5 Share messaging, set context.
    1.6 Complete Team Effectiveness Survey.

    2.1 Debrief results with leadership team.
    2.2 Share results with team.
    2.3 Identify areas of focus.
    2.4 Identify IDEA Model activities to support objectives and explore areas of focus.

    3.1 Conduct IDEA Model Activities:

    • Identify – Clarify goals, roles, and responsibilities.
    • Decisions – Determine levels of authority; decision-making process.
    • Exchanges – Review information shared with communication methods and preferred styles of each team member.
    • Atmosphere – Create a psychologically safe environment.

    3.2 Record outcomes and actions.

    4.1 Create team charter or agreement.
    4.2 Identify metrics to measure progress.
    4.3 Identify risks.
    4.4 Determine frequency of check-ins to review progress.
    4.5 Check-in with sponsor.

    Deliverables

    1. Execution and communication plan
    2. Team Effectiveness Survey
    1. Assessment results
    2. IDEA Model team-building activities
    1. List of solutions to incorporate into team norms
    2. Action Plan
    1. Team Charter

    Phase 1

    Assess the team

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Identify team members
    and behaviors to improve using IDEA Model
    1.2 Determine messaging including follow-up plan
    1.3 Send survey

    1.1 Review results with team
    1.2 Determine IDEA focus area(s)
    1.3 Conduct activity to determine solutions

    1.1 Document outcomes and actions
    1.2 Create team charter
    1.3 Identify metrics to show success
    1.4 Schedule check-in

    Improving team effectiveness

    Use the Info-Tech IDEA Model to assess and improve your team's effectiveness

    Begin by assessing, recognizing, and addressing challenges in:

    • Identity – team goals, roles, responsibilities, and accountabilities.
    • Decision-making paradigms and processes within the team.
    • Exchanges of information, motivation, and emotions between team members.
    • Atmosphere of team psychological safety.

    Effective Team

    • Identity
    • Decisions
    • Exchanges
    • Atmosphere

    Assess the shared understanding of team identity

    In addition to having a clear understanding of the team's goals and objectives, team members must also:

    • Understand their own and each other's roles, responsibilities, and accountabilities.
    • Recognize and appreciate the value of each team member.
    • Realize how their actions impact each others' work and the overall goals and objectives.
    • Understand that working in silos is considered a work group whereas a team coordinates activities, shares information, and supports each other to achieve their goals.

    Clear goals enable employees to link their contributions to overall success of the team. Those who feel their contributions are important to the success of the department are two times more likely to feel they are part of a team working toward a shared goal compared to those who don't (McLean & Company, Employee Engagement Survey, IT respondents, 2023; N=4,551).

    Goals matter in teamwork

    The goals and objectives of the team are the underlying reason for forming the team in the first place. Without a clear and agreed-upon goal, it is difficult for teams to understand the purpose of their work.

    Clear goals support creating clear roles and the contributions required for team success.

    Team Identity = Team goals and Objectives + Individual roles, responsibilities, and accountabilities

    Assess the shared understanding of decision making

    Decision making adds to the complexity of teamwork.
    Individual team members hold different information and opinions that need to be shared to make good decisions.
    Ambiguous decision-making processes can result in team members being unable to continue their work until they get clear direction.
    The most appropriate decision-making process depends on the type of team:

    • The higher the degree of interconnectivity in team members' work, the greater the need for a general consensus approach to decision making. However, if you opt for a general consensus approach, a backup decision-making method must be identified in the event consensus cannot be reached.
    • High-pressure and high-stakes environments tend to centralize decision making to make important decisions quickly.
    • Low-pressure and low-stakes environments are more likely to adopt consensus models.

    Spectrum of Decision Making

    General consensus between all team members.

    A single, final decision maker within the team.

    Ensure team members understand how decisions are made within the team. Ask:

    • Do team members recognize the importance of sharing information, opinions, and suggestions?
    • Do team members feel their voices are heard?
    • Must there be consensus between all team members?
    • Is there a single decision maker?

    Assess team exchanges by focusing on communication

    Evaluate exchanges within your team using two categories:

    These categories are related, but there is not always overlap. While some conflicts involve failures to successfully exchange information, conflict can also occur even when everyone is communicating successfully.

    Communication

    Managing Conflict

    Information, motivations, emotions

    Accepting and expressing diverse perspectives

    Resolving conflict (unified action through diverse perspectives)

    Transmission

    Reception
    (listening)

    Success is defined in terms of how well information, motivations, and emotions are transmitted and received as intended.

    Success is defined in terms of how well the team can move to united action through differences of opinion. Effective teams recognize that conflict can be healthy if managed effectively.

    Successful exchange behaviors

    • Shared understanding of how to motivate one another and how team members respond emotionally.
    • Team moving beyond conflict to united action.
    • Formalized processes used for resolving conflicts.
    • Platforms provided for expressing diverse or conflicting perspectives and opinions – and used in a constructive manner.
    • Use of agendas at meetings as well as clearly defined action items that reflect meeting outcomes.
    • Avoidance of language that is exclusive, such as jargon and inside jokes.

    Exchanges of information, emotion, and motivation

    When selecting a method of communication (for example, in-person versus email), consider how that method will impact the exchange of all three aspects – not just information.

    Downplaying the importance of emotional and motivational exchanges and focusing solely on information is very risky since emotional and motivational exchanges can impact human relationships and team psychological safety.

    • Information: data or opinions.
    • Emotions: feelings and evaluations about the data or opinions.
    • Motivations: what we feel like doing in response to the data or opinions.

    Communication affects the whole team

    Effects are not limited to the team members communicating directly:

    • How team members interact one on one transmits information and causes emotional and motivational responses in other group members not directly involved.
    • How the larger group receives information, emotions, and motivations will also impact how individuals relate to each other in group settings.

    Remember to watch the reactions and behavior of participants and observers when assessing how the team behaves.

    Managing conflict

    Identify how conflict management is embedded into team practices.

    • Resolving conflicts is difficult and uses up a lot of time and energy. This is especially true if the team needs to figure out what to do each and every time people disagree.
    • Teams that take the time to define conflict resolution processes upfront:
      • Demonstrate their commitment to resolving conflict in a healthy way.
      • Signal that diverse perspectives and opinions are valued, even if they spur disagreement sometimes.
      • Are ready for conflict when it arises – prepared to face it and thrive.

    Successfully communicating information, emotions, and motivations is not the same as managing conflict.

    Teams that are communicating well are more likely to uncover conflicting perspectives and opinions than teams that are not.

    Conflict is healthy and can be an important element of team success if it is managed.

    The team should have processes in place to resolve conflicts and move to united action.

    Assess the atmosphere

    Team psychological safety

    A team atmosphere that exists when all members feel confident that team members can do the following without suffering negative interpersonal consequences such as blame, shame, or exclusion:

    • Admit mistakes
    • Raise questions or concerns
    • Express dissenting views

    (Administrative Science Quarterly, 1999;
    The New York Times, 2016)

    What psychologically safe teams look like:

    • Open and learning-focused approach to error.
    • Effective conflict management within the team.
    • Emotional and relational awareness between team members.
    • Existence of work-appropriate interpersonal relationships between team members (i.e. beyond mere working relationships).

    (Administrative Science Quarterly, 1999;
    The New York Times, 2016)

    What "team psychological safety" is not:

    • A situation where all team members are friends.
      In some cases psychologically safe team atmospheres might be harder to create when team members are friends since they might be more reluctant to challenge or disagree with friends.
    • Merely trust. Being able to rely on people to honor their commitments is not the same as feeling comfortable admitting mistakes in front of them or disagreeing with them.

    "Psychological safety refers to an individual's perception of the consequences of taking an interpersonal risk or a belief that a team is safe for risk taking in the face of being seen as ignorant, incompetent, negative, or disruptive… They feel confident that no one on the team will embarrass or punish anyone else for admitting a mistake, asking a question, or offering a new idea."

    – re:Work

    Psychological safety

    The impact of psychological safety on team effectiveness

    Why does an atmosphere of team psychological safety matter?

    • Prevents groupthink.
      • People who do not feel safe to hold or express dissenting views gravitate to teams that think like they do, resulting in the well-known dangers of groupthink.
    • Encourages contribution and co-operation.
      • One study found that if team psychological safety is present, even people who tend to avoid teamwork will be more likely to contribute in team settings, thereby increasing the diversity of perspectives that can be drawn on (Journal of Organizational Culture, 2016).

    Creating psychological safety in a hybrid environment requires a deliberate approach to creating team connectedness.

    In the Info-Tech State of Hybrid Work in IT report autonomy and team connectedness present an interesting challenge in that higher levels of autonomy drove higher perceptions of lack of connectedness to the respondent's team. In a hybrid world, this means leaders need to be intentional in creating a safe team dynamic.

    47% of employees who experienced more control over their decisions related to where, when, and how they work than before the pandemic are feeling less connected to their teams.
    Source: Info-Tech, State of Hybrid Work in IT, 2022

    1.1 Prepare to launch the survey

    1-2 hours

    1. Review and record the objectives and outcomes that support your vision of a high-performing team:
      1. Why is this important to you?
      2. What reactions do you anticipate from the team?
    2. In your team meeting, share your vision of what a high-performing team looks like. Engage the team in a discussion:
      1. Ask how they work. Ask them to describe their best working team environment from a previous experience or an aspirational one.
      2. Option: Instruct them to write on sticky notes, one idea per note, and share. This approach will allow for theming of ideas.
    3. Introduce the survey as a way, together as a team, the current state can be assessed against the desired state discussed.
      1. Be clear that as the leader, you won't be completing the survey as you don't want to influence their perceptions of the team. As the leader, you hold authority, and therefore, experience the team differently. This is about them and their feedback.

    Input

    • Observations of team behavior
    • Clearly articulated goals for team cohesion

    Output

    • Speaking notes for introducing survey
    • Survey launch

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes
    • IDEA Assessment

    Participants

    • Leader
    • Team Members

    Download the IT Team Effectiveness Survey

    1.2 Launch the survey

    1-2 hours

    1. Determine how the survey will be completed.
      1. Paper-based
        1. Email a copy of the Word document IT Team Effectiveness Survey for each person to complete individually.
        2. Identify one person to collect each survey and enter the results into the team effectiveness survey tool (tab 2. Data – Effectiveness Answers and tab 3. Data – Team Type Answers). This must be someone outside the team.
      2. Online direct input into Team Effectiveness Survey Tool
        1. Post the document in a shared folder.
        2. Instruct individuals to select one of the numbered columns and enter their information into tab 2. Data – Effectiveness Answers and tab 3. Data – Team Type Answers.
        3. To protect anonymity and keep results confidential, suggest each person opens document in "Cognito mode."
        4. Hide the Summary and Results tabs to avoid team members previewing them.

    Download the IT Team Effectiveness Survey Results Tool

    Paper-Based Cautions & Considerations

    • Heavily dependent on a trusted third party for genuine results
    • Can be time consuming to enter the results

    Online Direct Cautions & Considerations

    • Ensure that users keep to the same numbered column across both entry tabs
    • Seeing other team members' responses may influence others
    • Least amount of administration

    Phase 2

    Review Results and Action Plan

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Identify team members
    and behaviors to improve using IDEA Model
    1.2 Determine messaging including follow-up plan
    1.3 Send survey

    1.1 Review results with team
    1.2 Determine IDEA focus area(s)
    1.3 Conduct activity to determine solutions

    1.1 Document outcomes and actions
    1.2 Create team charter
    1.3 Identify metrics to show success
    1.4 Schedule check-in

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analyzing and debriefing the results to determine themes and patterns to come to a team consensus on what to focus on.
    • Facilitated activities to drive awareness, build co-created definitions of what an effective team looks like, and identify solutions the team can undertake to be more effective.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Leader of the team
    • All team members

    Deliverables:

    • A presentation that communicates the team assessment results
    • A plan for effectively delivering the assessment results

    Phase 2: Build a plan to review results and create an action plan

    Reviewing assessment results and creating an improvement action plan is best accomplished through a team meeting.

    Analyzing and preparing for the team meeting may be done by:

    • The person charged with team effectiveness (i.e. team coach).
    • For teams that are seriously struggling with team effectiveness, the coach should complete this step in its entirety.
    • The team coach and the team lead.
    • Truly effective teams are self-reliant. Begin upskilling team leads by involving team leads from the start.
    1. Analyze team assessment results
    2. Prepare to communicate results to the team
    3. Select team activities that will guide the identification of action items and next steps
    4. Facilitate the team meeting

    2.1 Analyze results

    Health Dials

    1. Once the results are final, review the Health Dials for each of the areas.
      1. For each area of the team's effectiveness
        • Red indicates a threat – this will derail the team and you will require an external person to help facilitate conversations.
          It would be recommended to contact us for additional guidance if this is one of your results.
        • Yellow is a growth opportunity.
        • Green is a strength and pay attention to where the dial is – deep into strength or just past the line?
      2. Think about these questions and record your initial reactions.
        1. What surprises you – either positively or negatively?
        2. What areas are as expected?
        3. What behaviors are demonstrated that support the results?

    Prioritize one to two factors for improvement by selecting those with:

    • The lowest overall score.
    • The highest variance in responses.
    • If psychological safety is low, be sure to prioritize this factor; it is the foundation of any effective team.

    An image of the Health dials for each area.

    2.2 Analyze results

    Alignment of Responses

    1. The alignment of responses area provides you with an overview of the range of responses from the team for each area.
      • The more variety in the bars indicates how differently each person is experiencing the team.
      • The more aligned the bars are the more shared the experiences.

    The flatter the bars are across the top, the more agreement there was. Factors that show significant differences in opinion should be discussed to diagnose what is causing the misalignment within your team.

    1. Recommendation is to look at high scores and the alignment and lower scores and the alignment to determine where you may want to focus.

    The alignment chart below shows varied responses; however, there are two distinct patterns. This will be an important area to review.
    Things to think about:

    • Are there new team members?
    • Has there been a leadership change?
    • Has there been a change that has impacted the team?
    An image showing the alignment of responses for Identity, Decisions; Exchange; and Atmosphere.

    2.3 Analyze results

    Team Characteristics and Stakes

    1. Team Characteristics. Use the Team Type Results tab in the IT Team Effectiveness Assessment Tool to identify how the team characterizes itself along the High-Low Scale. The closer the dark blue bar is to the right or left suggests to which degree the team views the characteristic.
      1. Interdependence highlights the team's view on how interconnected and dependent they are on each other to get work done. Think of examples where they should be sharing or collaborating, and they are not.
      2. Virtual describes the physicality of the team. This area has changed a lot since 2020; however, it's still important to note if the team shares the same understanding of work location. Are they thinking of team members in a different geography or referring to hybrid work?
      3. Decision making describes the scale of one decision maker or many. Where are most decisions made by on your team or who is making them?
      4. Stability refers to the degree to which the team stays the same – no membership change or turnover. It can be defined by length of time the group has been together. Looking at this will help understand alignment results. If alignment is varied, one might expect a less stable team.
    2. Stakes and Pressure
      1. Pressure refers to the conditions in which the team must work. How urgent are requests?
      2. Stakes refers to the degree of impact the work has. Will outputs impact safety, health, or a service?
      3. This category can be reviewed against decision making – high pressure, high stakes environments usually have a high concentration of authority. Low pressure, low stakes decisions can also be made either by one person as there is relatively no impact or with many as you have time to get many perspectives.
      4. This area informs what your decision-making protocols should look like.

    A bar graph for Team Characteristics, and a quadrant analysis for comparing Stakes and Pressure.

    2.4 Prepare for meeting

    1-2 hours

    1. Select a facilitator
      • The right person to facilitate the meeting and present the results is dependent upon the results themselves, the team lead's comfort level, and the root and degree of team dysfunction.
      • Typically, the team lead will facilitate and present the results. However, it will be more appropriate to have a member of the HR team or an external third party facilitate.
    2. Set the agenda (recommended sample to the right) that ensures:
      • Team members reflect on the results and discuss reaction to the results. (E.g. Are they surprised? Why/why not?)
      • Results are clearly understood and accepted by team members before moving on to activities.
      • The aim of the meeting is kept in mind. The purpose of the team meeting is to involve all team members in the creation of an effectiveness improvement plan.
    3. Customize the Facilitation Guide and activities in the Improve IT Team Effectiveness Facilitation Guide. (Activities are aligned with the four factors in the IDEA model.)
      • Identify a clear objective for each activity given the team assessment results. (E.g. What are the areas of improvement? What is the desired outcome of the activity?)
      • Review and select the activities that will best achieve the objectives.
      • Customize and prepare for chosen activities appropriately.
      • Obtain all necessary materials.
      • Practice by anticipating and preparing for questions, objectives, and what you will say and do.

    Facilitation Factors
    Select a third-party facilitator if:

    • The team lead is uncomfortable.
    • The leadership or organization is implicated in the team's dysfunction, a third party can be sought in place of HR.
    • Regardless of who facilitates, it is critical that the team lead understands the process and results and is comfortable answering any questions that arise.

    Agenda

    • Review the IDEA Model.
    • Discuss the assessment results.
    • Invite team members to reflect on the results and discuss reaction to the results.
    • Ensure results are clearly understood and accepted.
    • Examine team challenges and strengths through selected team activities.
    • Create a team charter and effectiveness improvement plan.

    Materials

    • IT Team Effectiveness Activities Facilitation Guide
    • IT Team Effectiveness Survey results

    Participants

    • Leader

    2.5 Run the meeting

    2-3 hours

    Facilitate the team meeting and agree on the team effectiveness improvement plan.

    Work with the team to brainstorm and agree on an action plan of continuous improvements.

    By creating an action plan together with the team, there is greater buy-in and commitment to the activities identified within the action plan.

    Don't forget to include timelines and task owners in the action plan – it isn't complete without them.

    Document final decisions in Info-Tech's Improve IT Team Effectiveness Action Plan Tool.

    Review activity Develop Team Charter in the Improve IT Team Effectiveness Facilitation Guide and conclude the team meeting by creating a team charter. With a team charter, teams can better understand:

    • Team objectives
    • Team membership and roles
    • Team ground rules

    Facilitation Factors

    Encourage and support participation from everyone.

    Be sure no one on the team dismisses anyone's thoughts or opinions – they present the opportunity for further discussion and deeper insight.

    Watch out for anything said or done during the activities that should be discussed in the activity debrief.

    Debrief after each activity, outlining any lessons learned, action items, and next steps.

    Agenda

    • Review the IDEA Model.
    • Discuss the assessment results.
    • Invite team members to reflect on the results and discuss reaction to the results.
    • Ensure results are clearly understood and accepted.
    • Examine team challenges and strengths through selected team activities.
    • Create a team charter and effectiveness improvement plan.

    Materials

    • IT Team Effectiveness Activities Facilitation Guide
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes
    • IT Team Effectiveness Survey results

    Participants

    • Leader
    • Team Members
    • Optional – External Facilitator

    Phase 3

    Document and measure

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Identify team members
    and behaviors to improve using IDEA Model
    1.2 Determine messaging including follow-up plan
    1.3 Send survey

    1.1 Review results with team
    1.2 Determine IDEA focus area(s)
    1.3 Conduct activity to determine solutions

    1.1 Document outcomes and actions
    1.2 Create team charter
    1.3 Identify metrics to show success
    1.4 Schedule check-in

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:
    Building your team charter that will include:

    • Team vision, mission, and goals
    • Roles and responsibilities of each member
    • Decision-making responsibilities and process
    • How information will be shared and by whom
    • Ways to build psychological safety on the team

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Leader of the team
    • All team members

    Document and agree to regular check-ins to reassess.

    As a team it will be important to drive your brainstormed solutions into an output that is co-created.

    • Agree to what actions can be implemented.
    • Capture agreed-to team goals, roles, responsibilities, and decision process into a team charter. Also include your communication protocol that articulates how information will be shared in future.
    1. Review suggestions and actions
    2. Capture in team charter
    3. Assign metrics to measure success and determine when to review
    4. Complete ongoing check-ins with team through team meeting and plan to reassess if agreed to

    Team Charter

    Never assume everyone "just knows."

    Set clear expectations for the team's interactions and behaviors.

    • Some teams call this a team agreement, team protocol, or ways of working. Determine the naming convention that works best for your team and culture.
    • This type of document saw a renewed popularity during COVID-19 as face-to-face interactions were more difficult, and as teams, news ways to work needed to be discovered, shared, and documented.
    • A co-created team charter is a critical component to onboarding new employees in the hybrid world.

    Info-Tech Insight – State of Hybrid Work in IT

    One contributor to the report shared the effort and intention around maintaining their culture during the pandemic. The team agreement created became a critical tool to enable conversations between leaders and their team – it was not a policy document.

    Team effectiveness is driven through thoughtful planned conversations. And it's a continued conversation.

    A screenshot of the IT Team Charter Template page

    Download the IT Team Charter Template

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    Identify the impact that improved team effectiveness will have on the organization.
    Determine your baseline metrics to assess the success of your team interventions and demonstrate the impact to the rest of the organization using pre-determined goals and metrics.
    Share success stories through:

    • Newsletters or email announcements
    • Team meetings
    • Presentations to business partners or the organization

    Sample effectiveness improvement goal

    Sample Metric

    Increase employee engagement
    Increase overall employee engagement scores in the Employee Engagement survey by 5% by December 31, 2023.

    • Overall employee engagement

    Strengthen manager/employee relationships
    Increase manager driver scores in the Employee Engagement survey by 5% by December 31, 2023.

    • Employee engagement – manager driver
    • Employee engagement – senior leadership driver

    Reduce employee turnover (i.e. increase retention)
    Reduce voluntary turnover by 5% by December 31, 2023.

    • Voluntary turnover rate
    • Turnover by department or manager
    • Cost of turnover

    Increase organizational productivity
    Increase the value added by human capital by 5% by December 31, 2023.

    • Value added by human capital
    • Employee productivity
    • Human capital return on investment
    • Employee engagement

    Reassess team effectiveness

    Reassess and identify trends after they have worked on key focus areas for improvement.

    Track the team's progress by reassessing their effectiveness six to twelve months after the initial assessment.
    Identify if:

    • Team characteristics have changed.
    • Areas of team strengths are still a source of strength.
    • Areas for improvement have, in fact, improved.
    • There are opportunities for further improvement.

    As the team matures, priorities and areas of concern may shift; it is important to regularly reassess team effectiveness to ensure ongoing alignment and suitability.
    Note: It is not always necessary to conduct a full formal assessment; once teams become more effective and self-sufficient, informal check-ins by team leads will be sufficient.

    If you assess team effectiveness for multiple teams, you have the opportunity to identify trends:

    • Are there common challenges within teams?
    • If so, what are they?
    • How comfortable are teams with intervention?
    • How often is outside help required?

    Identifying these trends, initiatives, training, or tactics may be used to improve team effectiveness across the department – or even the organization.

    Teams are ultimately accountable for their own effectiveness.

    As teams mature, the team lead should become less involved in action planning. However, enabling truly effective teams takes significant time and resources from the team lead.

    Use the action plan created and agreed upon during the team meeting to hold teams accountable:

    • Ensure teams follow through on action items.
    • Ensure you are continuously assessing team effectiveness (formally or informally).

    The team coach should have a plan to transition into a supportive role by:

    • Providing teams with the knowledge, resources, and tools required to improve and sustain high effectiveness.
    • Providing team members and leads with a safe, open, and honest environment.
    • Stepping in as an objective third party when required.

    If the team continues to face barriers

    Other important information: If team effectiveness has not significantly improved, other interventions may be required that are beyond the scope of this project.

    The four factors outlined in the IDEA Model of team effectiveness are very important, but they are not the only things that have a positive or negative impact on teams. If attempts to improve the four factors have not resulted in the desired level of team effectiveness, evaluate other barriers:

    For organizational culture, ask if performance and reward programs do the following:

    • Value teamwork alongside individual achievement and competition
    • Provide incentives that promote a focus on individual performance over team performance
    • Reward or promote those who sabotage their teams

    For learning and development, ask:

    • Is team effectiveness included in our manager or leadership training?
    • Do we offer resources to employees seeking to improve their teamwork competencies?

    If an individual team member's or leader's performance is not meeting expectations, potential remedies include a performance improvement plan, reassignment, and termination of employment.

    These kinds of interventions are beyond the control of the team itself. In these cases, we recommend you consult with your HR department; HR professionals can be important advocates because they possess the knowledge, influence, and authority in the company to promote changes that support teamwork.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Redesign Your IT Department

    • You could have the best IT employees in the world, but if they aren't structured well your organization will still fail in reaching its vision.
    • Increase the effectiveness of IT as a function.
    • Provide employees with clarity in their roles and responsibilities.

    Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    • With the growing IT job market, turnover is a serious threat to IT's ability to deliver seamless value and continuously drive innovation.
    • Engagement initiatives are often seen as being HR's responsibility; however, IT leadership needs to take accountability for the retention and productivity of their employees in order to drive business value.

    Info-Tech Leadership Programs

    • Development of the leadership mind should never stop. This program will help IT leaders continue to craft their leadership competencies to navigate the ever-changing world in which we operate.
    • Actively delegate responsibilities and opportunities that engage and develop team members to build on current skills and prepare for the future.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    A picture of Carlene McCubbin

    Carlene McCubbin
    Practice Lead
    Info-Tech Research Group

    A picture of Nick Kozlo

    Nick Kozlo
    Senior Research Analyst
    Info-Tech Research Group

    A picture of Heather Leier-Murray

    Heather Leier-Murray
    Senior Research Analyst
    Info-Tech Research Group

    A picture of Stephen O'Conner

    Stephen O'Conner
    Executive Counselor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    A picture of Jane Kouptsova

    Jane Kouptsova
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Dr. Julie D. Judd, Ed.D.
    Chief Technology Officer
    Ventura County Office of Education

    Works Cited

    Aminov, I., A. DeSmet, and G. Jost. "Decision making in the age of urgency." McKinsey. April 2019. Accessed January 2023.
    Duhigg, Charles. "What Google Learned From Its Quest to Build the Perfect Team." The New York Times, 25 Feb. 2016. Accessed January 2023.
    Edmondson, Amy. "Psychological Safety and Learning Behavior in Work Teams." Administrative Science Quarterly, vol. 44, no. 2, June 1999, pp. 350-383.
    Gardner, Kate. "Julie Judd – Ventura County Office of Education." Toggle, 12 Sept. 2022. Accessed January 2023.
    Google People Operations. "Guide: Understand Team Effectiveness." reWork, n.d. Accessed February 2023.
    Harkins, Phil. "10 Leadership Techniques for Building High-Performing Teams." Linkage Inc., 2014. Accessed 10 April 2017.
    Heath, C. and D. Heath. Decision: How to make better choices in life and work. Random House, 2013, ISBN 9780307361141.
    Hill, Jon. "What is an Information Silo and How Can You Avoid It." Bloomfire, 23 March 2022. Accessed January 2023.
    "IT Team Management Software for Enhanced Productivity." Freshworks, n.d. Accessed January 2023.
    Jackson, Brian. "2022 Tech Trends." Info-Tech Research Group, 2022. Accessed December 2022.
    Kahneman, Daniel. Thinking fast and slow. Farrar, Straus and Giroux. 2011.
    Kouptsova, J., and A. Mathieson. "State of Hybrid Work in IT." Info-Tech Research Group, 2023. Accessed January 2023.
    Mayfield, Clifton, et al. "Psychological Collectivism and Team Effectiveness: Moderating Effects of Trust and Psychological Safety." Journal of Organizational Culture, Communications and Conflict, vol. 20, no. 1, Jan. 2016, pp. 78-94.
    Rock, David. "SCARF: A Brain-Based Model for Collaborating With and Influencing Others." NeuroLeadership Journal, 2008. Web.
    "The State of High Performing Teams in Tech Hypercontext." Hypercontext. 2022. Accessed November 2022.
    Weick, Carl, and Kathleen Sutcliff. Managing the unexpected. John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
    "Workplace Conflict Statistics: How we approach conflict at work." The Niagara Institute, August 2022. Accessed December 2022.

    Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}365|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management

    Organizations can struggle to understand what service-level agreements (SLAs) are required and how they can differ depending on the service type. In addition, these other challenges can also cloud an organization’s knowledge of SLAs:

    • No standardized SLAs documents, service levels, or metrics
    • Dealing with lost productivity and revenue due to persistent downtime
    • Not understanding SLAs components and what service levels are required for a particular service
    • How to manage the SLA and hold the vendor accountable

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    SLAs need to have clear, easy-to-measure objectives, to meet expectations and service level requirements, including meaningful reporting and remedies to hold the provider accountable to its obligations.

    Impact and Result

    This project will provide several benefits and learnings for almost all IT workers:

    • Better understanding of an SLA framework and required SLA elements
    • Standardized service levels and metrics aligned to the organization’s requirements
    • Reduced time in reviewing, evaluating, and managing service provider SLAs

    Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements Research & Tools

    Start here – Read our Executive Brief

    Understand how to resolve your challenges with SLAs and their components and ensuring adequate metrics. Learn how to create meaningful SLAs that meet your requirements and manage them effectively.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand SLA elements – Understand the elements of SLAs, service types, service levels, metrics/KPIs, monitoring, and reporting

    • SLA Checklist
    • SLA Evaluation Tool

    2. Create requirements – Create your own SLA criteria and templates that meet your organization’s requirements

    • SLA Template & Metrics Reference Guide

    3. Manage obligations – Learn the SLA Management Framework to track providers’ performance and adherence to their commitments.

    • SLO Tracker & Trending Tool

    Infographic

    Workshop: Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand the Elements of SLAs

    The Purpose

    Understand key components and elements of an SLA.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Properly evaluate an SLA for required elements.

    Activities

    1.1 SLA overview, objectives, SLA types, service levels

    1.2 SLA elements and objectives

    1.3 SLA components: monitoring, reporting, and remedies

    1.4 SLA checklist review

    Outputs

    SLA Checklist 

    Evaluation Process

    SLA Checklist

    Evaluation Process

    SLA Checklist

    Evaluation Process

    SLA Checklist

    Evaluation Process

    2 Create SLA Criteria and Management Framework

    The Purpose

    Apply knowledge of SLA elements to create internal SLA requirements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Templated SLAs that meet requirements.

    Framework to manage SLOs.

    Activities

    2.1 Creating SLA criteria and requirements

    2.2 SLA templates and policy

    2.3 SLA evaluation activity

    2.4 SLA Management Framework

    2.5 SLA monitoring, tracking, and remedy reconciliation

    Outputs

    Internal SLA Management Framework

    Evaluation of current SLAs

    SLA tracking and trending

    Internal SLA Management Framework

    Evaluation of current SLAs

    SLA tracking and trending

    Internal SLA Management Framework

    Evaluation of current SLAs

    SLA tracking and trending

    Internal SLA Management Framework

    Evaluation of current SLAs

    SLA tracking and trending

    Internal SLA Management Framework

    Evaluation of current SLAs

    SLA tracking and trending

    Further reading

    Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

    Hold Service Providers more accountable to their contractual obligations with meaningful SLA components & remedies

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

    Every year organizations outsource more and more IT infrastructure to the cloud, and IT operations to managed service providers. This increase in outsourcing presents an increase in risk to the CIO to save on IT spend through outsourcing while maintaining required and expected service levels to internal customers and the organization. Ensuring that the service provider constantly meets their obligations so that the CIO can meet their obligation to the organization can be a constant challenge. This brings forth the importance of the Service Level Agreement.

    Research clearly indicates that there is a general lack of knowledge when comes to understanding the key elements of a Service Level Agreement (SLA). Even less understanding of the importance of the components of Service Levels and the Service Level Objectives (SLO) that service provider needs to meet so that the outsourced service consistently meets requirements of the organization. Most service providers are very good at providing the contracted service and they all are very good at presenting SLOs that are easy to meet with very few or no ramifications if they don’t meet their objectives. IT leaders need to be more resolute in only accepting SLOs that are meaningful to their requirements and have meaningful, proactive reporting and associated remedies to hold service providers accountable to their obligations.

    Ted Walker

    Principal Research Director, Vendor Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Brief

    Vendors provide service level commitments to customers in contracts to show a level of trust, performance, availability, security, and responsiveness in an effort create a sense of confidence that their service or platform will meet your organization’s requirements and expectations. Sifting through these promises can be challenging for many IT Leaders. Customers struggle to understand and evaluate what’s in the SLA – are they meaningful and protect your investment? Not understanding the details of SLAs applicable to various types of Service (SaaS, MSP, Service Desk, DR, ISP) can lead to financial and compliance risk for the organization as well as poor customer satisfaction.

    This project will provide IT leadership the knowledge & tools that will allow them to:

    • Understand what SLAs are and why they need them.
    • Develop standard SLAs that meet the organization’s requirements.
    • Negotiate meaningful remedies aligned to Service Levels metrics or KPIs.
    • Create SLA monitoring & reporting and remedies requirements to hold the provider accountable.

    This research:

    1. Is designed for:
    • The CIO or CFO who needs to better understand their provider’s SLAs.
    • The CIO or BU that could benefit from improved service levels.
    • Vendor management who needs to standardize SLAs for the organization IT leadership that needs consistent service levels to the business
    • The contract manager who needs a better understanding of contact SLAs
  • Will help you:
    • Understand what a Service Level Agreement is and what it’s for
    • Learn what the components are of an SLA and why you need them
    • Create a checklist of required SLA elements for your organization
    • Develop standard SLA template requirements for various service types
    • Learn the importance of SLA management to hold providers accountable
  • Will also assist:
    • Vendor management
    • Procurement and sourcing
    • Organizations that need to understand SLAs within contract language
    • With creating standardized monitoring & reporting requirements
    • Organizations get better position remedies & credits to hold vendors accountable to their commitments
  • Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements (SLAs)

    Hold service providers more accountable to their contractual obligations with meaningful SLA components and remedies

    The Problem

    IT Leadership doesn't know how to evaluate an SLA.

    Misunderstanding of obligations given the type of service provided (SAAS, IAAS, DR/BCP, Service Desk)

    Expectations not being met, leading to poor service from the provider.

    No way to hold provider accountable.

    Why it matters

    SLAS are designed to ensure that outsourced IT services meet the requirements and expectations of the organization. Well-written SLAs with all the required elements, metrics, and remedies will allow IT departments to provide the service levels to their customer and avoid financial and contractual risk to the organization.

    The Solution

    1. Understand the key service elements within an SLA
    • Develop a solid understanding of the key elements within an SLA and why they're important.
  • Establish requirements to create SLA criteria
    • Prioritize contractual services and establish concise SLA checklists and performance metrics.
  • Manage SLA obligations to ensure commitments are met
    • Review the five steps for effective SLA management to track provider performance and deal with chronic issues.
  • Service types

    • Availability/Uptime
    • Response Times
    • Resolution Time
    • Accuracy
    • First-Call Resolution

    Agreement Types

    • SaaS/IaaS
    • Service Desk
    • MSP
    • Co-Location
    • DR/BCP
    • Security Ops

    Performance Metrics

    • Reporting
    • Remedies & Credits
    • Monitoring
    • Exclusion

    Example SaaS Provider

    • Response Times ✓
    • Availability/Uptime ✓
    • Resolution Time ✓
    • Update Times ✓
    • Coverage Time ✓
    • Monitoring ✓
    • Reporting ✓
    • Remedies/Credits ✓

    SLA Management Framework

    1. SLO Monitoring
    • SLOs must be monitored by the provider, otherwise they can't be measured.
  • Concise Reporting
    • This is the key element for the provider to validate their performance.
  • Attainment Tracking
    • Capturing SLO metric attainment provides performance trending for each provider.
  • Score carding
    • Tracking details provide input into overall vendor performance ratings.
  • Remedy Reconciliation
    • From SLO tracking, missed SLOs and associated credits needs to be actioned and consumed.
  • Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    To understand which SLAs are required for your organization and how they can differ depending on the service type. In addition, these other challenges can also cloud your knowledge of SLAs

    • No standardized SLA documents, Service levels, or metrics
    • Dealing with lost productivity & revenue due to persistent downtime
    • Understanding SLA components and what service levels are requires for a particular service
    • How to manage the SLA and hold the vendor accountable

    Common Obstacles

    There are several unknowns that SLA can present to different departments within the organization:

    • Little knowledge of what service levels are required
    • Not knowing SLO standards for a service type
    • Lack of resources to manage vendor obligations
    • Negotiating required metrics/KPIs with the provider
    • Low understanding of the risk that poor SLAs can present to the organization

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Info-Tech has a three-step approach to effective SLAs

    • Understand the elements of an SLA
    • Create Requirements for your organization
    • Manage the SLA obligations

    There are some basic components that every SLA should have – most don’t have half of what is required

    Info-Tech Insight

    SLAs need to have clear, easy to measure objectives to meet your expectations and service level requirements, including meaningful reporting and remedies to hold the provider accountable to their obligations.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations gain a better understanding of what an SLA is, understand the importance of SLAs in IT contracts, and ensure organizations are provided with rock-solid SLAs that meet their requirements and not just what the vendor wants to provide.

    • Vendors can make SLAs weak and difficult to understand; sometimes the metrics are meaningless. Not fully understanding what makes up a good SLA can bring unknown risks to the organization.
    • Managing vendor SLA obligations effectively is important. Are adequate resources available? Does the vendor provide manual vs. automated processes and which do you need? Is the process proactive from the vendor or reactive from the customer?

    SLAs come in many variations and for many service types. Understanding what needs to be in them is one of the keys to reducing risk to your organization.

    “One of the biggest mistakes an IT leader can make is ignoring the ‘A’ in SLA,” adds Wendy M. Pfeiffer, CIO at Nutanix. “

    An agreement isn’t a one-sided declaration of IT capabilities, nor is it a one-sided demand of business requirements,” she says. “An agreement involves creating a shared understanding of desired service delivery and quality, calculating costs related to expectations, and then agreeing to outcomes in exchange for investment.” (15 SLA mistakes IT leaders still make | CIO)

    Common obstacles

    There are typically a lot of unknowns when it comes to SLAs and how to manage them.

    Most organizations don’t have a full understanding of what SLAs they require and how to ensure they are met by the vendor. Other obstacles that SLAs can present are:

    • Inadequate resources to create and manage SLAs
    • Poor awareness of standard or required SLA metrics/KPIs
    • Lack of knowledge about each provider’s commitment as well as your obligations
    • Low vendor willingness to provide or negotiate meaningful SLAs and credits
    • The know-how or resources to effectively monitor and manage the SLA’s performance

    SLAs need to address your requirements

    55% of businesses do not find all of their service desk metrics useful or valuable (Freshservice.com)

    27% of businesses spend four to seven hours a month collating metric reports (Freshservice.com)

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Understand the elements of an SLA
      • Availability
      • Monitoring
      • Response Times
      • SLO Calculation
      • Resolution Time
      • Reporting
      • Milestones
      • Exclusions
      • Accuracy
      • Remedies & Credits
    • Create standard SLA requirements and criteria
      • SLA Element Checklist
      • Corporate Requirements and Standards
      • SLA Templates and Policy
    • Effectively Manage the SLA Obligations
      • SLA Management Framework
        • SLO Monitoring
        • Concise Reporting
        • Attainment Tracking
        • Score Carding
        • Remedy Reconciliation

    Info-Tech’s three phase approach

    Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

    Phase 1

    Understand SLA Elements

    Phase Content:

    • 1.1 What are SLAs, types of SLAs, and why are they needed?
    • 1.2 Elements of an SLA
    • 1.3 Obligation management monitoring, Reporting requirements
    • 1.4 Exclusions
    • 1.5 SLAs vs. SLOs vs. SLIs

    Outcome:

    This phase will present you with an understanding of the elements of an SLA: What they are, why you need them, and how to validate them.

    Phase 2

    Create Requirements

    Phase Content:

    • 2.1 Create a list of your SLA criteria
    • 2.2 Develop SLA policy & templates
    • 2.3 Create a negotiation strategy
    • 2.4 SLA Overachieving discussion

    Outcome:

    This phase will leverage knowledge gained in Phase 1 and guide you through the creation of SLA requirements, criteria, and templates to ensure that providers meet the service level obligations needed for various service types to meet your organization’s service expectations.

    Phase 3

    Manage Obligations

    Phase Content:

    • 3.1 SLA Monitoring, Tracking
    • 3.2 Reporting
    • 3.3 Vendor SLA Reviews & Optimizing
    • 3.4 Performance management

    Outcome:

    This phase will provide you with an SLA management framework and the best practices that will allow you to effectively manage service providers and their SLA obligations.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    SLAs need to have clear, easy-to-measure objectives to meet your expectations and service level requirements, including meaningful reporting and remedies to hold the provider accountable to their obligations.

    Phase 1 insight

    Not understanding the required elements of an SLA and not having meaningful remedies to hold service providers accountable to their obligations can present several risk factors to your organization.

    Phase 2 insight

    Creating standard SLA criteria for your organization’s service providers will ensure consistent service levels for your business units and customers.

    Phase 3 insight

    SLAs can have appropriate SLOs and remedies but without effective management processes they could become meaningless.

    Tactical insight

    Be sure to set SLAs that are easily measurable from regularly accessible data and that are straight forward to interpret.

    Tactical insight

    Beware of low, easy to attain service levels and metrics/KPIs. Service levels need to meet your expectations and needs not the vendor’s.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    SLA Tracker & Trending Tool

    Track the provider’s SLO attainment and see how their performance is trending over time

    SLA Evaluation Tool

    Evaluate SLA service levels, metrics, credit values, reporting, and other elements

    SLA Template & Metrics Reference Guide

    Reference guide for typical SLA metrics with a generic SLA Template

    Service-Level Agreement Checklist

    Complete SLA component checklist for core SLA and contractual elements.

    Key deliverable:

    Service-Level Agreement Evaluation Tool

    Evaluate each component of the SLA , including service levels, metrics, credit values, reporting, and processes to meet your requirements

    Blueprint objectives

    Understand the components of an SLA and effectively manage their obligations

    • To provide an understanding of different types of SLAs, their required elements, and what they mean to your organization. How to identify meaningful service levels based on service types. We will break down the elements of the SLA such as service types and define service levels such as response times, availability, accuracy, and associated metrics or KPIs to ensure they are concise and easy to measure.
    • To show how important it is that all metrics have remedies to hold the service provider accountable to their SLA obligations.

    Once you have this knowledge you will be able to create and negotiate SLA requirements to meet your organization’s needs and then manage them effectively throughout the term of the agreement.

    InfoTech Insight:

    Right-size your requirements and create your SLO criteria based on risk mitigation and create measurements that motivate the desired behavior from the SLA.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • An understanding of standard SLA service levels and metrics
    • Reduced financial risk through clear and concise easy-to-measure metrics and KPIs
    • Improved SLA commitments from the service provider
    • Meaningful reporting and remedies to hold the provider accountable
    • Service levels and metrics that meet your requirements to support your customers

    Business Benefits

    • Better understanding of an SLA framework and required SLA elements
    • Improved vendor performance
    • Standardized service levels and metrics aligned to your organization’s requirements
    • Reduced time in reviewing and comprehending vendor SLAs
    • Consistent performance from your service providers

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    1. Dollars Saved
    • Improved performance from your service provider
    • Reduced financial risk through meaningful service levels & remedies
    • Dollars gained through:
      • Reconciled credits from obligation tracking and management
      • Savings due to automated processes
  • Time Saved
    • Reduced time in creating effective SLAs through requirement templates
    • Time spent tracking and managing SLA obligations
    • Reduced negotiation time
    • Time spent tracking and reconciling credits
  • Knowledge Gained
    • Understanding of SLA elements, service levels, service types, reporting, and remedies
    • Standard metrics and KPIs required for various service types and levels
    • How to effectively manage the service provider obligations
    • Tactics to negotiate appropriate service levels to meet your requirements
  • Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way wound help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between three to six calls over the course of two to three months.

    Phase 1 - Understand

    • Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific SLA challenges

    Phase 2 - Create Requirements

    • Call #2: Review key SLA and how to identify them
    • Call #3: Deep dive into SLA elements and why you need them
    • Call #4: Review your service types and SLA criteria
    • Call #5: Create internal SLA requirements and templates

    Phase 3 - Management

    • Call #6: Review SLA Management Framework
    • Call #7: Review and create SLA Reporting and Tracking

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2
    Understanding SLAs SLA Templating & Management
    Activities

    1.1 SLA overview, objectives, SLA types, service levels

    1.2 SLA elements and objectives

    1.3 SLA components – monitoring, reporting, remedies

    1.4 SLA Checklist review

    2.1 Creating SLA criteria and requirements

    2.2 SLA policy & template

    2.3 SLA evaluation activity

    2.4 SLA management framework

    2.5 SLA monitoring, tracking, remedy reconciliation

    Deliverables
    1. SLA Checklist
    2. SLA policy & template creation
    3. SLA management gap analysis
    1. Evaluation of current SLAs
    2. SLA tracking and trending
    3. Create internal SLA management framework

    Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

    Phase 1

    Phase 1

    Understand SLA Elements

    Phase Steps

    • 1.1 What are SLAs, the types of SLAs, and why are they needed?
    • 1.2 Elements of an SLA
    • 1.3 Obligation management monitoring, Reporting requirements
    • 1.4 Exclusions and exceptions
    • 1.5 SLAs vs. SLOs vs. SLIs

    Create Requirements

    Manage Obligations

    1.1 What are SLAs, the types of SLAs, and why are they needed?

    SLA Overview

    What is a Service Level Agreement?

    An SLA is an overarching contractual agreement between a service provider and a customer (can be external or internal) that describes the services that will be delivered by the provider. It describes the service levels and associated performance metrics and expectations, how the provider will show it has attained the SLAs, and defines any remedies or credits that would apply if the provider fails to meet its commitments. Some SLAs also include a change or revision process.

    SLAs come in a few forms. Some are unique, separate, standalone documents that define the service types and levels in more detail and is customized to your needs. Some are separate documents that apply to a service and are web posted or linked to an MSA or SSA. The most common is to have them embedded in, or as an appendix to an MSA or SSA. When negotiating an MSA it’s generally more effective to negotiate better service levels and metrics at the same time.

    Objectives of an SLA

    To be effective, SLAs need to have clearly described objectives that define the service type(s) that the service provider will perform, along with commitment to associated measurable metrics or KPIs that are sufficient to meet your expectations. The goal of these service levels and metrics is to ensure that the service provider is committed to providing the service that you require, and to allow you to maintain service levels to your customers whether internal or external.

    1.1 What are SLAs, the types of SLAs, and why are they needed?

    Key Elements of an SLA

    Principle service elements of an SLA

    There are several more common service-related elements of an SLA. These generally include:

    • The Agreement – the document that defines service levels and commitments.
    • The service types – the type of service being provided by the vendor. These can include SaaS, MSP, Service Desk, Telecom/network, PaaS, Co-Lo, BCP, etc.
    • The service levels – these are the measurable performance objectives of the SLA. They include availability (uptime), response times, restore times, priority level, accuracy level, resolution times, event prevention, completion time, etc.
    • Metrics/KPIs – These are the targets or commitments associated to the service level that the service provider is obligated to meet.
    • Other elements – Reporting requirements, monitoring, remedies/credit values and process.

    Contractual Construct Elements

    These are construct components of an SLA that outline their roles and responsibilities, T&Cs, escalation process, etc.

    In addition, there are several contractual-type elements including, but not limited to:

    • A statement regarding the purpose of the SLA.
    • A list of services being supplied (service types).
    • An in-depth description of how services will be provided and when.
    • Vendor and customer requirements.
    • Vendor and customer obligations.
    • Acknowledgment/acceptance of the SLA.
    • They also list each party’s responsibilities and how issues will be escalated and resolved.

    Common types of SLAs explained

    Service-level SLA

    • This service-level agreement construct is the Service-based SLA. This SLA covers an identified service for all customers in general (for example, if an IT service provider offers customer response times for a service to several customers). In a service-based agreement, the response times would be the same and apply to all customers using the service. Any customer using the service would be provided the same SLA – in this case the same defined response time.

    Customer-based SLA

    • A customer-based SLA is a unique agreement with one customer. The entire agreement is defined for one or all service levels provided to a particular customer (for example, you may use several services from one telecom vendor). The SLAs for these services would be covered in one contract between you and the vendor, creating a unique customer-based vendor agreement. Another scenario could be where a vendor offers general SLAs for its services but you negotiate a specific SLA for a particular service that is unique or exclusive to you. This would be a customer-based SLA as well.

    Multi-level SLA

    • This service-level agreement construct is the multi-level SLA. In a multi-level SLA, components are defined to the organizational levels of the customer with cascading coverage to sublevels of the organization. The SLA typically entails all services and is designed to the cover each sub-level or department within the organization. Sometimes the multi-level SLA is known as a master organization SLA as it cascades to several levels of the organization.

    InfoTech Insight: Beware of low, easy to attain Service levels and metrics/KPIs. Service levels need to meet your requirements, expectations, and needs not the vendor’s.

    1.2 Elements of SLA-objectives, service types, and service levels

    Objectives of Service Levels

    The objective of the service levels and service credits are to:

    • Ensure that the services are of a consistently high quality and meet the requirements of the customer
    • Provide a mechanism whereby the customer can attain meaningful recognition of the vendors failure to deliver the level of service for which it was contracted to deliver
    • Incentivize the vendor or service provider to comply with and to expeditiously provide a remedy for any failure to attain the service levels committed to in the SLA
    • To ensure that the service provider fulfills the defined objectives of the outsourced service

    Service types

    There are several service types that can be part of an SLA. Service types are the different nature of services associated with the SLA that the provider is performing and being measured against. These can include:

    Service Desk, SaaS, PaaS, IaaS, ISP/Telecom/Network MSP, DR & BCP, Co-location security ops, SOW.

    Each service type should have standard service level targets or obligations that can vary depending on your requirements and reliance on the service being provided.

    Service levels

    Service levels are measurable targets, metrics, or KPIs that the service provider has committed to for the particular service type. Service levels are the key element of SLAs – they are the performance expectations set between you and the provider. The service performance of the provider is measured against the service level commitments. The ability of the provider to consistently meet these metrics will allow your organization to fully benefit from the objectives of the service and associated SLAs. Most service levels are time related but not all are.

    Common service levels are:

    Response times, resolution times per percent, restore/recovery times, accuracy, availability/uptime, completion/milestones, updating/communication, latency.

    Each service level has standard or minimum metrics for the provider. The metrics, or KPIs, should be relatively easy to measure and report against on a regular basis. Service levels are generally negotiable to meet your requirements.

    1.2.1 Activity SLA Checklist Tool

    1-2 hours

    Input

    • SLA content, Service elements
    • Contract terms & exclusions
    • Service metrices/KPIs

    Output

    • A concise list of SLA components
    • A list of missing SLA elements
    • Evaluation of the SLA

    Materials

    • Comprehensive checklist
    • Service provider SLA
    • Internal templates or policies

    Participants

    • Vendor or contract manager
    • IT or business unit manager
    • Legal
    • Finance

    Using this checklist will help you review a provider’s SLA to ensure it contains adequate service levels and remedies as well as contract-type elements.

    Instructions:

    Use the checklist to identify the principal service level elements as well as the contractual-type elements within the SLA.

    Review the SLA and use the dropdowns in the checklist to verify if the element is in the SLA and whether it is within acceptable parameters as well the page or section for reference.

    The checklist contains a list of service types that can be used for reference of what SLA elements you should expect to see in that service type SLA.

    Download the SLA Checklist Tool

    1.3 Monitoring, reporting requirements, remedies/credit process

    Monitoring & Reporting

    As mentioned, well-defined service levels are key to the success of the SLA. Validating that the metrics/KPIs are being met on a consistent basis requires regular monitoring and reporting. These elements of the SLA are how you hold the provider accountable to the SLA commitments and obligations. To achieve the service level, the service must be monitored to validate that timelines are met and accuracy is achieved.

    • Data or details from monitoring must then be presented in a report and delivered to the customer in an agreed-upon format. These formats can be in a dashboard, portal, spreadsheet, or csv file, and they must have sufficient criteria to validate the service-level metric. Reports should be kept for future review and to create historical trending.
    • Monitoring and reporting should be the responsibility of the service provider. This is the only way that they can validate to the customer that a service level has been achieved.
    • Reporting criteria and delivery timelines should be defined in the SLA and can even have a service level associated with it, such as a scheduled report delivery on the fifth day of the following month.
    • Reports need to be checked and balanced. When defining report criteria, be sure to define data source(s) that can be easily validated by both parties.
    • Report criteria should include compliance requirements, target metric/KPIs, and whether they were attained.
    • The report should identify any attainment shortfall or missed KPIs.

    Too many SLAs do not have these elements as often the provider tries to put the onus on the customer to monitor their performance of the service levels. .

    1.3.1 Monitoring, reporting requirements, remedies/credit process

    Remedies and Credits

    Service-level reports validate the performance of the service provider to the SLA metrics or KPIs. If the metrics are met, then by rights, the service provider is doing its job and performing up to expectations of the SLA and your organization.

    • What if the metrics are not being met either periodically or consistently? Solving this is the goal of remedies. Remedies are typically monetary costs (in some form) to the provider that they must pay for not meeting a service-level commitment. Credits can vary significantly and should be aligned to the severity of the missed service level. Sometimes there no credits offered by the vendor. This is a red flag in an SLA.
    • Typically expressed as a monetary credit, the SLA will have service levels and associated credits if the service-level metric/KPI is not met during the reporting period. Credits can be expressed in a dollar format, often defined as a percentage of a monthly fee or prorated annual fee. Although less common, some SLAs offer non-financial credits. These could include: an extension to service term, additional modules, training credits, access to a higher support level, etc.
    • Regardless of how the credit is presented, this is typically the only way to hold your provider accountable to their commitments and to ensure they perform consistently to expectations. You must do a rough calculation to validate the potential monetary value and if the credit is meaningful enough to the provider.

    Research shows that credit values that equate to just a few dollars, when you are paying the provider tens of thousands of dollars a month for a service or product, the credit is insignificant and therefore doesn’t incent the provider to achieve or maintain a service level.

    1.3.2 Monitoring, reporting requirements, remedies/credit process

    Credit Process

    Along with meaningful credit values, there must be a defined credit calculation method and credit redemption process in the SLA.

    Credit calculation. The credit calculation should be simple and straight forward. Many times, we see providers define complicated methods of calculating the credit value. In some cases complicated service levels require higher effort to monitor and report on, but this shouldn’t mean that the credit for missing the service level needs to require the same effort to calculate. Do a sample credit calculation to validate if the potential credit value is meaningful enough or meets your requirements.

    Credit redemption process. The SLA should define the process of how a credit is provided to the customer. Ideally the process should be fairly automated by the service provider. If the report shows a missed service level, that should trigger a credit calculation and credit value posted to account followed by notification. In many SLAs that we review, the credit process is either poorly defined or not defined at all. When it is defined, the process typically requires the customer to follow an onerous process and submit a credit request that must then be validated by the provider and then, if approved, posted to your account to be applied at year end as long as you are in complete compliance with the agreement and up-to-date on your account etc. This is what we need to avoid in provider-written SLAs. You need a proactive process where the service provider takes responsibility for missing an SLA and automatically assigns an accurate credit to your account with an email notice.

    Secondary level remedies. These are remedies for partial performance. For example, the platform is accessible but some major modules are not working (i.e.: the payroll platform is up and running and accessible but the tax table is not working properly so you can’t complete your payroll run on-time). Consider the requirement of a service level, metric, and remedy for critical components of a service and not just the platform availability.

    Info-Tech Insight SLA’s without adequate remedies to hold the vendor accountable to their commitments make the SLAs essentially meaningless.

    1.4 Exclusions indemnification, force majeure, scheduled maintenance

    Contract-Related Exclusions

    Attaining service-level commitments by the provider within an SLA can depend on other factors that could greatly influence their performance to service levels. Most of these other factors are common and should be defined in the SLA as exclusions or exceptions. Exceptions/exclusions can typically apply to credit calculations as well. Typical exceptions to attaining service levels are:

    • Denial of Service (DoS) attacks
    • Communication/ISP outage
    • Outages of third-party hosting
    • Actions or inactions of the client or third parties
    • Scheduled maintenance but not emergency maintenance
    • Force majeure events which can cover several different scenarios

    Attention should be taken to review the exceptions to ensure they are in fact not within the reasonable control of the provider. Many times the provider will list several exclusions. Often these are not reasonable or can be avoided, and in most cases, they allow the service provider the opportunity to show unjustified service-level achievements. These should be negotiated out of the SLA.

    1.5 Activity SLA Evaluation Tool

    1-2 hours

    Input

    • SLA content
    • SLA elements
    • SLA objectives
    • SLO calculation methods

    Output

    • Rating of the SLA service levels and objectives
    • Overall rating of the SLA content
    • Targeted list of required improvements

    Materials

    • SLA comprehensive checklist
    • Service provider SLA

    Participants

    • Vendor or contract manager
    • IT manager or leadership
    • Application or business unit manager

    The SLA Evaluation Tool will allow you evaluate an SLA for content. Enter details into the tool and evaluate the service levels and SLA elements and components to ensure the agreement contains adequate SLOs to meet your organization’s service requirements.

    Instructions:

    Review and identify SLA elements within the service provider’s SLA.

    Enter service-level details into the tool and rate the SLOs.

    Enter service elements details, validate that all required elements are in the SLA, and rate them accordingly.

    Capture and evaluate service-level SLO calculations.

    Review the overall rating for the SLA and create a targeted list for improvements with the service provider.

    Download the SLA Evaluation Tool

    1.5 Clarification: SLAs vs. SLOs vs. SLIs

    SLA – Service-Level Agreement The promise or commitment

    • This is the formal agreement between you and your service provider that contains their service levels and obligations with measurable metrics/KPIs and associated remedies. SLAs can be a separate or unique document, but are most commonly embedded within an MSA, SOW, SaaS, etc. as an addendum or exhibit.

    SLO – Service-Level Objective The goals or targets

    • This service-level agreement construct is the customer-based SLA. A Customer-based SLA is a unique agreement with one customer. The entire agreement is defined for one or all service levels provided to a particular customer. For example, you may use several services from one telecom vendor. The SLAs for these services would be covered in one contract between you and the Telco vendor, creating a unique customer-based to vendor agreement. Another scenario: a vendor offers general SLAs for its services and you negotiate a specific SLA for a particular service that is unique or exclusive to you. This would be a customer-based SLA as well.

    Other common names are Metrics and Key Performance Indicators (KPIs )

    SLI – Service-Level Indicator How did we do? Did we achieve the objectives?

    • An SLI is the actual metric attained after the measurement period. SLI measures compliance with an SLO (service level objective). So, for example, if your SLA specifies that your systems will be available 99.95% of the time, your SLO is 99.95% uptime and your SLI is the actual measurement of your uptime. Maybe it’s 99.96%. maybe 99.99% or even 99.75% For the vendor to be compliant to the SLA, the SLI(s) must meet or exceed the SLOs within the SLA document.

    Other common names: attainment, results, actual

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Web-posted SLAs that are not embedded within a signed MSA, can present uncertainty and risk as they can change at any time and typically without direct notice to the customer

    Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

    Phase 2

    Understand SLA Elements

    Phase 2

    Create Requirements

    Phase Steps

    • 2.1 Create a list of your SLA criteria
    • 2.2 Develop SLA policy & templates
    • 2.3 Create a negotiation strategy
    • 2.4 SLA overachieving discussion

    Manage Obligations

    2.1 Create a list of your SLA criteria

    Principle Service Elements

    With your understanding of the types of SLAs and the elements that comprise a well-written agreement

    • The next step is to start to create a set of SLA criteria for service types that your organization outsources or may require in the future.
    • This criteria should define the elements of the SLA with tolerance levels that will require the provider to meet your service expectations.
    • Service levels, metrics/KPIs, associated remedies and reporting criteria. This criteria could be captured into table-like templates that can be referenced or inserted into service provider SLAs.
    • Once you have defined minimum service-level criteria, we recommend that you do a deeper review of the various service provider types that your organization has in place. The goal of the review is to understand the objective of the service type and associated service levels and then compare them to your requirements for the service to meet your expectations. Service levels and KPIs should be no less than if your IT department was providing the service with its own resources and infrastructure.
    • Most IT departments have service levels that they are required to meet with their infrastructure to the business units or organization, whether it’s App delivery, issue or problem resolution, availability etc. When any of these services are outsourced to an external service provider, you need to make all efforts to ensure that the service levels are equal to or better than the previous or existing internal expectations.
    • Additionally, the goal is to identify service levels and metrics that don’t meet your requirements or expectations and/or service levels that are missing.

    2.2 Develop SLA policies and templates

    Contract-type Elements

    After creating templates for minimum-service metrics & KPIs, reporting criteria templates, process, and timing, the next step should be to work on contract-type elements and additional service-level components. These elements should include:

    • Reporting format, criteria, and timelines
    • Monitoring requirements
    • Minimum acceptable remedy or credits process; proactive by provider vs. reactive by customer
    • Roles & responsibilities
    • Acceptable exclusion details
    • Termination language for persistent failure to meet SLOs

    These templates or criteria minimums can be used as guidelines or policy when creating or negotiating SLAs with a service provider.

    Start your initial element templates for your strategic vendors and most common service types: SaaS, IaaS, Service Desk, SecOps, etc. The goal of SLA templates is to create simple minimum guidelines for service levels that will allow you to meet your internal SLAs and expectations. Having SLA templates will show the service provider that you understand your requirements and may put you in a better negotiating position when reviewing with the provider.

    When considering SLO metrics or KPIs consider the SMART guidance:

    Simple: A KPI should be easy to measure. It should not be complicated, and the purpose behind recording it must be documented and communicated.

    Measurable: A KPI that cannot be measured will not help in the decision-making process. The selected KPIs must be measurable, whether qualitatively or quantitatively. The procedure for measuring the KPIs must be consistent and well-defined.

    Actionable: KPIs should contribute to the decision-making process of your organization. A KPI that does not make any such contributions serves no purpose.

    Relevant: KPIs must be related to operations or functions that a security team seeks to assess.

    Time-based: KPIs should be flexible enough to demonstrate changes over time. In a practical sense, an ideal KPI can be grouped together by different time intervals.

    (Guide for Security Operations Metrics)

    2.2.1 Activity: Review SLA Template & Metrics Reference Guide

    1-2 hours

    Input

    • Service level metrics
    • List of who is accountable for PPM decisions

    Output

    • SLO templates for service types
    • SLA criteria that meets your organization’s requirements

    Materials

    • SLA Checklist
    • SLA criteria list with SLO & credit values
    • PPM Decision Review Workbook

    Participants

    • Vendor manager
    • IT leadership
    • Procurement or contract manager
    1. Review the SLA Template and Metrics Reference Guide for common metrics & KPIs for the various service types. Each Service Type tab has SLA elements and SLO metrics typically associated with the type of service.
    2. Some service levels have common or standard credits* that are typically associated with the service level or metric.
    3. Use the SLA Template to enter service levels, metrics, and credits that meet your organization’s criteria or requirements for a given service type.

    Download the SLA Template & Metrics Reference Guide

    *Credit values are not standard values, rather general ranges that our research shows to be the typical ranges that credit values should be for a given missed service level

    2.3 Create a negotiation strategy

    Once you have created service-level element criteria templates for your organization’s requirements, it’s time to document a negotiation position or strategy to use when negotiating with service providers. Not all providers are flexible with their SLA commitments, in fact most are reluctant to change or create “unique” SLOs for individual customers. Particularly cloud vendors providing IaaS, SaaS, or PaaS, SLAs. ISP/Telcom, Co-Lo and DR/BU providers also have standard SLOs that they don’t like to stray far from. On the other hand, security ops (SIEM), service desk, hardware, and SOW/PS providers who are generally contracted to provide variable services are somewhat more flexible with their SLAs and more willing to meet your requirements.

    • Service providers want to avoid being held accountable to SLOs, and their SLAs are typically written to reflect that.

    The goal of creating internal SLA templates and policies is to set a minimum baseline of service levels that your organization is willing to accept, and that will meet their requirements and expectations for the outsourced service. Using these templated SLOs will set the basis for negotiating the entire SLA with the provider. You can set the SLA purpose, objectives, roles, and responsibilities and then achieve these from the service provider with solid SLOs and associated reporting and remedies.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Web-posted SLAs that are not embedded within a signed MSA can present uncertainty and risk as they can change at any time and typically without direct notice to the customer

    2.3.1 Negotiating strategy guidance

    • Be prepared. Create a negotiating plan and put together a team that understands your organization’s requirements for SLA.
    • Stay informed. Request provider’s recent performance data and negotiate SLOs to the provider’s average performance.
    • Know what you need. Corporate SLA templates or policies should be positioned to service providers as baseline minimums.
    • Show some flexibility. Be willing to give up some ground on one SLO in exchange for acceptance of SLOs that may be more important to your organization.
    • Re-group. Have a fallback position or Plan B. What if the provider can’t or won’t meet your key SLOs? Do you walk?
    • Do your homework. Understand what the typical standard SLOs are for the type of service level.

    2.4 SLO overachieving incentive discussion

    Monitoring & Reporting

    • SLO overachieving metrics are seen in some SLAs where there is a high priority for a service provider to meet and or exceed the SLOs within the SLA. These are not common terms but can be used to improve the overall service levels of a provider. In these scenarios the provider is sometimes rewarded for overachieving on the SLOs, either consistently or on a monthly or quarterly basis. In some cases, it can make financial sense to incent the service provider to overachieve on their commitments. Incentives can drive behaviors and improved performance by the provider that can intern improve the benefits to your organization and therefore justify an incent of some type.
    • Example: You could have an SLO for invoice accuracy. If not achieved, it could cost the vendor if they don’t meet the accuracy metric, however if they were to consistently overachieve the metric it could save accounts payable hours of time in validation and therefore you could pass on some of these measurable savings to the provider.
    • Overachieving incentives can add complexity to the SLA so they need to be easily measurable and simple to manage.
    • Overachieving incentives can also be used in provider performance improvement plans, where a provider might have poor trending attainment and you need to have them improve their performance in a short period of time. Incentives typically will motivate provider improvement and generally will cost much less than replacing the provider.
    • There is another school of thought that you shouldn’t have to pay a provider for doing their job; however, others are of the opinion that incentives or bonuses improve the overall performance of individuals or teams and are therefore worth consideration if both parties benefit from the over performance.

    Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements

    Phase 3

    Understand SLA Elements

    Create Requirements

    Phase 3

    Manage Obligations

    Phase Steps

    • 3.1 SLA monitoring and tracking
    • 3.2 Reporting
    • 3.3 Vendor SLA reviews & optimizing
    • 3.4 Performance management

    3.1 SLA monitoring, tracking, and remedy reconciliation

    The next step to effective SLAs is the management component. It could be fruitless if you were to spend your time and efforts negotiating your required service levels and metrics and don’t have some level of managing the SLA. In that situation you would have no way of knowing if the service provider is attaining their SLOs.

    There are several key elements to effective SLA management:

    • SLO monitoring
    • Simple, concise reporting
    • SLO attainment tracking
    • Score carding & trending
    • Remedy reconciliation

    SLA Management framework

    SLA Monitoring → Concise Reporting → Attainment Tracking → Score Carding →Remedy Reconciliation

    “A shift we’re beginning to see is an increased use of data and process discovery tools to measure SLAs,” says Borowski of West Monroe. “While not pervasive yet, these tools represent an opportunity to identify the most meaningful metrics and objectively measure performance (e.g., cycle time, quality, compliance). When provided by the client, it also eliminates the dependency on provider tools as the source-of-truth for performance data.” – Stephanie Overby

    3.1 SLA management framework

    SLA Performance Management

    • SLA monitoring provides data for SLO reports or dashboards. Reports provide attainment data for tacking over time. Attainment data feeds scorecards and allows for trending analysis. Missed attainment data triggers remedies.
    • All service providers monitor their systems, platforms, tickets, agents, sensors etc. to be able to do their jobs. Therefore, monitoring is readily available from your service provider in some form.
    • One of the key purposes of monitoring is to generate data into internal reports or dashboards that capture the performance metrics of the various services. Therefore, service-level and metric reports are readily available for all of the service levels that a service provider is contracted or engaged to provide.
    • Monitoring and reporting are the key elements that validate how your service provider is meeting its SLA obligations and thus are very important elements of an SLA. SLO report data becomes attainment data once the metric or KPI has been captured.
    • As a component of effective SLA management, this attainment data needs to be tracked/recorded in an easy-to-read format or table over a period of time. Attainment data can then be used to generate scorecards and trending reports for your review both internally and with the provider as required.
    • If attainment data shows that the service provider is meeting their SLA obligations, then the SLA is meeting your requirements and expectations. If on the other hand, attainment data shows that obligations are not being met, then actions must be taken to hold the service provider accountable. The most common method is through remedies that are typically in the form of a credit through a defined process (see Sec. 1.3). Any credits due for missed SLOs should also be tracked and reported to stakeholders and accounting for validation, reconciliation, and collection.

    3.2 Reporting

    Monitoring & Reporting

    • Many SLAs are silent on monitoring and reporting elements and require that the customer, if aware or able, to monitor the providers service levels and attainment and create their own KPI and reports. Then if SLOs are not met there is an arduous process that the customer must go through to request their rightful credit. This manual and reactive method creates all kinds of risk and cost to the customer and they should make all attempts to ensure that the service provider proactively provides SLO/KPI attainment reports on a regular basis.
    • Automated monitoring and reporting is a common task for many IT departments. There is no reason that a service provider can’t send reports proactively in a format that can be easily interpreted by the customer. The ideal state would be to capture KPI report data into a customer’s internal service provider scorecard.
    • Automated or automatic credit posting is another key element that service providers tend to ignore, primarily in hopes that the customer won’t request or go through the trouble of the process. This needs to change. Some large cloud vendors already have automated processes that automatically post a credit to your account if they miss an SLO. This proactive credit process should be at the top of your negotiation checklist. Service providers are avoiding thousands of credit dollars every year based on the design of their credit process. As more customers push back and negotiate more efficient credit processes, vendors will soon start to change and may use it as a differentiator with their service.

    3.2.1 Performance tracking and trending

    What gets measured gets done

    SLO Attainment Tracking

    A primary goal of proactive and automated reporting and credit process is to capture the provider’s attainment data into a tracker or vendor scorecard. These tracking scorecards can easily create status reports and performance trending of service providers, to IT leadership as well as feed QBR agenda content.

    Remedy Reconciliation

    Regardless of how a credit is processed it should be tracked and reconciled with internal stakeholders and accounting to ensure credits are duly applied or received from the provider and in a timely manner. Tracking and reconciliation must also align with your payment terms, whether monthly or annually.

    “While the adage, ‘You can't manage what you don't measure,’ continues to be true, the downside for organizations using metrics is that the provider will change their behavior to maximize their scores on performance benchmarks.” – Rob Lemos

    3.2.1 Activity SLA Tracker and Trending Tool

    1-2 hours setup

    Input

    • SLO metrics/KPIs from the SLA
    • Credit values associated with SLO

    Output

    • Monthly SLO attainment data
    • Credit tracking
    • SLO trending graphs

    Materials

    • Service provider SLO reports
    • Service provider SLA
    • SLO Tracker & Trending Tool

    Participants

    • Contract or vendor managers
    • Application or service managers
    • Service provider

    An important activity in the SLA management framework is to track the provider’s SLO attainment on a monthly or quarterly basis. In addition, if an SLO is missed, an associated credit needs to be tracked and captured. This activity allows you to capture the SLOs from the SLA and track them continually and provide data for trending and review at vendor performance meetings and executive updates.

    Instructions: Enter SLOs from the SLA as applicable.

    Each month, from the provider’s reports or dashboards, enter the SLO metric attainment.

    When an SLO is met, the cell will turn green. If the SLO is missed, the cell will turn red and a corresponding cell in the Credit Tracker will turn green, meaning that a credit needs to be reconciled.

    Use the Trending tab to view trending graphs of key service levels and SLOs.

    Download the SLO Tracker and Trending Tool

    3.3 Vendor SLA reviews and optimizing

    Regular reviews should be done with providers

    Collecting attainment data with scorecards or tracking tools provides summary information on the performance of the service provider to their SLA obligations. This information should be used for regular reviews both internally and with the provider.

    Regular attainment reviews should be used for:

    • Performance trending upward or downward
    • Identifying opportunities to revise or improve SLOs
    • Optimizing SLO and processes
    • Creating a Performance Improvement Plan (PIP) for the service provider

    Some organizations choose to review SLA performance with providers at regular QBRs or at specific SLA review meetings

    This should be determined based on the criticality, risk, and strategic importance of the provider’s service. Providers that provide essential services like ERP, payroll, CRM, HRIS, IaaS etc. should be reviewed much more regularly to ensure that any decline in service is identified early and addressed properly in accordance with the service provider. Negative trending performance should also be documented for consideration at renewal time.

    3.4 Performance management

    Dealing with persistent poor performance and termination

    Service providers that consistently miss key service level metrics or KPIs present financial and security risk to the organization. Poor performance of a service provider reflects directly on the IT leadership and will affect many other business aspects of the organization including:

    • Ability to conduct day-to-day business activities
    • Meet internal obligations and expectations
    • Employee productivity and satisfaction
    • Maintain corporate policies or industry compliance
    • Meet security requirements

    Communication is key. Poor performance of a service provider needs to be dealt with in a timely manner in order to avoid more critical impact of the poor performance. Actions taken with the provider can also vary depending again on the criticality, risk, and strategic importance of the provider’s service.

    Performance reviews should provide the actions required with the goal of:

    • Making the performance problems into opportunities
    • Working with the provider to create a PIP with aggressive timelines and ramifications if not attained
    • Non-renewal or termination consideration, if feasible including provider replacement options, risk, costs, etc.
    • SLA renegotiation or revisions
    • Warning notifications to the service provider with concise issues and ramifications

    To avoid the issues and challenges of dealing with chronic poor performance, consider a Persistent or Chronic Failure clause into the SLA contract language. These clauses can define chronic failure, scenarios, ramifications there of, and defined options for the client including increased credit values, non-monetary remedies, and termination options without liability.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It’s difficult to prevent chronic poor performance but you can certainly track it and deal with it in a way that reduces risk and cost to your organization.

    SLA Hall of Shame

    Crazy service provider SLA content collection

    • Excessive list of unreasonable exclusions
    • Subcontractors’ behavior could be excluded
    • Downtime credit, equal to downtime percent x the MRC
    • Controllable FM events (internal labor issues, health events)
    • Difficult downtime or credit calculations that don’t make sense
    • Credits are not valid if agreement is terminated early or not renewed
    • Customer is not current on their account, SLA or credits do not count/apply
    • Total downtime = to prorated credit value (down 3 hrs = 3/720hrs = 0.4% credit)
    • SLOs don’t apply if customer fails to report the issue or request a trouble ticket
    • Downtime during off hours (overnight) do not count towards availability metrics
    • Different availability commitments based on different support-levels packages
    • Extending the agreement term by the length of downtime as a form of a remedy

    SLA Dos and Don’ts

    Dos

    • Do negotiate SLOs to vendor’s average performance
    • Do strive for automated reporting and credit processes
    • Do right-size and create your SLO criteria based on risk mitigation
    • Do review SLA attainment results with strategic service providers on a regular basis
    • Do ensure that all key elements and components of an SLA are present in the document or appendix

    Don'ts

    • Don’t accept the providers response that “we can’t change the SLOs for you because then we’d have to change them for everyone”
    • Don’t leave SLA preparation to the last minute. Give it priority as you negotiate with the provider
    • Don’t create complex SLAs with numerous service levels and SLOs that need to be reported and managed
    • Don’t aim for absolute perfection. Rather, prioritize which service levels are most important to you for the service

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Knowledge Gained

    • Understanding of the elements and components of an SLA
    • A list of SLO metrics aligned to service types that meet your organization’s criteria
    • SLA metric/KPI templates
    • SLA Management process for your provider’s service objectives
    • Reporting and tracking process for performance trending

    Deliverables Completed

    • SLA component and contract element checklist
    • Evaluation or service provider SLAs
    • SLA templates for strategic service types
    • SLA tracker for strategic service providers

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Improve IT-Business Alignment Through an Internal SLA

    • Understand business requirements, clarify current capabilities, and enable strategies to close service-level gaps.

    Data center Co-location SLA & Service Definition Template

    • In essence, the SLA defines the “product” that is being purchased, permitting the provider to rationalize resources to best meet the needs of varied clients, and permits the buyer to ensure that business requirements are being met.

    Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments

    • Keep your information security risks manageable when leveraging the benefits of cloud computing.

    Bibliography

    Henderson, George. “3 Most Common Types of Service Level Agreement (SLA).” Master of Project Academy. N.d. Web.

    “Guide to Security Operations Metrics.” Logsign. Oct 5, 2020. Web.

    Lemos, Rob. “4 lessons from SOC metrics: What your SpecOps team needs to know.” TechBeacon. N.d. Web.

    “Measuring and Making the Most of Service Desk Metrics.” Freshworks. N.d. Web.

    Overby, Stephanie. “15 SLA Mistakes IT Leaders Still Make.” CIO. Jan 21, 2021.

    Build a Security Metrics Program to Drive Maturity

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}266|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $22,947 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 8 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Processes & Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /security-processes-and-operations
    • Many security leaders put off adding metrics to their program because they don't know where to start or how to assess what is worth measuring.
    • Sometimes, this uncertainty causes the belief that their security programs are not mature enough for metrics to be worthwhile.
    • Because metrics can become very technical and precise,it's easy to think that they're inherently complicated (not true).

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The best metrics are tied to goals.
    • Tying your metrics to goals ensures that you are collecting metrics for a specific purpose rather than just to watch the numbers change.

    Impact and Result

    • A metric, really, is just a measure of success against a given goal. Gradually, programs will achieve their goals and set new more specific goals, and with them come more-specific metrics.
    • It is not necessary to jump into highly technical metrics right away. A lot can be gained from metrics that track behaviors.
    • A metrics program can be very simple and still effectively demonstrate the value of security to the organization. The key is to link your metrics to the goals or objectives the security team is pursuing, even if they are simple implementation plans (e.g. percentage of departments that have received security training course).

    Build a Security Metrics Program to Drive Maturity Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a security metrics program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Link security metrics to goals to boost maturity

    Develop goals and KPIs to measure your progress.

    • Build a Security Metrics Program to Drive Maturity – Phase 1: Link Security Metrics to Goals to Boost Maturity
    • Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool
    • KPI Development Worksheets

    2. Adapt your reporting strategy for various metric types

    Learn how to present different types of metrics.

    • Build a Security Metrics Program to Drive Maturity – Phase 2: Adapt Your Reporting Strategy for Various Metric Types
    • Security Metrics KPX Dashboard
    • Board-Level Security Metrics Presentation Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Security Metrics Program to Drive Maturity

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Current State, Initiatives, and Goals

    The Purpose

    Create a prioritized list of goals to improve the security program’s current state.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Insight into the current program and the direct it needs to head in.

    Activities

    1.1 Discuss current state and existing approach to metrics.

    1.2 Review contract metrics already in place (or available).

    1.3 Determine security areas that should be measured.

    1.4 Determine what stakeholders are involved.

    1.5 Review current initiatives to address those risks (security strategy, if in place).

    1.6 Begin developing SMART goals for your initiative roadmap.

    Outputs

    Gap analysis results

    SMART goals

    2 KPI Development

    The Purpose

    Develop unique KPIs to measure progress against your security goals.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Learn how to develop KPIs

    Prioritized list of security goals

    Activities

    2.1 Continue SMART goal development.

    2.2 Sort goals into types.

    2.3 Rephrase goals as KPIs and list associated metric(s).

    2.4 Continue KPI development.

    Outputs

    KPI Evolution Worksheet

    3 Metrics Prioritization

    The Purpose

    Determine which metrics will be included in the initial program launch.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A set of realistic and manageable goals-based metrics.

    Activities

    3.1 Lay out prioritization criteria.

    3.2 Determine priority metrics (implementation).

    3.3 Determine priority metrics (improvement & organizational trend).

    Outputs

    Prioritized metrics

    Tool for tracking and presentation

    4 Metrics Reporting

    The Purpose

    Strategize presentation based around metric type to indicate organization’s risk posture.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop versatile reporting techniques

    Activities

    4.1 Review metric types and discuss reporting strategies for each.

    4.2 Develop a story about risk.

    4.3 Discuss the use of KPXs and how to scale for less mature programs.

    Outputs

    Key Performance Index Tool and presentation materials

    Further reading

    Build a Security Metrics Program to Drive Maturity

    Good metrics come from good goals.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Metrics are a maturity driver.

    "Metrics programs tend to fall into two groups: non-existent and unhelpful.

    The reason so many security professionals struggle to develop a meaningful metrics program is because they are unsure of what to measure or why.

    The truth is, for metrics to be useful, they need to be tied to something you care about – a state you are trying to achieve. In other words, some kind of goal. Used this way, metrics act as the scoreboard, letting you know if you’re making progress towards your goals, and thus, boosting your overall maturity."

    Logan Rohde, Research Analyst, Security Practice Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Many security leaders put off adding metrics to their program because they don't know where to start or how to assess what is worth measuring.

    Complication

    • Sometimes, this uncertainty causes the belief that their security programs are not mature enough for metrics to be worthwhile.
    • Because metrics can become very technical and precise, it's easy to think they're inherently complicated (not true).

    Resolution

    • A metric, really, is just a measure of success against a given goal. Gradually, programs will achieve their goals and set new, more specific goals, and with them comes more specific metrics.
    • It is not necessary to jump into highly technical metrics right away. A lot can be gained from metrics that track behaviors.
    • A metrics program can be very simple and still effectively demonstrate the value of security to the organization. The key is to link your metrics to the goals or objectives the security team is pursuing, even if they are simple implementation plans (e.g. percentage of departments that have received security training).

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Metrics lead to maturity, not vice versa
      • Tracking metrics helps you assess progress and regress in your security program. This helps you quantify the maturity gains you’ve made and continue to make informed strategic decisions.
    2. The best metrics are tied to goals
      • Tying your metrics to goals ensures that you are collecting metrics for a specific purpose rather than just to watch the numbers change.

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For:

    • CISO

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Understand the value of metrics.
    • Right-size a metrics program based on your organization’s maturity and risk profile.
    • Tie metrics to goals to create meaningful KPIs.
    • Develop strategies to effectively communicate the right metrics to stakeholders.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • CIO
    • Security Manager
    • Business Professionals

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Become informed on the metrics that matter to them.
    • Understand that investment in security is an investment in the business.
    • Feel confident in the progress of the organization’s security strategy.

    Info-Tech’s framework integrates several best practices to create a best-of-breed security framework

    Information Security Framework

    Governance

    • Context and Leadership
      • Information Security Charter
      • Information Security Organizational Structure
      • Culture and Awareness
    • Evaluation and Direction
      • Security Risk Management
      • Security Policies
      • Security Strategy and Communication
    • Compliance, Audit, and Review
      • Security Compliance Management
      • External Security Audit
      • Internal Security Audit
      • Management Review of Security

    Management

    • Prevention
      • Identity Security
        • Identity and Access Management
      • Data Security
        • Hardware Asset Management
        • Data Security & Privacy
      • Infrastructure Security
        • Network Security
        • Endpoint Security
        • Malicious Code
        • Application Security
        • Vulnerability Management
        • Cryptography Management
        • Physical Security
        • Cloud Security
      • HR Security
        • HR Security
      • Change and Support
        • Configuration and Change Management
        • Vendor Management
    • Detection
      • Security Threat Detection
      • Log and Event Management
    • Response and Recovery
      • Security Incident Management
      • Information Security in BCM
      • Security eDiscovery and Forensics
      • Backup and Recovery
    • Measurement
      • Metrics Program
      • Continuous Improvement

    Metrics help to improve security-business alignment

    While business leaders are now taking a greater interest in cybersecurity, alignment between the two groups still has room for improvement.

    Key statistics show that just...

    5% of public companies feel very confident that they are properly secured against a cyberattack.

    41% of boards take on cybersecurity directly rather than allocating it to another body (e.g. audit committee).

    19% of private companies do not discuss cybersecurity with the board.

    (ISACA, 2018)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Metrics help to level the playing field

    Poor alignment between security and the business often stems from difficulties with explaining how security objectives support business goals, which is ultimately a communication problem.

    However, metrics help to facilitate these conversations, as long as the metrics are expressed in practical, relatable terms.

    Security metrics benefit the business

    Executives get just as much out of management metrics as the people running them.

    1. Metrics assuage executives’ fears
      • Metrics help executives (and security leaders) feel more at ease with where the company is security-wise. Metrics help identify areas for improvement and gaps in the organization’s security posture that can be filled. A good metrics program will help identify deficiencies in most areas, even outside the security program, helping to identify what work needs to be done to reduce risk and increase the security posture of the organization.
    2. Metrics answer executives’ questions
      • Numbers either help ease confusion or signify other areas for improvement. Offering quantifiable evidence, in a language that the business can understand, offers better understanding and insight into the information security program. Metrics also help educate on types of threats, staff needed for security, and budget needs to decrease risk based on management’s threat tolerance. Metrics help make an organization more transparent, prepared, and knowledgeable.
    3. Metrics help to continually prove security’s worth
      • Traditionally, the security team has had to fight for a seat at the executive table, with little to no way to communicate with the business. However, the new trend is that the security team is now being invited before they have even asked to join. This trend allows the security team to better communicate on the organization’s security posture, describe threats and vulnerabilities, present a “plan of action,” and get a pulse on the organization’s risk tolerance.

    Common myths make security metrics seem challenging

    Security professionals have the perception that metrics programs are difficult to create. However, this attitude usually stems from one of the following myths. In reality, security metrics are much simpler than they seem at first, and they usually help resolve existing challenges rather than create new ones.

    Myth Truth
    1 There are certain metrics that are important to all organizations, based on maturity, industry, etc. Metrics are indications of change; for a metric to be useful it needs to be tied to a goal, which helps you understand the change you're seeing as either a positive or a negative. Industry and maturity have little bearing here.
    2 Metrics are only worthwhile once a certain maturity level is reached Metrics are a tool to help an organization along the maturity scale. Metrics help organizations measure progress of their goals by helping them see which tactics are and are not working.
    3 Security metrics should focus on specific, technical details (e.g. of systems) Metrics are usually a means of demonstrating, objectively, the state of a security program. That is, they are a means of communicating something. For this reason, it is better that metrics be phrased in easily digestible, non-technical terms (even if they are informed by technical security statistics).

    Tie your metrics to goals to make them worthwhile

    SMART metrics are really SMART goals.

    Specific

    Measurable

    Achievable

    Realistic

    Timebound

    Achievable: What is an achievable metric?

    When we say that a metric is “achievable,” we imply that it is tied to a goal of some kind – the thing we want to achieve.

    How do we set a goal?

    1. Determine what outcome you are trying to achieve.
      • This can be small or large (e.g. I want to determine what existing systems can provide metrics, or I want a 90% pass rate on our monthly phishing tests).
    2. Decide what indicates that you’ve achieved your goal.
      • At what point would you be satisfied with the progress made on the initiative(s) you’re working on? What conditions would indicate victory for you and allow you to move on to another goal?
    3. Develop a key performance indicator (KPI) to measure progress towards that goal.
      • Now that you’ve defined what you’re trying to achieve, find a way to indicate progress in relative or relational terms (e.g. percentage change from last quarter, percentage of implementation completed, ratio of programs in place to those still needing implementation).

    Info-Tech’s security metrics methodology is repeatable and iterative to help boost maturity

    Security Metric Lifecycle

    Start:

    Review current state and decide on priorities.

    Set a SMART goal for improvement.

    Develop an appropriate KPI.

    Use KPI to monitor program improvement.

    Present metrics to the board.

    Revise metrics if necessary.

    Metrics go hand in hand with your security strategy

    A security strategy is ultimately a large goal-setting exercise. You begin by determining your current maturity and how mature you need to be across all areas of information security, i.e. completing a gap analysis.

    As such, linking your metrics program to your security strategy is a great way to get your metrics program up and running – but it’s not the only way.

    Check out the following Info-Tech resource to get started today:

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    The value of security metrics goes beyond simply increasing security

    This blueprint applies to you whether you need to develop a metrics program from scratch or optimize and update your current strategy.

    Value of engaging in security metrics:

    • Increased visibility into your operations.
    • Improved accountability.
    • Better communication with executives as a result of having hard evidence of security performance.
    • Improved security posture through better understanding of what is working and what isn’t within the security program.

    Value of Info-Tech’s security metrics blueprint:

    • Doesn’t overwhelm you and allows you to focus on determining the metrics you need to worry about now without pressuring you to do it all at once.
    • Helps you develop a growth plan as your organization and metrics program mature, so you continue to optimize.
    • Creates effective communication. Prepares you to present the metrics that truly matter to executives rather than confusing them with unnecessary data. Pay attention to metric accuracy and reproducibility. No management wants inconsistent reporting.

    Impact

    Short term: Streamline your program. Based on your organization’s specific requirements and risk profile, figure out which metrics are best for now while also planning for future metrics as your organization matures.

    Long term: Once the program is in place, improvements will come with increased visibility into operations. Investments in security will be encouraged when more evidence is available to executives, contributing to overall improved security posture. Potential opportunities for eventual cost savings also exist as there is more informed security spending and fewer incidents.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked-off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Link Security Metrics to Goals to Boost Maturity – Project Overview

    1. Link Security Metrics to Goals to Boost Maturity 2. Adapt Your Reporting Strategy for Various Metric Types
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Review current state and set your goals

    1.2 Develop KPIs and prioritize your goals

    1.3 Implement and monitor the KPI to track goal progress

    2.1 Review best practices for presenting metrics

    2.2 Strategize your presentation based on metric type

    2.3 Tailor presentation to your audience

    2.4 Use your metrics to create a story about risk

    2.5 Revise your metrics

    Guided Implementations
    • Call 1: Setting Goals
    • Call 2: KPI Development
    • Call 1: Best Practices and Reporting Strategy
    • Call 2: Build a Dashboard and Presentation Deck
    Onsite Workshop Module 1: Current State, Initiatives, Goals, and KPIs Module 2: Metrics Reporting

    Phase 1 Outcome:

    • KPI development and populated metrics tracking tool.

    Phase 2 Outcome:

    • Reporting strategy with dashboard and presentation deck.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities

    Current State, Initiatives, and Goals

    • Discuss current state and existing approach to metrics.
    • Review contract metrics already in place (or available).
    • Determine security areas that should be measured.
    • Determine which stakeholders are involved.
    • Review current initiatives to address those risks (security strategy, if in place).
    • Begin developing SMART goals for your initiative roadmap.

    KPI Development

    • Continue SMART goal development.
    • Sort goals into types.
    • Rephrase goals as KPIs and list associated metric(s).
    • Continue KPI development.

    Metrics Prioritization

    • Lay out prioritization criteria.
    • Determine priority metrics (implementation).
    • Determine priority metrics (improvement & organizational trend).

    Metrics Reporting

    • Review metric types and discuss reporting strategies for each.
    • Develop a story about risk.
    • Discuss the use of KPXs and how to scale for less mature programs.

    Offsite Finalization

    • Review and finalization of documents drafted during workshop.
    Deliverables
    1. Gap analysis results
    1. Completed KPI development templates
    1. Prioritized metrics and tool for tracking and presentation.
    1. Key Performance Index tool and presentation materials.
    1. Finalization of completed deliverables

    Phase 1

    Link Security Metrics to Goals to Boost Maturity


    Phase 1

    1.1 Review current state and set your goals

    1.2 Develop KPIs and prioritize your goals

    1.3 Implement and monitor KPIs

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Current state assessment
    • Setting SMART goals
    • KPI development
    • Goals prioritization
    • KPI implementation

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team

    Outcomes of this phase

    • Goals-based KPIs
    • Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of two to three advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Link Security Metrics to Goals to Boost Maturity

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2-4 weeks

    Step 1.1: Setting Goals

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Determine current and target maturity for various security programs.
    • Develop SMART Goals.

    Then complete these activities…

    • CMMI Assessment

    Step 1.2 – 1.3: KPI Development

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Prioritize goals
    • Develop KPIs to track progress on goals
    • Track associated metrics

    Then complete these activities…

    • KPI Development

    With these tools & templates:

    • KPI Development Worksheet
    • Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool

    Phase 1 Results & Insights:

    • Basic Metrics program

    1.1 Review current state and set your goals

    120 minutes

    Let’s put the security program under the microscope.

    Before program improvement can take place, it is necessary to look at where things are at presently (in terms of maturity) and where we need to get them to.

    In other words, we need to perform a security program gap analysis.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The most thorough way of performing this gap analysis is by completing Info-Tech’s Build an Information Security Strategy blueprint, as it will provide you with a prioritized list of initiatives to boost your security program maturity.

    Completing an abbreviated gap analysis...

    • Security Areas
    • Network Security
    • Endpoint Security
    • Vulnerability Management
    • Identity Access Management
    • Incident Management
    • Training & Awareness
    • Compliance, Audit, & Review
    • Risk Management
    • Business Alignment & Governance
    • Data Security
    1. Using the CMMI scale on the next slide, assess your maturity level across the security areas to the left, giving your program a score from 1-5. Record your assessment on a whiteboard.
    2. Zone in on your areas of greatest concern and choose 3 to 5 areas to prioritize for improvement.
    3. Set a SMART goal for improvement, using the criteria on goals slides.

    Use the CMMI scale to contextualize your current maturity

    Use the Capability Maturity Model Integration (CMMI) scale below to help you understand your current level of maturity across the various areas of your security program.

    1. Initial
      • Incident can be managed. Outcomes are unpredictable due to lack of a standard operating procedure.
    2. Repeatable
      • Process in place, but not formally implemented or consistently applied. Outcomes improve but still lack predictability.
    3. Defined
      • Process is formalized and consistently applied. Outcomes become more predictable, due to consistent handling procedure.
    4. Managed
      • Process shows signs of maturity and can be tracked via metrics. Moving towards a predictive approach to incident management.
    5. Optimizing
      • Process reaches a fully reliable level, though improvements still possible. Regularity allows for process to be automated.

    (Adapted from the “CMMI Institute Maturity Model”)

    Base your goals around the five types of metrics

    Choose goals that make sense – even if they seem simple.

    The most effective metrics programs are personalized to reflect the goals of the security team and the business they work for. Using goals-based metrics allows you to make incremental improvements that can be measured and reported on, which makes program maturation a natural process.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Before setting a SMART goal, take a moment to consider your maturity for each security area, and which metric type you need to collect first, before moving to more ambitious goals.

    Security Areas

    • Network Security
    • Endpoint Security
    • Vulnerability Management
    • Identity Access Management
    • Incident Management
    • Training & Awareness
    • Compliance, Audit & Review
    • Risk Management
    • Business Alignment & Governance
    • Data Security
    Metric Type Description
    Initial Probe Determines what can be known (i.e. what sources for metrics exist?).
    Baseline Testing Establishes organization’s normal state based on current metrics.
    Implementation Focuses on setting up a series of related processes to increase organizational security (i.e. roll out MFA).
    Improvement Sets a target to be met and then maintained based on organizational risk tolerance.
    Organizational Trends Culls together several metrics to track (sometimes predict) how various trends affect the organization’s overall security. Usually focuses on large-scale issues (e.g. likelihood of a data breach).

    Set SMART goals for your security program

    Specific

    Measurable

    Achievable

    Realistic

    Timebound

    Now that you have determined which security areas you’d like to improve, decide on a goal that meets the SMART criteria.

    Examples of possible goals for various maturity levels:

    1. Perform initial probe to determine number of systems capable of providing metrics by the end of the week.
    2. Take baseline measurements each month for three months to determine organization’s baseline state.
    3. Implement a vulnerability management program to improve baseline state by the end of the quarter.
    4. Improve deployment of critical patches by applying 90% of them within the set window by the end of the year.
    5. Demonstrate how vulnerability management affects broad organizational trends at quarterly report to senior leadership.

    Compare the bolded text in these examples with the metric types on the previous slide

    Record and assess your goals in the Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool

    1.1 Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool

    Use tab “2. Identify Security Goals” to document and assess your goals.

    To increase visibility into the cost, effort, and value of any given goal, assess them using the following criteria:

    • Initial Cost
    • Ongoing Cost
    • Initial Staffing
    • Ongoing Staffing
    • Alignment w/Business
    • Benefit

    Use the calculated Cost/Effort Rating, Benefit Rating, and Difference Score later in this project to help with goal prioritization.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    If you have already completed a security strategy with Info-Tech resources, this work may likely have already been done. Consult your Information Security Program Gap Analysis Tool from the Build an Information Security Strategy research.

    1.2 Develop KPIs and prioritize your goals

    There are two paths to success.

    At this time, it is necessary to evaluate the priorities of your security program.

    Option 1: Progress to KPI Development

    • If you would like practice developing KPIs for multiple goals to get used to the process, move to KPI development and then assess which goals you can pursue now based on resources available, saving the rest for later.

    Option 2: Progress to Prioritization of Goals

    • If you are already comfortable with KPI development and do not wish to create extras for later use, then prioritize your goals first and then develop KPIs for them.

    Phase 1 Schematic

    • Gap Analysis
    • Set SMART Goals (You are here.)
      • Develop KPIs
    • Prioritize Goals
    • Implement KPI & Monitor
    • Phase 2

    Develop a key performance indicator (KPI)

    Find out if you’re meeting your goals.

    Terms like “key performance indicator” may make this development practice seem more complicated than it really is. A KPI is just a single metric used to measure success towards a goal. In relational terms (i.e. as a percentage, ratio, etc.) to give it context (e.g. % of improvement over last quarter).

    KPI development is about answering the question: what would indicate that I have achieved my goal?

    To develop a KPI follow these steps:

    1. Review the case study on the following slides to get a sense of how KPIs can start simple and general and get more specific and complex over time.
    2. Using the example to the right, sort your SMART goals from step 1.1 into the various metric types, then determine what success would look like for you. What outcome are you trying to achieve? How will you know when you’ve achieved it?
    3. Fill out the KPI Development Worksheets to create sample KPIs for each of the SMART goals you have created. Ensure that you complete the accompanying KPI Checklist.

    KPIs differ from goal to goal, but their forms follow certain trends

    Metric Type KPI Form
    Initial Probe Progress of probe (e.g. % of systems checked to see if they can supply metrics).
    Baseline Testing What current data shows (e.g. % of systems needing attention).
    Implementation Progress of the implementation (e.g. % of complete vulnerability management program implementation).
    Improvement The threshold or target to be achieved and maintained (e.g. % of incidents responded to within target window).
    Organizational Trends The interplay of several KPIs and how they affect the organization’s risk posture (e.g. assessing the likelihood for a data breach).

    Explore the five metric types

    1. Initial Probe

    Focused on determining how many sources for metrics exist.

    • Question: What am I capable of knowing?
    • Goal: To determine what level of insight we have into our security processes.
    • Possible KPI: % of systems for which metrics are available.
    • Decision: Do we have sufficient resources available to collect metrics?

    2. Baseline Testing

    Focused on gaining initial insights about the state of your security program (what are the measurements?).

    • Question: Does this data suggest areas for improvement?
    • Goal: To create a roadmap for improvement.
    • Possible KPI: % of systems that provide useful metrics to measure improvement.
    • Decision: Is it necessary to acquire tools to increase, enhance, or streamline the metrics-gathering process?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don't lose hope if you lack resources to move beyond these initial steps. Even if you are struggling to pull data, you can still draw meaningful metrics. The percent or ratio of processes or systems you lack insight into can be very valuable, as it provides a basis to initiate a risk-based discussion with management about the organization's security blind spots.

    Explore the five metric types (cont’d)

    3. Program Implementation

    Focused on developing a basic program to establish basic maturity (e.g. implement an awareness and training program).

    • Question: What needs to be implemented to establish basic maturity?
    • Goal: To begin closing the gap between current and desired maturity.
    • Possible KPI: % of implementation completed.
    • Decision: Have we achieved a formalized and repeatable process?

    4. Improvement

    Focused on attaining operational targets to lower organizational risk.

    • Question: What other related activities could help to support this goal (e.g. regular training sessions)?
    • Goal: To have metrics operate above or below a certain threshold (e.g. lower phishing-test click rate to an average of 10% across the organization)
    • Possible KPI: Phishing click rate %
    • Decision: What other metrics should be tracked to provide insight into KPI fluctuations?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don't overthink your KPI. In many cases it will simply be your goal rephrased to express a percentage or ratio. In others, like the example above, it makes sense for them to be identical.

    5. Organizational Impact

    Focused on studying several related KPIs (Key Performance Index, or KPX) in an attempt to predict risks.

    • Question: What risks does the organization need to address?
    • Goal: To provide high-level summaries of several metrics that suggest emerging or declining risks.
    • Possible KPI: Likelihood of a given risk (based on the trends of the KPX).
    • Decision: Accept the risk, transfer the risk, mitigate the risk?

    Case study: Healthcare example

    Let’s take a look at KPI development in action.

    Meet Maria, the new CISO at a large hospital that desperately needs security program improvements. Maria’s first move was to learn the true state of the organization’s security. She quickly learned that there was no metrics program in place and that her staff were unaware what, if any, sources were available to pull security metrics from.

    After completing her initial probe into available metrics and then investigating the baseline readings, she determined that her areas of greatest concern were around vulnerability and access management. But she also decided it was time to get a security training and awareness program up and running to help mitigate risks in other areas she can’t deal with right away.

    See examples of Maria’s KPI development on the next four slides...

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is very little variation in the kinds of goals people have around initial probes and baseline testing. Metrics in these areas are virtually always about determining what data sources are available to you and what that data actually shows. The real decisions start in determining what you want to do based on the measures you’re seeing.

    Metric development example: Vulnerability Management

    See examples of Maria’s KPI development on the next four slides...

    Implementation

    Goal: Implement vulnerability management program

    KPI: % increase of insight into existing vulnerabilities

    Associated Metric: # of vulnerability detection methods

    Improvement

    Goal: Improve deployment time for patches

    KPI: % of critical patches fully deployed within target window

    • Associated Metric 1: # of critical vulnerabilities not patched
    • Associated Metric 2: # of patches delayed due to lack of staff
    • Associated Metric X

    Metric development example: Identity Access Management

    Implementation

    Goal: Implement MFA for privileged accounts

    KPI: % of privileged accounts with MFA applied

    Associated Metric: # of privileged accounts

    Improvement

    Goal: Remove all unnecessary privileged accounts

    KPI: % of accounts with unnecessary privileges

    • Associated Metric 1: # of privileged accounts
    • Associated Metric 2: # of necessary privileged accounts
    • Associated Metric X

    Metric development example: Training and Awareness

    Implementation

    Goal: Implement training and awareness program

    KPI: % of organization trained

    Associated Metric: # of departments trained

    Improvement

    Goal: Improve time to report phishing

    KPI: % of phishing cases reported within target window

    • Associated Metric 1: # of phishing tests
    • Associated Metric 2: # of training sessions
    • Associated Metric X

    Metric development example: Key Performance Index

    Organizational Trends

    Goal: Predict Data Breach Likelihood

    • KPX 1: Insider Threat Potential
      • % of phishing cases reported within target window
        • Associated Metrics:
          • # of phishing tests
          • # of training sessions
      • % of critical patches fully deployed within target window
        • Associated Metrics:
          • # of critical vulnerabilities not patched
          • # of patches delayed due to lack of staff
      • % of accounts with unnecessary privileges
        • Associated Metrics:
          • # of privileged accounts
          • # of necessary privileged accounts
    • KPX 2: Data Leakage Issues
      • % of incidents related to unsecured databases
        • Associated Metrics:
          • # of unsecured databases
          • # of business-critical databases
      • % of misclassified data
        • Associated Metrics:
          • # of misclassified data reports
          • # of DLP false positives
      • % of incidents involving data-handling procedure violations.
        • Associated Metrics:
          • # of data processes with SOP
          • # of data processes without SOP
    • KPX 3: Endpoint Vulnerability Issues
      • % of unpatched critical systems
        • Associated Metrics:
          • # of unpatched systems
          • # of missed patches
      • % of incidents related to IoT
        • Associated Metrics:
          • # of IoT devices
          • # of IoT unsecure devices
      • % of incidents related to BYOD
        • Associated Metrics:
          • # of end users doing BYOD
          • # of BYOD incidents

    Develop Goals-Based KPIs

    1.2 120 minutes

    Materials

    • Info-Tech KPI Development Worksheets

    Participants

    • Security Team

    Output

    • List of KPIs for immediate and future use (can be used to populate Info-Tech’s KPI Development Tool).

    It’s your turn.

    Follow the example of the CISO in the previous slides and try developing KPIs for the SMART goals set in step 1.1.

    • To begin, decide if you are starting with implementation or improvement metrics.
    • Enter your goal in the space provided on the left-hand side and work towards the right, assigning a KPI to track progress towards your goal.
    • Use the associated metrics boxes to record what raw data will inform or influence your KPI.
      • Associated metrics are connected to the KPI box with a segmented line. This is because these associated metrics are not absolutely necessary to track progress towards your goal.
      • However, if a KPI starts trending in the wrong direction, these associated metrics would be used to determine where the problem has occurred.
    • If desired, bundle together several related KPIs to create a key performance index (KPX), which is used to forecast the likelihood of certain risks that would have a major business impact (e.g. potential for insider threat, or risk for a data breach).

    Record KPIs and assign them to goals in the Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool

    1.2 Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool

    Document KPI metadata in the tool and optionally assign them to a goal.

    Tab “3. Identify Goal KPIs” allows you to record each KPI and its accompanying metadata:

    • Source
    • Owner
    • Audience
    • KPI Target
    • Effort to Collect
    • Frequency of Collection
    • Comments

    Optionally, each KPI can be mapped to goals defined on tab “2. Identify Security Goals.”

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Ensure your metadata is comprehensive, complete, and realistic. A different employee should be able to use only the information outlined in the metadata to continue collecting measurements for the program.

    Complete Info-Tech’s KPI Development Worksheets

    1.2 KPI Development Worksheet

    Use these worksheets to model the maturation of your metrics program.

    Follow the examples contained in this slide deck and practice creating KPIs for:

    • Implementation metrics
    • Improvement metrics
    • Organizational trends metrics

    As well as drafting associated metrics to inform the KPIs you create.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Keep your metrics program manageable. This exercise may produce more goals, metrics, and KPIs than you deal with all at once. But that doesn’t mean you can’t save some for future use.

    Build an effort map to prioritize your SMART goals

    1.2 120 minutes

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes
    • Laptop

    Participants

    • Security team
    • Other stakeholders

    Output

    • Prioritized list of SMART goals

    An effort map visualizes a cost and benefit analysis. It is a quadrant output that visually shows how your SMART goals were assessed. Use the calculated Cost/Effort Rating and Benefit Rating values from tab “2. Identify Security Goals” of the Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool to aid this exercise.

    Steps:

    1. Establish the axes and colors for your effort map:
      1. X-axis (horizontal) - Security benefit
      2. Y-axis (vertical) - Overall cost/effort
      3. Sticky color - Business alignment
    2. Create sticky notes for each SMART goal and place them onto the effort map based on your determined axes.
      • Goal # Example Security Goal - Benefit (1-12) - Cost (1-12)

    The image shows a matric with four quadrants. The X-axis is labelled Low Benefit on the left side and High benefit on the right side. The Y-axis is labelled Low cost at the top and High cost at the bottom. The top left quadrant is labelled Could Dos, the top right quadrant is labelled Must Dos, the lower left quadrant is labelled May Not Dos, and the lower right quadrant is Should Dos. On the right, there are three post-it style notes, the blue one labelled High Alignment, the yellow labelled Medium Alignment, and the pink labelled Low Alignment.

    1.3 Implement and monitor the KPI to track goal progress

    Let’s put your KPI into action!

    Now that you’ve developed KPIs to monitor progress on your goals, it’s time to use them to drive security program maturation by following these steps:

    1. Review the KPI Development Worksheets (completed in step 1.2) for your prioritized list of goals. Be sure that you are able to track all of the associated metrics you have identified.
    2. Track the KPI and associated metrics using Info-Tech’s KPI Development Tool (see following slide).
    3. Update the data as necessary according to your SMART criteria of your goal.

    A Word on Key Risk Indicators...

    The term key risk indicator (KRI) gets used in a few different ways. However, in most cases, KRIs are closely associated with KPIs.

    1. KPIs and KRIs are the same thing
      • A KPI, at its core, is really a measure of risk. Sometimes it is more effective to emphasize that risk rather than performance (i.e. the data shows you’re not meeting your goal).
    2. KRI is KPI going the wrong way
      • After achieving the desired threshold for an improvement goal, our new goal is usually to maintain such a state. When this balance is upset, it indicates that settled risk has once again become active.
    3. KRI as a predictor of emerging risks
      • When organizations reach a highly mature state, they often start assessing how events external to the organization can affect the optimal performance of the organization. They monitor such events or trends and try to predict when the organization is likely to face additional risks.

    Track KPIs in the Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool

    1.3 Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool

    Once a metric has been measured, you have the option of entering that data into tab “4. Track Metrics” of the Tool.

    Tracking metric data in Info-Tech's tool provides the following data visualizations:

    • Sparklines at the end of each row (on tab “4. Track Metrics”) for a quick sense of metric performance.
    • A metrics dashboard (on tab “5. Graphs”) with three graph options in two color variations for each metric tracked in the tool, and an overall metric program health gauge.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Be diligent about measuring and tracking your metrics. Record any potential measurement biases or comments on measurement values to ensure you have a comprehensive record for future use. In the tool, this can be done by adding a comment to a cell with a metric measurement.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. While onsite, our analysts will work with you and your team to facilitate the activities outlined in the blueprint.

    Getting key stakeholders together to formalize the program, while getting started on data discovery and classification, allows you to kickstart the overall program.

    In addition, leverage over-the-phone support through Guided Implementations included in advisory memberships to ensure the continuous improvement of the classification program even after the workshop.

    Logan Rohde

    Research Analyst – Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Ian Mulholland

    Senior Research Analyst – Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Call 1-888-670-8889 for more information.

    Phase 2

    Adapt Your Reporting Strategy for Various Metric Types


    Phase 2

    2.1 Review best practices for presenting metrics

    2.2 Strategize your presentation based on metric type

    2.3 Tailor your presentation to your audience

    2.4 Use your metrics to create a story about risk

    2.5 Revise Metrics

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Develop reporting strategy
    • Use metrics to create a story about risk
    • Metrics revision

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team

    Outcomes of this phase

    • Metrics Dashboard
    • Metrics Presentation Deck

    Phase 2 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of two to three advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Adapt Your Reporting Strategy for Various Metric Types

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2-4 weeks

    Step 2.1 – 2.3: Best Practices and Reporting Strategy

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Do’s and Don’ts of reporting metrics.
    • Strategize presentation based on metric type.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Strategy development for 3-5 metrics

    Step 2.4 – 2.5: Build a Dashboard and Presentation Deck

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review strategies for reporting.
    • Compile a Key Performance Index.
    • Revise metrics.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Dashboard creation
    • Presentation development

    With these tools & templates:

    • Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool Template
    • Security Metrics KPX Dashboard Tool

    Phase 2 Results & Insights:

    • Completed reporting strategy with presentable dashboard

    2.1 Review best practices for presenting metrics

    Avoid technical details (i.e. raw data) by focusing on the KPI.

    • KPIs add context to understand the behavior and associated risks.

    Put things in terms of risk; it's the language you both understand.

    • This usually means explaining what will happen if not addressed and what you recommend.
    • There are always three options:
      • Address it completely
      • Address it partially
      • Do not address it (i.e. accept the risk)

    Explain why you’re monitoring metrics in terms of the goals you’re hoping to achieve.

    • This sets you up well to explain what you've been doing and why it's important for you to meet your goals.

    Choose between KPI or KRI as the presentation format.

    • Base your decision on whether you are trying to emphasize current success or risk.

    Match presentation with the audience.

    • Board presentations will be short; middle-management ones may be a bit longer.
    • Maximize your results by focusing on the minimum possible information to make sure you sufficiently get your point across.
    • With the board, plan on showing no more than three slides.

    Read between the lines.

    • It can be difficult to get time with the board, so you may find yourself in a trial and error position, so pay attention to cues or suggestions that indicate the board is interested in something.
    • If you can, make an ally to get the inside scoop on what the board cares about.

    Read the news if you’re stuck for content.

    • Board members are likely to have awareness (and interest) in large-scale risks like data breaches and ransomware.

    Present your metrics as a story.

    • Summarize how the security program looks to you and why the metrics lead you to see it this way.

    2.2 Strategize your presentation based on metric type (1 of 5)

    Metric Type: Initial Probe

    Scenario: Implementing your first metrics program.

    • All metrics programs start with determining what measurements you are capable of taking.

    Decisions: Do you have sufficient insight into the program? (i.e. do you need to acquire additional tools to collect metrics?)

    Strategy: If there are no barriers to this (e.g. budget), then focus your presentation on the fact that you are addressing the risk of not knowing what your organization's baseline state is and what potential issues exist but are unknown. This is likely the first phase of an improvement plan, so sketching the overall plan is a good idea too.

    • If budget is an issue, explain the risks associated with not knowing and what you would need to make it happen.

    Possible KPIs:

    • % of project complete.
    • % of systems that provide worthwhile metrics.

    Strategize your presentation based on metric type (2 of 5)

    Metric Type: Baseline Testing

    Scenario: You've taken the metrics to determine what your organization’s normal state is and you're now looking towards addressing your gaps or problem areas.

    Decisions: What needs to be prioritized first and why? Are additional resources required to make this happen?

    Strategy: Explain your impression of the organization's normal state and what you plan to do about it. In other words, what goals are you prioritizing and why? Be sure to note any challenges that may occur along the way (e.g. staffing).

    • If the board doesn't like to open their pocketbook, your best play is to explain what stands to happen (or is happening) if risks are not addressed.

    Possible KPIs:

    • % of goals complete.
    • % of metrics indicating urgent attention needed.

    Strategize your presentation based on metric type (3 of 5)

    Metric Type: Implementation

    Scenario: You are now implementing solutions to address your security priorities.

    Decisions: What, to you, would establish the basis of a program?

    Strategy: Focus on what you're doing to implement a certain security need, why, and what still needs to be done when you’re finished.

    • Example: To establish a training and awareness program, a good first step is to actually hold training sessions with each department. A single lecture is simple but something to build from. A good next step would be to hold regular training sessions or implement monthly phishing tests.

    Possible KPIs:

    • % of implementation complete (e.g. % of departments trained).

    Strategize your presentation based on metric type (4 of 5)

    Metric Type: Improvement

    Scenario: Now that a basic program has been established, you are looking to develop its maturity to boost overall performance (i.e. setting a new development goal).

    Decisions: What is a reasonable target, given the organization's risk tolerance and current state?

    Strategy: Explain that you're now working to tighten up the security program. Note that although things are improving, risk will always remain, so we need to keep it within a threshold that’s proportionate with our risk tolerance.

    • Example: Lower phishing-test click rate to 10% or less. Phishing will always be a risk, and just one slip up can have a huge effect on business (i.e. lost money).

    Possible KPIs:

    • % of staff passing the phishing test.
    • % of employees reporting phishing attempts within time window.

    Strategize your presentation based on metric type (5 of 5)

    Metric Type: Organizational Trends

    Scenario: You've reached a mature state and now how several KPIs being tracked. You begin to look at several KPIs together (i.e. a KPX) to assess the organization's exposure for certain broad risk trends.

    Decisions: Which KPIs can be used together to look at broader risks?

    Strategy: Focus on the overall likelihood of a certain risk and why you've chosen to assess it with your chosen KPIs. Spend some time discussing what factors affect the movement of these KPIs, demonstrating how smaller behaviors create a ripple effect that affects the organization’s exposure to large-scale risks.

    Possible KPX: Insider Threat Risk

    • % of phishing test failures.
    • % of critical patches missed.
    • % of accounts with unnecessary privileges.

    Change your strategy to address security challenges

    Even challenges can elicit useful metrics.

    Not every security program is capable of progressing smoothly through the various metric types. In some cases, it is impossible to move towards goals and metrics for implementation, improvement, or organizational trends because the security program lacks resources.

    Info-Tech Insight

    When your business is suffering from a lack of resources, acquiring these resources automatically becomes the goal that your metrics should be addressing. To do this, focus on what risks are being created because something is missing.

    When your security program is lacking a critical resource, such as staff or technology, your metrics should focus on what security processes are suffering due to this lack. In other words, what critical activities are not getting done?

    KPI Examples:

    • % of critical patches not deployed due to lack of staff.
    • % of budget shortfall to acquire vulnerability scanner.
    • % of systems with unknown risk due to lack of vulnerability scanner.

    2.3 Tailor presentation to your audience

    Metrics come in three forms...

    1. Raw Data

    • Taken from logs or reports, provides values but not context.
    • Useful for those with technical understanding of the organization’s security program.

    2. Management-Level

    • Raw data that has been contextualized and indicates performance of something (i.e. a KPI).
    • Useful for those with familiarity with the overall state of the security program but do not have a hands-on role.

    3. Board-Level

    • KPI with additional context indicating overall effect on the organization.
    • Useful for those removed from the security program but who need to understand the relationship between security, business goals, and cyber risk.

    For a metric to be useful it must...

    1. Be understood by the audience it’s being presented to.
      • Using the criteria on the left, choose which metric form is most appropriate.
    2. Indicate whether or not a certain target or goal is being met.
      • Don’t expect metrics to speak for themselves; explain what the indications and implications are.
    3. Drive some kind of behavioral or strategic change if that target or goal is not being met.
      • Metrics should either affirm that things are where you want them to be or compel you to take action to make an improvement. If not, it is not a worthwhile metric.

    As a general rule, security metrics should become decreasingly technical and increasingly behavior-based as they are presented up the organizational hierarchy.

    "The higher you travel up the corporate chain, the more challenging it becomes to create meaningful security metrics. Security metrics are intimately tied to their underlying technologies, but the last thing the CEO cares about is technical details." – Ben Rothke, Senior Information Security Specialist, Tapad.

    Plan for reporting success

    The future of your security program may depend on this presentation; make it count.

    Reporting metrics is not just another presentation. Rather, it is an opportunity to demonstrate and explain the value of security.

    It is also a chance to correct any misconceptions about what security does or how it works.

    Use the tips on the right to help make your presentation as relatable as possible.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is a difference between data manipulation and strategic presentation: the goal is not to bend the truth, but to present it in a way that allows you to show the board what they need to see and to explain it in terms familiar to them.

    General Tips for a Successful Presentation

    Avoid jargon; speak in practical terms

    • The board won’t receive your message if they can’t understand you.
    • Explain things as simply as you can; they only need to know enough to make decisions about addressing cyber risk.

    Address compliance

    • Boards are often interested in compliance, so be prepared to talk about it, but clarify that it doesn't equal security.
    • Instead, use compliance as a bridge to discussing areas of the security program that need attention.

    Have solid answers

    • Try to avoid answering questions with the answer, “It depends.”
      • Depends on what?
      • Why?
      • What do you recommend?
    • The board is relying on you for guidance, so be prepared to clarify what the board is asking (you may have to read between the lines to do this).
    • Also address the pain points of board members and have answers to their questions about how to resolve them.

    2.4 Use your metrics to create a story about risk

    Become the narrator of your organization’s security program.

    Security is about managing risk. This is also its primary value to the organization. As such, risk should be the theme of the story you tell.

    "Build a cohesive story that people can understand . . . Raw metrics are valuable from an operations standpoint, but at the executive level, it's about a cohesive story that helps executives understand the value of the security program and keeps the company moving forward. "– Adam Ely, CSO and Co-Founder, Bluebox Security, qtd. by Tenable, 2016

    How to Develop Your Own Story...

    1. Review your security program goals and the metrics you’re using to track progress towards them. Then, decide which metrics best tell this story (i.e. what you’re doing and why).
      • Less is more when presenting metrics, so be realistic about how much your audience can digest in one sitting.
      • Three metrics is usually a safe number; choose the ones that are most representative of your goals.
    2. Explain why you chose the goals you did (i.e. what risks were you addressing?). Then, make an honest assessment of how the security program is doing as far as meeting those goals:
      • What’s going well?
      • What still needs improvement?
      • What about your metrics suggests this?
    3. Address how risks have changed and explain your new recommended course of action.
      • What risks were present when you started?
      • What risks remain despite your progress?
      • How do these risks affect the business operation and what can security do to help?

    Story arc for security metrics

    The following model encapsulates the basic trajectory of all story development.

    Use this model to help you put together your story about risk.

    Introduction: Overall assessment of security program.

    Initial Incident: Determination of the problems and associated risks.

    Rising Action: Creation of goals and metrics to measure progress.

    Climax: Major development indicated by metrics.

    Falling Action: New insights gained about organization’s risks.

    Resolution: Recommendations based on observations.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Follow this model to ensure that your metrics presentation follows a coherent storyline that explains how you assessed the problem, why you chose to address it the way you did, what you learned in doing so, and finally what should be done next to boost the security program’s maturity.

    Use a nesting-doll approach when presenting metrics

    Move from high-level to low-level to support your claims

    1. Avoid the temptation to emphasize technical details when presenting metrics. The importance of a metric should be clear from just its name.
    2. This does not mean that technical details should be disregarded entirely. Your digestible, high-level metrics should be a snapshot of what’s taking place on the security ground floor.
    3. With this in mind, we should think of our metrics like a nesting doll, with each metrics level being supported by the one beneath it.

    ...How do you know that?

    Board-Level KPI

    Mgmt.-Level KPI

    Raw Data

    Think of your lower-level metrics as evidence to back up the story you are telling.

    When you’re asked how you arrived at a given conclusion, you know it’s time to go down a level and to explain those results.

    Think of this like showing your work.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This approach is built into the KPX reporting format, but can be used for all metric types by drawing from your associated metrics and goals already achieved.

    Use one of Info-Tech’s dashboards to present your metrics

    2.4 Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool

    Choose the dashboard tool that makes the most sense for you.

    Info-Tech provides two options for metric dashboards to meet the varying needs of our members.

    If you’re just starting out, you’ll likely be inclined towards the dashboard within the Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool (seen here).

    The image shows a screenshot of the Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool.

    But if you’ve already got several KPIs to report on, you may prefer the Security Metrics KPX Dashboard Tool, featured on the following slides.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Not all graphs will be needed in all cases. When presenting, consider taking screenshots of the most relevant data and displaying them in Info-Tech’s Board-Level Security Metrics Presentation Template.

    Use one of Info-Tech’s dashboards to present your metrics

    2.4 Security Metrics KPX Dashboard

    Use Info-Tech’s Security Metrics KPX Dashboard to track and show your work.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Definitions section of the Security Metrics KPX Dashboard

    1. Start by customizing the definitions on tab 1 to match your organization’s understanding of high, medium, and low risk across the three impact areas (functional, informational, and recoverability).
    2. Next, enter up to 5 business goals that your security program supports.

    Use one of Info-Tech’s dashboards to present your metrics

    2.4 Security Metrics KPX Dashboard

    Use Info-Tech’s Security Metrics KPX Dashboard to track and show your work.

    The image shows a screenshot of tab 2 of the Security Metrics KPX Dashboard.

    1. On tab 2, enter the large-scale risk you are tracking
    2. Proceed by naming each of your KPXs after three broad risks that – to you – contribute to the large-scale risk.

    Use one of Info-Tech’s dashboards to present your metrics

    2.4 Security Metrics KPX Dashboard

    Use Info-Tech’s Security Metrics KPX Dashboard to track and show your work.

    The image is the same screenshot from the previous section, of tab 2 of the Security Metrics KPX Dashboard.

    1. Then, add up to five KPIs aimed at managing more granular risks that contribute to the broad risk.
    2. Assess the frequency and impact associated with these more granular risks to determine how likely it is to contribute to the broad risk the KPX is tracking.

    Use one of Info-Tech’s dashboards to present your metrics

    2.4 Security Metrics KPX Dashboard

    Use Info-Tech’s Security Metrics KPX Dashboard to track and show your work.

    The image is the same screenshot of tab 2 of the Security Metrics KPX Dashboard.

    1. Repeat as necessary for the other KPXs on tab 2.
    2. Repeat steps 3-7 for up to two more large-scale risks and associated KPXs on tabs 3 and 4.

    Use one of Info-Tech’s dashboards to present your metrics

    2.4 Security Metrics KPX Dashboard

    Use Info-Tech’s Security Metrics KPX Dashboard to track and show your work.

    The image shows a chart titled Business Alignment, with sample Business Goals and KPXs filled in.

    1. If desired, complete the Business Alignment evaluation (located to the right of KPX 2 on tabs 2-4) to demonstrate how well security is supporting business goals.

    "An important key to remember is to be consistent and stick to one framework once you've chosen it. As you meet with the same audiences repeatedly, having the same framework for reference will ensure that your communications become smoother over time." – Caroline Wong, Chief Strategy Officer, Cobalt.io

    Use one of Info-Tech’s dashboards to present your metrics

    2.4 Security Metrics KPX Dashboard

    Use Info-Tech’s Security Metrics KPX Dashboard to track and show your work.

    The image shows a screenshot of the dashboard on tab 5 of the Security Metrics KPX Dashboard.

    1. Use the dashboard on tab 5 to help you present your security metrics to senior leadership.

    Use one of Info-Tech’s dashboards to present your metrics

    2.4 Security Metrics KPX Dashboard

    Use Info-Tech’s Security Metrics KPX Dashboard to track and show your work.

    The image shows the same screenshot of Tab 2 of the Security Metrics KPX Dashboard that was shown in previous sections.

    Best Practice:

    This tool helps you convert your KPIs into the language of risk by assessing frequency and severity, which helps to make the risk relatable for senior leadership. However, it is still useful to track fluctuations in terms of percentage. To do this, track changes in the frequency, severity, and trend scores from quarter to quarter.

    Customize Info-Tech’s Security Metrics Presentation Template

    2.4 Board-Level Security Metrics Presentation Template

    Use the Board-Level Security Metrics Presentation Template deck to help structure and deliver your metrics presentation to the board.

    To make the dashboard slide, simply copy and paste the charts from the dashboard tool and arrange the images as needed.

    Adapt the status report and business alignment slides to reflect the story about risk that you are telling.

    2.5 Revise your metrics

    What's next?

    Now that you’ve made it through your metrics presentation, it’s important to reassess your goals with feedback from your audience in mind. Use the following workflow.

    The image shows a flowchart titled Metrics-Revision Workflow. The flowchart begins with the question Have you completed your goal? and then works through multiple potential answers.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. While onsite, our analysts will work with you and your team to facilitate the activities outlined in the blueprint.

    Getting key stakeholders together to formalize the program, while getting started on data discovery and classification, allows you to kickstart the overall program.

    In addition, leverage over-the-phone support through Guided Implementations included in advisory memberships to ensure the continuous improvement of the classification program even after the workshop.

    Logan Rohde

    Research Analyst – Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Ian Mulholland

    Senior Research Analyst – Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Call 1-888-670-8889 for more information.

    Insight breakdown

    Metrics lead to maturity, not vice versa.

    • Tracking metrics helps you assess progress and regress in your security program, which helps you quantify the maturity gains you’ve made.

    Don't lose hope if you lack resources to move beyond baseline testing.

    • Even if you are struggling to pull data, you can still draw meaningful metrics. The percent or ratio of processes or systems you lack insight into can be very valuable, as it provides a basis to initiate a risk-based discussion with management about the organization's security blind spots.

    The best metrics are tied to goals.

    • Tying your metrics to goals ensures that you are collecting metrics for a specific purpose rather than just to watch the numbers change.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Current maturity assessment of security areas
    • Setting SMART goals
    • Metric types
    • KPI development
    • Goals prioritization
    • Reporting and revision strategies

    Processes Optimized

    • Metrics development
    • Metrics collection
    • Metrics reporting

    Deliverables Completed

    • KPI Development Worksheet
    • Security Metrics Determination and Tracking Tool
    • Security Metrics KPX Dashboard Tool
    • Board-Level Security Metrics Presentation Template

    Research contributors and experts

    Mike Creaney, Senior Security Engineer at Federal Home Loan Bank of Chicago

    Peter Chestna, Director, Enterprise Head of Application Security at BMO Financial Group

    Zane Lackey, Co-Founder / Chief Security Officer at Signal Sciences

    Ben Rothke, Senior Information Security Specialist at Tapad

    Caroline Wong, Chief Strategy Officer at Cobalt.io

    2 anonymous contributors

    Related Info-Tech research

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    Tailor best practices to effectively manage information security.

    Implement a Security Governance and Management Program

    Align security and business objectives to get the greatest benefit from both.

    Bibliography

    Capability Maturity Model Integration (CMMI). ISACA. Carnegie Mellon University.

    Ely, Adam. “Choose Security Metrics That Tell a Story.” Using Security Metrics to Drive Action: 33 Experts Share How to Communicate Security Program Effectiveness to Business Executives and the Board Eds. 2016. Web.

    https://www.ciosummits.com/Online_Assets_Tenable_eBook-_Using_Security_Metrics_to_Drive_Action.pdf

    ISACA. “Board Director Concerns about Cyber and Technology Risk.” CSX. 11 Sep. 2018. Web.

    Rothke, Ben. “CEOs Require Security Metrics with a High-Level Focus.” Using Security Metrics to Drive Action: 33 Experts Share How to Communicate Security Program Effectiveness to Business Executives and the Board Eds. 2016. Web.

    https://www.ciosummits.com/Online_Assets_Tenable_eBook-_Using_Security_Metrics_to_Drive_Action.pdf

    Wong, Caroline. Security Metrics: A Beginner’s Guide. McGraw Hill: New York, 2012.

    Decide if You Are Ready for SAFe

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}355|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Complex application landscapes require delivery teams to work together and coordinate changes across multiple product lines and releases.
    • Leadership wants to balance strategic goals with localized prioritization of changes.
    • Traditional methodologies are not well suited to support enterprise agility: Scrum doesn’t scale easily, and Waterfall is too slow and risky.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    SAFe’s popularity is largely due to its structural resemblance to enterprise portfolio and project planning with top-down prioritization and decision making. This directly conflicts with Agile’s purpose and principles of empowerment and agility.

    • Poor culture, processes, governance, and leadership will disrupt any methodology. Many drivers for SAFe could be solved by improving and standardizing development and release management within current methodologies.
    • Few organizations are capable or should be applying a pure SAFe framework. Successful organizations have adopted and modified SAFe frameworks to best fit their needs, teams, value streams, and maturity.

    Impact and Result

    • Start with a clear understanding of your needs, constraints, goals, and culture.
      • Start with an Agile readiness assessment. Agile is core to value realization.
      • Take the time to determine your drivers and goals.
      • If SAFe is right for you, selecting the right implementation partner is key.
    • Plan SAFe as a long-term enterprise cultural transformation requiring changes at all levels.

    Decide if You Are Ready for SAFe Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Decide if You Are Ready for SAFe Storyboard – Research to help you understand where SAFe fits into delivery methodologies and determine if SAFe is right for your organization.

    This deck will guide you to define your primary drivers for SAFe, assess your Agile readiness, define enablers and blockers, estimate implementation risk, and start your SAFe implementation plan.

    • Decide if You Are Ready for SAFe Storyboard

    2. Scaled Agile Readiness Assessment – A tool to conduct an Agile readiness survey.

    Start your journey with a clear understanding about the level of Agile and product maturity throughout the organization. Each area that lacks strength should be evaluated further and added to your journey map.

    • Scaled Agile Readiness Assessment

    3. SAFe Transformation Playbook – A template to build a change management plan to guide your transition.

    Define clear ownership for every critical step.

    • SAFe Transformation Playbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Decide if You Are Ready for SAFe

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand where SAFe fits into delivery methodologies and SDLCs

    The Purpose

    Understand what is driving your proposed SAFe transformation and if it is the right framework for your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Better understanding of your scaled agile needs and drivers

    Activities

    1.1 Define your primary drivers for SAFe.

    1.2 Create your own list of pros and cons of SAFe.

    Outputs

    List of primary drivers for SAFe

    List of pros and cons of SAFe

    2 Determine if you are ready for SAFe

    The Purpose

    Identify factors influencing a SAFe implementation and ensure teams are aware and prepared.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Starting understanding of your organization’s readiness to implement a SAFe framework

    Activities

    2.1 Assess your Agile readiness.

    2.2 Define enablers and blockers of scaling Agile delivery.

    2.3 Estimate your SAFe implementation risk.

    2.4 Start your SAFe implementation plan.

    Outputs

    Agile readiness assessment results

    List of enablers and blockers of scaling Agile delivery

    Estimated SAFe implementation risk

    High-level SAFe implementation plan template

    Further reading

    Decide if You Are Ready for SAFe

    Approach the Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe) with open eyes and an open wallet.

    Analyst Perspective

    Ensure that SAFe is the right move before committing.

    Waterfall is dead. Or obsolete at the very least.

    Organizations cannot wait months or years for product, service, application, and process changes. They need to embrace business agility to respond to opportunities more quickly and deliver value sooner. Agile established values and principles that have promoted smaller cycle times, greater connections between teams, improved return on investment (ROI) prioritization, and improved team empowerment.

    Where organizations continue to struggle is matching localized Scrum teams with enterprise initiatives. This struggle is compounded by legacy executive planning cycles, which undermine Agile team authority. SAFe has provided a series of frameworks to help organizations deal with these issues. It combines enterprise planning and alignment with cross-team collaboration.

    Don't rely on popularity or marketing to make your scaled Agile decision. SAFe is a highly disruptive transformation, and it requires extensive training, coaching, process changes, and time to implement. Without the culture shift to an Agile mindset at all levels, SAFe becomes a mirror of Waterfall processes dressed in SAFe names. Furthermore, SAFe itself will not fix problems with communication, requirements, development, testing, release, support, or governance. You will still need to fix these problems within the SAFe framework to be successful.

    Hans Eckman, Principal Research Director, Applications Delivery and Management

    Hans Eckman
    Principal Research Director, Applications Delivery and Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech's Approach
    • Complex application landscapes require delivery teams to work together and coordinate changes across multiple product lines and releases.
    • Leadership wants to maintain executive strategic planning with faster delivery of changes.
    • Traditional methodologies are not well suited to support enterprise agility.
      • Waterfall is too slow, inefficient, and full of accumulated risk.
      • Scrum is not easy to scale and requires behavioral changes.
    • Enterprise transformations are never fast or easy, and SAFe is positioned as a complete replacement of your delivery practices.
    • Teams struggle with SAFe's rigid framework, interconnected methodologies, and new terms.
    • Few organizations are successful at implementing a pure SAFe framework.
    • Organizations without scaled product families have difficulties organizing SAFe teams into proper value streams.
    • Team staffing and stability are hard to resolve.
    Start with a clear understanding of your needs, constraints, goals, and culture.
    • Developing an Agile mindset is core to value realization. Start with Info-Tech's Agile Readiness Assessment.
    • Take the time to identify your drivers and goals.
    • If SAFe is right for you, build a transformation plan and select the right implementation partner.
    Plan SAFe as a long-term enterprise cultural transformation, requiring changes at all levels.

    Info-Tech Insight
    SAFe is a highly disruptive enterprise transformation, and it won't solve your organizational delivery challenges by itself. Start with an open mind, and understand what is needed to support a multi-year cultural transition. Decide how far and how fast you are willing to transform, and make sure that you have the right transformation and coaching partner in place. There is no right software development lifecycle (SDLC) or methodology. Find or create the methodology that best aligns to your needs and goals.

    Agile's Four Core Values

    "...while there is value in the items on the right, we value the items on the left more."
    - The Agile Manifesto

    STOP! If you're not Agile, don't start with SAFe.

    Agile over SAFe

    Successful SAFe requires an Agile mindset at all levels.

    Be aware of common myths around Agile and SAFe

    SAFe does not...

    1...solve development and communication issues.

    2...ensure that you will finish requirements faster.

    3...mean that you do not need planning and documentation.

    "Without proper planning, organizations can start throwing more resources at the work, which spirals into the classic Waterfall issues of managing by schedule."
    – Kristen Morton, Associate Implementation Architect,
    OneShield Inc. (Info-Tech Interview)

    Info-Tech Insight
    Poor culture, processes, governance, and leadership will disrupt any methodology. Many drivers for SAFe could be solved by improving and standardizing development and release management within current methodologies.

    Review the drivers that are motivating your organization to adopt and scale Agile practices

    Functional groups have their own drivers to adopt Agile development processes, practices, and techniques (e.g. to improve collaboration, decrease churn, or increase automation). Their buy-in to scaling Agile is just as important as the buy-in of stakeholders.

    If a group's specific needs and drivers are not addressed, its members may develop negative sentiments toward Agile development. These negative sentiments can affect their ability to see the benefits of Agile, and they may return to their old habits once the opportunity arises.

    It is important to find opportunities in which both business objectives and functional group drivers can be achieved by scaling Agile development. This can motivate teams to continuously improve and adhere to the new environment, and it will maintain business buy-in. It can also be used to justify activities that specifically address functional group drivers.

    Examples of Motivating Drivers for Scaling Agile

    • Improve artifact handoffs between development and operations.
    • Increase collaboration among development teams.
    • Reveal architectural and system risks early.
    • Expedite the feedback loop from support.
    • Improve capacity management.
    • Support development process innovation.
    • Create a safe environment to discuss concerns.
    • Optimize value streams.
    • Increase team engagement and comradery.

    Don't start with scaled Agile!

    Scaling Agile is a way to optimize product management and product delivery in application lifecycle management practices. Do not try to start with SAFe when the components are not yet in place.

    Scaled Agile


    Thought model describing how Agile connects Product Management to Product Delivery to elevate the entire Solution Lifecycle.

    Scale Agile delivery to improve cross-functional dependencies and releases

    Top Business Concerns When Scaling Agile

    1 Organizational Culture: The current culture may not support team empowerment, learning from failure, and other Agile principles. SAFe also allows top-down decisions to persist.

    2 Executive Support: Executives may not dedicate resources, time, and effort into removing obstacles to scaling Agile because of lack of business buy-in.

    3 Team Coordination: Current collaboration structures may not enable teams and stakeholders to share information freely and integrate workflows easily.

    4 Business Misalignment: Business vision and objectives may be miscommunicated early in development, risking poorly planned and designed initiatives and low-quality products.

    Extending collaboration is the key to success.

    Uniting stakeholders and development into a single body is the key to success. Assess the internal and external communication flow and define processes for planning and tracking work so that everyone is aware of how to integrate, communicate, and collaborate.

    The goal is to enable faster reaction to customer needs, shorter release cycles, and improved visibility of the project's progress with cross-functional and diverse conversations.

    Advantages of successful SAFe implementations

    Once SAFe is complete and operational, organizations have seen measurable benefits:

    • Multiple frameworks to support different levels of SAFe usage
    • Deliberate and consistent planning and coordination
    • Coordinating dependencies within value streams
    • Reduced time to delivery
    • Focus on customers and end users
    • Alignment to business goals and value streams
    • Increased employee engagement

    Sources: TechBeacon, 2019; Medium, 2020; "Benefits," Scaled Agile, 2023;
    "Pros and Cons," PremierAgile, n.d.; "Scaling Agile Challenges," PremierAgile, n.d.

    Advantages of successful SAFe implementations

    Source: "Benefits," Scaled Agile, 2023

    Recognize the difference between Scrum teams and the Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe)

    SAFe provides a framework that aligns Scrum teams into coordinated release trains driven by top-down prioritization.

    Scrum vs SAFe

    Develop Your Agile Approach for a Successful Transformation

    Source: Scaled Agile, Inc.

    Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Framework

    Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Framework

    Info-Tech Insight
    SAFe is an enterprise, culture, and process transformation that impacts all IT services. Some areas of Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Framework have higher impacts and require special attention. Plan to include transformation support for each of these topics during your SAFe implementation. SAFe will not fix broken processes on its own.

    Without adopting an Agile mindset, SAFe becomes Waterfall with SAFe terminology

    Waterfall with SAFe terminology

    Source: Scaled Agile, Inc.

    Info-Tech Insight
    When first implementing SAFe, organizations reproduce their organizational design and Waterfall delivery structures with SAFe terms:

    • Delivery Manager = Release Train Engineer
    • Stakeholder/Sponsor = Product Manager
    • Release = Release Train
    • Project/Program = Project or Portfolio

    SAFe isn't without risks or challenges

    Risks and Causes of Failed SAFe Transformations

    • SAFe conflicts with legacy cultures and delivery processes.
    • SAFe promotes continued top-down decisions, undermining team empowerment.
    • Scaled product families are required to define proper value streams.
    • Team empowerment and autonomy are reduced.
    • SAFe activities are poorly executed.
    • There are high training and coaching costs.
    • Implementation takes a long time.
    • End-to-end delivery management tools aligned to SAFe are required.
    • Legacy delivery challenges are not specifically solved with SAFe.
    • SAFe is designed to work for large-scale development teams.

    Challenges

    • Adjusting to a new set of terms for common roles, processes, and activities
    • Executing planning cycles
    • Defining features and epics at the right level
    • Completing adequate requirements
    • Defining value streams
    • Coordinating releases and release trains
    • Providing consistent quality

    Sources: TechBeacon, 2019; Medium, 2020; "Benefits," Scaled Agile, 2023;
    "Pros and Cons," PremierAgile, n.d.; "Scaling Agile Challenges," PremierAgile, n.d.

    Focus on your core competencies instead

    Before undertaking an enterprise transformation, consider improving the underlying processes that will need to be fixed anyway. Fixing these areas while implementing SAFe compounds the effort and disruption.

    Product Delivery

    Product Management

    "But big-bang transitions are hard. They require total leadership commitment, a receptive culture, enough talented and experienced agile practitioners to staff hundreds of teams without depleting other capabilities, and highly prescriptive instruction manuals to align everyone's approach."
    – "Agile at Scale," Harvard Business Review

    Insight Summary

    Overarching insight
    SAFe is a highly disruptive enterprise transformation, and it will not solve your organizational delivery challenges by itself. Start with an open mind, and understand what is needed to support a multi-year cultural transition. Decide how far and fast you are willing to transform and make sure that you have the right transformation and coaching partner in place.

    SAFe conflicts with core Agile principles.
    The popularity of SAFe is largely due to its structural resemblance to enterprise portfolio and project planning with top-down prioritization and decision-making. This directly conflicts with Agile's purpose and principles of empowerment and agility.

    SAFe and Agile will not solve enterprise delivery challenges.
    Poor culture, processes, governance, and leadership will disrupt any methodology. Many issues with drivers for SAFe could be solved by improving development and release management within current methodologies.

    Most organizations should not be using a pure SAFe framework
    Few organizations are capable of, or should be, applying a pure SAFe framework. Successful organizations have adopted and modified SAFe frameworks to best fit their needs, teams, value streams, and maturity.

    Without an Agile mindset, SAFe will be executed as Waterfall stages using SAFe terminology.
    Groups that "Do Agile" are not likely to embrace the behavioral changes needed to make any scaled framework effective. SAFe becomes a series of Waterfall PIs using SAFe terminology.

    Your transformation does not start with SAFe.
    Start your transition to scaled Agile with a maturity assessment for current delivery practices. Fixing broken process, tools, and teams must be at the heart of your initiative.

    Blueprint Deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key Deliverable

    SAFe Transformation Playbook

    Build a transformation and organizational change management plan to guide your transition. Define clear ownership for every critical step.

    Scaled Agile Readiness Assessment

    Conduct the Agile readiness survey. Without an Agile mindset, SAFe will follow Waterfall or WaterScrumFall practices.

    Case Study

    Spotify's approach to Agile at scale

    INDUSTRY: Digital Media
    SOURCE: Unified Communications and Collaborations

    Spotify's Scaling Agile Initiative

    With rapid user adoption growth (over 15 million active users in under six years), Spotify had to find a way to maintain an Agile mindset across 30+ teams in three different cities, while maintaining the benefits of cross-functional collaboration and flexibility for future growth.

    Spotify's Approach

    Spotify found a fit-for-purpose way for the organization to increase team autonomy without losing the benefits of cross-team communication from economics of scale. Spotify focused on identifying dependencies that block or slow down work through a mix of reprioritization, reorganization, architectural changes, and technical solutions. The organization embraced dependencies that led to cross-team communication and built in the necessary flexibility to allow Agile to grow with the organization.

    Spotify's scaling Agile initiative used interview processes to identify what each team depended on and how those dependencies blocked or slowed the team.

    Squad refers to an autonomous Agile release team in this case study.

    Case Study

    Suncorp instilled dedicated communication streams to ensure cross-role collaboration and culture.

    INDUSTRY: Insurance
    SOURCE: Agile India, International Conference on Agile and Lean Software Development, 2014

    Challenge Solution Results
    • Suncorp Group wanted to improve delivery and minimize risk. Suncorp realized that it needed to change its project delivery process to optimize business value delivery.
    • With five core business units, over 15,000 employees, and US$96 billion in assets, Suncorp had to face a broad set of project coordination challenges.
    • Suncorp decided to deliver all IT projects using Agile.
    • Suncorp created a change program consisting of five main streams of work, three of which dealt with the challenges specific to Agile culture:
      • People: building culture, leadership, and support
      • Communication: ensuring regular employee collaboration
      • Capabilities: blending training and coaching
    • Sponsorship from management and champions to advocate Agile were key to ensure that everyone was unified in a common purpose.
    • Having a dedicated communication stream was vital to ensure regular sharing of success and failure to enable learning.
    • Having a structured, standard approach to execute the planned culture change was integral to success.

    Case Study

    Nationwide embraces DevOps and improves software quality.

    INDUSTRY: Insurance
    SOURCE: Agile India, International Conference on Agile and Lean Software Development, 2014

    Challenge Solution Results
    • In the past, Nationwide primarily followed a Waterfall development process. However, this method created conflicts between IT and business needs.
    • The organization began transitioning from Waterfall to Agile development. It has seen early successes with Agile: decrease in defects per release and more success in meeting delivery times.
    • Nationwide needed to respond more efficiently to changing market requirements and regulations and to increase speed to market.
    • Nationwide decided to take a DevOps approach to application development and delivery.
    • IT wanted to perform continuous integration and deployment in its environments.
    • Cross-functional teams were organically created, made up of members from the business and multiple IT groups, including development and operations.
    • DevOps allowed Nationwide to be more Agile and more responsive to its customers.
    • Teams were able to perform acceptance testing with their customers in parallel with development. This allowed immediate feedback to help steer the project in the right direction.
    • DevOps improved code quality by 50% over a three-year period and reduced user downtime by 70%.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Call #1:

    Scope your requirements, objectives, and specific challenges.

    Call #2:

    1.1.1 Define your primary drivers for SAFe.

    1.1.2 Create your own list of pros and cons of SAFe.

    Call #3:

    1.2.1 Assess your Agile readiness.

    1.2.2 Define enablers and blockers for scaling Agile delivery.

    1.2.3 Estimate your SAFe implementation risk.

    Call #4:

    1.2.4 Start your SAFe implementation plan.

    Summarize your results and plan your next steps.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is one to four calls over the course of one to six weeks.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Planning Step 1.1 Step 1.2
    Identify your stakeholders. Step 1.1 Understand where SAFe fits into your delivery methodologies and SDLCs. Step 1.2 Determine if you are ready for SAFe.
    Activities 1. Determine stakeholders and subject matter experts.
    2. Coordinate timing and participation.
    3. Set goals and expectations for the workshop.
    1.1.1 Define your primary drivers for SAFe.
    1.1.2 Create your own list of pros and cons of SAFe
    1.2.1 Assess your Agile readiness.
    1.2.2 Define enablers and blockers for scaling Agile delivery.
    1.2.3 Estimate your SAFe implementation risk.
    1.2.4 Start your SAFe implementation plan.
    Deliverables
  • Workshop schedule
  • Participant commitment
    • List of primary drivers for SAFe
    • List of pros and cons of SAFe
    • Agile Readiness Assessment results
    • List of enablers and blockers for scaling Agile delivery
    • Estimated SAFe implementation risk
    • Template for high-level SAFe implementation plan

    Supporting Your Agile Journey

    Enable Product Agile Delivery Executive Workshop Develop Your Agile Approach Spread Best Practices with an Agile Center of Excellence Implement DevOps Practices That Work Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile
    Number One Number two Number Three Number Four Number Five

    Align and prepare your IT leadership teams.

    Audience: Senior and IT delivery leadership

    Size: 8-16 people

    Time: 7 hours

    Tune Agile team practices to fit your organization culture.

    Audience: Agile pilot teams and subject matter experts (SMEs)

    Size: 10-20 people

    Time: 4 days

    Leverage Agile thought leadership to expand your best practices.

    Audience: Agile SMEs and thought leaders

    Size: 10-20 people

    Time: 4 days

    Build a continuous integration and continuous delivery pipeline.

    Audience: Product owners (POs) and delivery team leads

    Size: 10-20 people

    Time: 4 days

    Execute a disciplined approach to rolling out Agile methods.

    Audience: Agile steering team and SMEs

    Size: 3-8 people

    Time: 3 hours

    Repeat Legend

    Sample agendas are included in the following sections for each of these topics.

    Your Product Transformation Journey

    1. Make the Case for Product Delivery2. Enable Product Delivery - Executive Workshop3. Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision4. Deliver Digital Products at Scale5. Mature and Scale Product Ownership
    Align your organization with the practices to deliver what matters most.Participate in a one-day executive workshop to help you align and prepare your leadership.Enhance product backlogs, roadmapping, and strategic alignment.Scale product families to align with your organization's goals.Align and mature your product owners.

    Audience: Senior executives and IT leadership

    Size: 8-16 people

    Time: 6 hours

    Repeat Symbol

    Audience: Product owners/managers

    Size: 10-20 people

    Time: 3-4 days

    Repeat Symbol

    Audience: Product owners/managers

    Size: 10-20 people

    Time: 3-4 days

    Audience: Product owners/managers

    Size: 8-16 people

    Time: 2-4 days

    Repeat Symbol

    Repeat Legend

    Phase 1

    Determine if SAFe Is Right for Your Organization

    Phase 1
    1.1 Understand where SAFe fits into your delivery methodologies and SDLCs
    1.2 Determine if you are ready for SAFe (fit for purpose)

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • 1.1.1 Define your primary drivers for SAFe.
    • 1.1.2 Create your own list of pros and cons of SAFe.
    • 1.2.1 Assess your Agile readiness.
    • 1.2.2 Define enablers and blockers for scaling Agile delivery.
    • 1.2.3 Estimate your SAFe implementation risk.
    • 1.2.4 Start your SAFe implementation plan.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior leadership
    • IT leadership
    • Project Management Office
    • Delivery managers
    • Product managers/owners
    • Agile thought leaders and coaches
    • Compliance teams leads

    Step 1.1

    Understand where SAFe fits into your delivery methodologies and SDLCs

    Activities
    1.1.1 Define your primary drivers for SAFe
    1.1.2 Create your own list of pros and cons of SAFe

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Outcomes of this step:

    • List of primary drivers for SAFe
    • List of pros and cons of SAFe

    Agile's Four Core Values

    "...while there is value in the items on the right, we value the items on the left more."
    – The Agile Manifesto

    STOP! If you're not Agile, don't start with SAFe.

    Agile's Four Core Values

    Successful SAFe requires an Agile mindset at all levels.

    Be aware of common myths around Agile and SAFe

    SAFe does not...

    1...solve development and communication issues.

    2...ensure that you will finish requirements faster.

    3...mean that you do not need planning and documentation.

    "Without proper planning, organizations can start throwing more resources at the work, which spirals into the classic Waterfall issues of managing by schedule."
    – Kristen Morton, Associate Implementation Architect,
    OneShield Inc. (Info-Tech Interview)

    Info-Tech Insight
    SAFe only provides a framework and steps where these issues can be resolved.

    The importance of values and principles

    Modern development practices (such as Agile, Lean, and DevOps) are based on values and principles. This supports the move away from command-and-control management to self-organizing teams.

    Values

    • Values represent your team's core beliefs and capture what you want to instill in your team.

    Principles

    • Principles represent methods for solving a problem or deciding.
    • Given that principles are rooted in specifics, they can change more frequently because they are both fallible and conducive to learning.

    Consider the guiding principles of your application team

    Teams may have their own perspectives on how they deliver value and their own practices for how they do this. These perspectives can help you develop guiding principles for your own team to explain your core values and cement your team's culture. Guiding principles can help you:

    • Enable the appropriate environment to foster collaboration within current organizational, departmental, and cultural constraints
    • Foster the social needs that will engage and motivate your team in a culture that suits its members
    • Ensure that all teams are driven toward the same business and team goals, even if other teams are operating differently
    • Build organizational camaraderie aligned with corporate strategies

    Info-Tech Insight
    Following methodologies by the book can be detrimental if they do not fit your organization's needs, constraints, and culture. The ultimate goal of all teams is to deliver value. Any practices or activities that drive teams away from this goal should be removed or modified.

    Review the drivers that are motivating your organization to adopt and scale Agile practices

    Functional groups have their own drivers to adopt Agile development processes, practices, and techniques (e.g. to improve collaboration, decrease churn, or increase automation). Their buy-in to scaling Agile is just as important as the buy-in of stakeholders.

    By not addressing a group's specific needs and drivers, the resulting negative sentiments of its members toward Agile development can affect their ability to see the benefits of Agile and they may return to old habits once the opportunity arises.

    Find opportunities in which both business objectives and functional group drivers can be achieved with scaling Agile development. This alignment can motivate teams to continuously improve and adhere to the new environment, and it will maintain business buy-in. This assessment can also be used to justify activities that specifically address functional group drivers.

    Examples of Motivating Drivers for Scaling Agile

    • Improve artifact hand-offs between development and operations.
    • Increase collaboration among development teams.
    • Reveal architectural and system risks early.
    • Expedite the feedback loop from support.
    • Improve capacity management.
    • Support development process innovation.
    • Create a safe environment to discuss concerns.
    • Optimize value streams.
    • Increase team engagement and comradery.

    Exercise 1.1.1 Define your primary drivers for SAFe

    30 minutes

    • Brainstorm a list of drivers for scaling Agile.
    • Build a value canvas to help capture and align team expectations.
    • Identify jobs or functions that will be impacted by SAFe.
    • List your current pains and gains.
    • List the pain relievers and gain creators.
    • Identify the deliverable needed for a successful transformation.
    • Complete your SAFe value canvas in your SAFe Transformation Playbook.

    Enter the results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook.

    Input
    • Organizational understanding
    • Existing Agile delivery strategic plans
    Output
    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    SAFe Value Canvas Template

    SAFe Value Canvas Template

    Case Study

    A public utilities organization steadily lost stakeholder engagement, diminishing product quality.

    INDUSTRY: Public Utilities
    SOURCE: Info-Tech Expert Interview

    Challenge

    • The goal of a public utilities organization was to adopt Agile so it could quickly respond to changes and trim costs.
    • The organization decided to scale Agile using a structured approach. It began implementation with IT teams that were familiar with Agile principles and leveraged IT seniors as Agile champions. To ensure that Agile principles were widespread, the organization decided to develop a training program with vendor assistance.
    • As Agile successes began to be seen, the organization decided to increase the involvement of business teams gradually so it could organically grow the concept within the business.

    Results

    • Teams saw significant success with many projects because they could easily demonstrate deliverables and clearly show the business value. Over time, the teams used Agile for large projects with complex processing needs.
    • Teams continued to deliver small projects successfully, but business engagement waned over time. Some of the large, complex applications they delivered using Agile lacked the necessary functionality and appropriate controls and, in some cases, did not have the ability to scale due to a poor architectural framework. These applications required additional investment, which far exceeded the original cost forecasts.

    While Agile and product development are intertwined, they are not the same!

    Delivering products does not necessarily require an Agile mindset. However, Agile methods help to facilitate the journey because product thinking is baked into them.

    Agile and product development are intertwined

    Recognize the difference between Scrum teams and the Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe)

    SAFe provides a framework that aligns Scrum teams into coordinated release trains driven by top-down prioritization.

    Difference between Scrum and SAFe

    Develop Your Agile Approach for a Successful Transformation

    Without adopting an Agile mindset, SAFe becomes Waterfall with SAFe terminology

    Waterfall with SAFe terminology

    Info-Tech Insight
    When first implementing SAFe, organizations reproduce their organizational design and Waterfall delivery structures with SAFe terms:

    • Delivery Manager = Release Train Engineer
    • Stakeholder/Sponsor = Product Manager
    • Release = Release Train
    • Project/Program = Project or Portfolio

    Advantages of successful SAFe implementations

    Once SAFe is complete and operational, organizations have seen measurable benefits:

    • Multiple frameworks to support different levels of SAFe usage
    • Deliberate and consistent planning and coordination
    • Coordinating dependencies within value streams
    • Reduced time to delivery
    • Focus on customers and end users
    • Alignment to business goals and value streams
    • Increased employee engagement

    Sources: TechBeacon, 2019; Medium, 2020; "Benefits," Scaled Agile, 2023;
    "Pros and Cons," PremierAgile, n.d.; "Scaling Agile Challenges," PremierAgile, n.d.

    Advantages of successful SAFe implementations

    Source: "Benefits," Scaled Agile, 2023

    SAFe isn't without risks or challenges

    Risks and Causes of Failed SAFe Transformations

    • SAFe conflicts with legacy cultures and delivery processes.
    • SAFe promotes continued top-down decisions, undermining team empowerment.
    • Scaled product families are required to define proper value streams.
    • Team empowerment and autonomy are reduced.
    • SAFe activities are poorly executed.
    • There are high training and coaching costs.
    • Implementation takes a long time.
    • End-to-end delivery management tools aligned to SAFe are required.
    • Legacy delivery challenges are not specifically solved with SAFe.
    • SAFe is designed to work for large-scale development teams.

    Challenges

    • Adjusting to a new set of terms for common roles, processes, and activities
    • Executing planning cycles
    • Defining features and epics at the right level
    • Completing adequate requirements
    • Defining value streams
    • Coordinating releases and release trains
    • Providing consistent quality

    Sources: TechBeacon, 2019; Medium, 2020; "Benefits," Scaled Agile, 2023; "Pros and Cons," PremierAgile, n.d.; "Scaling Agile Challenges," PremierAgile, n.d.

    Exercise 1.1.2 Create your own list of the pros and cons of SAFe

    1 hour

    Pros Cons

    Enter the results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook

    Input
    • Organizational drivers
    • Analysis of SAFe
    • Estimate of fit for purpose
    Output
    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Focus on your core competencies instead

    Before undertaking an enterprise transformation, consider improving the underlying processes that will need to be fixed anyway. Fixing these areas while implementing SAFe compounds the effort and disruption.

    Product Delivery

    Product Management

    "But big-bang transitions are hard. They require total leadership commitment, a receptive culture, enough talented and experienced agile practitioners to staff hundreds of teams without depleting other capabilities, and highly prescriptive instruction manuals to align everyone's approach."
    - "Agile at Scale," Harvard Business Review

    Step 1.2

    Determine if you are ready for SAFe (fit for purpose)

    Activities
    1.2.1 Assess your Agile readiness
    1.2.2 Define enablers and blockers for scaling Agile delivery
    1.2.3 Estimate your SAFe implementation risk
    1.2.4 Start your SAFe implementation plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Agile Readiness Assessment results
    • Enablers and blockers for scaling Agile
    • SAFe implementation risk
    • SAFe implementation plan

    Use CLAIM to guide your Agile journey

    Use CLAIM to guide your Agile journey

    Conduct the Agile Readiness Assessment Survey

    Without an Agile mindset, SAFe will follow Waterfall or WaterScrumFall practices.

    • Start your journey with a clear understanding of the level of Agile and product maturity throughout your organization.
    • Each area that lacks strength should be evaluated further and added to your journey map.

    Chart of Agile Readiness

    Exercise 1.2.1 Assess your Agile readiness

    1 hour

    • Open and complete the Agile Readiness Assessment in your playbook or the Excel tool provided.
    • Discuss each area's high and low scores to reach a consensus.
    • Record your results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook.

    Chart of Agile Readiness

    Enter the results in Scaled Agile Readiness Assessment.

    Input
    • Organizational knowledge
    • Agile Readiness Assessment
    Output
    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project Management Office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Exercise 1.2.2 Define enablers and blockers for scaling Agile delivery

    1 hour

    • Identify and mitigate blockers for scaling Agile in your organization.
      • Identify enablers who will support successful SAFe transformation.
      • Identify blockers who will make the transition to SAFe more difficult.
      • For each blocker, define at least one mitigating step.
    Enablers Blockers Mitigation

    Enter the results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook

    Input
    • Agile Readiness Assessment
    • Organizational knowledge
    Output
    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Estimate your SAFe implementation risk

    Poor Fit High Risk Scaling Potential
    Team size <50 >150 or non-dedicated 50-150 dedicated
    Agile maturity Waterfall and project delivery Individual Scrum DevOps teams Scrum DevOps teams coordinating dependencies
    Product management maturity Project-driver changes from stakeholders Proxy product owners within delivery teams Defined product families and products
    Strategic goals Localized decisions Enterprise goals implemented at the app level Translation and refinement of enterprise goals through product families
    Enterprise architecture Siloed architecture standards Common architectures Future enterprise architecture and employee review board (ERB) reviews
    Release management Independent release schedules Formal release calendar Continuous integration/development (CI/CD) with organizational change management (OCM) scheduled cross-functional releases
    Requirements management and quality assurance Project based Partial requirements and test case coverage Requirements as an asset and test automation

    Exercise 1.2.3 Estimate your SAFe implementation risk

    30 minutes

    • Determine which description best matches your overall organizational state.
    • Enter the results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook.
    • Change the text to bold in the cell you selected to describe your current state and/or add a border around the cell.

    Chart of SAFe implementation risk

    Enter the results in SAFe Transformation Playbook.

    Input
    • Agile Readiness Assessment
    • Organizational knowledge
    Output
    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Interpret your SAFe implementation risks

    Analyze your highlighted selections and patterns in the rows and columns. Use these factors to inform your SAFe implementation steps and timing.

    Interpret your SAFe implementation risks

    Build your implementation plan

    Build a transformation and organizational change management plan to guide your transition. Define clear ownership for every critical step.

    Plan your transformation.

    • Align stakeholders and thought leaders.
    • Select an implementation partner.
    • Insert critical steps.

    Build your SAFe framework.

    • Define your target SAFe framework.
    • Customize your SAFe framework.
    • Establish SAFe governance and reporting.
    • Insert critical steps.

    Implement SAFe practices.

    • Define product families and value streams.
    • Conduct SAFe training for:
      • Executive leadership
      • Agile SAFe coaches
      • Practitioners
    • Insert critical steps.

    For additional help with OCM, please download Master Organizational Change Management Practices.

    Exercise 1.2.4 Start your SAFe implementation plan

    30 minutes

    • Using the high-level SAFE implementation framework, begin building out the critical steps.
    • Record the results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook.
    • Your playbook is an evergreen document to help guide your implementation. It should be reviewed often.

    SAFe implementation plan

    Enter the results in your SAFe Transformation Playbook

    Input
    • SAFe readiness assessment
    • Enablers and blockers
    • Drivers for SAFe
    Output
    • IT leadership
    • Delivery managers
    • Project management office
    • Product owners and managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Architects

    Select an implementation partner

    Finding the right SAFe implementation partner is critical to your transformation success.

    • Using your previous assessment, align internal and external resources to support your transformation.
    • Select a partner who has experience in similar organizations and is aligned with your delivery goals.
    • Plan to transition support to internal teams when SAFe practices have stabilized and moved into continuous improvement.
    • Augment your transformation partner with internal coaches.
    • Plan for a multiyear engagement before SAFe benefits are realized.

    Summary of Accomplishments

    Your journey begins.

    Implementing SAFe is a long, expensive, and difficult process. For some organizations, SAFe provides the balance of leadership-driven prioritization and control with shorter release cycles and time to value. The key is making sure that SAFe is right for you and you are ready for SAFe. Few organizations fit perfectly into one of the SAFe frameworks. Instead, consider fine-tuning and customizing SAFe to meet your needs and gradual transformation.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Below are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Scaled Agile Delivery Readiness Assessment
    This assessment will help identify enablers and blockers in your organizational culture using our CLAIM+G organization transformation model.

    SAFE Value Canvas
    Use a value campus to define jobs, pains, gains, pain relievers, gain creators, and needed deliverables to help inform and guide your SAFe transformation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Bibliography

    "6 Biggest SAFe Agile Implementation Mistakes to Avoid." Triumph Strategic Consulting, 27 July 2017.

    "The 7 Must-Haves for Achieving Scaling Agile Success." The 7 Must-Haves for Achieving Scaling Agile Success.

    Ageling, Willem-Jan. "11 Most Common Reasons to Use Scaled Agile Framework (SAFE) and How to Do This With Unscaled Scrum." Medium, Serious Scrum, 26 Jan. 2020.

    Agile India, International Conference on Agile and Lean Software Development, 2014.

    "Air France - KLM - Agile Adoption with SAFe." Scaled Agile, 28 Nov. 2022.

    "Application Development Trends 2019 - Global Survey Report." OutSystems.

    "Benefits of SAFe: How It Benefits Organizations." Scaled Agile, 13 Mar. 2023.

    Berkowitz, Emma. "The Cost of a SAFe(r) Implementation: CPRIME Blog." Cprime, 30 Jan. 2023.

    "Chevron - Adopting SAFe with Remote Workforce." Scaled Agile, 28 Nov. 2022.

    "Cisco It - Adopting Agile Development with SAFe." Scaled Agile, 13 Sept. 2022.

    "CMS - Business Agility Transformation Using SAFe." Scaled Agile, 13 Sept. 2022.

    Crain, Anthony. "4 Biggest Challenges in Moving to Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe)." TechBeacon, 25 Jan. 2019.

    "The Essential Role of Communications ." Project Management Institute .

    Gardiner, Phil. "SAFe Implementation: 4 Tips for Getting Started." Applied Frameworks, 20 Jan. 2022.

    "How Do I Start Implementing SAFe?" Agility in Mind, 29 July 2022.

    "How to Masterfully Screw Up Your SAFe Implementation." Wibas Artikel-Bibliothek, 6 Sept. 2022.

    "Implementation Roadmap." Scaled Agile Framework, 14 Mar. 2023.

    Islam, Ayvi. "SAFe Implementation 101 - The Complete Guide for Your Company." //Seibert/Media, 22 Dec. 2020.

    "Johnson Controls - SAFe Implementation Case Study." Scaled Agile, 28 Nov. 2022.

    "The New Rules and Opportunities of Business Transformation." KPMG.

    "Nokia Software - SAFe Agile Transformation." Scaled Agile, 28 Nov. 2022.

    Pichler, Roman. "What Is Product Management?" Romanpichler, 2014.

    "Product Documentation." ServiceNow.

    "Pros and Cons of Scaled Agile Framework." PremierAgile.

    "Pulse of the Profession Beyond Agility." Project Management Institute.

    R, Ramki. "Pros and Cons of Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe)." Medium, 3 Mar. 2019.

    R, Ramki. "When Should You Consider Implementing SAFe (Scaled Agile Framework)?" Medium, Medium, 3 Mar. 2019.

    Rigby, Darrell, Jeff Sutherland, and Andy Noble. "Agile at Scale: How to go from a few teams to hundreds." Harvard Business Review, 2018.

    "SAFe Implementation Roadmap." Scaled Agile Framework, Scaled Agile, Inc., 14 Mar. 2023.

    "SAFe Partner Cprime: SAFe Implementation Roadmap: Scaled Agile." Cprime, 5 Apr. 2023.

    "SAFe: The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly." Project Management Institute.

    "Scaled Agile Framework." Wikipedia, Wikimedia Foundation, 29 Mar. 2023.

    "Scaling Agile Challenges and How to Overcome Them." PremierAgile.

    "SproutLoud - a Case Study of SAFe Agile Planning." Scaled Agile, 29 Nov. 2022.

    "Story." Scaled Agile Framework, 13 Apr. 2023.

    Sutherland , Jeff. "Scrum: How to Do Twice as Much in Half the Time." Tedxaix, YouTube, 7 July 2014.

    Venema, Marjan. "6 Scaled Agile Frameworks - Which One Is Right for You?" NimbleWork, 23 Dec. 2022.

    Warner, Rick. "Scaled Agile: What It Is and Why You Need It." High-Performance Low-Code for App Development, OutSystems, 25 Oct. 2019.

    Watts, Stephen, and Kirstie Magowan. "The Scaled Agile Framework (SAFE): What to Know and How to Start." BMC Blogs, 9 Sept. 2020.

    "What Is SAFe? The Scaled Agile Framework Explained." CIO, 9 Feb. 2021.

    "Why Agile Transformations Fail: Four Common Culprits." Planview.

    "Why You Should Use SAFe (and How to Find SAFe Training to Help)." Easy Agile.

    Y., H. "Story Points vs. 'Ideal Days.'" Cargo Cultism, 19 Aug. 2010.

    Bibliography

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    Ambler, Scott W. "Agile Architecture: Strategies for Scaling Agile Development." Agile Modeling, 2012.

    - - -. "Comparing Approaches to Budgeting and Estimating Software Development Projects." AmbySoft.

    - - -. "Agile and Large Teams." Dr. Dobb's, 17 Jun 2008.

    Ambler, Scott W. and Mark Lines. Disciplined Agile Delivery: A Practitioner's Guide to Agile Software Delivery in the Enterprise. IBM Press, 2012.

    Ambler, Scott W., and Mark Lines. "Scaling Agile Software Development: Disciplined Agility at Scale." Disciplined Agile Consortium White Paper Series, 2014.

    AmbySoft. "2014 Agile Adoption Survey Results." Scott W. Ambler + Associates, 2014.

    Bersin, Josh. "Time to Scrap Performance Appraisals?" Forbes Magazine, 5 June 2013. Accessed 30 Oct. 2013..

    Cheese, Peter, et al. " Creating an Agile Organization." Accenture, Oct. 2009. Accessed Nov. 2013..

    Croxon, Bruce, et al. "Dinner Series: Performance Management with Bruce Croxon from CBC's 'Dragon's Den.'" HRPA Toronto Chapter. Sheraton Hotel, Toronto, ON, 12 Nov. 2013. Panel discussion.

    Culbert, Samuel. "10 Reasons to Get Rid of Performance Reviews." Huffington Post Business, 18 Dec. 2012. Accessed 28 Oct. 2013.

    Denning, Steve. "The Case Against Agile: Ten Perennial Management Objections." Forbes Magazine, 17 Apr. 2012. Accessed Nov. 2013.

    Estis, Ryan. "Blowing up the Performance Review: Interview with Adobe's Donna Morris." Ryan Estis & Associates, 17 June 2013. Accessed Oct. 2013.

    Heikkila et al. "A Revelatory Case Study on Scaling Agile Release Planning." EUROMICRO Conference on Software Engineering and Advanced Applications (SEAA), 2010.

    Holler, Robert, and Ian Culling. "From Agile Pilot Project to Enterprise-Wide Deployment: Five Sure-Fire Ways To Fail When You Scale." VersionOne, 2010.

    Kniberg, Henrik, and Anders Ivarsson, "Scaling Agile @ Spotify," Unified Communications and Collaborations, 2012.

    Narayan, Sriram. "Agile IT Organization Design: For Digital Transformation and Continuous Delivery." Addison-Wesley Professional, 2015.

    Shrivastava, NK, and Phillip George. "Scaling Agile." RefineM, 2015.

    Sirkia, Rami, and Maarit Laanti. "Lean and Agile Financial Planning." Scaled Agile Framework Blog, 2014.

    Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe). "Agile Architecture." Scaled Agile Inc., 2015.

    VersionOne. 9th Annual: State of Agile Survey. VersionOne, LLC, 2015.

    Appendix A: Supporting Info-Tech Research

    Transformation topics and supporting research to make your journey easier, with less rework

    Supporting research and services

    Improving IT Alignment

    Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy
    Success depends on IT initiatives clearly aligned to business goals, IT excellence, and driving technology innovation.

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable
    Governance isn't optional, so keep it simple and make it flexible.

    Create an IT View of the Service Catalog
    Unlock the full value of your service catalog with technical components.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations
    Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Shifting Toward Agile DevOps

    Agile/DevOps Research Center
    Access the tools and advice you need to be successful with Agile.

    Develop Your Agile Approach for a Successful Transformation
    Understand Agile fundamentals, principles, and practices so you can apply them effectively in your organization.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work
    Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

    Perform an Agile Skills Assessment
    Being Agile isn't about processes, it's about people.

    Define the Role of Project Management in Agile and Product-Centric Delivery
    Projects and products are not mutually exclusive.

    Shifting Toward Product Management

    Make the Case for Product Delivery
    Align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision
    Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale
    Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership
    Strengthen the product owner role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Build a Value Measurement Framework
    Focus product delivery on business value- driven outcomes.

    Improving Value and Delivery Metrics

    Build a Value Measurement Framework
    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard
    Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively
    Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case
    Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

    Improving Governance, Prioritization, and Value

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable
    Governance isn't optional, so keep it simple and make it flexible.

    Maximize Business Value From IT Through Benefits Realization
    Embed benefits realization into your governance process to prioritize IT spending and confirm the value of IT.

    Drive Digital Transformation With Platform Strategies
    Innovate and transform your business models with digital platforms.

    Succeed With Digital Strategy Execution
    Building a digital strategy is only half the battle: create a systematic roadmap of technology initiatives to execute the strategy and drive digital transformation.

    Build a Value Measurement Framework
    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard
    Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Improving Requirements Management and Quality Assurance

    Requirements Gathering for Small Enterprises
    Right-size the guidelines of your requirements gathering process.

    Improve Requirements Gathering
    Back to basics: great products are built on great requirements.

    Build a Software Quality Assurance Program
    Build quality into every step of your SDLC.

    Automate Testing to Get More Done
    Drive software delivery throughput and quality confidence by extending your automation test coverage.

    Manage Your Technical Debt
    Make the case to manage technical debt in terms of business impact.

    Create a Business Process Management Strategy
    Avoid project failure by keeping the "B" in BPM.

    Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook
    Optimize and automate your business processes with a user-centric approach.

    Improving Release Management

    Optimize Applications Release Management
    Build trust by right-sizing your process using appropriate governance.

    Streamline Application Maintenance
    Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

    Streamline Application Management
    Move beyond maintenance to ensure exceptional value from your apps.

    Optimize IT Change Management
    Right-size IT change management to protect the live environment.

    Manage Your Technical Debt
    Make the case to manage technical debt in terms of business impact.

    Improve Application Development Throughput
    Drive down your delivery time by eliminating development inefficiencies and bottlenecks while maintaining high quality.

    Improving Business Relationship Management

    Embed Business Relationship Management in IT
    Show that IT is worthy of Trusted Partner status.

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership
    Strengthen the product owner role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Improving Security

    Build an Information Security Strategy
    Create value by aligning your strategy to business goals and business risks.

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies
    Enhance your overall security posture with a defensible and prescriptive policy suite.

    Simplify Identity and Access Management
    Leverage risk- and role-based access control to quantify and simplify the identity and access management (IAM) process.

    Improving and Supporting Business-Managed Applications

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications
    Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practices
    Ensure your software systems solution is architected to reflect stakeholders' short- and long-term needs.

    Satisfy Digital End Users With Low- and No-Code
    Extend IT, automation, and digital capabilities to the business with the right tools, good governance, and trusted organizational relationships.

    Build Your First RPA Bot
    Support RPA delivery with strong collaboration and management foundations.

    Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation
    Embrace the symbiotic relationship between the human and digital workforce.

    Improving Business Intelligence, Analytics, and Reporting

    Modernize Data Architecture for Measurable Business Results
    Enable the business to achieve operational excellence, client intimacy, and product leadership with an innovative, agile, and fit-for-purpose data architecture practice.

    Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy
    Deliver actionable business insights by creating a business-aligned reporting and analytics strategy.

    Build Your Data Quality Program
    Quality data drives quality business decisions.

    Design Data-as-a-Service
    Journey to the data marketplace ecosystems.

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy
    Learn about the key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

    Build an Application Integration Strategy
    Level the table before assembling the application integration puzzle or risk losing pieces.

    Appendix B: SDLC Transformation Steps

    Waterfall SDLC

    Valuable product delivered at the end of an extended project lifecycle, frequently in years

    Waterfall SDLC

    • Business is separated from the delivery of technology it needs. Only one-third of the product is actually valuable (ITRG, N=40,000).
    • In Waterfall, a team of experts in specific disciplines hand off different aspects of the lifecycle.
    • Document sign-offs are required to ensure integration between silos (Business, Development, and Operations) and individuals.
    • A separate change-request process lays over the entire lifecycle to prevent changes from disrupting delivery.
    • Tools are deployed to support a specific role (e.g. BA) and seldom integrated (usually requirements <-> test).

    Wagile/Agifall/WaterScrumFall SDLC

    Valuable product delivered in multiple releases

     Wagile/Agifall/WaterScrumFall SDLC

    • Business is more closely integrated by a business product owner, who is accountable for day-to-day delivery of value for users.
    • The team collaborates and develops cross-functional skills as they define, design, build, and test code over time.
    • Sign-offs are reduced but documentation is still focused on satisfying project delivery and operations policy requirements.
    • Change is built into the process to allow the team to respond to change dynamically.
    • Tools start to be integrated to streamline delivery (usually requirements and Agile work management tools).

    Agile SDLC

    Valuable product delivered iteratively: frequency depends Ops' capacity

    Agile SDLC

    • Business users are closely integrated through regularly scheduled demos (e.g. every two weeks).
    • Team is fully cross-functional and collaborates to plan, define, design, build, and test the code, supported by specialists.
    • Documentation is focused on future development and operations needs.
    • Change is built into the process to allow the team to respond to change dynamically.
    • Automation is explored for application development (e.g. automated regression testing).

    Agile With DevOps SDLC

    High frequency iterative delivery of valuable product (e.g. every two weeks)

     Agile With DevOps SDLC

    • Business users are closely integrated through regularly scheduled demos.
    • Development and operations teams collaborate to plan, define, design, build, test, and deploy code, supported by automation.
    • Documentation is focused on supporting users, future changes, and operational support.
    • Change is built into the process to allow the team to respond to change dynamically.
    • Test, build, deploy process is fully automated. (Service desk is still separated.)

    DevOps SDLC

    Continuous integration and delivery

     DevOps SDLC

    • Business users are closely integrated through regularly scheduled demos.
    • Fully integrated DevOps team collaborates to plan, define, design, build, test, deploy, and maintain code.
    • Documentation is focused on future development and use adoption.
    • Change is built into the process to allow the team to respond to change dynamically.
    • Development and operations toolchain are fully integrated.

    Fully integrated product SDLC

    Agile + DevOps + continuous delivery of valuable product on demand

     Fully integrated product SDLC

    • Business users are fully integrated with the teams through dedicated business product owner.
    • Cross-functional teams collaborate across the business and technical life of the product.
    • Documentation supports internal and external needs (business, users, operations).
    • Change is built into the process to allow the team to respond to change dynamically.
    • Toolchain is fully integrated (including service desk).

    Appendix C: Understanding Agile Scrum Practices and Ceremonies

    Cultural advantages of Agile

    Cultural advantages of Agile

    Agile* SDLC

    With shared ownership instead of silos, we are able to deliver value at the end of every iteration (aka sprint)

    Agile SDLC

    Key Elements of the Agile SDLC

    • You are not "one and done." There are many short iterations with constant feedback.
    • There is an empowered product owner. This is a single authoritative voice who represents stakeholders.
    • There is a fluid product backlog. This enables prioritization of requirements "just-in-time."
    • There is a cross-functional, self-managing team. This team makes commitments and is empowered by the organization to do so.
    • There is working, tested code at the end of each sprint: Value becomes more deterministic along sprint boundaries.
    • Stakeholders are allowed to see and use the functionality and provide necessary feedback.
    • Feedback is being continuously injected back into the product backlog. This shapes the future of the solution.
    • There is continuous improvement through sprint retrospectives.
    • The virtuous cycle of sprint-demo-feedback is internally governed when done right.

    * There are many Agile methodologies to choose from, but Scrum is by far the most widely used (and is shown above).

    Understand the Scrum process

    The scrum process coordinates multiple stakeholders to deliver on business priorities.

    Understand the Scrum process

    Understand the ceremonies part of the scrum process

     Understand the ceremonies part of the scrum process

    Scrum vs. Kanban: Key differences

    Scrum vs. Kanban: Key differences

    Scrum vs. Kanban: When to use each

    Scrum

    Related or grouped changes are delivered in fixed time intervals.

    Use when:

    • Coordinating the development or release of related items
    • Maturing a product or service
    • Coordinating interdependencies between work items

    Kanban

    Independent items are delivered as soon as each is ready.

    Use when:

    • Completing work items from ticketing or individual requests
    • Completing independent changes
    • Releasing changes as soon as possible

    Appendix D: Improving Product Management

    Product delivery realizes value for your product family

    While planning and analysis are done at the family level, work and delivery are done at the individual product level.

    Product delivery realizes value for your product family

    Manage and communicate key milestones

    Successful product-delivery managers understand and define key milestones in their product-delivery lifecycles. These milestones need to be managed along with the product backlog and roadmap.

    Manage and communicate key milestones

    Info-Tech Best Practice
    Product management is not just about managing the product backlog and development cycles. Teams need to manage key milestones, such as learning milestones, test releases, product releases, phase gates, and other organizational checkpoints.

    A backlog stores and organizes product backlog items (PBIs) at various stages of readiness

    Organize product backlog at various stages of readiness

    A well-formed backlog can be thought of as a DEEP backlog:

    Detailed Appropriately: PBIs are broken down and refined as necessary.

    Emergent: The backlog grows and evolves over time as PBIs are added and removed.

    Estimated: The effort that a PBI requires is estimated at each tier.

    Prioritized: A PBI's value and priority are determined at each tier.

    Source: Perforce, 2018

    Backlog tiers facilitate product planning steps

    Ranging from the intake of an idea to a PBI ready for development; to enter the backlog, each PBI must pass through a given quality filter.

    Backlog tiers facilitate product planning steps

    Each activity is a variation of measuring value and estimating effort in order to validate and prioritize a PBI.

    A PBI successfully completes an activity and moves to the next backlog tier when it meets the appropriate criteria. Quality filters should exist between each tier.

    Use quality filters to ensure focus on the most important PBIs

    Expand the concepts of defining "ready" and "done" to include the other stages of a PBI's journey through product planning.

    Use quality filters to ensure focus on the most important PBIs

    Info-Tech Best Practice
    A quality filter ensures that quality is met and the appropriate teams are armed with the correct information to work more efficiently and improve throughput.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    Product roadmaps guide delivery and communicate your strategy

    In "Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision," we demonstrate how a product roadmap is core to value realization. The product roadmap is your communicated path. As a product owner, you use it to align teams and changes to your defined goals, as well as your product to enterprise goals and strategy.

    Product roadmaps guide delivery and communicate your strategy

    Info-Tech Insight
    The quality of your product backlog - and your ability to realize business value from your delivery pipeline - is directly related to the input, content, and prioritization of items in your product roadmap.

    Info-Tech's approach

    Operationally align product delivery to enterprise goals

    Operationally align product delivery to enterprise goals

    The Info-Tech Difference

    Create a common definition of what a product is and identify the products in your inventory.

    Use scaling patterns to build operationally aligned product families.

    Develop a roadmap strategy to align families and products to enterprise goals and priorities.

    Use products and families to assess value realization.

    IT Risk management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}40|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}40|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk
    Mitigation is about balance: take a cost-focused approach to risk management.

    Develop a Cloud Testing Strategy for Today's Apps

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}470|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • The growth of the Cloud and the evolution of business operations have shown that traditional testing strategies do not work well with modern applications.
    • Organizations require a new framework around testing cloud applications that account for on-demand scalability and self-provisioning.
    • Expectations of application consumers are continually increasing with speed-to-market and quality being the norm.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Cloud technology does not change the traditional testing processes that many organizations have accepted and adopted. It does, however, enhance traditional practices with increased replication capacity, execution speed, and compatibility through its virtual infrastructure and automated processes. Consider these factors when developing the cloud testing strategy.
    • Involving the business in strategy development will keep them engaged and align business drivers with technical initiatives.
    • Implement cloud testing solutions in a well-defined rollout process to ensure business objectives are realized and cloud testing initiatives are optimized.
    • Cloud testing is green and dynamic. Realize the limitations of cloud testing and play on its strengths.

    Impact and Result

    • Engaging in a formal and standardized cloud testing strategy and consistently meeting business needs throughout the organization maintains business buy-in.
    • The Cloud compounds the benefits from virtualization and automation because of the Cloud’s scalability, speed, and off-premise and virtual infrastructure and data storage attributes.
    • Cloud testing presents a new testing avenue. Realize that only certain tests are optimized in the Cloud, i.e., load, stress, and functional testing.

    Develop a Cloud Testing Strategy for Today's Apps Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop a cloud testing strategy.

    Obtain organizational buy-ins and build a standardized and formal cloud testing strategy.

    • Storyboard: Develop a Cloud Testing Strategy for Today's Apps
    • None

    2. Assess the organization's readiness for cloud testing.

    Assess your people, process, and technology for cloud testing readiness and realize areas for improvement.

    • Cloud Testing Readiness Assessment Tool

    3. Plan and manage the resources allocated to each project task.

    Organize and monitor cloud project planning tasks throughout the project's duration.

    • Cloud Testing Project Planning and Monitoring Tool
    [infographic]

    Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}423|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity

    Having shifted operations almost overnight to a remote work environment, and with the crisis management phase of the COVID-19 pandemic winding down, IT leaders and organizations are faced with the following issues:

    • A reduced degree of control with respect to the organization’s assets.
    • Increased presence of unapproved workaround methods, including applications and devices not secured by the organization.
    • Pressure to resume operations at pre-pandemic cadence while still operating in recovery mode.
    • An anticipated game plan for restarting the organization’s project activities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    An organization’s shift back toward the pre-pandemic state cannot be carried out in isolation. Things have changed. Budgets, resource availability, priorities, etc., will not be the same as they were in early March. Organizations must ensure that all departments work collaboratively to support office repatriation. IT must quickly identify the must-dos to allow safe return to the office, while prioritizing tasks relating to the repopulation of employees, technical assets, and operational workloads via an informed and streamlined roadmap.

    As employees return to the office, PMO and portfolio leaders must sift through unclear requirements and come up with a game plan to resume project activities mid-pandemic. You need to develop an approach, and fast.

    Impact and Result

    Responsibly resume IT operations in the office:

    • Evaluate risk tolerance
    • Prepare to repatriate people to the office
    • Prepare to repatriate assets to the office
    • Prepare to repatriate workloads to the office
    • Prioritize your tasks and build your roadmap

    Quickly restart the engine of your PPM:

    • Restarting the engine of the project portfolio won’t be as simple as turning a key and hitting the gas. The right path forward will differ for every project portfolio practice.
    • Therefore, in this publication we put forth a multi-pass approach that PMO and portfolio managers can follow depending on their unique situations and needs.
    • Each approach is accompanied by a checklist and recommendations for next steps to get you on right path fast.

    Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    As the post-pandemic landscape begins to take shape, ensure that IT can effectively prepare and support your employees as they move back to the office.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Evaluate your new risk tolerance

    Identify the new risk landscape and risk tolerance for your organization post-pandemic. Determine how this may impact the second wave of pandemic transition tasks.

    • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 1: Evaluate Your New Risk Tolerance
    • Resume Operations Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    2. Repatriate people to the office

    Prepare to return your employees to the office. Ensure that IT takes into account the health and safety of employees, while creating an efficient and sustainable working environment

    • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 2: Repatriate People to the Office
    • Mid-Pandemic IT Prioritization Tool

    3. Repatriate assets to the office

    Prepare the organization's assets for return to the office. Ensure that IT takes into account the off-license purchases and new additions to the hardware family that took place during the pandemic response and facilitates a secure reintegration to the workplace.

    • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 3: Repatriate Assets to the Office

    4. Repatriate workloads to the office

    Prepare and position IT to support workloads in order to streamline office reintegration. This may include leveraging pre-existing solutions in different ways and providing additional workstreams to support employee processes.

    • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 4: Repatriate Workloads to the Office

    5. Prioritize your tasks and build the roadmap

    Once you've identified IT's supporting tasks, it's time to prioritize. This phase walks through the activity of prioritizing based on cost/effort, alignment to business, and security risk reduction weightings. The result is an operational action plan for resuming office life.

    • Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office – Phase 5: Prioritize Your Tasks and Build the Roadmap

    6. Restart the engine of your project portfolio

    Restarting the engine of the project portfolio mid-pandemic won’t be as simple as turning a key and hitting the gas. Use this concise research to find the right path forward for your organization.

    • Restart the Engine of Your Project Portfolio
    [infographic]

    Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}310|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $5,199 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-strategy

    Provide better end-user device support to a remote workforce:

    • Remain compliant while purchasing, deploying, supporting, and decommissioning devices.
    • Save time and resources during device deployment while providing a high-quality experience to remote end users.
    • Build a set of capabilities that will let you support different use cases.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Zero-touch is more than just deployment. This is more difficult than turning on a tool and provisioning new devices to end users.
    • Consider the entire user experience and device lifecycle to show value to the organization. Don’t forget that you will eventually need to touch the device.

    Impact and Result

    Approach zero-touch provisioning and patching from the end user’s experience:

    • Align your zero-touch approach with stakeholder priorities and larger IT strategies.
    • Build your zero-touch provisioning and patching plan from both the asset lifecycle and the end-user perspective to take a holistic approach that emphasizes customer service.
    • Tailor deployment plans to more easily scope and resource deployment projects.

    Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should adopt zero-touch provisioning, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Design the zero-touch experience

    Design the user’s experience and build a vision to direct your zero-touch provisioning project. Update your ITAM practices to reflect the new experience.

    • Zero-Touch Provisioning and Support Plan
    • HAM Process Workflows (Visio)
    • HAM Process Workflows (PDF)
    • End-User Device Management Standard Operating Procedure

    2. Update device management, provisioning, and patching

    Leverage new tools to manage remote endpoints, keep those devices patched, and allow users to get the apps they need to work.

    • End-User Device Build Book Template

    3. Build a roadmap and communication plan

    Create a roadmap for migrating to zero-touch provisioning.

    • Roadmap Tool
    • Communication Plan Template
    [infographic]

    Application Development Throughput

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}27|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}27|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /applications

    The challenge

    • As we work more and more using agile techniques, teams tend to optimize their areas of responsibility.
    • IT will still release lower-quality applications when there is a lack of clarity around the core SDLC processes.
    • Software development teams continue to struggle with budget and time constraints within their releases.
    • Typically each group claims to be optimized, yet the final deliverable falls short of the expected quality.

    Our advice

    Insight

    • Database administrators know this all too well: Optimizing can you perform worse. The software development lifecycle (SDLC) must be optimized holistically, not per area or team.
    • Separate how you work from your framework. You do not need "agile" or "extreme" or "agifall" or "safe" to optimize your SDLC.
    • SDLC optimization is a continuous effort. Start from your team's current capabilities and improve over time.

    Impact and results 

    • You can assume proper accountability for the implementation and avoid over-reliance on the systems integrator.
    • Leverage the collective knowledge and advice of additional IT professionals
    • Review the pitfalls and lessons learned from failed integrations.
    • Manage risk at every stage.
    • Perform a self-assessment at various stages of the integration path.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started.

    Read our executive brief to understand our approach to SDLC optimization and why we advocate a holistic approach for your company.

    Document your current state

    This phase helps you understand your business goals and priorities. You will document your current SDLC process and find where the challenges are.

    • Create a Horizontally Optimized SDLC to Better Meet Business Demands – Phase 1: Document the Current State of the SDLC (ppt)
    • SDLC Optimization Playbook (xls)

    Find out the root causes, define how to move forward, and set your target state

    • Create a Horizontally Optimized SDLC to Better Meet Business Demands – Phase 2: Define Root Causes, Determine Optimization Initiatives, and Define Target State (ppt)

    Develop the roll-out strategy for SDLC optimization

    Prioritize your initiatives and formalize them in a roll-out strategy and roadmap. Communicate your plan to all your stakeholders.

    • Create a Horizontally Optimized SDLC to Better Meet Business Demands – Phase 3: Develop a Rollout Strategy for SDLC Optimization (ppt)
    • SDLC Communication Template (ppt)

     

    Customer Service Management Software Selection Guide

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}530|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
    • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
    • The business is unaware of cross-selling opportunities across multiple product lines.
    • Customer service staff attrition rates continue to be high, creating longer response delays for voice channels.
    • Customer service responses are reactive in nature, reinforcing a poor culture for customer experience.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • After-sales customer service is critical for creating, maintaining, and growing customer relationships. Organizations that fail to provide adequate service will be ill positioned for future customer service and sales efforts.
    • Shift left toward delivering predictive service instead of reactive service to enhance customer experiences.
    • Ensure your key performance indicators accurately reflect the incentives you want to give your customer support staff for delivering appropriate customer service.

    Impact and Result

    • Determine your organization’s customer service maturity (and thus if a standalone CSM tool is relevant).
    • Understand key trends and differentiating features in the CSM marketspace.
    • Evaluate major vendors in the CSM marketspace to discover the best-fitting provider.

    Customer Service Management Software Selection Guide Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Customer Service Management Software Selection Guide – A guide to walk you through the process of selecting CSM software.

    This trends and buyer’s guide will help you:

    • Customer Service Management Software Selection Guide Storyboard

    2. CSM Platform RFP Template – A template to provide vendors with a detailed account of the requirements and the expected capabilities of the desired suite.

    Create your own request for proposal (RFP) for your customer service management suite procurement process by customizing Info-Tech's RFP template.

    • CSM Platform RFP Template

    3. CSM Platform Opportunity Assessment Tool – A tool to assess whether a CSM solution is right for your organization.

    Use this tool to assess your maturity and fit for a CSM solution. It will help identify your current CSM state and assist with the decision to move forward with a new solution or augment certain features.

    • CSM Platform Opportunity Assessment Tool

    4. Software Selection Workbook – A workbook to document your progress as your select software.

    Keep stakeholders engaged with simple and friction-free templates to document your progress for Rapid Application Selection.

    • The Software Selection Workbook

    5. Vendor Evaluation Workbook – A workbook to assess vendor capabilities and compare vendors.

    Leverage a traceable and straightforward Vendor Evaluation Workbook to narrow the field of potential vendors and accelerate the application selection process.

    • The Vendor Evaluation Workbook

    6. CSM Platform RFP Scoring Tool – A tool to support your business in objectively evaluating the CSM vendors being considered for procurement.

    Create an objective and fair scoring process to evaluate the RFPs and demonstrations provided by shortlisted vendors. Within this framework, provide a multidimensional evaluation that analyzes the solution's functional capabilities, architecture, costs, service support, and overall suitability in comparison to the organization's expressed requirements.

    • CSM Platform RFP Scoring Tool

    7. CSM Platform Vendor Demo Script Template – A template to support your business’ evaluation of vendors and their solutions with an effective demonstration.

    Create an organized and streamlined vendor demonstration process by clearly outlining your expectations for the demo. Use the demo as an opportunity to ensure that capabilities expressed by vendors are actually present within the considered solution.

    • CSM Platform Vendor Demo Script Template
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Customer Service Management Software Selection

    Market trends and buyer’s guide

    Analyst Perspective

    The pandemic and growing younger demographic have shifted the terrain of customer service delivery. Customer service management (CSM) tools ensure organizations enhance customer acquisition, customer retention, and overall revenues into the future.

    It is one thing to research customer service best practices; it is another to experience such service. Whether being put on hold for an hour with a telecommunications company, encountering voice biometric security with a bank, or receiving automated FAQs from a chatbot, we all perform our own primary research in customer service by going about our daily lives. Yet while the pandemic required a shift to this multichannel and digital assistant environment (to account for ongoing agent attrition), this trend was actually just accelerated. A growing younger demographic now prefers online communication channels to voice. Social media (whichever the platform) is a fundamental part of this demographic’s online presence and has instigated the need for customer service delivery to meet customers where they are – for both damage control and enhancing customer relationships.

    Organizations delivering customer service across multiple product lines need to examine what delivery channels they need to satisfy customers, alongside assessing how customer loyalty and cross-selling can increase revenues and company reputation. Customer service management tools can assist and enable the future state.

    Thomas Randall, Ph.D., Research Director

    Thomas Randall, Ph.D.
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech’s Solution
    • The business is unaware of cross-selling opportunities across multiple product lines.
    • Customer service staff attrition rates continue to be high, creating longer response delays for voice channels.
    • Customer service responses are reactive in nature, reinforcing a poor culture for customer experience.
    • It is not clear if a CSM tool would resolve the business’ challenges or if a better-fitting technology solution is preferable (such as a customer relationship management add-on).
    • The business does not know its customer service maturity well enough to assess the feasibility of adopting a CSM tool.
    This trends and buyer’s guide will help you:
    1. Determine your organization’s customer service maturity (and thus if a standalone CSM tool is relevant).
    2. Understand key trends and differentiating features in the CSM marketspace.
    3. Evaluate major vendors in the CSM marketspace to discover the best-fitting provider.

    The objective at the end of the day is to have a single interface that the front-line staff interacts with. I think that is the holy grail when we look at CSM technology. The objective that everyone has in mind is we'd all like to get to one screen and one window. Ultimately, the end game really hasn't changed: How can we make it easy for the agents and how can we minimize their errors? How can we streamline the process so they can work?
    Colin Taylor, CEO, The Taylor Reach Group

    Customer service management tools form an integral part of your CXM technology portfolio

    Customer service management tools are an integral part of CXM

    Info-Tech’s methodology for selecting the right CSM platform

    1. Contextualize the CSM Landscape 2. Select the Right CSM Vendor
    Phase Steps
    1. Define CSM tools.
    2. Explore CSM trends.
    3. Understand if CSM tools are a good fit for your organization.
    1. Build the business case.
    2. Streamline requirements elicitation for CSM.
    3. Construct the request for proposal (RFP)/vendor evaluation workbook.
    Phase Outcomes
    1. Consensus on scope of CSM and key CSM capabilities
    2. Identify your customer service maturity and use for CSM tools
    1. CSM business case
    2. High-value use cases and requirements
    3. CSM RFP/vendor evaluation workbook

    Info-Tech Insight
    Need help constructing your RFP? Use Info-Tech’s CSM Platform RFP Template!

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Discover if CSM tools are right for your organization. Understand what a CSM platform is and discover the “art of the possible.”

    Call #2: Identify right-sized vendors and build the business case to select a CSM platform.

    Call #3: Define your key CSM requirements.

    Call #4: Build procurement items, such as an RFP and demo script.

    Call #5: Evaluate vendors and perform final due diligence.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    The CSM selection process should be broken into segments:

    1. CSM vendor shortlisting with this buyer’s guide
    2. Structured approach to selection
    3. Contract review

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to his the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options

    Software Selection Engagement

    Five Advisory Calls Over a Five-Week Period to Accelerate Your Selection Process

    Expert analyst guidance over five weeks on average to select and negotiate software

    Save money, align stakeholders, speed up the process, and make better decisions

    Use a repeatable, formal methodology to improve your application selection process

    Better, faster results, guaranteed, included in membership

    Five advisory calls over a five week period to accelerate your selection process

    Book Your Selection Engagement

    Software Selection Workshops

    40 Hours of Advisory Assistance Delivered Online

    Select Better Software, Faster

    40 hours of expert analyst guidance

    Project & stakeholder management assistance

    Save money, align stakeholders, speed up the process, and make better decisions

    Better, faster results, guaranteed, $25,000 standard engagement fee

    Software selection workshops

    Book Your Workshop Engagement

    Customer Service Management (CSM) Software

    Phase 1: Contextualize the CSM Landscape

    Receive and resolve after-sales requests within a unified CSM platform

    MULTIPLE CHANNELS
    Customers may resolve their issues via a variety of channels, including voice, SMS, email, social media, and live webchat.
    KNOWLEDGE BASE
    Provide a knowledge base for FAQs that is both customer facing (via customer portal) and agent facing (for live resolutions).
    ANALYTICS
    Track customer satisfaction, agent performances, ticket resolutions, backlogs, traffic analysis, and other key performance indicators (KPIs).
    COLLABORATION
    Enable agents to escalate and collaborate within a unified platform (e.g. tagging colleagues to flag a relevant customer query).

    Info-Tech Insight
    After-sales customer service is critical for creating, maintaining, and growing customer relationships. Organizations that fail to provide adequate service will be poorly positioned for future customer service and sales efforts.

    Identify your differentiating CSM requirements that align to your use cases

    INTEGRATIONS
    Note what integrations are available for your contact center, CRM, or industry-specific solutions (e.g. inventory management) to get the most out of CSM.

    SENTIMENT ANALYSIS
    Reads, contextualizes, and categorizes tickets by sentiment (e.g. “positive”) before escalating to an appropriate agent.

    AUTO-RESPONSE EDITOR
    Built-in AI provides prewritten responses or auto-pulls the relevant knowledge article, assisting agents with speed to resolution.

    ATTRIBUTES-BASED ROUTING
    Learns over time how best to route tickets to appropriate agents based on skills, availability, or proximity of an agent (e.g. multilingual, local, or specialist agents).

    AUTOMATED WORKFLOWS
    CSM tool providers have varying usability for workflow building and enablement. Ensure your use cases align.

    TICKET PRIORITIZATION
    Adapts and prioritizes customer issues by service-level agreement (SLA), priority, and severity according to inputted KPIs.

    Good technology will not fix a bad process. I don't care how good the technology is. If the use case is wrong and the process is wrong, it's not going to work.
    Colin Taylor, CEO
    The Taylor Reach Group

    Leverage CSM tools to shift left toward predictive customer service

    Real-time Pre-event Post-event
    Channel example: Notifications via SMS or social media. Channel example: Notifications via SMS or social media. Channel example: Working with an agent or live chatbot. Channel example: Working with an agent or live chatbot.
    “Your car may need a check-up for faulty parts.” “Here is a local garage to fix your tire pressure.” “I see you have poor tire pressure. Here is a local garage.” “Thank you for your patience, how can we help?”
    Predictive Service
    The CSM recommends mitigation options to the customer before the issue occurs and before the customer knows they need it.
    Proactive Service
    The issue occurs but the CSM recommends mitigation options to the customer before the customer contacts the organization.
    Real-Time Service
    The organization offers real-time mitigation options while working with the customer to resolve the issue.
    Reactive Service
    The customer approaches the organization after the issue occurs, but the organization has no insight into the event.

    Selecting a CSM tool should form part of your broader CXM strategy

    Organizations should ask whether they need a standalone CSM solution or a CSM as part of a broader suite of CXM tools. The latter is especially relevant if your organization already invests in a CXM platform.

    Matrix of CMS tools as part of CXM strategy

    CSM tools are best-suited for organizations with high product and service complexity

    Customer Service Complexity

    Low complexity refers to primarily transactional inquiries. High complexity refers to service workflows for symptom analysis, problem identification, and solution delivery.

    Product Complexity

    High complexity refers to having a large number of brands and individual SKUs, technologically complex products, and products with many add-ons.

    A matrix showing that a standalone CSM tool is best where customer service complexity and product complexity are both high.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Use Info-Tech’s CSM Platform Opportunity Assessment Tool to discover your organization’s customer service maturity.

    Activity: Discover your customer service maturity

    30 minutes

    1. Complete the CSM Platform Opportunity Assessment Tool.
    2. Evaluate your result and document whether a CSM business case is warranted (or if a separate technology selection process is needed).
    Input Output
    • Understanding of the current state and how complex the organization’s product line and help desk support are
    • Ranking of the importance of each decision point
    • Assessment results that provide a high-level view of whether your organization’s product and customer service complexity warrant a standalone CSM tool
    Materials Participants
    • CSM Platform Opportunity Assessment Tool
    • Shared screen or projection
    • Customer support analyst(s)
    • Infrastructure and Operations lead(s)
    • Representative customer support staff
    • Product management analyst(s)

    Download the CSM Platform Opportunity Assessment Tool

    Finalize whether your organization is well positioned to leverage CSM tools

    Bypass Adopt
    Monochannel approach
    You do not participate in multichannel campaigns or your customer personas are typically limited to one or two channels (e.g. voice or SMS).
    Multichannel approach
    You are pursuing multifaceted, customer-specific campaigns across a multitude of channels.
    Small to mid-sized business with small CX team
    Do not buy what you do not need. Focus on the foundations of customer experience (CX) first before extending into a full-fledged CSM tool.
    Maturing CX department
    Customer service needs are extending into managing budgets, generating and segmenting leads, and measuring channel effectiveness.
    Limited product range
    CSM tools typically gain return on investment (ROI) if the organization has a complex product range and is looking to increase cross-sell opportunities across different customer personas.
    Multiple product lines
    Customer base and product lines are large enough to engage in opportunities for cross- and up-selling.

    Case Study

    AkzoNobel

    INDUSTRY
    Retail

    SOURCE
    Sprinklr (2021)

    Use CSM tools to unify the multichannel experience and reduce response time.

    Challenge Solution Results
    AzkoNobel is a leading global paints and coatings company. AzkoNobel had 60+ fragmented customer service accounts on social media for multiple brands. There was little consistency in customer experience and agent responses. Moreover, the customer journey was not being tracked, resulting in lost opportunities for cross-selling across brands. The result: slow response times (up to one week) and unsatisfied customers, leaving the AzkoNobel brand in a vulnerable state.

    AkzoNobel leveraged Sprinklr, a customer experience software provider, to unify six social channels, 19 accounts, and six brands. Sprinklr aligned governance across social media channels with AzkoNobel’s strategic business goals, emphasizing the need for process, increasing revenue, and streamlining customer service.

    AzkoNobel was able to use keywords from customers’ inbound messaging to put an escalation process in place.

    Since bringing on Sprinklr in 2015-2016, unifying customer service channels under one multichannel platform resulted in:

    • 172% increase in customer engagement.
    • 133% increase in post comments.
    • 80% reduced response times.
    • 47% of inquiries answered within five minutes.
    • $18,500 added revenues via social media responses.

    How it got here: The birth of CSM tools

    CSM developed alongside the telephone and call center, rather than customer relationship management platforms.

    1920s 1950s 1967-1973 1980-1990s 2000-2010s
    The introduction of lines of credit and growth of household appliance innovations meant households were buying products at an unprecedented rate. Department stores would set up customer service sections to assist with live fixes or returns. Following the Great Depression and World War II, process, efficiency, and computational technology became defining features of customer service. These features were played out in call centers as automatic call distribution (ACD) technology began to scale. With the development of private automatic branch exchange (PABX), AT&T introduced the toll-free telephone number. Companies began training staff and departments for customer service and building loyalty. With the development of interactive voice response (IVR) in 1973, call centers became increasingly more efficient at routing. Analog technology shifted to digital and the term “contact center” was coined. These centers began being outsourced internationally. With the advent of the internet, CSM technology (in the early guise of a “help desk”) became equipped with computer telephony integration (CTI). Software as a service (SaaS) and CRM maturation strengthened the retention and organization of customer data. Social media also enhanced consumer power as companies rushed to prevent online embarrassment. This prompted investment in multichannel customer service.

    Where it’s going: The future of CSM tools lies in predictive analytics

    The capabilities below are available today but will mature over the next few years. Use the roadmap as a guide for your year of implementation.

    2023
    Go mobile first
    85% of customers believe a company’s mobile website should be just as good as its desktop website. Enabling user-friendly mobile websites provides an effective channel to keep inbound calls down.

    2024
    Shift from multichannel to omnichannel
    Integrating CSM tools with your broader CXM suite enables customer data to seamlessly travel between channels for an omnichannel experience.

    2025
    Enable predictive service
    CSM tools integrate with Internet of Things (IoT) systems to provide automated notifications that alert staff of issues and mitigate issues with customers before the issue even occurs.

    2026
    Leverage predictive analytics for ML use cases
    Use customers’ historic data and preferences to perform better automated customer service over time (e.g. providing personalized resolutions based on previous customer engagements).

    Context and scenario play a huge role in measuring good customer service. Ensure your KPIs accurately reflect the incentives you want to give your customer support staff for delivering appropriate customer service.
    David Thomas, Customer Service Specialist
    Freedom Mobile
    (Reve Chat, 2022)

    Key trends in CSM technology

    As predictive analytics matures, organizations are making use of CSM tools’ ability to enhance personalization, improve their social media response times, and enable self-service.

    BIOMETRICS
    65% of customers say they would accept voice recognition to authorize their identity when calling a customer support line (GetApp, 2021).

    PERSONALIZATION
    51% of marketers, advocating for personalization across multiple touchpoints saw 300% ROI (KoMarketing, 2020).

    SOCIAL MEDIA
    29% of customers aged 18 to 39 prefer online chat communication before and after purchase (RingCentral, 2020).

    SELF-SERVICE
    92% of customers say they would use a knowledge base for self-service support if it was available (Vanilla, 2020).

    Customer Service Management (CSM) Software

    Phase 2: Select the Right CSM Vendor

    Conduct a business impact assessment to document the case for CSM tool selection

    Business Opportunity
    Determine high-level understanding of the need that must be addressed, along with the project goals and affiliated key metrics. Establish KPIs to measure project success.

    System Diagram
    Determine the impact on the application portfolio and where integration is necessary.

    Risks
    Identify potential blockers and risk factors that will impede selection.

    High-Level Requirements
    Consider the business functions and processes affected.

    People Impact
    Confirm who will be affected by the output of the technology selection.

    Overall Business Case
    Calculate the ROI and the financial implications of the application selection. Highlight the overarching value.

    Activity: Build the business case

    2 hours

    1. Access the Business Impact Assessment within the Software Selection Workbook (linked below). Store the assessment in a shared folder (such as in SharePoint, OneDrive, or Google Drive).
    2. Set aside two hours (does not need to be all at once) to ensure the selection team aligns with the unifying rationale for selection.
    3. Complete the six steps to arrive at a high-level business case. This case can then be shared and communicated with interested parties (e.g. impacted stakeholders).
    InputOutput
    • Drivers for the business opportunity to adopt CSM tools
    • Understanding of key stakeholders
    • Overview of application portfolio
    • Budgetary information
    • Business Impact Assessment, which captures your high-level business case
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Software Selection Workbook
    • Screen sharing or projector
    • Whiteboard and drawing materials
    • Customer support analyst(s)
    • Infrastructure and Operations lead(s)
    • Representative customer support staff
    • Product management analyst(s)

    Download the Software Selection Workbook

    Elicit and prioritize granular requirements for your CSM platform

    Understanding business needs through requirements gathering is key to defining everything about what is being purchased, yet it is an area where people often make critical mistakes.

    Signs of poorly scoped requirements Best practices
    • Requirements focus on how the solution should work instead of what it must accomplish.
    • Multiple levels of detail exist within the requirements, which are inconsistent and confusing.
    • Requirements drill all the way down into system-level detail.
    • Language is technical and dense, leaving some stakeholder groups confused on what they are actually looking for in a solution.
    • Requirements are copied from a market analysis of the art of the possible, abstract from organization’s own customer persona analysis.
    • Get a clear understanding of what the system needs to do and what it is expected to produce. Build customer personas to assist with identifying high-value use cases.
    • Test against the principle of MECE – requirements should be “mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive.”
    • Use language that is consistent with that of the market and focus on key differentiators – not table stakes.
    • Include the appropriate level of detail, which should be suitable for procurement and sufficient for differentiating vendors.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Review Info-Tech’s requirements gathering methodology to improve your requirements gathering process.

    Choose your route: RFP or otherwise?

    As you gather requirements, decide which procurement route best suits your context.

    RFI (Request for Information) RFQ (Request for Quotation) RFP (Request for Proposal)
    Purpose and Usage

    Gather information about products/services when you know little about what’s available.

    Often followed by an RFP.

    Solicit pricing and delivery information for products/services with clearly defined requirements.

    Best for standard or commodity products/services.

    Solicit formal proposals from vendors to conduct an evaluation and selection process.

    Formal and fair process; identical for each participating vendor.

    Level of Intent

    Fact-finding there is no commitment to engage the vendor.

    Vendors are often reluctant to provide quotes.

    Committed to procure a specific product/service at the lowest price.

    Intent to buy the products/services in the RFP.

    Business case/approval to spend is already obtained.

    Level of Detail High-level requirements and business goals.

    Detailed specifications of what products/services are needed.

    Detailed contract and delivery terms.

    Detailed business requirements and objectives.

    Standard questions and contract term requests for all vendors.

    Response

    Generalized response with high-level product/services.

    Sometimes standard pricing quote.

    Price quote and confirmation of ability to fulfill desired terms.

    Detailed solution description, delivery approach, customized price quote, and additional requested information.

    Product demo and/or hands-on trial.

    Info-Tech Insight
    If you are in a hurry, consider instead issuing Info-Tech’s Vendor Evaluation Workbook. This workbook speeds up the typical procurement process by adding RFP-like requirements (such as operational and technical requirements) while driving the procurement process via emphasis on high-value use cases.

    Download the Vendor Evaluation Workbook

    Activity: Document requirements

    2 hours

    1. Review each tab of Info-Tech’s CSM Platform RFP Scoring Tool to generate use cases and ideas for your requirements building.
    2. Modify and include additional features you may need, using Info-Tech’s CSM Platform RFP Template to assist with structure (if pursuing an RFP process) or Vendor Evaluation Workbook (if an RFP process is not needed). Pay attention to any nonfunctional requirements (such as security or integrations), alongside future trends of CSM. Vendors must be able to scale with your organization’s growth.
    3. You can use the CSM Platform RFP Scoring Tool again when assessing vendor responses.
    Input Output
    • Key use cases that capture your most important customer service support processes
    • Discussion of CSM future trends and differentiating features
    • Confirmation on organization’s significant nonfunctional requirements (e.g. security or integrations)
    • Either a Requirements Workbook to go straight to shortlisted vendor(s) or an RFP document to solicit a broader market response
    Materials Participants
    • CSM Platform RFP Scoring Tool
    • CSM Platform RFP Template
    • Vendor Evaluation Workbook
    • Customer support analyst(s)
    • Infrastructure and Operations lead(s)
    • Other major stakeholders (for requirements elicitation)

    Download the CSM Platform RFP Scoring Tool

    Download the CSM Platform RFP Template

    Once vendor responses are in, turn product demos into investigative interviews

    Avoid vendor glitz and glamour shows by ensuring vendors are concretely applying their solution to your high-value use cases.

    1 Minimize the number of vendors to four to keep up the pace of the selection process.
    2 Provide a demo script that captures your high-value use cases and differentiating requirements.
    3 Ensure demos are booked close together and the selection committee attends all demos.

    Conduct a day of rapid-fire vendor demos

    Zoom in on high-value use cases and answers to targeted questions

    Rapid-fire vendor investigative interview

    Invite vendors to come onsite (or join you via videoconference) to demonstrate the product and answer questions. Use a highly targeted demo script to help identify how a vendor’s solution will fit your organization’s particular business capability needs.

    Give each vendor 90 to 120 minutes to give a rapid-fire presentation. We suggest the following structure:

    • 30 minutes: Company introduction and vision
    • 60 minutes: Walkthrough of two or three high-value demo scenarios
    • 30 minutes: Targeted Q&A from the business stakeholders and procurement team

    To ensure a consistent evaluation, vendors should be asked analogous questions and answers should be tabulated.

    How to challenge the vendors in the investigative interview

    • Change the visualization/presentation.
    • Change the underlying data.
    • Add additional data sets to the artifacts.
    • Test voice quality (if the vendor offers a native telephony channel).
    • Test collaboration capabilities.

    To kick-start scripting your demo scenarios, leverage our CSM Platform Vendor Demo Script Template.

    A vendor scoring model provides a clear anchor point for your evaluation of CRM vendors based on a variety of inputs

    A vendor scoring model is a systematic method for effectively assessing competing vendors. A weighted-average scoring model is an approach that strikes a strong balance between rigor and evaluation speed.

    How do I build a scoring model? What are some of the best practices?
    • Start by shortlisting the key criteria you will use to evaluate your vendors. Functional capabilities should always be a critical category, but you’ll also want to look at criteria such as affordability, architectural fit, and vendor viability.
    • Depending on the complexity of the project, you may break down some criteria into subcategories to assist with evaluation (for example, breaking down functional capabilities into constituent use cases so you can score each one).
    • Once you’ve developed the key criteria for your project, the next step is weighting each criterion. Your weightings should reflect the priorities for the project at hand. For example, some projects may put more emphasis on affordability, others on vendor partnership.
    • Using the information collected in the subsequent phases of this blueprint, score each criterion from 1 to 100, then multiply by the weighting factor. Add up the weighted scores to arrive at the aggregate evaluation score for each vendor on your shortlist.
    • While the criteria for each project may vary, it’s helpful to have an inventory of repeatable criteria that can be used across application selection projects. The next slide contains an example that you can add to or subtract from.
    • Don’t go overboard on the number of criteria: five to ten weighted criteria should be the norm for most projects. The more criteria (and subcriteria) you must score against, the longer it will take to conduct your evaluation. Always remember, link the level of rigor to the size and complexity of your project! It’s possible to create a convoluted scoring model that takes significant time to fill out but yields little additional value.
    • Creation of the scoring model should be a consensus-driven activity among IT, procurement, and the key business stakeholders – it should not be built in isolation. Everyone should agree on the fundamental criteria and weights that are employed.
    • Consider using not just the outputs of investigative interviews and RFP responses to score vendors, but also third-party review services like SoftwareReviews.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Even the best scoring model will still involve some “art” rather than science. Scoring categories such as vendor viability always entail a degree of subjective interpretation.

    Define how you will score vendor responses and demos

    Your key CSM criteria should be informed by the following goals, use cases, and requirements.

    Criteria Description
    Functional Capabilities How well does the vendor align with the top-priority functional requirements identified in your accelerated needs assessment? What is the vendor’s functional breadth and depth?
    Affordability How affordable is this vendor? Consider a three-to-five-year total cost of ownership (TCO) that encompasses not just licensing costs but also implementation, integration, training, and ongoing support costs.
    Architectural Fit How well does this vendor align with your direction from an enterprise architecture perspective? How interoperable is the solution with existing applications in your technology stack? Does the solution meet your deployment model preferences?
    Extensibility How easy is it to augment the base solution with native or third-party add-ons as your business needs may evolve?
    Scalability How easy is it to expand the solution to support increased user, data, and/or customer volumes? Does the solution have any capacity constraints?
    Vendor Viability How viable is this vendor? Are they an established player with a proven track record or a new and untested entrant to the market? What is the financial health of the vendor? How committed are they to the particular solution category?
    Vendor Vision Does the vendor have a cogent and realistic product roadmap? Are they making sensible investments that align with your organization’s internal direction?
    Emotional Footprint How well does the vendor’s organizational culture and team dynamics align to yours?
    Third-Party Assessments and/or References How well-received is the vendor by unbiased third-party sources like SoftwareReviews? For larger projects, how well does the vendor perform in reference checks (and how closely do those references mirror your own situation)?

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Contract Review Services to level the playing field with shortlisted vendors

    You may be faced with multiple products, services, master service agreements, licensing models, service agreements, and more.

    Use Info-Tech’s Contract Review Services to gain insights on your agreements.

    Consider the aspects of a contract review:

    1. Are all key terms included?
    2. Are they applicable to your business?
    3. Can you trust that results will be delivered?
    4. What questions should you be asking from an IT perspective?

    Validate that a contract meets IT’s and the business’ needs by looking beyond the legal terminology. Use a practical set of questions, rules, and guidance to improve your value for dollar spent.

    Book Contract Review Service

    Download Master Contract Review and Negotiation for Software Agreements

    Customer Service Management (CSM) Software

    Vendor Analysis

    Evaluate software category leaders through vendor rankings and awards

    SoftwareReviews

    The Data Quadrant is a thorough evaluation and ranking of all software in an individual category to compare platforms across multiple dimensions.

    Vendors are ranked by their Composite Score, based on individual feature evaluations, user satisfaction rankings, vendor capability comparisons, and likeliness to recommend the platform.

    The Emotional Footprint is a powerful indicator of overall user sentiment toward the relationship with the vendor, capturing data across five dimensions.

    Vendors are ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score, which combines the overall Emotional Footprint rating with a measure of the value delivered by the solution.

    Speak with category experts to dive deeper into the vendor landscape

    SoftwareReviews

    Fact-based reviews of business software from IT professionals.

    Product and category reports with state-of-the-art data visualization.

    Top-tier data quality backed by a rigorous quality assurance process.

    User-experience insight that reveals the intangibles of working with a vendor.

    SoftwareReviews is powered by Info-Tech

    Technology coverage is a priority for Info-Tech, and SoftwareReviews provides the most comprehensive, unbiased data on today’s technology. Combined with the insight of our expert analysts, our members receive unparalleled support in their buying journey.

    Click here to access SoftwareReviews

    Comprehensive software reviews to make better IT decisions

    We collect and analyze the most detailed reviews on enterprise software from real users to give you an unprecedented view into the product and vendor before you buy.

    Microsoft Dynamics 365

    Est. 2003 | WA, USA | MSFT:NASDAQ

    Bio

    To accelerate your digital transformation, you need a new type of business application. One that breaks down the silos between CRM and ERP, that’s powered by data and intelligence, and helps capture new business opportunities. That’s Microsoft Dynamics 365.

    Offices

    Microsoft is located all over the world. For a full list, see Microsoft Worldwide Sites.

    representative Customers

    Stated Industry Specializations

    • Covers an extremely wide range of industries, such as finance, education, government, healthcare, manufacturing, and retail.

    Software review for Microsoft

    SoftwareReviews’ CSM Enterprise Vendor Ranking
    (out of 7)

    Likeliness to Recommend

    • 7th (81%)

    Plan to Renew

    • 6th (93%)

    Satisfaction That Cost Is Fair Relative to Value

    • 2nd (81%)

    Strengths

    • Product Strategy and Rate of Improvement (1st)
    • Ease of Customization (1st)
    • Breadth of Features (2nd)

    Areas to Improve

    • Availability and Quality of Training (5th)
    • Ease of Implementation (7th)
    • Usability and Intuitiveness (7th

    Microsoft Dynamics 365

    History

    Founded 2003 (as Microsoft Dynamics CRM)
    2005 Second version branded Dynamics 3.0.
    2009 Dynamics CRM 4.0 (Titan) passes 1 million user mark.
    2015 Announces availability of CRM Cloud design for FedRAMP compliance.
    2016 Dynamics 365 released as successor to Dynamics CRM.
    2016 Microsoft’s acquisition of LinkedIn provides line of data to 500 million users.
    2021 First-party voice channel added to Dynamics 365.
    2022 Announces Digital Contact Center Platform powered with Nuance AI, MS Teams, and Dynamics 365.

    Microsoft is rapidly innovating in the customer experience technology marketspace. Alongside Dynamics 365’s omnichannel offering, Microsoft is building out its own native contact center platform. This will provide new opportunities for centralization without multivendor management between Dynamics 365, Microsoft Teams, and an additional third-party telephony or contact-center-as-a-service (CCaaS) vendor. SoftwareReviews reports suggest that Microsoft is a market leader in the area of product innovation for CSM, and this area of voice channel capability is where I see most industry interest.

    Of course, Dynamics 365 is not a platform to get only for CSM functionality. Users will typically be a strong Microsoft shop already (using Dynamics 365 for customer relationship management) and are looking for native CSM features to enhance customer service workflow management and self-service.
    Thomas Randall
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech Insight
    Pricing for Microsoft Dynamics 365 is often contextualized to an organization’s needs. However, this can create complicated licensing structures. Two Info-Tech resources to assist are:

    *This service may be used for other enterprise CSM providers too, including Salesforce, ServiceNow, SAP, and Oracle.
    Contact your account manager to review your access to this service.

    Freshworks

    Est. 2010 | CA, USA | FRSH:NASDAQ

    Bio

    Freshworks' cloud-based customer support software, Freshdesk, makes customer happiness refreshingly easy. With powerful features, an easy-to-use interface, and a freemium pricing model, Freshdesk enables companies of all sizes to provide a seamless multichannel support experience across email, phone, web, chat, forums, social media, and mobile apps. Freshdesk’s capabilities include robust ticketing, SLA management, smart automations, intelligent reporting, and game mechanics to motivate agents.

    Offices

    • Americas: US
    • Asia-Pacific (APAC): Australia, India, Singapore
    • Europe, Middle East, and Africa (EMEA): France, Germany, Netherlands, UK

    Freshworks Representative Customers

    Stated Industry Specializations

    • Automotive
    • Education
    • Energy
    • Finance
    • Healthcare
    • Nonprofit
    • Professional Services
    • Publishing
    • Real Estate
    • Retail
    • Travel

    Software Review of Freshworks

    SoftwareReviews’ CSM Enterprise Vendor Ranking
    (out of 7)

    Likeliness to Recommend

    • 3rd (83%)

    Plan to Renew

    • 4th (94%)

    Satisfaction That Cost Is Fair Relative to Value

    • 3rd (80%)

    Strengths

    • Breadth of Features (1st)
    • Usability and Intuitiveness (1st)
    • Ease of Implementation (2nd)

    Areas to Improve

    • Ease of IT Administration (3rd)
    • Vendor Support (4th)
    • Product Strategy and Rate of Improvement (4th)

    Freshworks

    History

    Founded 2010
    2011 Freshdesk forms a core component of product line.
    2014 Raises significant capital in Series D round: $31M.
    2016 Acquires Airwoot, enabling real-time customer support on social media.
    2019 Raises $150M in Series H funding round.
    2019 Acquires Natero, which predicts, analyzes, and drives customer behavior.
    2021 Surpasses $300M in annual recurring revenues.
    2021 Freshworks posts its IPO listing.

    Freshworks stepped into the SaaS customer support marketspace in 2010 to attract dissatisfied Zendesk eSupport customers, following Zendesk’s large price increases that year (of 300%). After performing well during the pandemic, Freshworks has reinforced its global positioning in the CSM tool marketspace; SoftwareReviews data suggests Freshworks performs very well against its competitors for breadth and intuitiveness of its features.

    Freshworks receives strong recommendations from Info-Tech’s members, boasting a broad product selection that enables opportunities for scaling and receiving a high rate of value return. Of note are Freshworks’ internal customer management solution and its native contact center offering, limiting multivendor management typically required for integrating separate IT service management (ITSM) and CCaaS solutions.
    Thomas Randall
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Free Growth Pro Enterprise
    • $0 up to 10 agents
    • Knowledge base
    • Ticket routing
    • Out-of-box analytics
    • $15 agent/month
    • Collision detection
    • Integrations
    • Automated follow-ups
    • $49 agent/month
    • Multiple product lines
    • Personalization
    • CSAT surveys
    • Customer journey
    • $79 agent/month
    • Assist bot and email bot
    • Skill-based routing

    *Pricing correct as of November 2022. Listed in USD and absent discounts.
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.

    Help Scout

    Est. 2006 | MA, USA | HUBS:NYSE

    Bio
    Help Scout is designed with your customers in mind. Provide email and live chat with a personal touch and deliver help content right where your customers need it, all in one place, all for one low price. The customer experience is simple and training staff is painless, but Help Scout still has all the powerful features you need to provide great support at scale. With best-in-class reporting, an integrated knowledge base, 50+ integrations, and a robust API, Help Scout lets your team focus on what really matters: your customers.

    Offices

    • Americas: Canada, Colombia, US
    • APAC: Australia, Japan, Singapore
    • EMEA: Belgium, France, Ireland, Germany, UK

    Questions for support transition

    Stated Industry Specializations

    • eCommerce
    • Education
    • Finance
    • Healthcare
    • Logistics
    • Manufacturing
    • Media
    • Professional Services
    • Property Management
    • Software

    Software Review of Help Scout

    SoftwareReviews’ CSM Enterprise Vendor Ranking
    (out of 7)

    Likeliness to Recommend

    • 4th (82%)

    Plan to Renew

    • 7th (87%)

    Satisfaction That Cost Is Fair Relative to Value

    • 7th (71%)

    Strengths

    • Business Value Created (1st)
    • Ease of Data Integration (1st)
    • Breadth of Features (3rd)

    Areas to Improve

    • Ease of IT Administration (5th)
    • Product Strategy and Rate of Improvement (5th)
    • Quality of Features (6th)

    Help Scout

    History

    Founded 2011
    2015 Raised $6M in Series A funding.
    2015 Rebrands from Brightwurks to Help Scout.
    2015 Named by Appstorm as one of six CSM tools to delight Mac users.
    2016 iOS app released.
    2017 Android app released.
    2020 All employees instructed to work remotely.
    2021 Raises $15M in Series B funding.

    Help Scout provides a simplified, standalone CSM tool that operates like a shared email inbox. Best suited for mid-sized organizations, customers can expect live chat, in-app messaging, and knowledge-base functionality. A particular strength is Help Scout’s integration capabilities, with a wide range of CRM, eCommerce, marketing, and communication APIs available. This strength is also reflected in the data: SoftwareReviews lists Help Scout as first in its CSM category for ease of data integrations.

    Customers who are expecting a broader range of channels (including voice, video cobrowsing, and so on) will not find good return on investment with Help Scout. However, for mid-sized organizations looking to begin maturing their customer service management, Help Scout provides a strong foundation – especially for enhancing in-house collaboration between support staff.
    Thomas Randall
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Standard Plus Pro
    • $20 user/month
    • Live chat
    • Up to 25 users
    • 50+ integrations
    • 2 mailboxes
    • $40 user/month
    • Advanced permissions
    • Group users
    • 5 mailboxes
    • $65 user/month
    • HIPAA compliance
    • Onboarding service
    • Dedicated account manager

    *Pricing correct as of November 2022. Listed in USD and absent discounts.
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.

    HubSpot

    Est. 2006 | MA, USA | HUBS:NYSE

    Bio
    HubSpot’s Service Hub brings all your customer service data and channels together in one place and helps scale your support through automation and self-service. The result? More time for proactive service that delights, retains, and grows your customer base. HubSpot provides software and support to help businesses grow better. The overall platform includes marketing, sales, service, and website management products that start free and scale to meet our customers’ needs at any stage of growth.

    Offices

    • Americas: Canada, Colombia, US
    • APAC: Australia, Japan, Singapore
    • EMEA: Belgium, France, Ireland, Germany, UK

    HubSpot Representative Customers

    Stated Industry Specializations

    • Covers an extremely wide range of industries, such as finance, education, healthcare, manufacturing, and retail.

    Software Review for HubSpot

    SoftwareReviews’ CSM Enterprise Vendor Ranking
    (out of 7)

    Likeliness to Recommend

    • 1st (88%)

    Plan to Renew

    • 1st (98%)

    Satisfaction That Cost Is Fair Relative to Value

    • 5th (78%)

    Strengths:

    • Vendor Support (1st)
    • Availability and Quality of Training (1st)
    • Ease of IT Administration (1st)

    Areas to Improve:

    • Ease of Data Integration (5th)
    • Ease of Customization (5th)
    • Breadth of Features (7th)

    HubSpot

    History

    Founded 2006
    2013 Opens first international office in Ireland.
    2014 First IPO listing on NYSE, raising $140M.
    2015 Milestone for acquiring 15,000 customers
    2017 Acquires Kemvi for AI and ML support for sales teams.
    2019 Acquires PieSync for customer data synchronization.
    2021 Yamini Rangan is announced as new CEO.
    2021 Records $1B in revenues.

    HubSpot is a competitive player in the enterprise sales and marketing technology market. Offering an all-in-one platform, HubSpot allows users to leverage its CRM, marketing solutions, content management tool, and CSM tool. Across knowledge management, contact center integration, and customer self-service, SoftwareReviews data pits HubSpot as performing better than its enterprise competitors.

    While customers can leverage HubSpot’s CSM tool independently, watch out for scope creep. HubSpot’s other offerings are tightly integrated and module extensions could quickly add up in price. HubSpot may not be affordable for most regional, mid-sized organizations, and a poor ROI may be expected. For instance, the Pro plan is required to get a knowledge base, which is typically a standard CSM feature – yet the same plan also comes with multicurrency support, which could remain unleveraged.
    Thomas Randall
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Free Starter Pro Enterprise
    • $0 month
    • Ticketing
    • Live chat
    • 200 notifications per month
    • $45 month
    • 5,000 email templates
    • White label
    • 500 calling minutes
    • $450 month
    • 30 currencies
    • Knowledge base
    • Up to 300 workflows
    • $1,200 month
    • Conversation intelligence
    • SSO

    *Pricing correct as of November 2022. Listed in USD and absent discounts.
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.

    Salesforce

    Est. 1999 | CA, USA | CRM:NYSE

    Bio

    Service Cloud customer service software gives you faster, smarter customer support. Salesforce provides customer relationship management software and applications focused on sales, customer service, marketing automation, analytics, and application development.

    Offices

    • Americas: US
    • APAC: Australia, India, Singapore
    • EMEA: France, Germany, Netherlands, UK

    Salesforce Representative Customers

    Stated Industry Specializations

    • Covers an extremely wide range of industries, such as finance, education, government, healthcare, manufacturing, and retail.

    Software Review for Salesforce

    SoftwareReviews’ CSM Enterprise Vendor Ranking
    (out of 7)

    Likeliness to Recommend

    • 6th (81%)

    Plan to Renew

    • 2nd (96%)

    Satisfaction That Cost Is Fair Relative to Value

    • 4th (79%)

    Strengths:

    • Usability and Intuitiveness (5th)
    • Breadth of Features (5th)
    • Ease of Implementation (6th)

    Areas to Improve:

    • Ease of IT Administration (7th)
    • Availability and Quality of Training (7th)
    • Ease of Customization (7th)

    Salesforce

    History

    Founded 1999
    2000 Salesforce launches its cloud-based products.
    2003 The first Dreamforce (a leading CX conference) happens.
    2005 Salesforce unveils AppExchange.
    2013 Salesforce acquires ExactTarget and expands Marketing Cloud offering.
    2016 Salesforce acquires Demandware, launches Commerce Cloud.
    2019 Salesforce acquires Tableau to expand business intelligence capabilities.
    2021 Salesforce buys major collaboration vendor Slack.

    Salesforce was an early disruptor in CRM marketspace, placing a strong emphasis on a SaaS delivery model and end-user experience. This allowed Salesforce to rapidly gain market share at the expense of complacent enterprise application vendors. A series of savvy acquisitions over the years has allowed Salesforce to augment its core Sales and Service Clouds with a wide variety of other solutions, from ecommerce to marketing automation – and recently Slack for internal collaboration.

    Salesforce Service Cloud Voice is now available to take advantage of integrating telephony and voice channels into your CRM. This service is still maturing, though, with Salesforce selecting Amazon Connect as its preferred integrator. However, Connect is not necessarily plug-and-play – it is a communications platform as a service, requiring you to build your own contact center solution. This is either a fantastic opportunity for creativity or a time suck of already tied-up resources.
    Thomas Randall
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Service Cloud Essentials Service Cloud Professional Service Cloud Enterprise Service Cloud Unlimited
    • $25 user/month
    • Small businesses after basic functionality
    • $75 user/month
    • Mid-market target
    • $150 user/month
    • Enterprise target
    • Web Services API
    • $300 user/month
    • Strong upmarket feature additions

    *Pricing correct as of November 2022. Listed in USD and absent discounts.
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.

    Zendesk

    Est. 2007 | CA, USA | ZEN:NYSE

    Bio

    Zendesk streamlines your support with time-saving tools like ticket views, triggers, and automations. This helps you get straight to what matters most – better customer service and more meaningful conversations. Today, Zendesk is the champion of great service everywhere for everyone and powers billions of conversations, connecting more than 100,000 brands with hundreds of millions of customers over telephony, chat, email, messaging, social channels, communities, review sites, and help centers.

    Offices

    • Americas: Brazil, Canada, US
    • APAC: Australia, China, India, Indonesia, Japan, Korea, Malaysia, Philippines, Singapore, Thailand, Vietnam
    • EMEA: Denmark, France, Germany, Ireland, Italy, Netherlands, Poland, Spain, Sweden, UK

    Zendesk Representative Customers

    Stated Industry Specializations

    • Education
    • Finance
    • Government
    • Healthcare
    • Manufacturing
    • Media
    • Retail
    • Software
    • Telecommunications

    Software Review for Zendesk

    SoftwareReviews’ CSM Enterprise Vendor Ranking
    (out of 7)

    Likeliness to Recommend

    • 5th (81%)

    Plan to Renew

    • 5th (94%)

    Satisfaction That Cost Is Fair Relative to Value

    • 6th (77%)

    Strengths

    • Ease of IT Administration (2nd)
    • Ease of Implementation (5th)
    • Quality of Features (5th)

    Areas to Improve

    • Business Value Created (7th)
    • Vendor Support (7th)
    • Product Strategy and Rate of Improvement (7th)

    Zendesk

    History

    Founded 2007
    2008 Initial seed funding of $500,000.
    2009 Receives $6M through Series B Funding.
    2009 Relocates from Copenhagen to San Francisco.
    2014 Acquires Zopin Technologies.
    2014 Listed on NYSE.
    2015 Acquires We Are Cloud SAS.
    2018 Launches Zendesk Sell.

    Zendesk is a global player in the CSM tool marketspace and works with enterprises across a wide variety of industries. Unlike some other CSM players, Zendesk provides more service channels at its lowest licensing offer, affording organizations a quicker expansion in customer service delivery without making enterprise-grade investments. However, the price of the lowest licensing offer starts much higher than Zendesk’s competitors; organizations will need to consider if the cost to try Zendesk over an annual contract is within budget.

    Unfortunately, SoftwareReviews data suggests that Zendesk may not always provide that immediate value, especially to mid-sized organizations. Zendesk is rated lower for vendor support and business value created. However, Zendesk provides strong functionality that competes with other enterprise players, and mid-sized organizations are continually impressed with Zendesk’s automation workflows.
    Thomas Randall
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    *Pricing correct as of November 2022. Listed in USD and absent discounts.
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.

    Team Growth Pro
    • $49 user/month
    • Ticketing
    • Email, voice, SMS, and live chat channels
    • $79 user/month
    • AI-powered knowledge management
    • Self-service portal
    • $99 user/month
    • HIPAA compliance
    • Customizable dashboards

    LiveChat

    Est. 2002 | Poland | WSE:LVC

    Bio

    Manage all emails from customers in one app and save time on customer support. LiveChat is a real-time live-chat software tool for ecommerce sales and support that is helping ecommerce companies create a new sales channel. It serves more than 30,000 businesses in over 150 countries, including large brands like Adobe, Asus, LG, Acer, Better Business Bureau, and Air Asia and startups like SproutSocial, Animoto, and HasOffers.

    Offices

    • Americas: US
    • EMEA: Poland

    LiveChat Representative Customers

    Stated Industry Specializations

    • eCommerce
    • Education
    • Finance
    • Software and IT

    Software Review for LiveChat

    SoftwareReviews’ CSM Midmarket Vendor Ranking
    (out of 8)

    Likeliness to Recommend

    • 1st (93%)

    Plan to Renew

    • 4th (92%)

    Satisfaction That Cost Is Fair Relative to Value

    • 5th (83%)

    Strengths

    • Product Strategy and Rate of Improvement (1st)
    • Usability and Intuitiveness (1st)
    • Breadth of Features (1st)

    Areas to Improve

    • Ease of Implementation (5th)
    • Ease of IT Administration (5th)
    • Ease of Customization (7th)

    LiveChat

    History

    Founded 2002
    2006 50% of company stock bought by Capital Partners.
    2008 Capital Partners sells entire stake to Naspers.
    2011 LiveChat buys back majority of stakeholder shares.
    2013 Listed by Red Herring in group of most innovative companies across Europe.
    2014 Listed on Warsaw Stock Exchange.
    2019 HelpDesk is launched.
    2020 Offered services for free to organizations helping mitigate the pandemic.

    LiveChat’s HelpDesk solution for CSM is a relatively recent solution (2019) that is proving very popular for small to mid-sized businesses (SMBs) – especially across Western Europe. SoftwareReviews’ data shows that HelpDesk is well-rated for breadth of features, usability and intuitiveness, and rate of improvement. Indeed, LiveChat has won and been shortlisted for several awards over the past decade for customer feedback, innovation, and fast growth to IPO.

    When shortlisting LiveChat’s HelpDesk, SMBs should be careful of scope creep. LiveChat offers a range of other solutions that are intended to work together. The LiveChat self-titled product is designed to integrate with HelpDesk to provide ticketing, email management, and chat management. Moreover, LiveChat’s AI-based ChatBot (for automated webchat) comes with additional cost (starting at $52 team/month).
    Thomas Randall
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Team Plan Enterprise
    • $29 user/month.
    • Customized canned responses
    • Real-time reporting
    • Request quote
    • White labelling
    • Product training
    • Account manager

    *Pricing correct as of November 2022. Listed in USD and absent discounts.
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.

    ManageEngine

    Est. 1996 | India | Privately Owned

    Bio

    SupportCenter Plus is a web-based customer support software that lets organizations effectively manage customer tickets, their account and contact information, and their service contracts, and in the process provide a superior customer experience. ManageEngine is a division of Zoho.

    Offices

    • Americas: Brazil, Colombia, Mexico, US
    • APAC: Australia, China, India, Japan, Singapore
    • EMEA: Netherlands, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, UAE, UK

    ManageEngine Representative Customers

    Stated Industry Specializations

    • None stated but representative customers cover manufacturing, R&D, real estate, and transportation.

    Software Review for ManageEngine

    SoftwareReviews’ CSM Midmarket Vendor Ranking
    (out of 8)

    Likeliness to Recommend

    • 6th (85%)

    Plan to Renew

    • 5th (91%)

    Satisfaction That Cost Is Fair Relative to Value

    • 6th (83%)

    Strengths

    • Ease of Customization (1st)
    • Ease of Implementation (2nd)
    • Ease of IT Administration (2nd)

    Areas to Improve

    • Quality of Features (4th)
    • Usability and Intuitiveness (6th)
    • Availability and Quality of Training (8th)

    ManageEngine

    History

    Founded 1996
    2002 Branches from Zoho to become division focused on IT management.
    2004 Becomes an authorized MySQL Partner.
    2009 Begins shift of offerings into the cloud.
    2010 Tops 35,000 customers.
    2011 Integration with Zoho Assist.
    2015 Integration with Zoho Reports.

    ManageEngine, as a division of Zoho, has its strengths in IT operations management (ITOM). SupportCenter thus scores well in our SoftwareReviews data for ease of customization, implementation, and administration. As ManageEngine is a frequently discussed low-cost vendor in the ITOM market, customers often get good scalability across IT, sales, and marketing teams. Although SupportCenter is aimed at the midmarket and is low cost, organizations have the benefit of ManageEngine’s global presence and backing by Zoho for viability.

    However, because ManageEngine’s focus is ITOM, the breadth and quality of features for SupportCenter are not rated as well compared to its competitors. These features may be “good enough,” but usability and intuitiveness is not scored high. Organizations thinking about SupportCenter are recommended to identify their high-value use cases and perform user acceptance testing before adopting.
    Thomas Randall
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Standard* Pro* Enterprise*
    • Account and contact management
    • Knowledge base
    • SLA management
    • Customer portal
    • Active Directory integration
    • Reporting and dashboards
    • Billing contracts
    • Live chat
    • APIs
    • Automation tools

    *Pricing unavailable. Request quote.
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.

    Zoho Desk

    Est. 1996 | India | Privately Owned

    Bio

    Use the power of customer context to improve agent productivity, promote self-service, manage cross-functional service processes, and increase customer happiness. Zoho offers beautifully smart software to help you grow your business. With over 80 million users worldwide, Zoho's 55+ products (including Zoho Desk) aid your sales and marketing, support and collaboration, finance, and recruitment needs – letting you focus only on your business.

    Offices

    • Americas: Brazil, Colombia, Mexico, US
    • APAC: Australia, China, India, Japan, Singapore
    • EMEA: Netherlands, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, UAE, UK

    Zoho Desk Representative Customers

    Stated Industry Specializations

    • Covers an extremely wide range of industries, such as finance, education, government, healthcare, manufacturing, and retail.

    Software Review for Zoho Desk

    SoftwareReviews’ CSM Midmarket Vendor Ranking
    (out of 8)

    Likeliness to Recommend

    • 2nd (90%)

    Plan to Renew

    • 2nd (98%)

    Satisfaction That Cost Is Fair Relative to Value

    • 3rd (83%)

    Strengths

    • Breadth of Features (2nd)
    • Quality of Features (3rd)
    • Ease of Implementation (3rd)

    Areas to Improve

    • Business Value Created (5th)
    • Ease of Data Integration (5th)
    • Product Strategy and Rate of Improvements (5th)

    Zoho Desk

    History

    Founded 1996
    2001 Expands into Japan and shifts focus to SMBs.
    2006 Zoho CRM is launched, alongside first Office suite.
    2008 Reaches 1M users.
    2009 Rebrands from AdventNet to Zoho Corp.
    2011 Zoho Desk is built and launched.
    2017 Zoho One, a suite of applications, is launched.
    2020 Reaches 50M users.

    Zoho Desk is one of the highest scoring CSM tool providers for likelihood to renew and recommend (98% and 90%, respectively). A major reason is that users receive a broad range of functionality for a lower-cost price model. There is also the capacity to scale with Zoho Desk as midmarket customers expand; companies can grow with Zoho and can receive high return on investment in the process.

    However, while Zoho Desk can be used as a standalone CSM tool, there is danger of scope creep with other Zoho products. Zoho now has 50+ applications, all tied into one another. For Zoho Desk, customers may also lean into Zoho Assist (for troubleshooting customer problems via remote access) and Zoho Lens (for reality-based remote assistance, typically for plant machinery or servers). Consequently, customers should keep an eye on business value created if the scope of CSM grows wider.
    Thomas Randall
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Standard Pro Enterprise
    • $14 user/month
    • 1 social media channel
    • 5 workflow rules
    • $23 user/month
    • Telephony channel
    • Round-robin ticket assignment
    • Ticket sharing
    • $40 user/month
    • Live chat
    • Contract management SLAs

    *Pricing correct as of November 2022. Listed in USD and absent discounts.
    See pricing on vendor’s website for latest information.

    Summary of AccomplishmentSuccessful selection of a CSM tool

    In this trends and buyer’s guide for CSM tool selection, we engaged in several activities to:

    1. Contextualize the CSM technology marketspace.
    2. Engage in a selection process for CSM tools.

    The result:

    • Understanding of key trends and differentiating features in the CSM marketspace.
    • Determination of your organization’s customer service maturity (and thus if a standalone CSM tool is relevant).
    • Identification of high-value use cases that CSM tools should successfully enable.
    • Evaluation of major vendors in the CSM marketspace to discover the best-fitting provider.
    • Procurement items to finalize selection process.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech workshop or Guided Implementation

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Governance and Management of Enterprise Software Implementation

    • Being Agile will increase the likelihood of success.

    The Rapid Application Selection Framework

    • Application selection is a critical activity for IT departments. Implement a repeatable, data-driven approach that accelerates application selection efforts.

    Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management

    • Design an end-to-end technology strategy to drive sales revenue, enhance marketing effectiveness, and create compelling experiences for your customers.

    Bibliography

    Capers, Zach. “How the Pandemic Changed Customer Attitudes Toward Biometric Technology.” GetApp, 21 Feb. 2022. Accessed Nov. 2022.

    Gomez, Jenny. “The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly: A History of Customer Service.” Lucidworks, 15 Jul. 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.

    Hoory. “History of Customer Service: How Did It All Begin?” Hoory, 24 Mar. 2022. Accessed Nov. 2022.

    Patel, Snigdha. “Top 10 Customer Service Technology Trends to Follow in 2022.” Reve Chat, 21 Feb. 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.

    RingCentral. “The 2020 Customer Communications Review: A Survey of How Consumers Prefer to Communicate with Businesses.” RingCentral, 2020. Accessed Nov. 2022.

    Robinson-Yu, Sarah. “What is a Knowledgebase? How Can It Help my Business?” Vanilla, 25 Feb. 2022. Accessed Nov. 2022.

    Salesforce. “The Complete History of CRM.” Salesforce, n.d. Accessed Nov. 2022.

    Salesforce. “State of the Connected Customer.” 5th ed. Salesforce, 2022. Accessed Nov. 2022.

    Sprinklr. “How AzkoNobel UK Reduced Response Times and Increased Engagement.” Sprinklr, 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.

    Vermes, Krystle. “Study: 70% of Marketers Using Advanced Personalization Seeing 200% ROI.” KoMarketing, 2 Jun. 2020. Accessed Nov. 2022.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Colin Taylor, CEO, The Taylor Research Group

    Colin Taylor
    CEO
    The Taylor Reach Group

    Recognized as one of the leading contact/call center pioneers and experts, Colin has received 30 awards on two continents for excellence in contact center management and has been acknowledged as a leader and influencer on the topics of call/contact centers, customer service, and customer experience, in published rankings on Huffington Post, Call Center Helper, and MindShift. Colin was recognized as number 6 in the global 100 for customer service.

    The Taylor Reach Group is a contact center, call center and customer experience (CX) consultancy specializing in CX consulting and call and contact center consulting, management, performance, technologies, site selection, tools, training development and center leadership training, center audits, benchmarking, and assessments.

    David Thomas, Customer Service Specialist, Freedom Mobile

    David Thomas
    Customer Service Specialist
    Freedom Mobile

    David Thomas has both managerial and hands-on experience with delivering quality service to Freedom Mobile customers. With several years being involved in training customer support and being at the forefront of retail during the pandemic, David has witnessed first-hand how to incentivize staff with the right metrics that create positive experiences for both staff and customers.

    Freedom Mobile Inc. is a Canadian wireless telecommunications provider owned by Shaw Communications. It has 6% market share of Canada, mostly in urban areas of Ontario, British Columbia, and Alberta. Freedom Mobile is the fourth-largest wireless carrier in Canada.

    A special thanks to three other anonymous contributors, all based in customer support and contact center roles for Canada’s National Park Booking Systems’ software provider.

    Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}177|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Today’s rapidly scaling and increasingly complex products create mounting pressure on delivery teams to release new features and changes quickly and with sufficient quality.
    • Many organizations see BizDevOps as a solution to help meet this demand. However, they often lack the critical cross-functional collaboration and team-sport culture that are critical for success.
    • The industry provides little consensus and guidance on how to prepare for the transition to BizDevOps.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • BizDevOps is cultural, not driven by tools. It is about delivering high-quality and valuable releases to stakeholders through collective ownership, continuous collaboration, and team-first behaviors supported by tools.
    • BizDevOps begins with a strong foundation in five key areas. The crux of successful BizDevOps is centered on the strategic adoption and optimization of building great requirements, collaborative practices, iterative delivery, application management, and high-fidelity environments.
    • Teams take STOCK of what it takes to collaborate effectively. Teams and stakeholders must show up, trust the delivery method and people, orchestrate facilitated activities, clearly communicate and knowledge share every time they collaborate.

    Impact and Result

    • Bring the right people to the table. BizDevOps brings significant organizational, process and technology changes to improve delivery effectiveness. Include the key roles in the definition and validation of your BizDevOps vision and practices.
    • Focus on the areas that matter. Review your current circumstances and incorporate the right practices that addresses your key challenges and blockers to becoming BizDevOps.
    • Build your BizDevOps playbook. Gain a broad understanding of the key plays and practices that makes a successful BizDevOps organization. Verify and validate these practices in order to tailor them to your context. Keep your playbook live.

    Build Your BizDevOps Playbook Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Find out why you should implement BizDevOps, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Get started with BizDevOps

    Set the right expectations with your stakeholders and define the context of your BizDevOps implementation.

    • Build Your BizDevOps Playbook – Phase 1: Get Started With BizDevOps
    • BizDevOps Playbook

    2. Tailor your BizDevOps playbook

    Tailor the plays in your BizDevOps playbook to your circumstances and vision.

    • Build Your BizDevOps Playbook – Phase 2: Tailor Your BizDevOps Playbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Set Your Expectations

    The Purpose

    Discuss the goals of your BizDevOps playbook.

    Identify the various perspectives who should be included in the BizDevOps discussion.

    Level set expectations of your BizDevOps implementation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identification of the key roles who should be included in the BizDevOps discussion.

    Learning of key practices to support your BizDevOps vision and goals.

    Your vision of BizDevOps in your organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Define BizDevOps.

    1.2 Understand your key stakeholders.

    1.3 Define your objectives.

    Outputs

    Your BizDevOps definition

    List of BizDevOps stakeholders

    BizDevOps vision and objectives

    2 Set the Context

    The Purpose

    Understand the various methods to initiate the structuring of facilitated collaboration.

    Share a common way of thinking and behaving with a set of principles.

    Focus BizDevOps adoption on key areas of software product delivery.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A chosen collaboration method (Scrum, Kanban, Scrumban) to facilitate collaboration

    A mutually understanding and beneficial set of guiding principles

    Areas where BizDevOps will see the most benefit

    Activities

    2.1 Select your foundation method.

    2.2 Define your guiding principles.

    2.3 Focus on the areas that matter.

    Outputs

    Chosen collaboration model

    List of guiding principles

    High-level assessment of delivery practices and its fit for BizDevOps

    3 Tailor Your BizDevOps Playbook

    The Purpose

    Review the good practices within Info-Tech’s BizDevOps Playbook.

    Tailor your playbook to reflect your circumstances.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of the key plays involved in product delivery

    Product delivery plays that reflect the challenges and opportunities of your organization and support your BizDevOps vision

    Activities

    3.1 Review and tailor the plays in your playbook

    Outputs

    High-level discussion of key product delivery plays and its optimization to support BizDevOps

    Establish Realistic IT Resource Management Practices

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}435|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $36,337 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 28 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • As CIO, you oversee a department that lacks the resource capacity to adequately meet organizational demand for new projects and services.
    • More projects are approved by the steering committee (or equivalent) than your department realistically has the capacity for, and you and your staff have little recourse to push back. If you have a PMO – and that PMO is one of the few that provides usable resource capacity projections – that information is rarely used to make strategic approval and prioritization decisions.
    • As a result, project quality and timelines suffer, and service delivery lags. Your staff are overallocated, but you lack statistical evidence because of incomplete estimates, allocations, and very little accurate data.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • IT’s capacity for new project work is largely overestimated. Much of IT’s time is lost to tasks that go unregulated and untracked (e.g. operations and support work, break-fixes and other reactive work) before project work is ever approved. When projects are approved, it is done so with little insight or concern for IT’s capacity to realistically complete that work.
    • The shift to matrix work structures has strained traditional methods of time tracking. Day-to-day demand is chaotic, and staff are pulled in multiple directions by numerous people. As fast-paced, rapidly changing, interruption-driven environments become the new normal, distractions and inefficiencies interfere with productive project work and usable capacity data.
    • The executive team approves too many projects, but it is not held to account for this malinvestment of time. Instead, it’s up to individual workers to sink or swim, as they attempt to reconcile, day after day, seemingly infinite organizational demand for new services and projects with their finite supply of working hours.

    Impact and Result

    • Instill a culture of capacity awareness. For years, the project portfolio management (PPM) industry has helped IT departments report on demand and usage, but has largely failed to make capacity part of the conversation. This research helps inject capacity awareness into project and service portfolio planning, enabling IT to get proactive about constraints before overallocation spirals, and project and service delivery suffers.
    • Build a sustainable process. Efforts to improve resource management often falter when you try to get too granular too quickly. Info-Tech’s approach starts at a high level, ensuring that capacity data is accurate and usable, and that IT’s process discipline is mature enough to maintain the data, before drilling down into greater levels of precision.
    • Establish a capacity book of record. You will ultimately need a tool to help provide ongoing resource visibility. Follow the advice in this blueprint to help with your tool selection, and ensure you meet the reporting needs of both your team and executives.

    Establish Realistic IT Resource Management Practices Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a resource management strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Take stock of organizational supply and demand

    Set the right resource management approach for your team and create a realistic estimate of your resource supply and organizational demand.

    • Balance Supply and Demand with Realistic Resource Management Practices – Phase 1: Take Stock of Organizational Supply and Demand
    • Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator
    • Time Audit Workbook
    • Time-Tracking Survey Email Template

    2. Design a realistic resource management process

    Build a resource management process to ensure data accuracy and sustainability, and make the best tool selection to support your processes.

    • Balance Supply and Demand with Realistic Resource Management Practices – Phase 2: Design a Realistic Resource Management Process
    • Resource Management Playbook
    • PPM Solution Vendor Demo Script
    • Portfolio Manager Lite 2017

    3. Implement sustainable resource management practices

    Develop a plan to pilot your resource management processes to achieve maximum adoption, and anticipate challenges that could inhibit you from keeping supply and demand continually balanced.

    • Balance Supply and Demand with Realistic Resource Management Practices – Phase 3: Implement Sustainable Resource Management Practices
    • Process Pilot Plan Template
    • Project Portfolio Analyst / PMO Analyst
    • Resource Management Communications Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish Realistic IT Resource Management Practices

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Take Stock of Organizational Supply and Demand

    The Purpose

    Obtain a high-level view of current resource management practices.

    Identify current and target states of resource management maturity.

    Perform an in-depth time-tracking audit and gain insight into how time is spent on project versus non-project work to calculate realized capacity.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Assess current distribution of accountabilities in resource management.

    Delve into your current problems to uncover root causes.

    Validate capacity and demand estimations with a time-tracking survey.

    Activities

    1.1 Perform a root-cause analysis of resourcing challenges facing the organization.

    1.2 Create a realistic estimate of project capacity.

    1.3 Map all sources of demand on resources at a high level.

    1.4 Validate your supply and demand assumptions by directly surveying your resources.

    Outputs

    Root-cause analysis

    Tab 2 of the Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator, the Time Audit Workbook, and survey templates

    Tabs 3 and 4 of the Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator

    Complete the Time Audit Workbook

    2 Design a Realistic Resource Management Process

    The Purpose

    Construct a resource management strategy that aligns with your team’s process maturity levels.

    Determine the resource management tool that will best support your processes.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Activities

    2.1 Action the decision points in Info-Tech’s seven dimensions of resource management.

    2.2 Review resource management tool options, and depending on your selection, prepare a vendor demo script or review and set up Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager Lite.

    2.3 Customize a workflow and process steps within the bounds of your seven dimensions and informed by your tool selection.

    Outputs

    A wireframe for a right-sized resource management strategy

    A vendor demo script or Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager Lite.

    A customized resource management process and Resource Management Playbook.

    3 Implement Sustainable Resource Management Practices

    The Purpose

    Develop a plan to pilot your new processes to test whether you have chosen the right dimensions for maintaining resource data.

    Develop a communication plan to guide you through the implementation of the strategy and manage any resistance you may encounter.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify and address improvements before officially instituting the new resource management strategy.

    Identify the other factors that affect resource productivity.

    Implement a completed resource management solution.

    Activities

    3.1 Develop a pilot plan.

    3.2 Perform a resource management start/stop/continue exercise.

    3.3 Develop plans to mitigate executive stakeholder, team, and structural factors that could inhibit your implementation.

    3.4 Finalize the playbook and customize a presentation to help explain your new processes to the organization.

    Outputs

    Process Pilot Plan Template

    A refined resource management process informed by feedback and lessons learned

    Stakeholder management plan

    Resource Management Communications Template

    Further reading

    Establish Realistic IT Resource Management Practices

    Holistically balance IT supply and demand to avoid overallocation.

    Analyst perspective

    Restore the right accountabilities for reconciling supply and demand.

    "Who gets in trouble at the organization when too many projects are approved?

    We’ve just exited a period of about 20-25 years where the answer to the above question was usually “nobody.” The officers of the corporation held nobody to account for the malinvestment of resources that comes from approving too many projects or having systemically unrealistic project due dates. Boards of directors failed to hold the officers accountable for that. And shareholders failed to hold boards of directors accountable for that.

    But this is shifting right under our feet. Increasingly, PMOs are being managed with the mentality previously reserved for those in the finance department. In many cases, the PMOs are now reporting to the CFO! This represents a very simple and basic reversion to the concept of fiduciary duty: somebody will be held to account for the consumption of all those hours, and somebody should be the approver of projects who created the excess demand." – Barry Cousins Senior Director of Research, PMO Practice Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • IT leaders who lack actionable evidence of a resource-supply, work-demand imbalance.
    • CIOs whose departments struggle to meet service and project delivery expectations with given resources.
    • Portfolio managers, PMO directors, and project managers whose portfolio and project plans suffer due to unstable resource availability.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Build trustworthy resource capacity data to support service and project portfolio management.
    • Develop sustainable resource management practices to help you estimate, and continually validate, your true resource capacity for services and projects.
    • Identify the demands that deplete your resource capacity without creating value for IT.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Steering committee and C-suite management who want to improve IT’s delivery of projects.
    • Project sponsors that want to ensure their projects get the promised resource time by their project managers.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Ensure sufficient supply of time for projects to be successfully completed with high quality.
    • Communicate the new resource management practice and get stakeholder buy-in.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • As CIO, you oversee a department that lacks the resource capacity to adequately meet organizational demand for new projects and services. As a result, project quality and timelines suffer, and service delivery lags.
    • You need a resource management strategy to help bring balance to supply and demand in order to improve IT’s ability to deliver.

    Complication

    • The shift to matrix work structures has strained traditional methods of time tracking. Day-to-day demand is chaotic; staff are pulled in multiple directions by numerous people, making usable capacity data elusive.
    • The executive team approves too many projects, but is not held to account for the overspend on time. Instead, the IT worker is made liable, expected to simply get things done under excessive demands.

    Resolution

    • Instill a culture of capacity awareness. For years, the project portfolio management (PPM) industry has helped IT departments report on demand and usage, but it has largely failed to make capacity part of the conversation. This research helps inject capacity awareness into project and service portfolio planning, enabling IT to get proactive about constraints before overallocation spirals, and project and service delivery suffers.
    • Build a sustainable process. Efforts to get better at resource management often falter when you try to get too granular too quickly. Info-Tech’s approach starts at a high level, ensuring that capacity data is accurate and usable, and that IT’s process discipline is mature enough to maintain the data, before drilling down into greater levels of precision.
    • Establish a capacity hub. You will ultimately need a tool to help provide ongoing resource visibility. Follow the advice in this blueprint to help with your tool selection and ensure the reporting needs of both your team and executives are met.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Take a realistic approach to resource management. New organizational realities have made traditional, rigorous resource projections impossible to maintain. Accept reality and get realistic about where IT’s time goes.
    2. Make IT’s capacity perpetually transparent. The best way to ensure projects are approved and scheduled based upon the availability of the right teams and skills is to shine a light into IT’s capacity and hold decision makers to account with usable capacity reports.

    The availability of staff time is rarely factored into IT project and service delivery commitments

    As a result, a lot gets promised and worked on, and staff are always busy, but very little actually gets done – at least not within given timelines or to expected levels of quality.

    Organizations tend to bite off more than they can chew when it comes to project and service delivery commitments involving IT resources.

    While the need for businesses to make an excess of IT commitments is understandable, the impacts of systemically overallocating IT are clearly negative:

    • Stakeholder relations suffer. Promises are made to the business that can’t be met by IT.
    • IT delivery suffers. Project timelines and quality frequently suffer, and service support regularly lags.
    • Employee engagement suffers. Anxiety and stress levels are consistently high among IT staff, while morale and engagement levels are low.

    76% of organizations say they have too many projects on the go and an unmanageable and ever-growing backlog of things to get to. (Cooper, 2014)

    Almost 70% of workers feel as though they have too much work on their plates and not enough time to do it. (Reynolds, 2016)

    Resource management can help to improve workloads and project results, but traditional approaches commonly fall short

    Traditional approaches to resource management suffer from a fundamental misconception about the availability of time in 2017.

    The concept of resource management comes from a pre-World Wide Web era, when resource and project plans could be based on a relatively stable set of assumptions.

    In the old paradigm, the availability of time was fairly predictable, as was the demand for IT services, so there was value to investing time into rigorous demand forecasts and planning.

    Resource projections could be based in a secure set of assumptions – i.e. 8 hour days, 40 hour weeks – and staff had the time to support detailed resource management processes that provided accurate usage data.

    Old Realities

    • Predictability. Change tended to be slow and deliberate, providing more stability for advanced, rigorous demand forecasts and planning.
    • Fixed hierarchy. Tasks, priorities, and decisions were communicated through a fixed chain of command.
    • Single-task focus. The old reality was more accommodating to sustained focus on one task at a time.

    96% of organizations report problems with the accuracy of information on employee timesheets. (Dimensional, 2013)

    Old reality resource forecasting inevitably falters under the weight of unpredictable demands and constant distractions

    New realities are causing demands on workers’ time to be unpredictable and unrelenting, making a sustained focus on a specific task for any length of time elusive.

    Part of the old resource management mythology is the idea that a person can do (for example) eight different one-hour tasks in eight hours of continuous work. This idea has gone from harmlessly mistaken to grossly unrealistic.

    The predictability and focus have given way to more chaotic workplace realities. Technology is ubiquitous, and the demand for IT services is constant.

    A day in IT is characterized by frequent task-switching, regular interruptions, and an influx of technology-enabled distractions.

    Every 3 minutes and 5 seconds: How often the typical office worker switches tasks, either through self-directed or other-directed interruptions. (Schulte, 2015)

    12 minutes, 40 seconds: The average amount of time in-between face-to-face interruptions in matrix organizations. (Anderson, 2015)

    23 minutes, 15 seconds: The average amount of time it takes to become on task, productive, and focused again after an interruption. (Schulte, 2015)

    759 hours: The average number of hours lost per employee annually due to distractions and interruptions. (Huth, 2015)

    The validity of traditional, rigorous resource planning has long been an illusion. New realities are making the sustained focus and stable assumptions that old reality projections relied on all but impossible to maintain.

    For resource management practices to be effective, they need to evolve to meet new realities

    New organizational realities have exacerbated traditional approaches to time tracking, making accurate and usable resource data elusive.

    The technology revolution that began in the 1990s ushered in a new paradigm in organizational structures. Matrix reporting structures, diminished supervision of knowledge workers, massive multi-tasking, and a continuous stream of information and communications from the outside world have smashed the predictability and stability of the old paradigm.

    The resource management industry has largely failed to evolve. It remains stubbornly rooted in old realities, relying on calculations and rollups that become increasingly unsustainable and irrelevant in our high-autonomy staff cultures and interruption-driven work days.

    New Realities

    • Unpredictable. Technologies and organizational strategies change before traditional IT demand forecasts and project plans can be realized.
    • Matrix management. Staff can be accountable to multiple project managers and functional managers at any given time.
    • Multi-task focus. In the new reality, workers’ attentions are scattered across multiple tasks and projects at any given time.

    87% of organizations report challenges with traditional methods of time tracking and reporting. (Dimensional, 2013)

    40% of working time is not tracked or tracked inaccurately by staff. (actiTIME, 2016)

    Poor resource management practices cost organizations dearly

    While time is money, the statistics around resource visibility and utilization suggest that the vast majority of organizations don’t spend their available time all that wisely.

    Research shows that ineffective resource management directly impacts an organization’s bottom line, contributing to such cost drains as the systemic late delivery of projects and increased project costs.

    Despite this, the majority of organizations fail to treat staff time like the precious commodity it is.

    As the results of a 2016 survey show, the top three pain points for IT and PMO leaders all revolve around a wider cultural negligence concerning staff time (Alexander, TechRepublic, 2016):

    • Overcommitted resources
    • Constant change that affects staff assignments
    • An inability to prioritize shared resources

    Top risks associated with poor resource management

    Inability to complete projects on time – 52%

    Inability to innovate fast enough – 39%

    Increased project costs – 38%

    Missed business opportunities – 34%

    Dissatisfied customers or clients – 32%

    12 times more waste – Organizations with poor resource management practices waste nearly 12 times more resource hours than high-performing organizations. (PMI, 2014)

    The concept of fiduciary duty represents the best way to bring balance to supply and demand, and improve project outcomes

    Unless someone is accountable for controlling the consumption of staff hours, too much work will get approved and committed to without evidence of sufficient resourcing.

    Who is accountable for controlling the consumption of staff hours?

    In many ways, no question is more important to the organization’s bottom line – and certainly, to the effectiveness of a resource management strategy.

    Historically, the answer would have been the executive layer of the organization. However, in the 1990s management largely abdicated its obligation to control resources and expenditures via “employee empowerment.”

    Controls on approvals became less rigid, and accountability for choosing what to do (and not do) shifted onto the shoulders of the individual worker. This creates a current paradigm where no one is accountable for the malinvestment…

    …of resources that comes from approving too many projects. Instead, it’s up to individual workers to sink-or-swim, as they attempt to reconcile, day after day, seemingly infinite organizational demand with their finite supply of working hours.

    If your organization has higher demand (i.e. approved project work) than supply (i.e. people’s time), your staff will be the final decision makers on what does and does NOT get worked on.

    Effective time leadership distinguishes top performing senior executives

    "Everything requires time… It is the one truly universal condition. All work takes place in time and uses up time. Yet most people take for granted this unique, irreplaceable and necessary resource. Nothing else, perhaps, distinguishes effective executives as much as their tender loving care of time." – Peter Drucker (quoted in Frank)

    67% of employees surveyed believe their CEOs focus too much on decisions based in short-term financial results and not enough time on decisions that create a stable, positive workplace for staff. (2016 Edelman Trust Barometer)

    Bring balance to supply and demand with realistic resource management practices

    Use Info-Tech’s approach to resource management to capture an accurate view of where your time goes and achieve sustained visibility into your capacity for new projects.

    Realistic project resource management starts by aligning demand with capacity, and then developing tactics to sustain alignment, even in the chaos of our fast-paced, rapidly changing, interruption-driven project environments.

    This blueprint will help you develop practices to promote and maintain accurate resourcing data, while developing tactics to continually inform decision makers’ assumptions about how much capacity is realistically available for project work.

    This research follows a three-phase approach to sustainable practices:

    1. Take Stock of Organizational Supply and Demand
    2. Design a Realistic Resource Management Process
    3. Implement Sustainable Resource Management Practices

    Info-Tech’s three-phase framework is structured around a practical, tactical approach to resource management. It’s not about what you put together as a one-time snapshot. It’s about what you can and will maintain every week, even during a crisis. When you stop maintaining resource management data, it’s nearly impossible to catch up and you’re usually forced to start fresh.

    Info-Tech’s approach is rooted in our seven dimensions of resource management

    Action the decision points across Info-Tech’s seven dimensions to ensure your resource management process is guided by realistic data and process goals.

    Default project vs. non-project ratio

    How much time is available for projects once non-project demands are factored in?

    Reporting frequency

    How often is the allocation data verified, reconciled, and reported for use?

    Forecast horizon

    How far into the future can you realistically predict resource supply?

    Scope of allocation

    To whom is time allocated?

    Allocation cadence

    How long is each allocation period?

    Granularity of time allocation

    What’s the smallest unit of time to allocate?

    Granularity of work assignment

    What is time allocated to?

    This blueprint will help you make the right decisions for your organization across each of these dimensions to ensure your resource management practices match your current process maturity levels.

    Once your framework is defined, we’ll equip you with a tactical plan to help keep supply and demand continually balanced

    This blueprint will help you customize a playbook to ensure your allocations are perpetually balanced week after week, month after month.

    Developing a process is one thing, sustaining it is another.

    The goal of this research isn’t just to achieve a one-time balancing of workloads and expect that this will stand the test of time.

    The true test of a resource management process is how well it facilitates the flow of accurate and usable data as workloads become chaotic, and fires and crises erupt.

    • Info-Tech’s approach will help you develop a playbook and a “rebalancing routine” that will help ensure your allocations remain perpetually current and balanced.
    • The sample routine to the right shows you an example of what this rebalancing process will look like (customizing this process is covered in Phase 3 of the blueprint).

    Sample “rebalancing” routine

    • Maintain a comprehensive list of the sources of demand (i.e. document the matrix).
    • Catalog the demand.
    • Allocate the supply.
    • Forecast the capacity to your forecast horizon.
    • Identify and prepare work packages or tasks for unsatisfied demand to ensure that supply can be utilized if it becomes free.
    • Reconcile any imbalance by repeating steps 1-5 on update frequency, say, weekly or monthly.

    Info-Tech’s method is complemented by a suite of resource management tools and templates

    Each phase of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help plan your resource management strategy and sustain your process implementation.

    Resource management depends on the flow of information and data from the project level up to functional managers, project managers, and beyond – CIOs, steering committees, and senior executives.

    Tools are required to help plan, organize, and facilitate this flow, and each phase of this blueprint is centered around tools and templates to help you successfully support your process implementation.

    Take Stock of Organizational Supply and Demand

    Tools and Templates:

    Design a Realistic Resource Management Process

    Tools and Templates:

    Implement Sustainable Resource Management Practices

    Tools and Templates:

    Use Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager Lite to support your new process without a heavy upfront investment in tools

    Spreadsheets can provide a viable alternative for organizations not ready to invest in an expensive tool, or for those not getting what they need from their commercial selections.

    While homegrown solutions like spreadsheets and intranet sites lack the robust functionality of commercial offerings, they have dramatically lower complexity and cost-in-use.

    Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager Lite is a sophisticated, scalable, and highly customizable spreadsheet-based solution that will get your new resource management process up and running, without a heavy upfront cost.

    Kinds of PPM solutions used by Info-Tech clients

    Homemade – 46%

    Commercial – 33%

    No Solution – 21%

    (Info-Tech Research Group (2016), N=433)

    The image shows 3 sheets with charts and graphs.

    Samples of Portfolio Manager Lite's output and reporting tabs

    Info-Tech’s approach to resource management is part of our larger project portfolio management framework

    This blueprint will help you master the art of resource management and set you up for greater success in other project portfolio management capabilities.

    Resource management is one capability within Info-Tech’s larger project portfolio management (PPM) framework.

    Resource visibility and capacity awareness permeates the whole of PPM, helping to ensure the right intake decisions get made, and projects are scheduled according to resource and skill availability.

    Whether you have an existing PPM strategy that you are looking to optimize or you are just starting on your PPM journey, this blueprint will help you situate your resource management processes within a larger project and portfolio framework.

    Info-Tech’ s PPM framework is based on extensive research and practical application, and complements industry standards such as those offered by PMI and ISACA.

    Project Portfolio Management
    Status & Progress Reporting
    Intake, Approval, & Prioritization Resource Management Project Management Project Closure Benefits Tracking
    Organizational Change Management
    Intake → Execution→ Closure

    Realize the value that improved resource management practices could bring to your organization

    Spend your company’s HR dollars more efficiently.

    Improved resource management and capacity awareness will allow your organization to improve resource utilization and increase project throughput.

    CIOs, PMOs, and portfolio managers can use this blueprint to improve the alignment between supply and demand. You should be able to gauge the value through the following metrics:

    Near-Term Success Metrics (6 to 12 months)

    • Increased frequency of currency (i.e. more accurate and usable resource data and reports).
    • Improved job satisfaction from project resources due to more even workloads.
    • Better ability to schedule project start dates and estimate end dates due to recourse visibility.

    Long-Term Success Metrics (12 to 24 months)

    • More projects completed on time.
    • Reclaimed capacity for project work.
    • A reduction in resource waste and increased resource utilization on productive project work.
    • Ability to track estimated vs. actual budget and work effort on projects.

    In the past 12 months, Info-Tech clients have reported an average measured value rating of $550,000 from the purchase of workshops based on this research.

    Info-Tech client masters resource management by shifting the focus to capacity forecasting

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Education

    Source Info-Tech Client

    Situation

    • There are more than 200 people in the IT organization.
    • IT is essentially a shared services environment with clients spanning multiple institutions across a wide geography.
    • The PMO identified dedicated resources for resource management.

    Complication

    • The definition of “resource management” was constantly shifting between accounting the past (i.e. time records), the present (i.e. work assignments), and the future (i.e. long term project allocations).
    • The task data set (i.e. for current work assignments) was not aligned to the historic time records or future capacity.
    • It was difficult to predict or account for the spend, which exceeded 30,000 hours per month.

    “We’re told we can’t say NO to projects. But this new tool set and approach allows us to give an informed WHEN.” – Senior PMO Director, Education

    Resolution

    • The leadership decided to forecast and communicate their resource capacity on a 3-4 month forecast horizon using Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager 2017.
    • Unallocated resource capacity was identified within certain skill sets that had previously been assessed as fully allocated. While some of the more high-visibility staff were indeed overallocated, other more junior personnel had been systemically underutilized on projects.
    • The high demand for IT project resourcing was immediately placed in the context of a believable, credible expression of supply.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Establish Realistic IT Resource Management Practices – project overview

    1. Take Stock of Organizational Supply and Demand 2. Design a Realistic Resource Management Process 3. Implement Sustainable Resource Management Practices
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Set a resource management course of action

    1.2 Create realistic estimates of supply and demand

    2.1 Customize the seven dimensions of resource management

    2.2 Determine the resource management tool that will best support your process

    2.3 Build process steps to ensure data accuracy and sustainability

    3.1 Pilot your resource management process to assess viability

    3.2 Plan to engage your stakeholders with your playbook

    Guided Implementations
    • Scoping call
    • Assess how accountability for resource management is currently distributed
    • Create a realistic estimate of project capacity
    • Map all sources of demand on resources at a high level
    • Set your seven dimensions of resource management
    • Jump-start spreadsheet-based resource management with Portfolio Manager Lite
    • Build on the workflow to determine how data will be collected and who will support the process
    • Define the scope of a pilot and determine logistics
    • Finalize resource management roles and responsibilities
    • Brainstorm and plan for potential resistance to change, objections, and fatigue from stakeholders
    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:

    • Take Stock of Organizational Supply and Demand

    Module 2:

    • Design a Realistic Resource Management Process

    Module 3:

    • Implement Sustainable Resource Management Practices

    Phase 1 Outcome:

    • Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator

    Phase 2 Outcome:

    • Resource Management Playbook

    Phase 3 Outcome:

    • Resource Management Communications Template

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities

    Introduction to PPM and resource management

    1.1 Complete and review PPM Current State Scorecard Assessment

    1.2 Perform root cause analysis of resource management challenges

    1.3 Initiate time audit survey of management and staff

    Take stock of supply and demand

    2.1 Review the outputs of the time audit survey and analyze the data

    2.2 Analyze project and non-project demands, including the sources of those demands

    2.3 Set the seven dimensions of resource management

    Design a resource management process

    3.1 Review resource management tool options

    3.2 Prepare a vendor demo script or review Portfolio Manager Lite

    3.3 Build process steps to ensure data accuracy and sustainability

    Pilot and refine the process

    4.1 Define methods for piloting the strategy (after the workshop)

    4.2 Complete the Process Pilot Plan Template

    4.3 Conduct a mock resource management meeting

    4.4 Perform a RACI exercise

    Communicate and implement the process

    5.1 Brainstorm potential implications of the new strategy and develop a plan to manage stakeholder and staff resistance to the strategy

    5.2 Customize the Resource Management Communications Template

    5.3 Finalize the playbook

    Deliverables
    1. PPM Current State Scorecard Assessment
    2. Root cause analysis
    3. Time Audit Workbook and survey templates
    1. Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator
    1. Portfolio Manager Lite
    2. PPM Solution Vendor Demo Script
    3. Tentative Resource Management Playbook
    1. Process Pilot Plan Template
    2. RACI chart
    1. Resource Management Communications Template
    2. Finalized Resource Management Playbook

    Phase 1

    Take Stock of Organizational Resource Supply and Demand

    Phase 1 Outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Take Stock of Organizational Resource Supply and Demand

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1-2 weeks

    Step 1.1: Analyze the current state

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss the goals, aims, benefits, and challenges of resource management
    • Identify who is currently accountable for balancing resource supply and demand

    Then complete these activities…

    • Assess the current distribution of accountabilities in resource management
    • Delve into your current problems to uncover root causes
    • Make a go/no-go decision on developing a new resource management practice
    Step 1.2: Estimate your supply and demand

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Root causes of resource management
    • Your current impression about the resource supply-demand imbalance

    Then complete these activities…

    • Estimate your resource capacity for each role
    • Estimate your project/non-project demand on resources
    • Validate the findings with a time-tracking survey

    With these tools & templates:

    • Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator
    • Time-Tracking Survey Email Template

    Phase 1 Results & Insights:

    A matrix organization creates many small, untraceable demands that are often overlooked in resource management efforts, which leads to underestimating total demand and overcommitting resources. To capture them and enhance the success of your resource management effort, focus on completeness rather than precision. Precision of data will improve over time as your process maturity grows.

    Step 1.1: Set a resource management course of action

    PHASE 1

    1.1 Set a course of action

    1.2 Estimate supply and demand

    PHASE 2

    2.1 Select resource management dimensions

    2.2 Select resource management tools

    2.3 Build process steps

    PHASE 3

    3.1 Pilot your process for viability

    3.2 Plan stakeholder engagement

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Determine your resource management process capability level
    • Assess how accountability for resource management is currently distributed
    This step involves the following participants:
    • CIO / IT Director
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Functional / Resource Managers
    • Project Managers
    Outcomes of this step
    • Current distribution of accountability for resource management practice
    • Root-cause analysis of resourcing challenges facing the organization
    • Commitment to implementing a right-sized resource management practice

    “Too many projects, not enough resources” is the reality of most IT environments

    A profound imbalance between demand (i.e. approved project work and service delivery commitments) and supply (i.e. people’s time) is the top challenge IT departments face today..

    In today’s organizations, the desires of business units for new products and enhancements, and the appetites of senior leadership to approve more and more projects for those products and services, far outstrip IT’s ability to realistically deliver on everything.

    The vast majority of IT departments lack the resourcing to meet project demand – especially given the fact that day-to-day operational demands frequently trump project work.

    As a result, project throughput suffers – and with it, IT’s reputation within the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Where does the time go? The portfolio manager (or equivalent) should function as the accounting department for time, showing what’s available in IT’s human resources budget for projects and providing ongoing visibility into how that budget of time is being spent.

    Resource management can help to even out staff workloads and improve project and service delivery results

    As the results of a recent survey* show, the top three pain points for IT and PMO leaders all revolve around a wider cultural negligence concerning staff time:

    • Overcommitted resources
    • Constant change that affects staff assignments
    • An inability to prioritize shared resources

    A resource management strategy can help to alleviate these pain points and reconcile the imbalance between supply and demand by achieving the following outcomes:

    • Improving resource visibility
    • Reducing overallocation, and accordingly, resource stress
    • Reducing project delay
    • Improving resource efficiency and productivity

    Top risks associated with poor resource management

    Inability to complete projects on time – 52%

    Inability to innovate fast enough – 39%

    Increased project costs – 38%

    Missed business opportunities – 34%

    Dissatisfied customers or clients – 32%

    12 times more waste – Organizations with poor resource management practices waste nearly 12 times more resource hours than high-performing organizations. (PMI, 2014)

    Resource management is a core process in Info-Tech’s project portfolio management framework

    Project portfolio management (PPM) creates a stable and secure infrastructure around projects.

    PPM’s goal is to maximize the throughput of projects that provide strategic and operational value to the organization. To do this, a PPM strategy must help to:

    Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Management Process Model
    3. Status & Progress Reporting [make sure the projects are okay]
    1. Intake, Approval, & Prioritization [select the right projects] 2. Resource Management [Pick the right time and people to execute the projects Project Management

    4. Project Closure

    [make sure the projects get done]

    5. Benefits Tracking

    [make sure they were worth doing]

    Organizational Change Management
    Intake → Execution→ Closure

    If you don’t yet have a PPM strategy in place, or would like to revisit your existing PPM strategy before implementing resource management practices, see Info-Tech’s blueprint, Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy.

    Effective resource management is rooted in a relatively simple set of questions

    However, while the questions are rather simple, the answers become complicated by challenges unique to matrix organizations and other workplace realities in 2017.

    To support the goals of PPM more generally, resource management must (1) supply quality work-hours to approved and ongoing projects, and (2) supply reliable data with which to steer the project portfolio.

    To do this, a resource management strategy must address a relatively straightforward set of questions.

    Key Questions

    • Who assigns the resources?
    • Who feeds the data on resources?
    • How do we make sure it’s valid?
    • How do we handle contingencies when projects are late or when availability changes?

    Challenges

    • Matrix organizations require project workers to answer to many masters and balance project work with “keep the lights on” activities and other administrative work.
    • Interruptions, distractions, and divided attention create consistent challenges for workplace productivity.

    "In matrix organizations, complicated processes and tools get implemented to answer the deceptively simple question “what’s Bob going to work on over the next few months?” Inevitably, the data captured becomes the focus of scrutiny as functional and project managers complain about data inaccuracy while simultaneously remaining reluctant to invest the effort necessary to improve quality." – Kiron Bondale

    Determine your organization’s resource management capability level with a maturity assessment

    1.1.1
    10 minutes

    Input

    • Organizational strategy and culture

    Output

    • Resource management capability level

    Materials

    • N/A

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers

    Kick-off the discussion on the resource management process by deciding which capability level most accurately describes your organization’s current state.

    Capability Level Descriptions
    Capability Level 5: Optimized Our organization has an accurate picture of project versus non-project workloads and allocates resources accordingly. We periodically reclaim lost capacity through organizational and behavioral change.
    Capability Level 4: Aligned We have an accurate picture of how much time is spent on project versus non-project work. We allocate resources to these projects accordingly. We are checking in on project progress bi-weekly.
    Capability Level 3: Pixelated We are allocating resources to projects and tracking progress monthly. We have a rough estimate of how much time is spent on project versus non-project work.
    Capability Level 2: Opaque We match resource teams to projects and check in annually, but we do not forecast future resource needs or track project versus non-project work.
    Capability Level 1: Unmanaged Our organization expects projects to be finished, but there is no process in place for allocating resources or tracking project progress.

    If resources are poorly managed, they prioritize work based on consequences rather than on meeting demand

    As a result, matrix organizations are collectively steered by each resource and its individual motives, not by managers, executives, or organizational strategy.

    In a matrix organization, demands on a resource’s time come from many directions, each demand unaware of the others. Resources are expected to prioritize their work, but they typically lack the authority to formally reject demand, so demand frequently outstrips the supply of work-hours the resource can deliver.

    When this happens, the resource has three options:

    1. Work more hours, typically without compensation.
    2. Choose tasks not to do in a way that minimizes personal consequences.
    3. Diminish work quality to meet quantity demands.

    The result is an unsustainable system for those involved:

    1. Resources cannot meet expectations, leading to frustration and disengagement.
    2. Managers cannot deliver on the projects or services they manage and struggle to retain skilled resources who are looking elsewhere for “greener pastures.”
    3. Executives cannot execute strategic plans as they lose decision-making power over their resources.

    Scope your resource management practices within a matrix organization by asking “who?”

    Resource management boils down to a seemingly simple question: how do we balance supply and demand? Balancing requires a decision maker to make choices; however, in a matrix organization, identifying this decision maker is not straightforward:

    Balance

    • Who decides how much capacity should be dedicated to project work versus administrative or operational work?
    • Who decides how to respond to unexpected changes in supply or demand?

    Supply

    • Who decides how much total capacity we have for each necessary skill set?
    • Who manages the contingency, or redundancy, of capacity?
    • Who validates the capacity supply as a whole?
    • Who decides what to report as unexpected changes in supply (and to whom)?

    Demand

    • Who generates demand on the resource that can be controlled by their manager?
    • Who generates demand on the capacity that cannot be controlled by their manager?
    • Who validates the demand on capacity as a whole?
    • Who decides what to report as unexpected changes in demand (and to whom)?

    The individual who has the authority to make choices, and who is ultimately liable for those decisions, is an accountable person. In a matrix organization, accountability is dispersed, sometimes spilling over to those without the necessary authority.

    To effectively balance supply and demand, senior management must be held accountable

    Differentiate between responsibility and accountability to manage the organization’s project portfolio effectively.

    Responsibility

    The responsible party is the individual (or group) who actually completes the task.

    Responsibility can be shared.

    VS.

    Accountability

    The accountable person is the individual who has the authority to make choices, and is ultimately answerable for the decision.

    Accountability cannot be shared.

    Resources often do not have the necessary scope of authority to make resource management choices, so they can never be truly accountable for the project portfolio. Instead, resources are accountable for making available trustworthy data, so the right people can make choices driven by organizational strategy.

    The next activity will assess how accountability for resource management is currently distributed in your organization.

    Assess the current distribution of accountability for resource management practice

    1.1.2
    15 minutes

    Input

    • Organizational strategy and culture

    Output

    • Current distribution of accountabilities for resource management

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip chart
    • Markers

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Below is a list of tasks in resource management that require choices. Discuss who is currently accountable and whether they have the right authority and ability to deliver on that accountability.

    Resource management tasks that require choices Accountability
    Current Effective?
    Identify all demands on resources
    Prioritize identified project demands
    Prioritize identified operational demands
    Prioritize identified administrative demands
    Prioritize all of the above demands
    Enumerate resource supply
    Validate resource supply
    Collect and validate supply and demand data
    Defer or reject work beyond available supply
    Adjust resource supply to meet demand

    Develop coordination between project and functional managers to optimize resource management

    Because resources are invariably responsible for both project and non-project work, efforts to procure capacity for projects cannot exist in isolation.

    IT departments need many different technical skill sets at their disposal for their day-to-day operations and services, as well as for projects. A limited hiring budget for IT restricts the number of hires with any given skill, forcing IT to share resources between service and project portfolios.

    This resource sharing produces a matrix organization divided along the lines of service and projects. Functional and project managers provide respective oversight for services and projects. Resources split their available work-hours toward service and project tasks according to priority – in theory.

    However, in practice, two major challenges exist:

    1. Poor coordination between functional and project managers causes commitments beyond resource capacity, disputes about resource oversight, and animosity among management, all while resources struggle to balance unclear priorities.
    2. Resources have a “third boss,” namely uncontrolled demands from the rest of the business, which lack both visibility and accountability.

    The image shows a board balanced on a ball (labelled Resource Management), with two balls on either end of it (Capacity Supply on the left, and Demand on the right), and another board balanced on top of the right ball, with two more balls balanced on either side of it (Projects on the left and Operational, Administrative, Etc. on the right).

    Resource management processes must account for the numerous small demands generated in a matrix organization

    Avoid going bankrupt $20 at a time: small demands add up to a significant chunk of work-hours.

    Because resource managers must cover both projects and services within IT, the typical solution to allocation problems in matrix organizations is to escalate the urgency and severity of demands by involving the executive steering committee. Unfortunately, the steering committee cannot expend time and resources on all demands. Instead, they often set a minimum threshold for cases – 100-1,000 work-hours depending on the organization.

    Under this resource management practice, small demands – especially the quick-fixes and little projects from “the third boss” – continue to erode project capacity. Eventually, projects fail to get resources because pesky small demands have no restrictions on the resources they consumed.

    Realistic resource management needs to account for demand from all three bosses; however…

    Info-Tech Insight

    Excess project or service request intake channels lead to the proliferation of “off-the-grid” projects and tasks that lack visibility from the IT leadership. This can indicate that there may be too much red tape: that is, the request process is made too complex or cumbersome. Consider simplifying the request process and bring IT’s visibility into those requests.

    Interrogate your resource management problems to uncover root causes

    1.1.3
    30 minutes to 1 hour

    Input

    • Organizational strategy and culture

    Output

    • Root causes of resource management failures

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip chart
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Functional Managers
    • Project Managers
    1. Pick a starting problem statement in resource management. e.g. projects can’t get resource work-hours.
    2. Ask the participants “why”? Use three generic headings – people, processes, and technology – to keep participants focused. Keep the responses solution-agnostic: do not jump to solutions. If you have a large group, divide into smaller groups and use sticky notes to encourage more participation in this brainstorming step.
    People Processes Technology
    • We don’t have enough people/skills.
    • People are tied up on projects that run late.
    • Functional and project managers appear to hoard resources.
    • Resources cannot prioritize work.
    • Resources are too busy responding to 911s from the business.
    • Resources cannot prioritize projects vs. operational tasks.
    • “Soft-closed” projects do not release resources for other work.
    • We don’t have tools that show resource availability.
    • Tools we have for showing resource availability are not being used.
    • Data is inaccurate and unreliable.
    1. Determine the root cause by iteratively asking “why?” up to five times, or until the chain of whys comes full circle. (i.e. Why A? B. Why B? C. Why C? A.) See below for an example.

    1.1.2 Example of a root-cause analysis: people

    The following is a non-exhaustive example:

    The image shows an example of a root-cause analysis. It begins on the left with the header People, and then lists a series of challenges below. Moving toward the right, there are a series of headers that read Why? at the top of the chart, and listing reasons for the challenges below each one. As you read through the chart from left to right, the reasons for challenges become increasingly specific.

    Right-size your resource management strategy with Info-Tech’s realistic resource management practice

    If precise, accurate, and complete data on resource supply and demand was consistently available, reporting on project capacity would be easy. Such data would provide managers complete control over a resource’s time, like a foreman at a construction site. However, this theoretical scenario is incompatible with today’s matrixed workplace:

    • Sources of demand can lie outside IT’s control.
    • Demand is generated chaotically, with little predictability.
    • Resources work with minimal supervision.

    Collecting and maintaining resource data is therefore nearly impossible:

    • Achieving perfect data accuracy creates unnecessary overhead.
    • Non-compliance by one project or resource makes your entire data set unusable for resource management.

    This blueprint will guide you through right-sizing your resource management efforts to achieve maximum value-to-effort ratio and sustainability.


    The image shows a graph with Quality, Value on the Y axis, and Required Effort on the X-Axis. The graph is divided into 3 categories, based on the criteria: Value-to-effort Ratio and Sustainability. The three sections are labelled at the top of the graph as: Reactive, “gut feel”-driven; Right-sized resource management; Full control, complete data. The 2nd section is bolded. The line in the graph starts low, rising through the 2nd section, and is stable at the top of the chart in the final section.

    Choose your resource management course of action

    Portfolio managers looking for a resource management solution have three mutually exclusive options:

    Option A: Do Nothing

    • Rely on expert judgment and intuition to make portfolio choices.
    • Allow the third boss to dictate the demands of your resources.

    Option B: Get Precise

    • Aim for granularity and precision of data with a solution that may demand more capacity than is realistically available by hiring, outsourcing, or over-allocating people’s time.
    • Require detailed, accurate time sheets for all project tasks.
    • For those choosing this option, proceed to Info-Tech’s Select and Implement a PPM Solution.

    Option C: Get Realistic

    • Balance capacity supply and demand using abstraction.
    • Implement right-sized resource management practices that rely on realistic, high-level capacity estimates.
    • Reduce instability in data by focusing on resource capacity, rather than granular project demands and task level details.

    This blueprint takes you through the steps necessary to accomplish Option C, using Info-Tech’s tools and templates for managing your resources.

    Step 1.2: Create realistic estimates of supply and demand

    PHASE 1

    1.1 Set a course of action

    1.2 Estimate supply and demand

    PHASE 2

    2.1 Select resource management dimensions

    2.2 Select resource management tools

    2.3 Build process steps

    PHASE 3

    3.1 Pilot your process for viability

    3.2 Plan stakeholder engagement

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Create a realistic estimate of project capacity
    • Map all sources of demand on resources at a high level
    • Validate your supply and demand assumptions by directly surveying your resources
    This step involves the following participants:
    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers (optional)
    • Functional / Resource Managers (optional)
    • Project Resources (optional)
    Outcomes of this step
    • A realistic estimate of your total and project capacity, as well as project and non-project demand on their time
    • Quantitative insight into the resourcing challenges facing the organization
    • Results from a time-tracking survey, which are used to validate the assumptions made for estimating resource supply and demand

    Create a realistic estimate of your project capacity with Info-Tech’s Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator

    Take an iterative approach to capacity estimates: use your assumptions to create a meaningful estimate, and then validate with your staff to improve its accuracy.

    Use Info-Tech’s Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator to create a realistic estimate of your project capacity.

    The calculator tool requires minimal upfront staff participation: you can obtain meaningful results with participation from even a single person, with insight on the distribution of your resources and their average work week or month. As the number of participants increases, the quality of analysis will improve.

    The first half of this step guides you through how to use the calculator. The second half provides tactical advice on how to gather additional data and validate your resourcing data with your staff.

    Download Info-Tech’s Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator

    Info-Tech Insight

    What’s first, process or tools? Remember that process determines the quality of your data while data quality limits the tool’s utility. Without quality data, you cannot evaluate the success of the tool, so nail down your collection process first.

    Break down your resource capacity into high-level buckets of time for each role

    1.2.1
    30 minutes - 1 hour

    Input

    • Staff resource types
    • Average work week
    • Estimated allocations

    Output

    A realistic estimate of project capacity

    Materials

    Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator

    Participants

    • PMO Director
    • Resource/Functional Managers (optional)

    We define four high-level buckets of resource time:

    • Absence: on average, a resource spends 14% of the year on vacation, statutory holidays, business holidays and other forms of absenteeism.
    • Administrative: time spent on meetings, recordkeeping, etc.
    • Operational: keeping the lights on; reactive work.
    • Projects: time to work on projects; typically, this bucket of time is whatever’s left from the above.

    The image shows a pie chart with four sections: Absence - 6,698 14%; Admin - 10,286 22%; Keep the Lights On - 15, 026 31%; Project Capacity 15, 831 33%.

    Instructions for working through Tab 2 of the Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator are provided in the next two sections. Follow along to obtain your breakdown of annual resource capacity in a pie chart.

    Break down your resource capacity into high-level buckets of time for each role

    1.2.1
    Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator, Tab 2: Capacity Supply

    Discover how many work-hours are at your disposal by first accounting for absences.

    The image shows a section of the Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator, for calculating absences, with sample information filled in.

    1. Compile a list of each of the roles within your department.
    2. Enter the number of staff currently performing each role.
    3. Enter the number of hours in a typical work week for each role.
    4. Enter the foreseeable out-of-office time (vacation, sick time, etc.) Typically, this value is 12-16% depending on the region.

    Hours per Year represents your total resource capacity for each role, as well as the entire department. This column is automatically calculated.

    Working Time per Year represents your total resource capacity minus time employees are expected to spend out of office. This column is automatically calculated.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Example for a five-day work week:

    • 2 weeks (10 days) of statutory holidays
    • 3 weeks of vacation
    • 1.4 weeks (7 days) of sick days on average
    • 1 week (5 days) for company holidays

    Result: 7.4/52 weeks’ absence = 14.2%

    Break down your resource capacity into high-level buckets of time for each role (continued)

    1.2.1
    Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator, Tab 2: Capacity Supply

    Determine the current distribution of your resources’ time and your confidence in whether the resources indeed supply those times.

    The image is a screen capture of the Working Time section of the calculator, with sample information filled in.

    5. Enter the percentage of working time across each role that, on an annual basis, goes toward administrative duties (non-project meetings, training, time spent checking email, etc.) and keep-the-lights-on work (e.g. support and maintenance work).

    While these percentages will vary by individual, a high-level estimate across each role will suffice for the purposes of this activity.

    6. Express how confident you are in each resource being able to deliver the calculated project work hours in percentages.

    Another interpretation for supply confidence is “supply control”: estimate your current ability to control this distribution of working time to meet the changing needs in percentages.

    Percentage of your working time that goes toward project work is calculated based upon what’s left after your non-project working time allocations have been subtracted.

    Create a realistic estimate of the demand from your project portfolio with the T-shirt sizing technique

    1.2.2
    15 minutes - 30 minutes

    Input

    • Average work-hours for a project
    • List of projects
    • PPM Current State Scorecard

    Output

    A realistic estimate of resource demand from your project portfolio

    Materials

    Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator

    Participants

    • PMO Director
    • Project Managers (optional)

    Quickly re-express the size of your project portfolio in resource hours required.

    Estimating the resources required for a project in a project backlog can take a lot of effort. Rather than trying to create an accurate estimate for each project, a set of standard project sizes (often referred to as the “T-shirt sizing” technique) will be sufficiently accurate for estimating your project backlog’s overall demand.

    Instructions for working through Tab 3 of the tool are provided here and in the next section.

    1. For each type of project, enter the average number for work-hours.

    Project Types Average Number of Work Hours for a Project
    Small 80
    Medium 200
    Large 500
    Extra-Large 1000

    Improve your estimate of demand from your project portfolio by accounting for unproductive capacity spending

    1.2.2
    Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator, Tab 3: Project Demand

    2. Using your list of projects, enter the number of projects for each appropriate field.

    The image shows a screen capture of the number of projects section of the Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator, with sample information filled in.

    3. Enter your resource waste data from the PPM Current State Scorecard (see next section). Alternatively, enter your best guess on how much project capacity is spent wastefully per category.

    The image shows a screen capture of the Waste Assessment section of the Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator, with sample information filled in, and a pie chart on the right based on the sample data.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The calculator estimates the project demand by T-shirt-sizing the work-hours required by projects to be delivered within the next 12 months and then adding the corresponding wasted capacity. This may be a pessimistic estimate, but it is more realistic because projects tend to be delivered late more than early.

    Estimate how much project capacity is wasted with Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or contact your Account Manager for more information.

    This step is highly recommended but not required.

    Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard diagnostic provides a comprehensive view of your portfolio management strengths and weaknesses, including project portfolio management, project management, customer management, and resource utilization.

    Use the wisdom-of-the-crowd to estimate resource waste in:

    • Cancelled projects
    • Inefficiency
    • Suboptimal assignment of resources
    • Unassigned resources
    • Analyzing, fixing, and redeploying

    50% of PPM resource is wasted on average, effectively halving your available project capacity.

    Estimate non-project demand on your resources by role

    1.2.3
    45 minutes - 1 hour

    Input

    • Organizational chart
    • Knowledge of staff non-project demand

    Output

    Documented non-project demands and their estimated degree of fluctuation

    Materials

    Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator

    Participants

    • PMO Director
    • Functional Managers (optional)
    Document non-project demand that could eat into your project capacity.

    When discussing project demands, non-project demands (administrative and operational) are often underestimated and downplayed – even though, in reality, they take a de facto higher priority to project work. Use Tab 4 of the tool to document these non-project demands, as well as their sources.

    The image shows a screen capture from Tab 4 of the tool, with sample information filled in.

    1. Choose a role using a drop-down list.

    2. Enter the type and the source of the demand.

    3. Enter the size and the frequency of the demand in hours.

    4. Estimate how stable the non-project demands are for each role.

    Examine and discuss your supply-demand analysis report

    1.2.4
    30 minutes - 1 hour

    Input

    Completed Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator

    Output

    Supply-Demand Analysis Report

    Materials

    Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator

    Participants

    • PMO Director
    • Functional Managers
    • Project Managers

    Start a data-driven discussion on resource management using the capacity supply-demand analysis report.

    Tab 5 of the calculator is a report that contains the following analysis:

    1. Overall resource capacity supply and demand gap
    2. Project capacity supply vs. demand gap
    3. Non-project capacity supply vs. demand balance
    4. Resource capacity confidence

    Each analysis is described and explained in the following four sections. Examine the report and discuss the following among the activity participants:

    1. How is your perception of the current resource capacity supply-demand balance affected by this analysis? How is it confirmed? Is it changed?
    2. Perform a root-cause analysis of problems revealed by the report. For each observation, ask “why?” repeatedly – generally, you can arrive at the root cause in four iterations.
    3. Refer back to Activity 1.1.2: current distribution of accountability for resource management. In your situation, how would you prioritize which resource management tasks to improve? Who are the involved stakeholders?

    Examine your supply-demand analysis report: overall resource capacity gap

    1.2.4
    Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator, Tab 5: Supply-Demand Analysis

    1. Examine your resource capacity supply and demand gap.

    The top of the report on Tab 5 shows a breakdown of your annual resource supply and demand, with resource capacity shown in both total hours and percentage of the total. For the purposes of the analysis, absence is averaged. If total demand is less than available resource supply, the surplus capacity will be displayed as “Free Capacity” on the demand side.

    The Supply & Demand Analysis table displays the realistic project capacity, which is calculated by subtracting non-project supply deficit from the project capacity. This is based on the assumption that all non-project work must get done. The difference between the project demand and the realistic project capacity is your supply-demand gap, in work-hours.

    If your supply-demand gap is zero, recognize that the project demand does not take into account the project backlog: it only takes into account the projects that are expected to be delivered within the next 12 months.

    Examine your supply-demand analysis report: project capacity gap

    1.2.4
    Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator, Tab 5: Supply-Demand Analysis

    2. Examine your project capacity supply vs. demand gap.

    The project capacity supply and demand analysis compares your available annual project capacity with the size of your project portfolio, expressed in work-hours.

    The supply side is further broken down to productive vs. wasted project capacity. The demand side is broken down to three buckets of projects: those that are active, those that sit in the backlog, and those that are expected to be added within 12 months. Percentage values are expressed in terms of total project capacity.

    A key observation here is the limitation to which reducing wasteful spending of resources can get to the project portfolio backlog. In this example, even a theoretical scenario of 100% productive project capacity will not likely result in net shrinkage of the project portfolio backlog. To achieve that, either the total project capacity must be increased, or less projects must be approved.

    Note: the work-hours necessary for delivering projects that are expected to be completed within 12 months is not shown in this visualization, as they should be represented within the other three categories of projects.

    Examine your supply-demand analysis report: non-project capacity gap

    1.2.4
    Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator, Tab 5: Supply-Demand Analysis

    3. Drill down on the non-project capacity supply-demand balance by each role.

    The non-project capacity supply and demand analysis compares your available non-project capacity and their demands in a year, for each role, in work-hours.

    With this chart, you can:

    1. Observe which roles are “running hot,” (i.e. they have more demand than available supply).
    2. Verify your non-project/project supply ratio assumptions in Tab 2 of the tool / Activity 1.2.1.

    Tab 5 also provides similar breakdowns for administrative and keep-the-lights-on capacity supply and demand by each role.

    Examine your supply-demand analysis report: resource capacity confidence (RCC)

    1.2.4
    Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator, Tab 5: Supply-Demand Analysis

    4. Examine your resource capacity confidence.

    In our approach, we introduce a metric called Resource Capacity Confidence (RCC). Conceptually, RCC is defined as follows:

    Resource Capacity Confidence = SC × DS × SDR

    Term Name Description
    SC Supply Control How confident are you that the supply of your resources’ project capacity will be delivered?
    DS Demand Stability How wildly does demand fluctuate? If it cannot be controlled, can it be predicted?
    SDR Supply-Demand Ratio How severely does demand outstrip supply?

    In this context, RCC can be defined as follows:

    "Given the uncertainty that our resources can supply hours according to the assumed project/non-project ratio, the fluctuations in non-project demand, and the overall deficit in project capacity, there is about 50% chance that we will be able to deliver the projects we are expected to deliver within the next 12 months."

    Case study: Non-project work is probably taking far more time than you might like

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Government

    Source Info-Tech Client

    "When our customers get a budget for a project, it’s all in capital. It never occurs to them that IT has a limited number of hours. "

    Challenge

    • A small municipal government was servicing a wide geographic area for information technology and infrastructure services.
    • There was no meaningful division of IT resources between support and project work.
    • Previous IT leadership tried a commercial PPM tool and stopped paying maintenance fees for it because of lack of adoption.
    • Projects were tracked inconsistently in multiple places.

    Solution

    • New project requests were approved with IT involvement.
    • Project approvals were entirely associated with the capital budget required and resourcing was never considered to be a constraint.
    • The broad assumption was that IT time was generally available for project work.
    • In reality, the IT personnel had almost no time for project work.

    Results

    • The organization introduced Info-Tech’s Grow Your Own PPM Solution template with minor modifications.
    • They established delivery dates for projects based on available time.
    • Time was allocated for projects based on person, project, percentage of time, and month.
    • They prioritized project allocations above reactive support work.

    Validate your resourcing assumptions with your staff by surveying their use of time

    Embrace the reality of imperfect IT labor efficiency to improve your understanding of resource time spend.

    Use Info-Tech’s time-tracking survey to validate your resourcing assumptions and get additional information to improve your understanding of resource time spent: imperfect labor efficiency and continuous partial attention.

    Causes of imperfect IT labor inefficiency
    • Most IT tasks are unique to their respective projects and contexts. A component that took 30 minutes to install last year might take two hours to install this year due to system changes that occurred since then.
    • Many IT tasks come up unexpectedly due to the need to maintain and support systems implemented on past projects. This work is unpredictable in terms of specifics (what will break where, when, or how).
    • Task switching slows people down and consumes time.
    • Problem solving and solution design often requires unstructured time to think more openly. Some of the most valuable solutions are conceived or discovered when people aren’t regimented and focused on getting things done.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Part of the old resource management mythology is the idea that a person can do (for example) eight different one-hour tasks in eight hours of continuous work. This idea has gone from harmlessly mistaken to grossly unrealistic.

    Constant interruptions lead to continuous partial attention that threatens real productivity

    There’s a difference between being busy and getting things done.

    “Working” on multiple tasks at once can often feel extremely gratifying in the short term because it distracts people from thinking about work that isn’t being done.

    The bottom line is that continuous partial attention impedes the progress of project work.

    Research on continuous partial attention
    • A study that analyzed interruptions and their effects on individuals in the workplace found that that “41% of the time an interrupted task was not resumed right away” (Mark, 2015).
    • Research has also shown that it can take people an average of 23 minutes to return to a task after being interrupted (Schulte, 2015).
    • Delays following interruptions are typically due to switching between multiple other activities before returning to the original task. In many cases, those tasks are much lower priorities – and in some cases not even work-related.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It may not be possible to minimize interruptions in the workplace, as many of these are considered to be urgent at the time. However, setting guidelines for how and when individuals can be interrupted may help to limit the amount of lost project time.

    "Like so many things, in small doses, continuous partial attention can be a very functional behavior. However, in large doses, it contributes to a stressful lifestyle, to operating in crisis management mode, and to a compromised ability to reflect, to make decisions, and to think creatively."

    – Linda Stone, Continuous Partial Attention

    Define the goals and the scope of the time-tracking survey

    1.2.5
    30 minutes

    Input

    Completed Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator

    Output

    Survey design for the time-tracking survey

    Materials

    N/A

    Participants

    • PMO Director
    • Functional Managers
    • Project Managers

    Discuss the following with the activity participants:

    1. Define the scope of the survey
      • Respondents: Comprehensive survey of individuals vs. a representative sample using roles.
      • Granularity: decide how in-depth the questions will be and how often the survey will be delivered.
      • Data Collection: what information do you want to collect?
        • Proportion of project vs. non-project work.
        • Time spent on administrative tasks.
        • Prevalence and impact of distractions.
        • Worker satisfaction.
    2. Determine the sample time period covered by the survey
      • Info-Tech recommends 2-4 weeks. Less than 2 weeks might not be a representative sample, especially during vacation seasons.
      • More than 4 weeks will impose unreasonable time and effort for diminishing returns; data quality will begin to deteriorate as participation declines.
    3. Determine the survey method
      • Use your organization’s preferred survey distributor/online survey tool, or conduct one-on-one interviews to capture data.

    1.2.5 continued - Refine the questionnaire to improve the relevance and quality of insights produced by the survey

    Start with Info-Tech’s recommended weekly survey questions:

    1. Estimate your daily average for number of hours spent on:
      1. Total work
      2. Project work
      3. Non-project work
    2. How many times are you interrupted with “urgent” requests requiring immediate response in a given day?
    3. How many people or projects did you complete tasks for this week?
    4. Rate your overall satisfaction with work this week.
    5. Describe any special tasks, interruptions, or requests that took your time and attention away from project work this week.

    Customize these questions to suit your needs.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Maximize the number of survey responses you get by limiting the number of questions you ask. Info-Tech finds that participation drops off rapidly after five questions.

    1.2.5 continued - Communicate the survey goals and steps, and conduct the survey

    1. Communicate the purpose and goals of the survey to maximize participation and satisfaction.
      • Provide background for why the survey is taking place. Clarify that the intention is to improve working conditions and management capabilities, not to play “gotcha” or hold workers accountable.
    2. Provide a timeline so expectations are clear about when possible next steps will occur, such as
      • Sharing and analyzing results
      • Making decisions
      • Taking action
    3. Reiterate what people are required or expected to do and how much effort is required. Provide reasonable and realistic estimates of how much time and effort people should spend on audit participation.
    4. Distribute the survey; collect and analyze the data.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure that employees understand the purpose of the survey. It is important that they give honest responses that reflect the struggles they are encountering with balancing project and non-project work, not simply telling management what they want to hear.

    Ensuring that employees know this survey is being used to help them, rather than scolding them for not completing work, will give you useful, insightful data on employee time.

    Use Info-Tech’s Time-Tracking Survey Email Template for facilitating your communications.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Provide guidance to your resources with examples on how to differentiate project work vs. non-project work, administrative vs. keep-the-lights-on work, what counts as interruptions, etc.

    Optimize your project portfolio to maintain continuous visibility into capacity

    Now that you have a realistic picture of your realized project capacity and demand amounts, it’s time to use these values to tailor and optimize your resource management practices.

    Based on desired outcomes for this phase, we have

    1. Determined the correct course of action to resolve your supply/demand imbalances.
    2. Assessed the overall project capacity of your portfolio.
    3. Cataloged sources of project and non-project demands.
    4. Performed a time audit to create an accurate and realistic picture of the time spent on different types of work.

    In the next phase, we will:

    1. Wireframe a resource management process.
    2. Choose a resource management tool.
    3. Define data collection, analysis, and reporting steps within a sustainable resource management process.

    The image is a screenshot from tab 6 of the Time Audit Workbook. The image shows two pie charts.

    The image is a screenshot from tab 6 of the Time Audit Workbook. The image shows a pie chart.

    Screenshots from tab 6 of the Time Audit Workbook.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The validity of traditional, rigorous resource planning has long been an illusion because the resource projections were typically not maintained. New realities such as faster project cycles, matrix organizations, and high-autonomy staff cultures have made the illusion impossible to maintain.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.2 Assess the current distribution of accountability for resource management practice

    Discuss who is currently accountable for various facets of resource management, and whether they have the right authority and ability to deliver on that accountability.

    1.2.1 Create realistic estimates of supply and demand using Info-Tech’s Supply-Demand Calculator

    Derive actionable, quantitative insight into the resourcing challenges facing the organization by using Info-Tech’s methodology that prioritizes completeness over precision.

    Phase 2

    Design a Realistic Resource Management Process

    Phase 2 Outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Draft a Resource Management Process

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 3-6 weeks

    Step 2.1: Determine the dimensions of resource management

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Introduce the seven dimensions of resource management
    • Trade-off between granularity and utility of data

    Then complete these activities…

    • Decide on the seven dimensions
    • Examine the strategy’s cost-of-use

    With these tools & templates:

    Resource Management Playbook

    Step 2.2: Support your process with a resource management tool

    Discuss with the analyst:

    • Inventory of available PPM tools
    • Overview of Portfolio Manager Lite 2017

    Then complete these activities…

    • Populate the tool with data
    • Explore portfolio data with the workbook’s output tabs

    With these tools & templates:

    • Portfolio Manager Lite
    • PPM Solution Vendor Demo Script
    Step 2.3: Build process steps

    Discuss with the analyst:

    • Common challenges of resource management practice
    • Recommendations for a pilot initiative

    Then complete these activities…

    • Review and customize contents of the Resource Management Playbook

    With these tools & templates:

    • Resource Management Playbook

    Phase 2 Results & Insights:

    Draft the resource management practice with sustainability in mind. It is about what you can and will maintain every week, even during a crisis: it is not about what you put together as a one-time snapshot. Once you stop maintaining resource data, it's nearly impossible to catch up.

    Step 2.1: Customize the seven dimensions of resource management

    PHASE 1

    1.1 Set a course of action

    1.2 Estimate supply and demand

    PHASE 2

    2.1 Select resource management dimensions

    2.2 Select resource management tools

    2.3 Build process steps

    PHASE 3

    3.1 Pilot your process for viability

    3.2 Plan stakeholder engagement

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Establish a default project vs. non-project work ratio
    • Decide the scope of allocation for your strategy
    • Set your allocation cadence
    • Limit the granularity of time allocation
    • Define the granularity of work assignment
    • Apply a forecast horizon
    • Determine the update frequency
    This step involves the following participants:
    • CIO / IT Director
    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Functional / Resource Managers
    • Project Managers
    Outcomes of this step
    • Seven dimensions of resource management, chosen to fit the current needs and culture of the organization
    • Parameters for creating a resource management process (downstream)

    There is no one-size-fits-all resource management strategy

    Don’t get boxed into a canned solution that doesn’t make sense for your department’s maturity level and culture.

    Resource management strategies are commonly implemented “out-of-the-box,” via a commercial PPM or time-tracking tool, or an external third-party consultant in partnership with those types of tools.

    While these solutions and best practices have insights to offer – and provide admirable maturity targets – they often outstrip the near-term abilities of IT teams to successfully implement, adopt, and support them.

    Tailor an approach that makes sense for your department and organization. You don’t need complex and granular processes to get usable resourcing data; you just need to make sure that you’ve carved out a process that works in terms of providing data you can use.

    • In this step, we will walk you through Info-Tech’s seven dimensions of resource management to help wireframe your resource management process.
    • In the subsequent steps in this phase, we will develop these dimensions from a wireframe into a functioning process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Put processes before tools. Most commercial PPM tools include a resource management function that was designed for hourly granularity. This is part of the fallacy of an old reality that was never real. Determine which goals are realistic and fit your solution to your problem.

    Wireframe a strategy that will work for your department using Info-Tech’s seven dimensions of resource management

    Action the decision points across Info-Tech’s seven dimensions to ensure your resource management process is guided by realistic data and process goals.

    In this step, we will walk you through the decision points in each dimension to determine the departmental specificities of your resource management strategy

    Default project vs. non-project ratio

    How much time is available for projects once non-project demands are factored in?

    Reporting frequency

    How often is the allocation data verified, reconciled, and reported for use?

    Forecast horizon

    How far into the future can you realistically predict resource supply?

    Scope of allocation

    To whom is time allocated?

    Allocation cadence

    How long is each allocation period?

    Granularity of time allocation

    What’s the smallest unit of time to allocate?

    Granularity of work assignment

    What is time allocated to?

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Ensure that both the functional managers and the project managers participate in the following discussions. Without buy-in from both dimensions of the matrix organization, you will have difficulty making meaningful resource management data and process decisions.

    Establish your default project versus non-project work ratio

    2.1.1
    30 minutes

    Input

    • Completed Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator

    Output

    • Default organizational P-NP ratio and role-specific P-NP ratios

    Materials

    • Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator
    • Time Audit Workbook
    • Resource Management Playbook

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers

    How much time is available for projects once non-project demands are factored in?

    The default project vs. non-project work ratio (P-NP Ratio) is a starting point for functional and project managers to budget the work-hours at their disposal as well as for resources to split their time – if not directed otherwise by their managers.

    How to set this dimension. The Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator from step 1.2 shows the current P-NP ratio for the department, and how the percentages translate into work-hours. The Time Audit Workbook from step 1.2 shows the ratio for specific roles.

    For the work of setting this dimension, you can choose to keep the current ratio from step 1.2 as your default, or choose a new ratio based on the advice below.

    • Discuss and decide how the supply-demand gap should be reconciled from the project side vs. the functional side.
      • Use the current organizational priority as a guide, and keep in mind that the default P-NP ratio is to be adjusted over time to respond to changing needs and priorities of the organization.
      • Once the organizational default P-NP ratio is chosen, defining role-specific ratios may be helpful. A help desk employee may spend only 10% of their time on project work, while an analyst may spend 80% of their time on project work.

    Decide the scope of allocation for your strategy

    2.1.2
    15-30 minutes

    Input

    • Current practices for assigning work and allocating time
    • Distribution of RM accountability (Activity 1.1.2)

    Output

    • Resource management scope of allocation

    Materials

    • RM Playbook

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers

    To whom is time allocated?

    Scope of allocation is the “who” of the equation. At the lowest and most detailed level, allocations are made to individual resources. At the highest and most abstract level, though, allocations can be made to a department. Other “whos” in scope of allocation can include teams, roles, or skills.

    How to set this dimension. Consider how much granularity is required for your overall project capacity visibility, and the process overhead you’re willing to commit to support this visibility. The more low-level and detailed the scope of allocation (e.g. skills or individuals) the more data maintenance required to keep it current.

    • Discuss and decide to whom time will be allocated for the purposes of resource management.
      • Recall your prior discussion from activity 1.1.2 on how accountabilities for resource management are distributed within your organization.
      • The benefit of allocating teams to projects is that it is much easier to avoid overallocation. When a team is overallocated, it is visible. Individual overallocations can go unnoticed.
      • Once you have mastered the art of keeping resource data current and accurate at a higher level (e.g. team), it can be easier move lower level and assign and track allocations in a per-role or per-person basis.

    Set your allocation cadence

    2.1.3
    15-30 minutes

    Input

    • Current practices for assigning work and allocating time
    • Scope of allocation (Activity 2.1.2)

    Output

    • Determination of temporal frames over which time will be allotted

    Materials

    • RM Playbook

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers

    How long is each allocation period?

    How long is each individual allocation period? In what “buckets of time” do you plan to spend time – week by week, month by month, or quarter by quarter? The typical allocation cadence is monthly; however, depending on the scope of allocation and the nature of work assigned, this cadence can differ.

    How to set this dimension. Allocation cadence can depend on a number of factors. For instance, if you’re allocating time to agile teams, the cadence would most naturally be bi-weekly; if work is assigned via programs, you might allocate time by quarters.

    • Discuss and decide the appropriate allocation cadence for the purposes of resource management. You could even be an environment that currently has different cadences for different teams. If so, it will be helpful to standardize a cadence for the purposes of centralized project portfolio resource management.
      • If the cadence is too short (e.g. days or weeks), it will require a dedicated effort to maintain the data.
      • If the cadence is too long (e.g. quarters or bi-annual), your resource management strategy could fail to produce actionable insight and lack the appropriate agility in being responsive to changes in direction.
      • Ultimately, your allocation cadence may be contingent upon the limitations of your resource management solution (see step 2.2).

    Limit the granularity of time allocation

    2.1.3
    15-30 minutes

    Input

    • Requirements for granularity of data
    • Resource management scope of allocation (Activity 2.1.2)

    Output

    • Determination of lowest level of granularity for time allocation

    Materials

    • RM Playbook

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers

    What’s the smallest unit of time that will be allocated?

    Granularity of time allocation refers to the smallest unit of time that can be allocated. You may not need to set firm limits on this, given that it could differ from PM to PM, and resource manager to resource manager. Nevertheless, it can be helpful to articulate an “as-low-as-you’ll-go” limit to help avoid getting too granular too soon in your data aspirations.

    How to set this dimension. At a high level, the granularity of allocation could be as high as a week. At its lowest level, it could be an hour. Other options include a full day (e.g. 8 hours), a half day (4 hours), or 2-hour increments.

    • Discuss and decide the appropriate granularity for all allocations in the new resource management practice.
      • As a guideline, granularity of allocation should be one order of magnitude smaller than the allocation cadence to provide enough precision for meaningfully dividing up each allocation cadence, without imposing an unreasonably rigorous expectation for resources to manage their time.
      • The purpose of codifying this dimension is to help provide a guideline for how granular allocations should be. Hourly granularity can be difficult to maintain, so (for instance) by setting a half-day granularity you can help avoid project managers and resource managers getting too granular.

    Define the granularity of work assignments

    2.1.4
    15-30 minutes

    Input

    • Requirements for granularity of work assignment
    • Resource management scope of allocation (Activity 2.1.2)

    Output

    • Determination of work assignment

    Materials

    • RM Playbook

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers

    To what is time allocated?

    Determine a realistic granularity for your allocation. This is the “what” of the equation: what your resources are working on or the size of work for which allocations are managed.

    How to set this dimension. A high level granularity of work assignment would assign an entire program, a mid-level scope would involve allocating a project or a phase of a project, and a low level, rigorous scope would involve allocating an individual task.

    • Discuss and decide the appropriate granularity for all work assignments in the new resource management strategy.
      • The higher granularity that is assigned, the more difficult it becomes to maintain the data. However, assigning at program level might not lead to useful, practical data.
      • Begin by allocating to projects to help you mature your organization, and once you have mastered data maintenance at this level, you can move on to a more granular work assignment.
        • If you are at a maturity level of 1 or 2, Info-Tech recommends beginning by assigning by project. If you are at a maturity level 3-4, it may be time to start allocating by phase or task.

    Apply a forecast horizon

    2.1.5
    15-30 minutes

    Input

    • Current practices for work planning, capacity forecasting
    • Allocation scope, cadence, and granularity (Activities 2.1.2-4)

    Output

    • Resource management forecast horizon

    Materials

    • RM Playbook

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers

    How far into the future can you realistically predict resource supply?

    Determine a realistic forecasting horizon for your allocation. At this point you have decided “what” “who” is working on and how frequently this will be updated. Now it is time to decide how far resource needs will be forecasted, e.g. “what will this person be working on in 3 months?”

    How to set this dimension. A high-level forecast horizon would only look forward week-to-week, with little consideration of the long-term future. A mid-level forecast would involve predicting one quarter in advance and a low-level, rigorous scope would involve forecasting one or more years in advance.

    • Discuss and decide the appropriate forecast horizon that will apply to all allocations in the new resource management practice. It’s important that your forecast horizon helps to foster accurate data. If you can’t ensure data accuracy for a set period, make your forecast horizon shorter.
      • If you are at a maturity level of 1 or 2, Info-Tech recommends forecasting one month in advance.
      • If you are already at level 3-4 on the resource management maturity model, Info-Tech recommends forecasting one quarter to one year in advance.

    See the diagram below for further explanation

    2.1.5 Forecast horizon diagram

    Between today and the forecast horizon (“forecast window”), all stakeholders in resource management commit to reasonable accuracy of data. The aim is to create a reliable data set that can be used to determine true resource capacity, as well as the available resource capacity to meet unplanned, urgent demands.

    The image shows a Forecast horizon diagram, with Time on the x-axis and Data completeness on the Y-axis. The time between today and the forecast horizon is labelled as the forecast window. there is a line which descends in small degrees until the Forecast Horizon point, where the line is labelled Reasonable level of completeness.

    The image shows a chart that lines up with the sections before and after the Forecast Horizon. In the accuracy row, Data is accurate before the forecast horizon and a rough estimate after. In the planning row, before the horizon is reliable for planning, and can inform high-level planning after the horizon. In the free capacity row, before the horizon, it can be committed to urgent demands, and after the horizon, negotiate for capacity.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Ensure data accuracy. It is important to note that forecasting a year in advance does not necessarily make your organization more mature, unless you can actually rely on these estimates and use them. It is important to only forecast as far in advance as you can accurately predict.

    Determine the update frequency

    2.1.6
    30 minutes

    Input

    • Current practices for work planning, capacity reporting
    • Current practices for project intake, prioritization, and approval
    • RM core dimensions (Activities 2.1.1)

    Output

    • Resource management update frequency

    Materials

    • RM Playbook

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers

    How often is the allocation data verified, reconciled, and reported for use?

    How often will you reconcile and rebalance your allocations? Your update frequency will determine this. It is very much the heartbeat of resource management, dictating how often reports on allocations will be updated and published for stakeholders’ consumption.

    How to set this dimension. Determine a realistic frequency with which to update project reports. This will be how you determine who is working on what during each measurement period.

    • Discuss and decide how often the supply-demand gap should be reconciled from the project side vs. the functional side.
      • Keep in mind that the more frequent the reporting period, the more time must go into data maintenance. A monthly frequency requires maintenance at the end of the month, while weekly requires it at the end of each week.
      • Also think about how accurately you can maintain the data. Having a quarterly update frequency may require less maintenance time than monthly, but this information may not stay up to date in between these long stretches.
      • Reports generated at each update frequency should both inform resources on what to work on, what not to work on, and how to prioritize tasks if something unexpected comes up, as well as the steering committee, to help inform project approval decisions.

    Finalize the dimensions for your provisional resource management process

    2.1.7
    10 minutes

    Input

    • 7 core dimensions of resource management (Activities 2.1.1-6)

    Output

    • Provisional resource management strategy

    Materials

    • Resource Management Playbook

    Participants

    • CIO
    • PMO Director
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers

    Document the outputs from the preceding seven activities. These determinations will form the foundation of your resource management strategy, which we will go on to define in more detail in the subsequent steps of this phase.

    • Keep in mind, at this stage your dimensions are provisional and subject to change, pending the outcomes of steps 2.2 and 2.3.
    RM Core Dimensions Decision
    Default P-NP ratio 40%-60$ + exception by roles
    Scope of allocation Individual resource
    Allocation cadence Monthly
    Granularity of time allocation 4 hours
    Granularity of work assignment Projects
    Forecast horizon 3 months
    Reporting frequency Twice a month

    Document these dimensions in Section 1.1 of Info-Tech’s Resource Management Playbook. We will be further customizing this template in steps 2.3 and 3.1.

    Step 2.2: Determine the resource management tool that will best support your process

    PHASE 1

    1.1 Set a course of action

    1.2 Estimate supply and demand

    PHASE 2

    2.1 Select resource management dimensions

    2.2 Select resource management tools

    2.3 Build process steps

    PHASE 3

    3.1 Pilot your process for viability

    3.2 Plan stakeholder engagement

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Consider the pros and cons of commercial tools vs. spreadsheets as a resource management tool
    • Review the PPM Solution Vendor Demo Script to ensure your investment in a commercial tool meets your resource management needs
    • Jump-start spreadsheet-based resource management with Portfolio Manager Lite

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Functional / Resource Managers
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Choice of tool to support the resource management process
    • Examination of the commercial tool’s ability to support the resource management process chosen
    • Set-up and initial use of Portfolio Manager Lite for a spreadsheet-based resource management solution

    Effective resource management practices require an effective resource management tool

    The discipline of resource management has largely become inextricable from the tools that help support it. Ensure that you choose the right tool for your environment.

    Resource management depends on the flow of information and data from the project level up to functional managers, project managers, and beyond.

    Tools are required to help facilitate this flow, and the project portfolio management landscape is littered with endless time-tracking and capacity management options.

    These options can each have their merits and their drawbacks. The success of implementing a resource management strategy very much hinges upon weighing these, and then choosing the right solution for your project eco-system.

    • This first part of this step will help you assess the tool landscape and make the right choice to help support your resource management practices.
    • In the second part of this step, we’ll take a deep-dive into Info-Tech’s Excel-based resource management solution. If you are implementing our solution, these sections will help you understand and set up the tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Establish a book of record. While it is possible to succeed using ad hoc tools and data sources, a centralized repository for capacity data works best. Your tool choice should help establish a capacity book of record to help ensure ongoing reconciliation of supply and demand at the portfolio level.

    Get to know your resource management tool options

    At a high level, those looking for a resource management solution have two broad options: a commercial project portfolio management (PPM) or time-tracking software on the one hand, and a spreadsheet-based tool, like Google Sheets or Excel, on the other.

    Obviously, if your team or department already has access to a PPM or time-tracking software, it makes sense to continue using this, as long as it will accommodate the process that was wireframed in the previous step.

    Otherwise, pursue the tool option that makes the most sense given both the strategy that you’ve wireframed and other organizational factors. See the table below and the next section for guidance.

    If you’re planning on doing resource allocation by hand, you’re not going to get very far.”

    Rachel Burger

    Commercial Solutions Spreadsheet-Based Solutions
    Description
    • These highly powerful solutions are purchased from a software/service provider.
    • These can be as simple as a list of current projects on a spreadsheet or a more advanced solution with resource capacity analysis.
    Pros
    • Extraordinary function
    • Potential for automated roll-ups
    • Collaboration functionality
    • Easy to deploy: high process maturity or organization-wide adoption not required.
    • Lower cost-in-use – in many cases, they are free.
    • Highly customizable.
    Cons
    • High process maturity required
    • High cost-in-use
    • Generally expensive to customize
    • Comprehensive, continual, and organization-wide adoption required
    • Easy to break.
    • Typically, they require a centralized deployment with a single administrator responsible for data entry.

    Option A: When pursuing commercial options, don’t bite off more functionality than your people can sustain

    While commercial options offer the most robust functionality for automation, collaboration, and reporting, they are also costly, difficult to implement, and onerous to sustain over the long run.

    It’s not uncommon for organizations to sink vast amounts of money into commercial PPM tools, year after year, and never actually get any usable resource or forecasting data from these tools.

    The reasons for this can vary, but in many cases it is because organizations mistake a tool for a PPM or a resource management strategy.

    A tool is no substitute for having a clearly defined process that staff can support. Be aware of these two factors before investing in a commercial tool:

    • Visibility cannot be automated. It is not uncommon for CIOs to believe that because they’ve invested in a tool, they have an automated portfolio that enables them to sit back and wait for the data to roll in. With many tools, the challenge is that the calculations driving the rollups have become increasingly unsustainable and irrelevant in our high-autonomy staff cultures and interruption-driven work days.
    • Information does not equal knowledge. While commercial tools have robust reporting features, the data outputs can lead to information overload – and, subsequently, disinterest – unless they are curated and filtered to suit your executive’s needs and expectations.

    47%
    Of those companies using automated software to assist in resource management, almost half report that those systems failed to accurately calculate resource forecasts.

    PM Solutions

    Info-Tech Insight

    Put process sustainability before enhanced tool functionality.

    Ensure that you have sustainable processes in place before investing in an expensive commercial tool. Your tool selection should help facilitate capability-matched processes and serve user adoption.

    Trying to establish processes around a tool with a functionality that exceeds your process maturity is a recipe for failure.

    Before jumping into a commercial tool, consider some basic parameters for your selection

    Use the table below as a starting point to help ensure you are pursuing a resource management tool that is right for your organization’s size and process maturity level.

    Tool Category Characteristics # of Users PPM Maturity Sample Vendors
    Enterprise tools
    • Higher professional services requirements for enterprise deployment
    • Larger reference customers
    1,000> High
    • MS Project Server
    • Oracle Primavera
    • Planisware
    Mid-market tools
    • Lower expectation of professional services engaged in initial deployment contract
    • Fewer globally recognizable reference clients
    • Faster deployments
    100> Intermediate-to-High
    • Workfront
    • Project Insight
    • Innotas
    Entry-level tools
    • Lower cost than mid-market and enterprise PPM tools
    • Limited configurability, reporting, and resource management functionalities
    • Compelling solutions to the organizations that want to get a fast start to a trial deployment
    <100 Low-to-Intermediate
    • 5PM
    • AceProject
    • Liquid Planner

    For a more in-depth treatment of choosing and implementing a commercial PPM tool to assist with your resource management practice, see Info-Tech’s blueprint, Select and Implement a PPM Solution.

    Use Info-Tech’s PPM Solution Vendor Demo Script to help ensure you get the functionality you need

    PPM Solution Vendor Demo Script (optional)

    To ensure your investment in a commercial tool meets your resource management needs, use Info-Tech’s PPM Solution Vendor Demo Script to structure your tool demos and interactions with vendors.

    For instance, some important scenarios to consider when looking at potential tools include:

    • How are overallocation and underallocation situations identified and reconciled in the solution?
    • How are users motivated to maintain their own timesheets (beyond simply being mandated as part of their job); how does the solution and timesheet functionality help team members do their job?
    • How will portfolio-level reports remain useful and accurate despite “zero-adoption” scenarios, in which some or all teams do not actively maintain task and timesheet data?

    Any deficiencies in answering these types of questions should alert you to the fact that a potential solution may not adequately meet the needs of your resource management strategy.

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM Solution Vendor Demo Script

    "[H]ow (are PPM solutions) performing in a matrix organization? Well, there are gaps. There will be employees who do not submit timesheets, who share their time between project and operational activities, and whose reporting relationships do not fit neatly into the PPM database structure. This creates exceptions in the PPM application, and you may just have the perfect solution to a small subset of your problems." – Vilmos Rajda

    Option B: When managing resourcing via spreadsheets, you don’t have to feel like you’re settling for the lesser option

    Spreadsheets can provide a viable alternative for organizations not ready to invest in an expensive tool or for those not getting what they need from their commercial selections.

    When it comes to resource management at a portfolio level, spreadsheets can be just as effective as commercial tools for facilitating the flow of accurate and maintainable resourcing data and for communicating resource usage and availability.

    Some of the benefits of spreadsheets over commercials tools include:

    • They are easy to set up and deploy. High process maturity or organization-wide user adoption are not required.
    • They have a low cost-in-use. In the case of Excel, the tool itself comes at no additional cost.
    • They are highly customizable. No development time/costs are required to tweak the solution to suit your needs.

    To be clear: spreadsheets have their drawbacks (for instance, they are easy to break, require a centralized data administrator, and are yours and yours alone to maintain). If your department has the budget and the process maturity to support a commercial tool, you should pursue the options covered in the previous sections.

    However, if you are looking for a viable alternative to an expensive tool, spreadsheets have the ability to support a rigorous resource management practice.

    "Because we already have enterprise licensing for an expensive commercial tool, everyone else thinks it’s logical to start there. I think we’re going to start with something quick and dirty like Excel." – EPMO Director, Law Enforcement Services

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make the choice to ensure adoption.

    When making your selection, the most important consideration across all the solution categories is data maintenance. You must be assured that you and your team can maintain the data.

    As soon as your portfolio data becomes inconsistent and unreliable, decision makers will lose trust in your resource data, and the authority of your resource management strategy will become very tenuous.

    While spreadsheets offer a viable resource management option, not all spreadsheets are created equal

    Lean on Info-Tech’s experience and expertise to get up and running quickly with a superior resource management Excel-based tool: Portfolio Manager Lite 2017.

    Spreadsheets are the most common PPM tool – and it’s not hard to understand why: they can be created with minimal cost and effort.

    But when something is easy to do, it’s important to keep in mind that it’s also easy to do badly. As James Kwak says in his article, “The Importance of Excel,” “The biggest problem is that anyone can create Excel Spreadsheets—badly.”

    • Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager Lite 2017 offers an antidote to the deficiencies that can haunt home-grown resource management tools.
    • As an easy-to-deploy, highly evolved spreadsheet-based option, Portfolio Manager Lite enables you to mature your resource management processes, and provide effective resource visibility without the costly upfront investment.

    Download Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager Lite 2017

    Info-Tech Insight

    Balance functionality and adoption. Clients often find it difficult to gain adoption with commercial tools. Though homegrown solutions may have less functionality, the higher adoption level can make up for this and also potentially save your organization thousands a year in licensing fees.

    Determine your resource management solution and revisit your seven dimensions of resource management

    2.2.1
    Times will vary

    Participants

    • PMO Director

    Based on input from the previous slides, determine the resource management solution option you will pursue and implement to help support your resource management strategy. Record this selection in section 1.2 of the Resource Management Playbook.

    • You may need to revisit the decisions made in step 2.1 to consider if the default values for your seven core dimensions of resource management are still sound. Keep these current and relevant as you become more familiar with your resource management solution.
    RM Core Dimensions Default Value
    Default P-NP ratio Role-specific
    Scope of allocation Individual resource
    Allocation cadence Monthly
    Granularity of allocation (not defined)
    Granularity of work assignment Project
    Forecast horizon 6 months
    Reporting frequency (not defined)

    Portfolio Manager Lite has comprehensive sample data to help you understand its functions.

    As you can see in this table, the tool itself assumes five of the seven resource management core dimensions. You will need to determine departmental values for granularity of allocation and reporting frequency. The other dimensions are determined by the tool.

    If you’re piloting Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager Lite, review the subsequent slides in this step before proceeding to step 2.3. If you are not piloting Portfolio Manager Lite, proceed directly to step 2.3.

    Overview of Portfolio Manager Lite

    Portfolio Manager Lite has two set-up tabs, three data entry tabs, and six output-only tabs. The next 15 slides show how to use them. To use this tool, you need Excel 2013 or 2016. If you’re using Excel 2013, you must download and install Microsoft Power Query version 2.64 or later, available for download from Microsoft.

    The image shows an overview of the Portfolio Manager Lite tool. It shows the Input and Data Tabs on the left, and output tabs on the right. The middle of the graphic includes guidance to ensure that you refresh the outputs after each data entry, by using the Refresh All button

    Observe “table manners” to maintain table integrity and prevent Portfolio Manager Lite malfunctions

    Excel tables enable you to manage and analyze a group of related data. Since Portfolio Manager Lite uses tables extensively, maintaining the table’s integrity is critical. Here are some things to know for working with Excel tables.

    Do not leave empty rows at the end.

    Adjust the sizing handle to eliminate empty rows.

    Always paste values.

    Default pasting behavior can interrupt formula references and introduce unwanted external links. Always right-click and select Paste Values.

    Correctly add/remove rows within a table.

    Do not use row headings; instead, always right-click inside a table to manipulate table rows.

    Set up Portfolio Manager Lite

    2.2.1
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 2a: Org Setup

    The Org Setup tab is divided into two sections, Resources and Projects. Each section contains several categories to group your resources and projects. Items listed under each category will be available via drop-down lists in the data tabs.

    These categorizations will be used later to “slice” your resource allocation data. For example, you’ll be able to visualize the resource allocations for each team, for each division, or for each role.

    The image shows a screenshot of Tab 2a, with sample information filled in.

    1. Role and Default Non-Project Ratio columns: From the Supply-Demand Calculator, copy the list of roles, and how much of each role’s time is spent on non-projects by default (see below; add the values marked with yellow arrows).

    2. Resource Type column: List the type of resource you have available.

    3. Team and Skill columns: List the teams, and skills for your resources.

    In the Resources tab, items in drop-down lists will appear in the same order as shown here. Sort them to make things easy to find.

    Do not delete tables you won’t use. Instead, leave or hide tables.

    Set up Portfolio Manager Lite (continued)

    2.2.1
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 2a: Org Setup

    The projects section of the Org Setup tab contains several categories for entering project data. Items listed under each category will be available via drop-down lists in the Projects tab. These categorizations will be used later to analyze how your resources are allocated.

    The image shows the projects sections of Tab 2a.

    1. Project Type: Enter the names of project types, in which projects will be grouped. All projects must belong to a type. Examples of types may include sub-portfolios or programs.

    2. Project Category: Enter the names of project categories, in which projects will be grouped. Unlike types, category is an optional grouping.

    3. Phase: Enter the project phases. Ensure that your phases list has “In Progress” and “Complete” options. They are needed for the portfolio-wide Gantt chart (the Gantt tab).

    4. Priority and Status: Define the choices for project priorities and statuses if necessary (optional).

    5. Unused: An extra column with predefined choices is left for customization (optional).

    Set up Portfolio Manager Lite (continued)

    2.2.1
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 2b: Calendar Setup

    Portfolio Manager Lite is set up for a monthly allocation cadence out of the box. Use this tab to set up the start date, the default resource potential capacity, and the months to include in your reports.

    The image shows fields in the calendar set-up section of Tab 2a, with a Start Date and Hours Assumed per day.

    1. Enter a start date for the calendar, e.g. start of your fiscal or calendar year.

    2. Enter how many hours are assumed in a working day. It is used to calculate the default maximum available hours in a month.

    The image shows the Calendar section of tab 2a, with sample information filled in.

    Maximum Available Hours, Weekdays, and Business Days are automatically generated.

    The current month is highlighted in green.

    3. Enter the number of holidays to correct the number of business days for each month.

    Year to Date Reporting and Forecast Reporting ranges are controlled by this table. Use the period above Maximum Available Hours.

    The image shows the Year-to-Date and Forecast Reporting sections.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Both Portfolio Manager Lite and Portfolio Manager 2017 can be customized for non-monthly resource allocation. Speak to an Info-Tech analyst to ask for more information.

    Enter resource information and their total capacity

    2.2.2
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 3: Resources

    Portfolio Manager Lite is set up for allocating time to individual resources out of the box. Information on these resources is entered in the Resources tab. It has four sections, arranged horizontally.

    1. Enter basic information on your resources. Resource type, team, role, and skill will be used to help you analyze your resource data.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Resources tab with sample information filled in.

    Ensure that the resource names are unique.

    Sort or filter the table using the filter button in the header row.

    2. Their total capacity in work-hours is automatically calculated for each month, using the default numbers from the Calendar Setup tab. If necessary, overwrite the formula and enter in custom values.

    The image shows a screenshot of the total capacity in work-hours, with sample info filled in.

    Cells with less than 120 hours are highlighted in blue.

    Do not add or delete any columns, or modify this header row.

    Enter out-of-office time and non-project time for your resources

    2.2.2
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 3: Resources

    3. Enter the resources’ out-of-office time for each month, as they are reported.

    The image shows the Absence (hours) section, with sample information filled in.

    Do not add or delete any columns, or modify the header row, below the dates.

    4. Resources’ percentages of time spent on non-projects are automatically calculated, based on their roles’ default P-NP ratios. If necessary, overwrite the formula and enter in custom values.

    The image shows the Non-Project Ratio section, with sample information filled in.

    Do not add or delete any columns, or modify the header row, below the dates.

    Populate your project records

    2.2.3
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 4: Projects

    Portfolio Manager Lite is set up for allocating time to projects out of the box. Information on these projects is entered in the Projects tab.

    1. Enter project names and some basic information. These fields are mandatory.

    The image shows the section for filling in project names and basic information in the Projects tab. The image shows the table with sample information.

    Ensure that the project names are unique.

    Do not modify or change the headers of the first seven columns. Do not add to or delete these columns.

    2. Continue entering more information about projects. These fields are optional and can be customized.

    The image shows a section of the Projects tab, where you fill in more information.

    Headers of these columns can be changed. Extra columns can be added to the right of the Status column if desired. However, Info-Tech strongly recommends that you speak to an Info-Tech analyst before customizing.

    The Project Category, Phase, and Priority fields are entered using drop-down lists from the Org Setup tab.

    Allocate your resource project capacity to projects

    2.2.4
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 5: Allocations

    Project capacity for each resource is calculated as follows, using the data from the Resources tab:

    Project capacity = (total project capacity – absence) x (100% – non-project%)

    In the Allocations tab, project capacity is allocated in percentages with 100% representing the allocation of all available project time of a resource to a project.

    This allocation-by-percentage model has some advantages and drawbacks:

    Advantages

    • Allocating all available project capacity to project is straightforward
    • Easy for project managers to coordinate with each other (e.g. “Jon’s project time will be split 50%-50% between two projects” = enter 50% allocation to each project)

    Drawbacks

    • How many hours is represented by a percentage of someone’s capacity is unclear
    • Must check whether enough work-hours are allocated for what’s needed (e.g. “Deliverable A needs 20 hours of work from Jon in November. Is 50% of his project capacity enough?”)

    The Allocations tab has a few features to help you mitigate these disadvantages.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    For organizations with lower resource management practice maturity, start with percentages. In Portfolio Manager 2017, allocations are entered in work-hours to avoid the above drawbacks altogether, but this may require a higher practice maturity.

    Enter your resource project capacity allocations

    2.2.4
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 5: Allocations

    A line item in the Allocations tab requires three pieces of information: a project, a resource, and the percentage of project capacity for each month.

    The image shows a screenshot from the Allocations tab, with sample information filled in.

    1. Choose a project. Type, Start date, and End date are automatically displayed.

    2. Choose a resource. Team is automatically displayed.

    This image is another screenshot of the Allocations tab, showing the section with dates, with sample information filled in.

    3. Enter the resource’s allocated hours for the project in percentages.

    Built-in functions in the Allocations tab display helpful information for balancing project supply and demand

    2.2.4
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 5: Allocations

    The Allocations tab helps you preview the available project capacity of a resource, as well as the work-hours represented by each allocation line item, to mitigate the drawbacks of percentage allocations.

    In addition, overallocations (allocations for a given month add up to over 100%) are highlighted in red. These functions help resource managers balance the project supply and demand.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Allocations tab, with sample information filled in.

    To preview a resource’s project capacity in work-hours, choose a resource using a drop down. The resource’s available project capacity for each month is displayed to the right.

    Sort or filter the table using the filter button in the header row. Here, the Time table is sorted by Resource.

    The total work-hours for each line item is shown in the Hours column. Here, 25% of Bethel’s project capacity for 4 months adds up to only 16 work-hours for this project.

    A resource is overallocated when project capacity allocations add up to more than 100% for a given month. Overallocations are highlighted in red.

    Get the timeline of your project portfolio with the Gantt chart tab

    2.2.5
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 6: Gantt

    The Gantt tab is a pivot-table-driven chart that graphically represents the start and end dates of projects and their project statuses.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Gantt tab, with sample information filled in.

    Filter entries by project type above the chart.

    The current month (9-17) is highlighted.

    You can filter and sort entries by project name, sponsor, or project manager.

    In progress (under Phase column) projects show the color of their overall status.

    Projects that are neither completed nor in progress are shown in grey.

    Completed (under Phase column) projects are displayed as black.

    Get a bird’s-eye view of your available project capacity with the Resource Load tab

    2.2.6
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 7: Resource Load

    The Resource Load tab is a PivotTable showing the available project capacity for each resource.

    The image is a screenshot of the Resource Load tab, with sample information filled in.

    Change the thresholds for indicating project overallocation at the top right.

    You can filter and sort entries by resource or role.

    Values in yellow and red highlight overallocation.

    Values in green indicate resource availability.

    This table provides a bird’s-eye view of all available project capacity. Highlights for overallocated resources yield a simple heat map that indicates resourcing conflicts that need attention.

    The next two tabs contain graphical dashboards of available capacity.

    Tip: Add more resource information by dragging a column name into the Rows box in the PivotTable field view pane.

    Example: add the Team column by dragging it into the Rows box

    The image shows a screenshot demonstrating that you can add a Team column.

    Analyze your resource allocation landscape with the Capacity Slicer tab

    2.2.7
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 8: Capacity Slicer

    The Capacity Slicer tab is a set of pivot charts showing the distribution of resource allocation and how they compare against the potential capacity.

    The image shows a collection of 5 graphs and charts, showing the distribution of resource allocation, and compared against potential capacity.

    At the top left of each chart, you can turn Forecast Reporting on (true) or off (false). For Year to Date reporting, replace Forecast with YTD in the Field View pane’s Filter field.

    In the Allocated Capacity, in % chart, capacity is shown as a % of total available capacity. Exceeding 100% indicates overallocation.

    In the Realized Project Capacity, in hours chart, the vertical axis is in work-hours. This gap between allocation and capacity represents available project capacity.

    The bottom plots show how allocated project capacity is distributed. If the boxes are empty, no allocation data is available.

    Use the Team slicer to drill down on resource capacity and allocation by groups of resources

    2.2.7
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 8: Capacity Slicer

    A slicer filters the data shown in a PivotTable, a PivotChart, or other slicers. In this tab, the team slicer enables you to view resource capacity and allocation by each team or for multiple teams.

    The image shows a sample graph.

    The button next to the Team header enables multiple selection.

    The next button to the right clears the filter set by this slicer.

    All teams with capacity or allocation data are listed in the slicers.

    For example, if you select "App Dev":

    The image shows the same graph as previously shown, but this time with only App Dev selected in the left-hand column.

    The vertical axis scales automatically for filtered data.

    The capacity and allocation data for all application division teams is shown.

    Resources not in the App Dev team are filtered out.

    Drill down on individual-level resource allocation and demand with the Capacity Locator tab

    2.2.8
    Portfolio Manager Lite, Tab 9: Capacity Locator

    The Capacity Locator tab is a group of PivotCharts with multiple slicers to view available project capacity.

    For example: click on “Developer” under Role:

    The image shows the list of slicers available using the Capacity Locator tab.

    The image shows a series of graphs produced in the Capacity Locator tab.

    Primary skills of all developers are displayed on the left in the Primary Skill column. You can choose a skill to narrow down the list of resources from all developers to all developers with that skill.

    The selected resources are shown in the Resources column. Data on the right pertains to these resources.

    • The top left graph shows the average available project capacity for all selected resources.
    • The top right graph shows the sum of all available capacity from all selected resources.
    • In the lower left graph, pay attention to available total capacity, as selected resources may have significant non-project demands.
    • The lower right graph shows the number of assigned projects. Control the number of concurrent projects to reduce the need for multitasking and optimize your resource use.

    Where you see the filter button with an x, you can clear the filter imposed by this slicer.

    Check how your projects are resourced with the Project Viewer tab

    2.2.9
    Portfolio Manager Lite
    , Tab 10: Project Viewer

    The Project Viewer tab is a set of PivotCharts with multiple slicers to view how resources are allocated to different projects.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Project Viewer tab, with a bar graph at the top, filter selections at the bottom left, and four pie charts at the bottom right.

    Filtering by sponsor or project manager is useful for examining a group of projects by accountability (sponsor) or responsibility (project manager).

    The graphs show how project budgets are distributed across different categories and priorities of projects, and how resource allocations are distributed across different categories and priorities of projects.

    Report on your project portfolio status with the Project Updates tab

    2.2.10
    Portfolio Manager Lite
    , Tab 11: Project Updates

    The Project Updates tab is a PivotTable showing various fields from the Projects table to rapidly generate a portfolio-wide status report. You can add or remove fields from the Projects table using the PivotTable’s Field View pane.

    The image shows a screenshot of a large table, which is the Project Updates tab. A selection is open, showing how you can filter entries.

    Filter entries by phase. The screenshot shows an expansion of this drop down at the top left.

    Rearrange the columns by first clicking just below the header to select all cells in the column, and then dragging it to the desired position. Alternatively, arrange them in the Field View pane.

    Tools and other requirements needed to complete the resource management strategy

    2.2.11
    10 minutes

    • Recommended: If you are below a level 4 on Info-Tech’s resource management maturity scale, use Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager Lite to start.
    • Use a commercial PPM tool if you already have one in use and feel that you can accurately maintain the data in this tool.
    • Use this chart to estimate the amount of time it will take to accurately maintain the data for each reporting period.
      • Determine who will be responsible for this maintenance.
      • If there is no one currently available to maintain the data, allocate time for someone or you may even need a portfolio analyst.
      • We will confirm roles and responsibilities in phase 3.
    Maturity Level Dimensions Time needed per month
    Small (1-25 employees) Medium (25-75) Large (75-100) Enterprise (100+)
    1-2 %, team, project, monthly update, 1 month forecast 2 hours 6 hours 20 hours 50 hours
    3-4 %, person, phase, weekly update, 1 quarter forecast 4 hours 12 hours 50 hours 150 hours
    5 %, person, task, continuous update, 1 year forecast 8+ hours 20+ hours 100+ hours 400+ hours

    See also: Grow Your Own PPM Solution with Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager 2017

    Join hundreds of Info-Tech clients who are successfully growing their own PPM solution.

    If you are looking for a more robust resource management solution, or prefer to allocate staff time in hours rather than percentages, see Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager 2017.

    Similar to Portfolio Manager Lite, Portfolio Manager 2017 is a Microsoft Excel-based PPM solution that provides project visibility, forecasting, historical insight, and portfolio analytics capabilities for your PMO without a large upfront investment for a commercial solution.

    Watch Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager 2017 Video – Introduction and Demonstration.

    System Requirements

    To use all functions of Portfolio Manager 2017, you need Excel 2013 or Excel 2016 running on Windows, with the following add-ins:

    • Power Query (Excel 2013 only)
    • Power Pivot
    • Power View

    Power View is only available on select editions of Excel 2013 and 2016, but you can still use Portfolio Manager 2017 without Power View.

    If you are unsure, speak to your IT help desk or an Info-Tech analyst for help.

    For a new PMO, start with the new reality

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Law Enforcement

    Source Info-Tech Client

    Because we already have enterprise licensing for an expensive commercial tool, everyone else thinks it’s logical to start there. I think we’re going to start with something quick and dirty like Excel.” – EPMO Director, Law Enforcement Services

    Situation

    • This was an enterprise PMO, but with relatively low organizational maturity.
    • The IT department had relatively high project management maturity, but the enterprise was under-evolved at the portfolio level.
    • Other areas of the organization already had licensing and deployment of a top-tier commercial PPM tool.
    • There were no examples of a resource management practice.

    Complication

    • There was executive visibility on larger and more strategic projects.
    • There were no constraints on the use of resources for smaller projects.
    • The PMO was generally expected to provide project governance with their limited resources.
    • The organization lacked an understanding of the difference between project and portfolio management. Consequently, it was difficult to create resource management practices at the portfolio level due to a lack of resourcing.

    Resolution

    • The organization deferred the implementation of the commercial PPM tool.
    • They added high-level resource management using spreadsheets.
    • Executive focus was reoriented around overall resource capacity as the principle constraint for project approvals.
    • They introduced deeper levels of planning granularity over time.
    • When the planning granularity gets down to the task level, they move toward the commercial solution.

    Step 2.3: Build process steps to ensure data accuracy and sustainability

    PHASE 1

    1.1 Set a course of action

    1.2 Estimate supply and demand

    PHASE 2

    2.1 Select resource management dimensions

    2.2 Select resource management tools

    2.3 Build process steps

    PHASE 3

    3.1 Pilot your process for viability

    3.2 Plan stakeholder engagement

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • Draft a high-level resource management workflow
    • Build on the workflow to determine how data will be collected at each step, and who will support the process
    • Document your provisional resource management process
    This step involves the following participants:
    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Functional / Resource Managers
    • Project Managers
    Outcomes of this step
    • A high-level resource management workflow, customized from Info-Tech’s sample workflow
    • Process for collecting resource supply data for each reporting period
    • Process for capturing the project demand within each reporting period
    • Process for identifying and documenting resource constraints and issues for each reporting period
    • Standard protocol for resolving resource issues within each reporting period
    • Process for finalizing and communicating resource allocations for the forecast window
    • A customized Resource Management Playbook, documenting the standard operating procedure for the processes

    Make sustainability the goal of your resource management practices

    A resource management process is doing more harm than good if it doesn’t facilitate the flow of accurate and usable data week after week, month after month, year after year.

    When resource management strategies fail, it can typically be tied back to the same culprit: unrealistic expectations from the outset.

    If a resource management process strives for a level of data precision that staff cannot juggle day to day, over the long run, then things will eventually fall apart as staff and decision makers alike lose faith in the data and the relevancy of the process.

    Two things can be done to help avoid this fate:

    1. Strive for accuracy over precision. If your department’s process maturity is low, and staff are ping-ponged from task to task, fire to fire, throughout any given day, then striving for precise data is ill advised. Keep your granularity of allocation more high level, and strive for data that is “maintainably” accurate rather than “unmaintainably” precise.
    2. Keep the process simple. Use the advice in this step to develop a sustainable process, one that is easy to follow with clearly defined responsibilities and accountabilities at each step.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It's not about what you put together as a one-time snapshot. It's about what you can and will maintain every week, even during a crisis. When you stop maintaining resource management data, it’s nearly impossible to catch up and you’re usually forced to start fresh.

    Maintain reliable resourcing data with an easy-to-follow, repeatable process

    Info-Tech recommends following a simple five-step process for resource management.

    1. Collect resource supply data

    • Resources
    • Resource Managers

    2. Collect project demand data

    • Resource Managers
    • Project Managers
    • PMO

    3. Identify sources of supply/demand imbalance

    • PMO

    4. Resolve conflicts and balance project and non-project allocations

    • Resource Managers
    • Project Managers
    • PMO
    • Steering Committee, CIO, other executives

    5. Approve allocations for forecast window

    • PMO
    • Steering Committee, CIO, other executives

    This is a sample workflow with sample roles and responsibilities. This step will help you customize the appropriate steps for your department.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This process aims to control the resource supply to meet the demand – project and non-project alike. Coordinate this process with other portfolio management processes, ensuring that up-to-date resource data is available for project approval, portfolio reporting, closure, etc.

    Draft your own high-level resource management workflow

    2.3.1
    60 to 90 minutes

    Participants

    • Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Input

    • Process data requirements

    Output

    • High-level description of your target-state process

    Materials

    • Whiteboard or recipe cards

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out, at a high-level, your required and desired process steps.

    While Info-Tech recommends a simple five-step process (see previous slide), you may need to flesh out your process into additional steps, depending upon the granularity of your seven dimensions and the complexity of your resource management tool. A table-top planning exercise can be helpful to ensure the right process steps are covered.

    1. On a whiteboard or using white 4x6 recipe cards, write the unique steps of a resource management process. Use the process example at the bottom of this slide as a guide.
    2. Use a green marker or green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from each step.
    3. Use a red marker or red cards to address potential issues, problems, or risks that you can foresee at each step.

    For the purposes of this activity, avoid getting into too much detail by keeping to your focus on the high-level data points that will be required to keep supply and demand balanced on an ongoing basis.

    "[I]t’s important not to get too granular with your time tracking. While it might be great to get lots of insight into how your team is performing, being too detailed can eat into your team’s productive work time. A good rule of thumb to work by is if your employees’ timesheets include time spent time tracking, then you’ve gone too granular."

    Nicolas Jacobeus

    Use Info-Tech’s Resource Management Playbook to help evolve your high-level steps into a repeatable practice

    Once you’ve determined a high-level workflow, you’ll need to flesh out the organizational details for how data will be collected at each step and who will support the process.

    Use Info-Tech’s Resource Management Playbook to help determine and communicate the “who, what, when, where, why, and how” of each of your high-level process steps.

    The playbook template is intended to function as your resource management standard operating procedure. Customize Section 3 of the template to record the specific organizational details of how data will be collected at each process step, and the actions and decisions the data collection process will necessitate.

    • Activities 2.3.2-2.3.6 in this step will help you customize the process steps in Info-Tech’s five-step resource management model and record these in the template. If you developed a customized process in activity 2.3.1, you will need to add to/take away from the activity slides and customize the template accordingly.
    • Lean on the seven dimensions of resource management that you developed in step 2.1 to determine the cadence and frequency of data collection. For instance, if your update frequency is monthly, you will need to ensure you collect your supply-demand data prior to that, giving yourself enough time to analyze it and reconcile imbalances with stakeholders before refreshing your monthly reporting data.

    Download Info-Tech’s Resource Management Playbook

    How the next five activities will help you develop your playbook

    2.3 Resource Management Playbook

    Each of the slides for activities 2.3.2-2.3.6 are comprised of a task-at-a glance box as well as “important decisions to document” for each step.

    Work as a group to complete the task-at-a-glance boxes for each step. Use the “important decisions to document” notes to help brainstorm the “how” for each step. These details should be recorded below the task-at-a-glance boxes in the playbook – see point 6 in the legend below.

    Screenshot of Section 3 of the RM Playbook.

    The image shows a screenshot of Section 3 of the RM Playbook. A legend is included below.

    Screenshot Legend:

    1. Review your existing steps, tools, and templates used for this task. Alternatively, review the example provided in the RM Playbook.
    2. Designate the responsible party/parties for this process. Who carries out the task?
    3. Document the inputs and outputs for the task: artifacts, consulted and informed parties.
    4. If applicable, document the tools and templates used for the task.
    5. Designate the accountable party for this task. Only a single party can be accountable.
    6. Describe the “how” of the task below the Task-at-a-Glance table.

    Step one: determine the logistics for collecting resource supply data for each reporting period

    2.3.2
    20 minutes

    Step one in your resource management process should be ensuring a perpetually current view into your resource supply.

    Resource supply in this context should be understood as the time, per your scope of allocation (i.e. individual, team, skill, etc.) that is leftover or available once non-project demands have been taken out of the equation. In short, the goal of this process step is to determine the non-project demands for the forecast period.

    The important decisions to document for this step include:

    1. What data will be collected and from whom? For example, functional managers to update resource potential capacity and non-project resource allocations.
    2. How often will data be collected and when? For example, data will be collected third Monday of the month, three days before our monthly update frequency.
    3. How will the data be collected? For example, tool admin to send out data to update on third Monday; resource managers update the data and email back to tool admin.

    Document your process for determining resource supply in Section 3.1 of Info-Tech’s Resource Management Playbook.

    Task-at-a-glance:

    Inputs Artifacts i.e. historical usage data
    Consulted i.e. project resources
    Tools & Templates i.e. time tracking template
    Outputs Artifacts i.e. updated template
    Informed i.e. portfolio analyst
    Timing i.e. every second Monday
    Responsible i.e. functional managers
    Accountable i.e. IT directors

    Step two: map out how project demand will be captured within each reporting period

    2.3.3
    20 minutes

    Step two in your resource management process will be to determine the full extent of project demand for your forecast period.

    Project demand in this context can entail both in-flight projects as well as new project plans or new project requests that are proposing to consume capacity during the forecast period. In short, the goal of this process step is to determine all of the project demands for the forecast period.

    The important decisions to document for this step include:

    1. What data will be collected and from whom? For example, project managers to update project allocations for in-flight projects, and PMO will provide proposed allocations for new project requests.
    2. How often will data be collected and when? For example, data will be collected third Tuesday of the month, two days before our monthly update frequency.
    3. How will the data be collected? For example, tool admin to send out data to update on third Tuesday; project managers update the data and email back to tool admin.

    Document your process for determining project demand in Section 3.2 of Info-Tech’s Resource Management Playbook.

    Task-at-a-glance

    Inputs Artifacts i.e. historical usage data
    Consulted i.e. project resources
    Tools & Templates i.e. project demand template
    Outputs Artifacts i.e. updated demand table
    Informed i.e. portfolio analyst
    Timing i.e. every second Monday
    Responsible i.e. project managers
    Accountable i.e. PMO director

    Step three: record how resource constraints and issues for each reporting period will be identified and documented

    2.3.4
    20 minutes

    Step three in your resource management process will be to analyze your resource supply and project demand data to identify points of conflict.

    Once the supply-demand data has been compiled, it will need to be analyzed for points of imbalance and conflict. The goal of this process step is to analyze the raw data and to make it consumable by other stakeholders in preparation for a reconciliation or rebalancing process.

    The important decisions to document for this step include:

    1. How will the data be checked for inaccuracies? For example, tool admin to enter and QA data; reach out by the following Wednesday at noon with inconsistencies; managers to respond no later than next day by noon.
    2. What reports will employed? For example, a refreshed demand spreadsheet will be made available.
    3. What is an acceptable range for over- and under-allocations? For example, the acceptable tolerance for allocation is 15%; that is, report only those resources that are less than 85% allocated, or more than 115% allocated.

    Document your process for identifying resource constraints and issues in Section 3.3 of Info-Tech’s Resource Management Playbook.

    Task-at-a-glance

    Inputs Artifacts i.e. supply/demand data
    Consulted i.e. no one
    Tools & Templates i.e. Portfolio Manager Lite
    Outputs Artifacts i.e. list of issues
    Informed i.e. no one
    Timing i.e. every second Tuesday
    Responsible i.e. portfolio analyst
    Accountable i.e. PMO director

    Step four: establish a standard protocol for resolving resource issues within each reporting period

    2.3.5
    20 minutes

    Step four in your resource management process should be to finalize your capacity management book of record for the reporting period and prepare recommendations for resolving conflicts and issues.

    The reconciliation process will likely take place at a meeting amongst the management of the PMO and representatives from the various functional groups within the department. The goal of this step is to get the right roles and individuals to agree upon proposed reconciliations and to sign-off on resource allocations.

    The important decisions to document for this step include:

    1. What reports will be distributed and in what form? For example, refreshed spreadsheet will be available on the PMO SharePoint site.
    2. When will the reports be generated and for whom? For example, fourth Tuesday of the month, end of day – accessible for all managers.
    3. Who has input into how conflicts should be resolved? For example, conflicts will be resolved at monthly resource management meeting. All meeting participants have input, but the PMO director will have ultimate decision-making authority.

    Document your process for resolving resource constraints and issues in Section 3.4 of Info-Tech’s Resource Management Playbook.

    Inputs Artifacts i.e. meeting agenda
    Consulted i.e. meeting participants
    Tools & Templates i.e. capacity reports
    Outputs Artifacts i.e. minutes and resolutions
    Informed i.e. steering committee
    Timing i.e. every second Thursday
    Responsible i.e. PMO director
    Accountable i.e. CIO

    Step five: record how resource allocations will be finalized and communicated for the forecast window

    2.3.6
    20 minutes

    The final step in your resource management process is to clarify how resource allocations will be documented in your resource management solution and reported to the department.

    Once a plan to rebalance supply and demand for the reporting period has been agreed on, you will need to ensure that the appropriate data is updated in your resource management book of record, and that allocation decisions are communicated to the appropriate stakeholders.

    The important decisions to document for this step include:

    1. Who has ultimate authority for allocation decisions? For example, the CIO has final authority when conflicts need to be escalated and must approve all allocations for the forecast period.
    2. Who will update the book of record and when? For example, the tool admin will update the data before the end of the day following the resource management meeting.
    3. Who needs to be informed and of what? For example, resource plans will be updated in SharePoint for resources and managers to review.

    Document your process for approving and finalizing allocation in Section 3.5 of Info-Tech’s Resource Management Playbook.

    Task-at-a-glance

    Inputs Artifacts i.e. minutes and resolutions
    Consulted i.e. CIO, IT directors
    Tools & Templates i.e. Portfolio Manager Lite
    Outputs Artifacts i.e. updated availability table
    Informed i.e. steering committee
    Timing i.e. every second Friday
    Responsible i.e. portfolio analyst
    Accountable i.e. PMO director

    Finalize your provisional resource management process in the Playbook Template

    2.3 Resource Management Playbook

    Use Info-Tech’s Resource Management Playbook to solidify your processes in a formalized operating plan.

    Throughout this phase, we have been customizing sections 1, 2, and 3 of the Resource Management Playbook.

    Before we move to pilot and implement your resource management strategy in the next phase of this blueprint, ensure that sections 1-3 of your playbook have been drafted and are ready to be communicated and shared with stakeholders.

    • Avoid getting too granular in your process requirements. Keep it to high-level data requirements. Imposing too much detail in your playbook is a recipe for failure.
    • The playbook should remain provisional throughout your pilot phase. Aspects of your process will likely need to be changed or tweaked as they are met with some day-to-day realities. As with any “living document,” it can be helpful to explicitly assign responsibilities for updating the playbook over the long term to ensure it stays relevant.

    "People are spending far more time creating these elaborate [time-tracking] systems than it would have taken just to do the task. You’re constantly on your app refiguring, recalculating, re-categorizing... A better strategy would be [returning] to the core principles of good time management…Block out your calendar for the non-negotiable things. [Or] have an organized prioritized task list." – Laura Stack (quoted in Zawacki)

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1 Wireframe a resource management strategy using Info-Tech’s seven dimensions of resource management

    Action the decision points across Info-Tech’s seven dimensions to ensure your resource management process is guided by realistic data and process goals.

    2.3 Draft a high-level resource management workflow and elaborate it into a repeatable practice

    Customize Info-Tech’s five-step resource management process model. Then, document how the process will operate by customizing the Resource Management Playbook.

    Phase 3

    Implement Sustainable Resource Management Practices

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Implement Sustainable Resource Management Practices

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4-12 weeks

    Step 3.1: Pilot your resource management process

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review your resource management dimensions and tools
    • Review your provisional resource management processes
    • Discuss your ideas for a pilot

    Then complete these activities…

    • Select receptive project/functional managers to work with
    • Define the scope of your pilot and determine logistics
    • Finalize resource management roles and responsibilities

    With these tools & templates:

    • Process Pilot Plan Template
    • Resource Management Playbook
    • Project Portfolio Analyst Job Description
    Step 3.2: Plan to engage your stakeholders

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Results of your pilot, team feedback, and lessons learned
    • Your stakeholder landscape

    Then complete these activities…

    • Brainstorm and plan for potential resistance to change, objections, and fatigue from stakeholders
    • Plan for next steps

    With these tools & templates:

    • Resource Management Playbook

    Phase 3 Results & Insights:

    Engagement paves the way for smoother adoption. An engagement approach (rather than simply communication) turns stakeholders into advocates who can help boost your message, sustain the change, and realize benefits without constant intervention or process command-and-control.

    Step 3.1: Pilot your resource management process to assess viability

    PHASE 1

    1.1 Set a course of action

    1.2 Estimate supply and demand

    PHASE 2

    2.1 Select resource management dimensions

    2.2 Select resource management tools

    2.3 Build process steps

    PHASE 3

    3.1 Pilot your process for viability

    3.2 Plan stakeholder engagement

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Select receptive project and functional managers to work with during your pilot
    • Define the scope of your pilot and determine logistics
    • Plan to obtain feedback, document lessons learned, and create an action plan for any changes
    • Finalize resource management roles and responsibilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • A pilot team
    • A process pilot plan that defines the scope, logistics, and process for retrospection
    • Roles, responsibilities, and accountabilities for resource management
    • Project Portfolio Analyst job description template

    Pilot your new processes to test feasibility and address issues before a full deployment

    Adopting the right set of practices requires a significant degree of change that necessitates buy-in from varied stakeholders throughout IT and the business.

    Rome wasn’t built in a day. Similarly, your visibility into resource usage and availability won’t happen overnight.

    Resist the urge to deploy a big-bang rollout of your research management practices. This approach is ill advised for two main reasons:

    • It will put more of a strain on the implementation team in the near term, with a larger pool of end users to train and collect data from.
    • Putting untested practices in a department-wide spotlight could lead to mass confusion in the near-term and color the new processes in a negative light, leading to a loss of stakeholder trust and engagement right out of the gate.

    Start with a pilot phase. Identify receptive project managers and functional managers to work with, and leverage their insights to help iron out the kinks in your process before unveiling your practices to IT and business users at large.

    This step will help you:

    • Plan and execute a pilot of the processes we developed in Phase 2.
    • Incorporate the lessons learned from that pilot to strengthen your playbook and ease the communication process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Engagement paves the way for smoother adoption. An engagement approach (rather than simply communication) turns stakeholders into advocates who can help boost your message, sustain the change, and realize benefits without constant intervention or process command-and-control.

    Plan your pilot like you would any project to ensure it’s well defined and its goals are clearly articulated

    Use Info-Tech’s Process Pilot Plan Template to help define the scope of your pilot and set appropriate goals for the test run of your new processes.

    A process pilot is a limited scope of an implementation (constrained by time and resources involved) to test the viability and effectiveness of the process as it has been designed.

    • Investing time and energy into a pilot phase can help to lower implementation risk, enhance the details and steps within a process, and improve stakeholder relations prior to a full scale rollout.
    • More than a dry run, however, a pilot should be approached strategically and planned out to limit the scope of it and achieve specific outcomes.
    • Leverage a planning document to ensure your process pilot is grounded in a common set of definitions, that the pilot is delivering value and insight, and that ultimately the pilot can serve as a starting point for a full-scale process implementation.

    "The advantages to a pilot are several. First, risk is constrained. Pilots are closely monitored so if a problem does occur, it can be fixed immediately. Second, the people working in the pilot can become trainers as you roll the process out to the rest of the organization. Third, the pilot is another opportunity for skeptics to visit the pilot process and learn from those working in it. There’s nothing like seeing a new process working for people to change their minds." – Daniel Madison

    Download Info-Tech’s Process Pilot Plan Template

    Select receptive project and functional managers to work with during your pilot

    3.1.1
    20 to 60 minutes

    Input

    • Project management staff and functional managers

    Output

    • Pilot project teams

    Materials

    • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • Process Pilot Plan Template

    Participants

    • Process owner (PMO director or portfolio owner)
    • CIO

    Info-Tech recommends selecting project managers and functional managers who are aware of your role and some of the supply-demand challenges to assist in the implementation process.

    1. If receptive project and functional managers are known, schedule a 15-minute meeting with them to inquire if they would be willing to be part of the pilot process.
    2. If receptive project managers are not known, use Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Engagement Workbook to conduct a formal selection process.
      1. Enter a list of potential pilot project managers in tab 3.
      2. Rate project managers in terms of influence, pilot interest, and potential deployment contribution within tab 4.
      3. Review tab 5 in the workbook. Receptive project managers will appear in the top quadrants. Ideal project managers for the pilot are located in the top right quadrant of the graph.

    Document the project and functional managers involved in your pilot in Section 3 of Info-Tech’s Process Pilot Plan Template.

    Define the scope of your pilot and determine logistics

    Input

    • Sections 1 through 4 of the Process Pilot Plan Template

    Output

    • A process pilot plan

    Materials

    • Process Pilot Plan Template

    Participants

    • Process Owner (PMO Director or Portfolio Owner)
    • CIO
    • Project and Resource Managers

    Use Info-Tech’s Process Pilot Plan Template to design the details of your pilot.

    Investing time into planning your pilot phase strategically will ensure a clear scope, better communications for those piloting the processes, and overall, better, more actionable results during the pilot phase. The Process Pilot Plan Template is broken into five sections to assist in these goals:

      • Pilot Overview and Scope
      • Success and Risk Factors
      • Stakeholders Involved and Communications Plan
      • Pilot Retrospective and Feedback Protocol
      • Lessons Learned
    • The duration of your pilot should go at least one allocation period, depending on your frequency of updates, e.g. one week or month.
    • Estimates of time commitments should be captured for each stakeholder. During the retrospective at the end of the pilot, you should capture actuals to help determine the time-cost of the process itself and measure its sustainability.
    • Once the template is completed, schedule time to share and communicate it with the pilot team and executive sponsors of the process.

    While you should invest time in this planning document, continue to lean on the Resource Management Playbook as well as a process guide throughout the pilot phase.

    Execute your pilot and prepare to make process revisions before the full rollout

    Hit play! Begin the process pilot and get familiar with the work routine and resource management solution.

    Some things to keep in mind during the pilot include:

    • Depending on the solution you’re using, you will likely need to spend one day or less to populate the tool. During the pilot, measure the time and effort required to manage the data within the tool. Compare with the original estimate from activity 2.2.2. Determine whether time and effort required are viable on an ongoing basis (i.e. can you do it every week or month) and have value.
    • Meet with the pilot team and other stakeholders regularly during the pilot – at least weekly. Allow the team (and yourself) to speak honestly and openly about what isn’t working. The pilot is your chance to make things better.
    • Keep notes about what will need to change in the RM Playbook. For major changes, you may have to tweak the process during the pilot itself. Update the process documents as needed and communicate the changes and why they’re being made. If required, update the scope of the pilot in the Process Pilot Plan Template.

    Obtain feedback from the pilot group to improve your processes before a wider rollout

    3.1.3
    30 minutes

    Input

    • What’s working and what isn’t in the process

    Output

    • Ideas to improve process

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes
    • Process Pilot Plan Template

    Participants

    • Process Owner (PMO Director or Portfolio Owner)
    • Pilot Team

    Pilot projects allow you to validate your assumptions and leverage lessons learned. During the planning of the pilot, you should have scheduled a retrospective meeting with the pilot team to formally assess strengths and weaknesses in the process you have drafted.

    • Schedule the retrospective shortly after the pilot is completed. Info-Tech recommends a stop/start/continue activity with pilot participants to obtain and capture feedback.
    • Have members of the meeting record any processes/activities on sticky notes that should:
      • Stop: because they are ineffective or not useful
      • Start: because they would be useful for the tool and have not been incorporated into current processes
      • Continue: because they are useful and positively contribute to intended process outcomes

    An example of how to structure a stop/start/continue activity on a whiteboard using sticky notes.

    The image shows three black squares, each with three brightly coloured sticky notes in it. The three squares are labelled: Stop; Start; Continue.

    See below for additional instructions

    Document lessons learned and create an action plan for any changes to the resource management processes

    3.1.4
    30 minutes

    As a group, discuss everyone’s responses and organize according to top priority (mark with a 1) and lower priority/next steps (mark with a 2). At this point, you can also remove any sticky notes that are repetitive or no longer relevant.

    Once you have organized based on priority, be sure to come to a consensus with the group regarding which actions to take. For example, if the group agrees that they should “stop holding meetings weekly,” come to a consensus regarding how often meetings will be held, i.e. monthly.

    Create an action plan for the top priority items that require changes (the stops and starts). Record in this slide or your preferred medium. Be sure to include who is responsible for the action and the date that it will be implemented.

    Priority Action Required Who is Responsible Implementation Date
    Stop: Holding meetings weekly Hold meetings monthly Jane Doe, PMO Next Meeting: November 1, 2017
    Start: Discussing backlog during meetings Ensure that backlog data is up to date for discussion on date of next meeting John Doe, Portfolio Manager November 1, 2017

    Document the outcomes of the start/stop/continue exercise and your action plan in Section 6 of Info-Tech’s Process Pilot Plan Template.

    Review actions that can be taken based on the results of your pilot

    Situation Action Next Steps
    The dimensions that we chose for our strategy have proven to be too difficult to accurately maintain. The dimensions that we chose for our strategy have proven to be too difficult to accurately maintain. Reassess the dimensions that you chose for your strategy. Make sure that you are not overcommitting yourself based on your maturity level. You can always go back and adjust for a higher level of resource management maturity once you have mastered your current level. For example, if you chose “weekly” as your update frequency and this has proven to be too much to maintain, try updating monthly for a few months. Once you have mastered this update frequency, it will be easier to adjust to a weekly update process.
    We were able to maintain the data for our pilot based on the dimensions that we chose. However, allocating projects based on realized capacity did not alleviate any of our resourcing issues and resources still seem to be working on more projects than they can handle. Determine other factors at the organization that would help to maintain the data and work toward reclaiming capacity. Continue working with the dimensions that you chose and maintain the accuracy of this data. The next step is to identify other factors that are contributing to your resource allocation problems and begin reclaiming capacity. Continue forward to the resource management roadmap section and work on changing organizational structures and worker behavior to maximize capacity for project work.
    We were able to easily and accurately maintain the data, which led to positive results and improvement in resource allocation issues. If your strategy is easily maintained, identify factors that will help your organization reclaim capacity. Continue to maintain this data, and eventually work toward maintaining it at a more precise level. For example, if you are currently using an update frequency of “monthly” and succeeding, think about moving toward a “weekly” frequency within a few months. Once you feel confident that you can maintain project and resource data, continue on to the roadmap section to discover ways to reclaim resource capacity through organizational and behavioral change.

    Finalize resource management roles and responsibilities

    3.1.5
    15 to 30 minutes

    Input

    • Tasks for resource management
    • Stakeholder involved

    Output

    • Roles, responsibilities, and accountabilities for resource management

    Materials

    • Resource Management Playbook

    Participants

    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Functional Managers
    • Project Managers

    Perform a RACI exercise to help standardize terminology around roles and responsibilities and to ensure that expectations are consistent across stakeholders and teams.

    • A RACI will help create a clear understanding of the tasks and expectations for each stakeholder at each process step, assigning responsibilities and accountability for resource management outcomes.

    Responsible

    Accountable

    Consulted

    Informed

    Roles CIO PMO Portfolio Analyst Project Manager Functional Manager
    Collect supply data I A R I C
    Collect demand data I A R C I
    Identify conflicts I C/A R C C
    Resolve conflicts C A/R I R R
    Approve allocations A R I R I

    Document your roles and responsibilities in Section 2 of Info-Tech’s Resource Management Playbook.

    Use Info-Tech’s Portfolio Analyst job description to help fill any staffing needs around data maintenance

    3.1 Project Portfolio Analyst/PMO Analyst Job Description

    You will need to determine responsibilities and accountabilities for portfolio management functions within your team.

    If you do not have a clearly identifiable portfolio manager at this time, you will need to clarify who will wear which hats in terms of facilitating intake and prioritization, high-level capacity awareness, and portfolio reporting.

    • Use Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Analyst job description template to help clarify some of the required responsibilities to support your PPM strategy.
      • If you need to bring in an additional staff member to help support the strategy, you can customize the job description template to help advertise the position. Simply edit the text in grey within the template.
    • If you have other PPM tasks that you need to define responsibilities for, you can use the RASCI chart on the final tab of the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Analyst Job Description Template

    Finalize the Resource Management Playbook and prepare to communicate your processes

    Once you’ve completed the pilot process and made the necessary tweaks, you should finalize your Resource Management Playbook and prepare to communicate it.

    Revisit your RM Playbook from step 2.3 and ensure it has been updated to reflect the process changes that were identified in activity 3.1.4.

    • If during the pilot process the data was too difficult or time consuming to maintain, revisit the dimensions you have chosen and select dimensions that are easier to accurately maintain. Tweak your process steps in the playbook accordingly.
    • In the long term, if you are not observing any capacity being reclaimed, revisit the roadmap that we’ll prepare in step 3.2 and address some of these inhibitors to organizational change.
    • In the next step, we will also be repurposing some of the content from the playbook, as well as from previous activities, to include them in your presentation to stakeholders, using Info-Tech’s Resource Management Communications Template.

    Download Info-Tech’s Resource Management Playbook

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Make your process standardization comprehensive. The RM Playbook should serve as your resource management standard operating procedure. In addition to providing a walk-through of the process, an SOP also clarifies project governance by clearly defining roles and responsibilities.

    Step 3.2: Plan to engage your stakeholders with your playbook

    PHASE 1

    1.1 Set a course of action

    1.2 Estimate supply and demand

    PHASE 2

    2.1 Select resource management dimensions

    2.2 Select resource management tools

    2.3 Build process steps

    PHASE 3

    3.1 Pilot your process for viability

    3.2 Plan stakeholder engagement

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Brainstorm and plan for potential resistance to change, objections, and fatigue from stakeholders
    • Plan for next steps in reclaiming project capacity
    • Plan for next steps in overcoming supply-demand reconciliation challenges

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • PMO Director / Portfolio Manager
    • Pilot Team from Step 3.1

    Outcomes of this step

    • Plan for communicating responses and objections from stakeholders and staff
    • Plan to manage structural/enabling factors that influence success of the resource management strategy
    • Description of next steps in reclaiming project capacity and overcoming supply-demand reconciliation challenges
    • Final draft of the customized Resource Management Playbook

    Develop a resource management roadmap to communicate and reinforce the strategy

    A roadmap will help anticipate, plan, and address barriers and opportunities that influence the success of the resource management strategy.

    This step of the project will ensure the new strategy is adopted and applied with maximum success by helping you manage challenges and opportunities across three dimensions:

    1. Executive Stakeholder Factors

    For example, resistance to adopting new assumptions about ratio of project versus non-project work.

    2. Workforce/Team Factors

    For example, resistance to moving from individual- to team-based allocations.

    3. Structural Factors

    For example, ensuring priorities are stable within the chosen resource planning horizon.

    See Info-Tech’s Drive Organizational Change from the PMOfor comprehensive tools and guidance on achieving organizational buy-in for your new resource management practices.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Communicate, communicate, communicate. Staff are 34% more likely to adapt to change quickly during the implementation and adoption phases when they are provided with a timeline of impending changes specific to their department. (McLean & Company)

    Anticipate a wide range of responses toward your new processes

    While your mandate may be backed by an executive sponsor, you will need to influence stakeholders from throughout the organization in order to succeed. Indeed, as EPMO leader, success will depend upon your ability to confirm and reaffirm commitments on soft or informal grounds. Prepare an engagement strategy that anticipates a wide range of responses.

    Enthusiasts Fence-sitters Skeptics Saboteurs
    What they look like: Put all their energy into learning new skills and behaviors. Start to use new skills and behaviors at a sluggish pace. Look for alternate ways of implementing the change. Refuse to learn anything new or try new behaviors.
    How they contribute: Lead the rest of the group. Provide an undercurrent of movement from old behaviors to new. Challenge decisions and raise risk points with managers. May raise valid points about the process that should be fixed.
    How to manage them: Give them space to learn and lead others. Keep them moving forward by testing their progress. Listen to them, but don’t give in to their demands. Keep communicating with them until you convert them.
    How to leverage them: Have them lead discussions and training sessions. Use them as an example to forecast the state once the change is adopted. Test new processes by having them try to poke holes in them. If you can convert them, they will lead the Skeptics and Fence-sitters.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Hone your stakeholder engagement strategy. Most people affected by an IT-enabled change tend to be fence-sitters. Small minorities will be enthusiasts, saboteurs, and skeptics. Your communication strategy should focus on engaging the skeptics, saboteurs, and enthusiasts. Fence-sitters will follow.

    Define plans to deal with resistance to change, objections, and fatigue

    Be prepared to confront skeptics and saboteurs when communicating the change.

    1. Use the templates on the following slide to:
      1. Brainstorm possible objections from stakeholders and staff. Prioritize objections that are likely to occur.
      2. Develop responses to objections.
    2. Develop a document and plan for proactively communicating responses and objections to show people that you understand their point of view.
      1. Revise the communications messaging and plan to include proactive objection handling.
    3. Discuss the likelihood and impact of “saboteurs” who aren’t convinced or affected by change management efforts.
      1. Explore contingency plans for dealing with difficult saboteurs. These individuals can negate the progress of the rest of the team by continuing to resist the process and spreading toxic energy. If necessary, be ruthless with these individuals. Let them know that the rest of the group is moving on without them, and if they can’t or won’t adopt the new standards, then they can leave.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Communicate well and engage often. Agility and continuous improvement are good, but can degenerate into volatility if change isn’t managed properly. People will perceive change to be volatile if their expectations aren’t managed through communications and engagement planning.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The individuals best positioned to provide insight and influence change positively are also best positioned to create resistance.

    These people should be engaged early and often in the implementation process – not just to make them feel included or part of the change, but also because their insight could very likely identify risks, barriers, and opportunities that need to be addressed.

    Develop a plan to manage stakeholder resistance to the new resource management strategy

    3.2.1
    30 minutes

    Brainstorm potential implications and objections that executive stakeholders might raise about your new processes.

    Dimension Decision Potential Impact, Implications, and Objections Possible Responses and Actions
    i.e. Default Project Ratio 50% “This can’t be right...” “We conducted a thorough time audit to establish this ratio.”
    “We need to spend more time on project work.” “Realistic estimates will help us control new project intake, which will help us optimize time allocated to projects.”
    i.e. Frequency Monthly “This data isn’t detailed enough, we need to know what people are working on right now.” “Maintaining an update frequency of weekly would require approximately [X] extra hours of PMO effort. We can work toward weekly as we mature.”
    i.e. Scope Person “That is a lot of people to keep track of.” “Managing individuals is still the job of the project manager; we are responsible for allocating individuals to projects.”
    i.e. Granularity of Work Assignment Project “We need to know exactly what tasks are being worked on and what the progress is.” “Assigning at task level is very difficult to accurately maintain. Once we have mastered a project-level granularity we can move toward task level.”
    i.e. Forecast Horizon One month “We need to know what each resource is working on next year.” “With a monthly forecast, our estimates are dependable. If we forecast a year in advance, this estimate will not be accurate.”

    Document the outcomes of this activity on slide 26 of Info-Tech’s Resource Management Communications Template.

    Develop a plan to manage staff/team resistance to the new resource management strategy

    3.2.2
    30 minutes

    Brainstorm potential implications and objections that individual staff and members of project teams might raise about your new processes.

    Dimension Decision Potential Impact, Implications, and Objections Possible Responses and Actions
    i.e. Default Project Ratio 50% “There’s too much support work.” “We conducted a thorough time audit to establish this ratio. Realistic estimates will help us control new project intake, which will help us optimize your project time.”
    i.e. Frequency Monthly “I don’t have time to give you updates on project progress.” “This update frequency requires only [X] amount of time from you per week/month.”
    i.e. Granularity Project “I need more clarity on what I’m working on.” “Team members and project managers are in the best position to define and assign (or self-select) individual tasks.”
    i.e. Forecast Horizon One month “I need to know what my workload will be further in advance.” “You will still have a high-level understanding of what you will be working on in the future, but projects will only be officially forecasted one month in advance.”
    i.e. Allocation Cadence Monthly “We need a more frequent cadence.” “We can work toward weekly cadence as we mature.”

    Document the outcomes of this activity on slide 27 of Info-Tech’s Resource Management Communications Template.

    Develop a plan to manage structural/enabling factors that influence success of the resource management strategy

    3.2.3
    30 minutes

    Brainstorm a plan to manage other risks and challenges to implementing your processes.

    Dimension Decision Potential Impact, Implications, and Objections Possible Responses and Actions
    i.e. Default Project Ratio 50% “We have approved too many projects to allocate so little time to project work.” Nothing has changed – this was always the amount of time that would actually go toward projects. If you are worried about a backlog, stop approving projects until you have completed the current workload.
    i.e. Frequency Monthly “Status reports aren’t reliably accurate and up to date more than quarterly.” Enforce strict requirements to provide monthly status updates for 1-3 key KPIs.
    i.e. Scope Person “How can we keep track of what each individual is working on?” Establish a simple, easy reporting mechanism so that resources are reporting their own progress.
    i.e. Granularity Project “How will we know the status of a project without knowing what tasks are completed?” It is in the domain of the project manager to know what tasks have been completed and to report overall project progress.
    i.e. Forecast Horizon One Month “It will be difficult to plan for resource needs in advance.” Planning a month in advance allows you to address conflicts or issues before they are urgent.

    Document the outcomes of this activity on slide 28 of Info-Tech’s Resource Management Communications Template.

    Finalize your communications plan and prepare to present the new processes to the organization

    Use Info-Tech’s Resource Management Communications Template to record the challenges your resource management strategy is addressing and how it is addressing them.

    Highlight organizational factors that necessitated the change.

    • Stakeholders and staff understandably tend to dislike change for the sake of change. Use Info-Tech’s Resource Management Communications Template to document the pain points that your process change is addressing and explain the intended benefits for all who will be subject to the new procedures.

    Determine goals and benefits for implementation success.

    • Provide metrics by which the implementation will be deemed a success. Providing this horizon will provide some structure for stakeholders and hopefully help to encourage process discipline.

    Clearly indicate what is required of people to adopt new processes.

    • Document your Resource Management Playbook. Be sure to include specific roles and responsibilities so there is no doubt regarding who is accountable for what.

    Download Info-Tech’s Resource Management Communications Template

    "You need to be able to communicate effectively with major stakeholders – you really need their buy-in. You need to demonstrate credibility with your audience in the way you communicate and show how portfolio [management] is a structured decision-making process." – Dr. Shan Rajegopal (quoted in Akass, “What Makes a Successful Portfolio Manager”)

    Review tactics for keeping your processes on track

    Once the strategy is adopted, the next step is to be prepared to address challenges as they come up. Review the tactics in the table below for assistance.

    Challenge Resolution Next Step
    Workers are distracted because they are working on too many projects at once; their attention is split and they are unproductive. Workers are distracted because they are working on too many projects at once; their attention is split and they are unproductive. Review portfolio practices for ways to limit work in progress (WIP).
    Employees are telling project managers what they want to hear and not giving honest estimates about the way their time is spent. Ensure that employees understand the value of honest time tracking. If you’re allocating your hours to the wrong projects, it is your projects that suffer. If you are overallocated, be honest and share this with management. Display employee time-tracking reports on a public board so that everyone will see where their time is spent. If they are struggling to complete projects by their deadlines they must be able to demonstrate the other work that is taking up their time.
    Resources are struggling with projects because they do not have the necessary expertise. Perform a skills audit to determine what skills employees have and assign them to projects accordingly. If an employee with a certain skill is in high demand, consider hiring more resources who are able to complete this work.

    See below for additional challenges and tactics

    Review tactics for keeping supply and demand aligned

    Once the strategy is adopted, the next step is to use the outputs of the strategy to reclaim capacity and ensure supply and demand remain aligned. Review the tactics in the table below for assistance.

    Challenge Resolution Next Step
    There is insufficient project capacity to take on new work, but demand continues to grow. Extend project due date and manage the expectations of project sponsors with data. If possible, reclaim capacity from non-project work. Customize the playbook to address insufficient project capacity.
    There is significant fluctuation in demand, making it extremely challenging to stick to allocations. Project managers can build in additional contingencies to project plans based on resourcing data, with plans for over-delivering with surplus capacity. In addition, the CIO can leverage business relationships to curb chaotic demand. The portfolio manager should analyze the project portfolio for clues on expanding demand. Customize the playbook to address large fluctuations in demand.
    On a constant basis, there are conflicting project demands over specific skills. Re-evaluate the definition of a project to guard the value of the portfolio. Continually prioritize projects based on their business values as of today. Customize the playbook to address conflicting project demands. Feed into any near- and long-term staffing plans.

    Prepare to communicate your new resource management practices and reap their benefits

    As you roll out your resource management strategy, familiarize yourself with the capability improvements that will drive your resource management success metrics.

    1. Increased capacity awareness through the ability to more efficiently and more effectively collect and track complex, diverse, and dynamic project data across the project portfolio.
    2. Improved supply management. Increased awareness of resource capacity (current and forecasted) combined with the ability to see the results of resource allocations across the portfolio will help ensure that project resources are used as effectively as possible.
    3. Improved demand management. Increased capacity awareness, combined with reliable supply management, will help PMOs set realistic limits on the amount and kind of IT projects the organization can take on at any given time. The ability to present user-friendly reports to key decision makers will help the PMO to ensure that the projects that are approved are realistically attainable and strategically aligned.
    4. Increased portfolio success. Improvements in the three areas indicated above should result in more realistic demands on project workers/managers, better products, and better service to all stakeholders. While successfully implemented PPM solutions should produce more efficient PPM processes, ideally they should also drive improved project stakeholder satisfaction across the organization.

    The image shows a series on concentric circles, labelled (from the inside out): Capacity Awareness; Supply Management; Demand Management; Project Success.

    Info-Tech client achieves resource management success by right-sizing its data requirements and focusing on reporting

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Manufacturing

    Source Info-Tech Client

    We were concerned that the staff would not want to do timesheets. With one level of task definition, it’s not really timesheets. It’s more about reconciling our allocations.” – PMO Director, Manufacturing

    Challenge

    • In a very fast-paced environment, the PMO had developed a meaningful level of process maturity.
    • There had never been time to slow down enough to introduce a mature PPM tool set.
    • The executive leadership had started to ask for more throughput of highly visible IT projects.

    Solution

    • There had never been oversight on how much IT time went toward escalated support issues and smaller enhancement requests.
    • Staff had grown accustomed to a lack of documentation rigor surrounding the portfolio.
    • Despite a historic baseline of the ratio between strategic projects, small projects, and support, the lack of recordkeeping made it hard to validate or reconcile these ratios.

    Results

    • The organization introduced a robust commercial PPM tool.
    • They were able to restrict the granularity of data to a high level in order to limit the time required to enter and manage, and track the actuals.
    • They prepared executive leadership for their renewed focus on the allocation of resources to strategically important projects.
    • Approval of projects was right-sized based on the actual capacity and realized through improved timesheet recordkeeping.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1 Define the scope of your pilot and set appropriate goals for the test-run of your new processes

    An effective pilot lowers implementation risk, enhances the details and steps within a process, and improves stakeholder relations prior to a full scale rollout.

    3.2 Develop a plan to manage stakeholder and staff resistance to the new resource management practice

    Proactively plan for communicating responses and objections to show people that you understand their point of view and win their buy-in.

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    A matrix organization creates many small, untraceable demands that are often overlooked in resource management efforts, which lead to underestimating total demand and overcommitting resources. To capture them and enhance the success of your resource management effort, focus on completeness rather than precision. Precision of data will improve over time as your process maturity grows.

    Insight 2

    Draft the resource management practice with sustainability in mind. It is about what you can and will maintain every week, even during a crisis: it is not about what you put together as a one-time snapshot. Once you stop maintaining resource data, it’s nearly impossible to catch up.

    Insight 3

    Engagement paves the way for smoother adoption. An engagement approach (rather than simply communication) turns stakeholders into advocates who can help boost your message, sustain the change, and realize benefits without constant intervention or process command-and-control.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Disconnect between traditional resource management paradigms and today’s reality of work environment
    • Differentiation of accuracy and precision in capacity data
    • Snapshot of resource capacity supply and demand
    • Seven dimensions of resource management strategy
    • How to create sustainability of a resource management practice

    Processes Optimized

    • Collecting resource supply data
    • Capturing the project demand
    • Identifying and documenting resource constraints and issues
    • Resolving resource issues
    • Finalizing and communicating resource allocations for the forecast window

    Deliverable Completed

    • Resource Management Supply-Demand Calculator, to create an initial estimate of resource capacity supply and demand
    • Time-tracking survey emails, to validate assumptions made for creating the initial snapshot of resource capacity supply and demand
    • Resource Management Playbook, which documents your resource management strategy dimensions, process steps, and responses to challenges
    • PPM Solution Vendor Demo Script, to structure your resource management tool demos and interactions with vendors to ensure that their solutions can fully support your resource management practices
    • Portfolio Manager Lite, a spreadsheet-based resource management solution to facilitate the flow of data
    • Process Pilot Plan, to ensure that the pilot delivers value and insight necessary for a wider rollout
    • Project Portfolio Analyst job description, to help your efforts in bringing in additional staff to provide support for the new resource management practice
    • Resource Management Communications presentation, with which to engage your stakeholders during the new process rollout

    Research contributors and experts

    Trevor Bramwell, ICT Project Manager Viridor Waste Management

    John Hansknecht, Director of Technology University of Detroit Jesuit High School & Academy

    Brian Lasby, Project Manager Toronto Catholic District School Board

    Jean Charles Parise, CIO & DSO Office of the Auditor General of Canada

    Darren Schell, Associate Executive Director of IT Services University of Lethbridge

    Related Info-Tech research

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    Grow Your Own PPM Solution

    Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    Maintain and Organized Portfolio

    Manage a Minimum-Viable PMO

    Establish the Benefits Realization Process

    Manage an Agile Portfolio

    Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects

    Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program

    The Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program is a low-effort, high-impact program designed to help project owners assess and improve their PPM practices. Gather and report on all aspects of your PPM environment to understand where you stand and how you can improve.

    Bibliography

    actiTIME. “How Poor Tracking of Work Time Affects Your Business.” N.p., Oct. 2016. Web.

    Akass, Amanda. “What Makes a Successful Portfolio Manager.” Pcubed, n.d. Web.

    Alexander, Moira. “5 Steps to avoid overcommitting resources on your IT projects.” TechRepublic. 18 July 2016. Web.

    Anderson, Ryan. “Some Shocking Statistics About Interruptions in Your Work Environment.” Filevine, 9 July 2015. Web.

    Bondale, Kiron. “Focus less on management and more on the resources with resource management.” Easy in Theory, Difficult in Practice. 16 July 2014. Web.

    Burger, Rachel. “10 Software Options that Will Make Your Project Resource Allocation Troubles Disappear.” Capterra Project Management Blog, 6 January 2016. Web.

    Cooper, Robert, G. “Effective Gating: Make product innovation more productive by using gates with teeth.” Stage-Gate International and Product Development Institute. March/April 2009. Web.

    Dimensional Research. “Lies, Damned Lies and Timesheet Data.” Replicon, July 2013. Web.

    Edelman Trust Barometer. “Leadership in a Divided World.” 2016. Web.

    Frank, T.A. “10 Execs with Time-Management Secrets You Should Steal.” Monday*. Issue 2: Nov-Dec 2014. Drucker Institute. Web.

    Huth, Susanna. “Employees waste 759 hours each year due to workplace distractions.” The Telegraph, 22 Jun 2015. Web.

    Jacobeus, Nicolas. “How Detailed Does Your Agency Time Tracking Need to Be?” Scale Blog, 18 Jul 2016. Web.

    Lessing, Lawrence. Free Culture. Lulu Press Inc.: 30 July 2016.

    Kwak, James. “The Importance of Excel. The Baseline Scenario, 9 Feb 2013. Web.

    Madison, Daniel. “The Five Implementation Options to Manage the Risk in a New Process.” BPMInstitute.org. n.d. Web.

    Mark, Gloria. Multitasking in the Digital Age. Morgan & Claypool Publishers. 1 April 2015

    Maron, Shim. “Accountability Vs. Responsibility In Project Management.” Workfront, 10 June 2016. Web.

    PM Solutions. “Resource Management and the PMO: Three Strategies for Addressing Your Biggest Challenge.” N.p., 2009. Web.

    Project Management Institute. “Pulse of the Profession 2014.” PMI, 2014. Web.

    Planview. “Capacity Planning Fuels Innovation Speed.” 2016. Web.

    Rajda, Vilmos. “The Case Against Project Portfolio Management.” PMtimes, 1 Dec 2010. Web.

    Reynolds, Justin. “The Sad Truth about Nap Pods at Work.” TINYpulse, 22 Aug 2016. Web.

    Schulte, Brigid. “Work interrupts can cost you 6 hours a day. An efficiency expert explains how to avoid them.” Washington Post, 1 June 2015. Web.

    Stone, Linda. "Continuous Partial Attention." Lindastone.net. N.p., n.d. Web.

    Zawacki, Kevin. “The Perils of Time Tracking.” Fast Company, 26 Jan 2015. Web.

    The MVP Major Incident Manager

    The time has come to hire a new major incident manager. How do you go about that? How do you choose the right candidate? Major incident managers must have several typically conflicting traits, so how do you pick the right person? Let's dive into that.

    Register to read more …

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}145|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $21,919 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 13 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Product owners must bridge the gap between the customers, operations, and delivery to ensure products continuously deliver increasing value.
    • Product owners are often assigned to projects or product delivery without proper support, guidance, or alignment.
    • In many organizations, the product owner role is not well-defined, serves as a proxy for stakeholder ownership, and lacks reinforcement of the key skills needed to be successful.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    A product owner is the CEO for their product. Successful product management starts with empowerment and accountability. Product owners own the vision, roadmap, and value realization for their product or family aligned to enterprise goals and priorities.

    • Product and service ownership share the same foundation - underlying capabilities and best practices to own and improve a product or service are identical for both roles. Use the terms that make the most sense for your culture.
    • Product owners represent three primary perspectives: Business (externally facing), Technical (systems and tools), or Operational (manual processes). Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their primary perspective.
    • Product owners are operating under an incomplete understanding of the capabilities needed to succeed. Most product/service owners lack a complete picture of the needed capabilities, skills, and activities to successfully perform their roles.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a culture of product management trust and empowerment with product owners aligned to your operational structure and product needs.
    • Promote and develop true Agile skills among your product owners and family managers.
    • Implement Info-Tech’s product owner capability model to define the role expectations and provide a development path for product owners.

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Mature and Scale Product Ownership Storyboard – Establish a culture of success for product management and mature product owner capabilities.

    Strengthen the product owner role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

  • Establish a foundation for empowerment and success.
  • Assign and align product owners with products and stakeholders.
  • Mature product owner capabilities and skills.
    • Mature and Scale Product Ownership Storyboard

    2. Mature and Scale Product Ownership Readiness Assessment – Determine your readiness for a product-centric culture based on Info-Tech’s CLAIM+G model.

    Using Info-Tech’s CLAIM model, quickly determine your organization’s strengths and weaknesses preparing for a product culture. Use the heat map to identify key areas.

    • Mature and Scale Product Ownership Readiness Assessment

    3. Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook – Playbook for product owners and product managers.

    Use the blueprint exercises to build your personal product owner playbook. You can also use the workbook to capture exercise outcomes.

    • Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook

    4. Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook – Workbook for product owners and product managers.

    Use this workbook to capture exercise outcomes and transfer them to your Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook (optional).

    • Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook

    5. Mature and Scale Product Ownership Proficiency Assessment – Determine your current proficiency and improvement areas.

    Product owners need to improve their core capabilities and real Agile skills. The assessment radar will help identify current proficiency and growth opportunities.

    • Mature and Scale Product Ownership Proficiency Assessment
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Mature and Scale Product Ownership

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish the foundation for product ownership

    The Purpose

    Establish the foundation for product ownership.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Product owner playbook with role clarity and RACI.

    Activities

    1.1 Define enablers and blockers of product management.

    1.2 Define your product management roles and names.

    1.3 Assess your product management readiness.

    1.4 Identify your primary product owner perspective.

    1.5 Define your product owner RACI.

    Outputs

    Enablers and blockers

    Role definitions.

    Product culture readiness

    Product owner perspective mapping

    Product owner RACI

    2 Align product owners to products

    The Purpose

    Align product owners to products.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Assignment of resources to open products.

    A stakeholder management strategy.

    Activities

    2.1 Assign resources to your products and families.

    2.2 Visualize relationships to identify key influencers.

    2.3 Group stakeholders into categories.

    2.4 Prioritize your stakeholders.

    Outputs

    Product resource assignment

    Stakeholder management strategy

    Stakeholder management strategy

    Stakeholder management strategy

    3 Mature product owner capabilities

    The Purpose

    Mature product owner capabilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Assess your Agile product owner readiness

    Assess and mature product owner capabilities

    Activities

    3.1 Assess your real Agile skill proficiency.

    3.2 Assess your vison capability proficiency.

    3.3 Assess your leadership capability proficiency.

    3.4 Assess your PLM capability proficiency.

    3.5 Assess your value realization capability proficiency.

    3.6 Identify your business value drivers and sources of value.

    Outputs

    Real Agile skill proficiency assessment

    Info-Tech’s product owner capability model proficiency assessment

    Info-Tech’s product owner capability model proficiency assessment

    Info-Tech’s product owner capability model proficiency assessment

    Info-Tech’s product owner capability model proficiency assessment

    Business value drivers and sources of value

    Further reading

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership

    Strengthen the product owner’s role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Executive Brief

    Analyst Perspective

    Empower product owners throughout your organization.

    Hans Eckman

    Whether you manage a product or service, the fundamentals of good product ownership are the same. Organizations need to focus on three key elements of product ownership in order to be successful.

    • Create an environment of empowerment and service leadership to reinforce product owners and product family managers as the true owners of the vision, improvement, and realized the value of their products.
    • Align product and product family owner roles based on operational alignment and the groups defined when scaling product management.
    • Develop your product owners to improve the quality of roadmaps, alignment to enterprise goals, and profit and loss (P&L) for each product or service.

    By focusing the attention of the teammates serving in product owner or service owner roles, your organization will deliver value sooner and respond to change more effectively.

    Hans Eckman

    Principal Research Director – Application Delivery and Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Product owners must bridge the gap between the customers, operations, and delivery to ensure products continuously deliver increasing value.

    Product owners are often assigned to projects or product delivery without proper support, guidance, or alignment.

    In many organizations the product owner role is not well-defined, serves as a proxy for stakeholder ownership, and lacks reinforcement of the key skills needed to be successful.

    Common Obstacles

    Organizations have poor alignment or missing product owners between lines of business, IT, and operations.

    Product owners are aligned to projects and demand management rather than long-term strategic product ownership.

    Product families are not properly defined, scaled, and supported within organizations.

    Individuals in product owner roles have an incomplete understanding of needed capabilities and lack a development path.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Create a culture of product management trust and empowerment with product owners aligned to your operational structure and product needs.

    Promote and develop true Agile skills among your product owners and family managers.

    Implement Info-Tech’s product owner capability model to define the role expectations and provide a development path for product owners.

    Extend product management success using Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision and Deliver Digital Products at Scale.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is no single correct approach to product ownership. Product ownership must be tuned and structured to meet the delivery needs of your organization and the teams it serves.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Product owners make the final decision

    • Establish a foundation for empowerment and success
    • Assign product owners and align with products and stakeholders
    • Mature product owner capabilities and skills
    Product Owner capabilities: Vision, Product Lifecycle Management, Leadership, Value Realization

    The Info-Tech difference

    1. Assign product owners where product decisions are needed, not to match org charts or delivery teams. The product owner has the final word on product decisions.
    2. Organize product owners into related teams to ensure product capabilities delivered are aligned to enterprise strategy and goals.
    3. Shared products and services must support the needs of many product owners with conflicting priorities. Shared service product owners must map and prioritize demand to align to enterprise priorities and goals.
    4. All product owners share the same capability model.

    Insight summary

    There is no single correct approach to product ownership

    Successful product management starts with empowerment and accountability. Product owners own the vision, roadmap, and value realization for their product or family aligned to enterprise goals and priorities.

    Phase 1 insight

    Product owners represent three primary perspectives: business (external-facing), technical (systems and tools), or operational (manual processes). Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their primary perspective.

    Phase 2 insight

    Start with your operational grouping of products and families, identifying where an owner is needed. Then, assign people to the products and families. The owner does not define the product or family.

    Phase 3 insight

    Product owners are operating under an incomplete understanding of the capabilities needed to succeed. Most product/service owners lack a complete picture of the needed capabilities, skills, and activities to successfully perform their roles.

    Product and service ownership share the same foundation

    The underlying capabilities and best practices to own and improve a product or service are identical for both roles. Use the terms that make the most sense for your culture.

    Map product owner roles to your existing job titles

    Identify where product management is needed and align expectations with existing roles. Successful product management does not require a dedicated job family.

    Projects can be a mechanism for funding product changes and improvements

    Projects can be a mechanism for funding product changes and improvements. Shows difference of value for project life-cycles, hybrid life-cycles, and product life-cycles.

    Projects within products

    Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply.

    You go through a period or periods of project-like development to build a version of an application or product.

    You also have parallel services along with your project development, which encompass the more product-based view. These may range from basic support and maintenance to full-fledged strategy teams or services like sales and marketing.

    Product and services owners share the same foundation and capabilities

    For the purpose of this blueprint, product/service and product owner/service owner are used interchangeably. The term “product” is used for consistency but would apply to services, as well.

    Product = Service

    Common foundations: Focus on continuous improvement, ROI, and value realization. Clear vision, goals, roadmap, and backlog.

    “Product” and “service” are terms that each organization needs to define to fit its culture and customers (internal and external). The most important aspect is consistent use and understanding of:

    • External products
    • Internal products
    • External services
    • Internal services
    • Products as a service (PaaS)
    • Productizing services (SaaS)

    Recognize the product owner perspectives

    The 3 product owner perspectives. 1. Business: Customer-facing, value-generating. 2. Technical: IT systems and tools. 3. Operations: Keep-the-lights-on processes.

    Product owners represent one of three primary perspectives. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their primary perspective.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product owners must translate needs and constraints from their perspective into the language of their audience. Kathy Borneman, Digital Product Owner at SunTrust Bank, noted the challenges of finding a common language between lines of business and IT (e.g. what is a unit?).

    Match your product management role definitions to your product family levels

    Product ownership exists at the different operational tiers or levels in your product hierarchy. This does not imply a management relationship.

    Product portfolio

    Groups of product families within an overall value stream or capability grouping.

    Project portfolio manager

    Product family

    A collection of related products. Products can be grouped along architectural, functional, operational, or experiential patterns.

    Product family manager

    Product

    Single product composed of one or more applications and services.

    Product owner

    Info-Tech Insight

    Define the current roles that will perform the product management function or define consistent role names to product owners and managers.

    Align enterprise value through product families

    Product families are operational groups based on capabilities or business functions. Product family managers translate goals, priorities, and constraints so they are actionable at the next level. Product owners prioritize changes to enhance the capabilities that allow you to realize your product family. Enabling capabilities realize value and help reach your goals.

    Understand special circumstances

    In Deliver Digital Products at Scale, products were grouped into families using Info-Tech’s five scaling patterns. Assigning owners to Enterprise Applications and Shared Services requires special consideration.

    Value stream alignment

    • Business architecture
      • Value stream
      • Capability
      • Function
    • Market/customer segment
    • Line of business (LoB)
    • Example: Customer group > value stream > products

    Enterprise applications

    • Enabling capabilities
    • Enterprise platforms
    • Supporting apps
    • Example: HR > Workday/Peoplesoft > Modules Supporting: Job board, healthcare administrator

    Shared Services

    • Organization of related services into service family
    • Direct hierarchy does not necessarily exist within the family
    • Examples: End-user support and ticketing, workflow and collaboration tools

    Technical

    • Domain grouping of IT infrastructure, platforms, apps, skills, or languages
    • Often used in combination with Shared Services grouping or LoB-specific apps
    • Examples: Java, .NET, low-code, database, network

    Organizational alignment

    • Used at higher levels of the organization where products are aligned under divisions
    • Separation of product managers from organizational structure is no longer needed because the management team owns the product management role

    Map sources of demand and influencers

    Use the stakeholder analysis to define the key stakeholders and sources of demand for enterprise applications and shared services. Extend your mapping to include their stakeholders and influencers to uncover additional sources of demand and prioritization.

    Map of key stakeholders for enterprise applications and shared services.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your product owner map defines the influence landscape your product operates. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support and operate your product directly.

    Combine your product owner map with your stakeholder map to create a comprehensive view of influencers.

    The primary value of the product owner is to fill the backlog with the highest ROI opportunities aligned with enterprise goals.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The product owner owns the direction of the product.

    • Roadmap - Where are we going?
    • Backlog - What changes are needed to get there?
    • Product review - Did we get close enough?

    Product delivery realizes value for your product family

    While planning and analysis are done at the family level, work and delivery are done at the individual product level.

    Product strategy includes: Vision, Goals, Roadmap, backlog and Release plan.

    Product family owners are more strategic

    When assigning resources, recognize that product family owners will need to be more strategic with their planning and alignment of child families and products.

    Product family owners are more strategic. They require a roadmap that is strategic, goal-based, high-level, and flexible.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Roadmaps for your product family are, by design, less detailed. This does not mean they aren’t actionable! Your product family roadmap should be able to communicate clear intentions around the future delivery of value in both the near and long term.

    Connecting your product family roadmaps to product roadmaps

    Your product and product family roadmaps should be connected at an artifact level that is common between both. Typically, this is done with capabilities, but it can be done at a more granular level if an understanding of capabilities isn’t available.

    Product family roadmap versus Product Roadmaps.

    Develop a product owner stakeholder strategy

    Stakeholder management, Product lifecycle, Project delivery, Operational support.

    Stakeholders are a critical cornerstone to product ownership. They provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what a product owner can accomplish.

    Product owners operate within a network of stakeholders who represent different perspectives within the organization.

    First, product owners must identify members of their stakeholder network. Next, they should devise a strategy for managing stakeholders.

    Without a stakeholder strategy, product owners will encounter obstacles, resistance, or unexpected changes.

    Create a stakeholder network map to product roadmaps and prioritization

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers, to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    Stakeholder network map defines the influence landscape your product operates. Connectors determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape your product operates. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support and operate your product directly.

    Use “connectors” to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have informal yet substantive relationships with your stakeholders.

    Being successful at Agile is more than about just doing Agile

    The following represents the hard skills needed to “Do Agile”:

    Being successful at Agile needs 4 hard skills: 1. Engineering skills, 2. Technician Skills, 3. Framework/Process skills, 4. Tools skills.
    • Engineering skills. These are the skills and competencies required for building brand-new valuable software.
    • Technician skills. These are the skills and competencies required for maintaining and operating the software delivered to stakeholders.
    • Framework/Process skills. These are the specific knowledge skills required to support engineering or technician skills.
    • Tools skills. This represents the software that helps you deliver other software.

    While these are important, they are not the whole story. To effectively deliver software, we believe in the importance of being Agile over simply doing Agile.

    Adapted from: “Doing Agile” Is Only Part of the Software Delivery Pie

    Why focus on core skills?

    They are the foundation to achieve business outcomes

    Skills, actions, output and outcomes

    The right skills development is only possible with proper assessment and alignment against outcomes.

    Focus on these real Agile skills

    Agile skills

    • Accountability
    • Collaboration
    • Comfort with ambiguity
    • Communication
    • Empathy
    • Facilitation
    • Functional decomposition
    • Initiative
    • Process discipline
    • Resilience

    Product capabilities deliver value

    As a product owner, you are responsible for managing these facets through your capabilities and activities.

    The core product and value stream consists of: Funding - Product management and governance, Business functionality - Stakeholder and relationship management, and Technology - Product delivery.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    It is easy to lose sight of what matters when we look at a product from a single point of view. Despite what "The Agile Manifesto" says, working software is not valuable without the knowledge and support that people need in order to adopt, use, and maintain it. If you build it, they will not come. Product owners must consider the needs of all stakeholders when designing and building products.

    Recognize product owner knowledge gaps

    Pulse survey of product owners

    Pulse survey of product owners. Graph shows large percentage of respondents have alignment to common agile definition of product owners. Yet a significant perception gap in P&L, delivery, and analytics.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Less than 15% of respondents identified analytics or financial management as a key component of product ownership.
    2. Assess your product owner’s capabilities and understanding to develop a maturity plan.

    Source: Pulse Survey (N=18)

    Implement the Info-Tech product owner capability model

    Unfortunately, most product owners operate with incomplete knowledge of the skills and capabilities needed to perform the role. Common gaps include focusing only on product backlogs, acting as a proxy for product decisions, and ignoring the need for key performance indicators (KPIs) and analytics in both planning and value realization.

    Product Owner capabilities: Vision, Product Lifecycle Management, Leadership, Value Realization

    Vision

    • Market Analysis
    • Business Alignment
    • Product Roadmap

    Leadership

    • Soft Skills
    • Collaboration
    • Decision Making

    Product Lifecycle Management

    • Plan
    • Build
    • Run

    Value Realization

    • KPIs
    • Financial Management
    • Business Model

    Product owner capabilities provide support

    Vision predicts impact of Value realization. Value realization provides input to vision

    Your vision informs and aligns what goals and capabilities are needed to fulfill your product or product family vision and align with enterprise goals and priorities. Each item on your roadmap should have corresponding KPIs or OKRs to know how far you moved the value needle. Value realization measures how well you met your target, as well as the impacts on your business value canvas and cost model.

    Product lifecycle management builds trust with Leadership. Leadership improves quality of Product lifecycle management.

    Your leadership skills improve collaborations and decisions when working with your stakeholders and product delivery teams. This builds trust and improves continued improvements to the entire product lifecycle. A product owner’s focus should always be on finding ways to improve value delivery.

    Product owner capabilities provide support

    Leadership enhances Vision. Vision Guides Product Lifecycle Management. Product Lifecycle Management delivers Value Realization. Leadership enhances Value Realization

    Develop product owner capabilities

    Each capability: Vision, Product lifecycle management, Value realization and Leadership has 3 components needed for successful product ownership.

    Avoid common capability gaps

    Vision

    • Focusing solely on backlog grooming (tactical only)
    • Ignoring or failing to align product roadmap to enterprise goals
    • Operational support and execution
    • Basing decisions on opinion rather than market data
    • Ignoring or missing internal and external threats to your product

    Leadership

    • Failing to include feedback from all teams who interact with your product
    • Using a command-and-control approach
    • Viewing product owner as only a delivery role
    • Acting as a proxy for stakeholder decisions
    • Avoiding tough strategic decisions in favor of easier tactical choices

    Product lifecycle management

    • Focusing on delivery and not the full product lifecycle
    • Ignoring support, operations, and technical debt
    • Failing to build knowledge management into the lifecycle
    • Underestimating delivery capacity, capabilities, or commitment
    • Assuming delivery stops at implementation

    Value realization

    • Focusing exclusively on “on time/on budget” metrics
    • Failing to measure a 360-degree end-user view of the product
    • Skipping business plans and financial models
    • Limiting financial management to project/change budgets
    • Ignoring market analysis for growth, penetration, and threats

    Your product vision is your North Star

    It's ok to dream a little!

    Who is the target customer, what is the key benefit, what do they need, what is the differentiator

    Adapted from: Crossing the Chasm

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    A product vision shouldn’t be so far out that it doesn’t feel real or so short-term that it gets bogged down in minutiae and implementation details. Finding the right balance will take some trial and error and will be different for each organization.

    Leverage the product canvas to state and inform your product vision

    Leverage the product Canvas to state and inform your product vision. Includes: Product name, Tracking info, Vision, List of business objectives or goals, Metrics used to measure value realization, List of groups who consume the product/service, and List of key resources or stakeholders.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    Use a balanced value to establish a common definition of goals and value

    Value drivers are strategic priorities aligned to our enterprise strategy and translated through our product families. Each product and change has an impact on the value driver helping us reach our enterprise goals.

    Importance of the value driver multiplied by the Impact of value score is equal to the Value score.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your value drivers and impact helps estimate the expected value of roadmap items, prioritize roadmap and backlog items, and identify KPIs and OKRs to measure value realization and actual impact.

    Use CLAIM to guide your journey

    Culture, Learning, Automation, Integrated teams, Metrics and governance.

    Value is best created by self-managing teams who deliver in frequent, short increments supported by leaders who coach them through challenges.

    Product-centric delivery and Agile are a radical change in how people work and think. Structured, facilitated learning is required throughout the transformation to help leaders and practitioners make the shift.

    Product management, Agile, and DevOps have inspired SDLC tools that have become a key part of delivery practices and work management.

    Self-organizing teams that cross business, delivery, and operations are essential to gain the full benefits of product-centric delivery.

    Successful implementations require the disciplined use of metrics that support developing better teams

    Communicate reasons for changes and how they will be implemented

    Five elements of communicating change: What is the change? Why are we doing it? How are we going to go about it? How long will it take us to do it? What will the role be for each department individual?

    Leaders of successful change spend considerable time developing a powerful change message; that is, a compelling narrative that articulates the desired end state, and that makes the change concrete and meaningful to staff.

    The organizational change message should:

    • Explain why the change is needed.
    • Summarize what will stay the same.
    • Highlight what will be left behind.
    • Emphasize what is being changed.
    • Explain how the change will be implemented.
    • Address how change will affect various roles in the organization.
    • Discuss the staff’s role in making the change successful.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for mature and scale product ownership

    Phase steps

    1. Establish the foundation for product ownership

    Step 1.1 Establish an environment for product owner success

    Step 1.2 Establish your product ownership model

    2. Align product owners to products

    Step 2.1 Assign product owners to products

    Step 2.2 Manage stakeholder influence

    3. Mature product owner capabilities

    Step 3.1 Assess your Agile product owner readiness

    Step 3.2 Mature product owner capabilities

    Phase outcomes

    1.1.1 Define enablers and blockers of product management

    1.1.2 Define your product management roles and names

    1.2.1 Identify your primary product owner perspective

    1.2.2 Define your product owner RACI

    2.1.1 Assign resources to your products and families

    2.2.1 Visualize relationships to identify key influencers

    2.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    2.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    3.1.1 Assess your real Agile skill proficiency

    3.2 Mature product owner capabilities

    3.2.1 Assess your vision capability proficiency

    3.2.2 Assess your leadership capability proficiency

    3.2.3 Assess your PLM capability proficiency

    3.2.4 Identify your business value drivers and sources of value

    3.2.5 Assess your value realization capability proficiency

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Key deliverable

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook

    Capture and organize the outcomes of the activities in the workbook.

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook

    The workbook helps organize and communicate the outcomes of each activity.

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership Readiness Assessment

    Determine your level of mastery of real Agile skills and product owner capabilities.


    Blueprint benefits

    IT benefits

    • Competent product owner who can support teams operating in any delivery methodology.
    • Representative viewpoint and input from the technical and operational product owner perspectives.
    • Products aligned to business needs and committed work are achievable.
    • Single point of contact with a business representative.
    • Acceptance of product owner role outside the Scrum teams.

    Business benefits

    • Better alignment to enterprise goals, vision, and outcomes.
    • Improved coordination with stakeholders.
    • Quantifiable value realization tied to vision.
    • Product decisions made at the right time and with the right input.
    • Product owner who has the appropriate business, operations, and technical knowledge.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Align product owner metrics to product delivery and value realization.

    Member outcome

    Suggested Metric

    Estimated impact

    Increase business application satisfaction Satisfaction of business applications (CIO BV Diagnostic) 20% increase within one year after implementation
    Increase effectiveness of application portfolio management Effectiveness of application portfolio management (M&G Diagnostic) 20% increase within one year after implementation
    Increase importance and effectiveness of application portfolio Importance and effectiveness to business (APA Diagnostic) 20% increase within one year after implementation
    Increase satisfaction of support of business operations Support to business (CIO BV Diagnostic) 20% increase within one year after implementation
    Successfully deliver committed work (productivity) Number of successful deliveries; burndown Reduction in project implementation overrun by 20%

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project"

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Establish the Foundation for Product Ownership

    Phase 2 Align Product Owners to Products

    Phase 3 Mature Product Owner Capabilities

    • Call #1:
      Scope objectives and your specific challenges
    • Call #2:
      Step 1.1 Establish an environment for product owner success
      Step 1.2 Establish your product ownership model
    • Call #3:
      Step 2.1 Assign product owners to products
    • Call #4:
      Step 2.2 Manage stakeholder influence
    • Call #5:
      Step 3.1 Assess your Agile product owner readiness
    • Call #6:
      Step 3.2 Mature product owner capabilities

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 and 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Activities

    Establish the Foundation for Product Ownership

    Step 1.1 Establish an environment for product owner success

    1.1.1 Define enablers and blockers of product management

    1.1.2 Define your product management roles and names

    1.1.3 Assess your product management readiness

    Step 1.2 Establish your product ownership model

    1.2.1 Identify your primary product owner perspective

    1.2.2 Define your product owner RACI

    Align Product Owners to Products

    Step 2.1 Assign product owners to products

    2.1.1 Assign resources to your products and families

    Step 2.2 Manage stakeholder influence

    2.2.1 Visualize relationships to identify key influencers

    2.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    2.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    Mature Product Owner Capabilities

    Step 3.1 Assess your Agile product owner readiness

    3.1.1 Assess your real Agile skill proficiency

    Step 3.2 Mature product owner capabilities=

    3.2.1 Assess your Vision capability proficiency

    3.2.2 Assess your Leadership capability proficiency

    3.2.3 Assess your PLM capability proficiency

    3.2.4 Identify your business value drivers and sources of value

    3.2.5 Assess your Value Realization capability proficiency

    Deliverables

    1. Enablers and blockers
    2. Role definitions
    3. Product culture readiness
    4. Product owner perspective mapping
    5. Product owner RACI
    1. Product resource assignment
    2. Stakeholder management strategy
    1. Real Agile skill proficiency assessment
    2. Info-Tech’s product owner capability model proficiency assessment
    3. Business value drivers and sources of value

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Product delivery

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    Build Your Agile Acceleration Roadmap

    Quickly assess the state of your Agile readiness and plan your path forward to higher value realization.

    Develop Your Agile Approach for a Successful Transformation

    Understand Agile fundamentals, principles, and practices so you can apply them effectively in your organization.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

    Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

    Further the benefits of Agile by extending a scaled Agile framework to the business.

    Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

    Embrace a team sport culture built around continuous business-IT collaboration to deliver great products.

    Embed Security Into the DevOps Pipeline

    Shift security left to get into DevSecOps.

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    Execute a disciplined approach to rolling out Agile methods in the organization.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Application portfolio management

    APM Research Center

    See an overview of the APM journey and how we can support the pieces in this journey.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Streamline Application Maintenance

    Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

    Streamline Application Management

    Move beyond maintenance to ensuring exceptional value from your apps.

    Build an Application Department Strategy

    Delivering value starts with embracing what your department can do.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    Empower the business to implement its own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

    Optimize Applications Release Management

    Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Value, delivery metrics, estimation

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.

    Application Portfolio Assessment: End User Feedback

    Develop data-driven insights to help you decide which applications to retire, upgrade, re-train on, or maintain to meet the demands of the business.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations

    Don’t let bad estimates ruin good work.

    Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

    Commit to achievable software releases by grounding realistic expectations.

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

    Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

    Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    Deliver more projects by giving yourself the voice to say “no” or “not yet” to new projects.

    Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports

    Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Organizational design and performance

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Build a Strategic Workforce Plan

    Have the right people in the right place, at the right time.

    Implement a New Organizational Structure

    Reorganizations are inherently disruptive. Implement your new structure with minimal pain for staff while maintaining IT performance throughout the change.

    Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    Don’t just measure engagement, act on it.

    Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

    Set holistic measures to inspire employee performance.

    Phase 1

    Establish the Foundation for Product Ownership

    Phase 1: Establish an environment for product owner success, Establish your product ownership model

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1.1.1 Define enablers and blockers of product management

    1.1.2 Define your product management roles and names

    1.1.3 Assess your product management readiness

    1.2.1 Identify your primary product owner perspective

    1.2.2 Define your product owner RACI

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Step 1.1

    Establish an environment for product owner success

    Activities

    1.1.1 Define enablers and blockers of product management

    1.1.2 Define your product management roles and names

    1.1.3 Assess your product management readiness

    Establish the foundation for product ownership

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Enablers and blockers
    • Role definitions

    Empower product owners as the true owners of their product

    Product ownership requires decision-making authority and accountability for the value realization from those decisions. POs are more than a proxy for stakeholders, aggregators for changes, and the communication of someone else’s priorities.

    “A Product Owner in its most beneficial form acts like an Entrepreneur, like a 'mini-CEO'. The Product Owner is someone who really 'owns' the product.”

    – Robbin Schuurman,
    “Tips for Starting Technical Product Managers”

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Implement Info-Tech’s Product Owner Capability Model to help empower and hold product owners accountable for the maturity and success of their product. The product owner must understand how their product fits into the organization’s mission and strategy in order to align to enterprise value.

    Product and service owners share the same foundation and capabilities

    For the purpose of this blueprint, product/service and product owner/service owner are used interchangeably. The term “product” is used for consistency but applies to services, as well.

    Product = Service

    Common foundations: Focus on continuous improvement, ROI, and value realization. Clear vision, goals, roadmap, and backlog.

    “Product” and “service” are terms that each organization needs to define to fit its culture and customers (internal and external). The most important aspect is consistent use and understanding of:

    • External products
    • Internal products
    • External services
    • Internal services
    • Products as a service (PaaS)
    • Productizing services (SaaS)

    Define product ownership to match your culture and customers

    Characteristics of a discrete product:

    • Has end users or consumers
    • Delivers quantifiable value
    • Evolves or changes over time
    • Has predictable delivery
    • Has definable boundaries
    • Has a cost to produce and operate
    • Has a discrete backlog and roadmap of improvements

    What does not need a product owner?

    • Individual features
    • Transactions
    • Unstructured data
    • One-time solutions
    • Non-repeatable processes
    • Solutions that have no users or consumers
    • People or teams

    Info-Tech Insight

    • Products are long-term endeavors that don’t end after the project finishes.
    • Products mature and improve their ability to deliver value.
    • Products have a discrete backlog of changes to improve the product itself, separate from operational requests fulfilled by the product or service.

    Need help defining your products or services? Download our blueprint Deliver Digital Products at Scale.

    Connect roadmaps to value realization with KPIs

    Every roadmap item should have an expected realized value once it is implemented. The associate KPIs or OKRs determine if our goal was met. Any gap in value feedback back into the roadmap and backlog refinement.</p data-verified=

    " loading="lazy">

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every roadmap item should have an expected realized value once it is implemented. The associate KPIs or OKRs determine if our goal was met. Any gap in value feedback back into the roadmap and backlog refinement.

    Identify the differences between a project-centric and a product-centric organization

    Differences between Project centric and Product centric organizations in regards to: Funding, Prioritization, Accountability, Product management, Work allocation, and Capacity management.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product delivery requires significant shifts in the way you complete development work and deliver value to your users. Make the changes that support improving end-user value and enterprise alignment.

    Projects can be a mechanism for funding product changes and improvements

    Projects lifecycle, hybrid lifecycle and product lifecycle. Period or periods of project development have parallel services that encompass a more product-based view.

    Projects withing products

    Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply.

    You go through a period or periods of project-like development to build a version of an application or product.

    You also have parallel services along with your project development, which encompasses a more product-based view. These may range from basic support and maintenance to full-fledged strategy teams or services like sales and marketing.

    Recognize common barriers to product management

    The transition to product ownership is a series of behavioral and cultural changes supported by processes and governance. It takes time and consistency to be successful.

    • Command and control structures
    • Lack of ownership and accountability
    • High instability in the market, demand, or organization
    • Lack of dedicated teams align to delivery, service, or product areas
    • Culture of one-off projects
    • Lack of identified and engaged stakeholders
    • Lack of customer exposure and knowledge

    Agile’s four core values

    “…while there is value in the items on the right, we value the items on the left more.”

    Source: “The Agile Manifesto”

    We value...

    We value being agile: Individuals and interactions, Working Software, Customer collaboration, Responding to change. Versus being prescriptive: Processes and tools, Comprehensive documentation, Contract negotiation, following a plan.

    Exercise 1.1.1 Define enablers and blockers of product management

    1 hour
    1. Identify and mitigate blockers of product management in your organization.
    2. What enablers will support strong product owners?
    3. What blockers will make the transition to product management harder?
    4. For each blocker, also define at least one mitigating step.
    Define enablers e.g. team culture. Define blockers and at least one mitigating step

    Output

    • Enablers and blockers

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Align enterprise value through product families

    Product families are operational groups based on capabilities or business functions. Product family managers translate goals, priorities, and constraints so they are actionable at the next level. Product owners prioritize changes to enhance the capabilities that allow you to realize your product family. Enabling capabilities realize value and help reach your goals.

    Effective product delivery requires thinking about more than just a single product

    Good application and product management begins with strengthening good practices for a single or small set of applications, products, and services.

    Product portfolio

    Groups of product families within an overall value stream or capability grouping.

    Project portfolio manager

    Product family

    A collection of related products. Products can be grouped along architectural, functional, operational, or experiential patterns.

    Product family manager

    Product

    Single product composed of one or more applications and services.

    Product owner

    Info-Tech Insight

    Define the current roles that will perform the product management function or define consistent role names to product owners and managers.

    Exercise 1.1.2 Define your product management roles and names

    1-2 hour
    1. Identify the roles in which product management activities will be owned.
    2. Define a common set of role names and describe the role.
    3. Map the level of accountability for each role: Product or Product Family
    4. Product owner perspectives will be defined in the next step.

    Define roles, description and level of product accountability.

    Output

    • Role definitions

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Use CLAIM to guide your journey

    Culture, Learning, Automation, Integrated teams, Metrics and governance.

    Value is best created by self-managing teams who deliver in frequent, short increments supported by leaders who coach them through challenges.

    Product-centric delivery and Agile are a radical change in how people work and think. Structured, facilitated learning is required throughout the transformation to help leaders and practitioners make the shift.

    Product management, Agile, and DevOps have inspired SDLC tools that have become a key part of delivery practices and work management.

    Self-organizing teams that cross business, delivery, and operations are essential to gain the full benefits of product-centric delivery.

    Successful implementations require the disciplined use of metrics that support developing better teams

    Exercise 1.1.3 Assess your product management readiness

    1 hour
    1. Open and complete the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Readiness Assessment in your Playbook or the provided Excel tool.
    2. Discuss high and low scores for each area to reach a consensus.
    3. Record your results in your Playbook.

    Assess your culture, learning, automation, Integrated teams, metrics and governance.

    Output

    • Assessment of product management readiness based on Info-Tech’s CLAIM+G model.

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Readiness Assessment.

    Communicate reasons for changes and how they will be implemented

    Five elements of communicating change: What is the change? Why are we doing it? How are we going to go about it? How long will it take us to do it? What will the role be for each department individual?

    Leaders of successful change spend considerable time developing a powerful change message; that is, a compelling narrative that articulates the desired end state, and that makes the change concrete and meaningful to staff.

    The organizational change message should:

    Step 1.2

    Establish your product ownership model

    Activities

    1.2.1 Identify your primary product owner perspective

    1.2.2 Define your product owner RACI

    Establish the foundation for product ownership

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Product owner perspective mapping
    • Product owner RACI

    Recognize the product owner perspectives

    The 3 product owner perspectives. 1. Business: Customer-facing, value-generating. 2. Technical: IT systems and tools. 3. Operations: Keep-the-lights-on processes.

    Product owners represent one of three primary perspectives. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their primary perspective.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Product owners must translate needs and constraints from their perspective into the language of their audience. Kathy Borneman, Digital Product Owner at SunTrust Bank, noted the challenges of finding a common language between lines of business and IT (e.g. what is a unit?).

    Identify and align to product owner perspectives to ensure product success

    Product owner perspectives

    The 3 product owner perspectives. 1. Business: Customer-facing, value-generating. 2. Technical: IT systems and tools. 3. Operations: Keep-the-lights-on processes.
    1. Each product owner perspective provides important feedback, demand, and support for the product.
    2. Where a perspective is represented by a distinct role, the perspective is managed with that product owner.
    3. If separate roles don’t exist, the product owner must evaluate their work using two or three perspectives.
    4. The ultimate success of a product, and therefore product owner, is meeting the end-user value of the business product owner, tool support of the technical product owner, and manual processing support of the operations product owner.

    Line of business (LOB) product owners

    LOB product owners focus on the products and services consumed by the organization’s external consumers and users. The role centers on the market needs, competitive landscape, and operational support to deliver products and services.

    Business perspective

    • Alignment to enterprise strategy and priorities
    • Growth: market penetration and/or revenue
    • Perception of product value
    • Quality, stability, and predictability
    • Improvement and innovation
    • P&L
    • Market threats and opportunities
    • Speed to market
    • Service alignment
    • Meet or exceed individual goals

    Relationship to Operations

    • Customer satisfaction
    • Speed of delivery and manual processing
    • Continuity

    Relationship to Technical

    • Enabler
    • Analysis and insight
    • Lower operating and support costs

    Technical product owners

    Technical product owners are responsible for the IT systems, tools, platforms, and services that support business operations. Often they are identified as application or platform managers.

    Technical perspective

    • Application, application suite, or group of applications
    • Core platforms and tools
    • Infrastructure and networking
    • Third-party technology services
    • Enable business operations
    • Direct-to-customer product or service
    • Highly interconnected
    • Need for continuous improvement
    • End-of-life management
    • Internal value proposition and users

    Relationship to Business

    • Direct consumers
    • End users
    • Source of funding

    Relationship to Operations

    • End users
    • Process enablement or automation
    • Support, continuity, and manual intervention

    Operations (service) product owners

    Operational product owners focus on the people, processes, and tools needed for manual processing and decisions when automation is not cost-effective. Operational product owners are typically called service owners due to the nature of their work.

    Operational perspective

    • Business enablement
    • Continuity
    • Problem, incident, issue resolution
    • Process efficiency
    • Throughput
    • Error/defect avoidance
    • Decision enablement
    • Waste reduction
    • Limit time in process
    • Disaster recovery

    Relationship to Business

    • Revenue enablement
    • Manual intervention and processing
    • End-user satisfaction

    Relationship to Technical

    • Process enabler
    • Performance enhancement
    • Threat of automation

    Exercise 1.2.1 Identify your primary product owner perspective

    1 hour
    1. Identify which product owner perspective represents your primary focus.
    2. Determine where the other perspectives need to be part of your product roadmap or if they are managed by other product owners.

    Identify product/service name, identify product owner perspective, determine if other perspectives need to be part of roadmap.

    Output

    • Identification of primary product owner perspective.

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Realign differences between project managers and product owners

    Differences between Project Manager and Product Owners in regards to: Funding, Prioritization, Accountability, Product management, Work allocation, and Capacity management.

    Manage and communicate key milestones

    Successful product owners understand and define the key milestones in their product delivery lifecycles. These need to be managed along with the product backlog and roadmap.

    Define key milestones and their product delivery life-cycles.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Product ownership isn’t just about managing the product backlog and development cycles. Teams need to manage key milestones such as learning milestones, test releases, product releases, phase gates, and other organizational checkpoints.

    Define who manages each key milestone

    Key milestones must be proactively managed. If a project manager is not available, those responsibilities need to be managed by the product owner or Scrum Master. Start with responsibility mapping to decide which role will be responsible.

    Example milestones and Project Manager, Product Owner and Team Facilitator.

    *Scrum Master, Delivery Manager, Team Lead

    Exercise 1.2.2 Define your product owner RACI

    60 minutes
    1. Review your product and project delivery methodologies to identify key milestones (including approvals, gates, reviews, compliance checks, etc.). List each milestone on a flip chart or whiteboard.
    2. For each milestone, define who is accountable for the completion.
    3. For each milestone, define who is responsible for executing the milestone activity. (Who does the work that allows the milestone to be completed?)
    4. Review any responsibility and accountability gaps and identify opportunities to better support and execute your operating model.
    5. If you previously completed Deliver Digital Products at Scale , review and update your RACI in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook .

    Define: Milestones, Project Manager, Product/service owner, Team Facilitator, and Other roles.

    Output

    • Product owner RACI

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Phase 2

    Align Product Owners to Products

    Phase 2: Assign product owners to products, Manage stakeholder influence

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    2.1.1 Assign resources to your products and families

    2.2.1 Visualize relationships to identify key influencers

    2.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    2.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Step 2.1

    Assign product owners to products

    Activities

    2.1.1 Assign resources to your products and families

    Align product owners to products

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Product resource assignment

    Match your product management role definitions to your product family levels

    Using the role definitions, you created in Exercise 1.1.2, determine which roles correspond to which levels of your product families.

    Product portfolio

    Groups of product families within an overall value stream or capability grouping.

    Project portfolio manager

    Product family

    A collection of related products. Products can be grouped along architectural, functional, operational, or experiential patterns.

    Product family manager

    Product

    Single product composed of one or more applications and services.

    Product owner

    Info-Tech Insight

    Define the current roles that will perform the product management function or define consistent role names to product owners and managers.

    Assign resources throughout your product families

    Project families are owned by a product manager. Product owners own each product that has a distinct backlog.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • Start by assigning resources to each product or product family box.
    • A product owner can be responsible for more than one product.
    • Ownership of more than one product does not mean they share the same backlog.
    • For help organizing your product families, please download Deliver Digital Products at Scale.

    Understand special circumstances

    In Deliver Digital Products at Scale , products were grouped into families using Info-Tech’s five scaling patterns. Assigning owners to Enterprise Applications and Shared Services requires special consideration.

    Value stream alignment

    • Business architecture
      • Value stream
      • Capability
      • Function
    • Market/customer segment
    • Line of business (LoB)
    • Example: Customer group > value stream > products

    Enterprise applications

    • Enabling capabilities
    • Enterprise platforms
    • Supporting apps
    • Example: HR > Workday/Peoplesoft > Modules Supporting: Job board, healthcare administrator

    Shared Services

    • Organization of related services into service family
    • Direct hierarchy does not necessarily exist within the family
    • Examples: End-user support and ticketing, workflow and collaboration tools

    Technical

    • Domain grouping of IT infrastructure, platforms, apps, skills, or languages
    • Often used in combination with Shared Services grouping or LoB-specific apps
    • Examples: Java, .NET, low-code, database, network

    Organizational alignment

    • Used at higher levels of the organization where products are aligned under divisions
    • Separation of product managers from organizational structure is no longer needed because the management team owns the product management role

    Map the source of demand to each product

    With enterprise applications and shared services, your demand comes from other product and service owners rather than end customers in a value stream.

    Enterprise applications

    • Primary demand comes from the operational teams and service groups using the platform.
    • Each group typically has processes and tools aligned to a module or portion of the overall platform.
    • Product owners determine end-user needs to assist with process improvement and automation.
    • Product family managers help align roadmap goals and capabilities across the modules and tools to ensure consistency and the alignment of changes.

    Shared services

    • Primary demand for shared services comes from other product owners and service managers whose solution or application is dependent on the shared service platform.
    • Families are grouped by related themes (e.g. workflow tools) to increase reusability, standard enterprise solutions, reduced redundancy, and consistent processes across multiple teams.
    • Product owners manage the individual applications or services within a family.

    Pattern: Enterprise applications

    A division or group delivers enabling capabilities and the team’s operational alignment maps directly to the modules/components of an enterprise application and other applications that support the specific business function.

    Workforce Management, Strategic HR, Talent Management, Core HR

    Example:

    • Human resources is one corporate function. Within HR, however, there are subfunctions that operate independently.
    • Each operational team is supported by one or more applications or modules within a primary HR system.
    • Even though the teams work independently, the information they manage is shared with, or ties into processes used by other teams. Coordination of efforts helps provide a higher level of service and consistency.

    For additional information about HRMS, please download Get the Most Out of Your HRMS.

    Assigning owners to enterprise applications

    Align your enterprise application owners to your operating teams that use the enterprise applications. Effectively, your service managers will align with your platform module owners to provide integrated awareness and planning.

    Family manager (top-level), Family managers (second-level) and Product owners.

    Pattern: Shared services

    Grouping by service type, knowledge area, or technology allows for specialization while families align service delivery to shared business capabilities.

    Grouping by service type, knowledge area, or technology allows for specialization while families align service delivery to shared business capabilities.

    Example:

    • Recommended for governance, risk, and compliance; infrastructure; security; end-user support; and shared platforms (workflow, collaboration, imaging/record retention). Direct hierarchies do not necessarily exist within the shared service family.
    • Service groupings are common for service owners (also known as support managers, operations managers, etc.).
    • End-user ticketing comes through a common request system, is routed to the team responsible for triage, and then is routed to a team for resolution.
    • Collaboration tools and workflow tools are enablers of other applications, and product families might support multiple apps or platforms delivering that shared capability.

    Assigning owners to shared services

    Assign owners by service type, knowledge area, or technology to provide alignment of shared business capabilities and common solutions.

    Family manager (top-level), Family managers (second-level) and Product owners.

    Map sources of demand and influencers

    Use the stakeholder analysis to define the key stakeholders and sources of demand for enterprise applications and shared services. Extend your mapping to include their stakeholders and influencers to uncover additional sources of demand and prioritization.

    Map of key stakeholders for enterprise applications and shared services.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your product owner map defines the influence landscape your product operates. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support, and operate your product directly.

    Combine your product owner map with your stakeholder map to create a comprehensive view of influencers.

    Exercise 2.1.1 Assign resources to your products and families

    1-4 hours
    1. Use the product families you completed in Deliver Digital Products at Scale to determine which products and product families need a resource assigned. Where the same resource fills more than one role, they are the product owner or manager for each independently.
    2. Product families that are being managed as products (one backlog for multiple products) should have one owner until the family is split into separate products later.
    3. For each product and family, define the following:
      • Who is the owner (role or person)?
      • Is ownership clearly defined?
      • Are there other stakeholders who make decisions for the product?
    4. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook on the Product Owner Mapping worksheet.

    Output

    • Product owner and manager resource alignment.

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Step 2.2

    Manage stakeholder influence

    Activities

    2.2.1 Visualize relationships to identify key influencers

    2.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    2.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    Align product owners to products

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder management strategy

    Develop a product owner stakeholder strategy

    Stakeholder management, Product lifecycle, Project delivery, Operational support.

    Stakeholders are a critical cornerstone to product ownership. They provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what a product owner can accomplish.

    Product owners operate within a network of stakeholders who represent different perspectives within the organization.

    First, product owners must identify members of their stakeholder network. Next, they should devise a strategy for managing stakeholders.

    Without a stakeholder strategy, product owners will encounter obstacles, resistance, or unexpected changes.

    Create a stakeholder network map to product roadmaps and prioritization

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    Create a stakeholder network map to product roadmaps and prioritization. Use connectors to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape your product operates. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support, and operate your product directly.

    Use connectors to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have informal yet substantive relationships with your stakeholders.

    Exercise 2.2.1 Visualize relationships to identify key influencers

    1 hour
    1. List direct stakeholders for your product.
    2. Determine the stakeholders of your stakeholders and consider adding each of them to the stakeholder list.
    3. Assess who has either formal or informal influence over your stakeholders; add these influencers to your stakeholder list.
    4. Construct a diagram linking stakeholders and their influencers together.
      • Use black arrows to indicate the direction of professional influence.
      • Use dashed green arrows to indicate informal bidirectional influence relationships.
    5. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook .

    Output

    • Relationships among stakeholders and influencers

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Categorize your stakeholders with a prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map helps product owners categorize their stakeholders by their level of influence and ownership in the product and/or teams.

    Influence versus Ownership/Interest

    There are four areas on the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    • Players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediments to the objectives.
    • Mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.
    • Noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively but have little ability to enact their wishes.
    • Spectators are generally apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    Exercise 2.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    1 hour
    1. Identify your stakeholders’ interest in and influence on your Agile implementation as high, medium, or low by rating the attributes below.
    2. Map your results to the model below to determine each stakeholder’s category.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook .

    Influence versus Ownership/Interest with CMO, CIO and Product Manager in assigned areas.

    Output

    • Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Prioritize your stakeholders

    There may be too many stakeholders to be able to manage them all. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter most.

    Stakeholder category versus level of support.

    Consider the three dimensions of stakeholder prioritization: influence, interest, and support. Support can be determined by rating the following question: How likely is it that your stakeholder would recommend your product? These parameters are used to prioritize which stakeholders are most important and should receive your focused attention. The table to the right indicates how stakeholders are ranked.

    Exercise 2.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    1 hour
    1. Identify the level of support of each stakeholder by answering the following question: How likely is it that your stakeholder would endorse your product?
    2. Prioritize your stakeholders using the prioritization scheme on the previous slide.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook .

    Stakeholder, Category, level of support, prioritization.

    Output

    • Stakeholder and influencer prioritization

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

    Authority Vs. Ownership/Interest.

    Type

    Quadrant

    Actions

    Players

    High influence, high interest – actively engage Keep them updated on the progress of the project. Continuously involve players in the process and maintain their engagement and interest by demonstrating their value to its success.

    Mediators

    High influence, low interest – keep satisfied They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust and including them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.

    Noisemakers

    Low influence, high interest – keep informed Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using mediators to help them.

    Spectators

    Low influence, low interest – monitor They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks. By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, the product owner can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy spectators and noisemakers while ensuring the needs of mediators and players are met.

    Phase 3

    Mature Product Owner Capabilities

    Phase 3: Assess your Agile product owner readiness, Mature product owner capabilities.

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    3.1.1 Assess your real Agile skill proficiency

    3.2.1 Assess your vision capability proficiency

    3.2.2 Assess your leadership capability proficiency

    3.2.3 Assess your PLM capability proficiency

    3.2.4 Identify your business value drivers and sources of value

    3.2.5 Assess your value realization capability proficiency

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Step 3.1

    Assess your Agile product owner readiness

    Activities

    3.1.1 Assess your real Agile skill proficiency

    Mature product owner capabilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Real Agile skill proficiency assessment

    Why focus on core skills?

    They are the foundation to achieve business outcomes

    Skills, actions, output and outcomes

    The right skills development is only possible with proper assessment and alignment against outcomes.

    Being successful at Agile is more than about just doing Agile

    The following represents the hard skills needed to “Do Agile”:

    Being successful at Agile needs 4 hard skills: 1. Engineering skills, 2. Technician Skills, 3. Framework/Process skills, 4. Tools skills.

    • Engineering skills. These are the skills and competencies required for building brand-new valuable software.
    • Technician skills. These are the skills and competencies required for maintaining and operating the software delivered to stakeholders.
    • Framework/Process skills. These are the specific knowledge skills required to support engineering or technician skills.
    • Tools skills. This represents the software that helps you deliver other software.

    While these are important, they are not the whole story. To effectively deliver software, we believe in the importance of being Agile over simply doing Agile.

    Adapted from: “Doing Agile” Is Only Part of the Software Delivery Pie

    Focus on these real Agile skills

    Agile skills

    • Accountability
    • Collaboration
    • Comfort with ambiguity
    • Communication
    • Empathy
    • Facilitation
    • Functional decomposition
    • Initiative
    • Process discipline
    • Resilience

    Info-Tech research shows these are the real Agile skills to get started with

    Skill Name

    Description

    Accountability

    Refers to the state of being accountable. In an Agile context, it implies transparency, dedication, acting responsibly, and doing what is necessary to get the job done.

    Collaboration

    Values diverse perspectives and working with others to achieve the best output possible. Effective at working toward individual, team, department, and organizational goals.

    Comfort with ambiguity

    Allows you to confidently take the next steps when presented with a problem without having all the necessary information present.

    Communication

    Uses different techniques to share information, concerns, or emotions when a situation arises, and it allows you to vary your approach depending on the current phase of development.

    Empathy

    Is the ability to understand and share the feelings of another to better serve your team and your stakeholders.

    Facilitation

    Refers to guiding and directing people through a set of conversations and events to learn and achieve a shared understanding.

    Functional decomposition

    Is being able to break down requirements into constituent epics and stories.

    Initiative

    Is being able to anticipate challenges and then act on opportunities that lead to better business outcomes.

    Process discipline

    Refers to the focus of following the right steps for a given activity at the right time to achieve the right outcomes.

    Resilience

    Refers to the behaviors, thoughts, and actions that allow a person to recover from stress and adversity.

    Accountability

    An accountable person:

    • Takes ownership of their own decisions and actions and is responsible for the quality of results.
    • Recognizes personal accountabilities to others, including customers.
    • Works well autonomously.
    • Ensures that the mutual expectations between themselves and others are clearly defined.
    • Takes the appropriate actions to ensure that obligations are met in a timely manner.
    • As a leader, takes responsibility for those being led.

    Accountability drives high performance in teams and organizations

    • The performance level of teams depends heavily on accountability and who demonstrates it:
      • In weak teams, there is no accountability.
      • In mediocre teams, supervisors demonstrate accountability.
      • In high-performance teams, peers manage most performance problems through joint accountability. (Grenny, 2014)
    • According to Bain & Company, accountability is the third most important attribute of high-performing companies. Some of the other key attributes include honest, performance-focused, collaborative, and innovative. (Mankins, 2013)

    All components of the employee empowerment driver have a strong, positive correlation with engagement.

    Employee empowerment and Correlation with engagement.

    Source: McLean & Company Engagement Database, 2018; N=71,794

    Accountability

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Alerts others to possible problems in a timely manner.
    • Seeks appropriate support to solve problems.
    • Actively contributes to the creation and evaluation of possible solutions.
    • Acts on solutions selected and decisions made as directed.
    • Makes effective decisions about how to complete work tasks.
    • Demonstrates the capability of breaking down concrete issues into parts and synthesizing information succinctly.
    • Collects and analyzes information from a variety of sources.
    • Seeks information and input to fully understand the cause of problems.
    • Takes action to address obstacles and problems before they impact performance and results.
    • Initiates the evaluation of possible solutions to problems.
    • Makes effective decisions about work task prioritization.
    • Appropriately assesses risks before deciding.
    • Effectively navigates through ambiguity, using multiple data points to analyze issues and identify trends.
    • Does not jump to conclusions.
    • Draws logical conclusions and provides opinions and recommendations with confidence.
    • Takes ownership over decisions and their consequences.
    • Demonstrates broad knowledge of information sources that can be used to assess problems and make decisions.
    • Invests time in planning, discovery, and reflection to drive better decisions.
    • Effectively leverages hard data as inputs to making decisions.
    • Garners insight from abstract data and makes appropriate decisions.
    • Coaches others in effective decision-making practices.
    • Has the authority to solve problems and make decisions.
    • Thinks several steps ahead in deciding the best course of action, anticipating likely outcomes, risks, or implications.
    • Establishes metrics to aid in decision-making, for self and teams
    • Prioritizes objective and ambiguous information and analyzes this when making decisions.
    • Solicits a diverse range of opinions and perspectives as inputs to decision making.
    • Applies frameworks to decision making, particularly in situations that have little base in prior experience.
    • Makes effective decisions about organizational priorities.
    • Holds others accountable for their decisions and consequences.
    • Creates a culture of empowerment and trust to facilitate effective problem solving and decision making.
    • Makes sound decisions that have organization-wide consequences and that influence future direction.

    Collaboration as a skill

    The principles and values of Agile revolve around collaboration.

    • Works well with others on specialized and cross-functional teams.
    • Can self-organize while part of a team.
    • Respects the commitments that others make.
    • Identifies and articulates dependencies.
    • Values diverse perspectives and works with others to achieve the best output possible.
    • Effective at working toward individual, team, department, and organizational goals.
    The principles and values of Agile revolve around collaboration. Doing what was done before (being prescriptive), going though the motions (doing Agile), living the principles (being Agile)

    Collaboration

    The Agile Manifesto has three principles that focus on collaboration:

    1. The business and developers must work together daily throughout the project.
    2. Build projects around motivated individuals. Give them the environment and support they need and trust them to get the job done.
    3. The most efficient and effective method of conveying information to and within a development team is face-to-face conversation.

    Effective collaboration supports Agile behaviors, including embracing change and the ability to work iteratively.

    Collaboration

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Understands role on the team and the associated responsibilities and accountabilities.
    • Treats team members with respect.
    • Contributes to team decisions and to the achievement of team goals and objectives.
    • Demonstrates a positive attitude.
    • Works cross-functionally to achieve common goals and to support the achievement of other team/department goals.
    • Values working in a diverse team and understands the importance of differing perspectives to develop unique solutions or ideas.
    • Fosters team camaraderie, collaboration, and cohesion.
    • Understands the impact of one's actions on the ability of team members to do their jobs.
    • Respects the differences other team members bring to the table by openly seeking others' opinions.
    • Helps the team accomplish goals and objectives by breaking down shared goals into smaller tasks.
    • Approaches challenging team situations with optimism and an open mind, focusing on coming to a respectful conclusion.
    • Makes suggestions to improve team engagement and effectiveness.
    • Supports implementation of team decisions.
    • Professionally gives and seeks feedback to achieve common goals.
    • Values working in a diverse team and understands the importance of differing perspectives to develop unique solutions or ideas.
    • Motivates the team toward achieving goals and exceeding expectations.
    • Reaches out to other teams and departments to build collaborative, cross-functional relationships.
    • Creates a culture of collaboration that leverages team members' strengths, even when the team is remote or virtual.
    • Participates and encourages others to participate in initiatives that improve team engagement and effectiveness.
    • Builds consensus to make and implement team decisions, often navigating through challenging task or interpersonal obstacles.
    • Values leading a diverse team and understands the importance of differing perspectives to develop unique solutions or ideas.
    • Creates a culture of collaboration among teams, departments, external business partners, and all employee levels.
    • Breaks down silos to achieve inter-departmental collaboration.
    • Demonstrates ownership and accountability for team/department/ organizational outcomes.
    • Uses an inclusive and consultative approach in setting team goals and objectives and making team decisions.
    • Coaches others on how to identify and proactively mitigate potential points of team conflict.
    • Recognizes and rewards teamwork throughout the organization.
    • Provides the tools and resources necessary for teams to succeed.
    • Values diverse teams and understands the importance of differing perspectives to develop unique solutions or ideas.

    Comfort with ambiguity

    Ability to handle ambiguity is a key factor in Agile success.

    • Implies the ability to maintain a level of effectiveness when all information is not present.
    • Able to confidently act when presented with a problem without all information present.
    • Risk and uncertainty can comfortably be handled.
    • As a result, can easily adapt and embrace change.
    • People comfortable with ambiguity demonstrate effective problem-solving skills.

    Relative importance of traits found in Agile teams

    1. Handles ambiguity
    2. Agreeable
    3. Conscientious

    Comfort with ambiguity

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Requires most information to be present before carrying out required activities.
    • Can operate with some information missing.
    • Comfortable asking people within their known circles for help.
    • Significant time is taken to reveal small pieces of information.
    • More adept at operating with information missing.
    • Willing to reach out to people outside of their regular circles for assistance and clarification.
    • Able to apply primary and secondary research methods to fill in the missing pieces.
    • Can operate essentially with a statement and a blank page.
    • Able to build a plan, drive others and themselves to obtain the right information to solve the problem.
    • Able to optimize only pulling what is necessary to answer the desired question and achieve the desired outcome.

    Communication

    Even though many organizations recognize its importance, communication is one of the root causes of project failure.

    Project success vs Communication effectiveness. Effective communications is associated with a 17% increase in finishing projects within budget.

    56%

    56% of the resources spent on a project are at risk due to ineffective communications.

    PMI, 2013.

    29%

    In 29% of projects started in the past 12 months, poor communication was identified as being one of the primary causes of failure.

    PMI, 2013.

    Why are communication skills important to the Agile team?

    It’s not about the volume, it’s about the method.

    • Effectively and appropriately interacts with others to build relationships and share ideas and information.
    • Uses tact and diplomacy to navigate difficult situations.
    • Relays key messages by creating a compelling story, targeted toward specific audiences.

    Communication effectiveness, Activity and Effort required.

    Adapted From: Agile Modeling

    Communication

    Your Score:____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Actively listens, learns through observation, and uses clear and precise language.
    • Possesses an open and approachable demeanor, with a positive and constructive tone.
    • Demonstrates interest in the thoughts and feelings of others.
    • Considers potential responses of others before speaking or acting.
    • Checks own understanding of others’ communication by repeating or paraphrasing.
    • Demonstrates self-control in stressful situations.
    • Provides clear, concise information to others via verbal or written communication.
    • Seeks to understand others' points of view, looking at verbal and non-verbal cues to encourage open and honest discussions.
    • Invites and encourages others to participate in discussions.
    • Projects a sincere and genuine tone.
    • Remains calm when dealing with others who are upset or angry.
    • Provides and seeks support to improve communication.
    • Does not jump to conclusions or act on assumptions.
    • Tailors messages to meet the different needs of different audiences.
    • Accurately interprets responses of others to their words and actions.
    • Provides feedback effectively and with empathy.
    • Is a role model for others on how to effectively communicate.
    • Ensures effective communication takes place at the departmental level.
    • Engages stakeholders using appropriate communication methods to achieve desired outcomes.
    • Creates opportunities and forums for discussion and idea sharing.
    • Demonstrates understanding of the feelings, motivations, and perspectives of others, while adapting communications to anticipated reactions.
    • Shares insights about their own strengths, weaknesses, successes, ad failures to show empathy and help others relate.
    • Discusses contentious issues without getting defensive and maintains a professional tone.
    • Coaches others on how to communicate effectively and craft targeted messages.
    • Sets and exemplifies standards for respectful and effective communications in the organization.
    • Comfortably delivers strategic messages supporting their function and the organization at the enterprise level.
    • Communicates with senior-level executives on complex organizational issues.
    • Promotes inter-departmental communication and transparency.
    • Achieves buy-in and consensus from people who share widely different views.
    • Shares complex messages in clear, understandable language.
    • Accurately interprets how they are perceived by others.
    • Rallies employees to communicate ideas and build upon differing perspectives to drive innovation.

    Empathy

    Empathy is the ability to understand and share the feelings of another in order to better serve your team and your stakeholders. There are three kinds:

    Cognitive

    Thought, understanding, intellect

    • Knowing how someone else feels and what they might be thinking.
    • Contributes to more effective communication.

    Emotional

    Feelings, physical sensation

    • You physically feel the emotions of the other person.
    • Helps build emotional connections with others.

    Compassionate

    Intellect, emotion with action

    • Along with understanding, you take action to help.

    How is empathy an Agile skill?

    Empathy enables you to serve your team, your customers, and your organization

    Serving the team

    • Primary types: Emotional and compassionate empathy.
    • The team is accountable for delivery.
    • By being able to empathize with the person you are talking to, complex issues can be addressed.
    • A lack of empathy leads to a lack of collaboration and being able to go forward on a common path.

    Serving your customers and stakeholders

    • Primary type: Cognitive empathy.
    • Agile enables the delivery of the right value at the right time to your stakeholders
    • Translating your stakeholders' needs requires an understanding of who they are as people. This is done through observations, interviews and conversations.
    • Leveraging empathy maps and user-story writing is an effective tool.

    Empathy

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Knowing how someone else feels and what they might be thinking.
    • Ability to build emotional connections with others.
    • Able to harness emotional connections to achieve tangible and experiential outcomes.
    • Demonstrates an awareness of different feelings and ways of thinking by both internal and external stakeholders.
    • Limited ability to make social connections with others outside of the immediate team.
    • Able to connect with similarly minded people to improve customer/stakeholder satisfaction. (Insights into action)
    • Able to interact and understand others with vastly different views.
    • Lack of agreement does not stop individual. from asking questions, understanding, and pushing the conversation forward

    Facilitation

    It’s not just your manager’s problem.

    “Facilitation is the skill of moderating discussions within a group in order to enable all participants to effectively articulate their views on a topic under discussion, and to ensure that participants in the discussion are able to recognize and appreciate the differing points of view that are articulated.” (IIBA, 2015)

    • Drives action through influence, often without authority.
    • Leads and impacts others' thinking, decisions, or behavior through inclusive practices and relationship building.
    • Encourages others to self-organize and hold themselves accountable.
    • Identifies blockers and constructively removes barriers to progress.

    Facilitation

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Drives action through influence, often without authority.
    • Leads and impacts others' thinking, decisions, or behavior through inclusive practices and relationship building.
    • Encourages others to self-organize and hold themselves accountable.
    • Identifies blockers and constructively removes barriers to progress.
    • Maps and executes processes effectively.
    • Uses facts and concrete examples to demonstrate a point and gain support from others.
    • Openly listens to the perspectives of others.
    • Builds relationships through honest and consistent behavior.
    • Understands the impact of their own actions and how others will perceive it.
    • Identifies impediments to progress.
    • Anticipates the effect of one's approach on the emotions and sensitivities of others.
    • Practices active listening while demonstrating positivity and openness.
    • Customizes discussion and presentations to include "what’s in it for me" for the audience.
    • Presents compelling information to emphasize the value of an idea.
    • Involves others in refining ideas or making decisions in order to drive buy-in and action.
    • Knows how to appropriately use influence to achieve outcomes without formal authority.
    • Seeks ways and the help of others to address barriers or blockers to progress.
    • Leverages a planned approach to influencing others by identifying stakeholder interests, common goals, and potential barriers.
    • Builds upon successes to gain acceptance for new ideas.
    • Facilitates connections between members of their network for the benefit of the organization or others.
    • Demonstrates the ability to draw on trusting relationships to garner support for ideas and action.
    • Encourages a culture that allows space for influence to drive action.
    • Adept at appropriately leveraging influence to achieve business unit outcomes.
    • Actively manages the removal of barriers and blockers for teams.

    Functional decomposition

    It’s not just a process, it’s a skill.

    “Functional decomposition helps manage complexity and reduce uncertainty by breaking down processes, systems, functional areas, or deliverables into their simpler constituent parts and allowing each part to be analyzed independently."

    (IIBA, 2015)

    Being able to break down requirements into constituent consumable items (example: epics and user stories).

    Start: Strategic Initiatives. 1: Epics. 2: Capabilities. 3: Features. End: Stories.

    Use artifact mapping to improve functional decomposition

    In our research, we refer to these items as epics, capabilities, features, and user stories. How you develop your guiding principles and structure your backlog should be based on the terminology and artifact types commonly used in your organization.

    Agile, Waterfall, Relationship, Decomposition skill most in demand, definition.

    Functional Decomposition

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Able to decompose items with assistance from other team members.
    • Able to decompose items independently, ensuring alignment with business value.
    • Able to decompose items independently and actively seeks out collaboration opportunities with relevant SME's during and after the refinement process to ensure completion.
    • Able to decompose items at a variety of granularity levels.
    • Able to teach and lead others in their decomposition efforts.
    • Able to quickly operate at different levels of the requirements stack.

    Initiative and self-organization

    A team that takes initiative can self-organize to solve critical problems.

    • "The best architectures, requirements, and designs emerge from self-organizing teams." (Agile Manifesto)
    • In a nutshell, the initiative represents the ability to anticipate challenges and act on opportunities that lead to better business outcomes.
    • Anticipates challenges and acts on opportunities that lead to better business outcomes.
    • Thinks critically and is motivated to use both specialist expertise and general knowledge.
    • Driven by the delivery of business value and better business outcomes.
    • Empowers others to act and is empowered and self-motivated.

    Initiative and self-organization

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Demonstrates awareness of an opportunity or issue which is presently occurring or is within the immediate work area.
    • Reports an opportunity or issue to the appropriate person.
    • Acts instead of waiting to be asked.
    • Willingly takes on challenges, even if they fall outside their area of expertise.
    • Is proactive in identifying issues and making recommendations to resolve them.
    • Within the scope of the work environment, takes action to improve processes or results, or to resolve problems.
    • Not deterred by obstacles.
    • Tackles challenges that require risk taking.
    • Procures the necessary resources, team and technical support to enable success.
    • Assists others to get the job done.
    • Demonstrates awareness of an opportunities or issues which are in the future or outside the immediate work area.
    • Typically exceeds the expectations of the job.
    • Learns new technology or skills outside their specialization so that they can be a more effective team member.
    • Recommends solutions to enhance results or prevent potential issues.
    • Drives implementation of new processes within the team to improve results.
    • Able to provide recommendations on plans and decisions that are strategic and future-oriented for the organization.
    • Identifies areas of high risk or of organizational level impact.
    • Able to empower significant recourses from the organization to enable success.
    • Leads long-term engagements that result in improved organizational capabilities and processes.

    Process discipline

    A common misconception is that Agile means no process and no discipline. Effective Agile teams require more adherence to the right processes to create a culture of self-improvement.

    • Refers to the focus of following the right steps for a given activity at the right time to achieve the right outcomes.
    • Focus on following the right steps for a given activity at the right time to achieve desired outcomes.
    Example: Scrum Ceremonies during a sprint (1 - 4 weeks/sprint). 1: Sprint planning, 2: Daily scrum, 3: Sprint review, 4: Sprint retrospective.

    Process discipline

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Demonstrates awareness of the key processes and steps that are needed in a given situation.
    • Limited consistency in following processes and limited understanding of the 'why' behind the processes.
    • Aware and follows through with key agile processes in a consistent manner.
    • Demonstrates not only the knowledge of processes but understands the 'why' behind their existence.
    • Aware and follows through with key agile processes in a consistent manner.
    • Demonstrates understanding of not only why specific processes exist but can suggest changes to improve efficiency, consistency, and outcomes.

    N/A -- Maximum level is '3

    Resilience

    If your team hits the wall, don’t let the wall hit them back.

    • Resilience is critical for an effective Agile transformation. A team that demonstrates resilience always exhibits:
    • Evolution over transformation – There is a recognition that changes happen over time.
    • Intensity and productivity – A race is not won by the ones who are the fastest, but by the ones who are the most consistent. Regardless of what comes up, the team can push through.
    • That organizational resistance is futile – Given that it is working on the right objectives, the team needs to demonstrate a consistency of approach and intensity regardless of what may stand in its way.
    • Refers to the behaviors, thoughts, and actions that allow a person to recover from stress and adversity.

    How resilience aligns with Agile

    A team is not “living the principles” without resilience.

    1. Purpose

      Aligns with: “Our highest priority is to satisfy the customer through early and continuous delivery of valuable software.” The vision or goals may not be clear in certain circumstances and can be difficult to relate to a single work item. Being able to intrinsically source and harness a sense of purpose becomes more important, especially as a self-organizing team.
    2. Perseverance

      Aligns with: “Agile processes harness change for the customer's competitive advantage.” Perseverance enables teams to continuously deliver at a steady pace, addressing impediments or setbacks and continuing to move forward.
    3. Composure

      Aligns with: “Agile processes promote sustainable development,” and “At regular intervals, the team reflects ... and adjusts its behavior accordingly.”
      When difficult situations arise, composure allows us to understand perspectives, empathize with customers, accept late changes, and sustain a steady pace.
    4. Self-Reliance

      Aligns with: “The best architectures, requirements, and designs emerge from self-organizing teams.” Knowing oneself, recognizing strengths, and drawing on past successes, can be a powerful aid in creating high-performing Agile teams
    5. Authenticity

      Aligns with: “At regular intervals, the team reflects … and adjusts its behavior accordingly,” and “Build projects around motivated individuals.”
      When difficult situations arise, authenticity is crucial. “For example, being able to openly disclose areas outside of your strengths in sprint planning or being able to contribute constructively toward self-organization.”

    Adapted from: Why Innovation, 2019.

    Resilience

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Easily distracted and stopped by moderately stressful and challenging situations.
    • Requires significant help from others to get back on track.
    • Not frequently able (or knows) how to ask for help
    • Handles typical stresses and challenges for the given role.
    • Able to get back on track with limited assistance.
    • Able to ask for help when they need it.
    • Quality of work unaffected by an increase in pressures and challenges.
    • Handles stresses and challenges what is deemed above and beyond their given role.
    • Able to provide advice to others on how to handle difficult and challenging situations.
    • Quality of work and outcomes is maintained and sometimes exceeded as pressure increases.
    • Team looks to this individual as being the gold standard on how to approach any given problem or situation.
    • Directly mentors others on approaches in situations regardless of the level of challenge.

    Exercise 1.2.1 Identify your primary product owner perspective

    1 hour
    1. Review each real Agile skill and determine your current proficiency.
    2. Complete your assessment in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment tool.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.
    4. Review the skills map to identify strengths and areas of growth.

    Accountability, Collaboration, Comfort in Ambiguity, Communication, Empathy, Facilitation, Functional Decomposition, Initiative, Process Discipline, Resilience.

    Output

    • Agile skills assessment results.

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment.

    Determine your Agile skills proficiency: Edit chart data to plot your scores or add your data points and connect the lines.

    Step 3.2

    Mature product owner capabilities

    Activities

    3.2.1 Assess your vision capability proficiency

    3.2.2 Assess your leadership capability proficiency

    3.2.3 Assess your PLM capability proficiency

    3.2.4 Identify your business value drivers and sources of value

    3.2.5 Assess your value realization capability proficiency

    Mature product owner capabilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Info-Tech product owner capability model proficiency assessment

    Product capabilities deliver value

    As a product owner, you are responsible for managing these facets through your capabilities and activities.

    The core product and value stream consists of: Funding - Product management and governance, Business functionality - Stakeholder and relationship management, and Technology - Product delivery.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    It is easy to lose sight of what matters when we look at a product from a single point of view . Despite what "The Agile Manifesto" says, working software is not valuable without the knowledge and support that people need in order to adopt, use, and maintain it. If you build it, they will not come. Product owners must consider the needs of all stakeholders when designing and building products.

    Recognize product owner knowledge gaps

    Pulse survey of product owners

    Pulse survey of product owners. Graph shows large percentage of respondents have alignment to common agile definition of product owners. Yet a significant perception gap in P&L, delivery, and analytics.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Less than 15% of respondents identified analytics or financial management as a key component of product ownership.
    2. Assess your product owner’s capabilities and understanding to develop a maturity plan.

    Source: Pulse Survey (N=18)

    Implement the Info-Tech product owner capability model

    Unfortunately, most product owners operate with incomplete knowledge of the skills and capabilities needed to perform the role. Common gaps include focusing only on product backlogs, acting as a proxy for product decisions, and ignoring the need for key performance indicators (KPIs) and analytics in both planning and value realization.

    Product Owner capabilities: Vision, Product Lifecycle Management, Leadership, Value Realization

    Vision

    • Market Analysis
    • Business Alignment
    • Product Roadmap

    Leadership

    • Soft Skills
    • Collaboration
    • Decision Making

    Product Lifecycle Management

    • Plan
    • Build
    • Run

    Value Realization

    • KPIs
    • Financial Management
    • Business Model

    Product owner capabilities provide support

    Vision predicts impact of Value realization. Value realization provides input to vision

    Your vision informs and aligns what goals and capabilities are needed to fulfill your product or product family vision and align with enterprise goals and priorities. Each item on your roadmap should have corresponding KPIs or OKRs to know how far you moved the value needle. Value realization measures how well you met your target, as well as the impacts on your business value canvas and cost model.

    Product lifecycle management builds trust with Leadership. Leadership improves quality of Product lifecycle management.

    Your leadership skills improve collaborations and decisions when working with your stakeholders and product delivery teams. This builds trust and improves continued improvements to the entire product lifecycle. A product owner’s focus should always be on finding ways to improve value delivery.

    Product owner capabilities provide support

    Leadership enhances Vision. Vision Guides Product Lifecycle Management. Product Lifecycle Management delivers Value Realization. Leadership enhances Value Realization

    Develop product owner capabilities

    Each capability: Vision, Product lifecycle management, Value realization and Leadership has 3 components needed for successful product ownership.

    Avoid common capability gaps

    Vision

    • Focusing solely on backlog grooming (tactical only)
    • Ignoring or failing to align product roadmap to enterprise goals
    • Operational support and execution
    • Basing decisions on opinion rather than market data
    • Ignoring or missing internal and external threats to your product

    Leadership

    • Failing to include feedback from all teams who interact with your product
    • Using a command-and-control approach
    • Viewing product owner as only a delivery role
    • Acting as a proxy for stakeholder decisions
    • Avoiding tough strategic decisions in favor of easier tactical choices

    Product lifecycle management

    • Focusing on delivery and not the full product lifecycle
    • Ignoring support, operations, and technical debt
    • Failing to build knowledge management into the lifecycle
    • Underestimating delivery capacity, capabilities, or commitment
    • Assuming delivery stops at implementation

    Value realization

    • Focusing exclusively on “on time/on budget” metrics
    • Failing to measure a 360-degree end-user view of the product
    • Skipping business plans and financial models
    • Limiting financial management to project/change budgets
    • Ignoring market analysis for growth, penetration, and threats

    Capabilities: Vision

    Market Analysis

    • Customer Empathy: Identify the target users and unique value your product provides that is not currently being met. Define the size of your user base, segmentation, and potential growth.
    • Customer Journey: Define the future path and capabilities your users will respond to.
    • Competitive analysis: Complete a SWOT analysis for your end-to-end product lifecycle. Use Info-Tech’s Business SWOT Analysis Template.

    Business Alignment

    • Enterprise alignment: Align to enterprise and product family goals, strategies, and constraints.
    • Delivery and release strategy: Develop a delivery strategy to achieve value quickly and adapt to internal and external changes. Value delivery is constrained by your delivery pipeline.
    • OCM and go-to-market strategy: Create organizational change management, communications, and a user implementation approach to improve adoption and satisfaction from changes.

    Product Roadmap

    • Roadmap strategy: Determine the duration, detail, and structure of your roadmap to accurately communicate your vision.
    • Value prioritization: Define criteria used to evaluate and sequence demand items.
    • Release and capacity planning: Build your roadmap with realistic goals and milestones based on your delivery pipeline and dependencies.

    “Customers are best heard through many ears.”

    – Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom

    Vision: Market Analysis, Business Alignment, and Product Roadmap.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data comes from many places and may still not tell the complete story.

    Build your product strategy playbook

    Complete Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision to define your Vision, Goals, Roadmap approach, and Backlog quality filters.

    Digital Product Strategy Supporting Workbook

    Supporting workbook that captures the interim results from a number of exercises that will contribute to your overall digital product vision.

    Product Backlog Item Prioritization Tool

    An optional tool to help you capture your product backlog and prioritize based on your given criteria

    Product Roadmap Tool

    An optional tool to help you build out and visualize your first roadmap.

    Your Digital Product Vision Details Strategy

    Record the results from the exercises to help you define, detail, and make real your digital product vision.

    Your product vision is your North Star

    It's ok to dream a little!

    Who is the target customer, what is the key benefit, what do they need, what is the differentiator

    Adapted from: Geoffrey Moore, 2014.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    A product vision shouldn’t be so far out that it doesn’t feel real or so short-term that it gets bogged down in minutiae and implementation details. Finding the right balance will take some trial and error and will be different for each organization.

    Use product roadmaps to guide delivery

    In Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision, we showed how the product roadmap is key to value realization. As a product owner, the product roadmap is your communicated path to align teams and changes to your defined goals, while aligning your product to enterprise goals and strategy.

    As a product owner, the product roadmap is your communicated path to align teams and changes to your defined goals, while aligning your product to enterprise goals and strategy

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Info-Tech Best Practice Product delivery requires a comprehensive set of business and technical competencies to effectively roadmap, plan, deliver, support, and validate your product portfolio. Product delivery is a “multi-faceted, complex discipline that can be difficult to grasp and hard to master.” It will take time to learn and adopt methods and become a competent product manager or owner (“What Is Product Management?”, Pichler Consulting Limited).

    Match your roadmap and backlog to the needs of the product

    Ultimately, you want products to be able to respond faster to changes and deliver value sooner. The level of detail in the roadmap and backlog is a tool to help the product owner plan for change. The duration of your product roadmap is all directly related to the tier of product owner in the product family.

    The level of detail in the roadmap and backlog is a tool to help the product owner plan for change. The duration of your product roadmap is all directly related to the tier of product owner in the product family.

    Product delivery realizes value for your product family

    While planning and analysis are done at the family level, work and delivery are done at the individual product level.

    Product strategy includes: Vision, Goals, Roadmap, backlog and Release plan.

    Use artifact mapping to improve functional decomposition

    In our research, we refer to these items as epics, capabilities, features, and user stories. How you develop your guiding principles and structure your backlog should be based on the terminology and artifact types commonly used in your organization.

    Agile, Waterfall, Relationship, Decomposition skill most in demand, definition.

    Manage and communicate key milestones

    Successful product owners understand and define the key milestones in their product delivery lifecycles. These need to be managed along with the product backlog and roadmap.

    Define key milestones and their release dates.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Product ownership isn’t just about managing the product backlog and development cycles! Teams need to manage key milestones such as learning milestones, test releases, product releases, phase gates, and other organizational checkpoints!

    Milestones

    • Points in the timeline when the established set of artifacts is complete (feature-based), or checking status at a particular point in time (time-based).
    • Typically assigned a date and used to show the progress of development.
    • Plays an important role when sequencing different types of artifacts.

    Release dates

    • Releases mark the actual delivery of a set of artifacts packaged together in a new version of the product.
    • Release dates, firm or not, allow stakeholders to anticipate when this is coming.

    Leverage the product canvas to state and inform your product vision

    Leverage the product Canvas to state and inform your product vision. Includes: Product name, Tracking info, Vision, List of business objectives or goals, Metrics used to measure value realization, List of groups who consume the product/service, and List of key resources or stakeholders.

    Capability: Vision

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Product backlog.
    • Basic roadmap with milestones and releases.
    • Unprioritized stakeholder list.
    • Understanding of product’s purpose and value.
    • Customers and end-users defined with core needs identified.
    • Roadmap with goals and capabilities defined by themes and set to appropriate time horizons.
    • Documented stakeholder management plan with communication and collaboration aligned to the stakeholder strategy.
    • Value drivers traced to product families and enterprise goals.
    • Customer personas defined with pain relievers and value creators defined.
    • Fully-developed roadmap traced to family (and child) roadmaps.
    • Expected ROI for all current and next roadmap items.
    • KPIs/OKRs used to improve roadmap prioritization and sequencing.
    • Proactive stakeholder engagement and reviews.
    • Cross-functional engagement to align opportunities and drive enterprise value.
    • Formal metrics to assess customer needs and value realization.
    • Roadmaps managed in an enterprise system for full traceability, value realization reporting, and views for defined audiences.
    • Proactive stakeholder engagement with regular planning and review ceremonies tied to their roadmaps and goals.
    • Cross-functional innovation to find disruptive opportunities to drive enterprise value.
    • Omni-channel metrics and customer feedback mechanisms to proactively evaluate goals, capabilities, and value realization.

    Exercise 3.2.1 Assess your Vision capability proficiency

    1 hour
    1. Review the expectations for this capability and determine your current proficiency for each skill.
    2. Complete your assessment in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment tool.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.
    4. Review the skills map to identify strengths and areas of growth.

    Output

    • Product owner capability assessment

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment.

    Capabilities: Leadership

    Soft Skills

    • Communication: Maintain consistent, concise, and appropriate communication using SMART guidelines (specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and timely).
    • Integrity: Stick to your values, principles, and decision criteria for the product to build and maintain trust with your users and teams.
    • Influence: Manage stakeholders using influence and collaboration over contract negotiation.

    Collaboration

    • Stakeholder management: Build a communications strategy for each stakeholder group, tailored to individual stakeholders.
    • Relationship management: Use every interaction point to strengthen relationships, build trust, and empower teams.
    • Team development: Promote development through stretch goals and controlled risks to build team capabilities and performance.

    Decision Making

    • Prioritized criteria: Remove personal bias by basing decisions off data analysis and criteria.
    • Continuous improvement: Balance new features with the need to ensure quality and create an environment of continuous improvement.
    • Team empowerment/negotiation: Push decisions to teams closest to the problem and solution, using Delegation Poker to guide you.

    “Everything walks the walk. Everything talks the talk.”

    – Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom

    Leadership: Soft skills, collaboration, decision making.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product owners cannot be just a proxy for stakeholder decisions. The product owner owns product decisions and management of all stakeholders.

    Capability: Leadership

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Activities are prioritized with minimal direction and/or assistance.
    • Progress self-monitoring against objectives with leadership apprised of deviations against plan.
    • Facilitated decisions from stakeholders or teams.
    • Informal feedback on performance and collaboration with teams.
    • Independently prioritized activities and provide direction or assistance to others as needed.
    • Managed issue resolution and provided guidance on goals, priorities, and constraints.
    • Product decision ownership with input from stakeholders, SMEs, and delivery teams.
    • Formal product management retrospectives with tracked and measured changes to improve performance.
    • Consulted in the most challenging situations to provide subject matter expertise on leading practices and industry standards.
    • Provide mentoring and coaching to your peers and/or teammates.
    • Use team empowerment, pushing decisions to the lowest appropriate level based on risk and complexity.
    • Mature and flexible communication.
    • Provide strategies and programs ensuring all individuals in the delivery organization obtain the level of coaching and supervision required for success in their position.
    • Provide leadership to the organization’s coaches ensuring delivery excellence across the organization.
    • Help develop strategic initiatives driving common approaches and utilizing information assets and processes across the enterprise.

    Exercise 3.2.2 Assess your Leadership capability proficiency

    1 hour
    1. Review the expectations for this capability and determine your current proficiency for each skill.
    2. Complete your assessment in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment tool.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.
    4. Review the skills map to identify strengths and areas of growth.

    Output

    • Product owner capability assessment

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment.

    Capability: Product lifecycle management

    Plan

    • Product backlog: Follow a schedule for backlog intake, grooming, updates, and prioritization.
    • Journey map: Create an end-user journey map to guide adoption and loyalty.
    • Fit for purpose: Define expected value and intended use to ensure product meets your end user’s needs.

    Build

    • Capacity management: Work with operations and delivery teams to ensure consistent and stable outcomes.
    • Release strategy: Build learning, release, and critical milestones into a repeatable release plan.
    • Compliance: Build policy compliance into delivery practices to ensure alignment and reduce avoidable risk (privacy, security).

    Run

    • Adoption: Focus attention on end-user adoption and proficiency to accelerate value and maximize retention.
    • Support: Build operational support and business continuity into every team.
    • Measure: Measure KPIs and validate expected value to ensure product alignment to goals and consistent product quality.

    “Pay fantastic attention to detail. Reward, recognize, celebrate.”

    – Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom

    Product Lifecycle Management: Plan, Build, Run

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product owners must actively manage the full lifecycle of the product.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    A backlog stores and organizes PBIs at various stages of readiness

    A backlog stores and organizes PBIs at different levels of readiness. Stage 3 - Ideas are composed of raw, vague ideas that have yet to go through any formal valuation. Stage 2 - Qualified are researched and qualified PBIs awaiting refinement. Stage 1 - Ready are Discrete, refined RBIs that are read to be placed in your development team's sprint plans.

    A well-formed backlog can be thought of as a DEEP backlog:

    Detailed Appropriately: PBIs are broken down and refined, as necessary.

    Emergent: The backlog grows and evolves over time as PBIs are added and removed.

    Estimated: The effort a PBI requires is estimated at each tier.

    Prioritized: The PBI’s value and priority are determined at each tier.

    (Perforce, 2018)

    Distinguish your specific goals for refining in the product backlog vs. planning for a sprint itself

    Often backlog refinement is used interchangeably or considered a part of sprint planning. The reality is they are very similar, as the required participants and objectives are the same; however, there are some key differences.

    Backlog refinement versus Sprint planning. Differences in Objectives, Cadence and Participants

    Use quality filters to promote high value items into the delivery pipeline

    Product backlog has quality filters such as: Backlogged, Qualified and Ready. Sprint backlog has a backlog of accepted PBI's

    Basic scrum process

    The scrum process coordinates multiple stakeholders to deliver on business priorities.

    Prioritized Backlog, Sprint Backlog, Manage Delivery, Sprint Review, Product Release

    Capability: Product lifecycle management

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Informal or undocumented intake process.
    • Informal or undocumented delivery lifecycle.
    • Unstable or unpredictable throughput or quality.
    • Informal or undocumented testing and release processes.
    • Informal or undocumented organizational change management planning for each release.
    • Informal or undocumented compliance validation with every release.
    • Documented intake process with stakeholder prioritization of requests.
    • Consistent delivery lifecycle with stable and predictable throughput with an expected range of delivery variance.
    • Formal and documented testing and release processes.
    • Organizational change management planning for each major release.
    • Compliance validation with every major release.
    • Intake process using value drivers and prioritization criteria to sequence all items.
    • Consistent delivery lifecycle with stable and predictable throughput with little variance.
    • Risk-based and partially automated testing and release processes.
    • Organizational change management planning for all releases.
    • Automated compliance validation with every major release.
    • Intake process using enterprise value drivers and prioritization criteria to sequence all items.
    • Stable Agile DevOps with low variability and automation.
    • Risk-based automated and manual testing.
    • Multiple release channels based on risk. Automated build, validation, and rollback capabilities.
    • Cross-channel, integrated organizational change management for all releases.
    • Automated compliance validation with every change or release.

    Exercise 3.2.3 Assess your PLM capability proficiency

    1 hour
    1. Review the expectations for this capability and determine your current proficiency for each skill.
    2. Complete your assessment in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment tool.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.
    4. Review the skills map to identify strengths and areas of growth.

    Output

    • Product owner capability assessment

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment.

    Capabilities: Value realization

    Key performance indicators (KPIs)

    • Usability and user satisfaction: Assess satisfaction through usage monitoring and end-user feedback.
    • Value validation: Directly measure performance against defined value proposition, goals, and predicted ROI.
    • Fit for purpose: Verify the product addresses the intended purpose better than other options.

    Financial management

    • P&L: Manage each product as if it were its own business with profit and loss statements.
    • Acquisition cost/market growth: Define the cost of acquiring a new consumer, onboarding internal users, and increasing product usage.
    • User retention/market share: Verify product usage continues after adoption and solution reaches new user groups to increase value.

    Business model

    • Defines value proposition: Dedicate your primary focus to understanding and defining the value your product will deliver.
    • Market strategy and goals: Define your acquisition, adoption, and retention plan for users.
    • Financial model: Build an end-to-end financial model and plan for the product and all related operational support.

    “The competition is anyone the customer compares you with.”

    – Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom

    Value Realization: KPIs, Financial management, Business model

    Info-Tech Insight

    Most organizations stop with on-time and on-budget. True financial alignment needs to define and manage the full lifecycle P&L.

    Use a balanced value to establish a common definition of goals and value

    Value drivers are strategic priorities aligned to our enterprise strategy and translated through our product families. Each product and change has an impact on the value driver helping us reach our enterprise goals.

    Importance of the value driver multiplied by the Impact of value score is equal to the Value score.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your value drivers and impact helps estimate the expected value of roadmap items, prioritize roadmap and backlog items, and identify KPIs and OKRs to measure value realization and actual impact.

    Include balanced value as one criteria to guide better decisions

    Your balanced value is just one of many criteria needed to align your product goals and sequence roadmap items. Feasibility, delivery pipeline capacity, shared services, and other factors may impact the prioritization of backlog items.

    Build your balanced business value score by using four key value drivers.

    Determine your value drivers

    Competent organizations know that value cannot always be represented by revenue or reduced expenses. However, it is not always apparent how to envision the full spectrum of sources of value. Dissecting value by benefit type and the value source’s orientation allows you to see the many ways in which a product or service brings value to the organization.

    Business value matrix

    Graph with 4 quadrants representing Outward versus Inward, and Financial benefit versus Human benefit. The quadrants are Reach customers, Increase revenue/demonstrate value, Enhance services, Reduce costs.

    Financial benefits vs. improved capabilities

    Financial benefits refer to the degree to which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics and is often quite tangible.

    Human benefits refer to how a product or service can deliver value through a user’s experience.

    Inward vs. outward orientation

    Inward refers to value sources that have an internal impact and improve your organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in performing its operations.

    Outward refers to value sources that come from your interaction with external factors, such as the market or your customers.

    Exercise 3.2.4 Identify your business value drivers and sources of value

    1 hour
    1. Brainstorm the different types of business value that you produce on the sticky notes (one item per page). Draw from examples of products in your portfolio.
    2. Identify the most important value items for your organization (two to three per quadrant).
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook.

    Output

    • Product owner capability assessment

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook.

    My business value sources

    Graph with 4 quadrants representing Outward versus Inward, and Financial benefit versus Human benefit. The quadrants are Reach customers, Increase revenue/demonstrate value, Enhance services, Reduce costs.

    Capability: Value realization

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Product canvas or basic product positioning overview.
    • Simple budget or funding mechanism for changes.
    • Product demos and informal user feedback mechanisms.
    • Business value canvas or basic business model tied to roadmap funding.
    • Product funding tied to roadmap milestones and prioritization.
    • Defined KPIs /OKRs for roadmap delivery throughput and value realization measurement.
    • Business model with operating cost structures, revenue/value traceability, and market/user segments.
    • Scenario-based roadmap funding alignment.
    • Roadmap aligned KPIs /OKRs for delivery throughput and value realization measurement as a key factor in roadmap prioritization.
    • Business model tied to enterprise operating costs and value realization KPIs/OKRs.
    • P&L roadmap and cost accounting tied to value metrics.
    • Roadmap aligned enterprise and scenario-based KPIs /OKRs for delivery throughput and value realization measurement as a key factor in roadmap prioritization.

    Exercise 3.2.5 Assess your value realization capability proficiency

    1 hour
    1. Review the expectations for this capability and determine your current proficiency for each skill.
    2. Complete your assessment in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment tool.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.
    4. Review the skills map to identify strengths and areas of growth.

    Output

    • Product owner capability assessment

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment.

    Determine your product owner capability proficiency in regards to: Vision, Leadership, Product Lifecycle, and Value Realization

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem solved.

    Product ownership can be one of the most difficult challenges facing delivery and operations teams. By focusing on operational grouping and alignment of goals, organizations can improve their value realization at all levels in the organization.

    The foundation for delivering and enhancing products and services is rooted in the same capability model. Traditionally, product owners have focused on only a subset of skills and capabilities needed to properly manage and grow their products. The product owner capability model is a useful tool to ensure optimal performance from product owners and assess the right level of detail for each product within the product families.

    Congratulations. You’ve completed a significant step toward higher-value products and services.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as apart of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as apart of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1.1 Assess your real Agile skill proficiency

    Assess your skills and capabilities against the real Agile skills inventory

    2.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    Build a stakeholder management strategy.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Emily Archer

    Lead Business Analyst,
    Enterprise Consulting, authentic digital agency

    Emily Archer is a consultant currently working with Fortune 500 clients to ensure the delivery of successful projects, products, and processes. She helps increase the business value returned for organizations’ investments in designing and implementing enterprise content hubs and content operations, custom web applications, digital marketing, and e-commerce platforms.

    David Berg

    Founder & CTO
    Strainprint Technologies Inc.

    David Berg is a product commercialization expert who has spent the last 20 years delivering product management and business development services across a broad range of industries. Early in his career, David worked with product management and engineering teams to build core network infrastructure products that secure and power the internet we benefit from today. David’s experience also includes working with clean technologies in the area of clean power generation, agritech, and Internet of Things infrastructure. Over the last five years, David has been focused on his latest venture, Strainprint Technologies, a data and analytics company focused on the medical cannabis industry. Strainprint has built the largest longitudinal medical cannabis dataset in the world, with a goal to develop an understanding of treatment behavior, interactions, and chemical drivers to guide future product development.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Kathy Borneman

    Digital Product Owner, SunTrust Bank

    Kathy Borneman is a senior product owner who helps people enjoy their jobs again by engaging others in end-to-end decision making to deliver software and operational solutions that enhance the client experience and allow people to think and act strategically.

    Charlie Campbell

    Product Owner, Merchant e-Solutions

    Charlie Campbell is an experienced problem solver with the ability to quickly dissect situations and recommend immediate actions to achieve resolution, liaise between technical and functional personnel to bridge the technology and communication gap, and work with diverse teams and resources to reach a common goal.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Yarrow Diamond

    Sr. Director, Business Architecture
    Financial Services

    Yarrow Diamond is an experienced professional with expertise in enterprise strategy development, project portfolio management, and business process reengineering across financial services, healthcare and insurance, hospitality, and real estate environments. She has a master’s in Enterprise Architecture from Penn State University, LSSMBB, PMP, CSM, ITILv3.

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey, CBAP, PMI-PBA

    Enterprise Business Systems Analyst,
    Vertex, Inc.

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey has a history in software development and implementation as a Business Analyst and Project Manager for financial and taxation software vendors. Active in the International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA), Cari participated on the writing team for the BA Body of Knowledge 3.0 and the certification exam.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Kieran Gobey

    Senior Consultant Professional Services
    Blueprint Software Systems

    Kieran Gobey is an IT professional with 24 years of experience, focused on business, technology, and systems analysis. He has split his career between external and internal customer-facing roles, and this has resulted in a true understanding of what is required to be a Professional Services Consultant. His problem-solving skills and ability to mentor others have resulted in successful software implementations.

    Kieran’s specialties include deep system troubleshooting and analysis skills, facilitating communications to bring together participants effectively, mentoring, leadership, and organizational skills.

    Rupert Kainzbauer

    VP Product, Digital Wallets
    Paysafe Group

    Rupert Kainzbauer is an experienced senior leader with a passion for defining and delivering products that deliver real customer and commercial benefit. With a team of highly experienced and motivated product managers, he has successfully led highly complex, multi-stakeholder payments initiatives, from proposition development and solution design through to market delivery. Their domain experience is in building online payment products in high-risk and emerging markets, remittance, prepaid cards, and mobile applications.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Saeed Khan

    Founder,
    Transformation Labs

    Saeed Khan has been working in high tech for 30 years in Canada and the US and has held several leadership roles in Product Management in that time. He speaks regularly at conferences and has been writing publicly about technology product management since 2005.

    Through Transformation Labs, Saeed helps companies accelerate product success by working with product teams to improve their skills, practices, and processes. He is a cofounder of ProductCamp Toronto and currently runs a Meetup group and global Slack community called Product Leaders; the only global community of senior level product executives.

    Hoi Kun Lo

    Product Owner
    Nielsen

    Hoi Kun Lo is an experienced change agent who can be found actively participating within the IIBA and WITI groups in Tampa, FL and a champion for Agile, architecture, diversity, and inclusion programs at Nielsen. She is currently a Product Owner in the Digital Strategy team within Nielsen Global Watch Technology.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Abhishek Mathur

    Sr Director, Product Management
    Kasisto, Inc.

    Abhishek Mathur is a product management leader, an artificial intelligence practitioner, and an educator. He has led product management and engineering teams at Clarifai, IBM, and Kasisto to build a variety of artificial intelligence applications within the space of computer vision, natural language processing, and recommendation systems. Abhishek enjoys having deep conversations about the future of technology and helping aspiring product managers enter and accelerate their careers.

    Jeff Meister

    Technology Advisor and Product Leader

    Jeff Meister is a technology advisor and product leader. He has more than 20 years of experience building and operating software products and the teams that build them. He has built products across a wide range of industries and has built and led large engineering, design, and product organizations.

    Jeff most recently served as Senior Director of Product Management at Avanade, where he built and led the product management practice. This involved hiring and leading product managers, defining product management processes, solution shaping and engagement execution, and evangelizing the discipline through pitches, presentations, and speaking engagements.

    Jeff holds a Bachelor of Applied Science (Electrical Engineering) and a Bachelor of Arts from the University of Waterloo, an MBA from INSEAD (Strategy), and certifications in product management, project management, and design thinking.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Vincent Mirabelli

    Principal,
    Global Project Synergy Group

    With over 10 years of experience in both the private and public sectors, Vincent Mirabelli possesses an impressive track record of improving, informing, and transforming business strategy and operations through process improvement, design and re-engineering, and the application of quality to business analysis, project management, and process improvement standards.

    Oz Nazili

    VP, Product & Growth
    TWG

    Oz Nazili is a product leader with a decade of experience in both building products and product teams. Having spent time at funded startups and large enterprises, he thinks often about the most effective way to deliver value to users. His core areas of interest include Lean MVP development and data-driven product growth.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Mike Starkey

    Director of Engineering
    W.W. Grainger

    Mike Starkey is a Director of Engineering at W.W. Grainger, currently focusing on operating model development, digital architecture, and building enterprise software. Prior to joining W.W. Grainger, Mike held a variety of technology consulting roles throughout the system delivery lifecycle spanning multiple industries such as healthcare, retail, manufacturing, and utilities with Fortune 500 companies.

    Anant Tailor

    Cofounder and Head of Product
    Dream Payments Corp.

    Anant Tailor is a cofounder at Dream Payments where he currently serves as the COO and Head of Product, having responsibility for Product Strategy & Development, Client Delivery, Compliance, and Operations. He has 20+ years of experience building and operating organizations that deliver software products and solutions for consumers and businesses of varying sizes.

    Prior to founding Dream Payments, Anant was the COO and Director of Client Services at DonRiver Inc, a technology strategy and software consultancy that he helped to build and scale into a global company with 100+ employees operating in seven countries.

    Anant is a Professional Engineer with a Bachelor degree in Electrical Engineering from McMaster University and a certificate in Product Strategy & Management from the Kellogg School of Management at Northwestern University.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Angela Weller

    Scrum Master, Businessolver

    Angela Weller is an experienced Agile business analyst who collaborates with key stakeholders to attain their goals and contributes to the achievement of the company’s strategic objectives to ensure a competitive advantage. She excels when mediating or facilitating teams.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Product Delivery

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    Build Your Agile Acceleration Roadmap

    Quickly assess the state of your Agile readiness and plan your path forward to higher value realization.

    Implement Agile Practices That Work

    Improve collaboration and transparency with the business to minimize project failure.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

    Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

    Further the benefits of Agile by extending a scaled Agile framework to the business.

    Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

    Embrace a team sport culture built around continuous business-IT collaboration to deliver great products.

    Embed Security Into the DevOps Pipeline

    Shift security left to get into DevSecOps.

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    Execute a disciplined approach to rolling out Agile methods in the organization.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Application Portfolio Management

    APM Research Center

    See an overview of the APM journey and how we can support the pieces in this journey.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Streamline Application Maintenance

    Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

    Streamline Application Management

    Move beyond maintenance to ensuring exceptional value from your apps.

    Build an Application Department Strategy

    Delivering value starts with embracing what your department can do.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship

    Optimize Applications Release Management

    Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Value, Delivery Metrics, Estimation

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.

    Application Portfolio Assessment: End User Feedback

    Develop data-driven insights to help you decide which applications to retire, upgrade, re-train on, or maintain to meet the demands of the business.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations

    Don’t let bad estimates ruin good work.

    Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

    Commit to achievable software releases by grounding realistic expectations.

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

    Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

    Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    Deliver more projects by giving yourself the voice to say “no” or “not yet” to new projects.

    Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports

    Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Organizational Design and Performance

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Build a Strategic IT Workforce Plan

    Have the right people, in the right place, at the right time.

    Implement a New Organizational Structure

    Reorganizations are inherently disruptive. Implement your new structure with minimal pain for staff while maintaining IT performance throughout the change.

    Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    Don’t just measure engagement, act on it

    Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

    Set holistic measures to inspire employee performance.

    Bibliography (Product Management)

    “12th Annual State of Agile Report.” VersionOne, 9 April 2018. Web.

    A, Karen. “20 Mental Models for Product Managers.” Product Management Insider, Medium, 2 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Adams, Paul. “Product Teams: How to Build & Structure Product Teams for Growth.” Inside Intercom, 30 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Aghina, Handscomb, Ludolph, West, and Abby Yip, “How to select and develop individuals for successful agile teams: A practical guide” McKinsey & Company 20 Dec. 2018. Web.

    Agile Alliance. “Product Owner.” Agile Alliance. n.d. Web.

    Ambler, Scott W. "Communication on Agile Software Teams“, Agile Modeling. 2001-2022. Web.

    Ambysoft. “2018 IT Project Success Rates Survey Results.” Ambysoft. 2018. Web.

    Banfield, Richard, et al. “On-Demand Webinar: Strategies for Scaling Your (Growing) Enterprise Product Team.” Pluralsight, 31 Jan. 2018. Web.

    Beck, Beedle, van Bennekum, Cockburn, Cunningham, Fowler, Grenning, Highsmith, Hunt, Jeffries, Kern, Marick, Martin, Mellor, Schwaber, Sutherland, Thomas, "Manifesto for Agile Software Development." agilemanifesto.org. 2001

    Berez, Steve, et al. “How to Plan and budget for Agile at Scale.” Bain & Company, 08 Oct 2019. Web

    Blueprint. “10 Ways Requirements Can Sabotage Your Projects Right From the Start.” Blueprint. 2012. Web.

    Breddels, Dajo, and Paul Kuijten. “Product Owner Value Game.” Agile2015 Conference, Agile Alliance 2015. Web.

    Cagan, Martin. “Behind Every Great Product.” Silicon Valley Product Group. 2005. Web.

    Cohn, Mike. “What Is a Product?” Mountain Goat Software. 6 Sept. 2016. Web.

    Connellan, Thomas K. Inside the Magic Kingdom, Bard Press, 1997.

    Curphey, Mark. “Product Definition.” SlideShare, 25 Feb. 2007. Web.

    “Delegation Poker Product Image.” Management 3.0, n.d. Web.

    Distel, Dominic, et al. “Finding the sweet spot in product-portfolio management.’ McKinsey, 4 Dec. 2020. Web

    Eringa, Ron. “Evolution of the Product Owner.” RonEringa.com, 12 June 2016. Web.

    Fernandes, Thaisa. “Spotify Squad Framework - Part I.” PM101, Medium, 6 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Galen, Robert. “Measuring Product Ownership – What Does ‘Good’ Look Like?” RGalen Consulting, 5 Aug. 2015. Web.

    Grenny, Joseph. “The Best Teams Hold Themselves Accountable.” Harvard Business Review, 30 May 2014. Web.

    Halisky, Merland, and Luke Lackrone. “The Product Owner’s Universe.” Agile2016 Conference, Agile Alliance, 2016. Web.

    Bibliography (Product Management)

    IIBA "A Guide to the Business Analysis Body of Knowledge® (BABOK® Guide) v3" IIBA. 15 APR 2015

    Kamer, Jurriaan. “How to Build Your Own ‘Spotify Model’.” The Ready, Medium, 9 Feb. 2018. Web.

    Kendis Team. “Exploring Key Elements of Spotify’s Agile Scaling Model.” Scaled Agile Framework, Medium, 23 Jul. 2018. Web.

    Lindstrom, Lowell. “7 Skills You Need to Be a Great Product Owner.” Scrum Alliance, n.d. Web.

    Lukassen, Chris. “The Five Belts Of The Product Owner.” Xebia.com, 20 Sept. 2016. Web.

    Mankins, Michael. “The Defining Elements of a Winning Culture.” Bain, 19 Dec. 2013. Web.

    McCloskey, Heather. “Scaling Product Management: Secrets to Defeating Common Challenges.” ProductPlan, 12 July 2019. Web.

    McCloskey, Heather. “When and How to Scale Your Product Team.” UserVoice, 21 Feb. 2017. Web. Mironov, Rich. “Scaling Up Product Manager/Owner Teams.” Rich Mironov's Product Bytes, Mironov Consulting, 12 Apr. 2014. Web.

    Moore, Geoffrey A. “Crossing the Chasm, 3rd Edition.” Collins Business Essentials, 28 Jan 2014

    Oh, Paul. “How Mastering Resilience Can Help Drive Agile Transformations.” Why Innovation!, 10 Oct. 2019.

    Overeem, Barry. “A Product Owner Self-Assessment.” Barry Overeem, 6 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Overeem, Barry. “Retrospective: Using the Team Radar.” Barry Overeem, 27 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “How to Scale the Scrum Product Owner.” Roman Pichler, 28 June 2016 . Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Product Management Framework.” Pichler Consulting Limited, 2014. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Sprint Planning Tips for Product Owners.” LinkedIn, 4 Sept. 2018. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “What Is Product Management?” Pichler Consulting Limited, 26 Nov. 2014. Web.

    PMI "The high cost of low performance: the essential role of communications“. PMI Pulse of Profession, May 2013.

    Radigan,Dan. “Putting the ‘Flow' Back in Workflow With WIP Limits.” Atlassian, n.d. Web.

    Bibliography (Product Management)

    Rouse, Margaret. “Definition: product.” TechTarget, Sept. 2005. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on (Business) Value.” Scrum.org, 30 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Agile Product Management.” Scrum.org, 28 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Product Backlog Management.” Scrum.org, 5 Dec. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on the Product Vision.” Scrum.org, 29 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Starting Product Owners.” Scrum.org, 27 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Sharma, Rohit. “Scaling Product Teams the Structured Way.” Monetary Musings, 28 Nov. 2016. Web.

    Shirazi, Reza. “Betsy Stockdale of Seilevel: Product Managers Are Not Afraid To Be Wrong.” Austin Voice of Product, 2 Oct. 2018. Web.

    Spitz, Enid R. “The Three Kinds of Empathy: Emotional, Cognitive, Compassionate.” The Three Kinds of Empathy: Emotional, Cognitive, Compassionate. Heartmanity. Web.

    Steiner, Anne. “Start to Scale Your Product Management: Multiple Teams Working on Single Product.” Cprime, 6 Aug. 2019. Web.

    “The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, 2016. Web.

    “The Standish Group 2015 Chaos Report.” The Standish Group. 2015. Web.

    Theus, Andre. “When Should You Scale the Product Management Team?” ProductPlan, 7 May 2019. Web.

    Tolonen, Arto. “Scaling Product Management in a Single Product Company.” Smartly.io, 26 Apr. 2018. Web.

    Ulrich, Catherine. “The 6 Types of Product Managers. Which One Do You Need?” Medium, 19 Dec. 2017. Web.

    Verwijs, Christiaan. “Retrospective: Do The Team Radar.” The Liberators, Medium, 10 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Vlaanderen, Kevin. “Towards Agile Product and Portfolio Management”. Academia.edu. 2010. Web.

    Backlog

    2009 Business Analysis Benchmark Study.” IAG Consulting, 2009. Web.

    Armel, Kate. “Data-driven Estimation, Management Lead to High Quality.” Quantitative Software Management Inc, 2015. Web.

    Bradley, Marty. “Agile Estimation Guidance.” Leading Agile, 30 Aug. 2016. Web. Feb. 2019.

    CollabNet and VersionOne. “12th Annual State of Agile Report.” VersionOne, 9 April 2018. Web.

    Craveiro, João. “Marty meets Martin: connecting the two triads of Product Management.” Product Coalition, 18 Nov. 2017. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    “Enablers.” Scaled Agile, n.d. Web.

    “Epic.” Scaled Agile, n.d. Web.

    Fischer, Christian. “Scrum Compact.” Itemis, n.d. Web. Feb. 2019.

    Hackshall, Robin. “Product Backlog Refinement.” Scrum Alliance, 9 Oct. 2014. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Hartman, Bob. “New to agile? INVEST in good user stories.” Agile For All, 14 May 2009. Web.

    Huether, Derek. “Cheat Sheet for Product Backlog Refinement (Grooming).” Leading Agile, 2 Nov. 2013. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Karlsson, Johan. “Backlog Grooming: Must-Know Tips for High-Value Products.” Perforce, 18 May 2018. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Khan, Saeed. “Good Bye ‘Product Owner’, Hello ‘Backlog Manager.’” On Product Management, 27 June 2011. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Khan, Saeed. “Let’s End the Confusion: A Product Owner is NOT a Product Manager.” On Product Management, 14 July 2017. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Lawrence, Richard. “New Story Splitting Resource.” Agile For All. 27 Jan. 2012. Web. Feb. 2019.

    Leffingwell, Dean. “SAFe 4.0.” Scaled Agile Inc, 2017. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Lucero, Mario. “Product Backlog – Deep Model.” Agilelucero, 8 Oct. 2014. Web.

    “PI Planning.” Scaled Agile, n.d. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Roadmap and the Product Backlog.” Roman Pichler, 9 Sept. 2014. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Rubin, Kenneth S. Essential Scrum: A Practical Guide to the Most Popular Agile Process. Pearson Education, 2012.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Product Backlog Management.” Burozeven, 20 Nov. 2017. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Srinivasan, Vibhu. “Product Backlog Management: Tips from a Seasoned Product Owner.” Agile Alliance, n.d. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Todaro, Dave. “Splitting Epics and User Stories.” Ascendle, n.d. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    “What Characteristics Make Good Agile Acceptance Criteria?” Segue Technologies, 3 Sept. 2015. Web. Feb. 2019.

    Bibliography (Roadmap)

    Bastow, Janna. “Creating Agile Product roadmaps Everyone Understands.” ProdPad, 22 Mar. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Bastow, Janna. “The Product Tree Game: Our Favorite Way To Prioritize Features.” ProdPad, 21 Feb. 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Chernak, Yuri. “Requirements Reuse: The State of the Practice.” 2012 IEEE International Conference, 12 June 2012, Herzliya, Israel. Web.

    Fowler, Martin. “Application Boundary.” MartinFowler.com, 11 Sept. 2003. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Harrin, Elizabeth. “Learn What a Project Milestone Is.” The Balance Careers, 10 May 2018. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    “How to create a product roadmap.” Roadmunk, n.d. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “How to Master the 3 Horizons of Product Strategy.” Aha!, 24 Sept. 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “The Product Roadmap vs. the Technology Roadmap.” Aha!, 23 June 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018

    Juncal, Shaun. “How Should You Set Your Product Roadmap Timeframes?” ProductPlan, Web. Sept. 2018.

    Leffingwell, Dean. “SAFe 4.0.” Scaled Agile, 2017. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “What is a Minimum Viable Product (MVP).” Leanstack, 12 June 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. “10 Tips for Creating an Agile Product Roadmap.” Roman Pichler, 20 July 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. Strategize: Product Strategy and Product Roadmap Practices for the Digital Age. Pichler Consulting, 2016.

    “Product Roadmap Contents: What Should You Include?” ProductPlan, n.d. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Saez, Andrea. “Why Your Roadmap Is Not a Release Plan.” ProdPad, 23 October 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples.” Scrum.org, 7 Dec. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Bibliography (Vision and Canvas)

    Adams, Paul. “The Future Product Canvas.” Inside Intercom, 10 Jan. 2014. Web.

    “Aligning IT Funding Models to the Pace of Technology Change.” EDUCAUSE, 14 Dec. 2015. Web.

    Altman, Igor. “Metrics: Gone Bad.” OpenView, 10 Nov. 2009. Web.

    Barry, Richard. “The Product Vision Canvas – a Strategic Tool in Developing a Successful Business.” Polymorph, 2019. Web.

    “Business Canvas – Business Models & Value Propositions.” Strategyzer, 2019. Web.

    “Business Model Canvas.” Wikipedia: The Free Encyclopedia, 4 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Charak, Dinker. “Idea to Product: The Working Model.” ThoughtWorks, 13 July 2017. Web.

    Charak, Dinker. “Product Management Canvas - Product in a Snapshot.” Dinker Charak, 29 May 2017. Web.

    Chudley, James. “Practical Steps in Determining Your Product Vision (Product Tank Bristol, Oct. 2018).” LinkedIn SlideShare. Uploaded by cxpartners, 2 Nov. 2018. Web.

    Cowan, Alex. “The 20 Minute Business Plan: Business Model Canvas Made Easy.” COWAN+, 2019. Web.

    Craig, Desiree. “So You've Decided To Become A Product Manager.” Start it up, Medium, 2 June 2019. Web.

    “Create an Aha! Business Model Canvas Strategic Model.” Aha! Support, 2019. Web.

    Eick, Stephen. “Does Code Decay? Assessing the Evidence from Change Management Data.” IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering, vol. 27, no. 1, Jan. 2001, pp. 1-12. Web.

    Eriksson, Martin. “The next Product Canvas.” Mind the Product, 22 Nov. 2013. Web.

    “Experience Canvas: a Lean Approach: Atlassian Team Playbook.” Atlassian, 2019. Web.

    Freeman, James. “How to Make a Product Canvas – Visualize Your Product Plan.” Edraw, 23 Dec. 2019. Web.

    Fuchs, Danny. “Measure What Matters: 5 Best Practices from Performance Management Leaders.” OpenGov, 8 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Gorisse, Willem. “A Practical Guide to the Product Canvas.” Mendix, 28 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Gothelf, Jeff. “The Lean UX Canvas.” Jeff Gothelf, 15 Dec. 2016. Web.

    Gottesdiener, Ellen. “Using the Product Canvas to Define Your Product: Getting Started.” EBG Consulting, 15 Jan. 2019. Web.

    Gottesdiener, Ellen. “Using the Product Canvas to Define Your Product's Core Requirements.” EBG Consulting, 4 Feb. 2019. Web.

    Gray, Mark Krishan. “Should I Use the Business Model Canvas or the Lean Canvas?” Blog, Medium.com, 2019. Web.

    Bibliography (Vision and Canvas)

    Hanby, Jeff. "Software Maintenance: Understanding and Estimating Costs." LookFar, 21 Oct. 2016. Web.

    “How do you define a product?” Scrum.org, 4 Apr 2017, Web

    Juncal, Shaun. “How to Build a Product Roadmap Based on a Business Model Canvas.” ProductPlan, 19 June 2019. Web.

    “Lean Canvas Intro - Uber Example.” YouTube, uploaded by Railsware Product Academy, 12 Oct. 2018. Web.

    “Lesson 6: Product Canvas.” ProdPad Help Center, 2019. Web.

    Lucero, Mario. “The Product Canvas.” Agilelucero.com, 22 June 2015. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “Create a New Lean Canvas.” Canvanizer, 2019. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “Don't Write a Business Plan. Create a Lean Canvas Instead.” LEANSTACK, 2019. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “Why Lean Canvas vs Business Model Canvas?” Medium, 27 Feb. 2012. Web.

    Mirabelli, Vincent. “The Project Value Canvas.” Vincent Mirabelli, 2019. Web.

    Mishra, LN. “Business Analysis Canvas – The Ultimate Enterprise Architecture.” BA Times, 19 June 2019. Web.

    Muller. Jerry Z. “Why performance metrics isn’t always the best way to judge performance.” Fast Company, 3 April 2019. Web.

    Perri, Melissa. “What Is Good Product Strategy?” Melissa Perri, 14 July 2016. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “A Product Canvas for Agile Product Management, Lean UX, Lean Startup.” Roman Pichler, 16 July 2012. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Introducing the Product Canvas.” JAXenter, 15 Jan. 2013. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Roman's Product Canvas: Introduction.” YouTube, uploaded by Roman Pichler, 3 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Agile Vision Board: Vision and Product Strategy.” Roman Pichler, 10 May 2011. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Canvas – Template.” Roman Pichler, 11 Oct. 2016. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Canvas Tutorial V1.0.” LinkedIn SlideShare. Uploaded by Roman Pichler, 14 Feb. 2013. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Vision Board: Introduction.” YouTube uploaded by Roman Pichler, 3 Mar. 2017. Web.

    “Product Canvas PowerPoint Template.” SlideModel, 2019. Web.

    Bibliography (Vision and Canvas)

    “Product Canvas.” SketchBubble, 2019, Web.

    “Product Canvas.” YouTube, uploaded by Wojciech Szramowski, 18 May 2016. Web.

    “Product Roadmap Software to Help You Plan, Visualize, and Share Your Product Roadmap.” Productboard, 2019. Web.

    Roggero, Giulio. “Product Canvas Step-by-Step.” LinkedIn SlideShare, uploaded by Giulio Roggero, 18 May 2013. Web.

    Royce, Dr. Winston W. “Managing the Development of Large Software Systems.” Scf.usc.edu, 1970. Web.

    Ryan, Dustin. “The Product Canvas.” Qdivision, Medium, 20 June 2017. Web.

    Snow, Darryl. “Product Vision Board.” Medium, 6 May 2017. Web.

    Stanislav, Shymansky. “Lean Canvas – a Tool Your Startup Needs Instead of a Business Plan.” Railsware, 12 Oct. 2018. Web.

    Stanislav, Shymansky. “Lean Canvas Examples of Multi-Billion Startups.” Railsware, 20 Feb. 2019. Web.

    “The Product Vision Canvas.” YouTube, Uploaded by Tom Miskin, 20 May 2019. Web.

    Tranter, Leon. “Agile Metrics: the Ultimate Guide.” Extreme Uncertainty, n.d. Web.

    “Using Business Model Canvas to Launch a Technology Startup or Improve Established Operating Model.” AltexSoft, 27 July 2018. Web.

    Veyrat, Pierre. “Lean Business Model Canvas: Examples + 3 Pillars + MVP + Agile.” HEFLO BPM, 10 Mar. 2017. Web.

    “What Are Software Metrics and How Can You Track Them?” Stackify, 16 Sept. 2017. Web

    “What Is a Product Vision?” Aha!, 2019. Web.

    Supporting Research

    Transformation topics and supporting Info-Tech research to make the journey easier, with less rework.

    Supporting research and services

    Improving IT alignment

    Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy

    Success depends on IT initiatives clearly aligned to business goals, IT excellence, and driving technology innovation.

    Includes a "Strategy on a page" template

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Governance isn't optional, so keep it simple and make it flexible.

    Create an IT View of the Service Catalog

    Unlock the full value of your service catalog with technical components.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Supporting research and services

    Shifting toward Agile DevOps

    Agile/DevOps Resource Center

    Tools and advice you need to be successful with Agile.

    Develop Your Agile Approach for a Successful Transformation

    Understand Agile fundamentals, principles, and practices so you can apply them effectively in your organization.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

    Perform an Agile Skills Assessment

    Being Agile isn't about processes, it's about people.

    Define the Role of Project Management in Agile and Product-Centric Delivery

    Projects and products are not mutually exclusive.

    Supporting research and services

    Shifting toward product management

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    Build a Better Product Owner

    Strengthen the product owner's role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Supporting research and services

    Improving value and delivery metrics

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    Be careful what you ask for because you will probably get it.

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

    Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

    Supporting research and services

    Improving governance, prioritization, and value

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Governance isn't optional, so keep it simple and make it flexible.

    Maximize Business Value from IT Through Benefits Realization

    Embed benefits realization into your governance process to prioritize IT spending and confirm the value of IT.

    Drive Digital Transformation With Platform Strategies

    Innovate and transform your business models with digital platforms.

    Succeed With Digital Strategy Execution

    Building a digital strategy is only half the battle: create a systematic roadmap of technology initiatives to execute the strategy and drive digital transformation.

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Supporting research and services

    Improving requirements management and quality assurance

    Requirements Gathering for Small Enterprises

    Right-size the guidelines of your requirements gathering process.

    Improve Requirements Gathering

    Back to basics: great products are built on great requirements.

    Build a Software Quality Assurance Program

    Build quality into every step of your SDLC.

    Automate Testing to Get More Done

    Drive software delivery throughput and quality confidence by extending your automation test coverage.

    Manage Your Technical Debt

    Make the case to manage technical debt in terms of business impact.

    Create a Business Process Management Strategy

    Avoid project failure by keeping the "B" in BPM.

    Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook

    Optimize and automate your business processes with a user-centric approach.

    Create a Winning BPI Playbook

    Don't waste your time focusing on the "as is." Focus on the improvements and the "to be."

    Supporting research and services

    Improving release management

    Optimize Applications Release Management

    Build trust by right-sizing your process using appropriate governance.

    Streamline Application Maintenance

    Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

    Streamline Application Management

    Move beyond maintenance to ensure exceptional value from your apps.

    Optimize Change Management

    Right-size your change management process.

    Manage Your Technical Debt

    Make the case to manage technical debt in terms of business impact.

    Improve Application Development Throughput

    Drive down your delivery time by eliminating development inefficiencies and bottlenecks while maintaining high quality.

    Supporting research and services

    Business relationship management

    Embed Business Relationship Management

    Leverage knowledge of the business to become a strategic IT partner.

    Improving security

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    Create value by aligning your strategy to business goals and business risks.

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    Enhance your overall security posture with a defensible and prescriptive policy suite.

    Simplify Identity and Access Management

    Leverage risk- and role-based access control to quantify and simplify the IAM process.

    Supporting research and services

    Improving and supporting business-managed applications

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practices

    Ensure your software systems solution is architected to reflect stakeholders’ short-and long-term needs.

    Satisfy Digital End Users With Low- and No-Code

    Extend IT, automation, and digital capabilities to the business with the right tools, good governance, and trusted organizational relationships.

    Build Your First RPA Bot

    Support RPA delivery with strong collaboration and management foundations.

    Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation

    Embrace the symbiotic relationship between the human and digital workforce.

    Supporting research and services

    Improving business intelligence, analytics, and reporting

    Modernize Data Architecture for Measurable Business Results

    Enable the business to achieve operational excellence, client intimacy, and product leadership with an innovative, Agile, and fit-for-purpose data architecture practice.

    Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy

    Deliver actionable business insights by creating a business-aligned reporting and analytics strategy.

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Quality data drives quality business decisions.

    Design Data-as-a-Service

    Journey to the data marketplace ecosystems.

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

    Key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

    Build an Application Integration Strategy

    Level the table before assembling the application integration puzzle or risk losing pieces.

    Appendix

    Pulse survey results

    Pulse survey (N=18): What are the key components of product/service ownership?

    Pulse survey results: What are the key components of product/service ownership? Table shows answer options and responses in percentage.

    Pulse Survey (N=18): What are the key individual skills for a product/service owner?

    What are the key individual skills for a product/service owner? Table shows answer options and responses in percentage

    Other choices entered by respondents:

    • Anticipating client needs, being able to support delivery in all phases of the product lifecycle, adaptability, and ensuring a healthy backlog (at least two sprints’ worth of work).
    • Requirements elicitation and prioritization.
    • The key skill is being product-focused to ensure it provides value for competitive advantage.

    Pulse Survey (N=18): What are three things an outstanding product/service owner does that an average one doesn’t?

    What are three things an outstanding product/service owner does that an average one doesn't? Table shows results.

    Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}103|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation

    New technologies such as generative AI, quantum computing, 5G cellular networks, and next-generation robotics are ushering in an exciting new era of business transformation. By adopting an exponential IT mindset, IT leaders will be able to lead the autonomization of business capabilities.

    To capitalize on this upcoming opportunity, exponential IT leaders will have to become business advisors who unlock exponential value for the business and help mitigate exponential risk.

    Adopt a renewed focus on business outcomes to achieve autonomization

    An exponential IT mindset means that IT leaders will need to take a lead role in transforming business capabilities.

    • Embrace an expanded role as business advisors: CIOs will be tasked with greater responsibility for determining business strategy alongside the C-suite.
    • Know the rewards and mitigate the risks: New value chain opportunities and efficiency gains will create significant ROI. Protect these returns by mitigating higher risks to business continuity, information security, and delivery performance.
    • Plan to fully leverage technologies such as AI: It will be integral for IT to enable autonomous technologies in this new era of exponential technology progress.

    Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset Deck – An introduction to IT’s role in the autonomization era

    The role of IT has evolved throughout the past couple generations to enable fundamental business transformations. In the autonomization era, it will have to evolve again to lead the business through a world of exponential opportunity.

    • Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset Storyboard

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset

    Thrive through the next paradigm shift

    Executive Summary

    For more than 40 years, information technology has significantly transformed businesses, from the computerization of operations to the digital transformation of business models. As technological disruption accelerates exponentially, a world of exponential business opportunity is within reach.

    Newly emerging technologies such as generative AI, quantum computing, 5G cellular networks, and next-generation robotics are enabling autonomous business capabilities.

    The role of IT has evolved throughout the past couple generations to enable business transformations. In the autonomization era, it will have to evolve again. IT will have a new mission, an adapted governance structure, innovative capabilities, and an advanced partnership model.

    CIOs embracing exponential IT require a new mindset. Their IT practices will need to progress to the top of the maturity ladder as they make business outcomes their own.

    Over the past two generations, we have witnessed major technology-driven business transformations

    1980s

    Computerization

    The use of computer devices, networks, and applications became widespread in the enterprise. The focus was on improving the efficiency of back-office tasks.

    2000s

    Digitalization

    As the world became connected through the internet, new digitally enabled business models emerged in the enterprise. Orders were now being received online, and many products and services were partially or fully digitized for online fulfillment.

    Recent pandemic measures contributed to a marked acceleration in the digitalization of organizations

    The massive disruption resulting from pandemic measures led businesses to shift to more digital interactions with customers.

    The global average share of customer interactions that are digital went from 36% in December 2019 to 58% in July 2020.

    The global average share of customer interactions that are digital went from 36% to 58% in less than a year.*

    Moreover, companies across business areas have accelerated the digitization of their offerings.

    The global average share of partially or fully digitized products went from 35% in 2019 to 55% in July 2020.

    The global average share of partially or fully digitized products went from 35% to 55% in the same period.*

    The adoption of digitalized business models has accelerated during the pandemic. Post-pandemic, it is unlikely for adoption to recede.

    With more business applications ported to the cloud and more data available online, “digital-first” organizations started to envisage a next wave of automation.

    *Source: “How COVID-19 has pushed companies over the technology tipping point—and transformed business forever,” McKinsey & Company, 2020

    A majority of IT leaders plan to use artificial intelligence within their organizations in 2023

    In August 2022, Info-Tech surveyed 506 IT leaders and asked which tasks would involve AI in their organizations in 2023.

    Graph showing tasks that would involve AI in organizations in 2023.

    We found that 63% of IT leaders plan to use AI within their organizations to automate repetitive, low-level tasks by the end of 2023.

    With the release of the ChatGPT prototype in November 2022, setting a record for the fastest user growth (reaching 100 million active users just two months after launch), we foresee that AI adoption will accelerate significantly and its use will extend to more complex tasks.

    Newly emerging technologies and business realities are ushering in the next business transformation

    1980s

    Computerization

    2000s

    Digitalization

    2020s

    Autonomization

    As digitalization accelerates, a post-pandemic world with a largely online workforce and digitally transformed enterprise business models now enters an era where more business capabilities become autonomous, with humans at the center of a loop* that is gradually becoming larger.

    Deep Learning, Quantum Computing, 5G Networks, Robotics

    * Download Info-Tech’s CIO Trend Report 2019 – Become a Leader in the Loop

    The role of IT needs to evolve as it did through the previous two generations

    1980s

    Computerization

    IT professionals gathered functional requirements from the business to help automate back-office tasks and improve operational efficiency.

    2000s

    Digitalization

    IT professionals acquired business analysis skills and leveraged the SMAC (social, mobile, analytics, and cloud) stack to accelerate the automation of the front office and enable the digital transformation of business models.

    2020s

    Autonomization

    IT professionals will become business advisors and enable the establishment of autonomous yet differentiated business processes and capabilities.

    The autonomization era brings enormous opportunity for organizations, coupled with enormous risk

    Graph of Risk Severity versus Value Opportunity. Autonomization has a high value of opportunity and high risk severity.

    While some analysts have been quick to announce the demise of the IT department and the transition of the role of IT to the business, the budgets that CIOs control have continued to rise steadily over time.

    In a high-risk, high-reward endeavor to make business processes autonomous, the role of IT will continue to be pivotal, because while everyone in the organization will rush to seize the value opportunity, the technology risk will be left for IT to manage.

    Exponential IT represents a necessary change in a CIO’s focus to lead through the next paradigm shift

    EXPONENTIAL RISK

    Autonomous processes will integrate with human-led processes, creating risks to business continuity, information security, and quality of delivery. Supplier power will exacerbate business risks.

    EXPONENTIAL REWARD

    The efficiency gains and new value chains created through artificial intelligence, robotics, and additive manufacturing will be very significant. Most of this value will be realized through the augmentation of human labor.

    EXPONENTIAL DEMAND

    Autonomous solutions for productivity and back-office applications will eventually become commoditized and provided by a handful of large vendors. There will, however, be a proliferation of in-house algorithms and workflows to autonomize the middle and front office, offered by a busy landscape of industry-centric capability vendors.

    EXPONENTIAL IT

    Exponential IT involves IT leading the cognitive reengineering of the organization with evolved practices for:

    • IT governance
    • Asset management
    • Vendor management
    • Data management
    • Business continuity management
    • Information security management

    To succeed, IT will have to adopt different priorities in its mission, governance, capabilities, and partnerships

    Digitalization

    A Connected World

    Progressive IT

    • Mission

      Enable the digital transformation of the business
    • Governance

      Service metrics, security perimeters, business intelligence, compliance management
    • Capabilities

      Service management, business analysis, application portfolio management, data management
    • Partnerships

      Management of technology service agreements

    Autonomization

    An Exponential World

    Exponential IT

    • Mission

      Lead the business through autonomization.
    • Governance

      Outcome-based metrics, zero trust, ESG reporting, digital trust
    • Capabilities

      Experience management, business advisory, enterprise innovation, data differentiation
    • Partnerships

      Management of business capability agreements

    Fortune favors the bold: The CIO now has an opportunity to cement their role as business leader

    Levels of digital maturity.  From bottom: Unstable - inability to consistently deliver basic services, Firefighter - Reliable infrastructure and IT service desk, Trusted Operator - Enablement of business through applications and work orders, Business Partner - Effective delivery of strategic business projects, Innovator - Information and technology as a competitive advantage.

    Research has shown that companies that are more digitally mature have higher growth than the industry average. In these companies, the CIO is part of the executive management team.

    And while the role of the CIO is generally tied to their mandate within the organization, we have seen their role progress from doer to leader as IT climbs the maturity ladder.

    As companies strive to succeed in the next phase of technology-driven transformation, CIOs have an opportunity to demonstrate their business leadership. To do so, they will have to provide exceptionally mature services while owning business targets.

    2020 CIO Priorities Report

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}97|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • The velocity and magnitude of technology changes today has increased dramatically compared to anything that has come before.
    • The velocity and magnitude of advancements in technology has always seemed unprecedented in every wave of technology change we have experienced over the past 40 years. With each new wave of innovation, “unprecedented” is redefined to a new level, and so it remains true that today’s CIO is faced with unprecedented levels of change as a direct result of emerging technologies.
    • What is different today is that we are at the point where the emerging technology itself is now capable of accelerating the pace of change even more through artificial intelligence capabilities.
    • If we are to realize the business value through the adoption of emerging technologies, CIOs must address significant challenges. We believe addressing these challenges lies in the CIO priorities for 2020.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • First there was IT/business alignment, then there was IT/business integration – both states characterized as IT “getting on the same page” as the business. In the context of emerging technologies, the CIO should no longer be focused on getting on the same page as the CEO.
    • Today it is about the CEO and the CIO collaborating to write a new book about convergence of all things: technology (infrastructure and applications), people (including vendors), process, and data.
    • Digital transformation and adoption of emerging technologies is not a goal, it is a journey – a means to the end, not the end unto itself.

    Impact and Result

    • Use Info-Tech's 2020 CIO Priorities Report to ascertain, based on our research, what areas of focus for 2020 are critical for success in adopting emerging technologies.
    • Adopting these technologies requires careful planning and consideration for what is critical to your business customers.
    • This report provides focus on the business benefits of the technology and not just the capabilities themselves. It puts the CIO in a position to better understand the true value proposition of any of today’s technology advancements.

    2020 CIO Priorities Report Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to understand the top five priorities for CIOs in 2020 and why these are so critical to success.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Refine and adapt processes

    Learn about how processes can make or break your adoption of emerging technologies.

    • 2020 CIO Priorities Report – Priority 1: Refine and Adapt Processes

    2. Re-invent IT as collaboration engine

    Learn about how IT can transform its role within the organization to optimize business value.

    • 2020 CIO Priorities Report – Priority 2: Re-Invent IT as Collaboration Engine

    3. Acquire and retain talent for roles in emerging technologies

    Learn about how IT can attract and keep employees with the skills and knowledge needed to adopt these technologies for the business.

    • 2020 CIO Priorities Report – Priority 3: Acquire and Retain Talent for Roles in Emerging Technologies

    4. Define and manage cybersecurity and cyber resilience requirements related to emerging technologies

    Understand how the adoption of emerging technologies has created new levels of risk and how cybersecurity and resilience can keep pace.

    • 2020 CIO Priorities Report – Priority 4: Define and Manage Cybersecurity and Cyber Resilience Requirements Related to Emerging Technologies

    5. Leverage emerging technology to create Wow! customer experiences

    Learn how IT can leverage emerging technology for its own customers and those of its business partners.

    • 2020 CIO Priorities Report – Priority 5: Leverage Emerging Technology to Create Wow! Customer Experiences
    [infographic]

    Cut Cost Through Effective IT Category Planning

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}213|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • IT departments typically approach sourcing a new vendor or negotiating a contract renewal as an ad hoc event.
    • There is a lack of understanding on how category planning governance can save money.
    • IT vendor “go to market” or sourcing activities are typically not planned and are a reaction to internal client demands or vendor contract expiration.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Lack of knowledge of the benefits and features of category management, including the perception that the sourcing process takes too long, are two of the most common challenges that prevent IT from category planning.
    • Other challenges include the traditional view of contract renegotiation and vendor acquisition as a transactional event vs. an ongoing strategic process.
    • Finally, allocating resources and time to collect the data, vendor information, and marketing analysis prevents us from creating category plans.

    Impact and Result

    • An IT category plan establishes a consistent and proactive methodology or process to sourcing activities such as request for information (RFI), request for proposals, (RFPs), and direct negotiations with a specific vendor or“targeted negotiations” such as renewals.
    • The goal of an IT category plan is to leverage a strategic approach to vendor selection while identify cost optimizing opportunities that are aligned with IT strategy and budget objectives.

    Cut Cost Through Effective IT Category Planning Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should create an IT category plan to reduce your IT cost, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create an IT category plan

    Use our three-step approach of Organize, Design, and Execute an IT Category Plan to get the most out of your IT budget while proactively planning your vendor negotiations.

    • IT Category Plan
    • IT Category Plan Metrics
    • IT Category Plan Review Presentation
    [infographic]

    Project Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}48|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}48|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $303,499
    • member rating average days saved: 42
    • Parent Category Name: Project Portfolio Management and Projects
    • Parent Category Link: /ppm-and-projects

    The challenge

    • Ill-defined or even lack of upfront project planning will increase the perception that your IT department cannot deliver value because most projects will go over time and budget.
    • The perception is those traditional ways of delivering projects via the PMBOK only increase overhead and do not have value. This is less due to the methodology and more to do with organizations trying to implement best-practices that far exceed their current capabilities.
    • Typical best-practices are too clinical in their approach and place unrealistic burdens on IT departments. They fail to address the daily difficulties faces by staff and are not sized to fit your organization.
    • Take a flexible approach and ensure that your management process is a cultural and capacity fit for your organization. Take what fits from these frameworks and embed them tailored into your company.

    Our advice

    Insight

    • The feather-touch is often the right touch. Ensure that you have a lightweight approach for most of your projects while applying more rigor to the more complex and high-risk developments.
    • Pick the right tools. Your new project management processes need the right tooling to be successful. Pick a tool that is flexible enough o accommodate projects of all sizes without imposing undue governance onto smaller projects.
    • Yes, take what fits within your company from frameworks, but there is no cherry-picking. Ensure your processes stay in context: If you do not inform for effective decision-making, all will be in vain. Develop your methods such that guide the way to big-picture decision taking and support effective portfolio management.

    Impact and results 

    • The right amount of upfront planning is a function of the type of projects you have and your company. The proper levels enable better scope statements, better requirements gathering, and increased business satisfaction.
    • An investment in a formal methodology is critical to projects of all sizes. An effective process results in more successful projects with excellent business value delivery.
    • When you have a repeatable and consistent approach to project planning and execution, you can better communicate between the IT project managers and decision-makers.
    • Better communication improves the visibility of the overall project activity within your company.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started.

    Read our executive brief to understand why you should tailor project management practices to the type of projects you do and your company and review our methodology. We show you how we can support you.

    Lay the groundwork for project management success

    Assess your current capabilities to set the right level of governance.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 1: Lay the Groundwork for PM Success (ppt)
    • Project Management Triage Tool (xls)
    • COBIT BAI01 (Manage Programs and Projects) Alignment Workbook (xls)
    • Project Level Definition Matrix (xls)
    • Project Level Selection Tool (xls)
    • Project Level Assessment Tool (xls)
    • Project Management SOP Template (doc)

    Small project require a lightweight framework

    Increase small project's throughput.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 2: Build a Lightweight PM Process for Small Initiatives (ppt)
    • Level 1 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Level 1 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Level 1 Project Closure Checklist Template (doc)

    Build the standard process medium and large-scale projects

    The standard process contains fully featured initiation and planning.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 3: Establish Initiation and Planning Protocols for Medium-to-Large Projects (ppt)
    • Project Stakeholder and Impact Assessment Tool (xls)
    • Level 2 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Level 3 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Kick-Off Meeting Agenda Template (doc)
    • Scope Statement Template (doc)
    • Project Staffing Plan(xls)
    • Communications Management Plan Template (doc)
    • Customer/Sponsor Project Status Meeting Template (doc)
    • Level 2 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Level 3 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Quality Management Workbook (xls)
    • Benefits Management Plan Template (xls)
    • Risk Management Workbook (xls)

    Build a standard process for the execution and closure of medium to large scale projects

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 4: Develop Execution and Closing Procedures for Medium-to-Large Projects (ppt)
    • Project Team Meeting Agenda Template (doc)
    • Light Project Change Request Form Template (doc)
    • Detailed Project Change Request Form Template (doc)
    • Light Recommendation and Decision Tracking Log Template (xls)
    • Detailed Recommendation and Decision Tracking Log Template (xls)
    • Deliverable Acceptance Form Template (doc)
    • Handover to Operations Template (doc)
    • Post-Mortem Review Template (doc)
    • Final Sign-Off and Acceptance Form Template (doc)

    Implement your project management standard operating procedures (SOP)

    Develop roll-out and training plans, implement your new process and track metrics.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 5: Implement Your PM SOP (ppt)
    • Level 2 Project Management Plan Template (doc)
    • Project Management Process Costing Tool (xls)
    • Project Management Process Training Plan Template (doc)
    • Project Management Training Monitoring Tool (xls)
    • Project Management Process Implementation Timeline Tool (MS Project)
    • Project Management Process Implementation Timeline Tool (xls)

     

     

    Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}203|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • The immaturity of the big data market means that organizations lack examples and best practices to follow, and they are often left trailblazing their own paths.
    • Experienced and knowledgeable big data professionals are limited and without creative resourcing; IT might struggle to fill big data positions.
    • The term NoSQL has become a catch-all phrase for big data technologies; however, the technologies falling under the umbrella of NoSQL are disparate and often misunderstood. Organizations are at risk of adopting incorrect technologies if they don’t take the time to learn the jargon.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • NoSQL plays a key role in the emergence of the big data market, but it has not made relational databases outdated. Successful big data strategies can be conducted using SQL, NoSQL, or a combination of the two.
    • Assign a Data Architect to oversee your initiative. Hire or dedicate someone who has the ability to develop both a short-term and long-term vision and that has hands-on experience with data management, mining and modeling. You will still need someone (like a database administrator) who understands the database, the schemas, and the structure.
    • Understand your data before you attempt to use it. Take a master data management approach to ensure there are rules and standards for managing your enterprise’s data, and take extra caution when integrating external sources.

    Impact and Result

    • Assess whether SQL, NoSQL, or a combination of both technologies will provide you with the appropriate capabilities to achieve your business objectives and gain value from your data.
    • Form a Big Data Team to bring together IT and the business in order to leave a successful initiative.
    • Conduct ongoing training with your personnel to ensure up-to-date skills and end-user understanding.
    • Frequently scan the big data market space to identify new technologies and opportunities to help optimize your big data strategy.

    Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop a big data strategy

    Know where to start and where to focus attention in the implementation of a big data strategy.

    • Storyboard: Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms

    2. Assess the appropriateness of big data technologies

    Decide the most correct tools to use in order to solve enterprise data management problems.

    • Big Data Diagnostic Tool

    3. Determine the TCO of a scale out implementation

    Compare the TCO of a SQL (scale up) with a NoSQL (scale out) deployment to determine whether NoSQL will save costs.

    • Scale Up vs. Scale Out TCO Tool
    [infographic]

    Cybersecurity in Healthcare 2024

    Healthcare cybersecurity is a major concern for healthcare organizations and patients alike. In 2024, the healthcare industry faces several cybersecurity challenges, including the growing threat of ransomware, the increasing use of mobile devices in healthcare, and the need to comply with new regulations.

    Continue reading

    IT Metrics and Dashboards During a Pandemic

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}118|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Performance Measurement
    • Parent Category Link: /performance-measurement

    The ways you measure success as a business are based on the typical business environment, but during a crisis like a pandemic, the business environment is rapidly changing or significantly different.

    • How do you assess the scope of the risk?
    • How do you quickly align your team to manage new risks?
    • How do you remain flexible enough to adapt to a rapidly changing situation?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Measure what you have the data for and focus on managing the impacts to your employees, customers, and suppliers. Be willing to make decisions based on imperfect data. Don’t forget to keep an eye on the long-term objectives and remember that how you act now can reflect on your business for years to come.

    Impact and Result

    Use Info-Tech’s approach to:

    • Quickly assess the risk and identify critical items to manage.
    • Communicate what your decisions are based on so teams can either quickly align or challenge conclusions made from the data.
    • Quickly adjust your measures based on new information or changing circumstances.
    • Use the tools you already have and keep it simple.

    IT Metrics and Dashboards During a Pandemic Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to develop your temporary crisis dashboard.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Consider your organizational goals

    Identify the short-term goals for your organization and reconsider your long-term objectives.

    • Crisis Temporary Measures Dashboard Tool

    2. Build a temporary data collection and dashboard method

    Determine your tool for data collection and your data requirements and collect initial data.

    3. Implement a cadence for review and action

    Determine the appropriate cadence for reviewing the dashboard and action planning.

    [infographic]

    Build a Continual Improvement Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}463|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • IT managers must work hard to maintain and improve service quality or risk performance deterioration over time.
    • Leadership may feel lost about what to do next and which initiatives have higher priority for improvement.
    • The backlog of improvement initiatives makes the work even harder. Managers should involve the right people in the process and build a team that is responsible to monitor, measure, prioritize, implement, and test improvements.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Without continual improvement, sustained service quality will be temporary. Organizations need to put in place an ongoing process to detect potential services, enhance their procedures, and sustain their performance, whatever the process maturity is.

    Impact and Result

    • Set strategic vision for the continual improvement program.
    • Build a team to set regulations, processes, and audits for the program.
    • Set measurable targets for the program.
    • Identify and prioritize improvement initiatives.
    • Measure and monitor progress to ensure initiatives achieve the desired outcome.
    • Apply lessons learned to the next initiatives.

    Build a Continual Improvement Program Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Continual Improvement Program – A step-by-step document to walk you through building a plan for efficient IT continual improvement.

    This storyboard will help you craft a continual improvement register and a workflow to ensure sustained service improvements that fulfill ongoing increases in stakeholder expectations.

    • Build a Continual Improvement Program Storyboard

    2. Continual Improvement Register and Workflow – Structured documents to help you outline improvement initiatives, prioritize them, and build a dashboard to streamline tracking.

    Use the Continual Improvement Register and Continual Improvement Workflow to help you brainstorm improvement items, get a better visibility into the items, and plan to execute improvements.

    • Continual Improvement Register
    • Continual Improvement Workflow (Visio)
    • Continual Improvement Workflow (PDF)
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Build a Continual Improvement Program

    Don’t stop with process standardization; plan to continually improve and help those improvements stick.

    Analyst Perspective

    Go beyond standardizing basics

    IT managers often learn how to standardize IT services. Where they usually fail is in keeping these improvements sustainable. It’s one thing to build a quality process, but it’s another challenge entirely to keep momentum and know what to do next.

    To fill the gap, build a continual improvement plan to continuously increase value for stakeholders. This plan will help connect services, products, and practices with changing business needs.

    Without a continual improvement plan, managers may find themselves lost and wonder what’s next. This will lead to misalignment between ongoing and increasingly high stakeholder expectations and your ability to fulfill these requirements.

    Build a continual improvement program to engage executives, leaders, and subject matter experts (SMEs) to go beyond break fixes, enable proactive enhancements, and sustain process changes.

    Photo of Mahmoud Ramin, Ph.D., Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group. Mahmoud Ramin, Ph.D.
    Senior Research Analyst
    Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Even high-quality services and products need to be aligned with rising stakeholder expectations to sustain operational excellence.
    • Without the right leadership, commitment, and processes, improvements in service quality can be difficult to sustain.
    • Continual improvement is not only a development plan but also an organizational culture shift, which makes stakeholder buy-in even challenging.

    Common Obstacles

    • IT managers must work hard to maintain and improve service quality or risk performance deterioration over time.
    • Leadership feels lost about what to do next and which initiatives have higher priority for improvement.
    • A backlog of improvement initiatives makes the work even harder. Managers should involve the right people in the process and build a team that is responsible for monitoring, measuring, prioritizing, implementing, and testing improvements.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Set a strategic vision for the continual improvement program.
    • Build a team to set regulations, processes, and audits for the program.
    • Set measurable targets for the program.
    • Identify and prioritize improvement initiatives.
    • Measure and monitor progress to ensure initiatives achieve the desired outcome.
    • Apply lessons learned to the next initiatives.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Without continual improvement, any process maturity achieved around service quality will not be sustained. Organizations need to put in place an ongoing program to maintain their current maturity and continue to grow and improve by identifying new services and enhancing existing processes.

    Purpose of continual improvement

    There should be alignment between ongoing improvements of business products and services and management of these products and services. Continual improvement helps service providers adapt to changing environments. No matter how critical the service is to the business, failure to continually improve reduces the service value.

    Image of a notebook with an illustration titled 'Continuous Improvement'.

    Continual improvement is one of the five elements of ITIL’s Service Value System (SVS).

    Continual improvement should be documented in an improvement register to record and manage improvement initiatives.

    Continual improvement is a proactive approach to service management. It involves measuring the effectiveness and efficiency of people, processes, and technology to:

    • Identify areas for improvement.
    • Adapt to changes in the business environment.
    • Align the IT strategy to organizational goals.

    A continual improvement process helps service management move away from a reactive approach that focuses only on fixing problems as they occur.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure the basics are in place before you embark on a continual improvement initiative.

    Benefits of embedding a cross-organizational continual improvement approach

    Icon of a computer screen. Encourage end users to provide feedback on service quality. Icon of a crossed pencil and wrench.

    Provide an opportunity to stakeholders to define requirements and raise their concerns.

    Icon of a storefront.

    Embed continual improvement in all service delivery procedures.

    Icon of chevrons moving backward.

    Turn failures into improvement opportunities rather than contributing to a blame culture.

    Icon of a telescope.

    Improve practice effectiveness that enhances IT efficiency.

    Icon of a thumbs up in a speech bubble.

    Improve end-user satisfaction that positively impacts brand reputation.

    Icon of shopping bags.

    Improve operational costs while maintaining a high level of satisfaction.

    Icon of a magnifying glass over a map marker.

    Help the business become more proactive by identifying and improving services.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It’s the responsibility of the organization’s leaders to develop and promote a continual improvement culture. Work with the business unit leads and communicate the benefits of continual improvement to get their buy-in for the practice and achieve the long-term impact.

    Build a feedback program to get input into where improvement initiatives are needed

    A well-maintained continual improvement process creates a proper feedback mechanism for the following stakeholder groups:
    • Users
    • Suppliers
    • Service delivery team members
    • Service owners
    • Sponsors
    An efficient feedback mechanism should be constructed around the following initiatives:
    Target with an arrow in the bullseye. The arrow has four flags: 'Perceived value by users', 'Service effectiveness', 'Service governance', and 'Service demand'.
    Stakeholders who participate in feedback activities should feel comfortable providing suggestions for improvement.

    Work closely with the service desk team to build communication channels to conduct surveys. Avoid formal bureaucratic communications and enforce openness in communicating the value of feedback the stakeholders can provide.

    Info-Tech Insight

    When conducting feedback activities with users, keep surveys anonymous and ensure users’ information is kept confidential. Make sure everyone else is comfortable providing feedback in a constructive way so that you can seek clarification and create a feedback loop.

    Implement an iterative continual improvement model and ensure that your services align with your organizational vision

    Build a six-step process for your continual improvement plan. Make it a loop, in which each step becomes an input for the next step. A cycle around a dartboard with numbered steps: '01 Determine your goals', '02 Define the process team', '03 Determine initiatives', '04 Prioritize initiatives', '05 Execute improvement', '06 Establish a learning culture'.

    1. Determine your goals

    A vision statement communicates your desired future state of the IT organization.

    Your IT goals should always support your organizational goals. IT goals are high-level objectives that the IT organization needs to achieve to reach a target state.
    A cycle of the bolded statements on the right surrounding a dartboard with two bullseyes.

    Understand the high-level business objectives to set the vision for continual improvement in a way that will align IT strategies with business strategies.

    Obtaining a clear picture of your organization’s goals and overall corporate strategy is one of the crucial first steps to continual improvement and will set the stage for the metrics you select. Document your continual improvement program goals and objectives.

    Knowing what your business is doing and understanding the impact of IT on the business will help you ensure that any metrics you collect will be business focused.

    Understanding the long-term vision of the business and its appetite for commitment and sponsorship will also inform your IT strategy and continual improvement goals.

    Assess the future state

    At this stage, you need to visualize improvement, considering your critical success factors.

    Critical success factors (CSFs) are higher-level goals or requirements for success, such as improving end-user satisfaction. They’re factors that must be met in order to reach your IT and business strategic vision.

    Select key performance indicators (KPIs) that will identify useful information for the initiative: Define KPIs for each CSF. These will usually involve a trend, as an increase or decrease in something. If KPIs already exist for your IT processes, re-evaluate them to assess their relevance to current strategy and redefine if necessary. Selected KPIs should provide a full picture of the health of targeted practice.

    KPIs should cover these four vectors of practice performance:

    1. Quantity
      How many continual improvement initiatives are in progress
    2. Quality
      How well you implemented improvements
    3. Timeliness
      How long it took to get continual improvement initiatives done
    4. Compliance
      How well processes and controls are being executed, such as system availability
    Cross-section of a head split into sections with icons in the middle sections.

    Examples of key CSFs and KPIs for continual improvement

    CSF

    KPI

    Adopt and maintain an effective approach for continual improvement Improve stakeholder satisfaction due to implementation of improvement initiatives.
    Enhance stakeholder awareness about continual improvement plan and initiatives.
    Increase continual improvement adoption across the organization.
    Commit to effective continual improvement across the business Improve the return on investment.
    Increase the impact of the improvement initiatives on process maturity.
    Increase the rate of successful improvement initiatives.

    Prepare a vision statement to communicate the improvement strategy

    IT Implications + Business Context –› IT Goals
    • IT implications are derived from the business context and inform goals by aligning the IT goals with the business context.
    • Business context encompasses an understanding of the factors impacting the business from various perspectives, how the business makes decisions, and what it is trying to achieve.
    • IT goals are high-level, specific objectives that the IT organization needs to achieve to reach the target state. IT goals begin a process of framing what IT as an organization needs to be able to do in the target state.

    IT goals will help identify the target state, IT capabilities, and the initiatives that will need to be implemented to enable those capabilities.

    The vision statement is expressed in the present tense. It seeks to articulate the desired role of IT and how IT will be perceived.

    Strong IT vision statements have the following characteristics:
    Arrow pointing right. Describe a desired future
    Arrow pointing right. Focus on ends, not means
    Arrow pointing right. Communicate promise
    Arrow pointing right. Work as an elevator pitch:
    • Concise; no unnecessary words
    • Compelling
    • Achievable
    • Inspirational
    • Memorable

    2. Define the process team

    The structure of each continual improvement team depends on resource availability and competency levels.

    Make sure to allocate continual improvement activities to the available resources and assess the requirement to bring in others to fulfill all tasks.

    Brainstorm what steps should be included in a continual improvement program:

    • Who is responsible for identifying, logging, and prioritizing improvement opportunities?
    • Who makes the business case for improvement initiatives?
    • Who is the owner of the register, responsible for documenting initiatives and updating their status?
    • Who executes implementation?
    • Who evaluates implementation success?
    Match stakeholder skill sets with available resources to ensure continual improvement processes are handled properly. Brainstorm skills specific to the program:
    • Knowledge of provided products and services.
    • Good understanding of organization’s goals and objectives.
    • Efficiency in collecting and measuring metrics, understanding company standards and policies, and presenting them to impacted stakeholders.
    • Competency in strategic thinking and aligning the organization’s goals with improvement initiatives.

    Enable the continual improvement program by clarifying responsibilities

    Determine roles and responsibilities to ensure accountability

    The continual improvement activities will only be successful if specific roles and responsibilities are clearly identified.

    Depending on available staff and resources, you may be able to have full-time continual improvement roles, or you may include continual improvement activities in individuals’ job descriptions.

    Each improvement action that you identify should have clear ownership and accountability to ensure that it is completed within the specified timeframe.

    Roles and responsibilities can be reassigned throughout the continual improvement process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Create cross-functional teams to improve perspective and not focus on only one small group when trying to problem solve. Having other teams hear and reframe the issue or talk about how they can help to solve issues as a team can create bigger solutions that will help the entire IT team, not just one group.

    Consider assigning dedicated continual improvement roles

    Silhouette of a business person.
    CI Coordinator

    Continual improvement coordinators are responsible for moving projects to the implementation phase and monitoring all continual improvement roles.

    Silhouette of a business person.
    Business Owner

    Business owners are accountable for business governance, compliance, and ROI analysis. They are responsible for operational and monetary aspects of the business.

    Silhouette of a business person.
    IT Owner

    IT owners are responsible for developing the action plan and ensuring success of the initiatives. They are usually the subject matter experts, focusing on technical aspects.

    3. Determine improvement initiatives

    Businesses usually make the mistake of focusing too much on making existing processes better while missing gaps in their practices.

    Gather stakeholder feedback to help you evaluate the maturity levels of IT practices Sample of the End User Satisfaction Survey.

    You need to understand the current state of service operations to understand how you can provide value through continual improvement. Give everyone an opportunity to provide feedback on IT services.

    Use Info-Tech’s End User Satisfaction Survey to define the state of your core IT services.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Become proactive to improve satisfaction. Continual improvement is not only about identifying pain points and improving them. It enables you to proactively identify initiatives for further service improvement using both practice functionality and technology enablement.

    Understand the current state of your IT practices

    Determine the maturity level of your IT areas to help you understand which processes need improvement. Involve the practice team in maturity assessment activities to get ideas and input from them. This will also help you get their buy-in and engagement for improvement.

    Leverage performance metrics to analyze performance level. Metrics play a key role in understanding what needs improvement. After you implement metrics, have an impact report regularly generated to monitor them.

    Use problem management to identify root causes for the identified gaps. Potential sources of problems can be:

    • Recurring issues that may be an indicator of an underlying problem.
    • Business processes or service issues that are not IT related, such as inefficient business process or service design issues.

    Establish an improvement roadmap and execute initiatives

    Build a continual improvement register (CIR) for your target initiatives

    A CIR is a document used for recording your action plan from the beginning to the end of the improvement project.

    If you just sit and plan for improvements without acting on them, nothing will improve. CIR helps you create an action plan and allows you to manage, track, and prioritize improvement suggestions.

    Consider tracking the following information in your CIR, adjusted to meet the needs of your organization:

    Information

    Description

    Business value impact Identify approved themes or goals that each initiative should apply to. These can and should change over time based on changing business needs.
    Effort/cost Identify the expected effort or cost the improvement initiative will require.
    Priority How urgent is the improvement? Categorize based on effort, cost, and risk levels.
    Status Ensure each initiative has a status assigned that reflects its current state.
    Timeline List the timeframe to start the improvement initiative based on the priority level.
    CI functional groups Customize the functional groups in your CI program

    Populate your register with ideas that come from your first round of assessments and use this document to continually add and track new ideas as they emerge.

    You can also consider using the register to track the outcomes and benefits of improvement initiatives after they have been completed.

    Activity: Use the Continual Improvement Register template to brainstorm responsibilities, generate improvement initiatives, and action plan

    1-3 hours
    1. Open the Continual Improvement Register template and navigate to tab 2, Setup.
    2. Brainstorm your definitions for the following items to get a clear understanding of these items when completing the CIR. The more quantification you apply to the criteria, the more tangible evaluation you will do:
      • Business value impact categories
      • Effort/cost
      • Priority
      • Status
      • Timeline
    3. Discuss the teams that the upcoming initiatives will belong to and update them under CI Functional Groups.
    1. Analyze the assessment data collected throughout stakeholder feedback and your current-state evaluation.
    2. Use this data to generate a list of initiatives that should be undertaken to improve the performance of the targeted processes.
    3. Use sticky notes to record identified CI initiatives.
    4. Record each initiative in tab 3, CI Register, along with associated information:
      • A unique ID number for the initiative
      • The individual who submitted the idea
      • The team the initiative belongs to
      • A description of the initiative

    Download the Continual Improvement Register template

    Activity: Use the Continual Improvement Register template to brainstorm responsibilities, generate improvement initiatives, and action plan

    Input

    • List of key stakeholders for continual improvement
    • Current state of services and processes

    Output

    • Continual improvement register setup
    • List of initiatives for continual improvement

    Materials

    • Continual improvement register
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participant

    • CIO
    • IT managers
    • Project managers
    • Continual improvement manager/coordinator

    4. Prioritize initiatives

    Prioritization should be transparent and available to stakeholders.

    Some initiatives are more critical than others to achieve and should be prioritized accordingly. Some improvements require large investments and need an equally large effort, while some are relatively low-cost, low-effort improvements. Focus on low-hanging fruit and prioritize low-cost, low-effort improvements to help the organization with rapid growth. This will also help you get stakeholder buy-in for the rest of your continual improvement program.

    Prioritize improvement initiatives in your CIR to increase visibility and ensure larger improvement initiatives are done the next cycle. As one improvement cycle ends, the next cycle begins, which allows the continual improvement team to keep pace with changing business requirements.

    Stock image of a person on a ladder leaning against a bookshelf.

    Identify “quick wins” that can provide immediate improvement

    Prioritize these quick wins to immediately demonstrate the success of the continual service improvement effort to the business.

    01

    Keep the scope of the continual improvement process manageable at the beginning by focusing on a few key areas that you want to improve.
    • If you have identified pain points, addressing these will demonstrate the value of the project to the business to gain their support.
    • Choose the services or processes that continue to disrupt or threaten service – focus on where pain points are evident and where there is a need for improvement.
    • Critical services to improve should emerge from the current-state assessments.

    02

    From your list of proposed improvements, focus on a few of the top pain points and plan to address those.

    03

    Choose the right services to improve at the first stage of continual improvement to ensure that the continual improvement process delivers value to the business.

    Activity: Prioritize improvement initiatives

    2-3 hours

    Input: List of initiatives for continual improvement

    Output: Prioritized list of initiatives

    Materials: Continual improvement register, Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Laptops

    Participants: CIO, IT managers, Project managers, Continual improvement manager

    1. In the CI Register tab of the Continual Improvement Register template, define the status, priority, effort/cost, and timeline according to the definition of each in the data entry tab.
    2. Review improvement initiatives from the previous activity.
    3. Record the CI coordinator, business owner, and IT owner for each initiative.
    4. Fill out submission date to track when the initiative was added to the register.
    5. According to the updated items, you will get a dashboard of items based on their categories, effort, priority, status, and timeline. You will also get a visibility into the total number of improvement initiatives.
    6. Focus on the short-term initiatives that are higher priority and require less effort.
    7. Refer to the Continual Improvement Workflow template and update the steps.

    Download the Continual Improvement Register template

    Download the Continual Improvement Workflow template

    5. Execute improvement

    Develop a plan for improvement

    Determine how you want to reach your improvement objectives. Define how to make processes work better.
    Icons representing steps. Descriptions below.
    Make a business case for your action plan Determine budget for implementing the improvement and move to execution. Find out how long it takes to build the improvement in the practice. Confirm the resources and skill sets you require for the improvement. Communicate the improvement plan across the business for better visibility and for seamless organizational change management, if needed. Lean into incremental improvements to ensure practice quality is sustained, not temporary. Put in place an ongoing process to audit, enhance, and sustain the performance of the target practice.

    Create a specific action plan to guide your improvement activities

    As part of the continual improvement plan, identify specific actions to be completed, along with ownership for each action.

    The continual improvement process must:

    • Define activities to be completed.
    • Create roles and assign ownership to complete activities.
    • Provide training and awareness about the initiative.
    • Define inputs and outputs.
    • Include reporting.

    For each action, identify:

    • The problem.
    • Who will be responsible and accountable.
    • Metric(s) for assessment.
    • Baseline and target metrics.
    • Action to be taken to achieve improvement (training, new templates, etc.).

    Choose timelines:

    • Firm timelines are important to keep the project on track.
    • One to two months for an initiative is an ideal length of time to maintain interest and enthusiasm for the specific project and achieve a result.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every organization is unique in terms of its services, processes, strengths, weaknesses, and needs, as well as the expectations of its end users. There is no single action plan that will work for everyone. The improvement plan will vary from organization to organization, but the key elements of the plan (i.e. specific priorities, timelines, targets, and responsibilities) should always be in place.

    Build a communication plan to ensure the implementation of continual improvement stakeholder buy-in

    1. Throughout the improvement process, share information about both the status of the project and the impact of the improvement initiatives.
    Icon of a group of people. Encourage a collaborative environment across all members of the practice team.
    Icon of an ascending graph. Motivate every individual to continue moving upward and taking ownership over their roles.
    Icon of overlapping speech bubbles. Communication among team members ensures that everyone is on the same page working together toward a common goal.
    Icon of a handshake. The most important thing is to get the support of your team. Unless you have their support, you won’t be able to deliver any of the solutions you draw up.
    2. The end users should be kept in the loop so they can feel that their contribution is valued.
    Icon of an arrow pointing right. When improvements happen and only a small group of people are involved in the results and action plan, misconceptions will arise.
    Icon of a thumbs up in a speech bubble. If communication is lacking, end users will provide less feedback on the practice improvements.
    Icon of a cone made of stacked layers. For end users to feel their concerns are being considered, you must communicate the findings in a way that conveys the impact of their contribution.

    Info-Tech Insight

    To be effective, continual improvement requires open and honest feedback from IT staff. Debriefings work well for capturing information about lessons learned. Break down the debriefings into smaller, individual activities completed within each phase of the project to better capture the large amount of data and lessons learned within that phase.

    Measure the success of your improvement program

    Continual improvement is everybody’s job within the organization.

    Determine how improvements impacted stakeholders. Build a relationship pyramid to analyze how improvements impacted external users and narrow down to the internal users, implementing team, and leaders.
    1. How did we make improvements with our partners and suppliers? –› Look into your contracts and measure the SLAs and commitments.
    2. How could improvement initiatives impact the organization? –› Involve everybody to provide feedback. Rerun the end-user satisfaction survey and compare with the baseline that you obtained before improvement implementation.
    3. How does the improvement team feel about the whole process? –› What were the lessons learned, and can the team apply the lessons in the next improvement initiatives?
    4. How did the leaders manage and lead improvements? –› Were they able to provide proper vision to guide the improvement team through the process?
    A relationship pyramid with the initial questions on the left starting from '1' at the bottom to '4' at the 2nd highest level.

    Measure changes in selected metrics to evaluate success

    Measuring and reporting are key components in the improvement process.

    Adjust improvement priority based on updated objectives. Justify the reason. Refer to your CIR to document it.

    Did you get there?

    Part of the measurement should include a review of CSFs and KPIs determined in step 1 (assess the future state). Some may need to be replaced.

    • After an improvement has been implemented, it is important to regularly monitor and evaluate the CSFs and KPIs you chose and run reports to evaluate whether the implemented improvement has actually resolved the service/process issues or helped you achieve your objectives.
    • Establish a schedule for regularly reviewing key metrics that were identified in Step 1 and assessing change in those metrics and progress toward reaching objectives.
    • In addition to reviewing CSFs, KPIs, and metrics, check in with the IT organization and end users to measure their perceptions of the change once an appropriate amount of time has passed.
    • Ensure that metrics are telling the whole story and that reporting is honest in order to be informative.
    Outcomes of the continual improvement process should include:
    • Improved efficiency, effectiveness, and quality of processes and services.
    • Processes and services more aligned with the business needs and strategy.
    • Maturity of processes and services.

    For a guideline to determine a list of metrics, refer to Info-Tech’s blueprints:

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure you’re measuring the right things and considering all sources of information. Don’t rely on a single or very few metrics. Instead, consider a group of metrics to help you get a better holistic view of improvement initiatives and their impact on IT operations.

    6. Establish a learning culture and apply it to other practices

    Reflect on lessons learned to drive change forward

    What did you learn?
    Icon of a checklist and pencil. Ultimately, continual improvement is an ongoing educational program.
    Icon of a brain with a lighting bolt.
    Icon of a wrench in a speech bubble. By teaching your team how to learn better and identify sources of new knowledge that can be applied going forward, you maximize the efficacy of your team and improvement plan effort.
    What obstacles prevented you from reaching your target condition?
    Icon of a map marker. If you did not reach your target goals, reflect as a team on what obstacles prevented you from reaching that target.
    Icon of a wrench in a gear. Focus on the obstacles that are preventing your team from reaching the target state.
    Icon of a sun behind clouds. As obstacles are removed, new ones will appear, and old ones will disappear.

    Compare expectations versus reality

    Compare the EC (expected change) to the AC (actual change)
    Arrow pointing down.
    Arrow pointing left and down labelled 'Small'. Evaluate the differences: how large is the difference from what you expected? Arrow pointing right and down labelled 'Large'.
    Things are on track and the issue could have simply been an issue with timing of the improvement. More reflection is needed. Perhaps it is a gap in understanding the goal or a poor execution of the action plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Regardless of the cause, large differences between the EC and the AC provide great learning opportunities about how to approach change in the future.

    A cycle around a dartboard with numbered steps: '01 Determine your goals', '02 Define the process team', '03 Determine initiatives', '04 Prioritize initiatives', '05 Execute improvement', '06 Establish a learning culture'.

    Think long-term to sustain changes

    The continual improvement process is ongoing. When one improvement cycle ends, the next should begin in order to continually measure and evaluate processes.

    The goal of any framework is steady and continual improvement over time that resets the baseline to the current (and hopefully improved) level at the end of each cycle.

    Have processes in place to ensure that the improvements made will remain in place after the change is implemented. Each completed cycle is just another step toward your target state.
    Icon of a group of people. Ensure that there is a continual commitment from management.
    Icon of a bar chart. Regularly monitor metrics as well as stakeholder feedback after the initial improvement period has ended. Use this information to plan the next improvement.
    Icon of gears. Continual improvement is a combination of attitudes, behavior, and culture.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Sample of 'Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy'. Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy

    Success depends on IT initiatives clearly aligned to business goals, IT excellence, and driving technology innovation.

    Sample of 'Develop Meaningful Service Metrics'. Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    Reinforce service orientation in your IT organization by ensuring your IT metrics generate value-driven resource behavior.

    Sample of 'Common Challenges to incident management success'. Improve Incident and Problem Management

    Rise above firefighter mode with structured incident management to enable effective problem management.

    Works Cited

    “Continual Improvement ITIL4 Practice Guide.” AXELOS, 2020. Accessed August 2022.

    “5 Tips for Adopting ITIL 4’s Continual Improvement Management Practice.” SysAid, 2021. Accessed August 2022.

    Jacob Gillingham. “ITIL Continual Service Improvement And 7-Step Improvement Process” Invensis Global Learning Services, 2022. Accessed August 2022.

    Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}524|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,399 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • Users are demanding more valuable web functionalities and improved access to your website services. They are expecting development teams to keep up with their changing needs.
    • The criteria of user acceptance and satisfaction involves more than an aesthetically pleasing user interface (UI). It also includes how emotionally attached the user is to the website and how it accommodates user behaviors.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Complication

    • Organizations are focusing too much on the UI when they optimize the user experience of their websites. The UI is only one of many components involved in successful websites with good user experience.
    • User experience (UX) is often an afterthought in development, risking late and costly fixes to improve end-user reception after deployment.

    Insights

    • Organizations often misinterpret UX as UI. In fact, UX incorporates both the functional and emotional needs of the user, going beyond the website’s UI.
    • Human behaviors and tendencies are commonly left out of the define and design phases of website development, putting user satisfaction and adoption at risk.

    Impact and Result

    • Gain a deep understanding of user needs and behaviors. Become familiar with the human behaviors, emotions, and pain points of your users in order to shortlist the design elements and website functions that will receive the highest user satisfaction.
    • Perform a comprehensive website review. Leverage satisfaction surveys, user feedback, and user monitoring tools (e.g. heat maps) to reveal high-level UX issues. Use these insights to drill down into the execution and composition of your website to identify the root causes of issues.
    • Incorporate modern UX trends in your design. New web technologies are continuously emerging in the industry to enhance user experience. Stay updated on today’s UX trends and validate their fit for the specific needs of your target audience.

    Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should modernize your website, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and discover the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define UX requirements

    Reveal the opportunities to heighten the user experience of your website through a deep understanding of the behaviors, emotions, and needs of your end users in order to design a receptive and valuable website.

    • Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value – Phase 1: Define UX Requirements
    • Website Design Document Template

    2. Design UX-driven website

    Design a satisfying and receptive website by leveraging industry best practices and modern UX trends and ensuring the website is supported with reliable and scalable data and infrastructure.

    • Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value – Phase 2: Design UX-Driven Website
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your UX Requirements

    The Purpose

    List the business objectives of your website.

    Describe your user personas, use cases, and user workflow.

    Identify current UX issues through simulations, website design, and system reviews.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Strong understanding of the business goals of your website.

    Knowledge of the behaviors and needs of your website’s users.

    Realization of the root causes behind the UX issues of your website.

    Activities

    1.1 Define the business objectives for the website you want to optimize

    1.2 Define your end-user personas and map them to use cases

    1.3 Build your website user workflow

    1.4 Conduct a SWOT analysis of your website to drive out UX issues

    1.5 Gauge the UX competencies of your web development team

    1.6 Simulate your user workflow to identify the steps driving down UX

    1.7 Assess the composition and construction of your website

    1.8 Understand the execution of your website with a system architecture

    1.9 Pinpoint the technical reason behind your UX issues

    1.10 Clarify and prioritize your UX issues

    Outputs

    Business objectives

    End-user personas and use cases

    User workflows

    Website SWOT analysis

    UX competency assessment

    User workflow simulation

    Website design assessment

    Current state of web system architecture

    Gap analysis of web system architecture

    Prioritized UX issues

    2 Design Your UX-Driven Website

    The Purpose

    Design wireframes and storyboards to be aligned to high priority use cases.

    Design a web system architecture that can sufficiently support the website.

    Identify UX metrics to gauge the success of the website.

    Establish a website design process flow.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Implementation of key design elements and website functions that users will find stimulating and valuable.

    Optimized web system architecture to better support the website.

    Website design process aligned to your current context.

    Rollout plan for your UX optimization initiatives.

    Activities

    2.1 Define the roles of your UX development team

    2.2 Build your wireframes and user storyboards

    2.3 Design the target state of your web environment

    2.4 List your UX metrics

    2.5 Draw your website design process flow

    2.6 Define your UX optimization roadmap

    2.7 Identify and engage your stakeholders

    Outputs

    Roles of UX development team

    Wireframes and user storyboards

    Target state of web system architecture

    List of UX metrics

    List of your suppliers, inputs, processes, outputs, and customers

    Website design process flow

    UX optimization rollout roadmap

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}432|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $3,059 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • All too often, the portfolio of programs and projects looks more like a random heap than a strategically organized and balanced collection of investments that will drive the business forward.
    • Portfolio managers know that with the right kind of information and the right level of process maturity they can get better results through the portfolio; however, organizations often assume (falsely) that the required level of maturity is out of reach from their current state and perpetually delay improvements.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The information needed to define clear and usable criteria for organizing the portfolio of programs and projects already exists. Portfolio managers only need to identify the sources of that information and institute processes for regularly reviewing that information in order to define those criteria.
    • Once a portfolio manager has a clear idea of the goals and constraints that shape what ought to be included (or removed) from the portfolio and once these have been translated into clear and usable portfolio criteria, basic portfolio management processes can be instituted to ensure that these criteria are used consistently throughout the various stages of the project lifecycle.
    • Portfolio management frameworks and processes do not need to be built from scratch. Well-known frameworks – such as the one outlined in COBIT 5 APO05 – can be instituted in a way that will allow even low-maturity organizations to start organizing their portfolio.
    • Organizations do not need to grow into portfolio management frameworks to get the benefits of an organized portfolio; instead, they can grow within such frameworks.

    Impact and Result

    • An organized portfolio will ensure that the projects and programs included in it are strategically aligned and can actually be executed within the finite constraints of budgetary and human resource capacity.
    • Portfolio managers are better empowered to make decisions about which projects should be included in the portfolio (and when) and are better empowered to make the very tough decisions about which projects should be removed from the portfolio (i.e. cancelled).
    • Building and maturing a portfolio management framework will more fully integrate the PMO into the broader IT management and governance frameworks, making it a more integral part of strategic decisions and a better business partner in the long run.

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should maintain an organized portfolio of programs and projects, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess the current state of the portfolio and PPM processes

    Analyze the current mix of programs and projects in your portfolio and assess the maturity of your current PPM processes.

    • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 1: Assess the Current State of the Portfolio and PPM Processes
    • Project Portfolio Organizer
    • COBIT APO05 (Manage Portfolio) Alignment Workbook

    2. Enhance portfolio organization through improved PPM criteria and processes

    Enhance and optimize your portfolio management processes to ensure portfolio criteria are clearly defined and consistently applied across the project lifecycle when making decisions about which projects to include or remove from the portfolio.

    • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 2: Enhance Portfolio Organization Through Improved PPM Criteria and Processes
    • Portfolio Management Standard Operating Procedures

    3. Implement improved portfolio management practices

    Implement your portfolio management improvement initiatives to ensure long-term sustainable adoption of new PPM practices.

    • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 3: Implement Improved Portfolio Management Practices
    • Portfolio Management Improvement Roadmap Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Maintain an Organized Portfolio

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Portfolio Mix and Portfolio Process Current State

    The Purpose

    Analyze the current mix of the portfolio to determine how to better organize it according to organizational goals and constraints.

    Assess which PPM processes need to be enhanced to better organize the portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An analysis of the existing portfolio of projects (highlighting areas of concern).

    An analysis of the maturity of current PPM processes and their ability to support the maintenance of an organized portfolio.

    Activities

    1.1 Pre-work: Prepare a complete project list.

    1.2 Define existing portfolio categories, criteria, and targets.

    1.3 Analyze the current portfolio mix.

    1.4 Identify areas of concern with current portfolio mix.

    1.5 Review the six COBIT sub-processes for portfolio management (APO05.01-06).

    1.6 Assess the degree to which these sub-processes have been currently achieved at the organization.

    1.7 Assess the degree to which portfolio-supporting IT governance and management processes exist.

    1.8 Perform a gap analysis.

    Outputs

    Analysis of the current portfolio mix

    Assessment of COBIT alignment and gap analysis.

    2 Define Portfolio Target Mix, Criteria, and Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Define clear and usable portfolio criteria.

    Record/design portfolio management processes that will support the consistent use of portfolio criteria at all stages of the project lifecycle.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clearly defined and usable portfolio criteria.

    A portfolio management framework that supports the consistent use of the portfolio criteria across all stages of the project lifecycle.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify determinants of the portfolio mix, criteria, and constraints.

    2.2 Define the target mix, portfolio criteria, and portfolio metrics.

    2.3 Identify sources of funding and resourcing.

    2.4 Review and record the portfolio criteria based upon the goals and constraints.

    2.5 Create a PPM improvement roadmap.

    Outputs

    Portfolio criteria

    Portfolio metrics for intake, monitoring, closure, termination, reprioritization, and benefits tracking

    Portfolio Management Improvement Roadmap

    3 Design Improved Portfolio Sub-Processes

    The Purpose

    Ensure that the portfolio criteria are used to guide decision making at each stage of the project lifecycle when making decisions about which projects to include or remove from the portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Processes that support decision making based upon the portfolio criteria.

    Processes that ensure the portfolio remains consistently organized according to the portfolio criteria.

    Activities

    3.1 Ensure that the metrics used for each sub-process are based upon the standard portfolio criteria.

    3.2 Establish the roles, accountabilities, and responsibilities for each sub-process needing improvement.

    3.3 Outline the workflow for each sub-process needing improvement.

    Outputs

    A RACI chart for each sub-process

    A workflow for each sub-process

    4 Change Impact Analysis and Stakeholder Engagement Plan

    The Purpose

    Ensure that the portfolio management improvement initiatives are sustainably adopted in the long term.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Stakeholder engagement.

    Sustainable long-term adoption of the improved portfolio management practices.

    Activities

    4.1 Conduct a change impact analysis.

    4.2 Create a stakeholder engagement plan.

    Outputs

    Change Impact Analysis

    Stakeholder Engagement Plan

    Completed Portfolio Management SOP

    Release management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}9|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}9|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}9|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $35,731
    • member rating average days saved: 20
    • Parent Category Name: Infra and Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /infra-and-operations
    Today's world requires frequent and fast deployments. Stay in control with release management.

    We may not be able to show you this

    We may not be able to show you this just yet.
    Our deeper, more detailed content is reserved for Tymans Group clients. 

    If you are interested in retaining our services or would really like access, please contact us. 

    Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}124|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.8/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $8,846 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 23 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Data architecture involves many moving pieces requiring coordination to provide greatest value from data.
    • Data architects are at the center of this turmoil and must be able to translate high-level business requirements into specific instructions for data workers using complex data models.
    • Data architects must account for the constantly growing data and application complexity, more demanding needs from the business, an ever-increasing number of data sources, and a growing need to integrate components to ensure that performance isn’t compromised.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Data architecture needs to evolve with the changing business landscape. There are four common business drivers that put most pressure on archaic architectures. As a result, the organization’s architecture must be flexible and responsive to changing business needs.
    • Data architecture is not just about models. Viewing data architecture as just technical data modeling can lead to structurally unsound data that does not serve the business.
    • Data is used differently across the layers of an organization’s data architecture, and the capabilities needed to optimize use of data change with it. Architecting and managing data from source to warehousing to presentation requires different tactics for optimal use.

    Impact and Result

    • Have a framework in place to identify the appropriate solution for the challenge at hand. Our three-phase practical approach will help you build a custom and modernized data architecture.
      • Identify and prioritize the business drivers in which data architecture changes would create the largest overall benefit, and determine the corresponding data architecture tiers that need to be addressed.
      • Discover the best-practice trends, measure your current state, and define the targets for your data architecture tactics.
      • Build a cohesive and personalized roadmap for restructuring your data architecture. Manage your decisions and resulting changes.

    Build a Data Architecture Roadmap Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why your organization should optimize its data architecture as it evolves with the drivers of the business to get the most from its data.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prioritize your data architecture with business-driven tactics

    Identify the business drivers that necessitate data architecture improvements, then create a tactical plan for optimization.

    • Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy – Phase 1: Prioritize Your Data Architecture With Business-Driven Tactics
    • Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool
    • Data Architecture Optimization Template

    2. Personalize your tactics to optimize your data architecture

    Analyze how you stack up to Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model to uncover your tactical plan, and discover groundbreaking data architecture trends and how you can fit them into your action plan.

    • Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy – Phase 2: Personalize Your Tactics to Optimize Your Data Architecture
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool
    • Data Architecture Trends Presentation

    3. Create your tactical data architecture roadmap

    Optimize your data architecture by following tactical initiatives and managing the resulting change brought on by those optimization activities.

    • Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy – Phase 3: Create Your Tactical Data Architecture Roadmap
    • Data Architecture Decision Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify the Drivers of the Business for Optimizing Data Architecture

    The Purpose

    Explain approach and value proposition.

    Review the common business drivers and how the organization is driving a need to optimize data architecture.

    Understand Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture model.

    Determine the pattern of tactics that apply to the organization for optimization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of the current data architecture landscape.

    Priorities for tactical initiatives in the data architecture practice are identified.

    Target state for the data quality practice is defined.

    Activities

    1.1 Explain approach and value proposition.

    1.2 Review the common business drivers and how the organization is driving a need to optimize data architecture.

    1.3 Understand Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture model.

    1.4 Determine the pattern of tactics that apply to the organization for optimization.

    Outputs

    Five-tier logical data architecture model

    Data architecture tactic plan

    2 Determine Your Tactics For Optimizing Data Architecture

    The Purpose

    Define improvement initiatives.

    Define a data architecture improvement strategy and roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gaps, inefficiencies, and opportunities in the data architecture practice are identified.

    Activities

    2.1 Create business unit prioritization roadmap.

    2.2 Develop subject area project scope.

    2.3 Subject area 1: data lineage analysis, root cause analysis, impact assessment, business analysis

    Outputs

    Business unit prioritization roadmap

    Subject area scope

    Data lineage diagram

    3 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 2

    The Purpose

    Define improvement initiatives.

    Define a data quality improvement strategy and roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improvement initiatives are defined.

    Improvement initiatives are evaluated and prioritized to develop an improvement strategy.

    A roadmap is defined to depict when and how to tackle the improvement initiatives.

    Activities

    3.1 Create business unit prioritization roadmap.

    3.2 Develop subject area project scope.

    3.3 Subject area 1: data lineage analysis, root cause analysis, impact assessment, business analysis.

    Outputs

    Business unit prioritization roadmap

    Subject area scope

    Data lineage diagram

    Further reading

    Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    Optimizing data architecture requires a plan, not just a data model.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Integral to an insight-driven enterprise is a modern and business-driven data environment.

    “As business and data landscapes change, an organization’s data architecture needs to be able to keep pace with these changes. It needs to be responsive so as to not only ensure the organization continues to operate efficiently but that it supports the overall strategic direction of the organization.

    In the dynamic marketplace of today, organizations are constantly juggling disruptive forces and are finding the need to be more proactive rather than reactive. As such, organizations are finding their data to be a source of competitive advantage where the data architecture has to be able to not only support the increasing amount, sources, and rate at which organizations are capturing and collecting data but also be able to meet and deliver on changing business needs.

    Data architecture optimization should, therefore, aid in breaking down data silos and creating a more shared and all-encompassing data environment for better empowering the business.” (Crystal Singh, Director, Research, Data and Information Practice, Info-Tech Research Group)

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:
    • Data architects or their equivalent, looking to optimize and improve the efficiency of the capture, movement and storage of data for a variety of business drivers.
    • Enterprise architects looking to improve the backbone of the holistic approach of their organization’s structure.
    This Research Will Help You:
    • Identify the business drivers that are impacted and improved by best-practice data architecture.
    • Optimize your data architecture using tactical practices to address the pressing issues of the business to drive modernization.
    • Align the organization’s data architecture with the grander enterprise architecture.
    This Research Will Also Assist:
    • CIOs concerned with costs, benefits, and the overall structure of their organizations data flow.
    • Database administrators tasked with overseeing crucial elements of the data architecture.
    This Research Will Help Them:
    • Get a handle on the current situation of data within the organization.
    • Understand how data architecture affects the operations of the data sources within the enterprise.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • The data architecture of a modern organization involves many moving pieces requiring coordination to provide greatest value from data.
    • Data architects are at the center of this turmoil and must be able to translate high-level business requirements into specific instructions for data workers using complex data models.

    Complication

    • Data architects must account for the constantly growing data and application complexity, and more demanding needs from the business.
    • There is an ever-increasing number of data sources and a growing need to integrate components to ensure that performance isn’t compromised.
    • There isn’t always a clearly defined data architect role, yet the responsibilities must be filled to get maximum value from data.

    Resolution

    • To deal with these challenges, a data architect must have a framework in place to identify the appropriate solution for the challenge at hand.
      • Identify and prioritize the business drivers in which data architecture changes would create the largest overall benefit, and determine the corresponding data architecture tiers that need to be addressed to customize your solution.
      • Discover the best practice trends, measure your current state, and define the targets for your data architecture tactics.
      • Build a cohesive and personalized roadmap for restructuring your data architecture. Manage your decisions and resulting changes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Data architecture is not just about models. Viewing data architecture as just technical data modeling can lead to a data environment that does not aptly serve or support the business. Identify the priorities of your business and adapt your data architecture to those needs.
    2. Changes to data architecture are typically driven by four common business driver patterns. Use these as a shortcut to understand how to evolve your data architecture.
    3. Data is used differently across the layers of an organization’s data architecture; therefore, the capabilities needed to optimize the use of data change with it. Architecting and managing data from source to warehousing to presentation requires different tactics for optimal use.

    Your data is the foundation of your organization’s knowledge and ability to make decisions

    Data should be at the foundation of your organization’s evolution.

    The transformational insights that executives are constantly seeking to leverage can be uncovered with a data practice that makes high quality, trustworthy information readily available to the business users who need it.

    50% Organizations that embrace data are 50% more likely to launch products and services ahead of their competitors. (Nesta, 2016)

    Whether hoping to gain a better understanding of your business or trying to become an innovator in your industry, any organization can get value from its data regardless of where you are in your journey to becoming a data-driven enterprise:

    Business Monitoring
    • Data reporting
    • Uncover inefficiencies
    • Monitor progress
    • Track inventory levels
    Business Insights
    • Data analytics
    • Expose patterns
    • Predict future trends
    Business Optimization
    • Data-based apps
    • Build apps to automate actions based on insights
    Business Transformation
    • Monetary value of data
    • Create new revenue streams
    (Journey to Data Driven Enterprise, 2015)

    As organizations seek to become more data driven, it is imperative to better manage data for its effective use

    Here comes the zettabyte era.

    A zettabyte is a billion terabytes. Organizations today need to measure their data size in zettabytes, a challenge that is only compounded by the speed at which the data is expected to move.

    Arriving at the understanding that data can be the driving force of your organization is just the first step. The reality is that the true hurdles to overcome are in facing the challenges of today’s data landscape.

    Challenges of The Modern Data Landscape
    Data at rest Data movement
    Greater amounts Different types Uncertain quality Faster rates Higher complexity

    “The data environment is very chaotic nowadays. Legacy applications, data sprawl – organizations are grappling with what their data landscape looks like. Where are our data assets that we need to use?” (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    Solution

    Well-defined and structured data management practices are the best way to mitigate the limitations that derive from these challenges and leverage the most possible value from your data.

    Refer to Info-Tech’s capstone Create a Plan For Establishing a Business-Aligned Data Management Practice blueprint to understand data quality in the context of data disciplines and methods for improving your data management capabilities.

    Data architecture is an integral aspect of data management

    Data Architecture

    The set of rules, policies, standards, and models that govern and define the type of data collected and how it is used, stored, managed, and integrated within the organization and its database systems.

    In general, the primary objective of data architecture is the standardization of data for the benefit of the organization.

    54% of leading “analytics-driven” enterprises site data architecture as a required skill for data analytics initiatives. (Maynard 2015)

    MYTH

    Data architecture is purely a model of the technical requirements of your data systems.

    REALITY

    Data architecture is largely dependent on a human element. It can be viewed as “the bridge between defining strategy and its implementation”. (Erwin 2016)

    Functions

    A strong data architecture should:

    • Define, visualize, and communicate data strategy to various stakeholders.
    • Craft a data delivery environment.
    • Ensure high data quality.
    • Provide a roadmap for continuous improvement.

    Business value

    A strong data architecture will help you:

    • Align data processes with business strategy and the overall holistic enterprise architecture.
    • Enable efficient flow of data with a stronger focus on quality and accessibility.
    • Reduce the total cost of data ownership.

    Data architects must maintain a comprehensive view of the organization’s rapidly proliferating data

    The data architect:
    • Acts as a “translator” between the business and data workers to communicate data and technology requirements.
    • Facilitates the creation of the data strategy.
    • Manages the enterprise data model.
    • Has a greater knowledge of operational and analytical data use cases.
    • Recommends data management policies and standards, and maintains data management artifacts.
    • Reviews project solution architectures and identifies cross impacts across the data lifecycle.
    • Is a hands-on expert in data management and warehousing technologies.
    • Is not necessarily it’s own designated position, but a role that can be completed by a variety of IT professionals.

    Data architects bridge the gap between strategic and technical requirements:

    Visualization centering the 'Data Architect' as the bridge between 'Data Workers', 'Business', and 'Data & Applications'.

    “Fundamentally, the role of a data architect is to understand the data in an organization at a reasonable level of abstraction.” (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    Many are experiencing the pains of poor data architecture, but leading organizations are proactively tackling these issues

    Outdated and archaic systems and processes limit the ability to access data in a timely and efficient manner, ultimately diminishing the value your data should bring.

    59%

    of firms believe their legacy storage systems require too much processing to meet today’s business needs. (Attivio, Survey Big Data decision Makers, 2016)

    48%

    of companies experience pains from being reliant on “manual methods and trial and error when preparing data.” (Attivio, Survey Big Data decision Makers, 2016)

    44%
    +
    22%

    44% of firms said preparing data was their top hurdle for analytics, with 22% citing problems in accessing data. (Data Virtualization blog, Data Movement Killed the BI Star, 2016)

    Intuitive organizations who have recognized these shortcomings have already begun the transition to modernized and optimized systems and processes.

    28%

    of survey respondents say they plan to replace “data management and architecture because it cannot handle the requirements of big data.” (Informatica, Digital Transformation: Is Your Data Management Ready, 2016)

    50%

    Of enterprises plan to replace their data warehouse systems and analytical tools in the next few years. (TDWI, End of the Data Warehouse as we know it, 2017)

    Leading organizations are attacking data architecture problems … you will be left behind if you do not start now!

    Once on your path to redesigning your data architecture, neglecting the strategic elements may leave you ineffective

    Focusing on only data models without the required data architecture guidance can cause harmful symptoms in your IT department, which will lead to organization-wide problems.

    IT Symptoms Due to Ineffective Data Architecture

    Poor Data Quality

    • Inconsistent, duplicate, missing, incomplete, incorrect, unstandardized, out of date, and mistake-riddled data can plague your systems.

    Poor Accessibility

    • Delays in accessing data.
    • Limits on who can access data.
    • Limited access to data remotely.

    Strategic Disconnect

    • Disconnect between owner and consumer of data.
    • Solutions address narrow scope problems.
    • System barriers between departments.
    Leads to Poor Organizational Conditions

    Inaccurate Insights

    • Inconsistent and/or erroneous operational and management reports.
    • Ineffective cross-departmental use of analytics.

    Ineffective Decision Making

    • Slow flow of information to executive decision makers.
    • Inconsistent interpretation of data or reports.

    Inefficient Operations

    • Limits to automated functionality.
    • Increased divisions within organization.
    • Regulatory compliance violations.
    You need a solution that will prevent the pains.

    Follow Info-Tech’s methodology to optimize data architecture to meet the business needs

    The following is a summary of Info-Tech’s methodology:

    1

    1. Prioritize your core business objectives and identify your business driver.
    2. Learn how business drivers apply to specific tiers of Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture model.
    3. Determine the appropriate tactical pattern that addresses your most important requirements.
    Visualization of the process described on the left: Business drivers applying to Info-Tech's five-tier data architecture, then determining tactical patterns, and eventually setting targets of your desired optimized state.

    2

    1. Select the areas of the five-tier architecture to focus on.
    2. Measure current state.
    3. Set the targets of your desired optimized state.

    3

    1. Roadmap your tactics.
    2. Manage and communicate change.
    A roadmap leading to communication.

    Info-Tech will get you to your optimized state faster by focusing on the important business issues

    First Things First

    1. Info-Tech’s methodology helps you to prioritize and establish the core strategic objectives behind your goal of modernizing data architecture. This will narrow your focus to the appropriate areas of your current data systems and processes that require the most attention.

    Info-Tech has identified these four common drivers that lead to the need to optimize your data architecture.

    • Becoming More Data Driven
    • Regulations and Compliance
    • Mergers and Acquisitions
    • New Functionality or Business Rule

    These different core objectives underline the motivation to optimize data architecture, and will determine your overall approach.

    Use the five-tier architecture to provide a consumable view of your data architecture

    Every organization’s data system requires a unique design and an assortment of applications and storage units to fit their business needs. Therefore, it is difficult to paint a picture of an ideal model that has universal applications. However, when data architecture is broken down in terms of layers or tiers, there exists a general structure that is seen in all data systems.

    Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture. The five tiers being 'Sources' which includes 'Apps', 'Excel and other documents', and 'Access database(s)'; 'Integration and Translation' the 'Movement and transformation of data'; 'Warehousing' which includes 'Data Lakes & Warehouse(s) (Raw Data)'; 'Analytics' which includes 'Data Marts', 'Data Cube', 'Flat Files', and 'BI Tools'; and 'Presentation' which includes 'Reports' and 'Dashboards'.

    Thinking of your data systems and processes in this framework will allow you to see how different elements of the architecture relate to specific business operations.

    1. This blueprint will demonstrate how the business driver behind your redesign requires you to address specific layers of the five-tier data architecture.
    1. Once you’ve aligned your business driver to the appropriate data tiers, this blueprint will provide you with the best practice tactics you should apply to achieve an optimized data architecture.

    Use the five-tier architecture to prioritize tactics to improve your data architecture in line with your pattern

    Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Capability Model
    Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Capability Model featuring the five-tier architecture listing 'Core Capabilities' and 'Advanced Capabilities' within each tier, and a list of 'Cross Capabilities' which apply to all tiers.
    1. Based on your business driver, the relevant data tiers, and your organization’s own specific requirements you will need to establish the appropriate data architecture capabilities.
    2. This blueprint will help you measure how you are currently performing in these capabilities…
    3. And help you define and set targets so you can reach your optimized state.
    1. Once completed, these steps will be provided with the information you will need to create a comprehensive roadmap.
    2. Lastly, this blueprint will provide you with the tools to communicate this plan across your organization and offer change management guidelines to ensure successful adoption.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Optimizing data architecture requires a tactical approach, not a passive approach.

    The demanding task of optimization requires the ability to heavily prioritize. After you have identified why, determine how using our pre-built roadmap to address the four common drivers.

    Do not forget: data architecture is not a standalone concept; it fits into the more holistic design of enterprise architecture

    Data Architecture in Alignment

    Data architecture can not be designed to simply address the focus of data specialists or even the IT department.

    It must act as a key component in the all encompassing enterprise architecture and reflect the strategy and design of the entire business.

    Data architecture collaborates with application architecture in the delivery of effective information systems, and informs technology architecture on data related infrastructure requirements/considerations

    Please refer to the following blueprints to see the full picture of enterprise architecture:

    A diagram titled 'Enterprise Architecture' with multiple forms of architecture interacting with each other. At the top is 'Business Architecture' which feeds into 'Data Architecture' and 'Application Architecture' which feed into each other, and influence 'Infrastructure Architecture' and 'Security Architecture'.
    Adapted from TOGAF
    Refer to Phase C of TOGAF and Bizbok for references to the components of business architecture that are used in data architecture.

    Info-Tech’s data architecture optimization methodology helped a monetary authority fulfill strict regulatory pressures

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Financial
    Source: Info-Tech Consulting
    Symbol for 'Monetary Authority Case Study'. Look for this symbol as you walk through the blueprint for details on how Info-Tech Consulting assisted this monetary authority.

    Situation: Strong external pressures required the monetary authority to update and optimize its data architecture.

    The monetary authority is responsible for oversight of the financial situation of a country that takes in revenue from foreign incorporation. Due to increased pressure from international regulatory bodies, the monetary authority became responsible for generating multiple different types of beneficial ownership reports based on corporation ownership data within 24 hours of a request.

    A stale and inefficient data architecture prevented the monetary authority from fulfilling external pressures.

    Normally, the process to generate and provide beneficial ownership reports took a week or more. This was due to multiple points of stale data architecture, including a dependence on outdated legacy systems and a broken process for gathering the required data from a mix of paper and electronic sources.

    Provide a structured approach to solving the problem

    Info-Tech helped the monetary authority identify the business need that resulted from regulatory pressures, the challenges that needed to be overcome, and actionable tactics for addressing the needs.

    Info-Tech’s methodology was followed to optimize the areas of data architecture that address the business driver.

    • External Requirements
    • Business Driver
        Diagnose Data Architecture Problems
      • Outdated architecture (paper, legacy systems)
      • Stale data from other agencies
      • Incomplete data
          Data Architecture Optimization Tactics
        1. Optimized Source Databases
        2. Improved Integration
        3. Data Warehouse Optimization
        4. Data Marts for Reports
        5. Report Delivery Efficiency

    As you walk through this blueprint, watch for additional case studies that walk through the details of how Info-Tech helped this monetary authority.

    This blueprint’s three-step process will help you optimize data architecture in your organization

    Phase 1
    Prioritize Your Data Architecture With Business-Driven Tactics
    Phase 2
    Personalize Your Tactics to Optimize Your Data Architecture
    Phase 3
    Create Your Tactical Data Architecture Roadmap
    Step 1: Identify Your Business Driver for Optimizing Data Architecture
    • Learn about what data architecture is and how it must evolve with the drivers of the business.
    • Determine the business driver that your organization is currently experiencing.
    • Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool

    Step 2: Determine Actionable Tactics to Optimize Data Architecture
    • Create your data architecture optimization plan to determine the high-level tactics you need to follow.
    • Data Architecture Optimization Template

    Step 1: Measure Your Data Architecture Capabilities
    • Determine where you currently stand in the data architecture capabilities across the five-tier data architecture.
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Step 2: Set a Target for Data Architecture Capabilities
    • Identify your targets for the data architecture capabilities.
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Step 3: Identify the Tactics that Apply to Your Organization
    • Understand the trends in the field of data architecture and how they can help to optimize your environment.
    • Data Architecture Trends Presentation

    Step 1: Personalize Your Data Architecture Roadmap
    • Personalize the tactics across the tiers that apply to you to build your personalized roadmap.
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Step 2: Manage Your Data Architecture Decisions and the Resulting Changes
    • Document the changes in the organization’s data architecture.
    • Data architecture involves change management – learn how data architects should support change management in the organization.
    • Data Architecture Decision Template

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy – project overview

    PHASE 1
    Prioritize Your Data Architecture With Business-Driven Tactics
    PHASE 2
    Personalize Your Tactics to Optimize Your Data Architecture
    PHASE 3
    Create Your Tactical Data Architecture Roadmap
    Supporting Tool icon

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Identify Your Business Driver for Optimizing Data Architecture

    1.2 Determine Actionable Tactics to Optimize Data Architecture

    2.1 Measure Your Data Architecture Capabilities

    2.2 Set a Target for Data Architecture Capabilities

    2.3 Identify the Tactics that Apply to Your Organization

    3.1 Personalize Your Data Architecture Roadmap

    3.2 Manage Your Data Architecture Decisions and the Resulting Changes

    Guided Implementations

    • Understand what data architecture is, how it aligns with enterprise architecture, and how data architects support the needs of the business.
    • Identify the business drivers that necessitate the optimization of the organization’s data architecture.
    • Create a tactical plan to optimize data architecture across Info-Tech’s five-tier logical data architecture model.
    • Understand Info-Tech’s tactical data architecture capability model and measure the current state of these capabilities at the organization.
    • Determine the target state of data architecture capabilities.
    • Understand the trends in the field of data architecture and identify how they can fit into your environment.
    • Use the results of the data architecture capability gap assessment to determine the priority of activities to populate your personalized data architecture optimization roadmap.
    • Understand how to manage change as a data architect or equivalent.
    Associated Activity icon

    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:
    Identify the Drivers of the Business for Optimizing Data Architecture
    Module 2:
    Create a Tactical Plan for Optimizing Data Architecture
    Module 3:
    Create a Personalized Roadmap for Data Architecture Activities

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Preparation

    Workshop Day 1

    Workshop Day 2

    Workshop Day 3

    Workshop Day 4

    Workshop Day 5

    Organize and Plan Workshop Identify the Drivers of the Business for Optimizing Data Architecture Determine the Tactics For Optimizing Data Architecture Create Your Roadmap of Optimization Activities Create Your Personalized Roadmap Create a Plan for Change Management

    Morning Activities

    • Finalize workshop itinerary and scope.
    • Identify workshop participants.
    • Gather strategic documentation.
    • Engage necessary stakeholders.
    • Book interviews.
    • 1.1 Explain approach and value proposition.
    • 1.2 Review the common business drivers and how the organization is driving a need to optimize data architecture.
    • 2.1 Create your data architecture optimization plan.
    • 2.2 Interview key business stakeholders for input on business drivers for data architecture.
    • 3.1 Align with the enterprise architecture by interviewing the enterprise architect for input on the data architecture optimization roadmap.
    • 4.1 As a group, determine the roadmap activities that are applicable to your organization and brainstorm applicable initiatives.
    • 5.1 Use the Data Architecture Decision Documentation Template to document key decisions and updates.

    Afternoon Activities

    • 1.3 Understand Info-Tech’s Five-Tier Data Architecture.
    • 1.4 Determine the pattern of tactics that apply to the organization for optimization.
    • 2.3 With input from the business and enterprise architect, determine the current data architecture capabilities.
    • 3.3 With input from the business and enterprise architect, determine the target data architecture capabilities.
    • 4.2 Determine the timing and effort of the roadmap activities.
    • 5.2 Review best practices for change management.
    • 5.3 Present roadmap and findings to the business stakeholders and enterprise architect.

    Deliverables

    • Workshop Itinerary
    • Workshop Participant List
    1. Five-Tier Logical Data Architecture Model
    2. Data Architecture Tactic Plan
    1. Five-Tier Data Architecture Capability Model
    1. Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap
    1. Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap
    1. Data Architecture Decision Template

    Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy

    PHASE 1

    Prioritize Your Data Architecture With Business-Driven Tactics

    Phase 1 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Prioritize Your Data Architecture With Business-Driven Tactics

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 1.1: Identify Your Business Driver for Optimizing Data Architecture Step 1.2: Determine Actionable Tactics to Optimize Data Architecture
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Understand what data architecture is, what it is not, and how it fits into the broader enterprise architecture program.
    • Determine the drivers that fuel the need for data architecture optimization.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Understand the Five-Tier Data Architecture Model and how the drivers of the business inform your priorities across this logical model of data architecture.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Complete the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Create a tactical data architecture optimization plan based on the business driver input.
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Optimization Template

    Phase 1 Results & Insights

    • Data Architecture is not just about data models. The approach that Phase 1 guides you through will help to not only plan where you need to focus your efforts as a data architect (or equivalent) but also give you guidance in how you should go about optimizing the holistic data architecture environment based on the drivers of the business.

    Phase 1 will help you create a strategy to optimize your data architecture using actionable tactics

    In this phase, you will determine your focus for optimizing your data architecture based on the business drivers that are commonly felt by most organizations.

    1. Identify the business drivers that necessitate data architecture optimization efforts.
    2. Understand Info-Tech’s Five-Tier Data Architecture, a logical architecture model that will help you prioritize tactics for optimizing your data architecture environment.
    3. Identify tactics for optimizing the organization’s data architecture across the five tiers.

    “To stay competitive, we need to become more data-driven. Compliance pressures are becoming more demanding. We need to add a new functionality.”

    Info-Tech’s Five-Tier Data Architecture:

    1. Data Sources
    2. Data Integration and Translation
    3. Data Warehousing
    4. Data Analytics
    5. Data Presentation

    Tactical plan for Data Architecture Optimization

    Phase 1, Step 1: Identify Your Business Driver for Optimizing Data Architecture

    PHASE 1

    1.1 1.2
    Identify Your Business Driver for Optimizing Data Architecture Determine Actionable Tactics to Optimize Data Architecture

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand how data architecture fits into the organization’s larger enterprise architecture.
    • Understand what data architecture is and how it should be driven by the business.
    • Identify the driver that is creating a need for data architecture optimization.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect
    • Enterprise Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • A starting point for the many responsibilities of the data architect role. Balancing business and technical requirements can be challenging, and to do so you need to first understand what is driving the need for data architecture improvements.
    • Holistic understanding of the organization’s architecture environment, including enterprise, application, data, and technology architectures and how they interact.

    Data architecture involves planning, communication, and understanding of technology

    Data Architecture

    A description of the structure and interaction of the enterprise’s major types and sources of data, logical data assets, physical data assets, and data management resources (TOGAF 9).

    The subject area of data management that defines the data needs of the enterprise and designs the master blueprints to meet those needs (DAMA DMBOK, 2009).

    IBM (2007) defines data architecture as the design of systems and applications that facilitate data availability and distribution across the enterprise.

    Definitions vary slightly across major architecture and management frameworks.

    However, there is a general consensus that data architecture provides organizations with:

    • Alignment
    • Planning
    • Road mapping
    • Change management
    • A guide for the organization’s data management program

    Data architecture must be based on business goals and objectives; developed within the technical strategies, constraints, and opportunities of the organization in support of providing a foundation for data management.

    Current Data Management
    • Alignment
    • Planning
    • Road mapping
    Goal for Data Management

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data Architecture is not just data models. Data architects must understand the needs of the business, as well as the existing people and processes that already exist in the organization to effectively perform their job.

    Review how data architecture fits into the broader architectural context

    A flow diagram starting with 'Business Processes/Activities' to 'Business Architecture' which through a process of 'Integration' flows to 'Data Architecture' and 'Application Architecture', the latter of which also flows into to the former, and they both flow into 'Technology Architecture' which includes 'Infrastructure' and 'Security'.

    Each layer of architecture informs the next. In other words, each layer has components that execute processes and offer services to the next layer. For example, data architecture can be broken down into more granular activities and processes that inform how the organization’s technology architecture should be arranged.

    Data does not exist on its own. It is informed by business architecture and used by other architectural domains to deliver systems, IT services, and to support business processes. As you build your practice, you must consider how data fits within the broader architectural framework.

    The Zachman Framework is a widely used EA framework; within it, data is identified as the first domain.

    The framework aims to standardize artifacts (work-products) within each architectural domain, provides a cohesive view of the scope of EA and clearly delineates data components. Use the framework to ensure that your target DA practice is aligned to other domains within the EA framework.

    'The Zachman Framework for Enterprise Architecture: The Enterprise Ontology', a complicated framework with top and bottom column headers and left and right row headers. Along the top are 'Classification Names': 'What', 'How', 'Where', 'Who', 'When', and 'Why'. Along the bottom are 'Enterprise Names': 'Inventory Sets', 'Process Flows', 'Distribution Networks', 'Responsibility Assignments', 'Timing Cycles', and 'Motivation Intentions'. Along the left are 'Audience Perspectives': 'Executive Perspective', 'Business Mgmt. Perspective', 'Architect Perspective', 'Engineer Perspective', 'Technician Perspective', and 'Enterprise Perspective'. Along the right are 'Model Names': 'Scope Contexts', 'Business Concepts', 'System Logic', 'Technology Physics', 'Tool Components', and 'Operations Instances'.
    (Source: Zachman International)

    Data architects operate in alignment with the other various architecture groups

    Data architects operate in alignment with the other various architecture groups, with coordination from the enterprise architect.

    Enterprise Architect
    The enterprise architect provides thought leadership and direction to domain architects.

    They also maintain architectural standards across all the architectural domains and serve as a lead project solution architect on the most critical assignments.

    • Business Architect
      A business subject matter expert who works with the line-of-business team to assist in business planning through capability-based planning.
    • Security Architect
      Plays a pivotal role in formulating the security strategy of the organization, working with the business and CISO/security manager. Recommends and maintains security standards, policies, and best practices.
    • Infrastructure Architect
      Recommends and maintains standards across the compute, storage, and network layers of the organization. Reviews project solution architectures to ensure compliance with infrastructure standards, regulations, and target state blueprints.
    • Application Architect
      Manages the business effectiveness, satisfaction, and maintainability of the application portfolio. Conduct application architecture assessments to document expected quality attribute standards, identify hotspots, and recommend best practices.
    • Data Architect
      Facilitates the creation of data strategy and has a greater understanding of operational and analytical data use cases. Manages the enterprise data model which includes all the three layers of modelling - conceptual, logical, and physical. Recommends data management policies and standards, and maintains data management artefacts. Reviews project solution architectures and identifies cross impacts across the data lifecycle.

    As a data architect, you must maintain balance between the technical and the business requirements

    The data architect role is integral to connecting the long-term goals of the business with how the organization plans to manage its data for optimal use.

    Data architects need to have a deep experience in data management, data warehousing, and analytics technologies. At a high level, the data architect plans and implements an organization’s data, reporting, and analytics roadmap.

    Some of the role’s primary duties and responsibilities include:

    1. Data modeling
    2. Reviewing existing data architecture
    3. Benchmark and improve database performance
    4. Fine tune database and SQL queries
    5. Lead on ETL activities
    6. Validate data integrity across all platforms
    7. Manage underlying framework for data presentation layer
    8. Ensure compliance with proper reporting to bureaus and partners
    9. Advise management on data solutions

    Data architects bridge the gap between strategic and technical requirements:

    Visualization centering the 'Data Architect' as the bridge between 'Data Workers', 'Business', and 'Data & Applications'.

    “Fundamentally, the role of a data architect is to understand the data in an organization at a reasonable level of abstraction.” (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    Info-Tech Insight

    The data architect role is not always clear cut. Many organizations do not have a dedicated data architect resource, and may not need one. However, the duties and responsibilities of the data architect must be carried out to some degree by a combination of resources as appropriate to the organization’s size and environment.

    Understand the role of a data architect to ensure that essential responsibilities are covered in the organization

    A database administrator (DBA) is not a data architect, and data architecture is not something you buy from an enterprise application vendor.

    Data Architect Role Description

    • The data architect must develop (along with the business) a short-term and long-term vision for the enterprise’s data architecture.
    • They must be able to create processes for governing the identification, collection, and use of accurate and valid metadata, as well as for tracking data quality, completeness, and redundancy.
    • They need to create strategies for data security, backup, disaster recovery, business continuity, and archiving, and ensure regulatory compliance.

    Skills Necessary

    • Hands-on experience with data architecting and management, data mining, and large-scale data modeling.
    • Strong understanding of relational and non-relational data structures, theories, principles, and practices.
    • Strong familiarity with metadata management.
    • Knowledge of data privacy practices and laws.

    Define Policies, Processes, and Priorities

    • Policies
      • Boundaries of the data architecture.
      • Data architecture standards.
      • Data architecture security.
      • Responsibility of ownership for the data architecture and data repositories.
      • Responsibility for data architecture governance.
    • Processes
      • Data architecture communication.
      • Data architecture change management.
      • Data architecture governance.
      • Policy compliance monitoring.
    • Priorities
      • Align architecture efforts with business priorities.
      • Close technology gaps to meet service level agreements (SLAs).
      • Determine impacts on current or future projects.

    See Info-Tech’s Data Architect job description for a comprehensive description of the data architect role.

    Leverage data architecture frameworks to understand how the role fits into the greater Enterprise Architecture framework

    Enterprise data architectures are available from industry consortiums such as The Open Group (TOGAF®), and open source initiatives such as MIKE2.0.

    Logo for The Open Group.

    The Open Group TOGAF enterprise architecture model is a detailed framework of models, methods, and supporting tools to create an enterprise-level architecture.

    • TOGAF was first developed in 1995 and was based on the Technical Architecture Framework for Information Management (TAFIM) developed by the US Department of Defense.
    • TOGAF includes application, data, and infrastructure architecture domains providing enterprise-level, product-neutral architecture principles, policies, methods, and models.
    • As a member of The Open Group, it is possible to participate in ongoing TOGAF development initiatives.

    The wide adoption of TOGAF has resulted in the mapping of it to several other industry standards including CoBIT and ITIL.

    Logo for MIKE2.0.

    MIKE2.0 (Method for an Integrated Knowledge Environment), is an open source method for enterprise information management providing a framework for information development.

    • SAFE (Strategic Architecture for the Federated Enterprise) provides the technology solution framework for MIKE2.0
    • SAFE includes application, presentation, information, data, Infrastructure, and metadata architecture domains.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    If an enterprise-level IT architecture is your goal, TOGAF is likely a better model. However, if you are an information and knowledge-based business then MIKE2.0 may be more relevant to your business.

    The data architect must identify what drives the need for data from the business to create a business-driven architecture

    As the business landscape evolves, new needs arise. An organization may undergo new compliance requirements, or look to improve their customer intimacy, which could require a new functionality from an application and its associated database.

    There are four common scenarios that lead to an organization’s need to optimize its data architecture and these scenarios all present unique challenges for a data architect:

    1. Becoming More Data Driven As organizations are looking to get more out of their data, there is a push for more accurate and timely data from applications. Data-driven decision making requires verifiable data from trustworthy sources. Result: Replace decisions made on gut or intuition with real and empirical data - make more informed and data-driven decisions.
    2. New Functionality or Business Rule In order to succeed as business landscapes change, organizations find themselves innovating on products or services and the way they do things. Changes in business rules, product or service offering, and new functionalities can subsequently demand more from the existing data architecture. Result: Prepare yourself to successfully launch new business initiatives with an architecture that supports business needs.
    3. Mergers and Acquisitions If an organization has recently acquired, been acquired, or is merging with another, the technological implications require careful planning to ensure a seamless fit. Application consolidation, retirement, data transfer, and integration points are crucial. Result: Leverage opportunities to incorporate and consolidate new synergistic assets to realize the ROI.
    4. Risk and Compliance Data in highly regulated organizations needs to be kept safe and secure. Architectural decisions around data impact the level of compliance within the organization. Result: Avoid the fear of data audits, regulatory violations, and privacy breaches.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    These are not the only reasons why data architects need to optimize the organization’s data architecture. These are only four of the most common scenarios, however, other business needs can be addressed using the same concept as these four common scenarios.

    Use the Data Architecture Driver tool to identify your focus for data architecture

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1 Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool

    Follow Info-Tech’s process of first analyzing the needs of the business, then determining how best to architect your data based on these drivers. Data architecture needs to be able to rapidly evolve to support the strategic goals of the business, and the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool will help you to prioritize your efforts to best do this.

    Tab 2. Driver Identification

    Objective: Objectively assess the most pressing business drivers.

    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, tab 2.

    Tab 3. Tactic Pattern Plan, Section 1

    Purpose: Review your business drivers that require architectural changes in your environment.

    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, tab 3, section 1.

    Tab 3. Tactic Pattern Plan, Section 2

    Purpose: Determine a list of tactics that will help you address the business drivers.

    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, tab 3, section 2.

    Step
    • Evaluate business drivers to determine the data architecture optimization priorities and tactics.
    Step
    • Understand how each business driver relates to data architecture and how each driver gives rise to a specific pattern across the five-tier data architecture.
    Step
    • Review the list of high-level tactics presented to optimize your data architecture across the five tier architecture.

    Identify the drivers for improving your data architecture

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.1 1 hour

    INPUT: Data Architecture Driver tool assessment prompts.

    OUTPUT: Identified business driver that applies to your organization.

    Materials: Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool

    Participants: Data architect, Enterprise architect

    Instructions

    In Tab 2. Driver Identification of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, assess the degree to which the organization is feeling the pains of the four most common business drivers:

    1. Is there a present or growing need for the business to be making data-driven decisions?
    2. Does the business want to explore a new functionality and hence require a new application?
    3. Is your organization acquiring or merging with another entity?
    4. Is your organization’s regulatory environment quick to change and require stricter reporting?

    Data architecture improvements need to be driven by business need.

    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, tab 2 Driver Identification.
    Tab 2. Driver Identification

    “As a data architect, you have to understand the functional requirements, the non-functional requirements, then you need to make a solution for those requirements. There can be multiple solutions and multiple purposes. (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    Interview the business to get clarity on business objectives and drivers

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 1 hour per interview

    INPUT: Sample questions targeting the activities, challenges, and opportunities of each business unit

    OUTPUT: Sample questions targeting the activities, challenges, and opportunities of each business unit

    Materials: Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool

    Participants: Data architect, Business representatives, IT representatives

    Identify 2-3 business units that demonstrate enthusiasm for or a positive outlook on improving how organizational data can help them in their role and as a unit.

    Conducting a deep-dive interview process with these key stakeholders will help further identify high-level goals for the data architecture strategy within each business unit. This process will help to secure their support throughout the implementation process by giving them a sense of ownership.

    Key Interview Questions:

    1. What are your primary activities? What do you do?
    2. What challenges do you have when completing your activities?
    3. How is poor data impacting your job?
    4. If [your selected domain]’s data is improved, what business issues would this help solve?

    Request background information and documentation from stakeholders regarding the following:

    • What current data management policies and processes exist (that you know of)?
    • Who are the data owners and end users?
    • Where are the data sources within the department stored?
    • Who has access to these data sources?
    • Are there existing or ongoing data issues within those data sources?

    Interview the enterprise architect to get input on the drivers of the business

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.3 2 hours

    INPUT: Data Architecture Driver tool assessment prompts.

    OUTPUT: Identified business driver that applies to your organization.

    Materials: Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool

    Participants: Data architect, Enterprise architect

    Data architecture improvements need to be driven by business need.

    Instructions

    As you work through Tab 2. Driver Identification of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, consult with the enterprise architect or equivalent to assist you in rating the importance of each of the symptoms of the business drivers. This will help you provide greater value to the business and more aligned objectives.

    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, tab 2 Driver Identification.
    Tab 2. Driver Identification

    Once you know what that need is, go to Step 2.

    Phase 1, Step 2: Establish Actionable Tactics to Optimize Data Architecture

    PHASE 1

    1.11.2
    Identify Your Business Driver for Optimizing Data ArchitectureDetermine Actionable Tactics to Optimize Data Architecture

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture to begin focusing your architectural optimization.
    • Create your Data Architecture Optimization Template to plan your improvement tactics.
    • Prioritize your tactics based on the five-tier architecture to plan optimization.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect
    • Enterprise Architect
    • DBAs

    Outcomes of this step

    • A tactical and prioritized plan for optimizing the organization’s data architecture according to the needs of the business.

    To plan a business-driven architecture, data architects need to keep the organization’s big picture in mind

    Remember… Architecting an organization involves alignment, planning, road mapping, design, and change management functions.

    Data architects must be heavily involved with:

    • Understanding the short- and long-term visions of the business to develop a vision for the organization’s data architecture.
    • Creating processes for governing the identification, collection, and use of accurate and valid data, as well as for tracking data quality, completeness, and redundancy.
    • They need to create strategies for data security, backup, disaster recovery, business continuity, and archiving, and ensure regulatory compliance.

    To do this, you need a framework. A framework provides you with the holistic view of the organization’s data environment that you can use to design short- and long-term tactics for improving the use of data for the needs of the business.

    Use Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture to model your environment in a logical, consumable fashion.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The more complicated an environment is, the more need there is for a framework. Being able to pick a starting point and prioritize tasks is one of the most difficult, yet most essential, aspects of any architect’s role.

    The five tiers of an organization’s data architecture support the use of data throughout its lifecycle

    Info-Tech’s five-tier data architecture model summarizes an organization’s data environment at a logical level. Data flows from left to right, but can also flow from the presentation layer back to the warehousing layer for repatriation of data.

    Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture. The five tiers being 'Sources' which includes 'App1 ', 'App2', 'Excel and other documents', 'Access database(s)', 'IOT devices', and 'External data feed(s) & social media'; 'Integration and Translation' which includes 'Solutions: SOA, Point to Point, Manual Loading, ESB , ETL, ODS, Data Hub' and 'Functions: Scrambling Masking Encryption, Tokenizing, Aggregation, Transformation, Migration, Modeling'; 'Warehousing' which includes 'Data Lakes & Warehouse(s) (Raw Data)', 'EIM, ECM, DAM', and 'Data Lakes & Warehouse(s) (Derived Data)'; 'Analytics' which includes 'Data Marts', 'Data Cube', 'Flat Files', 'BI Tools', and the 'Protected Zone: Data Marts - BDG Class Ref. MDM'; and 'Presentation' which includes 'Formulas', 'Thought Models', 'Reports', 'Dashboards', 'Presentations', and 'Derived Data (from analytics activities)'.

    Use the Data Architecture Optimization Template to build your improvement roadmap

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2 Data Architecture Optimization Template

    Download the Data Architecture Optimization Template.

    Overview

    Use this template to support your team in creating a tactical strategy for optimizing your data architecture across the five tiers of the organization’s architecture. This template can be used to document your organization’s most pressing business driver, the reasons for optimizing data architecture according to that driver, and the tactics that will be employed to address the shortcomings in the architecture.

    Sample of Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Optimization Template. Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Optimization Template Table of Contents
    1. Build Your Current Data Architecture Logical Model Use this section to document the current data architecture situation, which will provide context for your plan to optimize your data architecture.
    2. Optimization Plan Use this section to document the tactics that will be employed to optimize the current data architecture according to the tactic pattern identified by the business driver.

    Fill out as you go

    As you read about the details of the five-tier data architecture model in the following slides, start building your current logical data architecture model by filling out the sections that correspond to the various tiers. For example, if you identified that the most pressing business driver is becoming compliant with regulations, document the sources of data required for compliance, as well as the warehousing strategy currently being employed. This will help you to understand the organization’s data architecture at a logical level.

    Tier 1 represents all of the sources of your organization’s data

    Tier 1 of Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture, 'Sources', which includes 'App1 ', 'App2', 'Excel and other documents', 'Access database(s)', 'IOT devices', and 'External data feed(s) & social media'.
    –› Data to integration layer

    Tier 1 is where the data enters the organization.

    All applications, data documents such as MS Excel spreadsheets, documents with table entries, manual extractions from other document types, user-level databases including MS Access and MySQL, other data sources, data feeds, big datasets, etc. reside here.

    This tier typically holds the siloed data that is so often not available across the enterprise because the data is held within department-level applications or systems. This is also the layer where transactions and operational activities occur and where data is first created or ingested.

    There are any number of business activities from transactions through business processes that require data to flow from one system to another, so it is often at this layer we see data created more than once, data corruption occurs, manual re-keying of data from system to system, and spaghetti-like point-to-point connections are built that are often fragile. This is usually the single most problematic area within an enterprise’s data environment. Application- or operational-level (siloed) reporting often occurs at this level.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    An optimized Tier 1 has the following attributes:

    • Rationalized applications
    • Operationalized database administration
    • Databases governed, monitored, and maintained to ensure optimal performance

    Tier 2 represents the movement of data

    Tier 2 of Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture, 'Integration and Translation', which includes 'Solutions: SOA, Point to Point, Manual Loading, ESB , ETL, ODS, Data Hub' and 'Functions: Scrambling Masking Encryption, Tokenizing, Aggregation, Transformation, Migration, Modeling'.
    –› Data to Warehouse Environment

    Find out more

    For more information on data integration, see Info-Tech’s Optimize the Organization’s Data Integration Practices blueprint.

    Tier 2 is where integration, transformation, and aggregation occur.

    Regardless of how you integrate your systems and data stores, whether via ETL, ESB, SOA, data hub, ODS, point-to-point, etc., the goal of this layer is to move data at differing speeds for one of two main purposes:

    1) To move data from originating systems to downstream systems to support integrated business processes. This ensures the data is pristine through the process and improves trustworthiness of outcomes and speed to task and process completion.

    2) To move data to Tier 3 - The Data Warehouse Architecture, where data rests for other purposes. This movement of data in its purest form means we move raw data to storage locations in an overall data warehouse environment reflecting any security, compliance and other standards in our choices for how to store.

    Also, this is where data is transformed for unique business purpose that will also be moved to a place of rest or a place of specific use. Data masking, scrambling, aggregation, cleansing and matching, and other data related blending tasks occur at this layer.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    An optimized Tier 2 has the following attributes:

    • Business data glossary is leveraged
    • ETL is governed
    • ETL team is empowered
    • Data matching is facilitated
    • Canonical data model is present

    Tier 3 is where data comes together from all sources to be stored in a central warehouse environment

    Tier 3 is where data rests in long-term storage.

    This is where data rests (long-term storage) and also where an enterprise’s information, documents, digital assets, and any other content types are stored. This is also where derived and contrived data creations are stored for re-use, and where formulas, thought models, heuristics, algorithms, report styles, templates, dashboard styles, and presentations-layer widgets are all stored in the enterprise information management system.

    At this layer there may be many technologies and many layers of security to reflect data domains, classifications, retention, compliance, and other data needs. This is also the layer where data lakes exist as well as traditional relational databases, enterprise database systems, enterprise content management systems, and simple user-level databases.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    An optimized Tier 3 has the following attributes:

    • Data warehouse is governed
    • Data warehouse operations and planning
    • Data library is comprehensive
    • Four Rosetta Stones of data are in place: BDG, data classification, reference data, master data.
    Data from integration layer –›
    Tier 3 of Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture, 'Data Warehouse Environment' which includes 'Data Lakes & Warehouse(s) (Raw Data)', 'EIM, ECM, DAM'.
    –› Analytics

    Find out more

    For more information on Data Warehousing, see Info-Tech’s Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation and Drive Business Innovation With a Modernized Data Warehouse Environment blueprints.

    Tier 4 is where knowledge and insight is born

    Tier 4 represents data being used for a purpose.

    This is where you build fit-for-purpose data sets (marts, cubes, flat files) that may now draw from all enterprise data and information sources as held in Tier 3. This is the first place where enterprise views of all data may be effectively done and with trust that golden records from systems of record are being used properly.

    This is also the layer where BI tools get their greatest use for performing analysis. Unlike Tier 3 where data is at rest, this tier is where data moves back into action. Data is brought together in unique combinations to support reporting, and analytics. It is here that the following enterprise analytic views are crafted:
    Exploratory, Inferential, Causal, Comparative, Statistical, Descriptive, Diagnostic, Hypothesis, Predictive, Decisional, Directional, Prescriptive

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    An optimized Tier 4 has the following attributes:

    • Reporting meets business needs
    • Data mart operations are in place
    • Governance of data marts, cubes, and BI tools in place
    Warehouse Environment –›
    Tier 4 of Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture, 'Analytics', which includes 'Data Marts', 'Data Cube', 'Flat Files', and 'BI Tools'.
    –› Presentation

    Find out more

    For more information on BI tools and strategy, see Info-Tech’s Select and Implement a Business Intelligence and Analytics Solution and Build a Next Generation BI with a Game-Changing BI Strategy blueprints.

    The presentation layer, Tier 5, is where data becomes presentable information

    Tier 5 represents data in knowledge form.

    This is where the data and information combine in information insight mapping methods (presentations, templates, etc.). We craft and create new ways to slice and dice data in Tier 4 to be shown and shared in Tier 5.

    Templates for presenting insights are extremely valuable to an enterprise, both for their initial use, and for the ability to build deeper, more insightful analytics. Re-use of these also enables maximum speed for sharing, consuming the outputs, and collective understanding of these deeper meanings that is a critical asset to any enterprise. These derived datasets and the thought models, presentation styles, templates, and other derived and contrived assets should be repatriated into the derived data repositories and the enterprise information management systems respectively as shown in Tier 3.

    Find out more

    For more information on enterprise content management and metadata, see Info-Tech’s Develop an ECM Strategy and Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata blueprints.

    Tier 5 of Info-Tech's Five Tier Data Architecture, 'Presentation', which includes 'Formulas', 'Thought Models', 'Reports', 'Dashboards', 'Presentations', and 'Derived Data (from analytics activities)'. The 'Repatriation of data' feeds the derived data back into Warehousing.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    An optimized Tier 5 has the following attributes:

    • Metadata creation is supervised
    • Metadata is organized
    • Metadata is governed
    • Content management capabilities are present

    Info-Tech Insight

    Repatriation of data and information is an essential activity for all organizations to manage organizational knowledge. This is the activity where information, knowledge, and insights that are stored in content form are moved back to the warehousing layer for long-term storage. Because of this, it is crucial to have an effective ECM strategy as well as the means to find information quickly and efficiently. This is where metadata and taxonomy come in.

    As a data architect, you must prioritize your focus according to business need

    Determine your focus.

    Now that you have an understanding of the drivers requiring data architecture optimization, as well as the current data architecture situation at your organization, it is time to determine the actions that will be taken to address the driver.

    1. Business driver

    Screenshot of Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, Tab 2. Tactic Pattern Plan.
    Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, Tab 2. Tactic Pattern Plan

    3. Documented tactic plan

    Data Architecture Optimization Template

    2. Tactics across the five tiers

    Another screenshot of Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, Tab 2. Tactic Pattern Plan.

    The next four slides provide an overview of the priorities that accompany the four most common business drivers that require updates to a stale data architecture.

    Business driver #1: Adding a new functionality to an application can have wide impacts on data architecture

    Does the business wants to add a new application or supplement an existing application with a new functionality?

    Whether the business wants to gain better customer intimacy, achieve operational excellence, or needs to change its compliance and reporting strategy, the need for collecting new data through a new application or a new functionality within an existing application can arise. This business driver has the following attributes:

    • Often operational oriented and application driven.
    • An application is changed through an application version upgrade, migration to cloud, or application customization, or as a result of application rationalization or changes in the way that application data is generated.
    • However, not all new functionalities trigger this scenario. Non-data-related changes, such as a new interface, new workflows, or any other application functionality changes that do not involve data, will not have data architecture impacts.
    Stock photo of someone using a smartphone with apps.
    Modified icon for Tools & Templates. When this business driver arises, data architects should focus on optimizing architecture at the source tier and the integration of the new functionality. Tactics for this business driver should address the following pattern:
    Tiers 1 and 2 highlighted.

    Business driver #2: Organizations today are looking to become more data driven

    Does the business wants to better leverage its data?

    An organization can want to use its data for multiple reasons. Whether these reasons include improving customer experience or operational excellence, the data architect must ensure that the organization’s data aggregation environment, reporting and analytics, and presentation layer are assessed and optimized for serving the needs of the business.

    “Data-drivenness is about building tools, abilities, and, most crucially, a culture that acts on data.” (Carl Anderson, Creating a Data-Driven Organization)

    Tactics for this business driver should address the following pattern:
    Tiers 3, 4, and 5 highlighted.
    Modified icon for Tools & Templates. When this business driver arises, data architects should focus on optimizing architecture at the source tier and the integration of the new functionality.
    Stock photo of someone sitting at multiple computers with analytics screens open.
    • This scenario is typically project driven and analytical oriented.
    • The business is looking to leverage data and information by processing data through BI tools and self-service.
    • Example: The organization wants to include new third-party data, and needs to build a new data mart to provide a slice of data for analysis.

    Business driver #3: Risk and compliance demands can put pressure on outdated architectures

    Is there increasing pressure on the business to maintain compliance requirements as per regulations?

    An organization can want to use its data for multiple reasons. Whether these reasons include improving customer experience or operational excellence, the data architect must ensure that the organization’s data aggregation environment, reporting and analytics, and presentation layer are assessed and optimized for serving the needs of the business.

    There are different types of requirements:
    • Can be data-element driven. For example, PII, PHI are requirements around data elements that are associated with personal and health information.
    • Can be process driven. For example, some requirements restrict data read/write to certain groups.
    Stock photo of someone pulling a block out of a Jenga tower.
    Modified icon for Tools & Templates. When this business driver arises, data architects should focus on optimizing architecture where data is stored: at the sources, the warehouse environment, and analytics layer. Tactics for this business driver should address the following pattern:
    Tiers 1, 3, and 4 highlighted.

    Business driver #4: Mergers and acquisitions can require a restructuring of the organization’s data architecture

    Is the organization looking to acquire or merge with another organization or line of business?

    There are three scenarios that encompass the mergers and acquisitions business driver for data architecture:

    1. The organization acquires/merges with another organization and wants to integrate the data.
    2. The organization acquires/merges a subset of an organization (a line of business, for example) and wants to integrate the data.
    3. The organization acquires another organization for competitive purposes, and does not need to integrate the data.
    Regardless of what scenario your organization falls into, you must go through the same process of identifying the requirements for the new data:
    1. Understand what data you are getting.
      The business may acquire another organization for the data, for the technology, and/or for algorithms (for example). If the goal is to integrate the new data, you must understand if the data is unstructured, structured, how much data, etc.
    2. Plan for the integration of the new data into your environment.
      Do you have the expertise in-house to integrate the data? Database structures and systems are often mismatched (for example, acquired company could have an Oracle database whereas you are an SAP shop) and this may require expertise from the acquired company or a third party.
    3. Integrate the new data.
      Often, the extraction of the new data is the easy part. Transforming and loading the data is the difficult and costly part.
    “As a data architect, you must do due diligence of the acquired firm. What are the workflows, what are the data sources, what data is useful, what is useless, what is the value of the data, and what are the risks of embedding the data?” (Anonymous Mergers and Acquisitions Consultant)
    Modified icon for Tools & Templates. When this business driver arises, data architects should focus on optimizing architecture at the source tier, the warehousing layer, and analytics. Tiers 1, 3, and 4 highlighted.

    Determine your tier priority pattern and the tactics that you should address based on the business drivers

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.1 30 minutes

    INPUT: Business driver assessment

    OUTPUT: Tactic pattern and tactic plan

    Materials: Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool, Data Architecture Optimization Template

    Participants: Data architect, Enterprise architect

    Instructions
    1. After you have assessed the organization’s business driver on Tab 1. Driver Identification, move to Tab 2. Tactic Pattern Plan.
    2. Here, you will find a summary of the business driver that applies to you, as well as the tier priority pattern that will help you to focus your efforts for data architecture.
    3. Document the Tier Priority Pattern and associated tactics in Section 2. Optimization Plan of the Data Architecture Optimization Plan.
    Screenshot of Data Architecture Driver Tool.
    Data Architecture Driver Tool
    Arrow pointing right. Sample of Data Architecture Optimization Template
    Data Architecture Optimization Template

    Info-Tech Insight

    Our approach will help you to get to the solution of the organization’s data architecture problems as quickly as possible. However, keep in mind that you should still address the other tiers of your data architecture even if they are not part of the pattern we identified. For example, if you need to become more data driven, don’t completely ignore the sources and the integration of data. However, to deliver the most and quickest value, focus on tiers 3, 4, and 5.

    This phase helped you to create a tactical plan to optimize your data architecture according to business priorities

    Phase 1 is all about focus.

    Data architects and those responsible for updating an organization’s data architecture have a wide-open playing field with which to take their efforts. Being able to narrow down your focus and generate an actionable plan will help you provide more value to the organization quickly and get the most out of your data.

      Phase 1
      • Business Drivers
        • Tactic Pattern
          • Tactical Plan

    Now that you have your prioritized tactical plan, move to Phase 2. This phase will help you map these priorities to the essential capabilities and measure where you stack up in these capabilities. This is an essential step in creating your data architecture roadmap and plan for coming years to modernize the organization’s data architecture.

    To identify what the monetary authority needed from its data architecture, Info-Tech helped determine the business driver

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Financial
    Source: Info-Tech Consulting
    Symbol for 'Monetary Authority Case Study'.

    Part 1

    Prior to receiving new external requirements, the monetary Authority body had been operating with an inefficient system. Outdated legacy systems, reports in paper form, incomplete reports, and stale data from other agencies resulted in slow data access. The new requirements demanded speeding up this process.

    Diagram comparing the 'Original Reporting' requirement of 'Up to 7 days' vs the 'New Requirement' of 'As soon as 1 hour'. The steps of reporting in that time are 'Report Request', 'Gather Data', and 'Make Report'.

    Although the organization understood it needed changes, it first needed to establish what were the business objectives, and which areas of their architecture they would need to focus on.

    The business driver in this case was compliance requirements, which directed attention to the sources, aggregation, and insights tiers.

    Tiers 1, 3, and 4 highlighted.

    Looking at the how the different tiers relate to certain business operations, the organization uncovered the best practise tactics to achieving an optimized data architecture.

    1. Source Tactics: 3. Warehousing Tactics: 4. Analytics Tactics:
    • Identify data sources
    • Ensure data quality
    • Properly catalogue data
    • Properly index data
    • Provide the means for data accessibility
    • Allow for data reduction/space for report building

    Once the business driver had been established, the organization was able to identify the specific areas it would eventually need to evaluate and remedy as needed.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.1

    Sample of activity 1.1.1 'Identify the drivers for improving your data architecture'. Identify the business driver that will set the direction of your data architecture optimization plan.

    In this activity, the facilitator will guide the team in identifying the business driver that is creating the need to improve the organization’s data architecture. Data architecture needs to adapt to the changing needs of the business, so this is the most important step of any data architecture improvements.

    1.2.1

    Sample of activity 1.2.1 'Determine your tier priority pattern and the tactics that you should address based on the business drivers'. Determine the tactics that you will use to optimize data architecture.

    In this activity, the facilitator will help the team create a tactical plan for optimizing the organization’s data architecture across the five tiers of the logical model. This plan can then be followed when addressing the business needs.

    Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy

    PHASE 2

    Personalize Your Tactics to Optimize Your Data Architecture

    Phase 2 will determine your tactics that you should implement to optimize your data architecture

    Business Drivers
    Each business driver requires focus on specific tiers and their corresponding capabilities, which in turn correspond to tactics necessary to achieve your goal.
    New Functionality Risk and Compliance Mergers and Acquisitions Become More Data Driven
    Tiers 1. Data Sources 2. Integration 3. Warehousing 4. Insights 5. Presentation
    Capabilities Current Capabilities
    Target Capabilities
    Example Tactics Leverage indexes, partitions, views, and clusters to optimize performance.

    Cleanse data source.

    Leverage integration technology.

    Identify matching approach priorities.

    Establish governing principles.

    Install performance enhancing technologies.

    Establish star schema and snowflake principles.

    Share data via data mart.

    Build metadata architecture:
    • Data lineage
    • Sharing
    • Taxonomy
    • Automatic vs. manual creation

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Personalize Your Tactics to Optimize Your Data Architecture

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 2.1: Measure Your Data Architecture Capabilities Step 2.2: Set a Target for Data Architecture Capabilities Step 2.3: Identify the Tactics That Apply to Your Organization
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Understand Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model to begin identifying where to develop tactics for optimizing your data architecture.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Understand Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model to begin identifying where to develop tactics for optimizing your data architecture.
    Finalize phase deliverable:
    • Learn about the trends in data architecture that can be leveraged to develop tactics.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Measure your current state across the tiers of the capability model that will help address your business driver.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Measure your target state for the capabilities that will address your business driver.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Review the tactical roadmap that was created with guidance from the capability gap analysis.
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Trends Presentation Template

    Phase 2 Results & Insights

    • Data architecture is not just data models. Understand the essential capabilities that your organization needs from its data architecture to develop a tactical plan for optimizing data architecture across its people, processes, and technology.

    Phase 2, Step 1: Measure Your Data Architecture Capabilities

    PHASE 2

    2.1 2.2 2.3
    Measure Your Data Architecture Capabilities Set a Target for Data Architecture Capabilities Identify the Tactics That Apply to Your Organization

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • As you walk through the data architecture capability model, measure your current state in each of the relevant capabilities.
    • Distinguish between essential and nice-to-have capabilities for your organization.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • A framework for generating a tactical plan for data architecture optimization.
    • Knowledge of the various trends in the data architecture field that can be incorporated into your plan.

    To personalize your tactical strategy, you must measure up your base data architecture capabilities

    What is a capability?

    Capabilities represent a mixture of people, technology, and processes. The focus of capability design is on the outcome and the effective use of resources to produce a differentiating capability or an essential supporting capability.

    To personalize your tactics, you have to understand what the essential capabilities are across the five tiers of an organization’s data architecture. Then, assess where you currently stand in these capabilities and where you need to go in order to build your optimization plan.

    'Capability' as a mixture of 'People', 'Technology', 'Process', and 'Assets'.

    Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model can be laid over the five-tier data architecture to understand the essential and advanced capabilities that an organization should have, and to build your tactical strategy for optimizing the organization’s data architecture across the tiers.

    Use Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model as a resource to assess and plan your personalized tactics

    Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model can be laid over the five-tier data architecture to understand the essential and advanced capabilities that an organization should have, and to build your tactical strategy for optimizing the organization’s data architecture across the tiers.

    Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Capability Model featuring the five-tier architecture listing 'Core Capabilities' and 'Advanced Capabilities' within each tier, and a list of 'Cross Capabilities' which apply to all tiers.

    Use the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool to create a tailored plan of action

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1.1 Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Instructions

    Use the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool as your central tool to develop a tactical plan of action to optimize the organization’s data architecture.

    This tool contains the following sections:

    1. Business Driver Input
    2. Capability Assessment
    3. Capability Gap Analysis
    4. Tactical Roadmap
    5. Metrics
    6. Initiative Roadmap

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Sample of the Info-Tech deliverable Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool.

    Benefits of using this tool:

    • Comprehensive documentation of data architecture capabilities present in leading organizations.
    • Generates an accurate architecture roadmap for your organization that is developed in alignment with the broader enterprise architecture and related architectural domains.

    To create a plan for your data architecture priorities, you must first understand where you currently stand

    Now that you understand the business problem that you are trying to solve, it is time to take action in solving the problem.

    The organization likely has some of the capabilities that are needed to solve the problem, but also a need to improve other capabilities. To narrow down the capabilities that you should focus on, first select the business driver that was identified in Phase 1 in Tab 1. Business Driver Input of the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool. This will customize the roadmap tool to deselect the capabilities that are likely to be less relevant to your organization.

    For Example: If you identified your business driver as “becoming more data-driven”, you will want to focus on measuring and building out the capabilities within Tiers 3, 4, and 5 of the capability model.

    Data Architecture Capability Model
    Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Capability Model with tiers 3, 4, and 5 highlighted.

    Note

    If you want to assess your organization for all of the capabilities across the data architecture capability model, select “Comprehensive Data Architecture Assessment” in Tab 1. Business Driver Input of the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool.

    Determine your current state across the related architecture tiers

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2 1 hour

    INPUT: Current data architecture capabilities.

    OUTPUT: An idea of where you currently stand in the capabilities.

    Materials: Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Participants: Data architect, Enterprise architect, Business representatives

    Use the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool to evaluate the baseline and target capabilities of your practice in terms of how data architecture is approached and executed.

    Instructions
    1. Invite the appropriate stakeholders to participate in this exercise.
    2. On Tab 2. Practice Components, assess the current and target states of each capability on a scale of 1–5.
    3. Note: “Ad hoc” implies a capability is completed, but randomly, informally, and without a standardized method.
      These results will set the baseline against which you will monitor performance progress and keep track of improvements over time.
    To assess data architecture maturity, Info-Tech uses the Capability Maturity Model Integration (CMMI) program for rating capabilities on a scale of 1 to 5:

    1 = Initial/Ad hoc

    2 = Developing

    3 = Defined

    4 = Managed and Measurable

    5 = Optimized

    Info-Tech Insight

    Focus on Early Alignment. Assessing capabilities within specific people’s job functions can naturally result in disagreement or debate, especially between business and IT people. Objectively facilitate any debate and only finalize capability assessments when there is full alignment. Remind everyone that data architecture should ultimately serve business needs wherever possible.

    Phase 2, Step 2: Set a Target for Data Architecture Capabilities

    PHASE 2

    2.12.22.3
    Measure Your Data Architecture CapabilitiesSet a Target for Data Architecture CapabilitiesIdentify the Tactics That Apply to Your Organization

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine your target state in each of the relevant capabilities.
    • Distinguish between essential and nice-to-have capabilities for your organization.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • A holistic understanding of where the organization’s data architecture currently sits, where it needs to go, and where the biggest gaps lie.

    To create a plan for your data architecture priorities, you must also understand where you need to get to in the future

    Keep the goal in mind by documenting target state objectives. This will help to measure the highest priority gaps in the organization’s data architecture capabilities.

    Example driver = Becoming more data driven Arrow pointing right. Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Capability Model with tiers 3, 4, and 5 highlighted. Arrow pointing right. Current Capabilities Arrow pointing right. Target Capabilities
    Gaps and Priorities
    Stock photo of a hand placing four shelves arranged as stairs. On the first step is a mini-cut-out of a person walking.

    Determine your future state across the relevant tiers of the data architecture capability model

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1 2 hours

    INPUT: Current state of data architecture capabilities.

    OUTPUT: Target state of data architecture capabilities.

    Materials: Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Participants: Data architect

    The future of data architecture is now.

    Determine the state of data architecture capabilities that the organization needs to reach to address the drivers of the business.

    For example: If you identified your business driver as “becoming more data driven”, you will want to focus on the capabilities within Tiers 3, 4, and 5 of the capability model.

    Driver = Becoming more data driven Arrow pointing right. Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Capability Model with tiers 3, 4, and 5 highlighted. Arrow pointing right. Target Capabilities

    Identify where gaps in your data architecture capabilities lie

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2 1 hour

    INPUT: Current and target states of data architecture capabilities.

    OUTPUT: Holistic understanding of where you need to improve data architecture capabilities.

    Materials: Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Participants: Data architect

    Visualization of gap assessment of data quality practice capabilities

    To enable deeper analysis on the results of your capability assessment, Tab 4. Capability Gap Analysis in the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool creates visualizations of the gaps identified in each of your practice capabilities and related data management practices. These diagrams serve as analysis summaries.

    Gap Assessment of Data Source Capabilities

    Sample of the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool, tab 4. Capability Gap Analysis.

    Use Tab 3. Data Quality Practice Scorecard to enhance your data quality project.

    1. Enhance your gap analyses by forming a relative comparison of total gaps in key practice capability areas, which will help in determining priorities.
    2. Put these up on display to improve discussion in the gap analyses and prioritization sessions.
    3. Improve the clarity and flow of your strategy template, final presentations, and summary documents by copying and pasting the gap assessment diagrams.

    Phase 2, Step 3: Identify the Tactics That Apply to Your Organization

    PHASE 2

    2.12.22.3
    Measure Your Data Architecture CapabilitiesSet a Target for Data Architecture CapabilitiesIdentify the Tactics That Apply to Your Organization

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Before making your personal tactic plan, identify the trends in data architecture that can benefit your organization.
    • Understand Info-Tech’s data architecture capability model.
    • Initiate the Data Architecture Roadmap Tool to begin creating a roadmap for your optimization plan.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • A framework for generating a tactical plan for data architecture optimization.
    • Knowledge of the various trends in the data architecture field that can be incorporated into your plan.

    Capitalize on trends in data architecture before you determine the tactics that apply to you

    Stop here. Before you begin to plan for optimization of the organization’s data environment, get a sense of the sustainability and scalability of the direction of the organization’s data architecture evolution.

    Practically any trend in data architecture is driven by an attempt to solve one or more the common challenges of today’s tumultuous data landscape, otherwise known as “big data.” Data is being produced in outrageous amounts, at very high speeds, and in a growing number of types and structures.

    To meet these demands, which are not slowing down, you must keep ahead of the curve. Consider the internal and external catalysts that might fuel your organization’s need to modernize its data architecture:

    Big Data

    Data Storage

    Advanced analytics

    Unstructured data

    Integration

    Hadoop ecosystem

    The discussion about big data is no longer about what it is, but how do businesses of all types operationalize it.

    Is your organization currently capturing and leveraging big data?

    Are they looking to do so in the near future?

    The cloud

    The cloud offers economical solutions to many aspects of data architecture.

    Have you dealt with issues of lack of storage space or difficulties with scalability?

    Do you need remote access to data and tools?

    Real-time architecture

    Advanced analytics (machine learning, natural language processing) often require data in real-time. Consider Lambda and Kappa architectures.

    Has your data flow prevented you from automation, advanced analytics, or embracing the world of IoT?

    Graph databases

    Self-service data access allows more than just technical users to participate in analytics. NoSQL can uncover buried relationships in your data.

    Has your organization struggled to make sense of different types of unstructured data?

    Is ETL enough?

    What SQL is to NoSQL, ETL is to NoETL. Integration techniques are being created to address the high variety and high velocity of data.

    Have your data scientists wasted too much time and resources in the ETL stage?

    Read the Data Architecture Trends Presentation to understand the current cutting edge topics in data architecture

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1 Data Architecture Trends Presentation

    The speed at which new technology is changing is making it difficult for IT professionals to keep pace with best practices, let alone cutting edge technologies.

    The Info-Tech Data Architecture Trends Presentation provides a glance at some of the more significant innovations in technology that are driving today’s advanced data architectures.

    This presentation also explains how these trends relate to either the data challenges you may be facing, or the specific business drivers you are hoping to bring to your organization.

    Sample of the Data Architecture Trends Presentation.
    Data Architecture Trends Presentation

    Gaps between your current and future capabilities will help you to determine the tactics that apply to you

    Now that you know where the organization currently stands, follow these steps to begin prioritizing the initiatives:

    1. What are you trying to accomplish? Determine target states that are framed in quantifiable objectives that can be clearly communicated. The more specific the objectives are the better.
    2. Evaluate the “delta,” or difference between where the organization currently stands and where it needs to go. This will be expressed in terms of gap closure strategies, and will help clarify the initiatives that will populate the road map.
    3. Determine the relative business value of each initiative, as well as the relative complexities of successfully implementing them. These scores should be created with stakeholder input, and then plotted in an effort/transition quadrant map to determine where the quickest and most valuable wins lie.
    Current State Gap Closure Strategies Target State Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap
    • Organization objectives
    • Functional needs
    • Current operating models
    • Technology assets
    Initiatives involving:
    • Organizational changes
    • Functional changes
    • Technology changes
    • Process changes
    • Performance objectives (revenue growth, customer intimacy, growth of organization)
    • Operating model improvements
    • Prioritized, simplified, and compelling vision of how the organization will optimize data architecture

    (Source: “How to Build a Roadmap”)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Optimizing data architecture requires a tactical approach, not a passive approach. The demanding task of optimization requires the ability to heavily prioritize. After you have identified why, determine how using our pre-built roadmap to address the four common drivers.

    Each of the layers of an organization’s data architecture have associated challenges to optimization

    Stop! Before you begin, recognize these “gotchas” that can present roadblocks to creating an effective data architecture environment.

    Before diving headfirst into creating your tactical data architecture plan, documenting the challenges associated with each aspect of the organization’s data architecture can help to identify where you need to focus your energy in optimizing each tier. The following table presents the common challenges across the five tiers:

    Source Tier

    Integration Tier

    Warehousing Tier

    Analytics Tier

    Presentation Tier

    Inconsistent data models Performance issues Scalability of the data warehouse Data currency, flexibility Model interoperability
    Data quality measures: data accuracy, timeliness, accessibility, relevance Duplicated data Infrastructure needed to support volume of data No business context for using the data in the correct manner No business context for using the data in the correct manner
    Free-form field and data values beyond data domain Tokenization and other required data transformations Performance
    Volume
    Greedy consumers can cripple performance
    Insufficient infrastructure
    Inefficiencies in building the data mart Report proliferation/chaos (“kitchen sink dashboards”)
    Reporting out of source systems DB model inefficiencies
    Manual errors;
    Application usability
    Elasticity

    Create metrics before you plan to optimize your data architecture

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3 1 hour

    INPUT: Tactics that will be used to optimize data architecture.

    OUTPUT: Metrics that can be used to measure optimization success.

    Materials: Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool

    Participants: Data architect

    Metrics will help you to track your optimization efforts and ensure that they are providing value to the organization.

    There are two types of metrics that are useful for data architects to track and measure: program metrics and project metrics. Program metrics represent the activities that the data architecture program, which is the sum of multiple projects, should help to improve. Project metrics are the more granular metrics that track each project.

    Program Metrics

    • TCO of IT
      • Costs associated with applications, databases, data maintenance
      • Should decrease with better data architecture (rationalized apps, operationalized databases)
    • Cost savings:
      • Retiring a legacy system and associated databases
      • Consolidated licensing
      • Introducing shared services
    • Data systems under maintenance (maintenance burden)
    • End-user data requests fulfilled
    • Improvement of time of delivery of reports and insights

    Project Metrics

    • Percent of projects in alignment with EA
    • Percent of projects compliant with the EA governance process (architectural due diligence rate)
    • Reducing time to market for launching new products
      • Reducing human error rates
      • Speeding up order delivery
      • Reducing IT costs
      • Reducing severity and frequency of security incidents

    Use Tab 6. Metrics of the Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool to document and track metrics associated with your optimization tactics.

    Use Info-Tech’s resources to build your data architecture capabilities

    The following resources from Info-Tech can be used to improve the capabilities that were identified as having a gap. Read more about the details of the five-tier architecture in the blueprints below:

    Data Governance

    Data architecture depends on effective data governance. Use our blueprint, Enable Shared Insights With an Effective Data Governance Engine to get more out of your architecture.

    Data Quality

    The key to maintaining high data quality is a proactive approach that requires you to establish and update strategies for preventing, detecting, and correcting errors. Find out more on how to improve data quality with Info-Tech’s blueprint, Restore Trust in Your Data Using a Business-Aligned Data Quality Management Approach.

    Master Data Management

    When you start your data governance program, you will quickly realize that you need an effective MDM strategy for managing your critical data assets. Use our blueprint, Develop a Master Data Management Strategy and Roadmap to Better Monetize Data to get started with MDM.

    Data Warehouse

    The key to maintaining high data quality is a proactive approach that requires you to establish and update strategies for preventing, detecting, and correcting errors. Find out more on how to improve data quality with Info-Tech’s blueprint, Drive Business Innovation With a Modernized Data Warehouse Environment.

    With the optimal tactics identified, the monetary authority uncovered areas needing improvement

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Financial
    Source: Info-Tech Consulting
    Symbol for 'Monetary Authority Case Study'.

    Part 2

    After establishing the appropriate tactics based on its business driver, the monetary authority was able to identify its shortcomings and adopt resolutions to remedy the issues.

    Best Practice Tactic Current State Solution
    Tier 1 - Data Sources Identify data sources Data coming from a number of locations. Create data model for old and new systems.
    Ensure data quality Internal data scanned from paper and incomplete. Data cleansing and update governance and business rules for migration to new system.
    External sources providing conflicting data.
    Tier 3 - Data Warehousing Data catalogue Data aggregated incompletely. Built proper business data glossary for searchability.
    Indexing Data warehouse performance sub-optimal. Architected data warehouse for appropriate use (star schema).
    Tier 4 - Data Analytics Data accessibility Relevant data buried in warehouse. Build data marts for access.
    Data reduction Accurate report building could not be performed in current storage. Built interim solution sandbox, spin up SQL database.

    Establishing these solutions provided the organization with necessary information to build their roadmap and move towards implementing an optimized data architecture.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of a Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1.1 – 2.2.2

    Sample of activities 2.1.1 and 2.2.2, the first being 'Determine your current state across the related architecture tiers'. Evaluate your current capabilities and design your target data quality practice from two angles

    In this assessment and planning activity, the team will evaluate the current and target capabilities for your data architecture’s ability to meet business needs based on the essential capabilities across the five tiers of an organization’s architectural environment.

    2.2.3

    Sample of activity 2.2.3 'Create metrics before you plan to optimize your data architecture'. Create metrics to track the success of your optimization plan.

    The Info-Tech facilitator will guide you through the process of creating program and project metrics to track as you optimize your data architecture. This will help to ensure that the tactics are helping to improve crucial business attributes.

    Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy

    PHASE 3

    Create Your Tactical Data Architecture Roadmap

    Phase 3 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Create Your Tactical Data Architecture Roadmap

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 3.1: Personalize Your Data Architecture RoadmapStep 3.2: Manage Your Data Architecture Decisions and the Resulting Changes
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Review the tactical plan that addresses the business drivers by optimizing your data architecture in the relevant focus areas.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Discuss and review the roadmap of optimization activities, including dependencies, timing, and ownership of activities.
    • Understand how change management is an integral aspect of any data architecture optimization plan.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Create your detailed data architecture initiative roadmap.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Create your Data Architecture Decision Template to document the changes that are going to be made to optimize your data architecture environment.
    • Review how change management fits into the data architecture improvement program.
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • Data Architecture Decision Template

    Phase 3 Results & Insights

    • Phase 3 will help you to build a personalized roadmap and plan for optimizing data architecture in your organization. In carrying out this roadmap, changes will, by necessity, occur. Therefore, an integral aspect of a data architect’s role is change management. Use the resources included in Phase 3 to smoothen the change management process.

    Phase 3, Step 1: Personalize Your Data Architecture Roadmap

    PHASE 3

    3.1 3.2
    Personalize Your Data Architecture Roadmap Manage Your Data Architecture Decisions and the Resulting Changes

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine the timing, effort, and ownership of the recommended optimization initiatives.
    • Brainstorm initiatives that are not yet on the roadmap but apply to you.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect
    • DBAs
    • Enterprise Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • A roadmap of specific initiatives that map to the tactical plan for optimizing your organization’s data architecture.
    • A plan for communicating high-level business objectives to data workers to address the issues of the business.

    Now that you have tactical priorities, identify the actionable steps that will lead you to an optimized data architecture

    Phase 1 and 2 helped you to identify tactics that address some of the most common business drivers. Phase 3 will bring you through the process of practically planning what those tactics look like in your organization’s environment and create a roadmap to plan how you will generate business value through optimization of your data architecture environment.

    Diagram of the three phases and the goals of each one. The first phase says 'Identify your data architecture business driver' and highlights 'Business Driver 3' out of four to focus on in Phase 2. Phase 2 says 'Optimization tactics across the five-tier logical data architecture' and identifies four of six 'Tactics' to use in Phase 3. Phase 3 is a 'Practical Roadmap of Initiatives' and utilizes a timeline of initiatives in which to apply the chosen tactics.

    Use the Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool to personalize your roadmap

    Supporting Tool icon 3.1.1 Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool
    Generating Your Roadmap
    1. On Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning, you will find a list of tactics that correspond to every capability that applies to your chosen driver and where there is a gap. In addition, each tactic has a sequence of “Suggested Initiatives,” which represent the best-practice steps that you should take to optimize your data architecture according to your priorities and gaps.
    2. Customize this list of initiatives according to your needs.
    3. The Gantt chart is generated in Tab 7. Initiative Roadmap, and can be used to organize your plan and ensure that all of the essential aspects of optimizing data architecture are addressed.
    4. The roadmap can be used as an “executive brief” roadmap and as a communication tool for the business.
    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool, Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning.
    Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning

    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool, Tab 7. Initiative Roadmap.
    Tab 7. Initiative Roadmap

    Determine the details of your data architecture optimization activities

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.2 1 hour

    INPUT: Timing of initiatives for optimizing data architecture.

    OUTPUT: Optimization roadmap

    Materials: Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool

    Participants: Data architect, Enterprise Architect

    Instructions

    1. With the list of suggested activities in place on Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning, select whether or not the initiatives will be included in the roadmap. By default, all of the initiatives are set to “Yes.”
    2. Plan the sequence, starting time, and length of each initiative, as well as the assigned responsibility of the initiative in Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning of the Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool.
    3. The tool will a generate a Gantt chart based on the start and length of your initiatives.
    4. The Gantt chart is generated in Tab 7. Initiative Roadmap.
    Screenshot of the Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool, Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning. Tab 5. Tactic and Initiative Planning Screenshot of the Data Architecture Tactic Roadmap Tool, Tab 7. Initiative Roadmap. Tab 7. Initiative Roadmap

    Info-Tech Insight

    The activities that populate the roadmap can be taken as best practice activities. If you want an actionable, comprehensive, and prescriptive plan for optimizing your data architecture, fill in the timing of the activities and print the roadmap. This can serve as a rapid communication tool for your data architecture plan to the business and other architects.

    Optimizing data architecture relies on communication between the business and data workers

    Remember: Data architects bridge the gap between strategic and technical requirements of data.

    Visualization centering the 'Data Architect' as the bridge between 'Data Workers', 'Business', and 'Data & Applications'.

    Therefore, as you plan the data and its interactions with applications, it is imperative that you communicate the plan and its implications to the business and the data workers. Stock photo of coworkers communicating.
    Also remember: In Phase 1, you built your tactical data architecture optimization plan.
    Sample 1 of the Data Architecture Optimization Template. Sample 2 of the Data Architecture Optimization Template.
    Use this document to communicate your plan for data architecture optimization to both the business and the data workers. Socialize this document as a representation of your organization’s current data architecture as well as where it is headed in the future.

    Communicate your data architecture optimization plan to the business for approval

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.3 2 hours

    INPUT: Data Architecture Tactical Roadmap

    OUTPUT: Communication plan

    Materials: Data Architecture Optimization Template

    Participants: Data Architect, Business representatives, IT representatives

    Instructions

    Begin by presenting your plan and roadmap to the business units who participated in business interviews in activity 1.1.3 of Phase 1.

    If you receive feedback that suggests that you should make revisions to the plan, consult Info-Tech Research Group for suggestions on how to improve the plan.

    If you gain approval for the plan, communicate it to DBAs and other data workers.

    Iterative optimization and communication plan:
    Visualization of the Iterative optimization and communication plan. 'Start here' at 'Communicate Plan and Roadmap to the Business', and then continue in a cycle of 'Receive Approval or Suggested Modifications', 'Get Advice for Improvements to the Plan', 'Revise Plan', and back to the initial step until you receive 'Approval', then 'Present to Data Workers'.

    With a roadmap in place, the monetary authority followed a tactical and practical plan to repair outdated data architecture

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Financial
    Source: Info-Tech Consulting
    Symbol for 'Monetary Authority Case Study'.

    Part 3

    After establishing the appropriate tactics based on its business driver, the monetary authority was able to identify its shortcomings and adopt resolutions to remedy the issues.

    Challenge

    A monetary authority was placed under new requirements where it would need to produce 6 different report types on its clients to a regulatory body within a window potentially as short as 1 hour.

    With its current capabilities, it could complete such a task in roughly 7 days.

    The organization’s data architecture was comprised of legacy systems that had poor searchability. Moreover, the data it worked with was scanned from paper, regularly incomplete and often inconsistent.

    Solution

    The solution first required the organization to establish the business driver behind the need to optimize its architecture. In this case, it would be compliance requirements.

    With Info-Tech’s methodology, the organization focused on three tiers: data sources, warehousing, and analytics.

    Several solutions were developed to address the appropriate lacking capabilities. Firstly, the creation of a data model for old and new systems. The implementation of governance principles and business rules for migration of any data. Additionally, proper indexing techniques and business data glossary were established. Lastly, data marts and sandboxes were designed for data accessibility and to enable a space for proper report building.

    Results

    With the solutions established, the monetary authority was given information it needed to build a comprehensive roadmap, and is currently undergoing the implementation of the plan to ensure it will experience its desired outcome – an optimized data architecture built with the capacity to handle external compliance requirements.

    Phase 3, Step 2: Manage Your Data Architecture Decisions and the Resulting Changes

    PHASE 3

    3.13.2
    Personalize Your Data Architecture RoadmapManage Your Data Architecture Decisions and the Resulting Changes

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • With a plan in place, document the major architectural decisions that have been and will be made to optimize data architecture.
    • Create a plan for change and release management, an essential function of the data architect role.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Data Architect
    • Enterprise Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • Resources for documenting and managing the inevitable change associated with updates to the organization’s data architecture environment.

    To implement data architecture changes, you must plan to accommodate the issues that come with change

    Once you have a plan in place, one the most challenging aspects of improving an organization is yet to come…overcoming change!

    “When managing change, the job of the data architect is to avoid unnecessary change and to encapsulate necessary change.

    You must provide motivation for simplifying change, making it manageable for the whole organization.” (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    Stock photo of multiple hands placing app/website design elements on a piece of paper.

    Create roadmap

    Arrow pointing down.

    Communicate roadmap

    Arrow pointing down.

    Implement roadmap

    Arrow pointing down.

    Change management

    Use the Data Architecture Decision Template when architectural changes are made

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2 Data Architecture Decision Template
    Document the architectural decisions made to provide context around changes made to the organization’s data environment.

    The goal of this Data Architecture Decision Template is to provide data architects with a template for managing the changes that accompany major architectural decisions. As you work through the Build a Business-Aligned Data Architecture Optimization Strategy blueprint, you will create a plan for tactical initiatives that address the drivers of the business to optimize your data architecture. This plan will bring about changes to the organization’s data architecture that need change management considerations.

    Document any major changes to the organization’s data architecture that are required to evolve with the organization’s drivers. This will ensure that major architectural changes are documented, tracked, and that the context around the decision is maintained.

    “Environment is very chaotic nowadays – legacy apps, sprawl, ERPs, a huge mix and orgs are grappling with what our data landscape look like? Where are our data assets that we need to use?” (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    Sample of the Data Architecture Decision Template.

    Use Info-Tech’s Data Architecture Decision Template to document any major changes in the organization’s data architecture.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s resources to smooth change management

    As changes to the architectural environment occur, data architects must stay ahead of the curve and plan the change management considerations that come with major architectural decisions.

    “When managing change, the job of the data architect is to avoid unnecessary change and to encapsulate necessary change.

    You must provide motivation for simplifying change, making it manageable for the whole organization.” (Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant)

    See Info-Tech’s resources on change management to smooth changes:
    Banner for the blueprint set 'Optimize Change Management' with subtitle 'Turn and face the change with a right-sized change management process'.
    Sample of the Optimize Change Management blueprint.

    Change Management Blueprint

    Sample of the Change Management Roadmap Tool.

    Change Management Roadmap Tool

    Use Info-Tech’s resources for effective release management

    As changes to the architectural environment occur, data architects must stay ahead of the curve and plan the release management considerations around new hardware and software releases or updates.

    Release management is a process that encompasses the planning, design, build, configuration, and testing of hardware and software releases to create a defined set of release components (ITIL). Release activities can include the distribution of the release and supporting documentation directly to end users. See Info-Tech’s resources on Release Management to smooth changes:

    Banner for the blueprint set 'Take a Holistic View to Optimize Release Management' with subtitle 'Build trust by right-sizing your process using appropriate governance'.
    Samples of the Release Management blueprint.

    Release Management Blueprint

    Sample of the Release Management Process Standard Template.

    Release Management Process Standard Template

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of a Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1.1

    Sample of activity 3.1.2 'Determine the timing of your data architecture optimization activities'. Create your personalized roadmap of activities.

    In this activity, the facilitator will guide the team in evaluating practice gaps highlighted by the assessment, and compare these gaps at face value so general priorities can be documented. The same categories as in 3.1.1 are considered.

    3.1.3

    Sample of activity 3.1.3 'Communicate your Data Architecture Optimization Plan to the business for approval'. Communicate your data architecture optimization plan.

    The facilitator will help you to identify the optimal medium and timing for communicating your plan for optimizing your data architecture.

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    • Data architecture needs to evolve along with the changing business landscape. There are four common business drivers that put most pressure on archaic architectures. As a result, the organization’s architecture must be flexible and responsive to changing business needs.

    Insight 2

    • Data architecture is not just about models.
      Viewing data architecture as just technical data modeling can lead to structurally unsound data that does not serve the business.

    Insight 3

    • Data is used differently across the layers of an organization’s data architecture, and the capabilities needed to optimize use of data change with it. Architecting and managing data from source to warehousing to presentation requires different tactics for optimal use.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • An understanding of what data architecture is, how data architects can provide value to the organization, and how data architecture fits into the larger enterprise architecture picture.
    • The capabilities required for optimization of the organization’s data architecture across the five tiers of the logical data architecture model.

    Processes Optimized

    • Prioritization and planning of data architect responsibilities across the five tiers of the five-tier logical data architecture model.
    • Roadmapping of tactics that address the most common business drivers of the organization.
    • Architectural change management.

    Deliverables Completed

    • Data Architecture Driver Pattern Identification Tool
    • Data Architecture Optimization Template
    • Data Architecture Trends Presentation
    • Data Architecture Roadmap Tool
    • Data Architecture Decision Template

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Ron Huizenga, Senior Product Manager, Embarcadero Technologies, Inc. Ron Huizenga, Senior Product Manager
    Embarcadero Technologies, Inc.

    Ron Huizenga has over 30 years of experience as an IT executive and consultant in enterprise data architecture, governance, business process reengineering and improvement, program/project management, software development, and business management. His experience spans multiple industries including manufacturing, supply chain, pipelines, natural resources, retail, healthcare, insurance, and transportation.

    Photo of Andrew Johnston, Architect, Independent Consultant. Andrew Johnston, Architect Independent Consultant

    An independent consultant with a unique combination of managerial, commercial, and technical skills, Andrew specializes in the development of strategies and technical architectures that allow businesses to get the maximum benefit from their IT resources. He has been described by clients as a "broad spectrum" architect, summarizing his ability to engage in many problems at many levels.

    Research contributors

    Internal Contributors
    Logo for Info-Tech Research Group.
    • Steven J. Wilson, Senior Director, Research & Advisory Services
    • Daniel Ko, Research Manager
    • Bernie Gilles, Senior Director, Research & Advisory Services
    External Contributors
    Logo for Embarcadero.
    Logo for Questa Computing. Logo for Geha.
    • Ron Huizenga, Embercardo Technologies
    • Andrew Johnston, Independent Consultant
    • Darrell Enslinger, Government Employees Health Association
    • Anonymous Contributors

    Bibliography

    Allen, Mark. “Get the ETL Out of Here.” MarkLogic. Sep, 2016. Web. 25 Apr 2017.[http://www.marklogic.com/blog/get-the-etl-out-of-here/]

    Anadiotis, George. “Streaming hot: Real-time big data architecture matters.” ZDNet. Jan, 2017. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [http://www.zdnet.com/article/streaming-hot-real-time-big-data-architecture-matters/]

    Aston, Dan. “The Economic value of Enterprise Architecture and How to Show It.” Erwin. Aug, 2016. Web. 20 Apr 2017. [http://erwin.com/blog/economic-value-enterprise-architecture-show/]

    Baer, Tony. “2017 Trends to Watch: Big Data.” Ovum. Nov, 2016. Web. 25 Apr 2017.

    Bmc. “Benefits & Advantages of Hadoop.” Bmc. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [http://www.bmcsoftware.ca/guides/hadoop-benefits-business-case.html]

    Boyd, Ryan, et al. “Relational vs. Graph Data Modeling” DZone. Mar 2016. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://dzone.com/articles/relational-vs-graph-data-modeling]

    Brahmachar, Satya. “Theme To Digital Transformation - Journey to Data Driven Enterprise” Feb, 2015. Web. 20 Apr 2017. [http://satyabrahmachari-thought-leader.blogspot.ca/2015/02/i-smac-theme-to-digital-transformation.html]

    Capsenta. “NoETL.” Capsenta. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://capsenta.com/wp-content/uploads/2015/03/Capsenta-Booklet.pdf]

    Connolly, Shaun. “Implementing the Blueprint for Enterprise Hadoop” Hortonworks. Apr, 2014. Web. 25 Apr 2017. https://hortonworks.com/blog/implementing-the-blue...

    Forbes. “Cloud 2.0: Companies Move From Cloud-First To Cloud-Only.” Forbes. Apr, 2017. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://www.forbes.com/sites/vmware/2017/04/07/cloud-2-0-companies-move-from-cloud-first-to-cloud-only/#5cd9d94a4d5e]

    Forgeat, Julien. “Lambda and Kappa.” Ericsson. Nov 2015. Web 25 Apr 2017. [https://www.ericsson.com/research-blog/data-knowledge/data-processing-architectures-lambda-and-kappa/]

    Grimes, Seth. “Is It Time For NoETL?” InformationWeek. Mar, 2010. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [http://www.informationweek.com/software/information-management/is-it-time-for-noetl/d/d-id/1087813]

    Gupta, Manav. et al. “How IB‹ leads in building big data analytics solutions in the cloud.” IBM. Feb, 2016. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://www.ibm.com/developerworks/cloud/library/cl-ibm-leads-building-big-data-analytics-solutions-cloud-trs/index.html#N102DE]

    “How To Build A Roadmap.” Hub Designs Magazine. Web 25 Apr 2017. [https://hubdesignsmagazine.com/2011/03/05/how-to-build-a-roadmap/]

    IBM. “Top industry use cases for stream computing.” IBM. Oct, 2015. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://www-01.ibm.com/common/ssi/cgi-bin/ssialias?htmlfid=IMW14704USEN]

    Mateos-Garcia, Juan, et al. “Skills Of The Datavores.” Nesta. July. 2015. Web. 8 Aug 2016. [https://www.nesta.org.uk/sites/default/files/skills_of_the_datavores.pdf].

    Maynard, Steven. “Analytics: Don’t Forget The Human Element” Forbes. 2015. Web. 20 Apr. 2017. [http://www.ey.com/Publication/vwLUAssets/EY-Forbes-Insights-Data-and-Analytics-Impact-Index-2015/$FILE/EY-Forbes-Insights-Data-and-Analytics-Impact-Index-2015.pdf]

    Neo4j. “From Relational to Neo4j.” Neo4j. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://neo4j.com/developer/graph-db-vs-rdbms/#_from_relational_to_graph_databases]

    NoETL “NoETL.” NoETL. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [http://noetl.org/]

    Nolan, Roger. “Digital Transformation: Is Your Data Management Ready?” Informatica. Jun, 2016. Web. 20 Apr 2017. [https://blogs.informatica.com/2016/06/10/digital-transformation-data-management-ready/#fbid=hmBYQgS6hnm]

    OpsClarity. “2016 State of Fast Data & Streaming Applications.” OpsClarity. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://www.opsclarity.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/2016FastDataSurvey.pdf]

    Oracle. “A Relational Database Overview.” Oracle. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/jdbc/overview/database.html]

    Ponemon Institute LLC. “Big Data Cybersecurity Analytics Research Repor.t” Cloudera. Aug, 2016. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://www.cloudera.com/content/dam/www/static/documents/analyst-reports/big-data-cybersecurity-analytics-research-report.pdf]

    Sanchez, Jose Juan. “Data Movement Killed the BI Star.” DV Blog. May, 2016. Web. 20 Apr. 2017. [http://www.datavirtualizationblog.com/data-movement-killed-the-bi-star/]

    SAS. “Hadoop; What it is and why does it matter?” SAS. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [https://www.sas.com/en_ca/insights/big-data/hadoop.html#hadoopusers]

    Schumacher, Robin. “A Quick Primer on graph Databases for RDBMS Professionals.” Datastax. Jul, 2016. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [http://www.datastax.com/2016/07/quick-primer-on-graph-databases-for-rdbms-professionals]

    Swoyer, Steve. “It’s the End of the Data Warehouse as We Know It.” TDWI. Jan, 2017. Web. 20 Apr. 2017. [https://upside.tdwi.org/articles/2017/01/11/end-of-the-data-warehouse-as-we-know-it.aspx]

    Webber, Jim, and Ian Robinson. “The Top 5 Use Cases of Graph Databases.” Neo4j. 2015. Web. 25 Apr 2017. [http://info.neo4j.com/rs/773-GON-065/images/Neo4j_Top5_UseCases_Graph%20Databases.pdf]

    Zachman Framework. [https://www.zachman.com/]

    Zupan, Jane. “Survey of Big Data Decision Makers.” Attiv/o. May, 2016. Web. 20 Apr 2017. [https://www.attivio.com/blog/post/survey-big-data-decision-makers]

    Drive Real Business Value with an HRIS Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}586|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $43,457 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 36 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Human Resource Systems
    • Parent Category Link: /human-resource-systems
    • In most organizations, the HR application portfolio has evolved tactically on an as-needed basis, resulting in un-integrated systems and significant effort spent on manual workarounds.
    • The relationship between HR and IT is not optimal for technology decision making. System-related decisions are made by HR and IT is typically involved only post-purchase to fix issues as they arise and offer workarounds.
    • IT systems for HR are not viewed as a strategic differentiator or business enabler, thereby leading to a limited budget and resources for HR IT systems and subsequently hindering the adoption of a strategic, holistic perspective.
    • Some organizations overinvest, while others underinvest in lightweight, point-to-point solutions. Finding the sweet spot between a full suite and lightweight functionality is no easy task.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Align HRIS goals with the business. Organizations must position HR as a partner prior to embarking on an HRIS initiative, aligning technology goals with organizational objectives before looking at software.
    • Communication is key. Often, HR and IT speak different languages. Maintain a high degree of communication by engaging stakeholder groups early.
    • Plan where you want to go. Designing a roadmap based on clear requirements, alignment with the business, and an understanding of priorities will contribute to success.

    Impact and Result

    • Evaluate the current state of HRIS, understand the pain points, and visualize your ideal processes prior to choosing a solution.
    • Explore the different solution alternatives: maintain current system, integrate and consolidate, augment, or replace system entirely.
    • Create a plan to engage IT and HR throughout the project. Equip HR with the decision-making tools to meet business objectives and drive business strategy. Establish a common language for IT and HR to effectively communicate.
    • Develop a practical and actionable roadmap that the entire organization can buy into.

    Drive Real Business Value with an HRIS Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop an HRIS strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Conduct an environmental scan

    Create a clear project vision that outlines the goals and objectives for the HRIS strategy. Subsequently, construct an HRIS business model that is informed by enablers, barriers, and the organizational, IT, and HR needs.

    • Drive Real Business Value with an HRIS Strategy – Phase 1: Conduct an Environmental Scan
    • Establish an HRIS Strategy Project Charter Template
    • HRIS Readiness Assessment Checklist

    2. Design the future state

    Gather high-level requirements to determine the ideal future state. Explore solution alternatives and choose the path that is best aligned with the organization's needs.

    • Drive Real Business Value with an HRIS Strategy – Phase 2: Design the Future State
    • HRIS Strategy Stakeholder Interview Guide
    • Process Owner Assignment Guide

    3. Finalize the roadmap

    Identify roadmap initiatives. Prioritize initiatives based on importance and effort.

    • Drive Real Business Value with an HRIS Strategy – Phase 3: Finalize the Roadmap
    • Initiative Roadmap Tool
    • HRIS Stakeholder Presentation Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Drive Real Business Value with an HRIS Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Conduct an Environmental Scan

    The Purpose

    Understand the importance of creating an HRIS strategy before proceeding with software selection and implementation.

    Learn why a large percentage of HRIS projects fail and how to avoid common mistakes.

    Set expectations for the HRIS strategy and understand Info-Tech’s HRIS methodology.

    Complete a project charter to gain buy-in, build a project team, and track project success.   

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A go/no-go decision on the project appropriateness.

    Project stakeholders identified.

    Project team created with defined roles and responsibilities.

    Finalized project charter to gain buy-in.  

    Activities

    1.1 Set a direction for the project by clarifying the focus.

    1.2 Identify the right stakeholders for your project team.

    1.3 Identify HRIS needs, barriers, and enablers.

    1.4 Map the current state of your HRIS.

    1.5 Align your business goals with your HR goals and objectives.

    Outputs

    Project vision

    Defined project roles and responsibilities

    Completed HRIS business model

    Completed current state map and thorough understanding of the HR technology landscape

    Strategy alignment between HR and the business

    2 Design the Future State

    The Purpose

    Gain a thorough understanding of the HRIS-related pains felt throughout the organization.

    Use stakeholder-identified pains to directly inform the HRIS strategy and long-term solution.

    Visualize your ideal processes and realize the art of the possible.  

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Requirements to strengthen the business case and inform the strategy.

    The art of the possible.

    Activities

    2.1 Requirements gathering.

    2.2 Sketch ideal future state processes.

    2.3 Establish process owners.

    2.4 Determine guiding principles.

    2.5 Identify metrics.

    Outputs

    Pain points classified by data, people, process, and technology

    Ideal future process vision

    Assigned process owners, guiding principles, and metrics for each HR process in scope

    3 Create Roadmap and Finalize Deliverable

    The Purpose

    Brainstorm and prioritize short- and long-term HRIS tasks.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand next steps for the HRIS project.

    Activities

    3.1 Create a high-level implementation plan that shows dependencies.

    3.2 Identify risks and mitigation efforts.

    3.3 Finalize stakeholder presentation.

    Outputs

    Completed implementation plan

    Completed risk management plan

    HRIS stakeholder presentation

    Agile Readiness Assessment Survey

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}160|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Today’s realities are driving organizations to digitize faster and become more Agile.
    • Agile transformations are difficult and frequently fail for a variety of reasons.
    • To achieve the benefits of Agile, organizations need to be ready for the significant changes that Agile demands.
    • Challenges to your Agile transformation can come from a variety of sources.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Use Info-Tech’s CLAIM+G model to examine potential roadblocks to Agile on six different organizational dimensions.
    • Use survey results to identify and address the issues that are most likely to derail your Agile transformation.

    Impact and Result

    • Better understand where and how your organization needs to change to support your Agile transformation.
    • Focus your attention on your organization’s biggest roadblocks to Agile.
    • Improve your organization’s chances of a successful Agile transformation.

    Agile Readiness Assessment Survey Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Agile Readiness Assessment Deck – A guide to help your organization survey its Agile readiness.

    Read this deck to see how an Agile Readiness Assessment can help your organization understand its readiness for Agile transformation. The storyboard guides you through how to collect, consolidate, and examine survey responses and create an actionable list of improvements to make your organization more Agile ready.

    • Agile Readiness Assessment Storyboard

    2. Survey Templates (Excel or MS Forms, available in English and French) – Use these templates to create and distribute the survey broadly within your organization.

    The Agile Readiness Assessment template is available in either Excel or Microsoft Forms (both English and French versions are available). Download the Excel templates here or use the links in the above deck to access the online versions of the survey.

    • Agile Readiness Survey – English
    • Agile Readiness Survey – French

    3. Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results Tool – Use this tool to consolidate and analyze survey responses.

    The Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results Tool allows you to consolidate survey responses by team/role and produces your heatmap for analysis.

    • Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Agile Readiness Assessment

    Understand how ready your organization is for an Agile transformation.

    Info-Tech Research Group Inc. is a global leader in providing IT research and advice. Info-Tech’s products and services combine actionable insight and relevant advice with ready-to-use tools and templates that cover the full spectrum of IT concerns.

    Analyst Perspective

    Use the wisdom of crowds to understand how ready you are for Agile transformation.

    Photo of Alex Ciraco, Principal Research Director, Application Delivery and Management, Info-Tech Research Group

    Agile transformations can be difficult and complex to implement. That’s because they require fundamental changes in the way an organization thinks and behaves (and many organizations are not ready for these changes).

    Use Info-Tech’s Agile Readiness Assessment to broadly survey the organization’s readiness for Agile along six dimensions:

    • Culture
    • Learning
    • Automation
    • Integrated teams
    • Metrics
    • Governance

    The survey results will help you to examine and address those areas that are most likely to hinder your move to Agile.

    Alex Ciraco
    Principal Research Director, Application Delivery and Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Your organization wants to shorten delivery time and improve quality by adopting Agile practices.
    • Your organization has not yet used Agile successfully.
    • You know that Agile transformations are complex and difficult to implement.
    • You want to maximize your Agile transformation’s chances of success.

    Common Obstacles

    • Risks to your Agile transformation can come from a variety of sources, including:
      • Organizational culture
      • Learning practices
      • Use of automation
      • Ability to create integrated teams
      • Use of metrics
      • Governance practices

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Use Info-Tech’s Agile Readiness Assessment to broadly survey your organization’s readiness for Agile.
    • Examine the consolidated results of this survey to identify challenges that are most likely to hinder Agile success.
    • Discuss and address these challenges to increase your chances of success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    By first understanding the numerous challenges to Agile transformations and then broadly surveying your organization to identify and address the challenges that are at play, you are more likely to have a successful Agile transformation.

    Info-Tech’s methodology

    1. Distribute Survey 2. Consolidate Survey Results 3. Examine Results and Problem Solve
    Phase Steps

    1.1 Identify the teams/roles you will survey.

    1.2 Configure the survey to reflect your teams/roles.

    1.3 Distribute the Agile Readiness Assessment Survey broadly in the organization.

    2.1 Collect survey responses from all participants.

    2.2 Consolidate the results using the template provided.

    3.1 Examine the consolidated results (both OVERALL and DETAILED Heatmaps)

    3.2 Identify key challenge areas (those which are most “red”) and discuss these challenges with participants

    3.3 Brainstorm, select and refine potential solutions to these challenges

    Phase Outcomes An appreciation for the numerous challenges associated with Agile transformations Identified challenges to Agile within your organization (both team-specific and organization-wide challenges) An actionable list of solutions/actions to address your organization’s Agile challenges.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Agile Readiness Assessment Survey

    Survey the organization to understand your readiness for an Agile transformation on six dimensions.

    Sample of the Agile Readiness Assessment Survey blueprint deliverable.

    Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results

    Examine your readiness for Agile and identify team-specific and organization-wide challenges.

    Sample of the Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results blueprint deliverable.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 6 to 8 calls over the course of 1 to 2 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

      Phase 1: Distribute Survey

    • Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges (identify potential participants).
    • Call #2: First call with participants (introduce Phase 1 and assign survey for completion).
    • Call #3: Gather survey responses (prep for Phase 2 calls).
    • Phase 2: Consolidate Survey Results

    • Call #4: Consolidate all survey responses using the template.
    • Call #5: Conduct initial review of consolidated results (prep for Phase 3 calls).
    • Phase 3: Examine Results and Problem Solve

    • Call #6: Present consolidated results to participants and agree on most pressing challenges.
    • Call #7: Brainstorm, identify, and refine potential solutions to most pressing challenges.
    • Call #8: Conduct closing and communication call.

    Phase 1 — Phase 1 of 3, 'Distribute Survey'.

    Customize and distribute the survey

    Decide which teams/roles will participate in the survey.

    Decide which format and language(s) you will use for your Agile Readiness Assessment Survey.

    Configure the survey templates to reflect your selected teams/roles.

    Distribute the survey for participants to complete.

    • 1.1 The Agile Readiness Assessment Survey will help you to identify both team-specific and organization-wide challenges to your Agile transformation. It is best to distribute the survey broadly across the organization and include several teams and roles. Identify and make note of the teams/roles that will be participating in the survey.
    • 1.2 Select which format of survey you will be using (Excel or online), along with the language(s) you will use (links to the survey templates can be found in the table below). Then configure the survey templates to reflect your list of teams/roles from Step 1.1.
    • Format Language Download Survey Template
      Excel English Agile Readiness Assessment Excel Survey Template – EN and FR
      Excel French
      Online English Agile Readiness Assessment Online Survey Template – EN
      Online French Agile Readiness Assessment Online Survey Template – FR

    • 1.3 Distribute your Agile Readiness Assessment Survey broadly in the organization. Give all participants a deadline date for completion of the survey.

    Phase 2 — Phase 2 of 3, 'Consolidate Results'.

    Consolidate Survey Results

    Collect and consolidate all survey responses using the template provided.

    Review the OVERALL and DETAILED Heatmaps generated by the template.

    • 2.1 Collect the survey responses from all participants. All responses completed using the online form will be anonymous (for responses returned using the Excel form, assign each a unique identifier so that anonymity of responses is maintained).
    • 2.2 Consolidate the survey responses using the template below. Follow the instructions in the template to incorporate all survey responses.
    • Download the Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results Tool

      Sample of the Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results Tool, ranking maturity scores in 'Culture', 'Learning', 'Automation', 'Integrated Teams', 'Metrics', and 'Governance'.

    Phase 3 — Phase 3 of 3, 'Examine Results'.

    Examine Survey Results and Problem Solve

    Review the consolidated survey results as a team.

    Identify the challenges that need the most attention.

    Brainstorm potential solutions. Decide which are most promising and create a plan to implement them.

    • 3.1 Examine the consolidated results (both OVERALL and DETAILED Heatmaps) and look at both team-specific and organization-wide challenge areas.
    • 3.2 Identify which challenge areas need the most attention (typically those that are most red in the heatmap) and discuss these challenges with survey participants.
    • 3.3 As a team, brainstorm potential solutions to these challenges. Select from and refine the solutions that are most promising, then create a plan to implement them.

    3.1 Exercise: Collaborative Problem Solving — Phase 3 of 3, 'Examine Results'.

    60 Mins

    Input: Consolidated survey results

    Output: List of actions to address your most pressing challenges along with a timeline to implement them

    Materials: Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results Tool, Whiteboard and markers

    Participants: Survey participants, Other interested parties

    This exercise will create a plan for addressing your most pressing Agile-related challenges.

    • As a team, agree on which survey challenges are most important to address (typically the most red in the heatmap).
    • Brainstorm potential solutions/actions to address these challenges.
    • Assign solutions/actions to individuals and set a timeline for completion.
    Challenge Proposed Solution Owner Timeline
    Enrichment
    lack of a CoE
    Establish a service-oriented Agile Center of Excellence (CoE) staffed with experienced Agile practitioners who can directly help new-to-Agile teams be successful. Bill W. 6 Months
    Tool Chain
    (lack of Agile tools)
    Select a standard Agile work management tool (e.g. Jira, Rally, ADO) that will be used by all Agile teams. Cindy K. 2 Months

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Sample of an Info-Tech blueprint. Modernize Your SDLC
    • Strategically adopt today’s SDLC good practices to streamline value delivery.
    Sample of an Info-Tech blueprint. Implement Agile Practices That Work
    • Guide your organization through its Agile transformation journey.
    Sample of an Info-Tech blueprint. Implement DevOps Practices That Work
    • Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.
    Sample of an Info-Tech blueprint. Mentoring for Agile Teams
    • Leverage an experience Agile Mentor to give your in-flight Agile project a helping hand.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    • Columbus Brown, Senior Principal – Practice Lead – Business Alignment, Daugherty Business Solutions
    • Saeed Khan, Founder, Transformation Labs
    • Brenda Peshak, Product Owner/Scrum Master/Program Manager, John Deere/Source Allies/Widget Industries LLC
    • Vincent Mirabelli, Principal, Global Project Synergy Group
    • Len O'Neill, Sr. Vice President and Chief Information Officer, The Suddath Companies
    • Shameka A. Jones, MPM, CSM, Lead Business Management Consultant, Mainspring Business Group, LLC
    • Ryland Leyton, Lead Business Analyst, Aptos Retail
    • Ashish Nangia, Lead Business System Analyst, Ashley Furniture Industries
    • Barbara Carkenord, CBAP, IIBA-AAC, PMI-PBA, PMP, SAFe POPM, President, Carkenord Consulting
    • Danelkis Serra, CBAP, Chapter Operations Manager, Regions & Chapters, IIBA (International Institute of Business Analysis)
    • Lorrie Staples-Ellis, CyberSecurity Integration Strategist, Wealth Management, Truist Bank
    • Ginger Sundberg, Independent Consultant
    • Kham Raven, Project Manager, Fraud Strategy & Execution, Truist Bank
    • Sarah Vollett, PMP, Business Analyst, Operations, College of Physicians and Surgeons of British Columbia
    • Nicole J Coyle, ICP-ACC, CEAC, SPC4, SASM, POPM, CSM, ECM, CCMP, CAPM, Team Agile Coach and Team Facilitator, HCQIS Foundational Components
    • Joe Glower, IT Director, Jet Support Services, Inc. (JSSI)
    • Harsh Daharwal, Senior Director, Application Delivery, J.R. Simplot
    • Hans Eckman, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    • Valence Howden, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    The Complete Manual for Layoffs

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}514|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $30,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead

    When the economy is negatively influenced by factors beyond any organization’s control, the impact can be felt almost immediately on the bottom line. This decline in revenue as a result of a weakening economy will force organizations to reconsider every dollar they spend.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The remote work environment many organizations find themselves in adds a layer of complexity to the already sensitive process of laying off employees.
    • Carrying out layoffs must be done while keeping personal contact as your first priority. That personal contact should be the basis for all subsequent communication with laid-off and remaining staff, even after layoffs have occurred.

    Impact and Result

    By following our process, we can provide your organization with the direction, tools, and best practices to lay off employees. This will need to be done with careful consideration into your organization’s short- and longer-term strategic goals.

    The Complete Manual for Layoffs Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare for layoffs

    Understand the most effective cost-cutting solutions and set layoff policies and guidelines.

    • The Complete Manual for Layoffs Storyboard
    • Layoffs SWOT Analysis Template
    • Redeployment and Layoff Strategy Workbook
    • Sample Layoffs Policy
    • Cost-Cutting Planning Tool
    • Termination Costing Tool

    2. Objectively identify employees

    Develop an objective layoff selection method and plan for the transfer of essential responsibilities.

    • Workforce Planning Tool
    • Employee Layoff Selection Tool

    3. Prepare to meet with employees

    Plan logistics, training, and a post-layoff plan communication.

    • Termination Logistics Tool
    • IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool
    • IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template
    • IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template
    • Knowledge Transfer Job Aid
    • Layoffs Communication Package

    4. Meet with employees

    Collaborate with necessary departments and deliver layoffs notices.

    • Employee Departure Checklist Tool

    5. Monitor and manage departmental effectiveness

    Plan communications for affected employee groups and monitor organizational performance.

    • Ten Ways to Connect With Your Employees
    • Creating Connections
    [infographic]

    Prepare Your Organization to Successfully Embrace the “New Normal”

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}422|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $61,749 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
    • The COVID-19 pandemic is creating significant challenges across every sector, but even the deepest crisis will eventually pass. However, many of the changes it has brought to how organizations function are here to stay.
    • As an IT leader, it can be challenging to envision what this future state will look like and how to position IT as a trusted partner to the business to help steer the ship as the crisis abates.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Organizations need to cast their gaze into the “New Normal” and determine an appropriate strategy to stabilize their operations, mitigate ongoing challenges, and seize new opportunities that will be presented in a post-COVID-19 world.
    • IT needs to understand the key trends and permanent changes that will exist following the crisis and develop a proactive roadmap for rapidly adapting their technology stack, processes, and resourcing to adjust to the new normal.

    Impact and Result

    • Info-Tech recommends a three-step approach for adapting to the new normal: begin by surveying crucial changes that will occur as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic, assess their relevance to your organization’s unique situation, and create an initiatives roadmap to support the new normal.
    • This mini-blueprint will examine five key themes: changing paradigms for remote work, new product delivery models, more self-service options for customers, greater decentralization and agility for organizational decision making, and a renewed emphasis on security architecture.

    Prepare Your Organization to Successfully Embrace the “New Normal” Research & Tools

    Read the Research

    Understand the five key trends that will persist after the pandemic has passed and create a roadmap of initiatives to help your organization adapt to the "New Normal."

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Prepare Your Organization to Successfully Embrace the “New Normal” Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Security Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}42|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}42|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,431
    • member rating average days saved: 29
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk

    The challenge

    You may be experiencing one or more of the following:

    • You may not have sufficient security resources to handle all the challenges.
    • Security threats are prevalent. Yet many businesses struggle to embed systemic security thinking into their culture.
    • The need to move towards strategic planning of your security landscape is evident. How to get there is another matter.

    Our advice

    Insight

    To have a successful information security strategy, take these three factors into account:

    • Holistic: your view must include people, processes, and technology.
    • Risk awareness: Base your strategy on the actual risk profile of your company. And then add the appropriate best practices.
    • Business-aligned: When your strategic security plan demonstrates alignment with the business goals and supports it, embedding will go much more straightforward.

    Impact and results 

    • We have developed a highly effective approach to creating your security strategy. We tested and refined this for more than seven years with hundreds of different organizations.
    • We ensure alignment with business objectives.
    • We assess organizational risk and stakeholder expectations.
    • We enable a comprehensive current state assessment.
    • And we prioritize initiatives and build out a right-sized security roadmap.

     

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get up to speed

    Read up on why you should build your customized information security strategy. Review our methodology and understand the four ways we can support you.

    Assess the security requirements

    It all starts with risk appetite, yes, but security is something you want to get right. Determine your organizations' security pressures and business goals, and then determine your security program's goals.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 1: Assess Requirements
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool (xls)
    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool (xls)

    Build your gap initiative

    Our best-of-breed security framework makes you perform a gap analysis between where you are and where you want to be (your target state). Once you know that, you can define your goals and duties.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 2: Assess Gaps
    • Information Security Program Gap Analysis Tool (xls)

    Plan the implementation of your security strategy 

    With your design at this level, it is time to plan your roadmap.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 3: Build the Roadmap

    Let it run and continuously improve. 

    Learn to use our methodology to manage security initiatives as you go. Identify the resources you need to execute the evolving strategy successfully.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 4: Execute and Maintain
    • Information Security Strategy Communication Deck (ppt)
    • Information Security Charter (doc)

     

    IT Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}20|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}20|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}20|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $105,465
    • member rating average days saved: 35
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Governance
    • Parent Category Link: strategy-and-governance
    Success depends on IT initiatives clearly aligned to business goals.

    Get Started With Artificial Intelligence

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}345|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $24,469 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 18 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Business Intelligence Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /business-intelligence-strategy
    • It is hard to not hear about how AI is revolutionizing the world. Across all industries, new applications for AI are changing the way humans work and how we interact with technologies that are used in modern organizations.
    • It can be difficult to see the specific applications of AI for your business. With all of the talk about the AI revolution, it can be hard to tie the rapidly changing and growing field of AI to your industry and organization and to determine which technologies are worth serious time and investment, and which ones are too early and not worth your time.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • AI is not a magic bullet. Instead, it is a tool for speeding up data-driven decision making. A more appropriate term for current AI technology is data-enabled, automated, adaptive decision support. Use when appropriate.
    • Garbage in, garbage out still applies to AI ‒ and it is even more relevant! AI technology has its foundations in data. Lots of it. Relevant, accurate, and timely data is essential to the effective use of AI.
    • AI is a rapidly evolving field – and this means that you can learn from others more effectively. Using a use case-based approach, you can learn from the successes and failures of others to more rapidly narrow down how AI can show value for you.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand what AI really means in practice.
    • Learn what others are doing in your industry to leverage AI technologies for competitive advantage.
    • Determine the use cases that best apply to your situation for maximum value from AI in your environment.
    • Define your first AI proof-of-concept (PoC) project to start exploring what AI can do for you.
    • Separate the signal from the noise when wading through the masses of marketing material around AI.

    Get Started With Artificial Intelligence Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to get up to speed with the rapid changes in AI technologies taking over the world today, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you on your AI journey.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Explore the possibilities

    Understand what AI really is in the modern world and how AI technologies impact the business functions.

    • Get Started With Artificial Intelligence – Phase 1: Explore the Possibilities

    2. Learn from your peers and give your AI a purpose

    Develop a good understanding of where AI is delivering value in your industry and other verticals. Determine the top three business goals to get value from your AI and give your AI a purpose.

    • Get Started With Artificial Intelligence – Phase 2: Learn From Your Peers and Give Your AI a Purpose

    3. Select your first AI PoC

    Brainstorm your AI PoC projects, prioritize and sequence your AI ideas, select your first AI PoC, and create a minimum viable business case for this use case.

    • Get Started With Artificial Intelligence – Phase 3: Select Your First AI PoC
    • Idea Reservoir Tool
    • Minimum Viable Business Case Document
    • Prototyping Workbook
    [infographic]

    What is resilience?

    • Large vertical image:
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    Aside from the fact that operational resilience is mandated by law as of January 2025 (yes, next year), having your systems and applications available to your customers whenever they need your services is always a good idea. Customers, both existing and new ones, typically prefer smooth operations over new functionality. If you have any roadblocks in your current customer journey, then solving those is also part of operational resilience (and excellence).

    Does this mean you should not market new products or services? Of course not! Solving a customer journey roadblock is ensuring that your company is resilient. The Happy Meal is a prime example: it solved a product roadblock for small children and a profits roadblock for the company. For more info, just google it. But before you bring a new service online, be sure that it can withstand the punches that will be thrown at it. 

    What is resilience? 

    Resilience is the art of making sure your services are available to your customers whenever they can use them. Note I did not say 24/7/365. Your business may require that, but perhaps your systems need "only" to be available during "normal" business hours.

    Resilient systems can withstand adverse events that impair their ability to perform normal functions, and, like in the case the Happy Meals, increased peak demands. Events can include simple breakdowns (like a storage device, an internet connection that fails, or a file that fails to load) or something worse, like a cyber attack or a larger failure in your data center.

    Your client does not care what the cause is; what counts for the client is, "Can I access your service? (or buy that meal for my kid.)"

    Resilience entails several aspects:

    • availability
    • performance
    • right-sizing
    • hardening
    • restore-ability
    • testing
    • monitoring
    • management and governance

    It is now tempting to apply these aspects only to your organization's IT or technical parts. That is insufficient. Your operations, management, and even e.g. sales must ensure that services rendered result in happy clients and happy shareholders/owners. The reason is that resilient operations are a symphony. Not one single department or set of actions will achieve this. When you have product development working with the technical teams to develop a resilient flow at the right level for its earning potential, then you maximize profits.

    This synergy ensures that you invest exactly the right level of resources. There are no exaggerated technical or operational elements for ancillary services. That frees resources to ensure your main services receive the full attention they deserve.

    Resilience, in other words, is the result of a mindset and a way of operating that helps your business remain at the top of its game and provides a top service to clients while keeping the bottom line in the black. 

    Why do we need to spend on this?

    I mean, if it ain't broke, don't fix it. That old adage is true, and yet not. Services can remain up and running for a long time with single points of failure. But can you afford to have them break at any time? If yes, and your customers don't mind waiting for you to patch things up, then you can "risk-accept" that situation. But how realistic is that these days? If I cannot buy it at your shop today, I'll more than likely get it from another. If I'm in a contract with you, yet you cannot deliver, we will have a conversation, or at the very least, a moment of disappointment. If you have enough "disappointments," you will lose the customer. Lose enough customers, and you will have a reputational problem or worse.

    We don't like to spend resources on something that "may"go wrong. We do risk assessments to determine the true cost of non-delivery and the likelihood of that happening. And there are different ways to deal with that assessment's outcome. Not everything needs to have double the number of people working on it, just in case one resignes. Not every system needs an availability of 99,999%.

    But sometimes, we do not have a choice. When lives are at stake, like in medical or aviation services, being sorry is not a good starting point. The same goes for financial services. the DORA and NIS2 legislation in the EU, the CEA, FISMA, and GLBA in the US, and ESPA in Japan, to name a few, are legislations that require your company, if active in the relevant regulated sectors, to comply and ensure that your services continue to perform.

    Most of these elements have one thing in common: we need to know what is important for our service delivery and what is not.

    Business service

    That brings us to the core subject of what needs to be resilient. The answer is very short and very complex at the same time. It is the service that you offer to your customers which must meet reliance levels.

    Take the example of a hospital. When there is a power outage, the most critical systems must continue operating for a given period. That also means that sufficient capable staff must be present to operate said equipment; it even means that the paths leading to said hospital should remain available; if not by road, then, e.g., by helicopter. If these inroads are unavailable, an alternate hospital should be able to take on the workload. 

    Not everything here in this example is the responsibility of the hospital administrators! This is why the management and governance parts of the resilience ecosystem are so important in the bigger picture. 

    If we look at the financial sector, the EU DORA (Digital Operational Resilience Act) specifically states that you must start with your business services. Like many others, the financial sector can no longer function without its digital landscape. If a bank is unexpectedly disconnected from its payment network, especially SWIFT, it will not be long before there are existential issues. A trading department stands to lose millions if the trading system fails. 

    Look in your own environment; you will see many such points. What if your internet connection goes down, and you rely on it for most of your business? How long can you afford to be out? How long before your clients notice and take action? Do you supply a small but critical service to an institution? Then, you may fall under the aforementioned laws (it's called third-party requirements, and your client may be liable to follow them.)

    But also, outside of the technology, we see points in the supply chain that require resilience. Do you still rely on a single person or provider for a critical function? Do you have backup procedures if the tech stops working, yet your clients require you to continue to service them? 

    In all these and other cases, you must know what your critical services are so that you can analyze the requirements and put the right measures in place.

    Once you have defined your critical business services and have analyzed their operational requirements, you can start to look at what you need to implement the aforementioned areas of availability, monitoring, hardening, and others. Remember we're still at the level of business service. The tech comes later and will require a deeper analysis. 

    In conclusion.

    Resilient operations ensure that you continue to function, at the right price, in the face of adverse events. If you can, resilience starts at the business level from the moment of product conception. If the products have long been developed, look at how they are delivered to the client and upgrade operations, resources, and tech where needed.

    In some cases, you are legally required to undertake this exercise. But in all cases, it is important that you understand your business services and the needs of your clients and put sufficient resources in the right places of your delivery chain. 

    If you want to discuss this further, please contact me for a free talk.

     

    IT Operations